# admin Experiences (experience) - Full Documentation # @Mention People and Groups in Chatter Posts and Comments @Mention a person or a group to call their attention to something you want them to see. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
1. When you write a post, enter @ followed by the first few letters of the person or group name. 2. Select the person or group from the list of matches. The list includes all matches for - People, typically users you interact with the most ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note When you mention people, the users you interact with most normally show at the top of the list. Certain sharing permissions can change the list order. If the Default Internal Access permission for the User object is set to Private, user suggestions are displayed in alphabetical order and the most interacted with users don’t show at the top. - Chatter Public groups - Chatter Private groups you’re a member of You can add up to 25 mentions to a single post or comment. You can’t mention archived groups, unlisted groups, customer groups, and private groups that you’re not a member of. 3. To post your update, click **Share**. For the people that you mention, - The person's name becomes a link to their profile. - Your update appears on the mentioned person's profile, To Me, and What I Follow feeds. - In Lightning Experience, an in-app notification is added to the mentioned person’s list of in-app notifications. - For people who choose to receive emails when mentioned, Chatter sends an email notification. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note There’s an exception: if you @mention yourself, you don’t receive a notification. - For the groups that you mention, - The group name becomes a link to the group page. - Your update appears on the group feed and each group member’s What I Follow feed. - Chatter sends email and in-app notifications to the group members who enabled the **Email on every post** preference for the group. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note On mobile devices, Chatter sends a push notification to group members who enabled **Someone @mentions your group** under their push notification settings. - If the mention is on a record feed, the record appears in the group records list. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example Your coworker Madison posts that she’s looking for information about an Acme product feature. You reply to Madison's post with the comment: “Talk to @Bob Smith, the Acme account manager. @Acme Products do you have any additional information for Madison about this feature?” Both Bob Smith (if he chose to receive emails when mentioned) and members of the Acme Products group get email and in-app notifications about your post. Mobile users who enabled **Someone @mentions your group** get a push notification. Madison can click **@Bob Smith** in the update to view Bob's profile, or click @Acme Products to see their group page. In addition to notifications, Bob sees the mention in his profile, To Me, and What I Follow feeds. Chatter enforces security and sharing rules in Salesforce. Let’s say you post to a record or a private or unlisted group. In that post, you @mention someone who doesn't have access to that record or isn't a member of the group. In this case, the @mention appears as a gray link. The mentioned person can’t see your post and doesn’t get notified about the post. But the mention does become a link to the mentioned person’s profile page. For example, Madison creates a private group for her project team and forgets to add her coworker Sandy Dunn to the group. When Madison posts an update to this group and @mentions Sandy Dunn, Sandy isn’t notified about the update. Sandy also can’t see the update because she's not a member of the private group. If Madison later adds Sandy to the group, Chatter doesn't notify Sandy about the previous mentions. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Report filters don't work on @mentions in SOQL queries or reports displaying FeedComments. #### See Also - [Share a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_sharing_post.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Sharing lets you quickly copy a public post to your profile or a group. This feature is available in Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience.") - [Share a Link to a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_sharing_post_link.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Salesforce Classic, share a post with other Chatter users via email or instant message.") - [View a Single Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_single_update.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can navigate to a detailed view of a Chatter post in a feed for a user, record, or group.") - [Visibility of User and Group @Mentions in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_mention_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you @mention people or groups in a Chatter update, anyone who has access to the update can see the post and all comments.") # About Posting Snapshots to User and Group Feeds When you post a widget snapshot to a Chatter feed, consider who you want to share the widget with. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group (View Only), Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To view dashboards: Run Reports
In Salesforce Classic, widgets are called components. A snapshot is a static image of a dashboard widget at a specific point in time posted to a Chatter feed. Post a widget snapshot to a user or group feed to share and get comments. For example, post a snapshot of this month's sales to your team. Each snapshot has a Viewing As label, which is the name of the running user whose dashboard widget that you’re viewing. You can also post snapshots of filtered widgets (except Visualforce or s-control widgets). When viewers click the snapshot title in the feed, they’re taken to your filtered view of the dashboard if the filters are still valid. If the filters aren’t valid, they see the unfiltered dashboard. To post a dashboard widget snapshot to a user or group feed in Lightning Experience, post the snapshot to the dashboard feed and mention a user or group. If you don't see the option to post a snapshot, contact your administrator about enabling dashboard component snapshots. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important Posting a snapshot to a user or group feed makes it potentially visible to the entire organization. - Posting to a user feed makes the snapshot public. Anyone who can view that user's profile can see it. - Posting to a public group makes the snapshot public. Anyone who can view your profile or the group feed can see it. - Posting to a private group shows the snapshot to all group members. People can see it whether they have access to the dashboard. Make sure that the widget doesn't contain sensitive information. # Accept or Decline Private Group Requests As the owner or manager of a private Chatter group, you can accept or decline requests to join the group. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
1. On a group detail page, click **Request**. You can also click the link in the email request. 2. Accept or decline the requests. Salesforce sends an email to each person to inform them that their request was accepted or declined. If you make a private group public, any pending requests are automatically accepted. # Access and Share Files Connect External Files After your admin enables Files Connect, you can access files from external sources, like Google Drive and SharePoint, or share them through feeds and Files home. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Files Connect for cloud-based external data sources is available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To access cloud-based data sources like SharePoint Online: Files Connect Cloud
## Download or Share Files on Files Home Download external files to your local system or share them with a set of people in your org from Files home. 1. Navigate to Files home. 2. The External Files list in the left column shows available external data sources. Select one and navigate through the folders, or use the search bar to find a file. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - Salesforce supports Google documents, spreadsheets, presentations, and drawings. In the Recent list, Google Drive content is limited to the 24 most recently accessed documents from the last 30 days. - SharePoint folders with special characters, such as # or %, appear in the list, but you can’t see or access any files in them. 3. Click ![Actions menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/tables_open_row_menu.png) next to the file name, and choose one of the following: - **Open** the file in the external data source, such as SharePoint. - **Download** the file to your local system. - **Share** the file either as a copy or as a reference. Your admin has determined which type of sharing is used in your org. When sharing, you do one of the following: - **Share a copy** of the external file stored in Salesforce. If files are shared with a Chatter group, all group members can access the files, even if members lack access to the external system. Salesforce Files doesn’t reflect any revisions to the file in external systems. - **Share a reference** to the external file stored outside Salesforce. Only users with access to the external system can download files. (Users must enter credentials for the system in the Authentication Settings for External Systems section of personal setup). Salesforce Files doesn’t reflect revisions to the file in external systems, but the reference points to the latest file version in those systems. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note To download files referenced from an external system, users must enter credentials for the system in the Authentication Settings for External Systems section of personal setup. When a user selects an external file from the file selector, a file reference or copy is created in Salesforce. If a file reference exists, it’s reused. ## Share Files in the Feed If you want to include external files in a specific Chatter conversation, use the feed. All files shared in the feed are either copies or references, as determined by your admin. In Salesforce Classic 1. While authoring a post, click **File** above the feed, and then click **Select a file from Salesforce**. 2. In the left column, click the external source, such as SharePoint. 3. Next to the file you want to share, click **Attach**. 4. In the body of your post, @mention the groups or people you want to share with. ![External files in feed](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/fc_feed.png) In Lightning Experience 1. While authoring a post, click the paperclip icon below the post to open the Select File window. 2. From the left column, click the external source, such as SharePoint or Google Drive. 3. Select the file you want to share, and click **Add**. 4. In the body of your post, @mention groups or people that you want to share with. ![External files in Lightning Experience feed](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/fc_feed_SFX.png) When you paste a link to an external document into a Chatter post, it’s converted into a Files Connect file reference. Under the body of your post, the file title and icon appear. Click the icon to open the file preview right from your feed. A file reference is created for the first link in each post. File references are not created for links in comments. ![External file link converted to file reference in Lightning Experience](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/files_convert_link.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note File previews are only available for files connected through Sharepoint, Google Drive, and Quip integrations. #### See Also - [Share Files with People in Salesforce Classic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_sharing_people.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Share files with people privately and set Viewer or Collaborator access for each person that you share the file with.") - [Share Files with Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_sharing_groups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Share files in Chatter with public or private groups so that members of the groups can view and download the files from their feed.") - [Share Files with Libraries in Salesforce Classic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_share_with_libraries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Share files with libraries to take advantage of the permission-setting capabilities of content libraries while still using the features of Salesforce Files.") # Access Experience Cloud Sites in the Salesforce Mobile App Accessing Experience Cloud sites from the Salesforce mobile app depends on several factors, including the type of template used to create the site and the licenses and permissions of site users. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## Grant the Necessary Permissions Make sure that site users can access the Salesforce mobile app. - Verify that the mobile app is enabled for your org (default) or enable it. From Setup, enter Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Salesforce Settings**. - Allow site access via the Salesforce mobile app by granting the “API Enabled” profile permission to external users with communities licenses. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then select **Profiles**. Select **Edit** on a profile to add the profile permission. ## Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites Sites that use the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template aren’t supported in the Salesforce mobile app.
Type of User How to Access a Site

Users with standard Salesforce licenses

Internal org users who are also in a community

Log in to the mobile app. Use the mobile App Launcher at the top of the navigation menu and select a community.

External users with the following community licenses:

  • Customer Community
  • Customer Community Plus
  • Partner Community
  • Customer Portal
  • Partner Portal
  • High-Volume Portal User
  • Lightning External Apps
  • Lightning External Apps Plus
Not supported
Unlicensed users (also known as guest users) Not supported
## Aura and LWR Sites Experience Builder sites aren't supported in the Salesforce mobile app. We recommend that you create and distribute a fully branded mobile app version of your Experience Cloud sites using Mobile Publisher. Users can also access Experience Builder sites from a [supported mobile browser](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_communities_browser_support.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Browser support for Experience Cloud sites varies by the device that you access the site from and the site template.") using the site URL. ## Experience Management, Experience Workspaces, and Experience Builder Experience Management and Experience Workspaces aren’t available. We recommend that you use the [supported browsers on desktop computers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_communities_browser_support.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Browser support for Experience Cloud sites varies by the device that you access the site from and the site template.") to make customizations in Experience Management, Experience Workspaces, and Experience Builder. - **[Experience Cloud Sites: What’s Different or Not Available in the Salesforce Mobile App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_access_in_salesforce1_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Cloud sites in the Salesforce mobile app are similar to the Lightning Experience desktop site, with some differences. # Account Brand Details Use the Account Brand Details component to show company information and brand details on the Account Management page. When you go to the Account Management page, you can access Experience Cloud site members and account brand details. Account brand details contain company information used for branding purposes, such as websites, email address, phone numbers, addresses, and company logos. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Add the Account Brand related lists to Accounts, so partners can access brand information. 1. Drag the **Account Brand Details** component to the page, and select it. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Account Id | Account Id is used to look up the associated Account Brand record. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Account Brand Details component: ![Account Brand Details component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/branding_component.png) # Account Management Channel managers can delegate partner users to help manage accounts. Using the Members tab, delegated account managers can activate and deactivate accounts and reset a member’s password. They can also manage branding assets that channel managers can use to create co-branded emails, marketing campaigns, and websites. Partner users who have been granted delegated external user administration rights can access Account Management from their Experience Cloud site. From Account Management, they can manage members of their partner account from the **Members** tab. Partner users who have been granted delegated external user administration can create and edit account brands from the **Branding** tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Add the **Account Brand** and **Members** related lists to the **Account** page layout, so partners can access member and brand information. 1. Select the **Account Management** component in the page you’re configuring. 2. Click the tab that you want to configure. 3. To view the component properties, select the Properties pane:
Property Details
Parent Record ID {!CurrentUser.accountId}
Related List Name Name of the related list displayed.
List Elements to Show
  • Breadcrumbs
  • Custom Title
  • Row Numbers
  • Refresh
Account Id {!CurrentUser.accountId}
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Account Management component in Experience Builder ![Account Management component in Experience Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/account_management.png) # Actions Bar Considerations in LWR Sites With the Actions Bar component, users can take action on Salesforce data directly from your LWR site. But before you add actions to LWR sites, it’s important to understand the limitations. ## Supported Actions The Actions Bar component supports these action types. - The Edit standard action - Create a Record, Update a Record, and headless Lightning web component quick actions Lightning web component quick actions are available for record home objects that are enabled for LWC. If you can’t create actions with the Lightning web component action type, they’re not currently supported for that object. See [Create a Lightning Web Component Action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=lightning_web_component_actions_create.htm&language=en_US). ## Action Overrides Action overrides for standard actions aren’t available in LWR sites. If you override the Edit standard action with a Lightning component, the default layout is used. If you override the Edit standard action with a Visualforce page, the action doesn’t appear for your site users. ## Lightning Page Navigation with Lightning Web Component Quick Actions To use the `lightning-navigation` service in a Lightning web component, include a target in your LWR site. ## Updating Quick Action Names If you change the API name of a quick action after you add it to your site, the action doesn’t appear for your site users. Remove the action from the Actions Bar component, and then add it back. ## Deleting Quick Actions When you delete a quick action that’s used in an LWR site, you don’t see a warning that the action is in use. Deleted actions don’t appear for your site users. # Activate Archived Chatter Groups Group owners, group managers, and users with the “Modify All Data” permission can activate an archived Chatter group from the group detail page. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
1. Navigate to the archived group that you want to activate. - To find the archived groups that you own, manage, or belong to, use the **My Archived Groups** filter on the Groups list view. - To find other archived groups, use global search, run a report, or ask your administrator for help. 2. On the group detail page, click **Activate**. You can also activate an archived group from the group settings page. After an archived group is reactivated, the group detail page displays. The Chatter publisher is enabled so members can create posts and share files with the group. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - Group members don’t receive email notifications when a Chatter group they own, manage, or belong to is archived or activated. - You can activate only one group at a time. To activate multiple groups at once, use the Salesforce API. #### See Also - [Archived Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_archive.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When a Chatter group is archived, group members can’t post content or share files with the group. Previous posts, comments, and files remain available.") - [Archive Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_archiving.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Archive a group manually, or edit automatic archiving settings.") # Activate Google Docs in Salesforce Google Docs™ allows you to create on-demand documents, spreadsheets, and presentations, edit them in your browser, and work together in real time with other collaborators. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Google Docs appear in Lightning Experience, but they switch to Salesforce Classic when clicked. The Add Google Doc button isn’t available in Lightning Experience. Google Apps Settings isn’t available in Lightning Experience Setup.
User Permissions Needed
Activating the Add Google Docs to Salesforce service: Customize Application
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important After you activate a Google Apps service in Salesforce, it’s visible to all your Salesforce users. To use these services, your users need Google Apps accounts on your domain. For more information, see [Get Started with Salesforce and Google Apps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_getstart.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Google Apps is a suite of on-demand communication and collaboration services hosted by Google and designed for business users."). 1. In Salesforce Classic Setup, enter Google Apps Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Google Apps Settings**. 2. Click **Edit** next to the Add Google Docs to Salesforce option in the Activate Google Apps Services list. 3. Select Activate. 4. Read and indicate whether you agree to the Terms of Use. 5. Click **Save**. When the Add Google Docs to Salesforce service is enabled, these changes allow users to create, edit, or view Google docs and associate them with Salesforce records. - The Notes & Attachments related list on accounts, assets, contacts, contracts, leads, opportunities, products, and custom objects is renamed to Google Docs, Notes, & Attachments. - The Attachments related list on cases, solutions, and campaigns is renamed to Google Docs & Attachments. - If Salesforce CRM Content is enabled, the Libraries tab has an **Add Google Doc** dropdown list. Users can also install the **Add Google Doc to Salesforce** browser button. The browser button allows them to associate a Google doc to several Salesforce records or a Salesforce CRM Content library without being logged in to Salesforce. Implementation Tips - For information about Google Docs, refer to [Google's online help](http://www.google.com/a/help/intl/en/users/dands.html). - By default, Google Docs users on your domain can share their Google docs with Google Apps accounts outside your domain. The control panel in your Google Apps account contains sharing settings that enable you to restrict document sharing to users within your org's domain. - Customer Portal and partner portal users with access to the Contribute tab in Salesforce CRM Content can create Google docs and associate existing Google docs to a Salesforce library. Portal users without access to Salesforce CRM Content can associate an existing Google doc to a record, but they cannot create new Google docs from within a record because they do not have access to the Google Docs, Notes, and Attachments related list in the portal. Portal users cannot use the **Add Google Doc to Salesforce** browser button. - When the Add Google Docs to Salesforce service is deactivated, Google docs can’t be accessed from Salesforce records. In addition, any Google docs in users' Recycle Bins that were deleted from a record are permanently removed from Salesforce. If the Add Google Docs to Salesforce service is reactivated within 30 days, Google docs that were associated with Salesforce records before the deactivation are restored to their previous location. Deactivating the Add Google Docs to Salesforce service does not affect Google docs in Salesforce CRM Content libraries. Deactivation doesn’t remove Google docs associations in libraries and doesn’t permanently delete Google docs in Recycle Bins. - If Google docs are referenced in Apex, the Add Google Docs to Salesforce service can’t be disabled for your org. - Google docs count against data storage. For each Google doc associated with a record or library in Salesforce, two Kb of storage is used. #### See Also - [Get Started with Salesforce and Google Apps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_getstart.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Google Apps is a suite of on-demand communication and collaboration services hosted by Google and designed for business users.") # Activate Your Site Activate your site to make it accessible to members. The result of activation differs depending on whether you have a Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site or a Lightning site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
- Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce: Activating the site makes the site URL active and enables login access for members. If [welcome emails are enabled](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can customize email sender information and Chatter email branding. You can also customize email templates, such as templates for welcoming new members and resetting members’ passwords. Decide how Salesforce sends emails for users with unverified email domains, and customize email templates in the user interface.") when you activate, a welcome email is sent to all members. If any of those users are new users, their welcome email includes their username and password. - Aura and LWR sites: Activating the site sends out a welcome email to all members. Activation is also required to successfully set up SEO for Lightning sites. To make the URL active and enable login access for members, publish the site. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If your organization has enabled enhanced domains, site traffic is routed through one of Salesforce’s content delivery network (CDN) partners. Contact Salesforce Customer Support to opt out of the Salesforce CDN. To activate a site: 1. From Setup, enter Digital Experiences in the global search box. Select **Sites**. 2. Open Experience Workspaces. 3. Select **Administration** | **Administration**. 4. Select **Activate**. 5. Select **OK**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To ensure your [contributors](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=networks_access_control_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) can access Experience Builder and Workspaces in an inactive community, enable the “Modify All Data” permission. #### See Also - [Experience Cloud Site Statuses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_status.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Cloud sites can have one of these statuses: preview, inactive, active, and archived.") - [Customize Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Update basic site settings like your site URL, site name, members, login options, and general preferences in the Administration tile of Experience Workspaces.") - [Deactivate Your Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_unpublish.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Deactivate your site when you add or remove members; add, remove, or rearrange tabs; change the color scheme; or change the URL. You also must deactivate a site before you can archive it.") # Activities Track your open activities and activity history and view them from a record information tab in your Experience Cloud site. Activities are supported for accounts, campaigns, claims, contacts, contracts, insurance policies, leads, opportunities, orders, products, quotes, and activity-enabled custom objects. Activities aren’t available in Experience Builder site when viewed on a mobile browser. 1. Select the **Activities** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | RecordId | The ID of the record. This value is automatically populated. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Activity timeline](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_activity_timeline.png) # Add a Chatter Feed Search as a Favorite In Salesforce Classic, add a Chatter feed search as a favorite to access feed updates quickly without leaving the Chatter tab. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
![Add a Chatter feed search as a favorite](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/favorites_add.png) 1. Enter terms in the header search box, and click **Search**. 2. To see the posts and comments that include your search terms, click **Search Feeds**. 3. Click **Add to Favorites**. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example Here’s a favorite search on the terms competitive analysis. ![Chatter favorites on the Chatter tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/favorites_on_chatter_tab.png) The favorite name on the Chatter page is the same as the search terms that you entered. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip You can save a search for a Chatter group name as a favorite for quick access the group feed from the Chatter page. Similarly, you can save a search for a person's name as a favorite for quick access to that person's posts, comments, and mentions. #### See Also - [Chatter Feed Search Results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_search_results.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Searches in Chatter feeds return the posts and comments that include your search terms. These results are the same whether your search is global or feed-level.") # Add a List View as a Chatter Favorite To monitor key business processes directly from your Chatter tab, add a list view as a Chatter favorite.
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
1. Open a list view or create one for a set of records, like accounts, opportunities, or leads. 2. To see the Chatter updates for the list items, click ![feeds icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_feeds.png) **Feed** in the top-right corner. 3. Click **Add to Favorites**. The favorite name on the Chatter tab is the same as the list view name. #### See Also - [View Record Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_viewing_record_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "View the Chatter feed associated with a record you follow to see updates about the record.") # Add a Salesforce CRM Collection to Your Aura Site To create an attractive and engaging display of CRM object data, add a CRM collection to your Aura site. Create and customize the data layout and record list views by using the CMS Collection component in Experience Builder. If you haven’t created a CRM collection but you want to display object data on your site, you can still add the CMS Collection component as a placeholder. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To access an Experience Builder site’s Content Management workspace:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences
  • AND is a member of the site
To customize an Experience Builder site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences OR assigned an experience admin, publisher, or builder role in that site
  • AND is a member of the site
1. In Experience Builder, click **Components**. 2. Drag the **CMS Collection** component onto the page. 3. In the component property panel, click **\+ Add Collection**. 4. Select the CRM collection that you want to add from the list, and save your change. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip The Type column indicates the source of a collection. For example, Account is any collection composed of Account data. A content type such as News or Image indicates a CMS Collection. 5. In the component property panel, customize the collection layout and content layout as needed. #### See Also - [CMS Collection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_cms_collection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add a CMS Collection to your Aura site using the CMS Collection component in Experience Builder. If you created a collection in your Content Management Workspace, you can customize the layout on your site page. If you don’t have a collection yet, you can still add the component as a placeholder on your page.") # Add a Topic as a Chatter Favorite Add a topic as a favorite to see the latest on the topics you’re interested in.
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
1. In Salesforce Classic, click a topic name to navigate to the topic detail page. 2. In the upper-right corner of the page, click ![Topic Options drop-down menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/case_feed_portal_select_widget.png), and choose **Add to Favorites**. The favorite name is the same as the topic name. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip When viewing a topic favorite, you can click the topic name at the top of the feed to go directly to the topic detail page. #### See Also - [Topics List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Chatter topics list to see the topics that people are talking about in your organization. All topic names appear in this list, including topics that are used solely in private groups or on records.") # Add a Translate Button to Feed Items in Experience Builder Sites A translation setting in Experience Builder puts a Translate with Google menu on every feed item. Translations are offered through a Google Cloud Translation API key that you provide. ### Required Editions
Available in: Experience Builder sites accessed through Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and mobile devices, and is available in Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To configure feed translations in a site
  • Is a System Administrator OR has the permission
  • Manage Experiences OR Create and Set Up Experiences
  • AND is a member of the site
Before you configure translation, go to [https://cloud.google.com/translate](https://cloud.google.com/translate), and get your translation key. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Google Cloud Translation is a subscription service. For pricing information, see [https://cloud.google.com/translate/pricing](https://cloud.google.com/translate/pricing). Take these steps to add a Google Cloud Translation API key to your site. 1. In Experience Builder, go to **Settings** | **Languages** and enter your Google Cloud Translation API key. 2. Click **Validate & Save Key**. This action checks the validity of your key, and, if valid, saves your setting. After you verify and save your key, a **Translate with Google** menu appears on all feed items in your site. Feed items include posts, questions, polls, and their comments, answers, and replies. - To translate the feed item into the default language, click **Translate with Google**. For site members, the default language comes from the locale that’s set on the user’s profile. For guest users, it comes from the locale that’s set in the user’s browser. - To select a language, click the menu icon and select a language from the list. These languages appear on the translation list.
AlbanianArabicArmenianBasqueBengali
BosnianBulgarianCatalanChinese SimplifiedChinese Traditional
CroatianCzechDanishDutchEnglish
EstonianFinnishFrenchGeorgianGerman
GreekHebrewHindiHungarianIcelandic
IndonesianIrishItalianJapaneseKorean
LatvianLithuanianLuxembourgishMacedonianMalay
MalteseMontenegrinNorwegianPolishPortuguese
RomanianRomanshRussianSerbianSlovak
SlovenianSpanishSwedishTagalogTamil
ThaiTurkishUkrainianUrduVietnamese
Welsh————
After translation, **Translate with Google** switches to **View Original**, so it’s easy to switch back to the original language. # Add Actions to the Group Publisher Customize the group publisher with quick actions and Salesforce mobile app actions. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize Chatter group layouts: Customize Application
By default, Chatter groups offer standard actions that are part of the global publisher layout, like Post, File, Link, and Poll. Override the global publisher layout with a customized group publisher layout. 1. From Setup, enter Groups in the Quick Find box, then select Group Layouts. 2. Click **Edit** next to the group layout that you want to customize, or click **New** to create a layout. 3. Click **override the global publisher layout** in the Quick Actions in the Salesforce Classic Publisher section or **override the predefined actions** in the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section. Changes to the Quick Actions in the Salesforce Classic Publisher section appear in the full Salesforce site. Changes to the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section appear in the Salesforce mobile app and Lightning Experience. In groups that allow customers, the publisher shows only standard actions. 4. Drag actions between the palette and the publisher layout to add, remove, and reorder actions. 5. Click **Save**. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example Add the Announcement and Add Record actions to the group publisher. ![Group publisher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_admin_publisher_layout.png) Now users can select this action directly in the publisher. ![Chatter group custom publisher layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_group_publisher_actions.png) # Add Actions to Your User Profile There are five available actions that can be added to a User Profile component in your site. These actions include: Freeze, Follow, Edit, Message, and Give Badge. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Only the Follow action is turned on by default. To modify your user profile actions in Lightning Experience: 1. Access the Salesforce Setup menu. 2. Go to **Object Manager** and select **Users**. 3. Click **User Page Layouts**. 4. On the **Mobile and Lightning Actions** tab, choose which buttons to display by dragging them into the **Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions** section. 5. Save your layout. Actions appear in a dropdown on the User Profile component and are displayed in the order you add them to the layout. # Add Agentforce Orchestrator Components to Your LWR Site For Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) sites, manually add the Agentforce Orchestrator LWC components to your site pages in Experience Builder. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost. To purchase, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Available in: Aura Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Available in: LWR Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
User Permissions Needed
To Configure Experience Builder components Manage Experience Cloud
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, then select **All Sites**. 2. Click **Builder** next to the name of your LWR site. Experience Builder opens in a new browser tab. 3. In the Pages menu, navigate to the page where you want to add the conversation interface. 4. From the Components panel, drag the **Conversation Page** component onto the page. 5. Navigate to the home page or the appropriate landing page. 6. From the Components panel, drag the **Suggestion Themes** component onto the page. 7. Navigate to the navigation page. From the Components panel, drag the **Side Bar** component onto the page. 8. Click **Publish**. # Add an Agentforce Service Agent to Your Experience Cloud Site Quickly configure and launch a fully functional Self-Service support portal with Enhanced Chat, agent routing, and built-in authentication, all without custom development. This solution provides out-of-the-box chat and agent routing, simplifying and accelerating your Self-Service portal deployment. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Available in: Enhanced Chat with the Einstein for Service, Einstein Platform, Community, Community Plus, or Agentforce for Service add-on
Available in: LWR and Aura
1. **[Deploy the Agent to Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_deploy_agent_to_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** First, deploy the agent to your selected Experience Cloud site. This action adds the necessary components to your site page. 2. **[Connect Your Agent Using a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_connect_agent_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Connect your agent to the chat component using a prebuilt flow template. This flow contains the logic for session creation, conversation handoffs, and user verification. # Add an Image from Salesforce CMS to Your LWR Site Add an image from Salesforce CMS to your site page or add to a component that's populated with CMS content. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Before you can add content from an enhanced CMS workspace to your site, add the site as a channel to the workspace. Then make sure that the image you want to add is published in the CMS workspace. 1. In Experience Builder, click **Components**. 2. Drag the **Image** component onto the page. You can also add images from CMS to any component that supports data binding. 3. In the component property panel, click **Select Image from CMS**. 4. Select the image and save your change. See data binding in action in the [Did You Know Series (English Only)](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/SUwcxSKrE2tNUXeBqtNWFG). You can update an image in Experience Builder without affecting the image that's saved in the CMS workspace. Use the property panel for the component where you add the image to change its size or other properties. # Add and Remove Chatter Group Members Own or manage a Chatter group? Here’s how you add or remove group members. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
1. In Salesforce Classic, go to the group’s detail page, and click **Add/Remove Members**. In Lightning Experience, go to the group highlights panel, and click **Add Member** (your administrator must add this quick action). 2. To filter the list of users, start entering the name of the user you want to add or remove. 3. To add a member, click **Add**; to remove a member, click ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png). For people who have requested to join, click **Accept** to accept the request, or ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png) to decline. 4. When you’re finished, click **Done**. #### See Also - [View Chatter Group Members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_members.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Members section on a Chatter group page shows all members of a group, including any customer members.") # Add CRM Connections to Your Aura Site To share Salesforce CRM data on your Aura site, add CRM connections in Content Management. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To access an Experience Builder site’s Content Management workspace:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences
  • AND is a member of the site
To customize an Experience Builder site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences OR assigned an experience admin, publisher, or builder role in that site
  • AND is a member of the site
CRM objects must be explicitly approved to make their data available on your site. Objects retain their permissions when used on Experience Cloud Sites. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Only objects that support list views are available. Only fields in global list views can be used for display on your site. 1. In your site’s Experience Workspaces, navigate to Content Management. 2. Go to **Content**, and click **Salesforce CRM**. 3. Click **Add CRM Connections**. 4. Select objects to add to your site by clicking ![plus icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/Add_Step_button.png). If an object is already approved and connected to your site, you see a gray checkbox next to the object. 5. Save your changes. 6. To disable existing connections, select **Disable Connection** from the row menu. To display CRM data on your Aura site, create a CRM collection in Content Management. #### See Also - [Create a Salesforce CRM Collection for Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_managed_content_collections_creatingcrm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To display CRM object data on your site, create CRM collections. CRM collections are automatically updated based on the data in your Salesforce org. When you add a CRM collection to your Aura site, you can customize its layout and formatting.") # Add Custom Pages That Don’t Require Login Within a site, portal, or community created with Experience Cloud, you can have publicly available pages that are accessible without requiring login, making them ideal for landing or marketing pages. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important This topic applies only to sites created with Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce. Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites use Salesforce Sites technology to set a custom domain for your org and a URL prefix for each site created. If you want to further customize your sites beyond what’s available in setup, you can use Salesforce Sites or Site.com to create customized pages. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites can have a combination of Visualforce and Site.com pages. By default, the pages you create don’t require login, but you can add authenticated pages if needed. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Administration** | **Pages** and then in the Advanced Customizations area, click either: - To create pages that don’t require login or edit out-of-the-box error pages, **Go to Lightning Platform**. - To open Site.com Studio, where you can create public, branded pages, **Go to Site.com Studio**. You can also create authenticated pages that require login. 3. After you create a public page in Site.com Studio, you must publish the Site.com site to allow users to access the page. For more information about creating pages, refer to these resources: - [Creating Site.com Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.siteforce_page_create.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Managing Salesforce Site Visualforce Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.sites_site_pages.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Manage Salesforce Sites Standard Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.sites_standard_pages.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Add Data Providers to Get Data on Enhanced LWR Site Pages (Beta) Configure data providers on enhanced LWR site pages in Experience Builder and get access to data from different sources. You can bind data from Apex or Record data providers to individual builder components on to these pages. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Data Provider Configuration is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/?_ga=2.247987783.1372150065.1709219475-629000709.1639001992). Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. 1. From the Pages menu in Experience Builder, click ![Open Page Properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_properties_ellipsis.png) to access the Page Action menu, then select **Page Settings**. The Data (Beta) tab is available for each page next to the Properties tab. 2. To view or configure data providers for the page, click the **Data (Beta)** tab. The existing data providers for the page appear in the Inherited Data Providers table. ![The Data beta panel to add data providers](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/experience_add_data_providers.png) 3. To add a data provider for the page, click **Add Data Provider**. 4. In the Add Data Provider window, enter a unique name. 5. From the Type dropdown, select the type of the data provider that you want to add. - If you select the Salesforce Record data provider type, then select an object and provide the record ID. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can configure only these objects through the Salesforce Record data provider: Account, Contact, Case, Lead, Opportunity, and Knowledge. - If you select the Apex data provider type, then provide the Apex class name, Apex method name, and Apex method parameters (if any). 6. Save your changes. The new data provider appears in the Configured Data Providers table. 7. To bind this data provider to a component, click ![Components panel icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_components_icon.png) The Component panel lists the components compatible with the page. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Data binding is supported for components that have string properties. 8. Select any component and drag it to the canvas. For example, select a Text Block component. 9. In the component property panel, in the Text or Expression field, enter a data binding expression in this format: {!.}. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example To show an Account name of an object in the Text Block component of a page, enter Account Name : {!Item.Name} The expression is evaluated and replaced with a value when the component is rendered. - **[Configuring Apex Data Providers in Experience Builder (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.data_providers_configuration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A data provider is a reference to a source of data. An Apex data provider is implemented as a function within an Apex class. A Salesforce Apex controller is an Apex class that stores information and logic related to a group of UI components. You can perform actions such as querying data, updating records, or invoking another Apex code using this logic. - **[Data Provider Considerations (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.data_providers_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When configuring data providers on an LWR site page, keep these considerations in mind. # Add File Privacy on Records to Edit File Details Layout Add the File Privacy on Records option to the Edit File Details layout to let file owners control the visibility of files attached to records. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize Content Version layouts: Customize Application
If you don’t see the File Privacy on Records option, you can add it by customizing the Content Version page layout. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note In Salesforce Classic, the File Privacy on Records option also appears on the content detail page and in the content edit dialog. If a file is marked as private in Lightning Experience, it’s also private in Salesforce Classic. This feature is also available in Experience Cloud sites. Only admins and a file’s owner can change the value of File Privacy on Records. 1. From Setup, enter Object Manager in the Quick Find box, and click **Object Manager**. 2. In the Object Manager, click **Content Version**, then click **Page Layouts**. 3. Open the page layout that you use for the Edit File Details page. 4. In the layout palette, select **Fields**, drag **File Privacy on Records** to the Fields section under Content Detail Version, and click **Save**. ![File Privacy on Records under Description](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_files_cont_ver_layout.png) ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Though you can place the option anywhere in the Fields section, consider placing it after **Description**. To see your result, from the Files tab, go to the Files page and edit a file’s details.![File Privacy on Records option](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_files_priv_on_records_2.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note When you click **Edit File Details from Related Lists**, the File Privacy on Records field isn't visible. # Add Files to a Library After you have your folder structure set up, you can add files to your folders. In the file picker, the search field filters among loaded files. Use the search option at the bottom of quick results for a broader library search. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
User Permissions Needed
To add files to a library: Customize Application
Use the file picker to browse libraries and folders, search by file name, and select files to add to the current library. 1. Go to **Files**, **Libraries**, and click **Add Files**. ![Add files to a library.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/admin_files_libraries_add_files.png) 2. In the file picker, open the library or folder that contains the files you want (for example, use **Libraries** in the picker to switch libraries). 3. To narrow the list by file name, enter text in the search field at the top of the file picker. Matches appear as you type. This search filters the loaded files in the picker, not every file in the library. If more files are available but not yet loaded (for example, before you scroll further in a long list), you only see a subset of matching names. That limit is expected behavior for this field, not a search malfunction. 4. To search more broadly in the library, go to the bottom of the quick search results and click the **Search** row. That action runs a fuller search and can return more matches than the top search field alone. 5. Select the files to add, and click **Add** (or the equivalent control) to add them to the library. # Add Flows to a Lightning Bolt Solution When you want to add flows to a Lightning Bolt Solution, group them into a flow category. Then add one or more flow categories to your solution. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create a flow category: Customize Application
To create a Lightning Bolt Solution without an Experience Builder template: Customize Application AND View Setup and Configuration
To create a Lightning Bolt Solution with an Experience Builder template: Customize Application AND Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
You can use a Lightning Bolt Solution to publish a turnkey solution on AppExchange, implement a site with a complete solution or new look, or reuse automated processes that use flows. You can only add active flows to a flow category. 1. From Setup, enter Flow Category in the Quick Find box, and select **Flow Category**. 2. Click **New Flow Category**. 3. Enter your developer name and a description. For the name, only alphanumeric characters and underscores are valid. 4. Choose flows from the list of active flows. ![add flows to your flow category](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_flow_category.png) 5. Save the flow category. 6. Add the flow category and any custom Lightning apps, Experience Builder templates, or other flow categories that you want to export to a Lightning Bolt Solution. 7. Package the solution to distribute in your orgs or in AppExchange. #### See Also - [Flow Builder Tour](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_builder.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Add Google Docs to Salesforce Add an existing Google doc to any record or library in Salesforce. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
User Permissions Needed
Creating a Google doc and linking it to Salesforce records:

Edit on the appropriate record type

AND

Google Apps account

![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note To use a Google Apps service in Salesforce, you must be logged in to your Google Apps business account. Business accounts use your organization's domain; for example, john.doe@company.com. If you are unsure of your Google Apps username and password, contact your administrator. Add a Google Doc to a Salesforce Record 1. Open a case, opportunity, or other record. 2. On the Google Docs, Notes, & Attachments related list or the Google Docs & Attachments related list, click **Add Google Doc**. 3. Enter the name of the Google doc. 4. Enter the Google doc URL. 5. Click **Save**. Add a Google Doc to a Salesforce CRM Content Library 1. On the **Libraries** tab or on a library detail page, click **Add Google Doc**. Log in to Google Apps if prompted. 2. Enter the Google Doc URL. 3. Click **Contribute**. 4. Enter a title and select a library. 5. Click **Publish**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note While you have your Google doc open, remember to share it with other Google Apps users in your organization. Only people with access to the Google doc in their Google Apps account can open the doc from Salesforce. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip For information about using Google Docs, refer to [Google's online help](http://www.google.com/a/help/intl/en/users/dands.html). # Add Groups to an Aura Site Want more collaborative sites or communities? Give site members and guest users the ability to browse and join groups in your Aura site. Use the standard design for groups or create your own customized version of the group detail page using separate components. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. To enable groups in your site, add groups to the site’s navigation menu. Go to **Settings** | **Navigation**. 2. In the dropdown, click **Edit** for the navigation menu that you want to customize. 3. Click **Add Menu Item** (1), and give your new menu item a name. 4. From the Type dropdown, select **Salesforce Object**. Then select **Group** for the Object Type and **Active Groups** for the Default List View (2). 5. Enable **Publicly available** (3) so guest users can browse through the list of active public groups. ![Add groups to Aura site navigation](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/exp_builder_aura_add_groups.png) 6. Save your changes. 7. If you haven’t already, customize the group publisher layout to include the Add Member action. With this action, group owners and managers can add members to the group, and isn’t shown in the list of actions in the group by default. Site visitors can access a new page in your site with a list of active groups using the navigation menu. When users click the name of an active group, they’re redirected to the group detail page. If it’s a private group, they’re asked to log in. Only logged-in group members can view private group content. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important If you’re adding Groups to an LWR site, you must create object pages for the Groups object. If you don’t create the object pages, site visitors can’t see the Groups when they click the menu item. A few things to keep in mind: - When you enable groups in your site, the default Group Detail page is used to display group data. This page uses the Group component under the hood for formatting and layout. The Group component is a composite, one-stop component that includes the group banner, group details, related lists, and the group feed. We recommend using this composite component, especially if you want your site pages to be responsive across desktop and mobile device browsers. - If you prefer to use a different layout or want more control over the placement of group content, create a custom page. Then use the Group Banner, Group Details, Group Related List, and Feed components. Depending on how you use the individual components, custom pages aren’t always responsive across all devices. Group list in the Customer Service Template ![Group list page in the Customer Service community template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/200_group_list_view.png) Group detail page in Customer Service Template ![Group page in Customer Service community](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/200_group_detail_page.png) # Add Hashtag Topics to Chatter Posts and Comments To organize Chatter posts and comments and make them easy to find, add topics. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
User Permissions Needed
To add existing topics to posts and comments: Assign Topics
To add new topics to posts and comments: Create Topics
For example, let’s say you post that you're working on a sales presentation for your customer Universal Paper. You can add the hashtag topic **#Universal Paper** in your update. Anyone can click the topic to find more information about Universal Paper and to see which people and groups are talking about Universal Paper. Anyone can search for Universal Paper, and the topic appears in the search results. Click the topic to see all the places that you have access to where the topic is assigned. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note When you add topics to posts that contain files, the topics are also added to those files. 1. When writing an update, type # followed by any text. As you type, pick a topic from the list of suggestions or press ENTER to add a topic. Topics can be up to three words. Commas ( , ) and closing square brackets ( \] ) automatically end a topic. Other punctuation, symbols, and separators are supported in topic names. Users need the Assign Topic permission to assign topics to posts or comments. If a user adds a topic without the proper permission, the system adds a clickable topic link, but the topic isn't assigned to the post. The link navigates to the topic detail page for that topic, but the post isn't included in the search results. 2. Click **Share**. The hashtag topic becomes a link to the topic detail page. The topic (without the hashtag) is also automatically added to the top-level post in the update. For example, if you include **#Universal Paper** in a comment under your coworker’s post, the topic **Universal Paper** is added to your coworker’s post. After you post an update, the only way to remove a hashtag topic in Lightning Experience is to delete or edit the post or comment. In Salesforce Classic, you can remove the topic from the top-level post. #### See Also - [Add Topics to Chatter Posts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_add.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add topics to Chatter posts and comments to make it possible to search for all the items that touch on that topic. You can add topics to any posts at any time directly in the feed.") # Add Languages to Your Aura Sites Add the languages that you want your site to support. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. In Experience Builder, click **![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings.png)** | **Languages**. 2. Click **Add Languages**. 3. Select the languages that you want to add to your site. 4. Rearrange the list in the order that you want languages to appear. 5. Save your changes. 6. Optionally, for each language, select a fallback language. The fallback language is the language to use when a page doesn’t have a translation for the language that the user selects. For example, imagine that a visitor chooses to view a page in French (CA), but there isn’t content for that page in French (CA). The fallback language is shown instead. 1. Under Site Languages, select a language. 2. From the **Fallback Language** field, select a fallback language. After you add a language to the site, the ![Languages icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_multilingual_globe.png) Language icon appears in the Experience Builder toolbar. Click it to switch between languages when previewing or editing page content. ![Language icon in the Experience Builder toolbar](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_multilingual_lang_icon.png) ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Consider offering users a way to get instant translations of feed items. (Feed items include posts, questions, polls, and their comments, answers, and replies.) For more information, see [Add a Translate Button to Feed Items in Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_translate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A translation setting in Experience Builder puts a Translate with Google menu on every feed item. Translations are offered through a Google Cloud Translation API key that you provide."). #### See Also - [Set the Default Language for Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_default.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The default language is the language that’s used in a site before a user has selected another language. By default, the default language is set to English (US).") - [Edit Language Content on the Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_editing_about.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Builder provides its own language menu that you can use to switch between languages as you edit content on each page. Switch languages and provide spot translations, like fixing a typo. You can also use this method for full page translations instead of exporting and importing site content.") - [Set Language Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you add Experience Builder sites languages, you can define separate settings for each language.") - [Delete a Language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_delete.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you delete a language, the translated content isn’t deleted—it’s just no longer visible. When you add the language back to the Experience Builder site, you can access the translated content again.") # Add Library Members You can add members to libraries. Permissions are customizable from the library level, which gives you control over who can access files. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
User Permissions Needed
To add library members: Customize Application
Go to **Files**, select **My Libraries**, and click the down arrow on the right side of the library. ![Add members to a library.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/admin_files_add_library_members.png) # Add Markup to the Page `` to Customize Your Experience Builder Site Add custom analytics, improve your SEO results, and more by adding custom markup to the page `` in Experience Builder. For example, you can include SEO meta tags that are visible only to search engines, add a favicon, or add custom code for Adobe Analytics and Google Tag Manager. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Google Analytics is supported out-of-the box by Salesforce, and doesn’t require the following steps. However, before using Google Analytics, you must [configure it for your site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_google_analytics_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up Google Analytics to track user IDs, user types, and search activity so that users can pull this information into meaningful reports."). For security purposes, we restrict the tags, attributes, and values allowed in the `head` markup of your pages.
Allowed Tags Allowed Attributes
<base> href, target
<link>

as, charset, crossorigin, disabled, href, hreflang, id, import, integrity, media, rel,1 relList, rev, sheet, sizes, target, title, type

1 For rel, allowed values are alternate, apple-touch-icon, apple-touch-icon-precomposed, apple-touch-startup-image, author, bookmark, canonical, external, help, icon, license, manifest, mask-icon, next, nofollow, noopener, noreferrer, pingback, prefetch, preload, prev, search, shortcut icon, stylesheet, and tag.

<meta>

charset, content, http-equiv,2 name, property, scheme

2 For http-equiv, allowed values are cleartype, content-type, content-language, and default-style.

The attribute http-equiv="X-UA-Compatible" is only supported in combination with content="IE=Edge".

<noscript>

Within <noscript> only the following elements are supported: <a>, <iframe>, <img>, and <meta>3

3For <meta>, allowed attributes are http-equiv and content. Both attributes are required.

refresh is the only allowed value for the attribute http-equiv.

<script> Use for custom content
<style> type, media, nonce, title
<title> None allowed
If the content in your `` tag is invalid, you can’t save your work. If you entered unsupported code, hover over ![Code error indicator](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/builder_headererror.png) to see details on the issues. Existing `head` elements that contain invalid markup are stripped from the page before it’s rendered. To get the `head` working again, use Experience Builder to remove the unsupported tags. 1. In Experience Builder, click **![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings.png)** | **Advanced**. ![Advanced section of the Settings area in Experience Builder.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_head2.png) 2. Click **Edit Head Markup**. 3. Enter the markup and save your changes. When you add custom markup, the code is added to the `head` of every page in your site, including login pages. 4. Before deploying the site to your production org, test the `head` markup in your sandbox or DE orgs. Depending on the CSP security level of your site, head markup sometimes doesn’t work as expected. See [Select the Relaxed CSP security level](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_security_csp_tips.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Whether you’re an administrator, content manager, or developer, be aware of the impact of the different security levels on your Experience Builder site. This impact can be far-ranging and unexpected."). Alternatively, conflicts can arise with Lightning Locker. See [Resolve Lightning Locker Conflicts in Experience Builder](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/communities_dev_security_limitations.htm) in the Experience Cloud Developer Guide. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Here we added HTML to include a favicon on our site’s pages. ![Edit Head Markup dialog box](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_head1.png) #### See Also - [_Experience Cloud Developer Guide_: Example: Adobe Analytics and Lightning Locker in Experience Builder Sites](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/communities_dev_security_example.htm) - [_LWR Sites for Experience Cloud Developer Guide_: Head Markup in LWR Sites](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.250.0.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/template_differences_markup.htm) # Add or Remove Customers in Chatter Groups If customer invitations are enabled for your organization, you can invite, add, and remove customers. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
It must be a private group that you own or manage and that [allows customers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_creating.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create public, private, and unlisted Chatter groups to collaborate with your teams and work together on projects."). 1. Navigate to a group detail page. 2. To add people who aren't already customers in your company, click **Invite People**, or **Add/Remove Members** | **Invite them to Salesforce Chatter!**. Enter email addresses separated by commas, add an optional message if you like, and click **Send**. When a customer accepts your invitation, they get access to Chatter and become a member of the group. 3. To add people who are already customers in your company, click **Add/Remove Members**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - When you invite a customer to your group, they get a unique username and password to log in to the group. They get the username and password even if they’re already a member of another Salesforce organization. They can’t use other Salesforce logins to access your customer group. - If a customer can’t log in to the group, verify that they’re using the authentication credentials from their welcome email. If the problem persists, ask your administrator for help. - If a customer loses their password, they can use the Forgot Password option to reset it. If they don’t have their username, they can recover it by contacting the administrator of the organization in which they’re a customer. #### See Also - [Add and Remove Chatter Group Members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_members_add.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Own or manage a Chatter group? Here’s how you add or remove group members.") - [View Chatter Group Members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_members.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Members section on a Chatter group page shows all members of a group, including any customer members.") # Add Rich Publisher Apps to Your Feeds Customize the Chatter publisher with payloads that are unique to your business process. Add a form to a post; choose from a selection of branding images; add inspiration to your feed with profound quotations. Select from the custom apps your team creates or acquires from AppExchange. Add up to five apps to the Chatter publisher. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura and Visualforce sites
User Permissions Needed
To add Rich Publisher Apps to the Chatter publisher:

Chatter Enabled

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

Add Rich Publisher Apps to the Chatter publisher. 1. Go to **Experience Workspaces**. 2. Click **Administration** | **Rich Publisher Apps**. 3. Move apps between the Available Apps and Selected Apps lists. ![Rich Publisher Apps admin page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_chatter_admin_richapps.png) 4. Rearrange the Selected Apps list in the order you want the apps’ icons to appear in the Chatter publisher. ![Rich Publisher Apps icons in the Chatter publisher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_chatter_richapps_icons.png) Selected apps appear to the right of the Attach icon in the Chatter publisher. The apps appear in the order you arranged them in the Selected Apps column. # Add Salesforce CMS Content to Your Experience Builder Site Use the Digital Experiences App to create, manage, and publish engaging content for your Experience Builder site. Then display your Salesforce CMS content on your Aura or LWR site using Experience Builder tools. When you use Experience Builder sites together with Salesforce CMS, you can keep your brand and content consistent everywhere the content is published. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
Experience Builder and site templates help you create, brand, and publish a custom site. You can choose from several templates, all of which come with components that you can use to add CMS content to your Aura and LWR site pages. [Salesforce CMS](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.community_managed_content_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) is a hybrid content management system where you can create, manage, and publish content from CMS workspaces to multiple channels, including Experience Builder sites. You can access your sites and Salesforce CMS workspaces from the Digital Experiences app, which is available through the App Launcher. View and manage your CMS workspaces and your Aura or LWR sites right from the Digital Experiences Home tab. ![Digital Experiences Home](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/salesforce_cms.png) ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Experience Cloud and Salesforce CMS have workspaces. In Experience Cloud, you use a site’s workspace to configure settings and find information about your site’s metrics and user engagement. In CMS workspaces, you create and manage CMS content and publish it to multiple channels. Before you can use Salesforce CMS content on your Experience Builder site, ensure that your site is based on the most up-to-date Lightning template. Connect Salesforce CMS to your Experience Builder site by adding the site as a channel to your Salesforce CMS workspace. Next, ensure that all content that you want to display on your site is published in your workspace. Content must be published before you can use it on your Aura or LWR sites. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Although the Digital Experiences app is available in sandboxes, you can't migrate CMS content to production. We recommend that you use the Digital Experiences app in production to create content that you plan to use beyond testing. Already have a CMS? You can use content from another CMS in your Experience Builder site for consistent branding, reuse of material, and ease of maintenance. See [Connect Your External CMS to Your Experience Builder Site](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.cms_dev.meta/cms_dev/cms_connect_intro.htm) in CMS Developer Guide to learn more. - **[Display Salesforce CMS Content in Your LWR Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_build_lwr_cms_content.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create content in Salesforce CMS that matches your branding and messaging, and then use the content on any Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) site. Dynamically display Salesforce CMS content in your LWR site with data binding components in Experience Builder. You can nest one component within another, add unique images, and create engaging pages with CMS content. - **[Display Salesforce CMS Content in Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_build_aura_cms_content.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Deliver and organize CMS content with Experience Builder and Content Management. Use Experience Builder to configure the content formatting and layout on your site pages. And use Content Management to organize your CMS content into collections and topics. #### See Also - [Add a Channel to a CMS Workspace](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.cms_channel_add.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Add Salesforce CMS Content to Your LWR Site with Data Binding Use data binding to populate your LWR site with Salesforce CMS content. Drop a component that supports data binding onto your site page and map it to content froma CMS workspace. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Before you can add content from a CMS workspace to your site, add the site as a channel to the workspace. Then make sure that the content you want to add is published in the CMS workspace. These steps demonstrate how to add news content from a CMS workspace to a Card component. You can follow these same steps for other CMS content types or if you're using the Banner, Tile, Grid, and Overlap components, which also support data binding. Some of the details can differ depending on the component and the type of CMS content that you're working with. 1. In Experience Builder, click **Components**. 2. Drag a Card component onto the page. 3. In the component property panel, click **Select Content**. ![Card component property panel with Select Content button highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_builder_card_component_select_content.png) 4. Select news content item that you want to add from the content selector, and then save your changes. ![Select content from Salesforce CMS and save.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_builder_cms_content_selector.png) The news content item is now a data source for the card component. To populate the component with the news content, map elements of the content, such as the title, body, and banner image, to the components that are nested in the card. 5. To add the news title: 1. In the Card component, select the Text Block for the headline (1). 2. In the component property panel, from the Text or Expression field, select **Title** (2). ![In a Text Block component, select Title from the Text or Expression field in the component property panel.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_builder_card_map_content.png) 6. To add the body: 1. Select the Text Block component for the subheader. 2. In the component property panel, from the Text or Expression field, select **Body**. 7. To add the banner image: 1. Select the Card component. 2. In the component propery panel, go to Image Settings. From the Image URL or Expression field, select **Banner Image > url**. If the news content doesn’t have a banner image, select a background image from CMS or add a different image URL to the Image URL or Expression field. 8. Continue to customize the card component and its nested components using the component property panel. You can customize the content layout, including component size, font size, image position, overlays, and more. If the news content is later updated in the CMS workspace and republished, those updates appear on your site. Here are some considerations when using data binding components. - If a component points to a site page that’s deleted, reconfigure the component to point to a different site page. - If a component points to a list view or related list view whose API name is changed, reconfigure the component to point to a different list view or related listview. - Although the Text Block, HTML Editor, Image, Video, and Button components don’t support direct data binding on the Home page, they’re data-bound when used on detail pages. And you can nest them in other data-bound components. On detail pages and as nested components, they inherit content from the data-bound component where they’re nested. See data binding in a Banner component in the [Did You Know Series (English Only)](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/SUwcxSKrE2tNUXeBqtNWFG). #### See Also - [Bind Data to CMS Content Pages in Your LWR Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_data_binding_detail.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Data-bound components used on CMS content pages automatically populate with content saved in Salesforce CMS. Map fields in the component property panel to fields in CMS content.") - [Add an Image from Salesforce CMS to Your LWR Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_data_binding_images.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add an image from Salesforce CMS to your site page or add to a component that's populated with CMS content.") - [Nest Content Components in Your LWR Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_data_binding_nesting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Nest content components within layout components on your LWR site to showcase more content from your Salesforce CMS. Create eye-catching content displays by nesting components that use data binding.") - [Use a Grid Component to Show Enhanced CMS Collections and List Views in LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_grid.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Grid component dynamically populates with data that’s saved in enhanced CMS collections and record list views. After you pick a data source, you add a content component within the grid to show the content that you want. The component provides data binding and pagination logic.") # Add Salesforce CRM Data to LWR or Aura Sites To help your users, customers, and partners accomplish more, share Salesforce CRM data on your Experience Builder site. Aura and LWR sites have different tools for displaying CRM data. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
Always keep your critical data secure and share only the data that you want users to see and access. For more information, see [Sharing CRM Data in an Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_sharing_CRM_data_cheatsheet.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Sharing CRM data in an Experience Cloud site can seem like a daunting task. You need to consider the various layers of sharing data in an internal Salesforce org, and then add the extra security layers included in a portal or community implementation. Here’s a cheat sheet of all the resources you need when setting up data sharing for your Experience Cloud site."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Not sure which site template or framework you’re using? Go to the All Sites list in the Digital Experiences app, and view the Template and Framework columns. You can see an ![Enhanced badge](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/enhanced_icon.png) badge beside enhanced LWR sites in the Framework column. The tools for sharing CRM Data on your Experience Builder site depend on whether you’re building an Aura or LWR site. - For Aura sites, share CRM data by using Content Management in Experience Workspaces and Experience Builder. In Content Management, add CRM Connections, and create and manage CRM Collections. With CRM Collections, you can display object data on your site in a cohesive package with customizable list views. In Experience Builder, add data to object pages by using CMS components such as CMS Collection. - For LWR sites, share CRM data by using Experience Builder. In Experience Builder, you add CRM data to your site using data-binding components such as Banner, Card, Grid, Overlap, and Tile. - **[Show CRM Data in Your Aura or LWR Site Using Object Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_type_object.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Aura and LWR sites, you can use object pages to show CRM data. Object pages include a record detail page, a record list page, and a related list page. Each page provides different views and details about object data. - **[Show Record Lists in Your Aura or LWR Site Using Navigation Menus](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_create_record_list.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create record list views for objects such as accounts, cases, contacts, and custom objects, and link to them from your site’s Navigation Menu or Tile Menu components. - **[Bind Data to CRM Record Detail Pages in Your LWR Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_data_binding_crm_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Data-bound components used on CRM record detail pages automatically populate with content saved in Salesforce CRM data in records. Map fields in the component property panel to fields in the CRM records. - **[Add Salesforce CRM Data to Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_aura_crm_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable your users to do more when you share Salesforce CRM data in your Aura site. Create CRM collections in the Content Management Workspace, and customize how your CRM data appears on your site using Experience Builder. - **[External Data Sources in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_external_data_sources.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Salesforce Connect and Salesforce Files Connect to access external data and content stored outside of your Salesforce org from your site. # Add Salesforce CRM Data to Your Aura Site Enable your users to do more when you share Salesforce CRM data in your Aura site. Create CRM collections in the Content Management Workspace, and customize how your CRM data appears on your site using Experience Builder. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
- **[Add CRM Connections to Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_managed_content_creating_content-crm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To share Salesforce CRM data on your Aura site, add CRM connections in Content Management. - **[Create a Salesforce CRM Collection for Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_managed_content_collections_creatingcrm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To display CRM object data on your site, create CRM collections. CRM collections are automatically updated based on the data in your Salesforce org. When you add a CRM collection to your Aura site, you can customize its layout and formatting. - **[Add a Salesforce CRM Collection to Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_aura_crm_collection_component.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To create an attractive and engaging display of CRM object data, add a CRM collection to your Aura site. Create and customize the data layout and record list views by using the CMS Collection component in Experience Builder. If you haven’t created a CRM collection but you want to display object data on your site, you can still add the CMS Collection component as a placeholder. # Add Streams to Your Experience Builder Site Your site users can combine multiple feeds into a stream to create a single point of access to related information. Combine feeds of top contributors or discussions concerning a particular product line. Create a stream that combines feeds from discussions, groups, topics, profiles, and all kinds of objects, like cases, opportunities, and accounts. No more jumping from feed-to-feed to get a sense of what people are saying. Each member can create up to 100 streams. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences

    OR

  • Be a member of the site AND View Setup and Configuration AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
To publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences

    OR

  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin or publisher in that site
In the Experience Builder, add the Stream List page to navigation, and you’re done. 1. In your site, open Experience Builder. 2. Click the navigation bar, and then click **Navigation Menu**. 3. Click **Add Menu Item**. 4. In the Menu Item panel, enter a name for the Stream List page, for example, STREAMS. 5. For **Type**, select Community Page. 6. For **Page**, select Stream List. 7. Choose whether to make the Stream List page publicly available. 8. Click **Publish**, and then click **Publish** again. 9. In the banner, click **Publish**, and then, in the confirmation dialog, click **Publish** again. Site users have access to tools for creating and viewing their own streams. # Add Style to Your Experience Builder Site with Themes A theme is a collection of information that defines the visual flow of your Experience Builder site. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Themes are made up of layouts and styles, such as colors, fonts, and images. These elements combine to give you granular control of the appearance and structure of each page in your site. Themes are all about the look and feel of your site and are independent of your content. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example The default Customer Service theme includes two layouts. - **Login**, which applies the theme layout to the login pages - **Default**, which applies the theme layout to all non-login pages Your site comes with several pre-built themes that you can quickly customize to meet your needs. Pre-built themes work across all our standard templates, such as Customer Service, Partner Central, Customer Account Portal, and Build Your Own (Aura). How you style an applied theme is unique to each site where the theme is used. The theme that you select changes the headers, footers, and other properties that are available for your site. Though pre-built themes come with their own layouts, you can switch between available layouts as needed. You can even work with your development team to create custom components and layouts. - **[Prebuilt Experience Builder Themes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_brand.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prebuilt themes come with every template. They let you style your site with clicks, not code. Apply color, fonts, and images to your site to match your design or brand. Match your colors precisely by uploading your own logo to generate a custom color scheme. Create branding sets to change colors, fonts, and logos quickly for different audiences and needs. - **[Change the Theme of Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_theme_change.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experiment and find the theme that works best for your needs, without changing your content. - **[Use Branding Sets in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_brandsets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Branding sets let you automatically change the look of your sites for different audiences and shift quickly between brands or presentations for campaigns or events. - **[Customize the Theme of Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_theme_customize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the theme of your Experience Builder site by adjusting everything from the size and color of your headers and footers, to the fonts and colors for active text. We can get you started, but you get to make the final tweaks to make the theme your own. #### See Also - [Developer Guide: Dynamic Branding with Login Pages](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.externalidentityImplGuide.meta/externalidentityImplGuide/external_identity_dynamic_with_default_login_page.htm) # Add Tabs to Your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Site If you’re using the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template, you can add tabs to your site. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you want to use all custom pages in your site, you can choose to hide tabs. Before you begin, keep these things in mind: - Enable the tabs that are required for the type of activity you’re performing in this site. For example, sharing accounts and opportunities with your partners or sharing cases and solutions with customers who need support. Don’t clutter your site with tabs that users don’t need. - Profiles control access to tabs. If a profile doesn’t have access to a tab, the tab is hidden for that profile in the site. In that case, you must manually expose the tabs in the profiles for your site members so that they can see the tabs in the site. - Lightning Component tabs aren’t supported in Experience Cloud sites. - Chatter Free users in your site don’t see any tabs except the Chatter tab. After you identify the features you want your site members to see, you can expose those features by choosing the corresponding tabs during setup. The tabs that you select also determine site navigation in the Salesforce mobile app. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Administration** | **Tabs**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you’re using one of the preconfigured templates instead of Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce, the **Tabs** page is hidden by default. To display the page, click **Administration** | **Preferences**, then select **Show all settings in Site Management** or **Show all settings in Experience Workspaces**. 3. Select the tabs to include in your site from the Available Tabs list. To select multiple tabs, press CTRL. 4. To add a tab, click **Add**. To remove a tab, select it in the Selected Tabs list and click **Remove**. 5. To change the order that the tabs display, click **Up** or **Down**. The tab at the top of the list is the landing tab for the site. When members access the site, it’s the first tab they see. If members don't have access to the site landing tab, they see the first tab that they have access to from the selected site tabs. If they don’t have access to any of the tabs, they see the Home tab. 6. Click **Save**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Changing from the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template to an Experience Builder–based template removes all tabs from your site. #### See Also - [Customize Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Update basic site settings like your site URL, site name, members, login options, and general preferences in the Administration tile of Experience Workspaces.") - [Rename the Chatter Tab](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_rename_chatter_tab.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Most likely, many of your Experience Cloud site members use the Chatter tab as their home base. You can customize it to meet your company's branding.") # Add the Files Related List to Page Layouts Customize page layouts to include the Files related list. With the Files related list, users can add files to a record and see a list of files associated with the record. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
Use files instead of attachments to make the files available outside of the context of the individual record. The file owner or admin still decides sharing settings for the file. 1. From Setup, at the top of the page, select **Object Manager** and select the object you want to add the Files related list to (such as Opportunity). 2. Click **Page Layouts**. 3. Click the page layout you want to customize. 4. In the list of available items in the left pane, click **Related Lists**. 5. Drag **Files** to the Related Lists section and click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Users can't drag files to add them to a record when the related list type is **Basic List**. To change the related list type, edit the related list component in the Lightning App Builder. # Add the Global Search Box to Your Customized Experience Cloud Site HTML Header If you customize your Experience Coud sites with an HTML header, you hide the global search box. To take advantage of this search functionality, add a form to your custom header. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
You can add the global search box to both Experience Builder and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You are automatically redirected to a Classic UI, when configuring this feature in an Experience Builder site. 1. In your customized HTML header, embed a form similar to this one. ```html
``` 2. Replace with the unique value you used for the URL when creating the Experience Cloud site. For example, if you entered customers as the unique value for your site URL, the form would look like this example: ```html
``` With global search from your internal org, you can get uneven results when searching for an Experience Cloud site User record. Here’s why and what you can do about it. Each site has a unique network ID. When you create a user through **Contact record** | **Create External User**, the new User record is assigned to a site's network ID. Global search looks for records in the internal org, which has a different network ID than the site. A global search doesn't search inside sites. Since the User record is associated with a site network ID, global search doesn't return results for that record. The workaround is to create User records in the internal org, and then associate the records to a site. You can associate an internal User record to a site by linking the internal record to a Contact record. After you forge the link, you can find the User record through global search. The User record's network ID is now associated with the internal org. # Add the Pending Task Banner to an Experience Cloud Site Surface urgent tasks and recommended actions to authenticated users by adding the Pending Task banner component to your Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Available in: LWR and Aura
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site OR
The Pending Task banner prioritizes tasks from multiple sources, including notifications, case updates, and incidents. 1. Open Experience Builder for your Experience Cloud site. 2. From the Components panel, drag the **Pending Task banner** to the page. ![Components panel, Pending Task banner](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/pendingtask.png) 3. Publish the site. #### See Also - [Build and Customize Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_build.htm&language=en_US) # Add Topics to Articles or Remove Them Easily add multiple topics of any type to specific articles, or quickly remove them as your Experience Cloud site’s needs change. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To access Experience Workspaces or Experience Management page:

Manage Experiences

OR

Create and Set Up Experiences

To add or remove topics: Create Topics
1. In Experience Workspaces, access topics by clicking **Content Management** | **Topics** | **Article Management**. 2. Use the search bar to look for articles. Filter your search by selecting a data category group, followed by a specific category. 3. Select an article, and then type to assign topics. Choose a suggested topic or type a new one. Type a comma (,) after your new topic to add it to the article. You can click existing topics to remove them. Considerations for adding and removing topics: - To automatically add the translated version of a topic to translated articles, the translated topics and articles must already be uploaded in the system. Otherwise, the translated article is tagged with the English topic. - Topics are site specific and don't require an assigned Network ID. If you choose to assign a Network ID, which isn't recommended, make sure you assign the ID of the site where your topic exists. # Add Topics to Chatter Posts Add topics to Chatter posts and comments to make it possible to search for all the items that touch on that topic. You can add topics to any posts at any time directly in the feed. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To add existing topics to posts and comments: Assign Topics
To add new topics to posts and comments: Create Topics
These steps outline how to add topics in Salesforce Classic. In Lightning Experience, when you post or comment, add a topic by putting a hashtag (#) in front of your topic terms, for example, #sales quotas. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note All topic names appear in the topics list and all topic names and descriptions are searchable. This visibility includes topics that are used solely in private groups or on records. 1. In the top corner of the post, click ![Feed drop-down arrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_feed_dropdown_arrow.png). 2. Click **Add Topics** or **Edit Topics**. 3. In the topic editor, start typing your text. As you type, you can pick a topic from the list of suggestions, or keep typing to create your own unique topic. To add more than one topic, type a comma after each topic. Commas ( , ) and closing square brackets ( \] ) automatically end a topic. Other punctuation, symbols, and separators are supported in topic names. Topics are case and space insensitive. Posts can have up to 10 topics. 4. When you’re done adding topics, click **Done** or press ENTER. A topic becomes a link to its detail page. On the topic detail page, you can see all the posts that you have access to that use the topic. When you add topics to posts that contain files, the topics are also added to those files. #### See Also - [Add Hashtag Topics to Chatter Posts and Comments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_add_topic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To organize Chatter posts and comments and make them easy to find, add topics.") - [Add a Topic as a Chatter Favorite](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_favorites_topics_adding.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add a topic as a favorite to see the latest on the topics you’re interested in.") # Add Topics to Files Topics make it possible to search for all the items that touch on a given topic. Topics added to Chatter posts are also added to any files in the post or its comments. When you search for those topics, the files are included in the results. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To add topics to files

Viewer access to the file

AND

Assign Topics (to add existing topics)

OR

Create Topics (to add new topics)

To add topics to files posted in Chatter feeds, [add topics to the post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_add.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add topics to Chatter posts and comments to make it possible to search for all the items that touch on that topic. You can add topics to any posts at any time directly in the feed.") where the file is attached. You can add regular topics or [hashtag topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_add_topic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To organize Chatter posts and comments and make them easy to find, add topics."). The topics are automatically added to any files that are attached to the post or its comments. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Post with file and Topics (Salesforce Classic)](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/topics_on_files_feed_post.png) Since Kimmy added the topics Sales Training, Western Region, and Feedback Request to a post, these topics are also added to the attached file. Now, coworkers can click on a topic to find other posts, files, and records associated with that topic. In Lightning Experience, go to the **Related** tab to see all records with a topic. Click **View All** for the entire list, and sort by Object Type to see all the files with the topic. In Salesforce Classic, go to the **Records** tab and choose **Files**. Otherwise, use the **Feed** tab to see all posts and files for the topic. # Add Visibility Rule to the Record List Control when to show or hide a Record List component based on user context or custom logic to deliver a more tailored experience. 1. To add a new visibility rule to the Record List, go to the **Visibility** tab and click **New Visibility Rule**. 2. Click Component state and select either **Show** or **Hide**. 3. In the **When** dropdown, select a condition to filter a visibility rule. 1. Any condition is met 2. All conditions are met 3. The custom logic is met. If you select this option, enter at least two custom logic expressions and specify the visibility rules using these logic expressions: - **Resource**: Select a user's resource type. The available **User** resource types are `isGuest`, `Record`, or `userID`. - **Operator**: Select a condition that applies to the field. - **Value**: Enter the value based on the resource you chose. - To add more conditions, click **Add Condition** and specify additional criteria. 4. Save your configuration. ![Add visibility rule for Record List](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/add_visibility_rule.png) # Add Your Custom Brand to Email Notifications Customize your company’s Chatter email notifications to show your company’s sender information, footer text, and footer logo. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize Chatter email settings: Customize Application
1. From Setup, enter Email Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Email Settings**. 2. Enter custom values for the email sender’s name and address to replace the default values. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If you change the sender’s email address, we send a verification email to the new address. The change is pending, and we continue to use the existing address while we await verification. The requested address doesn’t take effect until you click the confirmation link in the email. If verification is already pending for a new email address, and you specify a different new address, we retain the latest value and use that value for verification. If you enter a custom value for the sender’s address and you have enabled mail relay, your Chatter emails use the relay. 3. Customize what displays in the footer of Chatter emails. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - All Chatter emails display the Chatter logo and Salesforce information unless you replace them with your organization’s own logo and information. - If you previously customized the logo or footer text and want to restore the default values, use the API to set these fields to `null`. 1. To replace the default Chatter logo, choose a logo. The logo must be an existing document in the Documents tab and must be marked Externally Available Image. Images of 150 x 50 pixels on a transparent background work best. 2. To replace the default footer text, enter up to 765 characters. The default text includes the Salesforce name and physical address. We recommend including your org’s physical address to comply with applicable anti-spam laws. 4. Click **Save**. #### See Also - [Chatter Email Settings and Branding](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_email_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can change the format of your company’s outgoing emails and control whether users receive email notifications.") # Additional Experience Cloud Site Limitations Here are a few limitations when using features in Experience Cloud sites. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
- Channel Programs and Market Development Fund object list views and records don’t display on Salesforce for iOS. - Partner users can’t create account teams and add members to them. - Partner users can’t edit or delete members of an account shared with them by an internal user. - The default account teams option is not available for Experience Cloud sites. - Partner and portal users don’t receive emails to notify them of upcoming tasks. Reminder notifications are displayed on the bell icon. # Adjust the Style and Layout of Your Site Theme Experience Builder sites include several pre-built themes that you can modify easily. In addition to customizing the layouts, you can configure colors, fonts, images, sizes, and actions with a ton of choices and levers. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
You may be asking yourself: All those controls, where do I start? Start with the broadest settings. The **Theme Settings** section of the Theme panel contains general settings that affect your entire theme. These settings vary depending on your site’s active theme. ![Theme Panel with Theme Settings displayed](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_themepanel_themesettings.png) | Setting | Description | | --- | --- | | Show header | Shows or hides the header. | | Fix the header’s position | Pins the header to the top of the scrolling area so that it remains visible while a customer is scrolling a long page. To see this working, publish and preview your site. The change doesn’t appear in Experience Builder. | | Show hero | Shows or hides the theme’s hero image. | | Start hero under header | Positions the hero image at the top of page, under the header, to provide a seamless look. | | Set max page width | Sets the maximum width of the content across the page. Similar settings are in several component panels. The maximum width can be narrower than the overall display size of the header or hero. | To create different layouts for different pages, in Experience Builder, go to **Settings** | **Theme** | **Configure**. Each component type has different attributes that you can adjust in their property panels. Select a component to open its property panel and configure its options. Play with the settings to see what effects you can achieve. Changing your layouts doesn’t affect your content directly, only how it’s displayed. If you end up with something you don’t like or can’t use, and forget how to undo it, you can start over. 1. In Experience Builder Settings (1), select **Theme**. 2. Click **Reset** (2) for your current theme. 3. Read the warning and then click **Reset** to confirm. 4. Alternatively, you can reset a theme back to its defaults the next time you reactivate it in the Change Theme panel by selecting **Replace and start fresh**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Using either **Reset** or **Replace and start fresh** deletes all of your customizations. - Branding sets - Theme regions (settings for common elements across pages like headers) - Theme settings - Custom theme layouts - Custom theme layout assignments for pages - Custom CSS overrides These settings aren’t retrievable, so be careful about selecting either **Reset** or **Replace and start fresh**. # Administer Your Experience Cloud Site After creating your Experience Cloud site, take care of administrative tasks such as adding members, securing your data, defining what records are shown in your site and to whom, and enabling other features such as SEO. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
- **[Experience Cloud Site Setup Checklist](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_napili_template_setup_checklist.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Building an Experience Cloud site is the result of research, mapping of goals, and defining your audience. At the same time, you must have all your ducks in a row so the actual implementation process is seamless. You know your org best, but use this general checklist to help you organize what you need for site. - **[Customize Login, Self-Registration, and Password Management for Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_login.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the default login, logout, password management, and self-registration options for your site. Or customize the behavior with Apex and Visualforce or Experience Builder (Site.com Studio) pages. You can also use dynamic URLs to brand your pages at run time. - **[Experience Cloud Site Statuses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_status.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Cloud sites can have one of these statuses: preview, inactive, active, and archived. - **[Manage Site Emails and Notifications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_administer_emails_notifications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage the emails that are sent out from your Experience Cloud site, and which notifications your members see. # Agentforce for Experience Builder (Beta) Is Discontinued The Experience Builder Agent, previously announced as a beta feature for enhanced LWR sites, is discontinued as of Winter ’27. If you created an Experience Builder Agent during the beta, you can no longer use it. The Agentforce panel is no longer available in Experience Builder. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Foundations, or Agentforce 1 or Einstein 1 Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Experience Builder Agent is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/). Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. #### See Also - [Experience Builder Agent (Beta) Is Discontinued as of Winter ’27](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=005393433&type=1&language=en_US) # Agentforce Self-Service Billing Models Agentforce Self-Service offers resolution-based, login-based, and member-based billing models for customer self-service experiences. Use this information to understand how consumption is measured, which interactions are billable, and which billing model best fits your self-service deployment. ### Required Editions Agentforce Self-Service supports self-service experiences across chat, portal, voice, and messaging channels. The billing model that you choose depends on how customers access self-service experiences, how frequently they interact with them, and whether users authenticate before engaging with the agent experience.
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Foundations or Agentforce 1 Editions. Access to some standard agent actions requires additional add-on licenses.
Agentforce Self-Service supports self-service experiences across chat, portal, voice, and messaging channels. The billing model that you choose depends on how customers access self-service experiences, how frequently they interact with them, and whether users authenticate before engaging with the agent experience. ## Considerations for Agentforce Self-Service Billing Models Review these known limitations before you deploy Agentforce Self-Service billing models. - Email isn't supported. Resolution-based billing doesn't apply to email interactions. Email isn't covered by Agentforce Self-Service licenses. - Agentforce custom actions that call Data Cloud aren't supported. Custom actions that make Data Cloud calls aren't metered under the Help Agent Resolutions usage type. - Agent actions of type Prompt Template aren't supported. Prompt Template-based agent actions aren't metered under the Help Agent Resolutions usage type. - Proactive scenarios aren't supported. Proactive engagement scenarios aren't metered under the Help Agent Resolutions usage type. - Timeline component (Data Cloud calls) isn't supported. Data Cloud calls made through the Timeline component aren't metered under the Help Agent Resolutions usage type. - LLM calls through agent actions aren't supported. An agent action can internally call the LLM gateway. This call differs from LLM calls made by the Agentforce reasoner or planner, and it isn't metered under the Help Agent Resolutions usage type. ## When to Use Each Billing Model Choose the billing model that aligns with your self-service experience. | Billing Model | License | Best For | Available On | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Resolution-Based Billing | Agentforce Self-Service Resolutions | Guest users who interact with the help agent chat, voice, or messaging channels | Enhanced Chat, Web Chat, Agentforce Service Portal, Voice, and supported messaging channels | | Login-Based Billing | Agentforce Self-Service Login | Users requiring an authenticated portal experience that goes beyond a guest portal. Ideal for supporting a large volume of infrequent users. | Agentforce Service Portal | | Member-Based Billing | Agentforce Self-Service Member | Users requiring an authenticated portal experience that goes beyond a guest portal. Ideal for users who frequently access a portal. | Agentforce Service Portal | Salesforce Digital Wallet tracks consumption for all billing models. Consumption is recorded only when a billable event occurs. ## Resolution-Based Billing Agentforce Self-Service Resolutions is designed for self-service interactions across supported channels. Resolution-based billing is part of Agentforce Flex billing and uses Flex Credits to track consumption. The Agentforce Help Agent uses an outcome-based pricing model. You're charged only when the agent successfully resolves a customer inquiry or request. Billing consumption is calculated based on the total number of successful resolutions across your deployment channels and tracked using [Flex Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.usage_flex_credits.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Salesforce uses deterministic billing criteria rather than semantic interpretation of conversation quality, providing predictable and auditable billing outcomes. ## Billable Resolutions A Help Agent session qualifies as a Resolution when it meets these conditions: - Includes at least two turns of messages between the user and agent (not abandoned) - The final feedback from the user isn't explicitly negative - The conversation concludes without the user escalating to a human agent, or the final feedback is explicitly positive ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Sessions that don't meet the criteria above are considered unresolved and aren't billed. When a session is successfully resolved, any Agentforce actions or Data 360 queries run during that interaction are included and aren't billed separately. ## Feedback and Resolution User feedback is a primary signal in determining whether a Help Agent session counts as a Resolution. When a user gives explicit feedback during a session, that feedback determines whether the session is Resolved. - If the user's last feedback is positive, the session is Resolved and consumes a Resolution, even if the user requests escalation. - If the user's last feedback is negative, the session is Unresolved and doesn't consume a Resolution, even when escalation isn't requested. - If the user gives no feedback, escalation determines the outcome. A session that isn't escalated to a human agent is Resolved. A session that escalates to a human agent is Unresolved. Final feedback takes precedence. If a user gives more than one feedback signal in a session, only the final signal counts toward the resolution. ## Feedback capture scenarios The Help Agent captures feedback in three scenarios. | Scenario | When the agent asks for feedback | Availability | | --- | --- | --- | | User-initiated | The user explicitly asks to give feedback, such as "I want to give feedback." | Available by default. The Feedback Manager subagent handles the request. | | Pre-escalation | The agent asks for feedback right before it transfers the user to a human agent. If the response is ambiguous, escalation still proceeds. | Available by default. The Escalation with Feedback subagent handles the feedback. | | Post-task completion | The agent asks whether the user is satisfied after a task finishes, such as case creation, case retrieval, or a knowledge answer. | Requires manual configuration in your subagents. | |   |   |   | ## Abandoned Sessions Abandoned sessions aren't billed. A session is considered abandoned when the conversation ends before meaningful engagement occurs. To qualify as engaged, the interaction must include: - At least two user messages. - At least two agent responses beyond the initial welcome message. ## Escalated Sessions An escalation occurs when the Help Agent transfers the interaction to a human-assisted process, such as: - Transferring the user to a human agent. - Creating a case for human follow-up through an escalation flow. - Initiating another escalation handoff. Sessions that escalate aren't billed as Resolutions. If a case is created as part of a standard service process and not through an escalation flow, the interaction can still qualify for Resolution-based billing. ## Session Duration Agentforce Self-Service evaluates resolution-based billing at the end of a session window. For text-based channels, session duration is configurable and defaults to 2 hours. If a user resumes the conversation after the session window expires, a new session begins and is evaluated independently. ## Login-Based Billing Agentforce Self-Service Login is designed for authenticated users who access the Agentforce Service Portal. Consumption is tracked as login events in Salesforce Digital Wallet. A user who signs in multiple times during the same day counts as a single login. Unlike resolution-based billing, login-based billing doesn't evaluate conversation outcomes. Consumption is based on authenticated access to the self-service experience. Use Agentforce Self-Service Login when users access self-service periodically and benefit from a personalized portal experience. Key differences with agentic logins: | Feature |   | | --- | --- | | Setup & tracking | Managed in Salesforce Digital Wallet. Tracked as a usage type on the Flex Credits card. For more information, see [Flex Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.usage_flex_credits.htm&type=5&language=en_US). | | Consumption model | True consumption: Entitlements accumulate across the contract length rather than resetting annually. | For information about login-based licensing concepts, daily login usage, and license allocation, see [Experience Cloud User Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_license_types_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ## Member-Based Billing Agentforce Self-Service Member is designed for authenticated users who access self-service frequently. Consumption is tracked as member subscriptions rather than login events. Users can access Agentforce Service Portal experiences throughout their subscription period without consuming daily login events. Unlike resolution-based billing, member-based billing doesn't evaluate conversation outcomes. Use Agentforce Self-Service Member when users require ongoing or high-frequency access to self-service experiences. For information about member-based licensing concepts and license assignment, see [Experience Cloud User Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_license_types_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ## Included Capabilities Included capabilities can include: - Agentforce Self-Service conversations - Knowledge retrieval experiences - Agentforce actions - Personalization experiences - Self-service portal experiences - Supported messaging and communication channels, depending on the billing model and purchased entitlements For information about channel availability and licensing requirements, contact your Salesforce account executive. These runtime activities are included and aren't metered separately: - Data Cloud runtime queries used for knowledge retrieval and personalization - Agentforce standard actions - Agentforce custom actions For information about product consumption and usage tracking, see, [About Digital Wallet](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.wallet_about.htm&type=5&language=en_US) ## Activities That Don't Trigger Billing - Landing on a portal page without interacting with the agent. - Viewing AI-generated content without starting a conversation. - Browsing or navigating static content. - Expanding Dynamic Q&A content without engaging in a conversation. - Consuming content without interacting with the self-service agent experience. Billing begins only when a user actively engages in a conversational interaction with the agent. ## Example Billing Scenarios ## Guest User Resolves an Issue A customer visits a public support site and interacts with Agentforce Self-Service through web chat. The customer receives an answer and leaves the conversation without escalation. If the interaction meets the Resolution criteria, the session is billed as one Resolution. ## Authenticated User Accesses a Portal A customer logs in to Agentforce Service Portal multiple times during a single day. With login-based billing, the customer's activity counts as one login for that day. ## Frequent Portal User A customer with a member subscription accesses the portal throughout the month. The customer's usage is covered by the member subscription and isn't tracked as daily logins. ## Monitor Consumption Salesforce Digital Wallet tracks consumption across Agentforce Self-Service billing models. Consumption is tracked as: - Resolutions for resolution-based billing. Resolutions are tracked as a usage type on the Flex Credits card in Salesforce Digital Wallet. - Login events for login-based billing. - Member subscriptions for member-based billing. For resolution-based billing, Salesforce evaluates whether a Resolution occurred when the session window ends. To monitor usage, remaining entitlements, and consumption trends, see [Agentforce Service Billable Usage Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.service_cloud_billable_usage_types.htm&type=5&language=en_US) and [Monitor Usage for Consumption-Based Products in Digital Wallet](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.wallet_monitor_usage.htm&type=5&language=en_US). #### See Also - [Digital Wallet-Enabled Consumption-Based Products](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.wallet_enabled_products_rate_cards.htm&language=en_US) - [Agentforce Service Billable Usage Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.service_cloud_billable_usage_types.htm&language=en_US) - [Flex Credits Billable Usage Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.usage_flex_credits.htm&language=en_US) - [Einstein Trust Layer Region and Language Support](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_trust_lang_region.htm&language=en_US) # Allow Content Previews in Link Posts Salesforce provides rich media support for over 400 URL domains. When you share a supported link in a post, it’s converted into embedded videos, images, and other types of previews. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic

Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, Developer, and Database.com Editions

Salesforce CRM, Approvals, Chatter email notifications, Chatter Invitations, and customer invitations aren’t available in Database.com.

User Permissions Needed
To enable Chatter: Customize Application
Enable Chatter before you enable link previews. 1. From Setup, enter Chatter Settings in the Quick Find box, and select **Chatter Settings**. 2. Click **Edit**, select **Allow Rich Link Previews**, and click **Save**. Posts that have links to rich media content render those links as previews, like thumbnails, descriptions, and video players. Sometimes a post doesn’t render a link as a rich preview in the feed. An unrendered link means the URL domain for that link isn’t supported or we weren’t able to return the preview for the URL. To generate video previews, your URL must refer to a page that includes metadata for your video in either OpenGraph or oEmbed tags. Rich media previews are enabled by default. If you disable rich media previews, users can preview only videos from YouTube. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note For a look-up list of supported URL domains, see [“URL Domains for Rich Link Previews in Feeds.”](https://help.salesforce.com/servlet/servlet.FileDownload?file=0150M000003xaB8QAI) #### See Also - [Customize Content Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Modify the defaults for your Salesforce CRM Content organization and control settings like feature licenses, multilanguage search, and enhanced document viewer.") # Allow External Users to Access and Report on Tasks and Events Take the following steps to give access to your portal and Experience Cloud site users to report on tasks and events. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
1. From **Salesforce Setup**, access the **Object Manager**. 2. Access Tasks or Events, depending on which objects you must give access to. 3. Click **Fields & Relationships** | **Public** | **Set Field-Level Security**. Check all the profiles you’d like to have access to this field and click **Save**. 4. Click **Page Layout** and add the Public field to your Task or Event object’s page layout. 5. Click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - These steps allow you to make the Public field visible to external users. However, for tasks and events to show up in reports, the Public field must be checked when the task or event is created. You can [set up a flow](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=flow_build.htm&language=en_US) to automatically check all new and edited tasks and events and being public. To include previously created tasks and events in reports, you must manually select the **Public** field. - However, if you use the Tasks and Events standard report type, all activities are displayed regardless of whether the "Public" box is checked. # Allow External Users to Create and Edit Reports Partner and customer users can create, delete, and edit reports in their own personal folder or, with sufficient permission, in a privately shared folder. Grant partner and customer users permissions to create and edit reports through their profiles or permission sets. After you grant the required permissions, partners and customers can use the drag-and-drop Report Builder tool. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
User Permissions Needed
To create permission sets or enable custom permissions in profiles: Manage Profiles and Permission Sets
To assign a permission set to a user: Assign Permission Sets
To share a report folder with external users: Manager folder access or Manage Reports in Public Folders
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important - If your org was created before the Summer ’13 release, then before granting external users permissions you must first turn on enhanced sharing for reports and dashboards. - To create, customize, and delete reports, external users must use the Report Builder tool. Data visibility is based on two things: the user role the partner or customer belongs to and your organization’s sharing rules. Your organization’s field-level security is respected. So, if a field isn’t visible for external users, a partner or customer user doesn’t see it in Report Builder. 1. To let external users create and edit reports, assign Create and Customize Reports, Report Builder, and Edit My Reports permissions through custom profiles or permission sets. If you want external users to export report data, also assign them Export Reports permission. In Setup, enter Permission Sets in the Quick Find box, then select **Permission Sets** or **Profiles**. Assign the following permissions:
External User Permissions Needed to Create and Edit Reports
To create, customize, and delete reports in a personal folder: Create and Customize Reports
To create, customize and delete their own reports in a privately shared folder with Viewer access: Edit My Reports
To export report data: Export Reports
You can give permission to create and edit reports to all role-based external users with licenses. For example, you can give permission to Customer Community Plus and Partner Community. You can also give permission to all legacy role-based portal licenses, such as Customer Portal and Gold Partner. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - These permissions aren’t available to high-volume user licenses, such as Customer Community, High Volume Customer Portal, Service Cloud Portal, and Authenticated Website. - External users with legacy portal licenses can create and edit reports in Experience Cloud sites, but not in portals. - Users with Customer Account Portal, Partner Central, and Customer Service templates can create, edit, and delete reports in Experience Cloud sites. If you don’t see the New Report button, enable reports and add the Report List page to your site. If the button doesn’t appear after you enable Reports, republish your site. - Objects that don’t have a sharing rule for external users can’t be accessed by external users with the licenses listed. If an object is set to Public Read and no sharing rule is present, it shows an error on the report when accessed by the external user. - Objects that don’t support standard sharing (using Sharing settings) aren’t visible in reports intended for external users. 2. If you want your external users to create or edit reports in a privately shared folder, grant them Viewer access on the folder. On the **Reports** tab in the Folders view, click ![Pin icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/pin.png) next to the folder you want to share, then select **Share**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Partner and customer users can’t create, edit, or view reports in the Unfiled Public Reports folder. ![Screenshot of sharing a report](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_reports_folder_share.png) Depending on the objects, fields, and categories that your external users can access, they sometimes see custom report types in the UI when they create a report. If a user has read access on any fields or objects included in the custom report type, custom report types are visible. - **[Create a Report from Your Site with Report Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_report_builder_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With the new Report Builder page, external users can create, edit, and delete reports directly from their Experience Cloud site. # Allow Guest Users to Access Flows Allow guest users to access flows within a site to create multi-part registration forms, decision trees, and conditional screens tailored to unauthenticated users. Flows give your guest users more flexibility to accomplish tasks and provide information before they have to register. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience.
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To create, customize, or publish a site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
For every flow you want accessible to the guest user, you must provide individual access. To provide access: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Locate the flow to update and, from the actions dropdown next to the flow, select **Edit Access**. To appear in Experience Builder, your flows must be active screen flows. 3. Select **Override default behavior and restrict access to enabled profiles or permission sets**. 4. Save your flow. 5. Repeat this process with any flow that you want accessible to the Guest User profile. #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") - [_Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide_: Create Custom Component for Guest User Flows](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.lightning.meta/lightning/components_config_for_flow_guest_user.htm) ## Allow Guest User Access To allow guest user access from Experience Builder: 1. Go to **Settings**. 2. On the General tab, select **Guest users can see and interact with the site without logging in** and then click the guest user profile. 3. Under Enabled Flow Access, click **Edit**. 4. Choose flows from the **Available Flows** column and add them to the **Enabled Flows** column. 5. Save your work. 6. For LWR sites, return to Experience Builder and click **Workspaces** | **Administration**. 7. Click **Preferences** and select **Allow guest users to access public APIs**. 8. Save your work. To use Guest User Flows for login or self-registration, a developer must create a Lightning component that implements lightning:availableForFlowsScreens. They must also create an Apex controller for that component that uses the API exposed on the site object. ## Add a Flow to Your Login Page To add a flow to your login page from Experience Builder: 1. Go to the Login page and add the Flow component. 2. In the properties panel, select a predefined flow and a layout. 3. Edit the audience and assign it to Guest. 4. Delete the Login Form component. # Allow Users to Search Aura Sites Search in Aura sites depends on the type of template you use. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## Searching for Objects in Experience Cloud Aura Sites Objects must be searchable in Lightning Experience and supported in templates to be searchable in Experience Cloud sites. In addition to being marked as searchable, more setup is required to make objects discoverable for guest users. For more information, see Enable Search Autocomplete for Guest Users. Enable search filters to make an object in the internal org searchable in your site. To make custom objects searchable, the object must be related to a tab in the internal org. ![Search field on a Salesforce Object page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/search_field_on_object_page.png) ## Filtering Search Results in Aura Sites Experience Cloud Aura site users can filter their search results for Accounts, Cases, Contacts, Dashboards, Files, Knowledge, Leads, Opportunities, People, and Tasks. Search filtering for sites is on by default. To add search filters to the Search Filter layout, enter Search Layouts in the Object Manager search box and select the object that you want to add a filter to. Add the fields that users want to filter to the Search Results layout. Supported field types are checkbox, phone number, picklist, text, and URL. You can’t filter encrypted fields. To enable topic filters, site admins must turn on **Allow topic filtering for Lightning Knowledge search results**. You can find this site preference on the Administration page of your site’s Experience Workspace. For more information, see Access Experience Workspaces. To increase search performance, enable Einstein Search for Knowledge. Admins can add more topics for search to filter. They can add more topics in Content Management and include articles to that topic, which advances search when site members filter out more topics. Keep in mind, guest user knowledge searches return results for article titles only. The body of the article isn’t searched. Search results include all the records and files that a site member has access to, such as: - Files that they own or are shared with them directly. - Files they can access from a library. - Files associated with records they have access to. - Files shared with groups or sites they’re members of. ## Troubleshooting Global Search on Aura Sites Global search looks for records in the internal org, which has a different network ID than the site. Users created through the contact record of a site are assigned to the site’s unique network ID. If you’re searching for a site user with global search, you get the user associated with the global network ID instead of the site’s network ID. To avoid getting results you don’t want, create User records in the internal org, and then associate the records to your site. Link the internal record to a Contact record to associate the record to your site. After you link both records, you can find the User record through global search and the User record's network ID is now associated with the internal org. ## Searching the Customer Service Template in Aura Keep the following in mind when searching the Customer Service template in Aura: - The Search Results component only shows search results from articles and discussions. - Articles must be associated with a topic in Topic Management to surface in the Search Results component. - The Global Search Results component allows site members to see search results. Results can also be shown on separate tabs for Accounts, Cases, Contacts, Feeds (discussions), custom objects, and any other object that’s exposed in the site. - You must associate a tab to a custom object to make it searchable in global search. - The Search & Post Publisher component gives you the option to set up autocomplete search results. These suggested search results are based on the objects made searchable in the site, and included in autocomplete search. - **[Set Up Search Pages for Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_build_configure_aura_searches.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Experience Cloud sites created with Aura templates, use the Global Search Box and Global Search Results components to create a search page for your visitors. - **[Enable Search Autocomplete for Guest Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_search_autocomplete_guest.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes you want your Experience Cloud site’s guest users to benefit from the suggestions that come from autocomplete on their search terms. To make it happen, you must explicitly make result types publicly available. For example, when you want guest users to see suggestions for Knowledge articles, you can set up your search component so that Knowledge results are public. After you set up autocomplete, search shows any Knowledge articles that match a guest user’s search terms in autocomplete suggestions. - **[Add the Global Search Box to Your Customized Experience Cloud Site HTML Header](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_custom_search_box.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you customize your Experience Coud sites with an HTML header, you hide the global search box. To take advantage of this search functionality, add a form to your custom header. # Allow Users to Search LWR Sites You can set up search pages in sites created with LWR templates so your visitors can search for CRM objects or CMS content published from enhanced CMS workspaces. Visitors can also search for content within the Rich Content Editor and HTML Editor components, as well as within page title metadata. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
Set up the search capability on LWR sites through LWR components. The Search Bar component displays a field where visitors enter search terms. The Results Layout component displays the search results. Search results can only be shown on a standard Search page, so to use the Results Layout component, you must first create the search page. Visitors can filter and sort the search results, making it easier to find what they need. You can customize the No Results layout and the labels on your search page to complement your company’s branding. - **[Set Up CMS Content Search in an LWR Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_search_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In enhanced LWR sites, visitors can search for CMS content published from enhanced CMS workspaces. Visitors can also search for content within the Rich Content Editor and HTML Editor components, as well as within page title metadata. Use the Search Bar and Results Layout components to add the search functionality to your enhanced LWR site. - **[Set Up CRM Object Search in LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_build_lwr_crm_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a CRM search page so your site visitors can search for CRM records, such as cases, accounts, leads, opportunities, and knowledge articles, in LWR sites. Visitors can filter and sort the search results, making it easier to find what they need. You can create and save search configurations to display only the information you need and apply that configuration to multiple sites. You can customize the labels, buttons, background and images of the No Results panel, object navigation panel, and filter panel to compliment your company’s brand. # Allow Users to Search Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites Sites using Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce have much of the same functionality as Experience Cloud sites using Aura templates. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
There are a few additional things to consider if you’re using a Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site: - If Chatter is enabled, global search and contextual feed search are enabled by default in all sites. - With global search, members can search for records, files, people, groups, topics, feed posts, and comments. - Feed search () is helpful when members want to look for information in a specific feed context. Groups, user profiles, records, and the site feed support feed search. - If Chatter isn’t enabled, sidebar search is enabled in all Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites. - Sidebar search doesn’t support searches for items specific to Chatter, such as feeds, groups, files, topics, and user profiles. # Allow Users to Thank Their Coworkers Recognize your coworkers with thanks badges and post your thanks directly to the Chatter feed. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lighting Experience
Available in: All Editions that have Chatter enabled.
System administrators must have the “Moderate Chatter” permission for their profile and be using Salesforce Classic to enable Thanks. 1. From Setup, enter WDC Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **WDC Settings**. 2. Under Thanks Settings, select Enable. 3. Click **Save**. To disable Chatter Thanks, from Setup, enter WDC Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **WDC Settings** and deselect Enable. Users no longer see the Thanks action in the Chatter publisher or in the Salesforce mobile app action bar. However, they can still see previously created Thanks posts. # Analyze and Improve Experience Builder Site Performance The Salesforce Page Optimizer analyzes your site and identifies issues that impact performance. Use the information to refine your design and improve site performance for your members. The Page Optimizer is a free plug-in available from the Chrome Web Store. Download and install the plug-in as you would any Chrome extension. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To download the Page Optimizer, in Experience Builder, click ![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings.png) on the left sidebar, and then click **Advanced**. ![Link to Community Page Optimizer](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_optimizer.png) After installation, the Page Optimizer is located with your other Chrome extensions. ![Community Page Optimizer](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_performance_tool.png) ## Insights To analyze your site, navigate to your published site, load the page, and then launch the Page Optimizer. ![Community Page Optimizer Insights tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_perf_insights.png) The Insights tab (1) evaluates your page based on best practices for web applications developed using the Lightning framework. This tab displays an overall performance score (3) along with individual scores (5) for various analysis rules. To view details and suggested actions, click each rule. For more room to work, click **Popout** (2). The Insights tab is conservative in providing recommendations. For further insights, consider reviewing the raw data presented on the Waterfall, Timeline, Charts, Cost, and Actions tabs. To remove collected metrics, click **Clear** (4). Perform some user actions on the page to collect new metrics, and then reopen the Page Optimizer. For example, to gather performance metrics for liking a feed item, clear performance metrics, click Like, and reopen the Page Optimizer. ## Waterfall The Waterfall tab displays all network requests and performance instrumentation data. Click a row to view contextual information in the sidebar. Click the arrow to the left of each row to expand the information for each row. ![Community Page Optimizer Waterfall tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_perf_waterfall.png) ## Timeline The Timeline tab provides a profile of each component’s rendering lifecycle. The timeline view is optimized for displaying Lightning framework metrics, so it’s easier to interpret than Chrome DevTools. ![Community Page Optimizer Timeline tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_perf_timeline.png) ## Charts The Charts tab displays trending information about memory and components as customers use your page. ![Community Page Optimizer Chart tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_perf_chart.png) ## Components The Components tab displays the lifecycle counts for each component on the page. This view helps you identify potential component leaks and unexpected rendering behavior. Use the Component tab along with the Cost tab for an overall view of component performance. ![Community Page Optimizer Components tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_perf_components.png) ## Cost The Cost tab displays the amount of time each component was busy processing its logic. The lower the time, the better the performance. ![Community Page Optimizer Cost tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_perf_cost.png) ## Actions The Actions tab displays a list of all actions performed on the page along with their timing information. ## Export Export your analysis to a file to share with your development and support teams. ![Export your analysis to a file](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_perf_export.png) ## Submit Feedback We want to hear from you. Share your comments, questions, requests, and any issues that you find. [Submit Feedback](https://docs.google.com/a/salesforce.com/forms/d/e/1FAIpQLSdoOEXgX36lLXpJxlTiQTaw6aIAuvcYjwXnDSHIct4N62ANrQ/viewform). # Anatomy of a Chatter Post Here’s a quick look at all the information that surrounds a typical Chatter post in Lightning Experience.
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
Rae Potter created and posted a poll. ![A Chatter post in Lightning Experience](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collab_post_anatomy.png)
1

At the top of the post, the name of the person who posted appears. Click the name to navigate to that person’s profile.

If you’re seeing a post in a combined feed, like Company Highlights or What I Follow, the top can also show where the post originates. For example, it can show the name of the group where the post appears. You can click the group name to navigate to that group.

2 The actions menu. The options that appear on the actions menu depend on a few things. Are you viewing the post’s detail view? Has your administrator added actions to the Chatter publisher? Standard items on this menu include Bookmark and Delete—provided you’re the person who posted or you have permission to delete users’ posts. The Mute option appears on a post’s actions menu in the What I Follow feed and in the post’s detail view.
3

The post’s date and timestamp. The date and timestamp shows when the item was posted. Click the date and timestamp to navigate to the post’s detail view.

If the post is less than two days old, the date and timestamp is relative, such as “Just now.” Otherwise, the date and timestamp is absolute, such as “October 5, 2017 at 4:06 PM.”

4 The post. In this example, we see a poll question and its selection of answers.
5 The Like button. Click the Like button to show appreciation, agreement, affection, or some other positive response to the post. Some people like posts to show that saw the post.
6 The Comment button. Click the Comment button to shift your mouse focus to the Comment field. You can also click in the Comment field to start entering a comment on the post.
7 The Share menu. Use the Share menu to share this post with your followers or a group that you choose. Share with anyone who has access to the post, using the Copy Link option on the Share menu.
8

The view count. The view count shows how many times this post has been viewed. The count goes up whenever someone likes, comments on, or navigates to the detail view of the post.

Posts in private and unlisted Chatter groups can use a seen-by count in lieu of the view count. Seen by shows the count of people who have seen a post. Click the count to see the names of the people who have seen the post. What is considered as being seen? Liking, commenting, editing, and viewing in detail. An item is also considered seen when a user has it in view on the screen or when they scroll past it.

For both seen by and view, the actions you take in Salesforce Classic are tracked and counted. But only Lightning Experience shows the seen-by count and list.

Note
Note Users with Modify All Data or View All Data permission see a seen-by count in all feeds, and not just private and unlisted feeds.

One difference between the seen-by and view counts is that one person can be counted many times with view count. With seen by, a person is counted only one time, no matter how many times they perform a counted action.

9 The comment field. Comment on a post to build the discussion thread.
#### See Also - [Seen-By Information in Private and Unlisted Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_seenby.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Posts in private and unlisted Chatter groups have a seen-by count that shows the number of people who have seen a post. Click the count to see the names of people who have seen the post.") - [Characteristics of Chatter Counts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_counts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "There are a few ways to determine how many people are looking at a Chatter post. There’s the view count, the Seen by count, and the counts you find in the Interaction Count Report. Although there’s crossover in terms of what’s being counted, the counts for a given post can be different for each type. Let’s examine why.") # Announcement Section The Announcement Section component displays group announcements from any page in your Experience Builder site. 1. Select the **Announcement Section** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Group ID

Enter a group ID. To find a specific group ID, navigate to the group home page and copy the ID from the URL. The ID is a string of numbers and letters.

Group URL format example: https://MyDomainName.my.site.com/siteName/s/group/0F7A0000000DZXiNQO/groupName

For this URL, the group ID is 0F7A0000000DZXiNQO.

Header Label Enter header text for your component. The default is Announcement.
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Announcement Section component: ![Announcement component sample](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_announcement.png) # Apex Caching on the Salesforce CDN When you cache Apex methods on the Salesforce content delivery network (CDN), you improve performance of your LWR site, and your customers benefit from faster page load times. Only public data from Apex methods is intended to be cached, and it’s only cached for guest users. Apex caching controls differ depending on the type of Apex methods in your site. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions. Also available with Marketing Cloud Account Engagement (Pardot) in Professional Edition.
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
For Apex methods that you own, enable caching by using caching annotation. Annotate your Apex methods with @AuraEnabled(cacheable=true scope=’global’). And use @wire (LWC) to invoke publicly cacheable Apex actions. To avoid caching private data, annotate only Apex methods that return public data. Learn more about caching annotation in our developer guides. - [Wire Apex Methods to Lightning Web Components](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/component-library/documentation/en/lwc/lwc.apex_wire_method) - [AuraEnabled Annotation](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.apexcode.meta/apexcode/apex_classes_annotation_AuraEnabled.htm) - [Call Apex Methods Imperatively](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/component-library/documentation/en/lwc/lwc.apex_call_imperative) If your site uses managed packages, caching data from Apex methods in those packages is enabled by default. To disable it, deselect **Cache public data from Apex methods in Managed Packages** in Workspaces | Administration | Preferences. ![The preference Cache public data from Apex methods in managed packages is highlighted in the list of LWR site preferences.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/cdn_apex_caching_preference.png) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Only Apex methods that were annotated for caching in the managed packages get cached. If the Apex methods in the managed packages aren’t annotated, they don’t get cached even when the preference is enabled. Salesforce controls caching of Apex methods used on standard pages and components, and caches it where appropriate. # Apply Role-Based Access to an Experience Cloud Site Use role-based access to control who does what in a community, portal, or site. Assign roles to your contributors with the level of access they need in a specific experience. A contributor’s access role is specific to an Experience Builder site. A contributor can have different access roles in different sites. ### Required Editions
Available in: Experience Builder sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To access Experience Workspaces or Experience Builder:
  • View Setup and Configuration AND Create and Set Up Experiences AND be a member of the site
To add, remove, or change a contributor access role:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • Be an experience admin in that site AND be a member of the site
To be a contributor with a publisher, builder, or viewer role in an Experience Builder site:
  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site
  • To ensure that the limits of the role apply, Create and Set Up Experiences must be disabled
Contributors are users in your org that you add to your Experience Builder site. Specify what these contributors can do and see within the site by assigning them one of the following roles. - Experience admin—These contributors can do just about everything in an assigned Experience Builder site. They can access Experience Builder, manage contributors, and publish the site. - Publisher—These contributors help you build and publish the assigned Experience Builder site. They can access Experience Builder and publish the site. They can’t manage contributors. They have read-only access to the Experience Workspaces **Administration** | **Contributors** tab. - Builder—These contributors help build and maintain the assigned Experience Builder site. They can access Experience Builder. They can’t publish the site or manage contributors. They have read-only access to the Experience Workspaces **Administration** | **Contributors** tab. - Viewer—These contributors have read-only access to Experience Builder in an assigned site. They can view a site in Experience Builder. They can’t build, revise, or publish the site or manage contributors. They have read-only access to the Experience Workspaces **Administration** | **Contributors** tab. In addition to these contributor roles, existing Salesforce admins have broad access to your Experience Builder sites. They can control all Experience Cloud settings and can create communities, portals, and sites. ## Considerations for Applying Role-Based Access Control - Even if you’re an admin, you can’t update your own contributor role. To change your level of access to a site, another admin must update your role. - Contributors assigned an access role can’t upload images to the Tile Menu component or export templates, pages, or themes from Experience Builder. - To ensure that your contributors can access Experience Builder and Experience Workspaces in an inactive site, enable the “Modify All Data” permission. - To limit a user’s ability to modify or publish a site, ensure that the user doesn’t have the Create and Set Up Experiences permission. Then assign that user the appropriate role. - Contributors in your Experience Workspace can curate [Salesforce CMS](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.community_managed_content_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) content from within each site and decide who sees CMS content and how it appears. - If you use a sandbox, keep in mind that CMS workspaces are copied only to Full Copy sandboxes. Even though the Digital Experiences app is available in your Full Copy sandbox, you can’t migrate CMS content created in a sandbox to production. If you want to use CMS content beyond testing, we recommend that you create it in production. ## Add Contributors to a Site Add users as contributors to a specific site by assigning them an access role. 1. From your site in Experience Builder, go to **Workspaces** | **Administration**. 2. Select **Contributors** (1) and click **Add Contributors** (2). ![Add contributors](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_access_control.png) 3. Search users by name. Only [members of the Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_customize_members.htm&type=5&language=en_US) site are listed. 4. Click ![Add](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/cms_access_control_plus_icon.png) next to the users that you want to add. 5. Click **Next**. 6. For each user, assign a contributor role. ![Add contributors](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_access_control_add_roles.png) 7. Click **Finish**. ## Update a Contributor’s Access Role Change a contributor’s role to increase or decrease the contributor’s level of access to a site. Experience admins can’t change their own role. 1. From your site in Experience Builder, go to **Workspaces** | **Administration**. 2. Select **Contributors**. 3. Click **![Down arrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_manager3.png)** next to the contributor you want to update and select **Change Role**. ![Change contributors screen](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_access_control_update_contributor.png) 4. Select the new contributor role, and click **Update**. ## Remove a Contributor from a Site If a contributor leaves your company or transfers to a different team, you can remove the contributor from a site. The user is removed from the site but not from Salesforce. 1. From your site in Experience Builder, go to **Workspaces** | **Administration**. 2. Click **![Down arrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_manager3.png)** next to the contributor you want to update and select **Remove**. ![Remove Contributor](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_access_control_remove_contributor.png) After you remove a contributor from a site, the contributor can no longer access Experience Builder or Experience Workspaces for that site. #### See Also - [Role-Based Access in Salesforce CMS](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.cms_access_control_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Archive a Site Archive an inactive site so that users can no longer access it. You must deactivate a site before you can archive it. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
User Permissions Needed
To archive an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
1. Open the Digital Experiences app from the App Launcher. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To update visibility and tab settings for profiles you want to have access to the Digital Experiences app and the All Sites page, see [Enable Access to the Digital Experiences App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.community_managed_content_start_using.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 2. Click **View All** in All Sites. 3. Click the name of the site you want to archive. 4. On the site detail page, click **Archive**. 5. Click **Archive** again. ![Archive button on the Site Detail page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/archive_site.png) Your site is archived. If you change your mind, you can unarchive it. However, if you discontinue a license for a product that you no longer use, for example a B2B or D2C Commerce license, you must deactivate and archive any site that depends on that license, such as a storefront. - **[Considerations for Archiving a Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_archive_sites_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you archive a site, consider what types of sites can be archived, and the impact that archiving might have on users. #### See Also - [Deactivate Your Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_unpublish.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Deactivate your site when you add or remove members; add, remove, or rearrange tabs; change the color scheme; or change the URL. You also must deactivate a site before you can archive it.") # Archive Chatter Groups Archive a group manually, or edit automatic archiving settings. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Salesforce runs a weekly review of feed activity in groups. If a group has no new feed posts or comments for 90 consecutive days, the group is archived automatically. Mentioning a group doesn’t count as feed activity and doesn’t delay group archiving. Group owners, group managers, and users with the “Modify All Data” permission can manually archive or edit automatic archiving settings for groups at any time. 1. Click **Group Settings** on the group detail page in the Salesforce Classic. In the Lightning Experience, click **Edit Group** from the buttons in the group header. 2. Configure archiving for the group in one of two ways: - To archive the group right away, click **Archive**. - Select **Archive this group if there are no posts or comments for 90 days** and click **Save** to set up automatic archiving. After you archive a group: - The publisher on the group page is hidden and members can’t create posts or share files in the group. - The group no longer appears in the Active Groups filter on the Groups tab. - Previous group posts and comments no longer appear in the Chatter feed, unless someone adds a comment. Posts with new comments display in the All Company feed (Salesforce Classic) and the What I Follow feed of each group member. They appear in the Company Highlights feed (Lightning Experience), depending on the post’s popularity ranking and engagement (such as likes, comments, and views). Use the **My Archived Groups** filter in the Groups list to find the archived groups that you own, manage, or belong to. You can also use global search to find archived groups or associated content. Archived groups don’t count toward your group membership limit. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - Group members don’t receive email notifications when a Chatter group they own, manage, or belong to is archived or activated. - If your administrator disables archiving for groups, you can’t archive groups or edit automatic archiving settings. You can reactivate archived groups at any time, even if archiving has been disabled. #### See Also - [Archived Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_archive.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When a Chatter group is archived, group members can’t post content or share files with the group. Previous posts, comments, and files remain available.") - [Activate Archived Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_activating.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Group owners, group managers, and users with the “Modify All Data” permission can activate an archived Chatter group from the group detail page.") # Archived Chatter Groups When a Chatter group is archived, group members can’t post content or share files with the group. Previous posts, comments, and files remain available. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
In an archived group, users can still comment on existing posts, mention people, and search the feed. Users can also join and leave archived groups, create reports that include archived groups, and use global search to find archived groups and their content. Group owners and group managers can archive groups, reactivate them, and enable and disable automatic archiving at any time. Users with the “Modify All Data” permission can perform these actions on the public and private groups in their organization. Users with the “Manage Unlisted Groups” permission can perform these actions on unlisted groups. Archived groups help users focus on the active groups in your organization: - Archived groups don’t count toward a user’s group membership limits. - Unless someone adds a comment, posts from archived groups don’t appear in Chatter feeds. Posts with new comments appear in the All Company (Salesforce Classic) feed. They appear in the Company Highlights (Lightning Experience) feed, provided they rank highly in popularity or degree of engagement (their comments, likes, and views). In an archived feed, posts with new comments also appear in the What I Follow feed of each group member. - File and feed sharing is limited to active groups only, making group searches more efficient. - Archived groups appear only on the My Archived Groups list and not on the Active Groups list. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example Group archiving is useful for groups that have little or no feed activity, but contain useful information that you want to retain. For example: - A group that a sales team created while pursuing a deal. Though there probably isn’t much group activity after lead conversion, the sales team can still access important information about the customer. - A group that is used for planning a company event. It can be archived after the event, but revisited for historical vendor information and planning discussions. - A service desk type group that is used to track key issues for a major deployment for a customer. Archiving it after deployment issues are resolved still gives support agents access to relevant information for future troubleshooting. - When a new group replaces a legacy group with the same or broader purpose, the legacy group can be archived. Then you can redirect traffic to the new group. - Team groups can be archived when a team changes or team members leave the company. Team discussions are preserved for future reference. Turning off automatic archiving is useful for groups that contain important information but aren’t updated regularly. Think of a group that is used for company-wide announcements. When automatic archiving is turned off, groups without activity for more than 90 days don’t get archived, and users don’t miss any important posts. - **[Archive Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_archiving.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Archive a group manually, or edit automatic archiving settings. - **[Activate Archived Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_activating.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Group owners, group managers, and users with the “Modify All Data” permission can activate an archived Chatter group from the group detail page. # Article Content The Article Content component lets users view and vote on an individual article after they've selected it from search results. The article's title, latest revision date, and article type appear with the body of the article. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note When a user views an article that's been returned from a web search, the navigation breadcrumbs show the path to the first category associated with the article. If you enable article voting for this component, authenticated users see a prompt to vote below each article. Logged-in users can give articles a thumbs up or thumbs down vote. If your org uses star ratings on articles, thumbs up votes are recorded as five stars and thumbs down votes are recorded as one star. Article voting is available in the Winter ‘16 and later versions of Experience Builder templates. The user can return to the article later to view their vote, but can’t change it or see voting data from other members. You can view an article’s voting data at the top of the article in your org. 1. Select the **Article Content** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Record Id | This value is retrieved when the individual article is selected. | | URL Name | This value is retrieved when the individual article is selected. | | Show title in the article header | Select this option to show the title in the article’s header. | | Allow voting on articles | Select this option to let users vote on articles. This option is not selected by default. This functionality is available only in the Winter ’16 and later versions of Experience Builder templates. | | Show topics | Select this option to show topics associated with an article. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Article Content component: ![Article View](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/article_view.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Articles with This Topic The Articles With This Topic component is used on the Topic Detail page in Experience Builder sites built using the Customer Service template. It shows articles that have been tagged with the topic in question. 1. Select the **Articles With This Topic** component in the page you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Topic ID | The system supplies this value, and populates the component with articles specific to the topic shown on the topic detail page. | | Title | Enter text for the title. The default text is Articles With This Topic. | | Show Title | Show the title by checking this box. | | Number of Articles | Select the number of articles you want to show at a time. The default number is 10. | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note In order for articles to populate this component, the site language and article language must match. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Articles With This Topic component: ![Articles With This Topic component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_articles_with_this_topic.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Ask Agentforce About Highlighted Text on an Experience Cloud Site With Highlight-to-Ask, you can ask quick, contextual questions directly from a knowledge article on an Experience Cloud site to get accurate answers from your Agentforce Service agent. The agent combines your highlighted text and browsing history to provide more accurate responses. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Aura and LWR Experience Cloud Sites
Available in: Enhanced Chat with the Einstein for Service, Einstein Platform, Community, Community Plus, or Agentforce Service Agent add-on
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Foundations or Agentforce 1 Editions. Access to some standard agent actions requires additional add-on licenses
User Permissions Needed
To set up Enhanced Chat: Customize Application AND Modify Metadata Through Metadata API Function
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site OR View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site OR View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To create and manage Agentforce Service agents: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site OR View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Context-Aware Quick Chat supports only Version 1 of the Embedded Service Deployment. Using any other version may cause the component to not load or work as expected. Before you use Highlight-to-Ask, make sure you have completed these steps: - Log into or view the specific Experience Cloud site where the feature is deployed. See [Manage Users and Data Access in Experience Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_users_access.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - Add the Context-Aware Quick Chat component to the Experience Cloud site page you are viewing. See [Add Your Chat Window to an Experience Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.snapins_chat_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 1. On a page in your Experience Cloud site that contains a knowledge article or other content with highlightable text, highlight a word, phrase, or section related to your question. 2. In the small pop-up, click **Ask this**. 3. In the Quick Chat window that appears, type your question and press **Enter**. For example, What does error code 504 mean in this setup?. # Ask Button The Ask Button component lets users click a button to ask a question that is then published to the site. Users must log in to ask questions and participate in discussions. The Customer Service template pages come with two Ask Button components: one at the top of the page, and one at the bottom. The two aren’t linked, so you can remove one button or use different text or styling for each button. 1. Select the **Ask Button** component on the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. ![Ask Button component properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/ask_community_properties.png)
Property Details
Button Label Enter the text to show on the Ask button. The default is Ask a Question.
Allow members to add topics Select to show the topic area at the bottom of the feed publisher (1) and to allow members to add topics.
Block topic selection on questions in topics In a topic feed, block members from choosing a different topic from the Post To list when they ask a question.
Expand Details section by default When a member asks a question, show the Details section in an expanded state (2).
Button Text Color

Set the color to use for button text when the button is inactive.

For all values, Linked to Theme icon link icon shows that the current selection comes from colors defined in the Experience Builder theme.

Button Text Hover Color

Set the color to use for button text when a member mouses over the button.

In Experience Builder, you can test hover colors in Preview mode.

Button Background Color Set the color to use for the button background when the button is inactive.
Button Background Hover Color

Set the color to use for the button background when a member mouses over the button.

In Experience Builder, you can test hover colors in Preview mode.

Button Border Color Set the color to use for the border that surrounds the button.
Button Border Radius Move the slider to control the amount of curve to use for the button shape.
Max Button Width Move the slider to control the width of the button. Width percentage is set against the full width of the container the button sits in. So 100% is the full width of the container, rather than the full width of the browser page.
Button Alignment Set the position of a button within its container by selecting Center, Left, or Right.
Suggest questions Select to show previous questions that are similar to the one the member is asking. This property assists with question deflection and helps in using existing resources.
Include discussions in suggestions Select to show discussions related to the question the member is asking. This property assists with question deflection and helps in using existing resources.
Include articles in suggestions Select to show Knowledge articles related to the question the member is asking. This property assists with question deflection and helps in using existing resources.
Max Suggestions to Show Set the maximum number of questions, discussions, and articles to show to a member who is asking a question.
Show satisfaction prompt Select to show the member a prompt that asks if they were satisfied with the information provided when they asked a question.
Satisfaction Prompt Enter the question you want to ask a member about their satisfaction with the questions, discussions, and articles provided in response to their question. The default is Did we help to answer your question? Frame the question so that a positive response shows that your data helped and a negative response shows that it didn’t. Member response data provides you with metrics on the effectiveness of question deflection.
Ask follow-up question Select to ask the member a follow-up question to their satisfaction response.
Follow-Up Prompt Enter the follow-up question you want to ask the member. The default is Can we close your question? A member’s positive response closes the question without posting it. A negative response keeps the member’s question active.
Confirmation Message Enter a confirmation message to show when a member responds to your prompts. The default is Got it!
![Ask Button dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/ask_community_dialog.png) ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Ask Button component: ![Ask Button component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/ask_community.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") - [Case Deflection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_case_deflection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Case Deflection component searches text as it’s being entered into the Contact Support Form component, and returns relevant articles and discussions. If users don’t get the answer they need, they can continue with their request for support.") # Asset Files Asset files are packageable versions of Salesforce files that are used for branding and design purposes in your org or Experience Cloud site. Asset files can be used for headers and logo images. They can also be referenced by components. You don’t need to create asset files for regular, collaborative use of Salesforce Files. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
- **[Create a New Asset File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_asset_files_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an asset file from the Asset Library in Files home. - **[View and Edit Asset Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.files_asset_files_edit_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can view asset files in the Asset Files library in Files home, and view and edit asset files in Setup. # Assign a Moderator Make one or more people moderators in your Experience Cloud site so they can keep an eye on its content. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To assign permission sets: Assign Permission Sets
Moderators can be users from your internal org or external users with Access Experience Management and moderation permissions. External users who are moderators but don't have management and moderation permissions can moderate within context of the Experience Cloud site, such as directly in the site feed. You can assign moderators by assigning a permission set that includes one or more of these moderation permissions. | Permission | Lets Users | | --- | --- | | Moderate Experience Cloud Site Feeds | Review flagged posts and comments and take action, such as removing flags or deleting the post or comment. Moderator options for feed content are available in the site feed and in Experience Management and Experience Workspaces. | | Moderate Experiences Files | Review flagged files they have access to and take action, such as removing flags or deleting the file. Moderator options for files are available on a file's detail page and in Experience Management or Experience Workspaces. | | Moderate Experiences Chatter Messages | Review flagged messages and take action, such as removing a flag or deleting a message. This permission allows users access to flagged messages only in Experience Cloud sites they’re a member of. | | Can Approve Feed Post and Comment | Approve, delete, or edit posts and comments that are pending review. | | Moderate Experience Users | Freeze external users who are members. Moderators can freeze members on their user profile page or from an Insights report. | | Manage Experiences | Moderate content in Experience Management or Experience Workspaces. | | Access Experience Management | Access site pages from Experience Management and Experience Workspaces. | You can also add these permissions to a profile. These permissions are valid for all Experience Cloud sites the user is a member of, but don't apply in your internal org. 1. From Setup, enter Permission Sets in the Quick Find box, then select **Permission Sets**, then click **New**. 2. Create a permission set that includes the appropriate permissions. 3. From Setup, enter Users in the Quick Find box, then select **Users**. 4. Find the user you want to be a moderator and add the permission set to their Permission Set Assignments related list. After you grant moderator permissions to a user, keep these things in mind. - The user can now moderate any items they have access to in all Experience Cloud sites they're a member of. - The user can flag items even if Allow members to flag content is disabled in a site. - Moderators can receive an email notification when a post, comment, or file is flagged by selecting the Flag an item as inappropriate email notification. # Assign an Audience to a Branding Set You can tailor your branding to different audiences. For example, you can show one look and feel to your customers and another to your partners. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. In Experience Builder, open the Theme panel, click the down arrow next to the panel title, and select **Manage Branding Sets**. ![Theme panel in Experience Builder highlighting the branding set](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_audience_branding_set.png) 2. In the Branding Sets pane, click the down arrow for the branding set that you want to work with, and select **Assign**. Or, if the branding set already has an assigned audience, select **Edit Assignment**. 3. In the Assign Audience window, click **New Audience**. Name the audience, set the criteria to define it, select the conditions when the audience matches, and click **Save & Assign**. 4. To assign an existing audience to the branding set, select the audience, click **Assign**, and click **Done**. ![Assign Audience window](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_audience_assign_audience.png) You can’t assign an audience that includes record-based criteria to a branding set. Therefore, the Assign Audience window for a branding set doesn’t show audiences that include record-based criteria. 5. To make these changes visible to your site visitors, publish the site. Each Experience Cloud site has a branding set that’s assigned to the default audience. Site visitors who don’t meet the criteria for an assigned audience see the default branding. You can’t edit the audience assignment of the default branding set. #### See Also - [Considerations for Audience Targeting in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_use_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Audiences are a great help when you want to target specific user segments with relevant site content. As you work with audiences, there are some things to consider.") - [Criteria Types and Conditions for Audience Creation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_crm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can use several types of criteria to define an audience and determine the conditions under which the criteria apply.") - [Create an Audience for an Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_visibilty_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You define an audience by selecting criteria and the conditions under which the criteria apply. After you create an audience, you can assign it to a page variation, branding set, or component. You also can assign an audience to a component variation to personalize the content that different user segments see in the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, and Tile Menu components.") - [Prioritize Audiences in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audiences_prioritize_audiences.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When site visitors meet the criteria for more than one audience, you can prioritize which page variation, branding set, navigation menu, or CMS collection they see. To prioritize audiences, at least two audiences must be assigned to the page variation, branding set, or component variation.") # Assign an Audience to a Component When you assign an audience to a page component, all users see the same page, but the components that are visible on the page differ among user segments. For example, you have a page that’s visible to site members and guest users, and you want your members to be able to post questions and comments. You can add the Feed Publisher component to the page and assign this component to an audience for site members only. Your members can see the component, and guest users can’t. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. In Experience Builder, click the component that you want to work with. The blue outline around the component indicates that it doesn’t have an assigned audience. ![Feed Publisher component selected.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_component_select.png) 2. In the component’s properties panel, click the down arrow next to the component name, and select **Assign**. ![Component with Assign option available under Audience](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_components_assign_aud.png) 3. In the Assign Audience window, click **New Audience**. Name the audience, set the criteria to define it, select the conditions when the audience matches, and click **Save & Assign**. 4. To assign an existing audience to the component, select the audience, click **Assign**, and click **Done**. ![Page component now in purple, message at top of page, and message in the component editor all showing that an audience is assigned.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_component_aud_result.png) The component outline changes to purple and shows an audience icon to indicate that the component has an audience assigned. In the component’s properties panel, the audience icon and the name of the assigned audience appear with the component name. In Experience Builder, a note at the top of the page alerts you that at least one component on the page has a specific audience. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can’t assign an audience that includes record-based criteria to a component. Therefore, the Assign Audience window for a component doesn’t show audiences that include record-based criteria. You also can’t assign an audience to a component in the page template’s header or footer section. 5. To make these changes visible to your site visitors, publish the site. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note With the Navigation Menu, Tile Menu, and CMS Collection components, you also can control which information within the component is visible to different audiences. See [Assign an Audience to a Component Variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_personalize_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use audiences to vary the content that users see within the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, or Tile Menu components. For example, show one navigation menu to your site members and a more abbreviated navigation menu to guest users. Or show different CMS content to internal employees and external partners."). #### See Also - [Considerations for Audience Targeting in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_use_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Audiences are a great help when you want to target specific user segments with relevant site content. As you work with audiences, there are some things to consider.") - [Criteria Types and Conditions for Audience Creation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_crm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can use several types of criteria to define an audience and determine the conditions under which the criteria apply.") - [Create an Audience for an Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_visibilty_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You define an audience by selecting criteria and the conditions under which the criteria apply. After you create an audience, you can assign it to a page variation, branding set, or component. You also can assign an audience to a component variation to personalize the content that different user segments see in the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, and Tile Menu components.") - [Assign an Audience to a Component Variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_personalize_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use audiences to vary the content that users see within the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, or Tile Menu components. For example, show one navigation menu to your site members and a more abbreviated navigation menu to guest users. Or show different CMS content to internal employees and external partners.") # Assign an Audience to a Component Variation Use audiences to vary the content that users see within the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, or Tile Menu components. For example, show one navigation menu to your site members and a more abbreviated navigation menu to guest users. Or show different CMS content to internal employees and external partners. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
When you assign an audience to a [CMS Collection component variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_personalize_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5), you can determine which CMS content that audience sees within the component. When you assign an audience to a [Navigation Menu or Tile Menu component variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_personalize_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5), you can determine which items appear in the navigation menu for that audience. You can assign only one audience to each component variation. To prioritize audiences for component variations, see [Prioritize Audiences in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audiences_prioritize_audiences.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When site visitors meet the criteria for more than one audience, you can prioritize which page variation, branding set, navigation menu, or CMS collection they see. To prioritize audiences, at least two audiences must be assigned to the page variation, branding set, or component variation."). ## Assign an Audience to a CMS Collection 1. In Experience Builder, click the CMS Collection component that you want to work with. 2. In the component’s properties panel: - If no CMS collection has been added to the component, click **Add Collection**, select a collection, and click **Personalize**. - If a CMS collection has been added to the component, click **Personalize**. 3. In the first Assign audiences window: - If no collection has an assigned audience, click in the CMS Collection field, and select a collection from the menu. ![First Assign audiences window, showing CMS Collection field](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/audiences_cms_collection_add.png) - If an audience is already assigned to at least one collection, click **Add Assignment**, click in the CMS Collection field, and select another collection from the menu. ![First Assign audiences window, showing Add Assignment button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/audiences_cms_collection_add_assignment.png) 4. Click **Select audience** for the collection. ![First Assign audiences window, showing Select audience button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/audiences_cms_collection_select_audience.png) 5. In the second Assign Audience window: - To create an audience, click **New Audience**. Name the audience, set the criteria to define it, select the conditions when the audience matches, and click **Save & Assign**. - To assign an existing audience, select the audience, click **Assign**, and click **Done**. 6. To assign an audience to another CMS collection, click **Add Assignment**, and follow steps 3–5. Otherwise, click **Done**. 7. To make these changes visible to your site visitors, publish the site. ## Assign an Audience to a Navigation Menu or Tile Menu 1. In Experience Builder, click the Navigation Menu or Tile Menu component that you want to work with. 2. In the component’s properties panel: - If no default menu has been selected in the Default Menu field, select one. Then click **Personalize**. - If a default menu has been selected, click **Personalize**. ![Property editor panel for the Navigation Menu component showing the Personalize button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_nav_menu_property_panel.png) 3. In the first Assign audiences window: - If no navigation menu has an assigned audience, click in the Menu field, and select a navigation menu. - If at least one navigation menu has an assigned audience, click **Add Assignment**, click in the Menu field, and select another menu. 4. Click **Select audience** for the menu. 5. In the second Assign Audience window: - To create an audience, click **New Audience**. Name the audience, set the criteria to define it, select the conditions when the audience matches, and click **Save & Assign**. - To assign an existing audience, select the audience, click **Assign**, and click **Done**. ![Assign Audience window](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_audience_assign_audience.png) 6. To assign an audience to another menu variation, click **Add Assignment**, and follow steps 3–5. Otherwise, click **Done**. 7. To make these changes visible to your site visitors, publish the site. #### See Also - [Considerations for Audience Targeting in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_use_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Audiences are a great help when you want to target specific user segments with relevant site content. As you work with audiences, there are some things to consider.") - [Criteria Types and Conditions for Audience Creation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_crm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can use several types of criteria to define an audience and determine the conditions under which the criteria apply.") - [Create an Audience for an Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_visibilty_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You define an audience by selecting criteria and the conditions under which the criteria apply. After you create an audience, you can assign it to a page variation, branding set, or component. You also can assign an audience to a component variation to personalize the content that different user segments see in the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, and Tile Menu components.") - [Assign an Audience to a Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_component.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you assign an audience to a page component, all users see the same page, but the components that are visible on the page differ among user segments. For example, you have a page that’s visible to site members and guest users, and you want your members to be able to post questions and comments. You can add the Feed Publisher component to the page and assign this component to an audience for site members only. Your members can see the component, and guest users can’t.") - [Prioritize Audiences in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audiences_prioritize_audiences.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When site visitors meet the criteria for more than one audience, you can prioritize which page variation, branding set, navigation menu, or CMS collection they see. To prioritize audiences, at least two audiences must be assigned to the page variation, branding set, or component variation.") # Assign an Audience to a Page Variation You can show different pages to different audiences. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. In Experience Builder, open the Pages menu in the top toolbar, hover over the page that you want to edit, and click the Page Actions icon. ![Pages menu showing the Page Actions icon for a selected page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_page_properties.png) 2. Select **Page Settings**, and open the Page Variations tab. 3. Click the down arrow for the page variation that you want to work with, and select **Assign** or, if the page variation already has an assigned audience, select **Edit Assignment**. 4. In the Assign Audience window, click **New Audience** to crate an audience. Name the audience, set the criteria to define it, select the conditions when the audience matches, and click **Save & Assign**. 5. To assign an existing audience to the page variation, select the audience, click **Assign**, and click **Done**. ![Assign Audience window](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_audience_assign_audience.png) 6. To make these changes visible to your site visitors, publish the site. Each page has a default page version. Site visitors who don’t meet the criteria for an assigned audience see the default page. To set the audience visibility of a page variation to Default, in the Page Variation window, click the down arrow next to the page variation, and select **Set to Default**. You can’t edit the audience assignment of the default page variation. When you want to hide a page variation from all site visitors, you can set its audience visibility to None. Click the down arrow next to the page variation, and select **Unassign**. A page variation that’s not assigned to an audience isn’t visible to any site visitors. ![Page Variations window, showing selections for Unassign and Set to Default](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_variations_panel.png) #### See Also - [Considerations for Audience Targeting in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_use_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Audiences are a great help when you want to target specific user segments with relevant site content. As you work with audiences, there are some things to consider.") - [Criteria Types and Conditions for Audience Creation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_crm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can use several types of criteria to define an audience and determine the conditions under which the criteria apply.") - [Create an Audience for an Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_visibilty_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You define an audience by selecting criteria and the conditions under which the criteria apply. After you create an audience, you can assign it to a page variation, branding set, or component. You also can assign an audience to a component variation to personalize the content that different user segments see in the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, and Tile Menu components.") - [Prioritize Audiences in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audiences_prioritize_audiences.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When site visitors meet the criteria for more than one audience, you can prioritize which page variation, branding set, navigation menu, or CMS collection they see. To prioritize audiences, at least two audiences must be assigned to the page variation, branding set, or component variation.") - [_Blog post_: How to Personalize the Shared Regions of Your Experience Builder Site](https://www.learnexperiencecloud.com/s/article/How-To-Personalize-The-Shared-Regions-of-Your-Experience-Builder-Site) # Assign an Experience Cloud Site Manager To assign a user as an Experience Cloud site manager, give them the Manage Experiences permission. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To assign permission sets: Assign Permission Sets
Experience Cloud site managers must be internal site users. Site managers require the Manage Experiences permission so that they can access Experience Workspaces. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To enable Experience Workspaces, go to **Digital Experiences** | **Settings**. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, select **Permission Sets**, and then click **New**. 2. Create a permission set for the Manage Experiences permission. 3. Go to **System** | **System Permissions**, and click **Edit**. 4. Select **Manage Experiences**, and save your changes. 5. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select **Users**. 6. Add the new permission set to the managing user’s Permission Set Assignments related list. The user can now manage the site through Experience Management or Experience Workspaces. # Assign API Permissions for Agentic Search Assign the mandatory permissions required for portal users to access the Smart Search Assistance sub-agent. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost. To purchase, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Available in: Aura Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Available in: LWR Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
User Permissions Needed
To API Enabled System Permission
To manage Permission Sets Manage Profiles and Permission Sets
1. From Setup, enter Permission Sets in the Quick Find box and select **Permission Sets.** 2. Select the permission set assigned to your Experience Cloud site users. 3. Under System Permissions, select **Edit**. 4. Select **API Enabled**. 5. Save your changes. Without this permission, the FastSearch API cannot return data, and the agent will show empty responses. # Assign Cases to Partners Assign cases to partner users so they can view, modify, and update case information. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To assign cases to partners:

Edit on cases

AND

Transfer Cases or Transfer Record

Before you assign cases to partners, ensure partners have permissions to read and update cases. You can only assign cases that you have access to. 1. On the case detail page, click **\[Change\]** next to the **Case Owner** field. 2. Select **Partner User** from the Owner drop-down list and enter the name of the partner user. 3. Optionally, select the **Send Notification Email** checkbox to send an email to the new owner. 4. Click **Save**. The partner user can view and edit the case from their Experience Cloud site. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - Case comments added by partner site users are public and visible to any user that can view the case. - You can create case assignment and escalation rules that automatically assign cases to partner users based on criteria that you define. # Assign Leads to Partners You can assign leads to partners or allow partners to drive their own lead queue. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To assign leads to partner users: Edit on leads
You can: - Directly assign leads: Assign each lead to an individual partner user. - Configure lead distribution: Assign leads to a lead queue and allow partner users to claim leads from the queue. The native Partner Central Experience Cloud site template provides the lead inbox component that you can use to pass leads to partners. Use lead assignment rules to automatically assign leads to partner users or queues based on certain properties of those leads. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note User actions in a site don’t trigger assignment rules. - Configure deal registration: Allow partners to submit qualified or mature leads to get ahead of competitors. Assigning a lead to a partner user or partner lead queue is just like assigning a lead to any other user or queue. Leads assigned directly to a user or a queue that is not part of the lead pool are shown on the site’s Leads page or tab. The partner user can see leads by selecting the appropriate list view. Until a partner user has reviewed a lead, it displays in bold, and is in the My Unread Leads list view. # Assign Library Tagging Rules In Salesforce CRM Content, tags are descriptive labels that help classify and organize content. Contributors can assign tags to their files, Google docs, or web links, to enable all library members to browse for content by tag. The tagging rule in a library determines how contributors can tag content; for example, the restricted-tagging rule does not allow contributors to create tags. Library tagging rules are optional. By default, library contributors can enter any tag. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To assign a tagging rule to a library:

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

OR

Manage Libraries checked in your library permission definition

1. On the Libraries tab, select a library from the **My Libraries** area. 2. Click **Tagging Rules** and choose one of the following options: | Library Tagging Rule | Description | | --- | --- | | Open Tagging | This rule places no restrictions on tagging. Contributors can enter any tag when publishing or editing content. While a tag is typed, Salesforce CRM Content autosuggests tags based on the contributor's recently used tags and the Popular Tags list. | | Guided Tagging | This rule also enables contributors to enter any tag when publishing or editing content, but contributors are also offered a list of suggested tags. If you select Guided Tagging, the next step prompts you to enter the suggested tags that you want to recommend to library contributors. | | Restricted Tagging | This rule requires contributors to choose from the list of suggested tags. If you select Restricted Tagging, the next step prompts you to enter the list of suggested tags. | 3. If you chose **Guided Tagging** or **Restricted Tagging**, click the link for auto-populating the Suggested Tags field and then edit, add, or remove tags as needed. If you do not auto-populate the Suggested Tags field, any new tags you enter in the field are added to the existing list of suggested tags in the library. 4. Click **Save**. Notes on Library Tagging Rules: - Open Tagging is the default tagging rule. - If you publish, share, or move content to a library that uses restricted tags, you receive an error if your content contains unsupported tags. - When you share content from one library to another, the most restrictive tagging rule applies. For example: - When content is shared between a restricted-tagging library and a guided- or restricted-tagging library, you can only choose tags that are common to both libraries. - When content is shared between an open tagging library and a restricted-tagging library, you can only choose tags suggested in the restricted-tagging library. - If a restricted tagging rule is applied after content has already been published in the library and the existing content contains tags that are no longer permitted by the rule, the tags remain assigned to the content until it is edited or revised. For example, if the Q3Forecast document has a market indicators tag and market indicators is not a suggested tag according to the new restricted-tagging rule, market indicators is removed from Q3Forecast only when a user publishes a new version of the file or edits the file's tags on the content details page. - Don’t use too many tags. The search engine helps users find specific content. Tags enable users to browse and subscribe. Excessive tagging creates unnecessary clutter. - You can't change or delete tag names. You can remove tags from a document, but that doesn't delete the tag. - Tags are case insensitive. You can't have two tags with the same name even if they use different upper and lowercase letters. The case of the original tag is always used. #### See Also - [Create Libraries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_workspace_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Store, share, and manage your files in content libraries so you can decide who has access to files in each library and what permissions they have. Each org can have up to 2,000 libraries.") # Assign Moderator Privileges to Chatter Free Users As a moderator, you can assign moderator privileges to Chatter Free users in your organization. If needed, you can also remove moderator privileges. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To assign moderator privileges to Chatter Free users: Moderate Chatter
1. To go to the person's profile page, click their name in the People tab or on a feed. 2. On the profile page, the user action menu provides options for adding or removing moderator privileges and deactivating a user. ![Assigning moderator privileges from the user action menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_moderator_privileges.png) - If you want the person to be a moderator, select **Add Moderator Privileges**. - If the person is a moderator and you want to revoke those privileges, select **Remove Moderator Privileges**. #### See Also - [Change Chatter Group Roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_roles_change.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Salesforce Classic, you can change group roles for the groups that you own or manage.") # Assign Pin Post Permission Pin your most critical information to the top of a feed. In group and topics feeds, an authorized user can pin up to three posts. A pinned post stays in place until an authorized user unpins it. After you enable post pinning through Chatter Settings, you can assign the Pin Posts in Feeds permission through a permission set or a user profile. ### Required Editions
Available in Lightning Experience in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
User Permissions Needed
To assign post pinning permission to a user: Enable Chatter
When all permissions are in place, the **Pin** option appears on a feed item’s overflow menu in group and topics feeds. The **Pin** option isn’t available in the feed item’s detail view. Start by enabling post pinning for your org. Go to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings**, and select **Allow post pinning**. After post pinning is enabled, admins, group owners, and group managers can pin posts. Admins can also assign the Pin Posts in Feeds permission to users through user profiles or permission sets. ![A pinned post](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/networks_chatter_pin_post.png) When you pin a post, it appears twice in the feed: where it was posted and in its pinned position at the top of the feed. You can pin only the posts that were added directly to the feed. You can’t pin posts that were added through an @mention. Pinned posts are similar to announcements, with these differences. - Announcements are available only to group feeds. Post pinning is available to group and topics feeds. - Announcements follow a linear timeline: you post it and you let it expire. Pinned posts are more flexible: you can pin posts from the past or the present. - An announcement expires on a set date. A pinned post stays pinned until an authorized user unpins it. - Only group owners and managers and users with the Modify All Data permission can post and delete group announcements. Admins can choose who is authorized to pin posts. - You can post only one announcement per group feed. Authorized users can pin up to three posts to the top of a feed. - You can add style to a pinned post with the rich text editor. #### See Also - [Pin Posts in an Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_pin_post.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Assign Recognition Badges to Experience Cloud Site Members Assigning badges to members helps reward them for staying engaged in the Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To assign recognition badges: Assign Recognition Badges in Experience Builder Sites
1. Open the member’s profile page. 2. Click either the **Give Badge** button at the top of the profile or the **Give** button on the Recognition Badges card. 3. Choose which badge you want to assign by clicking **Change badge**. 4. Add a message letting the member know why they’re getting the badge, and click **Give**. ![Give a Badge dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/recog_badges_give.png) # Assign Screen-Responsive Property Values in Custom Components in Enhanced LWR Sites Specify different values for desktop, mobile, and tablet displays for string or integer property types in custom Lightning web components in enhanced LWR sites. With screen-responsive properties, the component uses the correct property value based on the end user’s screen size. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Enhanced LWR sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Screen-responsive properties are available only when the component developer has programmatically declared those properties to be screen responsive. 1. In Experience Builder, select the custom component. In the component’s property panel, an icon indicates the properties that are screen responsive. ![Section property panel, showing screen-responsive icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/screen_responsive_icon.png) 2. Specify the property value for the current screen size. By default, smaller screen sizes inherit the property values that you specify for larger screen sizes. 3. To specify a property value for a different screen size, use the menu in the navigation bar to select another view mode. ![View Mode menu in navigation bar](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/view_mode_lwr.png) #### See Also - [_LWR Sites for Experience Builder_: Make a Custom LWR Component Screen-Size Responsive](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/get_started_responsive_properties.htm) # Assign Tasks and Events to Partners If you have added a calendar to your Experience Cloud site, you can add events to it. Partner users with the Edit Events permission can create and edit their own events. Also, with the appropriate field-level security settings, partner users can view and create activities related to leads or opportunities. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To assign events to partner users: Edit Events
Partner users can add tasks to leads or opportunities as reminders of particular tasks. Administrators and channel managers can view the activity history for a particular lead or opportunity, or use reports to track activities assigned to partner users. A partner user can only add tasks for or see calendars shared by: - Other partner users assigned to the same account. - The channel manager for their account. # Attach a File to a Post or Comment in Chatter You can attach all file types to a post or comment—slide decks, spreadsheets, PDF files, images, audio files, and video files. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
The maximum file size that you can attach is 2 GB. When you attach a file, consider these things: - Only files posted in a private group stay private within that group. Otherwise, when a file is posted to a feed, everyone in your company can see it, even if the file started out as private. - Attaching a file from a group or library creates a reference to the file. If you update a file in Salesforce CRM Content, the updates are also reflected in the attached file. - In Lightning Experience, you can attach up to 10 files to a post and one file to a comment. - When you comment on an update resulting from feed tracking on a file, the **Attach File** option isn’t available. - You can post a file from an external data source. From the file selector, choose an external source and navigate through the folders to the file you want to post. A new file reference or copy is created in Salesforce for the corresponding external file. If a file reference exists for the file you select, it is reused. 1. For Salesforce Classic: To attach a file to a post, click **File** at the top of your feed. To attach a file to a comment, click **Attach File** below the comment. For Lightning Experience: To attach a file to a post or comment, click ![Attach icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_attach_icon.png) the Attach icon. 2. Do one of the following: - To attach a file that has already been uploaded to Salesforce or that exists in a Files Connect external data source, click **Select a file from Salesforce**. - To attach new files from your computer, click **Upload a file from your computer**. 3. Browse for the file you want to attach. Some file types don’t appear on the Select a File to Attach list. These types include Links, Google docs, documents from the Documents tab, and attachments from the Notes and Attachments related list. For more information about finding files to attach, see [Search for Files to Attach to a Chatter Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_attachments_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "From the file selector, you can see a list of Salesforce files that you own and have access to."). 4. Add a post or comment about the file. If you don’t enter any text, a generic update is posted with your attachment. 5. Below the text box, select **My Followers** to publish the post on your profile. To post to a group, select **A Group**. Type part of the group’s name in the Search Groups field, and select the group from the dropdown list. You can select only a group where you’re a member. 6. Click **Share**. #### See Also - [Upload Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_uploading.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Upload files to Files home, feeds, and records.") - [Upload a New Version of a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_versioning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Replace an old version of a file by uploading a new version.") - [Access and Share Files Connect External Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_connect_share.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After your admin enables Files Connect, you can access files from external sources, like Google Drive and SharePoint, or share them through feeds and Files home.") # Attach a Link to a File or Other Content to a Chatter Post In Salesforce Classic, share links with people by attaching them to a Chatter post.
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
If you share a URL with rich media support, your post shows a preview of the linked content. For information about currently supported URLs, see [Sites That Generate a Preview in Posts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_attach_file_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Salesforce provides rich media support for over 400 URLs. When you share a supported link in a post, it’s converted into embedded videos, images, and other types of previews."). 1. Above your feed, click **Link**. 2. Enter the URL to share. 3. Optionally, enter a Link Name. If you leave the Link Name field blank, the preview shows the title or name from the site URL. 4. Optionally, enter a post to include with the link. If you don't enter a post, a generic update is posted with your link. 5. To post to your profile, below the text box, select **My Followers**. To post to a group, select **A Group**. In the Search Groups field, enter part of the group’s name and select the group from the dropdown list. You can select only a group where you’re a member. If you’re posting on someone else’s profile or on a record, the **My Followers** and **A Group** options aren’t available. 6. Click **Share**. #### See Also - [Sites That Generate a Preview in Posts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_attach_file_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Salesforce provides rich media support for over 400 URLs. When you share a supported link in a post, it’s converted into embedded videos, images, and other types of previews.") # Attach Files and Links to Chatter Posts Share files and links from Salesforce or from your computer by attaching them to Chatter posts or comments. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
- **[Attach a File to a Post or Comment in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_attach_file.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can attach all file types to a post or comment—slide decks, spreadsheets, PDF files, images, audio files, and video files. - **[Search for Files to Attach to a Chatter Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_attachments_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** From the file selector, you can see a list of Salesforce files that you own and have access to. - **[Perform Actions on a File in a Chatter Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_attachments_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can perform actions on files in feeds. In Lightning Experience, actions are supported for posts but not for comments. - **[Download and Preview a File in a Chatter Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_attachments_view_download.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Not only can you download and save files posted to Chatter feeds, you can also preview files in your browser without downloading them. - **[Delete Files and Links from Chatter Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_attachments_del.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Only a file owner can delete files. Users with the “Modify All Data” permission can delete all comments, posts, files, and links. - **[Attach a Link to a File or Other Content to a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_attach_link.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Salesforce Classic, share links with people by attaching them to a Chatter post. - **[Sites That Generate a Preview in Posts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_attach_file_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce provides rich media support for over 400 URLs. When you share a supported link in a post, it’s converted into embedded videos, images, and other types of previews. - **[File Limits in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here’s a breakdown of the limits for files that are attached to a Chatter post or comment. # Attach Files to Records Attach files to records for a powerful way to collaborate and stay organized in Salesforce. Keep information on an opportunity, account, or case right where you need it. Share relevant documents with anyone with access to the record. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
User Permissions Needed
To attach files to records:

Read

OR

Edit on the object

You can attach files—such as Microsoft® Office documents, Adobe® PDFs, images, and videos—to most Salesforce records through the Files related list. If you don’t see the Files related list on a record, ask your admin to add it to the page layout for that record type. A file’s visibility on a record is controlled by the **File Privacy on Records** setting. When you know that a file is attached to a record, but you don’t see it, ask the file owner to adjust this setting. ## In Lightning Experience Click **Add Files** in the Files related list menu, or drag files directly onto the Files related list. (You can drag multiple files, but not a folder. You can’t drag files onto read-only related lists.) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note In Lightning Experience, your org may use a custom page layout for the file detail page. This page displays when you view or edit file details from the actions arrow on Files home, or when you edit file details from a file preview. However, if you click **Edit File Details** from the files related list on a record, the default file detail page displays instead of the custom layout. To see the custom file detail page layout on a file attached to a record, click the file’s title to open the file preview, and then click **Edit File Details**. ## In Salesforce Classic Click **Upload File** in the Files related list. - Files uploaded to the Files related list always become Salesforce Files, whether you’re in Lightning Experience or Salesforce Classic. - In Salesforce Classic, files uploaded to Notes & Attachments are either Salesforce Files or attachments, depending on how your org’s preferences are set. - Turn on the preference to upload files as Salesforce Files in Setup. Type Salesforce Files in the **Quick Find** box, select **General Settings**, and then click **Files uploaded to the Attachments related list on records are uploaded as Salesforce Files, not as attachments**. - When the preference is enabled, the Notes & Attachments related list shows the **Upload Files** button. If not enabled, it shows the **Attach File** button. - The preference Files uploaded to the Attachments related list on records are uploaded as Salesforce Files, not as attachments doesn't apply to the **Attachments** related list in the **Task and Event** object. ## Limits - In Salesforce Classic, the size limit for a file attached directly to the related list is 25 MB. This limit includes a file attached to a solution. - In Lightning Experience, the size limit for a file attached directly to the related list is 10 GB. - The file size limit for Chatter feed attachments is 2 GB. - The size limit for an email message, including attachments, is 25 MB. - If the **Don't allow HTML uploads as attachments or document records** security setting is enabled for your organization, you can’t upload files with the following file extensions: .htm, .html, .htt, .htx, .mhtm, .mhtml, .shtm, .shtml, .acgi, .svg. - Uploads from the Files related list aren’t supported in the Salesforce mobile app. - Salesforce doesn't remove geolocation information from uploaded images. #### See Also - [Make a File Private on a Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_make_private_on_record.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the File Privacy on Records setting to control who can see a file when it’s attached to a record. The setting is available when you edit a file’s details.") # Attach Multiple Files to a Chatter Post Attach up to 10 files to a Chatter post. View multiple file previews in the Chatter feed. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience and Experience Builder sites
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional,Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
Add up to 10 files to one Chatter post in Lightning Experience and Experience Builder sites. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note On comments, you can attach only one file. 1. In the Chatter publisher, click in the Share an Update field to expose the Attach icon. ![Attach icon on Chatter publisher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_chatter_files_attach.png) 2. Click ![Attach icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_chatter_files_attach_icon.png) the Attach icon to open the Select Files dialog. ![Select Files dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_chatter_files_select.png) 3. You have some options for choosing up to 10 files. - Select a category, and browse its related files (1). - Select a content source, and browse its related files (2). - Search for the file by its file name (3). - Click **Upload Files**, and browse your local drive for files (4). At the bottom of the dialog, there’s a count of selected files. The **Add** button also shows the current total. 4. When you finish your selection, click **Add**. # Authenticate Experience Cloud Site Users You have several options for authenticating customers and employees in your Experience Cloud site. Customers are users with Community, Customer Portal, External Identity, or partner portal licenses. By default, they can log in with the username and password that Salesforce assigns them for the Experience Cloud site. Your Salesforce org’s employees are users with full Salesforce licensing capabilities. These users follow the employee login flow using their Salesforce username and password. Beyond these default settings, you can configure SAML, third-party authentication providers, or OAuth to authenticate and authorize all users accessing your site. You can also configure self-registration to use Login Discovery, which makes it easier for users to authenticate. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - Session cookies are set at the domain level. When you log in as a different user during the same browser session, the new session cookies replace existing session cookies for that domain. As a result, the original user is logged out of the session. - The following authentication options also work with custom HTTPS web addresses. - **[SAML for Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_auth_configure_saml.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your Salesforce org already uses SAML single sign-on (SSO) to simplify and standardize your user authentication, you can extend this capability to your Experience Cloud sites. - **[Configure SAML SSO Between Salesforce Orgs or Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.sso_between_multiple_orgs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your company deploys more than one Salesforce org or Experience Cloud site, set up SAML single sign-on (SSO) so users can easily move between them. In this SSO configuration, a single org or site acting as the identity provider authenticates users for one or more orgs or sites in the service provider role. Users can log in to all orgs or sites with a single set of credentials. - **[Authentication Provider SSO with Salesforce as the Relying Party](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.sso_authentication_providers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With authentication providers, your users can log in to your Salesforce org or Experience Cloud site with single sign-on (SSO) using credentials from a third party. Authentication providers also give your users access to protected third-party data. Salesforce offers several ways to configure authentication providers, such as with OpenID Connect or with a custom OAuth 2.0 configuration. Which protocol you can use depends on the third party. #### See Also - [Customize Login, Self-Registration, and Password Management for Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_login.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the default login, logout, password management, and self-registration options for your site. Or customize the behavior with Apex and Visualforce or Experience Builder (Site.com Studio) pages. You can also use dynamic URLs to brand your pages at run time.") # Authenticate Once with Salesforce Chatter Salesforce Chatter makes getting to work in the full Salesforce site easier than ever. Just log in to the Salesforce Chatter app and launch the full Salesforce site directly from the app. Tap **Full Site** in the left navigation menu to launch your Salesforce homepage. You can also open a specific Chatter post, file, or image in Lightning Experience directly in your browser by tapping ![Drop Down Arrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_feed_dropdown_arrow_large.png) and **Open in browser**. # Authenticate to Files Connect External Data Sources If your administrator configured a data source like SharePoint to use per-user authentication, you can provide your credentials for that system in Salesforce. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Files Connect for cloud-based external data sources is available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To access cloud-based data sources like SharePoint Online: Files Connect Cloud
- **[Set Up Authentication to an External Data Source](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_connect_authenticate_first.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you connect to a Files Connect external data system for the first time, you can set up your authentication in just a few clicks. - **[Manage Your Files Connect External Data Source Authentication Credentials](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_connect_cred.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You or your Salesforce admin can use Files Connect to set up and manage your authentication settings for external data sources. With valid authentication settings, you can access files from external systems right from Salesforce. # Authentication Provider SSO with Salesforce as the Relying Party With authentication providers, your users can log in to your Salesforce org or Experience Cloud site with single sign-on (SSO) using credentials from a third party. Authentication providers also give your users access to protected third-party data. Salesforce offers several ways to configure authentication providers, such as with OpenID Connect or with a custom OAuth 2.0 configuration. Which protocol you can use depends on the third party. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To view the settings: View Setup and Configuration
To edit the settings:

Customize Application

AND

Manage Auth. Providers

You have several ways to configure an authentication provider. - Predefined authentication providers - Salesforce-managed authentication providers - OpenID Connect authentication providers - Custom authentication providers After you configure an authentication provider in Salesforce, you can add it to your Salesforce login page or your Experience Cloud login page. ## Single Sign-On Authentication and Authorization Flow Most authentication providers serve a dual purpose. In addition to authenticating users for SSO, they provide access to user data. With access to this third-party data, you can enrich your users’ Salesforce profiles with additional information after they log in with SSO. For example, when a user logs in to Salesforce using their Facebook credentials, they can authorize access to their Facebook data. Facebook then sends Salesforce an access token, which you can use to access Facebook profile data in order to populate the user’s Salesforce user profile. # Automatically Assign Topics to Articles Transport all your hard work of organizing Salesforce Knowledge in your Experience Cloud site, and boost SEO for your Knowledge articles, by mapping topics to data categories. All articles published with a specific data category are tagged with the topics you specify. Articles added to the data category in the future are also tagged. All articles with assigned topics are included in search results. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To access Experience Workspaces:

Manage Experiences

OR

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the site

To set up automatic topic assignments:

Edit Topics

AND

View Data Categories

To use automatic topic assignments, enable Experience Workspaces in Digital Experience Settings. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Access automatic topic assignments by clicking **Content Management** | **Topics** | **Automatic Topic Assignment**. 3. Enable **Automate Topic Assignment**. ![Enable automatic topic assignment](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_automatic_assignment1.png) 4. Select a data category group and a data category. ![Select data category group and data category](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_automatic_assignment2.png) 5. Add the topics that you want to assign to the articles under that data category. ![Add topics to articles](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_automatic_assignment3.png) 6. Select the option to add the topics to existing articles in the data category. The topics are then assigned to all articles in all data categories under the data category group. If you don’t select this option, the topics are added only to new articles added to the data category, and the existing articles remain unchanged. 7. Click **Save**. Take these items into consideration as you set up your topic assignment rules. - Topic assignments are site-specific. If you use the same article in two different sites, set up automatic assignments in both sites. - If a translation of a topic is available in Salesforce, the translated article is tagged with the corresponding translated topic. If there’s no translated topic in the system, localized articles are tagged with the base language topic. - You can’t automatically remove topics from articles. Instead, you must manually remove topics. - If you merge two topics, you must set up new rules. - If you automatically add a topic to a data category, the topic is added to all articles in the data categories above it in the hierarchy. Topics aren't automatically added down a hierarchy to child data categories. - To automatically assign topics to a newly added data category, remove all existing data categories and then publish the article. Next, add all data categories at once and republish the article. # Automatically Follow the Records That You Create When you follow a record, information about updates to tracked record fields are sent to your What I Follow feed in Chatter. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, Developer, and Database.com Editions.
User Permissions Needed
To view a record: Read on the record
By default, you don’t automatically follow the records that you create. If you want to automatically follow such records, you can enable auto-follow in your Chatter Settings. 1. To open your personal settings, click your profile image at the top of the page, and then click **Settings**. 2. Enter My Feeds in the Quick Find box, then click **My Feeds**. 3. Select Automatically follow records that I create. 4. Click **Save**. Consider the following tips for auto-following records: - By default, when you create a child record, the owner of the parent record becomes the owner of the child record. But, despite your **Automatically follow** setting, you don’t automatically follow the child record. You must follow the child explicitly, even when you’re the owner of the parent. - The Account Owner record field is updated to change the account owner. The new account owner follows the account automatically only if the Account Owner field is feed-tracked and the new account owner has auto-follow enabled. - If a workflow changes the Account Owner field while the record is created, the user who created the record doesn’t automatically follow the account. Consider the following scenario. You’re creating a record. Saving the record starts a workflow that immediately reassigns the Account Owner field to another user and then saves the record. The workflow changes the Account Owner field before the record is saved. So, you don’t follow the record automatically because you never were the record owner, even though you technically created the record. #### See Also - [View Record Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_viewing_record_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "View the Chatter feed associated with a record you follow to see updates about the record.") - [Record Recommendations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_record_recommendations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Following records helps keep you up-to-date on important changes to accounts, contacts, opportunities, and more.") # Best Practices and Considerations for Multilingual Sites Keep these practices and considerations in mind when you’re setting up a multilingual site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Experience Builder sites accessed through Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and mobile devices, and is available in Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
## General Best Practices and Considerations - Set the site’s default language before you begin adding translated content to your site. - For each translation, export a separate Languages.xml file to reduce the chance of overwriting any existing translations when importing new translations. For easier identification, we recommend renaming each file to include its country code—for example, languages\_de.xml, languages\_fr\_ca.xml. - When preparing files for translation, ensure that the file contains the default language and only one other language. When you import the file after translation, this best practice helps avoid overwriting any other languages. - If possible, avoid updating the site’s default content until after you receive and import your translated content. Because the translated file contains the original default content and the translated content, when you import the file, you overwrite any updates made in the interim. - If you decide to change a site’s default language after you add translated content, do so in this order: - Export site content. - Change the default language. - Import the exported file. You export first because changing the default language can overwrite existing translations. Export first to preserve your original default language and your translations. Then, after changing the default, import translations to restore them. Here’s how it works. Let’s say that you make English the default language and add French as a site language. After you add the translated French content, you decide to change the default site language to French. To preserve your original default language and existing translations, you must first export site content. Then select French as the default site language, and import content back into the site. - For custom components, when you make a new property available for edit in Experience Builder, keep this consideration in mind for translations: If the component is in use on a page in Experience Builder, delete the component from the page and replace it with the updated version. Otherwise, when you export the site content for translation, the property that you added is omitted for that component instance in the exported file. If the component contains content that’s already translated, export the site content first to preserve the existing translation. Then replace the component with the updated version. For more information, see [Aura Component Bundle Design Resources](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.lightning.meta/lightning/components_config_for_app_builder_design_files.htm) or, for Lightning web components, [Configure a Component for Experience Builder](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/component-library/documentation/en/lwc/use_config_for_community_builder). ## Best Practices and Considerations for Authenticated Users - For pages that require authentication, page content appears in the authenticated user’s profile language. - When authenticated users want to view a multilingual site in another language, their best option is to view the site as a guest user. Or, these users can change their profile language. Don’t edit the query parameters in a site’s URL to update the site’s language. ## Best Practices and Considerations for Guest Users - Add a language selector to all public pages, and make it easy to spot. It's the only way that guest users and unauthenticated visitors can select another language. - Customized labels and Knowledge articles use the translations that the site admin added in Translation Workbench. #### See Also - [_Blog post_: Localization within Experience Cloud Sites](https://www.learnexperiencecloud.com/article/Localization-within-Experience-Cloud-Sites) - [Language Selector](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_language_picker.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add the Language Selector component to multilingual sites so guest users can select their preferred language on public site pages.") # Best Practices and Tips for Using SEO in Experience Builder Sites Follow these guidelines and best practices when optimizing SEO in your site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
## General SEO Best Practices - Locate a site at the root level. To determine the location of your site, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then click **All Sites**. Then, check the address in the URL column. The address for a root-level site has the format https://site\_URL. A site that isn’t at the root level commonly has a URL with a path prefix in the format https://site\_URL/sub\_path/. If your site has a URL prefix, meaning it’s not at the root level, you must create a root site. You submit the sitemap for the root-level site to search engines first, and then submit the URLs for the site with a path prefix. - To ensure that your Knowledge articles are included in search results, assign at least one navigational, featured, or content topic to each article. - If your org supports multilingual Knowledge articles, keep the same URL as the base language article. We don’t recommend replacing the URLs of translated articles with language-specific URLs. - To improve search results and help people decide whether it’s the page they want, [use a page’s Title and Description properties](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_tags.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set the title, description, and head properties for your Experience Builder site pages to improve search results."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can use other `head` markup global tags to configure your social media tags from OpenGraph to Twitter. We restrict the tags, attributes, and values allowed in the `head` markup of your pages to improve security. - To make the object page URL more readable for humans, change the page’s base URL. Update all other references to your pages, such as object, detail, list, or related list, that you hand-coded from other pages or from links outside your site. These references aren’t automatically updated. - Pages with non-standard URLs, such as URLs that include query string parameters, aren’t included in the sitemap or content snapshots. As a result, search engines can’t crawl or index these pages. Therefore, avoid using standard pages to deliver dynamic data via URL parameters (/s/product?productId=12345). Instead, use object pages for the record pages to be crawled (s/product/12345). - When creating a custom Aura component that generates a URL or navigates to a page, use `lightning:navigation` to generate proper `` links. Similarly, for custom Lightning web components, use `lightning-navigation`. - 301 redirects ensure that users and search engines are directed to the correct page. For example, for a URL such as www.my\_site.com, we recommend creating a redirect to my\_site.com. You can set up these redirects with your DNS provider. - To indicate that a page is a duplicate of another page, [add a element](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_tags.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set the title, description, and head properties for your Experience Builder site pages to improve search results."), with the attribute rel=canonical and point to the canonical page. For example, ``. This action ensures that search engines crawl the canonical page and not a duplicate page. ## Sitemap and robots.txt Files - Don’t create a custom sitemap for LWR or Aura sites. Custom sitemaps are difficult to maintain and scale. Instead, use the automatically generated sitemap.xml file. - If you [create a custom robots.txt file](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The robots.txt file for your site is automatically generated. It allows search engines to crawl your entire site. However, if you want to tell search engines not to crawl certain pages of your public site, you can create a custom robots.txt file."), it must include the paths to all sitemaps for the domain. - When URL slugs are enabled and configured for product and category pages, they’re used as the canonical URL in sitemaps created for LWR Commerce stores. Otherwise, the sitemap continues using the recordId URL. - If you enable guest user access for an object that has existing records, manually trigger the full sitemap generation. Otherwise, the sitemap doesn’t include the object’s records until the next automatic sitemap regeneration, which can be up to a week later. ## Data Security - Regularly review and update the objects and records that are public through your guest user profile. This best practice controls the scope of your sitemap and helps keep your site secure. - To ensure that object data is available to search engines, review the sharing rules, field-level security (FLS), and permission sets assigned to an object. Even though an object and its fields are public, Salesforce security settings still determine guest user access to this data. - Ensure that all sensitive objects are private, even objects used in private pages that aren’t included in the sitemap. All public pages and public objects are discoverable because search engines use the sitemap only as a starting point to identify which site content is available for crawling. ## Testing and Validation - Review the accuracy of your sitemap.xml file before submitting it to search engines. Navigate as an unauthenticated user to https:///s/sitemap.xml for Aura sites or https:///sitemap.xml for LWR sites. We suggest using Google Chrome’s incognito mode. Ensure that the URLs listed in the site map are appropriate for guest users. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If a URL is mistakenly included in the sitemap, check that the correct permissions are enabled on the guest user profile and that your site is set up correctly for SEO. - Many webmaster tools require verification of your site. One of the best ways to verify that your site is to add the meta tag provided by the web team tool to your `head` markup. - Salesforce is a single-page application (SPA). So if you plan to use any third-party SEO tools to test your community, make sure that they’re configured to crawl JavaScript-based sites properly. - Check SEO performance and site speed using the free [Salesforce Community Page Optimizer plug-in](https://chrome.google.com/webstore/detail/salesforce-community-page/alkcnclapbnefkodhbkpifdkceldogka) for Chrome. #### See Also - [_Blog Post:_ Advanced SEO for Lightning Communities](https://developer.salesforce.com/blogs/2018/01/advanced-seo-lightning-communities.html) - [SEO for Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Search engine optimization (SEO) ensures that your public Experience Builder site is visible to search engines. SEO helps customers, partners, and visitors find your content via online search.") - [SEO Best Practices and Considerations for Guest Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_SEO_best_practices_guest_users.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [SEO for Experience Builder Sites FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Answers to common questions about using SEO in your Experience Builder site.") # Best Practices for Campaign Marketplace Looking for best practices and use cases to help you get the most out of Campaign Marketplace? You’ve come to the right place. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions
## Highlighting a Custom Field Channel managers can use Highlights to call out certain types of campaigns. Create a custom formula field for greater flexibility when choosing types of fields to highlight. For example, you can create a custom formula text field called “Recently Added”. Enter the following formula in the “Simple Formula” box: IF((TODAY() - 7) < DATEVALUE(CreatedDate), "RECENTLY ADDED", "") Add the “Recently Added” field to the columns in the list view you are using in your marketplace. Under **Highlights**, select the “Recently Added” field and choose the color you want to highlight recently added campaigns. ## Managing Visibility of Campaigns Using List Views Channel managers can configure components to manage how campaigns are displayed to partners. - Use filters to control visibility for campaigns. By default, we only show campaigns that are active and within the start and end of their date range. You can use activation or the start and end date to control visibility. Optionally add an approval process and a custom "approved" field on campaigns to control the visibility in the list view. - Provide different types of marketplaces to partners. Add multiple marketplaces, with different list views, to different regions on a page or using the tab component. - Hide partner-owned campaigns from the marketplace without using a trigger. You can filter the campaign list view using Owner User Type. You can also add a custom checkbox field to the campaign and set the default to "false". Make sure the field is read-only for the profiles that sign up for campaigns. You can then filter the list view by campaigns with the custom checkbox marked "true". ## Copying Fields That Are Not on a Partner’s Page Layout When a partner signs up for a campaign, fields that are not on the partner’s page layout are not copied. Use a trigger to copy fields you want to include on the child campaign when a partner signs up. These fields don’t show up in the layout, but are included in the child campaign record. We recommend using this trigger: trigger onSignUpCopyFields on Campaign (before insert) { ​ for (Campaign childCamp : System.Trigger.new) { // check if the campaign is being signed-up if (childCamp.parentId != null) { // may need to add more conditions here, depending on campaign hierarchy and usage. // read all the campaign data that might not be on the child // sign-up/clone doesn’t copy the fields not on the user's page layout Campaign parentCamp = \[SELECT Id, Name, Type, YourCustomFieldName\_\_C FROM Campaign WHERE Id =: childCamp.ParentId\]; YourCustomFieldName\_\_C = parentCamp.YourCustomFieldName\_\_C; // You can update the record directly only before insert. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Only fields that partners have read access to are displayed. ## Signing Up for a Campaign Partner users should default their “Actual Cost in Campaign” field to null and their “Num Sent in Campaign” field to 0 before signing up for a new campaign. #### See Also - [Set Up Campaign Marketplace](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_campaigns_marketplace_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With Campaign Marketplace, you can provide the structure and guidance necessary for partners to successfully execute campaigns. Channel marketers can create and share marketing campaigns, guidelines, and assets with partners. They can also customize the look and feel of the marketplace and highlight information that is important to partners. Partners can then choose which campaigns work best for them. This feature is available in Experience Builder sites and Lightning Bolt Solutions.") - [Campaign Marketplace](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_campaign_marketplace.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With Campaign Marketplace, you can provide the structure and guidance necessary for partners to successfully execute campaigns. Channel marketers can create and share marketing campaigns, guidelines, and assets with partners. Partners can then choose which campaigns work best for them.") # Bind Data to CMS Content Pages in Your LWR Site Data-bound components used on CMS content pages automatically populate with content saved in Salesforce CMS. Map fields in the component property panel to fields in CMS content. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize an LWR site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences

    OR

  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
1. In Experience Builder, navigate to a CMS content page such as News Detail or Document Detail and click **Components**. 2. Drag a component that supports data binding onto the page. In the component property panel, you already have content that’s inherited from the content pages. ![Banner component with inherited CMS content](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_builder_banner_inherited_cms_content.png) 3. Click the component fields and map them to elements of your inherited CMS content in the component property panel. You can bind data from any field on the detail page, including custom fields. The content then populates automatically in the component. ![Map data binding component fields to elements of inherited CMS content on a CMS content page.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_builder_cms_content_page_mapping.png) To use a component on a detail page without binding content, click the chain link icon next to the data source to unlock the content. Add your own content or paste in a valid URL in the field instead to link to static content. 4. Continue customizing how the content appears on the CMS content page in the component property panel. See data binding in CRM records in action in the [Did You Know Series (English Only)](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/SUwcxSKrE2tNUXeBqtNWFG). # Bind Data to CRM Record Detail Pages in Your LWR Site Data-bound components used on CRM record detail pages automatically populate with content saved in Salesforce CRM data in records. Map fields in the component property panel to fields in the CRM records. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize an LWR site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences

    OR

  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
1. In Experience Builder, navigate to a detail page such as Record Detail, and click **Components**. 2. Drag a component that supports data binding, such as Banner, Card, Grid, Overlap, and Tile, onto the page. In the component property panel, you already have content inherited from the content pages (1). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Grid component can be added to any type of site page in addition to Record Detail pages 3. In the component property panel, map the fields in the record to fields in the object detail page (2). You can bind data from any field on the detail page, including custom fields. ![Binding CRM data to an LWR tile component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_builder_crm_data_mapping.png) To use a component on a detail page without binding content, click the chain link icon next to the data source to unlock the content. Add your own content, or paste in a valid URL in the field to link to static content. To see data binding in CRM records in action, check out the [Did You Know Series (English Only)](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/SUwcxSKrE2tNUXeBqtNWFG). #### See Also - [Use a Grid Component to Show Enhanced CMS Collections and List Views in LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_grid.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Grid component dynamically populates with data that’s saved in enhanced CMS collections and record list views. After you pick a data source, you add a content component within the grid to show the content that you want. The component provides data binding and pagination logic.") # Biometric Login Button The Biometric Login Button component triggers the login prompt for face or fingerprint recognition on a mobile app. This component is supported only on the app login page of Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud apps configured with [User Opt-In Biometric Login](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?language=en_US&id=sf.branded_apps_exp_opt_in_biometric_login.htm&type=5). 1. Select the Biometric Login Button component on the app login page you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Button Label

Enter the text to display on the button that app users tap to trigger the login prompt for face or fingerprint credentials.

The default text is Log In with Biometrics.

Button Text Color Set the text color of the button label.
Button Background Color Set the background color of the button.
Button Border Color Set the button border color.
Button Border Radius Move the slider to configure the curve of the button’s shape.
Max Button Width Move the slider to configure the width of the button. The width percentage corresponds to the width of the container that the button is placed in. For example, a button at 50% width is half as wide as the container that it’s placed in.
Button Alignment Select Left, Right or Center to position the button within the container it’s placed in.
# Bookmark a Chatter Post Use bookmarks to track the posts that you want to get back to. View bookmarked posts in the Bookmarked feed. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
1. To expand the actions menu, click ![Post actions menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_feed_dropdown_arrow.png) at the top-right corner of the post you want to bookmark. 2. Click **Bookmark**. In Salesforce Classic, the bookmark icon (![Chatter bookmark in Salesforce Classic](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_bookmark.png)) appears next to the post. In Lightning Experience, the corner of the post is marked with a star (![Chatter bookmark in Lightning Experience](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collab_bookmark_lex.png)). On the Chatter page, click **Bookmarked** to see your bookmarked posts. You can add as many bookmarks as you like. #### See Also - [Like Posts and Comments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_like.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Like posts or comments to show your approval and receive email notifications if others comment on that post. You receive notifications only if you’ve selected to in your personal Chatter settings.") # Brand the Login Pages Use the Experience Builder to customize and brand the login pages with your own design. You can change the appearance of the login pages with a background image, color scheme, and font settings. Use Experience Builder to set the background. Your preference applies to all login pages unless you override the settings within an individual page. 1. Select **Go To Experience Builder**, if you’re not already in it. 2. From the Go To menu, select **Login**. 3. In the left pane, upload an image for the background, and then set color and text preferences as needed. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example The Branding Editor settings in Experience Builder: ![Branding Editor settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/login_background.png) ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_warning.png) Warning When you customize a login page or any page that includes fields with sensitive or confidential information with Experience Builder, we recommend that you use only standard components built by Salesforce or components that you built, customized, or vetted. Use of third-party components and code libraries on a page that includes fields with sensitive or confidential information can increase your risk for security vulnerabilities. # Brand Your Experience Builder Pages Each Experience Cloud template comes with its own set of pages for login, identity verification, password resets, and self-registration. You can use Experience Builder to customize your login experience to match your brand.Experience Builder pages are available after you publish your site. When you brand your site from Experience Builder, the branding settings on the Login & Registration Page of the Administration workspace are ignored. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Next to your site, click **Builder**. 3. To get the Experience Builder pages that come with your Experience Cloud site template, publish your site. In the top right, click **Publish**. If you see a notification to activate experiences, ignore it. You activate the site later on. 4. Return to the Administration workspace. In the top left, click ![Experience Builder icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/xid_builder_icon.png), and then select **Administration**. ![To Administration from Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/xid_navigate_to_admin_from_builder.png) 5. Select **Login & Registration**. 6. For each page type, such as login, identity verification, password resets, and self-registration, find the Experience Builder page that comes with your template. For example, to select an Experience Builder page for login, select Experience Builder as the Login Page Type, and then select **login** from the page picker. 7. Save your changes. 8. Return to Experience Builder. At the top of Workspaces, select **Administration**, then select ![Experience Builder icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/xid_builder_icon.png). 9. At the top of Builder, click the dropdown next to Setup, and then select your page type. For example, to select the login page, click the dropdown (1) and then select **Login** (2). ![Builder Branding Editor](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/xid_builder_login.png) Your login page now appears in Experience Builder. 10. From here, you can further brand your page with Experience Builder. For more information, see [Manage Your Site's Pages and Their Properties with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_manage_pages_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US). For more information on the page types you can brand to customize your authentication experience, see these resources. - [Customize Login, Logout, and Password Management Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.external_identity_login_page_use_cases.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Self-Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.external_identity_self_registration_use_cases.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Passwordless Login](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.external_identity_passwordless_login_use_cases.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Brand Your Identity Experience Create a branded identity experience by customizing the design of the pages users see when they log in to your site, verify their identity, reset passwords, and self-register. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
After you implement your sites' identity processes, bring it all together with your own branded design. For example, you can change the colors of your background and login buttons, insert your own logos, and customize the layout of your pages. You can also change the branding of your pages based on who the user is and where they're logging in from. Depending on your site's needs, you can choose which settings apply to which pages, or create custom branding for each type of page. For example, you're in charge of the Experience Cloud site for your coffee business. You want to create a branded experience by customizing the pages users see when they log in, verify their identity, reset passwords, and self-register. So you configure your pages to display your company's logo and set up a background image that shows the cozy atmosphere of your coffee shop. Now whenever existing users log in to your site, verify their identity, or reset passwords, they're presented with your logo and custom background image. And new users see your branded design when they self-register. Your branded identity experience makes the look and feel of your site memorable to your customers and keeps them coming back for more. - **[Brand Your Pages from the Administration Workspace](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.external_identity_customize_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce Customer Identity gives you a point-and-click way to brand the pages that prompt users to log in to your site, verify their identity, reset passwords, and self-register. If you’ve set up login flows, they also use these branding settings. - **[Brand Your Experience Builder Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.external_identity_create_branded_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Each Experience Cloud template comes with its own set of pages for login, identity verification, password resets, and self-registration. You can use Experience Builder to customize your login experience to match your brand.Experience Builder pages are available after you publish your site. - **[Create a Custom Login Discovery Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.external_identity_passwordless_login_in_apex.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To set up passwordless login with an email address or phone number, create a custom Login Discovery page. With this configuration, your users can self-register and log in with an email address or phone number. Set up your page in Experience Workspaces, and customize your login process with Apex. - **[Customize the Apex Login Controller](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.external_identity_customize_login_controller.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce provides an easy way to customize your login process using the Login Discovery Page, which lets you implement passwordless login. However, if you want even more control over your login process, you can modify the Apex login controllers and use customized Visualforce pages. # Brand Your Pages from the Administration Workspace Salesforce Customer Identity gives you a point-and-click way to brand the pages that prompt users to log in to your site, verify their identity, reset passwords, and self-register. If you’ve set up login flows, they also use these branding settings. For convenience, you can use the sample logos and backgrounds we provide by downloading this file: [https://www.salesforceidentity.info/ExternalIdentityAssets.zip](https://www.salesforceidentity.info/ExternalIdentityAssets.zip). Or use your own. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can brand Aura site pages from the Login & Registration page. If you used the Login & Registration page to brand pages for an LWR site before Summer ’23, those configurations still apply and can be edited from the Login & Registration page. For LWR sites that weren’t branded from the Login & Registration page before Summer ’23, see [Brand Your Experience Builder Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.external_identity_create_branded_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Each Experience Cloud template comes with its own set of pages for login, identity verification, password resets, and self-registration. You can use Experience Builder to customize your login experience to match your brand.Experience Builder pages are available after you publish your site."). The branding options you set here apply to all types of pages for logging in, verifying identity, resetting passwords, and self-registration, except Experience Builder pages. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Next to your site name, click **Workspaces**. 3. Select **Administration**, and then select **Login & Registration**. 4. To upload a logo from a file, take these steps. 1. For Logo Type, from the dropdown, select **File**. 2. For Logo File, click **Choose File**, then browse your local drive to upload a file Instead of uploading a file, you can enter a URL where you store your branding assets. This URL can use a dynamic value to determine which logo appears at run time. The URL contains the expid placeholder `{expid}`, for example, https://www.my-cms.com/{expid}/logo.png. When customers click a link to log in, how the login page looks depends on the expid value indicated in the login URL. 5. For Background Type, select an option to customize the background. Background Type, select **Color**, and select your color. 1. To use a solid color, from the dropdown, select **Color**, then select a color or enter a hexadecimal value. 2. To use an image or color gradient, from the dropdown, select **Image URL**, and then enter a URL to an image. The Image URL can also use a dynamic value to determine which background image appears at run time. 6. For Login Button, select a color or enter a hexadecimal value. The color applies to these buttons. - The **Log In** button on the login page - The **Verify** button on the identity verification page - The **Continue** button on the reset password page - The **Sign Up** button on the self-registration page 7. (Optional) For Right Frame URL, enter a URL to display content in an iframe to the right of the login form on the login page. For example, use the right frame URL to display a branded image or topical announcements. 8. For Footer Text, enter any text, such as a copyright, to display at the bottom of your pages. 9. Save your settings. 10. To view your changes, open your site URL. 1. From Administration, select **Settings**, and copy the URL for your site. 2. From your browser, open a new private (incognito) window, and paste the URL in the address bar. Here’s an example of how the login page looks with branding options set on the Login & Registration page. The logo is displayed above the login form and the background and Log In button each use custom colors. ![Basic login page in browser](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/xid_basic_login_page.png) Here's an example of the same login page using a background image instead of a solid color. ![Login page with background image URL](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/xid_default_background_image.png) # Brand Your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Site If you’re using the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template, you can customize the look and feel of your site in Experience Workspaces. You can add your own logo, colors, and copyright so that your site matches your company's branding and is instantly recognizable to your site members. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Follow these steps to design your site’s branding. If you’re using the Experience Builder to create your custom pages, you can use the Experience Builder instead. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Administration** | **Branding**. 3. Use the lookups to choose a header and footer for the site. First upload the files for your header and footer to the Documents tab. The header can be a GIF, JPG, or PNG file with a maximum file size of 20 KB. The footer must be an HTML file. The maximum file size for all HTML files is 100 KB. So if you have a footer HTML file that is 70 KB and you want to use an HTML file for the header, it must be 30 KB or smaller. The header you choose replaces the Salesforce logo below the global header. The footer you choose replaces the Salesforce copyright and privacy footer. 4. To choose a predefined color scheme, click **Select Color Scheme**. To select a color from the color picker, click the text box next to the page section fields. Here’s how selected colors show up in your site and in the Salesforce mobile app.
Color Choice Where It Appears
Header Background

Top of the page, under the black global header. If you select an HTML file in the Header field, it overrides this color choice.

Top of the login page.

Login page in the Salesforce mobile app.

Page Background Background color for all pages in your site, excluding the login page.
Primary Tab when it’s selected.
Secondary

Top borders of lists and tables.

Button on the login page.

Tertiary Background color for section headers on edit and detail pages.
5. Click **Save**. #### See Also - [Customize Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Update basic site settings like your site URL, site name, members, login options, and general preferences in the Administration tile of Experience Workspaces.") - [Brand Your Pages from the Administration Workspace](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.external_identity_customize_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Salesforce Customer Identity gives you a point-and-click way to brand the pages that prompt users to log in to your site, verify their identity, reset passwords, and self-register. If you’ve set up login flows, they also use these branding settings.") - [Set Up Dynamic URLs with Experience Workspaces](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.external_identity_dynamic_set_up_reg_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You set up dynamic URLs for your login experience from the Login & Registration page of the Administration workspace. Create dynamic URLs by including a placeholder that resolves at run time. Implement the dynamic URLs for the logo and right-frame content on the pages used to log in, verify identity, reset passwords, and self-register.") # Breadcrumb Use the Breadcrumb component in an Experience Builder site template on topic, article, or feed detail pages to let your customers easily navigate back to parent or grandparent topics. 1. Select the **Breadcrumb** component in the page you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Unique Name or ID | Use {!topicID} on topic pages, {!feedItemID} on question or feed item pages, and {!urlName} on article pages. | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note While topics reside in a fixed hierarchy, articles and feeds can be assigned to multiple topics at once. When an article or feed is assigned to a multiple of topic hierarchies, the Breadcrumb component shows topics that are the most discussed in a site. Breadcrumbs don’t appear on top-level topic pages. #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Broadcast Groups Broadcast groups are a special type of public, private, or unlisted Chatter group where only group owners and managers can post to the group. Group members can read posts and comment on them. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
By restricting the ability to post, group owners and managers can keep group discussions focused and relevant by cutting down noise. You can configure public, private, and unlisted groups to be broadcast groups. To set a group to broadcast mode, select **Broadcast Only** in the group settings. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example Creating broadcast groups are ideal when a limited and consistent set of individuals must regularly communicate with a large group of people. Some examples include: - Organization-wide updates from the executive leadership in the company - Policy changes from your company’s HR department - Event updates from the organizer of large events or company conferences - Important action alerts from key IT personnel, including their awesome Salesforce administrator Broadcast group setting in Salesforce Classic. ![Broadcast group setting in Salesforce Classic](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_groups_broadcast_settings.png) Broadcast group setting in Lightning Experience. ![Broadcast group setting in Lightning Experience](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/200_broadcast_groups_chatter.png) # Build a Portal with the Customer Account Portal Solution Set up a custom space where your customers can take care of their needs on their own, and reduce support calls to your company. Admins can set up Customer Account Portal with a few clicks. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create, customize, or publish an experience: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
![Customer Account Portal](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_account_portal.png) The Customer Account Portal comes with a variety of components out-of-the-box to make your company’s portal a personalized point of access to information, processes, and experts: - Use the [Tile Menu](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_tile_menu.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Tile Menu Lightning Web component in Experience Builder to add an intuitive and visually stunning navigation experience to your site.") for an intuitive and visually stunning navigation experience. - Configure the [Member Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_member_profile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Member Profile component allows site members to easily edit their account information. And the best part is that all a member’s important information is in one place—profile information and various settings in one handy component. What does that mean for you and your business? Fewer phone calls into your call centers for simple updates.") component to give customers all their account information and settings in one convenient place. - Give access to your company’s knowledge base to answer your customers’ most frequently asked questions Get started with this handy list of [setup tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customer_account_portal_setup_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review this high-level list of tasks and considerations for prepping and setting up your portal.") to create your own customer account portal. # Build an Expression-Based Visibility Rule in LWR Sites Using Custom Logic Build your own custom logic to show or hide a component or component variation. Create a custom logic expression by adding your conditions for component visibility. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
You can create visibility rules for any component in Experience Builder from the Visibility tab. Before creating a custom logic expression, add and specify the conditions. When you add a condition, it’s numbered. Your first condition is numbered 1, the second is numbered 2, and so forth. Use these conditions to build your expression. 1. From Experience Builder, select a component that appears on the canvas. 2. From the Visibility tab, click **\+ Add Visibility Rule**. 3. From the Component State dropdown, choose to show or hide the component. 4. To add a condition for the logic, click **Add Condition**. Choose values for all the conditions that you add. Add at least two conditions. 5. From the When dropdown, select **The Custom Logic Is Met**. 6. In the Custom Logic field, enter your custom logic expression. Consider these criteria when you build a custom logic expression: Include at least 2 conditions, use all the added conditions, and use only AND and OR operators. 7. Save your work. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Consider a scenario where you add three conditions: 1, 2, and 3. Your custom logic expression can be `1 AND 2 OR 3`. In this case, your component or variation would appear when the conditions 1 and 2 are met, or when only condition 3 is met. Another scenario: Consider the logic `((1 OR 2) AND (2 OR 3))`. In this example your component would appear when either condition 1 or 2 is met AND condition 2 or 3 is met. # Build and Customize Your Experience Cloud Site Choose from several preconfigured templates to create your site. Then customize the site to suit your needs and match your brand. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
- **[Which Experience Cloud Template Should I Use?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.siteforce_commtemp_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Cloud templates let you build responsive sites for delivering rich, branded spaces for your customers and partners. And with Experience Builder, you can accomplish a lot without coding. For example, you can edit a template’s components to include information about your site, add images to extend your branding, and include CMS content. And if you want a more customized experience, you can create custom pages, add components to pages, build custom Lightning components, and expose more Salesforce objects. - **[What Is the Enhanced Sites and Content Platform?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_enhanced.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The enhanced sites and content platform is a flexible new system that brings together Salesforce CMS and Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) sites. From Winter ’23, enhanced LWR sites and enhanced CMS workspaces that you create are hosted together on this redesigned platform, which offers partial deployment, improved content management, and expression-based visibility. - **[Create an Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_creating.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an Experience Cloud site using a wizard that helps you choose a template that meets your business needs. - **[Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Builder lets you easily style your site, create and customize pages, add drag-and-drop components, and deliver personalized experiences to different audiences. Choose a template to quickly start your site, and then style the pages to match your company’s branding. - **[Manage Your Site’s Pages and Their Properties in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_manage_pages_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Pages and Page Action menus centralize all your page-related needs, from page creation to audience criteria-based page visibility and everything in between. - **[Track Site Users with Your Google Analytics Tracking ID](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_google_id.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add your Google Analytics™ tracking ID to track page views. Enable access to your Salesforce data for deeper insights. Then, adjust your pages to more accurately reach your customers. - **[Multilingual Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Builder lets you create different language versions of your site to serve separate international audiences. For example, let’s say that you have customers in France and Germany. You can deliver the same site experience to each in the language that’s appropriate for their region. - **[Improve Experience Cloud Site Performance](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_performance_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Analyze your Experience Cloud site’s volume, traffic, and transaction loads to determine if your site could benefit from the many performance optimization tools available. - **[SEO for Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Search engine optimization (SEO) ensures that your public Experience Builder site is visible to search engines. SEO helps customers, partners, and visitors find your content via online search. - **[Connect Experience Cloud to Data Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_data_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To provide customers the personalized, individual experiences they now expect, you need detailed insights about your users and how you can best engage with them. By connecting your enhanced LWR sites to Data Cloud, you can capture and send user interaction data, such as clicks, scrolls, and product interactions, to Data Cloud. From there, you can organize your data and use it to create unified profiles, build robust site analytics, personalize your sites, generate recommendations, and discover new ways to use AI. - **[Add Salesforce CMS Content to Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_cms_content.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Digital Experiences App to create, manage, and publish engaging content for your Experience Builder site. Then display your Salesforce CMS content on your Aura or LWR site using Experience Builder tools. When you use Experience Builder sites together with Salesforce CMS, you can keep your brand and content consistent everywhere the content is published. - **[Add Salesforce CRM Data to LWR or Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_build_crm_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To help your users, customers, and partners accomplish more, share Salesforce CRM data on your Experience Builder site. Aura and LWR sites have different tools for displaying CRM data. - **[Configure Search Functionality in Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_build_configure_searches.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Help your visitors find what they’re looking for on your Experience Cloud sites. - **[Create a Branded Mobile App for Your Experience Cloud Site by Using Mobile Publisher](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_mobile_publisher.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Salesforce Mobile Publisher to create and distribute a fully branded mobile app for your Aura and LWR sites. - **[Lightning Bolt for Salesforce: Build Once, Then Distribute and Reuse](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Lightning Bolt for Salesforce lets you quickly build and distribute industry-specific Lightning Bolt Solutions to jump-start new org capabilities. Save time by building once and then reusing. Whether it’s for your own org or you’re a consulting partner or ISV, you can reduce the time required to implement solutions and cut development costs. - **[Customize Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update basic site settings like your site URL, site name, members, login options, and general preferences in the Administration tile of Experience Workspaces. - **[Enable Self-Service with Agentforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_self_service_agf.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give your customers an AI boost to help them resolve their issues on your Experience Cloud site. Add an AI agent to your site and define when the agent can start context-aware conversations. # Building Blocks of a Site An Experience Cloud site is composed of several layers that work together. Each layer contributes specific types of content and data. To help you understand how the pieces work together, let’s divide the components into major categories and discuss how they influence one another ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Developer, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
## Salesforce Platform Experience Cloud relies on the elements that you’ve created in your primary Salesforce org—all the applications that make up the Customer 360 platform, such as Commerce Cloud, Service Cloud, Sales Cloud, and Mulesoft. When you set up your org, you create users, profiles, and records that contain different types of data. You use all that data to power and populate your Experience Cloud site. You can use platform services built on Salesforce with your Experience Cloud sites. When we say platform services, we mean tools that are built on the Salesforce platform and can be used with many Salesforce products, including Experience Cloud. They aren’t tools that necessarily exist within the framework of Experience Cloud. For instance, you can use Flow Builder, Process Builder, or Apex triggers and classes with your site. Salesforce CMS (Content Management System) is a Lightning app where you can create, store, and manage all your content. Built on your Salesforce org, it exists outside of your site and provides a shared resource that you can use across multiple apps and sites. From that single location you can pull content into many sites and apps without having to recreate and manage the content. ## Security Your site is often the face of your company, useful for communicating with many types of users. To address complex access needs, you need a tailored approach to security and scale. The security settings are managed in several places, and some affect all sites while others are site-specific. Most settings are found in three separate locations: the Settings area in Experience Builder, user permissions in your Salesforce org, and your overall settings for Experience Cloud in Salesforce Setup. ## Presentation The presentation layer is where all the pieces come together and includes the Experience Builder templates and components. You can choose how your site displays to your audience and address accessibility concerns. Experience Builder components often draw from your Salesforce org to populate data and process actions taken by your users. Your personalization and security settings dictate what your users see and how they can interact with your site. ## Analytics When your site is live, you want to understand how users are interacting with it and how you can improve it. Using the Dashboard and Moderation tiles in Experience Workspaces, you can supervise your content and track user data with reports and dashboards. However, the analytics tools built on Experience Cloud are limited. To fully maintain the health of your site and deeply understand user interaction, we suggest implementing tools like Google Analytics or other third-party scripts. # Calendar View your events and others’ calendars from your Experience Builder site on your desktop or mobile device. Your admin can configure the calendar to display details in the side panel of the calendar component or they can hide the sidebar. Calendar sidebars are turned on by default and display your “My Events” calendar and other users’ calendars that have been shared with you. If your calendar is set up to display the side panel, you can collapse it if you need more space. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note There are a few things to keep in mind when using calendars from a site: - The option to hide or open the side panel in the Experience Cloud site Calendar is only available in calendars that have been configured to **Show Calendar Sidebar**. - Internal users and partners users can add a public calendar to their Other Calendars section. - When added as attendees, partners can see the event preview card, but they can’t edit or view complete event details. - Customer users can’t access public calendars and events. - Customer and partner users can’t add user records as attendees to events. - Partner users can invite people to calendar events using their email addresses. Because partner users can’t access other partner users’ email addresses, they can’t invite other partner users to calendar events. - Partner users can’t view shared calendars from mobile devices. You can share your My Events calendars with other team members and add their calendars to your view. If you want to change one of your events, simply drag it to a new time slot. 1. Select the **Calendar** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Show Calendar Sidebar | To display the calendar sidebar by default, select this option. To work with this item, use the full Salesforce site. | | Show Other Calendars | To display calendars that have been added to user’s calendar view, select this option. To work with this item, use the full Salesforce site. | | Let Users Create New Calendars | Turn on this option to create a calendar. To work with this item, use the full Salesforce site. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Calendar component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/calendar_component.png) # Campaign Marketplace With Campaign Marketplace, you can provide the structure and guidance necessary for partners to successfully execute campaigns. Channel marketers can create and share marketing campaigns, guidelines, and assets with partners. Partners can then choose which campaigns work best for them. Configure Campaign Marketplace to display pre-approved campaigns for partners. This feature is available in Lightning Experiences and Lightning Bolt solutions. 1. Select the **Campaign Marketplace** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | List View Name | This field looks up to the list view of campaigns created by the admin. | | Sort By | This field establishes how campaign tiles are categorized. | | Sort Order | This field establishes the order that campaign tiles appear in. | | Header Label | The label that appears at the top of the campaign marketplace. | | Show Image | Displays the Image field on a campaign. | | Highlight | Designates the field to highlight in the campaign marketplace. | | Highlight Color | Designates the color to highlight your campaigns with. | | Category Field | This field appears at the top of each campaign tile. Add a category field to callout important information about a campaign. | | Title Field | The title of the campaign. | | Body Field | Information displayed in the body of the campaign tile. | | Data Fields | Add data fields to call out additional important information about a campaign. The data fields appear at the bottom of the campaign tile. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Organize marketing campaigns with the Campaign Marketplace. ![Campaign Marketplace](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/campaign_marketplace.png) Add 1) highlights and 2) data fields to call out additional information about a campaign. ![Highlights and data fields](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/campaign_data_fields.png) # Capture Visitor Information with the Lead Form Component After you finish setting up your Guest User profile and configuring the correct object access, navigate to Experience Builder to configure the Lead Form component. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions.
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. From your Experience Builder canvas, select the Lead Form component. 2. Decide which fields you want displayed on your form. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note There are several required fields on the Lead object, including Last Name and Company. If you don’t want to display these fields on your form, uncheck **Show field** and enter a default value. 3. Choose to display standard fields, like Last Name, and add other Lead fields using the Custom Field sections. 4. To gather information from the form without displaying the field, use a custom field and under **Select an Input Type**, choose **Hidden**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note We strongly recommend that you avoid collecting and storing sensitive information in a hidden field. It’s possible for users to intercept and potentially change field information during data transfer. **Limitations and Behavior** - Keep in mind the possible scale of your use case. Microsites have an upper limit of 12,000 concurrent lead form submissions per minute. If you’re worried about exceeding this limit, reach out to your account executive. - The **Show Field** option determines whether a field displays on, and collects information from, the form. In contrast, hidden fields allow you to hide a field but still capture data. If you select **Hidden**, the form ignores **Show field** and hides the field. - Hidden fields capture the default value, unless you map to a standard field that exists on the form, such as Email. If you map to an existing field with a hidden field and another standard field, the visitor entered data is collected and the default value is ignored. - If multiple custom fields map to the same field on the Lead object, the last field collected is the field that is stored in the record. To avoid confusion, we recommend mapping each custom field to a unique field on the Lead object. - Certain default values require specific formatting. If you plan to map a custom field to a date, dateTime, multiple picklists, or reference field, use these formatting instructions. - Date: 2020-09-07 - DateTime: 2020-09-07T00:00:00Z - MultiplePicklist: A;B;C - Reference: Valid ID # Case Comments Publisher Use the Case Comments Publisher component to let customers and agents collaborate using comments on cases. Your customers can open cases, post comments, upload attachments, and check the status of their cases from any of their devices. The component provides a chronological, filterable list of comments your customers and agents have had within the context of a case. It includes case activities, internal and external comments, attachments, and status changes. When authenticated users add a comment to a case, they can add a file to the case as an attachment. So when a customer creates a case using a mobile phone, they can take a picture with their phone's camera and attach it to the case. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Users must have edit access on cases in order to attach files with the Case Comments Publisher component. By default, users can attach any supported file type that is 5 MB or less. You can restrict the types of files that users can upload by changing the default values for content types on the Library tab. 1. Select the **Case Comments Publisher** component in the page you're configuring. 2. To configure properties for the component, select the Properties pane: | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Case ID | Leave the default query string for the unless you plan to customize the component and add your own query string. The system uses the query string in this field to return the Case ID. | | Publisher Placeholder Text | Enter the text that appears in the search bar. The default value is **Write a new comment...**. | | Mobile Header Text | Enter the text that appears as the header for mobile users. Mobile and tablet see the text as the header for the comment text area. | | Can Attach Files | Lets users attach a file to the comment. | | Post Button Label | Enter the text for the button that submits the case or comment. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Case Comments Publisher component: ![Case Comments Publisher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/case_publisher.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Case Deflection The Case Deflection component searches text as it’s being entered into the Contact Support Form component, and returns relevant articles and discussions. If users don’t get the answer they need, they can continue with their request for support. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note For guest users, a case deflection search matches article titles only. It doesn’t return matches from the body of the article. If you built your Experience Cloud site before Spring \`18, you could be using the Create Case Form component. A revamped version, ushered in with Spring \`18, has split the component into two: the Contact Support Form and the Case Deflection components. We recommend you update your existing site to use the new components, as future updates and improvements are made on Contact Support Form and Case Deflection. Moreover, the new components allow you to use the Case Deflection Dashboard to verify the efficacy of your site’s case deflection. 1. Select the **Case Deflection** component in the page you’re configuring. Avoid placing the component in the template header or footer of the page. Doing so causes the component to appear on all pages. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | **General Settings** | Click to expand. | | Title | Bold text that appears over suggested articles and discussions. The default is **Need Answers Fast?**. | | Subtitle | Bold subtitle shown over suggested articles and discussions. The default is **Find what you need here.**. | | Maximum Suggestions to Display | Maximum number of suggested articles and discussions to show. The default is 6. | | **Empty State Content** | Click to expand. | | Topic ID | Use the dropdown menu to elect a topic to show before site users start entering text in the Contact Support Form component. If you leave this field empty, the component shows trending topics. | | **Content Types** | Click to expand. | | Articles | Select to include articles in suggestions. | | Discussions | Select to include discussions in suggestions. | | **Deflection Metrics** | Click to expand. You can view the data that’s gathered in this section in the Case Deflection Dashboard. This dashboard is available as part of the Salesforce Community Management Package, which you can find on AppExchange. | | Ask users if they’re satisfied with the suggested content | Let users tell you whether the suggested articles and discussions helped solve their case. | | Satisfaction Prompt | Ask users if they’re satisfied with suggestions. Default text is: **Did the content help solve your issue?** | | Ask follow-up prompt | Ask a follow-up question, provided users answer the first question. | | Follow-Up Prompt | Enter the text to use for your follow-up question. Default text is: **Stop creating your case?** | | Redirect URL for Abandoned Cases | The URL of the page you want users to see if they abandon their case. | | Confirmation Message | Default text is: **Got it!** | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Case Deflection component: ![Case Deflection component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_case_deflection.png) #### See Also - [Ask Button](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_ask_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Ask Button component lets users click a button to ask a question that is then published to the site. Users must log in to ask questions and participate in discussions.") - [Contact Support & Ask Buttons](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_contact_support.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Contact Support & Ask Buttons component adds two buttons to the page. The Contact Support button lets users click a button to create a case. The Ask button lets members ask a question and publish it to the site. All members must be logged in to ask the site a question.") # Change Chatter Group Roles In Salesforce Classic, you can change group roles for the groups that you own or manage. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note When the owner of a Chatter group is deactivated, the deactivated user still owns the group. But a user with the Modify All Data permission can assign a new owner for a public or private group. For unlisted groups, a user with the Manage Unlisted Groups permission can assign a new owner. 1. On the group’s detail page, click **Change Roles**. 2. To search for members, start entering a name in the search box. You can sort the list between **Managers** and **All Members** 3. Select the **Manager** checkbox for the people that you want to be managers. Customers who are group managers can see people who ask to join the group, even if they aren't in other common groups. They can also approve requests. To [change the group owner](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_editing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To change a Chatter group’s owner, edit group settings. Only the current group owner and people with the Modify All Data permission can change the owner."), you must own the group or have the right permission. Anyone with the Modify All Data permission can change the owner in public and private groups. Anyone with the Manage Unlisted Groups permission can change the owner for unlisted groups. To assign a new owner, click the **Group Settings** link next to the current owner. 4. Click **Done** # Change Document Authors Since documents are stored in folders that control user access, documents do not have owners like other types of records, but they do have authors. The author represents the user that originally uploaded the document file. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
User Permissions Needed
To change documents: Edit on documents
To change the author of a document: 1. View the document you want to modify. 2. Click **Change** next to the Author field. The **Change** link displays only on the detail page, not the edit page. If you do not see the **Change** link, you may not have sufficient privileges to change a document author. 3. Enter a new author name. Alternatively, click the lookup icon to choose from a list of users. 4. Check the Send Notification Email box if you would like to alert the new author of this change. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note When you change document authorship, Salesforce does not change the document’s visibility. # Change File Access in Lightning Experience Decide who can view and modify the files that you own. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
From the Sharing dialog, you can change file permissions for people and groups to Viewer, Collaborator, or Set by Record for files shared with records. - **Viewer** can view, download, and share files. - **Collaborator** can view, download, share, change permission, edit the file, and upload new versions. - **Set by Record** for a file attached to a record means that access to the file follows access to the record. People with read/write access to the record have Collaborator access to the file. People with read-only access to the record have Viewer access to the file. If you disable Standard sharing for Knowledge, and the access of the content on a Knowledge record is Set by Record, then the user must have the Modify All Data permission to get collaborator access. The user doesn’t inherit the collaborator access on the file attached to the Knowledge record based on the object-level access. - **Set by Library** for a file in a library means that access to the file follows access to the library. This setting can’t be changed. File owners and collaborators can change file permissions for people and groups from Viewer to Collaborator and conversely. They can also change file permissions for files shared with their company to Viewer, Collaborator, or No Access. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - A file is shared with your company when it's posted: - To a feed that all users can see - To a profile - To a record - To a public group _All Chatter users in your company_ are given Viewer permission by default. If you change that permission from Viewer or Collaborator to No Access, the file is no longer shared with the company or with public groups. - When you share a file with someone, they are given Collaborator access by default. When you share a file with a group, the group members are given Viewer access by default. You can change the default access when you share a file for the first time. File owners and collaborators can change access after a file has been shared. - File link recipients can only view and download files. They can't be collaborators. - Admins can also add the **Prevent others from sharing and unsharing** option to page layouts, letting users prevent further sharing of the file from the file detail page. 1. On the file preview page or from the file actions list, select **Share**. 2. Expand **Who Can Access**. 3. Change file permissions for people and groups using the menu, or click the **X** next to a person or record to stop sharing the file. # Change File Access in Salesforce Classic File owners and collaborators can change file permissions for people and groups. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
File owners can also change file permissions for files that are shared with their company. 1. On a file detail page, click **Share File** | **Sharing Settings**. 2. Find the person or group whose access you want to change, or change access for Any Chatter user in your company. 3. Select **Viewer**, **Collaborator**, or **No Access** (for your company). Or, for files shared with records, change to **Set by Record**. The change happens immediately. - **Viewers** can view, download, and share files. - **Collaborators** can view, download, share, change permission, edit the file, and upload new versions. - **Set by Library** for a file in a library means that access to the file follows access to the library. This setting can’t be changed. - **Set by Record** for a file attached to a record means that access to the file follows access to the record. People with read/write access to the record have **Collaborator** access to the file. People with read-only access to the record have **Viewer** access to the file. - **No Access** means that only the people in your company with whom this file is shared can find or view the file. If the file is shared with a private group, only members of the group can find or view the file. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - A file is shared with your company when it's posted: - To a feed that all users can see - To a profile - To a record - To a public group Any Chatter user in your company is given viewer permission by default. If you change the permission from viewer or collaborator to no access, you remove sharing to the company and to public groups. - When you share a file with someone, they are given Collaborator access by default. When you share a file with a group, the group members are given Viewer access by default. You can change the default access when you share a file for the first time. File owners and collaborators can change access after a file has been shared. #### See Also - [Who Can See My File?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_settings_perms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your files in Salesforce can be private to you, privately shared, or visible to your entire company. Learn how to identify a file’s sharing settings and how to change them.") - [Make a File Private](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_make_private.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can restrict access to shared files that you own by making them private.") - [Prevent Others from Sharing and Unsharing a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_freeze_sharing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can prevent others from sharing and unsharing a file that you own. Preventing others from sharing or unsharing doesn’t affect existing shares.") # Change from Help Center to a New Template Changing from a help center template to another template type is a simple process in itself. But the complexity increases with the things you must consider and actions you must take before you make the change. The complexity of a template change varies according to how much original help center content and configuration you want to preserve in the new template. Keep in mind that Salesforce partners have considerable experience with making template changes and can assist you with this process. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions
User Permissions Needed
To change a help center template
  • Create and Set Up Experiences
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Before you change templates in a production environment, try it out in your sandbox first. If you don’t try it out in your sandbox, you run a strong risk of losing data, wasting time, and creating unnecessary cost. In a template change, some objects and configurations are preserved and some aren’t. **Preserved after a Template Change** - Featured and navigational topics - Topic-to-article mapping - Data category-to-topic mapping - Data about trending articles and topics - Topic statistics - Your help center URL (but keeping the same URL is optional) **Not Preserved after a Template Change** - Your custom pages–There’s a workaround. You can export your custom pages before you change templates. After you change templates, you can import them into the new template. - Specific component configuration–Some configuration is preserved, like featured topics, navigational topics, and topic-to-article mapping. Some configuration isn’t preserved, like search and type-ahead search configuration. A template change offers an opportunity to revisit component configuration. For example, in your help center, you let customers search articles and cases. In your new template environment, you can widen your list of searchable objects to make many more object types easy to discover. - Branding–Before you change templates, consider whether you want to change or preserve brands in the new template. If you decide to keep the same brand, all the image assets used in the original template are available in your org’s asset library. You have access to this library in Experience Builder under **Theme** | **Images**. - Theme–When you change templates, the theme defaults to the new template’s theme. You can reuse theme elements from the original template by grabbing them from your org’s asset library. - CSS styles–You can copy your CSS styles under **Theme** | **Edit CSS**, and paste them into a text file. After you switch templates, you can copy-and-paste your CSS from the text file into the new site. After you preserve the things you want to retain from your original help center, you’re ready to change templates. 1. Ensure that you have the latest version of the help center template. 1. In Create and Set Up Experiences, open **Settings**, and click **Updates**. 2. Confirm that you understand the update changes, and click **Update**. 3. In the confirmation dialog, click **Update**. In the success dialog, click **Close**. 2. In the Administration Workspace, click **Settings** | **Change Template**. A message warns you that changing your siteʼs template permanently deletes all existing customizations and pages. 3. Click the tile for the template you’re changing to. 4. Click **Get Started**. 5. In the **Name** field, enter a name for your site. 6. In the **URL** field, enter the value you used for your help center or enter a new value. 7. Click **Create**. After your new template is in place, bring in the elements from the original help center template that you want to preserve. For example: - Import the custom pages you exported from your help center. - Configure page components. - Apply branding. - Adjust your theme, including pasting the custom CSS styles you preserved. - If you had featured topics in the help center, you can drag the Featured Topics component onto your Home page. Your original configuration of the Featured Topics component is preserved in the new template. #### See Also - [Update Your Experience Builder Site’s Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.communities_update_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "We introduce amazing features and enhancements with every release, so it pays to keep your Experience Builder site up to date! Typically, we automatically update your template to the latest version, so you can start adding the newest features to your site right away. However, when the changes are significant, you’re required to update your template manually.") - [Export a Customized Experience Builder Page for a Lightning Bolt Solution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Export pages that you’ve customized in an Experience Builder site. Use them as a base for new pages, or package and distribute them for others to use in their sites.") - [Considerations for Changing Your Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_template_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Changing your template affects site navigation, branding, and customizations.") - [Change Your Experience Cloud Site Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_template_change.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you use the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template, you can change your template to an Aura template or any installed Lightning Bolt Solution in Experience Builder. Changing templates isn’t available in LWR sites.") # Change the Access Level of a Chatter Group Edit a Chatter group’s settings to change its access level. For example, you open up an unlisted group to a wider audience by converting it to a private or public group. You can edit the settings for Chatter groups that you own or manage. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
User Permissions Needed
To edit public or private Chatter groups:

Group owner or group manager role

OR

Modify All Data to edit public and private groups

OR

Manage Unlisted Groups to edit unlisted groups

As a group owner or manager, you can change groups from private to public, or from public to private by [editing the group settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_editing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To change a Chatter group’s owner, edit group settings. Only the current group owner and people with the Modify All Data permission can change the owner."). When you change a private group to public, a few things happen: - Updates and files are visible to all users. - All pending requests to join the group are accepted. - Anyone can join the group. Private groups with customers can’t be converted to other group types. You can't change the group access level for private groups that allow customers. 1. In Salesforce Classic, click **Group Settings** on the group detail page. In the Lightning Experience, click the **Edit Group** button in the group header. 2. Change the access level for the group. 3. Save your changes. # Change the Content Layout in Experience Builder Quickly change the look of your Experience Builder site pages by switching to a different content layout. You can even create your own custom content layout components in the Developer Console and import them to use in your site. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip When you set up a new page or page variation, use a flexible layout. These highly customizable layouts are more adaptable than ready-to-use layouts, and you can re-create most fixed layouts by using a flexible layout. 1. In Experience Builder, open the page’s properties. Click ![Open Page Properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_properties_gear.png) beside the page on the top toolbar, or click **![Open Page Properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_properties_ellipsis.png)** | **Page Settings** beside the page in the Pages dropdown menu. ![Page menu in Experience Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/page_list_menu.png) 2. In the Layout section of Page Properties, click **Change**. ![Page properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_layout1.png) If a page variation is available, you can make it the active page by selecting the page variation. You can then change its content layout as required. ![Page Properties with page variation available](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_layout_variation.png) 3. Select the new layout. If you created a custom content layout component, you see both ready-to-use and custom content layouts displayed together. ![Change Layout dialog box](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_layout.png) You can’t use Lightning web components with the 2 column, 2:1 ratio, split-sidebar fixed layout. To incorporate Lightning web components on a page with this layout, use a flexible layout to create a page or page variation that’s arranged the same way. 4. Click **Change**. If the structure of the new layout is different from the current layout, some regions aren’t visible. However, the regions are still available and you can switch to a different layout at any time. If you change the layout of a default template page, the only way to revert to the original layout is to click **Undo**. #### See Also - [_Experience Cloud Developer Guide_: Create Custom Content Layout Components for Experience Builder](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/components_config_for_builder_layouts.htm) - [Create a Flexible Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_flexible_layout.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Build highly customized pages using flexible layouts. Create and resize columns within each section, then add and stack sections to build out the page. Bring it all to life with background images and color.") # Change the Owner of a Chatter Group To change a Chatter group’s owner, edit group settings. Only the current group owner and people with the Modify All Data permission can change the owner. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
User Permissions Needed
To edit public or private Chatter groups:

Group owner or group manager role

OR

Modify All Data to edit public and private groups

OR

Manage Unlisted Groups to edit unlisted groups

1. In Salesforce Classic, go to the group detail page and click **Group Settings**. In Lightning Experience, go to the header on the group detail page and click **Edit Group**. 2. Choose the owner from existing members. In the **Owner** field, enter a name or click the look-up icon to search group members. 3. Save your changes. #### See Also - [Add and Remove Chatter Group Members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_members_add.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Own or manage a Chatter group? Here’s how you add or remove group members.") # Change the Theme Layout of Your Experience Cloud Site’s Pages A theme layout defines the top-level regions of your page, such as the header and footer, navigation, search, and the user profile menu. A theme layout component categorizes the pages in your site that share a theme layout. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
A developer creates custom theme layout components in the Developer Console by implementing the `forceCommunity:themeLayout` interface. The developer can also add properties to a custom theme layout, which you can configure in the Theme panel area in Experience Builder. When the custom layout component is available, assign it to a theme layout to instantly transform the pages that use that layout. 1. In Experience Builder, click ![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings.png) on the left sidebar and then click **Theme**. ![The Theme area in Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings_theme.png) 2. To view and configure your theme layouts, select **Configure**. ![Experience Builder Theme Settings showing configure panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings_theme_configure.png) 3. If necessary, create a **New Theme Layout**. 4. Select a theme layout component for the theme layout. ![New theme layout type called Spring](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme2.png) 5. Update the theme layout’s settings, if available—properties vary depending on how your developer configured the theme layout component. ![Spring custom theme layout type](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme6.png) For example, the Default layout component in the Customer Service theme includes the following options for the header region. Hide the header region and navigation Hides the default site header on all site pages. The default site header includes the header image, search box, site menu, and user profile navigation menu. Select this option to replace the default header with a custom header. Hide notifications icon in site header Hides the notifications icon. Useful when you have a custom header or don’t use notifications. Search Component Replaces the default Search and Post component with a custom component, if available. User Profile Component Replaces the default Profile Header component with a custom version, if available. Set max page width Sets the maximum width of content across the page. The maximum width can be narrower than the overall display size of the header or footer. However, the Default layout component for the Jepson theme has different options. ![Configure area of Theme panel in Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings_theme_configure-options.png) Show header Displays or hides the header. Fix the header’s position Pins the header to the top of the scrolling area so that it remains visible while a customer is scrolling down through a long page. To see this working, publish and preview your site. The change doesn’t appear in Experience Builder. Show hero Displays or hides the theme’s hero image. Start hero under header Header visually overlaps the hero. We recommend using a transparent background for this header. 6. To apply the theme layout, select Override the default theme layout for this page (1). Selecting this option shows the Theme Layout options. Then, choose the new layout (2). ![The Page Properties area](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme5.png) #### See Also - [Custom Theme Layouts and Theme Layout Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_theme.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Theme layouts and theme layout components combine to give you granular control of the appearance and structure of each page in your site. Customize the layout’s header and footer to match your company’s style. Configure theme layout properties. Or use a custom search bar and user profile menu. Then use theme layouts to assign theme layout components to individual pages allowing you to quickly change layouts from one central location. Whether you’re a consulting partner or an ISV, or you simply want to revamp your own site, custom theme layouts make it easy to rebrand.") - [Page Properties and Types in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_prop.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Page Action menu to view and edit the properties of the pages that make up your Experience Builder site.") - [_Experience Cloud Developer Guide_: Create Custom Theme Layout Components for Experience Builder](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/components_config_for_builder_layouts.htm) - [_Experience Cloud Developer Guide_: Configure Swappable Search and Profile Menu Components](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/communities_dev_customize_swappable.htm) # Change the Theme of Your Experience Builder Site Experiment and find the theme that works best for your needs, without changing your content. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Changing themes is an easy, two-click effort in the **Theme** panel. Select **Change Theme** to see a list of available themes for your template. ![Theme Panel showing Change Themes selected](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme_panel_change.png) Your current theme is flagged as **Active**. Select any other theme, activate it, and it’s applied to your site. ![Change Themes theme list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme_changethemelist-active.png) Choosing a theme is just the start. Even if the defaults work for you, you’re not stuck with them. ![Theme panel with settings called out](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme_panel-adjustments.png) - Adjust the **Colors** (1) of text, backgrounds, and borders. - Upload background **Images** (2) and your company logo. - Select **Font** (3) styles. - Adjust **Theme Settings** (4) that are specific to the active theme. For example, choose: - whether to show the hero - whether to keep the header from scrolling - the width of page content Available settings are unique to the active theme. - Add, modify, and adjust components on the page individually to complete the experience. We remember the customizations that you create for your theme, even if you switch from the theme and then reactivate it later. What if you don’t like what you’ve customized? Easy, start fresh! ![Builder setttings with theme reset noted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings_theme_manage-reset.png) 1. In Experience Builder Settings (1), select **Theme**. 2. Click **Reset** (2) for your current theme. 3. Read the warning and then click **Reset** to confirm. 4. Alternatively, you can reset a theme back to its defaults the next time you reactivate it in the Change Theme panel by selecting **Replace and start fresh**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Using either **Reset** or **Replace and start fresh** deletes all of your customizations. - Branding sets - Theme regions (settings for common elements across pages like headers) - Theme settings - Custom theme layouts - Custom theme layout assignments for pages - Custom CSS overrides These settings aren’t retrievable, so be careful about selecting either **Reset** or **Replace and start fresh**. Many pre-built themes have multiple layouts, such as home, login, and content pages. Changing themes preserves your content, but a new theme doesn’t necessarily display your content in a useful or desirable manner. After a change, always reconfirm that your site still works the way you want it to. The Manage section of the Theme panel shows your currently active and configured themes. ![Theme section of Settings highlighting delete theme option](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings_theme_manage-menu.png) Chances are you aren’t using all of your themes, so you can delete (1) any extras here. Deleting a theme removes all of your customizations, similar to Reset. But you can add a fresh copy of the theme from the Change Theme section of the Theme panel. #### See Also - [Custom Theme Layouts and Theme Layout Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_theme.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Theme layouts and theme layout components combine to give you granular control of the appearance and structure of each page in your site. Customize the layout’s header and footer to match your company’s style. Configure theme layout properties. Or use a custom search bar and user profile menu. Then use theme layouts to assign theme layout components to individual pages allowing you to quickly change layouts from one central location. Whether you’re a consulting partner or an ISV, or you simply want to revamp your own site, custom theme layouts make it easy to rebrand.") - [Customize the Theme of Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_theme_customize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the theme of your Experience Builder site by adjusting everything from the size and color of your headers and footers, to the fonts and colors for active text. We can get you started, but you get to make the final tweaks to make the theme your own.") # Change Your Experience Cloud Site Template If you use the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template, you can change your template to an Aura template or any installed Lightning Bolt Solution in Experience Builder. Changing templates isn’t available in LWR sites. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura and Visualforce sites
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - Apart from the Help Center template, we don’t recommend changing from one Experience Builder template to another. So for example, avoid changing from a Customer Service template to a Partner Central template. Although the functionality is available for these templates, we recommend that you start afresh with a new template instead. If you do change from one template to another and lose your customizations, Salesforce Customer Support is unable to assist you. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important There’s no data loss when you change templates, but all customizations are lost. Be sure to review [Considerations for Changing Your Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_template_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Changing your template affects site navigation, branding, and customizations.") before changing your template. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Administration** | **Settings**. 3. Click **Change Template**. A message warns you that changing your siteʼs template permanently deletes all existing customizations and pages. 4. Choose the template you want to switch to. 5. When prompted, select **Change Template** to confirm your changes. After you change the template, you’re taken back to Experience Workspaces. Check to make sure your site pages, such as the Login page or Home page, are still the best choice for your updated site template. For example, if you previously had a Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template and switch to the Customer Service template, update your pages to use Experience Builder pages instead of Visualforce pages. If necessary, customize your site in Experience Builder and publish any changes you make. # Channel Menu Use the Channel Menu component to add the menu and button to your Experience Cloud site. 1. Complete these setup tasks to [add the Channel Menu to your Experience Cloud site](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=embedded_menu_communities.htm&language=en_US). 2. From the Components list, select the Channel Menu component and drag it onto the page that you’re configuring. 3. On the page, select the **Channel Menu** component. 4. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component: | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Channel Menu Deployment | Choose from the picklist for your org’s Channel Menu Deployment. | # Channel Program Member Limits Add up to 50,000 channel program members per organization. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Contact Salesforce Customer Support to increase the number of channel program members in your organization beyond the current limit. # Characteristics of Chatter Counts There are a few ways to determine how many people are looking at a Chatter post. There’s the view count, the Seen by count, and the counts you find in the Interaction Count Report. Although there’s crossover in terms of what’s being counted, the counts for a given post can be different for each type. Let’s examine why. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
The view count is available in all Chatter feeds. View count increases whenever someone likes, comments on, shares, or navigates to the detail view of the post. Views are counted each time one of these actions is taken. That is, if you visit a feed item detail view in the morning, then again in the afternoon, that’s counted as two views. When the person who posted visits that feed item later in the day, it’s counted as a view. The Seen by count is available in private and unlisted Chatter groups. The count increases whenever someone likes, comments on, edits, shares, or navigates to the detail view of a post. An item is also considered seen when a user has it in view on their screen or when they scroll past it. A seen-by action is counted only once for a given person. The person who posted the feed item isn’t included in the count. If you visit a feed item detail in the morning, then again in the afternoon, that’s counted as one seen-by event. A feed item’s seen-by count can differ from its view count. With seen-by, more actions are counted and each person’s activity is counted only once. In a Chatter feed, you typically get one count or the other. View count and seen-by count almost never appear together in the same feed. There are rare occasions when seen-by information isn't available and view count is displayed instead. If you turn seen-by off for a selected profile, the users with that profile see view count. The Interaction Count Report shows the top 100 feed item views over the last week in your org or Experience Cloud site. The count you get from an Interaction Count Report increases when someone likes, comments on, shares, or navigates to the feed item’s detail view. Interactions are counted each time one of these actions is taken. For example, when a user comments on a post three times, it’s counted as three views. In this way, view count and the interaction count are alike. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Actions performed through APIs are counted in the same way as actions performed through the UI. However, actions can have different names in APIs. For example, Seen by is called “read by” and views are called “interactions” in Connect REST API and Connect in Apex. So, why don’t the counts in the Interaction Count Report match the view count? There are three reasons. - Interaction counts aggregate only one week of data at a time. View counts aggregate continuously over time. - Interaction counts include only the top 100 feed items that had the most views within a week. - Multiple views by the same user within a brief period are each counted as interactions. Multiple views within the same period are counted only once for view counts. Here’s another way to look at these differences. | Questions | Interaction Count Report | View Count | Seen By Count | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Can one viewer be counted more than once? | ![Yes](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Yes](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   | | Are likes, comments, shares, and visits to the detail view counted? | ![Yes](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Yes](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Yes](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Does scrolling past the feed item or having it in view count? |   |   | ![Yes](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | When they take an included action, like commenting or sharing, is the feed item author included in the count? | ![Yes](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Yes](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   | | Are multiple views by the same person within a brief period counted as multiple views or interactions? | ![Yes](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   |   | | Do actions performed through APIs count in the same way as actions performed through the UI? | ![Yes](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Yes](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Yes](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | #### See Also - [Anatomy of a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_post_anatomy.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Here’s a quick look at all the information that surrounds a typical Chatter post in Lightning Experience.") # Chatter Activity and Influence Check your Chatter influence, and see your personal Chatter activity statistics. Check such statistics as how many posts you’ve made and how many likes or upvotes you’ve received. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Chatter activity statistics include the number of your posts and comments, comments received, and people who like or upvote your posts and comments. Chatter influence shows how your activity stacks up to other people’s. - Top Influencers lead collaboration efforts by regularly sharing essential content. - Active Influencers encourage others to get involved and share knowledge. - Observers are quiet participants or just getting started in Chatter. You can see your Chatter activity statistics and influence on your profile under your photo. You can also see your coworkers' Chatter activity and influence on their profiles. When viewing a profile, hover over ![information icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/info_icon.png) under the profile photo for details about how that person is uniquely influential. #### See Also - [Chatter Profile Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_profile_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize your personal Chatter profile. Add a photo and information about yourself so others can learn more about you.") # Chatter Customers in Private Groups Chatter customers are people outside your company's email domains. Customers can see only the groups they're invited to. They can interact only with members of those groups. Customers can’t see any Salesforce information. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Chatter customers: - Can be added to Chatter only if: - A manager or owner of a group that [allows customers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_creating.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create public, private, and unlisted Chatter groups to collaborate with your teams and work together on projects.") invites them to the group. - An administrator adds them in Setup by entering Users in the Quick Find box, then selecting **Users**. - Can see only: - Groups they belong to. - People in groups they belong to. Customers see only limited profiles. In a profile, they see photo, name, title, email, common group memberships, common files, and activity statistics and influence. They can't post to profiles. - Files shared to groups that they belong to. - Can't see: - Records or other Salesforce information, even in search results. - Topics, including topics in the feed, the topics list, topic detail pages, Recently Talked About, and Trending Topics. (Customers can see hashtag (#) topics.) - Recommendations and can't be recommended to others. Groups that allow customers can't be recommended. - Are identified as customers in profiles and in the groups they belong to. You can identify customers and groups with customers by the orange upper left corner of their photo. - Have limited profiles that include name, photo, title, company, email, feed, group membership, file ownership, and activity statistics and influence. - Can't be followed. Customers can't follow people or files. - Can be group members and managers. If the customer is a manager, they can see users who request to join the group, even if they aren't in other common groups. And they can approve requests. - Can't own, create, delete, moderate, join, or ask to join groups. - Can invite people that they're in common groups with to join groups that they manage. - Can't invite people inside your company's domain whose profiles they can't see. ## Considerations for Mobile Users Chatter customers can log in and use the Salesforce mobile app. The same restrictions are applied to customer users as when using Chatter on the web. #### See Also - [Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_about.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you're working on a team, you can create a group for your team to share mission-related files and information. Share information through the group feed.") - [Add or Remove Customers in Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_external_adding.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If customer invitations are enabled for your organization, you can invite, add, and remove customers.") # Chatter Desktop Control access to Chatter Desktop and install and configure the Chatter Desktop Managed Version. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. For more information, see [Chatter Desktop Retirement](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=000267581&type=1&language=en_US). - **[Control Access to Chatter Desktop](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_admin.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter Desktop is enabled for most organizations, but administrators can control access to Chatter Desktop. - **[Install Chatter Desktop Managed Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_installing_managed_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce provides two Chatter Desktop installers: a standard version for individual installations and a managed version for enterprise deployments. - **[Configure Chatter Desktop Managed Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_configuring_managed_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Control Chatter Desktop settings by deploying an XML-based configuration file to each user's machine. The configuration in the file overrides the user's settings. # Chatter Desktop Chatter Desktop is a free desktop application that lets you collaborate in Chatter without a browser. Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
For more information, see [Chatter Desktop Retirement](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=000267581&type=1&language=en_US). Use Chatter Desktop to post and comment in Chatter, and receive updates about your groups and the people, records, and files that you follow. Chatter Desktop also supports chat and private Chatter messages. It displays Chatter updates and private messages as popup notifications in your Windows taskbar or Mac OS X Dock. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Customer users can install and use Chatter Desktop but can’t access all its functionality. For example, customer users can’t follow users or records, chat, or access administration options. - **[Install Chatter Desktop](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_installation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. - **[Connect Chatter Desktop](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. - **[Configure Chatter Desktop](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_configuring.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. - **[Using Chatter Desktop](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. - **[Chatter Desktop Troubleshooting Tips](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_troubleshooting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find solutions for troubleshooting Chatter Desktop. - **[Disabling Chatter Desktop Remotely](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_disabling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. - **[Uninstall Chatter Desktop](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_uninstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** How to uninstall Chatter Desktop. - **[Chatter Desktop Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_release.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. # Chatter Desktop Releases Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018.
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions.
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. For more information, see [Chatter Desktop Retirement](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=000267581&type=1&language=en_US). This table describes the updates in each Chatter Desktop release.
Version Updates
3.2.3
  • Installer certificate update
3.2.2
  • Installer certificate update
3.2.1
  • Installer certificate update
3.2
  • Configure desktop alerts for new feed posts and comments
  • Configure Chatter Desktop to always display in the foreground
  • Delete feed posts if you have access
  • Post in all public groups
  • Scrolling and active links supported in group descriptions
  • Miscellaneous bug fixes including negative counts and names displayed twice in likes and broken hash tag topic links.
3.1.1
  • Installer certificate update
3.1
  • Attach files to comments
  • View your chat list sorted by first name
  • View the last activity date for your groups
  • View multiple chats more easily
  • Sort your chat favorites by people’s availability
  • See improved icons for your Chatter feed and file dragging and dropping to your posts
3.0
  • Chat with one or more people in your organization
  • Like comments
  • View a list of people who like a post or comment
  • View files attached to comments
  • View dashboard snapshots
  • View shared messages
  • Several miscellaneous bug fixes, including feed improvements using new components and an issue that prevented adding an @mention after a #topic
2.1
  • Support for customer users
  • Support for private Chatter messages
  • Miscellaneous bug fixes, including an issue with popup notifications stealing OS focus
2.0
  • A new user interface and visual design
  • View records
1.3.3
  • Global search for @mentions
  • Create instances on the Login screen
  • Switch and authenticate instances without restarting
  • Miscellaneous bug fixes, including an issue that generated empty notifications and an issue with the installer
1.3.2
  • An intermediate build to accommodate changes to Adobe AIR. Chatter Desktop immediately performs an extra update after 1.3.2 installs.
1.2.1
  • Locale fixes for Norwegian, Danish, Finnish, and Dutch
1.2.0
  • User and group details
  • Links to indicate you like a post
  • @mentions, which render in feeds and link to the mentioned user's profile
  • #topics, which render in feeds and link to search results in your browser
  • Auto-complete for @mentions and #topics
  • Performance improvements including image caching
  • Norwegian language support
  • Miscellaneous bug fixes
1.1.1
  • Updated for use with chatter.com
  • Minor bug fixes
1.1.0
  • Click files to preview them
  • Select the To:Me tab to see posts directed to you
  • Click groups and users to view their walls
  • Write on the walls of groups and users
1.0.7
  • Photo loading issue resolved
1.0.6
  • Performance optimizations for people and groups
  • Release of Chatter Desktop managed version
1.0.5
  • An option to log into your Developer Sandbox
  • Performance optimizations
  • Korean locale fixes
#### See Also - [Install Chatter Desktop](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_installation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018.") # Chatter Desktop Troubleshooting Tips Find solutions for troubleshooting Chatter Desktop.
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions.
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. For more information, see [Chatter Desktop Retirement](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=000267581&type=1&language=en_US). Chatter Desktop uses Adobe® Integrated Runtime (AIR®). This table describes solutions to common AIR-related issues. For more information, consult the Adobe® knowledge base.
Problem Solution
The Chatter Desktop installation fails

Delete the Shared Local Object (SLO) and Encrypted Local Store (ELS) directories and reinstall Chatter Desktop.

The SLO stores persistent information, like last screen position and size, and is on these paths for these operating systems:

  • Mac OS: /[USER]/Library/Preferences/sfdc-desktop*
  • Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8.x: C:\Users\[USER]\AppData\Roaming\sfdc-desktop*

  • Windows XP:C:\Documents and Settings\[USER]\Application Data\sfdc-desktop*

The ELS stores the Oauth2.0 identities for users and is at

  • Mac OS:/[USER]/Library/Application Support/Adobe/AIR/ELS/sfdc-desktop*
  • Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8.x:C:\Users\[USER]\AppData\Roaming\Adobe\AIR\ELS\sfdc-desktop*

  • Windows XP:C:\Documents and Settings\[USER]\Application Data\Adobe\AIR\ELS\sfdc-desktop*
Chatter Desktop on Linux freezes, presents an empty window, doesn’t save your password, or malfunctions in another way

If you’re using the managed installation, verify

  • The .chatterdesktop file is well-formed and contains valid XML
  • The URLs in the .chatterdesktop file are valid, and each URL begins with https:// and ends with salesforce.com

Also troubleshoot your Encrypted Local Storage (ELS) keystore. For more information, see http://kb2.adobe.com/cps/492/cpsid_49267.html

Chatter Desktop doesn’t preview PDF files Chatter Desktop uses Adobe® Acrobat® Reader to preview PDF files. Before you preview files with Chatter Desktop, download Adobe Acrobat from Adobe's website, install it, and open it at least once to complete the installation.
Photos with comments don’t refresh Click the sync icon.
#### See Also - [Configure Chatter Desktop](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_configuring.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018.") # Chatter Email Digests Email digests conveniently summarize recent activity in Chatter so you don’t miss important discussions. You can choose to receive daily or weekly summaries of updates from your personal feed or any group’s feed. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Personal digests include the updates that you see in your own Chatter feed. In a personal digest, you see updates about the groups that you belong to and the people, records, and files that you follow. Group digests include updates from groups’ Chatter feeds. Daily digests include up to 50 of the latest posts from the previous day. Weekly digests include up to 50 of the latest posts from the week. All posts in each digest show their three latest comments. Chatter sends daily digests at approximately midnight every day, and weekly digests at approximately midnight on Sunday. For user digests, the time is according to the user’s time zone. For group digests, the time is according to the organization’s time zone. Neither time is configurable. When you become a member of a group, you don’t receive email notifications initially because they’re turned off by default. You can use Set default frequency for groups I join:, in your personal Chatter Email Notifications settings, to choose how often to receive emails from new groups. Changing the default frequency doesn’t affect the groups you already belong to. If your organization existed before Summer ’11 and is a Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, or Developer Edition organization, you may still receive daily digests by default. #### See Also - [Navigate to Chatter Email Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_email_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In your personal Chatter email settings, you can change your preferences for receiving email notifications and digests. On a group page, you can set your notification preferences for that group.") - [Guidelines for Managing Your Personal Chatter Email Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_email_notify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Control the number of Chatter emails that you receive by choosing your most important feeds. And set the best frequency for personal and group digests.") # Chatter Email Settings and Branding You can change the format of your company’s outgoing emails and control whether users receive email notifications. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
If Chatter is enabled, email notifications are enabled by default. However, your users can configure their own email settings. They control whether they receive emails, how often they receive them, and the types of changes that trigger notifications. Configure general Chatter email settings and branding from Setup. Enter Email Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Email Settings**. This table describes the settings.
Setting Description
General Settings  
Allow Emails Enables or disables email notifications for your entire company. If you deselect this option, all email notifications are disabled and your users don’t receive notifications.
Allow Email Replies If selected, users can reply to email notifications about messages and comments via email instead of navigating to the comment or message in Chatter.
Allow Posts via Email If selected, users can post to groups through email.
Allow Attachments via Email If selected, users can include attachments on posts to groups that are made through email.
Show mobile app download badges

Show App Store and Google Play download badges for Salesforce in all Chatter email notifications from your internal org.

Badges don’t appear in email notifications from Experience Cloud sites. A recipient’s language setting affects whether badges appear: if a badge isn’t translated in the set language, it doesn’t appear in the email. The show badges option is selected by default.

Allow API-only Chatter Digests

This setting appears only if API-only Chatter Digests are enabled for your company. To enable this feature, contact Salesforce.

When you select this option, daily and weekly scheduled digests are disabled for your entire company. To provide digests to your users, you must call the API.

Sender  
From Name The name that appears as the sender’s name in the email notification. Enter a name in this field if you want the sender name to contain a static value, such as your company’s name. If you leave this field blank, a dynamic name is used.
Email Address

The email address of the sender. For example, add your company’s email address. This field is required for Chatter email notifications to be sent.

A few things to keep in mind:

  • If the Allow Email Replies setting isn’t selected, then replies sent via email go directly to this email address and don’t appear on the Chatter post.
  • Chatter email notifications are only sent from verified email addresses.
  • Don’t use a distribution email list in this field. Verification emails are sent when this field is populated. If you use a distribution email list, verification emails are sent to everyone in that list.
Branding  
Logo The Chatter logo appears in the email notification by default. To keep your email notifications consistent with your company’s brand, upload your company logo and replace the default.
Footer Text The text that appears in the footer of the notification email. We strongly recommend including your company’s physical address to comply with applicable anti-spam laws.
# Chatter Favorites Overview In Salesforce Classic, Chatter favorites give you easy access to list views, Chatter feed searches, and topics that you want to stay on top of. You can find Chatter favorites on the Chatter tab.
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
For example, imagine that you and your coworkers use the hashtag topic #acme to track information about your customer Acme. Consider adding #acme as a favorite so you can easily access these updates without leaving the Chatter tab. You can have up to 50 favorites. If you haven't added any favorites, the Favorites section doesn't appear on the Chatter tab. Chatter shows the four favorites most recently added or viewed. - Click a favorite to see the updates. - To see all your favorites, click **n more**. - Click ![Remove favorite](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_delete_x.png), which appears on hover, to remove a favorite. - **[Add a Chatter Feed Search as a Favorite](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_favorites_feed_adding.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Salesforce Classic, add a Chatter feed search as a favorite to access feed updates quickly without leaving the Chatter tab. - **[Add a Topic as a Chatter Favorite](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_favorites_topics_adding.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a topic as a favorite to see the latest on the topics you’re interested in. - **[Add a List View as a Chatter Favorite](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_favorites_listview_adding.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To monitor key business processes directly from your Chatter tab, add a list view as a Chatter favorite. # Chatter Feature Availability Let’s compare the Chatter features that are available in Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, Experience Builder sites, and the Salesforce mobile app.
Available in: Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, Experience Builder sites, and the Salesforce mobile app
Available in Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
## Chatter General
Feature Lightning Experience Salesforce Classic Experience Builder Sites Salesforce App
Chatter tab Check mark Check mark — Check mark
Compact feed — — Check mark —
Company verify answers — — Check mark —
Direct messages — — Check mark —
Edited marker Check mark Check mark Check mark —
Feed caching Check mark — Check mark Check mark
Feed moderation — — Check mark —
Feed tracked changes Check mark Check mark Check mark Check mark
Filters Check mark Check mark Check mark Check mark
Find in feed Check mark Check mark Check mark Check mark
Follower list Check mark Check mark Check mark Check mark
Infinite scrolling Check mark — — Check mark
Liked By card Check mark Check mark Check mark

Check mark

(iOS only)

Likes Check mark Check mark Check mark Check mark
Live comments Check mark — — —
Mute and unmute Check mark Check mark Check mark —
Notifications, email Check mark Check mark Check mark Check mark
Notifications, in-app Check mark — Check mark Check mark
Quick actions composer Check mark Check mark Check mark Check mark
Recommendations Check mark Check mark Check mark —
Seen by list on post Check mark —   —
Share post Check mark Check mark Check mark Check mark
Share post link Check mark Check mark Check mark —
Streams Check mark — Check mark —
Top rated answers — — Check mark —
View count on post Check mark — Check mark —
## Chatter Publisher | **Feature** | **Lightning Experience** | **Salesforce Classic** | **Experience Builder Sites** | **Salesforce App** | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | [Attachments](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_files_uploading.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | [Bookmarks](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_feed_bookmark_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | [Code snippets](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_admin_code_snippets.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | | [Code snippets in comments](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_admin_code_snippets.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | | [Delete comment](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_feed_posting.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | [Edit comment, plain text](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_feed_posting.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | [Edit comment, rich text](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_feed_posting.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | | [Edit post](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_feed_posting.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | | [File publisher](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=content_files_upload.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | — | — | | [Link publisher](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_attach_parent.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Overflow menu | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | | [Poll publisher](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_feed_polls.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | [Question publisher](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_chatter_questions_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | [Rich link previews](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_admin_rich_previews.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | | [Rich publisher apps](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=networks_chatter_rich_publisher_apps.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | — | — | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | | [Rich text comments](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=fields_using_html_editor.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | | [Rich text posts](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=fields_using_html_editor.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | | [Thanks](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=chatter_thanks.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | — | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | [Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_topics_add.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | [Upvote/downvote](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=networks_chatter_updown_vote.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | — | — | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | ## Files in Chatter | **Feature** | **Lightning Experience** | **Salesforce Classic** | **Experience Builder Sites** | **Salesforce App** | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | [Content libraries in feed file picker](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_files_uploading.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | | [Files Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_admin_files_connect.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | — | | [Inline images, add to posts](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=fields_using_html_editor.htm&type=5&language=en_US) [1](#fntarg_1) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | | [Inline images, add to comments](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=fields_using_html_editor.htm&type=5&language=en_US) [2](#fntarg_2) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | | [Multi-attach in feed](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_files_attach_multiple.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | | [Visibility control over files in records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_files_make_private_on_record.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | ## Chatter Groups | **Feature** | **Lightning Experience** | **Salesforce Classic** | **Experience Builder Sites** | **Salesforce App** | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | [Announcements](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_group_announcement.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | | Customizable banner | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | — | — | | [Filter by unread posts](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_group_filters.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | | [Live feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_group_live_feed.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | — | — | | [Post pinning](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_admin_pin_post.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) [3](#fntarg_3) | — | ## Chatter Profiles | **Feature** | **Lightning Experience** | **Salesforce Classic** | **Experience Builder Sites** | **Salesforce App** | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Customizable banner | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | — | — | | Hover card | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | — | | [Out-of-office setting](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=collab_admin_out_of_office.htm&type=5&language=en_US) | ![Check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | — | — | — | [1](#fnsrc_1) Copying inline images from external sources and pasting them into the editor isn’t supported. [2](#fnsrc_2) Copying inline images from external sources and pasting them into the editor isn’t supported. [3](#fnsrc_3) Post pinning isn’t available in compact feeds. # Chatter Features in Aura and Visualforce Sites Chatter is available in sites built using Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce templates. While many features that support customer and partner site are available only in Aura sites, some features are available in both types of templates. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura and Visualforce sites
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Add Rich Publisher Apps to Your Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_rich_publisher_apps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the Chatter publisher with payloads that are unique to your business process. Add a form to a post; choose from a selection of branding images; add inspiration to your feed with profound quotations. Select from the custom apps your team creates or acquires from AppExchange. Add up to five apps to the Chatter publisher. - **[Enable Chatter Questions in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_chatter_questions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter Questions helps you promote engagement by giving users the ability to ask and answer questions in their Chatter feed, in groups, and in records. Members in your users’ groups and Experience Cloud sites can answer questions in Chatter just as they would comment on a Chatter post. Users in sites built on the Customer Service template can also attach files to questions. - **[Data Model for Peer-to-Peer Conversations in Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_convo_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Cloud uses Chatter behind the scenes for peer-to-peer conversations in Experience Cloud sites. To keep conversations in your internal org separate from the ones in an external-facing site, each Chatter post or conversation is tied to the Experience Cloud site that it belongs to. If you have more than one external-facing site, the same is true for conversations in each site—each one is tied to the site that it belongs to. # Chatter Features in Aura Sites Chatter is a social network for holding and preserving discussions in a business, customer site, or other enterprise. Site members can use Chatter to engage with your organization, seek expert advice, and revisit relevant discussions. Chatter gives you a direct view into your site, fostering insight and inspiration. In sites, Chatter is often referred to as feeds or discussions. While Chatter is available in sites built using Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce templates, lots of extra features that support customer and partner site are available only in Aura sites. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). For example, threaded discussions add dimension to your feeds by including the power to reply to answers and comments. Company verification puts your organization’s stamp of approval on an answer to a customer question. Streams join multiple feeds together into one mega-feed. Direct messages create break-out sessions with a customer or partner needing individual attention. - **[Close a Conversation, Poll, or Question in an Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_close_thread.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The question is answered, the topic discussed, the poll decided. What do you do now? You end the conversation. Admins, moderators, and permitted members can close a question, poll, or post in an Aura site. And, if needed, they can reopen it. It’s a nice way to stop the churning on a settled matter. - **[Pin Posts in an Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_pin_post.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Pin a post to give more exposure to your most critical information. In your site’s group and topics feeds, an authorized user can pin up to three posts to the top of the feed. A pinned post stays in place until an authorized user unpins it. Pinning a post is only available in Aura sites. - **[Add Groups to an Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_add_groups_to_communities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Want more collaborative sites or communities? Give site members and guest users the ability to browse and join groups in your Aura site. Use the standard design for groups or create your own customized version of the group detail page using separate components. - **[Move Feed Items from One Public Group Feed to Another](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_movefeeditem.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Aura, the **Move** option on feed item dropdown menus offers a way to relocate feed items from one public group feed to another. Use Move to improve an item’s visibility or to place it in a more relevant context. For example, if a user posts a Sales poll in a Marketing feed by mistake, the poll can easily be moved to the right location. System Administrators, Community Managers, and Chatter Moderators can move posts, polls, and questions. - **[Threaded Discussions in an Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_threaded_discussions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you talk to people, it’s rarely like a feed, where one person asks a question and everyone else answers. In real life, when one person asks a question, someone answers, and then there's a reply to that answer, and a reply to that reply. With threaded discussions, you can participate in this lively flow in your sites. - **[Chatter Streams in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_streams_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your Aura site members can combine multiple feeds into a stream to create a single point of access to related information. Combine feeds of top contributors or discussions concerning a particular product line. Create a stream that combines feeds from discussions, groups, topics, profiles, and all kinds of objects, like cases, opportunities, and accounts. No more jumping from feed-to-feed to figure out what people are saying. Each member can create up to 100 streams. - **[Enable Direct Messages in an Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_direct_messages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Allow members to send direct messages to start a private conversation with up to 16 people, including the sender. Direct messages are supported in all Aura sites and in Lightning Bolt Solutions, such as the Lightning Partner Management solution. - **[Verify Answers for Your Company](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_company_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes there’s more than one correct answer to a question. Among the correct answers, your company can prefer one course for people to follow. You can highlight an answer that your company endorses by marking it as Company Verified. Questions marked as Company Verified or as Best Answer are copied to the top of the thread under a Top Rated Answers section. #### See Also - [Enable Code Snippets and Assign Permissions to Use Them](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_code_snippets.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Rename the Chatter Tab](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_rename_chatter_tab.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Most likely, many of your Experience Cloud site members use the Chatter tab as their home base. You can customize it to meet your company's branding.") - [Pin Posts in an Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_pin_post.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Pin a post to give more exposure to your most critical information. In your site’s group and topics feeds, an authorized user can pin up to three posts to the top of the feed. A pinned post stays in place until an authorized user unpins it. Pinning a post is only available in Aura sites.") - [Verify Answers for Your Company](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_company_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Sometimes there’s more than one correct answer to a question. Among the correct answers, your company can prefer one course for people to follow. You can highlight an answer that your company endorses by marking it as Company Verified. Questions marked as Company Verified or as Best Answer are copied to the top of the thread under a Top Rated Answers section.") - [Enable Upvotes and Downvotes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_updown_vote.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable upvoting and downvoting in lieu of liking questions and answers in your Experience Cloud site. When you enable upvoting and downvoting, members see an Upvote option under a question or answer and a Downvote option on the question or answer’s overflow menu. The Like option goes away. Upvoting and downvoting are disabled by default in Experience Cloud sites created in Spring ’19 and later.") - [Add Rich Publisher Apps to Your Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_rich_publisher_apps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the Chatter publisher with payloads that are unique to your business process. Add a form to a post; choose from a selection of branding images; add inspiration to your feed with profound quotations. Select from the custom apps your team creates or acquires from AppExchange. Add up to five apps to the Chatter publisher.") # Chatter Feed Search Results Searches in Chatter feeds return the posts and comments that include your search terms. These results are the same whether your search is global or feed-level. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
Watch a Demo: [![Watch Video Demo](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/play_btn.png) Search in Salesforce Classic](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/L6lwYMJUyH1n8sKr7KQDaA) Changes to record fields aren't included in search results. For example, imagine that you have enabled feed tracking on the Billing Address field for the Acme account. Then you modify the Acme billing address. Search results for Acme don't include _Acme — Suzanne Powell changed Billing Street to 10 Main Road._ You can perform many of the same actions in your feeds search results as you can in a feed. - Sort your search results by posts only or by posts and comments. - Comment on, like, share, bookmark, and delete posts. - Add, edit, or delete topics on posts. - Follow, share, download, preview, and upload new versions of files. - View the detail pages for Chatter files, groups, topics, and people by clicking the respective name in the update. - View a single feed update by clicking the timestamp below the update, for example, **Yesterday at 12:57 AM**. - On the Chatter tab in Salesforce Classic, click **Add to Favorites** to save a Chatter feed search to your favorites. In Salesforce Classic, to view search results for records, such as accounts, contacts, people, groups, topics, and files, click **Records** at the top left of the page. In Lightning Experience, you can focus in on one type of object by clicking that object name in the left column of search results. To view results for various objects, click **Top Results**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip For a more focused search of the feeds in a specific group, profile, record, or other Chatter feed, use fedd search. Salesforce supports hyperlinks and entity links, but only hyperlinks are searchable. An entity link is a user at-mention or a record slash-mention. An easy way to tell if a link is a hyperlink or entity link is to hover over the link in a post. If a hover card pops up with details about the user or record, then it’s an entity link. If there’s no hover card but instead a tooltip with the link url, then it’s a hyperlink. # Chatter Feeds Overview Follow people and records to see updates about them in Chatter. Updates appear in feeds on profiles, groups, the Chatter tab, topic detail pages, and on record detail pages. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Typically, following lets you see updates about: - Feed comments and posts - Posts, comments, and files on Chatter groups that you're a member of - Shared files and links - Tasks and events - Converted leads - Record field changes, like changes to record owner and closed opportunities and cases. Record updates are also called system-generated posts and feed tracked changes. They are updates that Salesforce automatically generates when someone creates a record or changes a tracked field on a record. The record updates that you see depend on how your administrator has configured feed tracking and whether you have access to the record. You don’t see tracked feed updates that are older than 45 days and have no likes or comments, because they are deleted automatically. Tracked changes in a feed can be bundled together for quick and easy reading. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note In Lightning Experience, the What I Follow feed on the Chatter home page has a **Fewer Updates** filter for omitting system-generated posts from your feed view. Printing is supported only for Chatter feeds associated with a case. See [Printable View in Case Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.case_interaction_printable_view.htm&type=5&language=en_US). #### See Also - [Share a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_sharing_post.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Sharing lets you quickly copy a public post to your profile or a group. This feature is available in Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience.") # Chatter for SharePoint Is EOL As of the Summer ’17 release, Salesforce Chatter for SharePoint reached end-of-life and is no longer supported. Chatter for SharePoint was a SharePoint plugin that let users access Chatter feeds from within SharePoint 2010. Salesforce has moved away from this solution to focus its development efforts on other user productivity capabilities. As you move away from the SharePoint plugin, there’s no need to worry about data loss. All Chatter data continues to reside securely in the Salesforce org. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, Developer, and Database.com Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note We removed the Chatter for SharePoint download from Setup in the Winter ’16 release. Going forward, the connection from SharePoint to the Salesforce org Chatter feed doesn’t function. So, existing users who try to access the plugin get an error message. To identify users who have the plugin, search in SharePoint for users with access to pages where the Chatter for SharePoint plugin is deployed. If you want to replace Chatter for SharePoint, we recommend that you move to SharePointAdept Chatter for SharePoint. A usage note, though: SharePointAdept doesn’t create Files Connect file references. Alternatively, you can build a custom integration using the Chatter public API. If you have questions, you can reach us by filing a case with Salesforce Support through Salesforce Help. # Chatter Group Archiving If a group has no new feed posts or comments for 90 consecutive days, the group is archived automatically. When group archiving is enabled, feed activity in groups is automatically reviewed weekly. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
Mentioning a group doesn’t count as feed activity and doesn’t delay group archiving. Archived groups count toward your org’s group limits (30,000) but not toward a user’s group membership limits (300). There are more group archiving settings on the group settings page, where group owners and managers can archive or activate the group and edit automatic archiving settings. To change archiving settings for multiple groups at the same time, use the Salesforce API. If your organization doesn’t want to use group archiving, turn off this feature in Setup. Enter Chatter in the Quick Find box, select **Chatter Settings**, and deselect **Allow Group Archiving** in the Groups section. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note You can take steps to allow group owners and managers to archive, activate, or turn off automatic archiving in the Salesforce mobile app and Lightning Experience. Customize the group layout and add the necessary fields. #### See Also - [Group Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_group_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The group layout lets you customize which fields, buttons, actions, and lists appear in Chatter groups. Changes to the group layout affect all groups in your organization, but they appear only on the group pages in the Salesforce mobile app. Changes to the group publisher appear in both the full Salesforce site and the Salesforce mobile app.") # Chatter Group Limitations in the Salesforce Mobile App There are limitations when you use the Groups feature in the Salesforce mobile app. ### Required Editions
Available in Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager editions.
When using groups in the Salesforce mobile app, you can’t: - See live feed updates. - Invite customers to join private customer groups. - Add records to Chatter groups with customers using the **Add Record** action. - Withdraw requests for joining private groups. - Change email and in-app notification settings for groups in Experience Cloud sites. - See or customize group member engagement data. - Share files with a group unless you’re a member or admin (iOS only) Group owners and managers can’t remove files from the group files list. # Chatter Group Recommendations Chatter recommends groups for you to consider joining. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
We base our recommendations on: - The popularity of the group determined by the number of members - The number of people that you're following in the group (Chatter recommends groups with the most members that you're following.) - If the group is new (created in the last month) To see an expanded list of your recommendations, click **More** in the Recommendations section. If no recommendations appear, then you already belong to all the recommended groups. Mouse over the recommendations and click ![Dismiss recommendation icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/group_recommendations_dismiss_x.png)to dismiss them. They don’t appear again. # Chatter Group Settings Use Chatter group settings to configure group features like group archiving, records in groups, and unlisted groups.
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Chatter Group Archiving](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_archive_admin.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If a group has no new feed posts or comments for 90 consecutive days, the group is archived automatically. When group archiving is enabled, feed activity in groups is automatically reviewed weekly. - **[Enable Records in Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_records_enabling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, records are allowed in groups. But you can also customize the group publisher to include the Add Record action, so users can add records to groups. - **[Enable Unlisted Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_unlisted_groups_enabling_for_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable unlisted groups for your organization to help users collaborate more privately in Chatter. - **[Unlisted Group Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_unlisted_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you decide to enable unlisted groups in your organization, consider these limitations. # Chatter Groups If you're working on a team, you can create a group for your team to share mission-related files and information. Share information through the group feed. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
You can join up to 300 groups, and your company can have a total of 30,000 groups. Chatter groups can be public, private, unlisted, and archived. - Public: Anyone can see and add posts, comments, and files. Anyone can join a public group. - Private: Only group members can see and add posts, comments, and files. All Experience Cloud site users can see the group picture, name, description, and members. If you want complete privacy, make the group Unlisted. People must ask the group's [owner or managers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_roles_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The actions that you can perform in a Chatter group depend on whether you’re a member, owner, or manager of the group.") to join the group. Users with the “Modify All Data” and “View All Data” permission can see group posts, updates, and files across the organization. Users with the “Manage All Data” permission can also join private groups directly and change group settings. - Unlisted: Only group members and users with the “Manage Unlisted Groups” permission can see and add posts, comments, and files. People can’t ask to join the group. The group’s owner or managers must invite the group members. Unlisted groups offer [more privacy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_unlisted_groups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Unlisted Chatter groups offer more privacy compared to private Chatter groups. Only group members and users with the Manage Unlisted Groups permission can access unlisted groups in list views, feeds, and search results.") and nonmembers can’t see or access unlisted groups in list views, feeds, or search results. - Groups with Customers: Private and unlisted groups can allow customers. You can identify groups with customers in Salesforce Classic by the orange upper left corner of the group photo. You can identify groups with customers in Lightning Experience by a caption in the group header. ![Access caption on a group header](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/private_with_customers.png) - Archived: Some groups can be archived. When a group is archived, people can no longer create posts but previous posts are retained for reference. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note In Lightning Experience, group feeds are live. Posts appear the moment they’re published so they don’t require a page refresh to update. Live group feeds are new in Lightning Experience, so they have lots of potential for enhancement and a few known issues. - Content posted to the group is live, but mentions aren’t. If you post to group A, the post is live. If you mention group A in another feed, group A requires a page refresh to show that mention. - When a group has a new post, you receive notifications only in Lightning Experience. - When people add comments to a post that you’re engaged in, you’re notified only in Lightning Experience. And you’re notified only when you’re actively entering comments or you’ve clicked in the comments box. - The number of participants supported in a live feed depends on your orgʼs subscription limits. If you're not getting a live group feed or live comments, refresh the page or click in a comments field. If the feed still isn't live, your org has likely hit its limit. You can still get updates the old-fashioned way by refreshing the page. - If you’re in a group feed that doesn’t seem live anymore, it’s a known issue that we’re working on (Safe Harbor). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note In Salesforce Classic, you can use the Collaboration Group Engagement report to monitor your group’s activity, such as members, posts, comments, and likes. If you use the report, you must add a group ID to see the number of post comments and likes. If you leave the Group ID field blank, the report doesn’t calculate those fields. The Group ID field is not available in Lightning Experience. #### See Also - [What Your Chatter Group Role Lets You Do](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_roles_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The actions that you can perform in a Chatter group depend on whether you’re a member, owner, or manager of the group.") - [Chatter Customers in Private Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_external_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter customers are people outside your company's email domains. Customers can see only the groups they're invited to. They can interact only with members of those groups. Customers can’t see any Salesforce information.") - [Live Chatter Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_live_feed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you’re in a group in Lightning Experience, the Chatter feed is live. Live feeds offer posts and comments right as they’re posted, without requiring a page refresh.") # Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26 Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is default disabled in new orgs. In some editions, Salesforce channels are default enabled in new orgs, and in others, admins can turn on this feature. With Salesforce channels, you can use Slack to communicate on record pages in Salesforce. You can still opt to use Chatter to communicate in Salesforce, or you can opt to use Salesforce channels for internal communications and Chatter for external communications. If you have any features that require Chatter functionality or APIs, such as Case Feed or an Experience Cloud site, enable Chatter in Setup.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in:

Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience (Chatter)

Lightning Experience (Salesforce channels)

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions (Chatter)
Starter Suite, Pro Suite, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions (Salesforce channels)
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED
To enable Chatter:Customize Application
To create a Slack workspace:Salesforce admin
Salesforce channels are enabled by default in orgs created in Starter Suite, Pro Suite, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions. Admins can enable Salesforce channels in existing orgs for the other editions listed, except where Slack is unavailable, such as in Government Cloud and in certain Hyperforce orgs. For more details, see [Salesforce Channels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.slack_salesforce_channels.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ## Changes in Salesforce When Chatter is turned off, some effects on the org are: - Salesforce Chatter is unavailable in the App Launcher (1). - The Follow button (2) and Chatter tab, publisher, and feed (3) are unavailable on record pages. - Chatter groups and the Groups tab (4) are unavailable. - Case Feed is unavailable. - The Customer Community template is unavailable to select when you create an Experience Cloud site. - Chatter functionality is unavailable on Experience Cloud sites. - The Chatter APIs are inaccessible. - If a package from AppExchange relies on Chatter functionality, installing the package can fail. ![Record page in Salesforce that shows Chatter features that are removed from the page when Chatter is turned off](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/262_chatter_off.png) Admins can opt to turn on Salesforce channels for an entire org, or they can add the Slack Lightning web component to whichever objects they choose. ## Turn on Chatter to Access Chatter Features and APIs To enable Chatter: 1. In Setup, enter Chatter in the Quick Find box and select **Chatter Settings**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. In the Chatter Settings section, select **Enable** and save your change. ## Adjust Feed Tracking to Control Where Chatter Is Available When you turn on Chatter, Feed Tracking is enabled for multiple objects across Salesforce. If you plan to use Chatter only for external communications, choose the objects where you want Chatter to appear. 1. In Setup, enter Feed in the Quick Find box and select **Feed Tracking**. 2. For each object listed, select or deselect **Enable Feed Tracking**. 3. For each object where you enable Feed Tracking, select the fields that you want to track. 4. Save your changes. #### See Also - [Customize Chatter Feed Tracking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_tracking.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you enable feed tracking for objects and records, users see updates for the objects and records that they follow in their What I Follow feed. Many objects and fields are tracked by default, but you can further customize feed tracking to include or exclude specific objects and fields.") - [Chatter Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure various Chatter features and customize the Chatter experience for your users on the Chatter Settings page in Setup.") - [Salesforce Channels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.slack_salesforce_channels.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Chatter Limits Limits for Chatter Plus user licenses. | Chatter Plus Feature | Allocation | | --- | --- | | Chatter Plus licenses in your org | Unlimited | | Data storage per Chatter Plus user | 20 MB | | File storage per Chatter Plus user (Professional Edition) | 612 MB | | File storage per Chatter Plus user (Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions) | 2 GB | The limits are subject to change. Contact Salesforce for more information. # Chatter Messages In Salesforce Classic, send a question to another person privately, or communicate with a limited set of people. Messaging is useful when a discussion isn't relevant to everyone you work with. Messages also notify people when a file is shared with them. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
Messages don't appear in your feed, your profile, global search results, or any part of Chatter that's publicly visible. Open the My Messages page by clicking the **Messages** link on the Chatter tab. On the My Messages page, you can: - See the most recent message in each of your conversations. The most recent message appears at the top of the list. - See the photo of the person who sent the most recent message. - See if you have unread messages (![Unread message icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collab_message_unread_icon.png)). - See if you sent the most recent reply (![I replied last icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collab_message_I_replied_last_icon.png)). - To view the full history of messages that were exchanged in a conversation,click any message. - Send a message by clicking **New Message**. Your messages are organized into conversations. It’s the unique combination of the people who participate in a conversation that defines it. For example, let's say you send a message to S. Smith. When S. Smith replies, the reply continues your one-on-one conversation. Every new message you send to S. Smith—even if it's about a different topic—also continues the same conversation. Over time, you build a rich conversation history with S. Smith that contains every message you've ever exchanged. At the same time, let's say you send a message to both S. Smith and B. Johnson. That message is considered part of a separate conversation between you, S. Smith, and B. Johnson. When S. Smith replies, the reply continues in the conversation among you, S. Smith, and B. Johnson, rather than in your one-on-one conversation with S. Consider these usage tips for Chatter messages. - You can send messages to anyone in your Chatter organization. It doesn't matter who you follow, who's following you, what groups you belong to, or if the recipient is a customer. - Conversations can involve up to 10 people total, including yourself. You can't send a message to yourself. - Conversation participants are established when someone sends the first message in the conversation. No one can add people or remove people from the conversation after the first message is sent. - As others reply, the **Messages** link on the Chatter tab shows the number of conversations with new messages. If you're already receiving Chatter email notifications, you're automatically notified of new messages. - You can't delete messages or conversations. - Imagine that, after reading the messages in a conversation, you want to mark the conversation unread. You can do so only with Connect REST API, and not with the user interface. # Chatter Overview Use Chatter features such as feeds, profiles, and groups to share information, collaborate, and keep up with the latest updates in your company. Chatter works in accordance with all security and permission settings in your Salesforce organization. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). In Lightning Experience, if you don’t see the Chatter tab, open Chatter from the App Launcher. Most objects in Lightning Experience don't show a Chatter tab unless [Feed Tracking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_tracking.htm&type=5&language=en_US) is enabled for the object. The exceptions are Group, Site, and User objects. Chatter is available on a per-organization basis. Only users within the same Salesforce organization can communicate with each other through Chatter. You can add people outside your company's email domains to use Chatter in your organization. When you add external users to a group that you own or manage, they appear as customer users. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note We use “company” and “organization”—or “org”—interchangeably. An organization is a single deployment of Salesforce with a defined set of licensed users. The words “company” and “organization” are used interchangeably in Chatter. For example, let’s say you see “share a file with all Chatter users in your company.” It means you're sharing with everyone who uses Chatter in the org. Chatter is available to customer users and partner users in Experience Cloud sites. But it’s not available to portal users in partner portals or Customer Portals. Some third-party browser plug-ins and extensions can interfere with the functionality of Chatter. If you experience malfunctions or inconsistent behavior with Chatter, disable the browser's plug-ins and extensions and try again. Chatter isn’t supported: - [In unsupported browsers](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?err=1&id=getstart_browsers_sfx.htm&language=en_US) - For external users in Customer Portals or partner portals - In the Console tab Posts and comments that users make in Chatter are retained during the entire time that a customer's applicable org remains provisioned. We reserve the right to enforce limits on: - The number of system-generated tracked feed updates. Currently tracked feed updates that are older than 45 days and have no likes or comments are deleted automatically. The tracked feed updates no longer appear in the feed. However, if auditing is enabled for a tracked field, the audit history for that field is still available. - The number of email notifications that can be sent per org per hour. The limits are subject to change. Contact Salesforce for more information. - **[General Chatter Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_allocations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Limits and allocations for Chatter features by edition and browser. - **[Chatter Limits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_limits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Limits for Chatter Plus user licenses. - **[Chatter Feature Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_features_compare.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let’s compare the Chatter features that are available in Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, Experience Builder sites, and the Salesforce mobile app. - **[Differences Between Chatter in Lightning Experience on Desktop and Mobile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_diffs_lex_desktop_mobile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Not every Lightning Experience feature is in the Salesforce mobile app. Find out what’s different in Chatter between desktop and mobile experiences. # Chatter Post Actions and Layouts Actions on posts and comments appear in the drop-down menu on a post or comment. Users can edit, bookmark, mute, and delete posts, add topics, and create tasks from posts. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
The standard Bookmark, Delete, Mute, and Add Topic actions on posts are available by default and you can’t modify them. However, you can add more actions like the Edit and Create New Task actions. - **[Enable Create New Tasks on Posts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_feed_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enhance the feed with an action that lets users create tasks directly from a post. # Chatter Post Visibility Learn where you can post in Chatter, who can see your posts, and whose posts you can see.
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
Anyone except [customers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_external_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter customers are people outside your company's email domains. Customers can see only the groups they're invited to. They can interact only with members of those groups. Customers can’t see any Salesforce information.") can see your posts on your profile, and the people who follow you can see your posts in their Chatter feed. However, if you change a record, only the people who have permission to see the record can see the record update in a feed. In Chatter, you see updates only from the people and records that you follow. Follow more records and people to see more updates in the Chatter feeds on your Home and Chatter tabs. In Salesforce Classic, click **People** on the Chatter tab to find a list of the people in your organization to follow or unfollow. The posts that you add to a group are also visible on your profile. But who sees that post depends on the [group type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_editing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To change a Chatter group’s owner, edit group settings. Only the current group owner and people with the Modify All Data permission can change the owner."). For example, when you post to a group that is: - Public, anyone except customers can see the post on your profile. - Private, only other group members can see the post on your profile. - Private and allows customers, all members can see the post in the group. Customers who are members of the group can see your posts on the group page but not on your profile. - Unlisted, only group members and users with Manage Unlisted Groups permission can see the post on your profile. Customers who are members of the group can see your posts on the group page but not on your profile. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Posts that are created on an Experience Cloud site are visible only within that site. If you try to access a post on an Experience Cloud site from your Salesforce org or from a different site, you get an error message that the post was deleted. To view the post, log in to the Experience Cloud site where the post was created. This issue doesn’t occur if the site is configured to allow guest user access. This table describes where you can post and where your post appears.
I’m posting on I can post to Who gets my post directly? Where does my post appear? File Considerations
Home tab, Chatter tab, or my profile My followers
  • People following you see your post in the What I Follow feed.
  • People who are mentioned in the post see the post in the What I Follow, To Me, and profile feeds.
  • Everyone who navigates to your profile can see your post on your profile.
  • Your post appears in feed search results.
  • Everyone can see your post in the All Company feed (Salesforce Classic).1
If you attach a file to the post, the file is available to all employees. The file also shows up in search results and file lists.
A public group
  • Members of this group see your post in the What I Follow feed.
  • Group members who are mentioned in the post see the post in the What I Follow, To Me, and profile feeds.
  • Everyone who navigates to the group can see your post on the group page.
  • Your post appears in feed search results.
  • Everyone can see your post in the All Company feed.
If you attach a file to the post, the file is available to anyone who has access to the group. The file also appears in search results and on file lists.
A private group
  • Members of this group see your post in the What I Follow feed.
  • Group members who are mentioned in the post see the post in the What I Follow, To Me, and profile feeds.
Only members of the group see your post in the group feed, feed search results, and the All Company feed. If you attach a file to the post, the file is available to anyone who has access to the group. The file also appears in search results and on file lists.
An unlisted group
  • Members of this group see your post in the What I Follow feed.
  • Group members who are mentioned in the post see the post in the What I Follow, To Me, and profile feeds.
Only group members and users with Manage Unlisted Groups permission see your post in the group feed, the All Company feed, and on your profile. If you attach a file to the post, the file is viewable and searchable by anyone who has access to the group.
A customer group
  • Members of this group see your post in the What I Follow feed.
  • Group members who are mentioned in the post see the post in the What I Follow, To Me, and profile feeds.
Only members of the group see your post in the group feed, feed search results, and the All Company feed. Members include employees and customers. If you attach a file to the post, the file is available to anyone who has access to the group. The file also appears in search results and on file lists.
Topic detail page My followers
  • People who follow you see your post in the What I Follow feed.
  • People who are mentioned in the post see the post in the What I Follow, To Me, and profile feeds.
  • Everyone can see your post on the topic detail page.
  • Everyone who navigates to your profile can see your post on your profile.
  • Your post appears in feed search results.
  • Everyone can see your post in the All Company feed.
If you attach a file to the post, the file is available to all employees. The file also appears in search results and on file lists.
A public group
  • Members of this group see your post in the What I Follow feed.
  • Group members who are mentioned in the post see the post in the What I Follow, To Me, and profile feeds.
  • Everyone can see your post on the topic detail page.
  • Everyone who navigates to the group can see your post on the group page.
  • Your post appears in feed search results.
  • Everyone can see your post in the All Company feed.
If you attach a file to the post, the file is available to anyone who has access to the group. The file also appears in search results and on file lists.
A private group
  • Members of this group see your post in the What I Follow feed.
  • Group members who are mentioned in the post see the post in the What I Follow, To Me, and profile feeds.
Only members of the group see your post on the topic detail page, in the group feed, feed search results, and the All Company feed. If you attach a file to the post, the file is available to anyone who has access to the group. The file also appears in search results and on file lists.
A customer group
  • Members of this group see your post in the What I Follow feed.
  • Group members who are mentioned in the post see the post in the What I Follow, To Me, and profile feeds.

Only members of the group see your post on the topic detail page, group feed, in feed search results, and in the All Company feed. Members include employees and customers.

Although customers see your post, they don’t see or have access to topics.

If you attach a file to the post, the file is available to anyone who has access to the group. The file also appears in search results and on file lists.
An unlisted group You can’t use topics in unlisted groups. You can add a hashtag topic when writing a post or comment in an unlisted group. The topic will be formatted as a link after you post. However, a topic detail page isn’t created, and the link doesn’t work. — — —
Another person’s profile That person’s profile only
  • The person sees your post in their profile feed.
  • People who follow both you and this person see your post in the person’s profile feed and the What I Follow feed.
  • People who are mentioned in the post see the post in their What I Follow, To Me, and profile feeds.
  • Everyone who navigates that person’s profile can see your post on your profile.
  • Your post appears in feed search results.
  • Everyone can see your post in the All Company feed.
If you attach a file to the post, the file is available to all employees. The file also appears in search results and on file lists.
A public group To the public group only
  • Members of this group see your post in the What I Follow feed.
  • Group members who are mentioned in the post see the post in the What I Follow, To Me, and profile feeds.
  • Everyone who navigates to the group can see your post on the group page.
  • Your post appears in feed search results.
  • Everyone can see your post in the All Company feed.
If you attach a file to the post, the file is available to anyone who has access to the group. The file also appears in search results and on file lists.
A private group To the private group only
  • Members of this group see your post in the What I Follow feed.
  • Group members who are mentioned in the post see the post in the What I Follow, To Me, and profile feeds.
Only members of the group see your post in the group feed, in feed search results, and in the All Company feed. If someone is both a member of the private group and one of your followers, they see your post on your profile page feed. If you attach a file to the post, the file is available to anyone who has access to the group. The file also appears in search results and on file lists.
An unlisted group To the unlisted group only
  • Members of this group and users with Manage Unlisted Groups permission see your post in the What I Follow feed.
  • Group members who are mentioned in the post see the post in the What I Follow, To Me, and profile feeds.
Only members of the group see your post in the group feed, feed search results, and the All Company feed. If you attach a file to the post, the file is viewable and searchable by anyone who has access to the group.
A customer group To the customer group only
  • Members of this group see your post in the What I Follow feed.
  • Group members who are mentioned in the post see the post in the What I Follow, To Me, and profile feeds.
Only members of the group see your post in the group feed, feed search results, and the All Company feed. Members include employees and customers. If you attach a file to the post, the file is available to anyone who has access to the group. The file also appears in search results and on file lists.
A record page To the record only
  • Everyone who is following the record and who has permission to access the record sees your post in the What I Follow feed.
  • People who are mentioned in the post and who have permission to access the record see the post. They see the post in the What I Follow, To Me, and profile feeds.
Everyone with permission to access the record can see your post. They see the post on the record detail page, in your profile, feed search results, and the All Company feed. If you attach a file to the post, the file is associated with the record. Everyone who has sharing rights to the record has access to the file.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note You can’t create posts on archived groups. Comments on existing posts in an archived group follow the same visibility settings as before the group was archived. [1](#fnsrc_1) This footnote applies to all mentions of the All Company feed in this table: The Company Highlights feed in Lightning Experience shows the post, depending on its popularity ranking and engagement (such as comments, likes, and views). # Chatter Posting Overview Use the Chatter publisher to post, comment, ask questions, and create polls. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
The publisher appears on your Home tab, Chatter tab, user profile page, and group and record detail pages. Use the publisher to write a post, comment on a post, attach a file or link to your post, add a poll, or ask a question. Posts and comments can be up to 10,000 characters long. Questions can be up to 255 characters, though question details can be much longer. Use the rich text editor to format your posts. Publisher actions include styling text and removing text styles, adding lists, adding inline images, hyperlinks, and emojis, @mentioning someone, and attaching a file. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The Chatter Publisher in Salesforce Classic shares some features with Lightning Experience. But the publisher in Lightning Experience has more. ![Chatter publisher in Lightning Experience](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatterPublisher.png) - Post tab (1) - Poll tab (2) - Question tab (3) - Font styles, including remove styles action (4) - List styles (5) - Inline image (6) - Inline Hyperlink (7) Hyperlinking inline images is not supported. Highlight link text before you click the hyperlink icon. If your hyperlink URL gets an error, check its syntax to ensure that: - The URL starts with https://. - The hostname and file name are correct. - The URL doesn't point to a localhost domain. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note In a Lightning console app, a link that you paste or add here can open differently than a link that appears in the same post if a `HYPERLINK()` formula produces it in the post text (for example, when automation builds the post body). See [HYPERLINK](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sf.customize_functions_hyperlink.htm&type=5&language=en_US) and [Tips for Working with Hyperlink Formula Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.tips_for_using_hyperlink_formula_fields.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - Emoji selector (8) - @Mention action (9) - Add file action (10) - Link-to-record prompt (11) The link-to-record feature brings up records that you have recently viewed. If the record you want to link to isn’t on the selection list, visit the record and try again. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip In Lightning Experience, you can use the keyboard to complete posts and comments. On Windows, enter content and press Ctrl+Enter. On macOS, press either Control+Enter or Command+Enter. In questions, shortcut keys work with question details, but not on the question itself. So if you ask a question but don’t include details, the shortcuts don’t work. When you include details with the question, then shortcuts work. By default, the publisher displays the Post, Poll, and Question actions. Your Salesforce administrator can change the order of the actions and add more actions. Therefore, the actions you see depend on how your administrator configured the publisher. When you post to a feed, everyone with access to the feed can comment on, like, upvote (if enabled), or share the post. Other actions can appear on the actions menu. ![Chatter post](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatterPostOverview.png) In Lightning Experience, comments are live and don’t require a page refresh to update. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Live comments is a new feature with lots of potential for enhancement and a few known issues. - When new comments are made on a feed post that you’re engaged in, you receive notifications only in Lightning Experience. Notifications appear when you’re actively typing comments or you’ve clicked in the comments box. - The number of participants supported for live comments depends on your org’s subscription limits. If you’re not getting live comments, then click in a comment field. If comments still aren’t live, then it looks like your org has hit its limit! You can still get updates the old-fashioned way by refreshing the page. Click **Edit** to modify your own posts and comments. If you’re a group owner or manager, then you can also edit other people’s posts on the group feed. Click **Delete** to remove your post from the feed. However, you can’t delete other people’s posts or posts about feed tracked changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If the Edit option isn’t available on posts or comments, either your administrator disabled this feature for your organization or Accessibility Mode is enabled. Because Chatter doesn’t support Accessibility Mode, post and comment editing become unavailable when it’s on. #### See Also - [Chatter Post Visibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_post_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn where you can post in Chatter, who can see your posts, and whose posts you can see.") - [Live Chatter Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_live_feed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you’re in a group in Lightning Experience, the Chatter feed is live. Live feeds offer posts and comments right as they’re posted, without requiring a page refresh.") - [Live Chatter Comments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_live_comments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Lightning Experience Chatter feeds, comments are live—they appear when they’re posted, without requiring a page refresh.") # Chatter Profile Best Practices and Considerations Tips and limitations for using Chatter profiles. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
- Information in the About Me section is searchable and makes you more visible to others. - Your posts appear in your profile feed and the What I Follow feeds of the people who are following you. To delete your posts, in Salesforce Classic hover over the post and click ![Delete button for Chatter posts and comments](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_delete_x.png); in Lightning Experience, select **Delete** from the post’s actions menu. - To change your email address, in Salesforce Classic click the edit icon next to the Contact heading; in Lightning Experience, edit your profile. - Not all users have profiles. For example, portal users and the Connection User in organizations that use Salesforce to Salesforce don’t have profiles. - Chatter External Users have access to a limited number of fields. Available fields include: - Name - Title - Email - Company - Nickname - You can’t choose what displays when a user hovers over a profile. # Chatter Profile Overview Customize your personal Chatter profile. Add a photo and information about yourself so others can learn more about you. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Click your name anywhere in Salesforce to view your profile. If available, you can also click the Profile tab or **Your Name** | **My Profile** at the top of the page. In Lightning Experience, click Your Name, and then click Your Name again in the dialog. View other people's profiles by clicking their name. ![New profile page when viewing self](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/profile_new_anlin_self.png) From this page you can: - Change your profile picture. (1) - Edit your About Me statement by clicking the pencil icon under your profile image. (2) - Edit your page banner. (3) - Edit your personal statement. (4) - Add links to your social media accounts. (5) - Search and filter your profile feed. (6) #### See Also - [Chatter Profile Best Practices and Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_profile_best_practices.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Tips and limitations for using Chatter profiles.") - [People Recommendations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_people_recommendations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter recommends people for you to follow based on similar interests.") # Chatter Questions Got questions? Use Chatter Questions to post a question to a feed, then watch the answers roll in. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Chatter Questions Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Extend the best possible Experience Cloud self-service site by promoting engagement internally and externally with questions in Chatter. - **[Display Similar Questions and Articles in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_deflection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Salesforce Classic, you can reduce duplicate content by showing similar questions and relevant Salesforce Knowledge articles. In Chatter, potential answers pop open as the user asks a question. In Experience Cloud sites with Chatter, question deflection features are available through Experience Builder components. - **[Display Similar Questions and Articles in the Customer Service Template Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_knowledge_deflection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Different Experience Cloud site users can ask similar questions. Chatter Questions helps reduce duplicate content in self-service sites that are built on the Customer Service template by showing similar questions and relevant Salesforce Knowledge articles. Potential answers appear on a list as a user enters a question in the Search field. - **[Enable Similar Articles for Chatter Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_knowledge_deflection_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When users ask questions in Salesforce Classic, similar questions appear as they type. If you’d like relevant Salesforce Knowledge articles to appear, too, you can enable Similar Articles. - **[Select a Best Answer for a Question in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_best_answer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** One of the advantages of asking a question in Chatter is that users can select the best answer. When a question has a best answer, users can quickly resolve an issue by going directly to the best answer. - **[Chatter Questions Overview FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter Questions lets users in Salesforce and Experience Cloud sites ask questions in the feed. Here are some common questions about the feature. - **[Track Use of Chatter Questions in Your Salesforce Organization and Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep tabs on the use and adoption of Chatter Questions in your organization or sites with reports and dashboards. - **[Differences Between Q&A Features in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.questions_q_and_a_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce offers various question-and-answer features that you can implement in your Salesforce organization and communities. Because some of these features use similar terminology, take a moment to review the differences between them. # Chatter Questions Overview Extend the best possible Experience Cloud self-service site by promoting engagement internally and externally with questions in Chatter. ### Required Editions
Available in both: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Developer, Performance, Enterprise, Contact Manager, and Unlimited Editions
With Chatter Questions, users can ask questions in their Chatter feed, in groups, and in records. Select **Question** from the Chatter publisher’s action menu, or click the Question tab. After a question is asked, moderators and the person who asked the question can select a best answer. The best answer is prominently displayed in the feed, allowing other users to quickly and easily find the information they need. Your users can organize their information with the question title and details about their question. They can ask the question to their followers, to a group, or to a specific person, as they can with other Chatter feed items. ![Chatter Question](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/question_feed_item.png) To enable Chatter Questions in your organization, add the Question action to the global publisher layout. If your organization was created after Summer ‘14, the Question action is automatically added. Nonetheless, we recommend that you drag it to the far left of the layout to increase its visibility. If you’re using a customized publisher layout in groups or on records, make sure that the Question action is added to those layouts as well. Chatter Desktop doesn’t support Chatter Questions. ## Chatter Questions Mobile Limitations Not every Lightning Experience feature is in the Salesforce mobile app. Find out what’s different between Chatter Questions on desktop and on mobile. When using Chatter Questions, you can’t: - See similar questions and knowledge articles when you ask questions. - Select best answers. Chatter Questions isn’t fully supported in Salesforce for Android and Salesforce for iOS. When coworkers ask questions, you can see who posted but the text of the question isn’t displayed. You can see any answers to the question, however. #### See Also - [Select a Best Answer for a Question in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_best_answer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "One of the advantages of asking a question in Chatter is that users can select the best answer. When a question has a best answer, users can quickly resolve an issue by going directly to the best answer.") - [Track Use of Chatter Questions in Your Salesforce Organization and Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep tabs on the use and adoption of Chatter Questions in your organization or sites with reports and dashboards.") - [Chatter Questions Overview FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter Questions lets users in Salesforce and Experience Cloud sites ask questions in the feed. Here are some common questions about the feature.") # Chatter Questions Overview FAQ Chatter Questions lets users in Salesforce and Experience Cloud sites ask questions in the feed. Here are some common questions about the feature. Why use Chatter Questions instead of asking my question in a regular Chatter post? Asking a question in Chatter saves you time. When you ask a question, similar questions and articles appear as you enter your question (Salesforce Classic and sites only). Chances are that someone already asked the same question, and it could have many answers or a best answer. Chatter Questions harnesses the value of existing content in Chatter. Can I filter the Chatter feed to show only questions? Yes, in Salesforce Classic. At the top of your Chatter feed, click ![Feed filter drop-down button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_feed_dropdown_arrow_large.png) next to **Show** and select **Questions**. Can I search for questions in Chatter? Yes. Use the Search This Feed button (![Find in feed button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/find_in_feed_icon_inline.png)) at the top of your Chatter feed. Questions are included in the feed search results. Is Chatter Questions available in the Salesforce mobile app? No. What happens when someone asks a question? Their question appears in the Chatter feed for their followers or the person or group they asked the question of. An email notification is also sent to the person or group they asked the question of. After a user asks a question, other users can then answer the question directly in Chatter. Who can select a best answer for a question? The person who asked the question and moderators can select the best answer for a question. Moderators can be the Chatter moderator or the site moderator. Your Salesforce administrator can also select the best answer for a question. For details, see [Select a Best Answer for a Question in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_best_answer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "One of the advantages of asking a question in Chatter is that users can select the best answer. When a question has a best answer, users can quickly resolve an issue by going directly to the best answer."). Can I track Chatter Questions use and adoption in my Salesforce organization? Yes, in Salesforce Classic and sites. For details, see [Track Use of Chatter Questions in Your Salesforce Organization and Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep tabs on the use and adoption of Chatter Questions in your organization or sites with reports and dashboards."). #### See Also - [Display Similar Questions and Articles in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_deflection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Salesforce Classic, you can reduce duplicate content by showing similar questions and relevant Salesforce Knowledge articles. In Chatter, potential answers pop open as the user asks a question. In Experience Cloud sites with Chatter, question deflection features are available through Experience Builder components.") - [Track Use of Chatter Questions in Your Salesforce Organization and Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep tabs on the use and adoption of Chatter Questions in your organization or sites with reports and dashboards.") # Chatter Settings Configure various Chatter features and customize the Chatter experience for your users on the Chatter Settings page in Setup. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, Developer, and Database.com Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Chatter Group Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_group_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Chatter group settings to configure group features like group archiving, records in groups, and unlisted groups. - **[Set the Format of Timestamps on Case Feed Posts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_casefeed_dateandtime.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In case feeds show users a relative timestamp on new posts, like 10m ago, or an absolute timestamp, like January 7, 2020 at 12:15PM. Comments and replies are also shown with relative timestamps. - **[Convert Character Combinations into Emoticons in the Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_emoticons.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Emoticons let your users enter character combinations in their posts and comments to create expressions. - **[Let Users Set Out-of-Office Messages in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_out_of_office.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let your users schedule and customize an out-of-office message, and place it next to their name in Chatter. You can enable or disable this feature in Setup, under Chatter Settings. Setting an out-of-office message is available only in Lightning Experience. - **[Customer Invitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_external_enabling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let users invite customers to the private groups that they own or manage. Customers are users outside your company's email domains. They have limited Chatter access and can see only the groups that they're invited to. They can interact only with members of those groups. - **[Coworker Invitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_coworker_invitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce users can invite coworkers without Salesforce licenses to Chatter. Invited users can access Chatter people, profiles, groups, and files, but users without a Salesforce license can’t see record data. - **[Enable Add Actions in the Chatter Publisher](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_actions_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Salesforce Classic, before you can add global actions to the Chatter publisher, you must first enable the Actions in the Publisher feature in Chatter Settings. Actions add functionality to the Chatter publisher and let your users do more in Salesforce across every device. - **[Feed Post and Comments Editing Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_feed_post_editing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With feed post editing, users can edit their own feed posts. Record owners can also edit any post on records they own, no matter who created the post. #### See Also - [Salesforce Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_setting_up.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With Chatter, users can collaborate on sales opportunities, service cases, campaigns, and projects with embedded apps and custom actions. Salesforce channels, which bring Slack into Salesforce, are another way to collaborate on records. In new orgs created in Summer ’26 and later, Salesforce channels are enabled by default, and Chatter is disabled. You can enable Chatter in these orgs if necessary, and you can continue to use Chatter in existing orgs.") - [Topics Privacy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_privacy.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Topic names and descriptions are not private, even for topics that appear solely in private groups and on records. Posts and records with topics have the same security and privacy as posts and records without topics.") # Chatter Streams Chatter streams are custom feeds that you create by combining multiple related feeds into one feed. Look for streams on your Chatter home page. Create up to 100 streams that each combine posts from up to 25 different feeds and feed types. Create streams that combine feeds from people, groups, and records, like accounts, opportunities, cases, and more. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer editions
![Chatter streams on the Chatter home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collab_chatter_streams.png) Visit the stream home by clicking the Streams heading on the Chatter home page. ![Streams heading on Chatter home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_streams_heading.png) The streams home lists all your streams and shows the people and records that you added. Each stream has its own row and its own set of row actions, including **Edit** and **Delete**. ![The Stream home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_streams_home.png) Click the number of records on a row to see a full list of people and records that you added to the stream. Click a stream name to open that stream. Once there, you can see that the stream page has some actions of its own. ![Action buttons on a stream](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_streams_buttons.png) Use these actions to edit the stream, set up stream notifications, and delete the stream. Each stream has a couple of filters. Choose **All Updates** to see everything, including Feed Tracked Changes (FTCs) in the stream. Choose **Fewer Updates** to omit FTCs from the stream. ![Filters on a stream](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_stream_filters.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Feed tracking tracks changes to objects and fields and posts them as updates in Chatter. Users who follow a record see updates to that record in their Chatter feed. When you create a stream, an **Every Post** option is available in the create dialog for enabling notifications for the stream. **Every Post** is the default setting. Notifications are sent to you via email and are pushed to your in-app notifications. Select **Never** to prevent notifications from this stream. You can also visit a stream page to adjust its notification settings. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Currently, activity on a topics feed in a stream doesn’t trigger notifications. ![Notification options in the New Stream dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_streams_notify.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Because a stream is made up of multiple feeds, no publisher is provided for posting to a stream. Knowledge articles (KAs) aren’t fully supported in streams. You can add them when you create and edit a stream by searching for the article’s ID number rather than its title. But you can’t add a KA to a stream from its Follow button like you can with other record types. Articles added to Streams using the article’s ID don’t appear in Records to Follow on the Stream's edit page. KAs also don’t appear when viewing the Follow button details on the article's detail page. - **[Create Chatter Streams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a Chatter stream to get a combined view of feeds from the profiles, groups, and records that you select. Include up to 25 feeds in each stream. Create up to 100 Chatter streams. You don’t have to follow a person, group, or record before you add it to a stream. The great thing about adding a feed to a stream is that it doesn’t count against the number of follows you’re allowed. You can create a Chatter stream from the Chatter home page, from the streams home page, and from a profile or record detail. - **[Edit a Chatter Stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_edit.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit a stream to change its name or to add or remove some of its feeds. You can edit a Chatter stream from the streams home page or from the stream itself. - **[Set Up Notifications for a Chatter Stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_notifications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Notification settings are available in the New Stream dialog and on the stream itself. You can create a stream and decide later whether you want to be notified when new posts are added to a stream. The default is to send a notification for every new post. So if you create a stream without touching its notification settings, you receive email and in-app notifications for that stream. If you like, you can change your selection later in the stream feed. - **[Delete a Chatter Stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_delete.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can delete a Chatter stream from the streams home page and from the stream itself. Deleting a Chatter stream doesn’t delete the records or posts that it contains. It deletes only the stream, which frees up space for you to add more streams. # Chatter Streams in Aura Sites Your Aura site members can combine multiple feeds into a stream to create a single point of access to related information. Combine feeds of top contributors or discussions concerning a particular product line. Create a stream that combines feeds from discussions, groups, topics, profiles, and all kinds of objects, like cases, opportunities, and accounts. No more jumping from feed-to-feed to figure out what people are saying. Each member can create up to 100 streams. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Activity on a topic’s feed in a stream doesn’t trigger notifications. ![The Streams page in a community](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_chatter_streams_overview.png) Each site member has their own view of the Streams page where they see their own streams. On the Streams page, members can create streams and use row actions menus to edit and delete their streams. ## Add a Chatter Stream Create and manage streams in your Aura site’s Streams home page. 1. Open the Streams page, and click **New**. 2. In the New Stream dialog, enter a name for your stream. ![New Stream dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_chatter_streams_dialog.png) 3. Under **Records to Follow**, select a type of feed you want to add to this stream. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Knowledge articles (KAs) aren’t fully supported in streams. You can add them when you create and edit a stream by searching for the article’s ID number rather than its title. But you can’t add a KA to a stream from its Follow button like you can with other record types. Articles added to Streams using the article’s ID don’t appear in Records to Follow on the Stream's edit page. KAs also don’t appear when viewing the Follow button details on the article's detail page. 4. In the same field, enter the name of a feed you want to add. 5. In your search results, click the feed you want to add. Selected feeds appear below the **Records to Follow** field. ![Topic feeds added to a stream](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_chatter_streams_add_feeds.png) 6. Under **Notify Me**, select a notification option. To receive an email notification whenever a new post appears in the stream, select **Every Post**. To turn off notifications for this stream, select **Never**. You can change this selection later in a stream’s detail view. 7. Click **Save**. Your new stream appears in a row on the Streams page. The row lists the number of feeds (records) that are included in the stream and the names of added feeds. Stream actions appear on the row actions menu at the end of the row. To open a stream, click its name. ![A stream on the Streams page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_chatter_streams_new_stream.png) ## Edit or Delete a Chatter Stream Easily edit a stream or delete it from your list of streams in your Aura site. Deleting a stream doesn’t delete the records or posts it contains. It deletes only the stream, which frees up space for you to create more streams. 1. Open the Streams page, and, from the row actions menu on the stream you want to remove, select **Edit** or **Delete**. 2. In the Edit Stream dialog, change the values you want to change. For example, rename the stream, delete a stream feed (record), add more feeds of a different type or the same type. ![Edit Stream dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_chatter_streams_edit_dialog.png) When you delete a record from a stream, the stream retains the posts from the deleted feed up to the point of deletion. Deleting a record stops the flow of new information from that feed into the stream. 3. Save your changes, or select **Delete**. ## View Aura Site Streams from Your Internal Salesforce Org Site members who have access to their internal Salesforce org can view their site streams from the org. When you click most site-based links from the internal org view, they lead right back to the site. You can take many feed actions, like answer, comment, mention, and like, when you visit a site stream in your internal org. Here are some others. - Upvote and downvote questions and answers, and see the impact in your site. - Verify answers, and see the verification in your site. - Click a link to a user profile, account, topic, or case, and jump to its home site. - Add a topic, and it’s added to your site. - Click the timestamp on a post, and jump to the post detail view in its home site. - Copy a link that leads to the item, person, or post detail view in its home site. - Click a mention in a site stream, and go to its home site. There’s no special setup to get links working between your site and your internal org. However, features, such as upvote and downvote and mark as company verified, do require that you enable them for your site. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - You can’t create a site stream from your internal Salesforce org. Create streams from your site. - Some Chatter features that are available in a site aren’t available when you visit a site stream from your internal org. For example, file attachments, inline images, post sharing, and hover cards aren’t available when you view site streams internally. - Site topics don’t appear when you view a stream from your internal Salesforce org. However, you can add topics. #### See Also - [Enable Upvotes and Downvotes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_updown_vote.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable upvoting and downvoting in lieu of liking questions and answers in your Experience Cloud site. When you enable upvoting and downvoting, members see an Upvote option under a question or answer and a Downvote option on the question or answer’s overflow menu. The Like option goes away. Upvoting and downvoting are disabled by default in Experience Cloud sites created in Spring ’19 and later.") - [Verify Answers for Your Company](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_company_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Sometimes there’s more than one correct answer to a question. Among the correct answers, your company can prefer one course for people to follow. You can highlight an answer that your company endorses by marking it as Company Verified. Questions marked as Company Verified or as Best Answer are copied to the top of the thread under a Top Rated Answers section.") # Chatter Tab Overview The Chatter tab gives you instant access to most of the collaboration features in Chatter. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
From the Chatter tab you can: - Post content that’s shared with people who follow you, or comment on someone else’s post. - Like posts or comments to show your support. - Share a post to your profile or to a group. Send a link to the post to other Chatter users in an email or instant message. - View, filter, and sort your feed to view posts from the people and records that you follow and the groups that you’re a member of. View, filter, and sort posts that mention you, that you bookmarked, or all posts from your company. - Search the feed for information in posts and comments on the Chatter tab. - Bookmark a post and track future comments on the post, or remember to follow up. - Add topics to a post—categorize the post and give it more visibility. - Access your people, groups, files, and topics lists. - View or update your profile information. - Read or send private messages that are visible only to certain people. - Access your favorites to see the latest posts and comments for your favorite topics, list views, and Chatter feed searches. - View your recommendations for people, groups, files, and records that closely relate to your job and interests. - View trending topics that people are discussing in Chatter right now. - Invite people to join your Chatter network, even though they don't have Salesforce licenses to use Chatter. # Choose a Landing Tab If you are using the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template, you can select a landing tab for your site. In Experience Workspaces, go to **Administration** | **Tabs**. The first tab in the Selected Tabs list is the landing page. There are multiple options for the landing tab in your site. Select the one that best meets members' needs. - Chatter tab—If you select this tab, the feed is the first thing members see when they log in. This option is good for sites where people spend most of their time in Chatter and don’t need a customized home page with additional components. You can also rename the Chatter tab. - Home tab—If you select this tab, the Salesforce Home tab for your org is the first thing members see when they log in. The components that display on the tab were added to the Home Page by your admin. This option is good if you don’t use Chatter or don't want a feed-based home page view. - Custom Visualforce tab—Selecting this option lets you build a completely custom landing page. # Close a Conversation, Poll, or Question in an Aura Site The question is answered, the topic discussed, the poll decided. What do you do now? You end the conversation. Admins, moderators, and permitted members can close a question, poll, or post in an Aura site. And, if needed, they can reopen it. It’s a nice way to stop the churning on a settled matter. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To assign close conversation permission to a user in a site:

Enable Chatter

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

To close a conversation, in a site: Close Conversation Threads
Closing conversations is available in group, topic, discussion, and user profile feeds in your Experience Builder sites. Admins and moderators can close posts, polls, and questions without any special configuration. Admins can assign the Close Conversation Threads permission to site members. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note When a conversation is exposed in your internal org, for example, through a cross-site stream, the conversation’s open or close status is respected. After a thread is closed, some actions are available to all and some actions are available only to admins and authorized members. This table outlines who can do what after a feed item is closed.
Action Availability on a Closed Conversation
Add a comment Blocked
Answer a question Blocked
Vote on a poll Blocked
Edit a feed item or its comments or answers Blocked to author; available to admins, moderators, and people with the Close Conversation Threads permission
Edit a topic Available
Delete a feed item or its comments or answers

Blocked to author; available to admins, moderators, and people with the Close Conversation Threads permission

If a user has the Close Conversation Threads permission, they can delete feed items whether the conversation is open or closed.

Publish a pending review comment (site moderation) Available to admins and moderators
Like or unlike; upvote or downvote Available
Select or remove a best answer Blocked to author; available to admins, moderators, and people with the Close Conversation Threads permission
Company verify; remove verification Available only to people with the Verify Answers to Chatter Questions permission
Flag Available
Share Available
Bookmark Available
Mute and unmute Available
Escalate to case Available only to people permitted to escalate a feed item to a case
![The Close Question option on a feed item's overflow menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/close_thread.png) 1. Go to the feed item, for example, a question, poll, or post, and open its overflow menu. 2. To close a question, select **Close Question**; to close a post, **Close Post**; to close a poll **Close Poll**. The feed item is closed to most new actions. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note When a feed item is closed, the overflow menu shows open options, for example, **Open Question**, **Open Post**, and **Open Poll**. # CMS Collection Add a CMS Collection to your Aura site using the CMS Collection component in Experience Builder. If you created a collection in your Content Management Workspace, you can customize the layout on your site page. If you don’t have a collection yet, you can still add the component as a placeholder on your page. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To access an Experience Builder site’s Content Management workspace:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences
  • AND is a member of the site
To customize an Experience Builder site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences OR assigned an experience admin, publisher, or builder role in that site
  • AND is a member of the site
The CMS Collection component can be added to a page multiple times and can use collections created from CMS content or Salesforce CRM data. Collections are created in the [Content Management area of Experience Workspaces.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_managed_content_collections.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Collections help you organize and display multiple pieces of content from your Salesforce CMS workspace on your Aura site. View, create, and edit collections in the Collections tab in the Content Management tile of your Aura site’s workspace. Create collections manually or use conditions for collections that update automatically.") You can add the CMS Collection component to a page before you create your first collection. But until a collection is associated with the component, you can’t access the layout options. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - Be careful when using the CMS Collections component to show products in a B2B Commerce store. The component doesn’t respect user entitlements. All users with access to a page where the component shows products see all products that are exposed through the component. - When a CMS collection is configured, it's shown in a grid layout. Mobile devices only show a single column, even if you have more than one column configured. 1. In Experience Builder, click **Components**. 2. Drag the **CMS Collection** component onto the page. 3. In the component property panel, click **\+ Add Collection**. 4. Select the collection that you want to add from the list, and save your changes. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip The Type column indicates the source of a collection. For example, News is any collection composed of CMS News content. An object name such as Account or Product indicates a Salesforce CRM Collection. 5. In the component property panel, customize the collection layout and content layout as needed. 6. To control what information the component displays, select field mappings in the component property panel. Your changes are saved as you make selections, and they’re reflected in the preview. - If you have a CMS collection, map component fields to properties of the CMS content. - If you have a CRM collection, map component fields to object field names. To make the content accessible to site visitors who use screen readers, map the Headline field to a text element from your CMS content or CRM object. For example, for a CMS Collection, you can map to the content title. Or if you have a CRM collection for the Account object, map to the Account Name field. ![Field Mappings in component property panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_cms_singleitem_field_mappings.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # CMS Connect (HTML) The CMS Connect (HTML) component lets you display HTML content from a content management system (CMS). After setting up a connection in your CMS Connect workspace, drag a CMS Connect component on a page to render content from that connection. Before using the CMS Connect (HTML) component, see [Create a CMS Connection](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.cms_dev.meta/cms_dev/cms_connect_create_connection.htm) in CMS Developer Guide. Then choose **Use in Builder** for the connection you want to use. ![CMS Connect Workspace](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/cms_connect_use_in_builder.png) 1. From the Component panel in Experience Builder, drag a CMS Connect component to the page and location where you want to display it. 2. Select the component. In the property editor, configure its properties. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | CMS Source | Select the CMS source that contains the content to display. If no sources are listed, click **Manage Connections** to set one up. | | Component Path | Enter the path to the component to display. If the connection has a root path, enter only the component part of the path. For example, if you entered content/capricorn for the root path, enter only banner1 for the component path. If your connection doesn’t have a root path, enter the full path for the component. | | Personalization | Select the option to enable personalization for this instance of the CMS Connect (HTML) component. Personalization lets you keep branding and other content consistent between your community and your website. | # CMS Connect (JSON) The CMS Connect (JSON) component displays JSON content from a content management system (CMS). Before using the CMS Connect (JSON) component, see [Create a CMS Connection](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.cms_dev.meta/cms_dev/cms_connect_create_connection.htm) in CMS Developer Guide. The connection includes the server URL and paths to your JSON information. It also defines content lists and content items that you want to display. Then choose **Use in Builder** for the connection you want to use. ![CMS Connect Workspace](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/cms_connect_use_in_builder.png) 1. In Experience Builder, drag a CMS Connect (JSON) component from the Components panel to the location on the page where you want to display it. 2. Using the property editor, configure the component’s properties.
Property Details
CMS Source Select the CMS source containing the content that you want to display. If no sources are listed, go to your CMS Connect workspace and define content items and content lists for the connection.
JSON Content Select the JSON content. Choose from the content items and content lists that you set up in the connection. In the property editor, the fields that you see depend on what you select. For example, if you select a content list, you see the layout options for a list.
Component Path Applies only for content items. Enter the path to the component to display. For example, enter the ID of a blog.
Content List Layout Choose a layout for your content list. Currently, the only option is Grid. Define the grid layout using the Items Per Page and Columns properties.
Content List Item Layout Choose a layout for items in your content list. Currently, the only option is Card. To specify card properties (Title, Author, and so on), enter a JSON expression or value. For example, enter @key, 6, or {!id}.
Content Item Layout Choose a layout for your content item. Currently, the only option is Detail. To specify detail properties (Title, Author, and so on), enter a JSON expression or value.
Items Per Page Enter the number of content items that display on each page.
Columns Enter the number of columns of content items that display on desktops and tablets. Phones display content items in a single column.
Title Enter a JSON expression or text for the title, such as @title.
Author Enter a JSON expression or text for the author, such as @author/name.
Published On Enter a JSON expression or text in ISO format for the publish date. For example, @date or YYYY-MM-DDTHH:mm:ss.sssZ.
Body Enter a JSON expression or text for the content body, such as @content.
Image Source Enter a JSON expression for the image source of the content item, such as @featured_image.
Navigation section Set up the navigation link for content items in your content list.
Link Text Enter the link text to display on your site page. The default is Read More.
Type Select whether the link points to a generated page or an external URL with the content items in your content list.
Page Displays the name of the generated detail page. The default name reflects the CMS source and content type name for your connection. To change the default name, URL, or layout of this page, change the page properties using the Pages menu.
URL

Enter the fully qualified URL to the content.

You can also specify JSON expressions, such as @link.

# CMS Single Item Add a single item of Salesforce CMS content such as a corporate statement, article, or image to your Aura site using the CMS Single Item component. You can add any content type, including News, Image, or Document, as a single item to a page. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To create, customize, or publish an Experience Builder site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
Before using the CMS Single Item component, create content in Salesforce CMS. You can add the component to your site without a content source, but you can’t configure it until you link it to content. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can only add published content created in the Digital Experiences app. If you have a published piece of content and a draft version of the content, the latest published version is what’s available to select. 1. In Experience Builder, click **Components**. 2. Drag the **CMS Single Item** component onto the page. 3. In the component property panel, click **Add Content**. 4. Select the content that you want to add from the list of published CMS content items, and save your change. 5. In the component property panel, customize the content layout, such as font size, image position, overlays, and more. 6. To control what information the component displays, select field mappings in the component property panel. Map component fields to properties of the Salesforce CMS content. Your changes are saved as you make selections, and they’re reflected in the preview. For example, map the Headline to the content title, and map the Subheading to the content body. Setting field mappings also makes your content more accessible to site visitors who use screen readers. ![Field Mappings in component property panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_cms_singleitem_field_mappings.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note When you publish or unpublish content that is bound to a CMS Single Item, your guest users can experience up to an hour delay before they see the updated content in your site. Authenticated users can experience up to a five-minute delay. #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # CMS Single Item (Detail) Add the CMS Single Item (Detail) component to a CMS Content page to configure the page and let users see your content in full. Use this component to customize the content and layout of detail pages for all CMS content types: News, Image, and Document. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To create, customize, or publish an Experience Builder site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
You can only add the CMS Single Item (Detail) to a CMS content detail page in Experience Builder. There’s only one detail page for each content type in Salesforce CMS. 1. In Experience Builder, navigate to a detail page, and then click **Components**. 2. Drag the **CMS Single Item (Detail)** component onto the page. 3. In the component property panel, determine the content layout (1), map fields to fields in the CMS content (2), and customize the layout of images and headers (3). ![Component property editor for CMS Single Item (Detail) component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_cms_singleitemdetail_propertypanel.png) Show content fields in a default order, or group them into sections for a more precise layout. To fully customize the appearance of your CMS content detail page, continue adjusting the fields in the component property panel. #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Collaborate in Chatter Groups Use public, private, or unlisted Chatter groups to collaborate with specific people in your company. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_about.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're working on a team, you can create a group for your team to share mission-related files and information. Share information through the group feed. - **[Unlisted Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_unlisted_groups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Unlisted Chatter groups offer more privacy compared to private Chatter groups. Only group members and users with the Manage Unlisted Groups permission can access unlisted groups in list views, feeds, and search results. - **[Seen-By Information in Private and Unlisted Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_seenby.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Posts in private and unlisted Chatter groups have a seen-by count that shows the number of people who have seen a post. Click the count to see the names of people who have seen the post. - **[Broadcast Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_groups_broadcast_about.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Broadcast groups are a special type of public, private, or unlisted Chatter group where only group owners and managers can post to the group. Group members can read posts and comment on them. - **[Filter Chatter Group Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_filters.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Lightning Experience, many filtering options are available in Chatter group feeds to help you get to information quickly. - **[Group List Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Groups page displays a list of the Chatter groups in your company. - **[Join or Leave Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_join.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Join Chatter groups to collaborate with other people on projects or common areas of interest. Share project-related files and information with the group. Leave the groups that are no longer relevant to you. - **[Chatter Group Limitations in the Salesforce Mobile App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_groups_mobile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are limitations when you use the Groups feature in the Salesforce mobile app. - **[Create and Manage Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_groups_manage_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a Chatter group for your team or a project, add members, and update group settings. - **[Work in Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_groups_working.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To make the best use of your groups, it helps to understand the information they offer and different ways to interact with them. - **[Records in Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can interact with your records through your Chatter groups. For example, you can create records and add and remove them from a group. # Collaborate with Everyone Complete tasks quickly and efficiently by collaborating with people either inside or outside your org. Here you’ll find information on collaboration tools like Chatter, Salesforce CRM Content, and documents. For information on using Slack to collaborate in Salesforce, see [Salesforce Channels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.slack_salesforce_channels.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Set Up and Maintain Collaboration Tools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collaboration_admin_welcome.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Help your users collaborate with one another and with people outside your organization. - **[Collaborate Within Your Company](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_within_company.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Stay current with what’s happening in your company. Share your knowledge in Chatter posts and comments, collaborate in groups, and access files and data across your organization. Salesforce channels, which bring Slack into Salesforce, are another way to collaborate in Salesforce. In new orgs created in Summer ’26 and later, Salesforce channels are enabled by default. - **[Collaborate with Partners and Customers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_with_customers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Share updates with customers and partners in Chatter groups. - **[Collaboration Resources for Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collaboration_resources_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In addition to online help, Salesforce publishes printable documentation to help you learn about our features. # Collaborate with Partners and Customers Share updates with customers and partners in Chatter groups. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Chatter Customers in Private Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_external_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter customers are people outside your company's email domains. Customers can see only the groups they're invited to. They can interact only with members of those groups. Customers can’t see any Salesforce information. - **[Add or Remove Customers in Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_external_adding.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If customer invitations are enabled for your organization, you can invite, add, and remove customers. # Collaborate Within Your Company Stay current with what’s happening in your company. Share your knowledge in Chatter posts and comments, collaborate in groups, and access files and data across your organization. Salesforce channels, which bring Slack into Salesforce, are another way to collaborate in Salesforce. In new orgs created in Summer ’26 and later, Salesforce channels are enabled by default. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). For information on using Slack to collaborate in Salesforce, see [Salesforce Channels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.slack_salesforce_channels.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Share Updates with People in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Share updates with coworkers, collaborate in Chatter groups, and view record updates. - **[Create, Share, and Organize Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Post files to feeds and records, share files with customers, and organize files into folders and libraries. - **[Salesforce Chatter for Windows 10 Anniversary Edition Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.win_chatter_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce Chatter is a downloadable app for Windows 10 Anniversary Edition users. Salesforce Chatter combines Chatter feeds and posting functionality with the power of an app optimized for Windows 10 users. # Collaboration Features Enable collaboration features so users in your Experience Cloud sites can collaborate with one another and with employees in your org. - **[Chatter Features in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter is a social network for holding and preserving discussions in a business, customer site, or other enterprise. Site members can use Chatter to engage with your organization, seek expert advice, and revisit relevant discussions. Chatter gives you a direct view into your site, fostering insight and inspiration. In sites, Chatter is often referred to as feeds or discussions. While Chatter is available in sites built using Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce templates, lots of extra features that support customer and partner site are available only in Aura sites. - **[Chatter Features in Aura and Visualforce Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_setup_chatter_aura_vf.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter is available in sites built using Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce templates. While many features that support customer and partner site are available only in Aura sites, some features are available in both types of templates. - **[Work with Files in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_files_in_communities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize Salesforce Files settings and understand file sharing and visibility to get the most out of Files in your Experience Cloud site. - **[Enable Ideas in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_ideas.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Ideas enable a group of users to post, vote for, and comment on ideas. Enabling Ideas provides an online, transparent way for you to attract, manage, and showcase innovation. # Collaboration Resources for Admins In addition to online help, Salesforce publishes printable documentation to help you learn about our features and successfully administer Salesforce.
  For End Users For Admins
Collaboration
Quick Actions Implementation Guide   Check icon indicating true
Set Up Salesforce File Sync   Check icon indicating true
Salesforce Files Connect Implementation Guide   Check icon indicating true
Experience Cloud
Community Management Guide for Experience Cloud   Check icon indicating true
# Collaboration Resources for Users In addition to online help, Salesforce publishes printable documentation to help you learn about our features. These documents include tip sheets, user guides, and other resources that describe the features and capabilities of Salesforce. These documents are available as Adobe® PDF files. Adobe Reader® is required to open PDF files; to download the latest version of Reader, go to [www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html](http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html). # Configure a Custom Domain for Your Experience Cloud Site To provide a branded experience for users who access your external-facing Salesforce content, serve your Experience Cloud sites on a domain that you own. With a custom domain, your users access your external-facing Experience Cloud site and its functionality through your branded URL, such as https://www.example.com. Also, with the many-to-many relationship between sites and custom domains, you can serve your external-facing content to meet your branding needs. For example, you can serve content from multiple Experience Cloud sites on one parent website, or serve multiple sites on one domain through custom paths. Because you can serve multiple sites on one domain, custom domains simplify the management of your domains and your corresponding network allowlists. And even if your Salesforce-hosted site URL changes due to a My Domain change, your custom domain remains constant, reducing the number of updates required. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions. Also available with Marketing Cloud Account Engagement (Pardot) in Professional Edition.
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
You can set up a custom domain to serve your sites at any time. When you set up a custom domain as you build your Experience Cloud sites, your visitors use your branded custom domain from the start. This approach can improve your SEO and eliminate future effort to update hard-coded links and change user behavior. To learn more and set up a custom domain, see [Custom Domains](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.domain_mgmt.htm&type=5&language=en_US). If you serve your site content on a custom domain, we also highly recommend that you use a content delivery network (CDN) to optimize your content and site performance. For more information, see [Content Delivery Networks (CDNs) and Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.community_builder_cdn_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) . If you set up a custom domain in a Professional Edition org with Marketing Cloud Account Engagement (Pardot), that domain must use the Salesforce CDN. #### See Also - [Experience Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Salesforce Experience Cloud lets you create branded digital experiences to share information and collaborate with people who are key to your business processes, such as customers, partners, or employees. Whether you call it a portal, help forum, support community, or something else, an Experience Cloud site is a great place to connect with the important folks in your life.") # Configure Agentforce Service Agent to Initiate Context-Driven Conversations on the Salesforce Mobile App Due to the limited screen space on mobile devices, auto-triggering Agentforce Service Agent when a user enters a search query may be intrusive and distracting to the user. For an elevated experience, create a custom LWC component for your experience site that allows users to choose whether they want Agentforce Service Agent to help them with their queries. This feature is designed to enhance user experience by providing a more intuitive interaction with Agentforce Service Agent. Customize the name and appearance of the custom component to match your experience site’s theme. ### Required Editions
View supported editions.
Before you begin, make sure the custom component is visible only on the Salesforce mobile app and not on the desktop site. 1. [Create and deploy a custom LWC component](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/lightning-web-components-basics/push-lightning-web-component-files) for your experience site that fetches the user information. In the newly created custom LWC component folder, use this template of the custom component. 1. Replace `[Master Label]` and `[Description]` as shown in this .js-meta.xml file. ``` 62.0 true [Master Label] [Description] lightningCommunity__Page lightningCommunity__Default ``` 2. Configure the .js file. Name the custom event. ``` import { LightningElement } from 'lwc'; export default class BannerForUnifiedSearchMobile extends LightningElement { handleClick() { var clickedEvent = new CustomEvent('custombuttonclicked', { bubbles: true, composed: true }); // Dispatches the event. window.dispatchEvent(clickedEvent); } } ``` 3. Replace `[Button Label]` and `[Mobile Button]` as shown in this .html file. ``` ``` 4. Configure the .css file. ``` .mobile-button { display: none; } @media (max-width: 768px) { .mobile-button { display: inline-block; } } ``` 2. In the Experience Site Builder, drag your custom LWC component on the Search Results page. 3. Go to **Settings** | **Advanced** | **Edit Head Markup**. Paste ‌this sample script into the head markup. Make sure you use the same event name as configured in step 1.b. `` 4. Save and publish your changes. # Configure Chatter Desktop Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important For more information, see [Chatter Desktop Retirement](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=000267581&type=1&language=en_US). The default Chatter Desktop configuration is appropriate for most users, but several Chatter Desktop settings are configurable. To access Chatter Desktop settings, click ![Chatter Desktop settings icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_desktop_settings.png) the Chatter Desktop settings icon and select **Settings**. From the Settings screen, you can: - Configure Chatter Desktop to launch when you start your computer. - Configure Chatter Desktop to minimize when you close it. - Turn popup notifications on or off. Popup notifications are enabled by default. - Manage alerts for new feed posts and comments (advanced settings). - Configure Chatter Desktop to always display in the foreground (advanced settings). - Move the chat window to the foreground when you receive a new message. - Play sounds when someone starts a new chat with you. Or play a sound for every chat message when a chat is minimized or out of focus. For example, a chat can be out of focus when you have multiple chats or are using another application. - Edit your [connections](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018."). #### See Also - [Chatter Desktop Troubleshooting Tips](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_troubleshooting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find solutions for troubleshooting Chatter Desktop.") # Configure Chatter Desktop Managed Version Control Chatter Desktop settings by deploying an XML-based configuration file to each user's machine. The configuration in the file overrides the user's settings. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic

Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, Developer, and Database.com Editions

Salesforce CRM, Approvals, Chatter email notifications, Chatter Invitations, and customer invitations are not available in Database.com.

![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. For more information, see [Chatter Desktop Retirement](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=000267581&type=1&language=en_US). 1. Create a file named .chatterdesktop, add a `chatterdesktop` parent element with two child elements, `config` and `servers`. 2. Inside the `config` element, create the child elements listed in this table and add a `default` and an `editable` attribute. Each attribute can have the value true or false. To make a child element the default setting, set the element’s `default` attribute to true. To allow users to change a default setting through the user interface, set the element’s `editable` attribute to true. | Child Element | Description | | --- | --- | | `launchOnStartup` | Launches the application on start-up. | | `minimizeOnClose` | Minimizes the application on close. | | `notifications` | Enables pop-up notifications. | | `criticalAlerts` | Enables alerts for new feed posts and comments by highlighting the taskbar icon (Windows) or causing the dock icon to bounce (Mac OS). | | `bringToForeground` | Brings Chatter Desktop to the foreground for new feed posts and comments. | | `alwaysOnTop` | Enables Chatter Desktop to always display in the foreground. | | `chatWindowToForeground` | Enables the chat window to display in the foreground when a new chat is received (Mac only). | | `chatSoundEnabled` | Enables sounds for new chats received. | | `playSoundForEveryMessage` | Enables sounds for all chats received. | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If the `default` attribute is set to true for `chatSoundEnabled` and false for `playSoundForEveryMessage`, a sound plays only for new chats received. If both are set to true, a sound plays for every chat received. If both are set to false, chat sounds are disabled. 3. If your organization uses instances of Salesforce other than Production and Sandbox, specify the servers that host those instances in separate `server` elements inside the `servers` element. Inside each `server` element, include the following attributes: - `label`—The name of the connection as you want it to appear in the user interface. - `serverUrl`—The URL you use to log in to the instance. The URL must begin with https:// and end with salesforce.com or chatter.com. For example, if your organization has a European division that you log into from https://emea.salesforce.com, enter that URL and name the connection Europe.. - `defaultServer`—Set to TRUE to make this server the default instance to which Chatter Desktop connects. 4. Test the .chatterdesktop configuration file. 1. Copy the .chatterdesktop configuration file to the user directory on your machine. The user directories are: - Mac OS—/Users/ - Linux—/home/ 2. Launch Chatter Desktop and verify that it functions correctly. 5. Copy the .chatterdesktop file to the user directory on every machine that is running Chatter Desktop in your organization. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example The following is a sample configuration file: ```markup ``` #### See Also - [Control Access to Chatter Desktop](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_admin.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter Desktop is enabled for most organizations, but administrators can control access to Chatter Desktop.") - [Install Chatter Desktop Managed Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_installing_managed_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Salesforce provides two Chatter Desktop installers: a standard version for individual installations and a managed version for enterprise deployments.") # Configure Data Graphs and Timeline Wrapper for Personalization Organize ingested events into Data Graphs and activate the Timeline Wrapper to surface chronological customer activity on your site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Available in: Aura Experience Cloud Sites
To show a chronological list of customer interactions, group your Data Model Objects (DMOs) into a Data Graph. This graph enables the Timeline Wrapper to retrieve related web engagement and search events stored in Data Cloud. 1. [Create a Data Graph](https://www.google.com/search?q=https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView%3Fid%3Dsf.c360_a_create_data_graph.htm) in the Data Cloud app using Party Identification as the Primary DMO. ![New data grapgh](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/newdatagraph.png) 2. Under Party Identification, add **Individual** to the graph, and then select **WebSite Engagement** and **Web Search Engagement** as related objects. ![Web search engangement (individual)](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/websearch1.png) ![Parity Identifiaction](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/webserachengment2.png) 3. Save and select **Activate**. 4. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Timeline Settings, select **Timeline Settings**, and turn on Data Cloud Events. 5. [Set Up a Timeline in Salesforce](https://www.google.com/search?q=https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView%3Fid%3Dsf.timeline_setup.htm) using User as the Timeline Object Name.![New Timeline](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/timeline3.png) 6. Under Timeline Related Objects, [Set Up a Timeline to Show Engagement Events from Data Cloud Data Graph](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.timeline_show_data_graph_events.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 7. Map the Identification Number as the Data Model Object Field. 8. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, select **All Sites**, and select **Builder** next to your site. 9. In Experience Builder, [Add Timeline to Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.timeline_experience_cloud.htm&type=5&language=en_US) by dragging the **Timeline Wrapper** component onto your page.![Drag Timeline wrapper](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/timelinewrapper4.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Timeline Wrapper is available only in Aura sites. 10. In the property editor, select the new timeline from the Timeline Name dropdown list and **Publish** the site. #### See Also - [Set Up a Timeline in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.timeline_client_information.htm&language=en_US) - [Data Graphs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_data_graphs.htm&language=en_US) # Configure Deal Registration in Partner Central Deal registration programs involve resellers registering deals with their vendor. Vendors in turn provide extra margins to the reseller for providing early pipeline visibility for these deals and keeping out competitors. Once a deal is registered, other resellers or your direct sales team can’t compete for the registered deal. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Configure deal registration to: - Automate the submission & approval process - Increase partner competitiveness and participation - Provide incentives to partners for leads they convert quickly - Get early visibility into your pipeline - Manage channel conflict - Monitor channel revenues both within your Experience Cloud site and in Salesforce Here’s a summary of how to configure deal registration in your Partner Central site. - **[Create Processes for Deal Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_process_deal_reg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A process allows you to define or customize the stages in the sales process for leads or opportunities. - **[Create Page Layouts for Deal Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_page_layouts_partners_deal_reg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use page layouts to control field visibility and behavior for different types of users and sales processes. There are likely fields on leads that you might not want to expose only to channel managers and not partners. - **[Create Lead Record Types for Deal Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_recordtypes_partners_deal_reg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a lead record type to track deals submitted by partners in Experience Cloud sites. Record types help you differentiate between sales leads and registered deals, assign page layouts for each profile for deal registration, and simplify reporting by lead record type. - **[Create a Global Action to Let Partners Register Deals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_deal_reg_global_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a global action to allow partners to register deals from Experience Cloud sites. Partner Central comes with a Quick Create button that you can add the global action to so partners can register deals. - **[Customize Opportunities for Deal Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_opp_process_deal_reg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an opportunity process, page layout, and record type, similar to leads. - **[Create Approval Workflows for Deal Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_deal_reg_approval_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Approval workflows are unique to each organization’s sales needs and business processes. - **[Customize Partner Central for Deal Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_dealreg_customize_partnercetral.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Partner Central comes predesigned to support deal registration. Use the Quick Create button to share a global action to submit registered deals. The template contains lead and deal list views for partner users. # Configure Digital Experiences Settings Manage settings that apply to all sites built on Experience Cloud. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
User Permissions Needed
To change digital experience settings: Customize Application
1. From Setup, enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **Digital Experiences** | **Settings**. 2. Make your changes and save.
Setting Description
Experience Management
Enable Experience Workspaces Use Experience Workspaces to manage your sites. This setting is on by default, but you can disable it.
Assign new records created by guest users to the default owner When enabled, all new records created by guest users are assigned to a default record owner. If no default record owner is chosen, the default record owner is the site’s owner.
Display warning for unsupported browsers When enabled, users are asked to update or switch browsers when they access an Aura site with an unsupported browser. Display warnings are available by default in Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) sites.
Enable ExperienceBundle Metadata API Provides access to the ExperienceBundle Metadata API, which allows text-based programmatic migration and creation of Aura sites. LWR sites use ExperienceBundle by default.
Role and User Settings
Number of customer roles You can have up to three roles. If you specify one customer role and then decide to increase the number of roles later, the increased number of roles isn’t applied to existing customer accounts.
Number of partner roles

When you enable the first external user on a partner account, a user role hierarchy is created for that account. The three roles are Partner User, Partner Manager, and Partner Executive. The role hierarchy rolls up to the account owner (typically, the channel manager). When you create contacts on the partner account and convert them to external users, assign one of these roles to them.

If you specify one partner role and then decide to increase the number of roles later, the increased number of roles isn’t applied to existing partner accounts.

Allow editing of the Partner Account field on opportunities and leads Select to allow partner users to edit the Partner Account field.
Enable Partner Super User Access Granting super user access to users with Partner Community licenses lets them access more data and records, regardless of sharing rules and org-wide defaults. Super users can access data owned by other site users who have the same role or a role below them. Super user access applies only to cases, leads, custom objects, and opportunities. External users have access to these objects only if you expose them using profiles or sharing and add the tabs to the portal.
Enable report options for external users Select this option to give external users with Partner Community or Customer Community Plus licenses and the “Run Reports” permission, access to report options on the run report page.
Let customer users access notes and attachments Select to let customer users access notes and attachments on accounts and contacts.
Allow customer users to change case statuses Let users with Customer Community Plus licenses change their case status in Visualforce sites.
Allow users to see contacts that haven’t been enabled for partner or customer accounts Let users see contacts from private accounts that they have read access to when the contact is associated with the parent record of their own contact record.
Require unique usernames for partners in this org Orgs created after Winter ’19 automatically contain username uniqueness at the org level.
Allow using standard external profiles for self-registration, user creation, and login Each external license type is associated with a default profile in the org. Enable this setting to let external users self-register and log in with the default external profile. Salesforce best practice is to clone the default profile and add all the permissions needed to the cloned profile.
Hide first and last name fields in SOAP API for site users, when making API calls from within a site with nicknames enabled This setting applies to SOAP API when used in an Aura controller that is invoked from a Lightning component on an Experience Cloud site.
Hide badges from guest users in Experience Builder sites Hide badges used in gamification from guest users in Aura sites.
Moderation Rule Settings
Moderation applies to all feed posts regardless of where they are visible Apply moderation flags and rules to all feed posts, including those visible across multiple sites. When this setting is disabled, moderation applies only to site-specific feed posts.
Moderation rules can be configured for internal users’ feed posts on records Apply moderation rules to internal users’ feed posts on records that might be visible across multiple sites.
Salesforce Mobile Settings for Experiences
Support links to Visualforce pages from site pages made using Visualforce in the mobile app Keep the Apex prefix in Experience Cloud site URLs so links between Visualforce pages resolve in Salesforce. Enabling this setting keeps the Apex prefix in all of your Experience Cloud site URLs.
New User Email Settings
Link expires in [x] days Select how many days you’d like an activation email to remain active.
Account Relationship Settings
Enable Account Relationships Enable to show Account Relationship objects and their associated sharing rules. After you enable this option, you can't disable it in your org.
External Account Hierarchy Settings
Enable External Account Hierarchy Enable to show External Account Hierarchy objects. After you enable this option, you can't disable it in your org.
Embedded Login
Apply Login Page Type to Embedded Login Applies the site’s login page type (default, Login Discovery, Experience Builder, or Visualforce) to its Embedded Login implementations.
Block Redirect to Unknown URL For the site’s Embedded Login implementations, blocks redirects to unknown URLs that are provided in the state parameter of the OAuth response. Redirects are allowed only when the URL is in the same host or domain as the site or is allow-listed in the Embedded Login salesforce-allowed-domains meta tag.
Sharing Sets
Create a sharing set  
Convert Site Member Access
Convert Site Member Access  
# Configure Features with Guided Setup Guided setup walks you through setting up visibility, processes, workflows, record types, layouts, and assignment rules for Salesforce features. From start to finish, guided setup leads you through each step with easy-to-follow directions and navigable links to settings pages. As long as you have a Partner license, you can access Guided Setup from Experience Workspaces. Click the Guided Setup tile, and select which feature you want to set up. ![Guided Setup landing page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/guided_setup_landing_page.png) Click **Overview** to get a description of the feature and the setup tasks. ![Guided Setup overview page for Lead Distribution](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_gs_overview.png) Click **Guided Setup** to begin setting up the feature. ![Guided Setup Set Up Features page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_gs_guided_setup.png) - (1) Each setup task has been organized into a separate step. Navigable links take you to the right setup pages for completing tasks. After you complete the step, you can mark that task as complete and move on to the next. - Not able to finish one of the setups? Or do you want to hit pause on a setup and move on to the next one? Not a problem. You can easily switch between setups from the upper left corner of the Guided Setup page (2). Any completed steps remain marked until you come back to them, so it’s easy to find your place again. - Need a bit more information about a process or step? Want to learn more? Salesforce Help, a link to the Trailblazer community, and related Trails are easily accessible on the right side of the screen (3). # Configure File Upload and Download Security Settings To provide more security, control the way some file types are handled during upload and download. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
User Permissions Needed
To configure file upload and download settings: Customize Application
To manage file upload and download settings: 1. From Setup, enter File Upload and Download Security in the Quick Find box, then select **File Upload and Download Security**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. To prevent users from uploading files that can pose a security risk, select Don't allow HTML uploads as attachments or document records. This setting blocks the upload of these MIME file types: .html, .htt, .mht, .svg, .swf, .thtml, and .xhtml. ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_warning.png) Warning Keep the following in mind when selecting this option: - If your organization uses the partner portal to give your partner users access to Salesforce, we don't recommend enabling this setting. Enabling this setting prevents your organization from customizing the appearance of your partner portal. - HTML attachments are not permitted on solutions, regardless of whether this security setting is enabled. In addition, this setting does not affect attachments on email templates; HTML attachments on email templates are always permitted. - After this setting is enabled, previously-uploaded HTML documents and attachments are unaffected. However, when users attempt to view an HTML attachment or document, their browser first prompts them to open the file in the browser, save it to their computer, or cancel the action. 4. Set download behavior for each file type: 1. **Download** (recommended): The file, regardless of file type, is always downloaded. 2. **Execute in Browser**: The file, regardless of file type, is displayed and executed automatically when accessed in a browser or through an HTTP request. 3. **Hybrid**: Salesforce Files are downloaded. Attachments and documents execute in the browser. 5. Click **Save**. # Configure Google Analytics™ for Experience Cloud Sites Set up Google Analytics to track user IDs, user types, and search activity so that users can pull this information into meaningful reports. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Google Analytics integrates with your self-service site to track user types, user IDs, page views on Salesforce objects, and customer search activity. To capture this information correctly, some initial setup is required. 1. In Experience Builder, go to **Settings** | **Security & Privacy**. Under **Content Security Policy**, select **Relaxed CSP: Permit Access to Inline Scripts and Allowed Hosts**. 2. Go to **Settings** | **Advanced** and enter your Google Analytics ID. For more information about the Google Analytics ID, check the [Google Analytics documentation](https://support.google.com/analytics/answer/1032385?hl=en). 3. Select **Let Google Analytics access your Salesforce data for deeper insights into search activity**. This step lets Google Analytics track user types, user IDs, and customer search activity in your site. 4. To enable the masking of IP addresses on the Google server side, select **Use IP Anonymization**. Masking IP addresses helps with privacy compliance and concerns. 5. Create custom dimensions in your Google Analytics account that capture user type and Salesforce object information. 1. From your Google Analytics account, go to **Admin** | **Property** | **Custom Definitions** | **Custom Dimensions**, and click **+New Custom Dimension**. 2. For the first index you want to use, enter the name User Type and select **Hit** for the scope. 3. For the second index, enter the name Salesforce Object and select **Hit** for the scope. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Google Analytics console auto assigns sequential indexes based on how many variables you created. Configure the custom dimension indexes in the site so that they match the indexes of the newly created variables. 6. Create a User-ID view. With the User-ID view, you can analyze how specific segments of traffic with an assigned ID engage with your content. 1. Go to **Admin** | **Property** | **Tracking Info** | **User-ID** and follow the instructions. 2. For the User-ID view, enter the name User Explorer. 7. To track the way different types of users are interacting with the site, click **Reporting** | **Audience** | **User Explorer** | **User Flow**. After you integrate Google Analytics, you can install the preconfigured [Google Analytics for Salesforce Communities package](https://analytics.google.com/analytics/gallery/#posts/search/%3F_.viewId%3DWGfCUMyAT0CaxBM0wOFRsQ/) or [create your own reports](https://support.google.com/analytics/answer/1151300?hl=en). # Configure Guided Setup Reports Additional configuration is required once you’ve installed your Guided Setup reports. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To delete reports in My Personal Custom Reports folder Create and Customize Reports
To delete reports in public folders Manage Public Reports
Once you’ve installed reports from the Guided Setup, filter values must be added to some reports. Check the filters on your reports to ensure that they are set correctly. 1. From the App Launcher, find and open **Reports**. 2. Click **All Folders** and select the report folder. 3. Select the report you want to customize and click **Edit**. 4. Make any necessary changes and save. If you want to remove any of the reports or folders from your organization, you must [manually delete them](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=analytics.reports_delete.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Don’t forget to also [delete the custom report type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.reports_manage_report_type.htm&type=5&language=en_US) for any reports that you decide to remove from your org. # Configure Highlight-to-Ask on Your Experience Cloud Site To let users ask Agentforce questions about highlighted text in knowledge articles, configure the Context-Aware Quick Chat Lightning Web Component on your Experience Cloud site. Passing context makes sure your users get in-context questions powered by an Agentforce Service agent. The Agentforce Service agent provides immediate, relevant answers without leaving the page. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Aura and LWR Experience Cloud Sites
Available in: Enhanced Chat with the Einstein for Service, Einstein Platform, Community, Community Plus, or Agentforce Service Agent add-on
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Foundations or Agentforce 1 Editions. Access to some standard agent actions requires additional add-on licenses
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site OR View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To create and manage Agentforce Service agents: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site OR View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To enable digital experiences: Customize Application
To set up this Enhanced Chat: Customize Application AND Modify Metadata Through Metadata API Function
Before configuring this component, make sure you have completed the necessary setup steps for Enhanced Chat, the Agentforce Service agent type, and context passing. - Set Up an Enhanced Chat Channel. See [Quickly Set Up Enhanced Chat for Testing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.miaw_setup_stages.htm&language=en_US&type=5) or [Create Your First Enhanced Chat Channel and Deployment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.miaw_quick_start.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - Configure the Agentforce Service agent. See: Set Up Your Agent Deploy the Context Passing Framework. - Deploy the Context Passing Framework. - Access to Service Starter components in your component palette. To configure Quick Chat, make your site more interactive. This lets you ask contextual questions without leaving the page. The component connects to your configured Agentforce Service agent to provide AI-powered, relevant answers. You can set the Lightning Web Component (LWC) properties to align with your site’s needs. A key feature of this component is its unique display configurations: - Middle: A modal window that appears in the center of the page. - Side: A panel that slides out from the side of the page. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Your site can use either the Context-Aware Quick Chat component or Enhanced Chat component, but you can't use both on the same site. The unique display modes and the highlight-to-ask feature are exclusive to the Context-Aware Quick Chat component. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences , and then select **All Sites**. 2. Click **Builder** next to your site. 3. In the Components panel, search for and drag the **Context-Aware Quick Chat** component onto your page layout. For a persistent experience, add this to your site's template, for example the footer. 4. Select the **Context-Aware Quick Chat** component on the page to open its property editor. 5. Set the Display Mode to either **Middle** or **Side**. 6. Enter the text for the Ask a Question Label. 7. Provide a Default Prompt to appear in the text input field. 8. Select or deselect the **Enable Text Highlighting** checkbox to control the feature. 9. Use preview mode to test the functionality. 10. Publish your site. # Configure Lead Distribution in Partner Central Automatically pass on leads acquired from your web site, marketing campaigns, or referral programs using lead distribution. Partner Central lets you share a common pool of leads with your channel partners on a partner site using the lead inbox. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
While companies can choose to configure lead distribution in multiple ways, one approach is to create a shared queue and list view of leads, and use assignment rules to automatically pass leads to partners in the lead inbox. Use Salesforce CRM capabilities such as lead page layouts, lead record types, and assignment rules to automate the process. Partner users can accept the leads they’re assigned from the lead inbox in the partner site. Configure lead distribution for your partner site for: - Automated routing of company-sourced leads to channel partners - Criteria-based lead assignment - Increased likelihood of lead conversion - Automated handling of dead or dormant leads Configuring lead distribution for your Partner Central site involves the following steps. - **[Create a Lead Process for Lead Distribution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A lead process allows you to define or customize status values or stages for leads. - **[Create a Queue for Lead Distribution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_distribution_queue_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a shared queue of leads and add partners to the queue. A queue is a special type of list view that you can quickly share with multiple users, groups, and roles. In fact, creating a queue automatically creates a list view in your org. Queues and their corresponding list views both have visibility settings that allow you to share contents with partner users in your Experience Cloud site. - **[Create Page Layouts for Lead Distribution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_page_layouts_partners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use page layouts to control field visibility and behavior for different types of users and sales processes. There are likely fields on the deal registration that the company may not wish to expose to partners. - **[Create Lead Record Types for Lead Distribution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_recordtypes_partners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a lead record to track sales leads that you pass to partner users. Record types help you differentiate between sales leads and registered deals, assign specific page layouts for different processes, and simplify reporting for each type of record. - **[Create Assignment Rules for Lead Distribution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_assignment_rules_partners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assignment rules allow you to automatically apply criteria to sort, queue, or act on leads. For example, use assignment rules to automatically assign leads to the lead inbox queue for Partner Central. - **[Customize Partner Central for Lead Distribution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_leaddist_customize_communities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Partner Central comes predesigned to support lead distribution. Verify that the Lead Inbox component works with your lead queue and list view and test the lead distribution process. # Configure Market Development Budgets Configure Partner Marketing Budgets so that channel account managers can access them. Set up workflows to streamline the approval process. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Configuring partner marketing budgets for your Partner Central Experience Cloud site involves the following steps. - **[Customize Page Layouts for Partner Marketing Budgets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_budget_page_layout.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Page layouts control field visibility and behavior for different types of users. Channel account managers must create and update budgets. The company may not want partner users to have access to budgets. - **[Grant Channel Account Managers Access to Partner Marketing Budgets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_budget_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a permission set that gives the channel account managers Create, Read, and Update permissions on Partner Marketing Budgets. - **[Share Partner Marketing Budgets with the Channel Account Manager](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_budget_sharing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a sharing rule that gives channel account managers access to budgets. - **[Create Approval Workflows for Partner Marketing Budgets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_fund_budget_approval_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Approval workflows are unique to each organization’s marketing needs and business processes. # Configure Messaging Channels for Agentforce Orchestrator Link your agent to specific communication channels to go live. This step makes sure that the Omni-Channel engine routes incoming conversations from your Experience Cloud site to your personalized AI agent and passes necessary site parameters for accurate search and personalization. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost. To purchase, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Available in: Aura Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Available in: LWR Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
User Permissions Needed
To Configure Messaging Channels
  • Customize Application
  • Manage Agentforce Agents
  • Create and Set Up Experiences
Before your begin make sure, - Your Agentforce Orchestrator configuration is active. - You have an agent utilizing the External Einstein Agent license. - An Enhanced Service Deployment (V2) exists for your site 1. From Setup, enter Messaging Settings in the Quick Find box and select **Messaging Settings**. 2. Locate your specific channel and click **Edit**. 3. Scroll to the Omni-Channel Routing section and click **Edit**. 4. Set Routing Type to **Agentforce Service Agent**. 5. Select your agent and verify the Fallback Queue. 6. Click Save. 7. Scroll down to the Parameter Mappings section. 8. Click **New** to map the variables required for your portal's security and search logic. 9. Map your portal’s Network ID or Site ID to the corresponding agent variables. This makes sure the agent knows it is operating within your specific Experience Cloud site. 10. Use the Custom Parameters section to define any extra data points that the agent should use for personalized responses. 11. Review all settings to make sure the Routing Type shows your agent. 12. Click **Save**. # Configure Microsite Layout and Create Navigation The Header component, included with the Microsite template, includes theme settings and built-in navigation. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions.
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. To customize the header, select the **Theme** menu. 2. Select **Theme Settings**. **Show fixed header** displays the Fixed Header component, which remains fixed at the top of the screen when your users scroll. You can also choose to fix the primary header by selecting **Fix theme header**, which gives your users access to the menu and navigation as they scroll. 3. Choose which headers to show and then select the component to configure the display. 4. To add navigation to the Header component, select the **Settings** menu. 5. Choose **Navigation** and select **Add Navigation Menu**. 6. From the Menu Editor dialog you can create menu items and choose where to link to. Drag and drop your items and choose how to display them by selecting the Header component. ## Use the Site Header Component (Beta) in a Microsite ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Site Header component is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/?_ga=2.247987783.1372150065.1709219475-629000709.1639001992). Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. 1. In **Settings** | **Theme** for the site, create a theme layout using the Simple Theme Layout option. 2. From the Pages menu, select a page where you want the Site Header component to appear. 3. In the page’s settings, select **Override the default theme layout for this page**, and select your new theme layout. 4. Delete the default Header component from the page and replace it with the Site Header component. #### See Also - [_Developer Documentation_: Create Components for LWR Sites](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/get_started_components.htm) - [_Developer Documentation_: Create Custom Layout Components](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/get_started_layout.htm) # Configure Partner Fund Allocations Configure partner fund allocation for your partner site to make funds available to your partner users. Channel account managers can create and update funds and track fund activity. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Configuring partner fund allocations for your Partner Central Experience Cloud site involves the following steps. - **[Customize Page Layouts for Partner Fund Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_allocation_page_layout.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Page layouts control field visibility and behavior for different types of users. Channel account managers need to create and update allocations, but the company may not wish to expose some information about allocations to partner users. - **[Grant Channel Account Managers Access to Partner Fund Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_allocation_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a permission set to grant channel account manager permissions on Partner Fund Allocations. - **[Share Partner Fund Allocations with the CAM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_allocation_sharing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create two sharing rules: one for the channel account manager (CAM) and one for the partner user. # Configure Partner Fund Claims Configure Partner Fund Claims so that partner users can claim funds for reimbursement after running a marketing campaign. Channel account managers can approve or reject the claim. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Configuring market fund claims for your Partner Central Experience Cloud site involves the following steps. - **[Grant Channel Account Managers and Partner Users Access to Partner Fund Claims](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_claim_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a permission set for your channel account manager (CAM) or financial department so they can manage and approve and reimburse fund claims. Create another permission set for your partner users so they can submit fund claims. - **[Create Approval Workflows for Partner Fund Claims](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_claim_approval_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Approval workflows are unique to each organization’s marketing needs and business processes. - **[Customize Page Layouts for Partner Fund Claims](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_claim_page_layout.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Page layouts control field visibility and behavior for different types of users. Partner users submit fund claims and channel account managers approve and reimburse them. # Configure Partner Fund Requests Configure Partner Fund Requests so that partner users can request funds for marketing campaigns and channel account managers can approve or reject the requests. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Configuring market fund requests for your Partner Central Experience Cloud site involves the following steps. - **[Grant Channel Account Managers and Partner Users Access to Partner Fund Requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_request_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a permission set for your channel account manager (CAM) or financial department so they can manage and approve fund requests. Create another permission set for your partner users so they can submit fund requests. - **[Create Approval Workflows for Partner Fund Requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_request_approval_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Approval workflows are unique to each organization’s marketing needs and business processes. - **[Customize Page Layouts for Partner Fund Requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_request_page_layout.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Page layouts control field visibility and behavior for different types of users. Partner users submit fund requests and channel account managers approve them. # Configure Reports for Partner Scorecard Assigning metrics to a Partner Scorecard is easy, but it’s important to correctly configure the reports. Follow these tips to display accurate information in your scorecard. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create, edit, and delete reports in private folders: Create and Customize Reports
To create, edit, and delete reports in public and private folders: Report Builder OR Report Builder (Lightning Experience)
Here are a few things to keep in mind regarding the reports that you associate with your partner scorecard: - Scorecards do not support report types on Account. To display data about objects that are related to Accounts, use a report type associated with a supported object or create a custom report type that includes both Account and a supported object. - Each Metric is pulled from a summary field of a report. For a report to work with scorecards, it can have a maximum of one summary field in addition to the row count. The summary value is what is displayed on your scorecard. Your metric must be associated with a summary report or the data does not display correctly. - You must have read access on all reports that you want to associate and view with scorecards. - If an account is disabled, scorecards associated that account are permanently deleted. - Account ID fields must be available on the report. The Scorecard component dynamically filters reports to the current Partner Account. The following table displays information about which objects Scorecards support and how to set up reports for them. | Object | Report Type | Actions to Take | | --- | --- | --- | | Opportunity | Standard | Set Field Level Security of Partner Account to Visible for all profiles of users viewing scorecards. | | Opportunity | Custom | Set Field Level Security of Partner Account to Visible for all profiles of the users viewing scorecards. Add the Partner Account ID field to the report type layout. | | Lead | Standard | Set Field Level Security of Partner Account to Visible for all profiles of the users viewing scorecards. | | Lead | Custom | Set Field Level Security of "Partner Account" to Visible for all profiles of the users viewing scorecards. Add the Partner Account ID field to the report type layout. | | Case | Standard | No Action Necessary. Case Contact Account Id assumed to be Partner Account ID. | | Case | Custom | Add the Case Contact’s Account Id field to the report type layout | | Partner Fund Allocation | Standard | No standard report types exist for this object. | | Partner Fund Allocation | Custom | Add the Channel Partner Account ID field to the report type layout. | | Partner Fund Request | Standard | No standard report types exist for this object. | | Partner Fund Request | Custom | Add the Channel Partner Account ID field to the report type layout. | | Custom Object | Standard | Add custom lookup field on Accounts. API name must be Scorecard\_Account. Must use "(Custom Object) with Account" as report type. | | Custom Object | Custom | Add custom lookup field on Accounts. API name must be Scorecard\_Account. Add the Account ID field to the custom object layout. | | Any Standard Object with an Account field and no Partner Account field | Standard | Scorecards do not support this type of report with default fields. Add a custom Lookup Relationship field on Accounts. The API name must be Scorecard\_Account. Use "(Custom Object) with Account" as the report type. | | Any Standard Object with an Account field and no Partner Account field | Custom | Scorecards do not support this type of report with default fields, unless a supported object is included in the report type. Otherwise, add a custom Lookup Relationship field on Accounts. The API name must be Scorecard\_Account. Add Account Id to the report type layout. | | Any other standard object | Standard | Scorecards do not support this type of report with default fields, unless a supported object is included in the report type. Otherwise, add a custom Lookup Relationship field on Accounts. The API name must be Scorecard\_Account. Use "(Custom Object) with Account" as the report type. | | Any other standard object | Custom | Add a supported object to the report type, or add a custom lookup relationship field on Accounts. API name must be Scorecard\_Account. Add the Account ID field to the report type layout for the custom entity | #### See Also - [Design the Field Layout for Reports Created from Your Custom Report Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.reports_report_type_setup.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Configure SAML SSO Between Salesforce Orgs or Experience Cloud Sites If your company deploys more than one Salesforce org or Experience Cloud site, set up SAML single sign-on (SSO) so users can easily move between them. In this SSO configuration, a single org or site acting as the identity provider authenticates users for one or more orgs or sites in the service provider role. Users can log in to all orgs or sites with a single set of credentials. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience

Federated Authentication is available in: All Editions

Delegated Authentication is available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Database.com Editions

Authentication Providers are available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions

Configuring SSO between an org and a site is largely the same as configuring SSO across orgs, with a few small differences in endpoint URLs that point to sites. SSO across multiple service providers uses hub-and-spoke architecture. The identity provider is the authentication hub at the center. The identity provider validates credentials and asserts the user’s identity to the spokes—the orgs or sites that are the service providers. ![Hub-and-spoke architecture for SSO between multiple orgs](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/sso_multi_org_architecture.png) Salesforce supports identity provider-initiated and service provider-initiated logins. For more information, see [SAML Login Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=xcloud.identity_provider_about.htm&type=5&language=en_US). To configure SSO between multiple Salesforce service providers: - Set up a Salesforce identity provider. - Set up one or more Salesforce service providers. - In the identity provider, integrate your service providers as connected apps. - Test the SSO connection. ## Set Up Your Salesforce Identity Provider Configure an org or site as an identity provider to act as your authentication hub. To enable a site as an identity provider, complete these steps in the org where the site is set up. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Identity Provider, and select **Identity Provider**. Click **Enable Identity Provider**. 2. Select a certificate that the identity provider and service provider can use to trust each other. Salesforce automatically creates a self-signed certificate when you enable your org as an identity provider. To create your own certificate, select **Create a new certificate**. 3. Save your certificate. If you changed your certificate, click **OK** to accept the warning message. 4. On the Identity Provider page, click **Download Certificate**. Use it when you set up your service provider. 5. Get SAML metadata to share with the service provider. Use this metadata when you configure SAML settings in the service provider. This step is different for orgs and sites. - If your identity provider is an org, click **Download Metadata** to get the metadata in an XML file. To get a URL that references an XML metadata file, copy the Salesforce Identity URL listed under SAML Metadata Discovery Endpoints. - If your identity provider is a site, copy the Experience Cloud Site Identity URL under SAML Metadata Discovery Endpoints. ## Set Up Your Salesforce Service Providers Configure your service provider orgs or sites—the spokes that rely on your authentication hub. Complete these steps in the service provider org or the org where your service provider site is enabled. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Single Sign-On Settings, then select **Single Sign-On Settings**. 2. Click **Edit**. To see SAML SSO settings, select **SAML Enabled**. Save the change. 3. Under SAML Single Sign-On Settings, click the appropriate button to create a configuration. 1. If you downloaded an XML metadata file from the identity provider, click **New from Metadata File**. Upload the metadata file that you saved and click **Create**. This option uses the metadata from the XML file to complete SSO settings. 2. If you copied the Salesforce Identity URL or the Experience Cloud Site Identity URL from the identity provider, click **New from Metadata URL**. Paste the URL and click **Create**. This option reads the XML file at the Salesforce Identity URL and uses it to complete SSO settings. The metadata options fill in the required SAML settings, including the Issuer, Entity ID, and Identity Provider Login URL fields. 4. For Identity Provider Certificate, upload the certificate you downloaded earlier from the identity provider. 5. For SAML Identity Type, select **Assertion contains the Federation ID from the User object**. 6. Save your settings. Then, from the Single Sign-On Settings pages, copy and save the Entity ID. You share this value with the identity provider when you create a connected app. 7. From the same page, get the SAML login endpoint to share with the identity provider. This step is different for orgs and sites. 1. To configure your org as a service provider, copy the Login URL under Your Organization. 2. To configure your site as a service provider, click the dropdown arrow next to For Communities. Your site's SAML endpoints appear. Copy the Login URL for your site. 8. In the service provider, add the identity provider as an authentication service. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter My Domain, then select **My Domain**. 2. Under Authentication Configuration, click **Edit**. 3. Select the authentication service for your identity provider. ![The Authentication Configuration page displays available authentication services](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/sso_authentication_configuration.png) To prevent users from logging in directly to the service provider, deselect **Login Form**. When users go to the service provider Login URL, they're redirected to the identity provider to log in. To give users the option to log in directly to the service provider, select **Login Form** and your identity provider. With both of these options selected, your identity provider appears as a login option on the service provider's login page. Users can decide whether to log in to the service provider directly or log in with SSO. ![When you select both Login Form and the identity provider as authentication services, users have the option to log in to the service provider directly](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/sso_login_form.png) 9. To define your other orgs as service providers, repeat these steps. Use the SAML metadata from your identity provider to complete SSO settings for your service providers. ## Integrate Service Providers as Connected Apps To define the service provider to the identity provider, create a connected app in the identity provider. 1. In the identity provider, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App, then select **App Manager**. Click **New Connected App**. 2. Complete the connected app's [basic information](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=xcloud.connected_app_create_basics.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 3. Under Web App settings, select **Enable SAML**. Remember the Entity ID and Login URL values that you saved when you configured your service provider? You need them now to complete the connected app settings. 1. For **Entity ID**, paste the Entity ID from the service provider. 2. For the **ACS URL**, paste the Login URL for the org or site. 3. For **Subject Type**, select Federation ID. 4. Save the settings. 5. To give your users access to this service provider, click **Manage** on the connected apps page. Select **Manage Profiles** or **Manage Permission Sets** and add the profiles or permission sets you want to access the service provider. For more information on profiles and permission sets, see [Manage Data Access](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=security_data_access_mgmt.htm&language=en_US) and [Manage Other Access Settings for a Connected App](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=xcloud.connected_app_manage_additional_settings.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 6. Each service provider needs its own connected app in the identity provider. To define your other service providers, repeat these steps. ## Test the SSO Connection Map a test user from the identity provider to the service provider and confirm that the test user can log in with SSO. 1. In the identity provider, create a test user. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, then select **Users**. 2. Click **New User**. 3. Complete the test user's basic information and assign the user a profile that can access the service provider. 4. Under Single Sign On Information, enter a unique Federation ID. The Federation ID can be any value. For more information on identifying and mapping users, see [Map Salesforce Users to the SAML Service Provider](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=xcloud.service_provider_map_users.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 5. Save the settings. 2. In the service provider, create the same test user. To bind the users together, use the same Federation ID that you entered for the test user in the identity provider. 3. In an incognito browser, enter the My Domain URL for the identity provider. 4. Log in to the identity provider as the test user. 5. In a new incognito browser tab, enter the My Domain URL for the service provider. If SSO is successful, you're redirected to the identity provider. Because you're already authenticated, you're then redirected back to the service provider and logged in. # Configure Search Functionality in Experience Cloud Sites Help your visitors find what they’re looking for on your Experience Cloud sites. Search behavior in Experience Cloud sites is different from searching an org. - When you search in an Experience Cloud site, you receive results specific to that site. To find items from a different site, site members must leave the current site and search in the other site. - In site search results, site members can view data that is explicitly shared with them in the site context. Shared content can include internal company content and records that aren’t explicitly shared with all site members. - In Experience Cloud sites, site members can enter terms, filter out, and select multiple topics to help refine their results. If a site member wants to view a complete list of results, they can clear all their filters. - **[Allow Users to Search LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_build_configure_lwr_searches.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can set up search pages in sites created with LWR templates so your visitors can search for CRM objects or CMS content published from enhanced CMS workspaces. Visitors can also search for content within the Rich Content Editor and HTML Editor components, as well as within page title metadata. - **[Allow Users to Search Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_search_aura_sites.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Search in Aura sites depends on the type of template you use. - **[Allow Users to Search Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_search_visualforce_sites.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sites using Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce have much of the same functionality as Experience Cloud sites using Aura templates. # Configure Settings in Your Administration Workspace Configure settings in your administration workspace, and enable other optional features in your Experience Cloud site such as user nicknames, guest access, private messages, direct messages, content flagging, and reputation levels. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). To use these settings, Chatter must be enabled in your org. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Administration** | **Preferences**. 3. Change the desire settings and then save your changes. - General - [Show nicknames](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_enable_nickname_display.htm&type=5&language=en_US) instead of full names in your site. Enabling nickname display allows more privacy and protects member identities. This protection is especially helpful in a public site where unregistered visitors can access member profiles. - Enable Chatter messages, which let members have secure private conversations with other Chatter users. To expose Chatter messages for external users, administrators must also enable the Chatter tab in sites using the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template. - [Enable direct messages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_direct_messages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Allow members to send direct messages to start a private conversation with up to 16 people, including the sender. Direct messages are supported in all Aura sites and in Lightning Bolt Solutions, such as the Lightning Partner Management solution."), which allows members to have secure private conversations in sites built using the Customer Service template. - [Optimize cached images for guest users on all devices](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_files_optimize_images_all_devices.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When guest users visit your site, cached images are optimized to best suit the user’s phone, tablet, or desktop computer. Image optimization makes your site’s pages load faster, which creates a better browsing experience for your visitors."). Resize images for faster loading on all devices. This feature is available when you use Salesforce's CDN for Digital Experiences. - [Let guest users view asset files and CMS content available to the site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_public_access.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Asset files include images associated with topics, recognition badges, site branding, and account branding. If public access is enabled in Experience Builder at the page or site level, this preference is automatically enabled. To ensure that guest users can view CMS collections on your LWR site’s public pages, also enable Allow guest users to access public APIs. - [Use custom Visualforce error pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_custom_error_pages_vf_auth.htm&type=5&language=en_US), if you want authenticated users to see your custom branded Visualforce error pages. - Show all settings in Workspaces that are hidden by default based on how you set up your site. Enabling this setting overrides the dynamic navigation provided in Experience Workspaces. - Experience Management - [Allow members to flag posts, comments, or files for moderation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderation_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on flagging for your Experience Cloud site to let members flag posts, comments, files, and messages that they deem inappropriate."). Members can flag items that contain inappropriate language or sensitive information. - [Enable Upvotes and Downvotes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_updown_vote.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable upvoting and downvoting in lieu of liking questions and answers in your Experience Cloud site. When you enable upvoting and downvoting, members see an Upvote option under a question or answer and a Downvote option on the question or answer’s overflow menu. The Like option goes away. Upvoting and downvoting are disabled by default in Experience Cloud sites created in Spring ’19 and later.") to allow members to participate in evaluating the worth of a question or answer. Up and down voting is enabled by default in sites created as of Winter ’18 and later. - [Enable Reputation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reputation_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable reputation so that site members are recognized and rewarded for participating.") to allow community managers to set up a point system that rewards users who participate in the site. Administrators set up corresponding reputation levels that users see on their profile. - [Enable knowledgeable people](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reputation_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable reputation so that site members are recognized and rewarded for participating.") so you can discover who's knowledgeable on topics and endorse people for their knowledge on a topic. - Files - Set the maximum size in MB for uploaded files. - Specify the types of files that can be uploaded. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce doesn't support downloads for files that are larger than 2 GB. These additional optional features can be found in Setup and other areas of Experience Workspaces. - [Assign Permission to Verify Answers for Your Company](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_company_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Sometimes there’s more than one correct answer to a question. Among the correct answers, your company can prefer one course for people to follow. You can highlight an answer that your company endorses by marking it as Company Verified. Questions marked as Company Verified or as Best Answer are copied to the top of the thread under a Top Rated Answers section.") to allow selected members to mark an answer as company verified. - [Assign Post Pinning Permission](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_pin_post.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Pin a post to give more exposure to your most critical information. In your site’s group and topics feeds, an authorized user can pin up to three posts to the top of the feed. A pinned post stays in place until an authorized user unpins it. Pinning a post is only available in Aura sites.") to allow selected members to pin a critical post to the top of a group or topics feed. - [Assign a Default Experience to a User Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.network_affinity.htm&type=5&language=en_US) to associate that profile with a specific Experience Cloud site. Notification emails about site-agnostic objects, like cases, accounts, and opportunities, take on the default site’s branding. Links in the emails take users to the default site—no more news from nowhere. - [Add Rich Publisher Apps to Your Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_rich_publisher_apps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the Chatter publisher with payloads that are unique to your business process. Add a form to a post; choose from a selection of branding images; add inspiration to your feed with profound quotations. Select from the custom apps your team creates or acquires from AppExchange. Add up to five apps to the Chatter publisher.") to enhance your feeds with items that are unique to your business process. #### See Also - [Show Nicknames Instead of Full Names in an Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_enable_nickname_display.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Give Secure Access to Unauthenticated Users with the Guest User Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_public_access.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Use Custom Visualforce Error Pages for Authenticated Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_custom_error_pages_vf_auth.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Enable Members to Flag Items in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderation_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on flagging for your Experience Cloud site to let members flag posts, comments, files, and messages that they deem inappropriate.") - [Enable Reputation in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reputation_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable reputation so that site members are recognized and rewarded for participating.") - [Limit Files in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_file_limits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Restrict the size and types of files that your members can upload. This list of file types lets you control what your members upload and also prevents spammers from polluting your Experience Cloud site with inappropriate files.") # Configure the Context Passing Framework for Agentforce Implement required components, including the User Interaction Context component and an Omni-Channel flow, to track critical user journey data. This framework maps pre-chat variables from your Experience Cloud site and securely delivers the context to your Agentforce Service agent. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Aura and LWR Experience Cloud Sites
Available in: Enhanced Chat with the Einstein for Service, Einstein Platform, Community, Community Plus, or Agentforce Service Agent add-on
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Foundations or Agentforce 1 Editions. Access to some standard agent actions requires additional add-on licenses
User Permissions Needed
To create and set up Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site OR View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To create and manage Agentforce Service agents: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site OR View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To enable digital experiences: Customize Application
To set up this Enhanced Chat: Customize Application AND Modify Metadata Through Metadata API Function
To add the Embedded Messaging component to an Experience Builder site Create and Setup Experiences
To set up Embedded Chat Customize Application AND Modify Metadata
Before you begin, make sure you have these components and configurations in place. - An Experience Cloud site built on either the Aura or LWR framework. See [Create an Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_creating.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - Customer Community or Customer Community Plus licenses in your org. See [Experience Cloud User Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_license_types_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - An Enhanced Chat Embedded Service Deployment configured to pass hidden pre-chat variables. The variables must be named exactly as shown below: - lastViewedArticleId - lastSearchQuery - lastViewedTopicId (for Aura sites) - lastViewedNDCId (for LWR sites) See [Customize the Embedded Pre-Chat Form](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.snapins_chat_customize_prechat_form.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - An Agentforce Service agent configured with a custom action or multiple custom actions that can consume these specific context variables. This generally involves defining the variables as Input Variables within the agent action's configuration, which the Agentforce Service agent is designed to execute upon chat transfer. See [Use Context Variables in Messaging Conversations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.service_agent_context_variables.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - The Quick Chat or Embedded Messaging components set up in your Experience Cloud site. See [Embedded Messaging](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_embedded_messaging.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - User verification is enabled, and you have set the pre-chat variable frequency to Every Session. See [Set Up User Verification](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sf.user_verification_setup.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 1. **[Configure the User Interaction Context for Agentforce Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_context_passing_framework_ui_context.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The User Interaction Context for Agentforce Lightning web component is the core of the framework. It captures user interaction data and passes it to your Agentforce agent. 2. **[Set Up Enhanced Chat for Context Passing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_context_passing_framework_enh_chat.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up your Enhanced Chat channel and Embedded Service deployment to accept and pass hidden pre-chat variables. These variables enable the User Interaction Context Lightning web component to function with your Agentforce Service agent. 3. **[Create Custom Fields on the Messaging Session Object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_context_passing_framework_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use the context variables passed by the Context Passing framework in your Agentforce Service agent, create custom fields on the Messaging Session object. These fields will store the data coming from your Experience Cloud site. 4. **[Map Context Variables and Route Chat with Omni-Channel Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_context_passing_framework_omni_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure an Omni-Channel flow to map the pre-chat variables from the chat deployment to the custom fields on the Messaging Session object and route chats to your Agentforce Service agent. 5. **[Expose Context Variables in Your Agentforce Service Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_context_passing_framework_variables.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To make the custom fields created on the Messaging Session object available to your agent, expose them as context variables in Agentforce Builder. This action establishes the direct data link required for your Agentforce Service agent to reference and utilize user journey data when executing actions and guiding responses. # Configure the CRM Search Results Page Set up and configure LWR search components to customize how your site is searched. The Search Bar component displays a field where visitors enter search terms. The Results Layout component displays the search results for your site. 1. Go to your site’s Search Results page in Experience Builder. 2. From the Components panel, drag the **Search Bar** component onto the header section of the page. When you add the component to the header section, CRM search is available across all site pages. 3. Drag the **Results Layout** component from the Components panel onto the page. To open the component’s properties panel, select the component on the canvas. 4. From the properties panel, click **Results Source**, and then select **CRM Object**. ![Results Layout properties panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_search_crm_source.png) 5. To update the existing search configuration for the site you are on, click **Search Configuration (Beta)** and then select **Customize Search** from the dropdown menu. When you select Customize Search, you can update the current search configuration for the site you are on. The dropdown also displays saved search configurations that can be applied to your site. 6. To add objects to the existing search configuration, in the **Objects Included in Search** section, click **Add**. The Accounts object is automatically included in Search. ![Objects Included in Search section](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_search_results_layout_add_object.png) 7. To make an object searchable by guest users, click the object to open the Edit Tab Properties menu. Select the **Publicly available** checkbox, and save your changes. ![Publicly available checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/publicly_available.png) 8. The order that objects are listed in under Objects Included in Search is how they appear in the left navigation panel on the search page. Drag objects up or down to arrange them in the order that you want them to appear. 9. To remove an object from the Search Results layout, click the **X** on an object tile. 10. Set up an object detail page for each object that you added to the search results layout. See [Create Custom Site Pages with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_create_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To extend your Experience Builder template, create custom site pages. To get the most from your Salesforce data, add custom record detail, list, and related list pages. To display individual pieces of content along with any combination of components, use CMS content pages."). 11. Select the object detail page from Pages, then drag the **Record Detail (Beta)** component onto the page. This component displays a Salesforce object’s record information on the object page. 12. To update the fields that appear in the Search Layout of the object: 1. Go to Setup, and in the Quick Find box of Object Manager enter the object name. 2. Select the object and then select **Search Layouts**. 3. Click the down arrow next to the site name and click **Edit**. To ensure that guest users can view CRM Object search results, check these settings. - In **Workspaces** | **Administration** | **Preferences**, select **Allow guest users to access public APIs**. - In Experience Builder, grant read access to the guest user profile for each applicable object. See [Configure the Guest User Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.rss_config_guest_user_profile.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - Create a sharing rule for each object record that you want to share with your users. # Configure the Default Login Page to Use a Custom Home Page If you're using external authentication providers and a custom home page, ensure that users are accessing the correct home page. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To access Experience Workspaces:
  • Manage Experiences OR Create and Set Up Experiences
  • AND is a member of the site
To customize administration settings:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences
  • AND is a member of the site
To edit Apex classes: Author Apex
Edit the `CommunitiesLandingController` so that it has the correct `startURL` for your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site. The `CommunitiesLandingPage` is the Active Site Home Page for your site, meaning that it is shown when someone enters a direct URL to your site. For instance, if your domain is universaltelco.my.site.com and your site URL is customers, the `CommunitiesLandingPage` is shown when someone enters https://universaltelco.my.site.com/customers. There are two methods for using a custom home page. - Update the `CommunitiesLandingController` code to redirect to the new page: 1. From Setup, enter Apex Classes in the Quick Find box, then select **Apex Classes**. 2. Click **Edit** next to `CommunitiesLandingController`. 3. Replace the code so that it reads: ```java public with sharing class CommunitiesLandingController { public PageReference forwardToStartPage() { } } ``` 4. Replace https://universaltelcom.my.site.com with the URL for your site. 5. Click **Save**. - Alternatively, you can replace the Active Site Home Page with a custom Visualforce page. 1. From Setup, enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then select **All Sites**. 2. Click **Workspaces** next to the site name. 3. Click **Administration** | **Pages** | **Go to Force.com**. 4. In the Site Detail section, click **Edit**. 5. In the Active Site Home Page field, select your custom Visualforce page. 6. Click **Save**. When a user enters the URL, they see the new Active Site Home Page. # Configure the Smart Search Assistance Sub-Agent Add search and action capabilities to your agent by configuring the Smart Search Assistance sub-agent and mapping its associated variables. This configuration allows the agent to retrieve results specifically from your Experience Cloud site search profile and respects site-specific security boundaries and data sources. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost. To purchase, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Available in: Aura Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Available in: LWR Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
User Permissions Needed
To configure Sub-Agents
  • System Administrator Profile OR Manage Agentforce Agents
  • Customize Application
Map Variables
  • Customize Application
  • View Setup and Configuration
1. From Setup, enter Agentforce Agents in the Quick Find box, and then select **Agentforce Agents**. 2. Click the name of your agent and select Open in Builder. 3. In the Agentforce Builder sidebar, select the **Sub-agents**. 4. Add the Sub-agent and choose Smart Search Assistance from the library. 5. Within the sub-agent settings, locate the View Action section and make sure Actionable Smart Search is added and active. 6. In the Context or Variables tab of the Builder, create two new custom variables: 1. Search Config: A variable to store your Search Configuration ID. 2. Network: A variable to capture the Network ID of your Experience Cloud site. 7. Map the Variables: 1. Select the Actionable Smart Search action within the sub-agent. 2. Under Tool Input Settings, map the Search Config variable to the Search Configuration input field. 3. Map the Network variable to the Network ID input field. Map the Portal ID to your specific Site ID to align with the SCTR2 cell mapping logic. 8. Save your work and select **Finish**. 9. Select **Activate**. # Configure the User Interaction Context for Agentforce Component The User Interaction Context for Agentforce Lightning web component is the core of the framework. It captures user interaction data and passes it to your Agentforce agent. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Aura and LWR Experience Cloud Sites
Available in: Enhanced Chat with the Einstein for Service, Einstein Platform, Community, Community Plus, or Agentforce Service Agent add-on
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Foundations or Agentforce 1 Editions. Access to some standard agent actions requires additional add-on licenses
Follow these steps to deploy the component to your site: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences , and then select **All Sites**. 2. Locate your target Experience Cloud site and click **Builder** next to your site. 3. In the left-hand toolbar, click the **Components**icon. 4. In the search bar at the top of the Components panel, search for User Interaction Context for Agentforce. 5. Drag the component from the list of results and drop it onto the **Template Footer** area of your site. 6. Publish your site. #### See Also - [Use Context Variables in Messaging Conversations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.service_agent_context_variables.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Configure Topics for Records in Lightning Experience Add the Topics component to record pages so that your users can assign topics to records. Topics allow your users to organize records by theme. On the topic detail page, users can see all the records with a topic and filter their record list views by topic. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create and save Lightning pages in the Lightning App Builder: Customize Application
By default, topics are enabled for most standard objects. To configure topics for objects, including custom objects, from Setup, enter Topics for Objects in the Quick Find box, then select **Topics for Objects**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note You can’t use encrypted fields for topic suggestions. 1. Create a record page for Lightning Experience. If you already have record pages for Lightning Experience, go to the next step. 2. In the Lightning App Builder, configure the Topics component and add it to the page’s layout. ![Topics component properties in Lightning App Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/topics_component_editor.png) 3. Save your page. If your page is new, activate it. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example Users with permission can view, add, and remove topics from records. ![Topics component on a record page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/topics_component_ui.png) #### See Also - [Enable and Configure Topics for Objects in Salesforce Classic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_records_admin.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable topics for objects so that users can add topics to records and organize them by common themes. This powerful feature is available with or without Chatter.") # Configure Who Can Assign Recognition Badges Use permission sets, our recommended method, to choose which members can assign recognition badges. Restricting who can do so helps control the number of badges in your site and maintains the value of a badge. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To create permission sets: “Manage Profiles and Permission Sets”
To assign permission sets: “Assign Permission Sets”
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note It’s currently not possible for users with a Customer Community or Customer Community Login license to assign a private badge. Only internal users or users with the following licenses, and with the **Assign Recognition Badges in Experience Builder Sites** permission, can assign a private badge: - Customer Community Plus - Customer Community Plus Login - Partner Community - Partner Community Login ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Buttons for assigning badges appear in two places on the member’s profile. If after following the steps below, your approved users don’t see the Give button at the top of a member’s profile, under Settings, go to Users. Edit the User Page Layout and add the Give Badge action in the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section. 1. First, set up the permission set for creating badges. From Setup, enter Permission Sets in the Quick Find box, then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter your permission set information. Name the permission set “Assign Recognition Badges in Experience Builder Sites.” 4. Click **System Permissions** and then click **Edit**. 5. To add the permissions for assigning a badge, select **Assign Recognition Badges in Experience Builder Sites** permission. 6. Select **Manage Assignments** and add those users you want to let assign badges. # Configure Who Can Create Recognition Badges Use permission sets, our recommended method, to choose which members can create recognition badges. Restricting who can do so helps control the number of badges in your site and maintains the value of a badge. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To create permission sets: “Manage Profiles and Permission Sets”
To assign permission sets: “Assign Permission Sets”
Say that you create a recognition badge to be given to MVPs. Restricting who can create badges helps eliminate the risk of having multiple MVP badges. Restricting who can give the badge to, say, community managers helps make sure only those members who are truly MVPs receive recognition for it. 1. First, set up the permission set for creating badges. From Setup, enter Permission Sets in the Quick Find box, then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter your permission set information. Name the permission set “Create Custom Badge Definitions.” 4. Click **System Permissions** and then click **Edit**. 5. To add the permissions for creating a badge, select **Create custom Badge Definitions** permission. 6. Select **Manage Assignments** and add those users you want to let create badges. # Configure Your Self-Registration Page After you decide which page type is best for your company, set up self-registration from the Login & Registration page in Experience Workspaces. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If you want even more control over self-registration, and you're familiar with Apex, you can customize your self-registration page and process by modifying the Apex controller. The customizations you make to this controller override the Login & Registration page settings. For steps, visit [Customize the Self-Registration Apex Controller](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_self_reg_apex.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites**. 2. To access Experience Workspaces, next to your site name, click **Workspaces**. 3. From Experience Workspaces, select **Administration**, and then select **Login & Registration**. 4. Under Registration Page Configuration, select **Allow customers and partners to self-register**. If users attempt to register with a duplicate username, they receive an error message that their request can’t be completed, but administrators aren't notified. 5. Select the self-registration page type. 1. To use the Default Page, select **Default Page**. You can customize the default page with Visualforce. For steps, see [Modify the Default Self-Registration Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.external_identity_self_registration_modify_default_page.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 2. To use the Experience Builder Page, select **Experience Builder Page**, click ![lookup magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png), and then select **Register**. For more information on using Experience Builder to customize your page, see [Manage Your Site's Pages and Their Properties in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_manage_pages_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) . 3. To use the Visualforce Page, select **Visualforce Page**, click ![lookup magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png), and then select a custom Visualforce page. 4. To use the Configurable Self-Reg Page, select **Configurable Self-Reg Page**. Then visit [Use the Configurable Self-Reg Page for Easy Sign-Up](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.external_identity_login_discovery_create_config_self.htm&type=5&language=en_US) for detailed configuration steps. 5. To use the Experience Builder Page, select **Experience Builder Page**, click ![lookup magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png), and then select **Register**. For more information on using Experience Builder to customize your page, see [Manage Your Site's Pages and Their Properties in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_manage_pages_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you’re trying out various page types, select the Default Page and save to clear your selections before choosing another page type. 6. For more control over your self-registration process, we sometimes recommend disabling the standard [Aura](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_login_self_register.htm&type=5&language=en_US) and [Lightning Web Runtime (LWR)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/template_pages.htm) self-registration components. Select **Disable the standard components for self-registration on Aura and LWR sites** if your use case fits one or more of these scenarios. - You selected the Default, Visualforce, or Configurable Self-Reg page types. - You selected the Experience Builder page type and you want full control over the user information that your self-registration Apex controller can collect. After you disable the standard component, create a custom component for your use case. - You selected the Experience Builder page type and you don’t want to use the standard self-registration component that comes with your site type. If you want to use the Experience Builder standard component that comes with your site type, leave this setting deselected to avoid breaking your flow. 7. For Profile, select the profile you want to assign to new users. 1. Assign a cloned version of a standard site profile as the default for self-registration. For example, assign a cloned version of the External Identity User profile. Avoid using a standard site profile as the default. 2. Use a restrictive profile as the default. If needed, open up access using permission sets or sharing rules. 8. For Account, follow the corresponding step based on your use case. 1. To save new users as contacts of a business account, click ![lookup magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png), and then select the account you want to use. 2. To save new users under individual person accounts, leave the Account field blank. 9. Save your settings. 10. [Test your self-registration process.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.external_identity_self_registration_test.htm&type=5&language=en_US) #### See Also - [Customize Code for Lightning Components on Login Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_custom_login_self_reg_lightning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To add custom logic to the Login pages in Experience Builder sites, customize the Lightning component for those pages.") - [Set Up Dynamic URLs with Experience Workspaces](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.external_identity_dynamic_set_up_reg_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You set up dynamic URLs for your login experience from the Login & Registration page of the Administration workspace. Create dynamic URLs by including a placeholder that resolves at run time. Implement the dynamic URLs for the logo and right-frame content on the pages used to log in, verify identity, reset passwords, and self-register.") - [Customize the Self-Registration Apex Controller](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_self_reg_apex.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Configure Person Accounts for Self-Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.external_identity_self_registration_person_accounts.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Use Apex to Configure Self-Registration in Batches for High-Volume Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_self_reg_apex.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your Experience Cloud site can handle twice as many self-registration requests at a time when they’re collected into batches and processed asynchronously rather than one at a time. The accounts and contacts created are owned and managed by the community administrator. After a batch is processed successfully, users receive an email with their login instructions. Batch processing self-registration requests improves performance and keeps your site moving during heavy traffic spikes. Minimal coding is required when you use the Apex controller that manages your self-registration flow.") - [Use the Configurable Self-Reg Page for Easy Sign-Up](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.external_identity_login_discovery_create_config_self.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Create a Custom Identity Verification Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.external_identity_passwordless_login_customize_verification_apex.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Configuring Apex Data Providers in Experience Builder (Beta) A data provider is a reference to a source of data. An Apex data provider is implemented as a function within an Apex class. A Salesforce Apex controller is an Apex class that stores information and logic related to a group of UI components. You can perform actions such as querying data, updating records, or invoking another Apex code using this logic. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Data Provider Configuration is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/?_ga=2.247987783.1372150065.1709219475-629000709.1639001992). Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. ## Prerequisites Verify that you meet these prerequisites: - Ensure that your org has the **Enable enhanced features** permission turned on in Experience Sites. - Ensure that your org has the **Use advance data binding in Lightning Web Runtime** permission turned on in LWR Sites. - Create a simple website using the Experience Site Builder UI. ## Data Provider Addition and Data Binding Create an Apex Class and Apex Method that you want to add as a data provider to a textbox component. - The Apex class should be the valid name of the publicly available Apex class that contains at least one method annotated with `@AuraEnabled (cacheable=true scope='global')`. If you assign a namespace, you must prefix or qualify the Apex class with `Namespace_` ``` public class ApexDataProviderDemo { @AuraEnabled(cacheable=true scope = 'global') public static Account getAccount(String name){ Account account = [SELECT FIELDS(STANDARD) FROM Account where Name =:name ]; return account; }} ``` - An Apex controller method is only eligible to qualify for Apex data provider if that is annotated with `@AuraEnabled(cacheable=true scope='global')` and contains supported input parameters and return type. - Render the site in the builder and add the bindings. ## Configuration of an Apex Data Provider In the Add Data Provider window, enter a unique name for the data provider you want to add and select the type as Apex Data Provider. Provide the Apex class name, Apex method name, and Apex method parameters (is any). ![Add data source](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/add_data_source.png) ![Data binding expression](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/data_binding.png) ## Apex Data Provider Metadata The metadata contains key blocks of information such as Expression key, Input Schema and Output Schema. Expression Key: - The format for the Apex data provider expression key should follow a developer name pattern and should not contain any predefined expression keys. Predefined expression keys include Product, Item, Order, Cart, Checkout, SplitShipment, User, Search, Wishlists, PurchasedProduct, MyProfile, Subscription, \_layout, \_metadata, $form, and $page. - Expression keys have to be unique in the component hierarchy. For example, if there is a Grid present on the page which is associated with a data provider, and a Text block inside its repeater slot is also associated with a data provider, then the two data providers cannot have the same expression key. This avoids any conflicts when there are nested data providers in the hierarchy. Input Schema: Consists of Apex class, Apex method, Apex method parameters, if required by the Apex method. - Apex Class: The Apex class should be the valid name of the publicly available Apex class that contains at least one method. The Apex class should also be prefixed with namespace\_\_ if there is any 7 namespace required to access the Apex class. - Apex Method: An Apex method is only eligible to qualify for Apex data provider if that is annotated with `@AuraEnabled(cacheable=true scope='global')` and contains supported input parameters and return type. - Apex Method Parameters | INPUT DATA TYPES | SUPPORTED FORMAT EXAMPLES | | --- | --- | | String | Any string. For example, "Lorem Ipsum" | | Boolean | TrueFalse | | Integer | 3744"3744" | | Double | 3744.0"3744.0" | | ID | 0D5B000001DVM9tkAh | Output Schema: Output schema for Apex Data Provider is the data type. The fields consist of complex data types, returned by the associated Apex method. The output schema is used in data binding on the component having the Apex data provider configured. The component uses expressions to use data binding in this form: `{!.}`. The field name can vary for describable and non-describable data types. - Describable Data Type: The members of the describable data type are predefined and thus there is a definitive way to refer to them in the expression. For example, if the return type is Account sobject, the data binding expression is `{!. Name} or {!.Id} or {!.value}`
DATA TYPE DATA BINDING EXPRESSION FORMAT
Boolean {<!sfdcExpressionKey>.value}
Date {<!sfdcExpressionKey>.value}
DateTime {<!sfdcExpressionKey>.value}
Decimal {<!sfdcExpressionKey>.value}
Double {<!sfdcExpressionKey>.value}
ID {<!sfdcExpressionKey>.value}
Integer {<!sfdcExpressionKey>.value}
Long {<!sfdcExpressionKey>.value}
Object {<!sfdcExpressionKey>.<objectMemberName>}
String {<!sfdcExpressionKey>.value}
Time {<!sfdcExpressionKey>.value}
sObject-Known {<!sfdcExpressionKey>.<fieldName>}
Generic sObject {<!sfdcExpressionKey>.<fieldName>}
POJO/Apex Class {<!sfdcExpressionKey>.<fieldName>}
Map

{<!sfdcExpressionKey>.value. <mapKey><fieldName>}

Map's key with only boolean and string data types are supported.

List

{<!sfdcExpressionKey>.value}

Can be bound to a repeater item within a repeater component like Grid, List, etc.

# Connect a Form Component to Marketing Cloud Engagement Using the Marketing Cloud Form component, you can capture customer information from an Experience Cloud microsite and send it directly to a Marketing Cloud Engagement data extension. Built on the powerful LWR platform, this form component gives you the tools to easily collect contact information and the flexibility to store data where it best serves your company. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions.
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The product formerly named Marketing Cloud was rebranded to Marketing Cloud Engagement. As we work on updating labels in the interface, you'll find both names used in Salesforce Help. Before you can send contact information directly to marketing data extensions, you must complete these setup items. 1. **Confirm that Marketing Cloud Connect is installed in Salesforce.** This tool integrates data from the Marketing Cloud Form component to Marketing Cloud Engagement. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Installed Packages, and then select **Installed Packages**. 2. Under Installed Packages, look for the Marketing Cloud Package. 3. If you see that the package is installed, skip to Step 9. 2. **Install Marketing Cloud Connect in Salesforce.** If you confirm that Marketing Cloud Connect isn’t installed, you can learn more in Salesforce Help. 1. Review [Prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=mktg.mc_co_prerequisites_connect_clouds.htm&type=5&language=en_US) and [Review Marketing Cloud Connect User Types and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=mktg.mc_co_user_types_and_permissions.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 2. To install the Marketing Cloud Connect managed package in Salesforce, choose to install your package in [production](https://sfdc.co/MCC) or in a [sandbox](https://sfdc.co/MCCSandbox). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Make sure that you’re using the latest version of a [supported web browser](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=getstart_browser_aloha.htm&type=5&language=en_US) 3. Log in to your Salesforce account using your admin credentials and select **Install for Admins Only.** 4. Click **Install**. If prompted, grant access to third-party websites. 5. Click **Continue**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Confirm that the managed package installation is complete before moving on to the next step. 3. **Configure page layouts.** After your package is fully installed, provide field access to your admin and your Site Builder users. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Page Layouts, and then select **Page Layouts**. 2. Navigate to User Page Layouts and open the User Layout. 3. Drag the **Marketing Cloud for AppExchange User** and **Marketing Cloud for AppExchange AdminUser** fields to the **Additional Information** section of the user page layout. 4. To give your admin user, or the user who’s setting up Marketing Cloud Connect, and your Site Builder users the necessary field permissions, navigate to Users in Salesforce Setup. 5. Find your admin user and click **Edit**. 6. Under General Information, select the boxes for **Marketing Cloud for AppExchange User** and **Marketing Cloud for AppExchange Admin**. 7. Edit your Site Builder users, and select **Marketing Cloud for AppExchange User**. 4. **Define process automation settings.** Allow the managed package wizard to configure workflow rules by providing a Default Workflow user with the correct permissions. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Process Automation, and then select **Process Automation Settings**. 2. Find the **Default Workflow User** field. 3. If **Default Workflow User** is empty, select the lookup icon and choose a user with system admin permissions to be the default workflow user. 4. Save your changes. 5. **Confirm and save your session settings.** Session settings allow the managed packed wizard to add IP allowlisting. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Session Settings, and then select **Session Settings**. 2. Scroll to the bottom of the page. You don’t change any settings. But if you omit this step, the managed package wizard is unable to add IP allowlisting, which then requires you to add 20 or more IP ranges manually. 3. Save your changes. 6. **Connect your accounts using the Marketing Cloud Connect Setup Wizard.** Now that you have the basic requirements, you can use the setup wizard. Several of the steps ask for confirmation that you completed earlier steps, so make sure not to skip steps two through five. 1. If you’re using Lightning Experience, switch to Salesforce Classic. 2. From the navigation bar, select the plus icon to navigate to the All Tabs screen. 3. Select **Marketing Cloud**. 4. Click **Verify Remote Site**. 5. From the MetadataAPI dialog, select **Okay**. 6. To begin the setup wizard, click **Start Wizard**. 7. The next screen is a prompt for the Default Workflow User you created. Click **Next**. 8. To move forward and acknowledge you’ve saved the Session Security Settings, click **Next**. 9. To acknowledge Field-Level Security information, click **Next**. 10. To acknowledge the page layout update information, click **Done**. 11. To acknowledge the automated changes, at the main Marketing Cloud Connector Setup screen, select **I agree**, and then click **Configure Marketing Cloud Connector**. 12. After you complete all the steps, you’re rewarded with a configuration summary. 13. To finish the setup wizard, click **Okay!** 7. **Create your Marketing Cloud Connect API user.** Marketing Cloud Engagement requires a user account for its connection to the Salesforce environment, so you can dedicate a user license to this purpose. Create your Marketing Cloud Connect API user and give them the appropriate roles. 1. In the Engagement app, hover over your username and select **Setup**. 2. From Setup, in the Quick find box, enter Users, and then click **Users**. 3. Click **Create**. 4. Enter your email address for **Reply Email** and **Notification Email Address**. 5. Enter a unique username, for example MC-API-User. 6. Leave the External Key field blank, unless your org requires it. 7. Select a time zone and a culture code. 8. Select API User. 9. Create a temporary password. 10. Save your changes. 11. From the Users screen, select the checkbox next to the user that you just created. 12. Click **Manage Roles**. 13. Click **Edit Roles**. 14. Assign the roles Administrator (if available for your account) and Marketing Cloud Administrator. 15. Save your work. 16. Log out of the Engagement app. 8. **Connect to Marketing Cloud from Salesforce.** Now, hop back over to your primary Salesforce org to finish user setup. Make sure you’re logged out of the Engagement app before you begin. 1. From Salesforce Classic, click the plus icon to navigate to the All Tabs screen. 2. Click **Marketing Cloud**. 3. Click **Connect to Marketing Cloud**. 4. Enter the username and password for the Marketing Cloud API User and log in. 5. After you complete the steps, you see the Marketing Cloud Connector Settings page. Step 9 involves setup tasks from this page. 9. **Check the Marketing Cloud Connector settings.** From the Marketing Cloud Connector Settings page you can verify your API User info and confirm endpoint settings. 1. To get to the Marketing Cloud Connector Settings page, go to Salesforce Setup in Classic mode and add /apex/marketingcloudsettings to the end of the url. If you just completed step 8 you can skip this. 2. Make sure that the API User Username and MID are correct. 3. Scroll down to **Advanced** and turn on **Tenant Specific OAuth Endpoints** if they aren’t on. 10. **In the Engagement app, check the Experience Cloud Marketing Form installation.** The last step in the installation process is to confirm that your package is installed. 1. From Engagement, navigate to the Setup menu. In the Quick Find box, enter Installed Packages and select **Installed Packages**. 2. Find the Experience Cloud Marketing Form package. 3. If the package doesn’t appear in the list, contact your Account Representative to get the package provisioned for your account. 11. **Test in Experience Cloud.** Your Marketing Cloud Form component is available and ready for testing. Go to Experience Builder for one last test. 1. Create a site using the Microsite (LWR) template. 2. To allow guest users to submit the form, go to Experience Workspaces and select the **Administration** tile. Choose **Preferences** and select **Allow guest user to access public APIs**. 3. Access Experience Builder and drag the Marketing Cloud Form component to your canvas. 4. Enter your Marketing Cloud MID, and the name of the data extension that you want to create. 5. Click **Create Data Extension**. 6. You’re ready to start gathering contact info. #### See Also - [How Do Experience Cloud Forms Connect to Marketing Cloud Engagement?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_marketing_cloud_form_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can connect a microsite to a Marketing Cloud Engagement data extension using the Marketing Cloud Form component. Contact information is gathered from your Experience Cloud sites and then sent to Engagement. The data that is collected from your site is momentarily stored in the Salesforce Core infrastructure and then sent to your data extension. The data transferred this way is only stored in Salesforce Core infrastructure for as long as it takes to call Marketing Cloud Engagement API.") # Connect Chatter Desktop Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important For more information, see [Chatter Desktop Retirement](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=000267581&type=1&language=en_US). If you have multiple Salesforce or Chatter logins, create a connection for each login. The connection lets Chatter Desktop access the Chatter data that you can access with that login on the web. 1. Click ![Chatter Desktop settings icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_desktop_settings.png) the Chatter Desktop settings icon and select **Settings**. 2. In the Connections section, enter a name for the connection and the URL from which you log in. The URL must begin with https:// and end with salesforce.com or chatter.com. For example, if your organization has a European division that you log into from https://emea.salesforce.com, enter that URL and name the connection Europe. By default, Chatter Desktop connects to your main instance of Salesforce (Production) or your Lightning Platform sandbox. 3. To authorize Chatter Desktop to connect using the login, click **Authorize** and follow the on-screen instructions. Use the radio buttons on the Settings screen to specify a default connection. To quickly switch connections while using Chatter Desktop, click ![Chatter Desktop settings icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_desktop_settings.png), select **Switch Connection**, and choose the connection. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note You can create multiple connections, but Chatter Desktop can log in to only one connection at a time. You can’t use Chatter Desktop to display data from multiple connections simultaneously. #### See Also - [Configure Chatter Desktop](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_configuring.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018.") # Connect Experience Cloud to Data Cloud To provide customers the personalized, individual experiences they now expect, you need detailed insights about your users and how you can best engage with them. By connecting your enhanced LWR sites to Data Cloud, you can capture and send user interaction data, such as clicks, scrolls, and product interactions, to Data Cloud. From there, you can organize your data and use it to create unified profiles, build robust site analytics, personalize your sites, generate recommendations, and discover new ways to use AI. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important - The Data Cloud integration isn’t available in Developer Edition orgs with Namespace configured. - The standard Data Cloud license is limited to one data space. To create additional data spaces, purchase the Data Spaces add-on license. See [Data Cloud Standard Editions and Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_dc_editions.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note This topic includes steps found in multiple products and requires different roles to complete. ## Set Up Data Cloud If you’re new to Data Cloud, your org requires some setup to get everything flowing correctly. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To access Data Cloud Setup: System Administrator
- Data Cloud admin: If you’re new to Data Cloud, start with [Get Started Using Data Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_product_considerations.htm&type=5&language=en_US). If not, skip to the next task on this page, Connect Your Enhanced LWR Site to Data Cloud. - If you plan to connect your site to a non-default data space, see [Create a Data Space](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?language=en_US&id=data.c360_a_data_spaces_create.htm&type=5). ## Connect Your Enhanced LWR Site to Data Cloud To capture detailed information about your site interactions and send it to Data Cloud for ingestion, connect your enhanced LWR site to Data Cloud. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences and then click **All Sites**. 2. Find the enhanced LWR site that you want to connect to Data Cloud and click **Builder**. 3. In Experience Builder, go to **Settings** | **Integrations**. 4. On the Data Cloud card, select **Add to Site**. 5. Click **Share site data with Data Cloud**. After you connect an LWR site to a data space, you can’t change the connection to a different data space. This limitation also applies to Data Cloud integrations created in Spring ’25 or earlier, which use the default data space. You can’t move data from one data space to another. To use a different data space, delete the site’s Data Cloud integration, and then reconfigure the integration with the new data space. The integration process can take up to an hour. 6. Check your email for confirmation that your setup is complete. When you receive your confirmation email, publish your site. ## Track User Interactions After your integration is set up, a set of interaction events is automatically mapped to Data Cloud. User consent is turned off by default for Experience Cloud sites. That means that even if you turn on Data Cloud, user information isn’t captured until you consent on behalf of your customers or implement a consent-management platform (CMP) app. 1. Create [consent management](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/data_cloud_consent_management.htm) options. 2. Check out our [event reference](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/data_event_reference.htm) guide to find out what you’re tracking. 3. Confirm that [your connection and data streams are active](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/data_cloud_setup.htm). #### See Also - [_Salesforce Help:_ Manage Data Spaces](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_data_spaces.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [_LWR Sites for Experience Cloud:_ Manage Data in LWR Sites](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/data_management.htm) # Connect Your Agent Using a Flow Connect your agent to the chat component using a prebuilt flow template. This flow contains the logic for session creation, conversation handoffs, and user verification. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Available in: Enhanced Chat with the Einstein for Service, Einstein Platform, Community, Community Plus, or Agentforce for Service add-on
Available in: LWR and Aura
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Click **New Flow**. The Flow Builder opens. 3. Select **Record-Triggered Flow**, then click **Create**. 4. From the Flow Templates pane, search and, then select **Agentforce Attach**. 5. Review and customize the flow if needed. In most cases, the default logic is sufficient, but you can adjust the triggers or the decision logic. 6. Click **Save As**, name the flow, and click **Activate**. 7. Return to Experience Builder, and confirm that the agent is mapped to the Enhanced Chat component. 8. Click **Publish** to deploy the site changes. # Considerations Before You Migrate an Aura Site to Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) Sites that run on Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) boast increased speed, scalability, security, and design flexibility over Aura sites. Migrating your Aura site to an LWR site requires considerable planning. Keep these considerations in mind. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Where possible, we changed noninclusive terms to align with our company value of Equality. We maintained certain terms to avoid any effect on customer implementations. ## General - Unlike Aura templates, which have specific components for specific site functions, LWR templates provide more general components that use concepts like data binding to achieve the same goals, but faster and more dynamically. ## Custom Aura Components - Identify any custom Aura components on your site, and replace them with Lightning web components (LWCs). - When building LWCs, use new LWC features such as [@slot](https://www.learnexperiencecloud.com/s/article/How-to-Create-Super-LWCs-with-Slots-in-Experience-Cloud-LWR), [responsive properties](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/get_started_responsive_properties.htm), and [custom property editors](https://resources.docs.salesforce.com/rel1/doc/en-us/static/pdf/Custom_Property_Types_and_Editors_Beta_Summer-23.pdf). - Use data binding to show CRM data and CMS content on the site, where possible, instead of wires or Apex controllers. - See [Learn Experience Cloud](https://www.learnexperiencecloud.com/experience-cloud-lwr-apps) and [Github](https://github.com/forcedotcom/commerce-on-lightning-components) for LWCs you can use for reference. ## Object and Site Pages - We recommend that you use the same base URL for object pages in the LWR site that mirror existing object pages in the Aura site. For example, if you have an existing page in your Aura site like `www.company.com/s/account/123456789/account-name`, we recommend that you give the object page in LWR a base URL of `/account`. Using the same base URL makes it easier for you to set up redirects later. - We recommend that you use the same base URL in the LWR site that mirrors existing site pages in the Aura site. For example, if you have an existing Builder page like `www.company.com/s/my-custom-page`, use `/my-custom-page` as the base URL in your LWR site. - Replace your Aura page layouts with flexible page layouts in LWR. ## Custom Domains and Custom URL Let’s say that your Aura site URL uses a custom domain like `www.company.com/s` or a Salesforce domain like `company.my.site.com/s/`, and the same domain serves the new LWR site, but without the /s/. - Create the LWR site without /s/. - Before go-live, set the LWR site to use `company.my.site.com/path` so that you can test redirects. - At go-live, delete the Aura site’s custom URL. In Setup, create a custom URL for the new LWR site that uses the custom domain. - To keep the old Aura site to serve content that you can’t render in LWR yet, add a new custom URL for the Aura site with a path such as `/archive`. ## Topics - If your Aura site uses topics and topic assignments with custom object records, replace the topics and topic assignments with custom objects such as Topic\_\_c and Topic\_Assignment\_\_c. - To drive sharing, consider setting up a master-detail relationship between Topic\_Assignment\_\_c and topic, and consider setting up lookup relationships to other objects for topic assignments - To drive sharing with site users, if needed, consider adding custom fields like a Site Identifier picklist field on the Topic\_\_c object. - Grant the proper object permissions to the Topic\_\_c and Topic\_Assignment\_\_c objects for the LWR site guest user. - Create guest sharing rules to share the right Topic\_\_c records with the guest user record. If Topic\_Assignment\_\_c records have a master-detail relationship toTopic\_\_c, Topic\_Assignment\_\_c records are also visible. ## Record Data Extract, Transform, and Load (ETL) - Topics and Topic Assignments - Export all topics and topic assignments for objects that are currently in use on the Aura site. - Import topics into the new custom object Topic\_\_c. - Import Topic Assignments into the new custom object Topic\_Assignment\_\_c, relating the new Topic\_\_c record with the EntityId that the topic assignment was related to - Records Containing URL Fields - Export records with the URL fields. - Locally update the URL field values with the new site URL. Import the file back into the org to update the records. ## User Sharing and Permissions - Guest Users - A new guest user is automatically created when you create an LWR site. Review the profile permissions and permission set assignments for the Aura site guest user, and carry over any necessary configuration to the LWR site guest user. - If there are existing, and still needed, guest user sharing rules in place for the Aura site’s guest user, duplicate them for the LWR site’s guest user. - Authenticated Users - Any existing sharing mechanisms for authenticated users are carried over from the Aura site to the LWR site. - Create sharing mechanisms for any new custom objects or components that you created for the new LWR site. - Any existing profile, permission set, and permission set assignments are carried over from the Aura site to the LWR site. ## CSS - Any CSS overrides that target standard markup in Aura don’t apply to markup in LWR. You must update the CSS style sheets. - There’s no dedicated CSS editor at the site-level for LWR sites. Add your CSS directly in the head markup. Components on LWR sites have a CSS Class section on the Style tab, where you can add a CSS class at the component level. - If the style sheet is a file that’s part of an archive (.zip), the markup is - ``` ``` - If the style sheet is the only file uploaded directly as a static resource, and not part of an archive (.zip), the markup is - ``` ``` - Test and confirm that CSS in LWCs works properly. - Design tokens in LWR sites differ from the ones in Aura sites. To update the tokens used in your components and style sheets, refer to the [–dxp styling hooks documentation](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/brand_hooks_map.htm). ## Google Analytics and Other Head Markup Scripts and Style sheets - Google Analytics - If you’re using the standard integration for Google Analytics, you must reconfigure it in LWR. As long as the LWR site is using the Aura site’s domain name, you can use the same Google Analytics ID. - If you’re using a script in the head markup, paste the script to the LWR site. As long as the LWR site is using the Aura site’s domain name, the script works. - Style sheets and Other Static Resources - Include any style sheets, JavaScript files, or other static resources in the head markup of the LWR site. ## Sitemap and Snapshot Generation - Sitemaps and snapshots are generated with the `my.site.com` domain, which means that you can test them before migrating the custom domain from the Aura to LWR site. To minimize SEO impact, make sure that sitemaps and snapshots are populated properly. - Consider placing a redirect from `/s/sitemap.xml` to `/sitemap.xml`. That way, you can redirect any sitemap submissions that you have to the new sitemap without updating them everywhere. ## File Asset Images - f you’re referencing any file assets as `/file-asset/`, you must update them to `/sfsites/c/file-asset/`. ## CMS - With Winter ’24, you can publish content from all CMS workspaces to LWR sites. - There are no CMS components in LWR sites. Use data binding to show CMS content in LWR sites. ## Redirects Consider adding these redirects (in CSV format). - /s, / and /s/, /: Redirects the Aura home page URL to the LWR home page URL. - /s/sitemap.xml, /sitemap.xml: Redirects the Aura sitemap URL to the LWR sitemap URL, rather than resubmitting to search engine crawlers. - /s/(customPage), /(customPage): Catches all pages to redirect one-level pages to their equivalent one-level pages in LWR. - /s/article/(articleAlias), /article/(articleAlias): Knowledge article redirect./s/contact/(contactId), /contact/(contactId): Object detail page redirect. (Here, contact is used as an example, but the same structure can be applied to any standard or custom object.) - External URL redirects aren’t supported. If you need an external URL redirect, set up a solution that redirects to a Visualforce page, which in turn redirects externally. ## Multilingual Sites - The new LWR language URL construct is a path rather than a query parameter, as it is in Aura. See [Create a Multilingual LWR Site](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/multilingual_lwr.htm). ## Visualforce Pages - If you run any Visualforce pages in your Aura site, such as custom robots.txt files, custom sitemaps, or other custom Visualforce pages, note the difference in URL structure between Aura and LWR for running Visualforce pages. - In Aura, the site is served behind the /s path, and Visualforce pages are served one level higher. - Example: Aura site at `mycompany.my.site.com/helpcenter/s/` would serve Visualforce pages from `mycompany.my.site.com/helpcenter/apex/myVisualforcePage`. - Example: Aura site at `helpcenter.mycompany.com/s/` would serve Visualforce pages from `helpcenter.mycompany.com/apex/myVisualforcePage`. - LWR sites are served at the root right after the site path, if any, and Visualforce pages are served from a path that is automatically created as a default for that site. The automatically created path for Visualforce pages is a combination of the site’s path + “vforcesite”. You can customize and modify this path from the Custom URLs section in Setup, if necessary. - Example: LWR site at `mycompany.my.site.com/helpcenter/` would serve Visualforce pages from `mycompany.my.site.com/helpcenter/helpcentervforcesite`. - Example: LWR site at `helpcenter.mycompany.com` would serve Visualforce pages from `helpcenter.mycompany.com/vforcesite`. ## Mobile Publisher Apps - Mobile Publisher offers beta  support for LWR sites. - The Playground app allows LWR sites with or without “/s” - Check out [LWR (Beta) Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.branded_apps_lwr_gaps.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - We strongly recommend that you test your app in the Playground app before creating and requesting a beta app. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note This feature is a Beta Service. Customer may opt to try such Beta Service in its sole discretion. Any use of the Beta Service is subject to the applicable Beta Services Terms provided at [Agreements and Terms](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/). #### See Also - [B2B Commerce Aura to LWR Migration Guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/commerce/lwr-migration/overview) # Considerations for Archiving a Site Before you archive a site, consider what types of sites can be archived, and the impact that archiving might have on users. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
- You can’t archive these LWR-based site types, even if they’re inactive: Marketing Landing Page sites (LWR sites used to host marketing landing pages) and LWR sites that use Experience Delivery. - You can only archive inactive sites. If your site is in Preview, you must activate and then deactivate the site before archiving it. - When you archive a site, - The site’s URL is unavailable to all users, including admins. - Instead of the site, users see a Site under maintenance page. - You can’t access the site’s Experience Builder or Workspaces. - The site doesn’t count against your org’s maximum 100 unarchived site limit. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If you decide to unarchive a site keep the following in mind: - Sites archived for longer than 3 release are out of date and may have unexpected performance when unarchiving. - To function correctly, unarchived LWR sites must be republished before they get the latest version of the site. # Considerations for Audience Targeting in Aura Sites Audiences are a great help when you want to target specific user segments with relevant site content. As you work with audiences, there are some things to consider. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
## General Considerations - You can create up to 1,500 audiences per site. To locate an audience in the Assign Audiences window, you can search using the % wildcard. You can also sort audiences by name or creation date. - You can’t assign audiences to the components in the template header and footer sections. - Custom object records aren’t automatically available in partial copy sandboxes and can cause issues with audiences that reference the custom objects. To avoid this situation, follow one of these recommendations. - Include the custom object data in your sandbox. - Temporarily remove the criteria that reference the custom object. - Edit records that include the custom object, and delete the data in the custom object lookup field. - After you publish your site, a slight delay can occur as your site loads, during which you see the default version of a page, component, or branding set. In this case, wait a bit and reload the page. - When an audience contains record-based criteria, field-level security that’s applied to criteria in the audience can restrict site visibility based on those field-level security settings. However, when an audience contains only user-based criteria, field-level security settings don’t restrict site visibility. ## Location Criteria Considerations - The user’s IP address, which can be in a neighboring geographical area, determines the location. - The location permission isn’t on by default in Developer Edition orgs. Contact Salesforce if you want to use this feature in that edition. - Some countries don’t permit use of the Google API. Location criteria don’t work for those regions. - Custom location fields aren’t available for use as audience criteria. - Keep location criteria broad. If an audience that’s limited to a particular city is unlikely to get much traffic, try using a larger geographic area, such as a state or a country. Or create one audience with multiple cities or states in the location criteria. - If you use an external CDN service, you must set the True-Client-IP header in your external CDN. Audience targeting can return unexpected results without this header. Refer to your CDN provider documentation for help with setting up headers. ## Domain Criteria Considerations - Available domains are created in Salesforce and associated with a site through a custom URL. - Domain criteria aren’t available in Developer Edition orgs. ## Record-Based Criteria Considerations - Record-based criteria use record fields, such as opportunity amount, not user fields, such as role. - You can assign an audience that includes record-based criteria only to a record detail page or a variation of that record detail page. - You can’t assign an audience that includes record-based criteria to a branding set or component. Audiences that include record-based criteria don’t appear on the list of audiences to choose from. - When you create an audience from a component or branding set, record-based criteria aren’t available for selection. ## Audience Criteria Considerations - If an audience contains record-based criteria, you can’t use that audience as a criterion in another audience. - You can’t use an audience as a criterion for itself. - An audience that’s used as a criterion for another audience can contain up to 10 criteria. - Audience criteria can be only one level deep. For example, you have three audiences: a California User audience, a Partner audience, and a Dog Owner audience. You can use Dog Owner as a criterion for Partner. However, you can’t then use Partner as a criterion for California User because Partner already contains an audience criterion: Dog Owner. - Layering audiences can be tricky. For example, if you have a San Francisco audience assigned to a page variation, all your users in San Francisco can see the page. If you add “company name” as a criterion to a component on the page, that component is visible only to users in San Francisco who work for that company. If you assign a California audience to the component, no one outside San Francisco can see the component because the entire page is assigned to the narrower San Francisco audience. # Considerations for Changing Your Template Changing your template affects site navigation, branding, and customizations. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Apart from the Help Center template, we don’t recommend changing from one Experience Builder template to another. So for example, avoid changing from a Customer Service template to a Partner Central template. Although the functionality is available for these templates, we recommend that you start afresh with a new template instead. If you do change from one template to another and lose your customizations, Salesforce Customer Support is unable to assist you. - When you change your template, Salesforce object data carries over, but branding and component customizations don’t. As a result, you must reconfigure any customizations in the new template. - Changing the template updates the available options in Experience Workspaces. To view all available options regardless of template selection, select **Administration** | **Preferences** | **Show all settings in Workspaces**. - Your Experience Cloud site URL changes when switching from a Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template to any other template type. Specifically, /s is appended to the site URL. Be sure to update any links to your site with the updated URL. - In active Experience Cloud sites: - When you switch to an Aura template, your template change is saved in a draft version. Use the draft version to further customize your site in Experience Builder. Your site is updated only after you publish your changes. - When you switch to the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template from any other template, your changes immediately reflect in your active site. In this scenario, we recommend that you deactivate your site before you change your template. After you’ve made all your changes, reactivate the site. - If your template is listed as None, then you’re not using a predefined template or you’re using a modified version of one. - After importing a B2B Commerce template, the My Account and Lists options on navigation menus, such as the Customizable User Profile Menu, require some follow-up. Edit the menu and reconnect these options with their pages. - Template changes aren’t supported in Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) templates. # Considerations for Deploying Experience Cloud Sites with Change Sets Keep the following considerations and limitations in mind when migrating your Experience Builder or Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site with change sets. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
## General - When you deploy an inbound change set, it overwrites the Experience Cloud site in the target org. So although you can’t use a change set to delete a component, you can delete the pages within an Experience Builder site. For example, let’s say you delete pages from an Experience Builder site in sandbox and then create an updated outbound change set. When you redeploy the change set in a target org, such as production, the pages are also deleted there. - If you update the Experience Cloud site template in the source org, ensure that you also update the template in the target org before deploying the change set. - You can’t deploy to a target org that’s using an earlier release version. For example, if your source org is on Summer ’19 (API version 46.0), you can’t deploy to a target org on Spring ’19 (API version 45.0). ## Administration Administration settings are in Experience Workspaces. - Remember to add any new or modified profiles or permission sets referenced in **Administration** | **Members** to your outbound change set. They’re not automatically included as dependencies. - For Experience Cloud sites created in a sandbox org before the Summer ’17 release, you must resave administration settings before migration to transfer them successfully. - Until you publish your site in the target org, settings for the change password, forgot password, home, self-registration, and login pages appear to return to their default values. - To update settings in the Members area and the Login & Registration area, you must deploy the changes in separate change sets. First update and deploy the Members area setting, and then update and deploy the Login & Registration settings. ## Navigation Menu The Navigation Menu component is available in Experience Builder sites. - For menu items that link to objects, list views are reset to the default list view. Also, custom list views for standard objects aren’t included as dependencies. - Deploying the navigation menu with additional menu items deletes any translations applied to existing menu items in the target environment. ## Recommendations - Updates to recommendation names aren’t supported. If you change the name of a recommendation in the source org having previously migrated it, the target org treats it as a new recommendation. - Recommendation images aren’t supported. - When you deploy an inbound change set, it overwrites the target org’s scheduled recommendations with recommendations from the source org. ## Partial Deployment for Enhanced LWR Sites - Partial site content deployment is available for enhanced LWR Experience Cloud sites created in Winter ’23 or later. - To deploy partial site content, make sure that the target org contains an existing site with the same name as the source site. - Adding a Digital Experience component to your outbound change set also adds that component’s variations to the change set. For example, adding the Home view component automatically adds all translations for the Home view. ## Unsupported Settings and Features The following items aren’t supported. Manually add them after you deploy the inbound change set. - Navigational and featured topics - Audience targeting - Dashboards and engagement - Recommendation images - Branding panel images in Experience Builder - The following Administration settings in Experience Workspaces: - The Account field in the Registration section of the Login and Registration area - The **Select which login options to display** option in the Login section of the Login and Registration area - The Settings area - The Rich Publisher Apps area #### See Also - [Change Sets Best Practices](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.changesets_best_practices.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Change Sets Implementation Tips](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.changesets_implementation_notes.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Deploy A Full Experience Cloud Site with Change Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_migrate_changesets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use change sets to move your Experience Cloud site between related orgs that have a deployment connection, such as your sandbox and production orgs. Create, customize, and test your site in your test environment and then migrate the site to production when testing is complete.") # Considerations for Page Hierarchy and URL Conflicts in Experience Builder When you create and organize pages in your Experience Builder site, some pages behave differently than others. Keep these page management considerations in mind when you use the Page Action menu. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
## Page Level Limits You can have up to six levels of pages when you use the Page Action menu to add subpages or move pages. Because of this limit, the option to add a subpage or move a page within your page hierarchy is disabled from the Page Action menu. When you create an object page, a page base (1) is created on one level, and the Detail, List, and Related List subpages (2) are created on a second level. When you create a content page, its Content Detail subpage is also on the second level. ![Account object and Account detail pages](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_object_and_standard_page.png) Because object and content pages take up two levels, adding them under the fifth level of an existing hierarchy exceeds the level limit of six pages. When a page is on the fifth level of the page hierarchy, you can only add a standard page as a subpage. The object and content pages are disabled and can’t be added. ![Object and content pages disabled](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_object_and_content_disabled.png) ## Dynamic URL Conflicts Some preconfigured pages (1) in your site contain a dynamic portion in the page URL, indicated with specific parameters (2). ![preconfigured page with dynamic URL](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_dynamic_URL.png) To avoid URL conflicts, the Add Subpage option is always disabled for these pages, and other pages can’t be moved under them. ## URL Conflicts Between Sites If you host multiple sites on the same Salesforce-managed domain, be sure to review your site URLs for conflicts, as it’s possible to configure the same URL for pages on two different sites. Let’s say you use https://ExperienceCloudSitesSubdomain.force.com for Site A’s homepage, and https://ExperienceCloudSitesSubdomain.force.com/products for Site B’s homepage. If you create a page on Site A that uses the subpath /products, that page and Site B’s homepage both use the URL https://ExperienceCloudSitesSubdomain.force.com/products. In this scenario, a site visitor can only access the Site A page through a navigation menu on Site A. If a site visitor navigates to http://ExperienceCloudSitesSubdomain.force.com/products any other way, they’re directed to Site B’s home page. ## General URL Conflicts A page that exists at the same level as another page with the same base URL (1) and has a dynamic URL (2) can’t have subpages. ![Account Detail Page base URL and dynamic URL](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_base_and_dynamic_URL.png) ![Account standard page base URL](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_account_standard_base_URL.png) In this example, the Account standard page and the Account object page have the same base URL, /account/. To prevent URL conflicts, the Add Subpage feature is disabled for the Account standard page. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To add a subpage when this feature is disabled for a standard page, you can change either page’s base URL. To change the standard page’s base URL, first, go to Page Settings from the Page Action menu, then click **Change URL**. You can also change the other conflicting page’s URL because all related subpages are updated with the new URL. Now let’s say the Account standard page is a subpage of another standard page in your site. When the Account standard page has no subpages of its own, you can move the Account object page under the Experience page as an immediate subpage. Here, the Account standard and Account object pages can exist on the same level within a single page hierarchy. ![Account standard page as a subpage of Experience standard page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_account_standard_as_subpage.png) But if the Account standard page has a subpage, the Account object can’t be in the same page hierarchy at the same level as the Account standard page. In this case, the base URLs of both pages conflict, which means that you can’t move the Account object page under the Experience page. When you click Move Page for the Account object page, the Experience standard page and its subpages are disabled as destinations. ![Experience page is disabled](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_experience_page_disabled.png) The Add Subpage option is always disabled for pages with dynamic URLs, such as object and content pages, to avoid URL conflicts with their default subpages. ## Move Page Conflicts From the Select a destination dialog, you can select a parent page to move your selected page under. Some pages are disabled because they can’t be parent pages for the page that you want to move. ![Some pages are disabled when you move a page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_move_page_errors.png) Some possible reasons include: - Page Level Limits: You can’t move a page under a parent page that results in a page hierarchy exceeding six levels. Say you want to move a page with a subpage, such as an object page, under a new parent page. You can only select a destination page up to the fourth level because the object page’s current page hierarchy consists of two pages. Moving it to a fifth (1) or sixth (2) level page exceeds the six-level limit of the new parent page’s hierarchy. ![6th level of page hierarchy](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_move_page_page_level_limit.png) ![You can only move object page up to the fourth level](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_move_page_error_page_level_limit.png) - URL conflicts: Review the suggestions in Dynamic and General URL Conflicts to easily move pages around in your site. - Some pages are always top level and can’t have subpages: Examples include the Home, Login, and Flow pages, as well as pages in the B2B template: Checkout, Flow, Order, and Confirmation. You can’t move these pages or move other pages under them. From the Select a destination dialog, you can move a page to the top level when you click the site name (1) and then click Move to Root (2). ![Move to root button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_move_to_root.png) The Move to Root button is disabled if a page is already at the top level in your page hierarchy. It’s also disabled when the page you want to move has a URL conflict with an existing top-level page. Review the suggestions under General URL Conflicts to move your page to the top level. # Considerations for Person or Group Between SharePoint and Salesforce Note the limitations of two data type fields when using SharePoint Online and Salesforce. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
- The SharePoint Online “Lookup (multi-select)” data type with text - The SharePoint Online “Person or Group” data type with indirect lookup data If you use these data type columns in SharePoint Online, the column values from SharePoint are not returned to Salesforce. # Considerations for Using Flows in LWR Using flows in your LWR sites lets you automate your business processes and use the versatility of Flow Builder to your advantage. But before you implement flows in your LWR sites, it’s important to understand the limitations. ## Aura Components LWR sites can’t run flows that use Aura components. Make sure that all custom flow screen components are built using Lightning Web Components (LWC). We’ve included here a list of commonly used Aura components and features that you can’t use in LWR. Keep in mind that this list isn’t exhaustive. File upload File Upload is an Aura component that is often used in screen flows. Image Image is an Aura component that is often used in screen flows. Local actions Building or modifying custom Aura components to use as local actions in flows isn’t available in LWR sites. This functionality is typically used to execute client-side logic in your flow. ## Pause or Resume Flows LWR doesn’t support pausing or resuming flows. ## Record Fields If you place record fields directly on your flow screens, those fields don’t appear in LWR sites. This Flow Builder functionality is sometimes referred to as automatic fields or dynamic forms for flows. ## `lightning-out` Component If you have custom Lightning Web Components or Aura components in your flow, then you can’t use the `lightning-flow` component on LWR sites. #### See Also - [Let Users Pause Flow Interviews](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_pause.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Record Fields on Flow Screens Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_ref_elements_screen_object_field.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Considerations When Using Customer Insights When you enable Customer Insights in your org, you’re allowing data to be gathered from site members and stored in Salesforce. Here are some things to keep in mind when using Customer Insights. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
- Customer Insights gathers and stores page views of logged-in site members. Agents can view activity on articles, assets, contracts, custom objects, discussions, orders, products, and tasks. - When you enable Customer Insights, you are authorizing data to be gathered from all logged-in site members. You can’t exclude specific profiles from being tracked. - Only Salesforce users with the View Customer Insights profile permission see the Customer Insights data. - Customer Insights isn’t supported in sites created using the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template. - Customer Insights is only available for business accounts, not person accounts. - Customer Insights doesn’t track Salesforce for Android and Salesforce for iOS activity. - If Customer Insights is enabled and **Data Protection and Privacy** is turned on, privacy settings must be complete for information to stay updated. To avoid missing information, make sure you: - Set up the Individual object with the fields you want to track. - Add the **Individual** field to the Contacts page layout. - From the Individual object, create records for the users you want to track with Customer Insights. - Connect user accounts with their Individual records. From a Contact record, find the **Individual** field, and search for the associated user. For more information on data protection and the Individual object, see [Set Up Tracking and Storage of Certain Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=individuals_setup_data_privacy.htm&language=en_US). # Contact Request Button & Flow Add the Contact Request Button & Flow component to let members click a button to request that customer support get back to them. Members describe the problem and enter their contact details in a window. After the request is sent, a support person can review the issue and contact the customer for follow-up and resolution. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To use this component, create a contact request flow from the Customer Contact Requests page in Setup. When a customer submits a request, a contact request record is created. You can route contact request records using Omni-Channel. Contact Request works in public sites and sites that require authentication. Make sure that your site users have the Run Flows permission, including your Guest User profile that’s used in public sites. Without this permission, members don’t see the button to submit contact requests. 1. On the page that you’re configuring, select the **Contact Request Button & Flow** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the component properties.
Property Details
Button Label The text to display on the support request button. The default is Request Help.
Contact Request Flow Select a contact request flow that you created in Setup or in Flow Builder. Only active flows that have the type Contact Request Flow are supported.
Button Text Color

Set the color of text to use for the button label.

The Linked to Theme icon link icon shows that the current selection comes from colors defined in the theme.

Button Text Hover Color

Set the color of text to use for the button label when a member mouses over the button.

In Experience Builder, you can test hover colors in Preview mode.

Button Background Color Set the color to use for the button background when the button is inactive.
Button Background Hover Color

Set the color to use for the button background when a member mouses over the button.

In Experience Builder, you can test hover colors in Preview mode.

Button Border Color Set the color to use for the border that surrounds the button.
Button Border Radius Move the slider to control the amount of curve to use for the button shape.
Max Button Width Move the slider to control the width of the button. Width percentage is set against the full width of the container that the button sits in. So 100% is the full width of the container, rather than the full width of the browser page.
Button Alignment Select Center, Left, or Right to set the position of a button within its container.
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Contact Request Button & Flow component. ![Request Help button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/contact_request_button_and_flow.png) When a user clicks the button a window appears. ![Contact request popup window](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/contact_request_button_and_flow_popup.png) #### See Also - [Let Customers Create Contact Requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.contact_request.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Contact Support & Ask Buttons The Contact Support & Ask Buttons component adds two buttons to the page. The Contact Support button lets users click a button to create a case. The Ask button lets members ask a question and publish it to the site. All members must be logged in to ask the site a question. When you enable Web-to-Case and set up a guest user case publishing action, guest users aren’t required to log in before creating a case. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Guest users can’t attach files when creating a case. Each button instance supports its own property values. So, if you have two sets of Contact Support & Ask buttons on a page, the values on each button are unique to that button. You can configure buttons to use the values you defined in your site theme so that they all look the same. But each button instance remains unique. 1. Select the **Contact Support & Ask Buttons** component on the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Header Label The text to show at the top of the component.
Ask Community Label The text to show on the Ask button. The default text is Ask a Question.
Contact Support Label The text to show on the Contact Support button. The default text is Contact Support.
Allow members to add topics Select to show the topic area at the bottom of the feed publisher and to allow members to add topics.
Expand Details section by default When a member asks a question, show the Details section in an expanded state.
Button Text Color

Set the color of button text to use when the button is inactive.

The Linked to Theme icon link icon shows that the current selection comes from colors defined in the theme.

Button Text Hover Color

Set the color of text to use when a member mouses over the button.

In Builder, you can test hover colors in Preview mode.

Button Background Color Set the color to use for the button background when the button is inactive.
Button Background Hover Color

Set the color to use for the button background when a member mouses over the button.

In Builder, you can test hover colors in Preview mode.

Button Border Color Set the color to use for the border that surrounds the button.
Button Border Radius Move the slider to control the amount of curve to use for the button border.
Suggest questions Select to show questions that are similar to the one the member is asking. This property assists with question deflection and helps in using existing resources.
Include discussions in suggestions Select to show discussions related to the question that the member is asking. This property assists with question deflection and helps in using existing resources.
Include articles in suggestions Select to show Knowledge articles related to the question that the member is asking. This property assists with question deflection and helps in using existing resources.
Max Suggestions to Show Set the maximum number of questions, discussions, and articles to show to a member who is asking a question.
Show satisfaction prompt Select to show the member a prompt that solicits information about their satisfaction with the content provided to them when they asked a question.
Satisfaction Prompt Enter the question you want to ask a member about their satisfaction with the questions, discussions, and articles you provided in response to their question. The default is Did we help to answer your question? Frame the question so that a positive response shows that your data helped and a negative response shows that it didn’t. Member response data provides you with metrics on the effectiveness of question deflection.
Ask follow-up question Select to ask the member a follow-up question to their satisfaction response.
Follow-Up Prompt Enter the follow-up question that you want to ask the member. The default is Can we close your question? A member’s positive response closes the question without posting it. A negative response keeps the member’s question active.
Confirmation Message Enter a confirmation message to show when a member responds to your prompts. The default is Got it!
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Contact Support & Ask Buttons component: ![Contact Support](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/contact_support.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") - [Case Deflection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_case_deflection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Case Deflection component searches text as it’s being entered into the Contact Support Form component, and returns relevant articles and discussions. If users don’t get the answer they need, they can continue with their request for support.") # Contact Support Button The Contact Support Button component adds a button that users click to create a case. When you enable Web-to-Case and set up a guest user case publishing action, guest users aren’t required to log in before creating a case. Each button instance supports its own property values. So, if you have two Contact Support buttons on a page, the values on each button are unique to that button. You can configure buttons to use the values you defined in your theme so that they all look the same. But each button instance remains unique. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Guest users can’t attach files when creating a case. 1. Select the **Contact Support Button** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component:
Property Details
Button Label The text to show on the button that users click to create a case. The default text is Contact Support.
Button Text Color

Set the color of text to use for the button label.

The Linked to Theme icon link icon shows that the current selection comes from colors defined in the theme.

Button Text Hover Color

Set the color of text to use for the button label when a member mouses over the button.

In Experience Builder , you can test hover colors in Preview mode.

Button Background Color Set the color to use for the button background when the button is inactive.
Button Background Hover Color

Set the color to use for the button background when a member mouses over the button.

In Experience Builder, you can test hover colors in Preview mode.

Button Border Color Set the color to use for the border that surrounds the button.
Button Border Radius Move the slider to control the amount of curve to use for the button shape.
Max Button Width Move the slider to control the width of the button. Width percentage is set against the full width of the container that the button sits in. So 100% is the full width of the container, rather than the full width of the browser page.
Button Alignment Select Center, Left, or Right to set the position of a button within its container.
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Contact Support Button component: ![Contact Support](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/contact_support_button.png) # Contact Support Form The Contact Support Form allows guest and authenticated users to create cases from a site. It works with the Case Deflection component to help site members find articles and discussions to answer questions as text is being entered into the form. If you built your Experience Cloud site before Spring \`18, you could be using the Create Case Form component. A revamped version, ushered in with Spring \`18, has split the component into two: the Contact Support Form and the Case Deflection components. We recommend you update your existing site to use the new components, as future updates and improvements are made on Contact Support Form and Case Deflection. Moreover, the new components allow you to use the Case Deflection Dashboard to verify the efficacy of your site’s case deflection. [Check out this topic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_migrate_to_support_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you built your Experience Cloud site before Spring `18, you could be using the Create Case Form component. A revamped version, ushered in with Spring `18, has split the component into two: the Contact Support Form and the Case Deflection components. We recommend you update your existing site to use the new components, as future updates and improvements are made on Contact Support Form and Case Deflection. Moreover, the new components allow you to use the Case Deflection Dashboard to verify the efficacy of your site’s case deflection.") if you want to migrate to the new components. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note A few things to keep in mind when using the Contact Support Form component: - Feed items aren’t generated for attachments when you create a case with the Contact Support Form component. - When you configure the case page layout for your site, specify that some fields are required. Adding required fields to the layout ensures that customers don’t accidentally submit cases with empty fields. - Fields with the data type `lookup`, such as Contact Name, Account Name, and custom lookup fields, aren’t supported for guest users. - Automatic triggers that change record ownership can affect what object details are visible to users or where the details are displayed. For example, if you create a case using the Contact Support Form component and an automatic trigger changes the case owner, the case record ID appears in the Case Number field. 1. Select the **Case Deflection** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | **General Settings** | Click to expand the section with general setting properties. | | Title | Text that displays at the top of the form customers use to create a case. The default is **Contact Customer Support**. | | Subtitle | Subtitle at the top of the form that customers use to create a case. The default is **Tell us how we can help**. | | **Performance Settings** | Click to expand. | | Create Cases in Batches | A global action that allows users to create cases in batches, rather than one at a time. Batching creation increases the number of cases that can be created at a time for high-volume sites. | | **Authenticated Users** | Click to expand. | | Global Action | A global action that allows users to create cases. The global action must be a Create a Record type, and on the case object. | | Configure global actions for authenticated users | Link to the area in Salesforce Setup where you can create global actions. | | Attach files | Select to allow users to attach files to their cases. They can upload up to 10 files. | | File Upload Button Label | Label for the button to allow customers to upload files. Default text is Upload File. | | **Guest Users** | Click to expand. | | Global Action | A global action that allows guest users to create cases. The global action must be a Create a Record type, and on the case object. | | Configure global actions for guest users | Link to the area in Salesforce Setup where you can configure global actions for guest users. | | **Confirmation Text** | Click to expand. | | Confirmation Title | The title at the top of the page confirming that a case was created. Default text is **Your case was created.** | | Confirmation Subtitle | More information under the confirmation title, after a case was created. Default text is **We’ll get back to you soon.** | | Case Summary | Shows the case subject and case number for the user’s future reference. | | Show Call to Action button | Select this option to have folks take a follow-up action after filing a case. | | Call to Action | The URL of the site you want users to see after filing a case. | | Call to Action Text | Call to action text label, based on what you want users to do. | | Call to Action Button Text | Text label for the call to action button. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Contact Support Form component: ![Contact Support Form component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_contact_support_form.png) # Content Delivery Fields This table provides a description of the fields that make up a content delivery. These fields are on the create-delivery wizard, the Content Deliveries related list, or the delivery details page. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic

Available in: All Editions except Database.com

Salesforce CRM Content available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions

| Field | Description | | --- | --- | | Allow Recipient to View in the Browser | If checked, the content delivery can be viewed in a custom web page. On the delivery details page, this field is labeled Allow View in the Browser. | | Allow Recipient to Download as PDF | If checked, the content delivery converts Microsoft® Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files into PDF files and gives the recipient the option of downloading the PDF. If the file you upload is not a PDF, Word, Excel, or PowerPoint file, this option doesn’t appear in the create-delivery wizard. On the delivery details page, this field is labeled Allow Download as PDF. | | Allow Download in Original Format | If checked, the content delivery allows recipients to download the original file. In the create-delivery wizard, this field is called Allow Recipient to Download as \[file type\] where \[file type\] is the original file's file type, such as .ppt, .pdf, or .doc. | | Author | For Salesforce CRM Content files, the user who published the file. (Read only) | | Content Delivery Name | The name assigned to the content delivery. By default, the Content Delivery Name includes the file name and the creation date. | | Content Delivery Opens Latest Version | For Salesforce CRM Content files, this flag indicates that the recipient of a content delivery sees the most current version of a file. For example, if a file is updated between the delivery-creation date and today's date, a recipient who views the delivery today sees the newest version. | | Content Delivery Expires | A flag that indicates whether access to the content delivery expires on the expiration date. In the create-delivery wizard, this flag corresponds to the checkbox next to the Remove access to content on field. | | Created By | The user who created the content delivery, including creation date and time. (Read only) | | Description | For Salesforce CRM Content files, the description provided when the file was published. (Read only) | | Expiration Date | The date when the content delivery can no longer be viewed. In the create-delivery wizard, this is the date entered in the Remove Access to Content on field. | | File Downloaded | A flag that indicates whether a file in the content delivery was downloaded. For example, if a content delivery includes options to view the content in a browser, download the content in its original file format, and download the content as a PDF file, this flag is checked if the recipient downloads the original file or the PDF file. (Read only) | | Internal View | A flag that indicates whether a Salesforce user viewed the content delivery. A view is considered internal if the user opens the delivery URL from within Salesforce, for example by clicking **View** on the Content Deliveries related list or clicking the delivery URL on the delivery detail page. If the user copies the URL and pastes it into a browser, the view is considered external. (Read only) | | Last Modified By | The user who last modified the content delivery, including modification date and time. (Read only) | | Last Viewed | The date and time on which the content delivery was last viewed. A view is one click of the content-delivery URL. (Read only) | | Notify Me of First View or Download | If checked, the user who created the content delivery receives an email notification the first time the content delivery URL is clicked. | | Owner Name | The user who owns the content delivery. (Read only) | | Related To | The record that the content delivery is associated with, such as an account, opportunity, or custom object. Users with sharing access to the record can click it to view more details. | | Require Password to Access Content | If checked, the recipient must enter the provided password before viewing the content delivery. The password appears when the content delivery is generated and for the life of the delivery on the delivery detail page. | | Title | For Salesforce CRM Content files, the title of the file included in the content delivery. (Read only) | | View Count | Total number of views for the content delivery, including internal and external. (Read only) | #### See Also - [Set Up Content Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_about.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A content delivery allows you to convert documents such as Microsoft® PowerPoint and Word files into an optimized web-based version for easy online viewing. After you create your delivery, you can send its encrypted URL to any recipient, such as leads, customers, partners, and colleagues, and then track how often people view or download the content. Content deliveries are available in Salesforce Classic only. However, Lightning Email generates delivery-based links as email attachments for Lightning Experience users who have access to the Content Deliveries feature.") # Content Settings Customize content settings and enable content previews. - **[Customize Content Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Modify the defaults for your Salesforce CRM Content organization and control settings like feature licenses, multilanguage search, and enhanced document viewer. - **[Allow Content Previews in Link Posts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_rich_previews.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce provides rich media support for over 400 URL domains. When you share a supported link in a post, it’s converted into embedded videos, images, and other types of previews. - **[Set Up Content Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_about.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A content delivery allows you to convert documents such as Microsoft® PowerPoint and Word files into an optimized web-based version for easy online viewing. After you create your delivery, you can send its encrypted URL to any recipient, such as leads, customers, partners, and colleagues, and then track how often people view or download the content. Content deliveries are available in Salesforce Classic only. However, Lightning Email generates delivery-based links as email attachments for Lightning Experience users who have access to the Content Deliveries feature. - **[Content Delivery Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This table provides a description of the fields that make up a content delivery. These fields are on the create-delivery wizard, the Content Deliveries related list, or the delivery details page. # Context Passing Framework (Beta) With the Context Passing Framework, Agentforce can track and leverage your journey across a site, providing a seamless, personalized experience.The Context Passing Framework is an independent feature that tracks user interactions, such as article page loads, search queries, topic clicks on Aura sites, or NDC clicks on LWR sites. It provides seamless context to Agentforce Service Agents (ASA) for context-aware responses in Enhanced Chat and Quick Chat sessions. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Aura and LWR Experience Cloud Sites
Available in: Enhanced Chat with the Einstein for Service, Einstein Platform, Community, Community Plus, or Agentforce Service Agent add-on
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Foundations or Agentforce 1 Editions. Access to some standard agent actions requires additional add-on licenses
The Context Passing Framework is a foundational feature that sets up your site for advanced service capabilities. It tracks customer site activity data, such as: - Article page loads - Search queries - Topic clicks (on Aura sites) - NDC clicks (on LWR sites) The Context Passing Framework securely passes this journey data as context directly to your Agentforce Service agent when you start a chat session.This context provides Agentforce Service agents with your recent site history, resulting in context-aware responses and a better experience in Enhanced Chat and Quick Chat sessions. - **[Configure the Context Passing Framework for Agentforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_context_passing_framework_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Implement required components, including the User Interaction Context component and an Omni-Channel flow, to track critical user journey data. This framework maps pre-chat variables from your Experience Cloud site and securely delivers the context to your Agentforce Service agent. # Contribute Content Contribute Content to your organization. Publish and upload files and Web links. - **[Publish Files to Libraries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_files_upload.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To publish files to libraries you can upload them from your computer, contribute them from your private library to a shared library, or share them from Chatter. - **[Upload and Publish Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_upload.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add files to libraries to take advantage of the permission setting and content delivery capabilities of Salesforce CRM Content. - **[Salesforce CRM Content Limits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_file_size_limits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Limits for features and search of Salesforce CRM content. - **[Contribute Web Links to Salesforce CRM Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_links_upload.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Classify and publish a Web link in Salesforce CRM Content. - **[Update Content Versions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_revise.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Clicking a file name on any Salesforce CRM Content tab opens the content details page. - **[Delete, Archive, and Restore Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delete.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are two methods for removing content from libraries: archiving and deleting. # Contribute Google Docs to Salesforce CRM Content Add Google Docs to libraries in Salesforce to leverage the permission setting capabilities of Salesforce CRM Content ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic

Salesforce CRM Content is available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions

Google Docs is available in all editions

User Permissions Needed
Creating a Google doc and linking it to a Salesforce CRM Content library:

Library member with a library permission that permits contributing content

AND

Google Apps account

With Google Docs™, you can create and share on-demand documents, presentations, and spreadsheets (Google docs) and see your changes in real time as you collaborate with other users. Associating your Google docs with Salesforce CRM Content allows you to access all types of content from a single, fully-indexed location. It also ensures that your Google docs receive the feedback and tracking benefits provided by Salesforce CRM Content features such as votes, comments, and subscriptions. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The **Add Google Doc** button on the **Libraries** tab is available only if your Salesforce admin has enabled the Add Google Doc to Salesforce service. ## Add New Google Docs to a Salesforce CRM Content Library 1. On the **Libraries** tab or on a library detail page, click **Add Google Doc**. Log in to Google Apps if prompted. 2. Enter the Google Doc URL. 3. Click **Contribute**. 4. Enter a title and select a library. See [Publish Files to Libraries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_files_upload.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To publish files to libraries you can upload them from your computer, contribute them from your private library to a shared library, or share them from Chatter.") for detailed instructions on publishing content to a library. 5. Click **Publish**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note While you have your Google doc open, remember to share it with other Google Apps users in your organization. Only people with access to the Google doc in their Google Apps account can open the doc from Salesforce. ## Adding Existing Google Docs to a Salesforce CRM Content Library If you have an existing Google doc, you can publish it into a library: 1. On the Libraries tab, choose **Add Existing** from the Add Google Doc drop-down button. A list of all the Google docs in your Google Apps account displays. 2. To limit your list of docs, enter a search term or choosing to view only documents, presentations, or spreadsheets. 3. Select the Google doc that you want to add to Salesforce CRM Content and click **Contribute**. 4. Optionally, edit the title of your Google doc and/or add a description. 5. Choose a library. If you do not want to add the doc to a public library, for example if the doc is still in progress, choose **Save in my private library**. 6. Optionally, choose a language. If multi-language support is enabled, the Language dropdown list is displayed . If you do not choose a language, Salesforce associates your content with your personal language setting. If users restrict their content searches to a particular language, only content associated with that language is displayed in the search result set. 7. To publish the content on behalf of another author, choose that author from the dropdown list. 8. Tag your content. Your tagging permission depends on the tagging rule assigned to the library: - If the library does not have a tagging rule or if your administrator assigned the open tagging rule, you can enter tags in the Tags field. As you type a tag, Salesforce CRM Content autosuggests tags based on your My Recent Tags list and the Popular Tags section on the Libraries tab. The My Recent Tags list on the Contribute window shows the 20 tags that you used most recently. To add a tag, click it to automatically add it to the Tags field. - If your administrator assigned the guided tagging rule, you can choose from the list of suggested tags or enter a new tag. To add a suggested tag, click it to automatically add it to the Tags field. - If your administrator assigned the restricted tagging rule, you must choose from the list of suggested tags. When you select a tag, it turns green. - You can't change or delete tag names. You can remove tags from a document, but that doesn't delete the tag. - Tags are case insensitive. You can't have two tags with the same name even if they use different upper and lowercase letters. The case of the original tag is always used. 9. If multiple record types are available, choose one from the dropdown list. The record type determines which custom fields appear for you to categorize and define your content. 10. After completing the custom fields, click **Publish** or **Save**. # Contribute Web Links to Salesforce CRM Content Classify and publish a Web link in Salesforce CRM Content. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To publish Web links in Salesforce CRM Content:

Manage Libraries checked in your library permission definition

OR

Add Content checked in your library permission definition

1. Click the **Libraries** tab. 2. To add a link, click **Contribute** | **Do you want to link to a website instead?**, then enter the URL, and click **Contribute**. To publish a link that is already in your private library, click the **My Private Files** tab, locate the link, and click **Publish**. 3. Assign a title and description to your Web link. 4. Choose a library. This library becomes the managing (home) library, meaning that the Web link can be shared with another library but its content details page can only be edited by a user with relevant permissions in the managing library. If you do not want the link to be visible to other users in your organization, choose **Save in my private library**. 5. Optionally, choose a language. If multi-language support is enabled, the Language dropdown list is displayed. If you do not choose a language, Salesforce associates your content with your personal language setting. If users restrict their content searches to a particular language, only content associated with that language is displayed in the search result set. 6. To publish the content on behalf of another author, choose that author from the dropdown list. 7. Tag your content. Your tagging permission depends on the tagging rule assigned to the library: - If the library does not have a tagging rule or if your administrator assigned the open tagging rule, you can enter tags in the Tags field. As you type a tag, Salesforce CRM Content autosuggests tags based on your My Recent Tags list and the Popular Tags section on the Libraries tab. The My Recent Tags list on the Contribute window shows the 20 tags that you used most recently. To add a tag, click it to automatically add it to the Tags field. - If your administrator assigned the guided tagging rule, you can choose from the list of suggested tags or enter a new tag. To add a suggested tag, click it to automatically add it to the Tags field. - If your administrator assigned the restricted tagging rule, you must choose from the list of suggested tags. When you select a tag, it turns green. - You can't change or delete tag names. You can remove tags from a document, but that doesn't delete the tag. - Tags are case insensitive. You can't have two tags with the same name even if they use different upper and lowercase letters. The case of the original tag is always used. 8. If multiple record types are available, choose one from the dropdown list. The record type determines which custom fields appear for you to categorize and define your content. 9. After completing the custom fields, click **Publish** or **Save**. # Control Access to Chatter Desktop Chatter Desktop is enabled for most organizations, but administrators can control access to Chatter Desktop. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic

Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, Developer, and Database.com Editions

Salesforce CRM, Approvals, Chatter email notifications, Chatter Invitations, and customer invitations are not available in Database.com.

![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. For more information, see [Chatter Desktop Retirement](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=000267581&type=1&language=en_US). 1. From Setup, enter Chatter Desktop Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Chatter Desktop Settings**. 2. To allow users to access Chatter data from Chatter Desktop, select Enable Chatter Desktop. To block access to the Chatter Desktop self-installation page and prevent all instances of Chatter Desktop from accessing Chatter data, deselect this option. 3. To prevent non-administrators from installing Chatter Desktop, select Allow Chatter Desktop Managed Installations Only. For example, select this option if your IT department plans to deploy Chatter Desktop to your organization. 4. Save your changes. #### See Also - [Salesforce Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_setting_up.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With Chatter, users can collaborate on sales opportunities, service cases, campaigns, and projects with embedded apps and custom actions. Salesforce channels, which bring Slack into Salesforce, are another way to collaborate on records. In new orgs created in Summer ’26 and later, Salesforce channels are enabled by default, and Chatter is disabled. You can enable Chatter in these orgs if necessary, and you can continue to use Chatter in existing orgs.") - [Install Chatter Desktop Managed Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_installing_managed_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Salesforce provides two Chatter Desktop installers: a standard version for individual installations and a managed version for enterprise deployments.") - [Configure Chatter Desktop Managed Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_configuring_managed_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Control Chatter Desktop settings by deploying an XML-based configuration file to each user's machine. The configuration in the file overrides the user's settings.") # Control Chatter Access Through Permission Sets Manage Chatter access by modifying existing permission sets or setting up new ones. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
User Permissions Needed
To enable Chatter: Customize Application
When you enable or disable Chatter through permission sets, consider that: - When you enable Chatter in a permission set, the permission set takes precedence over user profile settings. All users with a Chatter-enabled permission set have access to Chatter, even if Chatter isn't enabled in their user profile. - When you disable Chatter in a permission set, the permission set doesn't take precedence over user profile settings. All users with a Chatter-enabled user profile have access to Chatter, even if Chatter is disabled in their permission set. To prevent that person from accessing Chatter, disable Chatter in both the person's user profile and permission set. - When Chatter profile-based rollout is enabled for an org, Chatter is automatically enabled when some user-level permissions are already enabled. And some Chatter settings are disabled. For more information, see [Profile-Based Rollout Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_pbr_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In organizations that use Chatter profile-based rollout, limitations apply. There are limits with user profiles, permissions sets, and the interaction between users with and without Chatter access."). Verify that existing permission sets include the correct and required Chatter permissions for the desired subset of users. 1. In Setup, navigate to Permission Sets. 2. For each existing user-level permission set: 1. In the System section, click **System Permissions**. 2. Click **Edit**, and select **Enable Chatter**. The Enable Chatter permission is available in a permission set only after Chatter profile-based rollout is enabled for your org. ![System permissions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collabPermSets2.png) 3. Save your changes. 3. If applicable, create permission sets with the desired permissions and assign them to users. By default, all permissions in a new permission set are disabled. Enable the appropriate permissions in the new permission set to give users access to Chatter plus extra levels of management authority. - Create and Own New Chatter Groups (ChatterOwnGroups)—Users with this permission can create groups in Chatter. - Create and Share Content Deliveries for Chatter Files (ChatterFileLink)—Users with this permission can use files with Chatter, like uploading, attaching, and sharing, and create public links. - Invite Customers To Chatter (ChatterInviteExternalUsers)—Users with this permission can invite users who don’t have a Salesforce license to Chatter. - Manage Chatter Messages and Direct Messages (ManageChatterMessages)—Users with this permission have management access to Chatter Messages and Direct Messages (Experience Builder sites). - Moderate Chatter (ModerateChatter)—Users with this permission can moderate Chatter feeds. - Moderate Chatter Feeds (ModerateNetworkFeeds)—Users with this permission can moderate feeds in sites. - Use Case Feed (ViewCaseInteraction)—Users with this permission can access Case feeds. - View All Data (ViewAllData)—Users with this permission can view all data, regardless of their membership status in a feed or ownership of a record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Selecting the Enable Chatter permission in a person's permission set doesn't automatically turn on Chatter for that person. People can't use Chatter until you [turn on Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure various Chatter features and customize the Chatter experience for your users on the Chatter Settings page in Setup.") for your organization. #### See Also - [Get Ready for Profile-Based Rollout of Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_pbr_prepare.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you’re rolling out Chatter to a subset of your users, you can manage Chatter access with custom user profiles and permission sets. There’s a little up-front work that you can do to prepare.") - [Control Chatter Access Through User Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_pbr_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Modify existing custom user profiles to allow or deny access to Chatter.") - [Chatter Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure various Chatter features and customize the Chatter experience for your users on the Chatter Settings page in Setup.") - [Profile-Based Rollout Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_pbr_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In organizations that use Chatter profile-based rollout, limitations apply. There are limits with user profiles, permissions sets, and the interaction between users with and without Chatter access.") # Control Chatter Access Through User Profiles Modify existing custom user profiles to allow or deny access to Chatter. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
User Permissions Needed
To enable Chatter: Customize Application
When Salesforce turns on Chatter profile-based rollout for your organization, it adds the Enable Chatter permission to your existing user profiles and permissions sets. Enable Chatter is automatically enabled for all standard profiles. It’s also automatically enabled for custom profiles when any of these user-level permissions are enabled manually or as part of a license: - Create and Own New Chatter Groups (ChatterOwnGroups)—Users with this permission can create groups in Chatter. - Create and Share Content Deliveries for Chatter Files (ChatterFileLink)—Users with this permission can use files with Chatter, like uploading, attaching, and sharing. - Invite Customers To Chatter (ChatterInviteExternalUsers)—Users with this permission can invite users who don’t have a Salesforce license to Chatter. - Manage Chatter Messages and Direct Messages (ManageChatterMessages)—Users with this permission have management access to Chatter Messages and Direct Messages (Experience Builder sites). - Moderate Chatter (ModerateChatter)—Users with this permission can moderate Chatter feeds. - Moderate Chatter Feeds (ModerateNetworkFeeds)—Users with this permission can moderate feeds in sites. - Use Case Feed (ViewCaseInteraction)—Users with this permission can access Case feeds. - View All Data (ViewAllData)—Users with this permission can view all data, regardless of their membership status in a feed or ownership of a record. Modify your existing custom profiles with the desired permissions to manage access to Chatter, and create custom profiles, if necessary. 1. Log in as a Salesforce administrator. 2. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then select **Profiles**. ![Manage users, then profiles](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collabUserprofiles1.png) 3. For each custom user profile: 1. Click **Edit**. 2. In the Administrative Permissions section, select or deselect **Enable Chatter**, depending on whether you want users with this profile to have Chatter access. ![Administrative Enable Chatter permission](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collab_PBRProfiles.png) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important The Enable Chatter permission is available only if Chatter profile-based rollout is enabled for your organization. Salesforce enables profile-based rollout at your request. After profile-based rollout is enabled, selecting the Enable Chatter permission on a profile doesn't automatically enable Chatter for people with that profile. People can't use Chatter until you [turn on Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure various Chatter features and customize the Chatter experience for your users on the Chatter Settings page in Setup.") for your organization. 3. Save your changes. 4. If applicable, create custom user profiles with the desired permissions and assign them to users. #### See Also - [Get Ready for Profile-Based Rollout of Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_pbr_prepare.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you’re rolling out Chatter to a subset of your users, you can manage Chatter access with custom user profiles and permission sets. There’s a little up-front work that you can do to prepare.") - [Control Chatter Access Through Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_pbr_perm_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Manage Chatter access by modifying existing permission sets or setting up new ones.") - [Chatter Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure various Chatter features and customize the Chatter experience for your users on the Chatter Settings page in Setup.") - [Profile-Based Rollout Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_pbr_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In organizations that use Chatter profile-based rollout, limitations apply. There are limits with user profiles, permissions sets, and the interaction between users with and without Chatter access.") # Convert Character Combinations into Emoticons in the Feed Emoticons let your users enter character combinations in their posts and comments to create expressions. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, Database.com, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To enable emoticons: Customize Application
Emoticons are supported in Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and the Salesforce app. 1. From Setup, enter Chatter Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Chatter Settings**. 2. In the Emoticons in Feed section, select **Allow Emoticons**. Salesforce supports these character combinations in posts and comments.
Character Combinations Emoticon
  • :)
  • :-)
smile (smile)
  • :P
  • :-P
  • :p
  • :-p
tongue (tongue)
  • :(
  • :-(
frown (frown)
  • >:(
  • >:-(
angry (angry)
  • :((
  • :'(
  • :'-(
crying (crying)
# Coworker Invitations Salesforce users can invite coworkers without Salesforce licenses to Chatter. Invited users can access Chatter people, profiles, groups, and files, but users without a Salesforce license can’t see record data. ### Required Editions

Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, Developer, and Database.com Editions

Salesforce CRM, Approvals, Chatter email notifications, Chatter Invitations, and customer invitations aren’t available in Database.com.

To enable coworker invitations, select Allow Coworker Invitations in **Salesforce Setup** | **Chatter Settings.**. The email domain of the first Salesforce user who is added to the organization is used as the company domain in the Company Email Domains field. Coworker invitations aren't enabled if the first Salesforce user's domain is a free public email provider such as yahoo.com or gmail.com. In the Company Email Domains field, enter the domains that are used in your company’s email addresses. You can enter up to 200 domains. Avoid public email domains such as hotmail.com, yahoo.com, or gmail.com. If invited, anyone with an email address in these domains can join and see user profiles, feeds, and Chatter groups. When you turn off this feature, users can't accept outstanding invitations. Similarly, if you remove an email domain, users can't accept outstanding invitations from that domain. #### See Also - [Customer Invitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_external_enabling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Let users invite customers to the private groups that they own or manage. Customers are users outside your company's email domains. They have limited Chatter access and can see only the groups that they're invited to. They can interact only with members of those groups.") # Create a Branded Mobile App for Your Experience Cloud Site by Using Mobile Publisher Use Salesforce Mobile Publisher to create and distribute a fully branded mobile app for your Aura and LWR sites. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
Mobile Publisher is a powerful tool to create a mobile app from your Experience Cloud site. ![The Mobile Publisher landing page in Salesforce Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/publisher_landing_page.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Your organization must purchase licenses for Salesforce Mobile Publisher to use the feature. Contact your Salesforce account executive for more information. With Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud, you can add these native features to your branded mobile app. - Persistent authentication. - Biometric unlock. - Integrated barcode reader. - Geolocation. - Contacts stored on a mobile device. - Integration with Apple Wallet on iOS. - Bottom tab bar navigation. - And many more features. Refer to the [Mobile Publisher documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.branded_apps_commun_app.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Salesforce then publishes the app to the Google Play and Apple App stores. After the app is published, any update to your Experience Cloud site is automatically reflected in the app without the need to republish. Learn more about [Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.s1_branded_apps.htm&type=5&language=en_US), the assets you need for your branded app, and how to distribute your mobile app to your users. # Create a Channel Program Channel programs help channel managers organize multiple-channel sales organizations. Managers can create programs for different types of partner users, like Resellers, Value Added Resellers (VARs), Distributors, and Managed Service Providers (MSPs). They can also organize partner users based on geography or level of expertise. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create channel program Create on channel program
Channel Programs are available to users with Partner Community licenses. Create a channel program to provide partner users access to leads within their region, relevant marketing events, and relevant resources. If a partner user joins a team, you can add them to a channel program by making them a channel program member. You can add or remove channel program members from a channel program at any time. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Enable feed tracking on the Channel Program Member object to easily track partner activity, such as when a member changes to a different level. Be sure to add the Name column to the Channel Program Member related list. You can use the name to navigate to a member’s feed. 1. From the App Launcher, find and open **Channel Program**. 2. Click **New** and enter a name, category, and description. 3. Activate the Program. 4. Save the channel program. # Create a Conditional CMS Collection for Your Aura Site Make collections by creating filters that automatically include content that meets your defined criteria. To achieve complex and targeted results in your collection, combine several layers of filters. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To access Experience Workspaces or Experience Builder:

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the community, portal, or site

To customize an Experience Builder site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences OR assigned an experience admin, publisher, or builder role in that site
  • AND is a member of the site
To create collections using CMS content:
  • Assigned a content admin or content manager role in that CMS workspace
1. In Content Management, select **Collections**, and click **New** or **Create Collection**. 2. To make your collection easy to identify, enter a descriptive name in the New Collection window, select **CMS Content**, and click **Next**. 3. From the dropdown menu, choose the content type that you want to include, select **Conditionally**, and click **Next**. 4. In the Rule for Finding Content dropdown, choose - All Criteria are Met. This rule treats all your filters as ANDs, allowing only content that meets all the criteria to be included in the collection. - Any Criteria is Met. This rule treats all your filters as ORs, allowing any piece of content that meets any one of the criteria to be included in the collection. 5. To create a filter, select a filter type from the Filter By dropdown, then an operator from the When dropdown, and enter a value in the Value field to compare against.
Filter type Description
Topic

Has a single operator, called Includes, that searches for CMS content tagged with the topic listed in the value field. When adding more than one topic, separate them with commas.

For any given collection, you can only have one topic filter with up to 1,000 characters defining it.

Publish Date Has multiple operators that evaluate against the most recent publish date of available CMS content. Values can be entered as region-specific numeric dates or as date literals, like Today or Last Week. For more information see Relative Date Filter Reference.
Title Has two operators that evaluate against the Title field of your available CMS content for an exact (Equals) or partial match (Contains).
6. To create filters that further refine your collection, click **\+ Add Criteria**. You can use up to 10 filters to define a collection. 7. When you’re done adding filters, click **Finish**. #### See Also - [Create and Manage CMS Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.cms_content_create_manage.htm&language=en_US) - [Create a Salesforce CRM Collection for Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_managed_content_collections_creatingcrm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To display CRM object data on your site, create CRM collections. CRM collections are automatically updated based on the data in your Salesforce org. When you add a CRM collection to your Aura site, you can customize its layout and formatting.") - [Relative Date Filter Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=filter_dates_relative.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [_Developer Guide:_ Comparison Operators](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.soql_sosl.meta/soql_sosl/sforce_api_calls_soql_select_comparisonoperators.htm) - [_Developer Guide:_ Logical Operators](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.soql_sosl.meta/soql_sosl/sforce_api_calls_soql_select_logicaloperators.htm) # Create a Custom Login Discovery Page To set up passwordless login with an email address or phone number, create a custom Login Discovery page. With this configuration, your users can self-register and log in with an email address or phone number. Set up your page in Experience Workspaces, and customize your login process with Apex. When you create your Login Discovery page in Experience Workspaces, Salesforce generates a LoginDiscovery handler. You can customize the LoginDiscovery handler later. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and select **All Sites**. 2. Next to your site name, click **Workspaces**. 3. In the Workspaces page, select **Administration**, and then select **Login & Registration**. 4. Under Login Page Setup, for Login Page Type, select **Login Discovery Page**. ![Login Page Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/xid_login_discovery_empty_handler.png) 5. (Optional) For Login Prompt, enter the text that you want to appear as the prompt on your login page. For example, enter Email Address or Phone Number. You can localize the login prompt with a custom label. Use the `$Label` global variable, for example, `$Label.loginPrompt`. 6. For Login Discovery Handler, leave the field blank and click **Create a Login Discovery Handler**. Salesforce auto-generates the Apex handler on save. You modify the code later. 7. For Execute Login As, select a Salesforce admin with the Manage Users permission to run the handler. Execute Login As provides the context in which the Login Discovery handler runs. By assigning a user to the handler, operations performed by the handler are easily traced back to the login process. In production, you typically create a system user for the Execute Login As user. 8. If **Allow employees to log in directly to the site** is selected, deselect it. The Login Discovery Page doesn’t support org employees logging in to the site directly. However, you can customize the handler to redirect users to an IdP. For employees, you can set up Login Discovery with My Domain. From your My Domain Authentication Configuration settings, set the login page type to Discovery. 9. Save your settings. Salesforce generates a default login discovery handler and populates the Login Discovery Handler field with its name. This handler accepts an email address or phone number from the login page and emails or texts a verification code to the user. If the user’s email or phone number isn’t verified, the user is prompted for a password. To customize the welcome email that new users receive when they sign up with their email address, see [Customize the Passwordless Registration Welcome Email Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_otp_welcome_email.htm&language=en_US). # Create a Custom robots.txt File for Your Experience Builder Site The robots.txt file for your site is automatically generated. It allows search engines to crawl your entire site. However, if you want to tell search engines not to crawl certain pages of your public site, you can create a custom robots.txt file. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To create a Visualforce page and robots.txt file for your site: Create and Set Up Experiences
Use a Visualforce page to create a custom robots.txt file. Then add the URLs of the pages that you want search engines to crawl to the Allow section, and add the URLs that you don’t want search engines to crawl to the Disallow section. A common way to use a custom robots.txt file is to disallow your entire site and then selectively allow search engines to crawl individual pages. ``` Disallow: / # hides everything from ALL bots Allow: //s # add path you want to open to bots Allow: //s # add path you want to open to bots Sitemap: http:///s/sitemap.xml ``` Pages whose URLs you add to the Disallow section can still appear in search results. For example, if an allowed web page points to a disallowed URL, a search engine can index the URL when it’s crawling the allowed web page. Learn more in [Google’s Search Central Documentation](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/crawling-indexing/robots/intro). To hide or block a public site page from search results [use the noindex meta tag](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_tags.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set the title, description, and head properties for your Experience Builder site pages to improve search results."). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you have more than one site, each with a different custom domain subpath, they share a robots.txt file. Therefore, when you create a custom robots.txt file, ensure that your search engine crawling directives account for all pages in all of your sites. 1. In a text file, create a list of include (Allow) and exclude (Disallow) directives for the areas of your site that you want to expose to or hide from search engines. Also include the path to all sitemaps for the domain—for example, `https:///s/sitemap.xml`. Only relative URLs are valid for Allow and Disallow directives. 2. To create a Visualforce page, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Visualforce Pages. Then select **Visualforce Pages**, and click **New**. 3. Give the custom file a name. You can even call it robots. ![Content Snapshot](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/seo_custom.png) 4. Select **Available for Lightning Experience...**. 5. Copy your list of indexing directives and the sitemap path from the text file to the Visualforce page. For example: ``` User-agent: * Disallow: / Allow: /s Allow: /mycommunity/s Sitemap: https://example.com/s/sitemap.xml Sitemap: https://example.com/mycommunity/s/sitemap.xml ``` 6. Save your work. The Visualforce page is automatically saved at the root-level of the preferred domain. 7. From Experience Workspaces, click **Administration** | **Pages**, and then click **Go to Force.com**. Then, on the Site Details page, click **Edit**. 8. In the Site Robots.txt field, enter the name of the Visualforce page that you created, or click ![Lookup search icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png) to search for the file. 9. Save your work. #### See Also - [Best Practices and Tips for Using SEO in Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_best_practices.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Follow these guidelines and best practices when optimizing SEO in your site.") - [SEO for Experience Builder Sites FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Answers to common questions about using SEO in your Experience Builder site.") # Create a Customer Account Portal—Setup Tasks Review this high-level list of tasks and considerations for prepping and setting up your portal. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Planning Prep Your Salesforce Org for a Customer Portal
Set Up a Customer Account Portal Advanced Features
Site Design Reporting
# Create a Flexible Layout Build highly customized pages using flexible layouts. Create and resize columns within each section, then add and stack sections to build out the page. Bring it all to life with background images and color. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
  • OR
  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
1. [Create a custom page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_create_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To extend your Experience Builder template, create custom site pages. To get the most from your Salesforce data, add custom record detail, list, and related list pages. To display individual pieces of content along with any combination of components, use CMS content pages.") using a flexible layout. When you select a flexible layout for your page, you can’t change the layout type. The flexible layout lets you customize your page layout to suit your content needs. - To use a flexible layout with an existing page, [create a page variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_create_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To extend your Experience Builder template, create custom site pages. To get the most from your Salesforce data, add custom record detail, list, and related list pages. To display individual pieces of content along with any combination of components, use CMS content pages."). - To make the page span edge to edge, giving you full-screen-width sections, use the Set Max Page Width setting. First, [create a theme layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_theme_apply.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A theme layout defines the top-level regions of your page, such as the header and footer, navigation, search, and the user profile menu. A theme layout component categorizes the pages in your site that share a theme layout.") from **Settings** | **Theme** | **Configure**. Then, in Edit Properties, deselect **Set Max Page Width**. Now you can create a page from this theme layout with sections that span the width of the screen. 2. Build out your sections. A section consists of a row on your page and all its content. Example section: ![An example of a section](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_layout_section.png) - To add a section above or below the current section, click ![Plus icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_add_section_plus_icon.png). - To delete a section, click ![Trash icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_trash_icon.png). Deleting a section also deletes its content. Pages must include at least one section. To delete the last section, create another section and try again. - To reorder sections, drag the section to place it where you want it. 3. To customize a section, select it. Use Column Options to add, remove, and resize columns in this section. - To customize the column structure in this section, select a column layout preset (1). - In the Column Distribution field (2), use the handles between columns to resize them. The columns snap to a 12-column grid. The number in each column represents the grid units that the column uses out of 12. To get two columns of equal width, give each column a value of 6. A section can have up to six columns. - To delete a selected column, click the ![delete icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_x_icon.png) beneath it. Deleting a column also deletes its content. ![Customize section options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_section_options.png) 4. Use Section Style to add some panache, like background images and color.
ColorSets the section’s background color. To set a color, click the color swatch and use the color selector or enter a specific hexadecimal code in the text box. Use the slider to adjust the color’s strength.
ImageAdds a background image to the section. Upload an image or select one from your org’s asset library. Then select the Image Layout and Image Position in the section.
Image Overlay ColorAdds an overlay color to the section. To set a color, click the color swatch and use the color selector or enter a specific hexadecimal code in the text box. Use the slider to adjust the color’s opacity.
Section HeightUse the slider to set the minimum section height in pixels. The section adjusts automatically when content is taller. The minimum doesn’t apply to phones or tablets in portrait mode.
Content WidthUse the slider to set the content width as a percentage of the full width of the section. This setting doesn’t apply to phones or tablets in portrait mode.
![Section styles in the property panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_section_style.png) #### See Also - [Create Custom Site Pages with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_create_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To extend your Experience Builder template, create custom site pages. To get the most from your Salesforce data, add custom record detail, list, and related list pages. To display individual pieces of content along with any combination of components, use CMS content pages.") - [Change the Theme Layout of Your Experience Cloud Site’s Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_theme_apply.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A theme layout defines the top-level regions of your page, such as the header and footer, navigation, search, and the user profile menu. A theme layout component categorizes the pages in your site that share a theme layout.") # Create a Global Action to Let Partners Register Deals Create a global action to allow partners to register deals from Experience Cloud sites. Partner Central comes with a Quick Create button that you can add the global action to so partners can register deals. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
1. From Setup, enter Global Actions in the Quick Find box, then select **Global Actions**. 2. Create a global action, select **Lead** as the target object, and the [record type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_recordtypes_partners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a lead record to track sales leads that you pass to partner users. Record types help you differentiate between sales leads and registered deals, assign specific page layouts for different processes, and simplify reporting for each type of record.") for the deal registration process. 3. Select or specify an appropriate label for the global action. This label displays in the Create button menu in your site. 4. Fill out the other details and save the global action. 5. Customize the fields in the global action layout, based on the information you want your partners to submit for each deal. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Use a Lead Source value to indicate that the lead has been captured from the Deal Registration process. # Create a Help Center Set up a help center to give guest users access to the knowledge articles that you choose. Help users find solutions, and give them a way to contact you when the answer isn’t available. This topic is for you if your org uses Classic Knowledge. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions
User Permissions Needed
To create a help center
  • Create and Set Up Experiences

    AND

    Customize Application

    AND

    View Setup and Configuration
To work with topics in the site's content management system (CMS)
  • Create Topics
  • Merge Topics
  • Delete Topics
  • Edit Topics
Before you begin, review the topic, [“Introducing Help Center”](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_help_center_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A help center is a public-access, self-service site that makes it easy for people to find answers for themselves. Instead of filing cases through customer support, visitors find the information they need from the articles that you make available from your knowledge base. You reduce the load on your customer support team, and folks get the satisfaction of finding their own solutions."), and take the advance steps it discusses. This topic steps you through help center creation when your org uses Classic Knowledge. Generally, you create your help center site using the Help Center template, and then configure it using a guided setup. 1. In your org, go to **Setup** | **All Sites** and click **New**. 2. Click the **Help Center** tile, and then click **Get Started**. 3. Enter a name for your help center, and then complete the help center URL. 4. Click **Create**. 5. Go to your help center’s Experience Workspaces, and click the **Guided Setup** tile. Then click the **Help Center** guided setup tile. 6. On the **Help Center** guided setup tile, click the Guided Setup link. This step launches the guided setup. The setup steps you through configuring your help center. Each step includes a link to the location in the help center user interface where you can do the configuration described in the step. Guided setup steps include: - Creating topics and assigning featured topics - Mapping topics to data categories - Setting up a Customer Support page - Setting up your Home page - Configuring search - Configuring any other pages you want to include in your help center - Doing some final configuration in the help center’s Workspaces - Previewing and publishing your help center 7. Create topics and assign featured topics. Topics are the fundamental unit of organization in your help center. Ask your customer support team about the situations they get called about most. Use their ideas to create topics that are of great interest to customers seeking solutions. Have 250 x 250 pixel images on hand for each featured topic. These images add to the look and feel of your help center. Create an FAQ topic that you can use as a default topic. Create an FAQ article for your help center with useful, general information. 1. Go to Experience Workspaces, and click the Content Management tile. 2. Click the **Topics** tab, and then click **Topic Management**. 3. Add topics to your help center. Topics can be hierarchical, so you can add both topics and subtopics. 4. Still in the Topics area of Content Management, click **Featured Topics** and [Set Up Featured Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_featured.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Featured topics highlight current, popular conversations in your Experience Cloud site. Change them regularly to keep members up-to-date and engaged."). 8. Map topics to data categories using [Automatic Topic Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_automatic_topic_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Transport all your hard work of organizing Salesforce Knowledge in your Experience Cloud site, and boost SEO for your Knowledge articles, by mapping topics to data categories. All articles published with a specific data category are tagged with the topics you specify. Articles added to the data category in the future are also tagged. All articles with assigned topics are included in search results."). To make your articles visible in the help center, use data categories to automatically assign multiple topics to articles. This step is crucial. Salesforce Knowledge uses data categories to classify articles and make them discoverable. When you map topics to a data category, any article that uses the category also uses the topics that are mapped to it. Check the box for **Assign this Topic to all existing articles**. This step adds help center topics to existing articles and automates publishing to the help center. 9. In Experience Builder, open the Contact Support page, and set up the Contact Support and Case Deflection components. Your help center offers a Contact Support page that you set up in Experience Builder. The page comes with Contact Support and Case Deflection components. Case Deflection brings up articles and other resources that are related to the information a guest enters in the contact support form. For the Case Deflection component, set the default topic for “No Content” to your new FAQ topic. When guests come across a topic with no articles, they see your FAQ topic. Assign the FAQ topic to at least one article that contains lots of useful general information. 10. In Experience Builder, configure your home page. Get your image and HTML files ready to upload. The images are for your help center's logo, login page background, and page header. The header can be a GIF, JPG, or PNG file with a maximum file size of 20 KB. The HTML file is for your page footer. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Your default view of the help center includes the footer: Powered by Salesforce. You can easily delete it or replace it with your own footer content. 1. Go to **Settings** | **General**, and give your [guest user profile read access to your Help Center data categories](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.rss_config_guest_user_profile.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 2. Click ![The Theme icon in Experience Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/theme.png) the Theme icon, and configure your theme. Add a logo and login background image, select colors and fonts, and tweak Theme Settings. 3. Configure page components to apply your company’s brand to your help center. For example, in the default theme, add images to the Hero Header and Hero Background components. 11. In Experience Builder, open the Home page, click the Global Search for Peer-to-Peer Sites component, and [configure its properties](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_peer_to_peer_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Global Search for Peer-to-Peer Communities lets your users search for articles, discussions, and any object available to your site members and made searchable. The component is separate and distinct from the overall header, making it easy to customize to a site’s needs."). Under Autocomplete Search, select **Limit autocomplete search results to Discussions and Articles**. 12. Set up the other pages in your help center to look the way you want. Check out these useful help center pages: Topic Detail, Contact Us, and Article Detail. For the Knowledge Article component, clear the **Allow Voting** property. The votes of public users aren’t counted. 13. In the Administration Workspace, click **Preferences**, and select **Give access to public API requests on Chatter**. 14. Preview, publish, and activate your help center. 15. Publicize your new help center. For example, share your help center URL with visitors to your company website. #### See Also - [Help Center Set Up Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_help_center_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Help Center is designed with self-service in mind. The Help Center template comes with components and pages that you can use as-is or customize to suit your needs.") - [Change from Help Center to a New Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_help_center_change_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Changing from a help center template to another template type is a simple process in itself. But the complexity increases with the things you must consider and actions you must take before you make the change. The complexity of a template change varies according to how much original help center content and configuration you want to preserve in the new template. Keep in mind that Salesforce partners have considerable experience with making template changes and can assist you with this process.") # Create a Lead Process for Lead Distribution A lead process allows you to define or customize status values or stages for leads. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create processes: Customize Application
Create a process called Lead Distribution and define the statuses that the lead can be in. When you select status values for a process, think of all the stages a lead goes through in the process. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To use more values than the primary process record provides, [customize the Lead Status picklist values](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=editing_picklists_for_record_types_and_business_processes.htm&language=en_US) for leads before you create the lead process. 1. From Setup, enter Processes in the Quick Find box. 2. To [create a lead process](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=creating_multiple_business_processes.htm&language=en_US), such as for lead distribution, select **Lead Processes**. 3. Select the stages best suited to the lead and your business needs. 4. Save the process. # Create a Lightning Bolt Solution Have at least one Experience Builder template, custom app, or flow category that you want to distribute? Then you’re ready to create a Lightning Bolt Solution. With Lightning Bolt Solutions, you can combine custom Lightning apps, business process flows, and Experience Builder templates and pages in easy-to-build, distributable packages. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create a flow category: Customize Application
To create a Lightning Experience Builder template: Customize Application AND Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To create a Lightning Bolt Solution: Customize Application AND View Setup and Configuration
Including an Experience Builder template in your Lightning Bolt Solution is optional. Use any template as a base to build your custom site with standard pages and components, or create custom pages, layouts, and components of your own. After you finish customizing the template, export it or one of its pages from **Settings** | **Developer** in Experience Builder. To include flows, first create a flow category, and add the active flows that you want to export. 1. From Setup, enter Lightning Bolt Solutions in the Quick Find box, and select **Lightning Bolt Solutions**. 2. On the Details and Branding page, enter information about your solution. For example, enter your company and solution names, and list the solution’s key features. Click **Next**. 3. On the Solution Highlights page, add any combination of Experience Builder templates, flow categories, and custom apps. Click **Next**. 4. Review the Summary page, and click **Finish**. The new Lightning Bolt Solutions is now ready for distribution. #### See Also - [Add Flows to a Lightning Bolt Solution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_flow_category.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you want to add flows to a Lightning Bolt Solution, group them into a flow category. Then add one or more flow categories to your solution.") - [Export a Customized Experience Builder Template for a Lightning Bolt Solution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can customize and export an Experience Builder template to use as a base for creating Experience Builder sites. Create custom pages, layouts, and components. Export and package the template on its own or distribute it for others to use as a part of a Lightning Bolt Solution.") - [Export a Customized Experience Builder Page for a Lightning Bolt Solution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Export pages that you’ve customized in an Experience Builder site. Use them as a base for new pages, or package and distribute them for others to use in their sites.") - [Package and Distribute a Lightning Bolt Solution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_package.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you create a Lightning Bolt Solution, package the solution to distribute it to other users or orgs. You can upload the package to AppExchange to share or sell your solution.") # Create a Manual CMS Collection for Your Aura Site Create hand-picked static collections of Salesforce CMS content. Select and add specific content in a few clicks, and edit the collection at any time from the Content Management workspace. Create manual collections to gather CMS content items of a single content type. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To access Experience Workspaces or Experience Builder:

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the community, portal, or site

To customize an Experience Builder site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences OR assigned an experience admin, publisher, or builder role in that site
  • AND is a member of the site
To create collections using CMS content:
  • Assigned a content admin or content manager role in that CMS workspace
1. In Content Management, select **Collections**, and click **New**. 2. In the New Collection window, enter a descriptive name for the collection, select **CMS Content**, and click **Next**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To make your collection easy to locate, give it a descriptive name. 3. From the dropdown menu, choose the content type that you want to include, and select **Manually**. 4. To add content to the collection, click ![Selection icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_cms_crm_plusmark.png) beside each content item. ![New CMS ontent collection - content selection dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_workspaces_cms_collections-mancond-select.png) 5. Click **Finish**. #### See Also - [Create and Manage CMS Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.cms_content_create_manage.htm&language=en_US) - [Edit a Manual CMS Collection in Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.edit_a_manual_collection_aura.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Edit manual CMS Collections in Content Management to keep the content in your Aura site up to date.") # Create a Market Development Budget Channel account managers can create budgets for specific vendor groups based on location, type of funds (Market Development or co-op), or by channel programs. Using custom lookup fields, they can also associate budgets with marketing campaigns. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create budget Create on budget
To update budget Update on budget
If you have a Partner License and have enabled Experience Cloud sites, the Market Development Fund objects are available in your org. 1. From the App Launcher, find and open **Partner Marketing Budget**. 2. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Field-level security can’t be used to edit standard fields on partner marketing budgets. Click **New** and enter the name, type, amount, and start and end dates. 3. Save the budget. Select **Ignore Validation** to bypass validation criteria and allow more flexibility to how budgets are allocated, claimed, and requested. Ignore Validation can’t be reversed after it’s selected for a budget. You can update allocations, claims, and requests for this budget. The updated values must be associated with a budget that has the same validation status as this one. # Create a Microsite Create your microsite using the Microsite template and customize the existing components to fit your company needs. Microsites run on the Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) platform so you can create beautiful, efficient websites. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions.
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You must be an Experience Cloud customer to access the Microsite template. 1. From **Setup**, in the Quick Find box, enter Experiences, and then under **Digital Experiences**, select **All Sites**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If you’re just getting started with Experience Cloud and you’ve never created a site, see [Set Up an Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=experience.networks_setup_maintain_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 2. Select **New**. 3. Choose the Microsite template and click **Get Started**. 4. Name your microsite and provide a URL. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can associate the URL with your primary website URL, or create an entirely separate URL. 5. Choose whether you want Unauthenticated or Authenticated access. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To use the Lead Form component to capture leads and store them in Salesforce as Lead records, guest users must have access to your site. If you plan on using this functionality, we suggest that you choose the unauthenticated access option. For more information on giving guest users access to your site, see [Give Secure Access to Unauthenticated Users with the Guest User Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_public_access.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 6. Click **Create**. # Create a Mission Create a mission, choosing an action, threshold, and badge, to automatically give badges to your members. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To create recognition badges: Create Custom Badge Definitions
To manage your recognition badges:

Create And Set Up Experiences

AND

Moderate Chatter

OR

Manage Experiences

AND

Moderate Chatter

To manage badges created by someone else:

Modify All Data

AND

Moderate Chatter

![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - To use Missions, set up Recognition Badges. - Members only receive a mission badge once. If a member received the badge before a mission was set up, they won’t receive it again. - Missions count activities that occurred before the missions were set up. When you set up missions for the first time, click **Reset Activity Count** to restart the count for all activities. Be careful about resetting the counts after you have missions established, though, as the reset will erase all of your members’ progress toward earning badges. 1. In Experience Workspaces, click the Gamification tile and go to the Missions section. 2. Click **New**. 3. Give the mission a name and a description. ![New mission dialog box](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/missions_new.png) 4. Select the action that the member performs. 5. Enter the threshold, which sets the total number of actions a member must repeat to earn the badge. The threshold doesn’t repeat and badges are earned once. For example, if you set the threshold to 10, the member will receive the badge after completing the 10th action, but not the 20th. 6. Choose your preferred badge and save your changes. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To make a badge available for missions, in the Recognition Badges section, create or edit a badge and select **Mission Badge**. As a best practice, use the badge’s name and description to explain how the user can earn it. # Create a Multilingual Site Creating a multilingual site involves a few main steps. Define the languages that you want your site to support. Add translated content for each language. And enable site visitors to choose their preferred language. ### Required Editions
Available in: Experience Builder sites accessed through Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and mobile devices, and is available in Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Here’s an overview of the steps to take to create a multilingual site. 1. [Set the default language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_default.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The default language is the language that’s used in a site before a user has selected another language. By default, the default language is set to English (US).") for your site. It’s important to set the default language before you add translated content to your site. 2. [Add languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_add.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add the languages that you want your site to support.") to the site. 3. [Set options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you add Experience Builder sites languages, you can define separate settings for each language.") for each language, such as the display label and fallback language. 4. [Export and prepare the content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_export.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Export and prepare Experience Builder site content as one or multiple .xml files. Prepare the files for translation by creating nodes for specific languages. Then send the file to your translation service."), and send it for translation. Alternatively, you can [translate content directly on the page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_editing_about.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Builder provides its own language menu that you can use to switch between languages as you edit content on each page. Switch languages and provide spot translations, like fixing a typo. You can also use this method for full page translations instead of exporting and importing site content.") in Experience Builder. 5. [Import the translated content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After your translation service has completed the translations, import the translated .xml file into your Experience Builder site."). 6. Add a [Language Selector](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_language_picker.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add the Language Selector component to multilingual sites so guest users can select their preferred language on public site pages.") component to your site pages, so unauthenticated users can choose their preferred language. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Consider offering users a way to get instant translations of feed items. (Feed items include posts, questions, polls, and their comments, answers, and replies.) For more information, see [Add a Translate Button to Feed Items in Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_translate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A translation setting in Experience Builder puts a Translate with Google menu on every feed item. Translations are offered through a Google Cloud Translation API key that you provide."). #### See Also - [Best Practices and Considerations for Multilingual Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_best_practices.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep these practices and considerations in mind when you’re setting up a multilingual site.") # Create a New Asset File Create an asset file from the Asset Library in Files home. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
Salesforce admins and community managers have access to the Asset Library by default. Standard users who are members of the Asset Library can also create asset files. 1. From Files home, go to **Libraries** | **Asset Library**. 2. Click **Upload Asset File**. The file selector opens to let you upload a new file or select an existing file to make into an asset. 3. After you select a file, a dialog window displays these fields:
Field Description
Asset File Name On this screen, this field displays the API Name. After you click Save, this field displays the name of the file that you uploaded.
API Name

The unique name of the asset file in the API, also known as the developer name.

If you edit the API name, be sure to follow the DeveloperName requirements described in the ContentAsset object reference.

Let guest users see this asset file on public and login pages Select this option to make the asset file visible to guest users on public and login pages. When this option is checked, unauthenticated guest users can see logos and other images on your login page and other public pages.
Make asset file available to Salesforce org users Select this option to make this asset file accessible to all internal employees. Leave it unchecked if you prefer to restrict access to asset files.
4. Click **Save**. Your asset file is saved to the Asset Library and displays an Asset File label. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note To see and edit your asset files in Setup, enter Asset Files into the Quick Find box. #### See Also - [View and Edit Asset Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.files_asset_files_edit_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can view asset files in the Asset Files library in Files home, and view and edit asset files in Setup.") # Create a Partner Fund Allocation Allocate Market Development Funds (MDF) or co-op funds to channel partners from an existing budget. Allocations are associated with budgets and channel partners to track budget usage. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create allocations Create on allocations
To update allocations Update on allocations
If you have a Partner License and have enabled Experience Cloud sites, Market Development Fund objects are available in your org. 1. From the App Launcher, find and open **Fund Allocation**. 2. Click **New** and enter the name, budget, channel partner, and amount. 3. Save the allocation. Allocations can be updated. The budget associated with the updated allocation must have the same validation status as the original. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note We’ve created the **Total Approved Allocations** field for you. This formula field is automatically updated. # Create a Partner Fund Claim Let partner users claim money for expenses incurred on marketing activities. Claims are associated with fund requests. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create claims Create on claims
To update claims Update on claims
If you have a Partner License and have enabled Experience Cloud sites, Market Development Fund objects are available in your org. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Create a separate permission set for the channel account manager (CAM) or financial department to manage and approve fund claims. Partner users only need Create, Update, and Read permissions to submit a fund claim. 1. From the App Launcher, find and open **Fund Claim**. 2. Click **New** and enter the name, request, amount, and status of the claim. 3. Save the claim. Claims can be updated. The budget associated with the updated claim must have the same validation status as the original. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip You can [create an approval workflow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.what_are_approvals.htm&type=5&language=en_US) for partners to submit fund claims for reimbursement by the channel account manager or financial department. To prevent users from manually changing the status value on records they own, make sure the “Status” field on the Claim object is set to Read-only. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note We’ve created the **Total Approved Fund Claims** and **Total Reimbursed Fund Claims** fields for you. These formula fields are automatically updated. # Create a Partner Fund Request Partner users can request funds before marketing a vendor’s product or service. Channel account managers can approve the fund request. Fund requests are associated with channel partners, allocations, and campaigns to track how allocated funds are used. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create fund request Create on fund request
To update fund request Update on fund request
To delete fund request Delete on fund request
If you have a Partner License and have enabled Experience Cloud sites, the Market Development Fund objects are available in your org. 1. From the App Launcher, find and open **Fund Requests**. 2. Click **New** and enter the name, channel partner, requested amount, and status. 3. Save the fund request. Requests can be updated. The budget associated with the updated request must have the same validation status as the original. You can [create an approval workflow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.what_are_approvals.htm&type=5&language=en_US) for partners to submit fund requests to the channel account manager. To prevent users from manually changing the status value on records they own, make sure the “Status” field on the Request object is set to Read-only. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note We’ve created the **Total Approved Fund Requests** field for you. This formula field is automatically updated. # Create a Partner Site with Partner Central—Setup Tasks Partner Central is designed with partner sales workflows in mind and comes with components and pages that you can use directly or customize easily. Get started with your own Lightning partner Experience Cloud site! We’ve put together a high-level roadmap—or a recipe, if you will—of the decisions and tasks involved with setting up a site with Partner Central.
Plan Your Partner Site Prep Your Salesforce Org for a Partner Site
Set Up a Partner Site Enable PRM Features

For channel management:

For partner productivity:

Design Your Partner Site Enable Reporting for Partners
# Create a Poll Create polls to gather people’s opinions. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
1. Above the feed, click **Poll**. 2. Enter a question in the text box. In the question, you can add a hashtag or mention someone. 3. Provide at least two choices. To add another choice, click **Add more choices**. You can enter up to ten choices. 4. _Salesforce Classic only:_ Select to post the poll to your followers or to a group. If you’re posting the poll to a group, select the name of the group from the dropdown list. 5. To post the poll, click **Share**. #### See Also - [Vote on a Poll](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_polls_voting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Cast your vote on a poll.") # Create a Queue for Lead Distribution Create a shared queue of leads and add partners to the queue. A queue is a special type of list view that you can quickly share with multiple users, groups, and roles. In fact, creating a queue automatically creates a list view in your org. Queues and their corresponding list views both have visibility settings that allow you to share contents with partner users in your Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create and change queues:

Customize Application

AND

Manage Public List Views

To change lead list view visibility:

Read on leads

AND

Create and Customize List Views

To create, edit, or delete public list views: Manage Public List Views
1. From Setup, enter Queues in the Quick Find box, then select **Queues**. 2. [Create a queue](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=setting_up_queues.htm&language=en_US) to queue leads for the lead inbox. Let’s call this Lead Inbox Queue or an intuitive name of your choice. 3. On the queue detail page, under Queue Members, add the partner users you want to pass leads to. You can set the visibility settings by profiles, roles, or users. 4. Save the queue, which also creates a list view by the same name. 5. Next, go to the Leads object home in your org. From the Views drop-down list, select the list view with the same name as the queue and edit the list view. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can’t edit list views in Lightning Experience. 6. In the Step 4: Restrict Visibility section, set visibility preferences. For example, to share the queue with all partners, search by and share the list view with the All Partner Users group and save. In Partner Central sites, you can select this list view to display in the lead inbox in your site. You can create and share multiple queues and the corresponding list views with partner users. Partner users with permissions to access leads, queues, and the corresponding list views can see all lead list views and switch between them. #### See Also - [Create Queues](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=listviews_parent.htm&language=en_US) # Create a Report from Your Site with Report Builder With the new Report Builder page, external users can create, edit, and delete reports directly from their Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions To access Report Builder and the Report run page, enable reports for your sites. You can grant partner and customer users permissions to create and edit reports through their profiles or permission sets.
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
 
User Permissions Needed
To create permission sets or enable custom permissions in profiles: Manage Profiles and Permission Sets
To assign a permission set to a user: Assign Permission Sets
To let external users create and edit reports, turn on Create and Customize Reports, Report Builder, and Edit My Reports permissions through custom profiles or permission sets. If you want external users to export report data, assign them Export Reports permission.
External User Permissions Needed to Create and Edit Reports
To create, customize, and delete reports in a personal folder:

Create and Customize Reports

AND

Report Builder

To create, customize and delete their own reports in a privately shared folder with Viewer access:

Edit My Reports

AND

Report Builder

To export report data: Export Reports
The Report Builder page and Report Run are available in the following site templates: - Customer Account Portal - Partner Central - Customer Service External users can create, edit, and delete reports directly in their site from Report Builder. 1. Select the **Report** tab, and click **New Report**. 2. In Report Builder, create and customize your report. After you enable reports for your community the **New Report** button, and the option to view reports using the Report run page are available. To view the **New Report** button, add the Report List page to your community. If the button doesn’t appear after you enable Reports, republish your community. With all Salesforce reports, to view, edit, or delete a report you must have access to it. #### See Also - [Compare Access Levels for Report and Dashboard Folders](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=analytics.analytics_folder_access_chart.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Create a Salesforce CRM Collection for Your Aura Site To display CRM object data on your site, create CRM collections. CRM collections are automatically updated based on the data in your Salesforce org. When you add a CRM collection to your Aura site, you can customize its layout and formatting. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To access an Experience Builder site’s Content Management workspace:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences
  • AND is a member of the site
To customize an Experience Builder site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences OR assigned an experience admin, publisher, or builder role in that site
  • AND is a member of the site
Before you can create CRM collections, add CRM connections to your Aura site, and ensure that these CRM connections are approved for use. As you add records in Salesforce, they’re automatically added to the CRM collection connected to that object. You can create a CRM collection for an object even if you don’t have any records for that object in your org. If you anticipate having records to show on your Aura site, create a CRM Collection. 1. In your site’s Experience Workspaces, navigate to Content Management. 2. Go to **Collections**, and click **New**. ![Collections tab open with Collections and New highlighted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_cms_collections-crmmain.png) 3. In the New Collection window, enter a descriptive name for your collection, select **Salesforce CRM**, and click **Next**. ![New Collection dialog with Salesforce CRM selected](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_cms_collections-new-crm.png) 4. From the dropdown menu, select the object that you want to include in your collection. 5. Select the best list view to display your CRM collection. You can have multiple collections associated with an object, but each collection can only have one list view associated with it at a time. Objects with only one list view available can only have one collection at a time. ![New Collection dialog with list of views displayed for selected object](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_cms_collections-new-crm-3.png) Only global list views are available for creating CRM collections. All fields in a list view are available for display when that view is added as a content source in Experience Builder. 6. Click **Finish**. #### See Also - [Add a Salesforce CRM Collection to Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_aura_crm_collection_component.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To create an attractive and engaging display of CRM object data, add a CRM collection to your Aura site. Create and customize the data layout and record list views by using the CMS Collection component in Experience Builder. If you haven’t created a CRM collection but you want to display object data on your site, you can still add the CMS Collection component as a placeholder.") - [Create a Conditional CMS Collection for Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_managed_content_collections_creatingnative-auto.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Make collections by creating filters that automatically include content that meets your defined criteria. To achieve complex and targeted results in your collection, combine several layers of filters.") - [Create a Manual CMS Collection for Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_managed_content_collections_creatingnative-manually.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create hand-picked static collections of Salesforce CMS content. Select and add specific content in a few clicks, and edit the collection at any time from the Content Management workspace. Create manual collections to gather CMS content items of a single content type.") # Create a Search Page Set up CRM search capabilities through LWR components. Search results can be shown only on a standard Search page, so to use the Results Layout component, you must first create the search page. 1. In Experience Builder, click the Pages menu on the top toolbar, and then click **New Page** at the bottom of the menu. ![Pages menu with New Page button highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/pages-new-page-highlighted.png) 2. From the New Page dialog, select the **Standard Page** type. 3. Select the preconfigured **Search** page and then click **Next**. ![New page with Search selected](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/new_page_search.png) 4. Enter a name and URL for the page, and then click **Create**. # Create a Stream from a Profile or Record Detail Once you create one stream, the **Follow** button on profile and record detail pages changes. A plus sign appears before the button label and more options become available for adding the profile or record feed to an existing stream. There’s also an option to add the feed to a stream that you create on the spot. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer editions
Before you can create a stream from a profile or record detail, you must already have created at least one stream. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Knowledge articles (KAs) aren’t fully supported in streams. You can add them when you create and edit a stream by searching for the article’s ID number rather than its title. But you can’t add a KA to a stream from its Follow button like you can with other record types. Articles added to Streams using the article’s ID don’t appear in Records to Follow on the Stream's edit page. KAs also don’t appear when viewing the Follow button details on the article's detail page. 1. Go to the profile or the detail page of a record that you want to add to a new stream. 2. Click ![Follow button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_streams_follow.png), and select **New Stream**. 3. Enter a name for your stream. Notice the profile or record feed that you started from is already added to the **Records to Follow** field. To add more record or profile feeds, continue with Step 4. To finish the process, go to Step 7. 4. Click in the **Records to Follow** field, then click the down arrow (2) and choose a type of feed you want to add to your stream. ![New Stream dialog and Include in Stream field](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_search_field.png) 5. When you’ve made a selection, click in **Records to Follow** again and enter a search term to find a feed of that type (3). ![Search results in a New Stream dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_search_list.png) 6. Select a listed feed. ![Feeds listed in a New Stream dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_selected_objects.png) Repeat steps 4 through 6 until you have all the feeds (up to 25) that you want in this stream (4). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note You can add up to 25 unique record, group, and profile feeds to a stream. If your access to any of the 25 is removed, the removed entity is still counted as part of the 25. You can't replace it with something else. But you can remove it from the stream to create room for another feed. To include a person account in your stream, add it as an Account in the **Records to Follow** field. If you add a person account as a Contact, the related feed posts don’t appear. 7. Set up notifications for this stream by selecting either **Every Post** or **Never** (5). ![Notifications settings in the New Stream dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_notifications.png) **Every Post** is the default. It gives you email and in-app notifications whenever a new post is added to the stream. **Never** turns off notifications for this stream. 8. To save your selections, click **Save**. 9. To save your stream, click **Save** again. Your stream is listed in the left column on the Chatter home page, under the Streams heading (6). To open the stream, click its name. ![Completed stream on the Chatter home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_completed_stream.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If your stream isn’t listed on the Chatter home page, click the Streams heading to go to the streams home page. All the streams that you created are listed there. # Create a Stream from the Chatter Home Page The Chatter home page lists up to five of your streams and provides a button for adding more. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer editions
To create a Chatter stream, provide a title and select the feed types and feeds that you want in your stream. 1. Go to the Chatter home page, and click the ![New Stream icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_add_stream_icon.png) icon next to the Streams heading to open the New Stream dialog (1). 2. Enter a name for your stream. 3. In the **Records to Follow** field, click the down arrow (2) and choose a type of feed you want to add to your stream. ![New Stream dialog and Include in Stream field](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_search_field.png) 4. When you’ve made a selection, click in **Records to Follow** again and enter the name to search for (3). ![Search results in a New Stream dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_search_list.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Knowledge articles (KAs) aren’t fully supported in streams. You can add them when you create and edit a stream by searching for the article’s ID number rather than its title. But you can’t add a KA to a stream from its Follow button like you can with other record types. Articles added to Streams using the article’s ID don’t appear in Records to Follow on the Stream's edit page. KAs also don’t appear when viewing the Follow button details on the article's detail page. 5. Select a listed feed. ![Feeds listed in a New Stream dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_selected_objects.png) Repeat steps 3 through 5 until you have all the feeds (up to 25) that you want in this stream (4). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note You can add up to 25 unique record, group, and profile feeds to a stream. If your access to any of the 25 is removed, the removed entity is still counted as part of the 25. You can't replace it with something else. But you can remove it from the stream to create room for another feed. To include a person account in your stream, add it as an Account in the **Records to Follow** field. If you add a person account as a Contact, the related feed posts don’t appear. 6. Set up notifications for this stream by selecting either **Every Post** or **Never** (5). ![Notifications settings in the New Stream dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_notifications.png) **Every Post** is the default. It gives you email and in-app notifications whenever a new post is added to the stream. **Never** turns off notifications for this stream. 7. To save your selections, click **Save**. 8. To save your stream, click **Save** again. Your stream is listed in the left column on the Chatter home page, under the Streams heading (6). To open the stream, click its name. ![Completed stream on the Chatter home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_completed_stream.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If your stream isn’t listed on the Chatter home page, click the Streams heading to go to the streams home page. All the streams that you created are listed there. # Create a Stream from the Streams Home Page You can get to the streams home page by clicking the Streams heading on the Chatter home page. The Streams home page has controls for managing existing streams and making new ones. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer editions
To create a Chatter stream, provide a title and select the feed types and feeds that you want in your stream. 1. To open the Streams home page, go to the Chatter home page and click the Streams heading. ![Streams heading on the Chatter home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_streams_heading.png) 2. To open the New Stream dialog (1), click **New**. ![New Stream dialog and Include in Stream field](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_search_field.png) 3. Enter a name for your stream. 4. In the **Records to Follow** field, click the down arrow (2) and choose a type of feed to add to your stream. 5. When you’ve made a selection, click in **Records to Follow** again to search within the selected type of feed (3). ![Search results in a New Stream dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_search_list.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Knowledge articles (KAs) aren’t fully supported in streams. You can add them when you create and edit a stream by searching for the article’s ID number rather than its title. But you can’t add a KA to a stream from its Follow button like you can with other record types. Articles added to Streams using the article’s ID don’t appear in Records to Follow on the Stream's edit page. KAs also don’t appear when viewing the Follow button details on the article's detail page. 6. Select a listed feed. ![Feeds listed in a New Stream dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_selected_objects.png) Repeat steps 3 through 5 until you have all the feeds (up to 25) that you want in this stream (4). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note You can add up to 25 unique record, group, and profile feeds to a stream. If your access to any of the 25 is removed, the removed entity is still counted as part of the 25. You can't replace it with something else. But you can remove it from the stream and then add another feed. To include a person account in your stream, add it as an Account in the **Records to Follow** field. If you add a person account as a Contact, the related feed posts don’t appear. 7. Set up notifications for this stream by selecting either **Every Post** or **Never** (5). ![Notifications settings in the New Stream dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_notifications.png) **Every Post** gives you email and in-app notifications whenever a new post is added to the stream. **Never** turns off notifications for this stream. 8. To save your selections, click **Save**. 9. To save your stream, click **Save** again. Your stream is listed in the left column on the Chatter home page, under Streams (6). To open the stream, click its name. ![Completed stream on the Chatter home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_completed_stream.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If your stream isn’t listed on the Chatter home page, click the Streams heading to go to the streams home page. All the streams that you created are listed there. # Create a Task from a Chatter Post Read a Chatter post that you want to follow up on? In Salesforce Classic, use the Create New Task action to create a task directly from the post. You can create a task from anyone’s post, including posts with attachments. You can’t create a task from a system-generated post, like a record update. 1. Click the post’s overflow menu ![Post drop-down menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_feed_dropdown_arrow.png). 2. Select **Create New Task**. If you don’t see the Create New Task action, ask your Salesforce administrator to enable this action for your organization. 3. In the Create New Task dialog, add a subject and a due date. If applicable, associate the task with a contact or lead and an object, like an account. Use the search boxes to find available contacts, leads, and objects. 4. When you’re done, click **Create**. The task is assigned to you and posted to your profile feed. The task also appears in the My Tasks section on your Home tab. ![Task post](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatterCreateTaskPost.png) Click the task subject link (1 or 2) to open the task. Click the post link (3) to navigate to the post where the task was created. # Create an Audience for an Aura Site You define an audience by selecting criteria and the conditions under which the criteria apply. After you create an audience, you can assign it to a page variation, branding set, or component. You also can assign an audience to a component variation to personalize the content that different user segments see in the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, and Tile Menu components. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
You can follow the basic steps to create an audience or, for more complex audience creation, you can build an audience with a custom formula that uses AND and OR statements. These steps walk you through how to create an audience in the New Audience window, which you can open from the Assign Audience window. How to access the Assign Audience window depends on whether you start from a page variation, branding set, or component. See these topics to learn how to navigate to the Assign Audience and New Audience windows from those different site locations: - [Assign an Audience to a Page Variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audiences_page_variations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can show different pages to different audiences.") - [Assign an Audience to a Branding Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audiences_branding_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can tailor your branding to different audiences. For example, you can show one look and feel to your customers and another to your partners.") - [Assign an Audience to a Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_component.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you assign an audience to a page component, all users see the same page, but the components that are visible on the page differ among user segments. For example, you have a page that’s visible to site members and guest users, and you want your members to be able to post questions and comments. You can add the Feed Publisher component to the page and assign this component to an audience for site members only. Your members can see the component, and guest users can’t.") - [Assign an Audience to a Component Variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_personalize_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use audiences to vary the content that users see within the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, or Tile Menu components. For example, show one navigation menu to your site members and a more abbreviated navigation menu to guest users. Or show different CMS content to internal employees and external partners.") ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note When you create an audience from a component or branding set, the audience can’t include record-based criteria. You can include record-based criteria only when you create an audience from a page variation. ## Create an Audience—Basic Steps 1. In the Assign Audience window, click **New Audience**. ![Assign Audience window](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_audience_assign_audience.png) 2. Name the audience. For example, California Partners. ![New Audience window](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_audience_new_audience.png) 3. Under Audience Matches When, select which conditions are required for the audience to apply. For example, **All Conditions Are Met**. 4. Click the **Criteria Type** field, and select a criteria type from the menu. For example, **Location** or **User** | **Profile** | **User Type**. 5. Select an operator. For example, **equals**. 6. Enter a value for this criterion. For example, enter a location or select **Partner** from the menu. 7. To add more criteria, click **Add Condition**. 8. After you set all the criteria that you want to define the audience, save your changes. Now you can assign the audience. ## Create an Audience with Custom Logic Let’s say you want to create a highly targeted audience, such as marketing managers in California and sales managers in New York. You can create one audience with multiple user and location criteria and use parentheses and the AND operator to group the related criteria. Then you can separate the groups with the OR operator. 1. In the Assign Audience window, click **New Audience**. 2. Name the audience. For example, CA Marketing and NY Sales Mgrs. ![New Audience window showing custom formula](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/audiences_custom_formulas.png) 3. Under Audience Matches When, select **Custom Logic Is Met**. 4. Add the user and location criteria. - User > Manager > Department equals Marketing - Location equals California, United States - User > Manager > Department equals Sales - Location equals New York, United States 5. In the Condition Logic field, group the criteria using parentheses, pairing each targeted role and location with AND, and separating the groups with OR: (1 AND 2) OR (3 AND 4). For example, pairing (1 and 2) puts the marketing managers in California in one group, and (3 and 4) puts the sales managers in New York in another group. When you assign the audience, these criteria apply to users who fit in either group. 6. Save your changes. Now you can assign the audience. - **[Criteria Types and Conditions for Audience Creation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_crm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can use several types of criteria to define an audience and determine the conditions under which the criteria apply. #### See Also - [Considerations for Audience Targeting in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_use_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Audiences are a great help when you want to target specific user segments with relevant site content. As you work with audiences, there are some things to consider.") - [Criteria Types and Conditions for Audience Creation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_crm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can use several types of criteria to define an audience and determine the conditions under which the criteria apply.") # Create an Authentication Provider for Box To use Box as an external data source, first create an authentication provider for it in Salesforce. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create authentication providers:

Customize Application

AND

Manage Auth. Providers

For detailed visuals, tips, and troubleshooting, see the Files Connect [_Setup Guide_](https://org62.my.salesforce.com/sfc/p/000000000062/a/30000000TwBg/oY6nj5H8L_c0djY2t01Q5s39DqCk82b5lLKTOl9Aeuc) and [_User Guide_](https://org62.my.salesforce.com/sfc/p/000000000062/a/30000000TwBb/4P94FDKJU8TLPlV9UwgNyhFIeRb8cjoHnsneKTbtk9Q). 1. In Setup, enter Auth. Providers in the Quick Find box, then select **Auth. Providers**. 2. Click **New**. 3. For Provider Type, select **OpenID Connect**, and then set the following options: - Name — Enter the name you want to appear in Salesforce. - URL Suffix — Enter a suffix you want to appear at the end of the URL path. By default, the suffix reflects the Name entry. - Consumer Key — Enter any placeholder value. You fill this in after you create the Box application in Step 5. - Consumer Secret — Enter any placeholder value. You fill this in after you create the Box application in Step 5. - Authorize Endpoint URL — Enter https://account.box.com/api/oauth2/authorize - Token Endpoint URL — Enter https://api.box.com/oauth2/token - User Info Endpoint URL — Leave empty. - Default Scopes — Leave empty. 4. Click **Save**. Then, at the bottom of the Auth. Provider detail page, copy the Callback URL entry to a text file. (Use this when creating the Box application.) 5. After you create the Box application, edit the Salesforce Auth. Provider and replace the following values with those from the Box app. - Consumer.Key: the Box client\_id. - Consumer.Secret: the Box client\_secret. 6. Click **Save**. Your Box authentication provider is now ready to use. Next, you can create a Box application. 7. Using the credentials of your Box admin account, log in to https://app.box.com/developers/services. 8. Click **Create a Box Application**. 9. Enter a project name, select Box content, and click **Create Application**. 10. Click **Configure your application**. 11. In the **redirect\_uri** field, paste the Salesforce callback URL specified in the [OAuth2 specification](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.salesforce_communities_implementation.meta/salesforce_communities_implementation/remoteaccess_authenticate.htm). 12. Copy the **client\_id** and **client\_secret** values to a text file. Enter these values at step 6 of Create an Authentication Provider in Salesforce. # Create an Authentication Provider for Google Drive To use Google Drive as an external data source, create an authentication provider for it in Salesforce. The process begins with creating a related project in the Google Developers console. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create authentication providers:

Customize Application

AND

Manage Auth. Providers

For detailed visuals, tips, and troubleshooting, see the Files Connect [_Setup Guide_](https://org62.my.salesforce.com/sfc/p/000000000062/a/30000000TwBg/oY6nj5H8L_c0djY2t01Q5s39DqCk82b5lLKTOl9Aeuc) and [_User Guide_](https://org62.my.salesforce.com/sfc/p/000000000062/a/30000000TwBb/4P94FDKJU8TLPlV9UwgNyhFIeRb8cjoHnsneKTbtk9Q). 1. Using the credentials of your Google App for Work admin account, log in to [https://console.cloud.google.com](https://console.cloud.google.com). 2. In the title bar, expand **Select Project** and click **Create Project**. 3. Enter a project name and location, and click **Create**. 4. In the project dashboard, click the menu icon in the upper left, and then click **APIs & Services**. 5. In the API manager, go to the Library tab and search for Google Drive API. 6. In the search results, click **Google Drive API**, and then click **Enable API**. 7. In the menu on the left, click **Credentials**. 8. In the OAuth Consent Screen tab, enter a valid email address and application name, and click **Save**. 9. In the Credentials tab, click **Add credentials**, and select OAuth client ID. 10. Select Web application, and click **Create**. 11. Copy the client ID and client secret values to a text file. Use these values next, when you create an authentication provider in Salesforce. 12. In Setup, enter Auth. Providers in the Quick Find box, then select **Auth. Providers**. 13. Click **New**. 14. For Provider Type, select **OpenID Connect**, and then set the following options: - Name — Enter the name you want to appear in Salesforce. - URL Suffix — Enter the suffix at the end of the URL path. For example, in the path, https://login.salesforce.com/services/authcallback/00Dx00000000001/MyGoogleProvider, the suffix is “MyGoogleProvider” - Consumer Key — Enter the client ID you copied when creating the Google project. - Consumer Secret — Enter the client secret you copied when creating the Google project. - Authorize Endpoint URL —Enter https://accounts.google.com/o/oauth2/auth?access\_type=offline&approval\_prompt=force - Token Endpoint URL — Enter https://accounts.google.com/o/oauth2/token - Default Scopes — Enter openid email profile https://www.googleapis.com/auth/drive 15. Click **Save**. 16. At the bottom of the Auth. Provider detail page, copy the Callback URL entry to a text file. Use this URL when you edit the Google project next. 17. In the API Manager, in the menu on the left, click **Credentials**. 18. Click the previously created web app. 19. In the Authorized Redirect URIs section, add the Callback URL you copied when creating the authentication provider in Salesforce, and click **Save**. # Create an Authentication Provider for SharePoint Online or OneDrive for Business Using Azure Portal To use a Microsoft cloud-based external data source, create an authentication provider for it in Salesforce and register that provider in a Microsoft Azure web application. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create authentication providers:

Customize Application

AND

Manage Auth. Providers

The high-level steps to fully configure an authentication provider include: - Creating an Authentication Provider Using Placeholder Values. - Registering a Web Application in the Azure Management Console. - Configuring the Authentication Provider in Salesforce. #### See Also - [The Files Connect Setup Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The setup process for Files Connect varies by external data source.") ## Create an Authentication Provider Using Placeholder Values The authentication provider has a redirect URI so you can register your app. 1. In Setup, enter Auth. Providers in the Quick Find box, then select **Auth. Providers**. 2. Click **New**. 3. For Provider Type, select **OpenID Connect**, and then set the following options. - Name — Enter the name you want to appear in Salesforce. - URL Suffix — Enter a suffix you want to appear at the end of the URL path. By default, the suffix reflects the Name entry. - Consumer Key — Enter a placeholder value. - Consumer Secret — Enter a placeholder value. - Authorize Endpoint URL — Enter a placeholder that begins with _https_. - Token Endpoint URL — Enter a placeholder that begins with _https_. - Default Scopes — Leave empty. 4. Click **Save**. Then, at the bottom of the Auth. Provider detail page, copy the Callback URL entry to a text file. ## Register a Web Application in the Azure Management Console 1. Log in to Azure at https://portal.azure.com/. (If you have any trouble, connect to Azure with your browser in “incognito” mode.) 2. Under **Azure Services**, select **Azure Active Directory**. 3. Select your active directory. Skip this step if you only have one. 4. On the Active Directory page, select **App registrations** from the left navigation menu. 5. In the header menu, click **New Registration**. 6. Under **Create**, enter the following properties: - Name — Enter a name for your application. - Supported Account Types — Enter accounts that are only in this organizational directory. 7. Click **Register**. 8. After the app is created, from the left panel, click **Overview**. 9. Copy the Application ID to a text file. You need this ID to configure the auth. provider in Salesforce. 10. From the left panel, click **Certificates & Secrets**. 11. Click **New Client Secret**, enter a description, select a duration, and click **Add**. To see the key value, click **Save**. 12. Copy the key so you can use it in the auth. provider. 13. From the left panel, click **Authentication**. Under **Redirect URIs**, select type as **Web** and paste the callback URL that you copied from the bottom of the Auth. Provider detail page. 14. From the left panel, click **API Permissions**, click **Add a permission**, and click **Sharepoint**. 15. Choose which required app permissions you want to enable and click **Add permission**. ## Configure the Authentication Provider in Salesforce In Salesforce, replace the original placeholder values with the correct ones from the Azure app. 1. In Setup, enter Auth. Providers in the Quick Find box, then select **Auth. Providers**. 2. Next to the authentication provider you created earlier, click **Edit**. 3. Change the following values. - Consumer Key — Enter the Client ID you copied to a text file. - Consumer Secret — Enter the key you copied to a text file. - Authorize Endpoint URL — Enter: https://login.microsoftonline.com/common/oauth2/authorize?resource=https%3A%2F%2FYOUR\_TENANT.sharepoint.com&prompt=login - Token Endpoint URL — Enter: https://login.microsoftonline.com/common/oauth2/token - SharePoint Online example: https://login.microsoftonline.com/common/oauth2/authorize?prompt=consent&​resource=https%3A%2F%2Fcontenthubblitz.sharepoint.com%2F - OneDrive for Business example: https://login.microsoftonline.com/common/oauth2/authorize?prompt=consent&resource=https://contenthubblitz-my.sharepoint.com/ 4. Click **Save**. # Create an Experience Cloud Site Create an Experience Cloud site using a wizard that helps you choose a template that meets your business needs. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To see the number of sites you can create for your org, from Setup, enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, and select **Sites**. The maximum number of sites appears at the top of the page. 1. To create a site, from Setup, enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, select **All Sites**, and then click **New**. The creation wizard opens with several templates for you to choose from. 2. To see more information about a template, select it. - Customer Account Portal—A private and secure place for customers to access and update their account information. Improve customer relationships and decrease service costs by letting customers work in the portal. Customers can see and pay invoices, update their account information, and search your knowledge base for answers to their most frequent questions. - Partner Central—A flexible, responsive template designed for channel sales workflows. Recruit, build, and grow your partner network to drive channel sales and marketing together in a branded online space. Easily configure lead distribution, deal registration, and marketing campaigns. Share training materials and sales collateral in a central space, and use reports to track your pipeline. - Customer Service—A powerful, responsive self-service template with multiple prebuilt theme options. The Customer Service template lets users post questions to the community, search for and view articles, collaborate, and contact support agents by creating cases. Supports Knowledge, Chatter Questions, and cases. - Help Center—A public-access, self-service community that exposes the articles that you make available from your knowledge base. You reduce the load on your customer support team, and your users get the satisfaction of finding their own solutions. - Build Your Own (Aura)—Provides the basic pages that every Experience Builder site needs: Home, Create Record, Error, Record Detail, Record List, Related Record List, Search, Check Password, Forgot Password, Login, Login Error, and Register. Add more pages and components as needed for the experience you’re building. To refine the look of your site, customize your branding and themes. - Build Your Own (LWR)—Powered by the Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) framework, this customizable template delivers unparalleled page performance and improves developer productivity. Quickly build pixel-perfect pages and develop Lightning web components and themes that match your unique brand. Suitable for developers, consulting partners, and ISVs who are familiar with developing custom Lightning web components, and working with Salesforce DX, User Interface API, and Apex. See the [LWR Sites for Experience Cloud](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/intro.htm) guide. - Microsites (LWR)—Use the power of LWR to create beautiful, high-performance sites perfect for event pages, landing pages, or other special purpose websites. Microsites gives you all the tools to quickly spin up a website and then archive it when it’s no longer needed. Suitable for developers, consulting partners, and ISVs who are familiar with developing custom Lightning web components, and working with Salesforce DX, User Interface API, and Apex. See the [LWR Sites for Experience Cloud](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/intro.htm) guide. - Aloha—A configurable App Launcher template that lets users quickly find applications and access them using single sign-on authentication, including social logins. - Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce—Standard Salesforce structure and tabs that you can customize using Visualforce. Requires developer experience and advanced setup skills. Offers full platform access with a flexible configuration and supports most standard objects, custom objects, and the Salesforce mobile app. Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce isn’t a Lightning-based template and therefore doesn’t work with Experience Builder. 3. Select the template that you want to use. 4. Read the template description and key features, and click **Get Started**. 5. Enter a name. 6. For URL, enter the name of your site. This name is appended to the domain that you created when you [enabled digital experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enabling digital experiences is the first step to creating an Experience Cloud site, whether you’re building a community, portal, help center, or website. You also need to enable digital experiences when setting up Commerce Cloud, Financial Services Cloud, Health Cloud, and Work.com.") for this org. For example, if your domain name is UniversalTelco.my.site.com and you’re creating a customer community, you can enter customers to create the unique URL UniversalTelco.my.site.com/customers. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can create one site that doesn’t have a custom URL. You can change your site name and URL after the site is activated, but users aren’t redirected to the new URL. So be sure to inform your members before changing the name or URL. 7. Click **Create**. The site is created in Preview status. Now you’re ready to build and customize or manage and moderate your site. When you create a site, Salesforce supplies default pages for login, self-registration, change password, forgot password, and your home page. These pages are based on which template you use to create your site. You can customize these default pages at any time in the Login & Registration page of the Administration workspace. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important After you create a site, your profile is added to the list of profiles that have access to it. Then all users with this profile can log in to the site after it’s active. If you don’t want all users with your profile to have access to the site, remove the profile, and give yourself access through a different profile or permission set. Then create a profile specifically for your site users. When you create an Experience Cloud site, you have the ability to send out emails on behalf of the site to users. To prevent malicious emails, Experience Cloud sites only send emails from verified addresses and verified email domains. If the email address you are using for your Experience Cloud site hasn't been verified, we send a verification link to the email address entered in the **Email Sender** field of the Admin tile in your Experience Cloud site's Workspaces. Until the address is verified, `.invalid` is appended to the email sender address. Click the verification link to ensure emails are sent from your Experience Cloud site. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important System-generated emails from an unverified email-sending domain aren’t delivered, even if the From email address is verified. See [Requirements to Send Email from Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_email_verification_requirements.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[How Many Experience Cloud Sites Can My Org Have?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.faq_communities_how_do_i_find_number_available.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can have up to 100 Experience Cloud sites in your Salesforce org. Active, inactive, and preview sites, including Visualforce sites, count against this limit. #### See Also - [Experience Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Salesforce Experience Cloud lets you create branded digital experiences to share information and collaborate with people who are key to your business processes, such as customers, partners, or employees. Whether you call it a portal, help forum, support community, or something else, an Experience Cloud site is a great place to connect with the important folks in your life.") - [How Many Experience Cloud Sites Can My Org Have?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.faq_communities_how_do_i_find_number_available.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can have up to 100 Experience Cloud sites in your Salesforce org. Active, inactive, and preview sites, including Visualforce sites, count against this limit.") - [Edit Pages and Components in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_edit_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Each page contains a collection of components that are organized around a task or function, whether it’s opening a case or searching for an article. The pages in each Experience Builder template are ready for you to use with little configuration. Add new components to your site’s pages, edit the properties of existing components, or delete components that you don’t require.") # Create and Edit Document Folders Create document folders and set their visibility so that users have the correct access level. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
User Permissions Needed
To create, edit, or delete public document folders: Manage Public Documents
This topic describes how to create document folders and set their visibility in Salesforce Classic. For information on creating library folders in Lightning Experience, see [Create Folders in Libraries in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_library_folders.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 1. Click **Create New Folder** from the Documents tab. 2. Enter a Folder Label. The label is used to refer to the folder on user interface pages. 3. Choose a Public Folder Access option. Select Read/Write if you want users to be able to change the folder contents. A Read Only folder can be visible to users but they can't change its contents. 4. Choose a folder visibility option: - This folder is accessible by all users gives folder access to all users in your organization. - This folder is hidden from all users makes the folder private. - This folder is accessible only by the following users allows you to grant access to a desired set of users. The sets of users vary by edition and whether your organization has territory management. Choose a set of users from the Search dropdown list. Then select the desired value from the Available for Sharing list and click **Add** to move the value to the Shared To list. When you share a folder with a group, managers of the group members have no access to the folder unless those managers are also members of the group. 5. Click **Save**. You can add new documents to the folder or move documents to existing folders by editing the document’s properties. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Document folders can only contain documents. To store an attachment in a document folder, save the attachment to your computer and upload it to the document library. # Create and Edit Library Permissions Library permissions provide the different levels of library access that are required for most organizations. Here’s how to add new permissions and edit existing ones. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create or edit library permissions:

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

OR

Manage Content Permissions

To create or edit library permissions in Salesforce CRM Content, from Setup, enter Content Permissions in the Quick Find box, and select **Content Permissions**. Choose **Add Library Permissions** or **Edit** next to the permission. If your Salesforce CRM Content organization was created after the Spring '09 release, your organization already has Viewer, Author, and Library Administrator library permissions. If not, consider creating them. For the Viewer library permission, select the View Comments and Add Comments library privileges. For the Author library permission, select the Add Content, Add Content on Behalf of Others, Archive Content, Add Comment, and Tag Content library privileges. For the Library Administrator permission, select the Manage Library privilege. 1. Assign a name to the library permission. 2. Optionally, enter a description of the library permission. If your organization has several library permissions, consider describing each by its function or with a summary of its privileges. 3. In the Permissions section, select the checkboxes that correspond to the privileges you want to grant to users with this library permission, and click **Save**.
Library Privilege Description
Manage Library

Perform any action in the library. This privilege is required to edit a library’s name and description, add or remove library members, or delete a library. Manage Library is a super permission which provides all the following permission options listed except Deliver Content.

Creating a library requires the Manage Salesforce CRM Content app permission or Create Libraries system permission.

Add Content Publish new content to the library, upload new content versions, or restore archived (deleted) content. Content authors can also change any tags associated with their content and archive or delete their own content.
Add Content on Behalf of Others Choose an author when publishing content in the library.
Archive Content Archive and restore any content in the library.
Delete Content Delete any content in the library. Authors can undelete their own content from the Recycle Bin.
Feature Content Identify any content in the library as featured.
View Comments Read comments posted to any content in the library.
Add Comments Post comments to any content in the library and view all comments in the library. Users can edit or delete their own comments.
Modify Comments Edit or delete comments made to any content in the library.
Tag Content Add tags when publishing content or editing content details in the library.
Deliver Content Create a content delivery using any files in the library.
Attach or Share Content Make content from this library accessible in Chatter. Within Chatter, select a file from the library and attach it to a post or share it.
Organize File and Content Folder Create, rename, and delete folders in libraries in Lightning Experience.
4. Click **Save**. #### See Also - [Create Libraries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_workspace_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Store, share, and manage your files in content libraries so you can decide who has access to files in each library and what permissions they have. Each org can have up to 2,000 libraries.") - [Manage Library Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_workspace_perm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A library permission is a group of privileges assigned to each Salesforce CRM Content library member. It determines the tasks that a member can perform in a particular library. The same user can have a different library permission in each library.") - [Create Folders in Libraries in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_library_folders.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Organize library files into folders to find what you need quickly.") # Create and Manage Chatter Groups Create a Chatter group for your team or a project, add members, and update group settings. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Create Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_creating.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create public, private, and unlisted Chatter groups to collaborate with your teams and work together on projects. - **[Change the Owner of a Chatter Group](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_editing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To change a Chatter group’s owner, edit group settings. Only the current group owner and people with the Modify All Data permission can change the owner. - **[Customize Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_groups_customize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use record types to create group types with the layout and branding that you want. Then you can create custom groups. - **[Change the Access Level of a Chatter Group](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit a Chatter group’s settings to change its access level. For example, you open up an unlisted group to a wider audience by converting it to a private or public group. You can edit the settings for Chatter groups that you own or manage. - **[Add and Remove Chatter Group Members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_members_add.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Own or manage a Chatter group? Here’s how you add or remove group members. - **[Accept or Decline Private Group Requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_requests.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As the owner or manager of a private Chatter group, you can accept or decline requests to join the group. - **[What Your Chatter Group Role Lets You Do](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_roles_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The actions that you can perform in a Chatter group depend on whether you’re a member, owner, or manager of the group. - **[Archived Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_archive.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a Chatter group is archived, group members can’t post content or share files with the group. Previous posts, comments, and files remain available. - **[Delete Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_deleting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Deleting a group permanently deletes all group updates, including feed posts and any links that were posted to the group. To delete a group, you must be the group owner or a user with the Modify All Data permission. Group managers can’t delete a group. # Create and Save Search Configurations To make search results from LWR sites more relevant to your site, create a search configuration in Search Manager. You can filter out fields that you don’t need. After you save your configuration, it can be applied to multiple sites, simplifying the process of creating search configurations. 1. To create a search configuration that can be applied to multiple sites, click **Search Manager**. Salesforce redirects you to the Search Manager configuration page. ![Search Manager link](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_crm_search_manager.png) 2. In the Search Configuration section, click **New** 3. Create a name for your search configuration and then select the **LWR Experience Sites** channel. Click **Continue**. 4. From the New Search Query Configuration box, move the objects to include in your search from the Available Objects panel to the Selected Objects Panel. Click **Save and Continue**. ![Search Manager object configuration](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_crm_search_config_objects_ga.png) 5. To designate which fields are searchable, click the object and then select the **Field Searchability** tab. ![Field Searchability page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_crm_field_searchability.png) 6. To exclude a field from Search, click the down arrow and select **Exclude from Search**. Fields with a lock next to them can’t be excluded from Search. 7. To control which field values appear in your search, select the **Rules** tab. Select the field you want to filter on and the criteria it must meet to be included in your search. For example, if you only want escalated cases to appear in your search, select the Case object and create a rule where Status equals Escalated. ![Search Manger field rules](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_crm_search_field_rules.png) 8. Save your configuration. After you save the configuration, it appears in the dropdown menu of Search Configuration (Beta) in the Results Layout properties panel and can be applied across multiple sites. When you apply a saved configuration to your sites, the objects added automatically appear in your new site. ![Saved search configuration](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_crm_search_config_saved_ga.png) # Create Approval Workflows for Deal Registration Approval workflows are unique to each organization’s sales needs and business processes. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create processes: Customize Application
Approval workflows should account for how you want to route submitted deals, how you want to filter and evaluate them, and what notifications you want to send out. A few guidelines for planning your approval workflows: - Email Templates: Create email templates for each stage of the approval process that you to send notifications for. - Routing: Screen leads by record type and submit all registered deals for approval. - On Submission: Identify what field values change on the lead record on submission, for example the lead status. Decide if the lead record must be locked until it is approved or rejected. - Evaluation: Decide what qualifies a submitted lead to be considered for deal registration. Determine any thresholds, filter criteria, and stages you want to filter by. - Approval: Decide who to route the submitted deal to. Typically, this is the channel manager. Decide what happens on approval. - Change the Lead Status to approved. - Convert the lead to an opportunity. - Send an email notification to the partner user. - Set a deal expiration date and save the deal approval date for reporting. - Extend any margins or discounts that you might offer to the partner on successful closure. - Rejection: Decide what criteria disqualify a lead. Set the Lead Status to rejected. Send an email notification to inform them of the rejection. Unlock the lead record so partners can modify and resubmit if necessary. For detailed instructions, see the [approval workflow](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=extend_click_process.htm&language=en_US) documentation in the Salesforce Help # Create Approval Workflows for Partner Fund Claims Approval workflows are unique to each organization’s marketing needs and business processes. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create processes: Customize Application
Approval workflows should account for how you want to route submitted fund claims, how you want to filter and evaluate them, and what notifications you want to send out. A few guidelines for planning your approval workflows: - Email Templates: Create email templates for each stage of the approval process that you to send notifications for. - Routing: Screen fund claims by record type and submit all fund claims for approval. - On Submission: Identify what field values change on the field claim on submission, for example the fund claim status. Decide if the fund claim record must be locked until it is approved or rejected. - Evaluation: Decide what qualifies a submitted claim to be considered for approval. Determine any thresholds, filter criteria, and stages you want to filter by. - Approval: Decide who to route the submitted claim to. Typically, this is the channel account manager or the financial department. Decide what happens on approval. - Change the Fund Claim Status to approved. - Send an email notification to the partner user. - Rejection: Decide what criteria disqualify a fund claim. Set the Fund Claim Status to rejected. Send an email notification to inform them of the rejection. Unlock the claim record so partner user can modify and resubmit if necessary. For detailed instructions, see the [approval workflow](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=extend_click_process.htm&language=en_US) documentation in the Salesforce Help # Create Approval Workflows for Partner Fund Requests Approval workflows are unique to each organization’s marketing needs and business processes. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create processes: Customize Application
Approval workflows should account for how you want to route submitted fund requests, how you want to filter and evaluate them, and what notifications you want to send out. A few guidelines for planning your approval workflows: - Email Templates: Create email templates for each stage of the approval process that you to send notifications for. - Routing: Screen fund request by record type and submit all fund requests for approval. - On Submission: Identify what field values change on the field request on submission, for example the fund request status. Decide if the fund request record must be locked until it is approved or rejected. - Evaluation: Decide what qualifies a submitted request to be considered for approval. Determine any thresholds, filter criteria, and stages you want to filter by. - Approval: Decide who to route the submitted fund request to. Typically, this is the channel account manager or the financial department. Decide what happens on approval. - Change the Fund Request Status to approved. - Send an email notification to the partner user. - Rejection: Decide what criteria disqualify a fund request. Set the Fund Request Status to rejected. Send an email notification to inform them of the rejection. Unlock the fund request record so partner user can modify and resubmit if necessary. For detailed instructions, see the [approval workflow](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=extend_click_process.htm&language=en_US) documentation in the Salesforce Help # Create Approval Workflows for Partner Marketing Budgets Approval workflows are unique to each organization’s marketing needs and business processes. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create processes: Customize Application
Approval workflows should account for how you want to route submitted budgets, how you want to filter and evaluate them, and what notifications you want to send out. A few guidelines for planning your approval workflows: - Email Templates: Create email templates for each stage of the approval process that you wish to send notifications for. - Routing: Screen budgets by record type and submit all budgets for approval. - On Submission: Identify what field values change on the budget on submission, for example the budget status. Decide if the budget record must be locked until it is approved or rejected. - Evaluation: Decide what qualifies a submitted budget to be considered for approval. Determine any thresholds, filter criteria, and stages you want to filter by. - Approval: Decide who to route the submitted budget to. Typically, this is an internal user. Decide what happens on approval. - Send an email notification to the channel account manager. - Set a budget expiration date and save the budget approval date for reporting. - Rejection: Decide what criteria disqualify a budget. Send an email notification to inform them of the rejection. Unlock the budget record so channel account managers can modify and resubmit if necessary. For detailed instructions, see the [approval workflow](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=extend_click_process.htm&language=en_US) documentation in the Salesforce Help # Create Assignment Rules for Lead Distribution Assignment rules allow you to automatically apply criteria to sort, queue, or act on leads. For example, use assignment rules to automatically assign leads to the lead inbox queue for Partner Central. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Salesforce Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
For lead distribution, use assignment rules to define the criteria by which you want to distribute your leads, such as partner tier, geography, or specialization. 1. From Setup, enter Leads in the Quick Find box, then select **Lead Assignment Rules**. 2. Create a lead assignment rule, let’s call this All Channel Sales Leads. 3. Create rules to filter leads by record field values or user criteria and assign them to the lead inbox queue. You can also create rules to directly assign leads to partner users. 4. To send an email notification when a lead is assigned to the queue, select an email template. You can also [create custom templates for partner email notifications](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=creating_html_email_templates.htm&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Assignment rules that run after, rather than during, lead creation can’t include the Campaign field in their criteria. # Create Audiences for Your Recommendations Create audiences of new members or use the API to manage customized lists of audience members for your custom recommendations. ### Required Editions ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Recommendation audiences and personalization audiences are different features. For a more updated content targeting experience, we suggest using [CMS collections](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=community_managed_content_collections.htm&type=5&language=en_US) and [personalization audiences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=community_builder_page_visibilty_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US).
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To access Experience Workspaces or Experience Management:

Manage Experiences

OR

Create and Set Up Experiences

1. In Experience Workspaces, select **Content Management** | **Recommendations** | **Audiences**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Complete the following fields. - Name—Enter a name for the audience. - Audience Type - Select **New Members** to create an audience based on how long users have been site members. Enter the number of days since registration for audience members. - Select **Custom List** to create an audience based on any criteria you want. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can’t manage audience membership for custom lists through the UI. Add and remove members through the API. 4. Click **Save**. Audiences you create appear in the Audience drop-down list when you create a recommendation. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To remove an audience, click the audience name. At the bottom of the audience details, click **Delete**. If you remove an audience that is associated with a recommendation, the recommendation is disabled and the audience is set to the default (All site members). #### See Also - [_Connect REST API Developer Guide_: Custom Recommendation Audience Resources](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.chatterapi.meta/chatterapi/connect_resources_recommendation_audiences.htm) - [_Apex Reference Guide_: Recommendations Class](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.apexcode.meta/apexcode/apex_ConnectAPI_Recommendations_static_methods.htm#apex_ConnectAPI_Recommendations_static_methods) # Create Case Form The Create Case Form component searches text as it’s being entered into a case and displays articles based on the typed text. If users don’t see an answer, they can contact support for help. You can also protect your site from spammers by adding a reCAPTCHA widget that guest users must complete before they create a case. Before Spring ‘16, this component was named Case Creation. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note When you configure the case page layout for your site, specify that some fields are required. Adding required fields to the layout ensures that customers don’t accidentally submit cases with empty fields. 1. Select the **Create Case Form** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
General Settings Click to expand the section with general setting properties.
Attach Files Lets authenticated users attach a file to the comment in the case. Your organization’s settings control the limits for file sizes. If you enable Web-to-Case to let guest users create cases, keep in mind that guest users can’t attach files to a case.
Header Title Text that displays at the top of the page customers use to create a case. The default is Email Customer Support.
Confirmation Message Title Text that appears as the title of the message confirming that the case has been created. The default is: Your request was submitted successfully.
Confirmation Message Description Text that appears as the body of the message confirming that the case has been created. For example, You'll hear back from us soon.
Actions in the Publisher Click to expand the section with action properties.
Signed-In User Case Action The name of the action that creates cases for authenticated users. Use the action layout editor for the case object in Salesforce setup to specify which fields to include in the layout. The NewCase action is a default in your Salesforce org.
Guest User Case Action The name of the action that creates cases for unauthenticated users. Use the action layout editor for the case object in Salesforce setup to specify which fields to include in the layout.
Case Deflection Click to expand the section with case deflection properties.
Use Case Text to Suggest Articles Uses the text users type in the case title and description fields to suggest articles in the deflection area of the page. Article deflection appears only when you’ve implemented Salesforce Knowledge in your org.
Number of Articles Number of articles that display in the component.
Top-Level Category Top-level data category for template-driven sites using data categories. This data category is where articles used for deflection come from.
Category Group name for article deflection Data category group name for template-driven sites using data categories.
Deflection Banner Text Text that displays as the title of the deflection area of the page. The default is Need Answers Fast?.
Deflection Text Text that displays as the subtitle in the deflection area of the page.
Mobile-Only Deflection Text Text that displays in the deflection area for users of mobile devices.
reCAPTCHA Settings

Click to expand the section with reCAPTCHA settings.

Google no longer supports reCAPTCHA v1, which is the only version currently available in Experience Builder sites. In order to use reCAPTCHA v2 and above your sites, use a custom Lightning component.

reCAPTCHA for Guest Case Creation Adds the reCAPTCHA widget to your page. The reCAPTCHA widget requires guest users to complete a text field successfully before they can create a case.
Secret Key for reCAPTCHA Enter the key that you received when you registered for the service.
Site Key for reCAPTCHA

Enter the key that you received when you registered for the service.

Make sure that you thoroughly test the reCAPTCHA widget in your production organization.

![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Create Case Form component: ![Create Case Form component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/case_creation_napili_guest_element.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Create Channel Program Levels Motivate partner users to meet Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) using program levels. Create multiple levels within a program, and assign each partner user to a level that is based on their performance. Different levels can offer different incentives. For example, the Gold level can provide access to market development funds, which can be used to help the partner make more sales. Channel program members assigned to the Silver level can work toward the Gold level to gain access to market development funds. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create channel program level Create on channel program level
Channel Programs are available to users with Partner Community licenses. ![Program and Levels](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_channel_program.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The My Channel Program list view shows levels of channel programs owned by and shared with a user. Channel program levels help you organize members of a program into groups that are based on their performance and share different resources with different groups. 1. From the App Launcher, find and open **Channel Program Levels**. 2. Click **New** and enter the name, channel program, rank, and a description. 3. Save the channel program level. # Create Chatter Groups Create public, private, and unlisted Chatter groups to collaborate with your teams and work together on projects. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create groups Create and Own New Chatter Groups
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If you want to prevent some users from creating groups, you can do so by editing the user’s assigned profile. The permission “Create and Own New Chatter Groups” controls a users ability to create groups (public, private, or unlisted). The permission is enabled by default, but administrators can disable it on select user profiles. After an administrator disables this permission, a user with the affected profile can no longer create or be assigned as owner of new Chatter groups. If the user was already the owner of any groups, that ownership is not revoked. 1. Click the Groups tab. If you don’t see the Groups tab, open the App Launcher, search for groups, and click your result. 2. On the Groups list page, click **New Group**, and enter a group name and description. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Group names must be unique across public and private groups. Unlisted groups don’t require unique names. In Experience Cloud sites, both public and private group names must be unique within the site.![New Group button in Groups area](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_group_create.png) 3. Select an access level for your group. - Public—Anyone can see and add posts, comments, and files. Anyone can join. - Private—Only group members can see and add posts, comments, and files. People must ask to join, and the group's [owner or managers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_roles_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The actions that you can perform in a Chatter group depend on whether you’re a member, owner, or manager of the group.") must add them. Users with the “Modify All Data” and “View All Data” permission can see group posts, updates, and files across the organization. Users with the “Manage All Data” permission can also join private groups directly and change group settings. - Unlisted—Only group members and users with the “Manage Unlisted Groups” permission can see and add posts, comments, and files. People can’t ask to join. The group’s owner or managers must invite them. Unlisted groups offer [more privacy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_unlisted_groups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Unlisted Chatter groups offer more privacy compared to private Chatter groups. Only group members and users with the Manage Unlisted Groups permission can access unlisted groups in list views, feeds, and search results.") . Nonmembers can’t see or access unlisted groups in list views, feeds, and in search results. Unlisted groups aren’t available by default; your administrator must enable them for your organization. To allow customers to join a private or unlisted group, select **Allow Customers**. In Salesforce Classic, you can identify groups with customers by the orange upper left corner of the group photo. In Lightning Experience, you can identify groups that allow customers by a caption on the group page’s banner. If you allow customers in a group, you can't change the group access level later. If your Salesforce admin has enabled group archiving, you can change the automatic archiving settings for the group. Disable automatic archiving only if a group must remain active always, despite extended periods of inactivity. 4. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note You [own](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_roles_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The actions that you can perform in a Chatter group depend on whether you’re a member, owner, or manager of the group.") the groups that you create. To assign a new owner, finish creating the group, then [edit the group settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_editing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To change a Chatter group’s owner, edit group settings. Only the current group owner and people with the Modify All Data permission can change the owner."). # Create Chatter Streams Create a Chatter stream to get a combined view of feeds from the profiles, groups, and records that you select. Include up to 25 feeds in each stream. Create up to 100 Chatter streams. You don’t have to follow a person, group, or record before you add it to a stream. The great thing about adding a feed to a stream is that it doesn’t count against the number of follows you’re allowed. You can create a Chatter stream from the Chatter home page, from the streams home page, and from a profile or record detail. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer editions
- **[Create a Stream from the Chatter Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_streams_createfromchatterhome.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Chatter home page lists up to five of your streams and provides a button for adding more. - **[Create a Stream from the Streams Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_streams_createfromstreamshome.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can get to the streams home page by clicking the Streams heading on the Chatter home page. The Streams home page has controls for managing existing streams and making new ones. - **[Create a Stream from a Profile or Record Detail](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_streams_createfromrecordhome.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Once you create one stream, the **Follow** button on profile and record detail pages changes. A plus sign appears before the button label and more options become available for adding the profile or record feed to an existing stream. There’s also an option to add the feed to a stream that you create on the spot. #### See Also - [Chatter Streams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter streams are custom feeds that you create by combining multiple related feeds into one feed. Look for streams on your Chatter home page. Create up to 100 streams that each combine posts from up to 25 different feeds and feed types. Create streams that combine feeds from people, groups, and records, like accounts, opportunities, cases, and more.") - [Edit a Chatter Stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_edit.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Edit a stream to change its name or to add or remove some of its feeds. You can edit a Chatter stream from the streams home page or from the stream itself.") - [Delete a Chatter Stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_delete.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can delete a Chatter stream from the streams home page and from the stream itself. Deleting a Chatter stream doesn’t delete the records or posts that it contains. It deletes only the stream, which frees up space for you to add more streams.") # Create Component Variations in Enhanced LWR Sites Use Expression-Based Component Variations to create multiple versions of your component and assign visibility rules to target specific customer groups with each variation. Component Variations gives your site more flexibility and better opportunities to cater to individual customers and create the best experience possible. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
You can create variations for any component from the Component Variations icon. 1. From Experience Builder, select a component that appears on the canvas or add a new one. 2. Click the Component Variations icon at the top of the properties panel. 3. Click **+New Component Variation**. 4. Enter a name and save your variation. Your new variation is now listed in the Draft Variations section. It remains in draft state until you add a visibility rule. You can change your component name later by selecting the settings dropdown and clicking **Edit Name**. 5. To differentiate your variation from the default component, select your variation and update the options on the Settings and Style tabs. When you’re ready to make the variation visible, go to the Visibility tab. 6. Click **+Add Visibility Rule**. Create a rule with one or several conditions. Show or hide your variation when the conditions are met. 7. Save your visibility rule. Your variation is now available in a published state and appears to site visitors when the conditions are met. 8. After you create multiple variations, prioritize them from the Variations dropdown by dragging them into the appropriate order. Things to keep in mind: - Each component can have up to 15 variations. - Priority kicks in when a condition is true for more than one variation. If no conditions are true for any variation, the default component is shown. - When a component has variations, the variations icon appears on the canvas next to the component name. - The default component is the original version that your variations are based on. For the default component (Default) is listed next to the component name in the variations list and in the component title. # Create Content Deliveries A content delivery lets you convert documents such as Microsoft® PowerPoint and Word files into an optimized web-based version for easy online viewing. After you create your delivery, you can send its encrypted URL to any recipient, such as leads, customers, partners, and colleagues, and then track how often people view or download the content. Content deliveries are available in Salesforce Classic only. However, Lightning Email generates delivery-based links as email attachments for Lightning Experience users who have access to the Content Deliveries feature. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic

Available in: All Editions except Database.com

Salesforce CRM Content available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions

User Permissions Needed
To create content deliveries from a shared library in Salesforce CRM Content:

Member of the library

AND

Deliver Content checked in your library permission definition

To create content deliveries from a personal library in Salesforce CRM Content: Create Content Deliveries
To create content deliveries (non-Content user): Create Content Deliveries
A content delivery can be created from the Content Deliveries related list on most Salesforce objects. Salesforce CRM Content users can also create a content delivery from the content details page or the Related Content related list. 1. From the Content Deliveries related list, Related Content related list, or the content details page, click **Deliver Content**. 2. Upload a file. 3. Optionally, modify the Delivery Name field. This name identifies your content delivery in Salesforce. We recommend using a name that makes the delivery easily distinguishable from other deliveries on the same record. The default delivery name includes the file name and today’s date. 4. Select the delivery methods that determine how your content can be viewed. The options that appear depend on the file format you uploaded.
Allow Recipient to View in the Browser Creates an online version of the file that recipients can view in their browser.
Allow Recipient to Download as [file type] file Lets the recipient of your content delivery view the content in its original format. For example, if you uploaded a Microsoft® Word file, this field is Allow download as .doc file.

If a preview of the file doesn’t exist in Salesforce, users can download the delivered file regardless of whether downloading is allowed. File previews are made the first time they are requested in Salesforce, but not before. Viewing a file’s detail page or posting it to a feed generate file previews.

Allow Recipient to Download as PDF Lets recipients download a .pdf version of the file. This option is only available for Microsoft® PowerPoint, Word, and Excel files.
5. Select Notify Me of First View or Download if you want to receive an email the first time your recipient clicks the content-delivery URL. 6. If the content you are delivering is time-sensitive, select the Remove Access to Content on checkbox and enter an expiration date. By default, the expiration date is 90 days from the current date. After creating your content delivery, you can change the expiration date at any time on the delivery detail page. 7. Optionally, select Require a Password to Access Content. When you create the content delivery, you receive a password to include with the delivery URL that you send to your recipients. The password is available for the life of the delivery on the delivery detail page. 8. Optionally, use the lookup to associate your content delivery with a Salesforce record. The record you were viewing when you clicked **Deliver Content** is selected by default. 9. Click **Save & Next**. Your delivery is usually ready within a few moments, but you can click **Notify Me** to exit the content delivery wizard and be notified via email when your content delivery is ready. 10. If you did not exit the content delivery wizard, click **Preview** to verify that you are satisfied with the delivery. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important Formatting in the original file sometimes doesn’t display correctly in the online version. If you chose Allow Recipient to View in the Browser, preview your content delivery before sending its URL to your recipients. If you are not happy with the quality of the online version, click **Previous** and choose to make your content available in its original file format or a PDF only. 11. Copy and paste the delivery URL and, if applicable, its password into an email or instant message for delivery. The URL is available on the delivery detail page. For more information, see [Viewing and Editing Content Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "On the Content Deliveries related list or the Content Deliveries list page, click the name of a content delivery to open the detail page."). #### See Also - [Share Files Via Link](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_sharing_via_link.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Creating a public link generates a URL that you can copy and share with anyone inside or outside your company. Control access to the file with a password, or set the link to expire.") # Create Criteria to Moderate Your Experience Cloud Site Create criteria that define keywords or groups of members. Criteria are used in rules to moderate member-generated content, such as posts and comments. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To view, create, edit, and delete criteria:

Manage Experiences OR Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the Experience Cloud site

## Plan Your Use Cases Before creating your member criteria, think about what you want to do. - Do you want to protect your site from bots and spammers? Most spammers attack shortly after they’ve joined. Set up member criteria based on a user’s creation date. - Do you want to review members’ first posts? Set up member criteria that target users without contributions. - Do you want to moderate your internal users’ activity? Set up member criteria to include only your internal users. - Do you want to be notified when a partner contributes for the first time? Set up member criteria to include only your partner users that don’t have contributions. Before creating content criteria, think about what you want to moderate. - Do you want to moderate profanities and slang? Set up separate keyword lists for each group of related words. - Do you want to replace competitor product names with asterisks? Create a keyword list just for your competitor products. - Do you want to monitor content for HIPAA compliance? Create a keyword list that alerts of possible HIPAA violations. You can also use the Metadata API or Tooling API to set up keyword lists. ## Create Content Criteria Create and modify content criteria that define offensive language or inappropriate content that you don’t want in your Experience Cloud site. Content criteria are used in rules to moderate member-generated content, such as posts and comments. Some things to keep in mind: - Your org can have up to 30 keyword list criteria. This limit is per org, not per Experience Cloud site. - A keyword list can have up to 2,000 keywords. - Capitalization and trailing punctuation are ignored when matching your keywords to user-generated content. For example, if your criteria include BadWord, it’s matched when a user types BADWORD or badword. Set up content criteria to use in your moderation rules. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Moderation** | **Content Criteria** | **New**. 3. Enter a name, unique name, and description for your criteria. 4. Click **Save**. 5. Update the keywords in your criteria. To add keywords, click **Add**. - Keywords can only be up to 100 characters and can include letters, numbers, spaces, and special characters. - Wildcard characters aren’t supported. - Separate keywords with commas or line breaks. - When adding keywords, you can copy and paste up to 32,000 characters at a time. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To cover different variations of the same word, you can use special characters and spaces. For example: - bad-word - b@dword - b a d w o r d To delete keywords, select the keywords you want to remove, then click **Delete**. A message indicates how many keywords were added or failed to add, and the number of duplicates that were ignored. If your entire entry failed to save, review the keyword requirements and then submit again. Don’t worry about adding duplicates because they’re ignored. To delete criteria, click **Del** from the Content Criteria page. If criteria are being used by a rule, you can’t delete them. ## Create Member Criteria Create and modify member criteria to use in moderation rules. Target specific groups of members based on their user profile, user type, user creation date, or whether they've posted or previously commented in the Experience Cloud site. Use member criteria in your rules to help pin-point specific use cases, like reviewing posts only from your customer users who were created in the last seven days. Some things to keep in mind: - Your org can have up to 100 member criteria. This limit is per org, not per Experience Cloud site. - Each member criteria can include up to 100 user conditions. You can create criteria that include only user types and user profiles, or just filters. Or if you want it all, your criteria can include user types, user profiles, and filters. Let’s get started. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Moderation** | **Member Criteria**, then click **New**. 3. Enter a name, unique name, and description for your criteria. 4. Select the types of user types or user profiles to include in your criteria. You can select any combination of types and profiles. Members are included when they belong to _any_ one of your selections. If you delete a profile in your internal org, the profile is also removed from your member criteria. 5. Select to filter your members by: - None—Select this option if you don’t want to filter the criteria using the other options. None is the default selection. - User creation date—Select this option to include only users that were created within a specific time frame. Enter the number of days since the user was created. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note A user’s creation date might not be the same date they became a member of the Experience Cloud site. For example, you can have an internal user that was created 120 days ago who became a member of the site five days ago. For users that self-register, their creation date is the date they become a member of the site. - Members without site contributions—Select this option to include only members that haven’t posted or commented in the Experience Cloud site. Posts that are pending review don’t count as contributions until they’re approved. If you selected user types or user profiles, and you also select filter conditions, members are included only if they belong to one of the selected user types or profiles _and_ the filter condition. 6. Click **Save** to apply your changes. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Let’s look at the following conditions: - User Types: Partner - User Profiles: Customer Community Plus Login User, Customer Community Plus User, and Customer Community User - Filter By: User creation date is set to seven days since the user was created This member criterion applies to: - Partner users created in the last seven days - Customer Community Plus Login User created in the last seven days - Customer Community Plus User created in the last seven days - Customer Community User created in the last seven days You can use this member criteria in a rule to: - Review and approve their posts - Be notified of their contributions - Flag all their contributions To delete criteria, click **Del** from the Member Criteria page. If criteria are being used by a rule, you can’t delete them. # Create Custom Fields on the Messaging Session Object To use the context variables passed by the Context Passing framework in your Agentforce Service agent, create custom fields on the Messaging Session object. These fields will store the data coming from your Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Aura and LWR Experience Cloud Sites
Available in: Enhanced Chat with the Einstein for Service, Einstein Platform, Community, Community Plus, or Agentforce Service Agent add-on
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Foundations or Agentforce 1 Editions. Access to some standard agent actions requires additional add-on licenses
Use these steps for each of the required context variables such as lastViewedArticleId or lastSearchQuery to create a corresponding custom field on the Messaging Session object. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Object Manager, and then select **Object Manager**. 2. On the Object Manager page, use the internal Quick Find box to search for Messaging Session, and then click **Messaging Session** to open its detail page. 3. From the left menu, click **Fields & Relationships**. 4. Click **New**. 5. Select the **Text** field type, and then click **Next**. 6. Set the field label and field name to exactly match the context variable name. For example, if the variable is lastSearchQuery, the API Name must be lastSearchQuery. 7. Complete the remaining steps of the field creation wizard, setting appropriate Field-Level Security (FLS) and adding the field to necessary page layouts. 8. To complete the wizard steps, set the correct Field-Level Security and add the field to the necessary page layouts for agents to view the data. 9. Repeat steps 4 through 7 for every required context variable to make sure all data can be captured. # Create Custom Site Pages with Experience Builder To extend your Experience Builder template, create custom site pages. To get the most from your Salesforce data, add custom record detail, list, and related list pages. To display individual pieces of content along with any combination of components, use CMS content pages. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To create a site page from a preconfigured page or an installed object page: Customize Application
Your site’s pages appear alphabetically in the Pages menu. To differentiate them from standard pages, object and content pages are labeled. Other page types, such as availability pages for sites that use the Salesforce content delivery network (CDN), also show an identifying label. ![The Pages menu shows labels that identify which pages are object, content, or availability pages](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_builder_page_menu_new.png) ## Create a Standard Page Create a standard page based on a blank layout or on a preconfigured page (if available). Standard pages are the default pages that come with the Experience Builder template or that you create. 1. In Experience Builder, open the Pages menu and then click **New Page**. 2. Click **Standard Page** and then choose a layout. - For LWR sites, the page uses a flexible layout by default unless a custom content layout is available to choose. - For Aura sites, choose a fixed or a [flexible layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_flexible_layout.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Build highly customized pages using flexible layouts. Create and resize columns within each section, then add and stack sections to build out the page. Bring it all to life with background images and color."). Alternatively, if preconfigured pages are available for your template, choose a preconfigured page, or click **New Blank Page** to select a fixed or a flexible layout. Then click **Next**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note For sites created with the Build Your Own (Aura) template, you can choose from several preconfigured pages to build out your site. For example, in a site where Chatter is enabled, select **Feed Detail** to create a Chatter feed page, or **Question Detail** for a page where users can post questions and answers. When you add a standard Feed Detail or Question Detail page to your site, community members can use the Share feature to include links to other sites or Chatter groups in their posts. 3. Give the page a name, specify the static portion of the page’s URL, and then provide an API Name (optional). Click **Create**. To avoid performance problems on Aura sites, you can’t specify any of these reserved words on their own as the static portion of a standard page’s URL: on, once, before, after. However, you can specify these words in combination with other words. 4. Add and configure page components on your new page. 5. Preview and publish your site. ## Create an Object Page Create an object page that connects to your Salesforce data. When you create an object page, you actually create three new pages related to the object: a record detail page, a record list page, and a related list page. Each page provides different views and details about the object’s data. Generic object pages display record information for a Salesforce object when custom object pages don’t exist. 1. In Experience Builder, open the Pages menu and then click **New Page**. 2. Click **Object Pages** and then choose the object that you want to associate with the page. To toggle between all object pages and installed object pages, use the Show Objects dropdown menu. Installed object pages are pages that were [exported from](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=community_builder_export_page.htm&type=5&language=en_US) or imported into your org. Objects for object pages that already exist on the site are not available in the Page list, while for standard pages, exported versions still appear as choices. 3. Click **Create**, and then click **Create** again if prompted. 4. Add and configure page components on your new page. 5. Preview and publish your site. ## Create a Content Page Create a content page to display individual pieces of your Salesforce CMS content. The content types available for the page depend on what content pages you previously created for your site as well as what content types are contained in the CMS workspace connected to your site. For example, if you previously created a news content page for your site, the news content type isn’t available. Before you create a content page, add your Experience Builder site as a channel in a Salesforce CMS workspace. This step creates the connection between your site and your CMS content. Next, ensure that all content that you want to display on your site is published in your workspace. Content must be published before you can use it on your Aura or LWR site. 1. In Experience Builder, open the Pages menu and then click **New Page**. 2. Click **CMS Content Page** and then choose a content type for the page. Click **Create**. 3. Go to your new content page to add and configure page components. 4. Preview and publish your site. ## Create a Page Variation In Aura sites, you can use page variations to create personalized versions of the same page that are targeted to different audiences. For example, you can create region-specific variations of the Home page instead of creating two separate pages. ![Page Variations in Page Properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_builder_page_menu_page_variations.png) 1. To access the Page Variations tab (1) for a page, from the Pages menu, click **![Action ellipses](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_properties_ellipsis.png)(2)** | **Page Settings**. 2. To duplicate an existing page variation, click **![Actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_manager3.png)** | **Duplicate** (4). A copy of the page variation appears in the page variations list. To customize the name of the duplicate page variation, click **![Actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_manager3.png)** | **Rename**. 3. To create a page variation, click **New Page Variation** (3) and then choose a layout. - To create a unique layout, click **New Blank Page**. Select a layout option then click **Next**. Give your page variation a name then click **Create**. - To use a preconfigured layout, select one of the available options then click **Next**. Give your page variation a name then click **Create**. 4. Add and configure page components on your new page variation. 5. [Assign the page variation to an audience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_visibilty_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You define an audience by selecting criteria and the conditions under which the criteria apply. After you create an audience, you can assign it to a page variation, branding set, or component. You also can assign an audience to a component variation to personalize the content that different user segments see in the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, and Tile Menu components."). 6. Preview and publish your site. In Aura sites, if an audience doesn't have an assigned page variation and the default page variation for the object is deleted, users see a generic record layout when they try to access the record. Generic record layouts can include record detail, record list, and record-related list pages. #### See Also - [Personalization with Audience Targeting in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_visibilty_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep your users engaged by offering personalized, relevant content that’s customized for a particular audience. To create an audience, you assemble a set of criteria that defines a user segment. You can then tailor a single site to meet the needs of multiple user segments. For example, you can present the same site with a different look and feel for each audience or show different pages, components, or data to different audiences.") - [Add Salesforce CRM Data to LWR or Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_build_crm_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To help your users, customers, and partners accomplish more, share Salesforce CRM data on your Experience Builder site. Aura and LWR sites have different tools for displaying CRM data.") - [Add Salesforce CMS Content to Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_cms_content.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Digital Experiences App to create, manage, and publish engaging content for your Experience Builder site. Then display your Salesforce CMS content on your Aura or LWR site using Experience Builder tools. When you use Experience Builder sites together with Salesforce CMS, you can keep your brand and content consistent everywhere the content is published.") # Create Dynamic Component Visibility in Enhanced LWR Sites Control component visibility on your enhanced LWR site pages by creating rules that contain conditions. Stack multiple conditions to create the perfect set of visibility conditions for each component. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Visibility rules created during the Spring '23 pilot are no longer functional and must be replaced in future releases. You can create rules for any component in Experience Builder by using the Visibility tab. 1. From Experience Builder, select a component that appears on the canvas. 2. Click the **Visibility** tab. 3. Click **+Add Visibility Rule**. Create a rule with one or several conditions. Show or hide your component when the conditions are met. 4. Save your rule. Your new rule is viewable and editable from the Visibility tab. # Create Folders in Libraries in Lightning Experience Organize library files into folders to find what you need quickly. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To add folders to a library:

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

OR

Manage Library checked in your library permission definition

OR

Organize File and Content Folder checked in your library permission definition

Library managers can create, rename, and delete folders in libraries in Lightning Experience. Folders are visible to all users who have access to the library. The **New Folder** button adds a folder to the library or creates a subfolder within a folder. You can create multiple levels of subfolders. The row-level **Move** action lets you move a file among folders and subfolders within a library. ![Screenshot of Files home](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/files_home_folders.png) Create folders in Lightning Experience to organize files that are already in libraries. Upload files to a library by selecting the library and then clicking Add Files. Library folders can also be created, renamed, and deleted using SOAP API. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note When viewing your libraries in Salesforce Classic or in mobile, you can see the folder structure that you created in Lightning Experience. Only one level of folders is viewable in mobile. ## Get Started with Library Folders - Folders are enabled by default in any new libraries that you create. Folders are not enabled by default in existing libraries. To enable folders in a library, click the **New Folder** button. Depending on the size of the library, enabling folders can take a few minutes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note To enable folders in a library, you need the “Manage Salesforce CRM Content” permission. Verify that you’re both a member of the library and have Library Administrator permission. You can also use SOAP API to enable folders in libraries. - In libraries with more than 5,000 files, you can’t enable folders. Anyone with the “Organize File and Content Folder” permission can create, rename, and delete folders. You can view all folders in a library that you have access to, and move files and folders within a library. You may be able to sort content of some libraries or folders, but not others, in ascending or descending alphabetical order. Sometimes when you sort folders by the **NAME** or **LAST ACTIVITY** columns, the Asset folder remains at the top of the list. In some cases column headers do not sort the column content. It's not possible to sort contents in every library or folder by clicking either the **TITLE** or **LAST MODIFIED DATE** columns. |   | Lightning Experience | Salesforce Classic | | --- | --- | --- | | Create, rename, and delete library folders | ![check icon indicating true](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   | | Move files in a library into folders | ![check icon indicating true](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   | | View folders | ![check icon indicating true](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![check icon indicating true](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | View libraries | ![check icon indicating true](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![check icon indicating true](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Add files to a library | ![check icon indicating true](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![check icon indicating true](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Create, edit, and delete libraries | ![check icon indicating true](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![check icon indicating true](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Manage library membership | ![check icon indicating true](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![check icon indicating true](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ## Sort Library Folders When you sort Folders by the **NAME** or **LAST ACTIVITY** columns, the Asset folder remains at the top of the list. Although users can click them, the list can remain unchanged per design. # Create Google Apps Accounts To access the Google Apps services that are enabled in Salesforce, each user needs a Google Apps account on the domain your organization registered with Google. An account includes a username and password that allow the user to log in to all Google Apps services. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
Export users to Google: Customize Application
Create Google Apps accounts: Google Apps administrator
After creating a Google Apps account for your organization and enabling Google Apps in Salesforce, you can create Google Apps accounts for individual users. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If your organization purchased Salesforce and Google Apps Supported, the number of Google Apps Premier Edition accounts you can create is limited to the number of licenses your organization purchased. 1. From Setup, enter Users in the Quick Find box, then select **Users**. 2. In the View drop-down list, choose a list of users. 3. Click **Export to Google Apps** to export all the users in the list. To export certain users only, select those users in the Action column. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If Google Apps is not enabled for your organization, the **Export to Google Apps** button does not display. To enable Google Apps in Salesforce, see [Get Started with Salesforce and Google Apps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_getstart.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Google Apps is a suite of on-demand communication and collaboration services hosted by Google and designed for business users."). 4. On the Export Users to Google Apps page, click the export file link that is labeled as Step 1. The name of the link depends on the list view you chose to export; for example, if you were viewing the All Users list, the link on the Export Users to Google Apps page is **All Users Export File**. 5. In the CSV spreadsheet that displays when click you the export link, provide a temporary password for each user. You can modify the username, last name, and first name fields for any user as needed. Google creates account names by adding your domain to the usernames in the spreadsheet; for example, if your domain is acme.com and the spreadsheet contains john.doe and jane.doe usernames, the Google Apps usernames are john.doe@acme.com and jane.doe@acme.com. 6. Save the spreadsheet to your computer. 7. Click the **Google Apps Bulk User Import Tool** link to launch the Bulk Account Update page for your organization's Google Apps account. If prompted, log in with your Google Apps administrator username. Only the user who is registered with Google as the administrator of your organization's account can create additional Google Apps accounts on your organization's domain. 8. Follow Google's instructions to import the data in the spreadsheet. The Google Apps administrator receives a confirmation report, and the user for each successfully created account receives a notification email at his or her new Gmail account. 9. Notify users of their usernames and passwords. They will need this information to use any Google Apps service that is enabled in Salesforce. #### See Also - [Get Started with Salesforce and Google Apps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_getstart.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Google Apps is a suite of on-demand communication and collaboration services hosted by Google and designed for business users.") # Create Lead Record Types for Deal Registration Create a lead record type to track deals submitted by partners in Experience Cloud sites. Record types help you differentiate between sales leads and registered deals, assign page layouts for each profile for deal registration, and simplify reporting by lead record type. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Creating a lead record type requires you to associate it with a [lead process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_process_deal_reg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A process allows you to define or customize the stages in the sales process for leads or opportunities.") and allow you to specify [page layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_page_layouts_partners_deal_reg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use page layouts to control field visibility and behavior for different types of users and sales processes. There are likely fields on leads that you might not want to expose only to channel managers and not partners.") to be used with different profiles. Similarly, creating an opportunity record type requires you to provide a sales process and opportunity page layouts. 1. From Setup, enter Record Types in the Quick Find box, then select **Record Types** under Leads. To create an opportunity record, select **Record Types** under Opportunities. 2. Create a lead record type to track registered deals called **Registered Deal**. If you’re creating an opportunity record type, create one for registered deals as well. 3. Activate the record type and assign it to the appropriate partner and channel manager profiles for your site. 4. Assign page layouts for the partner and channel manager profiles. 5. If you haven’t already, edit the picklist values for the Lead Source field to include a value for registered deals. If this is the first time you’re setting up a deal registration process for your company, consider converting existing leads to the generic sales lead record type. Using separate record types for standard leads versus registered deals simplifies the reporting process. # Create Lead Record Types for Lead Distribution Create a lead record to track sales leads that you pass to partner users. Record types help you differentiate between sales leads and registered deals, assign specific page layouts for different processes, and simplify reporting for each type of record. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Creating a lead record type requires a [lead process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A lead process allows you to define or customize status values or stages for leads.") and a [lead page layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_page_layouts_partners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use page layouts to control field visibility and behavior for different types of users and sales processes. There are likely fields on the deal registration that the company may not wish to expose to partners."). Lead distribution is used for managing outbound leads that your company passes to your partners. Deal registration, on the other hand, allows partners to submit leads early on so they can get ahead of their competition. Both channel managers and partner users see both lead record types, but channel managers typically require more visibility and control over the data. Define lead page layouts with both channel managers and partner users needs in mind. You can assign page layouts to profiles for each lead record type you create. 1. From Setup, enter Leads in the Quick Find box, then select **Record Types** under Leads. 2. Create a record type to track leads you pass to partners for lead distribution. Let’s call this **Sales Lead**. For deal registration, create a separate record type called **Deal Registration**. 3. Activate the record type and assign it to the appropriate partner and channel manager profiles for your site. 4. Assign page layouts for the partner and channel manager profiles. 5. Edit the picklist values for the Lead Source record type. Include values that let you track inbound leads from deal registration (from partners) separately from outbound sales leads (passed to partners). # Create Libraries Store, share, and manage your files in content libraries so you can decide who has access to files in each library and what permissions they have. Each org can have up to 2,000 libraries. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create libraries:

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

OR

Create Libraries

To add members to a library:

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

OR

Manage Library checked in your library permission definition

To assign library permissions to members:

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

OR

Manage Library checked in your library permission definition

Create a new library, add library members, and assign library permissions to the members. 1. From the My Libraries section of the Libraries tab home page, click **New**. 2. Enter a unique library name. If you want, add a description. 3. Click **Save and Add Members**. If you want to add members later, click the **Save and Close** button. 4. On the **Libraries** tab, click the library name if the library isn’t already open. 5. In the **Members** section, click **Add Members**. If the member you want to add isn’t listed, type their first name in the search box and click **Find**. 6. Select members from the Available Members box. Members can include individual Salesforce CRM Content users or public groups containing Salesforce CRM Content users. If you have many Salesforce CRM Content users, create a public group and add it to a library rather than adding users to the library individually. 7. To add the members to the library, click **Add**. 8. Click **Next**. 9. Select a library permission for each user or public group and click **Save**. For more information, see [Manage Library Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_workspace_perm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A library permission is a group of privileges assigned to each Salesforce CRM Content library member. It determines the tasks that a member can perform in a particular library. The same user can have a different library permission in each library."). Libraries are available to users even if they don’t have Salesforce CRM Content licenses. In Lightning Experience, users without Content licenses can view libraries and work with library files and folders. In Salesforce Classic, they can view libraries and access files from libraries. Libraries are available without Content by default. Manage these settings in two places: - To enable access for everyone in your org, go to Setup. Enter General Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **General Settings**. Select **Libraries in Salesforce Files**. - To control access for a subset of users, use the Access Libraries permission, available for profiles and permission sets on most standard user licenses. # Create Library Folders Creating folders gives you more control over the content in your libraries. You can organize folders and subfolders in a way that makes sense to you. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
User Permissions Needed
To create library folders: Customize Application
Go to **Files**, **Libraries**, **Owned By Me**, and click **New Folder**. Permissions are assigned at the library level, making your folder structure a great way to manage who can work with files. # Create Page Layouts for Deal Registration Use page layouts to control field visibility and behavior for different types of users and sales processes. There are likely fields on leads that you might not want to expose only to channel managers and not partners. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create or customize page layouts: Customize Application
Create two page layouts: one for the channel manager and partner profiles in your partner site. 1. From Setup, enter Leads in the Quick Find box, then select **Page Layouts** under Leads. 2. Create a lead [page layout](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=customize_layout.htm&language=en_US) for partner users by cloning the primary lead layout. Let’s call this **Deal Registration - **, or specifically, Deal Registration - Partner Users. 3. Modify the page layout to add, remove, or modify the behavior of fields, action buttons, related lists, and layouts based on who the layout is for. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip - Extend the Lead Source picklist values to indicate which leads are submitted by partners as deals. - Add a custom, auto-numbering field called Deal ID to both partner and channel manager page layouts. You can use this field value as a separate identifier for deals, in both leads and opportunities. 4. Save the page layout. 5. Repeat for channel manager profiles. # Create Page Layouts for Lead Distribution Use page layouts to control field visibility and behavior for different types of users and sales processes. There are likely fields on the deal registration that the company may not wish to expose to partners. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create or customize page layouts: Customize Application
Create two page layouts: one for the channel manager and partner profiles in your partner site. 1. From Setup, enter Leads in the Quick Find box, then select **Page Layouts** under Leads. 2. Create a lead [page layout](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=customize_layout.htm&language=en_US) for partner users by cloning the primary lead layout. Let’s call this **Lead Distribution - **. 3. Modify the page layout to add, remove, or modify the behavior of fields, action buttons, related lists, and layouts based on who the layout is for. Typically, channel managers see more data than partner users. 4. Save the page layout. 5. Repeat for channel manager profiles. # Create Partner Accounts Add each company with which you partner to Salesforce as a business account. We recommend that channel managers create partner accounts so they can view all partner data. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To view accounts: Read on accounts
To create accounts: Create on accounts
To create a partner account: Manage External Users
Partner accounts are Salesforce accounts that a channel manager uses to manage partner organizations, partner users, and activities when using a partner site or partner portal. A channel manager who owns a partner account can access all the data associated with the partner account and the associated partner users. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The partner user role is a subordinate of the account owner's role. All data for the partner user role rolls up to the partner account owner's role. Keep in mind that if you disable a partner user, their partner user role becomes obsolete and their data no longer rolls up to the partner account role. 1. Create a business account. 2. Click **Manage External Account**, and then click **Enable as Partner**. The **Enable as Partner** and **Disable Partner Account** actions aren’t available in the Salesforce mobile app. 3. In the confirmation dialog, select **Yes, I want to enable this account as a Partner Account**. 4. Click **Confirm**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - If your organization has person accounts, they cannot be used as partner accounts. Only business accounts can be used as partner accounts. - Partner accounts can’t be deleted, but they can be [disabled](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_partner_community_disable_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can't delete partner accounts, but you can disable them. Disabling a partner account disables partner users associated with the account. We recommend disabling a partner account only if the account was accidentally enabled for site access."). - To enable a partner in Lightning Experience, add the **Enable Partner User** button to the **Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions** section on the Account and Contact page layouts. After you create a partner account, you can add users to the account as contact records and then convert them to partner users. Partner users are Salesforce users with access to CRM objects, such as opportunities, leads, and campaigns. Partner users can access and modify the Salesforce data you share with them by logging in to a site. They can be added to account or opportunity teams. #### See Also - [Add Teams to Your Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.accountteam_add.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Create Processes for Deal Registration A process allows you to define or customize the stages in the sales process for leads or opportunities. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create processes: Customize Application
When you select status values for a process, think of all the stages a lead or an opportunity goes through. For example, for deal registration, the Lead Status values could be New, Submitted, Approved, Rejected. Create a process for leads. Create a separate process for opportunities. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To use more values than the primary process record provides, [customize the Lead Status picklist values](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=editing_picklists_for_record_types_and_business_processes.htm&language=en_US) for leads before you create the lead process. Also, add the Deal Registration to the Lead Source picklist values. 1. From Setup, enter Processes in the Quick Find box. 2. To [create a process](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=creating_multiple_business_processes.htm&language=en_US) for leads, select **Lead Processes**. To create a process for opportunities, select **Sales Process** under Opportunities. 3. Select the stages best suited to the lead or opportunity and your business needs. 4. Save the process. # Create Record Button Use the Create Record Button component to allow site members to create records using global actions. This component relies on the global actions defined in your org by the administrator. If you associate more than one action with this button, it acts like a dropdown list. When a site member selects an action from the list, the Create Record page dynamically loads the appropriate action layout for that action using the Create Record Form component. 1. Add the **Create Record Button** component to a page or select it on the page you’re configuring. For example, you can add this component to the Home page to make it easy for site members to find. 2. Click **Add Global Action** to add an action to the Global Actions list. 3. Select each action and modify its type and public availability in the Global Action Properties section. - Select the global action type to be associated with each action in the Global Actions list. - Select Publicly Accessible to make that action available for guest users of the site. ![Modifying global action properties for the Create Record Button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/create_record_button_modify_actions.png) ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Create Record Button component on a site home page. ![Create New button with global action menu on community home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/create_new_button_home_page.png) # Create Record Form The Create Record Form component displays the action layout when a user clicks an action from the Create Record button. When a site member clicks an action from the Create Record button in your site, they’re redirected to the Create Record page, which uses the Create Record Form component to display the fields in the associated global action layout. The page and component automatically pick up the global action layout defined in Setup based on the clicked action and the Action Name property is automatically populated. No additional configuration is required. 1. Select the **Create Record Form** component in the page you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component: | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | **Action Name** | The API name of the action is automatically populated and doesn’t require configuration. | | **Performance Settings** | Click to expand. | | Create Records in Batches | A global action that allows users to create cases, leads, and custom objects in batches, rather than one at a time. Batching creation increases the number of objects that can be created at a time for high-volume sites. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Create Record Form component. ![Create new record form component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/create_new_record_form.png) # Create Records in Chatter Groups Use the group publisher to create records in Chatter groups. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create a record in Chatter groups: Create on the object
The actions that are available to you in the group publisher depend on a few things: - Your permissions - Your role in the group - The group type - The way your administrator has configured the group publisher Here are some facts about records in group feeds: - Depending on how your administrator configures the groups publisher layout, you can create account, contact, lead, opportunity, contract, campaign, case, and custom object records. Other objects aren’t supported. - When you create a record in a group, a record creation post appears in several places. For example, it appears in the group feed, on your profile, in the record feed, and in your company’s Chatter feed. Only users with the necessary permissions (via license, profile, permissions, and sharing rules) can view the record and the record creation feed post. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Filter the group feed to **Show All Updates** to view record creation posts. - All comments on the record creation post appear in the group feed. In the group feed, you see the comments that are made in the record feed and by users who don’t belong to the group. For example, John creates a record in a private group. The record creation post appears in the group feed and in the record feed. Sally isn’t a member of the same private group, but she has access to the record detail page and the record feed. Sally comments on the record creation post in the record feed, and it appears in the private group’s feed. - Record visibility in groups respects user permissions and sharing access rules in your organization. Group members with permissions can view the record and comment on it from any context. For example, they can comment in a group, on the owner’s profile, on the record detail page, and in the company’s Chatter feed. Group members without permissions, such as Chatter Free users, can’t see the record or the record feed in the group or anywhere else. - You can’t create records in groups that allow customers. - If your administrator has enabled [adding records to groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_records_add_follow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add records to groups to collaborate on and discuss the records as a team."): - Creating a record within a group automatically creates a group-to-record relationship. This relationship is the same as when you add an existing record. - The group records list displays the records that you create, in addition to the records that you add. You can [remove records from Chatter groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_records_remove.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Remove the records that you no longer use from your Chatter groups."). # Create Rules to Moderate Your Experience Cloud Site Moderation rules help protect your site from spammers, bots, and offensive or inappropriate content. Create and modify rules for your Experience Cloud site to moderate member-generated content. Each rule specifies the member-generated content the rule applies to, the criteria to enforce the rule on, and the moderation action to take. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To view, create, edit, and delete rules:

Manage Experiences OR Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the Experience Cloud site

Your Experience Cloud site comes populated with content and rate limiting moderation rules that block, flag, freeze, replace, or review banned keywords. Simply activate the rules and they’re ready to go. You can customize both the rules and the list of banned keywords in the Rules section of the Moderation workspace. Alternatively, you can create your own custom moderation rules as needed. You can also use the Metadata API or Tooling API to set up content rules. If your Experience Cloud site uses the Customer Service template, moderation rules apply to questions and group posts created by your members. If your Experience Cloud site uses Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce, moderation rules can also run on publisher actions. Some things to keep in mind: - Your org can have up to 30 rules. This limit is per org, not per Experience Cloud site. This limit includes both content rules and rate rules. - Each content rule can have up to 3 keyword criteria and 10 member criteria. - Preconfigured moderation rules apply only to feed posts, comments, and polls. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Before creating a rule, we recommend that you create criteria to use in the rule. ## When Do Moderation Rules Run? Rules that block content run first, followed by rules to review and approve content, then rules that replace content, and last by rules that flag content. If two or more rules perform the same action, the oldest rule runs first, based on the date the rule was created. Rules to replace content don’t run when the content also applies to a review rule—we want moderators to review the original content. On the server, Salesforce executes Experience Cloud site rules within the standard order of execution. #### See Also - [Translate Metadata Labels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.entering_translated_terms.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Create Criteria to Moderate Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderator_manage_criteria.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create criteria that define keywords or groups of members. Criteria are used in rules to moderate member-generated content, such as posts and comments.") ## Create or Modify Content Rules To block, replace, flag, or allow you to review and approve member-generated content, create content rules. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Moderation** | **Rules**. 3. Click **Edit** next to an existing rule. To create a rule, click **New** | **Content Rule**. 4. Add or update the rule details, including a unique name that’s used by the API, and select **Activate Rule** to enable the rule. 5. In Rule Conditions: - Specify which types of member-generated content this rule applies to. Posts and comments only apply to content created in groups and user profiles. All feed types, such as polls and links, are supported. - Choose whether to block content from being published, allow reviewers to approve the content before it’s published, replace keywords with asterisks, or flag inappropriate content. - Specify the message that your member sees when their content is blocked. If you don’t specify a message, the member sees the standard message: “You can’t use %BLOCKED\_KEYWORD% or other inappropriate words in this site. Review your content and try again.” The %BLOCKED\_KEYWORD% variable displays up to 5 blocked words. You can also use this variable in your own custom message. For international sites, you can translate this message. From Setup, enter Translate in the Quick Find box, then select **Translate**. To provide a translation for the message, select the Moderation Rule setup component and expand the site the rule belongs to. 6. In Criteria, specify member criteria and content criteria to enforce this rule. Think about who the rule applies to and the specific keywords involved. 7. Save your changes. Keep the following things in mind: - If you activate a content rule without specifying member criteria, the rule applies to all members. - If you activate a content rule without specifying content criteria, the rule either: - Stops members from creating posts and comments entirely - Sends all posts for review - Flags all posts and comments - If you select member criteria and content criteria, the rule applies only when both criteria are met. - Specifying criteria is optional. However, we recommend that you include criteria in your rules to target specific members and content. ## Create Rate Limit Rules To monitor and limit how frequently member-generated content is created, create or modify rate rules. Rate rules protect your Experience Cloud site against spammers and bots that attack your site by posting the same message multiple times in a row. You can create rate rules to notify your moderators of suspicious spammer-like behavior or freeze a member on the spot. Each rate rule controls two actions: notification and freeze. You can set up your rate rule for both actions or just one. You can apply the rule to: posts, comments, files, and private messages. In Experience Cloud sites that use the Customer Service template, you can apply rules to questions and answers. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Moderation** | **Rules** then click **New** and select **Rate Rule**. 3. In Rule Conditions: - Specify which types of member-generated content this rule applies to. Posts and comments only apply to content created in groups and user profiles. - Specify the member criteria that trigger this rule. If you activate a rate rule without specifying member criteria, the rule applies to all external users. If you activate a rate rule without specifying member criteria, the rule applies to all external users. Spammers are typically new members. We recommend creating member criteria that only include customer users that were created in the last seven days. - Specify the time frame that the rule applies to. Determine how much content can be created within that time frame before the moderator is notified. Determine how much content can be created before the member is frozen. When members are frozen, they’re frozen in all sites that they’re a member of. Emails are sent to users with the Moderate Experience Users permission. Make sure that you assign your moderators this permission. Emails are sent even if a user has turned off Chatter emails. 4. Activate the rule. 5. Save your changes. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Let’s use the following rate rule as an example. - Applies To: Posts and private messages - Member Criteria: Customer users created in the past 7 days - Content Creation Time Frame: 3 minutes - Notify Moderators: 6 - Freeze Members: 10 With this rate rule, here’s what happens when a member reaches your limits. | In the span of 3 minutes, a member creates... | Is the moderator notified? | Is the member frozen? | | --- | --- | --- | | 4 posts and 2 private messages | ![checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) | ![Crossmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/crossmark.png) | | 6 posts | ![checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) | ![Crossmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/crossmark.png) | | 6 comments | ![checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) | ![Crossmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/crossmark.png) | | 8 posts and 2 private messages | ![checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) | ![checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) | | 10 posts | ![checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) | ![checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) | | 10 comments | ![Crossmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/crossmark.png) | ![Crossmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/crossmark.png) | A rate rule with these values protects the site from spammers and bots but also allows you to help your new members. Maybe a non-threatening member posted a question over and over hoping to get it answered faster. Rate rules do more than protect—they let you help members in need. Here’s a rule set up just for private messages. - Applies To: Private messages - Member Criteria: Customer users created in the past 3 days - Content Creation Time Frame: 15 minutes - Notify Moderators: 1 - Freeze Members: 3 This rate rule protects the site from spammers that attack via private messages. If your rate rule doesn’t take immediate effect, give it time. If you set up a rate rule to freeze members when they create content 10 times in 3 minutes. It’s possible for a member to create 9 items towards the end of the first 3-minute time frame. In this case, the member isn’t frozen until they post another 10 items in the second 3-minute time frame. Check the member criteria you’re using. For example, let's say you have a rate rule that uses member criteria to filter for members without contributions. After a member’s first post or comment, the rule doesn’t apply to the member anymore, so the member doesn’t reach the freeze limit you set. # Create Special Purpose Websites with Microsites Microsites are useful for everything from event pages to lightweight websites. Using the Microsite template, you can create a site with built-in navigation and layout components that are responsive and easy to customize. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions.
## Before You Begin Microsites are high-performance websites often designed for specific opportunities and singular use cases. Before you start designing your microsite, we recommend that you keep these things in mind. - The Microsite template offers limited support for standard components. For a list of supported components, see [Standard Components for LWR Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_byo_lwr_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Standard components are built by Salesforce. Build Your Own (LWR) and Microsite (LWR) templates include record experiences such as Record Detail and Actions Bar (beta availability varies by release). LWR templates also support no-code data binding to dynamically show CRM and CMS data without custom code."). - To achieve the best possible performance at scale, we recommend serving microsites from a content delivery network (CDN). For more information about the Experience Cloud CDN, see [Serve Your Experience Cloud Site with the Salesforce Content Delivery Network (CDN)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.domain_mgmt_salesforce_cdn.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - Keep in mind the possible scale of your use case. Microsites have an upper limit of 12,000 concurrent lead form submissions per minute. If you’re worried about exceeding this limit, reach out to your account executive. - **[Create a Microsite](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_microsites_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create your microsite using the Microsite template and customize the existing components to fit your company needs. Microsites run on the Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) platform so you can create beautiful, efficient websites. - **[Configure Microsite Layout and Create Navigation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_microsites_header.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Header component, included with the Microsite template, includes theme settings and built-in navigation. - **[How Do Experience Cloud Forms Connect to Marketing Cloud Engagement?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_marketing_cloud_form_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can connect a microsite to a Marketing Cloud Engagement data extension using the Marketing Cloud Form component. Contact information is gathered from your Experience Cloud sites and then sent to Engagement. The data that is collected from your site is momentarily stored in the Salesforce Core infrastructure and then sent to your data extension. The data transferred this way is only stored in Salesforce Core infrastructure for as long as it takes to call Marketing Cloud Engagement API. - **[Connect a Form Component to Marketing Cloud Engagement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_marketing_cloud_form_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Using the Marketing Cloud Form component, you can capture customer information from an Experience Cloud microsite and send it directly to a Marketing Cloud Engagement data extension. Built on the powerful LWR platform, this form component gives you the tools to easily collect contact information and the flexibility to store data where it best serves your company. - **[Send Visitor Information to the Salesforce Lead Object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_microsites_lead_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Lead Form component in the Microsite template to capture visitor information in your site and create a new Lead record in Salesforce. - **[Capture Visitor Information with the Lead Form Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_microsites_configure_lead_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you finish setting up your Guest User profile and configuring the correct object access, navigate to Experience Builder to configure the Lead Form component. # Create Use-Case Driven Sites Whether you're creating a site for self-service or one for partner vendors, Experience Cloud has the solution to fit your needs. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
- **[Experience Cloud and Integrating with Journey Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_journey_builder.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Journey Builder in Marketing Cloud Engagement helps you create personalized journeys for your site based on triggering events or geared for specific audiences. Greet new users with rich content emails, send reminders to users who need profile pics, or schedule follow-up emails for users who log a case. To use this feature, you must have both Experience Cloud and Marketing Cloud Engagement licenses. # Create, Edit, and Delete Recognition Badges In addition to the four default badges, you can create your own to fit the needs of your site. You can edit both the default badges and your custom badges. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To create recognition badges: Create Custom Badge Definitions
To manage your recognition badges:

Create And Set Up Experiences

AND

Moderate Chatter

OR

Manage Experiences

AND

Moderate Chatter

To manage badges owned by someone else:

Modify All Data

AND

Moderate Chatter

1. To create a badge, in Experience Workspaces, click the Gamification tile and go to the Recognition Badges section. 2. Click **New**. 3. Give your badge a name and a description and upload an image. Click **Save**. The **Public** and **Active** checkboxes are selected by default. When you save, your badge is immediately available to everyone with permissions to give a badge. If you want to limit who can give a badge, deselect **Public**. If you aren’t ready for it to be live, deselect **Active**. If you want the badge to be available for a mission, select **Mission Badge**. ![Window for creating a recognition badge.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/recog_badges_new.png) 4. To edit the fields, go to the badge related list, click the dropdown at the end of the badge’s row, and click **Edit**. ![Badge dropdown with Edit, Delete, and Manage Badge Givers options.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/recog_badges_edit_dropdown.png) 5. To delete a badge, go to the badge related list, click the dropdown at the end of the badge’s row, and click **Delete**. # Create, Share, and Organize Files Post files to feeds and records, share files with customers, and organize files into folders and libraries. - **[Differences Between Files, Salesforce CRM Content, Salesforce Knowledge, Documents, and Attachments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_differences.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Explore the differences in the various ways to manage your files and content. - **[Salesforce Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_salesforce_files_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** On the Files tab, organize and access your files. - **[Enable Salesforce Files Settings For Managed Packages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_enable_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To avoid an exception error while installing the managed package, enable the Skip triggers execution and validation rules on asset files setting. - **[Files Connect External Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_connect_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Browse, search, and share external files right from Salesforce. - **[Document Libraries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_libraries_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Store files without attaching them to records. - **[Salesforce CRM Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Organize, share, search, and manage all types of files within your organization. - **[Google Apps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_apps_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Integrate Google apps like Google Docs and Gmail with Salesforce. # Criteria Types and Conditions for Audience Creation You can use several types of criteria to define an audience and determine the conditions under which the criteria apply. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
## Audience Criteria Types Profile Target users who fit a particular profile that’s defined in your org—for example, Customer Community User, Partner, Marketing User. Location Target users who are in a particular geographic area, such as a state or country, as determined by their IP address. For limitations to keep in mind, see [Location Criteria Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_use_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5). Domain Target users based on how they enter your site, such as via coffee.awsimporters.com or tea.awsimporters.com. For limitations to keep in mind, see [Domain Criteria Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_use_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5). User Object Target users based on CRM fields, such as the department that they work in or their role. You can select these types of fields on CRM objects. - Text - Picklist - Multi-select picklist - Number - Checkbox - Currency - Date (but not Date/Time) Permission Target users who are assigned particular permissions in your org. Record-Based Criteria Vary what users can see based on the characteristics of the record that they’re viewing. For example, show different record detail pages for a low-priority case and an escalated case, or show different pages for high-value versus low-value opportunities. You can use these objects to create record-based criteria. - Account - Asset - Campaign - Case - Contact - Contract - Lead - Opportunity - Product2 - ProductCategory - Quote - Custom objects - Any object, except Knowledge, with at least one record type (only some fields available) For limitations to keep in mind, see [Record-Based Criteria Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_use_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5). Audience To avoid re-creating complex sets of criteria, you can use audiences as criteria to create another audience. For example, you have a site that sells coffee and tea, and you created audiences for coffee drinkers, tea drinkers, and high-volume customers. Then you want to market a special opportunity for coffee drinkers in California who are high-volume customers. You can create an audience just for this sale using your Coffee Drinkers and High-Volume Customers audiences, plus a location criterion for California. ![New audience modal with both user type and audience criteria](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/audience_as_criteria.png) For limitations to keep in mind, see [Audience Criteria Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_use_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5). ## Conditions for Audience Matching In the Audience Matches When picklist, you determine the conditions under which your audience criteria apply. The criteria can apply when: - All conditions are met - Any condition is met - Custom logic is met For example, you create an audience with a Location criterion of California and a Profile criterion of Customer Community User. If the audience criteria apply when all conditions are met, only users in California with the Customer Community User profile can see your content. If the audience criteria apply when any condition is met, any user in California, and any user anywhere with the Customer Community User profile, can see your content. To create more complex audiences, you can use custom logic. With custom logic, you use AND and OR statements to group and apply audience criteria. For example, you have an internal site, and you want to target content to marketing managers based in California and sales managers based in New York. You can use custom logic so that users who fall into either of these audiences can see that content. #### See Also - [Considerations for Audience Targeting in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_use_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Audiences are a great help when you want to target specific user segments with relevant site content. As you work with audiences, there are some things to consider.") - [Create an Audience for an Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_visibilty_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You define an audience by selecting criteria and the conditions under which the criteria apply. After you create an audience, you can assign it to a page variation, branding set, or component. You also can assign an audience to a component variation to personalize the content that different user segments see in the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, and Tile Menu components.") # CRM Analytics Dashboard Use the CRM Analytics Dashboard component to add CRM Analytics to your site's pages. 1. Select the **CRM Analytics Dashboard** component in the page you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Dashboard Select an available dashboard from the dropdown list.
Height Specify the height of the dashboard, in pixels. The default is 300.
Filter

Add selections or filters to apply to the dashboard when it appears on the page at runtime. You can filter dataset fields by variables or specified values. For filtering on dimensions, use this syntax:

{'datasets' : {'dataset1': [ {'fields': ['field1'], 'selection': ['$value1', '$value2']}, {'fields': ['field2'], 'filter': { 'operator': 'operator1', 'values': ['$value3', '$value4']}}]}}

For filtering on measures, use this syntax:

{'datasets' : {'dataset1': [ {'fields': ['field1'], 'selection': ['$value1', '$value2']}, {'fields': ['field2'], 'filter': { 'operator': 'operator1', 'values': [[$value3]]}}]}}

datasets takes dataset system names which are found in the left panel of the edit page for a dataset. (If your org has namespaces, include the namespace prefix and two underscores before the dataset system name.)

fields takes dimensions or measures in the dataset. To find the names, click the Explore icon to open the widget, select Show SAQL from the Options menu.

values can be specific values or fields in a Salesforce object To find the name of a field, go to Setup, locate the object you want, and select Fields. Use the Field Name (also known as the API name). For custom fields, use the name with "__c" at the end.

With the selection option, the dashboard is shown with all its data, and the specified dimension values are highlighted. The selection option can be used alone or with the filter option. Selection takes dimension values only. To use this option, the dashboard must include a list, date, or toggle widget that groups by the specified dimension.

With the filter option, the dashboard is shown with only filtered data. The filter option can be used alone or with the selection option. Filter takes dimension or measure values.

Use operator with the filter option. Supported operators for dimensions: in; not in; matches Supported operators for measures: = ; >= ; > ; <= ; <.

Show Sharing Icon Add the Share icon on the dashboard. When this option is selected, users can click the icon to open the Share dialog, where they can post to Chatter and download images and data. To show the Share icon, the minimum dashboard height is 612 pixels. Default is false.
Show Title Control the visibility of the dashboard title. When this option is selected, the dashboard’s title appears above the dashboard. Default is true.
Show Header Control the visibility of the dashboard header. When this option is selected, the dashboard is displayed with a header bar that includes the Open in Analytics icon, the date and time that the dashboard’s data was updated, and the dashboard views menu. Note that the header bar also appears if either Show Sharing Icon or Show Title is selected.
Open Links in New Windows Specify where links from the dashboard to other assets are opened. When this option is selected, links open in new windows. When this option isn’t selected, links open in the same window. Default is true.
Hide On Error Control whether or not users see a dashboard that has an error. When this option is selected, if the dashboard has an error, it won’t appear on the page. When this option isn’t selected, the dashboard appears but doesn’t show any data. An error can occur when a user doesn't have access to the dashboard or it has been deleted. Default is false.
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example CRM Analytics Dashboard component: ![CRM Analytics Dashboard component in Experience Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/bi_communities_experience_builder_component.png) # Cross-Cloud Features Enable cross-cloud features so users in your Experience Cloud sites can access them. Some objects and features available in specific clouds, like Industries and Commerce Cloud, require add-on licenses. - **[Enable Objects for Experience Cloud Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_cases_for_external_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Salesforce standard and custom objects for external users so that they have access from your Experience Cloud sites. # CSP and Lightning Locker Design Considerations Whether you’re an administrator, content manager, or developer, be aware of the impact of the different security levels on your Experience Builder site. This impact can be far-ranging and unexpected. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip For extra error guidance when developing your Experience Builder site, we recommend using Google Chrome. After you set the CSP security level for your site, test it in other browsers to make sure that your customers have a good experience. In addition to error messages and feedback, you can use the Developer Console to help identify any directive issues or CSP violations. ## What Does the Strict CSP Level Affect? Strict CSP is the default, maximum security level for Experience Builder sites. This level of security can impact many aspects of your site, especially resources that make calls to external sources, such as: - Rich Content Editor - HTML Editor - Third-party components - Custom components - `head` markup - CMS Connect content In addition, Strict CSP mitigates the risk of cross-site scripting (XSS) and other content injection attacks by disallowing inline scripts. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note We recommend that you update your third-party libraries to modern versions that don’t depend on the `unsafe-inline` keyword.
Impact Description Example Recommendation
Blocks inline scripts All inline scripts, including inline <script> elements and inline event handlers, are blocked from running on your site. Common services such as Google Tag Manager can’t work properly when these scripts are blocked. You include an inline script in the head markup to write messages to the console log for testing purposes, for example, <script>console.log(“blocked”);</script>. Because all inline scripts are blocked, messages aren’t written to the log. Replace inline scripts in your site and instead use a static resource that’s uploaded as a relative URL, or avoid inline scripts entirely.
Blocks remote JavaScript resources unless allowlisted All requests for remote JavaScript files are blocked from executing, unless you explicitly allow those resources.. You want to use the popular D3.js library to create a scatterplot. But because all remote JavaScript files are blocked, nothing is drawn. Upload all JavaScript libraries to your org as static resources, and then add the static resource to your component. After the library is loaded from the static resource, you can use it as normal. Or you can host the asset as a static resource and refer to it with a relative URL
Blocks non-script remote resources unless allowlisted All requests for non-script resources to external servers are prevented, unless you explicitly allow those servers. You decide to host your company logo on an external server and reference it in a component. However, the image isn’t shown. Host your resources through Salesforce using component functionality, such as the Rich Content Editor. Or you can host the asset as a static resource and refer to it with a relative URL.
Isolates third-party components and custom code when Lightning Locker is on

Third-party components and custom code from different namespaces are prevented from interacting and accessing each other’s DOM. These resources can only access supported APIs.

If you inadvertently allow a malicious domain, isolated resources are unable to send data to that domain.

By mistake, you use a malicious component on the same page that you’re exposing internal Salesforce records through a Salesforce out-of-the-box component. Because the components are isolated, the malicious component is unable to access those records.

Follow best practices for using third-party components in your site and custom code in your head markup.

If you have trouble getting third-party components or custom code to work with Lightning Locker, see Resolve Lightning Locker Conflicts in Experience Builder in the Experience Cloud Developer Guide.

Allows third-party components and custom code to communicate when Lightning Locker is off

Third-party components and custom code from different

Third-party components and custom code from different namespaces can interact and access each other’s DOM. These resources can also use unpublished frameworks. And resources in an open browser tab are exposed, permitting third-party components and custom code to access and edit them.

Partners and developers of managed packages on AppExchange must choose whether they want their components to be available when Lightning Locker is turned off.

You want to use third-party components that automatically inject additional third-party JavaScript into the page, including the site’shead markup. Turning off Lightning Locker can potentially cause security flaws in your site and prevent third-party Aura components from being available at design time and rendering at runtime. Disable Lightning Locker only as a last resort.
       
## What Does the Relaxed CSP Level Affect? To use resources from third parties such as Google, you can choose the Relaxed CSP level. But make sure that you understand the ramifications of a less secure, relaxed CSP environment on your site. In this state, you can optionally disable Lightning Locker when custom functionality doesn’t work properly. But we strongly advise against turning off Lightning Locker. For information on Lightning Locker workarounds, see [Resolve Lightning Locker Conflicts in Experience Builder](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/communities_dev_security_limitations.htm) in the Experience Cloud Developer Guide.
Impact Description Example
Allows inline scripts All inline scripts are allowed to run in your site, including scripts that use eval(). These scripts are allowed because many common services such as Google Tag Manager require them to work properly. However, inline scripts are a common source of XSS attacks. You include in your head markup an inline script to log every user action on a page for marketing-related analysis. Because inline scripts are allowed, analytics are logged successfully.
Allows remote JavaScript and non-script resources when allowlisted All requests to external servers for JavaScript files and non-script resources are allowed when you identify the servers. Client-side code can also make requests to your site. You use a script that pulls in your company’s blog posts. For the content to show, allow the script for the site using the Trusted Sites for Scripts area in Experience Builder, and allow the non-script content host in Trusted URLs in Setup.
Isolates third-party components and custom code when Lightning Locker is on

Third-party components and custom code from different namespaces are prevented from interacting and accessing each other’s DOM. These resources can only access supported APIs.

If you inadvertently allow a malicious domain, isolated resources are unable to send data to that domain.

By mistake, you use a malicious component on the same page that you’re exposing internal Salesforce records through a Salesforce out-of-the-box component. Because the components are isolated, the malicious component is unable to access those records.
Allows third-party components and custom code to communicate when Lightning Locker is off

Third-party components and custom code from different namespaces can interact and access each other’s DOM. These resources can also use unpublished frameworks. And resources in an open browser tab are exposed, permitting third-party components and custom code to access and edit them.

Partners and developers of managed packages on AppExchange must choose whether they want their components to be available when Lightning Locker is turned off in the relaxed CSP environment.

You want to use third-party components that automatically inject additional third-party JavaScript into the page, including the site’shead markup.
#### See Also - [_Experience Cloud Developer Guide:_ Using the Developer Console](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/intro_devconsole.htm) - [_Lightning Web Components Dev Guide:_ Determine Whether a JavaScript Library Is Locker Compliant](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/component-library/documentation/en/lwc/js_third_party_guidance) - [_Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide:_ eval() Function is Limited by Lightning Locker](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.lightning.meta/lightning/security_js_eval.htm) - [_Lightning Web Components Dev Guide:_ Use Third-Party JavaScript Libraries](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/component-library/documentation/en/lwc/lwc.js_third_party_library) - [_Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide:_ Using External JavaScript Libraries](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.lightning.meta/lightning/js_libs_platform.htm#js_libs_platform) - [_Experience Cloud Developer Guide:_ Enable Third-Party Components to Run When Lightning Locker Is Off](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/communities_dev_security_components.htm) # CSP and Lightning Locker in Experience Builder Sites Experience Builder sites use Content Security Policy (CSP) and Lightning Locker to secure your site from malicious attacks and custom code vulnerabilities. CSP is a W3C standard that controls the source of content that can be loaded on your site’s pages and helps protect against cross-site scripting (XSS) attacks. Lightning Locker is a Salesforce architectural layer that allows third-party Lightning components and custom code to run safely on the same page in the browser. With different levels of security, you can optimize your site security choices and tolerance for risk. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note By default, sites created before the Spring ’19 (February 2019) release use the Allow Inline Scripts and Script Access to Any Third-party Host setting. In Spring ’22 (February 2022), that option is being removed for those sites. We strongly recommend updating your script security level and testing your site before that option expires. For new sites created after the Spring ’19 release, Strict CSP is the default CSP setting. ## What Is CSP? CSP is a list of rules that define the Content-Security-Policy HTTP header that’s sent to the browser when someone visits your site. Web browsers use these rules to block requests to unknown servers for different kinds of resources such as scripts, images, and other data. Strict CSP makes your site the most secure against these kinds of attacks by preventing requests to other servers, unless explicitly allowed. CSP determines what is part of your site and what isn’t. One of the most important aspects of CSP is how it defines the boundaries of your site. Anything not loaded through your site's domain name, such as a logo hosted on a separate company site, is considered a third-party host. This approach to CSP follows the same-origin policy that browsers already enforce. You can access third-party hosted materials, but you must choose a security level for your site first. Then, allow the hosts as appropriate. ## What Is Lightning Locker? Lightning Locker is a Salesforce architectural layer that enhances the security of the third-party Lightning components in your site and custom code in your `head` markup. These third-party components and custom code can contain security vulnerabilities that enable the exfiltration of data and potentially malicious actions using that data. Lightning Locker controls whether third-party components and custom code from different namespaces can share data or interfere with each other. If third-party components or custom code deals with sensitive data, communication between these resources is a special concern. For example, without Lightning Locker, a third-party component could include JavaScript that captures secure data that a customer enters in another component, and then send that data to their own servers. Lightning Locker ensures that third-party components and custom code that interacts with resources in other namespace can run safely even when together on the same page in the browser. Lightning Locker: - Uses containers to isolate all third-party components that belong to one namespace from third-party components in a different namespace. - Enforces coding best practices by only allowing access to supported APIs and eliminating access to non-published frameworks. - Turns on native security features in the browser. By default, Lightning Locker is turned on for your site. Depending on your security level, you can choose to turn off Lightning Locker for all third-party components and custom code. ## Security Levels You can choose from these security levels.
Security Level Description
Strict CSP: Block Access to Inline Scripts and Permits Access to Allowed Hosts

Default setting for sites created in Spring ’19 (February 2019) and later.

Provides maximum security.

  • Blocks the execution of all inline scripts and all requests for remote JavaScript files unless explicitly allowed.
  • Allows the display of non-script resources, such as images, from third-party hosts that are explicitly allowed.
  • Lightning Locker is turned on automatically, but can be turned off.
Relaxed CSP: Permit Access to Inline Scripts and Allowed Hosts

Provides moderate security.

  • Allows inline scripts to run in your site.
  • Allows the loading of remote JavaScript files and the display of non-script resources, such as images, from third-party hosts that are explicitly allowed.
  • Lightning Locker is turned on automatically, but can be turned off.
Allow Inline Scripts and Script Access to Any Third-party Host

Provides no added security, but enables your site to work as currently designed.

  • Blocks nothing.
  • Allows access to all third-party hosts without the need to explicitly allow those hosts.
  • Lightning Locker is turned on and can’t be disabled.
Note
Note This option is only visible for sites created before Spring ’19. In Spring ’22 (February 2022), this option is being removed.
- **[CSP and Lightning Locker Design Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_security_csp_tips.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Whether you’re an administrator, content manager, or developer, be aware of the impact of the different security levels on your Experience Builder site. This impact can be far-ranging and unexpected. - **[Where to Allowlist Third-Party Hosts for Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_security_csp_allow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Regardless of your security level, you must allowlist all non-script resources such as images, style sheets, and fonts that are hosted outside your Experience Builder site. And if you reference external JavaScript files in your site, you must allowlist these remote hosts. - **[Select a Security Level in Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_security_csp_scriptlevel.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Choose a security level to control whether scripts can be executed from your Experience Builder site and whether third-party components and custom code can share data. #### See Also - [_Experience Cloud Developer Guide:_ Enable Third-Party Components to Run When Lightning Locker Is Off](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/communities_dev_security_components.htm) - [_Lightning Web Components Dev Guide:_ Security with Lightning Locker](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/component-library/documentation/en/lwc/security_locker_service) - [_Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide:_ Developing Secure Code](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.lightning.meta/lightning/security_intro.htm) - [Static Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.pages_static_resources.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Custom Lightning Components Build your own custom Lightning components to use in Experience Builder sites. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note As of API version 45.0, you can build Lightning components using two programming models: Lightning Web Components, and the original model, Aura Components. To develop custom Aura components for your Experience Builder site, see [Experience Cloud Developer Guide: Configure Drag-and-Drop Components for Experience Builder](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/components_config_for_builder.htm). To develop custom Lightning web components for your Experience Builder site, see [Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Configure a Component for Experience Builder](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/component-library/documentation/lwc/lwc.use_config_for_community_builder). You can’t incorporate Lightning web components with the 2 column, 2:1 ratio, split-sidebar fixed page layout that’s available in Experience Builder. Use a flexible layout to create a page or page variation in Experience Builder that’s arranged the same way. Custom Lightning components configured for Experience Builder sites behave just like standard template components. Drag the component to the page canvas. To edit its properties, select the component on the page canvas, and then enter changes in the floating component property editor. Custom components appear in the Components panel along with your template’s components. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example A custom component added to the page canvas, with properties open in the property editor: ![Custom Lightning Component open in the page canvas](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_custom_lightning_comp.png) #### See Also - [Create a Flexible Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_flexible_layout.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Build highly customized pages using flexible layouts. Create and resize columns within each section, then add and stack sections to build out the page. Bring it all to life with background images and color.") - [Change the Content Layout in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_change_layout.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Quickly change the look of your Experience Builder site pages by switching to a different content layout. You can even create your own custom content layout components in the Developer Console and import them to use in your site.") # Custom Theme Layouts and Theme Layout Components Theme layouts and theme layout components combine to give you granular control of the appearance and structure of each page in your site. Customize the layout’s header and footer to match your company’s style. Configure theme layout properties. Or use a custom search bar and user profile menu. Then use theme layouts to assign theme layout components to individual pages allowing you to quickly change layouts from one central location. Whether you’re a consulting partner or an ISV, or you simply want to revamp your own site, custom theme layouts make it easy to rebrand. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
A theme layout component is the top-level layout (1) for the template pages in your site. Theme layout components are organized and applied to your pages through theme layouts. A theme layout component includes the common header and footer (2), and often includes navigation, search, and the user profile menu. In contrast, the content layout (3) defines the content regions of your pages. The next image shows a two-column content layout. ![Template page with theme and content layouts, numbered 1-3](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_contentlayout3.png) A theme layout categorizes site pages that share a theme layout component. You can assign a theme layout component to any theme layout. Apply the theme layout in the page’s properties. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To create custom theme layout components in the Developer Console, a developer implements the `forceCommunity:themeLayout` interface. All of our pre-built themes are developed on top of this interface and also use several design property interfaces (color picker, image picker, slider) in Experience Builder. Pre-built themes also take advantage of theme swapping. You can quickly change the overall look and feel of the site without impacting any of the underlying pages, page layouts, and components. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Let’s say you create three pages for your upcoming Spring campaign. You want them to use the Large Header theme layout component that your developer created. In the **Settings** | **Theme** area, you add a custom theme layout called Spring to categorize these pages and assign the Large Header layout component to it. ![The Theme area](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme1.png) Next, apply the Spring theme layout in each page’s properties, which instantly applies the Large Header layout to each page. ![The Page Properties area](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme5.png) To apply the theme layout, select **Override the default theme layout for this page** (1). This selection shows the **Theme Layout** options. Then, choose the new layout (2) from the available choices. Everything looks rosy until your VP of marketing decides that the header takes up too much room. That’s an easy fix because you don’t have to update the properties of each page to change the theme layout. Instead, with one click in the Theme panel, you can switch Spring to the Small Header layout component and instantly update all three pages! ![Spring custom theme layout type](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme3.png) ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Now let’s say that the Small Header layout includes two custom properties—Blue Background and Small Logo. You enabled and applied these properties to all your campaign pages. However, for one page, you want to apply only the Small Logo property. In this case, you could create a theme layout called Spring B, assign the Small Header layout component to it, and enable Small Logo. Then, you apply the Spring B theme to the page. ![Spring custom theme layout type](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme4.png) Not sure which pages are associated with any of your theme layouts? ![Theme Settings panel with Pages Assigned shown](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme_settings.png) With a click and a glance, you can see how many and which pages are associated with any of your theme layouts. From **Settings** | **Theme**, click the Pages Assigned total for any theme layout row (1). Clicking this value opens a list of the pages associated with that theme layout (2). Theme layouts make it easy to reuse the same theme layout component in different ways while maintaining as much granular control as you need. #### See Also - [Developer Guide: Build a Condensed Theme Layout Component](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/communities_dev_example.htm) - [Trailhead: Create a Custom Theme Layout Component](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/projects/communities_theme_layout/steps/create_component) - [Change the Theme Layout of Your Experience Cloud Site’s Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_theme_apply.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A theme layout defines the top-level regions of your page, such as the header and footer, navigation, search, and the user profile menu. A theme layout component categorizes the pages in your site that share a theme layout.") - [_Experience Cloud Developer Guide_: Create Custom Theme Layout Components for Experience Builder](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/components_config_for_builder_layouts.htm) - [_Experience Cloud Developer Guide_: Configure Swappable Search and Profile Menu Components](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/communities_dev_customize_swappable.htm) # Customer Invitations Let users invite customers to the private groups that they own or manage. Customers are users outside your company's email domains. They have limited Chatter access and can see only the groups that they're invited to. They can interact only with members of those groups. ### Required Editions

Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, Developer, and Database.com Editions

Salesforce CRM, Approvals, Chatter email notifications, Chatter Invitations, and customer invitations aren’t available in Database.com.

Customer invitations don’t support My Domain URLs or domains created with single sign-on or IP restrictions. To enable customer invitations with these features in place, we recommend one of these approaches: - Customize the single sign-on page for your organization with an extra link redirecting users to https://MyDomainName.my.salesforce.com/. - Enable single sign-on for your customers. When Chatter is enabled in your org, customer invitations are enabled by default. To disable customer invitations, go to Setup and enter Chatter in the Quick Find box. Select **Chatter Settings** and deselect **Allow Customer Invitations** in the Chatter Settings section. Disabling customer invitations doesn’t delete existing customers or groups that allow customers. #### See Also - [Coworker Invitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_coworker_invitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Salesforce users can invite coworkers without Salesforce licenses to Chatter. Invited users can access Chatter people, profiles, groups, and files, but users without a Salesforce license can’t see record data.") # Customizable User Profile Menu The Customizable User Profile Menu component displays a user’s name or nickname and profile picture. It can also display a company name or icon. If the user isn’t logged in, a Login button appears in the header. Starting in Summer ‘20, the Customizable User Profile Menu component replaces the User Profile component in Experience Builder sites using the new B2B Commerce Template and new sites using specific themes, including Ember, Stella, Webster, Citizen, Cypress, and Jepson. Existing sites using those themes get the new component instead of the old version when they reapply or change the theme. 1. In the page that you’re configuring, click the header component to open the property editor. 2. Expand the Layout section, and select the Customizable User Profile Menu component in the User Profile Component dropdown. 3. Click the Customizable User Profile Menu component to open its property editor. 4. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Login Label Enter a label for the Login button that members use to log in to the site. The default is Log In.
Text Color Choose the color of the text for the log in button.
Text Hover Color Choose the color of the text when the user is hovering over the log in button.
Background Color Choose the background color of the log in button.
Background Hover Color Choose the background color to show when the user is hovering over the log in button.
Border Color Choose the border color of the log in button.
Border Radius (0px - 50px) Set the radius of the button border.
Default Menu Choose the default navigation menu to show to authenticated users. To edit your menu selection, click the Edit button.
Menu Style for Authenticated Users

Choose whether to display a menu icon, the user’s name, or both.

On mobile devices, only the icon is shown.

Icon Choose whether to use a company logo or an avatar as the menu icon.
Include Company Name Opt to include the company name in the user profile menu. The default is to omit it.
Text Orientation Choose whether to display the company name to the right or left of the icon.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - When you import a B2B Commerce template, the My Account and Lists options on navigation menus are dropped. Edit the menu, like the Customizable User Profile menu, and recreate these menu options. - Menu item types system link and event display only in the Customizable User Profile Menu component. # Customizable User Settings The Customizable User Settings component enables your users to customize their site settings. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Customizable User Settings component replaces the User Settings component, which was deprecated in Winter ’21. The customizable user site settings include changing language, locale, and time zone so that the site is localized appropriately. A user can also see their username, change their email or password, and deactivate their account. Users can choose to show their profile details to guest users who aren’t logged in to the site. They can also choose to receive email based on events in the site. If users don’t want to receive email about events in the site, they can disable email notifications. You can customize the labels on many of these fields. 1. Select the **Customizable User Settings** component on the page. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
User Settings Header Customizable label for the settings page. Default text is My Settings.
User ID Value automatically retrieved by the system.
Account Tabs  
Account Management Tab Title Customizable label for the Account Management tab. This tab's account details. Default text is Account Management.
Connected Sources Tab Title Customizable label for the Connected Sources tab. This tab lists external and other data sources to which the user is connected. Default text is Connected Sources.
Hide the Connected Sources tab Prevents the Connected Sources tab from appearing on the Customizable User Settings component.
Location  
Section Header Customizable label for the Location section. This section includes language, locale, and time zone fields. Default text is Location.
Profile Visibility  
Hide section Prevents the Profile Visibility section from appearing on the Customizable User Settings component.
Section Header Customizable label for the Profile Visibility section. This section includes the option to restrict what others can see on a user’s profile page. Default text is Profile Visibility.
Section Description Customizable description of the Profile Visibility section. Default text is Customize who is able to see what on your profile page.
Section Hint Text Customizable hint text that appears when users hover over the help icon next to the description. It defines each visibility level. Default text is Restricted: Visible to the users who created the site. Members: Visible to logged-in members. Public: Visible to anyone viewing pages, logged in or not.
Email Notifications  
Hide section Prevents email notifications from appearing in a user’s personal Chatter settings.
Section Header Customizable label for the Email Notification section. The section includes options for enabling or disabling all or some email notifications. Default text is Email Notifications.
Section Description Customizable description of the section that lists the various actions that send email notifications. Default text is When email notifications are enabled.
Hide feed notification options Prevents feed and post notifications from appearing in a user’s personal Chatter settings.
Account Details

If you have a Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud app listed on the App Store, it’s recommended that you customize the Deactivate Account Button label, and other Deactivate Account user settings, to use the term Delete rather than Deactivate. Learn more about this requirement.

Section Header Customizable label for the Account Details section. This section includes the deactivate account fields. Default text is Account Details.
Hide the Deactivate Account section

Deselect to show the Deactivate Account section on your user's My Settings page.

Before showing the Deactivate Account section, enable the User Self Deactivate setting from Setup | User Management Settings.

Deactivate Account Section Label Customizable label for the Deactivate Account section. Default text is Deactivate Account
Deactivate Account Button Label Customizable label for the Deactivate Account button. Default text is Deactivate My Account
Deactivate Account Confirmation Title Customizable title of the confirmation message. Default text is Deactivate your account?
Deactivate Account Confirmation Message Customizable text of the confirmation message body. Default text is After you deactivate your account, you'll lose access to this site.
Deactivate Account Confirmation Button Label Customizable label of the button for the popup confirmation message. Default text is Got It
Deactivate Account Error Message” Customizable error message displayed if the user is unable to initiate deletion of their account. Default text is Something went wrong. Contact your site administrator.
For orgs where Single Sign-On (SSO) is enabled, consider hiding the Change Password link on a user’s My Settings page. - In Setup, create a permission set, for example Single Sign On Link. - In System permissions, set “Is Single Sign-On Enabled” to On. - Assign the permission set to appropriate users in your org. The “Change password” page no longer appears on their My Settings page. #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") - [_Set Up and Maintain Your Salesforce Organization_: Enable User Self-Deactivation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_deactivate_external_option.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [_Set Up and Maintain Your Salesforce Organization_: Let Users Scramble Their User Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_scramble_user_setting.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [_Data Protection and Privacy_: Data Deletion for Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.data_deletion_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [_Data Protection and Privacy Help_: Data Deletion for the Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.data_deletion_platform.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Customize Chatter Feed Tracking When you enable feed tracking for objects and records, users see updates for the objects and records that they follow in their What I Follow feed. Many objects and fields are tracked by default, but you can further customize feed tracking to include or exclude specific objects and fields. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience

Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, Developer, and Database.com Editions

The Account, Case, Contact, Lead, Opportunity, and User objects aren’t available in Database.com.

Salesforce Connect external objects are available in Developer Edition and, for an extra cost, in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions.

User Permissions Needed
To customize fields tracked in feeds: “Customize Application”
To view the feed tracking setup page: “View Setup and Configuration”
You can configure feed tracking for users, Chatter groups, topics, custom objects, and external objects. You can also set up feed tracking for the following standard objects: - accounts - article types - assets - campaigns - cases - contacts - contracts - dashboards - events - leads - opportunities - products - reports - solutions - tasks ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note In Lightning Experience, most objects don't show a Chatter tab unless feed tracking is enabled for the object. The only exceptions are Group, Site, and User objects. The What I Follow feed shows updates to the tracked fields on the people and objects that a user follows. There’s one exception. Updates that report a user’s own changes to a tracked field appear in the user’s profile feed, but not in What I Follow. 1. From Setup, enter Feed Tracking in the Quick Find box, then select **Feed Tracking**. 2. Select an object. 3. Select Enable Feed Tracking. You must have the required user permissions to see the Enable Feed Tracking checkbox. 4. Select up to 20 of the object’s fields to track. You can’t select fields for external objects or article types. These standard field types can't be tracked: - Auto-number, formula, and roll-up summary fields - Encrypted and read-only system fields - The Expected Revenue field on opportunities - The Solution Title and Solution Details fields on solutions. These fields appear only for translated solutions in organizations with multilingual solutions enabled 5. If you have actions in the publisher enabled, you see the All Related Objects option. To show feed items when related objects are created, select this checkbox. To enable actions in the publisher, in the Setup Quick Find box, enter Chatter, and select Chatter Settings. Under Actions in the Publisher, select Enable Actions in the Publisher. 6. Save your changes. When a value in a tracked field changes, users see a notification about the change in the appropriate feed. #### See Also - [Feed Tracking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_tracking_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Feed tracking detects changes to tracked record fields and posts them as updates in the What I Follow feed. Users who follow a record see those updates in their view of What I Follow, with one exception: Updates that users make themselves aren’t posted to What I Follow. Users can see those updates in their profile feeds.") # Customize Chatter Groups Use record types to create group types with the layout and branding that you want. Then you can create custom groups. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
User Permissions Needed
To create record types for groups: “Create and Edit Record Types for Groups”
Creating a group record type creates a group type that users can choose when they create Chatter groups. 1. From Setup, enter Groups in the Quick Find box, then select **Record Type**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Choose an existing record type as the basis for the new group type. 4. Enter a label and the name of the new record type. The label appears when users select a group type. The name is the unique API name. 5. Enter a description, which is visible to users. 6. To activate the record type, select **Active**. 7. To make the record type available to users with a particular profile, select **Make Available** next to that profile. To enable it for the group type for all profiles, select the checkbox in the header row. 8. Click **Next**. 9. Choose a page layout option for records of this type. 10. Save the record type. # Customize Chatter Influence Customize activity thresholds for posts, comments, and likes to improve the Chatter influence calculation. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize Chatter influence: Customize Application
Chatter activity statistics include counts for posts and comments made, comments received, and likes and upvotes on posts and comments. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If upvotes are enabled, they count toward influence as likes received. 1. From Setup, enter Influence in the Quick Find box, then select **Influence**. 2. Change the minimum activity thresholds. All minimum activity thresholds default to zero. If you set higher thresholds, users who don’t meet all three minimums are considered observers who aren’t counted when calculating influence rank. Users who do meet all three minimums but have relatively low activity are also considered observers, but they’re counted when calculating influence. 3. Click **Save**. Chatter influence is recalculated when you save these values. ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_warning.png) Warning Use caution when setting new thresholds because users’ influence levels can change immediately. #### See Also - [Salesforce Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_setting_up.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With Chatter, users can collaborate on sales opportunities, service cases, campaigns, and projects with embedded apps and custom actions. Salesforce channels, which bring Slack into Salesforce, are another way to collaborate on records. In new orgs created in Summer ’26 and later, Salesforce channels are enabled by default, and Chatter is disabled. You can enable Chatter in these orgs if necessary, and you can continue to use Chatter in existing orgs.") # Customize Code for Lightning Components on Login Pages To add custom logic to the Login pages in Experience Builder sites, customize the Lightning component for those pages. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create and edit Lightning components: Customize Application
Each site has these default Login pages: Check Password, Forgot Password, Login, Login Error, and Register. And each Login page has a standard Lightning component that drives this functionality. If your company or site has any usability, security, or accessibility requirements that aren't supported by preconfigured login components, you can customize the login experience by creating custom components and adding code logic. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Lightning Components, and then select **Lightning Components**. 2. To customize a component, click the one that you want. For example, to customize the login experience, click loginForm. ![List of Lightning components](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lightning_components.png) 3. On the Lightning component detail page, click **Developer Console**. 4. In the Developer Console workspace, add `implements="forceCommunity:availableForAllPageTypes"` to the `` tag. Implementing the `forceCommunity:availableForAllPageTypes` interface exposes the component in Experience Builder. 5. Add custom code logic and save your changes as a new custom component. 6. Go back to Experience Builder in your site and bring up the Login page from the list of pages. The custom component you created appears on the list of components. ![Custom Lightning component in Experience Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_lightning_custom_component.png) # Customize Content Fields Create, modify, and delete Salesforce CRM Content custom fields so you can categorize and define your content. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create, edit, or delete custom fields:

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

OR

Manage Content Properties

To create, modify, and delete Salesforce CRM Content custom fields for categorizing and defining your content, go to the object management settings for content. If you're using Lightning Experience, go to the Object Manager, select **Content Version**, then scroll to the fields area. If you're using Salesforce Classic, enter Salesforce Files in the Quick Find box, then select **Fields**. The data assigned to these fields during upload is available on the content details page for the life of the file. After creating custom content fields, you must assign them to a page layout. The page layout determines which fields appear when a user uploads or revises files in Salesforce CRM Content. 1. Click **New**. 2. Choose the type of field to create, and click **Next**. 3. For relationship fields, associate an object with the field and click **Next**. 4. Enter a field label. The field name is automatically populated based on the field label you enter. This name can contain only underscores and alphanumeric characters, and must be unique in your org. It must begin with a letter, not include spaces, not end with an underscore, and not contain two consecutive underscores. Ensure the custom field name is not identical to any standard field name for that object. 5. Choose the page layout that should display the field as an editable field. Click **Edit** or **Del** in the Content Custom Fields & Relationships related list to edit or delete a custom content field. You can’t edit or delete the standard content fields. Deleted custom fields and their data are stored until your org permanently deletes them or 15 days has elapsed, whichever happens first. Until that time, you can restore the field and its data. #### See Also - [Customize Salesforce CRM Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Modify content fields, validation rules, library permissions, and other default settings.") # Customize Content Settings Modify the defaults for your Salesforce CRM Content organization and control settings like feature licenses, multilanguage search, and enhanced document viewer. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To modify Salesforce CRM Content settings: Manage Salesforce CRM Content
1. From Setup, enter Salesforce CRM Content in the Quick Find box, then select **Salesforce CRM Content**. 2. You can modify the following defaults for your Salesforce CRM Content organization: | Option | Description | | --- | --- | | Enable Salesforce CRM Content | If this option is checked, Salesforce CRM Content is enabled for your organization. | | Autoassign feature licenses to existing and new users | If this option is checked, Salesforce automatically attempts to assign Salesforce CRM Content feature licenses to all existing users. If there aren’t enough licenses available, no licenses are assigned. Contact Salesforce to request more feature licenses. When a new user is created, a Salesforce CRM Content feature license is automatically assigned as long as licenses are available. A feature license corresponds to the Salesforce CRM Content User checkbox on the user detail page. | | Enable multilanguage search and contribute | If this option is checked, a Language dropdown list is available when users publish, edit, or search for content. The Language dropdown list contains all languages that Salesforce supports. If a user doesn’t choose a language when publishing content, that content is associated with the user’s personal language by default. If a user’s personal language setting is different from the organization’s language, content published by that user is associated with the user’s language, not the organization’s language. | #### See Also - [Customize Salesforce CRM Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Modify content fields, validation rules, library permissions, and other default settings.") - [Allow Content Previews in Link Posts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_rich_previews.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Salesforce provides rich media support for over 400 URL domains. When you share a supported link in a post, it’s converted into embedded videos, images, and other types of previews.") # Customize Email Sent from Experience Cloud Sites You can customize email sender information and Chatter email branding. You can also customize email templates, such as templates for welcoming new members and resetting members’ passwords. Decide how Salesforce sends emails for users with unverified email domains, and customize email templates in the user interface. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important System-generated emails from an unverified email-sending domain aren’t delivered, even if the From email address is verified. See [Requirements to Send Email from Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_email_verification_requirements.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites**. Next to your Experience Cloud site, click **Workspaces**. 2. Click **Administration**, and then select **Emails**. 3. Enter custom values for the email sender’s name and address to replace the default values. For security reasons, the sender's email must be verified to create an Experience Cloud site and to send welcome emails to new site members. If you change the sender’s email address, we send a verification email to the new address. The change is pending, and we continue to use the existing address while we await verification. The requested address doesn’t take effect until you click the confirmation link in the verification email. If verification is pending for a new email address and you specify a different new address, we retain the latest value and use that value for verification. If you enter a custom value for the sender’s address and you have enabled mail relay, your Chatter emails use the relay. 4. Optional: Emails that contain sensitive data are sent through Salesforce's servers instead of through your corporate email relay. To use an alternative email address for messages that contain sensitive data without modifying your primary domain's DKIM settings, select **Use a secondary sender email address**. Then enter a custom value for the secondary sender email address. If you turn on secondary sender, emails that don’t contain sensitive data are still sent through your corporate email relay. For security reasons, you must verify the email-sending domain for the secondary sender address and the secondary sender address itself before emails are sent through it. Message routing with secondary sender depends on several factors. For example, in some cases messages like the Welcome New Member email include sensitive authentication information and are sent through the secondary sender address. However, if your members log in via single sign-on (SSO), then the Welcome New Member email doesn’t include authentication information, so it’s sent via your configured email relay and network sender address. 5. Optional: Decide how your site sends emails on behalf of users with an unverified email domain. Salesforce offers two ways to set the From address for email sent on behalf of a user with an unverified email domain. An org-wide substitute email address, set on the Deliverability Setup page, applies across your org. To use the address in your site's Sender Email Address field instead, select **Enable Email Domain Substitution**. In either case, the sender email address must be verified and use a verified email domain, or the email fails. If you turn on email domain substitution, the site's verified sender address takes precedence, even if your org has a substitute email address set. If you don't turn on email domain substitution, Salesforce uses your org's substitute email address instead, when one is set. If neither option is set, or if you turn on email domain substitution but your site's email sender address isn't verified, Salesforce suppresses email sent on behalf of a user with an unverified email domain. For examples of how different configurations send messages on behalf of users with an unverified email domain, see [Send Email for Users with Unverified Domains](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_user_email_verification_substitute_domain.htm&language=en_US). 6. Customize the content that appears in the footer of Chatter emails. All Chatter emails display the Chatter logo and Salesforce information by default unless you replace them with your logo and information. If you previously customized the logo or footer text and want to restore the default values, use the API to set these fields to `null`. 1. To replace the default Chatter logo, choose a logo. The logo must be an existing document in the Documents tab and must be marked Externally Available Image. Images of 150 x 50 pixels on a transparent background work best. 2. To replace the default footer text, enter up to 1,000 characters. The default text includes the Salesforce name and physical address. We recommend including your physical address to comply with applicable anti-spam laws. 7. To send email to users when they’re added to the site, select **Send welcome email**. Welcome emails contain login information for external members. If you don’t select this option, you must send username and password information directly to the user who’s registering for your site. Salesforce sends welcome emails when: - A site changes from Preview status to Active status. An inactive site doesn’t receive emails unless the associated org has a default portal or if the user’s profile is part of an active portal. - An admin adds a profile or permission set to an active site. - A user of an active site is assigned a profile or permission set. You can set the duration that the link provided in the welcome email is valid. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then click **Digital Experiences** | **Settings**. 2. Change the link expiration duration under New User Email Settings and save your work. If a profile or permission set is part of multiple sites, users with that profile or permission set receive a welcome email from each site. The first email contains login credentials, but emails from subsequent sites simply contain a link to the site. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The BCC compliance email setting isn't available for Experience Cloud site welcome emails. 8. To send email to users when they receive a one-time password, for One-Time Password, look up and select the email template, Communities: One-Time Password Email. This one-time password email message isn’t enabled by default. If you don’t select this option, Salesforce sends a generic message for identity verification. Salesforce sends one-time password verification emails to verify a user’s identity. Salesforce also sends emails with one-time passwords for device activation when users log in from an unfamiliar browser, app, or IP address. This use case isn't covered by the One-Time Password email template. To customize emails sent for device activation, use the Device Activation Verification email template. - An external user attempts to log in to your Experience Cloud site with an email address. - An external user attempts to register a mobile or Universal 2nd Factor (U2F) device. - An external user changes their email address. 9. To select an email template for Forgot Password, Change Password, Case Comment, User Lockout, One-Time Password, Old Email Address Change Verification, New Email Address Change Verification, Device Activation Verification, Self-Registration Micro-Batch Error, or One-Time Password For Headless Forgot Password Flow, click ![Lookup magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png). Then select an email template from the list. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Password reset links expire after 24 hours. You can customize the default email templates. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note When you customize the contents of a default email template, use the {!Community\_Url} merge field to populate the URL for the current Experience Cloud site. This field ensures that emails have the correct URL to direct users to the appropriate site. The `{!Community_url}` merge field isn’t available for the User Lockout template. 10. Save your changes. The system sends emails related to approvals, workflows, and changes to unscoped objects, like cases, based on site membership. For example, if a workflow triggers an email, all the recipients are grouped based on-site membership and then one email is sent to each group. If the user is a member of multiple active sites, the email comes from the oldest active site. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Objects that you can see whether you’re in a site or your internal Salesforce org are called unscoped objects. Unscoped objects include records like opportunities, accounts, cases, and the like. Another way to customize site emails is to use these fields on the API Network object. - CaseCommentEmailTemplateId—ID of the email template used when submitting a comment on a case. - ChangePasswordEmailTemplateId—ID of the email template used when notifying users that their password has been reset. - ChgEmailVerNewEmailTemplateId—ID of the email template used when notifying users that their email address has been changed. This template is sent to the new email address. - ChgEmailVerOldEmailTemplateId—ID of the email template used when notifying users that their email address has been changed. This template is sent to the old email address. - DeviceActEmailTemplateId—ID of the email template used when users log in from an unrecognized browser, app, or IP address. The email contains a one-time password that users enter to verify their identity. - EmailFooterLogoId—ID of the Document object that displays as an image in the footer of the site Chatter emails. - EmailFooterText—Text that displays in the footer of site Chatter emails. - EmailSenderAddress—Read only. Email address from which site emails are sent. - EmailSenderName—Name from which site emails are sent. - ForgotPasswordEmailTemplateId—ID of the email template used when users forget their password. - LockoutEmailTemplateId—ID of the email template used when users try to reset their password after locking themselves out of their site from too many login attempts. - NewSenderAddress—Email address that has been entered as the new value for EmailSenderAddress but hasn’t been verified yet. After a user has requested to change the sender email address and has successfully responded to the verification email, the NewSenderAddress value overwrites the value in EmailSenderAddress. This value becomes the email address from which site emails are sent. - If verification is pending for a new email address, and you set NewSenderAddress to null, the verification request is canceled. - NewSenderAddress is automatically set to null after EmailSenderAddress has been set to the new verified address. - If verification is pending for a new email address, and you specify a different new address for this field, only the latest value is retained and used for verification. - OptionsSendWelcomeEmail—Determines whether a welcome email is sent when a new user is added to the site. - VerificationEmailTemplateId—ID of the email template used when users must verify their identity, for example, when they log in without a password or from a new device. - WelcomeEmailTemplateId—ID of the email template used when sending welcome emails to new site members. #### See Also - [Merge Fields for Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.merge_fields_communities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can personalize the email that you send to Experience Cloud site members by adding merge fields to your email templates.") - [Customize Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Update basic site settings like your site URL, site name, members, login options, and general preferences in the Administration tile of Experience Workspaces.") - [Customize Buttons on the Tabbed Activity Composer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.activitytimeline_configure_call_task_event_tabs.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Use Your Classic Email Templates in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.classic_templates_in_lightning.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Customize Experience Builder Site Libraries with Images Give each library a unique look by branding it with an image. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize a library:

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

OR

Manage Library checked in your library permission definition

Library users can identify libraries at a glance without having to figure out which library to access. Library administrators can change images as libraries evolve or switch off branding for their sites. ![Customize library folders.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/files_library_branding.png) 1. To add a custom library image, from Files Home, click the dropdown to the right of a library, and choose **Edit Library Details**. ![Edit a library from the dropdown on the right.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/214_manage_libraries.png) 2. Click the **Upload Image** button under Library Image. For best results, choose an image in a 16:9 aspect ratio (for example, 480 pixels by 270 pixels). ![Add a custom image to a library.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/files_home_edit_asset_library.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Branded library images are visible only in the desktop Libraries component tile view. Depending on their permissions, some external users can see library asset images, even if they’re not library members. Choose images that you’d like everyone to see. You can remove custom images anytime. If you don’t add a custom image, the default library image appears on the folder. # Customize Experience Cloud Site Libraries with Images Give each library a unique look by branding it with an image. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize a library:

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

OR

Manage Library

Library users can identify libraries at a glance without having to figure out which library to access. Library administrators can change images as libraries evolve or switch off branding. ![Customize library folders.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/files_library_branding.png) 1. To add a custom library image, from Files Home, click the dropdown to the right of a library, and choose **Edit Library Details**. ![Edit a library from the dropdown on the right.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/manage_libraries.png) 2. Click **Upload Image** under Library Image. For best results, choose an image in a 16:9 aspect ratio (for example, 480 pixels by 270 pixels). ![Add a custom image to a library.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/files_home_edit_asset_library.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Branded library images are visible only in the desktop Libraries component tile view. Depending on their permissions, some external users can see library asset images, even if they’re not library members. Choose images that you’d like everyone to see. You can remove custom images anytime. If you don’t add a custom image, the default library image appears on the folder. # Customize Login, Self-Registration, and Password Management for Your Experience Cloud Site Configure the default login, logout, password management, and self-registration options for your site. Or customize the behavior with Apex and Visualforce or Experience Builder (Site.com Studio) pages. You can also use dynamic URLs to brand your pages at run time. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
By default, each site comes with default login, logout, password management, and self-registration pages. Salesforce also includes associated Apex controllers that drive this functionality under the hood. You can use Experience Builder or Visualforce to create custom branding and change the default behavior. ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_warning.png) Warning When you customize a login page or any page that includes fields with sensitive or confidential information with Experience Builder, we recommend that you use only standard components built by Salesforce or components that you built, customized, or vetted. Use of third-party components and code libraries on a page that includes fields with sensitive or confidential information can increase your risk for security vulnerabilities. - **[Brand Your Identity Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.external_identity_branding_use_cases.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a branded identity experience by customizing the design of the pages users see when they log in to your site, verify their identity, reset passwords, and self-register. - **[Set Up Dynamic URLs with Experience Workspaces](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.external_identity_dynamic_set_up_reg_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You set up dynamic URLs for your login experience from the Login & Registration page of the Administration workspace. Create dynamic URLs by including a placeholder that resolves at run time. Implement the dynamic URLs for the logo and right-frame content on the pages used to log in, verify identity, reset passwords, and self-register. - **[Redirect Users to a Custom Logout URL](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.external_identity_use_custom_logout_url.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When your customers log out, they're directed to your site login page by default. To redirect them to a different location, such as your company website or a Visualforce page, specify a custom logout URL. - **[Customize Your Forgot Password and Reset Password Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.external_identity_password_management_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can customize your Forgot Password and Reset Password pages from the Administration workspace. You can also create custom password management pages in Visualforce. - **[Configure Your Self-Registration Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.external_identity_create_registration_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you decide which page type is best for your company, set up self-registration from the Login & Registration page in Experience Workspaces. - **[Customize the Self-Registration Apex Controller](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_self_reg_apex.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For even more control, you can customize how customers and partners register for your site by modifying the default self-registration controller or by replacing it with your own custom controller. You can customize the self-registration controller regardless of which page type you're using. # Customize Opportunities for Deal Registration Create an opportunity process, page layout, and record type, similar to leads. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Many companies create separate sales processes for their direct and indirect sales opportunities. Some companies prefer to expose a shorter list of opportunity stage values that are less granular compared to stages used by their direct sales team. 1. [Create an opportunity process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_process_deal_reg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A process allows you to define or customize the stages in the sales process for leads or opportunities."). 2. [Create two opportunity page layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_page_layouts_partners_deal_reg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use page layouts to control field visibility and behavior for different types of users and sales processes. There are likely fields on leads that you might not want to expose only to channel managers and not partners."), one for partner users and one for channel managers. 3. [Create an opportunity record type to track registered deals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_recordtypes_partners_deal_reg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a lead record type to track deals submitted by partners in Experience Cloud sites. Record types help you differentiate between sales leads and registered deals, assign page layouts for each profile for deal registration, and simplify reporting by lead record type."), different from the opportunity record type you use to track direct sales opportunities. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip - Many companies struggle with how to report on channel versus internal sales. Using separate record types to categorize opportunities by who is working on them— internal sales teams or partners—allows you to report on direct and channel sales separately. - Make this opportunity record type the default for partner users. This ensures they see the same record type when the opportunity is converted, regardless of who does the conversion. - Add the Deal Registration value to the Lead Source picklist values for the opportunity record type. 4. [Map any custom fields](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=customize_mapleads.htm&language=en_US) on the lead record type to the opportunity record type for deal registration. # Customize Page Layouts for Partner Fund Allocations Page layouts control field visibility and behavior for different types of users. Channel account managers need to create and update allocations, but the company may not wish to expose some information about allocations to partner users. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create or customize page layouts Customize Application
Create a marketing fund allocation page layout for the channel account manager. 1. From Setup, enter Allocation in the Quick Find box, then select **Page Layouts** under Partner Fund Allocation. 2. Create a Partner Fund Allocation [page layout](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=customize_layout.htm&language=en_US) for channel account managers by cloning the primary partner fund allocation layout. Let’s call this **Marketing Fund Allocation - CAM**. 3. Modify the page layout to add, remove, or modify the behavior of fields, action buttons, related lists, and layouts based on who the layout is for. Typically, channel managers create and update fund allocations. 4. Save the page layout. # Customize Page Layouts for Partner Fund Claims Page layouts control field visibility and behavior for different types of users. Partner users submit fund claims and channel account managers approve and reimburse them. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create or customize page layouts Customize Application
Create two partner fund claim page layouts: one for the channel account manager (CAM) and one for the partner user. 1. From Setup, enter Claim in the Quick Find box, then select **Page Layouts** under Partner Fund Claim. 2. Create a partner fund claim [page layout](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=customize_layout.htm&language=en_US) for channel account managers by cloning the primary partner fund claim layout. Let’s call this **Marketing Fund Claim- CAM**. 3. Modify the page layout to add, remove, or modify the behavior of fields, action buttons, related lists, and layouts based on who the layout is for. Typically, channel managers approve and update requests. 4. Save the page layout. 5. Create another page layout for the partner users, keeping in mind that they submit fund claims, but don’t approve them. # Customize Page Layouts for Partner Fund Requests Page layouts control field visibility and behavior for different types of users. Partner users submit fund requests and channel account managers approve them. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create or customize page layouts Customize Application
Create two partner fund request page layouts: one for the channel account manager (CAM) and one for the partner user. 1. From Setup, enter Request in the Quick Find box, then select **Page Layouts** under Partner Fund Request. 2. Create a Partner Fund Request [page layout](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=customize_layout.htm&language=en_US) for channel account managers by cloning the primary partner fund request layout. Let’s call this **Marketing Fund Request- CAM**. 3. Modify the page layout to add, remove, or modify the behavior of fields, action buttons, related lists, and layouts based on who the layout is for. Typically, channel managers approve and update requests. 4. Save the page layout. 5. Create another page layout for the partner users, keeping in mind that they submit fund requests. # Customize Page Layouts for Partner Marketing Budgets Page layouts control field visibility and behavior for different types of users. Channel account managers must create and update budgets. The company may not want partner users to have access to budgets. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create or customize page layouts Customize Application
Create a partner marketing budget page layout for the channel account manager (CAM). 1. From Setup, enter Budget in the Quick Find box, then select **Page Layouts** under Partner Marketing Budget. 2. Create a Partner Marketing Budget [page layout](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=customize_layout.htm&language=en_US) for channel account managers by cloning the primary partner marketing budget layout. Let’s call this **Marketing Budget - CAM**. 3. Modify the page layout to add, remove, or modify the behavior of fields, action buttons, related lists, and layouts based on who the layout is for. Typically, channel managers create and update budgets. 4. Save the page layout. # Customize Partner Central for Deal Registration Partner Central comes predesigned to support deal registration. Use the Quick Create button to share a global action to submit registered deals. The template contains lead and deal list views for partner users. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
1. In your Partner Central site, go to the Home page in Experience Builder. 2. Click the **Quick Create** component and add another global action. By default, a New Account action is added. Click it and select the [global action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_deal_reg_global_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a global action to allow partners to register deals from Experience Cloud sites. Partner Central comes with a Quick Create button that you can add the global action to so partners can register deals.") you created for partners to register deals. 3. To save your changes, publish the site. 4. Log in as a partner to test the deal registration process. 1. Submit a couple registered deals from the Quick Create button. 2. In a different browser, log in to see if the approval workflows are working. Approve or reject a deal. 3. Back in the site, check the lead and deal list views as partner. # Customize Partner Central for Lead Distribution Partner Central comes predesigned to support lead distribution. Verify that the Lead Inbox component works with your lead queue and list view and test the lead distribution process. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
1. In your Partner Central site, go to the Home page in Experience Builder. 2. Click the Lead Inbox component and select the lead list view you want to display and link to. Configure other properties in the Property Editor. 3. To save your changes, publish the site. 4. Log in as a partner to test the lead distribution process. - Create a few test leads that match the assignment rules for the lead queue. - Make sure that the leads show up in the lead inbox queue and list view. - Accept a lead. Accepting a lead makes the partner the owner of the lead. - Verify that the lead shows up in the partners list view. # Customize Recommendations in Experience Cloud Sites Create recommendations to drive engagement for your Experience Cloud site, encouraging users to watch videos, take trainings, and more. Target specific audiences and use channels to specify locations for the recommendations. ### Required Editions ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Recommendation audiences and personalization audiences are different features. For a more updated content targeting experience, we suggest using [CMS collections](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=community_managed_content_collections.htm&type=5&language=en_US) and [personalization audiences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=community_builder_page_visibilty_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US).
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To access Experience Workspaces or Experience Management:

Manage Experiences

OR

Create and Set Up Experiences

1. In Experience Workspaces, select **Content Management** | **Recommendations**. 2. Select **Default Channel** or one of the custom channels. A channel is a way to group recommendations together so you can determine where they show up in the site. Default Channel Recommendations in the default channel appear in predefined locations, such as the Home and Question Detail pages in Customer Service and Partner Central templates. Custom Channel You choose the pages where you want these recommendations to appear. In Experience Builder, add the Recommendations Carousel component to the page where you want the recommendation to appear. Use the property editor to specify the custom channel with the recommendation. Using a custom channel, you could surface a recommendation to review specific knowledge articles on a product description page to guide customers to more information. If you want to change the channel of a recommendation, delete the recommendation and recreate it in a different channel. 3. Click **New**. 4. Complete the following fields: - Name—Enter a name for the recommendation. This name doesn’t appear in the site. - Image—Click **Upload Image** to include an image with your recommendation. - Title—Optionally, enter header text that appears above the image. - Description—Enter detailed text that suggests what users can do. - Button text—Enter a label for the button in the recommendation. - https://—Enter the URL that the button opens. The URL can contain context variables to pass information about the user who clicked the recommendation and the context in which it was clicked. For example, include a `{!userId}` context variable in your URL, https://www.example.com/doSurvey?userId={!userId}. When a user clicks the button in the recommendation, Salesforce sends the ID of that user to your server in the HTTP request. Recommendations support these context variables. | Context Variable | Description | | --- | --- | | `{!actionLinkId}` | The ID of the recommendation link that the user clicked. | | `{!actionLinkGroupId}` | The ID of the recommendation link group containing the recommendation that the user clicked. | | `{!communityId}` | The ID of the site in which the user clicked the recommendation. The value for your internal Salesforce org is the empty key, `"000000000000000000"`. | | `{!orgId}` | The ID of the org in which the user clicked the recommendation. | | `{!userId}` | The ID of the user that clicked the recommendation. | - Audience—Select an audience for the recommendation. If you don’t select an audience, all members of the site see the recommendation. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To create an audience that appears in this dropdown list, in Experience Workspaces, select **Content Management** | **Recommendations** | **Audiences**. Click **New**. - Enabled—If checked, this recommendation is active and appears in sites. The Recommendations Carousel displays your custom recommendations and also displays system-generated topic recommendations for your site. After a site member clicks or dismisses a recommendation, it no longer appears for that member. 5. Click **Save**. So that users don’t see the same recommendations all the time, Salesforce periodically removes and brings back custom recommendations that haven’t been accepted or dismissed. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To remove a recommendation, click the recommendation name. At the bottom of the recommendation details, click **Delete**. - **[Create Audiences for Your Recommendations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recs_audience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create audiences of new members or use the API to manage customized lists of audience members for your custom recommendations. #### See Also - [Update Your Experience Builder Site’s Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.communities_update_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "We introduce amazing features and enhancements with every release, so it pays to keep your Experience Builder site up to date! Typically, we automatically update your template to the latest version, so you can start adding the newest features to your site right away. However, when the changes are significant, you’re required to update your template manually.") # Customize Salesforce CRM Content Modify content fields, validation rules, library permissions, and other default settings. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create, edit, or delete content fields:

Manage Content Properties

OR

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

To define or change field validation rules: Customize Application
To create, edit, or delete library permissions:

Manage Content Permissions

OR

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

Modify content settings: Manage Salesforce CRM Content
From Setup, enter Salesforce CRM Content in the Quick Find box, and select **Salesforce CRM Content** to access the following options for customizing Salesforce CRM Content: - **Content Fields**—[Create, edit, or delete custom content fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create, modify, and delete Salesforce CRM Content custom fields so you can categorize and define your content."). Custom fields allow users to categorize and define content during the publishing process. - **Validation Rules**—Create, edit, or delete validation rules. Validation rules verify that the data a user enters when publishing content meets the standards you specify before the user can save the content. - **Library Permissions**—[Create, edit, or delete library permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_workspace_perm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A library permission is a group of privileges assigned to each Salesforce CRM Content library member. It determines the tasks that a member can perform in a particular library. The same user can have a different library permission in each library."). A library permission determines user privileges within a library. - **Settings**—[Modify Salesforce CRM Content default settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Modify the defaults for your Salesforce CRM Content organization and control settings like feature licenses, multilanguage search, and enhanced document viewer.") for multi-language support, PDF downloads, content pack creation, or the enhanced document viewer. #### See Also - [Set Up Salesforce CRM Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_initialsetup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up Salesforce CRM Content in your org to enable content libraries and set up permissions.") # Customize Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites Update basic site settings like your site URL, site name, members, login options, and general preferences in the Administration tile of Experience Workspaces. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
You can customize your site at any time, but if you plan to make major changes, we recommend deactivating the site first. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Administration**, then select what you want to customize. - [Add Members to Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_customize_members.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Add Tabs to Your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_tabs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you’re using the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template, you can add tabs to your site.") - [Brand Your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_branding.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you’re using the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template, you can customize the look and feel of your site in Experience Workspaces. You can add your own logo, colors, and copyright so that your site matches your company's branding and is instantly recognizable to your site members.") - [Customize Login, Self-Registration, and Password Management for Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_login.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the default login, logout, password management, and self-registration options for your site. Or customize the behavior with Apex and Visualforce or Experience Builder (Site.com Studio) pages. You can also use dynamic URLs to brand your pages at run time.") - [Customize Email Sent from Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can customize email sender information and Chatter email branding. You can also customize email templates, such as templates for welcoming new members and resetting members’ passwords. Decide how Salesforce sends emails for users with unverified email domains, and customize email templates in the user interface.") - [Override Default Pages in Your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_page_overrides.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "For Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites, you can use company-branded Home and Service Not Available pages by overriding the standard pages in your site.") - [Configure Settings in Your Administration Workspace](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_miscellaneous.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure settings in your administration workspace, and enable other optional features in your Experience Cloud site such as user nicknames, guest access, private messages, direct messages, content flagging, and reputation levels.") - [Update Your Experience Cloud Site’s Name, Status, and Description](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Manage your Experience Cloud site name, description, status, and template all from one location.") 3. To share the site with stakeholders while it's still in Preview, copy the URL displayed on the **Administration** | **Administration** page. By sharing your site in Preview, you can get useful feedback to incorporate before going live. Also, by having early members post, comment, and share records, your site appears active when members log in to the site for the first time. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You must add users as members of the site before you can share the site URL. After you finish customizing your site, activate the site to make it available to members. If you [enable welcome emails](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can customize email sender information and Chatter email branding. You can also customize email templates, such as templates for welcoming new members and resetting members’ passwords. Decide how Salesforce sends emails for users with unverified email domains, and customize email templates in the user interface.") when you activate, a welcome email is sent to all members. If users are new portal users, their welcome email includes their username and password. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can't publish or unpublish a site that uses a Saleforce Tabs + Visualforce template. To make the site inaccessible, deactivate it. - **[Brand Your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_branding.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you’re using the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template, you can customize the look and feel of your site in Experience Workspaces. You can add your own logo, colors, and copyright so that your site matches your company's branding and is instantly recognizable to your site members. - **[Enable the Global Header for Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_global_header.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site and Salesforce Classic, the global header lets you switch between your sites and your Salesforce org. - **[Choose a Landing Tab](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_landing_tab.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you are using the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template, you can select a landing tab for your site. - **[Enable Leads for Visualforce Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_leads_for_external_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you are using the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template, enable leads for partner users in your Experience Cloud site so that they can access and create leads in your sites. # Customize Sites with Experience Builder Experience Builder lets you easily style your site, create and customize pages, add drag-and-drop components, and deliver personalized experiences to different audiences. Choose a template to quickly start your site, and then style the pages to match your company’s branding. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
- **[Find Your Way Around Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_ui.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Builder lets you quickly create and style your Aura or LWR site to match your organization’s branding. - **[Apply Role-Based Access to an Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_access_control_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use role-based access to control who does what in a community, portal, or site. Assign roles to your contributors with the level of access they need in a specific experience. A contributor’s access role is specific to an Experience Builder site. A contributor can have different access roles in different sites. - **[Add Style to Your Experience Builder Site with Themes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_theme_understanding.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A theme is a collection of information that defines the visual flow of your Experience Builder site. - **[Find and Create Asset Files in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_find_create_assets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Upload and select images for your header, logo, rich content editor, and custom components using the file selector in Experience Builder. After they're uploaded, files are converted to packageable asset files and stored in your org asset library for easy reference and retrieval. - **[Experience Builder Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_general_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Settings area to track which template you’re using, view your site’s status and publication history, and customize your template. If you’re using the Customer Service template, access your navigational and featured topic settings. - **[Preview Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_preview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before going live, you can preview your Experience Builder site to see how it looks in a desktop browser window or on a mobile device. - **[Publish Your Experience Builder Site Customizations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_publish.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Publish your Aura or LWR site in Experience Builder to make your site updates and component customization updates available to your site members. #### See Also - [Find Your Way Around Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_ui.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Builder lets you quickly create and style your Aura or LWR site to match your organization’s branding.") - [Experience Builder Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_general_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Settings area to track which template you’re using, view your site’s status and publication history, and customize your template. If you’re using the Customer Service template, access your navigational and featured topic settings.") # Customize the Apex Login Controller Salesforce provides an easy way to customize your login process using the Login Discovery Page, which lets you implement passwordless login. However, if you want even more control over your login process, you can modify the Apex login controllers and use customized Visualforce pages. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create and edit Visualforce pages: Customize Application
To edit Apex classes:

Author Apex

AND

Customize Application

You can use these steps to customize the login process for Default, Experience Builder, and Visualforce Pages. If you're using the Login Discovery Page to implement passwordless login programmatically, see [Email or Phone Number Registration with Passwordless Login](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.external_identity_passwordless_login_in_apex.htm&type=5&language=en_US). For more information on Login Pages, see [Login Page Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.external_identity_login_discovery_login_types.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Apex Classes, and then select **Apex Classes**. 2. Next to `CommunitiesLoginController`, click **Edit**. 3. Add the following code. ```java global PageReference forwardToCustomAuthPage() { String startUrl = System.currentPageReference().getParameters().get('startURL'); return new PageReference(Site.getPathPrefix() + '/SiteLogin?startURL=' + EncodingUtil.urlEncode(startURL, 'UTF-8')); } ``` 4. If you created a custom login page, replace `SiteLogin` with the name of your Visualforce page. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Click **Edit** next to `CommunitiesLandingController`. 7. Add this code. ```java public PageReference forwardToCustomAuthPage() { String startUrl = System.currentPageReference().getParameters().get('startURL'); return new PageReference(Site.getPathPrefix() + '/SiteLogin?startURL=' + EncodingUtil.urlEncode(startURL, 'UTF-8')); } ``` 8. If you created a custom login page, replace `SiteLogin` with the name of your Visualforce page. 9. Click **Save**. 10. From Setup, enter Visualforce Pages in the Quick Find box, then select **Visualforce Pages**. 11. Click **Edit** next to `CommunitiesLogin`. 12. In the first line of code, add the following: ``` action="{!forwardToCustomAuthPage}" ``` 13. Click **Save**. 14. Click **Edit** next to `CommunitiesLanding`. 15. In the first line of code, add the following: ``` action="{!forwardToCustomAuthPage}" ``` 16. Click **Save**. # Customize the Branding of the Search Results Page Customize the branding of the Object Navigation panel, the No Results page, and Filters. You can customize the text, buttons, background, and images to fit your company’s brand. 1. To format the page that appears when a visitor’s search doesn’t return any results, expand the **No results settings** section. You can upload a branded image to replace the default image and customize the page title and description. ![No Results configuration in Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_crm_search_no_results.png) 2. To include the user’s search term and the selected object in the title text of the No Results page, use dynamic field values. - To include the search term, enter {1} in the title. - To include the object that is selected, enter {0} in the title. For example, if your title text is We couldn’t find any results for {1} in {0}, and the visitor entered Oranges while searching the Account object, then the No Results text is **We couldn’t find any results for Oranges in Accounts**. ![No Results title text](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_crm_search_no_results_title.png) 3. To customize the background, text, and padding of the Object Navigation panel, expand **Object Navigation Settings** in the Results Layout properties panel. The Object Navigation Settings section is only available on desktop. ![Object Navigation Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_crm_object_nav_settings.png) 4. To customize Filter settings, buttons, texts, and branding, expand **Filter Settings** in the Results Layout properties panel. ![Filter Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_crm_search_filter_settings.png) 5. Preview and publish your site. # Customize the Chatter Group Layout and Publisher Add and remove fields, buttons, look-ups, and related lists to change the layout of groups. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize Chatter group layouts: Customize Application
1. From Setup, enter Group Layouts in the Quick Find box, then select **Group Layouts**. 2. Click **Edit** next to the group layout that you want to customize, or click **New** to create a layout. 3. From the palette on the top of the page, drag fields, buttons, and other user interface elements. Drag these elements to different sections to add them to the group layout. To remove elements from the layout, drag them back to the palette. To make sure your action works in the Salesforce mobile app and Lightning Experience, be sure the following are in your group layout: - Post - Announcement (announcements aren’t available in the Salesforce mobile app) - File - Poll - Edit Group - New Group Member - Manage Notifications - Delete Group - Leave Group All group layout changes affect the Salesforce mobile app and Lightning Experience. Group publisher changes appear everywhere. For example, imagine that you delete the Files related list or a field in the Group Details section. Your changes appear only in the app and Lightning Experience. They don’t appear in Salesforce Classic. 4. To save the layout, click **Save**. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example Let’s allow group owners and managers to archive and activate groups from the Salesforce mobile app and Lightning Experience. Drag the Archive field to the Group Detail section. ![Editing a group layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_admin_group_layout.png) To assign group layouts by user profiles, click **Page Layout Assignment** on the group layout list view. # Customize the Device Activation Email Template Customize the email you send to verify a user's identity when they access your Experience Cloud site from an unfamiliar browser, application, or IP address. The email includes a one-time password (OTP) that users enter to verify their identity. Change the look and wording of the email to match your brand. ### Required Editions
Available in: Experience Builder sites
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Device activation works differently based on whether you've configured a trusted IP address range. If you haven't defined a trusted IP range, users are prompted to verify their identity when they log in from a new browser or app. If you have defined a trusted IP range, users must verify their identity when they log in from an IP address outside of the range. For more information on how device activation works, see [Device Activation](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=xcloud.security_overview_identity_verification.htm&type=5&language=en_US). You can enable device activation for Experience Cloud site users through Profiles in [Session Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=platform.users_profiles_session.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sites, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Next to your site, click **Workspaces**. 3. Select **Administration**, and then select **Emails**. 4. Under Email Templates, click ![lookup magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png) next to Device Activation Verification, and select **Experience Cloud: Device Activation Verification Email**. 5. Save your settings. Your site is set up to send device activation notifications to users. 6. To customize the notification, edit the email template. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Email Templates, and then select **Classic Email Templates**. 2. Next to Experience Cloud: Device Activation Verification Email, click **Edit**. 3. Edit the text in the email body. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Don't remove `{!Verification_Code}`. 1. Optionally, to personalize the text, use the available merge fields listed at the top of the page. For more information, see [Merge Fields for Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=experience.merge_fields_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Device activation email template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/device_activation_email_template.png) # Customize the Email Address Change Template You can customize the email template you send to users when they change the email address they use with Salesforce. Change the look to match your brand and the wording of the message. ### Required Editions
Available in: Experience Builder sites
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Salesforce sends two verification emails to a user when the user changes their email address. One is sent to the user’s old email address, and one is sent to the new one. The user clicks the verification URL in the email sent to the new address, and completes the email address change. You can customize those emails. If you change a user’s email address for them, no email change verification email is sent. The Email Address Change Verification email templates are available to Experience Builder sites as of Winter ’21. 1. From Setup, enter All Experiences in the Quick Find box, and select **All Experiences**. Next to your site, click **Workspaces**. 2. Select **Administration**, and then select **Emails**. 3. Under Email Templates, click ![lookup magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png) next to Old Email Address Change Verification and select **Experiences: Old Email - Change Email Verification**. 4. Under Email Templates, click ![lookup magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png) next to New Email Address Change Verification and select **Experiences: New Email - Change Email Verification**. 5. Click **Save**. Your site is set up to send notifications to users when their email addresses change. 6. To make customizations, edit the email template. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can use the `{!ChgEmailVer.NewEmail}`, `{!ChgEmailVer.OldEmail}`, and `{!ChgEmailVer.URL}` merge fields. 1. From Setup, enter Email Templates in the Quick Find box, then select **Classic Email Templates**. 2. Next to Experiences: Old Email - Change Email Verification or Experiences: New Email - Change Email Verification, select **Edit**. 3. Edit the text in the email body. To personalize your email content, use the available merge fields listed at the top of the page. 4. Click **Save**. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Communities: Change Email Verification template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/auth_ver_merge.png) #### See Also - [Customize Email Sent from Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can customize email sender information and Chatter email branding. You can also customize email templates, such as templates for welcoming new members and resetting members’ passwords. Decide how Salesforce sends emails for users with unverified email domains, and customize email templates in the user interface.") - [Merge Fields for Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.merge_fields_communities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can personalize the email that you send to Experience Cloud site members by adding merge fields to your email templates.") # Customize the Files Detail Page In Lightning Experience, you can customize the fields and layout of the Files detail page. Use record types to customize the layouts of different record types, and tailor the data you capture based on the file type. Choose from standard fields to show when the file was last updated, file size, file type, and more. Create custom fields and buttons to track metadata that’s specific to your business, to use in validation rules, and to provide data for searches and reports. Use record types to customize the page layouts of different file record types. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
To see the Files Detail Page, set up at least one custom record type (in addition to General, the default type). 1. From Setup, enter Object Manager in the Quick Find box, and click **Object Manager**. 2. In the Object Manager, click **Content Version**, then click **Page Layouts**. 3. Create a new page layout or open the existing page layout that you use for the **Edit File Details** page. These check boxes can be added to the page layout of the edit file detail page: - **Add File Privacy on Records to Edit File Details Layout** Lets file owners control the visibility of files attached to records. - **Prevent Others from Sharing and Unsharing a File**Lets file owners prevent others from sharing and unsharing their file. (Checking this box doesn’t affect existing shares of a file.) The custom layout displays when users view or edit file details from the actions arrow on Files home, or edit file details from a file preview. However, from the files related list on a record, clicking **Edit File Details** displays the default file detail page instead of the custom layout. To see the custom file detail page layout on a file attached to a record, click the file title to open the file preview, and then click **Edit File Details**. From the Content Version object in Object Manager, you can also: - Create custom fields and buttons to track metadata to use in validation rules and provide data for searches and reports. - Create validation rules for files added to libraries, records, and Files home. By requiring users to follow naming conventions or fill in mandatory fields, you can improve the quality of the data and metadata in your org. # Customize the Headless Registration Email Template When you configure headless registration for an off-platform app, you can customize the one-time password (OTP) email that users receive to verify their identity. Edit the default email template to match your company’s branding. Keep in mind that this email template is only for headless registration in an app outside of the Salesforce platform. It isn’t designed for users registering or logging in to an Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sites, and then select **All Sites**. Next to the Experience Cloud site for your Headless Identity implementation, click **Workspaces**. 2. Select **Administration**, and then select **Emails**. 3. Under Email Templates, next to One-Time Password for Headless Registration, click ![lookup magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png), and then select **Experience Cloud: One-Time Password Email for Headless Registration Verification**. 4. Save your changes. 5. To customize the email, edit the template. 1. From Setup, enter Email Templates in the Quick Find box, and select **Classic Email Templates**. 2. Next to Experience Cloud: One-Time Password Email for Headless Registration Verification, select **Edit**. 3. Edit the text in the email body. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Don’t remove `{!Verification_Code}`. 4. To add more fields to the email, copy merge field values into the template. Under Available Merge Fields, select a field type, select a field, and then copy and paste the merge field value into the email body. For merge fields specific to Headless Identity, select **Network Member Fields** for the field type. ![Headless Identity merge fields for the headless registration email template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/headless_registration_email_fields.png) 5. Save your changes. # Customize the One-Time Password Email Template You can customize the email that you send to external users to verify their identity with a one-time password (OTP). The email includes a verification code that users enter to prove their identity. Control how you communicate with your customers and partners by rewording the email that comes with the verification code. ### Required Editions
Available in: Experience Builder sites
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Salesforce sends out an email with an OTP for email verifications in these scenarios. - Headful passwordless login—Set up a login page for your Experience Cloud site that allows users to log in with their email address. You create a passwordless login page from your site’s Login & Registration page. See [Brand Your Identity Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=external_identity_branding_use_cases.htm&language=en_US). - Headless passwordless login—Allow users to log in to your off-platform app with an email address or phone number. Salesforce also sends an email with a one-time password for device activation email verifications. To customize this notification, see [Device Activation Email Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_device_activation_challenge_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the email you send to verify a user's identity when they access your Experience Cloud site from an unfamiliar browser, application, or IP address. The email includes a one-time password (OTP) that users enter to verify their identity. Change the look and wording of the email to match your brand."). The one-time password email template is available to Experience Builder sites as of Winter ’19. 1. From Setup, enter All in the Quick Find box, and select **All Experiences**. Next to your site, click **Workspaces**. 2. Select **Administration**, and then select **Emails**. 3. Under Email Templates, click ![lookup magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png) next to One-Time Password, and select **Experience Cloud: One-Time Password Email**. 4. Click **Save**. Your site is set up to send verification code notifications to users. 5. To customize the notification, edit the email template. 1. From Setup, enter Email Templates in the Quick Find box, and select **Classic Email Templates**. 2. Next to Experiences: One-Time Password Email, select **Edit**. 3. Edit the text in the email body. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Don’t remove `{!Verification_Code}`. 4. (Optional) In the email body, insert merge fields listed under Available Merge Field. To get the merge field value, select a field type, and then select a field. Copy and paste the merge field value into the email body. For example, from the Field Type dropdown, select **Network Member Fields**, and then select **Site Name**. The Merge Field Value displays `{!Community.Name}`. 5. Click **Save**. You can also use Visualforce to create a custom OTP email template using the `$Network` global merge field type. # Customize the Passwordless Registration Welcome Email Template If you use passwordless registration for your Experience Cloud site, users receive a welcome email containing a one-time password (OTP) when they sign up. To tailor this email for your company’s brand, use a custom email template. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
These steps show you how to configure and customize the Experience Cloud: New Member Welcome Email - Passwordless Registration email template, which is a Classic email template that's tailored for this use case. Alternatively, you can create your own Classic email template from scratch and configure it in your Experience Cloud settings for Welcome New Member for Passwordless Registration. The Visualforce email template type isn't supported for passwordless registration—you can use only the Text, HTML with Classic Letterhead, and Custom HTML types. For more information on creating Classic email templates, see [Email Templates in Salesforce Classic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.admin_emailtemplates.htm&type=5&language=en_US) in Salesforce Help. [Lightning email templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.email_templates_lightning_parent.htm&type=5&language=en_US) aren't supported for passwordless registration. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If you create your own Classic email template from scratch, make sure that you use the `{!Verification_Code}` merge field. For the Experience Cloud: New Member Welcome Email - Passwordless Registration email template, use these Network Member merge fields. This template doesn't support any other merge fields. - `{!Pwdless_New_User.FirstName}`—Passwordless Registration User First Name - `{!Pwdless_New_User.LastName}`—Passwordless Registration User Last Name - `{!Pwdless_New_User.Username}`—Passwordless Registration User Username - `{!Pwdless_New_User.Email}`—Passwordless Registration User Email Address - `{!Pwdless_New_User.Phone}`—Passwordless Registration User Phone Number - `{!Verification_Code}`—Verification Code 1. Add the New Member Welcome Email - Passwordless Registration email template to your Experience Cloud settings. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sites, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Next to your Experience Cloud site, click **Workspaces**. 3. Select **Administration**, and then select **Emails**. 4. Under Email Templates, next to Welcome New Member for Passwordless Registration, click ![lookup magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png), and then select **Experience Cloud: New Member Welcome Email - Passwordless Registration**. 5. Save your changes. 2. To customize the email, edit the template. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Email Templates, and then select **Classic Email Templates**. 2. Next to Experience Cloud: New Member Welcome Email - Passwordless Registration, click **Edit**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note In orgs created after Summer ’24, the email template unique name is `CommunityPasswordlessRegistrationEmailTemplate`. In orgs created before Summer ’24, the unique name is `CPasswordlessRegistrationEmailTemplate`. 3. Edit the default text in the email body. 4. To add more fields to the email, copy merge field values into the template. Under Available Merge Fields, select **Network Member** for field type. Use the Passwordless Registration merge fields. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Don’t remove `{!Verification_Code}`. 5. Save your changes. For more information about passwordless registration, see [Passwordless Login](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.external_identity_passwordless_login_use_cases.htm&type=5&language=en_US). # Customize the Self-Registration Apex Controller For even more control, you can customize how customers and partners register for your site by modifying the default self-registration controller or by replacing it with your own custom controller. You can customize the self-registration controller regardless of which page type you're using. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note We recommend that you modify the self-registration controller only if you're familiar with Apex. If you're not as comfortable with Apex, but you still want flexibility with your self-registration process, use the Configurable Self-Reg Page and modify its associated handler. You can generate your own registration form by modifying the `CommunitiesSelfRegController` and the associated `CommunitiesSelfReg` Visualforce page. You use this single Apex controller regardless of which registration page type you choose. The customizations you make in `CommunitiesSelfRegController` override the Login & Registration page settings. In orgs created before the Spring ’15 release, existing Apex customizations for self-registration remain in effect. You also use the `CommunitiesSelfRegController` controller to implement multiple sites. Then you direct users to the appropriate start URL for each site. You can add, edit, or delete Apex using the Salesforce user interface only in a Developer Edition organization, a Salesforce Enterprise Edition trial organization, or sandbox organization. In a Salesforce production organization, you can change Apex only by using the Metadata API `deploy` call, the Salesforce Extensions for Visual Studio Code, or the Ant Migration Tool. The Salesforce Extensions for Visual Studio Code and Ant Migration Tool are free resources provided by Salesforce to support its users and partners, but are not considered part of our Services for purposes of the Salesforce Main Services Agreement. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find Box, enter Apex Classes, and then select **Apex Classes**. 2. Next to `CommunitiesSelfRegController`, click **Edit**. 3. (Optional) To define which profile to assign to the user, enter a value for the `ProfileId`. 4. If you're using a business account, enter the account ID for the partner or customer account that users who self-register are associated with. This account ID value overrides the default account set on the Login & Registration page. Ensure that the account you use is enabled as a partner. Go to the account, click **Manage External Account**, then click **Enable as Partner**. 5. If you're enabling self-registration for multiple sites, add code to assign the correct profile, role, and account ID to each site. 6. Save your changes. 7. Enable access to accounts and contacts for the guest profile. The guest profile is automatically associated with your site. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Next to your site name, click **Workspaces**. 3. Select **Administration**, and then select **Pages**. 4. Under Advanced Customizations, click **Go to Force.com**. 5. Click **Public Access Settings**, then click **Edit**. 6. Under Standard Object Permissions, next to Accounts, select **Read** and **Create**. 7. Repeat the previous step for Contacts and save your changes. 8. Under Enabled Apex Class Access, click **Edit**. 9. Add `CommunitiesSelfRegController` to **Enabled Apex Classes**, and save your changes. 10. Under Enabled Visualforce Page Access, click **Edit**. 11. Add `CommunitiesSelfReg` to **Enabled Visualforce Pages**, and save your changes. 8. Test your self-registration process. When setup is complete, customers and partner users who submit the completed self-registration form are logged in to the site. # Customize the Theme of Your Experience Builder Site Customize the theme of your Experience Builder site by adjusting everything from the size and color of your headers and footers, to the fonts and colors for active text. We can get you started, but you get to make the final tweaks to make the theme your own. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Every pre-built theme is loaded with options to help you achieve the style you want without ever dealing with code. And we remember how you set up each theme so you can change between them easily. If you previously customized a pre-built theme, when you reactivate it you can decide to use your current settings or replace them and start over. ![Using current settings for reactivated theme](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme-reactivate.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Using either **Reset** or **Replace and start fresh** deletes all of your customizations. - Branding sets - Theme regions (settings for common elements across pages like headers) - Theme settings - Custom theme layouts - Custom theme layout assignments for pages - Custom CSS overrides These settings aren’t retrievable, so be careful about selecting either **Reset** or **Replace and start fresh**. Changing themes preserves your content, but a new theme doesn’t necessarily display your content in a useful or desirable manner. After a change, always reconfirm that your site still works the way you want it to. - **[Adjust the Style and Layout of Your Site Theme](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_theme_adjust.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Builder sites include several pre-built themes that you can modify easily. In addition to customizing the layouts, you can configure colors, fonts, images, sizes, and actions with a ton of choices and levers. - **[Theme Guidance: Header Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_theme-g-header.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Headers provide context and easy navigation throughout a site. - **[Theme Guidance: Hero Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_theme-g-hero.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Hero images are large images that are designed to dominate the visual field of a page and grab attention. - **[Theme Guidance: Search Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_theme-g-search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Multiple search components and placement options give you flexibility to design the right experience for your customers. - **[Custom Theme Layouts and Theme Layout Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_theme.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Theme layouts and theme layout components combine to give you granular control of the appearance and structure of each page in your site. Customize the layout’s header and footer to match your company’s style. Configure theme layout properties. Or use a custom search bar and user profile menu. Then use theme layouts to assign theme layout components to individual pages allowing you to quickly change layouts from one central location. Whether you’re a consulting partner or an ISV, or you simply want to revamp your own site, custom theme layouts make it easy to rebrand. #### See Also - [Developer Guide: Build a Condensed Theme Layout Component](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/communities_dev_example.htm) - [Trailhead: Create a Custom Theme Layout Component](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/projects/communities_theme_layout/steps/create_component) # Customize the User Lockout Email Template You can customize the email template you send to users when they attempt to reset their password after getting locked out of your Experience Cloud site due to too many failed login attempts. You can change the look to match your brand and how and when users can unlock their accounts. ### Required Editions
Available in: Experience Builder site
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Users are unable reset their passwords when their accounts are locked. Depending upon their password policy, they may need to wait awhile or contact an admin to unlock their account before they can reset their password. Admins set the password policy, including the maximum allowable invalid login attempts, on the site user’s profile page. This password policy determines the next steps users take to unlock their account. The default email template includes a formula that checks the profile’s password policy and pulls that information into the notification sent. The user lockout email template is available to Experience Builder sites as of Summer ’18. 1. From Setup, enter All in the Quick Find box, and select **All Experiences**. Next to your site, click **Workspaces**. 2. Select **Administration**, and then select **Emails**. 3. Under Email Templates, click ![lookup magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png) next to User Lockout, and select **Experiences: User Lockout Email**. 4. Click **Save**. Your site is set up to send notifications to users when they’re locked out of their accounts. 5. To change the formula or make other customizations, edit the email template. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - The formula included in this template is only for lockout emails. When applied to another email type, the formula returns a blank message. - The `{!Community_url}` merge field isn’t available for the lockout template. 1. From Setup, enter Email Templates in the Quick Find box, then select **Classic Email Templates**. 2. Next to Experiences: User Lockout Email, select **Edit**. 3. Edit the text in the email body. To personalize your email content, use the available merge fields listed at the top of the page. 4. Click **Save**. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example If the password policy locks users out for 15 minutes before they can try to log in again, the formula returns the following message: “Try again in 15 minutes.” ![Communities: User Lockout Email template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/user_lockout_email.png) # Customize Your Forgot Password and Reset Password Pages You can customize your Forgot Password and Reset Password pages from the Administration workspace. You can also create custom password management pages in Visualforce. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can select a Visualforce page as your custom Forgot Password or Reset Password page for Aura sites only. If you used a Visualforce page as your custom Forgot Password or Reset Password page for an LWR site before Summer ’23, the site still uses the Visualforce page. However, if you change the LWR site’s Forgot Password or Reset Password page to another page type, you can’t go back to using the Visualforce page. To use a custom Experience Builder Forgot Password page, first publish your login page in Experience Builder. For your Forgot Password Page, you can select from these page types. - Default Page—A simple page with basic styling that serves as a starting point for your customizations. - Experience Builder Page—Use the Experience Builder design tool to quickly create a page that matches your company's theme. To access the Experience Builder Page, you must first publish your site. - Visualforce Page—Use a custom Visualforce page. For your Reset Password Page, you can use a Default Page or a custom Visualforce Page. Experience Builder Pages aren't supported. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites** 2. Next to your site name, click **Workspaces**. 3. Select **Administration**, and then select **Login & Registration**. 4. Under Password Pages, for Forgot Password, select a page type. - To use the Default Page, select **Default Page**. - To use the Experience Builder Page, select **Experience Builder Page**, then click ![Lookup magnifying glass icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png) and select **Forgot Password**. - To use a custom Visualforce Page, select **Visualforce Page**, then click ![Lookup magnifying glass icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png) and select a Visualforce page. 5. For Reset Password, select a page type. - To use the Default Page, select **Default Page** - To use a custom Visualforce Page, select **Visualforce Page**, then click ![Lookup magnifying glass icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png) and select a Visualforce page. Be sure that your site’s Reset Password page and your site’s login page use different Visualforce pages. 6. Save your settings. 7. To view your changes, open your site URL in a private (incognito) browser and click the Forgot Password link, then follow the prompts to reset your password. #### See Also - [Customize Code for Lightning Components on Login Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_custom_login_self_reg_lightning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To add custom logic to the Login pages in Experience Builder sites, customize the Lightning component for those pages.") - [Set Up Dynamic URLs with Experience Workspaces](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.external_identity_dynamic_set_up_reg_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You set up dynamic URLs for your login experience from the Login & Registration page of the Administration workspace. Create dynamic URLs by including a placeholder that resolves at run time. Implement the dynamic URLs for the logo and right-frame content on the pages used to log in, verify identity, reset passwords, and self-register.") - [Customize Login, Self-Registration, and Password Management for Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_login.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the default login, logout, password management, and self-registration options for your site. Or customize the behavior with Apex and Visualforce or Experience Builder (Site.com Studio) pages. You can also use dynamic URLs to brand your pages at run time.") # Dashboard Use the Dashboard component to add dashboards you set up in your org’s public folder to your site’s pages. 1. Select the **Dashboard** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Dashboard Name | Select an available dashboard. | | Height | Adjust the height of the dashboard. Column width controls the dashboard width. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Dashboard component: ![Dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/dashboard.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - Members can’t change the dashboard’s running user in the site. This view is read only. - The refresh button isn’t available in Experience Builder sites on mobile devices. - Dashboards data is automatically refreshed when viewed in Experience Sites. - Starting Spring '25, the developer name is supported for Dashboards. However, the Dashboard component won't render on the site if it's in a private folder (This can happen if you move the dashboard to a private folder after adding it to a site) or if it contains a duplicate developer name. In both cases, you can't retrieve the Dashboard ID. # Dashboard List The Dashboard List component lets users view dashboards in list form. The dashboard list can be filtered with these criteria: - Recent - Created by Me - Private Dashboards - All Dashboards Users who view a site on the Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud app or a mobile browser can sort the dashboard only by Recent. Users also have access to dashboard folders. Folders include: - Created by Me - Shared with Me - All Folders The Dashboard List component doesn’t have any editable properties. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Dashboard List component can only be used on the Dashboard List page. # Data Model for Peer-to-Peer Conversations in Experience Cloud Sites Experience Cloud uses Chatter behind the scenes for peer-to-peer conversations in Experience Cloud sites. To keep conversations in your internal org separate from the ones in an external-facing site, each Chatter post or conversation is tied to the Experience Cloud site that it belongs to. If you have more than one external-facing site, the same is true for conversations in each site—each one is tied to the site that it belongs to. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura and Visualforce sites
You don’t have to worry about your Experience Cloud site users seeing your internal Chatter conversations, or vice versa. Here are the [primary objects](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.api.meta/api/RelationshipsOfChatterObjects.htm) behind Chatter. ![Flow chart showing the data model of conversations](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/convo_chart.png) Here’s what the key objects represent in terms of your peer-to-peer conversations. - [User](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_user.htm)—The person who is posting to the site. - [FeedItem](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_feeditem.htm)—A new post or thread on a site. - [FeedComment](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_feedcomment.htm)—A comment added to an existing post. - [FeedLike](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_feedlike.htm)—Tracks who liked a post. - [FeedAttachment](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_feedattachment.htm)—Tracks which file or link was attached to a post. - [FeedPollChoice](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_feedpollchoice.htm)—Shows the choices for a poll that’s posted in the feed. - [FeedPollVote](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_feedpollvote.htm)—Tracks how users voted on a poll that’s posted in the feed. - [ContentDocument](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_contentdocument.htm)—Represents a file uploaded to the site as an attachment or an inline image in a post. - [ContentVersion](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_contentversion.htm)—Tracks file versioning. When you upload a file (`ContentDocument`), a child `ContentVersion` record is created. - [CollaborationGroup](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_collaborationgroup.htm)—A group in the site. - [CollaborationGroupMember](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_collaborationgroupmember.htm)—A member of a group. - [Topic](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_topic.htm)—A topic (#hashtag) of conversation. - [TopicAssignment](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_topicassignment.htm) —Links a topic to a conversation in the site. - [EntitySubscription](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_entitysubscription.htm): Tracks which records or users someone is following. Here are a few other important objects to be aware of. - [Contact](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_contact.htm)—All external site users (people who don’t work for your company) must first be created as contacts before they can be enabled as a user of your Experience Cloud site. - [Account](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_account.htm)—The company that a contact works for. If you sell B2C and use person accounts, you load the person’s info as a person account and not a contact. A person account creates a hybrid of an account and contact behind the scenes. - [Network](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_network.htm?search_text=user)—The site the forum posts map into. - [NetworkMember](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_networkmember.htm?search_text=user)—Tracks the Chatter preferences for a user in a given site and the reputation points that they’ve earned. These records are created during your user load. To migrate users’ reputation points, update them at the end of your migration. - **[Migrate Peer-to-Peer Conversations to Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_convo_migrate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Migrating peer-to-peer conversations from other platforms can be a part of creating an Experience Cloud site. Understand the steps to take before migrating and how to use Data Loader to migrate conversations. # Data Provider Considerations (Beta) When configuring data providers on an LWR site page, keep these considerations in mind. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Data Provider Configuration is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/?_ga=2.247987783.1372150065.1709219475-629000709.1639001992). Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. - Operations supported when configuring a data provider are create, view, and delete. - Reconfiguring an Apex data provider by modifying the Apex methods and parameters isn’t supported. - If components such as reports and dashboards reference a data provider, then deleting this data provider can cause errors. Delete the references before you delete the data provider. - When you configure multiple data providers for a page, you see only one data provider listed as Inherited Content for the component in the property panel. - When you configure multiple data providers for a page, you see only one data binding expression for one data provider in the Text or Expression field in the property panel. # Deactivate Chatter Free Users As a moderator, you can deactivate Chatter Free users if, for example, they left the company. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To deactivate Chatter Free users: Moderate Chatter
When the owner of a Chatter group is deactivated, the deactivated user still owns the group. But a user with the Modify All Data permission can assign a new owner for a public or private group. For unlisted groups, a user with the Manage Unlisted Groups permission can assign a new owner. 1. To go to the person's profile page, click their name in the People tab or on a feed. 2. On the profile page, click **Deactivate User** from the user action menu. ![User action menu on Chatter Free user profile](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_moderator_deactivate_user.png) If you want to reactivate a Chatter Free user, use global search to find their profile. You use global search because deactivated users don't appear on the People tab. # Deactivate Your Site Deactivate your site when you add or remove members; add, remove, or rearrange tabs; change the color scheme; or change the URL. You also must deactivate a site before you can archive it. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If a community license is removed from your org, members can still access sites associated with that license. To ensure security, deactivate sites that you wish to discontinue. To ensure your contributors can access Experience Builder and Workspaces in an inactive community, enable the “Modify All Data” permission. 1. From Setup, enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then select **All Sites**. 2. Click **Workspaces** next to the site you want to deactivate. 3. Click **Administration** | **Settings**. 4. Click **Deactivate**. After your site is inactive and offline, only users who have the Create and Set Up Experiences permission can access it. All other users see a Site Under Construction page. #### See Also - [Experience Cloud Site Statuses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_status.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Cloud sites can have one of these statuses: preview, inactive, active, and archived.") - [Activate Your Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_publish.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Activate your site to make it accessible to members. The result of activation differs depending on whether you have a Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site or a Lightning site.") - [Customize Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Update basic site settings like your site URL, site name, members, login options, and general preferences in the Administration tile of Experience Workspaces.") # Deal Registration Reports These reports are provided in the **Deal Registration Reports** folder.
Report Name Description Additional Customization
Number of Approved Deals by Month Number of approved deals for current fiscal year by month. Update the lead source and lead status filters with the correct filter values
Approved Deals by Value Total value of approved deals. Update lead source and lead status filters with the correct filter values
Approved to Converted Ratio Ratio of deals approved to deals converted for the current fiscal year by partner. N/A
Closed Deals by Partner Displays the value closed deal registered by partners. N/A
Deals Registered by Age Displays registered deals by age. Add Age custom field
Deal Registration Trend Displays deal registration over time. Update lead source and lead status filters with the correct filter values
Deals Expiring Soon Displays registered deals that expire in the next 30 days.
  • Update lead source filter with the correct filter value
  • Add Expiration date field and a filter (f.i.: Next 7 days)
Deals Pending Approval Number of deals pending approval. N/A
Rejected Deal Number of deals that have been rejected. Update lead source filter value
Converted Deals with No Activity Number of deals registered with no partner activity in the last 14 days. Update lead source filter value
Top Active Deals Most valuable converted deals that have not yet been closed. Update lead source filter value
# Define a Simple URL External Data Source If Chatter is enabled for your organization, Salesforce can access data hosted on another web domain for use in the Files tab and feed. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To define an external data source: Customize Application
1. From Setup, enter External Data Sources in the Quick Find box, and then select **External Data Sources**. 2. Click **New External Data Source**, and set the following options:
Field Description
Label A user-friendly name for the data source displayed in the Salesforce user interface.
Name A unique identifier used to refer to this external data source definition through the API. The Name field can contain only underscores and alphanumeric characters. It must be unique, begin with a letter, not include spaces, not end with an underscore, and not contain two consecutive underscores.
Type Choose Simple URL.
URL The URL of the server hosting data outside of Salesforce, which must begin with http:// or https://.
Default External Repository Used for SharePoint® Online®. If metadata is not accessible, use this field to create tables and default table fields.
Large Icon

Specify an icon to easily identify the data source in the Salesforce user interface.

First define the icon as a static resource in Salesforce. For more information, see Defining Static Resources.

Small Icon

Specify an icon to easily identify the data source in the Salesforce user interface.

First define the icon as a static resource in Salesforce. For more information, see Defining Static Resources.

Identity Type

The identity type used to authenticate to the external data source.

Select Anonymous, which doesn’t require users to provide credentials when accessing the data source.

Authentication Protocol

The protocol required to access the data source.

Select No Authentication.

![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - Simple URL data sources can’t be included in global search, so the “Validate and Sync” option isn’t supported. - SOQL queries can’t be performed on the external objects created from Simple URL data sources. - Files from a Simple URL data source can’t be previewed in the file preview player. # Define an External Data Source for Box Let users access their Box content from Files home, feed posts, and search. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To define an external data source: Customize Application
1. From Setup in Salesforce Classic, enter External Data Sources in the Quick Find box, then select **External Data Sources**. 2. Click **New External Data Source**. Then set the following options.
Field Description
Label A user-friendly name for the data source displayed in the Salesforce user interface.
Name A unique identifier used to refer to this external data source definition through the API. The Name field can contain only underscores and alphanumeric characters. It must be unique, begin with a letter, not include spaces, not end with an underscore, and not contain two consecutive underscores.
Type Choose Files Connect: Box
Identity Type

The identity type used to authenticate to the external data source.

Select Per User to require separate credentials for each user who accesses the data source. (Administrators must enable the data source for specific permission sets and profiles. Users then enter their credentials when first accessing the data source.)

Authentication Protocol

The protocol used to access Box.

Select OAuth 2.0.

Authentication Provider Enter the Box Authentication Provider.
Scope Leave blank.
Start Authentication Flow on Save Select to immediately test the settings above.
Files from a Box data source can’t be previewed in the file preview player. # Define an External Data Source for Google Drive Let Chatter users access their Google Drive content from the Files tab, feed posts, and search. Salesforce supports Google documents, spreadsheets, presentations, and drawings. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To define an external data source: Customize Application
1. From Setup, enter External Data Sources in the Quick Find box, then select **External Data Sources**. 2. Click **New External Data Source**. Then set the following options.
Field Description
Label A user-friendly name for the data source displayed in the Salesforce user interface.
Name A unique identifier used to refer to this external data source definition through the API. The Name field can contain only underscores and alphanumeric characters. It must be unique, begin with a letter, not include spaces, not end with an underscore, and not contain two consecutive underscores.
Type Choose Files Connect: Google Drive
Identity Type

The identity type used to authenticate to the external data source.

Select Per User to require separate credentials for each user who accesses the data source. (Administrators must enable the data source for specific permission sets and profiles. Users then enter their credentials when first accessing the data source..)

Select Named Principal to use the same set of credentials for every user who accesses the data source from Salesforce.

Authentication Protocol

The protocol used to access Google Drive.

Select OAuth 2.0.

Authentication Provider Enter the Google Drive authentication provider.
Scope Leave blank.
Start Authentication Flow on Save Select to immediately test the settings above.
# Define an External Data Source for SharePoint Online or OneDrive for Business With Files Connect and Chatter, Salesforce can access content from Microsoft’s cloud-based systems. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To define an external data source: Customize Application
1. From Setup, enter External Data Sources in the Quick Find box, then select **External Data Sources**. 2. Click **New External Data Source**. Then set the following options.
Field Description
Label A user-friendly name for the data source displayed in the Salesforce user interface.
Name

A unique identifier used to refer to this external data source definition through the API. The Name field can contain only underscores and alphanumeric characters. It must be unique, begin with a letter, not include spaces, not end with an underscore, and not contain two consecutive underscores.

This entry must match the value entered in the SharePoint fields, Managed Properties | Property Name and Alias.

Type Choose Files Connect: Microsoft SharePoint Online or Files Connect: Microsoft OneDrive for Business.
Site URL

The URL of your SharePoint site, site collection, or web app.

The URL must begin with https. It should look like this: https://salesforce.sharepoint​.com/HRSite

(Don’t copy the URL seen in the browser when accessing SharePoint. It should not look like this: https://salesforce.sharepoint.​com/HRSite/SitePages​/Home.aspx)

Exclude Other Site Collections Accesses only the site collection specified by the URL, ignoring any other site collections. This should always be enabled if any users are currently allowed to access the root site collection.
Identity Type

The identity type used to authenticate to the external data source.

Select Per User to require separate credentials for each user who accesses the data source. (Administrators must enable the data source for specific permission sets and profiles. Users then enter their credentials when first accessing the data source.)

Select Named Principal to use the same set of credentials for every user who accesses the data source from Salesforce.

Authentication Protocol

The protocol used to access SharePoint Online.

Select OAuth 2.0.

Authentication Provider Enter the SharePoint Online or OneDrive for Business authentication provider.
Scope Leave blank.
Start Authentication Flow on Save Select to immediately test your settings or to create an external object for this external data source.
Custom columns defined on SharePoint should not have spaces in the name. Files from a SharePoint Online or OneDrive for Business data source can’t be previewed in the file preview player. #### See Also - [The Files Connect Setup Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The setup process for Files Connect varies by external data source.") # Define Your Site Structure, Layout, and Design After you consider your site’s vision and purpose and you’re familiar with frameworks and templates, you can plan your site’s structure, layout, and design. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## Why Is This Important? Planning your site's structure, layout, and design before you begin building it helps you prioritize what to launch. You can narrow the scope of your site and set clear milestones for launching it. A plan in place makes building your site faster and easier. ## What Should You Keep in Mind? User Experience: Think of your site as a product that you design for your users. To find out what your users want and expect from your site, consider conducting a user experience initiative that includes research and interviews. Integrate your findings with any personas and journeys that you built, and then plan your site’s structure, layout, and design. If possible, involve user experience and user interface designers. Structure and Information Architecture: Your site’s structure depends on how you organize its information. Consider your users’ expectations and needs. What intuitive paths can they take to find content? How can you organize the content to match these paths and make content easy to find? If you conducted user experience research, refer to your findings. Organize your planned site content into labeled categories. Labeled categories help you structure your site’s navigation system and menu. Make the labels concise, meaningful, and not too broad or too specific. For example, you can group business location, hours of operation, staff, and mission statement in a category labeled About Us. This category can become an item in your navigation menu. The top-level categories that you come up with can become the top-level labels in your navigation menu. And then you can add informational subcategories to each top-level menu. Page Layout: Using the categories you devised for your site structure, decide how to organize the pages and subpages that contain your content. Title your pages intentionally and order them according to your information architecture so that users can easily find them through the navigation menu or search. You can adjust your navigation as you develop pages. Make sure to match primary pages with top-level menu categories, and match subpages with subcategories. Begin to design your pages by using the Experience Cloud templates, which are preconfigured with page layouts. Available templates include layouts designed for use cases such as hosting a partner website or help center, or providing customer service. Customize your pages with content and features that are important to your users. For example, add sections to your site based on the questions that came up the most for your customers during user experience research. To prioritize what your users need, work closely with user experience and user interface designers, if possible. You can define audiences and then associate them with page variations that you create and customize. Only the users in those audiences can see page variations so that the content is personalized for them. For example, you define an audience as users who live on the West Coast of the United States. Create a variation of your home page with photographs of the Pacific Ocean and coastal landscapes. Then apply the West Coast audience to the page so that only those users can see it. Other users see the default page. Page Structure and Components: Consider the specific components and structure of each type of page. If possible, work with your user experience designers to create wireframes—sketches of a page’s features and component configuration. You can solicit early feedback on your wireframes and ensure that you’re incorporating users’ needs as you design. You can also use one of our templates to sketch out a site in Experience Builder, and have people look at the site in the builder in preview mode. Some web design features are consistent and standardized. For example, page headers often include a company’s name or logo in the top right, a search bar in the top left, and a menu bar across the middle. Users are familiar with these conventions, so keep them in mind when you design. Incorporate your brand. Consider where to place your organization name, and consider the colors, fonts, and images to employ. These design components contribute to your brand image. Keep your branding consistent across pages and subpages, from your homepage, to a forum, to an FAQ page, and more. ## Find Out More ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Manage Your Site’s Pages and Their Properties in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_manage_pages_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Pages and Page Action menus centralize all your page-related needs, from page creation to audience criteria-based page visibility and everything in between.") ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Edit Pages and Components in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_edit_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Each page contains a collection of components that are organized around a task or function, whether it’s opening a case or searching for an article. The pages in each Experience Builder template are ready for you to use with little configuration. Add new components to your site’s pages, edit the properties of existing components, or delete components that you don’t require.") ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Personalization with Audience Targeting in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_visibilty_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep your users engaged by offering personalized, relevant content that’s customized for a particular audience. To create an audience, you assemble a set of criteria that defines a user segment. You can then tailor a single site to meet the needs of multiple user segments. For example, you can present the same site with a different look and feel for each audience or show different pages, components, or data to different audiences.") # Define Your Site Vision and Purpose Experience Cloud makes it easy to build sites that deliver customer-first experiences—fast! But, before you dive head-first into building your Experience Cloud site, pause for a moment to envision the larger picture of what you want your site to accomplish. What is your website’s primary purpose? ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## Why Is This Important? When you’re clear about your site’s purpose, you take a strategic approach to building and managing your site. And then clarity about your target audience, conversion actions, goals, and measurements naturally follow. Your investment in this site goes beyond the resources used to build it. Your online presence is typically the first impression of your business that your customers have. A clearly defined purpose is the first step to building a meaningful website that adds value for you and your customers and partners. Having a clearly defined site purpose also helps you: - Ensure all members of your team are aligned on the overall goals of the site. - Determine which [framework and template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_frameworks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Select a framework and template as part of your site planning. The choices you make at the beginning of your site creation process have long-term downstream implications. In particular, consider your business objectives, your technical know-how, and the costs associated with each.") best serve your needs. - [Develop the design of your website](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_design.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you consider your site’s vision and purpose and you’re familiar with frameworks and templates, you can plan your site’s structure, layout, and design."), including the layout and which pages and features to include. - Set up your site for success when you [plan your rollout and adoption](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_rollout_adoption.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your Experience Cloud site gives you a web presence and helps you connect your business to the people who need it—both inside and outside your company. Generate excitement, awareness, and traffic for your site with a promotional plan, and consider how to measure adoption of your site when it’s live.") framework. - [Gather the right people](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_who_does_what.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Cloud sites are typically not developed, designed, and maintained by a single person because these tasks require different skills. Depending on the size of your company and scale of your site, you could have some people handle several roles or a dedicated person for each role.") to drive your site to fruition. ## What Should You Keep in Mind? Here are some considerations to help you craft your vision and purpose. Review Your Objectives: Highlight which key elements of the business the site addresses. Does it lower costs, increase brand awareness, or simplify operations? Are you creating a business flow, such as a registration process or an onboarding process? Here are some objective ideas. - Improve engagement: Give customers an easy way to interact with your organization whenever and wherever they are. They can search for articles, ask questions, and get crowd-sourced answers. - Provide self-service: Empower your customers to find solutions to customer-service issues on their own with access to your knowledge base, your service agents, and peer-to-peer support. Provide access to their data in a member portal. - Improve partner relationships: Collaborate on opportunities and deals to increase you and your partners’ revenue stream. Onboard partners quickly by sharing content and training materials. Consider the Use Cases: Use cases are foundational to your strategy and the user experience. Use cases can help you define, map out, and prioritize how you want your customers to use the site. Define an initial set of use cases and align them with your business objectives. Think of use cases in terms of a prioritization exercise. To get started, think about what’s most important for your site to support the experience you want to create. Then, prioritize the use cases by noting which are accelerated growth drivers, top-priority growth drivers, tough wins, and efficiency drivers. ![Self-Service Portal Use Case](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Self-Service Portal Use Case A self-service site is a place where you can help your customers help themselves. Here are some of the use cases for this type of site. - Account Management—Users can conveniently update their contact information, update their preferences, and sign up for new services. - Help Portal—Supply knowledge articles that aid in case deflection, customer satisfaction, and agent productivity. Use chatbots or live agents to supply quick responses to questions. - Support Portal—Provide easy access to customer support and the ability to create and track cases. Pair with a support knowledge base so users can get answers quickly. ## What’s Next? After you have a clear vision of where your site is headed and how to get there, you can fill in the blank in this question: “The purpose of my site is to \_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_” Write down your vision and use it as your guiding light as you plan and prepare for site building. And now, full speed ahead to bring your vision to life! ## Find Out More ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Experience Cloud Site Management Canvas Planning Tool](https://www.salesforce.com/form/conf/comm-cmx-canvas/?conf-redirect=true) ![Video](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_video.png) [Show Me How: Best Practices for Adoption in Your Sites](https://www.learnexperiencecloud.com/s/news/show-me-how-best-practices-for-adoption-in-your-sites-MCF46SJXSNS5HEXE5VMMENEMC3YM) ![Trailhead](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_trailhead.png) [Experience Cloud Site Strategy](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/experience-cloud-site-strategy) # Deflection Tracking The Deflection Tracking component gathers data from users about the deflection content that you provide. Prompt users with a customized set of answers, and capture their feedback in your Salesforce org. Use the Salesforce Case Deflection Reporting Package for Experience Builder sites to build reports about the effectiveness of your deflection content. Reports help you plan your content strategy with the support of real data. 1. Select the **Deflection Tracking** component, and drag it onto any Feed Detail, Question Detail, or Article Detail page. Avoid placing the component in the template header or footer of the page. Doing so causes the component to appear on all pages. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Question Label | Enter a prompt that asks users if they’re satisfied with the suggested content. Default text is: **Did this information resolve your issue?**. | | Show confirmed deflection button | Select to include a confirmed deflection button that users click to confirm that the information resolved their issue. | | Confirmed Deflection Button Label | Enter a label for the confirmed deflection button. Default text is: **Yes**. | | Show potential deflection button | Select to include a potential deflection button that users click to show that the information possibly resolved their issue. | | Potential Deflection Button Label | Enter a label for the potential deflection button. Default text is: **Maybe**. | | Show unsuccessful deflection button | Select to include an unsuccessful deflection button that users click to show that the information didn’t resolve their issue. | | Unsuccessful Deflection Button Label | Enter a label for the unsuccessful deflection button. Default text is: **No**. | | Thank You Message Label | Enter a message thanking the user for their response. Default text is:**Thanks for your feedback!**. | 3. Publish the page. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Deflection Tracking component set up in Experience Builder: ![Deflection Tracking Component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_deflection_tracking_modal.png) Sample Deflection Tracking component in viewable user page: ![Deflection Tracking Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_deflection_tracking_example.png) Install the Salesforce Case Deflection Reporting Package to see how well the Deflection Tracking component actually deflects cases from being created. Use the Community Case Deflection Metrics dashboard to get metrics on potential and confirmed case deflections and the most helpful articles and discussions. #### See Also - [Case Deflection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_case_deflection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Case Deflection component searches text as it’s being entered into the Contact Support Form component, and returns relevant articles and discussions. If users don’t get the answer they need, they can continue with their request for support.") - [Ask Button](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_ask_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Ask Button component lets users click a button to ask a question that is then published to the site. Users must log in to ask questions and participate in discussions.") - [Contact Support & Ask Buttons](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_contact_support.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Contact Support & Ask Buttons component adds two buttons to the page. The Contact Support button lets users click a button to create a case. The Ask button lets members ask a question and publish it to the site. All members must be logged in to ask the site a question.") - [_Experience Cloud Developer Guide_: Report on Deflections: The Deflection Signals Framework](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/communities_dev_using_deflection_framework.htm?q=the%20deflection%20signals%20framework) # Delete a Chatter Stream You can delete a Chatter stream from the streams home page and from the stream itself. Deleting a Chatter stream doesn’t delete the records or posts that it contains. It deletes only the stream, which frees up space for you to add more streams. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer editions
- **[Delete a Chatter Stream from the Streams Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_deletefromstreamshome.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The streams home page lists all your streams, and each row provides a set of actions that you can perform on the listed stream. Actions include the **Delete** action. Deleting a Chatter stream doesn’t delete the records or posts that it contains. It deletes only the stream, which frees up space for adding new streams. - **[Delete a Chatter Stream from Within the Stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_deletefromstream.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Once you navigate to a stream, a **Delete** action is available for deleting the stream. Deleting a Chatter stream doesn’t delete the records or posts that it contains. It deletes only the stream, which frees up space for you to add more streams. #### See Also - [Chatter Streams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter streams are custom feeds that you create by combining multiple related feeds into one feed. Look for streams on your Chatter home page. Create up to 100 streams that each combine posts from up to 25 different feeds and feed types. Create streams that combine feeds from people, groups, and records, like accounts, opportunities, cases, and more.") - [Create Chatter Streams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a Chatter stream to get a combined view of feeds from the profiles, groups, and records that you select. Include up to 25 feeds in each stream. Create up to 100 Chatter streams. You don’t have to follow a person, group, or record before you add it to a stream. The great thing about adding a feed to a stream is that it doesn’t count against the number of follows you’re allowed. You can create a Chatter stream from the Chatter home page, from the streams home page, and from a profile or record detail.") - [Edit a Chatter Stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_edit.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Edit a stream to change its name or to add or remove some of its feeds. You can edit a Chatter stream from the streams home page or from the stream itself.") # Delete a Chatter Stream from the Streams Home Page The streams home page lists all your streams, and each row provides a set of actions that you can perform on the listed stream. Actions include the **Delete** action. Deleting a Chatter stream doesn’t delete the records or posts that it contains. It deletes only the stream, which frees up space for adding new streams. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer editions
1. On the Chatter home page, click the Streams heading to open the streams home page. ![The Streams heading on the Chatter home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_streams_heading.png) ![The streams home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_streams_home2.png) 2. On the row that lists the stream you want to delete, click the ![Actions icon on a stream row](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_streams_rowactionicon.png) menu icon, and select **Delete**. 3. In the Delete dialog, click **Delete**. # Delete a Chatter Stream from Within the Stream Once you navigate to a stream, a **Delete** action is available for deleting the stream. Deleting a Chatter stream doesn’t delete the records or posts that it contains. It deletes only the stream, which frees up space for you to add more streams. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer editions
The Chatter home page lists your five most recently accessed streams. Click a stream name to open it. If the stream you want to edit is not listed, click the Streams heading to navigate to the streams home page. There you can locate your stream, and click its name to open it. 1. Once you’ve navigated to a stream, click its **Delete** button. ![The Delete button on a stream](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_streams_deletebutton2.png) 2. In the Delete dialog, click **Delete**. # Delete a File When you delete a file from Salesforce Files, it’s also removed from all locations where it was shared. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
User Permissions Needed
To delete a file:

File owner

OR

Delete Salesforce Files

To delete a file that isn't associated with another file or object:

File owner

OR

Modify All Data

If the file is contained in a library, only the file owner or a user with delete permission in the library can delete the file. The Library Administrator is an example of someone with delete permission in a library. 1. In Lightning Experience, from the App Launcher, open Files. 2. Find the file that you want to delete and open its row-level actions dropdown. 3. Click **Delete** and confirm your changes. If the file was shared via a link, anyone with the link no longer has access to the file. You can restore the file and all the shares that were associated with it by removing it from the Recycle Bin. #### See Also - [Delete Files and Links from Chatter Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_attachments_del.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Only a file owner can delete files. Users with the “Modify All Data” permission can delete all comments, posts, files, and links.") - [Remove a File from a Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_remove_from_record.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Remove a file from a single record that the file’s attached to. Unlike deleting a file, removing doesn’t affect the file on other records or posts, and the file remains in Files home. To remove files from records, you must have at least collaborator access on the file.") - [Who Can See My File?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_settings_perms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your files in Salesforce can be private to you, privately shared, or visible to your entire company. Learn how to identify a file’s sharing settings and how to change them.") # Delete a Language When you delete a language, the translated content isn’t deleted—it’s just no longer visible. When you add the language back to the Experience Builder site, you can access the translated content again. ### Required Editions
Available in: Experience Builder sites accessed through Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and mobile devices, and is available in Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. In Experience Builder, click **![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings.png)** | **Languages**. 2. Under Site Languages, click **![Delete language](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_multilingual_delete.png)** next to the language that you want to delete. #### See Also - [Add Languages to Your Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_add.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add the languages that you want your site to support.") # Delete a Page in Experience Builder Remove a site page or page variation that you no longer need by deleting it from the Page Action menu. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Before you delete a page from your site, review [Considerations for Page Hierarchy and URL Conflicts in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_management_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you create and organize pages in your Experience Builder site, some pages behave differently than others. Keep these page management considerations in mind when you use the Page Action menu."). Keep in mind that you can’t delete: - The default pages and objects that come with the template - A page’s default page variation - A parent page without deleting its subpages - A custom object page without deleting its related object pages (detail, list, and related list) To delete a page or page variation: 1. In Experience Builder, open the Pages menu. 2. To access the Page Actions menu, click ![Open Page Properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_properties_ellipsis.png). 3. To delete a page, click **Delete Page**. Deleting a page also deletes the subpages nested under it. For example, when you delete Parent Page, Child Page and Grandchild Page are also deleted: ![Delete parent page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_delete_parent_page.png) To delete a subpage page in the page hierarchy, click ![Open Page Properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_properties_ellipsis.png) next to the specific page you want to delete. 4. To delete page variations (if available), open the Page Actions menu and click **Page Settings**. 5. Open the Page Variations tab. 6. Click the dropdown next to the page variation that you want to delete, then click **Delete**. # Delete Assigned Badges Sometimes badges are assigned to a member by mistake. If you gave the badge, you can delete it from the member’s profile page. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To manage your recognition badges:

Create And Set Up Experiences

AND

Moderate Chatter

OR

Manage Experiences

AND

Moderate Chatter

1. Open the profile page for the member who got the badge by mistake. 2. To open the Recognition Badge list view, click **View All** under Recognition. ![Recognition Badges card on a User Profile page.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/recog_badges_profile_card.png) 3. Locate the badge in the list and click the dropdown at the end of the row. 4. Click **Delete**. ![Badge list view with the Delete option at the end of the row.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/recog_badges_delete_profile_badge.png) # Delete Chatter Groups Deleting a group permanently deletes all group updates, including feed posts and any links that were posted to the group. To delete a group, you must be the group owner or a user with the Modify All Data permission. Group managers can’t delete a group. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To retain group data for future reference, [archive groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_archiving.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Archive a group manually, or edit automatic archiving settings.") instead of deleting them. In Lightning Experience, delete a group by clicking **Delete Group** from the buttons in the group highlights panel. In Salesforce Classic: 1. On a group detail page, click **Group Settings**. 2. Click **Delete**. 3. Click **OK**. When you delete a group that includes files, you're not deleting the files, just references to them. The files remain in their original location. For example, you can see the files that you own by applying the **Owned by Me** filter on Files home. If files were posted to the group and not shared in other locations, deleting the group also removes the references to the files. The files remain in the file owner's **Owned by Me** filter on Files home, where the files are private but can be shared again later. #### See Also - [Archive Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_archiving.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Archive a group manually, or edit automatic archiving settings.") - [View Where a File Is Shared](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_shared_with.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out who can see a file and their level of access. From the File Detail page, you can access a full list of every person or object the file is shared with.") # Delete Documents When you delete a document, Salesforce stores it in the Recycle Bin. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
User Permissions Needed
To delete documents: Delete on documents
To restore documents: Delete on documents
To delete a document, click **Del** next to the document on the documents list page. Alternatively, click **Delete** on the documents detail page. You can restore the document to your document library within that time by clicking **Undelete** from the Recycle Bin. - You can delete any document in your personal folder and folders with “Public Folder Access” set to “Read/Write.” To delete a document in a public folder with “Public Folder Access” set to “Read Only,” you need “Manage Public Documents” permissions. - If you delete a document that's included in a letterhead or HTML email template, emails using the letterhead or template display a broken link. You can fix the broken link by removing the document from the Recycle Bin. - You can't delete a document that's being used as a custom logo in meeting requests. To delete it, you must either select another document to use as a logo or uncheck the option to display a custom logo in meeting requests. # Delete Files and Links from Chatter Feeds Only a file owner can delete files. Users with the “Modify All Data” permission can delete all comments, posts, files, and links. - To delete a link from a Chatter feed, simply delete its post. - To delete a file from a Chatter feed on a record: - Delete its post. This action not only deletes the post, but also removes the file from the feed and from the Notes and Attachments related list. The file remains in its original location. If the file isn't posted anywhere else, it goes back to being private, but can be shared again later. - Click **Del** next to the feed attachment on the Notes and Attachments related list. This action removes the file from all Chatter feeds where it’s been shared. It also deletes the file from the Notes and Attachments related list. You can restore the file from the Recycle Bin. If the file was attached from your computer, a Chatter feed, group, or a Salesforce CRM Content library, deleting it from the Notes and Attachments related list removes it from the post, but not from its original location. - To delete a file from a file detail page: Click **Delete** on a file's detail page to delete the file and remove it from all locations where it's been shared. If the file was shared via link, anyone with the link no longer has access to the file once it’s deleted. You can restore the file and all the shares that were associated with it by removing it from the Recycle Bin. - To delete a file from a content detail page: From the content details page, click **Edit** | **Delete Content** to delete the file. Deleting a Chatter file from the content details page deletes the file from Salesforce CRM Content and from Chatter. #### See Also - [Chatter Post Visibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_post_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn where you can post in Chatter, who can see your posts, and whose posts you can see.") # Delete Topics People with the right permissions can delete topics directly from topic detail pages. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
User Permissions Needed
To delete standard topics:

Modify All Data

OR

Delete Topics

To delete topics that are also used as navigational, featured, or content topics in a site:

Create and Set Up Experiences

OR

Manage Experiences

Because topic names and descriptions aren't private, administrators can delete topics for compliance reasons or to remove inappropriate content. When deleting topics, consider these points. - Topics are permanently deleted. They aren’t sent to the Recycle Bin. - Deleted topics are removed from search results, the topics list, all posts and records, Recently Talked About topics, Related Topics, and your users’ favorites. After the next calculation, deleted topics are removed from Trending Topics. - Users can reintroduce a topic after it’s been deleted. To delete a topic: 1. Navigate to the topic detail page. 2. In the upper right, click **Delete** (Lightning Experience) or ![Topic Options drop-down menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/case_feed_portal_select_widget.png) and choose **Delete** (Salesforce Classic). In Experience Cloud sites, delete topics from **Workspaces** | **Content Management** | **Topics**. After the topics are deleted, they’re no longer assigned in your site. # Delete, Archive, and Restore Content There are two methods for removing content from libraries: archiving and deleting. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To archive and restore any content in the library: Archive Content checked in your library permission definition
To archive and restore content that you published: Add Content checked in your library permission definition
To delete content: Delete Content checked in your library permission definition
Archiving lets you continue to store files in Salesforce without them being in a library or exposed in search results. Deleting files moves them to the **Recycle Bin**, where files remain for 15 days before being permanently, automatically deleted. Within 15 days of deleting a file, you can restore it from the **Recycle Bin**. You can also restore archived files. Before you delete or archive content, it's important to know what's similar and different about these two methods: | Effects of Archiving or Deleting Content | Archived Content | Deleted Content | | --- | --- | --- | | Counts towards file storage limits (storage size as well as number of documents) | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   | | Removed from libraries | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | New versions can no longer be uploaded | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Content can’t be downloaded (unless deleted content is restored within 15 days) |   | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Content no longer appears in search results | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Content can be restored | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Automatically removed from subscription lists (without notifying subscribers) | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Permanently deleted by emptying Recycle Bin |   | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | To archive or delete content files: 1. On the **Libraries**, **Content**, or **Subscriptions** tab, click the name of the file you want to remove. 2. On the **Content Details** page, click **Edit** | **Archive Content** or **Edit** | **Delete Content**. To delete files in content packs: - By default, you must first delete the content pack, and then delete the file. - If your admin has enabled the Salesforce CRM Content setting that allows files to be deleted from content packs, you can delete a file without having to first remove it from a content pack. This removes all versions of that file from all content packs, including content packs you don’t have access to, like those in Private Libraries. To restore archived content files: 1. Do one of the following to open the **Content Details** page for an archived file: - Follow a bookmark to the archived content. - On the **Libraries** tab, click a library name to open the **Library Details**page. Click the **View Archived Content** link to see a list of archived content on the **Content** tab. Click the name of the content file you want to restore. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The **View Archived Content** link only displays if you have the Archive Content, Add Content, or Manage Libraries privileges in your library permission. If you have the Archive Content or Manage Libraries privileges, you will see a list of all archived content in the library, regardless of author. If you do not have those privileges but have the Add Content privilege, you will only see archived content that you authored and archived. 2. On the **Content Details** page, click **Edit** | **Restore Content**. To restore deleted content: 1. On either the **Libraries** or **Subscriptions** tab, or on the **Content Details** page, go to the **Recycle Bin**. 2. Select the checkbox for the content file you want to restore, and click **Undelete**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - Authors can always archive and restore their own content. Authors do not require the Archive Content library permission option. - If a file is in Salesforce CRM Content and also posted in Chatter, archiving it doesn't remove the Chatter post. - Deleting a Chatter file from the content details page deletes the file from Salesforce CRM Content and from Chatter. #### See Also - [Delete a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_deleting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you delete a file from Salesforce Files, it’s also removed from all locations where it was shared.") # Deliver Content Use content delivery to convert documents into an optimized web-based version for easy online viewing. - **[Create Content Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A content delivery lets you convert documents such as Microsoft® PowerPoint and Word files into an optimized web-based version for easy online viewing. After you create your delivery, you can send its encrypted URL to any recipient, such as leads, customers, partners, and colleagues, and then track how often people view or download the content. Content deliveries are available in Salesforce Classic only. However, Lightning Email generates delivery-based links as email attachments for Lightning Experience users who have access to the Content Deliveries feature. - **[View and Edit Content Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** On the Content Deliveries related list or the Content Deliveries list page, click the name of a content delivery to open the detail page. - **[Use the Content Deliveries Related List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_related_list.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A content delivery allows you to convert documents such as Microsoft® PowerPoint and Word files into an optimized web-based version for easy online viewing. # Deploy A Full Experience Cloud Site with Change Sets Use change sets to move your Experience Cloud site between related orgs that have a deployment connection, such as your sandbox and production orgs. Create, customize, and test your site in your test environment and then migrate the site to production when testing is complete. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences
To edit deployment connections and use inbound change sets:

Deploy Change Sets AND Modify All Data

Note
Note If a user requires access only to metadata for deployments, you can turn on the Modify Metadata Through Metadata API Functions permission. This permission gives such users the access that they need for deployments without providing access to org data. For details, see “Modify Metadata Through Metadata API Functions Permission” in Salesforce Help.
To use outbound change sets: Create and Upload Change Sets, Create AppExchange Packages, AND Upload AppExchange Packages
You can use change sets to move full Experience Builder and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites using the Network component type. 1. Create and test your site in your preferred test org, such as sandbox. 2. From Setup in your test org, enter Outbound Change Sets in the Quick Find box, and then select **Outbound Change Sets**. 3. Create a change set, and click **Add** in the Change Set Components section. 4. Select the **Network** component type, choose your site, and then click **Add to Change Set**. 5. To add dependent items, click **View/Add Dependencies**. We recommend selecting all the dependencies listed. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip - For navigation menus that link to standard objects, custom list views aren’t included as dependencies. Manually add the custom list view to your change list. - Manually add new or modified profiles or permission sets referenced in **Administration** | **Members**. - The list of dependencies has two Site.com items—MySiteName and MySiteName1. MySiteName holds the various Visualforce pages that you can set in Administration in Experience Workspaces. MySiteName1 includes the pages from Experience Builder. 6. Click **Upload** and select your target org, such as production. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Make sure that your target org allows inbound connections. The inbound and outbound orgs must have a deployment connection. Change sets deploy to an org, not to a site that you pick. The destination site is represented by the **Network** component that you added to the change set. To deploy the same staged site to multiple production orgs, upload and deploy the change set separately to each connected target org. 7. From Setup, select **Inbound Change Sets** and find the change set that you uploaded from your source org. 8. Validate and deploy the change set to make it available in the target org. ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_warning.png) Warning When you deploy an inbound change set, it overwrites the site in the target org. 9. Manually reconfigure any [unsupported items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_migrate_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) in the target org site. 10. Add data for your site, and test it to make sure that everything works as expected. Then publish your changes to go live. #### See Also - [Considerations for Deploying Experience Cloud Sites with Change Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_migrate_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep the following considerations and limitations in mind when migrating your Experience Builder or Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site with change sets.") - [Change Sets Best Practices](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.changesets_best_practices.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Upload Outbound Change Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.changesets_about_outbound.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Deploy Inbound Change Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.changesets_about_inbound.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Deploy an Experience Cloud Site from Sandbox to Production We recommend creating, customizing, and testing your Experience Cloud site in a test environment, such as a sandbox, before deploying it to your production org. When testing is complete, you can use change sets or Metadata API to migrate your site from one org to another. Deciding whether to use change sets or MD API depends on several factors. Some things to consider are the complexity of the changes that you’re migrating, your level of comfort with developer tools, and the application lifecycle management (ALM) model that you’re using. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
To learn more about the ALM models and development options available to you, check out [Determine Which Application Lifecycle Management Model Is Right for You](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/trails/determine-which-application-lifecycle-management-model-is-right-for-you) on Trailhead. Lightning Bolt Solutions aren’t suitable for deploying Experience Cloud sites between your orgs. Use a Lightning Bolt Solution to share or sell a solution on AppExchange or implement a site with a turnkey solution or new look. ## Change Sets If you’re more comfortable working with point-and-click tools, change sets are your deployment friend. A change set represents a set of customizations in your org (or metadata components) that you can deploy to a connected org. You can manage your application using declarative tools. You don’t have to use a command-line interface or a version control system to meet your customization needs. You use the Setup menu to create changes in a development environment. You then migrate the changes between environments as you work through the ALM steps. Your release artifact is a set of metadata changes relative to what’s in the production org. What gets released is only metadata that has been added or changed—if it doesn’t change, it’s not in the release. ## Metadata API If you’re up to speed on Metadata API and more comfortable in the world of code, use Metadata API to deploy changes programmatically. You can retrieve, deploy, create, update, and delete customization information for your org, such as Experience Cloud sites, custom object definitions, and page layouts. Using Metadata API is ideal when your changes are complex or when you need a more rigorous change management process and an audit process (or version control system) to manage multiple work streams. As with the change set process, the release artifact that you create is a set of metadata changes relative to your production org. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Some Experience Cloud site settings and features aren’t yet supported in Metadata API, so you have to migrate them manually between environments. Remember to track these changes so that you don’t forget to migrate them. - **[Deploy Your Experience Cloud Site with Change Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_migrate_changesets_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use change sets to move all or part of your Experience Cloud site between related orgs that have a deployment connection. You can use the Network component type to move any full Experience Cloud site. Or, you can use the Digital Experience component type to move partial site content for enhanced LWR sites. - **[Deploy Your Experience Cloud Site with the Metadata API](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_migrating_from_sandbox.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Metadata API to move your Experience Cloud site from one Salesforce org to another. Set up and test your site in your test environment, and then retrieve the site’s data and deploy it to your production org. # Deploy Partial Experience Cloud Site Content with Change Sets Use change sets to move individual Experience Cloud components and content between related orgs that have a deployment connection, such as your sandbox and production orgs. Create and test changes in your test environment, and then migrate only those changes to production when they’re ready. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences
To edit deployment connections and use inbound change sets:

Deploy Change Sets AND Modify All Data

If a user requires access only to metadata for deployments, you can enable the Modify Metadata Through Metadata API Functions permission. This permission gives such users the access they need for deployments without providing access to org data. For details, see “Modify Metadata Through Metadata API Functions Permission” in Salesforce Help.

To use outbound change sets: Create and Upload Change Sets, Create AppExchange Packages, AND Upload AppExchange Packages
Partial deployment with change sets is available for enhanced LWR sites created in Winter ’23 and later. You can use change sets to move partial content for Experience Builder sites using the Digital Experiences component type. 1. Create and test your site in your preferred test org, such as a sandbox. 2. From Setup in your test org, in the Quick Find box, enter Outbound Change Sets, and then select **Outbound Change Sets**. 3. Create a change set, and click **Add** in the Change Set Components section. 4. Select the **Digital Experience** component type. 5. Select the content that you want to deploy from the list of components, and then click **Add To Change Set**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip - To identify which enhanced LWR site each listed component belongs to, use the Type column. The Type column uses the naming convention site/MySiteName. - To identify what content each listed component represents, use the Name column. The Name column uses the naming convention sfdc\_cms\_\_/. For example, the name sfdc\_cms\_\_brandingSet/Build\_Your\_Own\_LWR represents a branding set named Build Your Own LWR. 6. Click **Upload**, and select your target org, such as production. Make sure that the target org allows inbound connections. The inbound and outbound orgs must have a deployment connection. 7. From Setup, select **Inbound Change Sets**, and find the change set that you uploaded from your source org. 8. Validate and deploy the change set to make it available in the target org. ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_warning.png) Warning When you deploy an inbound change set, it overrides the corresponding site content in the target org. 9. Manually reconfigure any [unsupported items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_migrate_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) in the target org site. 10. To make sure that everything works as expected, test your site. Then publish your changes to go live. # Deploy the Agent to Your Experience Cloud Site First, deploy the agent to your selected Experience Cloud site. This action adds the necessary components to your site page. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Available in: Enhanced Chat with the Einstein for Service, Einstein Platform, Community, Community Plus, or Agentforce for Service add-on
Available in: LWR and Aura
User Permissions Needed
To enable digital experiences: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site OR View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To set up this Enhanced Chat: Customize Application AND Modify Metadata Through Metadata API Function
To create and manage Agentforce Service agents: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site OR View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Before you begin, make sure you've completed these steps: - [Create an Agent from an Agentforce Service Agent Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.service_agent_setup.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - Create an Experience Cloud site. - Provision Digital Engagement in your Salesforce org. - Confirm your org uses Omni-Channel or [Enhanced Chat](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.miaw_setup_stages.htm&language=en_US) (formerly Messaging for In-App and Web). 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Agentforce Agents, and then select **Agentforce Agents**. 2. From the list of agents, select the specific agent you want to deploy (for example, Agentforce Service Agent). 3. In the top right corner of the Agent Details page, click **Open in Builder**. 4. From the Agent Readiness Checklist, select **Deploy Your Agent to an Experience Cloud Site**, and then click **Go to Sites**. 5. Select an Experience Cloud site from the list and click **Deploy**. ![Deploy Service Agent window](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/deploy_agent_ec.png) 6. When the confirmation window appears, verify the prerequisites are complete, and then click **Yes** to proceed. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The chat panel doesn’t automatically open in preview mode. Users must manually click the chat icon. In Experience Builder, verify that the Enhanced Chat component is added to the page. If you don’t see it, make sure that Enhanced Chat is configured in Setup. See [Quickly Set Up Enhanced Chat v1 or v2 for Testing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.miaw_setup_stages.htm&language=en_US). #### See Also - [Enable Salesforce Knowledge in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_knowledge_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable Salesforce Knowledge to quickly get articles to your customers and agents in an Experience Cloud site. Knowledge articles provide accurate information to customers when and where they need it.") # Deploy Your Experience Cloud Site with Change Sets Use change sets to move all or part of your Experience Cloud site between related orgs that have a deployment connection. You can use the Network component type to move any full Experience Cloud site. Or, you can use the Digital Experience component type to move partial site content for enhanced LWR sites. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
- **[Deploy A Full Experience Cloud Site with Change Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_migrate_changesets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use change sets to move your Experience Cloud site between related orgs that have a deployment connection, such as your sandbox and production orgs. Create, customize, and test your site in your test environment and then migrate the site to production when testing is complete. - **[Deploy Partial Experience Cloud Site Content with Change Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_migrate_changesets_partial.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use change sets to move individual Experience Cloud components and content between related orgs that have a deployment connection, such as your sandbox and production orgs. Create and test changes in your test environment, and then migrate only those changes to production when they’re ready. - **[Considerations for Deploying Experience Cloud Sites with Change Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_migrate_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep the following considerations and limitations in mind when migrating your Experience Builder or Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site with change sets. # Deploy Your Experience Cloud Site with the Metadata API Use Metadata API to move your Experience Cloud site from one Salesforce org to another. Set up and test your site in your test environment, and then retrieve the site’s data and deploy it to your production org. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
Depending on the site framework, the following metadata types combine to define the site. To successfully migrate a site, use the Metadata API retrieve call to retrieve XML file representations of your org’s components. Network Represents an Experience Cloud site. Contains administration settings, such as page override, email, and membership configurations. CustomSite Contains the domain and page setting information, including indexPage, siteAdmin, and URL definitions. DigitalExperienceBundle and DigitalExperienceConfig _or_ ExperienceBundle _or_ SiteDotCom The metadata type you require varies depending on the site type. Represents the different settings and components, such as pages, branding sets, and themes, that make up a site. - For enhanced LWR sites, introduced in Winter ’23 (API version 56.0), DigitalExperienceBundle and DigitalExperienceConfig combine to provide text-based representations of your site elements and settings. You can retrieve editable site metadata and quickly create, update, publish, and deploy sites programmatically. You can also partially deploy enhanced LWR sites. - For non-enhanced LWR sites, ExperienceBundle provides text-based representations of the site’s settings, pages, and components. You can retrieve editable site metadata and quickly create, update, publish, and deploy sites programmatically. - For Aura sites, you can choose to use either ExperienceBundle or SiteDotCom, but we recommend using ExperienceBundle. Before Summer ’19 (API version 45.0 and earlier), the Network, CustomSite, and SiteDotCom metadata types combined to define an Aura site. However, retrieving the SiteDotCom type produces a binary .site file that isn’t human readable. See [ExperienceBundle for Experience Builder Sites](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/communities_dev_migrate_expbundle.htm). - For Visualforce sites, SiteDotCom represents the site. For additional information on these metadata types and instructions on migrating data, see the [Metadata API Developer Guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.api_meta.meta/api_meta/) and the [Salesforce CLI Command Reference](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.sfdx_cli_reference.meta/sfdx_cli_reference/cli_reference_force_mdapi.htm). ## Required Metadata Types at a Glance The metadata types that you use to deploy a site vary depending on the site type.
Required Metadata Type Enhanced LWR Site LWR Site Aura Site Visualforce Site
Network Required Required Required Required
CustomSite Required Required Required Required
DigitalExperienceBundle Required      
DigitalExperienceConfig Required      
ExperienceBundle   Required

ExperienceBundle (recommended)

or

SiteDotCom

 
SiteDotCom     Required
## Tips and Considerations - Before migrating data to another org, [enable digital experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enabling digital experiences is the first step to creating an Experience Cloud site, whether you’re building a community, portal, help center, or website. You also need to enable digital experiences when setting up Commerce Cloud, Financial Services Cloud, Health Cloud, and Work.com.") in the destination org and enter the same domain name that you used in your sandbox org to avoid getting an error. - For each Experience Cloud site, the network component has a unique name and URL path prefix. When you retrieve the network component, the generated XML file name is based on the name of the network. When migrating, the API looks at the file name and, if it exists, updates the site. If it doesn’t exist, the API creates a site. If someone changes the site name in the sandbox and then tries to migrate, they see an error. The API is trying to create a site with the existing path prefix. - Examine the XML file for CustomSite to make sure that all dependencies are brought over. If any are missing, explicitly state them in the XML file. - In addition to the required components described previously, include all the other components required by your site. Components can include such items as custom objects, custom fields, custom Lightning components, and Apex classes. - To deploy the Network and Profile components using unlocked packages, create a separate unlocked package for each component and deploy them individually. - When deploying an Aura site with ExperienceBundle, ensure that the SiteDotCom type isn’t included in the manifest file. - If you rename a site in **Administration** | **Settings**, make sure that the source and target sites have matching values for the `picassoSite` and `site` attributes in the Network component. - If there are any changes to the guest user profile, include the profile as part of the site migration. - When you migrate user profiles, users are added to the site in the production org. Emails are then sent to members in the same way as for any new site. - During deployment, make sure that the NavigationMenu developer name in the target org is the same as the developer name in the source org. - If the containerType is CommunityTemplateDefinition, you can’t update an existing NavigationMenu via Metadata API. - To deploy an Aura site with a custom template, first retrieve and deploy the CommunityTemplateDefinition and the relevant metadata types, such as CommunityThemeDefinition. Then retrieve and deploy ExperienceBundle or SiteDotCom and the relevant metadata types. - Deploying the navigation menu with additional menu items deletes any translations applied to existing menu items in the target environment. - To include navigation menus when you move your site, use the NavigationMenu metadata type. - You can’t deploy to a target org that’s using an earlier release version. For example, if your source org is on Summer ’19 (API version 46.0), you can’t deploy to a target org on Spring ’19 (API version 45.0). - NavigationLinkSet was deprecated in Winter ’20 (API version 47.0) and replaced by NavigationMenu. - If your site includes pages from Site.com Studio, use the SiteDotCom metadata type, because deploying the site using ExperienceBundle permanently deletes the Site.com Studio pages. - ExperienceBundle doesn’t support retrieving and deploying across different API versions. If you’re trying to upgrade ExperienceBundle metadata from an earlier API version to a later one—for example, from API version 48.0 to 49.0—take the following steps: 1. Set the API version in the package.xml manifest file to 48.0 and deploy the package. 2. Then, set the API version in package.xml to 49.0. 3. To get the latest ExperienceBundle updates, retrieve the package . - When deploying a site, you sometimes receive a warning message about invalid ID values. For example: The topicId property of component 9b8a4e98-e724-4292-bd3c-0813adf9ddc2 references an object with the ID value 0TO4R000000EGPEWA4. Occasionally, when deployed to a destination org, ID values can become invalid—for example, if the referenced ID doesn’t exist in the destination org. If you encounter component issues in your destination org, verify that the ID values are correct. In these situations, you can deploy the site successfully despite the warning. However, we recommend verifying in the target org that the object ID referenced in the component is still valid. If the ID is incorrect, manually update the ID to resolve any component issues in the target org. Alternatively, if it’s a custom component that you created, consider replacing the object ID with the object’s API name instead to avoid the issue in future. ## Sample Template The following sample contains all the fields that you can migrate through the Metadata API. ```markup true true txt,png,jpg,jpeg,pdf,doc,csv unfiled$public/ContactFollowUpSAMPLE unfiled$public/CommunityChangePasswordEmailTemplate true admin@myorg.com MyCommunity true true true false false true true false true true true true true true true unfiled$public/CommunityForgotPasswordEmailTemplate false unfiled$public/CommunityLockoutEmailTemplate 51200 MyCommunity_Permissions Admin VisualForce Designer Designer Designer Designer MyCommunity1 true true MyCommunity Live home Chatter mycommunity unfiled$public/CommunityWelcomeEmailTemplate ``` ## Sample `package.xml` Manifest File A manifest file defines the components that you’re trying to retrieve. The following sample shows a `package.xml` manifest file for retrieving all the components of an Experience Builder site. ```markup * Network * CustomSite * ExperienceBundle * CustomTab * CustomObject * ApexClass * ApexPage * ApexComponent * Portal * Profile * Document 46.0 ``` - **[Troubleshoot Metadata Deployment Errors in Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_migrate_troubleshoot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Solve issues that can arise when deploying LWR and Aura sites with ExperienceBundle or enhanced LWR sites with DigitalExperienceBundle. #### See Also - [Deploy A Full Experience Cloud Site with Change Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_migrate_changesets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use change sets to move your Experience Cloud site between related orgs that have a deployment connection, such as your sandbox and production orgs. Create, customize, and test your site in your test environment and then migrate the site to production when testing is complete.") # Determine If an Object Can Trigger Journeys Before you create an event-based journey, check that the object you want to use works. This test helps you identify available objects.
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
1. In Journey Builder, create a journey. 2. Drag the **Salesforce Data Event** tile onto the canvas. 3. To configure the event, click the icon. 4. Select **Salesforce Data**. 5. In **Select an Object**, look for the object you’re interested in. If you don’t see an object, it can’t be used to trigger a journey. # Develop a Security Plan for Your Experience Cloud Site Salesforce has various security settings and permissions you can use when you’re building a site on the Experience Cloud platform. Before you start creating a site, put together a security plan that can help you during the implementation. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## Why Is This Important? The security of the data you store in Salesforce is critical to the integrity of your business. Beyond data, security includes authentication, public unauthenticated access, and cookie management. ## What Should You Keep in Mind? Making a detailed and specific plan for your data security needs is an essential step to creating a safe and secure site for your customers and partners. Ask these questions before you start your implementation. Data Security and Encryption: - How much access to different objects in Salesforce do you want to give to your site’s users? - Is this access different for authenticated users versus unauthenticated users? - What external organization-wide sharing settings do you need so you can restrict the default access level for an object’s records? - What field-level security settings do you need so that you can restrict users from seeing certain fields? - What object permissions must you specify for users to create, read, edit, and delete records for each object? - Do you want to encrypt data elements, such as standard or custom fields or files? - Does your Salesforce org already have an encryption policy for its internal users? Access: - Do you want your users to sign in to the site, only browse as guest users, or both? - Which default object permissions, if any, do you want to apply to the guest user profile? - Which system permissions do you want to remove from the guest user profile? - Which Visualforce pages and Apex controllers do your guest users need access to? - Do you want guest users to see other members of your site? - Do you want to use nicknames to protect the identity of your site’s members? Authentication: - Do you want your users to self-register? - Do you want site users to authenticate using an external identity provider (single sign-on)? - Do you need configurations for third-party authentication providers, such as Facebook or LinkedIn? - Do you want to build integrations between your site and custom branded apps, such as mobile or desktop apps? Cookies: - Do you need end-user cookie consent management? ## Find Out More - ![Video](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_video.png) [Who Sees What in Experience Cloud](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/bLE3QNRSej2iasw9vvc6Tk) - ![Video](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_video.png) [Show Me How: External Sharing](https://www.learnexperiencecloud.com/s/news/show-me-how-june-11-2020-MC65E4EQKHYRA7VEZ3BDKAITDOAU) - ![Trailhead](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_trailhead.png) [Trailhead: Protect Your Salesforce Data](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/trails/security) - ![Trailhead](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_trailhead.png) [Trailhead: Share CRM Data with Your Partners](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/trails/security) - ![Video](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_video.png) [Show Me How: Single Sign-on](https://www.learnexperiencecloud.com/s/news/show-me-how-may-28-2020-MCMLFAUZAMDRG2DP6XZ22BYZW3CQ) - ![Video](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_video.png) [Show Me How: Self Registration](https://www.learnexperiencecloud.com/s/news/show-me-how-may-14-2020-MCU5Y634RFSBHR3HNCCEAC4T3JTI) - ![Video](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_video.png) [Show Me How: Cookie Consent Management](https://www.learnexperiencecloud.com/s/news/show-me-how-cookie-consent-management-MCZL54ZNBMBVARFOO2AE4N6IG3FE) - ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Develop Secure Sites: Authenticated and Guest Users](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/communities_dev_security_authenticated_and_guest_users.htm) # Differences Between Chatter in Lightning Experience on Desktop and Mobile Not every Lightning Experience feature is in the Salesforce mobile app. Find out what’s different in Chatter between desktop and mobile experiences. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer editions
## Feeds When viewing feed items in the Salesforce mobile app, you can’t see: - Live feed or live comment updates. - Rich text formatting or code snippets in the main feed. (_Salesforce for Android and Salesforce for iOS only_) - Inline images in the main feed—you see a placeholder with the name of the image instead. (_Salesforce for Android only_) - Multiple attachments on an item in the main feed—only the first attachment is displayed. (_Salesforce for Android and Salesforce for iOS only_) - Previews of links in the main feed. (_Salesforce for Android and Salesforce for iOS only_) - Bundled posts in the What I Follow feed. (_Salesforce for Android and Salesforce for iOS only_) - Social feed posts. (_Salesforce for Android and Salesforce for iOS only_) - The full content of posts shared from Lightning Experience when viewed in the main Chatter feed (_Salesforce for Android and Salesforce for iOS only_). - The full content of posts shared from Lightning Experience when viewed in feeds on profiles (_Salesforce for iOS only_). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note To see the shared content, tap the **View Post** link in the shared feed item. When posting, commenting, or doing other work in feeds from the Salesforce mobile app, you can’t: - Apply rich text formatting or include code snippets in feed items. - Add more than one attachment to feed items. - Edit all feed posts. - Share posts. (_mobile browser app only_) - Search in feeds on user profiles and records. There are some other features that aren’t available in Chatter in the Salesforce mobile app. You can’t: - Switch the main feed to show only muted posts. - Filter the main feed to show all updates, fewer updates, questions, or only posts related to a specific object. - Send or view Chatter messages. - See recommendations. - Add or view Chatter favorites. - See Chatter activity statistics or Chatter influence status. - Invite coworkers to sign up for Chatter. - For external users, receive Chatter push notifications. # Differences Between Files, Salesforce CRM Content, Salesforce Knowledge, Documents, and Attachments Explore the differences in the various ways to manage your files and content.
  Files Home Salesforce CRM Content Salesforce Knowledge Documents Tab Attachments
Purpose Upload, store, find, follow, share, and collaborate on Salesforce files in the cloud. Publish and share official corporate files with coworkers and deliver them to customers. Create and manage content, known as articles, in a knowledge base. Internal users and customers can quickly find and view the articles that they need. Customers include people on your Customer Portal, partner portal, Service Cloud Portal, Salesforce Sites, or Experience Cloud sites. Store web resources, such as logos, DOT files, and other Visualforce materials in folders without attaching them to records. Attach files to records from the Attachments related list on selected detail pages.
Common Uses Upload a file and store it privately until you're ready to share it. Share the file with coworkers and groups to collaborate and get feedback. Attach files to posts in a Chatter feed on the Home tab, Chatter tab, a profile, a record, or a group. Create, clone, or modify a sales presentation and save it so only you can see it and work on it. When you're ready, publish it so other users in your company have access to it. Create a content pack and send it to customers. Write, edit, publish, and archive articles using the Articles Management tab, or find and view published articles using the Articles tab. If Salesforce Knowledge is enabled in your Customer Portal, partner portal, Service Cloud Portal, or Lightning Platform Sites, customers and partners can access articles. Create a public knowledge base so website visitors can view articles. Add a custom logo to meeting requests by uploading your logo to the Documents tab. Add a file to a specific record, like an event, marketing campaign, contact, or case by attaching it on the Attachments related list.
Supported File Types All All All All All
Maximum File Sizes 2 GB
  • 2 GB
  • 2 GB (including headers) when uploaded via Connect REST API
  • 2 GB (including headers) when uploaded via REST API
  • 38 MB when uploaded via SOAP API
  • 10 MB when uploaded via Bulk API
  • 150 MB when uploaded via Bulk API 2.0
  • 10 MB when uploaded via Visualforce
  • 5 MB Classic Knowledge
  • 2 MB Lightning Knowledge
  • 5 MB
  • 20 KB for a custom-app logo
  • 25 MB for file attachments
  • 2 GB for feed attachments
#### See Also - [Work with Salesforce Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Salesforce Files to share and collaborate on files, store files privately, manage version updates, and follow files that are important to you. Use Files Connect to connect to external file systems right from Salesforce.") # Differences Between Q&A Features in Salesforce Salesforce offers various question-and-answer features that you can implement in your Salesforce organization and communities. Because some of these features use similar terminology, take a moment to review the differences between them. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience

Answers and Chatter Answers are available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions

Chatter Questions is available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions

Salesforce has released three features that let users post questions and answers in a public forum setting. While these features share a common purpose, they represent an evolution of Salesforce’s Q&A features.
Q&A Feature Description Structure How Users Access It
Version 1: Answers (Salesforce Classic only) Answers, released in Winter ’11, was Salesforce’s first Q&A feature for communities. Starting in Summer ’13, Answers isn’t available in new orgs. Answers is built on the Question standard object. Internal users access the Answers feature via the Answers tab in Salesforce.
Version 2: Chatter Answers (Salesforce Classic only)

Chatter Answers, released in Spring ’12, was intended for customers who liked the Answers user experience but wanted more features.

Chatter Answers let companies maintain an out-of-the-box, self-service site where users could help address each other’s questions, and provided a feed view of users’ questions. Starting in Summer ’16, Chatter Answers isn’t available in new orgs.

Chatter Answers is built on the Question standard object. Internal users access Chatter Answers via the Q&A tab, and moderators can view a list of questions in the Questions tab.
Version 3: Chatter Questions

Chatter Questions, released in Winter ’15, represents the most advanced developments in Salesforce Q&A functionality. Because it takes advantage of Chatter’s built-in capabilities, it’s ideal for customers who want their Q&A feature tightly integrated into Chatter.

Chatter Questions is available in Salesforce orgs, as well as in Experience Cloud Aura and Visualforce sites where Chatter Questions is enabled.

Chatter Questions is built on the Chatter data model, and uses the Feed Post and Feed Comment objects. Internal users access Chatter Questions within Chatter. They use the Question action in the Chatter publisher to post a question, and all questions are visible in the Chatter feed.
# Disable Edit Feed Post for All Users You can disable feed post in Chatter settings. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To enable or disable features in Chatter Settings: Customize Application
1. From Setup, enter Chatter Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Chatter Settings**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. In the Post and Comment Modification section, deselect the checkbox on Allow users to edit posts and comments. ![Post and comment modification](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_edit_post_settings.png) 4. Click **Save**. 5. If you have assigned the “Can Approve Feed Post and Comment” permission, disable that on the relevant permission sets. “Can Approve Feed Post and Comment” lets assigned users edit and delete any post or comment in any Chatter feed those users have access to. This permission is available under **Setup** | **Permission Sets** | **Select a permission set** | **System Permissions**. The feed post editing feature is disabled for your entire organization (or, for step 5, for all users assigned the edited permission set). Users can no longer edit posts and comments. # Disable Partner Accounts You can't delete partner accounts, but you can disable them. Disabling a partner account disables partner users associated with the account. We recommend disabling a partner account only if the account was accidentally enabled for site access. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To view accounts: Read on accounts
To create accounts: Create on accounts
To disable a partner account: Manage External Users
If you choose to disable a partner account: - Up to 15 active and inactive external users associated with the account are permanently disabled. You also remove them from all sites, groups, teams, permission sets, and sharing rules they're associated with. - If there are more than 15 active or inactive external users associated with an account, you can’t disable it. Disable the users before disabling the account. - Roles and groups associated with the account are permanently deleted and not moved to the Recycle Bin. 1. Go to the account detail page for the account you want to disable. 2. Click **Manage External Account**, then click **Disable Partner Account**. 3. Click **OK** to confirm. If you decide to re-enable the account in the future, you can re-enable individual contacts as partner site users. Re-enabling a contact for a partner site creates a partner user record that is not associated with the previous partner user and role. You can't restore deleted roles and groups. # Disabling Chatter Desktop Remotely Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important For more information, see [Chatter Desktop Retirement](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=000267581&type=1&language=en_US). If the computer where you installed Chatter Desktop is stolen or lost, you can block Chatter Desktop from accessing your Salesforce data. 1. From your personal settings, enter Advanced User Details in the Quick Find box, then select **Advanced User Details**. No results? Enter Personal Information in the Quick Find box, then select **Personal Information**. 2. In the Remote Access section, click **Revoke** next to Chatter Desktop. #### See Also - [Chatter Desktop Troubleshooting Tips](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_troubleshooting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find solutions for troubleshooting Chatter Desktop.") # Display and Edit Document Properties Display detailed document information and update document properties. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: all editions except Database.com
User Permissions Needed
To view documents: Read on documents
To update properties: Edit on documents
To replace documents: Edit on documents
To move documents: Edit on documents
To delete documents: Delete on documents
- To display a document, locate the document on the documents home or list pages, then click the document name to display detailed information. - To update document properties, click **Edit**. - To replace a document with an updated version, click **Replace Document**. - To email a document to a contact, click **Email Document**, fill in the details of the email, and click **Send**. The document is sent as an attachment to the email and is logged in the Activity History for the contact. Documents that reference URLs rather than physical files cannot be emailed. For a document that is an image embedded in an HTML email template, such as a logo in a letterhead, make sure the document is marked as Externally Available on the Documents tab so that a user who does not have a Salesforce username and password can view the image when it is received in an email. - To search for a document, enter search terms and click **Find Document**. A list of documents that match your search terms displays. You can search for terms using the following fields: - Document Name - Keywords - Description - To make a document's content searchable, check Document Content Searchable - To view all the documents in a folder, click the folder name. - To store a document in a different folder, click **Edit**, choose a new folder, and click **Save**. - Deleting Documents - To delete a document, click **Delete**. # Display Images Faster on All Devices When guest users visit your site, cached images are optimized to best suit the user’s phone, tablet, or desktop computer. Image optimization makes your site’s pages load faster, which creates a better browsing experience for your visitors. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
Optimization reduces an image’s byte size while keeping the perceived image quality as close to the original image as possible. The optimization feature determines the best width and image format to use based on the user’s device, browser, and operating system. This feature is available for sites that use the Salesforce CDN. Our CDN is enabled by default for sites that use enhanced domains. You can also configure custom domains to use the Salesforce CDN option. If you have an existing custom domain on a shared certificate, we recommend that you switch it to a single certificate. There's no downtime when you switch from a shared to a single certificate. On the Domain Edit page, select the option **Single certificate for content delivery network (CDN)**. The image optimization feature supports JPEG, PNG for images with transparency, GIF, and web image formats. It doesn’t support Photoshop (PSD), RAW, or SVG formats. Use these recommendations when you upload images. - Use images with a width of 2,000–4,000 pixels. - Keep the image’s file size between 200 KB and 2 MB. - Use the sRGB color profile. - Keep the total pixel count of animated GIFs under 100 million pixels for sites hosted on Experience Delivery. The total pixel count is the sum of all frames (width × height × number of frames). To disable this preference, in Experience Workspaces, under **Administration** | **Preferences**, deselect **Optimize cached images for guest users on all devices**. # Display Optimized Images on Mobile Devices Asset file images are optimized for mobile display in Experience Cloud sites. Mobile-optimized image display creates a version of images that is better suited to a small screen and slower connection. This preference, which is enabled by default, lets customers who use file assets in sites see logos and product images faster on mobile devices. To disable this preference, deselect **Optimize images for mobile devices** in Experience Workspaces under **Administration** | **Preferences**. # Display Salesforce CMS Content in Your Aura Site Deliver and organize CMS content with Experience Builder and Content Management. Use Experience Builder to configure the content formatting and layout on your site pages. And use Content Management to organize your CMS content into collections and topics. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
To display CMS content on your Aura site, first create the site in Experience Builder. Then, in the CMS workspace or enhanced CMS workspace where you created and published the content, add the site as a channel. In Experience Builder, control and customize how your Salesforce CMS content appears on your site pages using CMS components such as CMS Single Item or CMS Collection. Choose which type of content to show, such as an image, document, a news item, or a CMS collection. And format the content so that it appears exactly how you want it on your site. - [CMS Single Item](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_cms_singleitem.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add a single item of Salesforce CMS content such as a corporate statement, article, or image to your Aura site using the CMS Single Item component. You can add any content type, including News, Image, or Document, as a single item to a page.") - [CMS Single Item (Detail)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_cms_singleitem_detail.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add the CMS Single Item (Detail) component to a CMS Content page to configure the page and let users see your content in full. Use this component to customize the content and layout of detail pages for all CMS content types: News, Image, and Document.") - [CMS Collection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_cms_collection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add a CMS Collection to your Aura site using the CMS Collection component in Experience Builder. If you created a collection in your Content Management Workspace, you can customize the layout on your site page. If you don’t have a collection yet, you can still add the component as a placeholder on your page.") In Content Management, create collections and topics to organize multiple items of Salesforce CMS content. Collections and topics help you group related content items for use in your Aura site. Collections and topics are unique to each Aura site, so you can reuse and reorganize CMS content for different audiences. - [Salesforce CMS Collections for Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_managed_content_collections.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Collections help you organize and display multiple pieces of content from your Salesforce CMS workspace on your Aura site. View, create, and edit collections in the Collections tab in the Content Management tile of your Aura site’s workspace. Create collections manually or use conditions for collections that update automatically.") - [Salesforce CMS Topics for Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_managed_content_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Assign topics to Salesforce CMS content so that it’s easier to organize and display on your Aura site. Topics help you organize your Salesforce CMS content in the same way that they help you manage your Experience Cloud site’s feeds.") Access Experience Builder (1) and Content Management (2) from your site’s Workspaces. ![Experience Builder and Content Management in Aura site workspaces](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/workspaces_navigation_aura_builder_contentmanage.png) - **[Salesforce CMS Collections for Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_managed_content_collections.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Collections help you organize and display multiple pieces of content from your Salesforce CMS workspace on your Aura site. View, create, and edit collections in the Collections tab in the Content Management tile of your Aura site’s workspace. Create collections manually or use conditions for collections that update automatically. - **[Salesforce CMS Topics for Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_managed_content_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign topics to Salesforce CMS content so that it’s easier to organize and display on your Aura site. Topics help you organize your Salesforce CMS content in the same way that they help you manage your Experience Cloud site’s feeds. #### See Also - [Create and Manage CMS Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.cms_content_create_manage.htm&language=en_US) # Display Salesforce CMS Content in Your LWR Site Create content in Salesforce CMS that matches your branding and messaging, and then use the content on any Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) site. Dynamically display Salesforce CMS content in your LWR site with data binding components in Experience Builder. You can nest one component within another, add unique images, and create engaging pages with CMS content. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
Data binding establishes a connection between data sources such as Salesforce CMS and a site’s user interface. Components used in LWR sites populate with content saved in the CMS and display the content based on parameters that you set on the site. To learn more about data binding in LWR sites, watch: [![Video](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icons/video_60.png)Did You Know: Discover LWR Sites (English Only)](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/SUwcxSKrE2tNUXeBqtNWFG) - **[Add Salesforce CMS Content to Your LWR Site with Data Binding](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_data_binding.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use data binding to populate your LWR site with Salesforce CMS content. Drop a component that supports data binding onto your site page and map it to content froma CMS workspace. - **[Use a Grid Component to Show Enhanced CMS Collections and List Views in LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_grid.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Grid component dynamically populates with data that’s saved in enhanced CMS collections and record list views. After you pick a data source, you add a content component within the grid to show the content that you want. The component provides data binding and pagination logic. - **[Add an Image from Salesforce CMS to Your LWR Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_data_binding_images.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add an image from Salesforce CMS to your site page or add to a component that's populated with CMS content. - **[Nest Content Components in Your LWR Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_data_binding_nesting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nest content components within layout components on your LWR site to showcase more content from your Salesforce CMS. Create eye-catching content displays by nesting components that use data binding. - **[Bind Data to CMS Content Pages in Your LWR Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_data_binding_detail.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Data-bound components used on CMS content pages automatically populate with content saved in Salesforce CMS. Map fields in the component property panel to fields in CMS content. #### See Also - [Add or Remove a Channel from a CMS Workspace](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.cms_channel_add.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Create and Manage CMS Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.cms_content_create_manage.htm&language=en_US) # Display Similar Questions and Articles in Chatter In Salesforce Classic, you can reduce duplicate content by showing similar questions and relevant Salesforce Knowledge articles. In Chatter, potential answers pop open as the user asks a question. In Experience Cloud sites with Chatter, question deflection features are available through Experience Builder components. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Chatter Questions is available in: Group, Professional, Developer, Performance, Enterprise, Contact Manager, and Unlimited Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - Besides Salesforce Classic, question deflection is available in sites that are built on the Customer Service (Napili) template or built with Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce. For more information, select these components on an Experience Builder page, and view their properties [Ask Button](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=rss_ask_community.htm&language=en_US) and [Contact Support and Ask Buttons](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=rss_contact_support.htm&language=en_US). - Similar Questions and Similar Articles aren’t available in Lightning Experience or the Salesforce app. When a user enters a question in Chatter, similar questions automatically appear in a list below the question title field. To show relevant Knowledge articles along with similar questions, [enable Similar Articles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_knowledge_deflection_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When users ask questions in Salesforce Classic, similar questions appear as they type. If you’d like relevant Salesforce Knowledge articles to appear, too, you can enable Similar Articles."). List of similar questions and articles below the question title field: ![Question article drop-down action](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/rss_deflection_questions_articles.png) - 1: Book and question mark icons indicate whether a search result is an article or a question. - 2: Question results show the question title, the number of answers, and a green flag with the text Answered when a best answer is selected. Users see up to 10 results in the results list, with questions appearing before articles. Salesforce shows an equal number of questions and articles. But if there aren’t enough of one result type, extra results of the other type are shown. If no question or article title matches the text entered by the user, the results list doesn’t appear. Results are based on whether the question or article title contains the text entered by the user. The search accounts for partially matching terms and non-adjacent terms. For example, the results for “best backpack” could include a question titled “Which backpack is best for day hikes?”, and the results for “backpack” could include an article titled “Backpacking Tips.” The user can conduct a search that also scans question descriptions and article text by pressing TAB or clicking out of the title field. Moving out of the title field causes a separate list of results to appear below the question publisher. Advanced dropdown search results of similar questions and articles: ![Search results after pressing TAB](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/rss_deflection_tab_out.png) If no result answers the user’s question, they can post their question by clicking **Ask**. #### See Also - [Track Use of Chatter Questions in Your Salesforce Organization and Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep tabs on the use and adoption of Chatter Questions in your organization or sites with reports and dashboards.") # Display Similar Questions and Articles in the Customer Service Template Search Different Experience Cloud site users can ask similar questions. Chatter Questions helps reduce duplicate content in self-service sites that are built on the Customer Service template by showing similar questions and relevant Salesforce Knowledge articles. Potential answers appear on a list as a user enters a question in the Search field. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Similar Questions and Similar Articles are also available in internal Salesforce organizations with Chatter and in sites built with Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce. To learn more, see [Display Similar Questions and Articles in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_deflection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Salesforce Classic, you can reduce duplicate content by showing similar questions and relevant Salesforce Knowledge articles. In Chatter, potential answers pop open as the user asks a question. In Experience Cloud sites with Chatter, question deflection features are available through Experience Builder components."). When a user enters a question in the Search field, similar questions and Knowledge articles appear in a list below the field. The list contains two tabs: **Articles** and **Questions**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note To expose an All tab that shows combined results (recommended), enable [Similar Articles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_knowledge_deflection_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When users ask questions in Salesforce Classic, similar questions appear as they type. If you’d like relevant Salesforce Knowledge articles to appear, too, you can enable Similar Articles."). By default, each tab contains up to six results. The **All** tab shows both matching articles and questions, with articles appearing first. It displays an equal number of questions and articles. If there isn’t enough of one type of result, more results of the other type are displayed to reach the maximum. To see results of a particular type, users can click the **Articles** and **Questions** tabs. If a search only returns one result type (for example, questions), users still see all the tabs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note For a user to see similar articles, Knowledge must be enabled in the site and the user must have access to it. ![Similar Questions and Articles drop-down](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/napili_similar_qs_articles.png) - 1: The **Articles** and **Questions** tabs let users view results of each type. Users can use the Up and Down arrow keys to navigate between results on any of the tabs. Clicking a question or article in the list navigates directly to it. - 2: Text and chat bubble icons indicate whether a search result is an article or a question. - 3: Questions in the list show the number of answers. If a question was answered, a green checkmark with the text Best Answer appears next to it in the list. - 4: Search results are based on whether the question or article title contains the text entered by the user. When the user performs a full search by clicking **Search**, the search engine also scans question descriptions and article text for matching terms. To customize the search settings, edit the Search Publisher component in Experience Builder. #### See Also - [Enable Similar Articles for Chatter Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_knowledge_deflection_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When users ask questions in Salesforce Classic, similar questions appear as they type. If you’d like relevant Salesforce Knowledge articles to appear, too, you can enable Similar Articles.") - [Track Use of Chatter Questions in Your Salesforce Organization and Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep tabs on the use and adoption of Chatter Questions in your organization or sites with reports and dashboards.") # Display the Full List of Assigned Recognition Badges on a Member’s Profile Page Edit the user profile layout to display the full list of assigned recognition badges on a members’ profile page. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To update the user profile layout: Customize Application
1. From Setup, go to **Users** under **Customize**. Select **Page Layouts**. 2. Click **Edit** next to User Profile Layout. 3. Click **Related Lists** and drag **Recognition** to the Related Lists section of the page layout. ![Layout properties page with Related Lists open and Recognition dragged onto the page.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/recog_badges_profile_layout.png) 4. Click **Save**. 5. Each site’s guest users have a discrete user profile. To find out which user profile layout to update, go to Experience Builder in the site you’re working on. 6. Click **Settings** and select the link to the guest user profile. 7. Repeat steps 1–4 for that user profile layout. # Display Unearned Mission Badges Inspire members to participate more in your Experience Cloud site by showing them the badges they can earn. You can display the unearned badges in the member’s recognition badges list. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To edit page components: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - To use Missions, set up Recognition Badges. - Missions count activities that occurred before the missions were set up. You can reset the count when you create your mission, but be aware that this resets all the activity counters. 1. In Experience Builder, open the Badge Received Related List page. 2. Click the User Recognition List component. 3. Select **Show unearned badges**.![User Recognition List component editor.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/missions_display_unearned.png) # Document Libraries Store files without attaching them to records. - **[Document Library Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.docs_def.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Each document that is stored in the document library resides in a folder. The folder’s attributes determine the accessibility of the folder and the documents within it. - **[Documents Home](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.docs_home.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Click the Documents tab to display the documents home page. If the Documents tab is not visible, you can customize your display to show it. The Documents tab is not part of Salesforce CRM Content. - **[View Document Lists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.docs_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The documents list page displays a list of documents in a selected folder. From this page, you can view detailed document information or manipulate the document. - **[Upload and Replace Items on the Documents Tab](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.docs_upload.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can store documents and images on the Documents tab without attaching them to records. You can then use these items in your Salesforce org, such as when creating an email template. - **[Search for Documents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.docs_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Searching returns a list of documents that match all your search terms. Search results are listed in order of the closest matches. - **[Delete Documents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.docs_delete.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you delete a document, Salesforce stores it in the Recycle Bin. - **[Moving Documents to Salesforce Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.docs_documents_to_files.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As you make the move to Lightning Experience, you may have questions about the files you have stored in the Documents tab in Salesforce Classic. - **[Document Properties](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_doc_properties.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The documents you upload through Chatter have a set of properties that you can see and interact with. - **[Create and Edit Document Folders](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_document_folders.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create document folders and set their visibility so that users have the correct access level. # Document Library Overview Each document that is stored in the document library resides in a folder. The folder’s attributes determine the accessibility of the folder and the documents within it. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
Document libraries store documents that aren’t attached to records. Access your library documents via the Documents tab. If your Documents tab is not visible, customize your display to show it. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The Documents tab is not part of Salesforce CRM Content. #### See Also - [Differences Between Files, Salesforce CRM Content, Salesforce Knowledge, Documents, and Attachments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_differences.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Explore the differences in the various ways to manage your files and content.") # Document Properties The documents you upload through Chatter have a set of properties that you can see and interact with. - **[Display and Edit Document Properties](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.docs_edit.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Display detailed document information and update document properties. - **[Document Properties](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.docs_properties.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** a description of the properties in alphabetical order that are stored for each document in the document library. - **[Change Document Authors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.docs_author.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Since documents are stored in folders that control user access, documents do not have owners like other types of records, but they do have authors. The author represents the user that originally uploaded the document file. # Document Properties a description of the properties in alphabetical order that are stored for each document in the document library. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
Field Description
Author The main point of contact for a document. Initially, the person uploading the document is the author. Thereafter, the author can be any selected user.
Created By The name of the person who originally uploaded the file.
Modified By The name of the person who last uploaded the file.
Folder The name of the folder that contains the document.
Document Content Searchable A checkbox that indicates if the content within a document can be searched via the Find Document button on the Documents tab. This checkbox is automatically set by Salesforce.
Document Name The name of the document including its file extension.
Document Unique Name A unique name used to refer to the document when using the Lightning Platform API. In managed packages, this name prevents naming conflicts on package installations. This name can contain only underscores and alphanumeric characters, and must be unique in your org. It must begin with a letter, not include spaces, not end with an underscore, and not contain two consecutive underscores. With this field, a developer can change certain components' names or titles in a managed package and the changes are reflected in a subscriber's organization.
Description A statement distinguishing this document from others.
Indicate Document is Internal

A checkbox that adds a flag to the document indicating that document viewers should not share the file outside of the organization. Checking this box does not expressly enforce any security rules.

The Indicate Document is Internal and Externally Available Image checkboxes are mutually exclusive; you cannot select both.

Externally Available Image

A checkbox that indicates if the document is an image available for HTML email templates, such as a logo in a letterhead, and does not require a Salesforce username and password to view in an email.

This checkbox indicates if the document is an image used as a custom app logo or custom tab icon, which require a Salesforce username and password to view.

The Indicate Document is Internal and Externally Available Image checkboxes are mutually exclusive; you cannot select both.

Keywords An open text field containing one or more words that describe the document. The program checks for matches in this field when doing a search.
Path Stored in place of Document Name if you prefer to create a link to the document instead of uploading it.
Size The size of the document in bytes.
Type The file type is determined by the file extension. For example, filename.ppt is recognized as a PowerPoint file. If the Don't allow HTML uploads as attachments or document records security setting is enabled for your organization, you cannot upload files with the following file extensions: .htm, .html, .htt, .htx, .mhtm, .mhtml, .shtm, .shtml, .acgi, .svg.
# Documents Home Click the Documents tab to display the documents home page. If the Documents tab is not visible, you can customize your display to show it. The Documents tab is not part of Salesforce CRM Content. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
User Permissions Needed
To view Documents tab: Read on documents
To view documents: Read on documents
To upload new documents: Create on documents
- Under **Find a Document**, enter keywords to search for a document. - In the **Document Folders** section, select a folder to view all the documents contained in that folder. - The **Recent Documents** section displays the last ten or twenty-five documents you viewed, with the most recently-viewed document listed first. This list is derived from your recent items and includes records owned by you and other users. Toggle the **Show 25 items** and **Show 10 items** links to change the number of items that display. - In the **Recent Documents** section, click **New** to upload a new document. # Download and Preview a File in a Chatter Feed Not only can you download and save files posted to Chatter feeds, you can also preview files in your browser without downloading them. There are several places in Chatter where you can download and preview files: - On the **Files** page—Click **![FileActionsArrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_actions_arrow.png)** | **![green down arrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_download.png) Download** or click the preview (![magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_preview_icon.png)) icon next to the file. - On any Chatter feed—Click **More Actions** | **![Download file](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_download.png) Download** next to the file, or to preview the file, click the file thumbnail or click **More Actions** | **![Preview file](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_preview_icon.png) Preview**. - On the Files Owned by list on a profile—Click **![FileActionsArrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_actions_arrow.png)** | **![green down arrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_download.png) Download** or click the preview (![magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_preview_icon.png)) icon next to the file. - On the Files Shared with list on a group—Click **![FileActionsArrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_actions_arrow.png)** | **![green down arrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_download.png) Download** or click the preview (![magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_preview_icon.png)) icon next to the file. - In the Notes and Attachments related list on a record, click **Download** next to the feed attachment. To preview the file, click **Preview** next to the feed attachment. Previewing a file opens it in your browser with the enhanced document viewer. The enhanced document viewer provides the following capabilities for viewing documents: - You can use the next page (![NextPageArrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_arrow_next.png)), previous page (![PreviousPageArrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_arrow_prev.png)), first page (![FirstPageArrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_arrow_first.png)), and last page (![LastPageArrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_arrow_last.png)) icons on the document toolbar. And you can navigate through a document page-by-page by right-clicking and choosing **Next Page** and **Previous Page**. - You can use the scroll bar to move continuously through a document without needing to click the **Next Page** and **Previous Page** icons. Continuous scrolling is not available for PowerPoint files. - You can jump directly to a page by entering the page number in the page field and pressing Enter. - From the right-click menu, you can choose **Fit Width** to expand the width of the document, or **Fit Full Page** to preview the whole page of the document. The fit width icon (![FitWidthIcon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_fit_width.png)) and fit full page icon (![FitFullPageIcon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_fit_fullpage.png)) are also available on the toolbar. - From the right-click menu, you can choose **Full Screen** to preview the document in full screen mode or **Exit** to exit full screen mode. The full screen icon (![FitFullScreenIcon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_full_screen.png)) and exit icon (![FullScreenCloseIcon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_full_screen_close.png)) are also available on the toolbar. - From the right-click menu, you can **Zoom In** or **Zoom Out**. The zoom-in icon (![ZoomInIcon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_zoom_in.png)) and zoom-out icon (![ZoomOutIcon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_zoom_out.png)) are also available on the toolbar. - You can use the keyboard arrow keys to navigate page-by-page through a document. Click the document viewer and use the keys as follows: - Right-arrow key: moves a PowerPoint document forward one slide and moves a PDF, Word, or Excel document forward one page. - Left-arrow key: moves a PowerPoint document backward one slide and moves a PDF, Word, or Excel document backward one page. - Up-arrow key: moves a PowerPoint document forward one slide and scrolls a PDF, Word, or Excel document up the page. - Down-arrow key: moves a PowerPoint document backward one slide and scrolls a PDF, Word, or Excel document down the page. - You can’t preview files larger than 25 MB, unknown file types, password-protected files, and copy-protected PDFs. For files that you can’t preview, the **Preview** option isn’t available on feeds or list views, and files appear as generic file type icons in the feed. Some Microsoft Office 2007 features don’t display correctly in previews. If a file can be previewed, but a preview doesn’t exist, contact your Salesforce admin to request to regenerate the preview. - In Internet Explorer 11, the **Preview** option redirects to the file detail page. #### See Also - [Who Can See My Attached Files and Links in Chatter?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_attachments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Share files and links with people by attaching them to Chatter posts or comments.") - [Delete Files and Links from Chatter Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_attachments_del.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Only a file owner can delete files. Users with the “Modify All Data” permission can delete all comments, posts, files, and links.") # Draft Posts in Chatter Save Chatter posts as drafts and access them later to edit, publish, or delete. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To see drafts: Allow draft posts
To save and publish drafts:

Edit my Own Posts

AND

Allow users to edit posts and comments

The Draft Posts feature automatically saves your Chatter posts as you create them, including content like files, links, images, mentions, hashtags, and other rich text. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The Drafts Posts feature is available only for Chatter Posts, and not for Questions or Polls. You also can’t create Chatter Posts on draft Knowledge articles. Draft posts save automatically as you type a post. Once you’ve added text or a rich text item to your post, **Saving...** appears next to **Share** and then changes to **Saved**. When your draft is saved, you can access it from **My Drafts**. To access a draft post from **My Drafts**: 1. Go to the Chatter tab and select **My Drafts**. 2. From the post’s dropdown menu, you can select **Edit**, **Publish**, or **Delete**. When a draft is saved, - Attached files remain private until the post is published. - If the draft contains a hashtag, the corresponding topic is not created until the post is published. - It can be found in **My Drafts**, but doesn’t appear in search. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Post visibility settings are saved only for the first draft. After a draft post has saved, you can edit the post in My Drafts, but you can’t change the post’s visibility. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example Here’s how you edit a post from **My Drafts**: ![Draft post example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collab_edit_draft.png) # Edit a Chatter Stream Edit a stream to change its name or to add or remove some of its feeds. You can edit a Chatter stream from the streams home page or from the stream itself. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
- **[Edit a Chatter Stream from the Streams Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_editfromstreamshome.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The streams home page lists all the streams you created. Each stream has its own list row that provides actions that you can perform on that stream, including the **Edit** action. - **[Edit a Chatter Stream from the Stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_editfromstream.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Each stream has its own **Edit** action that you can access by navigating to the stream. #### See Also - [Chatter Streams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter streams are custom feeds that you create by combining multiple related feeds into one feed. Look for streams on your Chatter home page. Create up to 100 streams that each combine posts from up to 25 different feeds and feed types. Create streams that combine feeds from people, groups, and records, like accounts, opportunities, cases, and more.") - [Create Chatter Streams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a Chatter stream to get a combined view of feeds from the profiles, groups, and records that you select. Include up to 25 feeds in each stream. Create up to 100 Chatter streams. You don’t have to follow a person, group, or record before you add it to a stream. The great thing about adding a feed to a stream is that it doesn’t count against the number of follows you’re allowed. You can create a Chatter stream from the Chatter home page, from the streams home page, and from a profile or record detail.") - [Delete a Chatter Stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_delete.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can delete a Chatter stream from the streams home page and from the stream itself. Deleting a Chatter stream doesn’t delete the records or posts that it contains. It deletes only the stream, which frees up space for you to add more streams.") # Edit a Chatter Stream from the Stream Each stream has its own **Edit** action that you can access by navigating to the stream. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
The Chatter home page lists your five most recently accessed streams. Click a stream name to open it. If the stream you want to edit is not listed, click the Streams heading to navigate to the streams home page. There you can locate your stream, and click its name to open it. 1. Once you open the stream, click its **Edit** button to open the Edit Stream dialog. ![The Edit button on a stream](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_streams_editbutton.png) ![Edit Stream dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_edit.png) 2. Edit the stream. - Edit the stream name. - To add more feeds to the stream, click in the **Records to Follow** field to select a feed type. And follow the steps in [Create a Stream from the Streams Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_streams_createfromstreamshome.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can get to the streams home page by clicking the Streams heading on the Chatter home page. The Streams home page has controls for managing existing streams and making new ones."). - To remove a feed from the stream, click its ![Delete icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_delete_object_icon.png) icon. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Knowledge articles (KAs) aren’t fully supported in streams. You can add them when you create and edit a stream by searching for the article’s ID number rather than its title. But you can’t add a KA to a stream from its Follow button like you can with other record types. Articles added to Streams using the article’s ID don’t appear in Records to Follow on the Stream's edit page. KAs also don’t appear when viewing the Follow button details on the article's detail page. 3. To save your changes, click **Save**. 4. To save your stream, click **Save** again. # Edit a Chatter Stream from the Streams Home Page The streams home page lists all the streams you created. Each stream has its own list row that provides actions that you can perform on that stream, including the **Edit** action. ### Required Editions
Available in:Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
1. Go to the Chatter home page, and click the Streams heading to open the streams home page. ![The Streams heading on the Chatter home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_streams_heading.png) ![The streams home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_streams_home2.png) 2. On the row that lists the stream you want to edit, click the ![Actions icon on a stream row](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_streams_rowactionicon.png) menu icon, and select **Edit** to open the Edit Stream dialog. ![Edit button and Edit Stream dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_edit.png) 3. Edit the stream. - Edit the stream name. - To add more feeds to the stream, click in the **Records to Follow** field to select a feed type. And follow the steps in [Create a Stream from the Streams Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_streams_createfromstreamshome.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can get to the streams home page by clicking the Streams heading on the Chatter home page. The Streams home page has controls for managing existing streams and making new ones."). - To remove a feed from the stream, click its ![Delete icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_streams_delete_object_icon.png) icon. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Knowledge articles (KAs) aren’t fully supported in streams. You can add them when you create and edit a stream by searching for the article’s ID number rather than its title. But you can’t add a KA to a stream from its Follow button like you can with other record types. Articles added to Streams using the article’s ID don’t appear in Records to Follow on the Stream's edit page. KAs also don’t appear when viewing the Follow button details on the article's detail page. 4. To save your changes, click **Save**. 5. To save your stream, click **Save** again. # Edit a Manual CMS Collection in Your Aura Site Edit manual CMS Collections in Content Management to keep the content in your Aura site up to date. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To access Experience Workspaces or Experience Builder:

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the community, portal, or site

To customize an Experience Builder site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences OR assigned an experience admin, publisher, or builder role in that site
  • AND is a member of the site
To create collections using CMS content:
  • Assigned a content admin or content manager role in that CMS workspace
1. In Content Management, go to the Collections tab. 2. Select the collection that you want to edit. 3. To view more details about the content such as the content body or slug, click the content title (1). 4. To change the title or to add or remove content from the collection, click **Edit** (2). 5. To change the order of how the content appears on your site, move items up or down in the list (3). ![Steps to edit a manual CMS collection in Content Management](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_workspaces_edit_manual_collection.png) If you want to delete the Collection, click **Delete**. # Edit Language Content on the Page Experience Builder provides its own language menu that you can use to switch between languages as you edit content on each page. Switch languages and provide spot translations, like fixing a typo. You can also use this method for full page translations instead of exporting and importing site content. ### Required Editions
Available in: Experience Builder sites accessed through Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and mobile devices, and is available in Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. Open the page you want to translate, and select a language from the Experience Builder language menu. ![Experience Builder language menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_multilingual_globe2.png) 2. To access component properties, select the component on the page. By default, all component properties use the default site language, which is the language that you see until you add translated content. 3. Enter the translated content in the property fields. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Experience Builder doesn’t validate languages as you enter content. Take care to add the correct content for the selected language. # Edit Pages and Components in Experience Builder Each page contains a collection of components that are organized around a task or function, whether it’s opening a case or searching for an article. The pages in each Experience Builder template are ready for you to use with little configuration. Add new components to your site’s pages, edit the properties of existing components, or delete components that you don’t require. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you plan to add components to a new custom page, spend some time planning the composition and layout of the page based on its purpose. 1. From the Pages menu in the top navigation bar, select the page that you want to edit. 2. To open the Components panel, click the Components panel icon ![Components panel icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_components_icon.png). ![Experience Builder Components Panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_component_panel.png) The Components panel lists only the components that are compatible with the selected page. For example, you can’t add the User Profile Detail component to the Home page. 3. Drag the component from the Components panel onto an editable area of the page. When you drag a component over a content or theme layout region, a label appears to help you identify the region. Components in a content layout region are specific to the page. Components in a theme layout region are shared everywhere that the theme layout region is used, and the label “Shared” is added to the component’s name on the canvas. 4. To edit the properties of a component, select it on the canvas or in the Page Structure panel. When you select a component, Experience Builder highlights the component with a blue border and shows the component’s property panel. Click the pushpin icon ![Pushpin icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/exp_builder_pushpin_icon.png) in the property panel to float the panel over the canvas or to dock it to the right of the canvas. When the panel is docked, the entire canvas is visible. 5. Update the component as needed. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Here’s a sample configuration of the Headline component (1) on the Home page, showing the list of supported components for that page (2) and the component’s property panel (3). You can duplicate, delete, or assign an audience to the component to control its visibility (4). ![Add, configure, or remove components in Experience Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/comm_builder_add_configure_components.png) - You can browse a selection of custom Lightning components on AppExchange and add them to your org directly from Experience Builder. Click **Get more on the AppExchange** in the Components panel. Components that are ready to add to Experience Builder pages are shown. When you add a component, it appears in the Components panel of all the template-based sites in your org. - You can also create custom Lightning components and use them on Experience Builder pages. For more information on creating custom Lightning components and enabling them for Experience Builder, see the [Experience Cloud Developer Guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/communities_dev_intro.htm). - **[Assign Screen-Responsive Property Values in Custom Components in Enhanced LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lwr_screen_responsive.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Specify different values for desktop, mobile, and tablet displays for string or integer property types in custom Lightning web components in enhanced LWR sites. With screen-responsive properties, the component uses the correct property value based on the end user’s screen size. - **[Show or Hide Components on Mobile, Tablet, or Desktop for Enhanced LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_hide_components_by_device_type.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Improve the readability of your site by hiding unnecessary components. In enhanced LWR sites, site builders can customize which components are shown or hidden for each device type—mobile, tablet, or desktop. Components are shown by default. - **[Hide Components on Mobile Devices with Experience Builder for Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_mobile_hide_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Reduce page load times and cluttered mobile screens by hiding non-business critical components on mobile devices. View your Aura site in Builder using the mobile mode and select which components you wish to hide. - **[Error Messages for Pages Without Data in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_error_messages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you use Lightning components to build a template-based page in Experience Builder, sometimes the page doesn’t load correctly on your site. Find out why this error happens, and how you can fix it. Make sure that the component has underlying data. # Einstein Predictions The Einstein Predictions component lets users display predictions and improvements for a standard or custom object on an Experience Builder site page. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To add the Einstein Predictions component to an Experience Builder site page
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND
  • Is a member of the site
To view predictions on a site page View Einstein Discovery Recommendations
After a model is deployed, you can use it to display predictions and improvements for a standard or custom object on an Experience Builder site page. 1. In Experience Builder, open the Experience Builder site page to which you want to add a prediction. 2. Drop the Einstein Predictions component where you want it on the page. 3. In the component configuration panel, use the Prediction lookup to find and select the prediction you want to embed in the site page. 4. Optionally, configure other properties for this prediction as well.
Property Description
Prediction Search for a list of any predictions (deployed models) to which you have access.
Show Prediction Label Select this checkbox to show the prediction label.
Title Descriptive label for the prediction.
Show title Select this checkbox to show the title.
Prediction score unit

Unit of measure for the prediction. Examples:

  • Currency for money-based predictions
  • % for probability-based predictions
  • time interval for time-based predictions (hours, days, weeks, and so on)
Unit precedes score Select this checkbox to show units preceding the prediction, such as currency symbols. By default, units follow the prediction.
Positive prediction label Label to display when the prediction is higher than the threshold in a binary classification model. Examples: Win, Retain, Success, and so on.
Negative prediction label Label to display when the prediction is lower than the threshold in a binary classification model. Examples: Loss, Churn, Fail, and so on.
Show top predictors Select this checkbox to show the predictors with the highest impact on the prediction.
Collapse details Select this checkbox to show top predictors but hide other details.
Show ranked probabilities Select this checkbox to show ranked probabilities for outcome values. Applies only to predictions associated with multiclass classification models.
Include link to model card Select this checkbox to show the Learn about this model link that users can click to see the model card associated with this prediction.
Show improvements Select this checkbox to show Einstein Discovery suggestions on how to improve the predicted outcome. Applies only to predictions associated with binary classification or numeric models.
Number of improvements to show Set the maximum number of improvements returned on the prediction card. Applies only to predictions associated with binary classification or numeric models.
Improvement threshold percentage Specify a number to display only improvements that impact the predicted outcome by this percentage or higher. Applies only to predictions associated with binary classification or numeric models.
Show values for predictors Select this checkbox to show the impact value next to predictors and improvements.
Show prediction warnings

Select this checkbox to show user warnings, such as:

  • missing fields that are required for the model
  • field values that are outside of the valid range used to build the predictive model
Calculate prediction as a date Select this checkbox to show time-based predictions as based on a relative start date plus an offset value (the original prediction result).
Start calculating date prediction from Select the date field to use for when to start calculating the predicted date.
Time period

Select the unit for the offset value (original prediction result) used to calculate the predicted date.

  • Minutes
  • Hours
  • Days
  • Weeks
  • Months
Predicted date format

Select how to display the predicted date.

  • Time Remaining formats the prediction according to the selected Time period.
  • Specific Date formats the prediction as a date according to the logged-in user’s locale settings.
Show prediction history starting from

Select a reference point to display score history:

  • Last change
  • Last week
When a user views this site page, predictions are updated in real time. No writeback to Salesforce is needed. # Einstein Scoring Partners can see how well their leads score according to your company’s conversion patterns. Get Einstein Lead Scoring by adding the Einstein Scoring component to the detail pages of partners’ leads in Experience Cloud sites. ### Required Editions
Available for partners in Experience Cloud Aura sites, accessed through Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions with Sales Cloud or Service Cloud. A PRM add-on license is required for each partner user.
User Permissions Needed
To customize an Experience Cloud site:

Create and Set Up Experiences AND Be a member of the site

OR

View Setup and Configuration AND Be a member of the site AND Be an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site

To give partners access to these features, you must also set up Einstein Lead Scoring. Then, verify the required steps for adding the Einstein Scoring component in your Experience Cloud site. Not all steps are required for all templates. 1. If Einstein Scoring isn’t preconfigured in your Experience Cloud template, add it. Einstein Scoring is only available for the Lead object detail page. 1. Either [Create Object Pages for Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_create_page.htm&type=5&language=en_US) or [Edit Object Pages for Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_edit_pages.htm&type=5&language=en_US) that you’re already using. 2. From the Component menu, drag the **Einstein Scoring** component to the Lead detail page. The component displays best in a narrow page column. 2. If navigation for Einstein Scoring isn’t preconfigured in your Experience Cloud template, add the Einstein Scoring detail page to the site’s navigation menu. From the Settings menu, click **Navigation** and [edit the navigation menu where you want partners to locate the page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_setup_nav_menu.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 3. [Publish the changes to your site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_publish.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Einstein Scoring component: ![A lead score showing company and zip code indicating a possible conversion and source and country indicating unlikely conversion.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/prm_lead_scoring.png) #### See Also - [Set Up Einstein Lead Scoring for Partners](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.prm_lead_scoring_for_partners.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Email Preferences The Unsubscribe link at the bottom of a Marketing Cloud Engagement email opts the person out of all further emails from that instance of Engagement. If you want users to be able to unsubscribe from site emails without unsubscribing from other brand or company emails, some setup is required.
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Email preferences aren’t automatically synced between Experience Cloud and Marketing Cloud Engagement without customization. Consider discussing implementing a custom subscription center with your integrator or Salesforce services. The controls for system-generated emails from a site, like comment notifications, are managed within the site by users, not in the Engagement app. # Emails in the Site Case Feed When you enable the site case feed for Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce, external users with access to a case see case emails in their feed. Emails in the site case feed include the email’s author, recipients, text, and time sent. By default, if the case contact sends or receives a case email, that email appears in the feed of all users—both internal and external—with access to the case. For an external user to view the case, their profile must include access to cases in the site. For example, suppose Rita, an external user, posts a question. The question remains unresolved, and a moderator creates a case from it using the Question-to-Case action. If the support agent assigned to the case emails Rita from the email publisher, Rita and all other users with access to the case see the email in their case feed. Users with access to a case typically include the assigned support agent and the case contact. ## Using Apex to Show or Hide Emails in the Case Feed The IsExternallyVisible field of the EmailMessage object controls the visibility of email messages in the site case feed. When the field is set to `true`, emails sent or received by the case contact are visible to external users with access to the case. If the site case feed is enabled, you can write an Apex trigger or process to hide or expose all case emails in the feeds of external site users. First, create an Apex class with a Future method to update the IsExternallyVisible field. Then, create a trigger on EmailMessage and pass the EmailMessage objects into the method on insert/update in the After context. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important If the IsExternallyVisible field isn’t selected on an email and the email’s default visibility is set to true, you can’t use the Before context of an Apex trigger to set IsExternallyVisible to false. #### See Also - [Emails in the Site Case Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.ccf_expose_case_emails.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you enable the site case feed for Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce, external users with access to a case see case emails in their feed. Emails in the site case feed include the email’s author, recipients, text, and time sent.") - [Site Case Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.ccf_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With the site case feed, agents and Experience Cloud site members see the lifecycle of a case from start to finish. All case interactions appear in a unified, chronological Chatter case feed. Site members benefit from the added functionalities of Chatter, while service features help agents provide efficient, personalized support. To use Site Case Feed, Chatter must be turned on in your org.") ## Expose or Hide a Published Post or Email in the Site Case Feed When necessary, support agents can expose or hide individual case emails and published Chatter posts in the case feed of Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site users. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To edit the external visibility of a published Chatter post or email on a case:
  • Edit My Own Posts
  • Edit Posts on Records I Own
  • Compact case feed enabled in your org
  • Site case feed enabled in your org
To change the external visibility of a published Chatter post or email on a case: 1. Navigate to the post or email in the compact case feed. 2. In the post or email’s dropdown menu: - Select **Make Public** to expose an internal Chatter post or email in the case feed of external users with access to the case The case contact and any other external users with access to the case now see the post or email in their case feed. An agent might choose to make an email or post in the site case feed public in order to keep the case contact updated about internal progress on the case. - Select **Make Private** to remove a Chatter post or email from the case feed of external users with access to the case The case contact and any other external users with access to the case no longer see the post or email in their case feed. (It still appears in the feeds of internal users with access to the case.) An agent can choose to make an email or post in the site case feed private if they want to hide their correspondence with the case contact from the case feed of other external users with access to the case. Keep in mind that when you make an email private, the email recipients already received the email. Similarly, when you make a Chatter post private, external users with access to the case may have been notified by email when it was first posted. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example **Make Public** option on a case Chatter post: ![Make Public option](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/ccf_make_public.png) **Make Public** option on a case email: ![Make Public on email](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/ccf_make_public_email.png) The agent who owns the case and those above them in the hierarchy see the **Make Public** and **Make Private** options on all case emails and Chatter posts on the case. Internal users who don’t own the case also see these options on case posts or emails that they wrote. # Embedded Appointment Management The embedded Appointment Management component allows users to schedule, modify, or cancel an appointment. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Legacy Embedded Appointment Management is scheduled for [retirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=002521428&type=1&language=en_US) on June 17, 2025. You can continue using this product until then. After the retirement, use Appointment Assistant in Field Service, which offers many similar features. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip - Make sure to set up Field Service, build the flows you need, and install the Salesforce Field Service managed package before adding this component to your site pages. - Remove the Embedded Chat component from the site pages where you want to use this component. You can use one embedded component per page. 1. Select the embedded Appointment Management component in the page that you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component: | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Embedded Service Deployment | Select an embedded Appointment Management deployment. | | Logged In Button Label | Enter a label for the appointment manager when users are logged in. The default label is Book Appointment. | | Logged Out Button Label | Enter a label for the appointment manager when users aren’t logged in. The default label is Log In and Book Appointment. | | Button Loading Message | Enter a label for the appointment manager when the flow is loading. The default label is Loading.... | # Embedded Messaging Use the Embedded Messaging component to add Messaging for Web to your Experience Cloud site. Note the following considerations before you begin. - If you use the Embedded Service or Channel Menu components on your Experience Builder site, remove them. Use the Page Structure panel to find and remove the extra components. - To effectively iframe your website and reduce JavaScript library conflicts, Messaging for Web creates a unique site that appears in your All Sites list in Setup. Don’t reuse this generated site URL, which has reduced security, for other purposes. Don’t modify this generated site through Builder or Workspace links. - In Mobile Publisher apps, the mobile floating action button launches a native Agentforce panel through the Embedded Messaging component. For Mobile Publisher apps, this behavior replaces the web-based Messaging for Web mobile flow. 1. Complete these setup steps for [Messaging for Web](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.miaw_setup_stages.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 2. For Experience Builder sites, from the Experience Builder Components list, select the **Embedded Messaging** component and drag it onto the page that has the Experience Builder site as the host domain value. 3. From the Experience Builder Components list, select the **Embedded Messaging** component and drag it onto the page that has the Experience Builder site as the host domain value. 4. On the page, select the **Embedded Messaging** component. 5. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component:
Property Details
Embedded Web Deployment Choose your Embedded Service Deployment for Messaging for Web.
Chat Button Visibility

Default Visibility means that the chat button is shown by default or according to any business hours that are configured.

Always Visible overrides your existing visibility settings and ensures that the chat button is always shown on page load.

Always Hidden overrides your existing visibility settings and ensures that the chat button is always hidden on page load.

Mobile Deployment

Select the Mobile Deployment where this component is displayed. All mobile deployments are available for selection. If the selected mobile deployment’s messaging channel doesn’t match the web deployment’s channel, a validation error appears.

To turn off the native Agentforce experience and use the Lightning component instead, select Null for the mobile deployment.

  • The floating action button opens a native Agentforce panel.
  • If user verification is enabled on the messaging channel, the button is hidden for guest users.
After publishing your site, the conversation and active messaging button appears on your site. Experience Builder helps you design the experience but is nonfunctional. The component uses your default site language unless you enable a new language in Translation Workbench. Make sure to return to the [messaging for web deployment configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=miaw_configure_web_deployment_1.htm&language=en_US) instructions and complete the CORS allowlist step. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important - Place the component only in a template footer region. Adding to a non-template region can cause disruption in the messaging experience. - A Mobile Publisher app supports an Agentforce agent in either guest mode or authenticated mode, but not both. A user can’t switch between guest and verified states, because only one deployment menu is available in Experience Builder. To adjust the position of the mobile floating action button—for example, to clear the tab bar—override the CSS custom properties. In Experience Builder, go to **Settings** | **Advanced** | **Edit Head Markup**, and then adjust the values as needed. ``` ``` #### See Also - [Set Up Enhanced Chat](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.miaw_setup_stages.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Configure a Messaging for Web Deployment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.miaw_configure_web_deployment_1.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Add Flexibility and Power with Enhanced Chat](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.miaw_intro_landing.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Embedded Service The Embedded Service component allows users to request a chat with a support agent. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important - Make sure to set up Chat and Embedded Service before adding this component to your site pages. For help, see “Set Up Embedded Service for Your Website” in Salesforce Help. - Remove existing Chat buttons from the site pages where you want to use the Embedded Service component. If you don’t remove Chat buttons, the component doesn’t work. 1. Select the Embedded Service component in the page that you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component: | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Chat Deployment | Select an Embedded Chat deployment. | | Display Chat Button | Display the chat button to users. | | Fill in Pre-Chat Fields | When selected, the name and email fields on your pre-chat form are pre-populated for logged-in users. | | Button Label | Enter a label for the chat button. The user sees this text before they start a chat. The default label is Chat with an Expert. | | Offline Button Label | Enter a label for the chat button when there are no support agents available to chat. The default label is Agent Offline. | | Offline Support Button Label | Enter a label for the chat button when there are no support agents available to chat, and your Embedded Service deployment has offline support enabled. Offline support lets you present a web-to-case form inside the chat window when agents are offline. The default label is Contact Us. | | Chat Waiting Message | Enter a label for the chat button when a chat has been requested and is waiting for an agent. The default label is Loading..... | | Chat Waiting Background Image URL | Enter a URL for an image to display in the chat window when a chat is waiting for an agent. | | Agent Avatar Image URL | Enter a URL for an agent avatar image to display in the chat window. This avatar applies to all agents taking chats from this button. We recommend using an image no larger than 40x40 pixels | | Pre-Chat Background Image URL | Enter a URL for a banner image to display in the chat window while the user fills out the pre-chat form. | | Code Setting Name | Enter the code setting name from Embedded Chat setup and load JavaScript files you’ve added as static resources. | | Company Logo URL | Enter a URL for a logo to display in the minimized chat window when a chat is waiting for an agent. We recommend using an image no larger than 25x25 pixels. | | Routing Order | Enter IDs for userId, buttonId, or userId\_buttonId, separated by commas. This field sets a routing order to agents and chat buttons for the Embedded Service Deployment, which overrides the assigned Chat button. | | External Scripts | Enter the static resource name for the external script used to create custom chat events. Use the name of the static resource object, like CustomEvent, instead of the name of the file itself. | | External Styles | Enter the static resource name for the external style used to create custom chat events. Use the name of the static resource object, like CustomStyles, instead of the name of the file itself. | | Storage Domain | Enter an existing site domain for your deployment. Let visitors navigate between subdomains during a chat session and ensure their continuous session continuity. | # Employee Login Link Use the Employee Login Link component to direct users with accounts in the site’s parent org to their login page. When your employees or other users who have accounts in the parent org for the site end up on the site login page, you can redirect them to their own login page with a link. They can then log in with all the settings and permissions of their org account. 1. Select the **Employee Login Link** component in the page that you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Employee Login Link | Enter text that identifies the login option for employees. The label appears as clickable text on the page. The default text is Are you an employee? Login here. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Employee Login Link component: ![Sample Employee Login Link](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/login_employee_element.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Enable Add Actions in the Chatter Publisher In Salesforce Classic, before you can add global actions to the Chatter publisher, you must first enable the Actions in the Publisher feature in Chatter Settings. Actions add functionality to the Chatter publisher and let your users do more in Salesforce across every device. ### Required Editions
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To enable actions: Customize Application
1. From Setup, enter Chatter Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Chatter Settings**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. In the Actions in the Publisher section, select **Enable actions in the publisher**. 4. Save your changes. #### See Also - [Publisher Actions and Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_publisher_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Actions add functionality to the Chatter Publisher in Salesforce Classic. Actions let your users do more in Salesforce across all devices.") # Enable Analytics in Your Experience Cloud Site Enable Analytics for Experience Cloud sites to allow your partner and customer users to view and explore Analytics dashboards. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Experience Cloud is available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Analytics is available for an extra cost in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions. Also available in: Developer Edition
User Permissions Needed
To create, customize, or activate an Experience Cloud site:

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND is a member of the site they’re trying to update

To modify Analytics settings: Analytics Growth permission set license with Manage Analytics permission
To view, explore, and share embedded Analytics dashboards: Analytics for Communities permission set license with View Analytics on Experience Cloud Site Pages permission
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Only users with a Customer Community Plus, Partner Community, or Lightning External Apps Plus license can use this feature. This feature is supported in Experience Cloud sites but not in portals. To share Analytics dashboards in your Experience Cloud site, complete the following steps. 1. Set up Analytics in your Salesforce org, as described in the [Set Up the CRM Analytics Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/HTViewHelpDoc?id=bi_help_setup.htm&language=en_US) section. 2. Enable Analytics for Experience Cloud and set up site members. See [Enable CRM Analytics for Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/HTViewHelpDoc?id=bi_setup_communities_enable.htm&language=en_US). 3. In Analytics, create dashboards and save them in an Analytics app. Designate that app for sharing with the community. For more information about working with Analytics, refer to the [Analytics Library](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/HTViewHelpDoc?id=bi.htm&language=en_US). 4. Embed your Analytics dashboards using either [Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=analytics.bi_embed_community_builder.htm&type=5&language=en_US) or [Visualforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=analytics.bi_embed_community_vf.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 5. From the Analytics app containing your dashboards, give access to site members by selecting **Share**. In the Share dialog, select **Enable sharing with Communities**. Invite site partners and customers to share the app. For more information, see [Share CRM Analytics in Experience Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/HTViewHelpDoc?id=bi_app_communities.htm&language=en_US). # Enable and Configure Topics for Objects in Salesforce Classic Enable topics for objects so that users can add topics to records and organize them by common themes. This powerful feature is available with or without Chatter. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To enable topics for objects: Customize Application
Administrators can enable topics for accounts, assets, campaigns, cases, contacts, contracts, files, leads, opportunities, orders, solutions, custom objects, and English articles. For each object type, administrators specify which fields to use for topic suggestions. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Topics are supported on only English Knowledge articles. ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_warning.png) Warning When topics are enabled for an object, public tags are disabled for records of that object type. 1. From Setup, enter Topics for Objects in the Quick Find box, then select **Topics for Objects**. 2. Select an object. 3. At the right, select Enable Topics. 4. Select the text fields that you want to use for topic suggestions. (From a combination of the selected fields, up to three suggestions are made from the first 2,000 characters. Suggestions depend on the text values processed by the NLP library. In certain cases, suggestions don’t appear.) Encrypted fields don’t appear in the list of selectable fields because you can't use encrypted fields for topic suggestions. 5. Click **Save**. Now, users with access to the enabled objects and appropriate topics permissions can: - See topic assignments and suggestions on records of that object type - Add and remove topics from records of that object type - To filter their list views, use topics on records of that object type If your organization uses Chatter, users can click any topic that is assigned to a record to go directly to a topic page. On a topic page, users can see other records on the topic, people who are knowledgeable about the topic, and other related information. # Enable and Map Dashboards Use dashboards in Experience Cloud sites to measure their success. You can even map a dashboard to the Experience Workspaces Home page. Map custom dashboards or use the ones provided in our AppExchange package. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
User Permissions Needed
To map dashboards in Experience Workspaces:

Create and Set Up Experiences OR Manage Experiences

AND

Manage Dashboards in Public Folders

AND

Is a member of the Experience Cloud site

To view dashboards:

Manage Experiences

OR

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the Experience Cloud site

You can choose to map any dashboard you have access to, but ensure that your community managers have access as well. All dashboards display as Lightning dashboards, regardless of what types of dashboard you’re using or what interface your org is using. For example, a Salesforce Classic dashboard gets displayed as a Lightning dashboard. Not all browsers support this Lightning view, so make sure you’re using a [supported browser](https://help.salesforce.com/HTViewHelpDoc?id=getstart_browsers_sfx.htm&language=en_US). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Keep in mind that you can get preconfigured dashboards in the [Salesforce Communities Management package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reporting_dashboards_package.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Salesforce Communities Management packages give community managers an essential starter set of dashboards and reports to keep tabs on activity and engagement directly in Experience Workspaces.") available for download on the AppExchange. If the Salesforce Communities Management package is installed in your org, each of the pages has a default mapping to a dashboard from the package. You can overwrite these values as needed. To map or update your dashboards: 1. Open Experience Workspaces for your site. 2. Click **Dashboards** | **Settings**. 3. For each of the pages, select the dashboard you want to show to community managers. To change the name of the dashboard page, click inside the dashboard label. The dashboard you map to Home displays on your Experience Workspaces Home page. 4. Click **Save**. Dashboards are visible to community managers when they expand the Dashboards section or visit the Home page in Experience Workspaces. Verify the dashboard mappings by clicking **Dashboards** and then clicking each page name. If you mapped a dashboard to the Home page, check that out too. ## Create a Dashboard While you can show any dashboard in your Experience Cloud site, we recommend creating them based on the custom report types available for sites. All dashboards show as Lightning dashboards, regardless of the type of dashboard that you use or the interface that your org uses. For example, a Salesforce Classic dashboard is displayed as a Lightning dashboard. Not all browsers support this Lightning view, so make sure to use a [supported browser](https://help.salesforce.com/HTViewHelpDoc?id=getstart_browsers_sfx.htm&language=en_US). 1. Create a dashboard with components. Select the report as your source type. Add a component for each report you want to include in your dashboard. Find your report on the Data Sources tab and add it to the component. 2. Share the folder that you save your dashboard in with your community managers. 3. From Experience Workspaces, click **Dashboards** | **Settings** to map your dashboard. When a community manager accesses Experience Workspaces, the dashboard appears under Dashboards. If you mapped a dashboard to the Home page, the dashboard appears there. Dashboards in Experience Workspaces are automatically refreshed every 24 hours. To see the latest data, click **Refresh**. If you access the dashboard after it has been recently refreshed, the dashboard displays the globally cached data from the last refresh. If the dashboard hasn’t been refreshed in 24 hours, it’s refreshed automatically when you access it. All role-based external users in your Experience Cloud site can refresh dashboards set up with “Run as specified user” and “Run as logged-in user” up to 1,000 times daily per org. Scheduled and automatic refreshes don’t count against the limit. There is no refresh limit for internal users. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Experience Cloud sites don’t fully support dashboard subscriptions. If you subscribe to dashboards, you receive email notifications with updated dashboard information, but you can’t click through to the dashboard from the email notification. Remember that you can customize your dashboards at any time. To edit your dashboard, go to the **Dashboards** | **Settings** page in Experience Workspaces. Click into the **Label** field to edit the page name and select the down arrow to the right of the **Dashboard** field to map to a different dashboard. Click **Edit dashboard** to open the dashboard in your internal Salesforce org. If you’re using a dashboard that was created in Lightning Experience, the edit link doesn’t work. For a Salesforce Classic dashboard to render optimally in the Lightning view used in Experience Workspaces, make sure that your dashboard meets these requirements. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Metrics are supported in the Lightning view, but they display as large tiles. We recommended that you don’t include metrics in your dashboards. - Includes only up to 20 reports arranged within three columns - Doesn’t include unsupported charts, such as funnel, scatter, table, multi-metric, pie, and gauge For a list of dashboard features not supported in the Lightning view, see [Reports and Dashboards: Lightning Experience Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/HTViewHelpDoc?id=lex_gaps_limitations_analytics.htm&language=en_US). ## View a Site’s Dashboards Use dashboards to monitor the health of your Experience Cloud site. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Dashboards**. Pages that have dashboards mapped to them appear in the Dashboards section or on the Home page. 3. Click the dashboard page that you want to view. For an immediate refresh of dashboard data, click **Refresh** If you access the dashboard after it was recently refreshed, the dashboard shows the globally cached data from the last refresh. If the dashboard hasn’t been refreshed in 24 hours, it’s refreshed automatically when you access it. All role-based external users in your site can refresh dashboards set up with Run as specified user and Run as logged-in user up to 1,000 times daily per org. Scheduled and automatic refreshes don’t count against the limit. There’s no refresh limit for internal users. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Experience Cloud sites don’t fully support dashboard subscriptions. If you subscribe to dashboards, you receive email notifications with updated dashboard information, but you can’t click through to the dashboard from the email notification. 4. To view a related report, click **View Report** on the dashboard. Remember that the dashboards are configured to show site-specific data. Be sure not to filter the report by Network ID. Filtering by Network ID ensures that the report dynamically displays data for the Experience Cloud site that you view it from. When you add a Network ID filter, it causes the report to show data only for the site with that Network ID. The report shows this limited data, regardless of which site you view it in. ## Customize a Site’s Dashboards Customize your dashboards to manage and prioritize the metrics that you want to view for your Experience Cloud site. 1. Click **Dashboards** | **Settings** in Experience Workspaces. 2. To edit the dashboard name, click the Label field and enter your changes. 3. To map to a different dashboard, click the down arrow right of the Dashboard field, and then click the desired dashboard. 4. To edit the dashboard in your internal Salesforce org, click **Edit Dashboard.** ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If you’re using a dashboard that was created in Lightning Experience, the edit link doesn’t work. #### See Also - [_Salesforce Help_: Create a Custom Report Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.reports_defining_report_types.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Enable Chatter Questions in Your Experience Cloud Site Chatter Questions helps you promote engagement by giving users the ability to ask and answer questions in their Chatter feed, in groups, and in records. Members in your users’ groups and Experience Cloud sites can answer questions in Chatter just as they would comment on a Chatter post. Users in sites built on the Customer Service template can also attach files to questions. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Chatter Questions is available in: Group, Professional, Developer, Performance, Enterprise, and Unlimited Editions.
User Permissions Needed
To edit the global publisher layout: Customize Application
To set up Chatter Questions, add the Question action to the global publisher layout. In orgs created after Summer ’14, the Question action is automatically added, but we recommend dragging it to the far left to increase its visibility. ![Chatter Question in the Customer Service template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_attach_files_questions.png) 1. From Setup, enter Publisher Layouts in the Quick Find box, then select **Publisher Layouts**. 2. Click **Edit** next to the global publisher layout. 3. Drag the Question action from the palette to the global publisher layout. If the Question action already appears in the layout, drag it to the location where you want it. 4. Click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're using a customized publisher layout in groups or on records, make sure that the Question action is added to those layouts as well. - **[Enable Upvotes and Downvotes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_updown_vote.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable upvoting and downvoting in lieu of liking questions and answers in your Experience Cloud site. When you enable upvoting and downvoting, members see an **Upvote** option under a question or answer and a **Downvote** option on the question or answer’s overflow menu. The **Like** option goes away. Upvoting and downvoting are disabled by default in Experience Cloud sites created in Spring ’19 and later. #### See Also - [Track Use of Chatter Questions in Your Salesforce Organization and Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_reporting.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Enable Clickjack Protection in Experience Cloud Sites Clickjacking is a type of attack that tricks users into clicking something, such as a button or link, because they perceive it to be safe. By creating hidden iframes pointing to your Experience Cloud site pages, hackers can entice users to click an element that appears to be on a different web page. But instead of the visible element handling the click, the click is hijacked and some element of the invisible site iframe on top receives it. Clickjacking can potentially lead to data intrusion, unauthorized emails, changed credentials, or other malicious site-specific results. With clickjack protection, however, you can secure your site by controlling whether browsers allow frames pointing to your pages. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To configure clickjack protection for Site.com sites, see [Enable Clickjack Protection in Site.com](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.siteforce_clickjacking_enable.htm&type=5&language=en_US). You can set clickjack protection for your Experience Cloud site pages to one of these levels. - **Allow framing by any page (no protection)**: The least secure level. All external domains can frame your site pages. - **Allow framing of site pages on external domains (good protection)**: Only trusted external domains can frame your site pages. You specify the domains that you trust in the Trusted Domains for Inline Frames list. - **Allow framing by the same origin only (recommended)**: The default level for Experience Cloud sites. Allows framing of site pages by pages with the same domain name and protocol security. - **Don’t allow framing by any page (most protection)**: The most secure level. However, for Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites and for Experience Builder sites, this option prevents pages in the Administration section of Experience Workspaces from opening. To avoid this issue, select a different clickjack protection level. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip The location for enabling clickjack protection differs for Experience Builder sites and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites. If your site has a mixture of both Experience Builder and Visualforce pages, enable clickjack protection in both locations. ## Enable Clickjack Protection for Experience Builder Sites 1. In Experience Builder, select **Settings** | **Security & Privacy**. 2. Under Clickjack Protection Level, select a clickjack protection level. 3. If you chose to allow framing of site pages external domains, specify the domains that you trust to frame your site. For each trusted domain, take these steps. 1. In the Trusted Domains for Inline Framing section, click **Add Trusted Domain**. 2. Enter the domain that can frame your site pages. You can add up to 100 trusted domains for each Experience Builder site. Some infrastructure limits the maximum size of HTTP headers. If you allow multiple domains to frame your site, keep the size of the CSP header under 12 KB. Salesforce customers report issues when the header size approaches 16 KB, and third parties often add to the header during processing. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Added domains take effect only when Allow framing of site pages on external domains (good protection) is selected. ## Enable Clickjack Protection for Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites 1. To access the Site Details page, use one of these methods. - In Experience Workspaces, select **Administration** | **Pages** | **Go to Force.com** - From Salesforce Setup, enter Sites and Domains in the Quick Find box, select **Sites**, and select the site from the Sites list. 2. Click **Edit** on the Site Details page. 3. Select your preferred level of clickjack protection and save your changes. 4. If you chose to allow framing of your site pages on your external domains, specify the domains that you trust to frame your page. For each domain, take these steps. 1. In the Trusted Domains for Inline Framing section, click **Add Domain**. 2. Enter the domain that can frame your site pages. You can add up to 512 trusted domains for each Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site. Some infrastructure limits the maximum size of HTTP headers. If you allow multiple domains to frame your site pages, keep the size of the CSP header under 12 KB. Salesforce customers report issues when the header size approaches 16 KB, and third parties often add to the header during processing. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Added domains take effect only when **Allow framing of site pages on external domains (good protection)** is selected. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Internet Explorer supports clickjack protection through the legacy X-Frame-Options HTTP Header only. This header supports `sameorigin`, `deny` (none), `allowall`, and `allow-from` uri. In particular, `allow-from` uri supports only one URI. To support a list for IE users, the framing site must identify itself to the site domain by passing in a query parameter in the `iframe` tag. For example, if you add https://example.com as a trusted external domain, then the page on https://example.com must make its iframe as follows: `` You can also set the trusted external domain in the `iframeDomain` cookie. This method allows iframes if the `_iframeDomain` URL variable isn’t saved when navigating between pages in IE. `Cookie iframeDomainCookie = ApexPages.currentPage().getCookies().get('iframeDomain'); if (iframeDomainCookie == null) { iframeDomainCookie = new Cookie('iframeDomain','www.example.com'); // Set the new cookie for the page ApexPages.currentPage().setCookies(new Cookie[]{iframeDomainCookie}); }` # Enable Code Snippets and Assign Permissions to Use Them Use code snippets to enter syntax-highlighted code samples through the Chatter publisher. To make code snippets available, enable them and assign the permission to use them. There are two ways to enable code snippets and assign permission: through a user profile (step 1) or through a permission set (step 2). Code snippets are available in Lightning Experience and Experience Builder sites that are based on the Customer Service template. 1. Enable code snippets through a user profile: 1. In Setup, expand **Manage Users** (**Users** in Lightning Experience), click **Profiles**, then click **Clone** next to **Standard User**. 2. Give the clone a **Profile Name**, and click **Save**. 3. On the clone page, click **Edit**. 4. Scroll to the **General User Permissions** section, select **Allow Inclusion of Code Snippets from UI**, and click **Save**. 5. Under **Manage Users**, click **Users**. 6. Edit each user you want to give code snippet permission to, and assign them the cloned user profile. 2. Enable code snippets through a permission set: 1. In Setup, expand **Manage Users** (**Users** in Lightning Experience), click **Permission Sets**, then click **New**. 2. In the **Label** field, enter a name for the permission set. 3. Optionally, pick a type of user license for this permission set. Pick **None** if you don’t want to limit this permission set to a particular license type. 4. Click **Save**. 5. On the new permission set page, under **System**, click **System Permissions**, then click **Edit**. 6. Select **Allow Inclusion of Code Snippets from UI**, and click **Save**. 7. Click **Manage Assignments**, then **Add Assignments**. 8. Assign the new permission set, then click **Done**. Your users can enter code snippets in the Chatter publisher. Users can’t add a code snippet to a list. # Enable Content Deliveries and Public Links Use Content deliveries and public links to send links to files to people inside or outside your organization. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
User Permissions Needed
To enable content deliveries and public links: Customize Application
With content deliveries, you can set a password or an expiration date for the link, and track how frequently the content is viewed. When you create a public link to a file, you can set a password and expiration date. Public links to folders don’t have password protection or link expiration. You can’t track content views on public links to files or folders. Any time confidential documents are shared, we recommend requiring password protection. 1. From Setup, enter Content Deliveries and Public Links in the Quick Find box, and select **Content Deliveries and Public Links**. Select Content Deliveries feature can be enabled for users and Public Links can be enabled for users (Requires Content Deliveries). 2. From Setup, enter Permission Sets in the Quick Find box, and select **Permission Sets**. Select a permission set, click **System Permissions**, and select Create Public Links. 3. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, and select **Profiles**. Select a profile, and click **Edit**. In **General User Permissions**, select Create Public Links. You don't need this permission for files in a shared Salesforce CRM Content library. Instead, complete steps 1 and 2 and then ensure that the user is a library member and that **Deliver Content** is checked in the library permission definition. 4. From Setup, enter Content Permissions in the Quick Find box, and select **Content Permissions**. Next to Library Administrator in the list of library permissions, click **Edit**, enable **Deliver Content**, and save your changes. After enabling content delivery and choosing a default for password protection, add the Content Deliveries related list to your page layouts to create new content deliveries and find details about existing deliveries on a record. In addition to the global settings that enable content deliveries and public links for your org, you need to enable the user permissions "Create Content Deliveries" or "Create Public Links" on profiles or in permission sets. Files in libraries are governed by settings in the library, not user permissions. To share files managed by a library, Deliver Content must be enabled for the user in the library. # Enable Create New Tasks on Posts Enhance the feed with an action that lets users create tasks directly from a post. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize Chatter feed item layouts Customize Application
[Actions in the Publisher](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.enabling_actions.htm&language=en_US) and feed tracking for the Task object must be enabled. 1. From Setup, enter Feed Item in the Quick Find box, then select **Feed Item Layouts**. 2. Click **Edit** next to Feed Item Layout. 3. In the Feed Item Layout, click **Quick Actions**. 4. For Salesforce Classic, select the **Create New Task** action and drag it to the Actions in the Publisher section. ![Add action to post](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_admin_post_actions.png) For Lightning Experience, drag **Create New Task** to the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section. If you don’t see the Create New Task action, verify that the Actions in the Publisher feature is enabled under Chatter Settings in Setup. 5. Save your changes. The Create New Task action displays on a post’s menu. When a user creates a task from a post, the task shows up in the My Task list on the user’s Home page. The Create New Task action on posts - Is available on user-entered posts, but not on system-generated posts like tracked feed updates. - Generates an update that appears in the user’s feed. - Can be partly customized. You can’t change the fields, but you can change the layout of the fields. The fields available on the Create New Task Layout are - Subject - Due Date - Assigned To - Name - Related To # Enable Digital Experiences Enabling digital experiences is the first step to creating an Experience Cloud site, whether you’re building a community, portal, help center, or website. You also need to enable digital experiences when setting up Commerce Cloud, Financial Services Cloud, Health Cloud, and Work.com. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
User Permissions Needed
To enable digital experiences: Customize Application
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note After you enable digital experiences, you can’t disable it. If your org’s access to Experience Cloud is suspended for non-payment, all your sites are deactivated, including the ones in Preview. When Experience Cloud is re-enabled, all sites are inactive. You can activate them, but you can’t return to the Preview state. 1. From Setup, enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then select **Digital Experiences** | **Settings**. 2. Select **Enable Digital Experiences**. Your digital experiences domain is shown. It includes your My Domain name in the format MyDomainName.my.site.com for production orgs. 3. Click **Save**. ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_warning.png) Warning Review these considerations about access after enabling digital experiences. - After enabling digital experiences, you can create external-facing sites that are associated with accounts. External user contact records are visible to all other external users associated with the same account, unless the default external access for contacts is set to Private. - In Salesforce orgs created before February 8, 2024 that enabled digital experiences before the “Enable Secure Roles Behavior and Update Sharing Group References in Production” release update was enforced Winter ’26, record access was automatically extended to external members. Records previously accessible to Roles and Subordinates are available to Roles, Internal and Portal Subordinates. Opening up access to the site and portal subordinates could expose your org’s data to external users. To secure your sites, use the Convert External User Access Wizard to help ensure that no records or folders are shared with external users. For more information, see [Use the Convert External User Access Wizard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.customer_portal_access_wizard.htm&language=en_US). - In all orgs created on February 8, 2024 or later and in all orgs that enabled digital experiences after Winter ’26, access is secure by default. Records shared with the Roles and Internal Subordinates group through sharing rules or other mechanisms remain accessible only to internal users. If you have the Create and Set Up Experiences permission, you can now create experiences. - In Experience Builder sites and Lightning Experience, the App Launcher lets members switch between their Salesforce org and experiences that they’re a member of. - In Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites and Salesforce Classic, the global header lets users switch between their Salesforce org and experiences that they're a member of. #### See Also - [Enable the Global Header for Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_global_header.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site and Salesforce Classic, the global header lets you switch between your sites and your Salesforce org.") - [Enable the App Launcher in Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_enable_app_launcher.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Display the App Launcher in Experience Builder Sites to make it easy for members to move between their sites and their Salesforce org. This functionality is available in any site based an Experience Builder site template or Lightning Bolt solution.") # Enable Direct Messages in an Aura Site Allow members to send direct messages to start a private conversation with up to 16 people, including the sender. Direct messages are supported in all Aura sites and in Lightning Bolt Solutions, such as the Lightning Partner Management solution. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To enable direct messages:

Access Experience Management OR Manage Experiences OR Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the Experience Cloud site

To enable Chatter: Customize Application
Direct messages offer privacy for more sensitive conversations. Imagine a scenario where a customer brings up an issue they have with a product in the Experience Cloud site feed. A support agent can share that post and address the customer’s concerns privately in a direct message. Similarly, a channel manager can discuss sensitive sales data with one or more partner users in a partner site. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Private messages and direct messages are separate features. Direct messages are newer and offer a richer feature set for private communication. Direct messages are based on Chatter and offer a rich text editor that supports inline images and attachments. With direct messages, you can start a message right from a feed post. 1. Make sure that Chatter is enabled in your org. 2. Open Experience Workspaces. 3. Under Administration, click **Preferences**. 4. Select **Enable direct messages** and save your changes. 5. In Experience Builder, click the **Profile Header** component on the Home page and select **Include My Messages**. The My Messages link appears in the user profile dropdown menu. 6. Publish your Experience cloud site. To facilitate easy access to direct messages, add other components to your site. - Add the **Messages** page to your site’s navigation menu for prominent placement and easy access. - Add the **New Message Button** component to any page you want to allow members to create messages from. - Add the **Message Notification** component to the home page. After enabling direct messages, members can start a direct message conversation: - From the Messages page. - From user profiles and from hovers on users names. - From the Message Notification and the New Message Button components on-site pages. - By sharing a feed post as a direct message. Members can flag messages that are spam or inappropriate. They can also opt to receive email notifications when someone sends them a direct message or responds to a conversation they’re a part of. Members can access their direct message conversations by clicking **My Messages** in their user profile dropdown menu. To allow members to flag messages that are inappropriate, Allow members to flag content preference in the Administration tile of Experience Workspaces. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The maximum number of people who can participate in a single direct message, including the sender, is 16. If people leave, you can add more people, up to a total of 16. ![Access direct messages from your user profile](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/direct_messages_access.png) Here’s what the messages list view looks like: ![Direct messages list view in a community](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/direct_messages_list_view.png) ## Direct Message Limitations Before you enable direct messages for your Aura site, review these considerations. - Direct messages require that Chatter is enabled in your org. - Direct messages can be enabled only in Experience Builder sites and in Lightning Bolt Solutions. - Users with the View All Data and Modify All Data permissions can’t access direct message data unless they’re participants in the conversation. - Only users with the Manage Chatter Messages and Direct Messages permission can view all the direct messages data in your org. - The maximum number of people who can participate in a single direct message, including the sender, is 16. If people leave, you can add more people, up to a total of 16. - To moderate flagged direct messages, the moderator needs the Moderate Chatter Messages and Direct Messages permission and the Moderate Experiences Chatter Messages permission. - To maintain privacy, direct messages aren’t included in search results. - When members flag a direct message, the entire conversation is flagged. Individual messages can’t be flagged. - If you have private messages enabled, they remain available. However, direct messages are better integrated with Lightning technology. We recommend that you switch to direct messages. ### For Developers Direct messages are supported in Connect REST API. Under the hood, direct messages are a special implementation of feed posts and comments parented to a direct message entity. If you use Connect REST API to create a custom implementation of direct messages, a few things to keep in mind: - The first message is stored as a feed post and the responses are stored as comments. - Unlike other objects, direct messages can’t have multiple feed posts associated with a single direct message conversation. - You can’t follow, like, share, mention people in, mute, and bookmark feed items associated with direct messages. You also can’t associate topics with direct message feed items. - Feeds associated with direct messages aren’t accessible via search, public feeds, or streams. - Email notifications for direct messages aren’t supported for custom implementations built for the internal Salesforce org. - Direct messages are only supported on the Messages page. Using direct messages on custom pages isn’t supported and can lead to unexpected authentication results. - In the Experience Cloud site UI, direct messages display only to the participants in the conversation. However, Apex code runs in system mode, which means that the permissions of the current user aren’t considered. This limitation has implications for pages that use Apex and Visualforce. - Review your Visualforce pages for any potential exposure of direct message data. - Review your AppExchange apps that are written in Apex to ensure that direct message data isn’t exposed. - Visualforce and Apex developers in your org might be able to access direct message data. Use permission sets, profile-level permissions, and sharing checks in your code to limit user access. #### See Also - [Edit Pages and Components in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_edit_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Each page contains a collection of components that are organized around a task or function, whether it’s opening a case or searching for an article. The pages in each Experience Builder template are ready for you to use with little configuration. Add new components to your site’s pages, edit the properties of existing components, or delete components that you don’t require.") - [Moderate Flagged Items in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderator_flagged_items.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Moderators can review and act on flagged items in their Experience Cloud sites.") - [Manage Your Site Email Notifications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_manage_email_notifications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use email notifications to keep up with important updates in your Experience Cloud sites.") # Enable Edit Feed Post in User Profiles or Permission Sets By default, feed post editing is disabled on all custom profiles. To make the feature available to your users, you can either modify your user profiles or assign the permissions to users via a permission set. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create custom profiles Manage Profiles and Permission Sets
To assign permission sets Assign Permission Sets
Here’s how you enable the permissions in a permission set. 1. From Setup, enter Permission Sets in the Quick Find box, then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click an existing custom permission set or create one. 3. Click **System Permissions**, then click **Edit**. 4. Select the edit feed post permissions that you want to enable. - Edit My Own Posts—Let susers edit their own posts and comments. - Edit Posts on Records I Own—Lets users edit posts and comments on records they own. This setting applies to all posts and comments on a record, both by the author and made by other users. - Can Approve Feed Post and Comment—Lets users edit and delete the posts and comments of any person in the Chatter feeds that they have access to. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Assign the permission set to the users who need the permissions. # Enable Feed Updates for Related Records Show feed updates on a record’s detail page whenever someone creates related records. Feed updates for related records let you track the creation of related records from the parent record. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, Database.com, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To change feed tracking settings Customize Application
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Feed Tracking and select **Feed Tracking**. 2. Click the object for which you want to enable feed updates for related records. 3. Click **All Related Objects**. If you don’t see this option, make sure that actions in the publisher are enabled. The All Related Objects option isn’t available for all objects. 4. Save your changes. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example If you enable feed updates for related records on accounts, the account feed includes: - Feed updates for all activity on the account - Feed updates announcing new related records Records must be created via object-specific actions, from related lists on the record itself, or directly associated with the related record to appear in its Chatter feed. For example, if a task is created via a global action and isn't directly associated with a parent record via the Related To or Name fields, the task doesn't appear in the related record 's feed even if you update it and relate it to records afterward. Enabling All Related Objects doesn’t retroactively add related records to feeds. Only newly created records that are related to the enabled object are included in its Chatter feed. #### See Also - [Feed Tracking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_tracking_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Feed tracking detects changes to tracked record fields and posts them as updates in the What I Follow feed. Users who follow a record see those updates in their view of What I Follow, with one exception: Updates that users make themselves aren’t posted to What I Follow. Users can see those updates in their profile feeds.") - [Action Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.actions_types.htm&language=en_US) # Enable GEO to Make Site Pages More Discoverable by AI To make public site pages more discoverable by AI-powered search engines and enhance the precision of generated answers, enable generative engine optimization (GEO) in Experience Builder. When you enable GEO, AI bots can request content snapshots of your site’s pages to generate answers more effectively. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions. This feature isn’t supported in Government Cloud.
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Before you enable GEO for your site, review the AI bots listed in [SEO for Experience Builder Sites FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_faq.htm&language=en_US&type=5). When you enable this feature, you automatically opt in to all listed web crawlers. 1. In Experience Builder, open the SEO tab in Settings. 2. Enable **Provide content snapshots of public site pages when requested by AI bots**. ![GEO setting in Experience Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/seo_geo.png) 3. Publish your site to make your changes live. After you publish the site, it can provide content snapshots of public site pages when requested by AI bots. #### See Also - [Provide Search Engines with Fresh Content Snapshots](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_snapshot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Builder sites in your production org use the Content Snapshot service to generate SEO optimized HTML for web crawlers such as Googlebot, and content sharing platforms such as Facebook. The concept is common to single-page application frameworks known as dynamic rendering. Salesforce takes a snapshot when you make changes to your site’s publicly available content. This functionality works well for most updates. But let’s say you update a page with time-sensitive information, such as price changes for a flash sale. Instead of waiting, you can take a manual snapshot once every 24 hours to refresh the page content served to search engines.") - [SEO for Experience Builder Sites FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Answers to common questions about using SEO in your Experience Builder site.") # Enable Ideas in Your Experience Cloud Site Ideas enable a group of users to post, vote for, and comment on ideas. Enabling Ideas provides an online, transparent way for you to attract, manage, and showcase innovation. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize Ideas settings: Customize Application
To view Ideas: Read on Ideas AND Read on Idea Themes
To manage org-wide settings for Ideas, follow these high-level steps: 1. From Setup, enter Ideas Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Ideas Settings** 1. To enable Ideas for your org, select the Enable Ideas checkbox. After you enable the HTML editor, you can't disable it. 2. Optionally, select Enable Text-Formatting, Images and Links to enable the Ideas HTML editor, which gives users WYSIWYG HTML editing and image referencing capabilities when they post or comment on ideas. 3. Ensure that the multi-select Categories field is enabled by clicking the **Enable** button located below the Categories message at the top of the page. This button is not displayed if your organization already has the Categories field enabled. 4. To let Ideas members associate more than one category with an idea, select Enable Categories. After you enable multi-select categories, you can't disable it. 5. To let users earn points and ratings based on their activity in each zone, select Enable Reputations. 6. In the Half-Life (in Days) field, enter the number of days. The half-life setting determines how quickly old ideas drop in ranking on the Popular Ideas subtab, to make room for ideas with more recent votes. A shorter half-life moves older ideas down the page faster than a longer half-life. 2. Define and customize fields for Ideas: 1. Define picklist values for the Categories and Status fields. Make sure that you add the categories and statuses to the zones you are including in the Experience Cloud site. 2. Set field-level security for standard and custom fields. 3. Create custom fields and set validation rules on them. Custom fields appear in the Additional Information section on the Post Idea and Idea Detail pages. 4. Optionally, add the Attachment field to the layout and set field-level security to enable users to add files to their ideas. 3. To enable experts within your zones, create a public group that includes these users. 4. Optionally, enable Idea Themes in your org. 5. Create one or more zones to organize ideas into logical groups, and associate the zones with the Experience Cloud site. 6. Customize your Ideas page layouts to display the information you want to see. 7. Create validation rules that prevent offensive language from being used in the zone 8. Set up Apex triggers and validation rules for comments on ideas. 9. Enable user profiles for members and moderators and ensure the profiles can access Ideas. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important To view Ideas, guest user profiles created after October 1, 2018 must have the Read on Ideas and Read on Idea Themes user permissions manually enabled. 10. Add the Ideas tab and the Idea Themes tab to the site. #### See Also - [Enable and Customize Ideas Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.ideas_settings.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Enable Leads for Visualforce Sites If you are using the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template, enable leads for partner users in your Experience Cloud site so that they can access and create leads in your sites. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To enable leads for partner users: Manage Profiles and Permission Sets
When you enable leads for partner users in your site, you can assign leads to those members. Also, partner users can edit leads, create leads, import leads, and mass update leads in a list view. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Administration** | **Tabs**, and add the **Leads** tab to the list of available tabs in your site. 3. In Setup, set tab visibility and object permissions. You can either set them on the profile or using a permission set. If you plan to apply these permissions selectively, we recommend using a permission set . 1. If using a permission set, use the following settings for leads: - In the Tab Settings, select Available and Visible. - In the Object Settings, select Read, Create, and Edit. 2. If using a profile, such as the Partner User profile, set the leads tab setting to Default On and enable the Read, Create, and Edit object permissions for leads. 4. Optionally, you can assign extra permissions that enable advanced features for your partners. If you plan to apply these permissions to only some of your partner users, we recommend creating separate permissions sets. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Partner users with legacy portal licenses can use these advanced features in sites, but not in portals.
Feature Partner User Permission Needed

To import leads using the Import Leads link on the Leads tab in your site.

If your partner user is importing leads, it might also make sense to allow them to import accounts and contacts using the Import My Organization’s Accounts & Contacts link on the Accounts and Contacts tabs in your site.

“Import Leads”

AND

Optionally, “Import Personal Contacts”

To change the status of multiple leads via the Change Status button. “Manage Leads”
To change the owner of multiple leads via the Change Owner button. “Transfer Leads”
# Enable Members to Flag Items in Your Experience Cloud Site Turn on flagging for your Experience Cloud site to let members flag posts, comments, files, and messages that they deem inappropriate. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To allow members to flag items:

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the Experience Cloud site

If you haven’t already, [install the Salesforce Communities Management (for Communities with Chatter)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reporting_dashboards_package.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Salesforce Communities Management packages give community managers an essential starter set of dashboards and reports to keep tabs on activity and engagement directly in Experience Workspaces.") package from AppExchange. The Allow members to flag content preference enables: - Members to flag posts, comments, and files using the Flag as inappropriate option. - Members to flag messages from within the Experience Cloud site on their My Messages page in Chatter. If a member has turned on email notification for messages, they can also flag the message directly from their email. Members can only flag messages that are sent from sites they’re members of. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Messages can’t be flagged in partner or customer portals, your internal org, or from the Salesforce mobile app. - Group owners and managers to moderate the groups they own or manage. This setting isn’t required to flag or moderate items using the API. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Administration** | **Preferences**, then select **Allow members to flag content**. 3. Click **Save**. If you want to create custom advanced moderation logic for your Experience Cloud site, you can create triggers that flag content. Custom triggers run behind the scenes and don’t require you to allow your members to flag content. #### See Also - [Assign a Moderator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderator_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Make one or more people moderators in your Experience Cloud site so they can keep an eye on its content.") # Enable Notifications in Experience Builder Sites With Global Notifications, your members receive messages wherever they’re working, whether in their sites or in their apps. Members receive notifications on any screen—mobile, tablet, and desktop. This functionality is available in Experience Builder sites based on Customer Service (Napili), Partner Central, and any Lightning Bolt solutions. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create permission sets: Manage Profiles and Permission Sets
To assign a permission set to a user: Assign Permission Sets
To create, customize, or publish a site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
![Notifications in communities](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_notif.png) All events that trigger notifications are supported. Members can even trigger notifications on record feeds. For example, an internal member can trigger a notification from the Salesforce org by @mentioning an external member on a lead or opportunity. When a member clicks a notification, the originating detail page or other appropriate location is displayed for easy collaboration across sites and apps. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - If you use the Build Your Own (Aura) template, create the Feed Detail page so you can see notifications. - Replies on threaded discussions only trigger notifications for the post owner. By default, the Notifications icon is hidden in existing sites and displayed in new sites. 1. In Experience Builder, click ![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings.png) on the left sidebar and then click **Theme**. 2. For the default Customer Service theme layout, show or hide Notifications for your members by selecting **Hide Notifications icon in site header**. - **[Manage Your Site Email Notifications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_manage_email_notifications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use email notifications to keep up with important updates in your Experience Cloud sites. # Enable Objects for Experience Cloud Site Users Enable Salesforce standard and custom objects for external users so that they have access from your Experience Cloud sites. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
User Permissions Needed
To enable objects: Manage Profiles and Permission Sets
Objects are available without any additional setup in Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) and Aura sites. Add the object-related components to the canvas, and customize for your business needs. Guest and authenticated users can access the object pages based on their sharing and visibility settings. To show objects in Salesforce Tabs and Visualforce sites: 1. In the site’s workspaces, access **Administration** | **Tabs**. Add the object tab to the list of available tabs in your site. 2. Set tab visibility and the object permissions needed for your use case using a permission set. #### See Also - [Restrict Experience Cloud Site User Access to Cases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_restrict_case_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Determine whether users with Customer Community Plus licenses can view and edit cases in which they’re listed as the contact. You can disable the standard sharing behavior that grants the assigned contact and everyone in their role hierarchy access to a case. After disabling this sharing behavior, you can control access to cases by creating a manual share or by using Apex managed sharing.") - [Merge Fields for Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.merge_fields_communities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can personalize the email that you send to Experience Cloud site members by adding merge fields to your email templates.") - [Enable Portal Reply Email Notifications in Case Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.case_interaction_enabling_portal_email_notifications.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Enable Other Salesforce Features in Experience Cloud Sites Experience Cloud offers a platform to expose Salesforce features and functionality to site members. For example, enable Salesforce Knowledge so customers can view knowledge articles in your site. Enable case feeds to facilitate discussions over customer cases. There’s also Chatter Questions, direct messages, Question-to-Case, and field service data. - **[Cross-Cloud Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_setup_cross_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable cross-cloud features so users in your Experience Cloud sites can access them. Some objects and features available in specific clouds, like Industries and Commerce Cloud, require add-on licenses. - **[Service Cloud Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_setup_service.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Service Cloud features, such as Salesforce Knowledge and Site Case Feed, for your self-service sites in Experience Cloud. Some objects and features, like Field Service, require add-on licenses. Some features, like Case Feed, require Chatter to be turned in your org. - **[Sales Cloud Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_setup_sales.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Sales Cloud features so that your partners can sell products quickly using partner relationship management (PRM) sites in Experience Cloud. Some objects and features, like Commerce Cloud, require add-on licenses. - **[Collaboration Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_setup_collaboration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable collaboration features so users in your Experience Cloud sites can collaborate with one another and with employees in your org. # Enable Partner Functionality in Your Org Buy partner licenses to enable partner functionality in your org. Partner licenses are required to use the Lightning Partner Central community template, set up partner accounts, and create partner users in your org. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
When you buy partner licenses, the following functionality is enabled in your org: - The Partner Central Experience Cloud Site template. - The default [Partner User profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.exp_cloud_partner_create_considerations.htm&type=5&language=en_US). You can clone it to create custom partner profiles or extend data access via permission sets. - Three standard [partner roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_partner_roles_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US): Partner User, Partner Manager, Partner Executive. When you create partner accounts, you can associate one of these roles with the partner users. - A [sharing rule group and category](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_group_member_types.htm&type=5&language=en_US) targeted at partner users. - The **Manage External Account** and **Enable as Partner** buttons on accounts. - A **Manage External User** and **Enable Partner User** button on contacts. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If you have previously purchased partner portal licenses, you already have these features in your org. # Enable Question-to-Case Enable Question-to-Case in your Experience Cloud sites, Salesforce org, or both. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura and Visualforce sites
 
User Permissions Needed
To enable Question-to-Case: Customize Application
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 1. From Setup, enter Support Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Support Settings**. 2. To enable Question-to-Case in Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites where you have enabled Chatter Questions, select **Enable Question-to-Case in Experience Cloud Sites**. 3. To enable Question-to-Case in your Salesforce org, select **Enable Question-to-Case in Salesforce**. 4. Click **Save**. - Question-to-Case isn't available in sites using Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) or Help Center templates. - Case assignment rules aren’t supported in Question-to-Case. By default, cases created from questions are assigned to the moderator who escalates the question. You can write a workflow rule that automatically adds cases that were created from questions to a queue so agents can claim them. ## Add the Question from Chatter Field to the Case Detail View When a case is created from a question in Chatter, the Question from Chatter field on case detail pages displays a link to the original question. This field helps agents quickly navigate to the feed. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To set field-level security:

Manage Profiles and Permission Sets

AND

Customize Application

To customize page layouts Customize Application
First, use field-level security to specify which users can see the Question from Chatter field on case detail pages. 1. From the object management settings for cases, go to Fields. 2. Click **Question from Chatter**. 3. Click **Set Field-Level Security**. 4. Select **Visible** for any profile that you want to be able to use Question-to-Case. 5. Click **Save**. After you make the field visible to users, you can choose to add it to the Case Details view. 1. From the object management settings for cases, go to Page Layouts. 2. Click **Edit** next to the page layout that you want to customize. 3. Drag the Question from Chatter field from the Fields section of the page layout editor palette to the Case Information section of the page. 4. Click **Save**. 5. Click **Page Layout Assignment** to confirm that the user profiles, which need Question-to-Case are assigned to the page layout that you customized. In addition, assign internal users who need access to the Question from Chatter field on cases to that page layout. #### See Also - [Find Object Management Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.extend_click_find_objectmgmt_parent.htm&type=5&language=en_US) ## Add the Escalate to Case Action to the Feed Item Layout and Confirm Access Give moderators the ability to create cases from questions by adding the Escalate to Case action to Chatter Questions pages. This action is created automatically when Question-to-Case is enabled in your organization. Make sure that the profiles that need Question-to-Case have access to the record type associated with the Escalate to Case action. 1. From Setup, enter Feed Item in the Quick Find box, then select **Feed Item Layouts**. 2. Click **Edit** next to Feed Item Layout. 3. Drag the Escalate to Case action from the Quick Actions category in the palette to the Quick Actions in the Salesforce Classic Publisher section. 4. Click **Save**. 5. Click **Page Layout Assignments** to confirm that the user profiles that need Question-to-Case are assigned to the Feed Item Layout. Check which record type is assigned to the profiles that need access to the Escalate to Case action. 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the name of a profile. 3. In the Record Type Settings section, make a note of which case record types the profile uses. 4. In the Permissions section, make sure that the user profile has either the **Moderate Chatter** or **Moderate Experiences Feeds** permission enabled. Then, check which record type the Escalate to Case action uses, and change it if necessary. 1. From Setup, enter Actions in the Quick Find box, then select **Feed Item Actions**. 2. Click **Edit** next to the Escalate to Case action. 3. Confirm that the Record Type field shows a record type that’s assigned to the profiles that need access to this action. If it doesn’t, select an appropriate record type from the drop-down list. 4. Click **Save**. ## Create a Case from a Question in Chatter If a question in Chatter hasn’t been resolved, moderators can create a case from the question. Question-to-Case must be enabled in your org. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create a case from a question in Salesforce:

Moderate Chatter OR Modify All Data

AND

Create on cases

To create a case from a question in an Experience Cloud site:

Moderate Chatter OR Modify All Data OR Moderate Experiences Feeds

AND

Create on cases

1. Navigate to the question in the feed. 2. Select **Escalate to Case** in the action dropdown menu. ![Escalate Action](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/qtc_escalate_action.png) A window appears that’s pre-populated with the case subject, contact, and description. Unless Question-to-Case has a queue associated with it, the case is automatically assigned to you. 3. If needed, edit the case details. 4. Create the case. After a case is created from a Chatter question, the customer who asked the question receives an email notifying them that a case was created from their question. The email provides the case number and a link to the case. Agents can respond to the question directly from the case feed using the action in the publisher. Agents choose who can view the response by selecting either “Customer Only” or “Everyone”. They can also navigate to the original question from the case’s detail page by clicking the link in the Question from Chatter field. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can also create a flow to automatically create a case from unresolved questions. Flows related to Question-to-Case act on the Feed Item object and evaluate whether question posts meet your escalation criteria. You can create flow variables based on several Feed Item fields, including: - BestCommentId: The ID of the comment that was selected as the best answer. If no comment has been selected as the best answer, this field is null. - CommentCount: The number of comments on a question. - LikeCount: The number of likes on a question. Other things to consider: - Each flow variable’s data type must match the feed item field’s data type. CommentCount and LikeCount are number fields, while BestCommentId is a text field. - The creation of a feed item can trigger a flow, but updates to feed items (such as likes and comments) can’t. Depending on your use case, you might need to specify how much time must pass before a related flow runs. # Enable Records in Chatter Groups By default, records are allowed in groups. But you can also customize the group publisher to include the Add Record action, so users can add records to groups. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
The Add Record action on the group publisher lets users add records to groups. Users can add account, contact, lead, opportunity, contract, campaign, case, and custom object records. The **Add Record** action isn’t available by default. But you can configure the group publisher to include it. Consider also customizing object layouts to include the Groups related list on record detail pages. The Groups related list shows users the list of groups that are associated with the record. Customize the layout of all the standard and custom objects in your organization that support group-record relationships. If you don’t want users to add records to groups, enter Chatter in the Quick Find box in Setup, then select Chatter Settings, and deselect **Allow records in groups in the Groups** section. Disabling the feature hides the Group Records list on the group detail page and the **Add Record** action in the group publisher. For custom objects, you can choose which record types users can add to groups. For each custom object that you want to manage, go to the custom object detail page and, under Optional Features, select **Allow in Chatter Groups**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Custom object records added to a group before Summer ’15, when selecting record types was added, continue to appear in the Group Records list. Be sure to enable this feature for each existing custom object that you want to allow in groups. #### See Also - [Customize the Chatter Group Layout and Publisher](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_layout_customize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add and remove fields, buttons, look-ups, and related lists to change the layout of groups.") # Enable Reputation in Your Experience Cloud Site Enable reputation so that site members are recognized and rewarded for participating. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To edit settings:

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the Experience Cloud site

A powerful tool for a community manager is the ability to recognize individual members for their participation. Community managers know that recognition and a little friendly competition usually lead to more active members. Enabling reputation turns on a default point system and a set of reputation levels in the Experience Cloud site. A community manager can personalize labels and point values. Members start to accrue points by performing the actions that have assigned point values. When the member exceeds the top of the level's point threshold, they move up a level. They, and other members, see their reputation level on their profile and when hovering over their name. Total points also show on member's profiles. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note When you enable Reputation, Chatter influence is removed from the Contribution section on the profile page. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Administration** | **Preferences**. 3. Select **Enable setup and display of reputation levels**, then click **Save**. After you enable reputation, a default point system and set of reputation levels is available. The default reputation points are as follows:
Action Points
Engagement
Write a post 1
Write a comment 1
Receive a comment 5
Like something 1
Receive a like 5
Share a post 1
Someone shares your post 5
Mention someone

1

If your post contains more than one @mention, you get a point for each @mention.

Receive a mention 5
Questions and Answers
Ask a question 1
Answer a question 5
Receive an answer 5
Mark an answer as best 5
Your answer is marked as best 20
Knowledge
Endorsing someone for knowledge on a topic 5
Being endorsed for knowledge on a topic 20
If your selected Experience Cloud site doesn’t have Chatter enabled, the Reputation section doesn’t appear. To show the Reputation section, go to **Administration** | **Preferences** and select **Show all settings in Workspaces**. #### See Also - [Set Up Reputation Levels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reputation_level_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Update the default reputation levels to meet your Experience Cloud site’s needs and help motivate your members.") - [Set Up Reputation Points](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reputation_points_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up a point system to reward users for participating in the Experience Cloud site.") - [How is my Experience Cloud site reputation calculated?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_faq_how_is_reputation_calculated.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The reputation level on your profile is calculated based on your total points.") # Enable Salesforce Files Connect for Your Organization Let users search and share files from external systems like Google Drive and SharePoint. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Files Connect for cloud-based external data sources is available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To enable Salesforce Files Connect: Customize Application
1. From Setup, enter Files Connect in the Quick Find box, and then select **Files Connect**. 2. Click **Edit**, and then select **Enable Files Connect**. 3. For File Sharing, select one of the following: - **Copy** — stores a copy of external files in Salesforce. If files are shared with a Chatter group, all group members can access the files, even if they lack access to the external system. - **Reference** — points to external files stored outside Salesforce. No file previews are available, and file downloads require user access to the external system. (Users must enter credentials for the system in the Authentication Settings for External Systems section of personal setup). Choose Copy mode if your organization shares files with external customers or partners. Choose Reference mode to reflect access restrictions from the external system in Salesforce. Regardless of sharing mode, files in Salesforce don’t reflect file revisions in external systems. However, Reference mode points to the latest versions in those systems. #### See Also - [The Files Connect Setup Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The setup process for Files Connect varies by external data source.") - [Let Users and Administrators Access Files Connect Data Sources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_perm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you enable Files Connect, give users and administrators permission to access specific external data sources from Salesforce.") # Enable Salesforce Files Settings For Managed Packages To avoid an exception error while installing the managed package, enable the Skip triggers execution and validation rules on asset files setting. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
1. From Setup, enter `Salesforce Files` in the Quick Find box, then select **General Settings**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Select **Skip triggers execution when deploying asset files** and **Skip triggers execution and validation rules on asset files**. 4. Save your changes. # Enable Salesforce Knowledge in Your Experience Cloud Site Enable Salesforce Knowledge to quickly get articles to your customers and agents in an Experience Cloud site. Knowledge articles provide accurate information to customers when and where they need it. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Experience Cloud sites are available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions. The Help Center template is available in Essentials Edition.

Salesforce Knowledge is available in: Performance and Developer Editions and in Unlimited Edition with the Service Cloud.

Salesforce Knowledge is available for an additional cost in Enterprise and Unlimited Edition.

Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
  • OR
  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
To publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
  • OR
  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin or publisher in that site
To set up Salesforce Knowledge, create article types and article actions, and modify category groups assignments:
  • Customize Application
  • AND
  • Manage Salesforce Knowledge
To assign user licenses: Manage Internal Users
To create data categories: Manage Data Categories
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - Your Salesforce org needs at least one Salesforce Knowledge license to enable and set up Salesforce Knowledge. - Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site members without the Knowledge One permission can't access Salesforce Knowledge through sites. They also can’t access Salesforce Knowledge in sites via Salesforce for Android or Salesforce for iOS. If you haven’t yet, check out [Salesforce Knowledge](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=knowledge_whatis.htm&language=en_US). After setting up your knowledge base, either in Salesforce Classic or Lightning Experience, complete these steps to view articles in your Experience Cloud sites. 1. Use permission sets to give users Read permissions. 1. In Setup, enter Permission Sets in the Quick Find box, and then click **Permission Sets**. 2. Give Read permission for the article types (Salesforce Knowledge in Classic) or record types (Lightning Knowledge) that you want to share with users. 3. Give Read permissions to each guest user profile you’d like to have access to Salesforce Knowledge. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note There are a few reasons why a user can’t find an article: it’s deleted or archived, it doesn’t exist, it has no assigned topic, or the user doesn’t have the access to view it. When an article isn’t available, guest users are directed to a login page and logged-in users see an “Invalid Page” error. 4. Assign the permission sets to the correct user profiles for your sites. 2. From Setup, enter Topics for Objects in the Quick Find box, then select **Topics for Objects**. 1. In Classic Knowledge, enable topics for all the article types you want to include. 2. In Lightning Knowledge, enable topics for Knowledge. 3. Salesforce Knowledge uses data categories to organize content. Experience Builder sites use topics. To ensure that your articles appear in search results, assign a topic to each article. You can easily map articles in your data categories to topics in a site. Follow these steps to map articles to topics automatically. 1. In Experience Workspaces of an Aura site, click **Content Management** | **Topics** | **Automatic Topic Assignment**. After enabling Automatic Topic Assignment, map topics to data category groups and data categories. You can choose to add the topics to all the articles existing in data categories, and to articles added in the future. You can map your exact hierarchy from data categories to topics, up to eight levels of depth. 2. In LWR sites, use the Knowledge components to show knowledge articles. 3. In Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites, add the Knowledge tab to the available tabs in the site. 4. In Aura sites, enable thumbs-up and thumbs-down voting on articles so you can identify helpful articles and ones that need improvement. 1. In Experience Builder, navigate to the Article Detail page. 2. To view and Article Content component’s properties, click it. 3. In the property editor, select **Allow voting on articles**. 4. Publish your changes. - **[Hide Fields in Lightning Knowledge Search Results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_knowledge_search_hide_results.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you display Knowledge search results in a grid layout, you can adjust the Knowledge search layout for different user profiles. Use this capability to hide some of the information that’s returned in results from different user profiles. #### See Also - [Salesforce Knowledge](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.knowledge_whatis.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Build Your Knowledge Base in Salesforce Classic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.knowledge_setup.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Automatically Assign Topics to Articles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_automatic_topic_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Transport all your hard work of organizing Salesforce Knowledge in your Experience Cloud site, and boost SEO for your Knowledge articles, by mapping topics to data categories. All articles published with a specific data category are tagged with the topics you specify. Articles added to the data category in the future are also tagged. All articles with assigned topics are included in search results.") # Enable Search Autocomplete for Guest Users Sometimes you want your Experience Cloud site’s guest users to benefit from the suggestions that come from autocomplete on their search terms. To make it happen, you must explicitly make result types publicly available. For example, when you want guest users to see suggestions for Knowledge articles, you can set up your search component so that Knowledge results are public. After you set up autocomplete, search shows any Knowledge articles that match a guest user’s search terms in autocomplete suggestions. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To configure component properties: Customize Application
1. In Experience Builder, click a search component. Autocomplete properties are available on most search components. 2. In the search component property editor, open the Autocomplete section and click an object. The object that you click is an object type that you want to make visible to guest users in search results. When you click an object, a window opens where you can select a different object type. So keep your original selection, or change it here. 3. Select **Publicly available**. 4. Click **Save**. # Enable Self-Service with Agentforce Give your customers an AI boost to help them resolve their issues on your Experience Cloud site. Add an AI agent to your site and define when the agent can start context-aware conversations. - **[Let Agentforce Service Agent Start Search-Based Conversations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_cnfg_asa_context_driven_conversations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let Agentforce Service Agent read users’ search queries in real time and initiate context-driven conversations to help users find what they are looking for faster. - **[Let Agentforce Service Agent Start Data Category-Based Conversations (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_cnfg_asa_data_category_conversations_mobile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Help your users find what they're looking for faster by setting up Agentforce Service Agent to read the data categories users select in real time and start conversations based on the information. - **[Reduce Tab Switching in Agentforce Service Agent on Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_set_up_bidirectional_capability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use your deployed Agentforce Service agent within an Experience Cloud site to keep conversations and relevant content in one place for site visitors. This script prevents links the agent provides in its responses from opening new browser tabs, keeping you in the same conversation window and reducing navigation so you can find solutions faster. This procedure focuses on configuring the Experience Cloud site to optimize the agent's behavior for a single-tab experience. - **[Add an Agentforce Service Agent to Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_add_agent_to_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Quickly configure and launch a fully functional Self-Service support portal with Enhanced Chat, agent routing, and built-in authentication, all without custom development. This solution provides out-of-the-box chat and agent routing, simplifying and accelerating your Self-Service portal deployment. - **[Give Users Instant Context with Highlight-to-Ask](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_context_aware_quick_chat.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With Highlight-to-Ask, Experience Cloud site users can highlight text in a knowledge article and ask the Agentforce Service agent a question based on the context. This functionality is an alternative to the Enhanced Chat component on your Experience Cloud site. - **[Context Passing Framework (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_context_passing_framework.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With the Context Passing Framework, Agentforce can track and leverage your journey across a site, providing a seamless, personalized experience.The Context Passing Framework is an independent feature that tracks user interactions, such as article page loads, search queries, topic clicks on Aura sites, or NDC clicks on LWR sites. It provides seamless context to Agentforce Service Agents (ASA) for context-aware responses in Enhanced Chat and Quick Chat sessions. - **[Personalization for Self-Service](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.personalization_for_self_service_0.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Ground every self-Service interaction in a unified view of customer data to reduce effort and provide relevant context. Self-Service success depends on minimizing the time customers spend clarifying intent or restating information. Personalization for Self-Service uses the Unified Customer Profile in Data 360 to provide a context framework. This framework combines profile data, historical activity, and derived insights. - **[Implement Agentforce Orchestrator for Experience Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.implement_agentforce_orchestrator_for_experience_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Deliver an autonomous, AI-driven service experience on your Experience Cloud site by implementing the Agentforce Orchestrator. This guide provides the end-to-end roadmap for connecting your customer relationship management (CRM) data, Enterprise Knowledge, and Self-Service agent logic. - **[Agentforce Self-Service Billing Models](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.agentforce_self_service_billing_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Agentforce Self-Service offers resolution-based, login-based, and member-based billing models for customer self-service experiences. Use this information to understand how consumption is measured, which interactions are billable, and which billing model best fits your self-service deployment. # Enable Similar Articles for Chatter Questions When users ask questions in Salesforce Classic, similar questions appear as they type. If you’d like relevant Salesforce Knowledge articles to appear, too, you can enable Similar Articles. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Chatter Questions is available in: Group, Professional, Developer, Performance, Enterprise, Contact Manager, and Unlimited Editions
User Permissions Needed
To enable Similar Articles for Chatter Questions: “Customize Application”
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Chatter and Salesforce Knowledge must be enabled in your organization. Enabling Similar Articles turns on the feature in: - Your internal Salesforce organization (Salesforce Classic only) - Your Experience Cloud site that’s built with Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce or the Customer Service (Napili) template 1. From Setup, enter Knowledge Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Knowledge Settings**. 2. Under Chatter Questions Settings, select **Display relevant articles as users ask questions in Chatter (also applies to sites with Chatter)**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Make sure that the Question action has been added to the desired page layouts. Otherwise, users can’t see it. To learn more about how Similar Articles and Similar Questions work, see: - [Display Similar Questions and Articles in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_deflection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Salesforce Classic, you can reduce duplicate content by showing similar questions and relevant Salesforce Knowledge articles. In Chatter, potential answers pop open as the user asks a question. In Experience Cloud sites with Chatter, question deflection features are available through Experience Builder components.") - [Display Similar Questions and Articles in the Customer Service Template Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_knowledge_deflection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Different Experience Cloud site users can ask similar questions. Chatter Questions helps reduce duplicate content in self-service sites that are built on the Customer Service template by showing similar questions and relevant Salesforce Knowledge articles. Potential answers appear on a list as a user enters a question in the Search field.") - See the properties on the Experience Builder components [Ask Button](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=rss_ask_community.htm&language=en_US) and [Contact Support and Ask Buttons](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=rss_contact_support.htm&language=en_US). #### See Also - [Display Similar Questions and Articles in the Customer Service Template Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_questions_knowledge_deflection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Different Experience Cloud site users can ask similar questions. Chatter Questions helps reduce duplicate content in self-service sites that are built on the Customer Service template by showing similar questions and relevant Salesforce Knowledge articles. Potential answers appear on a list as a user enters a question in the Search field.") # Enable the App Launcher in Experience Builder Sites Display the App Launcher in Experience Builder Sites to make it easy for members to move between their sites and their Salesforce org. This functionality is available in any site based an Experience Builder site template or Lightning Bolt solution. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To create permission sets: Manage Profiles and Permission Sets
To assign a permission set to a user: Assign Permission Sets
To let members see the App Launcher: Show App Launcher in Experience Builder sites
To create, customize, or publish an Experience Builder site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
![App Launcher in communities](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_applauncher.png) The App Launcher displays a tile for every app and published site (both Tabs + Visualforce and Experience Builder sites). Unlike in Lightning Experience, the All Items area and AppExchange link aren't available. Users see only the apps and sites that they’re authorized to see according to their profile or permission sets. The App Launcher is automatically enabled for new sites, but for older sites, you may need to enable it manually. 1. In Experience Builder, select the **Navigation Menu** component in the page you’re configuring. 2. To display the App Launcher in existing sites, ensure **Hide App Launcher in site header** is deselected. 3. To let users see the App Launcher, ensure the Show App Launcher in Experiences Builder sites permission is enabled in user profiles in Setup. By default, this user permission is enabled for all standard profiles but it’s not enabled for custom profiles. Enable this user perm on custom profiles or create a permission set. The App Launcher isn’t available in Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites. Members who use Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites and Salesforce Classic can use the global header to switch between their sites and their Salesforce org. #### See Also - [Switch Between Your Salesforce Org and Your Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_navigate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you use Experience Builder sites and Lightning Experience, use the App Launcher to switch back and forth between your Salesforce org and your Experience Cloud sites associated with it. If you use Tabs + Visualforce sites and Salesforce Classic, use the global header. You can embed a site URL directly into buttons or links. You can also redirect a user to another site or to a specific page within another site.") - [Enable the Global Header for Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_global_header.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site and Salesforce Classic, the global header lets you switch between your sites and your Salesforce org.") # Enable the Global Header for Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites In Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site and Salesforce Classic, the global header lets you switch between your sites and your Salesforce org. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create permission sets: Manage Profiles and Permission Sets
To assign a permission set to a user: Assign Permission Sets
Digital Experiences must be enabled in your Salesforce org to use the global header. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important The global header is visible only in Salesforce orgs using Salesforce Classic. Salesforce orgs using Lightning Experience can use the App Launcher to switch between the org and various experiences. ![Communities Global Header](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/header_after_callout.jpg) The View Global Header permission is disabled by default for all standard profiles. To view the global header, assign the View Global Header permission either by selecting it on standard profiles, creating custom profiles, or by creating a permission set. Create permission sets to easily assign this permission to specific people. 1. From Setup, enter Permission Sets in the Quick Find box, then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **New** and create a permission set that includes the System Permission View Global Header. 3. Assign the permission set to the appropriate users. Users with this permission set see the global header at the top of all pages. They can use the menu on the left to switch between their Salesforce Classic internal org and any experience they have access to. The **Your Name** menu on the right side contains links to edit contact information and log out. Internal users can also access Salesforce Help and links to Setup and other tools depending on user permissions and enabled features. In a Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site, users with either the Manage Experiences or the Create and Set Up Experiences permission see a gear icon (![Community management gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_gear_16x16.png)) they can use to switch to Experience Workspaces or Experience Management. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Within Experience Workspaces or Experience Management, users see the global header and the Community Management menu, even if they don’t have the View Global Header permission. However, we recommend that you still assign the View Global Header permission so users can switch between your Salesforce Classic internal org and experiences. ![Community Management menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_global_header_comm_mgmt_menu1.png) #### See Also - [Switch Between Your Salesforce Org and Your Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_navigate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you use Experience Builder sites and Lightning Experience, use the App Launcher to switch back and forth between your Salesforce org and your Experience Cloud sites associated with it. If you use Tabs + Visualforce sites and Salesforce Classic, use the global header. You can embed a site URL directly into buttons or links. You can also redirect a user to another site or to a specific page within another site.") - [Enable the App Launcher in Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_enable_app_launcher.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Display the App Launcher in Experience Builder Sites to make it easy for members to move between their sites and their Salesforce org. This functionality is available in any site based an Experience Builder site template or Lightning Bolt solution.") # Enable the Library Component Set up libraries to upload, share, and manage files. You need Salesforce administrator permissions to enable the Libraries component. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
User Permissions Needed
To enable the Libraries component: Customize Application
Go to **Libraries**, and select **My Libraries**, and click **New**. You can give your library a unique name and description in the New Library Wizard. ![the New Library Wizard.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/admin_files_new_library.png) # Enable Unlisted Chatter Groups Enable unlisted groups for your organization to help users collaborate more privately in Chatter. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To enable permission for profiles: Customize Application
Unlisted groups offer more privacy compared to private groups. Only group members and users with the Manage Unlisted Groups permission can access unlisted groups in list views, feeds, and search results. By default, unlisted groups aren’t enabled for your organization. Review the limitations of unlisted groups, before you enable this feature in your organization. 1. From Setup, enter Chatter in the Quick Find box, then select **Chatter Settings**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Select **Enable Unlisted Groups**. A message with important information appears, giving you more detail about enabling unlisted groups in your organization. 4. In the highlighted message, select the checkbox next to **I want to enable unlisted groups and understand that I may need to update Apex/Visualforce code in my organization**. 5. Click **Save**. Any user can create an unlisted group. Unlike private groups, users with the View All Data or Modify All Data permission can’t view or update unlisted groups unless they’re members. To allow non-members to view and modify unlisted groups, assign the Manage Unlisted Groups permission to them via their profile or permission set. #### See Also - [Unlisted Group Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_unlisted_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before you decide to enable unlisted groups in your organization, consider these limitations.") # Enable Upvotes and Downvotes Enable upvoting and downvoting in lieu of liking questions and answers in your Experience Cloud site. When you enable upvoting and downvoting, members see an **Upvote** option under a question or answer and a **Downvote** option on the question or answer’s overflow menu. The **Like** option goes away. Upvoting and downvoting are disabled by default in Experience Cloud sites created in Spring ’19 and later. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura and Visualforce sites
User Permissions Needed
To enable up and down voting: Create and Set Up Experiences
For sites created before the Winter ’18 release, it’s an easy task to enable up and down voting. ![Upvote and Downvote options on questions and answers](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_chatter_updown_vote.png) When you change to upvotes, pre-existing likes are included in the upvote count. Click the count to see a list of the people who have upvoted. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - No one is listed more than once, even if a person both liked and upvoted a question or answer. But each like and upvote is counted. For example, if someone both liked and upvoted a question, the count is 2, although their name is listed only once. If you prefer not to merge your like and upvote counts, contact Salesforce support. - On influence cards, upvotes count as likes received. Your own upvotes on your own posts or comments aren’t counted towards influence. Downvoting a post or comment doesn’t reduce the like count, unless a user is changing their own upvote to a downvote. - Members must be logged in to a site to use the upvote and downvote feature. 1. Go to Experience Workspaces and click **Administration** | **Preferences**. 2. Under Experience Management, select **Allow members to upvote and downvote**. 3. Click **Save**. # Enable WDC Thanks Recognition Badges are based on the WDC Thanks feature. Enable this feature plus the ability to restrict who can create badges before continuing in your setup. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To set up the Thanks feature: Customize Application
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You don’t need an extra WDC license to set up the Thanks feature. 1. In Classic, from Setup, enter WDC Settings in the **Quick Find** box. 2. Select **WDC Settings.** 3. Under **Thanks Setting**, select **Enable** and save. The Restrict Custom Badge Creators option is now available. 4. Under Restrict Custom Badge Creators, select **Enable**, and save. ![Settings page displaying WDC options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/wdc_settings.png) # Enabling More Features for Partner Relationship Management Enable more features for channel managers and sales partners. Channel managers can monitor channel business from the Channel Management Console, and access predesigned reports and dashboards for following partner activity. Channel managers can also train partners with the resources and content that drives growth for your business using Partner Enablement and In-App Guidance. Partners benefit from a slew of sales features that help them sell more efficiently. Considering enabling Einstein Lead Scoring, Einstein Opportunity Scoring, Contact Intelligence View, Lead Intelligence View, and Pipeline Inspection for partners. Plus, everyone can stay in touch easily using the PRM for Slack app.
Available for channel managers in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer Editions with Sales Cloud or Service Cloud. You must have at least one PRM add-on license.
Available for partners in supported Experience Cloud sites, accessed through Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer Editions with Sales Cloud or Service Cloud. A PRM add-on license is required for each partner user.
#### See Also - [Managing Channels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.salesforce_prm_channel_management_parent.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Partner Relationship Management Analytics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.salesforce_prm_analytics_parent.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Enabling and Guiding Your Partners](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.salesforce_prm_enablement.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Staying Productive as a Partner](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.salesforce_prm_partner_productivity_parent.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Collaborating With Partners Using PRM for Slack](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.prm_for_slack_parent.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Encrypt Experience Cloud Site Data You can add a measure of security to your Experience Cloud sites by encrypting files, attachments, and supported fields. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning with Spring ’17, Shield Platform Encryption no longer masks encrypted data in the presentation layer. This change can affect some users’ ability to work with encrypted data. If you have data you don’t want specific users to see, revisit their [field-level security settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_profiles_field_perms.htm&type=5&language=en_US), [organization-wide sharing defaults](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.security_sharing_owd_about.htm&type=5&language=en_US), and [object permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_profiles_object_perms.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Keep the following things in mind: - You can encrypt data in Experience Cloud sites, but not in legacy portals. - If you’re using Classic Encryption, data in encrypted custom fields is still masked. - Your site’s specific settings for personally identifiable information (PII) apply regardless of whether data is encrypted. - Data encryption doesn't change anything about the site user experience. However, encrypting the Account Name field affects how users' roles are displayed to admins. Normally, a site user’s role name is displayed as a combination of their account name and the name of their user profile. When you encrypt the Account Name field, the account ID is displayed instead of the account name. For example, when the Account Name field isn’t encrypted, a user belonging to the Acme account with the Customer User profile would have a role called Acme Customer User. When Account Name is encrypted, the role is displayed as something like 001D000000IRt53 Customer User. #### See Also - [Which Standard Fields Can I Encrypt?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_pe_standard_fields.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Strengthen Your Data's Security with Shield Platform Encryption](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_pe_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Encryption for Chatter Encryption for Chatter lets you encrypt sensitive data when it’s stored, and not just when it’s transmitted over a network. As of the Winter ’18 release, mass encryption and decryption of Chatter data is generally available. To enable encryption for Chatter, contact support for help with setting it up. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic, Lightning Experience, and the Salesforce mobile app

Available for an extra cost in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions. Requires purchasing Salesforce Shield.

Available in: Developer Edition at no charge for orgs created in Summer ’15 and later.

Encryption applies to all Chatter feeds. It lets your company comply confidently with privacy policies, regulatory requirements, and contractual obligations for handling Chatter data. Encrypted fields work normally throughout the Salesforce user interface, business processes, and APIs. (There are some exceptions; for example, encrypted fields can’t be filtered.) When you encrypt a field, existing values aren't encrypted immediately. Values are encrypted only after you interact with them, for example, you add or edit field content. Encrypted fields include: - Feed posts and comments - Feed questions and answers - Link labels and URLs - Feed polls and poll choices - Content from your custom Rich Publisher Apps ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If you participated in the pilot, turn encryption for Chatter off and on again to include new fields. Contact Salesforce for assistance with encrypting all previously created data. Enabling encryption for Chatter disables Einstein Spam Detection and exposes Chatter to the global limitations that come with encryption. # Engagement The Engagement component displays charts related to member engagement in the Chatter group. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). The Engagement component is visible only to internal users who have reporting permissions in orgs that have group engagement. External users can't see the component even with Enable report options for external users turned on. You can also choose to make the component visible only to group managers. 1. Select the **Engagement** component in the page that you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Group ID | The group’s ID. Typically, this field is populated when the page loads. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Screenshot of Engagement section on a group detail page. Includes feed, membership, and summary charts.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/engagement_component.png) # Enhanced List View Partners can better prioritize selling when they can see activity frequency metrics for their contacts, leads, and opportunities, and get insights on their deal health. Use the Enhanced List View component to give partners access to Contact Intelligence View, Lead Intelligence View, and Pipeline Inspection from their Experience Cloud sites. ### Required Editions
Available for partners in Experience Cloud Aura sites, accessed through Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions with Sales Cloud or Service Cloud. A PRM add-on license is required for each partner user.
User Permissions Needed
To customize an Experience Cloud site:

Create and Set Up Experiences AND Be a member of the site

OR

View Setup and Configuration AND Be a member of the site AND Be an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site

To give partners access to these features, you must also complete basic Contact Intelligence, Lead Intelligence, and Pipeline Inspection setup requirements. Requirements include assigning corresponding permission sets. Then, verify which steps you must complete based on when you create your site, the features you choose to enable, and the Experience Cloud template you’re using. Not all steps are required for all templates. 1. If the feature you want to enable isn’t preconfigured in your Experience Cloud template, create a page for it. We recommend creating a separate page for each Enhanced List View feature (Contact Intelligence View, Lead Intelligence View, Pipeline Inspection). Only one feature can be displayed per component, and the Enhanced List View component displays at full screen. 1. [Create a Standard Page with a flexible layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_create_page.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 2. From the Component menu, drag the **Enhanced List View** component to the page, and select it. 3. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Object | Select the object that corresponds with the feature you want to add to this page (Contacts, Leads, or Opportunities) | 2. If navigation for the feature you want to enable isn’t preconfigured in your Experience Cloud template, add the Enhanced List View page to the site’s navigation menu. From the Settings menu, click **Navigation** and [edit the navigation menu where you want partners to locate the page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_setup_nav_menu.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 3. Repeat steps 1–2 for each Enhanced List View feature (Contact Intelligence View, Lead Intelligence View, Pipeline Inspection) that you want to add a page for. 4. [Publish the changes to your site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_publish.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Enhanced List View component for Pipeline Inspection: ![Pipeline Inspection view of a partners opportunities, showing the activity metrics for an opportunity, including a high score, the days to close, and upcoming and recent activity.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/pi_activity_no_callouts.png) #### See Also - [Set Up Contact Intelligence View and Lead Intelligence View for Partners](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.salesforce_prm_setup_ci_li.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Set Up Pipeline Inspection for Partners](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.salesforce_prm_setup_pi.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Enterprise Knowledge in Experience Cloud Sites Provide a unified Self-Service experience by surfacing articles from both Salesforce and external repositories. Enterprise Knowledge standardizes content from multiple sources, making it possible for users to access a single source of truth within your Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost. To purchase, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Available in: Aura Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Available in: LWR Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Enterprise Knowledge eliminates the need for users to switch between different platforms or search tools. By harmonizing data in Data Cloud, your Experience Cloud site can show articles from: - Internal Repositories: Salesforce Knowledge (Knowledge Core). - External Repositories: SharePoint, Confluence, Google Drive, and other third-party systems. Regardless of the source, articles appear in a standardized format using a unified article rendering component. This ensures a consistent user experience for Experience Cloud site users, guest users, and internal agents. To support the transition to Enterprise Knowledge, the Experience Cloud site uses specific components designed for harmonized data: - EK Article Detail Page: A dedicated page template in Aura and LWR that hosts harmonized content. - Knowledge Summary: An AI-generated summary specifically for Enterprise Knowledge articles. Users see only AI-generated summaries, as there is no option for manual summary entry for EK articles. - Knowledge Dynamic Q&A: A component that invokes the Enterprise Knowledge API to provide real-time answers based on the current and related articles. To make sure that search results and citations function correctly, you must use only Enterprise Knowledge Harmonized Data Model Objects (DMOs). - Smart Search Assistance: The agent uses these harmonized objects as a data source to generate summaries and citations. - Citation Highlighting: When a user clicks a citation, the site goes to the harmonized article and highlights the specific text chunk that the AI response was grounded on. Because Enterprise Knowledge relies on Data Cloud, security is governed by the user context: - Data Cloud Governance: Salesforce admins must create data governance policies to grant site users access to the harmonized Data Model Objects. - Guest User Access: Rendering EK articles for unauthenticated guest users requires specific configuration in Default External Access to ensure external content is visible without a login wall. # Error Messages for Pages Without Data in Experience Builder When you use Lightning components to build a template-based page in Experience Builder, sometimes the page doesn’t load correctly on your site. Find out why this error happens, and how you can fix it. Make sure that the component has underlying data. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
![Error message stating that page can't be loaded.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_no_data_error.png) An error occurs on site pages in one of the following three instances: - The page has no components - The page has one or more components, and one or more have no underlying data - Your org has SEO-friendly URLs enabled, but there’s no URL slug specified for the object type You see this error when components rely on dynamic data, and they don’t find any underlying data to draw upon. For example, a Group component that doesn’t find a group ID, or a record that can’t find a record ID would both give you an error. ![Error message for dynamic data](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_missing_dynamic_data.png) Why do I see this error? In most situations, the page is trying to draw information when information doesn’t exist. Let’s say you make a record detail page for the Account object. If you don’t have any accounts set up in Salesforce, you see an error. Or let’s say you set up a group detail page, but your new site doesn’t have any groups. Once again, you see an error. To fix the errors that involve SEO-friendly URLs, add a URL slug to the object that you’re referencing in the component. That way, the component loads the correct data. You can add the URL slug programmatically, such as using Apex, on the `ObjectRelatedUrl` object. Any gotchas? The Customer Service template uses topics to organize content in a site. To see topic detail pages, first set up [Navigational Topics in Site Management](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/HTViewHelpDoc?id=networks_topics_navigational.htm&language=en_US). The following default pages in the Customer Service template can show this error. Here are some tips on how to fix it. - Article Detail: Create at least one Salesforce Knowledge article in your org. - Topic Detail: Create a Navigational Topic. - Question Detail: Create a Navigational Topic. Use the Ask a Question button to create a question. - Feed Detail: Use the Post Publisher or Ask a Question button to create a post or question. - Group Detail: Create a group in the site. # Experience Builder Settings Use the Settings area to track which template you’re using, view your site’s status and publication history, and customize your template. If you’re using the Customer Service template, access your navigational and featured topic settings. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To access the Settings area in Experience Builder, click ![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings.png) on the left sidebar. Not all settings are available for all sites. ![Experience Builder Settings, showing the General tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/experience_builder_settings_general.png) General In the General area, settings include: Template Shows the name and version of the template that your site uses. Public Access Specifies the level of access to the page. When you enable public access, guest users can view asset files on public pages by default. However, users whose profile settings are more restrictive can’t always view this page, even if you choose Public. When you enable public access, the preference **Let guest users view asset files on public pages** in **Administration** | **Preferences** is automatically enabled. Site Title (Aura sites only) Lets you set the title for your site. The title briefly appears in the browser’s title bar before your site’s Home page loads. Published Status Indicates whether your site is published. If it’s published, click the link to open the live site in a separate browser tab. Preferred Domain Lets you choose which domain to use for indexing your site’s pages to improve search engine results. (Multiple domains for the same site can dilute search engine results and lower page ranking.) The Preferred Domain dropdown appears only after you set up a [custom domain](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.domain_mgmt.htm&type=5&language=en_US) for your site in Setup. You can set only HTTPS preferred domains. Guest User Profile Shows the associated guest user profile. When you click the link, you go to the Profile page in Salesforce Setup, where you can modify profile settings, such as which permissions the guest user has. For more information about configuring the guest user profile, see [Give Secure Access to Unauthenticated Users with the Guest User Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_public_access.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Set Featured and Navigational Topics (Customer Service template only) [Define featured topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_featured.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Featured topics highlight current, popular conversations in your Experience Cloud site. Change them regularly to keep members up-to-date and engaged.") and [topics to be used for navigation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_navigational.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Structure your Experience Cloud site’s content and help your users find what they need with navigational topics. If your org uses data categories, community managers can link current Salesforce Knowledge articles associated with those categories to each navigational topic. If data categories aren’t enabled, administrators can add articles to each topic using Connect REST API.") in Experience Workspaces or Experience Management. Theme In the Theme area, you can [control the layout and appearance](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_theme.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Theme layouts and theme layout components combine to give you granular control of the appearance and structure of each page in your site. Customize the layout’s header and footer to match your company’s style. Configure theme layout properties. Or use a custom search bar and user profile menu. Then use theme layouts to assign theme layout components to individual pages allowing you to quickly change layouts from one central location. Whether you’re a consulting partner or an ISV, or you simply want to revamp your own site, custom theme layouts make it easy to rebrand.") of each page in your site. Languages In the Languages area, set the multilingual properties for your site. When you set these properties, the [Language Selector](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_language_picker.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add the Language Selector component to multilingual sites so guest users can select their preferred language on public site pages.") component uses them to let guest users select their preferred language on a page in your site. Navigation In the Navigation area, create and manage navigational menus for your site. You can use menus in Navigation, Tile Menu, Profile, and custom menu components. Mobile Publisher Configure navigation options and settings for your Mobile Publisher app. SEO (Aura sites only) In the SEO area, you can define what information can be indexed by external services and discovered through online searches. From the Guest User Profile, make an object’s records public and available for SEO indexing. You can also [generate a manual sitemap refresh](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=networks_manual_SEO_sitemap.htm&type=5&language=en_US) for your site. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To access SEO settings in Experience Builder, enable public access for your site from the General area in Settings. Search (enhanced LWR sites only) In the Search area, you can rebuild the index after you publish fresh content in your site or in the connected CMS workspace. Your site visitors can then see your new content in their search results. This feature is available only after [you set up a standard Search page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_search_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In enhanced LWR sites, visitors can search for CMS content published from enhanced CMS workspaces. Visitors can also search for content within the Rich Content Editor and HTML Editor components, as well as within page title metadata. Use the Search Bar and Results Layout components to add the search functionality to your enhanced LWR site."). CMS Connect (Aura sites only) [Add a header and footer from a connected CMS source](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/communities_dev_cms_headerfooter.htm) to your site. Advanced In the Advanced area, you can [track page views, mask IP addresses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_google_id.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add your Google Analytics™ tracking ID to track page views. Enable access to your Salesforce data for deeper insights. Then, adjust your pages to more accurately reach your customers."), [add markup to the page head](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_head.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add custom analytics, improve your SEO results, and more by adding custom markup to the page in Experience Builder. For example, you can include SEO meta tags that are visible only to search engines, add a favicon, or add custom code for Adobe Analytics and Google Tag Manager."), and show all components in the Components panel. By default, we filter the components available in the Components panel according to each page’s purpose. For example, the Case Comments Publisher is available only for the Case Details page. When you enable **Show all components**, you see the complete list of components when you open the Components panel for any page except login pages. (For limitations in enhanced LWR sites, see [LWR Template Limitations](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/template_limitations.htm).) However, you can still add the Related Questions List component only to the Question Detail page and the Related Articles List component only to the Article Detail page. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Some components require the page to pass specific parameters. When you remove component filtering, you can add a component that relies on a passed parameter to a page that doesn’t pass any values. For the component to work correctly, you must manually configure the component’s parameters. For example, some components that take `{!recordId}` as a parameter expect to get this value from the page’s URL. If you add the component to a page that doesn't pass this value through the URL, you must manually provide it. Similarly, let’s say you add the Group Detail component, which requires a `{!recordId}` value, to the Case Detail page instead of the Group Detail page. Although both pages pass a `{!recordId}` value, the ID that Case Detail passes is incorrect. Integrations (LWR sites only) Add functionality such as Google Analytics to your site. Security & Privacy Manage security and privacy settings for your Experience Cloud site, including [Clickjack protection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_clickjack_protection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Clickjacking is a type of attack that tricks users into clicking something, such as a button or link, because they perceive it to be safe. By creating hidden iframes pointing to your Experience Cloud site pages, hackers can entice users to click an element that appears to be on a different web page. But instead of the visible element handling the click, the click is hijacked and some element of the invisible site iframe on top receives it. Clickjacking can potentially lead to data intrusion, unauthorized emails, changed credentials, or other malicious site-specific results. With clickjack protection, however, you can secure your site by controlling whether browsers allow frames pointing to your pages."), [Content Security Policy (CSP)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_security_csp_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Builder sites use Content Security Policy (CSP) and Lightning Locker to secure your site from malicious attacks and custom code vulnerabilities. CSP is a W3C standard that controls the source of content that can be loaded on your site’s pages and helps protect against cross-site scripting (XSS) attacks. Lightning Locker is a Salesforce architectural layer that allows third-party Lightning components and custom code to run safely on the same page in the browser. With different levels of security, you can optimize your site security choices and tolerance for risk."), and [site cookie usage](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_cookies.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Cloud uses cookies to improve functionality and accelerate processing times. By saving a user’s settings, cookies can enhance the user’s experience and the performance of the Experience Cloud site."). Updates In the Updates area, you can update your site’s template to the latest version. Developer (Aura sites only) In the Developer area, you can export customized Experience Builder templates and pages. You can add these templates and pages to a Lightning Bolt Solution to distribute to other orgs or publish on AppExchange. Change History The Change History area shows a chronological list of publication dates for your site. When you publish a site and enter a summary of the site changes in the publication confirmation window, that summary appears here. The panel also shows any changes made to the configuration of domains that are associated with your site and identifies which user made each update. # Experience Builder Site Limitations Be aware of the limitations that apply to Experience Builder sites such as Customer Service and Partner Central. ## General Limitations - Lookup fields aren’t supported for custom objects or in Experience Builder sites created before Spring ’16. - When Experience Builder site users save an opportunity, they’re not prompted to add products, even when the **Prompt users to add products to opportunities** setting is enabled. Only users in sites built with Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce are prompted to add products. - In multilingual sites, the login page for the site appears in the default language. To create login pages in other languages, use custom Visualforce pages. - Google reCAPTCHA only works when access to Google web traffic is allowed. Causes for these disruptions vary, and can include network outages or government-mandated blocks. If a large percentage of your site is blocked from Google web traffic, consider requiring users to log in to post to the site. - The Create New option for lookups isn’t supported in Customer Service sites. Also, only authenticated external users (not guest users) can access asset lookup fields. - For guest users, case validation doesn’t run when cases are submitted through the Contact Support component. Validation runs after the submission is processed in the queue. Salesforce recommends writing custom client-side validation or writing custom Apex before inserting triggers to sanitize the case content. - Customer users can’t be added to account teams. ## Partner Sites - Partner Central doesn’t support the language selector. - To protect your sales data, we disable guest user access for the navigation menu in Partner Central by default. - Partner Central doesn’t provide default self-service customer support features, such as navigational topics, articles, and the search publisher. To extend support to your partners, consider exposing cases in your community and creating a quick action button for creating cases. - You can’t export sites built on Partner Central as Lightning Bolt solutions. You can export individual pages, but not the entire site. ## Browser Limitations ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Customers accessing your Experience Builder sites from unsupported browsers receive a warning that site features may not work as intended and are directed to use a different or updated browser for the best experience. They can still choose, after the warning, to use the site with their current browser and reduced effectiveness, if they want. For the list of Salesforce supported browsers, see [Supported Browsers for Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_communities_browser_support.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Browser support for Experience Cloud sites varies by the device that you access the site from and the site template."). - Mobile devices using the BlackBerry or Microsoft Windows operating systems aren’t supported. - Mobile users who perform the pinch-zoom gesture on Experience Cloud site preview images zoom into the center of the image, and not a specific area of the preview image. - Internet Explorer versions before 11 aren’t supported. We’ve created a page that automatically lets your users know that they must either upgrade or use a newer browser. You can also redirect to your own page that informs users that those browsers aren’t supported. Create a file such as ieRedirect.js, and include this code in the file. ``` if (window.attachEvent && !window.addEventListener) { window.location = ''; } ``` Then link to the redirect file in the head markup of the site. In Experience Builder, click **![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings.png)** | **Advanced**, click **Edit Head Markup**, and add this code. ``` ``` - Only the latest versions of Chrome, Firefox, and Safari (on Mac operating systems) are supported. ## LWR Site Limitations An LWR site supports up to 500 routes, or unique URLs. For best performance, keep the number of routes below 250. Dynamic content can help keep your number of routes lower. For example, don’t create an individual page with a unique route for each content item. Instead, use record details to represent your content, and then create a single page that shows record details and requires only one route. # Experience Cloud Salesforce Experience Cloud lets you create branded digital experiences to share information and collaborate with people who are key to your business processes, such as customers, partners, or employees. Whether you call it a portal, help forum, support community, or something else, an Experience Cloud site is a great place to connect with the important folks in your life. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
You can create multiple sites within your organization for different purposes and transition seamlessly between them. For example, you can use Experience Cloud sites to: - Drive more sales by connecting your employees with your distributors, resellers, and suppliers - Deliver world-class service by giving your customers one place to get answers - Promote an upcoming event and manage social listening, content, engagement, and workflows all in one place Learn more about the versatile ways that you can use Experience Cloud in the video. - **[Understand the Basics of Experience Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Discover how Experience Cloud helps you create digital experiences and branded spaces for your employees, customers, and partners. You can build sites, portals, and forums with the level of customization that you want using little or no code. Or, if you’re comfortable using code, you can build them programmatically. - **[Plan and Prepare for Your Experience Cloud Implementation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Cloud comprises flexible, powerful features that you can combine in multiple ways to deliver the digital experience you need, whether it’s a portal, help center, or mobile app. And although it can be tempting to dive right into building, we recommend taking time to think about the combination of features you need to deliver a productive, successful site. We can’t cover every planning aspect, but these topics describe some key areas to consider, research, and incorporate as you develop your overall plan. - **[Set Up and Configure Your Org for Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_setup_maintain_communities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before setting up your first Experience Cloud site, complete a few tasks in Salesforce Setup to prepare your org for customer- and partner-facing sites. From enabling digital experiences to selecting the correct org settings, we’ve got you covered! The steps you take when preparing your org for Experience Cloud sites are the same you take when setting up sites for Commerce Cloud, Financial Services Cloud, Health Cloud, and Work.com. - **[Manage Users and Data Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_users_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** One of the most important administrative tasks is setting up and maintaining your users. Salesforce provides a variety of features and tools that help you ensure that your Experience Cloud partner, customer, and guest users have the right access to data. - **[Build and Customize Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_build.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Choose from several preconfigured templates to create your site. Then customize the site to suit your needs and match your brand. - **[Agentforce for Experience Builder (Beta) Is Discontinued](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_agent_exp_builder.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Experience Builder Agent, previously announced as a beta feature for enhanced LWR sites, is discontinued as of Winter ’27. If you created an Experience Builder Agent during the beta, you can no longer use it. The Agentforce panel is no longer available in Experience Builder. - **[Create Use-Case Driven Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_use_cases.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Whether you're creating a site for self-service or one for partner vendors, Experience Cloud has the solution to fit your needs. - **[Secure Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can help keep your Experience Cloud site more secure by enabling clickjack protection, authenticating users, encrypting data, and protecting against malicious resources and vulnerabilities in components using CSP and Lightning Locker. These options allow you to maintain the security of your site while still using the external sources you need. In addition, you can use various settings and permissions to protect your data and your customers’ data, and publicly share the site with guest users. - **[Deploy an Experience Cloud Site from Sandbox to Production](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_migrate_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We recommend creating, customizing, and testing your Experience Cloud site in a test environment, such as a sandbox, before deploying it to your production org. When testing is complete, you can use change sets or Metadata API to migrate your site from one org to another. Deciding whether to use change sets or MD API depends on several factors. Some things to consider are the complexity of the changes that you’re migrating, your level of comfort with developer tools, and the application lifecycle management (ALM) model that you’re using. - **[Manage Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_community_management_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Administer, manage, and moderate your Experience Cloud site from Experience Workspaces. - **[Use Reporting in Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reporting_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use reporting to see short-term and long-term trends in various areas of your Experience Cloud site. The preconfigured AppExchange package makes reporting a snap for community managers. You can also give the power of reporting to your members. - **[Experience Cloud Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep the following considerations in mind when creating sites with Experience Cloud. # Experience Cloud and Integrating with Journey Builder Journey Builder in Marketing Cloud Engagement helps you create personalized journeys for your site based on triggering events or geared for specific audiences. Greet new users with rich content emails, send reminders to users who need profile pics, or schedule follow-up emails for users who log a case. To use this feature, you must have both Experience Cloud and Marketing Cloud Engagement licenses.
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). This feature passes member information, including email addresses, from the Experience Cloud to Engagement. Trigger a personalized journey with events, or choose a specific audience. Examples of events include: - User joins a site - Case creation - User buys a product (depending on configuration) - New Chatter group membership - New Chatter post creation - Chatter question and answer activity - Create or update any custom object and most standard objects Examples of audiences include: - All users of the site - Users who own a certain product (depending on configuration) - Users with the highest number of reputation points - Users who belong to the same Chatter group - Users who haven’t contributed in the last number of days The two clouds integrate through Marketing Cloud Connect (available on AppExchange). When it’s set up, you’re ready to go. The process and email creation is all handled in Journey Builder. The See Also links guide you to those steps. A few things to do and consider before you get started: - Make sure that the Engagement app is set up and you have at least one site. - Install the Marketing Cloud Connect package. - Decide whether to use contact or user data. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Adding users to a community is slower when triggering journeys. If you’re adding lots of new users, like more than 1,000, at once, we suggest letting Journey Builder run overnight. - **[Experience Cloud Journey Data Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_jb_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you create an Experience Cloud journey, you choose whether to add user or contact data. To avoid unintentionally sending emails to people who have opted out, you must stay consistent. There are also some event trigger and tracking limitations. - **[Email Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_jb_email_pref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Unsubscribe link at the bottom of a Marketing Cloud Engagement email opts the person out of all further emails from that instance of Engagement. If you want users to be able to unsubscribe from site emails without unsubscribing from other brand or company emails, some setup is required. - **[Triggering Journeys Based on Events](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_jb_event_triggers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can trigger journeys based on an event that happens in the site, like when members join. - **[Triggering Journeys Based on Audiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_jb_audience_triggers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can select a set of users—an audience—and put them into a journey. Your audience can be specific and include, say, a user who purchased a certain product and posted within the last 30 days. - **[Determine If an Object Can Trigger Journeys](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_jb_usable_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you create an event-based journey, check that the object you want to use works. This test helps you identify available objects. - **[Sync an Object to the Marketing Cloud Engagement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_jb_sync_object.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To create an audience-based journey, sync object data to Marketing Cloud Engagement. - **[Experience Cloud Objects for Creating Member Journeys](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_jb_objects_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Most, but not all, Experience Cloud objects can be used for creating journeys. This list includes the available objects along with a description, their eligibility status, API object, and use cases (as appropriate). #### See Also - [Connect the Clouds](https://help.marketingcloud.com/en/documentation/integrated_products__crm_and_web_analytic_solutions/marketing_cloud_connector_v5/connecting_the_clouds/) - [Journey Builder](https://help.marketingcloud.com/en/documentation/journey_builder/) - [Get Started With Journey Builder](https://help.marketingcloud.com/en/documentation/journey_builder/getting_started_with_journey_builder/) # Experience Cloud Considerations Keep the following considerations in mind when creating sites with Experience Cloud. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
- **[How Experience Cloud Uses Lightning](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lightning_in_communities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There’s lots of Lightning striking Salesforce these days and it can be tricky to know how it all works together. Here's the rundown. - **[Experience Builder Site Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Be aware of the limitations that apply to Experience Builder sites such as Customer Service and Partner Central. - **[Experience Cloud Sites Usage Allocation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_usage_allocation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Cloud site usage is governed by daily, monthly, and yearly allocations. Understanding these allocations is important to the success of your sites. Salesforce provides tools to help you monitor site usage so that you can avoid exceeding these allocations, or purchasing overages when needed. - **[Hide Unneeded Visualforce Pages on Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_configure_vf_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To avoid exposing pages that don’t reflect your brand or that allow for alternative ways to log in to your site, be aware of these guidelines when configuring Visualforce pages that are part of your Experience Cloud site. Understand the relationship between Experience Cloud sites and Salesforce Sites, their public Visualforce pages, and steps to take for a proper configuration. - **[Additional Experience Cloud Site Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_additional_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here are a few limitations when using features in Experience Cloud sites. # Experience Cloud Cookies Experience Cloud uses cookies to improve functionality and accelerate processing times. By saving a user’s settings, cookies can enhance the user’s experience and the performance of the Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Salesforce doesn’t currently provide functionality for end-user cookie consent management. The platform is compatible with many existing third-party solutions. We recommend that you work with your internal IT teams or consult your implementation partners to identify the right solution for your organization’s needs. Cookies are divided into required, functional, and marketing. Functional cookies include preferences and statistics. - Required: Strictly necessary to browse the website and to use its features. - Functional: Preferences: Used by the website to remember choices made previously. Language settings are an example of a preference type cookie. - Functional: Statistics: Used to collect information about how a website is used, including links clicked and which pages users visited. - Marketing: Used to track online activity for a more personalized experience, including relevant advertisement. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - Experience Cloud can run without the use of functional cookies; however, site functionality can be reduced. The impact on functionality depends on the purpose of the blocked cookie. - Experience Cloud cookies are limited to LWR and Aura sites. - Experience Cloud doesn't use any marketing cookies. - Any cookie with an `LSKEY-c$` prefix is the same as the original cookie, but it is set if the site has Locker Service enabled. It must be a separate cookie since Locker Service restricts how cookies are read on the client side. This table describes the Experience Cloud cookies collected by Salesforce. Cookies for All Users (Authenticated and Unauthenticated) | Cookie Name | Duration | Cookie Type | Description | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | `__Secure-has-sid` | Session | Required | Detects a user’s login state on the client side. Set during login to Aura or LWR Experience. Never set this cookie to HttpOnly. | | `_ga` | 2 Years | Required | A third-party cookie that’s used if the site admin chooses to track site users with a Google Analytics tracking ID. | | `{UserId}_KMPage` | 1 Day | Functional: Preferences | In Salesforce Classic, used to read the last user selection for 'Find in View', 'Article Language', {DataCategory}, and 'Validation Status' in Article Management. | | `{UserId}_KnowledgePageDispatcher` | Session | Functional: Preferences | In Salesforce Classic, used to remember the user selection to determine whether to show 'Articles' or 'My Drafts' view in Knowledge. | | `{UserId}_KnowledgePageFilter{DataCategory}` | Session | Functional: Preferences | In Salesforce Classic, used to remember the last user selection for the data category filter in Knowledge. | | `{UserId}_KnowledgePageFilterArticleArticleType` | Session | Functional: Preferences | In Salesforce Classic, used to remember the last user selection for the article type filter for 'Articles' view in Knowledge. | | `{UserId}_KnowledgePageFilterArticlePublishStatus` | Session | Functional: Preferences | In Salesforce Classic, used to remember the last user selection for the publish status filter for 'Articles' view in Knowledge. | | `{UserId}_KnowledgePageFilterArticleValidationStatus` | Session | Functional: Preferences | In Salesforce Classic, used to remember the last user selection for the validation status filter for 'Articles' view in Knowledge. | | `{UserId}_KnowledgePageFilterLanguage` | Session | Functional: Preferences | In Salesforce Classic, used to remember the last user selection for the language filter in Knowledge. | | `{UserId}_KnowledgePageFilterMyDraftArticleType` | Session | Functional: Preferences | In Salesforce Classic, used to remember the last user selection for the article type filter for 'My Drafts' view in Knowledge. | | `{UserId}_KnowledgePageFilterMyDraftPublishStatus` | Session | Functional: Preferences | In Salesforce Classic, used to remember the last user selection for publish status filter for 'My Drafts' view in Knowledge. | | `{UserId}_KnowledgePageFilterMyDraftValidationStatus` | Session | Functional: Preferences | In Salesforce Classic, used to remember the last user selection for the validation status filter for 'My Drafts' view in Knowledge. | | `{UserId}_KnowledgePageSortFieldArticle` | Session | Functional: Preferences | In Salesforce Classic, used to remember the last user selection for 'Sort by' for the 'Articles' view in Knowledge. | | `{UserId}_KnowledgePageSortFieldMyDraft` | Session | Functional: Preferences | In Salesforce Classic, used to remember the last user selection for 'Sort by' for 'My Drafts' view in Knowledge. | | `{UserId}_spring_KmMlAnyoneDraftArticlesList` | 1 Day | Required | In Salesforce Classic, used to configure layout properties for the Draft Articles view in Article Management. | | `{UserId}_spring_KmMlArchivedArticlesList` | 1 Day | Required | In Salesforce Classic, used to configure layout properties for 'Archived Articles' in Article Management. | | `{UserId}_spring_KmMlMyDraftArticlesList` | 1 Day | Required | In Salesforce Classic, used to configure layout properties for 'Draft Articles' assigned to 'Me' in Article Management. | | `{UserId}_spring_KmMlMyDraftTranslationsList` | 1 Day | Required | In Salesforce Classic, used to configure layout properties for 'Draft Translations' in Article Management. | | `{UserId}_spring_KmMlPublishedArticlesList` | 1 Day | Required | In Salesforce Classic, used to configure layout properties for 'Published Articles' in Article Management. | | `{UserId}_spring_KmMlPublishedTranslationsList` | 1 Day | Required | In Salesforce Classic, used to configure layout properties for 'Published Translations' in Article Management. | | `_sid` | Session | Required | Identifies a Live Agent session. Stores a unique pseudonymous ID for a specific browser session over chat service. | | `expid_[site prefix]` | 30 Days | Functional: Statistics | Used to render pages based on specified brand. | | `52609e00b7ee307e` | Session | Required | Browser Fingerprint cookie. Used to detect session security problems. | | `79eb100099b9a8bf` | Session | Required | Browser Fingerprint trigger cookie. Used to detect session security problems. | | `activeView` | Session | Functional: Preferences | In Salesforce Classic, used to remember the last user selection for 'Articles' or 'Translations' tab in Article Management. | | `AgentConsoleFE` | Session | Functional: Preferences | In Salesforce Classic, used to remember the page style of the Agent Console. | | `AgentConsoleS` | Session | Functional: Preferences | In Salesforce Classic, used to remember the page style of the Agent Console. | | `AgentConsoleY` | Session | Functional: Preferences | In Salesforce Classic, used to remember the page style of the Agent Console. | | `AgentConsoleX` | Session | Functional: Preferences | In Salesforce Classic, used to remember the page style of the Agent Console. | | `alohaEpt` | 90 Seconds | Functional: Statistics | Used to calculate the `ExperiencePageTime` on Salesforce Classic pages. | | `apex__EmailAddress` | 1 Year | Required | Caches contact IDs associated with email addresses. | | `auraBrokenDefGraph` | 1 Week | Functional: Statistics | Used to track when a Lightning page has malformed HTML. | | `autocomplete` | 60 Days | Functional: Preferences | Determines if the login page remembers the user's username. | | `BAYEAX_BROWSER` | Expired on Creation | Required | Identify a unique browser subscribed to CometD streaming channels. | | `BrowserId` | 1 Year | Required | Used for security protections. Rendered on a subset of Salesforce domains, including .salesforce.com, .force.com, and the domains for Salesforce login pages, Lightning pages, and Experience Cloud sites. | | `calViewState` | Session | Functional: Statistics | Sets the inline calendar date state in Salesforce Classic (current week selected). | | `caPanelState` | Session | Functional: Preferences | Saves the open, closed, and height percent states of the calendar panel. | | `clientSrc` | Session | Required | Used for security protections. | | `communityId` | Session | Required | Cookie set to tie the ideas to a specific Experience Cloud site. | | `CookieConsent` | 1 Year | Required | Used to apply end-user cookie consent preferences. Stores a Boolean for whether user has consented to the cookie policy options offered by the site. Without this cookie, customers would not be able collect consent from their end users. | | `CookieConsentPolicy` | 1 Year | Required | Used to apply end-user cookie consent preferences set by our client-side utility. | | `cookieSettingVerified` | Session | Required | Used to create a popup message telling users that cookies are required. | | `cordovaVersion` | Session | Required | Used for internal diagnostics with mobile applications. | | `cqcid` | 1 Year | Functional: Statistics | Used to track a guest shopper's browsing activity. | | `csssid` | Session | Required | Used to establish a request context in the correct tenant org. | | `csssid_Client` | Session | Required | Enables user switching. | | `devOverrideCsrfToken` | Session | Required | CSRF Token. | | `dialpadShown` | Session | Required | Used in essential Open CTI functionality to determine the dial pad focus. | | `disco` | Session | Required | Tracks the last user login and active session for bypassing login (For example, OAuth immediate flow). | | `FedAuth` | Session | Required | For the SharePoint connector, used to authenticate to the top-level site in SharePoint. | | `force-proxy-stream` | 3 Hours | Required | Ensures that client requests hit the same proxy hosts and are more likely to retrieve content from cache. | | `force-stream` | 180 Minutes | Required | Used to redirect server requests for sticky sessions. | | `gTalkCollapsed` | 1 Year | Required | Controls whether the sidebar in Salesforce Classic is open or not for a user. | | `hideDevelopmentTools` | Session | Functional: Preferences | Used to determine whether to show the developer tools. | | `hideFilesWarningModal` | 50 Years | Functional: Preferences | Stores the user acknowledgment that a public link to a Salesforce file is on email send. The warning window isn't continually shown after the user acknowledges this action. | | `hideIdentityDialog` | 1 Year | Functional: Preferences | Hides the dialog box that informs that the current user is logged out when switching to another user. | | `idccsrf` | Session | Required | Tracks `CrossSiteRequestForgery` validation for certain SSO flows. | | `ideaToggle` | Session | Functional: Preferences | Show the 'Ideas' list view or the 'Feed' list view. | | `inst` | Session | Required | Used to redirect requests to an instance when bookmarks and hardcoded URLs send requests to a different instance. This type of redirect can happen after an org migration, a split, or after any URL update. | | `iotcontextsplashdisable` | 10 Years | Functional: Preferences | For the IoT product, stores user preference of whether to show Context Splash popup. | | `language` | Session | Required | Identifies the language for custom components, surveys, and flows, which support multiple languages. Without this cookie, translations for custom features can appear incorrectly. | | `lastActivePage` | Session | Required | Used in essential Open CTI functionality, such as determining if CTI should screen pop the current call object. | | `lastCallObjectId` | Session | Required | Used in essential Open CTI functionality, such as determining if CTI should screen pop the current call object. | | `lastlist` | Session | Required | Used to store the cookie name for the last list URL. | | `liveagent_invite_rejected_` | Session | Functional: Statistics | Instructs Live Agent not to reissue an invitation on the same domain. Deletion of this cookie degrades customer experience as they can get repeated invitations. | | `liveagent_sid` | Session | Required | Identifies a Live Agent session. Stores a unique pseudonymous ID for a specific browser session over chat service. | | `lloopch_loid` | 1 Year | Required | Determines whether to send the user to a specific portal login or an app login. | | `login` | 60 Days | Functional: Preferences | If the user’s session has expired, used to fetch the username and populate it on the main login page when using the process builder app. | | `logouturl` | Session | Functional: Preferences | Stores the last logged in org for redirecting requests. Used for logging whether the cookie is present in site and community guest-user requests. | | `oid` | 1 Year | Required | Stores the last logged in org for redirecting requests. Used for logging whether the cookie is present in site and community guest-user requests. | | `oinfo` | 3 Months | Functional: Statistics | Tracks the last logged in org. | | `pctrk` | 1 Year | Required | Used to count unique page views by unauthenticated (guest) users in Experience Cloud sites against a Customer's billing entitlements. | | `pc-unit` | 1 Year | Functional: Preferences | Sets a preference for displaying platform cache units to either MB or KB. | | `PicassoLanguage` | Session | Required | Used to store a user’s language selection for this Experience Builder site. The site doesn’t load without this cookie if the user changes the site’s language. | | `PicassoViewMode` | Session | Functional: Preferences | Stores a user’s view mode selection for this Experience Builder site. | | `PreferredLanguage<18-char SiteID>` for example, `PreferredLanguage0DMxx0000004C93GAE` | 1 Year | Functional: Preferences | Used to store the user language preference for language detection and localized user experience in LWR sites. Used to store the user language preference for language detection and localized user experience in LWR sites. | | `promptTestMod` | 30 Days | Required | Stores whether test mode is in effect. This cookie is read-only. | | `redirectionWarning` | 1 Year | Functional: Preferences | Enables the customer to store URLs that are exempt from setting a redirect warning interstitial page on an allowlist. | | `rememberUn` | 60 Days | Functional: Preferences | Track the Remember Me checkbox that the user selected to enable login hint. | | `renderCtx` | Session | Required | Used to store site parameters in the session for reuse across requests by a single client for functionality and performance reasons. Metadata required for fetching site pages and components based on `pageId`, `schema`, `viewType`, `brandingSet`, `formFactor`, and audience targeting. | | `RRetURL` | Session | Required | Used with 'Log in As' to restore the original state. | | `RRetURL2` | Session | Required | The return URL to redirect to when logging out of a session. | | `RSID` | Session | Required | Session ID and login-as session ID. In this case the cookies are copied to the response and cause the target URL to rebuild appropriately in a proxy situation. The cookies aren't created, examined, or modified. | | `rsid2` | Session | Required | Stores the encrypted original session ID when switching to a site while switched in as an internal user. | | `schgtclose` | 0 | Functional: Statistics | Deprecated feature, not used. | | `sfdc_lv2` | 1 Year | Required | Stores identity confirmation details for Experience Cloud users. If the cookie isn't set or it expires, users must repeat the identity confirmation process the next time that they log in. Identity confirmation requires a verification method such as SMS, an authenticator app, or a security key. | | `sfdc-stream` | 3 hours | Required | Used to maintain a sticky (persistent) session on the salesforce.com domain. Makes sure that subsequent streaming requests are forwarded to the same server instance where the streaming subscription request was originally handled. | | `showNewBuilderWarningMessage` | 100 years | Functional: Preferences | Used to show or hide a warning message for the new dashboard builder. | | `sid` | Session | Required | SessionID. | | `sid_Client` | Session | Required | Used to detect and prevent session tampering. | | `sidebarPinned` | 10 Years | Required | Controls the state of the Salesforce Classic sidebar. | | `sitePreview` | Session | Required | Stores the authentication code for previewing the site. Preview mode doesn’t load without this cookie. | | `ssostartpage` | 1 Year | Required | Identifies the Identity Provider (IdP) location for SSO; certain service provider initiated SSO requests can fail without this cookie. | | `SUCSP` | Session | Required | Used when the user identity that an administrator is assuming (via Log in to Experience as User) is a Customer Success Portal (CSP) user. | | `SUPRM` | Session | Required | Used when the user identity that an administrator is assuming (via Log in to Experience as) is a Partner Relationship Management (PRM) portal user. | | `t` | Expired on Creation | Functional: Statistics | Used to avoid duplicate access checks. | | `useStandbyUrl` | Not Set | Required | Controls how quickly to set the standby URL when loading the softphone. | | `waveUserPrefFinderLeftNav` | 100 Years | Functional: Preferences | Preference for left navigation UI in CRM Analytics. | | `waveUserPrefFinderListView` | 100 Years | Functional: Preferences | Preference for displaying list views in CRM Analytics. | | `webact` | 1 Year | Functional: Statistics | Used to collect metrics per page view for personalization. | | `WelcomePanel` | 1 Day | Functional: Preferences | Stores Experience Cloud preferences. | # Experience Cloud Glossary Here are definitions to some key terms and concepts related to Experience Cloud. Experience Cloud Salesforce Experience Cloud is a digital experience platform that makes it easy to build beautifully designed, CRM-powered online sites. What was formerly known as Community Cloud is now called Experience Cloud, to better reflect the many types of digital experiences you can create and connect. Experience Cloud Site An Experience Cloud site is an online space for connecting with your customers, promoting collaboration, and streamlining key business processes. - Experience Builder sites, formerly called Lightning communities, are template-based sites that you customize in Experience Builder. These sites are built on one of two frameworks—Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) or Aura. - LWR sites are built with the latest LWR-based templates, such as the Build Your Own (LWR) and Microsites (LWR) templates. From Winter ’23, new LWR sites are hosted on the enhanced sites and content platform, and they’re referred to as enhanced LWR sites. - Aura sites are built with our original templates that run on Aura, such as Customer Service, Partner Central, and Customer Account Portal. - Visualforce sites, previously called Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites, are sites that you develop using Visualforce. For clarity, we use the terms LWR sites, enhanced LWR sites, Aura sites, and Visualforce sites where possible to help you identify which features apply to your site. See also [Enhanced Sites and Content Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_basics_glossary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5). Enhanced Sites and Content Platform The enhanced sites and content platform is a flexible system that brings together Salesforce CMS and LWR sites. From Winter ’23, new LWR sites and CMS workspaces that you create are hosted together on this redesigned platform, which offers partial deployment, site content search, easy content management, and more. To identify LWR sites that are hosted on the new platform, we use the term enhanced LWR sites. And for CMS workspaces, we use the term enhanced CMS workspaces. See [What Is the Enhanced Sites and Content Platform?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_enhanced.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The enhanced sites and content platform is a flexible new system that brings together Salesforce CMS and Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) sites. From Winter ’23, enhanced LWR sites and enhanced CMS workspaces that you create are hosted together on this redesigned platform, which offers partial deployment, improved content management, and expression-based visibility.") Experience Builder Experience Builder is used to design and build LWR and Aura sites using preconfigured templates and Lightning components. Use standard or custom components to create customized site pages without code. Experience Workspaces Command central for administering your Experience Cloud site. From Workspaces you can access Experience Builder, manage content, configure site settings, and monitor your site. Community managers can view dashboards for groups, members, feed activity, and license usage, and manage the community’s reputation system. Moderators can see which items have been flagged for review. Community The old term for what is now known as an Experience Cloud site. The new term better reflects the many types of digital experiences you can create. Framework The codebase or technical platform on which your Experience Cloud site is built. You can build a site using one of three frameworks: Lightning Web Runtime (LWR), Aura, and Visualforce. Template A predesigned set of solutions that help you quickly build a site that meets specific business needs. Templates are preconfigured with page layouts, components, and business processes designed to address common business scenarios. We have templates for customer self-service, help centers, and partner relationship management, as well as a build-your-own template that offers common pre-built pages to jump-start a custom site. External User Any user logging in to an Experience Cloud site with an Identity license or Experience Cloud license. Guest User Any user accessing an Experience Cloud site without logging in. Guest users are always unauthenticated. Salesforce CMS The Salesforce Content Management System is a hybrid CMS where you can create, manage, and publish content from a centralized location. In the Digital Experiences app (previously called the Salesforce CMS app), you can share your content to Salesforce endpoints, such as Experience Cloud sites and marketing emails, or to external channels. CMS Workspace You use CMS workspaces in the Digital Experiences app to create, organize, and share your content. Each workspace can have its own contributors, translation language settings, channels, content, and folders. See also [Enhanced Sites and Content Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_basics_glossary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5). CMS Connect A solution that connects external CMS content to your Experience Builder site for consistent branding, reuse of material, and ease of maintenance. # Experience Cloud Journey Data Model When you create an Experience Cloud journey, you choose whether to add user or contact data. To avoid unintentionally sending emails to people who have opted out, you must stay consistent. There are also some event trigger and tracking limitations.
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Every external site member has both an associated user object and a contact object. Internal site users, including employee site users, typically have only the user object. The email preferences for the user and contact records aren’t linked. A person who opts out of a contact record journey still gets email from user record journeys. A best practice is to choose one data type and stick to it. A couple of other points to consider when picking the data model: - Some events can trigger only user-based journeys. When you create a journey for a given event, the application shows you whether you can add user, contact, or either record to the journey. For many common community objects, only the user record is available. If you plan to standardize on contacts, use audience-based journeys instead as they can use either the user or contact records. - Emails sent by journeys that are based on contact records are logged on the contact objects in Salesforce. Logging isn’t always the case for journeys based on user records. If tracking is important, go with contacts. #### See Also - [Triggering Journeys Based on Audiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_jb_audience_triggers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can select a set of users—an audience—and put them into a journey. Your audience can be specific and include, say, a user who purchased a certain product and posted within the last 30 days.") - [Triggering Journeys Based on Events](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_jb_event_triggers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can trigger journeys based on an event that happens in the site, like when members join.") # Experience Cloud Objects for Creating Member Journeys Most, but not all, Experience Cloud objects can be used for creating journeys. This list includes the available objects along with a description, their eligibility status, API object, and use cases (as appropriate).
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). A quick note about object status: - If you want to create an event-based journey, the object must be workflow-enabled. - To create an audience-based journey, the object must be replicable.
Object Description Status API Example Use Case
Sites and Membership        
Network A site and its settings
  • Not Workflow-enabled
  • Not Replicable
Network  
NetworkMember Individual user memberships
  • Workflow-enabled
  • Replicable
NetworkMember Triggers when a new member joins the community
NetworkMemberGroup List of profiles and permission sets added to a site (not related to Chatter groups)
  • Not Workflow-enabled
  • Not Replicable
NetworkMemberGroup  
Chatter Groups        
CollaborationGroup A Chatter group
  • Workflow-enabled
  • Not Replicable
CollaborationGroup  
CollaborationGroupMember Member of a Chatter group
  • Workflow-enabled
  • Replicable
CollaborationGroupMember Triggers when a user joins a Chatter Group in the Community
CollaborationGroupFeed A single item on a Chatter group feed
  • Not Workflow-enabled
  • Replicable
CollaborationGroupFeed  
Feeds        
FeedItem Entry in the feed
  • Workflow-enabled
  • Replicable
FeedItem Triggers when a user asks a question or makes another type of feed post
FeedComment Comment added to a feed by a user
  • Not Workflow-enabled
  • Replicable
FeedComment  
Topics        
Topic A topic
  • Workflow-enabled
  • Replicable
Topic  
TopicAssignment Relationship between a topic and an entity
  • Workflow-enabled
  • Replicable
TopicAssignment Triggers when a user posts a question on a specific topic, or adds a topic to any FeedItem
EntitySubscription Subscription for following a record or another user
  • Not Workflow-enabled
  • Replicable
EntitySubscription Triggers when a user follows a topic, user, or record
Cases        
Case Service case
  • Workflow-enabled
  • Replicable
Case Triggers when a user opens or updates a case
# Experience Cloud Resources Learn more about Experience Cloud with helpful videos, guides, and blog posts. Or hit the trail with modules and projects on Trailhead. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Trailhead icon

Trailhead

Before you create an Experience Cloud site, we recommend going over a few key concepts in Trailhead.

Builder icon

Create, Design, and Manage Experience Cloud Sites

Video icon

Videos

Map icon

Limitations, Supported Browsers, and Mobility

Customization icon

Advanced Customizations

Apps icon

AppExchange Packages

Process icon

Going from Legacy Portals to Experience Cloud Sites

Trailhead icon

The Trailblazer Community

# Experience Cloud Site Moderation Limits and Limitations Moderation limits ensure that your Experience Cloud site performs optimally. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## Criteria Limits - Your org can have up to 30 keyword list criteria. This limit is per org, not per Experience Cloud site. - Your org can have up to 100 member criteria. This limit is per org, not per Experience Cloud site. ## Rule Limits and Limitations - Each content rule can have up to 3 keyword criteria and 10 member criteria. And each rate rule can have up to 10 member criteria. - Moderation rules apply only to feed posts, comments, and polls. Moderation rules don’t apply to topics that are created. ## Audit Limitations Changes to a feed item’s status aren’t included in the Insights report. # Experience Cloud Site Moderation Strategies and Tools Moderation allows you to empower members of your Experience Cloud site to monitor content and ensure that it’s appropriate and relevant. Set up rules to automate moderation and do the heavy lifting for you. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Moderation is crucial for an Experience Cloud site to thrive. You need active moderators who are willing to spend time ensuring that the members and content in your site are appropriate and helpful. It’s also critical to empower members to speak up when they view something as inappropriate or offensive. With moderation, you can: - Designate specific users as moderators so that they can closely monitor the site - Allow members to flag posts, comments, files, and messages that are inappropriate or spam - Allow moderators to review and act on flagged items, such as deleting a post, comment, or file - Allow group owners and managers to moderate within their groups - Create rules and criteria to automatically block, flag, replace keywords in member-generated content, such as posts or comments - Create rules to review and approve content from specific members - Track flagging and moderation activity within your site To limit the size and types of files allowed in your site, in Experience Workspaces, go to **Administration** | **Preferences**. To report on moderation activity in your sites, you can use the preconfigured reports from AppExchange. For more information about the AppExchange package, see [Report on Experience Cloud Sites with AppExchange Packages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reporting_dashboards_package.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Salesforce Communities Management packages give community managers an essential starter set of dashboards and reports to keep tabs on activity and engagement directly in Experience Workspaces."). You can also query flagged content or activity using the API, or create a custom report type using Networks as the primary object. If you want to create custom advanced moderation logic for your Experience Cloud site, you can create triggers that flag content. Custom triggers run behind the scenes and don’t require you to allow your members to flag content. If your org is using Transaction Security, moderation offers some of the same functionality. Transaction Security and moderation can be used at the same time. - **[Track Experience Cloud Site Activity with the Moderation Overview Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderation_overview_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Moderation Insights are arranged in clickable tiles on the Moderation Overview page in Experience Workspaces. View the entire picture of your site’s moderation activity at a glance and take action on day-to-day moderation tasks. - **[Enable Members to Flag Items in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderation_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Turn on flagging for your Experience Cloud site to let members flag posts, comments, files, and messages that they deem inappropriate. - **[Create Criteria to Moderate Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderator_manage_criteria.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create criteria that define keywords or groups of members. Criteria are used in rules to moderate member-generated content, such as posts and comments. - **[Create Rules to Moderate Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderator_manage_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Moderation rules help protect your site from spammers, bots, and offensive or inappropriate content. Create and modify rules for your Experience Cloud site to moderate member-generated content. Each rule specifies the member-generated content the rule applies to, the criteria to enforce the rule on, and the moderation action to take. - **[Review and Approve Posts and Comments in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderator_manage_pending_content.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Moderation rules to review and approve content ensure that non-compliant and inappropriate content isn’t immediately visible to everyone in your Experience Cloud site. Posts and comments pending review aren’t displayed in the feed; only the author and moderators can see pending posts and comments in the feed. An author can see a pending comment on a pending post only if the author posted both. After you set up the rules, moderators can approve content directly in the feed and in Experience Workspaces. - **[Moderate Flagged Items in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderator_flagged_items.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Moderators can review and act on flagged items in their Experience Cloud sites. - **[Set Up Apex Triggers for Flagging Items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderation_flag_triggers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use triggers to create custom advanced moderation logic that automatically flags items in your Experience Cloud site. - **[Experience Pulse](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_community_pulse.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Pulse displays metrics at the top of Workspaces. Click a metric to open the corresponding report or dashboard for more information or to take action. Customize the displayed metrics or create ones to meet your needs. - **[Experience Cloud Site Moderation Limits and Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderation_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Moderation limits ensure that your Experience Cloud site performs optimally. #### See Also - [Assign a Moderator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderator_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Make one or more people moderators in your Experience Cloud site so they can keep an eye on its content.") - [Assign an Experience Cloud Site Manager](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_community_manager_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To assign a user as an Experience Cloud site manager, give them the Manage Experiences permission.") - [Limit Files in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_file_limits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Restrict the size and types of files that your members can upload. This list of file types lets you control what your members upload and also prevents spammers from polluting your Experience Cloud site with inappropriate files.") # Experience Cloud Site Setup Checklist Building an Experience Cloud site is the result of research, mapping of goals, and defining your audience. At the same time, you must have all your ducks in a row so the actual implementation process is seamless. You know your org best, but use this general checklist to help you organize what you need for site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Have you considered everything on these lists? ## Before You Begin: _Gather your branding assets:_ ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) High-resolution image of your company logo ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Color scheme (or an image to upload to automatically generate one) ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Image to use as a header ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Thumbnail images (385x385 pixels), if you’re using [Featured Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_featured.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Featured topics highlight current, popular conversations in your Experience Cloud site. Change them regularly to keep members up-to-date and engaged.") _In your internal Salesforce org:_ ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) [Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enabling digital experiences is the first step to creating an Experience Cloud site, whether you’re building a community, portal, help center, or website. You also need to enable digital experiences when setting up Commerce Cloud, Financial Services Cloud, Health Cloud, and Work.com."). Choose a unique URL that works for your business, because you can’t change it after it’s been set. ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) [Set up email templates](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/HTViewHelpDoc?id=email_create_a_template.htm&language=en_US) for any communication between the community and its members (welcome email, resetting password email, and so on). ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Enable any Service Cloud features you plan to use in the community, such as [Salesforce Knowledge](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=knowledge_whatis.htm&language=en_US) and [Embedded Chat](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=snapins_chat_overview.htm&language=en_US). ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Review [profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/HTViewHelpDoc?id=admin_userprofiles.htm&language=en_US) and add [permission sets](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/HTViewHelpDoc?id=perm_sets_overview.htm&language=en_US) as needed. ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) [Set up Web-to-Case.](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/HTViewHelpDoc?id=setting_up_web-to-case.htm&language=en_US) If you’re using Salesforce Knowledge: ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Review your [data categories](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=categorygroup_create.htm&language=en_US). ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Enable [feed tracking](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/HTViewHelpDoc?id=collab_feed_tracking_overview.htm&language=en_US) for your Knowledge article types. ## As You’re Making Your Site: _In your internal Salesforce org:_ ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) [Add members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_customize_members.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Configure the Guest User Profile (access using Experience Builder): ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Give read and create permissions for the case object. ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) If using Salesforce Knowledge, give guests access to your data categories. _In Experience Workspaces:_ ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) [Set up navigational topics and subtopics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_navigational.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Structure your Experience Cloud site’s content and help your users find what they need with navigational topics. If your org uses data categories, community managers can link current Salesforce Knowledge articles associated with those categories to each navigational topic. If data categories aren’t enabled, administrators can add articles to each topic using Connect REST API."), and associate articles to each topic. ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) [Set up featured topics and associated images](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_featured.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Featured topics highlight current, popular conversations in your Experience Cloud site. Change them regularly to keep members up-to-date and engaged."). ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) [Download the latest Salesforce Communities Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reporting_dashboards_package.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Salesforce Communities Management packages give community managers an essential starter set of dashboards and reports to keep tabs on activity and engagement directly in Experience Workspaces.") from the AppExchange. ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) [Set up moderation criteria and rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderation_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Moderation allows you to empower members of your Experience Cloud site to monitor content and ensure that it’s appropriate and relevant. Set up rules to automate moderation and do the heavy lifting for you."). ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Enable and set up [reputation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reputation_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your reputation in the Experience Cloud site directly corresponds to how active you are. The more you post, comment, and share, the higher your reputation level is. This feature requires Chatter to be enabled for the site."). _In Experience Builder:_ ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) [Customize your community to match your company’s branding](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_brand.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prebuilt themes come with every template. They let you style your site with clicks, not code. Apply color, fonts, and images to your site to match your design or brand. Match your colors precisely by uploading your own logo to generate a custom color scheme. Create branding sets to change colors, fonts, and logos quickly for different audiences and needs."). ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) [Add standard and custom Lightning components to customize their design and content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_edit_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Each page contains a collection of components that are organized around a task or function, whether it’s opening a case or searching for an article. The pages in each Experience Builder template are ready for you to use with little configuration. Add new components to your site’s pages, edit the properties of existing components, or delete components that you don’t require."). ## After Making Your Site ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Set up an internal Chatter or Slack group for feedback, and invite people to take a test drive while the site is still in preview mode. ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Incorporate their feedback, and then [publish your site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_publish.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Publish your Aura or LWR site in Experience Builder to make your site updates and component customization updates available to your site members."). ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Seed the site with some initial content: welcome posts, groups, and relevant or fun articles. ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) [Archive your site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_archive_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Archive an inactive site so that users can no longer access it. You must deactivate a site before you can archive it.") if you no longer need it. # Experience Cloud Site Statuses Experience Cloud sites can have one of these statuses: preview, inactive, active, and archived. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
Status Description
Preview

Customization of the Experience Cloud site isn't complete, and the site has never been activated. Once you activate an Experience Cloud site, you can't go back to Preview status.

Users with Create and Set Up Experiences can access sites in Preview status if their profile or permission set is associated with the site. They can also share a link to these sites with users whose profiles or permission sets are associated with the site. The link for sharing a Preview site is located in Experience Workspaces, under Administration.

No welcome emails are sent even if Send welcome email is selected.

Note
Note If your org’s access to Experience Cloud is suspended for non-payment, all your sites are deactivated, including the ones in Preview. When Experience Cloud is re-enabled, all sites are inactive. You can activate them, but you can’t return to the Preview state.

Preview sites count against the maximum number of sites you can have in your org.

Inactive

The Experience Cloud site was previously Active but was deactivated.

You may want to deactivate a site if you need to:

  • Add or remove members
  • Add, remove, or change the order of tabs
  • Change the color scheme
  • Change the site URL

When you deactivate an Experience Cloud site , it no longer appears in the dropdown menu. Users with Create and Set Up Experiences can still access the setup for Inactive sites regardless of membership. If members try to access Inactive sites using a direct link, they see an error page.

Welcome emails are sent if Send welcome email is selected or if the user’s email settings are not enabled.

Inactive sites count against the maximum number of sites you can have in your org.

Active

The Experience Cloud site is active and available to members.

Welcome emails are sent to new members if Send welcome email is selected.

Active sites count against the maximum number of sites you can have in your org.

Archived
  • You can only archive inactive sites. If your site is in Preview, you must activate and then deactivate the site before archiving it.
  • When you archive a site,
    • The site’s URL is unavailable to all users, including admins.
    • Instead of the site, users see a Site under maintenance page.
    • You can’t access the site’s Experience Builder or Workspaces.
    • The site doesn’t count against your org’s maximum 100 unarchived site limit.
- **[Deactivate Your Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_unpublish.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Deactivate your site when you add or remove members; add, remove, or rearrange tabs; change the color scheme; or change the URL. You also must deactivate a site before you can archive it. - **[Archive a Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_archive_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Archive an inactive site so that users can no longer access it. You must deactivate a site before you can archive it. - **[Unarchive a Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_unarchive_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Unarchive an archived site so that users can access it. #### See Also - [Customize Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Update basic site settings like your site URL, site name, members, login options, and general preferences in the Administration tile of Experience Workspaces.") - [Activate Your Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_publish.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Activate your site to make it accessible to members. The result of activation differs depending on whether you have a Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site or a Lightning site.") - [Deactivate Your Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_unpublish.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Deactivate your site when you add or remove members; add, remove, or rearrange tabs; change the color scheme; or change the URL. You also must deactivate a site before you can archive it.") - [Share a Link to Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_share_link.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can allow members to preview your Experience Cloud site before making it active.") # Experience Cloud Sites Usage Allocation Experience Cloud site usage is governed by daily, monthly, and yearly allocations. Understanding these allocations is important to the success of your sites. Salesforce provides tools to help you monitor site usage so that you can avoid exceeding these allocations, or purchasing overages when needed. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Edition Bandwidth Allocation (per rolling 24-hour period per community) Service Request Time (per rolling 24-hour period per site) Maximum Page Views
Developer Edition 500 MB 10 minutes N/A
Enterprise Edition

1 GB for sandbox

40 GB for production

30 minutes for sandbox

60 hours for production

500,000/month

Unlimited Edition

Performance Edition

1 GB for sandbox

40 GB for production

30 minutes for sandbox

60 hours for production

1,000,000/month
Bandwidth The number of megabytes served and received from both the community's origin server and the cache server. The origin server refers to the Web server that hosts your community site. The cache server refers to the CDN server that serves your cache community site pages. This allocation is only calculated for non-authenticated community users.“Rolling 24-hour period” refers to the 24 hours immediately preceding the current time. Service Request Time The total server time in minutes required to generate pages for the community. This allocation is only calculated for non-authenticated community users. “Rolling 24-hour period” refers to the 24 hours immediately preceding the current time. Page View A request from a non-authenticated community user to load a page associated with your community. Requests from authenticated community users aren’t counted as page views. Cached page views are also counted. Requests That Count as Page Views Requests for the following _are_ counted as page views.
Requests for... Example
Your Experience Cloud site domain http://MyDomainName.my.site.com
Your custom Experience Cloud site web address http://site.mycompany.com
Any page associated with your Experience Cloud site

http://MyDomainName.my.site.com/mypage

http://MyDomainName.my.site.com/s/mypage

http://site.mycompany.com/mypage

http://site.mycompany.com/s/mypage

Custom login pages  
Requests That Don’t Count as Page Views Requests for the following are not counted as page views.
Requests for... Example
Authorization Required error page http://MyDomainName.my.site.com/unauthorized

AJAX requests:

  • JavaScript remoting
  • Visualforce
  • Apex: RemoteAction
  • Visualforce: <apex:actionFunction>
Resources loaded on the page, such as robots.txt or the favorite icon

http://MyDomainName.my.site.com/robot.txt

http://site.mycompany.com/favicon

Attachments and documents  
Error pages, apart from Authorization Required, such as Limit Exceeded and Maintenance http://MyDomainName.my.site.com/BandwithExceeded
Tab clicks within a page  
Images included in an HTML field http://MyDomainName.my.site.com/servlet/rtaImage
Custom file field http://MyDomainName.my.site.com/servlet/fileField
System pages associated with your Experience Cloud site, such as the login, logout confirmation, and forgot password pages

http://site.mycompany.com/login

https://site.mycompany.com/s/login

API REST calls http://MyDomainName.my.site.com/Service/apexrest
Page View Allocations The following table lists Experience Cloud site page view allocations for each edition. This allocation applies to all the Experience Cloud sites in your org.
Edition Maximum Number of Communities Maximum Page Views
Enterprise Edition 100 500,000/month

Unlimited Edition

Performance Edition

100 1,000,000/month
A few things to bear in mind with page view allocation: - Your org’s page view entitlement is the sum of page views included in the edition plus any additional page views purchased from Salesforce. - Salesforce calculates page view overages by looking at a 12-month look-back period. If your site page views exceed the org allocation for page views, contact Salesforce to understand how to buy overages. Site members and unauthorized users can still access your Experience Cloud site, even if your org goes over its page view allocation. Let’s look at Acme Enterprises, which has set up a customer community. Their Enterprise Edition org includes 500,000 page views per month. Acme expects its community to take off, so they purchase another 500,000 page views per month. Their total page view entitlement is 1 million page views per month. So, over the course of a 12-month look back period, Acme’s community can have 12 million page views (that’s 12 x 1 million page view allocation). The community has a spike in usage for a month, and goes over its 1 million allocation. Is Acme charged an overage? No, because the next month the community has fewer than 1 million-page views. It all averages out when the calculation is made at the end of the 12-month look back period. In short, the community has to average 1 million page views per month over the course of a 12-month look back period to remain below its allocation. Monitoring Usage Accurately monitor your site’s page view usage with the Page Views - Monthly Trend report, found in the Community Management Package for Communities from AppExchange. Install the package that is right for your communities: - [Community Management Package for Communities with Chatter](https://appexchange.salesforce.com/listingDetail?listingId=a0N3000000B5XHsEAN) - [Community Management Package for Communities without Chatter](https://appexchange.salesforce.com/listingDetail?listingId=a0N3000000B5XI7EAN) You can also see page view usage in your org’s Company Information section. In Setup, enter Company Information in the **Quick Find** box and click **Company Information**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The page view allocation found under Usage-Based Entitlement may not reflect the correct allocation for your Salesforce edition. API Usage Allocation in Experience Cloud Sites Communities API usage limits listed here are in addition to your Salesforce org's API limits.
  Customer Community Customer Community Plus Partner Community Lightning Platform Starter Lightning Platform Plus
API Calls per Day 0

200 per member (member-based license)

10 per member (login-based license)

200 per member (member-based license)

10 per member (login-based license)

200 per member for Enterprise Edition orgs

200 per member for Unlimited Edition orgs

1000 per member for Enterprise Edition orgs

5000 per member for Unlimited Edition orgs

# Experience Cloud Sites: What’s Different or Not Available in the Salesforce Mobile App Experience Cloud sites in the Salesforce mobile app are similar to the Lightning Experience desktop site, with some differences. - The navigation menu for an Experience Cloud site doesn’t include all the items that are available to your internal org: - The navigation menu shows only the tabs that the admin has included in that site via Tabs & Pages in the site’s administration settings. - The Events and Today items aren’t available and don’t appear in the navigation menu. - Tasks are available only to users with the Edit Tasks permission. - The Reports item isn’t available and doesn’t appear in the navigation menu. - There’s no All Company nor Company Highlights feed. - Adding inline images to a post isn’t available. - Experience Management and Experience Workspaces aren’t available. - Site.com branding isn’t supported. - Members can’t flag private messages as inappropriate. - Reputation isn’t supported. However, if reputation is enabled and set up in the desktop site, users do accrue points when using the Salesforce mobile app. Users can view their points in the desktop site only. - Search is scoped to the Experience Cloud site and returns only items from the current site. The only exception is records, since they’re shared across sites and the internal org. - Role-based external users can approve and reject approval requests from the Approval History related list on records, but they can’t submit requests for approval. - A user’s list of notifications includes notifications from all Experience Cloud sites the user is a member of. The name of the site in which the notification originated appears after the timestamp. - External users accessing Experience Cloud sites don’t see a help link. - Photos appear next to users’ names in the People list. - The Experience Builder template and your user licenses determine how you can access Experience Cloud sites. For more information, see Access Experience Cloud Sites in the Salesforce Mobile App in Salesforce Help. - Group members in Experience Cloud sites can’t edit their email and in-app notification settings. As a workaround, users can set their group email notification preference to **Every Post** in the site from the desktop site. Selecting this option enables both email notifications and in-app notifications for that group. - Push notifications for Experience Cloud sites aren’t supported in the Salesforce mobile app. Their navigation and authentication behavior can vary for members with both an internal and external login or multiple external logins. We recommend that users with multiple logins access a site from a supported mobile browser using the site URL. In a mobile browser, site users receive notifications via the bell icon and notification tray. - Direct message notifications aren’t supported in mobile sites. If a user receives a direct message while using the mobile website, the bell notification doesn’t display a new message. - Experience Cloud sites aren’t available when the mobile device is offline. - The Experience Cloud site’s Related List - Single component isn’t supported for Files. - The Record Headline component doesn’t support Chatter actions or field labels. - You can’t create a record from a lookup field. # Experience Pulse Experience Pulse displays metrics at the top of Workspaces. Click a metric to open the corresponding report or dashboard for more information or to take action. Customize the displayed metrics or create ones to meet your needs. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
To get started, map reports and dashboards to your Experience Workspaces. You can either map manually or install the Winter ’18 or later version of the AppExchange package. After installation, Experience Pulse displays automatically. If you have an Experience Cloud site with Chatter, four tiles display after you install the package: Members, New Members, Unanswered Questions, and Flagged Discussions. To customize a metric tile, click **Edit Metrics**. From here, create a metric or edit an existing one. You can have up to six metrics at a time. ![Edit page for Community Pulse Metrics displaying edit options.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_edit_pulse.png) By design, clicking a metric opens the corresponding report. However, selecting **Open in dashboard** lets you open a dashboard instead. #### See Also - [Enable and Map Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_dashboards_for_cm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use dashboards in Experience Cloud sites to measure their success. You can even map a dashboard to the Experience Workspaces Home page. Map custom dashboards or use the ones provided in our AppExchange package.") # Export a Customized Experience Builder Page for a Lightning Bolt Solution Export pages that you’ve customized in an Experience Builder site. Use them as a base for new pages, or package and distribute them for others to use in their sites. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To create a Lightning Experience Builder template, theme, or page: Customize Application AND Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To create a Lightning Bolt Solution: Customize Application AND View Setup and Configuration
1. In Experience Builder, select **Settings** | **Developer**, and click **Export a Page**. ![The Developer area](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_export4.png) 2. Select the page to export. 3. Click **Export**. After you export a page, it appears in the New Page dialog box in all the Experience Builder sites in your org. If you package the page and install it in another org, it appears in that org’s New Page dialog box. A newly installed page is highlighted as New for 30 days. ![New Page dialog box](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_add_page2.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If the site already has an object page for an object, the exported object page doesn’t appear as a page to export option in the New Page dialog. If the object page is deleted, it once again is available as an option. See [Export and Packaging Considerations for Lightning Bolt Solutions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before you export and package a Lightning Bolt Solution, keep the following considerations and limitations in mind."). 4. To distribute your page, [create a managed package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_package.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you create a Lightning Bolt Solution, package the solution to distribute it to other users or orgs. You can upload the package to AppExchange to share or sell your solution.") that includes the page. Or add the page to a Lightning Bolt Solution, and include it in the package. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can quickly get to the Package page of Salesforce Setup by selecting **Package the Experience Builder page** in the export page success message. To delete an exported or imported page, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and click **Pages**. Existing pages in Experience Builder that are based on the deleted page are unaffected. However, deleted pages no longer appear in the New Page dialog. #### See Also - [Export and Packaging Considerations for Lightning Bolt Solutions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before you export and package a Lightning Bolt Solution, keep the following considerations and limitations in mind.") - [_First-Generation Managed Packaging Developer Guide_: Create and Upload a Managed Package](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.pkg1_dev.meta/pkg1_dev/uploading_packages.htm) # Export a Customized Experience Builder Template for a Lightning Bolt Solution You can customize and export an Experience Builder template to use as a base for creating Experience Builder sites. Create custom pages, layouts, and components. Export and package the template on its own or distribute it for others to use as a part of a Lightning Bolt Solution. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To create a Lightning Experience Builder template, theme, or page: Customize Application AND Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To create a Lightning Bolt Solution: Customize Application AND View Setup and Configuration
If your customized template isn’t based on the latest version, you can’t export it until you update the template. 1. In Experience Builder, select **Settings** | **Developer**, and click **Export a Template**. The information that you add on this page appears in the Experience Creation wizard and helps others understand your template’s purpose and benefits. ![The Developer area](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_export1.png) 2. Add a unique template name, a publisher name, and select a category. 3. Add at least one image as the thumbnail image. The recommended image dimensions are 1260 x 820 pixels. You can add two more images that appear in the detailed description of the template. 4. Enter a summary that describes the purpose of the template. 5. Enter at least one key feature. The feature titles appear under the thumbnail in the Experience Creation wizard. The feature descriptions appear in the solution’s detailed description. 6. Click **Export**. After you export the template, it appears in the Experience Creation wizard in your org. You can then use it as a base for building new Experience Builder sites. If you package the template in a Lightning Bolt Solution and install it in another org, it appears in that org’s Experience Creation wizard. ![The Community Creation Wizard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_export3.png) 7. To distribute the template, [create a managed package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_package.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you create a Lightning Bolt Solution, package the solution to distribute it to other users or orgs. You can upload the package to AppExchange to share or sell your solution."). Or, add the template to a Lightning Bolt Solution, and include it in the package. To delete an exported or imported template, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then click **Templates**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - If you create an Experience Builder site in your org that’s based on an imported or exported template, you can’t delete the template. - If you include object pages in a custom template, you can’t delete the object from your org unless you remove the template’s object pages. - If you add subpages to an Experience Builder site in your org and export the template, the new site doesn’t have the same page hierarchy as the original. All pages in the exported site are found at the top level. #### See Also - [Export and Packaging Considerations for Lightning Bolt Solutions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before you export and package a Lightning Bolt Solution, keep the following considerations and limitations in mind.") - [_Second-Generation Managed Packaging Developer Guide_: Second-Generation Managed Packages](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.pkg2_dev.meta/pkg2_dev/sfdx_dev_dev2gp.htm) - [_First-Generation Managed Packaging Developer Guide_: Create and Upload a Managed Package](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.pkg1_dev.meta/pkg1_dev/uploading_packages.htm) # Export a Customized Experience Builder Theme for a Lightning Bolt Solution Export themes that you’ve customized and use them in your own Experience Builder sites, or package and distribute them for others to use. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To create a Lightning Experience Builder template, theme, or page: Customize Application AND Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To create a Lightning Bolt Solution: Customize Application AND View Setup and Configuration
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If your customized theme isn’t based on the latest template version, you can’t export it until you [update the template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.communities_update_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "We introduce amazing features and enhancements with every release, so it pays to keep your Experience Builder site up to date! Typically, we automatically update your template to the latest version, so you can start adding the newest features to your site right away. However, when the changes are significant, you’re required to update your template manually."). 1. In Experience Builder, change to the theme you want to export if that isn’t your active theme. ![Builder Theme settings with Change Theme highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme_panel_change.png) 2. Select **Settings** | **Developer**, and click **Export a Theme**. ![The Developer area](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_export5.png) 3. Fill in the form with the needed elements for the Change Theme detail page. Clear information and images help you and others understand what is in the theme and how it works. ![Change Theme detail page of Cypress theme](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_changetheme-description.png) 4. Click **Export**. After you export a theme, it appears in the Change Theme dialog box in all the Experience Builder sites in your org. If you package the theme and install it in another org, it appears in that org’s Change Theme dialog box. Themes are ordered by how new they are, so a newly imported theme appears at the beginning of the list. ![Change theme list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_change_theme_themeslist.png) 5. To distribute your theme, create a managed package. Or add the theme to a Lightning Bolt Solution, and include it in the package. To delete an imported or exported theme, from Setup, enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, and click **Themes**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If an Experience Builder site in your org is using the theme, you can’t delete the theme until you switch to a different one. # Export and Packaging Considerations for Lightning Bolt Solutions Before you export and package a Lightning Bolt Solution, keep the following considerations and limitations in mind. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip We recommend using managed packages to avoid naming conflicts with other packages in your customer’s org or your own. ## Add Custom Apps - When you include apps in a Lightning Bolt Solution, follow general guidelines in the [Components in Managed Packages](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.pkg2_dev.meta/pkg2_dev/packaging_packageable_components.htm#mdc_lightning_bolt) for developing and distributing Lightning apps. - When you package the solution, app components are automatically added to the package. For example, the package includes customized fields, page layouts, and relationships with standard objects. ## Add Flows - To reuse a single flow or a group of flows, add them to a flow category. Then include the flow category in your Lightning Bolt Solution. - You can add only active flows to a flow category. ## Export and Package an Experience Builder Template - An exported template name must be unique. - You can export a customized template from Experience Builder and include it in a Lightning Bolt Solution, but including a template isn’t required. - When you export a template from Experience Builder, the system removes non-alphanumeric characters from template and page names. For example, My Template #2 becomes My\_Template\_2. - For navigation menu items that link to objects, list views are reset to the default list view. Also, custom list views for standard objects aren’t included as dependencies, although custom list views for custom objects are included. - Only the following Administration settings in Experience Workspaces are included. - Change password page - Forgot password page - Home page - Login page - **Allow employees to log in directly to an Experience Cloud site** option - The following items aren’t included when you export an Experience Builder template. After you import the template and use it to create an Experience Builder site in the destination org, you must manually reconfigure these items. - Most Administration settings (except for the settings already listed). - Experience Builder settings, including head markup and the Google Tracking ID. - Custom theme layout components that aren’t listed in **Settings** | **Theme** | **Configure** aren’t included. For theme layout components to be included, you don’t have to assign them to a page. - Custom styles in the CSS editor. - Localized content for multilingual sites. - Non-default page variations; only default page variations are included. If a page doesn’t have a default variation, the page is excluded. For example, if a page has two variations that are both set to audience-based visibility, then the page is excluded entirely. - If you upgrade a managed template package, existing sites that are based on the upgraded template aren’t updated. - Some pages in a template are available only when a feature is enabled in your org—for example, the Article Detail page requires Salesforce Knowledge. An exported template includes just the pages that exist in your site at the time of export. Any site that’s built using the exported template includes only those same pages. For further assistance, contact Salesforce Customer Support. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Some components show errors when you deploy or export a site as a template and require you to manually configure the component’s properties in Builder. For example, to set filters for the Object Home and Record List components in your exported site, navigate to the component properties. Then reconfigure the filter that you want to use from the dropdown menu. ## Export and Package a Theme - You can export a custom Experience Builder theme from Experience Builder but a standalone theme can’t be included in a Lightning Bolt Solution. - An exported theme name must be unique. - Custom theme layout components that aren’t listed in **Settings** | **Theme** | **Configure** aren’t included. For theme layout components to be included, you don’t have to assign them to a page. - If you upgrade a managed theme package, existing sites that are based on the upgraded theme aren’t updated. - When you export a theme from Experience Builder, the system removes non-alphanumeric characters from your theme name. For example, My Theme #2 becomes My\_Theme\_2. ## Export and Package a Single Experience Builder Page - The exported Experience Builder page name must be unique. - When you export a page, the system generates a developer name (`devName`) by prepending the site name and removing non-alphanumeric characters. For example, My #awesome page in the Acme site becomes Acme\_My\_awesome\_page. Developer names longer than 80 characters are truncated. - When you export an Experience Builder page, its page variations aren’t included in the package. Export the page variations separately. - Exported page variations use the naming convention `[Site Name]_[Page Name]_[Variation Name]`. | Original Page Name | Exported Page Name | Exported Page Developer Name | | --- | --- | --- | | Coffee Fans | Coffee Fans | Acme\_Coffee\_Fans | | West Coast (page variation) | Coffee Fans - West Coast | Acme\_Coffee\_Fans\_West\_Coast | | East Coast (page variation) | Coffee Fans - East Coast | Acme\_Coffee\_Fans\_East\_Coast | - For images in the Rich Content Editor, we export the version used in the editor, which isn’t necessarily the latest version of the asset file. - Audience-based visibility criteria aren’t included in the export process. Manually reenter this information after importing the page to the site in the destination org. - You can’t export individual login pages. - Export assigns a developer name from the site, object, and page type (detail, list, or related list). You can’t rename object pages during export the way you can some standard pages, and trying to export the same object page again can fail if that exported page already exists. - If a site already has object pages for an object, the New Page dialog doesn’t include that object to choose from again. This prevents an exported object sub-page from showing up as a separate selectable page. Standard pages can list multiple exported layouts in the wizard; object pages don’t behave the same way. If several exported object pages exist for one object in Setup, remove unneeded pages to avoid ambiguity. #### See Also - [Salesforce App Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.apps_considerations.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Export a Customized Experience Builder Template for a Lightning Bolt Solution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can customize and export an Experience Builder template to use as a base for creating Experience Builder sites. Create custom pages, layouts, and components. Export and package the template on its own or distribute it for others to use as a part of a Lightning Bolt Solution.") - [Export a Customized Experience Builder Page for a Lightning Bolt Solution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Export pages that you’ve customized in an Experience Builder site. Use them as a base for new pages, or package and distribute them for others to use in their sites.") - [_First-Generation Managed Packaging Developer Guide_: Create and Upload a Managed Package](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.pkg1_dev.meta/pkg1_dev/uploading_packages.htm) # Export Language Content Export and prepare Experience Builder site content as one or multiple .xml files. Prepare the files for translation by creating nodes for specific languages. Then send the file to your translation service. ### Required Editions
Available in: Experience Builder sites accessed through Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and mobile devices, and is available in Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Before you begin, let’s look at the structure of the .xml file that’s created when you export language content. The file consists of several elements, and these elements are the key ones to focus on. - `component` elements represent the page components that make up your site. Many of these components contain text that must be translated. - The `field` element contains the component’s properties for a particular language. The language is defined by the `language` attribute. - `property` elements include `CDATA` tags that contain the text strings for translation. As you can see in this sample XML for a component, several `CDATA` tags don’t contain any content. So the only `CDATA` tags that you and your translators must focus on are the ones that contain text. ```markup ``` ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If you exported your site content for translation before Winter ’22, you can’t import the resulting translated file. To ensure a successful import, export your site content again and translate it in this more recent .xml file. To export and prepare content for translation: 1. In Experience Builder, click **![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings.png)** | **Languages**. 2. Click **Export Content**. 3. Select your default language. You can select a language other than your default language, but we don’t recommend it unless you must export existing translations for that particular language. If you haven’t yet added translations for the language, the exported file is empty. 4. (Optional) Change the export file name. The default name of this file is Languages.xml, but you can rename it. Consider exporting a file for each translation and renaming each file by its country code. For example, if you intend to get translations for French, German, and Spanish, you can rename the files language\_fr.xml, language\_de.xml, and language\_es\_mx.xml, respectively. 5. Click **Export**. 6. If you’re prompted to, choose where to save the file. 7. Prepare the .xml file for translation. 1. Copy the `field` element for the content to be translated, and paste the copy under the original. ![A field element in a Languages.xml file](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_multilingual_export_1.png) You can copy a `field` element multiple times for multiple translations in one file. However, to reduce the chance of overwriting existing translations when importing new ones, we recommend that you export a separate Languages.xml file for each translation. 2. Update the `language` attribute in the pasted `field` element to the new language. ![A duplicate field element ready for translation](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_multilingual_export_2.png) 3. Save your changes. After you export and prepare the .xml file, you can send it for translation. Ask your translators to put translated content between the brackets that follow the `CDATA` tags. ![The CDATA element in a field element](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_multilingual_export_3.png) If possible, avoid updating the site’s default content until after you receive and import your translated content. Because the translated file contains the original default content and the translated content, when you import the file, you overwrite updates made in the interim. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Keep this consideration in mind for translations when you make a new property of a custom component available for edit in Experience Builder: If the component is in use on a page in Experience Builder, delete the component from the page and replace it with the updated version. Otherwise, when you export the site content for translation, the property that you added is omitted for that component instance in the exported file. If the component contains content that’s already translated, export the site content first to preserve the existing translation. Then replace the component with the updated version. For more information, see [Aura Component Bundle Design Resources](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.lightning.meta/lightning/components_config_for_app_builder_design_files.htm) or, for Lightning web components, [Configure a Component for Experience Builder](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/component-library/documentation/en/lwc/use_config_for_community_builder). When you receive the translated .xml file, [import it back into the site.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After your translation service has completed the translations, import the translated .xml file into your Experience Builder site.") #### See Also - [Import Translated Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After your translation service has completed the translations, import the translated .xml file into your Experience Builder site.") # Expose Context Variables in Your Agentforce Service Agent To make the custom fields created on the Messaging Session object available to your agent, expose them as context variables in Agentforce Builder. This action establishes the direct data link required for your Agentforce Service agent to reference and utilize user journey data when executing actions and guiding responses. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Aura and LWR Experience Cloud Sites
Available in: Enhanced Chat with the Einstein for Service, Einstein Platform, Community, Community Plus, or Agentforce Service Agent add-on
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Foundations or Agentforce 1 Editions. Access to some standard agent actions requires additional add-on licenses
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Agent, and then select **Agentforce Agents**. 2. From the Agents Setup page, click the name of your agent Agentforce Service agent to open its details. 3. Click **Open in Builder**, and then select the **Context** tab. If your agent is in read-only mode, deactivate it first. 4. In the Messaging Session Variables section, click **Update Included Fields**. 5. Select the custom fields you created on the Messaging Session object, and then **save** your changes. The custom Messaging Session fields you select are exposed in Agentforce Builder as context variables and become available to map to action inputs and to reference in topic instructions. # Expression-Based Component Variations in Enhanced LWR Sites Site visitors are important to your business and deserve to have the most custom experience possible. With Expression-Based Component Variations, you can create multiple versions of a component and then change the style and visibility settings to make each version unique. You can choose to have a single variation for a targeted group or several variations that apply broadly to subsets of your users. Apply visibility rules to each variation to make it appear to the appropriate site visitors. And when you have multiple variations for the same component, prioritize them so you know when your variations appear and to whom. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
- **[Create Component Variations in Enhanced LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_expression_based_variations_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Expression-Based Component Variations to create multiple versions of your component and assign visibility rules to target specific customer groups with each variation. Component Variations gives your site more flexibility and better opportunities to cater to individual customers and create the best experience possible. # Expression-Based Visibility in Enhanced LWR Sites With Expression-Based Visibility, you can create a set of rules that dictate when and to whom your components in your enhanced LWR sites appear. Choose visibility settings based on User and Product object fields such as location, language, buyer groups, and more. Creating visibility conditions based on expressions improves the agility of your site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
- **[Create Dynamic Component Visibility in Enhanced LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_expression_based_visibility_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Control component visibility on your enhanced LWR site pages by creating rules that contain conditions. Stack multiple conditions to create the perfect set of visibility conditions for each component. - **[Expression-Based Visibility Rules in Enhanced LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_expression_based_visibility_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Expression-Based Visibility to define when and to whom your components appear in your enhanced LWR sites. Create component visibility rules from the Visibility tab on your components. - **[Build an Expression-Based Visibility Rule in LWR Sites Using Custom Logic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_create_custom_logic_expression.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Build your own custom logic to show or hide a component or component variation. Create a custom logic expression by adding your conditions for component visibility. # Expression-Based Visibility Rules in Enhanced LWR Sites Use Expression-Based Visibility to define when and to whom your components appear in your enhanced LWR sites. Create component visibility rules from the Visibility tab on your components. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Visibility rules created during the Spring '23 pilot are no longer functional and must be replaced in future releases. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can also hide or show components based on device type. For each component you can create a single rule that can contain multiple conditions. Each condition can have up to 5 spans. For example, `User.Record.Last Modified By.Contact.Account Name.ShippingCity` contains six spans so it isn’t allowed. If you don’t create any rules, the component appears to everyone. Rules are created using AND, OR, or custom logic. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Consider a rule with a Show component state and two conditions using AND logic. One condition says that the User Record City must equal Chicago and the second says that the User Record Title must equal Marketing Manager. The component appears to all users that are in Chicago AND have the title of Marketing Manager. If you changed the logic to OR, the component appears to anyone in Chicago OR anyone with the title of Marketing Manager. Selectable condition values depend on the type of resource. If you select a field with a predefined list of values, the list is populated in the Value dropdown. If you select an open text field, an open text field is available for the value. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Visibility rules aren’t visible from the canvas. From preview mode, user type is evaluated based on the mode, and rules apply if relevant. ## Supported Objects, Fields, Field Types, and Operators The supported objects are User and, in the B2B, B2C, and D2C Commerce templates only, Product. Not all fields are supported for either object. Component visibility rules rely on the data captured in fields associated with the page’s object. Not all fields, field types, and operators are supported. Supported operators depend on the selected field type. Supported field types: - String type fields: Autonumber, Currency, Email, Number, Percent, Phone, Text, Text Area, URL - Checkbox (boolean) - Number - Picklist - Multi picklist Supported Operators: - \= and == (Equal) - <> or != (Not Equal) - \> (Greater Than) - \>= (Greater Than or Equal) - < (Less Than) - <= (Less Than or Equal) - CONTAINS (only available for string, picklist, and multi-picklist fields) - NOT CONTAINS (only available for string, picklist, and multi-picklist fields) #### See Also - [Show or Hide Components on Mobile, Tablet, or Desktop for Enhanced LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_hide_components_by_device_type.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Improve the readability of your site by hiding unnecessary components. In enhanced LWR sites, site builders can customize which components are shown or hidden for each device type—mobile, tablet, or desktop. Components are shown by default.") # Extend Salesforce to Customers with the Correct Licenses Buy customer licenses to enable customer-specific functionality in your org. Customer licenses are required to give access to the Customer Account Portal and set up customer users. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
When you buy customer licenses, the following functionality is enabled in your org. - The default Customer Community profile. You can clone it to create custom customer profiles or extend data access via permissions sets. - The **Enable as Customer User** button on contacts. - Access to delegated admin, reports and dashboards, and advanced sharing for customer users. Check out [Experience Cloud Sites and Users in Your Salesforce Org](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/5kixavmXPC372dCZ37Z2dv), a quick video about how Salesforce Experiences live in an org, the differences between licenses, and how Salesforce accounts and site users are associated with one another. # External Account Hierarchy List Card The External Account Hierarchy List card displays child and parent nodes within an external account hierarchy in list form. The hierarchical order of the accounts is represented by nested rows. When you enable **Enable External Account Hierarchy** in Settings, external account hierarchies are available in your org. 1. Select the **External Account Hierarchy List Card** component on the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component: | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Hierarchy Type | The type of hierarchy of which the accounts are added. The available values are Partner and Customer. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample External Account Hierarchy component: ![External account hierarchy](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/external_account_hierarchy_images.png) # External Data Sources in Your Experience Cloud Site Use Salesforce Connect and Salesforce Files Connect to access external data and content stored outside of your Salesforce org from your site. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Provide your site users access to: - Data that’s stored in another Salesforce org, SAP® NetWeaver Gateway, or IBM WebSphere® that your org accesses via Salesforce Connect - Content that’s stored in Google Drive or SharePoint that your org accesses via Files Connect ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Let’s say you have a partner community for sales, and you store your product order information in a back-office ERP system. You can surface that information to your sales partners, enabling them to view and update orders within the context of all related data regardless of where it’s stored. Or maybe you store your templates for contracts and other agreements in a non-Salesforce environment. Your sales partners can access the latest versions of that content as needed. #### See Also - [Salesforce Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/HTViewHelpDoc?id=platform_connect_about.htm&language=en_US) - [Salesforce Files Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_files_connect.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Identity Type for External Data Sources](https://help.salesforce.com/HTViewHelpDoc?id=platform_connect_identity_type.htm&language=en_US) # Featured Topics The Featured Topics component lets you place your Experience Builder site’s designated featured topics and the images that represent them on any page. 1. From the Components list, select the Featured Topics component and drag it onto a page. 2. On the page, select the **Featured Topics** component. 3. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Title Enter a title for the featured topics area. The default text is Featured Topics.
Show Title Check to show the title. Clear to hide the title.
Overlay Color The color to use as a wash over the tile background color. In the property’s rgba field, the default is 0,0,0,0.4.
Overlay Hover Color

The color to use as a wash over the tile background color when a user mouses over the tile. The Linked to theme icon link icon indicates that the value is taken from the site’s theme.

In Builder, you can test your hover color in Preview mode.

Border Radius

Slide to adjust the curve of featured topic tile borders.

If the component is in a narrow container, a round radius tends to look more oval.

If you set border radius to 50, very round, we recommend that you set Text Position to left, right, or center. The text background color is always rectangular, and placing text at the top or bottom of a circular tile truncates the background.

Text Color Set the color of labels on featured topic tiles.
Text Hover Color

Set the color to use for a label when a user mouses over the tile.

In Builder, you can test your hover color in Preview mode.

Text Background Color Set the color to use for the tile background when it’s inactive. In the property’s rgba field, the default is 0,0,0,0.
Text Background Hover Color

Set the color to use for the tile background when a user mouses over the tile. In the property’s rgba field, the default is 0,0,0,0.

In Builder, you can test your hover color in Preview mode.

Max Text Background Width

Move the slider to control the width of the text background color. Width percentage is set against the full width of the tile. So 100% is the full width of the tile, rather than the full width of the browser page or the featured topic component.

No matter what percentage you set, the text background width is always wide enough to support that label that sits on it.

Text Position

Select where to place text on a featured topic tile.

  • Top Left
  • Top Center
  • Top Right
  • Left
  • Center
  • Right
  • Bottom Left
  • Bottom Center
  • Bottom Right
Text Alignment

Set alignment of text within the text background. Select Center, Left, or Right.

Alignment changes can be less noticeable when text background is narrow or text is positioned at the top or bottom of the tile.

![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Featured Topics on the Topic Catalog page. ![Featured Topic component on the Topic Catalog page.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_communities_featured_topic.png) #### See Also - [Set Up Featured Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_featured.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Featured topics highlight current, popular conversations in your Experience Cloud site. Change them regularly to keep members up-to-date and engaged.") # Featured Topics & Feeds The Featured Topics & Feeds component gives members access to Featured Topics, Discussions, and My Feed in a tabbed setting. Site members must be logged in to see the My Feed tab. The Featured tab shows the featured topics you configured in the Content Management Workspace. You can boost your brand by providing images for featured topics. Topics and images are displayed as tiles on the Featured tab. 1. Select the **Featured Topics & Feeds** component in the page you’re configuring or drag the component from the Components panel to the page. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Featured Tab Label Enter a label for the Featured Topics tab. The default label is Featured.
Discussion Tab Label Enter a label for the Discussions tab. The default label is Discussions.
My Feed Label Enter a label for the My Feed tab. The default label is My Feed.
Default Sort Order for Discussion Feed Present site members and guests with the initial feed sort order that you intend. If users change the sort order in their view, their selection sticks.
Compact Feed in Discussion Tab Use the compact version of the feed on the Discussions tab. Compact feeds show only question titles and make it easier for users to scan the feed. Compact feeds don’t support filters.
Overlay Color The color to use as a wash over the tile background color. In the property’s rgba field, the default is 0,0,0,0.4.
Overlay Hover Color

The color to use as a wash over the tile background color when a user mouses over the tile. The Linked to theme icon link icon indicates that the value is taken from the Experience Builder’s theme.

In Experience Builder, you can test hover colors in Preview mode.

Border Radius

Slide to adjust the curve of the border around each featured topic tile.

If the component is in a narrow container, a round radius tends to look more oval.

If you set border radius to 50, very round, we recommend that you set Text Position to Left, Right, or Center. The text background color is always rectangular, and placing text at the top or bottom of a circular tile truncates the background.

Text Color Set the color of labels on featured topic tiles.
Text Hover Color

Set the color to use for a label when a user mouses over the tile.

In Experience Builder, you can test hover colors in Preview mode.

Text Background Color Set the color to use for the tile background when it is inactive. In the property’s rgba field, the default is 0,0,0,0.
Text Background Hover Color

Set the color to use for the tile background when a user mouses over the tile. In the property’s rgba field, the default is 0,0,0,0.

In Experience Builder, you can test hover colors in Preview mode.

Max Text Background Width

Move the slider to control the width of the text background color. Width percentage is set against the full width of the tile. So 100% is the full width of the tile, rather than the full width of the browser page or the featured topic component.

No matter what percentage you set, the text background width is always wide enough to support that label that sits on it.

Text Position

Select where to place text on a featured topic tile.

  • Top Left
  • Top Center
  • Top Right
  • Left
  • Center
  • Right
  • Bottom Left
  • Bottom Center
  • Bottom Right
Text Alignment

Set alignment of text within the text background. Select Center, Left, or Right.

Alignment changes can be less noticeable when text background is narrow or text is positioned at the top or bottom of the tile.

![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Featured Topics & Feeds component: ![Home Page Tabs component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/home_tabs.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Feed The Feed component displays a feed of all record or group interactions, including posts, questions, system updates, and attachments. Use the Feed component to add a feed to a record, topic, group, user profile, or site discussion. The component provides a chronological, filterable list of posts made with the Feed Publisher component. Users who click a post’s timestamp are directed to an expanded view, which shows the post and all its related comments. Comments and attachments on posts appear inline below the post for desktop and tablet users. 1. Select the **Feed** component in the page you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Feed Type

Select the type of feed you want to place on your page. Types include:

  • Group or Record—Group or Record feed shows everything that is posted to a selected group or record, like an account or opportunity.
  • Discussion—Discussion feed shows everything that is posted to Navigational Topics.
  • My Feed—Shows feed items that are tagged with a topic, or a person or record that you follow. My Feed also shows all of your personal site activity. You see all shared feed items unless another person shared the item with a group that you aren't a member of. With public groups, you see the feed item that you shared despite not being a member.
  • Topic—Topic feed shows everything that is posted to a selected topic.
  • User Profile—User Profile feed shows everything that is posted for user profile feeds.
  • Bookmarks—Bookmarks feed shows everything that is posted for a selected bookmark.

Search isn’t supported on the Topic feed type. If you plan to make your feed searchable, select the Group or Record feed type.

The Group or Record, Discussion, and Topic feed types support the Top Posts sort order, which sorts feed items based on relevance. Relevance is represented as a numeric score, and certain events, such as likes and comments, increase the score of a given feed item. The feed items with the highest scores within a given container, like topics or groups, represent posts with a high level of interest.

Record ID The feed item ID. Typically, this field is automatically populated when the page loads. Leave this field blank if you pick the Discussion or My Feed options in Feed Type.
Default Filter For feed entries that you want your site members to see, select the default filter.
Default Sort Order The default sort order for the Discussion and Topic feed types. Presents site members and guests with the initial experience that you intend. If users choose to change the sort order in their view, their selection sticks.
Post Style Choose to expand or collapse post comments by default.
Let members search feeds

Choose to let site members search an individual feed.

Search isn’t supported on the Topic feed type.

Let members sort feeds Choose to let site members sort a feed. When sorting is enabled, members can sort a feed by the latest posts or most recent activity.
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Users who unfollow topics, users, or records stop seeing posts regarding those topics users or records from the time they unfollow. Older posts about those topics, users, or records are still visible on the feed. Sample Feed component ![Image of a Feed in a community.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/feed_component.png) Each feed type comes with a set of filters for limiting what’s shown in the feed. This table lists and describes filter types, and it pairs filters with the feeds where they’re available. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Bookmarks feed doesn’t have any filters.
Filter Name Description Feed Types
All Updates Shows all posts in a feed. No comments are shown. Click a post's date and timestamp to navigate to its detail view. The detail view includes all comments on the post.
  • Group or Record
  • My Feed
  • User Profile
All Questions Shows all the questions in the feed.
  • Discussion
  • Group or Record
  • My Feed
  • Topic
Questions with Best Answer Shows all questions with an answer that is marked as best.
  • Discussion
  • Group or Record
  • My Feed
  • Topic
Questions with No Best Answer Shows all questions with answers, none of which is marked as best.
  • Discussion
  • Group or Record
  • My Feed
  • Topic
Unanswered Questions Shows the questions that aren’t answered.
  • Discussion
  • Group or Record
  • My Feed
  • Topic
#### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Feed Compact Use the Feed Compact component to add a compact, scannable version of a feed to an object. Object types that take a compact feed include a record, a topic, a group, a user profile, or an overall site discussion. Feed Compact only shows questions in a feed, and is only recommended if the only feed type used is a question. The component provides a chronological list of questions made with the Feed Publisher component. Compact feeds initially show only parent-level feed posts. Clicking a post takes you to the expanded post and all its related comments. 1. Select the **Feed Compact** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Show Views Select to show the number of times an item is viewed View count icon and count. A view is counted when an item is liked, commented on, or its detail view is opened. Clear to hide the view count.
Show Likes Select to show the number of likes for each post. Clear to hide the number of likes.
Show Comments Select to show the number of comments for each post. Clear to hide the number of comments.
Compact Feed Type

Select the object or context you want to associate this feed with.

Discussion—Shows all questions tagged with a navigational topic, for example #Q4wins. Users don’t have to follow a navigational topic to see it in the discussion. And feed items that discuss the topic but don’t have the tag don’t appear in the discussion, even to users who follow the topic. Shared feed items appear in a Discussion feed only if the question posted with the shared item (the share message) includes the topic tag. Even if the shared item has a tag, it doesn’t appear in the feed if the tag isn’t included in the share message.

  • Group or Record—Shows all questions created on a record or in a group.
  • My Feed—Shows questions that are tagged with a topic, or person or record that you follow. My Feed also shows all questions related to your personal site activity. You see all shared feed items unless another person shared the item with a group that you aren't a member of. With public groups, you see the feed item that you shared despite not being a member.
  • Topic—Shows all questions that are tagged with the topic. Shared questions appear in a Topic compact feed only if the message posted with the shared item (the share message) includes the topic tag (for example, #Q4wins). Even if the shared item has a tag, it doesn’t appear in the feed if the tag isn’t included in the share message.
  • User Profile—Shows your personal site activity in terms of questions.
  • Bookmarks—Shows questions that you bookmarked.
Entity Id

The feed item ID. Typically, this field is automatically populated when the page loads. Leave this field blank if you pick the Discussion or My Feed options in Compact Feed Type.

When you add the Compact Feed to a non-object page, such as a home page, the auto populated Entity ID displays only questions asked by the logged in user. If you want to display a full group or record or feed, change the Entity ID to the ID of the group or record you want to display.

Default Sort Order The default sort order on a feed. Presents site members and guests with the initial experience that you intend. If users change the sort order in their view, their selection sticks.
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Users who unfollow topics, users, or records stop seeing posts regarding those topics users or records from the time they unfollow. Older posts about those topics, users, or records are still visible on the feed. Sample Feed Compact component: ![Compact feed component with publisher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/publisher_compact_feed.png) Feed Compact comes with a set of filters for limiting what’s shown in the feed. This table lists and describes Feed Compact filter types. | Filter Name | Description | | --- | --- | | All Questions | Shows all questions in a compact feed. No answers are shown. Click a question or its date-and-time stamp to navigate to its detail view. The detail view includes all answers to the question. | | Unanswered Questions | Shows all questions that aren’t answered. | | Questions with No Best Answer | Shows all questions with answers, none of which is marked as best. | | Questions with Best Answer | Shows all questions that have an answer that’s marked as a best answer. | #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Feed History The Feed History component displays the number of posts per day in the past 30 days. The Feed History component is visible only to users who have reporting permissions in orgs that have group engagement. You can also choose to make the component visible only to group managers. 1. Select the **Feed History** component in the page that you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Group ID | The group’s ID. Typically, this field is populated when the page loads. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Feed history component displays as Feed Posts and includes chart of feed activity by day for the last 30 days.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/feed_history_component.png) # Feed Post & Comments The Feed Post & Comments component shows the detailed view of an individual post, comment, or question in the site feed. For questions, it includes the question, all the answers to that question, and an indication if it was escalated to a case. Only users who are logged in can post an answer to a question. Users can attach a file to a question or answer post by clicking the paperclip icon. They can choose to **Select a File** from files already uploaded to the site or **Upload a File** from the user's local drive. When an answer is posted, users can click the dropdown button at the top right corner of the post to edit, bookmark, delete, or flag the post. Also, users can edit the topics associated with the post. The editing and flagging features must be enabled for the site. Select the **Feed Post & Comments** component in the page you’re configuring. There are no properties to set for this component. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Feed Post & Comments component: ![Feed Post and Comments component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/feed_item_view.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Feed Post and Comments Editing Overview With feed post editing, users can edit their own feed posts. Record owners can also edit any post on records they own, no matter who created the post. A Chatter Settings option and user permissions control the availability of the feed post editing feature. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note In addition to permissions, sharing rules can affect user access to feed post editing, including who can delete a post. The Allow users to edit posts and comments option in Chatter Settings enables or disables the Edit Feed Post feature for your organization. This option is enabled by default in existing organizations before Summer ’26 and in new orgs when you enable Chatter. All users who are assigned a standard profile can edit their own posts and comments immediately, except for Chatter Free, Chatter External, and Customer Portal users. For users who are assigned custom profiles, admins must specifically enable the permissions in the users’ custom profiles or permission sets. The “Edit My Own Posts” permission lets users edit their own posts. In orgs where Chatter is enabled, this permission is automatically enabled on standard profiles, except Chatter External, Chatter Free, and Customer Portal User profiles. To allow Chatter External, Chatter Free, or Custom Portal users to edit their own posts, clone the profiles. Enable the “Edit My Own Posts” permission in the cloned profiles. Then assign the cloned profiles to the users. The “Edit Posts on Records I Own” permission lets users edit all posts and comments on the records they own—both their own and other users’. For example, a group owner or manager can edit all posts on the group’s feed. A manager for a particular record type can edit all posts on the record. This permission is available on standard and custom profiles, but it’s disabled by default. The “Can Approve Feed Post and Comment” permission is a powerful option to consider when assigning editorial capability. Users with this permission can edit and delete the posts and comments of any person in the Chatter feeds that they have access to. Consider whether it’s useful to have a few users with this capability. But also consider that assigning this permission places whoever has it in a position of trust. Be thoughtful about whom you assign it to. This table summarizes the permissions and their default settings.
User Permission Description Available in Default Setting
Edit My Own Posts Allows users to edit their own posts

Standard profiles, except

  • Chatter External User
  • Chatter Free User
  • High Volume Customer Portal User
  • Partner Community User Profile
Disabled in all new orgs after Summer ’26. Enabled in all orgs before Summer ’26.
Custom profiles Disabled in all new and existing organizations
Edit Posts on Records I Own Allows record owners to modify their own posts and posts other users made on groups and record detail pages. Custom profiles Disabled in all new and existing organizations. However, Chatter moderators, Experience Cloud site moderators, and users with “Modify All Data” permission can always edit all posts and comments.
For users who have the required permissions, the Edit option is available from the menu on posts, comments, questions, and answers. It opens a separate Edit window, where users can modify the text. ![Edit post](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_edit_posts.png) After users save their edited version of the post, it shows an Edited timestamp to indicate that the original post was modified. ![Edited post](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_edited_post.png) If users edit a post or comment and mention new people or groups, those people and groups receive email notifications. But the people and groups who were mentioned in the original post or comment don’t receive a new email notification. Email notifications for edited posts or comments show the Edited timestamp. For Experience Cloud site users, feed post editing is available only if the site was created using either Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce or the Customer Service template. The Edit option isn’t available on system-generated posts like feed tracked record updates. - **[Enable Edit Feed Post in User Profiles or Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_feed_edit_custom_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, feed post editing is disabled on all custom profiles. To make the feature available to your users, you can either modify your user profiles or assign the permissions to users via a permission set. - **[Disable Edit Feed Post for All Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_feeds_edit_posts_disable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can disable feed post in Chatter settings. # Feed Publisher The Feed Publisher component lets customers create rich text posts on records, groups, topics, and profiles, and attach files from any of their devices. It also supports multiple file attachments, inline images, and rich link previews. The Feed Publisher component isn’t supported for articles. The Feed Publisher offers a way to add content to a site feed. It works together with the Feed and Feed Compact components. When site members create posts using the Feed Publisher, the posts are displayed in the related Feed or Feed Compact component on the page. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The way the Feed Publisher component appears in Experience Builder mobile preview mode can differ from the way it appears in display mode. For example, let’s say in Setup an admin adds actions to the global publisher layout. They add New Task, New Event, and Log a Call. Those actions appear in preview mode for both the desktop and mobile views of the publisher. But, after you publish your changes, the actions appear only in the desktop view, not in the mobile view. Only the Post action is available in both views. By default, the Feed Publisher lets users attach any supported file type up to 2 GB per file. For best performance, inline images up to 25 MB per image are recommended. Inline images over 25 MB appear at full size, and can be slow to load. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Copying inline images from external sources and pasting them into the text editor isn’t supported. 1. Select the **Feed Publisher** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Type

Select the type of feed publisher you want to place on your page. To use global publisher actions defined in your Salesforce organization, choose Global. To use an object-specific publisher layout, choose Record.

For example, use Record if you want to add the publisher to a custom group detail page. Use the publisher actions that are included in the group publisher layout for your org.

Record ID The feed item ID. Typically, this field is automatically populated with the record ID when the page loads. Leave this field blank if you pick the Global feed publisher type.
Publisher Layout Design Choose if you want to see the wide or narrow feed publisher layout design.
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Feed Publisher component, wide layout ![Image of the Feed Publisher in a community.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/feed_publisher_component.png) Example: Sample Feed Publisher component, narrow layout ![Feed Publisher component, narrow layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/publisher_feed_narrow.png) Example: Sample feed post with inline image ![Inline image in feed post](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/publisher_feed_inline_image.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Feed Sort and Filter Options for Chatter On any Chatter feed, the sort and filter options vary, depending on how your admin sets up Salesforce and which feed you’re viewing. Not all sort and filter options are available on all feeds. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
On most Chatter feeds, filters are sticky. That is, they persist until you change them. The landing feed is the exception. For the landing feed, your filter selection doesn’t persist when you leave the Chatter tab and then return to it. The landing feed is the feed that you see when you navigate to the Chatter tab. Typically, it’s a form of the What I Follow Feed. For Lightning Experience, if you haven’t followed 10 or more things, the landing feed is a form of the Company Highlights feed. The landing feed differs from the feed that you see when you specifically choose What I Follow or Company Highlights. The actual What I Follow and Company Highlights feeds have sticky filters: For example, apply a filter like All Updates on What I Follow, then navigate away. When you return to What I Follow, the All Updates filter still applies. This table shows the sort and filter options that are available with each Chatter feed.
Feed Available Sort and Filter Options
What I Follow
  • Latest Posts (Sort) Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
  • Most Recent Activity (Sort) Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
  • All Updates (Filter) Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
  • Fewer Updates (Filter) Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
  • People (Filter) Salesforce Classic
  • Groups (Filter) Salesforce Classic
  • Files (Filter) Salesforce Classic
  • Questions (Filter) Salesforce Classic
  • Reports (Filter) Salesforce Classic
  • Teams (Filter) Salesforce Classic
  • Work (Filter) Salesforce Classic
To Me
  • Latest Posts (Sort) Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
  • Most Recent Activity (Sort) Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
Muted (Salesforce Classic)
  • Latest Posts (Sort) Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
  • Most Recent Activity (Sort) Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
Bookmarked
  • Latest Posts (Sort) Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
  • Most Recent Activity (Sort) Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
All Company (Salesforce Classic)
  • Latest Posts (Sort) Salesforce Classic
  • Most Recent Activity (Sort) Salesforce Classic
Company Highlights (Lightning Experience)
  • Top Posts (Sort) Lightning Experience
  • Latest Posts (Sort) Lightning Experience
  • Most Recent Activity (Sort) Lightning Experience
Group
  • Latest Posts (Sort) Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
  • Most Recent Activity (Sort) Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
  • All Updates (Filter) Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
  • Fewer Updates (Filter) Salesforce Classic
  • Unread Posts (Filter) Lightning Experience
  • All Questions (Filter) Lightning Experience
  • Unanswered Questions (Filter) Lightning Experience
  • Questions with No Best Answer (Filter) Lightning Experience
  • Questions with Best Answer (Filter) Lightning Experience
Profile
  • Latest Posts (Sort) Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
  • Most Recent Activity (Sort) Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
  • All Updates (Filter) Lightning Experience
  • Posts by This User (Filter) Lightning Experience
Record
  • Latest Posts (Sort) Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
  • Most Recent Activity (Sort) Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
  • All Updates (Filter) Salesforce Classic
  • Internal Only (Filter) Salesforce Classic
  • Fewer Updates (Filter) Salesforce Classic
#### See Also - [Filter Your Chatter Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_subfilter.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use filters to limit what appears in your Chatter feed to the items that match the selected filter.") - [Sort Your Chatter Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_sorting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Sort your Chatter feed by the latest posts or the most recent comments.") # Feed Tracked Change Bundles We save you time and space in your feeds by bundling multiple feed tracked change updates into a quick-reference list. Bundles are collections of feed tracked change items that you see in feeds. You can see bundles in your browser. In Salesforce for Android and Salesforce for iOS, bundles appear only in record feeds. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
![Bundled feed tracked changes](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collab_feed_clump.png) Feed tracked changes (FTCs) are bundled when at least three FTCs with the same parent ID are formed within a specified time. The default time is 1,440 minutes. New FTCs are added to the same bundle, as long as the interval of the bundle is within a specified time. The interval measurement comes from comparing the created date of the oldest FTC to the newest. The default interval is 10,080 minutes. If you want to change the default time or interval, contact Salesforce Customer Support. When someone comments on a bundled FTC, it’s removed from the bundle and placed on its own in the feed. FTCs without comments or likes are deleted and removed from the bundle after 45 days. If the number of FTCs in an existing bundle drops to two, the bundle’s nonetheless preserved. If the number of FTCs in a bundle drops to one, the bundle’s deleted, and the single FTC appears on its own in the feed. Tracked feed updates that are older than 45 days and have no likes or comments are deleted automatically. The tracked feed updates no longer appear in the feed. However, if auditing is enabled for a tracked field, the tracking field audit history is still available. # Feed Tracking Feed tracking detects changes to tracked record fields and posts them as updates in the What I Follow feed. Users who follow a record see those updates in their view of What I Follow, with one exception: Updates that users make themselves aren’t posted to What I Follow. Users can see those updates in their profile feeds. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience

Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, Developer, and Database.com Editions

The Account, Case, Contact, Lead, Opportunity, and User objects aren’t available in Database.com.

Salesforce Connect external objects are available in Developer Edition and, for an extra cost, in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions.

User Permissions Needed
To select the fields to track: “Customize Application”
To view the field tracking setup page: “View Setup and Configuration”
Feed tracking is available for record fields. You can configure feed tracking for users, Chatter groups, topics, custom objects, external objects, and the following standard objects: accounts, knowledge articles, assets, campaigns, cases, contacts, contracts, dashboards, events, leads, opportunities, products, reports, solutions, and tasks. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important In Lightning Experience, most object records don't show a Chatter tab unless Feed Tracking is enabled for the object. Exceptions include Group, Site, and User objects. Sharing rules and field-level security determine the visibility of record changes in Chatter feeds. To see changes to a record in their feeds, users must have access to the record. These objects and fields are tracked by default. - Account: Account Name, Account Owner - Case: Case Owner, Priority, Status - Chatter Group: Allow Customers, Description, Group Access, Information Body, Information Title, Name, Owner Name - Contact: Account Name, Contact Owner, Name - Lead: Lead Owner, Lead Status, Name - Opportunity: Amount, Close Date, Opportunity Name, Opportunity Owner, Stage - Topic: Description - User: About Me, Address, Email, Manager, Phone, Title Salesforce deletes up to 20,000 tracked feed updates per week, as long as the updates are older than 45 days and have no likes or comments. Tracked feed updates for Case records aren’t removed. Updates to Case records are retained for audit and compliance purposes. If auditing is enabled for a tracked field, the tracking field audit history is still available. Reports on feed activities don’t include information about system-generated posts. Tracked changes in a feed can be bundled together for quick and easy reading. This image shows two change notifications bundled together. On this record, Bat Chad changed the values for the Product Owner and QA Engineer fields. ![Tracked changes clumped together in a feed](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collab_feed_clump.png) - **[Customize Chatter Feed Tracking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_tracking.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you enable feed tracking for objects and records, users see updates for the objects and records that they follow in their What I Follow feed. Many objects and fields are tracked by default, but you can further customize feed tracking to include or exclude specific objects and fields. - **[Enable Feed Updates for Related Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.enabling_feed_items_for_related_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Show feed updates on a record’s detail page whenever someone creates related records. Feed updates for related records let you track the creation of related records from the parent record. - **[Feed Tracking Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_tracking_limits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here are some limitations on tracking objects, fields, and topics. - **[Feed Tracked Change Bundles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_clumping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We save you time and space in your feeds by bundling multiple feed tracked change updates into a quick-reference list. Bundles are collections of feed tracked change items that you see in feeds. You can see bundles in your browser. In Salesforce for Android and Salesforce for iOS, bundles appear only in record feeds. #### See Also - [Chatter Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure various Chatter features and customize the Chatter experience for your users on the Chatter Settings page in Setup.") - [Feed Tracked Change Bundles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_clumping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "We save you time and space in your feeds by bundling multiple feed tracked change updates into a quick-reference list. Bundles are collections of feed tracked change items that you see in feeds. You can see bundles in your browser. In Salesforce for Android and Salesforce for iOS, bundles appear only in record feeds.") # Feed Tracking Limitations Here are some limitations on tracking objects, fields, and topics. - Reports on feed activities don’t include information about system-generated posts. - When feed tracking is enabled for person accounts, users can follow and see updates to account fields, but not to contact fields. - Feed tracking for events doesn't include requested meetings. Requested meetings are tracked only after they’re confirmed and become events. - User can follow activities and knowledge articles in a Chatter feed. However, the ![green plus](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_follow.png) **Follow** button in the Action column for activity and knowledge article list views isn’t available. - When feed tracking is enabled for Knowledge, the feed always refers to knowledge articles by the name they’re given when created. If a knowledge article is renamed, this change isn’t reflected in the feed. - If you disable feed tracking for topics, users can’t follow new topics. They can continue to follow the topics they followed when feed tracking was enabled. The followed topics count toward the maximum number of things they can follow. Use the Connect REST API to stop following topics after feed tracking is disabled. - Automated cleanup periodically removes older tracked feed updates that have no likes or comments. Tracked feed updates on Case records aren’t removed by this process; they’re retained for audit and compliance purposes. - Most feed tracking changes are reported in the What I Follow feed. However, users’ own changes to tracked fields are reported in their profile feeds instead. - When an object owner is transferred using the mass transfer record feature, the feed doesn't capture the action. The object owner change action is captured on the feed when a transfer is done manually. - When feed tracking is enable for the Activity object, the Task field can't be selected for tracking. Task is an internal Salesforce field that indicates the type of activity represented by the record and can't be updated once set. ## Feed Tracking Limitations on External Objects - Field history tracking isn’t available for external objects. - Record feeds aren’t available for Salesforce Connect external objects that map to high-data-volume external data sources. # File and Content Engagement Report See how many times a file has been downloaded, shared, liked, and commented on. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To run and view a file report Run Reports
To run and view the File and Content Engagement report, go to the file detail page, and click ![Show file report](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_show_report.png) **Show file report**. The report shows information for these fields. | Field | Number of times users... | | --- | --- | | Total Downloads | Downloaded the file. | | Posts | Posted the file to a feed. This number doesn’t count the number of times the file has been attached to comments on posts. | | Post Comments | Commented on file posts in feeds. | | Likes | Liked file posts on feeds. This number doesn’t count likes received by comments on the file post. | | Shares | Shared the file using **Share with people** and **Share with groups**. If a user clicks **Share** on a file post, it’s counted as a post and not as a share. | | Links | Shared the file using **Share via link**. If the file is uploaded to a Salesforce CRM Content library, then content deliveries are also counted. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example Numbers in the File and Content Engagement report combine the counts of all versions of a file. For example, let’s say there are 2 versions of the file. Version A has been downloaded 4 times, and version B has been downloaded 5 times. The Total Downloads reports 9 downloads. # File Limits in Chatter Here’s a breakdown of the limits for files that are attached to a Chatter post or comment. ## File Sharing Limits A file can be shared a maximum of 100 times. This count includes shares with records, people, and groups. If a file is approaching the maximum, consider creating a public link or making the file public by posting it to your feed. View the **Shared With** list on a file detail page to see who a file is shared with and their level of access. ## File Size Limits The file size limit for files that are attached to Chatter feed posts and comments is 2 GB. ## File Privacy Limits On private files, file metadata is not also private. A user without permission to access a private file can nonetheless access the file’s metadata. So, for example, through a private file’s metadata, an unpermitted user can see who’s following the private file. Salesforce doesn't remove geolocation information from uploaded images. ## Folder Deletion You can’t delete root folders from the org. # File Previews and Details View and edit file details, and report on files. - **[Preview Files and Edit File Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_previewing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Preview a file to view it without downloading. View and update key details about a file from the File Details page. - **[Remove a File from a Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_remove_from_record.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Remove a file from a single record that the file’s attached to. Unlike deleting a file, removing doesn’t affect the file on other records or posts, and the file remains in Files home. To remove files from records, you must have at least collaborator access on the file. - **[Delete a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_deleting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you delete a file from Salesforce Files, it’s also removed from all locations where it was shared. - **[View Where a File Is Shared](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_shared_with.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out who can see a file and their level of access. From the File Detail page, you can access a full list of every person or object the file is shared with. - **[File and Content Engagement Report](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_report_engagement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See how many times a file has been downloaded, shared, liked, and commented on. # File Privacy and Sharing Keep your files private, or choose from a variety of sharing options. - **[Who Can See My File?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_settings_perms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your files in Salesforce can be private to you, privately shared, or visible to your entire company. Learn how to identify a file’s sharing settings and how to change them. - **[Change File Access in Salesforce Classic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_change_permission.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** File owners and collaborators can change file permissions for people and groups. - **[Change File Access in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_change_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Decide who can view and modify the files that you own. - **[Make a File Private](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_make_private.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can restrict access to shared files that you own by making them private. - **[Make a File Private on a Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_make_private_on_record.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the **File Privacy on Records** setting to control who can see a file when it’s attached to a record. The setting is available when you edit a file’s details. - **[Share Files with Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_sharing_groups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Share files in Chatter with public or private groups so that members of the groups can view and download the files from their feed. - **[Share Files with People in Salesforce Classic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_sharing_people.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Share files with people privately and set **Viewer** or **Collaborator** access for each person that you share the file with. - **[Share Files with Libraries in Salesforce Classic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_share_with_libraries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Share files with libraries to take advantage of the permission-setting capabilities of content libraries while still using the features of Salesforce Files. - **[Attach Files to Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_attach_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Attach files to records for a powerful way to collaborate and stay organized in Salesforce. Keep information on an opportunity, account, or case right where you need it. Share relevant documents with anyone with access to the record. - **[Prevent Others from Sharing and Unsharing a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_freeze_sharing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can prevent others from sharing and unsharing a file that you own. Preventing others from sharing or unsharing doesn’t affect existing shares. - **[Share Files with People in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_sharing_people_lex.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Share files with people privately and set **Viewer** or **Collaborator** access for each person who you share the file with. - **[Share Files Via Link](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_sharing_via_link.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Creating a public link generates a URL that you can copy and share with anyone inside or outside your company. Control access to the file with a password, or set the link to expire. # File Recommendations Chatter recommends popular files for you to follow. The number of people who have viewed or downloaded a file determines the file’s popularity. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
To see an expanded list of your recommendations, click **More** in the Recommendations section. If no recommendations appear, then you already follow all the recommended files. #### See Also - [Follow a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_following.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Follow a file to see updates in your Chatter feed, including when a new version of the file is uploaded. If you stop following a file, the file remains in your Files list, but you don't see updates about it in your feed anymore.") # File Size and Sharing Limits Here are some size and sharing limits for Salesforce Files and other file types. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Feature Location Limit
Salesforce Files Files home, in libraries, in Chatter posts and comments, on a record’s Files related list
  • 10 GB in Files Home, libraries, and on a record's Files related list
  • 2 GB when uploaded in Chatter posts and comments
Attachments On a record’s related list in Lightning Experience. (In Lightning Experience, attachments are added as Salesforce files) 10 GB
On a record’s related list in Salesforce Classic 25 MB
Documents Documents tab in Salesforce Classic
  • 5 MB
  • 20 KB for a custom-app logo
Salesforce Knowledge attachments Files attached to articles in Lightning Knowledge 5 MB
Chat Chat
  • 5 MB when transferring a file in a chat
Salesforce CRM content Content and Libraries tabs in Salesforce Classic
  • 10 GB in Files Home, libraries, and on a record’s Files related list
  • 2 GB when uploaded in Chatter posts and comments
  • 2 GB (including headers) when uploaded via Connect REST API
  • 2 GB (including headers) when uploaded via REST API
  • 38 MB when uploaded via SOAP API
  • 10 MB when uploaded via Bulk API
  • 150 MB when uploaded via Bulk API 2.0
  • 10 MB when uploaded via Visualforce
Email messages, including attachments Your Salesforce-integrated email app 25 MB
## File Sharing Limits A file can be shared a maximum of 2000 times. This count includes shares with records, people, and groups. If a file is approaching the maximum number of shares, consider creating a public link or making the file public by posting it to your feed. View the **Shared With** list on a file detail page to see who a file is shared with and their level of access. To download files larger than 2 GB you can use only the REST API and the download servlet. #### See Also - [Upload Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_uploading.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Upload files to Files home, feeds, and records.") # File Updates in the Feed Follow a file to see updates about the file in your feed, view a file’s version history, and get file recommendations. - **[Follow a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_following.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow a file to see updates in your Chatter feed, including when a new version of the file is uploaded. If you stop following a file, the file remains in your Files list, but you don't see updates about it in your feed anymore. - **[View File Version History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_history.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The file detail page and the Version History list give you access to lots of useful file actions and information. - **[File Recommendations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_recommendations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter recommends popular files for you to follow. The number of people who have viewed or downloaded a file determines the file’s popularity. # File Visibility and Sharing in Experience Cloud Sites When sharing and viewing files, context matters. Experience Cloud site files are tied to the site context in which they’re created or uploaded, with a few exceptions. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
File Visibility and Sharing in Experience Cloud Sites
Who What File Visibility File Sharing
Site user Files - general

Regardless of the Experience Cloud site, users see files:

  • they own
  • shared with them directly
  • shared to an Experience Cloud site they’re a member of
  • shared to a group they can access
  • they can access within a library
  • posted to a record they have access to and when visibility on that file is set to allow them to access it
  • content added from Salesforce CMS

When you enable Chatter for your org, make sure you’ve also enabled Chatter for your users. This way, they can access all Salesforce files in your org, including asset files.

For files that are not in libraries, you can only share them in the Experience Cloud site where they were uploaded. For files in libraries that you can access, you can share them across sites when you share to a record. You can’t share files from the file detail page in Experience Cloud sites.

Prevent others from sharing and unsharing a file that you own by checking the Prevent others from sharing and unsharing option on the file’s sharing settings or detail page. Users with the Manage Experiences permission or Access Experience Management can share files across sites. For example, a file created in site A can be shared in site B.

Site user Files shared with users To view a file, the user must be a member of the Experience Cloud site the file was created in. If users can view a file, they can share it, unless the Prevent others from sharing and unsharing option is enabled.
Site user Files shared with groups To view a file shared with a group, the user must have access to the group and the Experience Cloud site where the file was uploaded. To share a file with a group, the group and the file must be in the same Experience Cloud site.
Site user Files on records To view a file on a record, the user requires access to the record. The file visibility on the record must be set to allow site users. A library file can be shared with a record with no restrictions. Use the Customer Access switch on a file’s sharing detail page to allow customers to see individual files on records.
Site user Files in libraries Site users who are members of a library can view files in that library.

To share a file with a library, you must be a member of the library.

Users with the Manage Experiences permission or Access Experience Management can share library files across sites.

Guest user Files - general To give guest users access to files in Experience Cloud sites, select Give access to public API requests on Chatter in Experience Workspaces | Administration | Preferences. To let guest users upload files in Experience Cloud sites, select Allow site guest users to upload files in Setup | Salesforce Files | General Settings.
Guest user Files shared with records When your Experience Cloud site allows guest users, they can access a file shared with a record on any entity, such as an account or opportunity. Guest users can view Notes and Attachments but not the Files Related List. Learn how to enable Customer Access for a file. For guest users, only publicly accessible files can be downloaded.
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example To share from a library to a group in an Experience Cloud site, upload the file to the Files List component in an Aura site. This is an example of uploading to the library within the context of the site. Alternatively, you can share the file with a record, or custom object that is accessible in the site. # Files Connect External Files Browse, search, and share external files right from Salesforce. - **[Authenticate to Files Connect External Data Sources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_connect_authenticate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your administrator configured a data source like SharePoint to use per-user authentication, you can provide your credentials for that system in Salesforce. - **[Access and Share Files Connect External Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_connect_share.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After your admin enables Files Connect, you can access files from external sources, like Google Drive and SharePoint, or share them through feeds and Files home. - **[Search for Files Connect External Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_connect_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Search an external data source, like Google Drive, Box, or SharePoint, right within Salesforce. # Files Home Files Home is the central location of your files in Salesforce. See all files that you’ve stored privately, view files that are shared with you, and share files with others. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Watch a demo: [![Video](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/play_btn.png)Checklist for Salesforce Files](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/doRH4wRfTeegi7Gi5BCAWi) From **Files** home, you can: - See all the files that you own or have access to, and filter your list of files. - Search for files by using filters and by entering terms in the Files search box or the search box at the top of the page. - See your favorite files and most recently accessed files under the Files dropdown. - Upload private files or upload and share files with people, groups, or via a link. - Preview a file without downloading it. - Follow a file and receive updates about it in the Chatter feed. To stop receiving updates about a file, click ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png) next to the file that you're following (requires Chatter). - To download, share, get a public link, view file details, upload a new version, edit file details, and delete files, click ![FileActionsArrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_actions_arrow.png). - If Files Connect is enabled in your org, [browse, search, and share files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_connect_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Browse, search, and share external files right from Salesforce.") that are stored in an external data source right from Salesforce. - To view the file detail page, click a file name. - To see a file owner’s profile, click the owner’s name. **Files** home provides powerful tools for working with and managing your files. ![The Files home page, showing different list views for files and available file actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/214_files_home_LEX.PNG) - To refine the list of files you see, filter your file list (1). - Access files in your libraries from **Libraries** in the left navigation panel. - Search (2) to find the files you need. In Salesforce Classic, filtering your file list also filters your search. To search all files you have access to, select the Recent filter. - Upload files to Salesforce (3). - All file types are supported, including everything from Microsoft® PowerPoint presentations and Excel spreadsheets, to Adobe® PDFs and image files. You can upload and download audio and video files, but you can’t parse or preview them. - Preview, download, share, and rename files directly from the file list (4). - If Files Connect is enabled for your org, the left navigation panel shows a section for external file sources (5). Files are automatically added to the file list when: - You upload a file. - You attach a file to a record. - You or someone else attaches a file to a Chatter feed or comment. - Someone else shares a file privately with you by using the Sharing dialog box. - You upload a file to a Salesforce CRM Content library. - Someone else uploads a file to a library that you're a member of. - You or someone else creates a content pack or uploads a web link in Salesforce CRM Content. You see only files from content packs and web links that you have access to. #### See Also - [Filter Your Files List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_list_filter.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the filters on the Files page to quickly access to your files in Salesforce.") - [Who Can See My File?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_settings_perms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your files in Salesforce can be private to you, privately shared, or visible to your entire company. Learn how to identify a file’s sharing settings and how to change them.") - [Delete a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_deleting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you delete a file from Salesforce Files, it’s also removed from all locations where it was shared.") # Files List Use the Files List component in the Customer Service template to give site members a convenient place to view and manage their files. Members can upload, sort, and filter files using the files list. Clicking a file opens the file previewer, where members can upload a new version, download, and delete the file. Filters in the left sidebar show different selections of files. The Libraries filter shows files from Salesforce CRM Content libraries, and Files Connect users can see their external libraries under External Sources. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note A preview thumbnail is an easy way to find files in mobile and tablet views. A thumbnail view isn’t yet available for desktop. 1. Select the **Files List** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Files List | Modify the number of records that display in the window, from 10 to 100. A scrollbar appears to let users scroll to see more records | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Files List component, wide layout ![Files List component wide layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/files_list.png) # Files Owned Lists on Profile Pages The Files Owned list on a person’s profile page shows the files that the person most recently attached to a Chatter post. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
The list includes files that the profile owner attached to a profile post, a group, or a record, or uploaded to Salesforce CRM Content libraries. To see available file options, mouse over the file’s name. To go to a file’s detail page, click the file’s name. Click **Show All** to see a list of all the files that the profile owner attached and uploaded. The list doesn’t include files that you don’t have access to, documents from the Documents tab, or attachments from the Notes and Attachments list. On the files list you can: - Upload private files or share files with people, groups, or via a link - Preview a file, if a preview is available - To receive updates in your feed, follow a file - To view the file detail page, click the file name #### See Also - [Filter Your Files List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_list_filter.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the filters on the Files page to quickly access to your files in Salesforce.") # Filter and Sort Your Chatter Feeds In your Chatter feeds, use the filter and sort options to see updates that are relevant to you. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Filtering and sorting your Chatter feed is useful when you want to view a particular set of posts instead of all posts. - **[Filter Your Chatter Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_subfilter.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use filters to limit what appears in your Chatter feed to the items that match the selected filter. - **[Sort Your Chatter Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_sorting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sort your Chatter feed by the latest posts or the most recent comments. - **[Feed Sort and Filter Options for Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_filters_available.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** On any Chatter feed, the sort and filter options vary, depending on how your admin sets up Salesforce and which feed you’re viewing. Not all sort and filter options are available on all feeds. # Filter Chatter Group Feeds In Lightning Experience, many filtering options are available in Chatter group feeds to help you get to information quickly. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager editions
![Group feed filters](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_groups_unread.png) Here are the filters you find in group feeds. - **All Updates**—Shows all content in the feed. - **Unread Posts**—Limits the feed to the posts that you haven’t read. To see this filter, you must be a member of the group. A post is considered read when you’ve liked it, commented on it, edited it, scrolled by it, or viewed it in detail. - **All Questions**—Limits the feed to all questions posted through the question publisher. - **Unanswered Questions**—Limits the feed to all questions posted through the question publisher that don’t have an answer. - **Questions with No Best Answer**—Limits the feed to all questions posted through the question publisher where a Best Answer hasn’t been selected. - **Questions with Best Answer**—Limits the feed to all questions posted through the question publisher where a Best Answer is selected. # Filter Your Chatter Feed Use filters to limit what appears in your Chatter feed to the items that match the selected filter. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
In Chatter, you can filter the feeds on the Chatter page, your profile, group pages, record detail pages, and search result pages. Filters aren’t available on all feeds, and some filter options aren’t available on all feeds that support filters. On most feeds, filters are sticky. That is, they persist until you change them. For example, if you select the Company Highlights feed, and you navigate away from that page and come back, your filter selection doesn't change. However, the landing feed is different. The landing feed is the feed that you see when you go to the Chatter tab. When you leave the Chatter tab, the filters don't stick. If you follow more than 10 things, you’re redirected to Company Highlights, otherwise you’re redirected to What I Follow. - In Salesforce Classic, click ![down arrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_feed_dropdown_arrow.png) next to **Show** and select a filter option. In Lightning Experience, click the filter feed icon next to the feed search field. If a filter option isn’t present, filters aren’t available for that feed. ![Filter icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/filter_icon.png) Here are some of the filters that can appear on the list. - All Updates—Shows all posts and comments from: - The people and records that you follow - Posts from the groups that you’re a member of - All [system-generated posts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Follow people and records to see updates about them in Chatter. Updates appear in feeds on profiles, groups, the Chatter tab, topic detail pages, and on record detail pages.") ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note In the What I Follow feed, you see system-generated posts for changes to the tracked fields on all the people and entities that you follow. You don’t see system-generated posts for your own changes to tracked fields. To see system-generated posts for your own changes, look in your profile feed. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important When you use the All Updates filter on a Lightning record page with custom components, you could notice a performance slowdown. To improve general page loading performance, the page loads in a specific order. Your page first loads the top feed items, then all components, then the remaining feed items. Custom components can require increased loading time, which delays loading times for the remaining feed items. - Fewer Updates - Shows all posts and comments from the people and records that you follow and the groups that you're a member of. - Hides system-generated posts from records that nobody has commented on. - People—Shows the posts and comments from the people that you follow. - Groups—Shows the posts in the groups that you're a member of. - Files—Shows posts that include: - Files that you follow. - File posts that someone you follow has commented on. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example Use the Fewer Updates filter to hide system-generated posts. For example, you’re following the Acme account, and the account executive for Acme creates an opportunity. Later, the account executive changes a tracked field on the Acme account. In both cases, Salesforce automatically generates an update about each change. Salesforce posts these updates to both your Chatter feed and the feed on the Acme account detail page. The Fewer Updates filter hides these system-generated posts in your feed, unless someone has commented on the posts. To see the system-generated posts, select the All Updates filter. #### See Also - [Feed Sort and Filter Options for Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_filters_available.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "On any Chatter feed, the sort and filter options vary, depending on how your admin sets up Salesforce and which feed you’re viewing. Not all sort and filter options are available on all feeds.") # Filter Your Files List Use the filters on the **Files** page to quickly access to your files in Salesforce. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
The Files page lists all the files that you have access to. Filters show you different groups of those files, letting you find what you’re looking for quickly. | Filter Name | Description | | --- | --- | | **Recent** | The most recent files you've viewed. | | **Owned by Me** | Only the files you’ve uploaded to Salesforce in Chatter, libraries, and directly in Files home. | | **Shared with Me** | Files that have been shared with you either by a private share or a public post to your profile. | | **Following** | The files you're following in Chatter. This filter is available only in organizations that use Chatter. | | **Libraries** | Files that anyone has uploaded to libraries that you're a member of and all files that you uploaded to your private library. Files are grouped by library name. | | **Related Files** | This filter appears in records for activity-enabled objects, such as leads, contacts, person accounts, opportunities, cases, and custom objects. Use this filter to pick a file that is already a part of the record. | #### See Also - [View Where a File Is Shared](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_shared_with.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out who can see a file and their level of access. From the File Detail page, you can access a full list of every person or object the file is shared with.") # Find and Create Asset Files in Experience Builder Upload and select images for your header, logo, rich content editor, and custom components using the file selector in Experience Builder. After they're uploaded, files are converted to packageable asset files and stored in your org asset library for easy reference and retrieval. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
  • OR
  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
To edit or delete asset files or to add asset files to the Asset Library by default in Experience Builder or Salesforce CMS: Customize Application
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce admins and community managers have access to the Asset Library by default. Standard users who are members of the Asset Library can edit and delete asset files they own. Only admins can edit and delete asset files they don’t own. To allow standard users to upload content in Experience Builder, make sure they are members of the Asset Library. 1. From Experience Builder, open the Theme panel and select **Images**. Click an image icon (1) to open the unified file selector. ![Upload images to Experience Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_create_assets_1.png) The file selector displays only image files, so you don’t have to wade through all your files to find your logo or header image. If the image file you want is already an asset file, it’s in the asset library, which is clearly marked by the Org Asset Library badge. Asset files for your Salesforce org and all your sites are stored in the Org Asset Library, so you don’t need to maintain copies in different places. 2. Select an existing file or click Upload Image to add a new one. ![File selector with org asset library](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_file_selector.png) When you add an image to your site for the first time, an asset file is automatically created and stored in the Org Asset Library. Admins have full access to the Org Asset Library and can search for, tag, and subscribe to asset files. To provide library access to users, add them as members of the library with the appropriate permissions. Users without these permissions don’t see the Org Asset Library. The Org Asset Library is available in all new orgs, and is automatically activated in existing orgs. If public access is enabled in Experience Builder at the page or site level, the **Let guest users view asset files and CMS content available to the site** preference is enabled in **Administration** | **Preferences**. This preference remains enabled as long as any page has public access enabled. If you upload images for use on site login pages, be sure that this preference is enabled. #### See Also - [Asset Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_asset_files.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Find and Endorse People Who Are Knowledgeable About a Topic Discover experts and recognize them in Chatter using the Knowledgeable People section of topic pages and the Overview tab of user profile pages.
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
The topic page shows the five people who are most knowledgeable about the topic. Ranking is based on their activity on the topic and the recognition they’ve received for the topic. For example, Chatter considers how often people: - Are mentioned in posts or in comments on posts with the topic - Receive likes on comments on posts with the topic - Receive endorsements for the topic Endorsements are a strong signal of knowledge, so if someone endorses you, you’re automatically included on the list of knowledgeable people. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Knowledgeable people are calculated and updated once a day. ![Knowledgeable People on topic detail page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/knowledgeable_people.png) To change endorsements: - Endorse someone you think is knowledgeable about a topic by clicking **Endorse** under the person’s name. If the person you want to endorse doesn’t appear in the Knowledgeable People section, click **Endorse People**. Endorse People shows the full list, which you can search. (You can’t endorse Chatter Free users, customers, or yourself.) - Remove your endorsement of someone at any time by clicking ![Remove endorsement](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/tables_stop_sharing.png) next to **Endorsed** under the person’s name. Removing your endorsement of someone doesn’t necessarily remove them from the knowledgeable people list. Other people can still endorse them, or they could already have significant activity on the topic. To remove yourself from the knowledgeable people list: - Opt out by clicking **Hide me** under your name. No one can see you on the list after you hide yourself. If you change your mind, you can opt in again by clicking **Endorse People** and then **Show me** next to your name. To see a person’s full range of expertise: - Navigate to their user profile page, and click the Overview tab. - To see topic detail pages, click a topic name. - To add or remove your endorsements, click the thumbs-up icon. ![Knowledgeable topics on user profile page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/knowledgeable_on_profile.png) # Find Salesforce CRM Content Related to Records Quickly find content files that are related to leads, accounts, contacts, opportunities, products, cases, or custom objects by using the related lists on those records. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions
To access Salesforce CRM Content:

Salesforce CRM Content User checked in your personal information

AND

Member of the library

If your organization has Salesforce CRM Content enabled, you can take advantage of Salesforce CRM Content functionality on detail pages for leads, accounts, contacts, opportunities, products, cases, or custom objects. The Related Content related list allows you to search for files, content packs, Web links, or Google docs and attach them to the record. When you attach a file, the latest version is available for the life of the record unless the file is removed. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The **Related Content** and **Content Deliveries** related lists are only available on a record if they have been added to the corresponding page layout by an administrator. From the Related Content related list, you can: - Click the content's title to view the content details page where you can perform several tasks, such as commenting and voting on content, downloading files, opening Web pages and Google docs, and subscribing to content, authors, tags, or libraries. For more information, see [View and Edit Content Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_preview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Clicking a file name on the Libraries, Content, or Subscriptions tabs opens the content details page, which is a central access point to preview content and gather information about a particular file, Web link, content pack, or Google doc in Salesforce CRM Content. Starting with the Summer '10 release, if Chatter is enabled for your organization, files posted to Chatter are also listed."). - Click **Del** next to a piece of content to remove it from the record. This action doesn’t delete the content from the Salesforce CRM Content library. - If content deliveries are enabled in your organization, click **Deliver Content** to create a content delivery. A content delivery allows you to convert documents such as Microsoft® PowerPoint and Word files into an optimized web-based version for easy online viewing. After you create your delivery, you can send its encrypted URL to any recipient, such as leads, customers, partners, and colleagues, and then track how often people view or download the content. Content deliveries are available in Salesforce Classic only. However, Lightning Email generates delivery-based links as email attachments for Lightning Experience users who have access to the Content Deliveries feature. For more information, see [Creating Content Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A content delivery lets you convert documents such as Microsoft® PowerPoint and Word files into an optimized web-based version for easy online viewing. After you create your delivery, you can send its encrypted URL to any recipient, such as leads, customers, partners, and colleagues, and then track how often people view or download the content. Content deliveries are available in Salesforce Classic only. However, Lightning Email generates delivery-based links as email attachments for Lightning Experience users who have access to the Content Deliveries feature."). - Search for related content: 1. Click **Find Content** or **Search All**. In both cases, Salesforce CRM Content searches within the libraries that you have access to. If you click **Search All**, the search results display all the content in your libraries. For the Find Content search, your search results contain content that is relevant to the record; Salesforce CRM Content searches for content with text or attributes that match the following fields: - On an opportunity, the Opportunity Name, Account Name, and all competitors and products. - On an account, the Account Name and Industry. - On a case, the Case Reason, Subject, Account Name, and Industry. - On a lead, the Name, Company, Industry, and Title. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note On a custom object, clicking **Find Content** returns search results that contain the full custom object name in the document's text or attributes. If no content meets this criterion, the search results are empty and a Search All search is used instead. 2. On the search results page, filter your results as needed by entering search terms or selecting filter criteria from the sidebar. 3. Click **Attach** for any file that you want to attach to the record. 4. Click the **Back** link to return to the detail page. # Find Your Way Around There are three primary areas where you set up, design, and manage your Aura and LWR Experience Cloud sites: Salesforce Setup, Experience Workspaces, and Experience Builder. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Developer, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
## Salesforce Setup The Salesforce Setup menu contains settings that apply to your Salesforce org. An Experience Builder site is built on top of your existing org and uses your Salesforce data. The Setup menu is where you turn on Experiences, create a site, manage user permissions, and log in to existing sites. ![Digital Experiences in Salesforce Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/salesforce_setup.png) ## Experience Workspaces After you create a site, Experience Workspaces is where you access Experience Builder, manage content, configure site settings, and monitor your Experience Cloud site. Community managers can view dashboards for groups, members, feed activity, and license usage and manage the community’s reputation system. Moderators can see which items have been flagged for review. ![Experience Workspaces](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/workspaces_navigation.png) ## Experience Builder Use Experience Builder to customize your site. Experience Cloud offers many types of sites, from community portals to online stores. Based on the template you choose, Experience Builder provides a list of pages and components that you can use on those pages. Create themes to fit your custom branding, and when you’re ready to go live, publish your site. ![Example Experience Builder Home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/experience_builder.png) # Find Your Way Around Experience Builder Experience Builder lets you quickly create and style your Aura or LWR site to match your organization’s branding. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To access Experience Builder: - From the All Sites page in Setup, click **Builder** next to the site name. - From the Digital Experiences app, click **Builder** next to the site name. - From a site, click **Experience Builder** in the profile menu. Experience Builder is available in all fully supported languages that Salesforce offers. If you change the language in your Salesforce user profile settings to one of these languages, the labels in Experience Builder appear in that language. Use the Experiences menu (1) to: - Access various workspaces to manage site analytics, login, registration, reputation, topics, and other settings. - Navigate to Salesforce Setup. - View the site after it’s published. If your site is unauthenticated, we recommend that you open the site in an incognito or private browser tab. That way, you see exactly what your site visitors see. ![Experience Builder user interface](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/experience_builder_ui.png) In Experience Builder you can also: - Drag a component from the Components panel onto your page (2). The panel includes standard components and custom ones from AppExchange. - [Theme the site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_brand.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prebuilt themes come with every template. They let you style your site with clicks, not code. Apply color, fonts, and images to your site to match your design or brand. Match your colors precisely by uploading your own logo to generate a custom color scheme. Create branding sets to change colors, fonts, and logos quickly for different audiences and needs.") to match your organization’s brand and style (3). - View the page structure and the components on the current page (4). To edit a component’s properties, select the component. - [Edit site settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_general_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Settings area to track which template you’re using, view your site’s status and publication history, and customize your template. If you’re using the Customer Service template, access your navigational and featured topic settings.") and [accept updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.communities_update_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "We introduce amazing features and enhancements with every release, so it pays to keep your Experience Builder site up to date! Typically, we automatically update your template to the latest version, so you can start adding the newest features to your site right away. However, when the changes are significant, you’re required to update your template manually.") to your site’s template (5). - Navigate to the site page that you want to edit on the Pages menu (6). You can also open the Page Settings for any page in this menu to [manage](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_manage_pages_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Pages and Page Action menus centralize all your page-related needs, from page creation to audience criteria-based page visibility and everything in between."), [create](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_create_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To extend your Experience Builder template, create custom site pages. To get the most from your Salesforce data, add custom record detail, list, and related list pages. To display individual pieces of content along with any combination of components, use CMS content pages."), [delete](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_delete_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Remove a site page or page variation that you no longer need by deleting it from the Page Action menu."), or [set the visibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_visibilty_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You define an audience by selecting criteria and the conditions under which the criteria apply. After you create an audience, you can assign it to a page variation, branding set, or component. You also can assign an audience to a component variation to personalize the content that different user segments see in the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, and Tile Menu components.") of that page. - Refresh the current page (7). - [See how your site appears on different devices](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_preview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before going live, you can preview your Experience Builder site to see how it looks in a desktop browser window or on a mobile device.") (8). - Find help and tips (9). - [Preview the site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_preview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before going live, you can preview your Experience Builder site to see how it looks in a desktop browser window or on a mobile device.") as an authenticated or guest user (10). - [Publish your site updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_publish.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Publish your Aura or LWR site in Experience Builder to make your site updates and component customization updates available to your site members.") (11). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To ensure your contributors can access Experience Builder and Workspaces in an inactive community, enable the “Modify All Data” permission. #### See Also - [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Builder lets you easily style your site, create and customize pages, add drag-and-drop components, and deliver personalized experiences to different audiences. Choose a template to quickly start your site, and then style the pages to match your company’s branding.") - [Experience Builder Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_general_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Settings area to track which template you’re using, view your site’s status and publication history, and customize your template. If you’re using the Customer Service template, access your navigational and featured topic settings.") - [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Find Your Way Around Experience Workspaces Experience Workspaces is your one-stop shop for building, setting up, and monitoring your Experience Cloud site. Access Builder and Administration workspaces to manage your site’s setup and branding. Community managers can view dashboards for groups, members, feed activity, and license usage, and manage the community's reputation system. Moderators can see which items have been flagged for review. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To access Experience Workspaces or Experience Management:
  • Access Experience Management OR Manage Experiences OR Create and Set Up Experiences
  • AND is a member of the site
To access moderation rules and criteria:
  • Manage Experiences OR Create and Set Up Experiences
  • AND is a member of the site
To customize administration settings or use Experience Builder:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences
  • AND is a member of the site
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can customize your site at any time, but if you plan on making major changes, we recommend deactivating the site first. If Experience Workspaces isn’t enabled in your org, enable it in **Digital Experiences** | **Settings** . Experience Workspaces is enabled by default for all Experience Cloud sites created after Spring ’17. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important The options available in Experience Workspaces are based on your site template selection and preferences. That’s what’s happening when some options in the following list don’t appear in your site. To display all sections, go to **Administration** | **Preferences**, and select **Show all settings in Experience Workspaces**. Experience Workspaces includes the following workspaces. ![Experience Workspaces](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/experience_workspaces.png) [Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Builder lets you easily style your site, create and customize pages, add drag-and-drop components, and deliver personalized experiences to different audiences. Choose a template to quickly start your site, and then style the pages to match your company’s branding.") Experience Builder lets you brand and design your pages. [Create and customize pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_create_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To extend your Experience Builder template, create custom site pages. To get the most from your Salesforce data, add custom record detail, list, and related list pages. To display individual pieces of content along with any combination of components, use CMS content pages."), [modify or add Lightning components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_edit_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Each page contains a collection of components that are organized around a task or function, whether it’s opening a case or searching for an article. The pages in each Experience Builder template are ready for you to use with little configuration. Add new components to your site’s pages, edit the properties of existing components, or delete components that you don’t require."), customize the site’s navigation menu, and manage page-level settings. [Moderation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderation_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Moderation allows you to empower members of your Experience Cloud site to monitor content and ensure that it’s appropriate and relevant. Set up rules to automate moderation and do the heavy lifting for you.") From the Home tab in Moderation, view your site’s home page dashboard and reports for flagged posts, comments, messages, and files. From the [Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderator_manage_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Moderation rules help protect your site from spammers, bots, and offensive or inappropriate content. Create and modify rules for your Experience Cloud site to moderate member-generated content. Each rule specifies the member-generated content the rule applies to, the criteria to enforce the rule on, and the moderation action to take.") tab, [administrators can set up moderation rules and content criteria](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderation_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on flagging for your Experience Cloud site to let members flag posts, comments, files, and messages that they deem inappropriate.") for the community. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If your home page still displays a message to install the Salesforce Experience Management package, your administrator hasn’t mapped a dashboard yet. Content Management [Add CMS content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_cms_content.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Digital Experiences App to create, manage, and publish engaging content for your Experience Builder site. Then display your Salesforce CMS content on your Aura or LWR site using Experience Builder tools. When you use Experience Builder sites together with Salesforce CMS, you can keep your brand and content consistent everywhere the content is published.") to your site and manage your site’s [Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Navigational, featured, and content topics are a fantastic way to organize information and content in an Experience Cloud site and boost SEO for your articles. Use topics to structure your site’s content or highlight key discussions. You can create topics or use the topics that organically emerge from site member posts.") and [Recommendations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create recommendations to drive engagement for your Experience Cloud site, encouraging users to watch videos, take trainings, and more. Target specific audiences and use channels to specify locations for the recommendations.") from the Content Targeting workspace. Create a navigation menu and showcase popular topics in your site from the Topics tab. Drive engagement from the Recommendations tab. Dynamically render headers, footers, banners, CSS, JavaScript, and other CMS content on your pages. [Gamification](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_gamification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use gamification tools, like Recognition Badges and Reputation, to keep your members engaged in your site. To add gamification features, make sure that Chatter is enabled for the site.") Use gamification tools to keep your site members engaged, like [Recognition Badges](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recog_badges.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Acknowledge your members’ accomplishments or celebrate with them using recognition badges. To add this feature to your site, make sure that Chatter is enabled for the site.") and [Reputation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reputation_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your reputation in the Experience Cloud site directly corresponds to how active you are. The more you post, comment, and share, the higher your reputation level is. This feature requires Chatter to be enabled for the site."). [Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_dashboards.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you invest in creating a site, community, or portal, you want to measure your investment’s performance and gain insights on how you can improve your site’s engagement. Having site web analytics and data with reports and dashboards at your fingertips can help you iterate your site’s direction. Use Salesforce and third-party analytics tools to stay up to date on your site’s engagement numbers. Some reporting capabilities require add-on licenses.") View dashboards and reports for your site. The administrator sets up dashboards that display in the Reporting [tabs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_dashboards_for_cm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use dashboards in Experience Cloud sites to measure their success. You can even map a dashboard to the Experience Workspaces Home page. Map custom dashboards or use the ones provided in our AppExchange package."). Monitor activity and take immediate action in your site from the Engagement tab using [Insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_insights_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Insights are reports that help community managers monitor activity and take action on that activity. Insights make it easier to manage day-to-day moderation tasks, encourage engagement, and drive member adoption. You can set up Insights to monitor new members, unanswered questions, newly created groups, trending topics, and even recent Chatter contributions. The main difference between Engagement Insights and dashboards are that Insights let you take immediate action on recent activity in your Experience Cloud site, and the reports in dashboards let you see trends."). [Administration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_setup_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After creating your Experience Cloud site, take care of administrative tasks such as adding members, securing your data, defining what records are shown in your site and to whom, and enabling other features such as SEO.") From the Administration workspace, you can update the basic setup of your site. Configure preferences, [manage membership](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.exp_cloud_administer_members.htm&type=5&language=en_US) and site contributors, set reputation levels and points to reward members for activity in the feed. Configure tabs, select branding properties to apply, and [customize your site’s login experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_login.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the default login, logout, password management, and self-registration options for your site. Or customize the behavior with Apex and Visualforce or Experience Builder (Site.com Studio) pages. You can also use dynamic URLs to brand your pages at run time."). Determine which pages are available to your site, [customize email templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can customize email sender information and Chatter email branding. You can also customize email templates, such as templates for welcoming new members and resetting members’ passwords. Decide how Salesforce sends emails for users with unverified email domains, and customize email templates in the user interface."), and [configure URL redirects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_url_redirects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Page redirects help maintain the discoverability and SEO equity of your sites in Experience Cloud. Learn some of the key concepts and considerations before you set up page redirection in your Aura and Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) sites."). You can also create your own app with Rich Publisher Apps, or get one from AppExchange. [Guided Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_guided_setup_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Guided setup walks you through setting up visibility, processes, workflows, record types, layouts, and assignment rules for Salesforce features. From start to finish, guided setup leads you through each step with easy-to-follow directions and navigable links to settings pages.") Configure features with Guided Setup. It walks you through setting up visibility, processes, workflows, record types, layouts, and assignment rules for Salesforce features. Each setup step gives easy-to-follow directions and navigable links to setup pages. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important If you’re an administrator and accidentally remove yourself from a site, you can’t access the Administration settings in Experience Workspaces. To add yourself back to the site or to make other membership updates, [use the API](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.faq_communities_membership_update_api.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If you set clickjack protection for your site to the level for the most protection, pages in some workspaces, including Administration, appear as blank pages. To avoid this problem, use the recommended setting. If you encounter this issue, in Setup, enter Custom URLs in the Quick Find box, and select **Custom URLs**. Click the label for the site (not the Site.com link), and reset the clickjack protection level to the recommended setting. - **[Configure Settings in Your Administration Workspace](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_miscellaneous.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure settings in your administration workspace, and enable other optional features in your Experience Cloud site such as user nicknames, guest access, private messages, direct messages, content flagging, and reputation levels. - **[Streamline Customer Support with Customer Insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_community_360.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customer Insights informs support agents working in the Service Console whether the customer has looked at the pertinent documentation. It also shows if the customer has filed a case before calling support. As a result, agents don’t suggest articles that a customer has accessed or open duplicate cases, decreasing customer frustration and improving support. - **[Update Your Experience Cloud Site’s Name, Status, and Description](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage your Experience Cloud site name, description, status, and template all from one location. - **[Key Concepts in Page Redirection in Aura and LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_url_redirects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Page redirects help maintain the discoverability and SEO equity of your sites in Experience Cloud. Learn some of the key concepts and considerations before you set up page redirection in your Aura and Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) sites. # Flow (Experience Builder Component) Flows automate business processes to collect, update, edit, and create Salesforce information. With the Flow component in Experience Builder, you can add flows to your pages. Add the Flow component to your site pages just like any other component. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
  • OR
  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
To publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
  • OR
  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin or publisher in that site
To run a flow in an Experience Builder site Run Flows
- Flows in Experience Builder sites are supported through the Flow and Suggested Actions components. - Flow creators can overwrite error messages with their own content. 1. Build a flow in Flow Builder. 2. Activate the flow. 3. Drag the Flow component into position on your site page. ![Flow component in Components panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_flow_component.png) 4. In the property editor, select the flow you want to use and any other properties. ![Flow component properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_flow_component2.png) Here’s a flow called Survey customers in a site. ![A Flow component on a community page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_flow_component_example.png)
Component Description
Flow Only active screen flows are available. Flows that were built in the Desktop Flow Designer aren’t supported.
Layout

By default, flows display in one column.

If a screen contains a Section screen component, that screen ignores the Layout property.

  • Starting in Winter ’23, two-column flow layouts are ignored. For a better layout option, add Section components to your flow screens. Each Section component lets you organize record fields and screen components in up to four adjustable-width columns.
  • If a flow screen contains a Section component, that screen ignores the Layout property.
Input variables If you see other properties, they’re the flow’s input variables. Variables appear only if they allow input access.
Pass record ID into this variable

This option is available only for Text input variables in Record pages. For simplicity, we recommend passing the ID to only one variable.

For example, when this component is embedded in an Opportunity Record page, at run time the component passes the opportunity’s ID into the selected input variable.

#### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") - [Build a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_build.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Two-Column Flow Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_considerations_design_layout.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Customize the Error Message for Running Flow Users (Best Practice)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_build_logic_fault_usermsg.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [_Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide_: Create Custom Component for Guest User Flows](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.lightning.meta/lightning/components_config_for_flow_guest_user.htm) # Follow a File Follow a file to see updates in your Chatter feed, including when a new version of the file is uploaded. If you stop following a file, the file remains in your Files list, but you don't see updates about it in your feed anymore. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
To start seeing updates, click **+** **Follow**. To stop seeing updates, click **x** **Unfollow**. In Lightning Experience, follow a file from the file detail page. In Salesforce Classic, follow a file from a feed, file detail page, or files list. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The option to follow files is available only in organizations that use Chatter. Following a file does not send an email notification. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important On private files, file metadata is not private. A user without permission to access a private file can nonetheless access the file’s metadata. So, for example, through a private file’s metadata, an unpermitted user can see who’s following the private file. #### See Also - [Upload a New Version of a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_versioning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Replace an old version of a file by uploading a new version.") # Follow Button The Follow Button component lets users follow topics, articles, and other users. In the Page Editor, you can configure the follow button component on the User Profile, Article Detail, and Topic Detail pages. This component lets users follow other users, articles, or topics. When a user views their own profile, the button isn’t visible because users can’t follow themselves. Each button instance supports its own property values. So, if you have two Follow buttons on a page, the values on each button are unique to that button. You can configure buttons to use the values you defined in your theme so that they all look the same. But each button instance remains unique. 1. Select the **Follow Button** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Followed Record ID The system supplies this value. Don’t update this field.
Allow email notifications on topics Select to let user’s receive email notifications for topic activity.
Button Text Color

Set the color of text that’s used for the button label.

The Linked to Theme icon link icon shows that the current selection comes from colors defined in the theme.

Button Text Hover Color

Set the color of text that’s used for the button label when a member mouses over the button.

In Builder, you can test your hover color in Preview mode.

Button Background Color Set the color to use for the button background when the button is inactive.
Button Background Hover Color

Set the color to use for the button background when a member mouses over the button.

In Builder, you can test your hover color in Preview mode.

Button Border Color Set the color to use for the border that surrounds the button.
Button Border Radius Move the slider to control the amount of curve to use for the button shape.
Max Button Width Move the slider to control the width of the button. Width percentage is set against the full width of the container the button sits in. So 100% is the full width of the container, rather than the full width of the browser page.
Button Alignment To set the horizontal alignment of a button within its container, select Center, Left, or Right.
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Follow button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/follow_button.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Turn on Feed Tracking for each article type you want members to follow. #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Follow Dashboards and Dashboard Components If feed tracking is enabled for dashboards, you can view updates and field changes in the Chatter feed. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group (View Only), Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To view dashboards: Run Reports AND access to the dashboard folder
Only unfiltered data is used to generate alerts. If you don't see feeds, ask your administrator to enable feed tracking for dashboards. 1. To follow a dashboard, click **Follow**. In Salesforce Classic, you follow all eligible components individually. You can choose to follow specific dashboard components. In Lightning Experience, you follow the entire dashboard. If you want to follow a specific dashboard component, switch to Salesforce Classic. 2. To follow a specific dashboard component in Salesforce Classic, hover over a component to display the ![Menu icon for dashboard components](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/component_hover_sprite_first_state.png) menu, and select **Follow this Component**. To clear the hover menu, click an empty part of the screen. To stop following a component, click ![Menu icon for dashboard components](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/component_hover_sprite_first_state.png) and select **Following**. #### See Also - [View Record Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_viewing_record_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "View the Chatter feed associated with a record you follow to see updates about the record.") # Follow Dashboards and Post Snapshots Chatter lets you track updates to your feed-tracked dashboards and post dashboard snapshots. The snapshot posts help other users follow changes in the dashboard data. - **[Follow Dashboards and Dashboard Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.dashboards_follow_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If feed tracking is enabled for dashboards, you can view updates and field changes in the Chatter feed. - **[About Posting Snapshots to User and Group Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.dashboards_post_snapshots.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you post a widget snapshot to a Chatter feed, consider who you want to share the widget with. - **[Post Snapshots of Dashboard Widgets to Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.dashboards_post_to_dashboard_feed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Post a snapshot of a dashboard widget to a Chatter feed to help other users follow changes in the data. # Follow Topics Follow topics so you can see updates in your Chatter feed. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
To follow a topic, click **Follow** in one of these locations: - Topic detail page If the **Follow** button on the topic detail page has a ![Plus sigh on Follow button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_follow_plus.png) in front of it (Lightning Experience), you have more options. To see options for following the topic and for adding it to a new or existing stream, click the button. To follow the topic from the menu, click **What I Follow**. ![Options on a Follow menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_streams_addfromtopic.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note You can find streams in Lightning Experience on the Chatter home page. - Topics list (Salesforce Classic only) You can follow a maximum combined total of 500 people, topics, and records. To see how many items you’re following, view the Following list on your profile. To stop following a topic, click **Following** (Lightning Experience) or click ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png) next to Following (Salesforce Classic). After you stop following a topic, you don’t see future updates to the topic in your Chatter feed. If your administrator disables feed tracking for topics, you can’t follow new topics. However, you continue to follow the ones that you followed when feed tracking was enabled. These topics count toward the maximum number of people, topics, and records that you can follow. To stop following a topic after your administrator disables feed tracking, you must use Connect REST API. #### See Also - [Create a Stream from a Profile or Record Detail](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_streams_createfromrecordhome.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Once you create one stream, the Follow button on profile and record detail pages changes. A plus sign appears before the button label and more options become available for adding the profile or record feed to an existing stream. There’s also an option to add the feed to a stream that you create on the spot.") # Forgot Password Use the Forgot Password component to let users request a new password. Sometimes users forget their existing passwords and need a new one. The Forgot Password component gives users the ability to get one without contacting an administrator. The user enters the username that’s associated with the account, clicks the button, and gets email instructions for resetting the password. 1. Select the **Forgot Password** component in the page that you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Check Email URL | Enter the view or path to the page that notifies the user when the password has been reset and an email has been sent. | | Username Label | Enter the text that appears in the field where the user enters a valid username, which can be in the form of an email address if users are identified that way. | | Submit Button Label | Enter the text for the button that the user clicks to make the password reset request. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Forgot Password component: ![A Forgot Password example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/login_forgot_password_component.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Gamification Use gamification tools, like Recognition Badges and Reputation, to keep your members engaged in your site. To add gamification features, make sure that Chatter is enabled for the site. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Recognition Badges](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recog_badges.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Acknowledge your members’ accomplishments or celebrate with them using recognition badges. To add this feature to your site, make sure that Chatter is enabled for the site. - **[Reputation Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reputation_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your reputation in the Experience Cloud site directly corresponds to how active you are. The more you post, comment, and share, the higher your reputation level is. This feature requires Chatter to be enabled for the site. # General Chatter Allocations Limits and allocations for Chatter features by edition and browser. ## Chatter Allocations by Feature These allocations are subject to change. Contact Salesforce for more information.
  Feature Allocation
Groups  
  Groups a user can join 3001
  Groups in your org 30,0001
  Members in a group Unlimited
  Characters in the Information field in a group 4,000
  Max size of email when posting to a group by email (including text and attachments) 25 MB
  Attachments you can include in a post to a group by email 25
Feeds  
  Mentions in a single post or comment 25
  Characters in a mention search string 500 for a person’s first and last name (combined), or for a group name
  Characters in single post or comment 10,000. In rich-content posts, tags are included in this count, even though they’re aren’t shown.
  Characters in a question 255, and the count is shown; answers can have 10,000 characters, and rich-content tags are included in the answer character count.
  Email notifications sent after you like or comment on a post 10
  Bookmarks Unlimited
  Favorites 50
  People, topics, and records you can follow 5002
  Maximum posts you can see in your feed at any given time The 500 most recent posts. This limit doesn’t apply to profile, group, and record feeds.
Files  
  File attachment size 2 GB
  Times a file can be shared 2000
People and Profiles  
  Profile photo size 8 MB
  People you can add to a chat 10
  People you can add to Chat My Favorites 100
  Characters in a Chatter message 10,000
Skills  
  Skills assigned to a user 100
  Characters in a skill name 99
Topics  
  Topics on a single post 10
  Topics on a single record 100
  Characters in a topic name 99
  Topics on articles 200
1You can join up to 300 groups and your org can have up to 30,000 groups. Archived groups count toward your org’s group limits (30,000) but not toward a user’s group membership limits (300). 2You can follow a maximum combined total of 500 people, topics, and records. To see how many items you’re following, view the Following list on your profile. Posts and comments that users make in Chatter are retained during the entire time that a customer's applicable org remains provisioned. We reserve the right to enforce limits on: - The number of system-generated tracked feed updates. Currently tracked feed updates that are older than 45 days and have no likes or comments are deleted automatically. The tracked feed updates no longer appear in the feed. However, if auditing is enabled for a tracked field, the audit history for that field is still available. - The number of email notifications that can be sent per org per hour. ## Chatter Browser Limits Some third-party browser plug-ins and extensions can interfere with the functionality of Chatter. If you experience malfunctions or inconsistent behavior with Chatter, disable the browser's plug-ins and extensions and try again. In the Spring ’20 edition of Lightning Experience on iPad Safari, check your text editors for rich text editor support. For example, check for support in a feeds publisher. If you don’t have rich text editor support—you can’t add an emoji or a hyperlink—you’re using an older, unsupported editor. Talk with Salesforce Support about bringing in the Quill editor to replace it. ## Chatter Mentions Limits You can’t mention archived groups, unlisted groups, customer groups, and private groups that you’re not a member of. If a person who isn’t a member of a private group is mentioned in a post or comment on that private group, the mention link displays as gray and links to the member’s profile page. An exception is when the person mentioned has Modify All Data permission. In this case, the link displays in blue and links to the member’s profile page. However, Salesforce security and sharing rules still apply. People who aren’t a member of a private group don’t have access to the private group and don’t see or get notified about any updates. # Generate a Manual Sitemap Refresh for Your Experience Builder Site When you go live with a new Experience Builder site or make significant updates to an existing one, you can generate a manual sitemap one time every 24 hours outside of the weekly automatic sitemap refresh. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To initiate a manual refresh of your sitemap one time every 24 hours: 1. In Experience Builder, navigate to the SEO tab in settings. 2. Click the **Generate Sitemap** button to manually generate a sitemap for your site. ![SEO Manual Sitemap Generation window in Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_generate_manual_SEO_sitemap.png) 3. Track the status of the sitemap as it processes. The status bar shows In Progress while the sitemap generates. After your sitemap is generated, the status updates to read Complete. ![Status bar for manual sitemap generation](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/sitemap_status_bar.png) ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip For the best experience, generate a manual sitemap during off-peak hours. When you add new pages to your site, these links are included in an automatic partial sitemap refresh every 24 hours. If you add new pages after you manually generate a sitemap, they’re added to the sitemap automatically. #### See Also - [Provide Search Engines with Fresh Content Snapshots](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_snapshot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Builder sites in your production org use the Content Snapshot service to generate SEO optimized HTML for web crawlers such as Googlebot, and content sharing platforms such as Facebook. The concept is common to single-page application frameworks known as dynamic rendering. Salesforce takes a snapshot when you make changes to your site’s publicly available content. This functionality works well for most updates. But let’s say you update a page with time-sensitive information, such as price changes for a flash sale. Instead of waiting, you can take a manual snapshot once every 24 hours to refresh the page content served to search engines.") - [Create a Custom robots.txt File for Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The robots.txt file for your site is automatically generated. It allows search engines to crawl your entire site. However, if you want to tell search engines not to crawl certain pages of your public site, you can create a custom robots.txt file.") - [Configure a Custom Domain for Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_custom_domain.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To provide a branded experience for users who access your external-facing Salesforce content, serve your Experience Cloud sites on a domain that you own. With a custom domain, your users access your external-facing Experience Cloud site and its functionality through your branded URL, such as https://www.example.com. Also, with the many-to-many relationship between sites and custom domains, you can serve your external-facing content to meet your branding needs. For example, you can serve content from multiple Experience Cloud sites on one parent website, or serve multiple sites on one domain through custom paths. Because you can serve multiple sites on one domain, custom domains simplify the management of your domains and your corresponding network allowlists. And even if your Salesforce-hosted site URL changes due to a My Domain change, your custom domain remains constant, reducing the number of updates required.") # Get Familiar with Your Chatter Group To see group updates, files, and members, click a group's name in a feed, in the Groups list, or on someone's profile. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
The amount of detail that you see and the kinds of things you can do on a group’s page depends on a few things. The group type; your membership, your ownership or management of the group, and your group role all affect what you can do. ## Non-Members of Public Groups If you’re viewing the group detail page of a public group that you’re not a member of, you can: - Post an update or add a comment, and click **Share**. - To join the group, click **Join**. - View group description and information. The group description and information appear in a separate column next to the feed. - View the group's members. The Group Members section shows the group's current members, including external customers who are members of the group. - View, download, and search files posted to the group. Files posted to the group feed or shared with the group appear in the Group Files section. - View the topics the group is talking about. The group's topics appear under posts in the group feed. - Search for group information. ## Non-Members of Private Groups If you're viewing the group detail page of a private group that you're not a member of, you can only: - Ask to join the group. To request to join a group, click **Ask to Join**. This action sends an email to the owner and managers of the private group. - View the group's picture and description. - View the group's members. The Group Members section shows the group's current members, including any external customers who are members of the group. ## Nonmembers of Unlisted Groups If you're not a member of an unlisted group, you can’t view the group detail page. ## Group Members of Public, Private, and Unlisted Groups When you’re a member of a public, private, or unlisted group, you can also: - Change Your Email Settings and In-App Notifications for the Salesforce Mobile App. In Lightning Experience, click **Email Notifications** from the group highlights panel to modify your group email settings. In Salesforce Classic, click **Email Me...** to set up email about activity in the group, either whenever someone posts, daily, or weekly. Selecting **Every Post** also turns on in-app notifications for groups in the Salesforce mobile app. To stop receiving email and mobile notifications for the group's activity, click **Turn Off Group Email**. To modify all your Chatter email settings, click **Email Settings** - Invite people. If your administrator has enabled invitations, click **Invite People** to invite people to join the group. For private groups, only the group manager, group owner, or users with the Modify All Data permission can invite people. For unlisted groups, only the group manager, group owner, or users with the Manage Unlisted Groups permission can invite people. - Leave the group. To leave a group, or withdraw a request to join a private group, click ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png). To leave a group that you own, you must first assign a new owner. ## Group Owners and Group Managers When you’re the owner or manager of a public, private, or unlisted group, you can also: - Add or remove group members. - Change the group photo. - Edit group settings. - Edit the Information section, To add information for the group's members, click **Add Information** or ![Edit File](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_edit.png) in the Information section. You can customize this section, including its title. - Edit the Description section. To add a description of the group, click **Add Description** or ![Edit File](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_edit.png) in the Description section. - Change member roles. - Accept or decline requests for private groups. #### See Also - [Group Files Lists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_recent_files.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Salesforce Classic, the Group Files list shows a group’s recently posted files.") # Get Ready for Profile-Based Rollout of Chatter If you’re rolling out Chatter to a subset of your users, you can manage Chatter access with custom user profiles and permission sets. There’s a little up-front work that you can do to prepare. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Before you begin, disable Chatter for your org. In Setup, go to **Chatter Settings** and deselect **Enable**. From a high-level perspective, a profile-based rollout of Chatter consists of these steps: - Salesforce enables the Chatter profile-based rollout feature for your org. - You determine who gets access to Chatter. - You review and modify existing custom user profiles and permissions sets. - Verify that in a custom user profile or permission set, the Enable Chatter permission has the desired setting. - To permit or restrict Chatter access, assign the associated profile or permission set to users. - You turn on Chatter for your org. Perform this step as a separate, final step. If you combine this step with another step or perform it out of order, unpredictable and undesirable results can occur. #### See Also - [Profile-Based Chatter Rollout Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_pbr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A profile-based rollout of Chatter makes Chatter available to a controlled set of users instead of all users in your organization.") - [Control Chatter Access Through User Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_pbr_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Modify existing custom user profiles to allow or deny access to Chatter.") - [Control Chatter Access Through Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_pbr_perm_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Manage Chatter access by modifying existing permission sets or setting up new ones.") # Get Started with Chatter Connect with people and share business information securely in real time. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Chatter Tab Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_home_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Chatter tab gives you instant access to most of the collaboration features in Chatter. - **[Chatter Desktop](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter Desktop is a free desktop application that lets you collaborate in Chatter without a browser. Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. - **[The People and Records You Auto-Follow Initially](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_auto_follow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Starting in June 2010, when your administrator initially turns on Chatter, we help get you started by automatically following certain users and records in your organization. - **[Like Posts and Comments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_like.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Like posts or comments to show your approval and receive email notifications if others comment on that post. You receive notifications only if you’ve selected to in your personal Chatter settings. - **[Reply to Chatter Email Notifications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_email_reply.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you receive certain email notifications, you can conveniently perform some actions by replying directly from your email. - **[Navigate to Chatter Email Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_email_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In your personal Chatter email settings, you can change your preferences for receiving email notifications and digests. On a group page, you can set your notification preferences for that group. - **[Chatter Email Digests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_email_digest.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Email digests conveniently summarize recent activity in Chatter so you don’t miss important discussions. You can choose to receive daily or weekly summaries of updates from your personal feed or any group’s feed. - **[Guidelines for Managing Your Personal Chatter Email Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_email_notify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Control the number of Chatter emails that you receive by choosing your most important feeds. And set the best frequency for personal and group digests. # Get Started with Salesforce and Google Apps Google Apps is a suite of on-demand communication and collaboration services hosted by Google and designed for business users. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Not all Google Apps features are available in Lightning Experience. The features that are available may not look the same as they do in Salesforce Classic.
User Permissions Needed
To view and modify Google Apps domain settings: Customize Application
To activate or deactivate Google Apps services: Customize Application
To install or uninstall Salesforce AppExchange packages: Download AppExchange packages
To export a list of users to Google to create Google Apps accounts: Customize Application
If your organization has a Google Apps account, Salesforce administrators can enable Google Docs, Gmail, and a host of Google-related AppExchange apps—customized for use within Salesforce. ## Step 1: Create a Google Apps Account Create a Google Apps account for your organization using one of the following methods: - From Setup, enter Google Apps in the Quick Find box, select **Google Apps Settings**, and click **Sign Up** to launch the account-creation page on the Google website. You are prompted to register your organization's domain name or purchase a new domain name from Google. A domain is the portion of a website's URL that follows the “www.” Follow Google's steps to configure your new or existing domain and set up your Google Apps account. - If your organization purchased the Salesforce and Google Apps Supported feature, from Setup, enter Premier Setup in the Quick Find box, then select **Premier Setup** to create a new Google Apps Premier Edition account or upgrade your existing Standard Edition account to Premier Edition. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Google Apps in Salesforce supports Google Apps business accounts but not consumer accounts. You can identify a consumer account by the “gmail.com” domain in an email address; for example, myname@gmail.com is a consumer account. The Google Apps domain you set up in Salesforce must be the domain you registered with Google for your organization; for example, mycompany.com is a business rather than consumer account. ## Step 2: Configure Google Apps Domain Settings - On the Google Apps Settings page in Salesforce, click **Edit**, then Choose a user for the Google Apps Administrative Contact field. This person is the point of contact for Google Apps users in your organization; specifically, if a user cannot access a Google Apps service, he or she is directed to contact the Google Apps Administrative Contact. The Google Apps Administrative Contact does not need to be the same person who is registered as your organization's Google Apps administrator with Google, but only the Google Apps administrator can create new Google Apps users on your domain - Next, enter the Google Apps Domain that you registered with Google. For example, if your company's URL is http://www.acme.com and you created a Google Apps account for the acme.com domain, enter acme.com in the Google Apps Domain field. Save your changes. ## Step 3: Activate Google Apps Services - In the Activate Google Apps Services section on the Google Apps Settings page, locate the Google Apps service(s) that you want to activate, then click **Edit** or **Install** to activate a service. - In the Action column, **Edit** corresponds to Google Apps services that are already integrated in Salesforce, and **Install** corresponds to uninstalled Salesforce AppExchange apps. For descriptions of the Google-related AppExchange apps, visit [https://appexchange.salesforce.com](https://appexchange.salesforce.com). ## Step 4: Create Google Apps Users Activating Google Apps services in Salesforce makes the services visible to all users in your organization, but a user cannot access a service unless he or she has a Google Apps account on your organization's domain. The Google Apps administrator registered with Google can create these additional accounts. #### See Also - [Get Started With Salesforce and Google Apps Supported](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_premier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Salesforce and Google Apps Supported feature includes a Google Apps Premier Edition account for your organization. In Salesforce, you can create that account or upgrade from an existing Google Apps Standard Edition account to Google Apps Premier Edition.") - [Set Up Google Apps in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_about.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Edit domain settings and modify Google Apps services.") - [Activate Google Docs in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_docs_activate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Google Docs™ allows you to create on-demand documents, spreadsheets, and presentations, edit them in your browser, and work together in real time with other collaborators.") - [Gmail™ in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_gmail_activate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Salesforce offers several options to integrate with Gmail. Your options depend on whether you are using Lightning Experience or Salesforce Classic.") # Get Started With Salesforce and Google Apps Supported The Salesforce and Google Apps Supported feature includes a Google Apps Premier Edition account for your organization. In Salesforce, you can create that account or upgrade from an existing Google Apps Standard Edition account to Google Apps Premier Edition. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
User Permissions Needed
To create a Google Apps Premier Edition account in Salesforce:

Customize Application

OR

Google Apps Administrative Contact

To upgrade Google Apps Standard Edition to Google Apps Premier Edition in Salesforce:

Customize Application

OR

Google Apps Administrative Contact

After you create a new Google Apps Premier Edition account or upgrade your existing Google Apps Standard Edition account in Salesforce, the Premier Setup page displays your organization's domain name, the number of Google Apps Premier Edition licenses available to your organization, and, if applicable, the status of your upgrade. ## Creating a New Google Apps Premier Edition Account If your organization does not have a Google Apps account, complete the following steps to register a Google Apps Premier Edition account and enable Salesforce and Google Apps: - From Setup, enter Premier Setup in the Quick Find box, then select **Premier Setup**. - Complete the fields in Column A: | Field | Description | | --- | --- | | Domain Name | Enter the domain that you want to register as your organization's Google Apps account. For example, if your company's URL is http://www.acme.com, enter acme.com as your Domain Name. | | User Name | This value is used to create the Google Apps administrator for your organization's account. For example, if your Google Apps administrator will be jsmith@acme.com, enter jsmith. After your Google Apps account is created, you can log in with the User Name and Password and change this value if necessary. | | First Name | This value is used to create the Google Apps administrator for your organization's account. After your Google Apps account is created, you can log in with the User Name and Password and change this value if necessary. | | Last Name | This value is used to create the Google Apps administrator for your organization's account. After your Google Apps account is created, you can log in with the User Name and Password and change this value if necessary. | | Email Address | This email address receives a confirmation notice when your Google Apps Premier Edition account is created. Google does not store this value for any other purpose. | | Password | The Google Apps administrator can log in to Google Apps with this password. | | Confirm Password | The Google Apps administrator can log in to Google Apps with this password. | - Click **Create New Premier Account**. - To enable Salesforce and Google Apps, from Setup, enter Google Apps Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Google Apps Settings**. - Choose a user for the Google Apps Administrative Contact field. This person is the point of contact for Google Apps users in your organization; specifically, if a user cannot access a Google Apps service, he or she is directed to contact the Google Apps Administrative Contact. The Google Apps Administrative Contact does not need to be the same person who is registered as your organization's Google Apps administrator with Google, but only the Google Apps administrator can create new Google Apps users on your domain. - Verify that the Google Apps Domain field contains the domain name you registered with Google. - Activate Google Apps services in Salesforce. - Create users for your organization's Google Apps account. For more information, see [Create Google Apps Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_export.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To access the Google Apps services that are enabled in Salesforce, each user needs a Google Apps account on the domain your organization registered with Google. An account includes a username and password that allow the user to log in to all Google Apps services."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The number of Google Apps Premier Edition accounts you can create is limited to the number of licenses your organization purchased with the Salesforce and Google Apps Supported feature. ## Upgrading to a Google Apps Premier Edition Account Complete the following steps to upgrade your organization's existing Google Apps Standard Edition account to a Google Apps Premier Edition account. - From Setup, enter Premier Setup in the Quick Find box, then select **Premier Setup**. - Complete the fields in Column B: | Field | Description | | --- | --- | | Domain Name | The domain that you want to register as your organization's Google Apps Premier Edition account. If you already enabled Salesforce and Google Apps, this field is prepopulated with your organization's domain name. | | Google Apps Token | The 16-digit token required to upgrade from Google Apps Standard Edition to Google Apps Premier Edition. Your organization's Google Apps administrator can access this information on the Google website. For more information, click **Retrieve Google Apps Token** in Column B. | - Click **Upgrade Existing Account to Premier**. - To enable Salesforce and Google Apps, from Setup, enter Google Apps Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Google Apps Settings**. - As needed, edit the Google Apps Administrative Contact field. This person is the point of contact for Google Apps users in your organization; specifically, if a user cannot access a Google Apps service, he or she is directed to contact the Google Apps Administrative Contact. The Google Apps Administrative Contact does not need to be the same person who is registered as your organization's Google Apps administrator with Google, but only the Google Apps administrator can create new Google Apps users on your domain. - Verify that the Google Apps Domain field contains the domain name you registered with Google. - As necessary, activate Google Apps services in Salesforce. - As necessary, create users for your organization's Google Apps account. For more information, see [Create Google Apps Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_export.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To access the Google Apps services that are enabled in Salesforce, each user needs a Google Apps account on the domain your organization registered with Google. An account includes a username and password that allow the user to log in to all Google Apps services."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The number of Google Apps Premier Edition accounts you can create is limited to the number of licenses your organization purchased with the Salesforce and Google Apps Supported feature. #### See Also - [Get Started with Salesforce and Google Apps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_getstart.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Google Apps is a suite of on-demand communication and collaboration services hosted by Google and designed for business users.") # Get the Salesforce Chatter App Salesforce Chatter is available from the Windows Store. Devices must be running Windows 10 Anniversary Edition. **Install Salesforce Chatter** The Salesforce Chatter downloadable app is available for Windows 10 Anniversary Edition users. You can download and install Salesforce Chatter from the Windows Store. Once the app is installed, launch it from your home screen and log in to your Salesforce account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If you’re not able to log in, verify with your Salesforce admin that you’re enabled to use the downloadable app. # Give Customers Access to Your Knowledge Base Through Help Center A help center is a public-access, self-service site that makes it easy for people to find answers for themselves. Instead of filing cases through customer support, visitors find the information they need from the articles that you make available from your knowledge base. You reduce the load on your customer support team, and folks get the satisfaction of finding their own solutions. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions
Use the new Help Center template to create a help center in minutes. When your help center is in place, use a guided setup to step through help center configuration. The guided setup offers links that take you to relevant locations in the help center’s user interface. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If your needs change, you can move from a help center template to another kind of customer portal. [A process is available](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_help_center_change_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Changing from a help center template to another template type is a simple process in itself. But the complexity increases with the things you must consider and actions you must take before you make the change. The complexity of a template change varies according to how much original help center content and configuration you want to preserve in the new template. Keep in mind that Salesforce partners have considerable experience with making template changes and can assist you with this process.") in the Administration Workspace for making the switch. ## Before You Begin Here are some facts to help in your decision to select the Help Center template. - Help Center offers limited support for standard components. For a list of supported components, see [Which Components Can I Use with Each Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") - Help Center is a public-only template, which doesn’t include the site login page. - Only specific object pages are fully supported, but the template lets you create other standard and custom object pages. For a list of supported pages, see [Help Center Template Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_help_center_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Help Center template offers a public-facing, self-service portal where guest users can search your knowledge base for answers to their questions. It reduces the load on your customer support staff and gives customers the satisfaction of finding their own solutions."). Before you create your help center, there are a few actions you can take to prepare the way. **Enable Salesforce Knowledge in Your Org** Before you can create a help center, Knowledge must be enabled for your org, and you must enable the Knowledge org preference. It’s also useful to have a robust collection of Knowledge articles with a focus on solutions to common problems. Ideally, you already have Knowledge enabled along with a large collection of helpful articles. The main purpose of your help center is to give the public easy access to this useful information. **Plan your knowledge base and set up visibility for your data categories** The simpler your data is structured, the easier your help center is to navigate. Make the right content available to the public. You can choose the types of articles to make public so nothing sensitive or proprietary is at risk. **List the topics you intend to cover in your help center** Topics are the foundation of your help center. They make it easy for customers to discover all the information that you provide about a given subject. Talk to your customer support team about the things people ask about most. Base your Featured Topics selection on the most frequently asked questions. If you like, your topics can have a hierarchical structure—for example, you can set up topics with subtopics. **Set up an article layout specifically for your help center** The way an article is laid out can affect how easy it is to access the article’s data. Don’t hide the lead. Consider offering a summary section at the top so customers can get to basic information quickly. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note In Summer ’18, we increased the limits on articles and translation languages for some editions. It’s useful to know for your help center planning. - Essentials: 500 Articles, 1 Language - Enterprise: 50 K Articles, 5 Languages - Unlimited 150 K Articles, 10 Languages **Gather your resources** Upload the text and image files you plan to use in your help center to your org. - For the Featured Topics component, upload 250-by-250-pixel images—one for each featured topic. You can have up to 25 featured topics, but consider using fewer to keep your help center easy to navigate. - Upload images for your help center's logo, login page background, and page header. Your help center images are a branding opportunity, so make them attractive and representative of your brand. The header can be a GIF, JPG, or PNG file with a maximum file size of 20 KB. - Upload an HTML file for your page footer. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Your default view of the help center includes the footer: Powered by Salesforce. You can easily delete it or replace it with your own footer content. #### See Also - [Knowledge Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.knowledge_settings.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Create a Help Center](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_help_center_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up a help center to give guest users access to the knowledge articles that you choose. Help users find solutions, and give them a way to contact you when the answer isn’t available. This topic is for you if your org uses Classic Knowledge.") - [Organize Experience Cloud Sites with Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Navigational, featured, and content topics are a fantastic way to organize information and content in an Experience Cloud site and boost SEO for your articles. Use topics to structure your site’s content or highlight key discussions. You can create topics or use the topics that organically emerge from site member posts.") - [Set Up Featured Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_featured.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Featured topics highlight current, popular conversations in your Experience Cloud site. Change them regularly to keep members up-to-date and engaged.") - [Automatically Assign Topics to Articles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_automatic_topic_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Transport all your hard work of organizing Salesforce Knowledge in your Experience Cloud site, and boost SEO for your Knowledge articles, by mapping topics to data categories. All articles published with a specific data category are tagged with the topics you specify. Articles added to the data category in the future are also tagged. All articles with assigned topics are included in search results.") - [Contact Support Form](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_contact_support_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Contact Support Form allows guest and authenticated users to create cases from a site. It works with the Case Deflection component to help site members find articles and discussions to answer questions as text is being entered into the form.") - [Configure Digital Experiences Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Manage settings that apply to all sites built on Experience Cloud.") - [Salesforce Knowledge Help and Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.knowledge_map.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Plan Your Knowledge Base in Salesforce Classic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.knowledge_customizing.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Configure the Guest User Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.rss_config_guest_user_profile.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Knowledge Article Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.knowledge_article_types_manage.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Give Thanks to Your Coworkers in Chatter Recognize your coworkers with badges and post your thanks directly to their Chatter feed. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: All Editions that have Chatter enabled.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The Chatter Free license has limited functionality with Thanks features. Rewards features require a WDC license. This includes giving, creating, or receiving badges tied to rewards. Thank someone if they’ve done a great job or to recognize an achievement. 1. From the Chatter publisher, click **Thanks**. If **Thanks** isn’t displayed, click **More** and select **Thanks** from the publisher’s drop-down menu. 2. Type the name of the person you want to thank. Currently, you can only thank one person at a time, but you can mention other people in your post’s message. 3. Select **Change Badge** to select a different badge for your post or keep the default badge. You can choose from twelve pre-defined badges. Select the badge image to see more information about the badge. 4. Type a message for the person you’re thanking. 5. Select your audience. - **My Followers** to post to all your followers - **A Group** to post to a specific group. Search for the group and select the group from the list. The person you’re thanking is @mentioned at the beginning of the post’s message. When you post to a private group, only the group’s members can see your post to the group. However, the badge will also appear publicly on the Recognition tab of the recipient’s profile. 6. Click **Share**. Your Thanks post appears in your feed and the feed of the person you’re thanking. If you’re posting to a public group or a record page, the post appears on the group or record feed and their profile. If you’re posting to a private group, only members of the private group can see your post to the group. However, the badge will also appear publicly on the Recognition tab of the recipient’s profile. # Give Users Instant Context with Highlight-to-Ask With Highlight-to-Ask, Experience Cloud site users can highlight text in a knowledge article and ask the Agentforce Service agent a question based on the context. This functionality is an alternative to the Enhanced Chat component on your Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Aura and LWR Experience Cloud Sites
Available in: Enhanced Chat with the Einstein for Service, Einstein Platform, Community, Community Plus, or Agentforce Service Agent add-on
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Foundations or Agentforce 1 Editions. Access to some standard agent actions requires additional add-on licenses
- **[Configure Highlight-to-Ask on Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_context_aware_quick_chat_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To let users ask Agentforce questions about highlighted text in knowledge articles, configure the Context-Aware Quick Chat Lightning Web Component on your Experience Cloud site. Passing context makes sure your users get in-context questions powered by an Agentforce Service agent. The Agentforce Service agent provides immediate, relevant answers without leaving the page. - **[Ask Agentforce About Highlighted Text on an Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_context_aware_quick_chat_start.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With Highlight-to-Ask, you can ask quick, contextual questions directly from a knowledge article on an Experience Cloud site to get accurate answers from your Agentforce Service agent. The agent combines your highlighted text and browsing history to provide more accurate responses. # Global Search Box The Global Search Box component lets you expose global search in your Experience Builder site. Let your users search for any object available to them. Autocomplete search results are based on the most recently used objects and records by the user, the same as global search in your org. The search accounts for partially matching terms and non-adjacent terms. 1. Select the **Global Search Box** component in the page you’re configuring. In the Partner Central template, for example, this box is on the Home page. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Placeholder Text for Search Field | Specify the text that appears in the search box. The default text is Search... | | Objects in Autocomplete Results | Click **Add** to add searchable Salesforce objects to your site’s autocomplete results. To edit an object, click the object name. In the edit window, you can change to another type of object and you can mark the object as **Publicly available**. To select a different object type, click the object name and select from the list. To make results of that object type available to guest users, select **Publicly available**. | | Maximum Autocomplete Results | Enter the maximum number of autocomplete results displayed to the user during a search. The default is 5. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Global Search Box component in Partner Central: ![Global Search Box component in Partner Central](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/global_search_no_publisher.png) With global search from your internal org, you can get uneven results when searching for a site User record. Here’s why and what you can do about it. Each site has a unique network ID. When you create a site user through **Contact record** | **Create External User**, the new User record is assigned to a site's network ID. Global search looks for records in the internal org, which has a different network ID than the site. A global search doesn't search inside sites. Since the User record is associated with a site network ID, global search doesn't return results for that record. The workaround is to create User records in the internal org, and then associate the records to a site. You can associate an internal User record to a site by linking the internal record to a Contact record. After you forge the link, you can find the User record through global search. The User record's network ID is now associated with the internal org. #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") - [Enable Search Autocomplete for Guest Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_search_autocomplete_guest.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Sometimes you want your Experience Cloud site’s guest users to benefit from the suggestions that come from autocomplete on their search terms. To make it happen, you must explicitly make result types publicly available. For example, when you want guest users to see suggestions for Knowledge articles, you can set up your search component so that Knowledge results are public. After you set up autocomplete, search shows any Knowledge articles that match a guest user’s search terms in autocomplete suggestions.") # Global Search for Peer-to-Peer Communities Global Search for Peer-to-Peer Communities lets your users search for articles, discussions, and any object available to your site members and made searchable. The component is separate and distinct from the overall header, making it easy to customize to a site’s needs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Global Search for Peer-to-Peer Communities component replaces the Search & Post Publisher component, which was deprecated in Winter ’18. Autocomplete search accounts for partially matching terms and non-adjacent terms. 1. In the page that you’re configuring, select the **Global Search for Peer-to-Peer Communities** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Placeholder Text for Search Field | Enter the text that appears in the search box. The default text is Search... | | Autocomplete Search | Click to expand the section with autocomplete search properties. | | Use autocomplete in searches | Select to let users see suggested search results as they type search terms. | | Maximum Autocomplete Results | Enter the maximum number of suggested results displayed on each tab during a search. The default is 6. An equal number of questions, articles, and objects are displayed in the combined results tab. If a type doesn’t have enough results, results of other types are displayed to reach the maximum number. This functionality is available only in the Winter '16 and later versions of Experience Builder templates. | | Limit autocomplete search results to Discussions and Articles | Select to show only discussions and articles in autocomplete results. | | Objects in Autocomplete Results | Click **Add** to add searchable Salesforce objects to your site’s autocomplete results. To edit an object, click the object name. In the edit window, you can change to another type of object and you can mark the object as **Publicly available**. To select a different object type, click the object name and select from the list. To make results of that object type available to guest users, select **Publicly available**. | | Ask Experience | Click to expand the section with properties regarding asking the site. | | Show footer during search | Select to display the footer that gives members an option to ask the site a question. | | Post to Ask the Experience | Enter the text that invites users to post a question to the site or to customer support. The default is: Don’t see what you're looking for? | | Create Your Question Prompt | Enter the text that users click to ask a question. The default is: Ask a question. | | Create Your Sign-In Prompt | Enter the text that directs users to a login page before they ask a question. The default is: Sign in to ask a question. | | Allow members to add topics | Select to show a topic area at the bottom of the question and to allow members to add topics. | | Expand Details section by default | Show the full question Details section. Users can collapse and expand this section as they choose. | With global search from your internal org, you can get uneven results when searching for a site User record. Here’s why and what you can do about it. Each site has a unique network ID. When you create a site user through **Contact record** | **Create External User**, the new User record is assigned to a site's network ID. Global search looks for records in the internal org, which has a different network ID than the site. A global search doesn't search inside sites. Since the User record is associated with a site network ID, global search doesn't return results for that record. The workaround is to create User records in the internal org, and then associate the records to a site. You can associate an internal User record to a site by linking the internal record to a Contact record. After you forge the link, you can find the User record through global search. The User record's network ID is now associated with the internal org. #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") - [Enable Search Autocomplete for Guest Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_search_autocomplete_guest.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Sometimes you want your Experience Cloud site’s guest users to benefit from the suggestions that come from autocomplete on their search terms. To make it happen, you must explicitly make result types publicly available. For example, when you want guest users to see suggestions for Knowledge articles, you can set up your search component so that Knowledge results are public. After you set up autocomplete, search shows any Knowledge articles that match a guest user’s search terms in autocomplete suggestions.") # Global Search Results The Global Search Results component displays search results from across the site. The results shown are based on search terms entered in the Search Publisher and can be displayed in one list or in multiple tabs. 1. Select the **Global Search** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Search Term | The system supplies this search term to search across the site. | | Show the All results tab | To show search results in one list under All, check the box. | | Allow search results filtering | To allow search result filtering, check the box. | | Object | Add or remove tabs to customize which lists search results are displayed in. | | Publically Available | To make the object publicly available for all users, including Guest users, check the box. | | Show search results from all feeds, including questions, posts, and comments | For Discussions objects only. To show expanded search results from all Chatter feeds, check the box. Search results from all feeds use the expanded feed, rather than the compact feed. | ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important To allow your users to find a custom object’s records when they search, in Salesforce setup create a custom tab set to Default On or Default Off. Creating a custom tab enables the custom object's **Allow Search** setting. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To see results from all feed types in a site (including questions and posts on records), select the **Show search results from all feeds, including questions, posts, and comments** option on the Discussions tab. Global Search Results shown in the site: ![Global Search Results component used in the community](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_networks_global_search.png) With global search from your internal org, you can get uneven results when searching for a site User record. Here’s why and what you can do about it. Each site has a unique network ID. When you create a site user through **Contact record** | **Create External User**, the new User record is assigned to a site's network ID. Global search looks for records in the internal org, which has a different network ID than the site. A global search doesn't search inside sites. Since the User record is associated with a site network ID, global search doesn't return results for that record. The workaround is to create User records in the internal org, and then associate the records to a site. You can associate an internal User record to a site by linking the internal record to a Contact record. After you forge the link, you can find the User record through global search. The User record's network ID is now associated with the internal org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note In a B2B Commerce store, when configuring the types of results to return with a Global Search, don't include Product2 type objects. Global Search doesn't respect the store's user entitlements. So buyers could see products that they're not entitled to see. The Results Layout component respects user entitlements. You can use Results Layout for products and Global Search for things like cases, articles, and feeds. #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") - [How Search Crowding Affects Search Results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.search_crowding_considerations.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Gmail™ in Salesforce Salesforce offers several options to integrate with Gmail. Your options depend on whether you are using Lightning Experience or Salesforce Classic. ### Required Editions
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
User Permissions Needed
Activating Gmail options in Salesforce: Customize Application
## Gmail Integration Options in Lightning Experience In Lightning Experience, the following options are available to log emails and use Gmail: | Option | Description | | --- | --- | | Send Through Gmail | For reps who spend most of their time in Salesforce, but want to use a Gmail account to send emails. Emails are composed in Salesforce, but are sent through a connected Gmail account, and appear in the Gmail Sent Folder. When Send through Gmail is enabled, the Activity History on leads and contacts includes a Compose Gmail button. Emails are logged to the records the email was sent from. See [Send Email Through Gmail or Office 365 in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.email_send_through_external.htm&type=5&language=en_US). | | Gmail Integration | For reps who spend most of their time in their Gmail account. When emails are sent, reps select which Salesforce records to log the emails to. See [Gmail Integration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.email_int_user_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US). | | Einstein Activity Capture | For users who prefer to have emails logged automatically. Einstein logs email activity from a connected client or device, including Gmail. See [Einstein Activity Capture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.einstein_sales_aac.htm&type=5&language=en_US). | ## Gmail Integration Options in Salesforce Classic In Salesforce Classic, you can integrate Gmail to Salesforce in the following ways: - Gmail to Salesforce - Gmail Buttons and Links ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The Gmail integration is also available for Salesforce Classic users. See [Gmail Integration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.email_int_user_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Gmail to Salesforce lets you log emails automatically. It also lets you log chats you send from your Mails account as activities on leads, contacts, opportunities, and other records that support activity history. It’s important to know that after you activate Gmail to Salesforce, you can’t deactivate it. To activate Gmail to Salesforce: - From Setup, enter Email to Salesforce in the Quick Find box, then select **Email to Salesforce**. Confirm that it’s activated. - From Setup, enter Google Apps Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Google Apps Settings**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important After you activate a Google Apps service in Salesforce, it’s visible to all your Salesforce users. To use these services, your users need Google Apps accounts on your domain. For more information, see [Get Started with Salesforce and Google Apps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_getstart.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Google Apps is a suite of on-demand communication and collaboration services hosted by Google and designed for business users."). - Set a Google Apps Administrative Contact and Google Apps Domain, then save your changes. Gmail Buttons and Links adds **Gmail** links next to email fields on all records and adds **Compose Gmail** buttons in Activity History on leads and contacts. When you select a Gmail link or **Compose Gmail**, Salesforce automatically logs you in to your Gmail account and automatically populates the To field. If Gmail to Salesforce is activated, Salesforce also populates the BCC field with your Email to Salesforce address. To activate Gmail Buttons and Links: - From Setup, enter Google Apps in the Quick Find box, then select **Google Apps Settings**. - In the Activate Google Apps Services list, click **Edit** next to Gmail Buttons and Links. - To activate Gmail Buttons and Links, select Active. - To add **Gmail** links next to all email fields (except email fields on pages under Setup), select Gmail Links - To add **Compose Gmail** buttons in Activity History on leads and contacts, select Gmail Buttons. - Read and indicate whether you agree to the Terms of Use. - Click **Save**. If you use Gmail Buttons and Links without Gmail to Salesforce, you can still use the Gmail links on contacts and leads. But keep in mind that Salesforce doesn’t log emails you send from your Gmail account. Salesforce also doesn’t automatically populate the BCC field on the Compose Mail window with an Email to Salesforce address. #### See Also - [Get Started with Salesforce and Google Apps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_getstart.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Google Apps is a suite of on-demand communication and collaboration services hosted by Google and designed for business users.") - [Gmail Help](http://support.google.com/mail/?hl=en) # Google Apps Enable Google apps like Google Docs, Gmail, and Google-related AppExchange apps—customized for use within Salesforce. - **[Get Started with Salesforce and Google Apps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_getstart.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Google Apps is a suite of on-demand communication and collaboration services hosted by Google and designed for business users. - **[Get Started With Salesforce and Google Apps Supported](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_premier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Salesforce and Google Apps Supported feature includes a Google Apps Premier Edition account for your organization. In Salesforce, you can create that account or upgrade from an existing Google Apps Standard Edition account to Google Apps Premier Edition. - **[Set Up Google Apps in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_about.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit domain settings and modify Google Apps services. - **[Create Google Apps Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_export.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To access the Google Apps services that are enabled in Salesforce, each user needs a Google Apps account on the domain your organization registered with Google. An account includes a username and password that allow the user to log in to all Google Apps services. - **[Activate Google Docs in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_docs_activate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Google Docs™ allows you to create on-demand documents, spreadsheets, and presentations, edit them in your browser, and work together in real time with other collaborators. - **[Gmail™ in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_gmail_activate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce offers several options to integrate with Gmail. Your options depend on whether you are using Lightning Experience or Salesforce Classic. - **[Use Google Talk in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_talk_activate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Google Talk within Salesforce is no longer available. Learn how to deactivate it. # Google Apps Integrate Google apps like Google Docs and Gmail with Salesforce. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: all editions except Database.com
- **[Google Apps Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_apps_about.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Google Apps™ is a suite of on-demand communication and collaboration services hosted by Google and designed for business users. Salesforce integrates key Google Apps services and provides several AppExchange apps that enhance and customize Google-related functionality. - **[Use Google Docs in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_docs_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Google Docs™ to create and share on-demand documents, presentations, and spreadsheets (“Google docs”) and see your changes in real time as you collaborate with other users. Because your content is stored within Google, there is no need to manage versions or send attachments by email—simply log in with your Google Apps account and view the current document or its revision history. - **[Add Google Docs to Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_docs_creating.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add an existing Google doc to any record or library in Salesforce. - **[Contribute Google Docs to Salesforce CRM Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_googledoc_contribute.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add Google Docs to libraries in Salesforce to leverage the permission setting capabilities of Salesforce CRM Content # Google Apps Overview Google Apps™ is a suite of on-demand communication and collaboration services hosted by Google and designed for business users. Salesforce integrates key Google Apps services and provides several AppExchange apps that enhance and customize Google-related functionality. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
Not all Google Apps features are available in Lightning Experience. Those that are available may not look the same as they do in Salesforce Classic. The following services for Google Apps are integrated with Salesforce and require a simple activation by a Salesforce administrator. ## Add Google Docs to Salesforce Google Docs™ allows you to create on-demand documents, spreadsheets, and presentations, edit them in your browser, and work together in real time with other collaborators. When the Add Google Docs to Salesforce service is activated, you can: - Use the Google Docs, Notes, & Attachments or Google Docs & Attachments related list on any Salesforce record to create, edit, or view Google docs and associate them to a record. - Share a Google doc with any Google Apps user in your organization. - Associate Google docs with Salesforce records even when you are not working in Salesforce by using the **Add Google Doc to Salesforce** browser button. - Add Google docs to Salesforce CRM Content, which allows you to manage all types of content in a centralized location. ## Gmail to Salesforce Gmail™ is a Web-based email application that operates on all standard browsers and can be used with your company's domain. Use Gmail to Salesforce to automatically log emails you send from your Gmail account as activities on lead and contact records in Salesforce. ## Gmail Buttons and Links Gmail Buttons and Links adds **Gmail** links next to email fields on all records and adds **Compose Gmail** buttons in Activity History on leads and contacts. When you select a Gmail link or **Compose Gmail**, Salesforce automatically logs you in to your Gmail account and automatically populates the To field. If Gmail to Salesforce is activated, Salesforce also populates the BCC field with your Email to Salesforce address. # Grant Channel Account Managers Access to Partner Fund Allocations Create a permission set to grant channel account manager permissions on Partner Fund Allocations. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create permission sets Manage Profiles and Permission Sets
To assign permission sets Assign Permission Sets
If you have a Partner License and have enabled Experience Cloud sites, Market Development Fund objects are available in your org. Create a permission set that gives the channel account managers Create, Read, and Update permissions on Partner Fund Allocations. 1. From Setup, enter Permission in the Quick Find box, then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter your permission set information. 4. Select the channel account manager profile for the type of user that this permission set is assigned to # Grant Channel Account Managers Access to Partner Marketing Budgets Create a permission set that gives the channel account managers Create, Read, and Update permissions on Partner Marketing Budgets. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create permission sets Manage Profiles and Permission Sets
To assign permission sets Assign Permission Sets
If you have a Partner License and have enabled Experience Cloud sites, Market Development Fund objects are available in your org. 1. From Setup, enter Permission in the Quick Find box, then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter your permission set information. 4. Select the channel account manager profile for the type of user that this permission set is assigned to # Grant Channel Account Managers and Partner Users Access to Partner Fund Claims Create a permission set for your channel account manager (CAM) or financial department so they can manage and approve and reimburse fund claims. Create another permission set for your partner users so they can submit fund claims. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create permission sets Manage Profiles and Permission Sets
To assign permission sets Assign Permission Sets
Create two permission sets. Grant Create, Read, Update, and Delete permissions on Fund Claims to the channel manager. Grant channel partner users Create, Update, and Read on Fund Claims. 1. From Setup, enter Permission in the Quick Find box, then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Create a permission set for the channel account manager. 4. Select the channel account manager profile for the type of user that this permission set is assigned to for one of your permission sets. 5. Create a permission set for the partner user, giving them only Create, Read, and Update access to Fund Claims. # Grant Channel Account Managers and Partner Users Access to Partner Fund Requests Create a permission set for your channel account manager (CAM) or financial department so they can manage and approve fund requests. Create another permission set for your partner users so they can submit fund requests. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create permission sets Manage Profiles and Permission Sets
To assign permission sets Assign Permission Sets
Create two permission sets. Grant Create, Read, Update, and Delete permissions on Fund Requests to the channel manager. Grant channel partner users Create, Update, and Read on Fund Requests. 1. From Setup, enter Permission in the Quick Find box, then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Create a permission set for the channel account manager. 4. Select the channel account manager profile for the type of user that this permission set is assigned to for one of your permission sets. 5. Create a permission set for the partner user, giving them only Create, Read, and Update access to Fund Requests. # Ground Agentforce Service Agent in Customer Context Configure your agent to initialize conversations using the user identity, recent activity, and pending tasks. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Available in: LWR and Aura
Available in: Available in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Foundations or Agentforce 1 Editions. Access to some standard agent actions requires additional add-on licenses.
User Permissions Needed
To create and manage Agentforce Service agents: Manage Agentforce Service Agents permission set AND Manage AI Agents To let the agent user securely access data and perform actions, see Best Practices for Agent User Permissions.
Grounding the agent in the Personalization API creates a greeting that references the specific context of the user. 1. In the Agentforce Builder, select your **Agentforce Service agent**. 2. Select the **Init action**. 3. Add a step to call the Personalization API. 4. Configure the step to retrieve activityEvents and the toDoList. 5. Use a Prompt Template to merge these signals into a greeting. 6. Select **Save** and **Activate** the agent. # Group The Group component displays all the content in a group using a single composite component. It includes the group banner, which includes the member and owner actions, the group feed, description, and related lists (group members and files). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). When you add groups to your site navigation menu, clicking the Groups item directs site members to a list of groups. Clicking a group in the group list loads the Group Detail page, which uses this component by default. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - Add the Add Member action to the group publisher for users to access it from the banner. - For optimal display, choose a wide column width when using this component on a custom page. 1. Select the **Group** component on the page you’re configuring. By default, this component is on the Group Detail page. You must have at least one group in your site to view the Group Detail page and modify its components. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Group ID | The ID of the group. This value is automatically populated when the group is displayed. | | Feed Tab Label | The label used for the group feed tab on mobile devices. The default text is Feed. The label you specify here doesn’t affect labels on desktop browsers. | | Details Tab Label | The label used for the group details tab on mobile devices. The default text is Details. The label you specify here doesn’t affect labels on desktop browsers. | | Related Tab Label | The label used for the related lists tab on mobile devices. The default text is Related. The label you specify here doesn’t affect labels on desktop browsers. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_warning.png) Warning Avoid spamming new group members in a community, especially if you are adding group members en masse. Deselect the following org-wide Chatter email notifications: **Allow Emails** and **Allow Posts via Email**. Access these settings by searching Email Settings in the Quick Find search box in Salesforce Setup. Sample Group component: ![Group component on group detail page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/group_component.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Group component is optimized to be responsive across all devices. If you want more control over the placement of group content, you can use separate components to create a custom layout. Use the Group Banner, Group Detail, Group Related List, Feed Publisher, and the Feed or Feed Compact components to create a custom group page. However, creating a custom group page does not guarantee optimal display and responsiveness across desktop and mobile devices. #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Group Banner Use the Group Banner component on custom group detail pages for your site. This component displays the group name, the group photo, the Join Group and Leave Group buttons, and other action buttons for group owners, managers, and members. Use the Group Banner component with the Group Detail, Group Related List, Feed Publisher, and the Feed or Feed Compact components to create a custom group detail page. Creating a custom group detail page does not guarantee optimal display and responsiveness across all desktop and mobile devices. We recommend using the Group component instead, which is a single composite component that displays all of this content. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - Add the Add Member action to the group publisher for users to access it from the banner. - For optimal display, choose a wide column width when using this component. 1. Select the **Group Banner** component on the page you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Group ID | The ID of the group. This value is automatically populated when the group is displayed. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Group Banner component: ![Group banner image with the group photo and action buttons](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/group_banner.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Group Detail Use the Group Detail component on custom group detail pages for your site. This component displays the content from the group description and information fields along with the name of the group owner. Use the Group Detail component with the Group Banner, Group Related List, Feed Publisher, and the Feed or Feed Compact components to create a custom group detail page. Creating a custom group detail page does not guarantee optimal display and responsiveness across all desktop and mobile devices. We recommend using the Group component instead, which is a single composite component that displays all of this content. 1. Select the **Group Detail** component on the page you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Group ID | The ID of the group. This value is automatically populated when the group is displayed. | | Header label | The label for the group details section. Affects both the desktop and mobile view. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Group Detail component: ![Group Detail component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/group_description.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Group Files Lists In Salesforce Classic, the Group Files list shows a group’s recently posted files. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
To see available file options, mouse over the file’s name. To go to a file’s detail page, click the file’s name. To expand the files list, click **Show All**. On the files list you can: - See a list of all the files that are posted to a group, search for a specific file, and perform actions on a file. - Search for files that have been posted to the group. The list includes files that you and other people have attached to the Chatter feed on the group. - Upload private files or upload and share files with people, groups, or via a link. - Preview a file without downloading it. - Follow a file and receive updates about it in the Chatter feed. To stop receiving updates about a file, click ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png) next to the file that you're following (requires Chatter). - To download, share, get a public link, view file details, upload a new version, edit file details, and delete files, click ![FileActionsArrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_actions_arrow.png). - To view the file detail page, click a file name. - To see a file owner’s profile, click the owner’s name. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - You can’t preview files larger than 25 MB, unknown file types, password-protected files, and copy-protected PDFs. For files that you can’t preview, the **Preview** option isn’t available on feeds or list views, and files appear as generic file type icons in the feed. Some Microsoft Office 2007 features don’t display correctly in previews. If a file can be previewed, but a preview doesn’t exist, contact your Salesforce admin to request to regenerate the preview. - Files without a file extension or with an unrecognized file extension show “unknown” in the Type column. #### See Also - [View Chatter Group Members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_members.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Members section on a Chatter group page shows all members of a group, including any customer members.") # Group Layouts The group layout lets you customize which fields, buttons, actions, and lists appear in Chatter groups. Changes to the group layout affect all groups in your organization, but they appear only on the group pages in the Salesforce mobile app. Changes to the group publisher appear in both the full Salesforce site and the Salesforce mobile app. ### Required Editions
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
The changes you make to the group layout and the publisher affect all groups in your organization. You can’t customize the layout of an individual group. - **[Customize the Chatter Group Layout and Publisher](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_layout_customize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add and remove fields, buttons, look-ups, and related lists to change the layout of groups. - **[Add Actions to the Group Publisher](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_group_add_record.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the group publisher with quick actions and Salesforce mobile app actions. # Group List Page The Groups page displays a list of the Chatter groups in your company. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Click **Groups** on the sidebar of the Chatter page to display a list of the Chatter groups in your company. On the Groups page, you can [Create a group](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_creating.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create public, private, and unlisted Chatter groups to collaborate with your teams and work together on projects.") To open a New Group dialog and create your group, click **New Group**. Filter and sort the groups list Use the following filters to filter your groups. - **Recently Viewed** and **Recently Viewed Groups** show the groups that you recently looked at, starting with the group you viewed last - **My Groups** shows the groups that you belong to, own, or manage - **Active Groups** shows the active groups in your company - **My Archived Groups** shows the archived groups that you belong to, own, or manage. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note In Lightning Experience, click the pin view icon ![Pin view icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/pin_view_icon.png) to pin a selected list view. The pinned view becomes your default view until you unpin it. To sort the list, click a column header. - The Group column sorts by group name. - The Last Activity column sorts by the date of the last post or comment on a group. - The Membership column sorts based on your membership status. Search for a group Search for groups by entering two or more letters of a group name or description in the Find Groups box. The list automatically filters based on what you type. [View a group](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_detail.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To see group updates, files, and members, click a group's name in a feed, in the Groups list, or on someone's profile.") To view a group, click its name. You can view all groups, but you see only updates and files for public groups and private groups that you belong to. Groups that [allow customers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_external_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter customers are people outside your company's email domains. Customers can see only the groups they're invited to. They can interact only with members of those groups. Customers can’t see any Salesforce information.") display the parenthetical (With Customers). Join a public group or ask to join a private group To join a public group, click **Join**. For private groups, click **Ask to Join** to send a request to join to the group's owner and managers. Users with the Modify All Data permission can directly join private groups; so they see **Join** for private groups. Leave a group or withdraw a request for membership To leave a group or to withdraw a request to join a group, click ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png). View the group owner’s profile To see a group owner’s [profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_profile_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize your personal Chatter profile. Add a photo and information about yourself so others can learn more about you."), Click the group owner's name. Get a group recommendation View the groups that Chatter recommends that you join in the Recommendations section. Recommendations are based on a group's popularity and the number of people that you follow who are in the group. To see the full list of recommendations, click **More**. If you don't see recommendations, then you already belong to all the recommended groups. #### See Also - [Group Files Lists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_recent_files.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Salesforce Classic, the Group Files list shows a group’s recently posted files.") # Group Related List Use the Group Related List component on custom group detail pages for your site. This component displays the group files, members, and records. Use the Group Related List component with the Group Banner, Group Detail, Feed Publisher, and the Feed or Feed Compact components to create a custom group detail page. Creating a custom group detail page does not guarantee optimal display and responsiveness across all desktop and mobile devices. We recommend using the Group component instead, which is a single composite component that displays all of this content. 1. Select the **Group Related List** component on the page you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Group ID | The ID of the group. This value is automatically populated when the group is displayed. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Group Related List component: ![Group related list component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/group_related_list.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Guidelines for Deleting Your Users’ Chatter Messages Salesforce administrators with the Manage Chatter Messages permission can access all users’ private messages via SOAP API. You can view and delete any message (for example, for compliance). ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions for users with a Salesforce license, and Database.com Edition for users with a Database.com Admin license
When you delete private Chatter messages, consider these guidelines. - Messages are hard deleted. That is, they’re removed completely without a trip to the Recycle Bin. - Deleted messages aren’t included in message search results. - Deleting a message that resulted from sharing a file with someone doesn’t also delete the file. - If all messages in a conversation are deleted, the conversation isn’t shown in My Messages. The conversation can’t be retrieved via Connect REST API. - If replies via email are enabled, and a user replies to a deleted message, Chatter returns an error notification and doesn’t process the reply message. # Guidelines for Managing Your Personal Chatter Email Settings Control the number of Chatter emails that you receive by choosing your most important feeds. And set the best frequency for personal and group digests. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
## Email Me When Someone Be choosy about your personal email settings. Make selections that help you stay on top of important discussions without becoming overwhelmed by too much email.
Option Most Important Recommendations and Notes
Follows me   If you’re not already following the person, you can click a link in the email to start following your new follower.
Posts on my profile Checkmark People approach you directly by posting questions or information on your profile, so make sure that you get notified.
Shares a post I made   This setting applies only to posts shared in Salesforce Classic. Posts shared in Lightning Experience don’t trigger an email notification.
Likes or upvotes my post or comment   Upvote notifications are only available in orgs with upvote functionality enabled.
Comments on my status or a change I made   This setting provides notification for actions taken on feed tracked changes. A feed tracked change is a change that you make on a Salesforce record that triggers an automatic post to your Chatter feed. Enabling this option notifies you when someone comments on the automatic post.
Comments on a post on my profile    
Comments after me   After you commented on an item, get notifications for comments after yours.
Comments on an item I bookmarked   If you use bookmarks to track items that you’re interested in, get notified each time someone comments on that item. If you typically use likes to track items of interest, then this option is less important.
Comments on an item I like Checkmark When you like a post, you can get notifications for the comments that come in. You don't receive notifications after liking a comment.
Mentions me in a post Checkmark People use mentions to ask for your input and draw you into discussions, so make sure that you get notified.
Mentions me in a comment Checkmark Checkmark People use mentions to ask for your input and draw you into discussions, so make sure that you get notified.
Sends me a message Checkmark

Get Sends me a message notifications when people send you private Chatter messages, including notifications about files that have been shared with you.

Endorses me on a topic    
## Set Frequency for Personal Digest | Option | Recommended | Recommendations and Notes | | --- | --- | --- | | Daily | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | Daily digests include the 50 latest posts from the previous day and the three latest comments on each post. | | Weekly |   | Weekly digests include the 50 latest posts from the week and the three latest comments on each post. | | Limited |   | Limited means less than weekly. If you’re selective about the options in the “Email me when someone” section, try Limited to reduce your number of personal digests. | Personal digests aren’t supported in communities. ## Set Default Frequency for Groups I Join Changing the default frequency for groups you join doesn’t affect the groups you already belong to. | Option | Recommended | Recommendations and Notes | | --- | --- | --- | | Email on every post |   | In communities, the Email on every post option is disabled after more than 10,000 members choose this setting for the group. All members who had this option selected are automatically switched to Daily digests. | | Daily digests |   | Daily digests include the 50 latest posts from the previous day and the three latest comments on each post. | | Weekly digests |   | Weekly digests include the 50 latest posts from the week and the three latest comments on each post. | | Limited | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | Limited means less than weekly. Keep this default setting for all new groups. You can change to more frequent notifications for groups that you expect to monitor and contribute to actively. If your org has the **Send announcement emails** permission enabled, you still receive some Group emails. | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Users can choose the notification frequency after they start following a group, or an admin can set the frequency for all users using Data Loader. For more information about using Data Loader to change email frequency, see [Set the default group notification email and its frequency via Data Loader](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=000315501&type=1&language=en_US). #### See Also - [Chatter Email Digests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_email_digest.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Email digests conveniently summarize recent activity in Chatter so you don’t miss important discussions. You can choose to receive daily or weekly summaries of updates from your personal feed or any group’s feed.") - [Navigate to Chatter Email Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_email_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In your personal Chatter email settings, you can change your preferences for receiving email notifications and digests. On a group page, you can set your notification preferences for that group.") # Headline The Headline component gives you customizable headline text and text banner with inline links to pages that show discussions, topics, and articles. It also displays an icon to the left of the banner that identifies the content as an article or a discussion when either is selected. 1. Select the **Headline** component in the page you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Title Enter the static text for the page’s headline. The default text for the page is Welcome!.
Banner Text Enter the static text that appears on the home page. The default text is A place where you can easily find solutions and ask questions.
Page Type

Enter the type of content that the page displays in this page. Type either article, topic, or discussion to retrieve the title of the page and display an icon identifying the type of page the user is viewing.

When Page Type is set to article, the Headline component is hidden in the mobile view. If you want to show the Headline component, you need custom CSS.

Unique Name or ID The system retrieves the ID from the URL of the question or article when it’s selected.
Banner Text with Articles and Discussions

Enter the static text and link text that lets users select a page that shows articles or discussions. This text and links in this field appear on the page when Salesforce Knowledge is enabled and set up in your organization. You can translate and change the value of each component, but not the position of the component.

Explore other <a href="javascript:void(0)" class="headlineArticles">articles</a> and <a href="javascript:void(0)" class="headlineDiscussions">discussions</a> on this topic
Banner Text with Discussions

Enter the static text and link text that lets users select a page that shows discussions only. This text and link in this field appear on the page when Salesforce Knowledge isn’t enabled in your organization. You can translate and change the value of each component, but not the position of the component.

Explore other <a href="javascript:void(0)" class="headlineDiscussions">discussions</a> on this topic
Show Subtopics

Below the headline, displays links to topics that are children of the current topic. (On mobile devices, these links appear in a Subtopics menu.)

Only navigational topics support parent-child relationships.

If you have set up navigational subtopics, change the following properties in the property editor to populate topic and subtopics dynamically on the topic detail page: | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Title | Enter {!topicName} to retrieve and display the topic name on the topic detail page. | | Page Type | Enter topic as the page type. | | Show Subtopics | Select this option to display subtopics. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Headline component: ![Headline component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/headline.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Help Center Set Up Tasks Help Center is designed with self-service in mind. The Help Center template comes with components and pages that you can use as-is or customize to suit your needs. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions
Get started with your own publicly accessible Help Center! We’ve put together a set of tasks and useful references for setting up a Help Center.
Plan Your Help Center
Enable Knowledge in Your Org and Enable the Knowledge Org Preference
Create and Configure Your Help Center
Add Branding and Customize Your Help Center Theme
# Help Center Template Pages The Help Center template offers a public-facing, self-service portal where guest users can search your knowledge base for answers to their questions. It reduces the load on your customer support staff and gives customers the satisfaction of finding their own solutions. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions
## Included Features - Ready-made template - Guided setup configuration - Publicly accessible - Self-service - Curated—you decide which of your Knowledge articles is shared ## Included Pages **Template Pages** - Home - Contact Support - Error - Search - Topic Catalog - Topic Detail **Object Pages** - File Detail - File List - Related Record List **Content Pages** - News Detail #### See Also - [Manage Your Site’s Pages and Their Properties in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_manage_pages_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Pages and Page Action menus centralize all your page-related needs, from page creation to audience criteria-based page visibility and everything in between.") - [Page Properties and Types in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_prop.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Page Action menu to view and edit the properties of the pages that make up your Experience Builder site.") # Hide Components on Mobile Devices with Experience Builder for Aura Sites Reduce page load times and cluttered mobile screens by hiding non-business critical components on mobile devices. View your Aura site in Builder using the mobile mode and select which components you wish to hide. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. In Experience Builder, change the view to Mobile. 2. Click the component you want to hide to open the properties panel. 3. Scroll to the bottom of the panel and click **Hide on Mobile**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - You can hide or show components by clicking **Page Structure**, and clicking the eye icon next to the component. The Page Structure button also displays the number of hidden components. - You can’t hide components in an area that’s shared across different pages on a site, even if you’ve chosen to hide a component. Let’s say your site is using a default theme, and the header is shared across all the pages. Any component included in the header is visible on all site pages, even if you choose to hide some components on some pages. # Hide Fields in Lightning Knowledge Search Results When you display Knowledge search results in a grid layout, you can adjust the Knowledge search layout for different user profiles. Use this capability to hide some of the information that’s returned in results from different user profiles. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Salesforce Knowledge is available in Essentials and Unlimited Editions with Service Cloud.

Salesforce Knowledge is available for an additional cost in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions. For more information, contact your Salesforce representative.

Applies to: Aura sites
To use this feature, Salesforce Knowledge must be enabled in your org. 1. Open your site’s Administration Workspace. 2. Go to **Preferences** | **General**, and select the **Use a profile-based layout for Lightning Knowledge search results** checkbox. 3. Click **Save**. 4. In Salesforce Setup, go to Object Manager, and click **Knowledge**. 5. Click **Search Layouts**. 6. Click a user profile, and remove the information that you want to hide. Repeat step 6 for each user profile that you want to change. # Hide Unneeded Visualforce Pages on Your Experience Cloud Site To avoid exposing pages that don’t reflect your brand or that allow for alternative ways to log in to your site, be aware of these guidelines when configuring Visualforce pages that are part of your Experience Cloud site. Understand the relationship between Experience Cloud sites and Salesforce Sites, their public Visualforce pages, and steps to take for a proper configuration. ## Relationship Between Experience Cloud Sites and Salesforce Sites When you create an Experience Cloud site, Salesforce creates a Salesforce Site. Salesforce Site technology powers some of the underlying features behind Experience Cloud sites. For example, [some security settings are set at the Salesforce Site level](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.sites_creating_and_editing_sites.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Salesforce Sites also automatically create and exposes a set of default Visualforce pages. Before you set up an Experience Cloud site, review the settings of the associated Salesforce Site. To get the full picture of what is visible after creating an Experience Cloud site, review the Experience Builder pages and the accompanying Site Visualforce pages. If you already have a live Experience Cloud site, run a check to see which pages are visible. One of the default Visualforce pages is named `SiteLogin`. To check if your site exposes this page, append `/SiteLogin` after your Experience Cloud site domain (without the `/s`). | If your Experience Cloud site URL looks like this: | Try accessing: | | --- | --- | | yourcommunity.example.com/ | yourcommunity.example.com/SiteLogin | | yourcommunity.example.com/s | yourcommunity.example.com/SiteLogin | | example.com/yourcommunity | example.com/yourcommunity/SiteLogin | | example.com/yourcommunity/s | example.com/yourcommunity/SiteLogin | If you see your branded login page or the expected error page for your community, your site seems to be properly configured. However, if you see a default Visualforce page that you didn’t expect to see, continue reading to see how you can fix it. ## Default Visualforce Pages Exposed by Salesforce Sites When a Salesforce Site is created, a new set of default metadata is added to your org. - Visualforce pages, such as SiteLogin, SiteRegister, and ForgotPassword - Aura components, such as forgotPassword, loginForm, and selfRegister - Apex classes, such as MyProfilePageController, SiteLoginController, and SiteRegisterController - Visualforce components, such as SiteFooter, SiteLogin, and SiteLogin - Static resource (SiteSamples) This metadata is intended as examples and templates that you can reuse to expose custom functionality throughout your site. For example, if you need a fully personalized login experience, you could reuse and customize the sample code provided in the SiteLogin Visualforce page or the loginForm Aura component. Some Visualforce pages are publicly accessible by default. - BandwidthExceeded - CommunitiesLanding - CommunitiesLogin - CommunitiesSelfReg - CommunitiesSelfRegConfirm - CommunitiesTemplate - Exception - FileNotFound - ForgotPassword - ForgotPasswordConfirm - InMaintenance - SiteLogin - SiteRegister - SiteRegisterConfirm - UnderConstruction To control what is visible through your site, review those pages and classify them into different categories. - Keep the pages you need and want to expose publicly. For example, you might want to customize the InMaintenance page, which is shown when your Experience Cloud site is offline, to reflect your brand. - Remove the pages that you don’t need and shouldn’t make publicly accessible. For example, if you don't need a custom login page on your site, you probably don’t want to leave the default SiteLogin Visualforce page exposed publicly. - **[Update Public Accessibility Settings for Standard Visualforce Pages of Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_update_public_settings_vf_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the public accessibility settings of your standard Visualforce pages that are associated with your Experience Cloud site, and update them as needed. # High-Volume Registrations and Record Creation Fixes Request forms on standard components and pages automatically check for errors and prompt users to fix the errors before submitting. If you invoked micro-batching for record creation using the Apex method, resolve all form errors before submission. Errors not discovered before submissions are sent to the site admin via email. You can also access errors that occur during record processing using Connect API. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Developer, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
If you’re using micro-batching for self-registration, users receive an error email for any issues that occur while the request is processing that they can fix. To configure the self-registration user error email template, select **Administration** | **Emails** from your site’s Workspaces. You receive an error email containing information about which records failed to process and why they failed if the issue is something that you, and not the user, can fix. By default, error emails go to the site admin. To change who receives the error email, update the Site.Admin field for the site. You can also use Connect API calls to get more information about errors sent to you. This example ConnectAPI call gets information about a registration error. ``` GET /connect/communities/${communityId}/microbatching/errors". For example, "/connect/communities/${communityId}/microbatching/errors?processType=SELF_REGISTRATION&earliestDate=2021-11-16T16:17:31.797Z ``` After fixing the source of the problem, you can reprocess the record. You can also download the data for records and discard errors. For more information, see [Connect REST API Introduction](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.chatterapi.meta/chatterapi/intro_working_with_chatter_connect.htm). # High-Volume Self-Registration and Record Creation High-volume sites often involve heavier than usual registration traffic and record creation. You can process more self-registrations and record creations per second when you process them in small batches, called micro-batches, instead of one at a time. After they’re submitted, the requests are collected into batches, and the batches are processed asynchronously. Processing transactions using micro-batching improves performance and keeps your site moving during heavy traffic spikes. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Developer, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
- **[Use Apex to Configure Self-Registration in Batches for High-Volume Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_self_reg_apex.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your Experience Cloud site can handle twice as many self-registration requests at a time when they’re collected into batches and processed asynchronously rather than one at a time. The accounts and contacts created are owned and managed by the community administrator. After a batch is processed successfully, users receive an email with their login instructions. Batch processing self-registration requests improves performance and keeps your site moving during heavy traffic spikes. Minimal coding is required when you use the Apex controller that manages your self-registration flow. - **[Use Apex to Configure Record Creation in Batches for High-Volume Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_record_creation_apex.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Cloud site users can create more cases, leads, and custom objects per second when they’re collected into batches and processed asynchronously rather than one at a time. Batch processing improves performance and keeps your site moving during heavy traffic spikes. You can invoke batch record creation using the Apex method added for this purpose. - **[Use Experience Builder to Configure Micro-Batching for High-Volume Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_record_creation_builder.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Create Record Form, Contact Support Form, or Lead Form (LWC) components to create cases, leads, and custom objects more efficiently. When records are collected into batches and processed asynchronously, your site can process more records at a time. Batch processing improves performance and keeps your site moving during traffic spikes. - **[High-Volume Registrations and Record Creation Fixes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_submission_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Request forms on standard components and pages automatically check for errors and prompt users to fix the errors before submitting. If you invoked micro-batching for record creation using the Apex method, resolve all form errors before submission. Errors not discovered before submissions are sent to the site admin via email. You can also access errors that occur during record processing using Connect API. # How Do Experience Cloud Forms Connect to Marketing Cloud Engagement? You can connect a microsite to a Marketing Cloud Engagement data extension using the Marketing Cloud Form component. Contact information is gathered from your Experience Cloud sites and then sent to Engagement. The data that is collected from your site is momentarily stored in the Salesforce Core infrastructure and then sent to your data extension. The data transferred this way is only stored in Salesforce Core infrastructure for as long as it takes to call Marketing Cloud Engagement API. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions.
Your microsite runs on Experience Cloud, but the data is stored and resides in Marketing Cloud Engagement. In order to access, manage, or delete this data, you must follow the [Marketing Cloud Engagement Deletion](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.data_deletion_marketing.htm&type=5&language=en_US) process. For more information, see the Salesforce Trust and Compliance Documentation for both [Salesforce Services](https://www.salesforce.com/content/dam/web/en_us/www/documents/legal/misc/salesforce-security-privacy-and-architecture.pdf) and [Marketing Cloud Engagement](https://www.salesforce.com/content/dam/web/en_us/www/documents/legal/misc/marketing-cloud-security-privacy-and-architecture.pdf). ![Marketing Cloud data transfer diagram](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/marketing_cloud_data_transfer.png) #### See Also - [Connect a Form Component to Marketing Cloud Engagement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_marketing_cloud_form_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Using the Marketing Cloud Form component, you can capture customer information from an Experience Cloud microsite and send it directly to a Marketing Cloud Engagement data extension. Built on the powerful LWR platform, this form component gives you the tools to easily collect contact information and the flexibility to store data where it best serves your company.") # How Experience Cloud Uses Lightning There’s lots of Lightning striking Salesforce these days and it can be tricky to know how it all works together. Here's the rundown. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## What is Salesforce Lightning? Lightning includes a new experience, framework, and environment. Lightning makes it easier to build responsive applications for any device. Lightning includes these technologies: - Lightning Component Framework, which gives you a UI development framework that accelerates development and app performance. - Lightning App Builder lets you build Lightning pages visually, without code, using standard and custom Lightning components. You can make your Lightning components available in the Lightning App Builder, so admins can build custom user interfaces without code. - Experience Builder is like the Lightning App Builder, except that it’s used to design and build Experience Builder sites using Lightning components. Just like Lightning App Builder, you can use standard or custom components so admins can create Experience Builder pages with point-and-click customization. Some Salesforce products built with the Lightning framework include Lightning Experience, the Salesforce mobile app, and the various Experience Builder site templates (like Customer Service, Partner Central, and Help Center) and Lightning Bolt Solutions. ## What is Lightning Experience? Lightning Experience is the name of for the desktop user experience, intended for internal Salesforce users only. For more information, see the [Lightning Experience section](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=lex_intro.htm&language=en_US) in Salesforce Help. ## When people talk about “Lightning sites”, what do they mean? Lightning in the context of Experience Cloud means the use of Lightning components to build communities, sites, and portals. Build using templates, such as Customer Service, Partner Central, or [Lightning Bolt Solutions](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=community_builder_export_overview.htm&language=en_US). ## How is the Lightning framework used in Experience Cloud sites? Experience Cloud sites and Lightning Experience use the same _underlying_ Lightning framework technology—but it isn’t necessary to enable Lightning Experience to use Experience Cloud sites. Think of it this way: You have a dishwasher and a washing machine in your house. Can you turn one on without the other? Yes. Sure, they have a few things in common: They both need electricity to work, they both live in your house, and have the word “wash” in their names. But they run independently of one another. ## Do I first turn on Lightning Experience in my internal org to use Experience Builder sites? No. It’s not required that you enable Lightning Experience to use Experience Builder sites, such as Customer Service, Partner Central, and Lightning Bolt Solutions. Experience Cloud sites use the same underlying technology as Lightning Experience, _but are independent of one another_ ## If I turn on Lightning Experience in my internal org, can I still use the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template for a site? Yes! Turning on Lightning Experience for your internal users has no impact on what templates you use in our external-facing sites. You can build your site with the Lightning framework or with Visualforce. The UI enabled in your internal Salesforce org makes no difference to what UI technology you use for your external-facing site. ## If I build a custom Lightning component for the Lightning App Builder, can I use it in Experience Builder? Yes! See the [Experience Cloud Developer Guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/components_config_for_builder.htm) for more information. ## Can I enable Lightning Experience for my Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites? No. By definition, a Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site uses Visualforce technology under the hood. There's no button in a Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site that allows you to switch to Lightning technology. Also, remember that Lightning Experience is a user experience that’s for internal Salesforce users only. If you want a site with the Lightning look and feel, create one with a template that uses Lightning technology. ## If I turn on Lightning Experience in my internal Salesforce org, are there Experience Cloud features that I can't use? Switch to Salesforce Classic for the following functionality. | Feature or Setting | Available with Differences | Not Available | Notes | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Global header |   | ![Checkmark icon indicating true](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) | To switch between your org and Experience Cloud sites in Lightning Experience orgs, use the App Launcher. | | Cloning or creating email templates as a Partner Community or Customer Community Plus user |   | ![Checkmark icon indicating true](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) |   | | Enabling WDC Thanks to use Mission Badges in Experience Builder sites |   | ![Checkmark icon indicating true](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) |   | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Most of the Experience Cloud functionality that isn’t supported in Lightning Experience affects only Salesforce admins. But being limited to admins doesn’t prevent you from enabling Lightning Experience in your org. You can always enable Lightning Experience for most profiles in your Salesforce org, and give the System Admin profile the option to switch to Salesforce Classic. # How is my Experience Cloud site reputation calculated? The reputation level on your profile is calculated based on your total points. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Points are accrued when you perform activities that your community manager has assigned point values. You could also potentially gain points if your posts or comments draw reaction from other members. For example, your community manager may have decided that writing a post earns you 5 points. If someone else shares your post, your community manager may decide that you should earn 10 points because your post is influencing others to contribute. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Only active users accrue points. For example, if an active user likes the post of an inactive user, the active user gets 1 point, but the inactive user gets no points. Default point values are as follows. Keep in mind that your community manager may have customized these values. For more information, contact your community manager.
Action Points
Engagement
Write a post 1
Write a comment 1
Receive a comment 5
Like something 1
Receive a like 5
Share a post 1
Someone shares your post 5
Mention someone

1

If your post contains more than one @mention, you get a point for each @mention.

Receive a mention 5
Questions and Answers
Ask a question 1
Answer a question 5
Receive an answer 5
Mark an answer as best 5
Your answer is marked as best 20
Knowledge
Endorsing someone for knowledge on a topic 5
Being endorsed for knowledge on a topic 20
#### See Also - [Enable Reputation in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reputation_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable reputation so that site members are recognized and rewarded for participating.") # How Many Experience Cloud Sites Can My Org Have? You can have up to 100 Experience Cloud sites in your Salesforce org. Active, inactive, and preview sites, including Visualforce sites, count against this limit. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
To see this limit in your org, from Setup enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then select **All Sites**. The Maximum number of sites (including active, inactive, and preview) field displays 100. Archived sites don’t count against this limit. #### See Also - [Create an Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_creating.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create an Experience Cloud site using a wizard that helps you choose a template that meets your business needs.") # HTML Editor The HTML Editor component lets you create and edit custom content in HTML. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. In Experience Builder, drag the HTML Editor component from the Components panel onto the page. ![HTML Editor in Components panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/html_editor_component.png) 2. Add and format HTML content. ![HTML Editor](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/html_editor.png) The HTML Editor component supports the following HTML tags and attributes. Any exceptions are flagged in your markup. Tags: a, abbr, acronym, address, area, article, aside, audio, b, basefont, bdi, bdo, big, blockquote, br, button, canvas, caption, center, cite, code, col, colgroup, datalist, dd, del, details, dfn, dialog, dir, div, dl, dt, em, embed, fieldset, figcaption, figure, font, footer, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, header, hgroup, hr, i, iframe, img, input, ins, kbd, label, legend, li, main, map, mark, menu, meter, noscript, object, ol, optgroup, option, output, p, param, pre, progress, q, rp, rt, ruby, s, samp, section, select, small, span, strike, strong, sub, summary, sup, svg, table, tbody, td, template, textarea, tfoot, th, thead, time, tr, track, tt, u, ul, use, var, wbr, xmp Attributes: abbr, accept, accept, -charset, accesskey, action, align, alink, allow, allowfullscreen, alt, aria-\*, autocapitalize, autocomplete, autoplay, axis, background, bgcolor, border, capture, cellpadding, cellspacing, char, charoff, charset, checked, cite, class, classid, clear, code, codebase, codetype, color, cols, colspan, compact, content, contenteditable, controls, controls-list, coords, crossorigin, csp, data, data-\*, datetime, declare, decoding, default, defer, dir, dirname, disabled, download, draggable, enctype, face, for, formaction, formenctype, formmethod, formnovalidate, formtarget, frameborder, frameborder, headers, height, hidden, high, href, hreflang, hspace, http-equiv, id, inputmode, is, ismap, itemprop, itemscope, itemtype, kind, label, lang, language, link, list, loop, longdesc, low, marginheight, marginwidth, max, maxlength, media, method, min, minlength, mozallowfullscreen, multiple, muted, name, nohref, noresize, noshade, novalidate, nowrap, open, optimum, pattern, placeholder, poster, preload, pubdate, radiogroup, readonly, rel, required, referrerpolicy, rev, reversed, role, rows, rowspan, rules, sandbox, scheme, scope, scrolling, selected, shape, size, sizes, span, spellcheck, src, srcdoc, srclang, srcset, standby, start, step, style, summary, tabindex, target, text, title, translate, type, usemap, valign, value, valuetype, version, vlink, vspace, webkitAllowFullScreen, width, wrap, xmlns #### See Also - [Rich Content Editor](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_rich_text_component.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Rich Content Editor component lets you add formatted custom text to your Aura site pages, along with images and videos.") # Identify Your Preferred Domain to Improve SEO Results By default, your site is available on the \*.my.site.com or \*.force.com domain, but you can add a custom domain so that your site URLs reflect your company brand. However, multiple domains for the same site, meaning \*.my.site.com, \*.force.com, and custom domains, can dilute search engine results and lower page ranking. If you have multiple domains, identify which domain to use for crawling and indexing your site’s pages. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
The Preferred Domain setting appears in Experience Builder only if you have multiple domains associated with your Aura or LWR site. For an enhanced LWR site, or for an Aura or LWR site with multiple domains where you haven’t identified a preferred domain, the site’s first custom domain alphabetically is the preferred domain. 1. In Experience Builder, go to **Settings** | **General**. 2. Select your preferred domain. ![Preferred domain](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/seo_domain.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - Make sure that you configure your preferred domain before submitting the sitemap to a search engine. After your site is public, the search engine shows all the custom URLs that you added to the sitemap. - You can set only HTTPS preferred domains. - Issues can occur if you configure preferred domains for two LWR or Aura sites that use the same custom domain with different path prefixes. For example, let’s say you have two sites, https://example.com/site1 and https://example.com/site2. If you configure preferred domains for both sites, then site2 uses the preferred domain for site1. To avoid problems in this scenario, set the Preferred Domain field to None for both sites. #### See Also - [Configure a Custom Domain for Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_custom_domain.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To provide a branded experience for users who access your external-facing Salesforce content, serve your Experience Cloud sites on a domain that you own. With a custom domain, your users access your external-facing Experience Cloud site and its functionality through your branded URL, such as https://www.example.com. Also, with the many-to-many relationship between sites and custom domains, you can serve your external-facing content to meet your branding needs. For example, you can serve content from multiple Experience Cloud sites on one parent website, or serve multiple sites on one domain through custom paths. Because you can serve multiple sites on one domain, custom domains simplify the management of your domains and your corresponding network allowlists. And even if your Salesforce-hosted site URL changes due to a My Domain change, your custom domain remains constant, reducing the number of updates required.") - [Custom Domains](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.domain_mgmt.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Generate a Manual Sitemap Refresh for Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_manual_SEO_sitemap.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you go live with a new Experience Builder site or make significant updates to an existing one, you can generate a manual sitemap one time every 24 hours outside of the weekly automatic sitemap refresh.") # Implement Agentforce Orchestrator for Experience Cloud Deliver an autonomous, AI-driven service experience on your Experience Cloud site by implementing the Agentforce Orchestrator. This guide provides the end-to-end roadmap for connecting your customer relationship management (CRM) data, Enterprise Knowledge, and Self-Service agent logic. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost. To purchase, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Available in: Aura Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Available in: LWR Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Implementing the orchestrator requires coordination across three major Salesforce areas: Data Cloud, Agentforce, and Experience Cloud. To make sure a successful rollout, use this implementation sequence: - - Foundation (Data Cloud): Build the unified user profile using DataGraphs so the agent understands the user context. - Logic (Agentforce): Configure the Self-Service agent with the Smart Search Assistance sub-agent and Actionable Smart Search tools. - Connection (Orchestrator): Link your data and agent logic in the Agentforce Orchestrator Configuration. - Interface (Experience Cloud): Deploy the Concierge component and Unified Prompt Bar to your site. The Agentforce Orchestrator transforms your site into an active service assistant by providing: - - Agentic Enterprise Search: Summarizes results from Enterprise Knowledge and internal CRM data. - Contextual Personalization: Generates AI-driven greetings and Suggestion Themes based on real-time engagement data. - Unified Request Flows: Identifies user intent to start Service Processes and Unified Catalog intake forms directly from the chat interface. - **[Self-Service Agent Actor](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.self_service_agent_actor.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how the Self-Service agent functions as the central reasoning engine for your site. The agent evaluates user intent and orchestrates specialized sub-agents and tools to deliver a personalized, conversational experience. - **[Smart Search Assistance Logic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.smart_search_assistance_logic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how the Smart Search Assistance sub-agent uses semantic search and grounded AI to retrieve, summarize, and cite information while maintaining strict security for authenticated and guest users. - **[Unified Catalog Integration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.unified_catalog_integration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how the Agentforce Service agent leverages the Unified Catalog to surface service processes and request forms. This integration makes it possible for users to find and start intake forms through the natural language interface of your Experience Cloud site. results. - **[Enterprise Knowledge in Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.enterprise_knowledge_in_experience_cloud_sites.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide a unified Self-Service experience by surfacing articles from both Salesforce and external repositories. Enterprise Knowledge standardizes content from multiple sources, making it possible for users to access a single source of truth within your Experience Cloud site. - **[Set Up Agentforce Orchestrator Configurations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.set_up_agentforce_orchestrator_configurations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Define how your Agentforce Orchestrator interacts with users by configuring greeting behaviors and linking Data Cloud personalization signals. This configuration serves as the engine that coordinates the conversational features of your Experience Cloud site. - **[Turn On Agentic Enterprise Search for Agents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.turn_on_agentic_enterprise_search_for_agents.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable the search logic that allows your agent to summarize articles and resolve queries using your customer relationship management (CRM) data. This setup provides the foundation for the Agentforce Service agent to retrieve results from your Enterprise Knowledge data. - **[Assign API Permissions for Agentic Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.assign_api_permissions_for_agentic_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign the mandatory permissions required for portal users to access the Smart Search Assistance sub-agent. - **[Configure the Smart Search Assistance Sub-Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.configure_the_smart_search_assistance_sub_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add search and action capabilities to your agent by configuring the Smart Search Assistance sub-agent and mapping its associated variables. This configuration allows the agent to retrieve results specifically from your Experience Cloud site search profile and respects site-specific security boundaries and data sources. - **[Configure Messaging Channels for Agentforce Orchestrator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.configure_messaging_channels_for_agentforce_orchestrator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Link your agent to specific communication channels to go live. This step makes sure that the Omni-Channel engine routes incoming conversations from your Experience Cloud site to your personalized AI agent and passes necessary site parameters for accurate search and personalization. - **[Set Up Messaging Settings for Agentforce Orchestrator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.set_up_messaging_settings_for_agentforce_orchestrator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure a messaging channel to use Agentforce Orchestrator so that conversations from your Experience Cloud site are routed through the orchestrator. - **[Set Up Experience Cloud Site for Agentforce Orchestrator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.set_up_experience_cloud_site_for_agentforce_orchestrator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Link your Experience Cloud site to the Agentforce Orchestrator and configure the required page components for autonomous AI interactions. This setup makes it possible for your site to host the conversational and search features needed for a personalized user experience. - **[Add Agentforce Orchestrator Components to Your LWR Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.add_agentforce_orchestrator_components_to_your_lwr_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) sites, manually add the Agentforce Orchestrator LWC components to your site pages in Experience Builder. - **[Manage the Concierge Sidebar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.manage_the_concierge_sidebar.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Define the proactive experience for your users. By configuring Suggestion Themes and the Concierge Sidebar, you provide users with "one-click" actions that trigger specific agent topics immediately, reducing the need for typing. - **[Limitations for Autonomous AI on Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.limitations_for_autonomous_ai_on_experience_cloud_sites.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the mandatory constraints for search and orchestration features to make sure your Experience Cloud site functions as intended and maintains a secure guest user experience. # Import Translated Content After your translation service has completed the translations, import the translated .xml file into your Experience Builder site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Experience Builder sites accessed through Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and mobile devices, and is available in Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Don't update your site’s default content until after you import the translated content. The translated file contains the original default content and the translated content. When you import the translated file, the import overwrites any changes that you made to the default content while the content was with your translation service. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If you exported your site content for translation before Winter ’22, you can’t import the resulting translated file. To ensure a successful import, export your site content again and translate it in this more recent .xml file. 1. In Experience Builder, click **![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings.png)** | **Languages**. 2. Click **Import Translation**. 3. Browse to the file or drag it onto the window. For files under 1 MB, a message tells you whether the content was imported successfully. For files over 1 MB, you receive an email when the import process finishes. ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_warning.png) Warning Import overwrites the current translation values in your site. Before you import an .xml file, ensure that the file matches the expected format and is well formed. After you import the translated content, test your pages to make sure that content displays correctly. Use the language selector to view each page in a supported language. #### See Also - [Export Language Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_export.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Export and prepare Experience Builder site content as one or multiple .xml files. Prepare the files for translation by creating nodes for specific languages. Then send the file to your translation service.") # Improve Experience Cloud Site Performance Analyze your Experience Cloud site’s volume, traffic, and transaction loads to determine if your site could benefit from the many performance optimization tools available. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
- **[The Scale of Your Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_perf_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Large-scale sites are more than just sites that support a large volume of users. Transaction loads, and heavy traffic patterns also impact the scale of a site. Large-scale sites can benefit from performance and scale optimization tools. Your account representative can advise you on which performance and scale optimizations to enable. - **[Scale and Performance Optimization Tools for Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_perf_tools.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce performance tools help ensure that your high-traffic sites and large-scale B2B and B2C applications perform well and deliver lightning fast response times. Each tool has been tested and developed to meet specific scale and performance needs. - **[Which Performance Tools Do I Need Based on My Experience Cloud Site?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_site_use_cases.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With Experience Cloud, you can build a wide range of business-to-consumer (B2C) and business-to-business (B2B) applications that have different performance and scale considerations and optimizations. This section outlines common scenarios, likely performance issues, and the best tools to optimize performance. - **[High-Volume Self-Registration and Record Creation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_microbatching.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** High-volume sites often involve heavier than usual registration traffic and record creation. You can process more self-registrations and record creations per second when you process them in small batches, called micro-batches, instead of one at a time. After they’re submitted, the requests are collected into batches, and the batches are processed asynchronously. Processing transactions using micro-batching improves performance and keeps your site moving during heavy traffic spikes. - **[Progressive Rendering Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_prioritization_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Progressive Rendering prioritizes the display order of your page components. With proper planning and testing, it can improve display time performance and polish your site’s experience to better engage customers. - **[Analyze and Improve Experience Builder Site Performance](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_optimizer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Salesforce Page Optimizer analyzes your site and identifies issues that impact performance. Use the information to refine your design and improve site performance for your members. The Page Optimizer is a free plug-in available from the Chrome Web Store. Download and install the plug-in as you would any Chrome extension. - **[Upgrade Record Components to LWC Technology](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_component_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update record components in your Aura sites to run on Lightning Web Component (LWC) technology, and see improved accessibility and stylistic changes. - **[Improve Experience Cloud Site Performance with Browser Caching](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_cache.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you use many components in your Experience Builder site, you can improve your site’s performance with browser caching. Performance is about the same for the first page load, but subsequent page loads are faster. The cache is encrypted and secure. - **[Apex Caching on the Salesforce CDN](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_perf_apex_caching.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you cache Apex methods on the Salesforce content delivery network (CDN), you improve performance of your LWR site, and your customers benefit from faster page load times. Only public data from Apex methods is intended to be cached, and it’s only cached for guest users. Apex caching controls differ depending on the type of Apex methods in your site. # Improve Experience Cloud Site Performance with Browser Caching If you use many components in your Experience Builder site, you can improve your site’s performance with browser caching. Performance is about the same for the first page load, but subsequent page loads are faster. The cache is encrypted and secure. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
The **Enable secure and persistent browser caching to improve performance** setting enables browser caching of your site’s Lightning components. It’s enabled by default. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To cache your site’s Visualforce pages on your end users’ web browsers, disable the site-level setting: **Cache public Visualforce pages**. For more information on caching your site’s Visualforce pages, see Configure Site Caching in Salesforce Help. To verify that the **Enable secure and persistent browser caching to improve performance** setting is enabled: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Session Settings, and then select **Session Settings**. ![Enable secure and persistent browser caching to improve performance](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_cache.png) #### See Also - [Configure Site Caching](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.sites_caching.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Include a Files Connect Data Source in Global Search Combine searches for Salesforce data with external data from Google Drive, SharePoint, OneDrive for Business, or Box. Developers can automate the process with supported SOQL or SOSL queries with the API. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Files Connect for cloud-based external data sources is available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an external object and provide access to its fields: Customize Application
To include external data in global searches or API queries, first create a related external object. External objects behave similarly to custom objects, but map to data stored outside Salesforce in an external system like SharePoint. Each external object maps to a data table, and the object fields map to accessible table columns. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip External objects support lookup relationships similar to custom objects, letting you integrate external data into related lists and other areas throughout Salesforce. For details, see [External Object Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/HTViewHelpDoc?id=external_object_relationships.htm&language=en_US). To fully configure global search, you have to - Choose the layout for global search results - Create an external object from an external data source - Give users access to the external object fields - Create a custom tab for the external object (Lightning Experience Only) By default, Files Connect external objects use the standard search results layout for Chatter and the Files tab. If you want to display customized search layouts for these objects, complete these steps. 1. From Setup, enter Files Connect Settings in the Quick Find box, and select **Files Connect Settings**. 2. Select **Use External Object Search Layout**. 3. Define an external data source that supports search: - [SharePoint Online or OneDrive for Business](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_sp_online_xds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With Files Connect and Chatter, Salesforce can access content from Microsoft’s cloud-based systems.") - [Google Drive](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_google_xds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Let Chatter users access their Google Drive content from the Files tab, feed posts, and search. Salesforce supports Google documents, spreadsheets, presentations, and drawings.") - [Box](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_box_xds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Let users access their Box content from Files home, feed posts, and search.") 4. From Setup, enter External Data Sources in the Quick Find box, and select **External Data Sources**. 5. To access the details page, click the data source name. 6. Click **Validate and Sync**. If the **Validate and Sync** button is disabled, edit the [Authentication Settings for External Systems](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.external_authentication.htm&type=5&language=en_US) to enable the Start Authentication Flow on Save checkbox. 7. Select the table named “items\_\[data source\].” Then, click **Sync** and create an external object that maps to the entire source. Now deploy the object to make the data it contains available to users. 8. Choose **Build** | **Develop** | **External Objects**. 9. Click **Edit** next to the new external object. 10. At the bottom of the page, click **Deployed**, and then click **Save**. 11. To give users access to the external object fields: 1. From Setup, enter Permission Sets in the Quick Find box, and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click a permission set in which you enabled Files Connect. 3. In the Apps section, click **Object Settings**. 4. Click the name of the external object. 5. Click **Edit**, and enable the necessary Read permissions (for the object itself, and all fields you want to reveal in Salesforce). 6. Click **Save**. 12. Next, create a custom tab for the external object (Lightning Experience Only): 1. From Setup, enter Tabs in the search bar, and select **Tabs**. 2. Click **New** in the Custom Object Tabs section. 3. In Step 1 of the setup wizard, enter the name of the custom object you created from your external data source. 4. In Step 2, choose the availability and visibility of the tab to profiles. The tab doesn’t need to be visible, but it does need to be accessible. Choose either **Default On** or **Tab Hidden**. 5. Complete Step 3 and click **Save**. To automate search with SOQL or SOSL, review the supported queries for your data source. SharePoint and OneDrive external objects support these standard fields and any custom fields you enable. Queries on specific fields return only documents that the external data source indexed. SOQL and SOSL Support for SharePoint and OneDrive External Objects | Field Name | Queryable | Sortable | | --- | --- | --- | | Author | Yes | Yes | | Comment | No | Yes | | ContentLength | Yes | Yes | | CreationDate | Yes | Yes | | DisplayUrl | No | Yes | | DownloadUrl | No | No | | ExternalId | Yes | Yes | | IsFolder | Yes | Yes | | MimeType | Yes | Yes | | Name | Yes | Yes | | UpdateDate | Yes | Yes | | UpdatedBy | Yes | Yes | You can also use ParentId\_c as query criteria to retrieve the list of documents in a folder. However, that field isn’t displayed in query results unless your query specifies a ParentId\_\_c value. Files Connect supports all standard Google Drive properties, but not custom properties. The following properties have different field names in Salesforce external objects: SOQL and SOSL Support for Google Drive External Objects | Google Property | Salesforce Field | | --- | --- | | alternateLink | DisplayUrl | | createDate | CreationDate | | description | Comment | | downloadURL | contentStreamUri | | editable | readOnly | | fileSize | ContentLength | | id | ExternalId | | lastModifyingUserName | UpdatedBy | | mimeType | MimeType | | modifiedDate | UpdateDate | | ownerNames | Author | | originalFilename | contentStreamFileName | | title | Name | This subset of fields supports SOQL and SOSL queries. (None are sortable, reflecting limitations in the Google Drive API.) - CreationDate - lastViewedByMeDate - MimeType - Name ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Google Drive queries on the Name field support only one wildcard, %. Searches using this wildcard match only name prefixes. For example, the title "HelloWorld" would be returned with the query Name LIKE "Hello%" but not Name LIKE "%World". - sharedWithMe ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Queries on the sharedWithMe field with a value of "false" are not supported, protecting confidential data. - starred - UpdateDate #### See Also - [The Files Connect Setup Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The setup process for Files Connect varies by external data source.") - [Include SharePoint Custom Properties in Search, SOQL, and SOSL Queries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_sp_custom_props.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you create an external object for a SharePoint data source, some special steps are needed to search or query any custom properties it contains.") # Include SharePoint Custom Properties in Search, SOQL, and SOSL Queries After you create an external object for a SharePoint data source, some special steps are needed to search or query any custom properties it contains. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Files Connect for cloud-based external data sources is available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an external object and provide access to its fields: Customize Application
## Configuring Custom Properties in SharePoint If you have the existing mapped custom columns and Office documents' (Microsoft Word, Excel, etc.) metadata in SharePoint, external objects in Salesforce let you select and filter on the following custom properties: - Custom columns defined in a Custom Content Type - Metadata from Microsoft Word, Excel, and other Office documents To search on these custom properties in Salesforce, a Sharepoint administrator must create a corresponding Managed Property. - To display these properties in external object fields, or use them in SOQL or SOSL `SELECT` queries, set the corresponding Managed Property to Retrievable. - To filter on these properties in external objects, or use them as query criteria in a SOQL or SOSL `WHERE` clause, set the corresponding Managed Property to Queryable. ## Querying Resulting Fields in Salesforce for SharePoint Online In the following example, `CustomProperty` stands for the Custom column name defined in the Custom Content Type, or the Office document metadata name. `ManagedCustomProperty` stands for the corresponding Managed Property name. In most cases, you can use `ManagedCustomProperty` for both the `SELECT` and `WHERE` clause. Here’s a SOQL example: ```sql SELECT ManagedCustomProperty FROM items_spOnline_x WHERE ManagedCustomProperty=... ``` However, for file types that SharePoint doesn’t index for search, such as .jpg, .png, and .pdf files, you must use `CustomProperty` in the `SELECT` clause and `ManagedCustomProperty` in the `WHERE` clause. As a workaround, you can define an alias on the Managed Property in SharePoint and format queries like this: ```sql SELECT Alias FROM items_spOnline WHERE Alias=... ``` Normally, custom properties aren’t displayed on external object detail pages—defining an alias also addresses this issue. ## Boolean Custom Properties When using boolean (Yes/No) custom properties with a corresponding Managed Property set to the Text type, the corresponding external object field must be set to the Text type as well. In filters, the values “0” and ”1” equal false and true, respectively. For example: ```sql WHERE customBooleanWithTextManagedProperty=”1” ``` “0” and ”1” are also displayed as results, however, so boolean custom properties should use a Managed Property type of YesNo. Set the corresponding external object field to Checkbox to query it with standard `true` or `false` values. For example: ```sql WHERE customBooleanWithYesNoManagedProperty=true ``` ## Metadata in Microsoft Office Documents The Sharepoint Search service returns all metadata from Office documents as strings, so corresponding external object fields must be set to the Text type. Dates are returned in the format, MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss AM/PM, (for example, “3/31/2015 9:59:00 PM”). To query on fields using the Date type, the external object must include a corresponding Date field for filtering, and a Text field for selecting. ## Limitations for Specific SharePoint Property Types in Salesforce for SharePoint Online - Number, Currency, and Choice multiple properties can’t be selected for file types SharePoint doesn’t index for search. By default, this includes image, video, and .pdf files, although .pdf files are natively indexed starting with SharePoint 2013. - Multiple Line of Text, URL, and Date properties aren’t queryable. - Choice multiple and URL properties can’t be selected. #### See Also - [Include a Files Connect Data Source in Global Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Combine searches for Salesforce data with external data from Google Drive, SharePoint, OneDrive for Business, or Box. Developers can automate the process with supported SOQL or SOSL queries with the API.") # Inform Customers About Your Experience Builder Site Availability Keep your customers informed when they can’t immediately access your Experience Builder site. Customizable availability pages describe what’s happening while customers wait for your site to load. The Service Not Available page lets them know when your site is down. When your site has higher-than-usual demand, the Too Many Requests page appears. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
This feature is available for all sites that use the Salesforce CDN. The Salesforce CDN is enabled by default for sites that use enhanced domains. You can also configure custom domains to use the Salesforce CDN option. ## Customize Availability Pages in Experience Builder You can customize the layout and configure the colors, fonts, images, and sizes for the pages. Use the HTML Editor and Rich Content Editor to update the content (including language) and images. The Service Not Available page has its own theme with a customizable header and footer. The Service Not Available page’s theme is shared with the Too Many Requests page. Some standard Experience Builder features aren’t available for these pages, such as SEO settings, public page settings, and progressive rendering. Custom components aren’t available for these pages. You have different configuration options, depending on whether you’re using an Aura or LWR site. If you’re using an LWR site, you can update the page layout from a single column. If you’re using an Aura site, you can only use a single column for the layout. Audiences and Page Variations features of Aura sites aren’t available for this page. To access the availability pages in Experience Builder: - From Setup, enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, and then select **All Sites**. - Click **Builder** next to the site you want to access. - Click the Pages menu, and then choose **Service Not Available** or **Too Many Requests**. To make the page available for use, click **Publish**. - **[Use a Custom Service Not Available Page for Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_sna_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Maintain business continuity with customers and enable them to log cases when your site is down using the Service Not Available page in Experience Builder. - **[Use a Custom Too Many Requests Page for Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_tmr_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When your site’s performance is impacted by high traffic, the Too Many Requests page displays a customizable message to let customers know they’ll be redirected momentarily. The page automatically refreshes to check when the site is working and redirects customers to the site when it’s available. # Insights for Engagement Insights are reports that help community managers monitor activity and take action on that activity. Insights make it easier to manage day-to-day moderation tasks, encourage engagement, and drive member adoption. You can set up Insights to monitor new members, unanswered questions, newly created groups, trending topics, and even recent Chatter contributions. The main difference between Engagement Insights and dashboards are that Insights let you take immediate action on recent activity in your Experience Cloud site, and the reports in dashboards let you see trends. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Let us do the setup work for you! Keep in mind that you can get preconfigured dashboards in the [Salesforce Communities Management package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reporting_dashboards_package.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Salesforce Communities Management packages give community managers an essential starter set of dashboards and reports to keep tabs on activity and engagement directly in Experience Workspaces.") available for download on the AppExchange. Insight reports provided in the package are 100% customizable. You can change the default page names, report folder mappings (except moderation report folder mappings), and even the report columns and filters at any time. So don’t be afraid to customize or change what you get in the package. To map Engagement Insights dashboards, in a site’s Workspaces, click **Dashboards** | **Engagement**. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example With an Insights report set up to track new members, community managers can quickly navigate to a new member’s profile to send them a welcome message. ![Screen shot of Insight report.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_insight_report.png) They can also access other reports about members directly from the Insights page using the drop-down menu. ![Screen shot of a mapped Insight page with the drop-down report menu expanded.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_insight_report_switch.png) ## View and Customize Engagement Insights Use Engagement Insights to monitor recent activity and immediately take action. Engagement Insights help you manage day-to-day moderation tasks and keep up on adoption and engagement in your Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To view Engagement Insights in Experience Workspaces:

Access Experience Management OR Manage Experiences OR Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the Experience Cloud site

To customize Engagement Insights reports: Create and Customize Reports
Each Engagement Insights page includes multiple reports. You can access these reports using the dropdown menu on the page. On the Engagement Insights page, links are automatically created for report fields such as Created By or Group Name. For posts, comments, and messages, you can even see the contents directly on the page. Engagement Insights are powerful tools that you can use to perform mass-actions. For example, if a spammer attacks your site, you can select all the offending posts and click **Delete Post**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Some Engagement Insights actions require special permissions. If you can’t perform an action, let your admin know. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Dashboards** or **Moderation**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Your admin maps Engagement Insights pages. If the Dashboards or Moderation section doesn’t include any Engagement Insights pages, your admin hasn’t mapped them yet. Pages with mapped report folders appear when you expand the sections. 3. Click the Engagement Insights page you want to view. - To access other Engagement Insights reports, use the dropdown menu. - Take action! Only the first two actions are displayed on the page. To see more actions, click ![Down arrow icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/list_view_down_arrow_lex.png) next to the displayed actions. You can select up to 100 rows at a time. - To filter the report by relative and custom date ranges, use the dropdown date filter. Select one of the following relative date ranges: All Time, This Week, This Month, Last Month, Today, Yesterday, Last 7 Days, and Last 30 Days. You can also enter your own custom date range. - To sort the report by a specific column, click the column heading. An arrow on the column indicates whether the report is sorted by ascending or descending order. - To edit or customize the report, click ![Icon to edit the report](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/bi_dashboard_pencil_icon.png) to open the report in your internal org. From there you can customize the report to fit your needs, such as adding or removing columns and updating the report filters. - To edit the actions assigned to a page, click ![Icon to edit the actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/bi_dashboard_options_icon.png) to open the Edit Engagement Insights Actions page. Actions that appear on the Engagement Insights report are displayed based on the data returned in the report. For example, if the report returns data about a user, the **Freeze Member** and **Unfreeze Member** actions are displayed. If the report stops returning data, actions aren’t removed. However, when you go to update the actions, we let you know that some are no longer appropriate. Each Engagement Insights report can have its own actions. You can edit these actions at any time, but keep in mind that an Engagement Insights report must have at least one action. Actions displayed in the picklist on the Edit Engagement Insights Actions page are all the available and appropriate actions for your report, including custom actions. Engagement Insights reports are automatically refreshed when you access them. You can also force an update. ## Create Custom Actions for Insights Do more with Insights reports with custom actions. Say a spammer attacks your Experience Cloud site. You can create and use a custom action to remove all the spammer’s posts and comments with just one click. Custom Insights actions work with standard objects and custom objects. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create, edit, and set version settings for Visualforce pages: Customize Application
To edit custom Visualforce controllers: Author Apex
When you click an Insights action in the report, behind the scenes a Visualforce page drives the action. The Visualforce page links to standard or custom objects using standard controllers or standard list controllers. Here are the high-level steps of how to create a custom Insights action. 1. Create a Visualforce page. There are a few options you can use: - Use a standard controller Choose this option to create a Visualforce page that contains the same functionality and logic used in standard Salesforce pages. For example, if you use the standard Accounts controller, clicking a **Save** button in a Visualforce page results in the same behavior as clicking **Save** on a standard Account edit page. - Use a standard list controller Choose this option to create a Visualforce page that can display or act on a set of records. Examples of existing Salesforce pages that work with a set of records include: list pages, related lists, and mass action pages. - Use a controller extension that uses Apex Choose this option if you want to expose new functionality, customize the navigation through an application, use callouts or web services, or if you need finer control for how information is accessed for your page. All options work with standard objects and custom objects. For detailed information about these options, see the Visualforce Developer Guide. 2. Add your custom action to the Insights report. Actions are displayed based on the data returned in the report. Make sure that you have a report that is currently returning the data your action needs. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Navigate to the Insights report that you want to apply your new custom action to. 3. On the report, click ![Gear icon for Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/list_view_charts_gear_icon.png) and then add your custom action from the picklist. 3. Ensure that your users have the correct permissions to complete your custom action. Depending on how you set up your custom action, after the action is executed, the user either stays on the Insights page or is redirected to a page in your internal org. Unlike our standard Insights actions, users don’t receive the standard success or failure message for custom actions. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Here’s an example of a custom action to delete all activity from an Experience Cloud site member. This custom action is great for cleaning up thesite after a spam attack. Create a custom controller extension using an Apex class and use it in your Visualforce page. The following `DeleteAllActivityControllerExtension` class is an example of a custom controller extension. ```markup public with sharing class DeleteAllActivityControllerExtension { private List ids; private String retURL; private Database.DeleteResult[] deleteResult = null; private Map resultMap; private String success = 'success'; private String failure = 'failure'; public DeleteAllActivityControllerExtension(ApexPages.StandardController controller) { resultMap = new Map(); /* The IDs you select on the Insights page are stored in a comma separated string of IDs. This string is passed in a parameter called "idsList" */ String idsList = ApexPages.currentPage().getParameters().get('idsList'); //The return URL to the Insights page is passed in a parameter called "retURL" retURL = ApexPages.currentPage().getParameters().get('retURL'); ids = idsList.split(','); } public PageReference deleteAllActivity() { deleteFeedPosts(); deleteFeedComments(); //Include these two lines of code to be redirected to the Insights page after you click the action. PageReference retPage = new PageReference(retURL); retPage.setRedirect(true); Integer failureCount = calculateFailureCount(); Integer successCount = ids.size() - failureCount; retPage.getParameters().put(success, String.valueOf(successCount)); retPage.getParameters().put(failure, String.valueOf(failureCount)); return retPage; } private void deleteFeedPosts() { List feedItems = [Select Id, CreatedById FROM FeedItem WHERE CreatedById IN :ids]; deleteResult = Database.delete(feedItems, false); //Update the resultMap with failures to calculate the failureCount if(deleteResult != null) { for(Integer i=0;i < deleteResult.size();i++) { if (!deleteResult.get(i).isSuccess()) { for(Database.Error error : deleteResult.get(i).getErrors()) { resultMap.put(string.valueOf(feedItems.get(i).CreatedById), failure); } } } } } private void deleteFeedComments() { List feedComments = [Select Id, CreatedById FROM FeedComment WHERE CreatedById IN :ids]; deleteResult = Database.delete(feedComments, false); //Update the resultMap with failures to calculate the failureCount if(deleteResult != null) { for(Integer i=0;i < deleteResult.size();i++) { if (!deleteResult.get(i).isSuccess()) { for(Database.Error error : deleteResult.get(i).getErrors()) { resultMap.put(string.valueOf(feedComments.get(i).CreatedById), failure); } } } } } private Integer calculateFailureCount() { Integer failureCount = 0; for (String result : resultMap.values()) { if (failure == result) { failureCount++; } } return failureCount; } } ``` This code creates a **Delete All Activity** button in your Insights report. This button deletes all posts and comments for any selected members. If you wanted to delete all private messages and files too, you could expand the code. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - This code example doesn’t include any permission checks. This custom action only works for admins. - The IDs for the items you selected on the Insights report are passed to the Visualforce page using the `idsList` parameter. The following Visualforce markup shows how the custom controller extension can be used in a page. ```markup ``` #### See Also - [_Salesforce Help_: Visualforce Pages as Global Custom Actions](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/HTViewHelpDoc?id=custom_actions_vf_pages_for_global_actions.htm&language=en_US) - [_Visualforce Developer Guide_: Standard Controllers](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.pages.meta/pages/pages_controller_std.htm) - [_Visualforce Developer Guide_: Standard List Controllers](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.pages.meta/pages/pages_controller_sosc_about.htm) - [_Visualforce Developer Guide_: Building a Controller Extension](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.pages.meta/pages/pages_controller_extension.htm) # Install Chatter Desktop Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. For more information, see [Chatter Desktop Retirement](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=000267581&type=1&language=en_US). Salesforce provides two Chatter Desktop installers: a standard version for individual installations and a managed version for enterprise deployments. The following are the minimum requirements for using Chatter Desktop: - Windows - 2.33 GHz or faster x86-compatible processor, or Intel Atom™ 1.6 GHz or faster processor for netbook devices - Microsoft® Windows® XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista® Home Premium, Business, Ultimate, or Enterprise (including 64-bit editions) with Service Pack 2, or Windows 7 - 512 MB of RAM (1 GB recommended) - Mac - Intel® Core™ Duo 1.83 GHz or faster processor - Mac OS X v 10.5, 10.6, or v10.7 - 512 MB of RAM (1 GB recommended) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important Chatter Desktop uses Adobe® Integrated Runtime (AIR®), Adobe's cross-platform runtime environment for desktop applications, and runs only on operating systems that Adobe AIR supports. Chatter Desktop doesn’t run on operating systems that Adobe AIR doesn’t support, such as 64-bit Linux. See the Adobe website for information on Adobe AIR. The standard version: - Requires administrator privileges on your machine - Doesn’t require administrator privileges in Salesforce - Automatically installs the required version of Adobe® Integrated Runtime (AIR®) - Requires acceptance of an end-user license agreement when Chatter Desktop first launches - Posts “Installed Chatter Desktop” to Chatter when Chatter Desktop first launches - Periodically checks Salesforce for new versions To install the standard version: 1. From your personal settings, enter Chatter Desktop in the Quick Find box, then select Chatter Desktop. 2. Click the **Download Now** badge. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Administrators can disable the Chatter Desktop download page and block users from accessing Chatter Desktop. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important Chatter Desktop uses Adobe® Acrobat® Reader to preview PDF files. Before you preview files with Chatter Desktop, download Adobe Acrobat from [Adobe's website](http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html), install it, and open it at least once to complete the installation. #### See Also - [Uninstall Chatter Desktop](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_uninstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "How to uninstall Chatter Desktop.") # Install Chatter Desktop Managed Version Salesforce provides two Chatter Desktop installers: a standard version for individual installations and a managed version for enterprise deployments. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic

Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, Developer, and Database.com Editions

Salesforce CRM, Approvals, Chatter email notifications, Chatter Invitations, and customer invitations are not available in Database.com.

![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. For more information, see [Chatter Desktop Retirement](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=000267581&type=1&language=en_US). The following are the minimum requirements for using Chatter Desktop: - Windows - 2.33 GHz or faster x86-compatible processor, or Intel Atom™ 1.6 GHz or faster processor for netbook devices - Microsoft® Windows® XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista® Home Premium, Business, Ultimate, or Enterprise (including 64-bit editions) with Service Pack 2, or Windows 7 - 512 MB of RAM (1 GB recommended) - Mac - Intel® Core™ Duo 1.83 GHz or faster processor - Mac OS X v 10.5, 10.6, or v10.7 - 512 MB of RAM (1 GB recommended) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important Chatter Desktop uses Adobe® Integrated Runtime (AIR®), Adobe's cross-platform runtime environment for desktop applications, and runs only on operating systems that Adobe AIR supports. Chatter Desktop doesn’t run on operating systems that Adobe AIR doesn’t support, such as 64-bit Linux. See the Adobe website for information on Adobe AIR. The managed version of Chatter Desktop is ideal for enterprises deploying Chatter Desktop to users who don't have administrator privileges on their machines. The managed version: - Doesn’t automatically install AIR. Your IT department must obtain a redistribution agreement from Adobe Systems Incorporated and deploy the required version of AIR before they deploy Chatter Desktop - Requires your IT department to accept the Chatter Desktop managed version end-user license agreement on behalf of the deployed Chatter Desktop users - Doesn’t automatically post to Chatter when Chatter Desktop first launches - Doesn’t regularly check Salesforce for new versions To install the managed version: 1. Deploy Adobe® Integrated Runtime (AIR®) version 2.6 or later (the latest version is recommended) to the machines where you plan to deploy Chatter Desktop. AIR is Adobe's cross-platform runtime environment for desktop applications, and is a prerequisite for Chatter Desktop. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Visit these links before deploying AIR: - AIR® overview: [http://www.adobe.com/devnet/air/articles/distributing\_air\_in\_enterprise.html](http://www.adobe.com/devnet/air/articles/distributing_air_in_enterprise.html) - Information on obtaining an AIR® redistribution license from Adobe Systems Incorporated: [http://www.adobe.com/products/air/runtime\_distribution1.html](http://www.adobe.com/products/air/runtime_distribution1.html) - Installation information: [http://help.adobe.com/en\_US/air/redist/WS485a42d56cd19641-70d979a8124ef20a34b-8000.html](http://help.adobe.com/en_US/air/redist/WS485a42d56cd19641-70d979a8124ef20a34b-8000.html) - Administration information: [http://help.adobe.com/en\_US/air/admin/WS485a42d56cd1964167ea49bd124ef17d52a-8000.html](http://help.adobe.com/en_US/air/admin/WS485a42d56cd1964167ea49bd124ef17d52a-8000.html) 2. From Setup, enter Chatter Desktop Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Chatter Desktop Settings**. 3. To download the managed version, click the link. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important Chatter Desktop uses Adobe® Acrobat® Reader to preview PDF files. Before you preview files with Chatter Desktop, download Adobe Acrobat from [Adobe's website](http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html), install it, and open it at least once to complete the installation. #### See Also - [Control Access to Chatter Desktop](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_admin.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter Desktop is enabled for most organizations, but administrators can control access to Chatter Desktop.") - [Configure Chatter Desktop Managed Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_configuring_managed_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Control Chatter Desktop settings by deploying an XML-based configuration file to each user's machine. The configuration in the file overrides the user's settings.") # Invite People to Join Chatter If enabled by your administrator, you can invite people to use Chatter who also work for your company but don't have Salesforce licenses. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To invite people to Chatter: Allow Invitations
Invited users can view profiles, post on their feed, and join groups, but they can't see your Salesforce data or records. You can [invite users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_invite.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If enabled by your administrator, you can invite people to use Chatter who also work for your company but don't have Salesforce licenses.") from the People tab or when adding members to a group. Also, you can add customers to private groups that you own or manage. To invite people to Chatter: 1. On the Chatter page, click **Invite Coworkers!**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note You can invite only people with email addresses in your company's domains. Portal users can't send invitations. 2. To send invitations from Chatter, enter email addresses and click **Send**. 3. To send invitations using your own email account, click **send your own email invitation**. If you have set a default email client, an email with an invitation link opens in your mail program. Otherwise, you see an invitation link that you can copy and paste into an email. You can also invite coworkers to join a public group, even if they don't use Chatter yet. Owners and managers of private groups can send invitations. If customer invitations are enabled, owners and managers can also invite customers. When someone accepts an invitation to join the group, they join Chatter as well. 1. Click the **Groups** tab, and click a group name. 2. In the Manage Members section on the group detail page, click **\+ Add** next to a member’s name to add them to the group. You can also search for members. If you’re the group owner or manager, you can also click **Add/Remove Members**, then click **Invite them to Salesforce Chatter!**. 3. Enter email addresses, and click **Send**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If a user doesn't accept the invitation within the first day, Chatter sends an email reminder the second day. If the user doesn't accept that invitation, Chatter sends another reminder the following day. A user has up to 60 days to accept an invitation to join Chatter. If during that time, an administrator deselects Allow Invitations or removes the user's domain from the list, the user can't accept the invitation. When delegated authentication single sign-on is enabled in your organization, invited users bypass the password registration page. If their username exists, they can’t accept the invitation. #### See Also - [Chatter Customers in Private Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_external_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter customers are people outside your company's email domains. Customers can see only the groups they're invited to. They can interact only with members of those groups. Customers can’t see any Salesforce information.") # Join or Leave Chatter Groups Join Chatter groups to collaborate with other people on projects or common areas of interest. Share project-related files and information with the group. Leave the groups that are no longer relevant to you. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
1. Go to the group’s detail page. 2. To join a public group, click **Join** or **Join Group**. To join a private group, click **Ask to Join**. Your request is sent to the private group’s owner and managers, who accept or decline your request. You can join up to 300 groups and your org can have up to 30,000 groups. Archived groups count toward your org’s group limits (30,000) but not toward a user’s group membership limits (300). To leave a group that you joined or to withdraw your request to join a private group, go to the group detail page and click ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png) or **Leave Group**. If you don’t see these options, ask your Salesforce admin to adjust the page layout. # Keep Track of Chatter Posts with Bookmarks Use bookmarks to track Chatter posts that you’re interested in. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Bookmark a post by selecting **Bookmark** from the post’s overflow menu. After you bookmark a post, you can find it again easily through the **Bookmarked** feed on the left sidebar of the Chatter home page. The **Bookmarked** feed is personal. It shows only the posts that you bookmark. Other users can’t see which posts you’ve bookmarked. When someone comments on a post that you bookmarked, you’re notified by email. Bookmark notifications are enabled by default, but you can change your [email notifications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_email_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In your personal Chatter email settings, you can change your preferences for receiving email notifications and digests. On a group page, you can set your notification preferences for that group."). There’s no limit on the number of bookmarks that you can add. When you’re no longer interested in a bookmarked post, you can remove the bookmark by selecting **Remove Bookmark** from the post’s overflow menu. This action removes the post from the **Bookmarked** feed. - **[Bookmark a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_post_bookmarking.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use bookmarks to track the posts that you want to get back to. View bookmarked posts in the Bookmarked feed. - **[Remove a Bookmark from a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_bookmark_removing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you remove a bookmark from a Chatter post, the post no longer appears in the Bookmarked feed. #### See Also - [Like Posts and Comments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_like.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Like posts or comments to show your approval and receive email notifications if others comment on that post. You receive notifications only if you’ve selected to in your personal Chatter settings.") - [View a Particular Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_filters.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Change your Chatter feed to show a subset of posts.") - [Guidelines for Managing Your Personal Chatter Email Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_email_notify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Control the number of Chatter emails that you receive by choosing your most important feeds. And set the best frequency for personal and group digests.") # Key Concepts in Page Redirection in Aura and LWR Sites Page redirects help maintain the discoverability and SEO equity of your sites in Experience Cloud. Learn some of the key concepts and considerations before you set up page redirection in your Aura and Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) sites. ## Internal Redirects To redirect users away from one Experience Builder site page to another page on the same site, create an internal redirect. To configure internal redirects for a site that exists on multiple domains, create redirect entries with the corresponding path prefixes for all of the domains. For example: ``` MyDomainCommunity/s/source, /target /CustomDomainCommunity/s/source, /target ``` Keep the following in mind when creating an internal redirect: - The source URL is the Experience Builder site page that you want to direct your users away from. - The target URL is the page in the same Experience Builder site that you want to redirect your users to. - For the source and target URLs, include everything after the domain name. - Only use the root path as the source URL if the site where you configure the redirect is hosted on the root of the domain. - Include the path prefix in the source URL, but not the target. For the target URL in Aura sites, this means including everything after the /s. - Server-side URL redirect rules run when the web server handles a request for a path. Client-side navigation doesn’t go through the same request flow, so it doesn’t respect the server-side rules in the same way. ## External Redirects You can also set up external redirects, which redirect users to or from a page outside of your Aura or LWR site. Keep the following in mind when creating external redirects: - To create an external redirect, add the source and target URLs to a CSV file. - The source URL is the page that you want to direct your users away from. - The target URL is the page that you want to redirect your users to. - Only use the root path as the source URL if the site where you configure the redirect is hosted on the root of the domain. ## Static and Dynamic Redirects Static page redirects point a user from one URL to another. You essentially tell Salesforce where to send a user based on the URL they were trying to reach. Let’s say your users are trying to reach www.mysite.com/homepage. However, you’ve replaced the site with www.mysite.com/home-page. At that point, you create a redirect from the first site to the second. Dynamic URL redirect rules use a pattern to identify a URL and automatically redirect a user to a new URL based on that pattern. Dynamic rules are especially helpful when you create user-friendly URL slugs for custom objects and your product and category pages in Salesforce B2C Commerce stores. Keep these points in mind when creating dynamic redirect rules: - There’s a limit of 100 dynamic redirect rules per org. - Redirect rules require a source and a target. - You can use dynamic redirect rules for internal and external redirects. When using dynamic rules, the system compares the URL that the customer enters to the source URL. If the patterns match, then the customer is redirected to the target URL. Aura and LWR sites support static and dynamic redirects: - From registered custom domain URLs previously hosted outside Salesforce - To URLs hosted outside Salesforce - Between site pages hosted on Salesforce domains - That include query params in source and target URLs ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Dynamic redirects don't work for URLs that start with `/secur`, end with .`css`, or have `lastmod=`. ## Redirect Users to Your Aura and LWR Site Pages Set up page redirects on your Aura and LWR sites in Experience Cloud. To set up URL redirects from a page in your site to an external target, add the source and target URLs to a CSV file and then import the file in the Administration workspace. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To delete or deactivate existing redirects, use the [Lightning Platform REST API](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.api_rest.meta/api_rest/intro_what_is_rest_api.htm) to interact with the [SiteRedirectMapping](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_siteredirectmapping.htm) object. Don’t import a blank CSV file from the URL Redirects page. Keep these points in mind when importing CSV files: - The redirects go live as soon as you upload them successfully. - If you import a new CSV file, it overwrites the existing redirect file. - The CSV file of redirects has a 4-MB file size limit. ![URL Redirects user interface, showing where you can import the CSV file](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/seo_url_redirects.png) 1. In Experience Workspaces, go to **Administration** | **URL Redirects** | **Import**. 2. If you plan to add URL redirects without replacing existing redirect rules, first export your existing redirects as a CSV file. 3. Add the new URLs to the file that you downloaded, and then import the CSV file again. If the file size is 10,240 bytes or smaller and uploads successfully, a summary of your most recent import appears on the URL Redirects page. If the file size exceeds 10,240 bytes, or if the total number of URLs previously imported is more than 100, an email notifies you of the import status. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example **CSV for Internal Redirects** In this example, https://MyDomainName.com/TargetSite/s/account/001RM000005Su9JYAS/acme redirects to https://MyDomainName.com/TargetSite/s/newaccount/001RM000005Su9JYAS/acme. This example outlines the format to use when redirecting from one Experience Builder site page to another page in the same site. ``` /source, /target /TargetSite/s/account/001RM000005Su9JYAS/acme, /newaccount/001RM000005Su9JYAS/acme ``` If a source URL’s page is still available to users, internal redirects from that URL occur only if a user navigates to the source URL by using their browser. If a user clicks an available source URL through a site page, such as Global Search Results or Top Articles, the user is directed to that URL instead and isn’t redirected to the target URL. **CSV for External Redirects in Aura Sites** In this example, https://MyDomainName.com/case/oldCaseLocation redirects to https:// MyDomainName.com/TargetSite/s/case/500RM000003UjsEYAS/my-case-2. This example outlines the format to use when creating external redirects. For the source URL, include everything after the domain name. For the target URL, include everything after /s. ``` /source, /target /case/oldCaseLocation, /case/500RM000003UjsEYAS/my-case-2 ``` **CSV for Dynamic URL Redirect Rules in Aura and LWR Sites** A URL comprises path segments that are separated by a “/”. For example, `/path/to/source` has three path segments: `path`, `to`, `and` source. An asterisk (\*) denotes a wildcard that can match any text on the source side. If you use a variable in the source URL, you must also use it in the target URL. A simple example of a dynamic redirect rule is `/prod/pid/`(productId)`, /product/`(productId), where (productId) is a variable. Here's a sample CSV file that includes this rule: ``` /source, /target /prod/pid/(productId), /product/(productId) ``` A customer enters the URL `https://www.my.company.salesforce.com/prod/pid/prd-123` In this case, the `prod/pid/prd-123` part of the URL matches the `/prod/pid/(product)` source. So the customer is redirected to the target `https://www.my.company.salesforce.com/product/prd-123`. Consider a scenario that uses a wildcard for redirects. If you add the rule: ``` /path/*/category, /categories/category-abc-slug ``` And the customer enters `https://www.my.company.salesforce.com/path/id/category`. Then the source `/path/id/category` part of the URL matches the `/path/*/category` source, and as a result, the customer is redirected to `https://www.my.company.salesforce.com/path/categories/category-abc-slug`. You can use multiple variables and multiple wildcards, but only one variable and wildcard per path segment. # Knowledgeable People Highlight topic experts so the site can direct questions straight to them. The Knowledgeable People component displays up to five experts, chosen based on factors such as best answers, mentions, or likes on questions and posts. In the Page Editor, you can configure the Knowledgeable People component on Topic View pages. 1. Select the **Knowledgeable People** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Title | Enter a title for the component. The default text is Knowledgeable People. | | Topic ID | The default entry, {!topicId}, displays unique knowledgeable users for each topic. To instead display knowledgeable users based on a specific topic, enter the topic ID. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Knowledgeable People component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/knowledgeable_people_communities.png) For sites created in Spring ‘15 or earlier, complete these steps to add the Knowledgeable People component: - From the site, click ![Community management gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_gear_16x16.png) in the global header. - Click **Administration** | **Preferences**, and select **Enable knowledgeable people on topics**. - Click **Administration** | **Pages**, and go to Site.com Studio. - In the Site Pages section, double-click the **main** page. - In the Views tab at left, double-click **Customer Service Topic View**. - Click the Page Elements tab ![Page Elements tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/siteforce_icon_pageitems.png), and search for the Knowledgeable People component. - Right-click the component, and place it in the `div.cSecondaryContent` section. #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Language Selector Add the Language Selector component to multilingual sites so guest users can select their preferred language on public site pages. Only guest users on public pages see the Language Selector component. The site initially appears in the default site language until the user selects a different language. The page then reloads in the selected language if a translation is available. For authenticated users on private pages, the site typically appears in their profile language automatically. But when users have credentials and they’re not yet logged in, they’re treated like a guest user. So if a user selects a language on a public page that contains a Language Selector component—let’s say the Home page—that language choice persists after the user logs in. There are two exceptions to this rule. - The Login page is a public page, but even if it contains the Language Selector component, the language selection that a user makes on this page doesn’t persist after login. - If a user’s profile language differs from the default site language, and the user chooses the default site language in the language selector, that choice doesn't persist after login. Instead, the site appears in the user’s profile language. To change the profile language preference as an authenticated user, open the Experience Workspace for the site that you want to view, and follow these steps. 1. From the User Profile, click **My Settings**. ![my settings in admin user profile](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/admin_user_experience_workspace.png) 2. From the My Personal Information menu, click **Language & Time Zone**, and select a profile language. Then when you access a site as a logged-in user, the site URL displays your selected language. ![Language settings in experience workspace](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/language_settings_experience_workspace.png) 3. To view the updated profile language, log out, and then log back in to your site. The Language Selector component isn’t included on any page by default. Add it manually to the pages in your site. You can add the Language Selector component to any section of any page, but we recommend placing it where it’s easy to spot. Also, consider adding the component to a theme region, such as the Template Header Top region. Items that are added to theme regions are common across all pages, so it’s not necessary to add the component to every page. Customized components and Salesforce Knowledge articles use the translations that the site admin adds through Translation Workbench. 1. To add the Language Selector component to your page, drag it onto the page that you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component: | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Label | Identifies this component on a page. This text helps increase accessibility. Default text is Preferred Language. | | Button Label Alignment | Specifies how the language selector’s label is aligned on the button. Select Left, Center, or Right. The default value is Center. | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - For information about setting up languages in a site, see [Multilingual Communities Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=community_builder_multilingual_overview.htm&language=en_US). If no languages apart from the default language are set in the site, the language selector shows the default language without a dropdown option. - To see the list of languages that guest users see, make sure that you’re on a page that contains the Language Selector component. Then click the selector’s dropdown icon. - When a guest user accesses a site in a language that’s not included in the Language Selector component, the site redirects to the set default language in Experience Builder. - A user can add the query parameters for one of the site's supported languages to the site's URL in the browser address bar and override the default site language. However, this method isn’t supported and can cause inconsistent behavior. When authenticated users want to view a multilingual site in another language, their best option is to view the site as a guest user. Or, these users can change their profile language. - Ensure that all translated content and Salesforce Knowledge articles have a version in the site’s default language. - Before Summer ’18, the Language Selector component was named Language Picker. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Language Selector component with dropdown language list visible: ![Open language selector](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_lang_picker_open.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") - [Best Practices and Considerations for Multilingual Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_best_practices.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep these practices and considerations in mind when you’re setting up a multilingual site.") # Lead Distribution and Deal Registration Experience Cloud sites provide an incredibly robust and flexible set of tools to manage both inbound and outbound leads. Use Partner Central to implement lead distribution, lead monitoring, and deal registration with a few clicks of a button. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Lead distribution is the practice of managing and maturing both inbound and outbound sales leads with channel partners who are selling on your behalf. Many companies sell their products through partners. With the lead distribution process, companies source leads and pass them to their partners for follow-up and sales. Lead distribution is also known as lead pass. Other companies rely on their partners to source leads and register them with the company. This process is known as deal registration. The channel manager checks in the Salesforce org to make sure that the submitted lead does not create channel conflict with other partners. - **[Assign Leads to Partners](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_partners_assign_leads.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can assign leads to partners or allow partners to drive their own lead queue. - **[Configure Lead Distribution in Partner Central](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_distribution_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatically pass on leads acquired from your web site, marketing campaigns, or referral programs using lead distribution. Partner Central lets you share a common pool of leads with your channel partners on a partner site using the lead inbox. - **[Configure Deal Registration in Partner Central](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_deal_reg_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Deal registration programs involve resellers registering deals with their vendor. Vendors in turn provide extra margins to the reseller for providing early pipeline visibility for these deals and keeping out competitors. Once a deal is registered, other resellers or your direct sales team can’t compete for the registered deal. # Lead Distribution Reports These reports are provided in the **Lead Distribution Reports** folder.
Report Name Description Additional Customization
Unassigned Leads Number of unassigned partner leads. Replace lead owner ID filter with the queue record ID.
Unassigned Leads by Age Displays unassigned leads by age.
  • Replace the lead owner ID filter with the queue record ID
  • Add the Lead Age formula field: ROUND(NOW()-CreatedDate, 0)
Lead Creation Trend Number of partner leads created. Replace the lead owner ID filter with the queue record ID
Leads by Partner Number of leads owned by partner.
Tip
Tip Add an age filter to Leads
Leads by Stage Displays partner leads by stage. N/A
Leads by Source Displays partner leads by channel. N/A
Leads by Region Displays partner leads by region. N/A
Leads with No Activity Displays partner leads with no activity by timeframe. N/A
# Lead Inbox Use the Lead Inbox component to share a common pool of leads with partners in your site. The lead inbox uses a queue and the list view associated with a queue to pass leads to partners. Partners included in the visibility settings for the queue and list view can see and accept leads from the Lead Inbox. Accepting a lead makes the user the owner of the lead. 1. Click the Lead Inbox component on the page you’re configuring. By default, the Lead Inbox component lives on the Home page of the Partner Central template. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component: | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Title | Specify a title for the lead inbox. The default title is Lead Inbox. | | Number of Leads | Specify the number of leads to display in the lead inbox. The default value is 5. | | Sort Order | Select a sort order for the list of leads. You can sort by the date on which the lead was created, ascending or descending. | | Link to the leads list view | Select to show a link to a lead list view on the lead inbox. | | Linked List View | If you selected the previous option, specify the leads list view you want to show a link for. By default, the first leads list view in the org is selected. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Lead Inbox Component: ![Lead Inbox component in Partner Central](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lead_inbox.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Learn About Experience Cloud Frameworks and Templates Select a framework and template as part of your site planning. The choices you make at the beginning of your site creation process have long-term downstream implications. In particular, consider your business objectives, your technical know-how, and the costs associated with each. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## Why Is This Important? You can build an Experience Cloud site using one of three frameworks: Lightning Web Runtime (LWR), Aura, or Visualforce. Each framework supports different templates. The LWR framework uses Lightning Web Components (LWC). LWC offers a platform for developers to build components on a standardized web stack. The LWR framework with LWC creates unparalleled performance and speed. LWR templates include Build Your Own (LWR) and Microsite (LWR). To build a site using an LWR template, you need access to developer resources. Aura uses a standardized Server-Side JavaScript framework, which helps developers build customizable components. But web practices have changed, improved, and become even more standardized since Server-Side JavaScript’s introduction in 2014, paving the way for the evolution to LWR. Aura templates include Customer Service, Partner Central, Help Center, Build Your Own, and Customer Account Portal. Aura templates are mostly low-code. Lightning web components and Aura components can coexist and interoperate on a page. The Visualforce framework includes a tag-based markup language, similar to HTML, and a set of server-side “standard controllers” that make basic database operations simple to perform. The Visualforce framework supports Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites. To create a branded experience using Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce, you need access to developer resources. ## Find Out More ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Which Experience Cloud Template Should I Use?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.siteforce_commtemp_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Cloud templates let you build responsive sites for delivering rich, branded spaces for your customers and partners. And with Experience Builder, you can accomplish a lot without coding. For example, you can edit a template’s components to include information about your site, add images to extend your branding, and include CMS content. And if you want a more customized experience, you can create custom pages, add components to pages, build custom Lightning components, and expose more Salesforce objects.") ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [What Is the Enhanced Sites and Content Platform?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_enhanced.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The enhanced sites and content platform is a flexible new system that brings together Salesforce CMS and Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) sites. From Winter ’23, enhanced LWR sites and enhanced CMS workspaces that you create are hosted together on this redesigned platform, which offers partial deployment, improved content management, and expression-based visibility.") # Learn More About Experience Cloud Licenses Licenses are a gateway to authenticated access to your Experience Cloud sites. So one of the most important steps when planning a site is selecting the right licenses for your use case. These licenses grant access to Experience Cloud sites to customers and partners who can't otherwise log in to your company's Salesforce org: External Identity, External Apps, Customer Community, Customer Community Plus, Partner Community, and Channel Account. A Salesforce account executive can help you understand the difference between the licenses, and help you decide the best ones for your use case. Before that, let’s answer some basic questions first. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## Why Is This Important? Licenses are an investment for your business, so license selection is key. Along with profiles and permission sets, licenses give your customers more or fewer permissions and access to items displayed on your site. One way to look at your site’s relationship with licenses is to see it as an airplane. Each passenger has a different type of ticket (license), and therefore, different levels of access. They’re all on the same ride, but each passenger has a slightly different experience based on how much their ticket cost. Customer Community Licenses get a basic pass, like an economy ticket. Customer Community Plus Licenses get more access, like a business ticket. Partner Community Licenses? They get much more access, like a first-class ticket. ## What Should You Keep in Mind? When you’re considering Experience Cloud licenses for your site, start with your site’s goals, and then find a license that aligns with them. Define and prioritize your use cases and how they impact your company. After you define your site’s goals, the next step is to define the different personas who can access the site. After you define your persona requirements, align the license for each persona. Each persona and set of requirements can require different licenses. Here are some questions to consider when choosing among the various license types. This list isn’t exhaustive, but it’s a good starting point. - Who are your site’s users? - How many users do you expect to access your site? - Are your site’s users logging in to the site to do something, or are they simply browsing and filling out the occasional form? - How often do you expect users to log in to the site? - What objects do you expect your users to access, and what type of access do they need, for example, read, write, edit? - Do your users need access to reports and dashboards? - Do your users need extra platform capabilities such as API calls, data, and file storage? - What type of sharing do you want your users to be able to access? - Do you want your customers or partners to manage their own accounts, such as adding new users for accounts they can access or disabling users? In Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions, you can create up to 100 Experience Cloud sites without buying communities licenses. However, you need licenses for some features in Experience Cloud to work. For example, to create sites using the Partner Central template, you must purchase at least one Partner Community license. Active, inactive, and preview sites, including Visualforce sites, count against this limit. Archived sites don’t count against your maximum limit. ## Find Out More ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Experience Cloud User Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_license_types_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Let Agentforce Service Agent Start Data Category-Based Conversations (Beta) Help your users find what they're looking for faster by setting up Agentforce Service Agent to read the data categories users select in real time and start conversations based on the information. ### Required Editions
View supported editions.
User Permissions Needed
To enable agents in Salesforce:

Manage AI Agents

OR

Customize Application

To build and manage Service Agents:

Manage Agentforce Service Agents AND Manage AI Agents

OR

Customize Application

To access knowledge base: Lightning Knowledge
Complete these prerequisites for desktop site and the Salesforce mobile app: 1. Make sure you have [Enhanced Chat set up](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.miaw_setup_stages.htm&type=5&language=en_US) on your customer site. 2. [Set up your self service portal.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.customize_selfservice.htm&type=5&language=en_US) 3. [Set up a service agent.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.service_agent_setup.htm&type=5&language=en_US) When you review the topics that come with a service agent, make sure General FAQ and Escalation topics are added. After creating your service agent: 1. In Agent Builder, click **Knowledge**. 2. Enable **Show Sources** and enter your knowledge domain URL. This URL is where the Agentforce Service Agent searches for the knowledge articles to answer user queries. 4. [Connect your service agent to Enhanced Chat](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.agent_setup_channels.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 5. [Configure Agentforce Service Agent to Initiate Context-Driven Conversations Based on Data Categories Selected by Users on the Desktop Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.support_cnfg_asa_data_category_selection_based_context_driven_conversations_desktop.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Follow these steps to share information about data categories with Agentforce Service Agent. 6. [Configure Agentforce Service Agent to Initiate Context-Driven Conversations on the Salesforce Mobile App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.support_cfng_ai_exp_on_mobile.htm&type=5&language=en_US) Due to the limited screen space on mobile devices, auto-triggering Agentforce Service Agent when a user enters a search query may be intrusive and distracting to the user. To make your experience better, make a special LWC part for your experience site. This part lets users select if they want Agentforce Service Agent to help them with their questions. This feature is designed to enhance the user experience by providing a more intuitive interaction with Agentforce Service Agent. Customize the name and appearance of the custom component to match your experience site’s theme. - **[Let Agentforce Service Agent Start Data Category-Based Conversations (Desktop) (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_cnfg_asa_data_category_conversations_desktop.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to share information about data categories selected by users with Agentforce Service Agent. - **[Configure Agentforce Service Agent to Initiate Context-Driven Conversations on the Salesforce Mobile App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_cfng_ai_exp_on_mobile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Due to the limited screen space on mobile devices, auto-triggering Agentforce Service Agent when a user enters a search query may be intrusive and distracting to the user. For an elevated experience, create a custom LWC component for your experience site that allows users to choose whether they want Agentforce Service Agent to help them with their queries. This feature is designed to enhance user experience by providing a more intuitive interaction with Agentforce Service Agent. Customize the name and appearance of the custom component to match your experience site’s theme. # Let Agentforce Service Agent Start Data Category-Based Conversations (Desktop) (Beta) Follow these steps to share information about data categories selected by users with Agentforce Service Agent. ### Required Editions
View supported editions.
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter and select `All Sites`. 2. In Experience Workspaces, click the **AI Experiences** tile. 3. In Settings, turn on **Share Data Category Selection with Agentforce Service Agent**. 4. From Experience Builder, [publish your experience site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.ec_publish_site.htm&type=5&language=en_US). # Let Agentforce Service Agent Start Search-Based Conversations Let Agentforce Service Agent read users’ search queries in real time and initiate context-driven conversations to help users find what they are looking for faster. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enhanced Chat and Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the Einstein for Service, Einstein Platform, Community, Community Plus, or Agentforce for Service add-on
User Permissions Needed
To enable agents in Salesforce:

Manage AI Agents

OR

Customize Application

To build and manage Service Agents:

Manage Agentforce Service Agents AND Manage AI Agents

OR

Customize Application

To access knowledge base: Lightning Knowledge
Complete these prerequisites for desktop site and the Salesforce mobile app: 1. Make sure you have [Enhanced Chat set up](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.miaw_setup_stages.htm&type=5&language=en_US) on your customer site. 2. [Set up your self service portal.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.customize_selfservice.htm&type=5&language=en_US) 3. [Set up a service agent.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.service_agent_setup.htm&type=5&language=en_US) When you review the topics that come with a service agent, make sure General FAQ and Escalation topics are added. After creating your service agent: 1. In Agent Builder, click **Knowledge**. 2. Enable **Show Sources** and enter your knowledge domain URL. This URL is where the Agentforce Service Agent searches for the knowledge articles to answer user queries. 4. [Connect your service agent to Enhanced Chat (MIAW)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.agent_setup_channels.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Let Agentforce Service Agent Start Search-Based Conversations (Desktop)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_cnfg_asa_context_driven_conversations_desktop.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to share search queries with Agentforce Service Agent. - **[Configure Agentforce Service Agent to Initiate Context-Driven Conversations on the Salesforce Mobile App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.support_cfng_ai_exp_on_mobile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Due to the limited screen space on mobile devices, auto-triggering Agentforce Service Agent when a user enters a search query may be intrusive and distracting to the user. For an elevated experience, create a custom LWC component for your experience site that allows users to choose whether they want Agentforce Service Agent to help them with their queries. This feature is designed to enhance user experience by providing a more intuitive interaction with Agentforce Service Agent. Customize the name and appearance of the custom component to match your experience site’s theme. # Let Agentforce Service Agent Start Search-Based Conversations (Desktop) Follow these steps to share search queries with Agentforce Service Agent. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter and select `All Sites`. 2. In Experience Workspaces, click the **AI Experiences** tile. 3. In Settings, turn on **Share search queries with Agentforce Service Agent**. 4. From Experience Builder, [publish your experience site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.ec_publish_site.htm&type=5&language=en_US). # Let Users and Administrators Access Files Connect Data Sources After you enable Files Connect, give users and administrators permission to access specific external data sources from Salesforce. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Files Connect for cloud-based external data sources is available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To set permissions: Customize Application
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip You can provide access to data sources through permission sets or custom profiles. However, permission sets let you more quickly adjust access for several types of users. Regardless of which method you choose, be sure to give administrators access so they can configure data sources. 1. From Setup, enter Permission Sets in the Quick Find box, then select **Permission Sets** or enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then select **Profiles**. 2. Create a permission set or profile, or click an existing one. If you use a permission set, User License must be set to the default option, “None.” 3. For a permission set, click **System Permissions**, then click **Edit**. For a profile, click **Edit**, and scroll down to the Administrative Permissions section. 4. To access cloud-based data sources, select **Files Connect Cloud**, and then click **Save**. 5. For a permission set, click **Manage Assignments** in the toolbar at the top of the page. Then click **Add Assignments**, select users for the permission set, and click **Assign**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important Include any administrators who need to configure external data sources. 6. If you haven’t already, define the external data sources for your organization: - [Define an External Data Source for SharePoint Online or OneDrive for Business](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_sp_online_xds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With Files Connect and Chatter, Salesforce can access content from Microsoft’s cloud-based systems.") - [Define an External Data Source for Google Drive](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_google_xds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Let Chatter users access their Google Drive content from the Files tab, feed posts, and search. Salesforce supports Google documents, spreadsheets, presentations, and drawings.") - [Define an External Data Source for Box](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_box_xds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Let users access their Box content from Files home, feed posts, and search.") If you select an identity type of Named Principal for the data source, skip the following steps. But if you select Per User, read on. 7. In Setup, return to the detail page for the permission set or profile. Then do either of the following: - For a permission set, in the Apps section, click **External Data Source Access**. - For a profile, go to the Enabled External Data Source Access related list. 8. Click **Edit**, add specific data sources to the Enabled External Data Sources list, and click **Save**. (Users enter their credentials when they first access external data sources, or from their personal settings on the Authenticated Settings for External Systems page.) #### See Also - [The Files Connect Setup Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The setup process for Files Connect varies by external data source.") - [Enable Salesforce Files Connect for Your Organization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Let users search and share files from external systems like Google Drive and SharePoint.") # Let Users Set Out-of-Office Messages in Chatter Let your users schedule and customize an out-of-office message, and place it next to their name in Chatter. You can enable or disable this feature in Setup, under Chatter Settings. Setting an out-of-office message is available only in Lightning Experience. ![Out of Office Setting](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collab_profiles_out_of_office_pref.png) 1. In Setup, go to **Chatter Settings**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. In the **Out of Office** section, enable (or disable) **Users can set Out of Office messages**. 4. Click **Save**. # Libraries Store, share, and manage your files in content libraries. - **[Create Libraries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_workspace_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Store, share, and manage your files in content libraries so you can decide who has access to files in each library and what permissions they have. Each org can have up to 2,000 libraries. - **[Manage Library Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_workspace_perm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A library permission is a group of privileges assigned to each Salesforce CRM Content library member. It determines the tasks that a member can perform in a particular library. The same user can have a different library permission in each library. - **[Create and Edit Library Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_workspace_perm_add.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Library permissions provide the different levels of library access that are required for most organizations. Here’s how to add new permissions and edit existing ones. - **[Assign Library Tagging Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_tagging_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Salesforce CRM Content, tags are descriptive labels that help classify and organize content. Contributors can assign tags to their files, Google docs, or web links, to enable all library members to browse for content by tag. The tagging rule in a library determines how contributors can tag content; for example, the restricted-tagging rule does not allow contributors to create tags. Library tagging rules are optional. By default, library contributors can enter any tag. - **[Restrict Record Types in a Library](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_types_restrict.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Library administrators can choose which record types are available in a library. They can also set the default record type for publishing content to the library. - **[Set Up Libraries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_libraries_component.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Libraries are a wonderful way to organize files and manage user permissions. See files displayed in a grid or switch to the familiar list view. Click a library or folder to see files displayed as thumbnails. A thumbnail view is an easy way to find files. With the Libraries component, you can sort files and pinpoint exactly what you’re looking for in no time at all. # Libraries Give access to your libraries to site members using the Libraries component. Use this component in Customer Service, Build Your Own (Aura), Partner Central, and Customer Account Portal templates. Site members view and open libraries they have access to, either in a list view or a tile view. Drill down inside libraries and folders, and the files display as thumbnails, making it easy to spot a colorful spreadsheet or perfect photo. The Libraries component doesn’t have any properties to edit, and it can be used on any page that isn’t already using the Files List component. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Libraries component: ![Libraries component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_libraries.png) # Lightning Bolt for Salesforce: Build Once, Then Distribute and Reuse Lightning Bolt for Salesforce lets you quickly build and distribute industry-specific Lightning Bolt Solutions to jump-start new org capabilities. Save time by building once and then reusing. Whether it’s for your own org or you’re a consulting partner or ISV, you can reduce the time required to implement solutions and cut development costs. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
![Time equals money](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_timemoney.png) A Lightning Bolt Solution is a portable package that’s packed with power. It can combine custom Lightning apps, business process flows, and Experience Builder templates and pages in an easy-to-build and distributable form. Use a Lightning Bolt Solution to share or sell a solution on AppExchange, implement an Experience Builder site with a turnkey solution or new look, or configure automation. You can publish apps or flows without an Experience Builder template or include one when you want to apply your brand. A Lightning Bolt Solution combines one or more of the following: - Customized Experience Builder templates—A template includes a theme layout and CSS, along with pages, content layouts, and Lightning components. Alternatively, instead of a full template, you can also export a single Experience Builder page with its content layout and components. - Flow categories—A flow category contains one or more flows, making it easy to group flows for related business processes. - Custom apps—Adding customized apps lets you create solutions tailored to your industry. Lightning Bolt Solutions are flexible, so you can take advantage of them in many ways. Here are just a few examples. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example You’ve customized the Partner Central template to create an Experience Builder site with features that meet your particular business needs. You want to create several similar partner sites, but you don’t want to build each one from scratch. By exporting your customized template, you can reuse it and build as many branded sites as you need. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example You’re a consulting partner who specializes in creating solutions for the real estate industry. Your solutions feature a unique look, custom apps for finding mortgages, and automation that alerts sales people of properties with active prospects. With a Lightning Bolt Solution, you can create and export your solution in a way that’s easy to use. After you install your Lightning Bolt Solution in the customer’s org, you can further customize it to suit their needs. By building the bulk of the solution in your org and then distributing it to your customers, you can rapidly launch new solutions. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example You’re an ISV who builds a custom insurance agent app. The app includes automation to create coverage estimates and automatically notify customers of the results. Using a Lightning Bolt Solution, you can easily bundle your app and business process flows into a single package. Distribute the package to your customers to install in their Salesforce orgs, or market the solution on AppExchange. ## Package and Distribute Your Solution You can package and distribute solutions to use in other orgs and sites. After you create and upload a package, share the link privately with your clients, customers, or partners. Alternatively, publish your custom Lightning Bolt Solution as a managed package in AppExchange. Market your solution with an AppExchange listing in the same way that you list any other app, component, or consulting service. Describe your solution, pricing, support, and other details so that customers can determine whether your offering is right for them. ![Add a Lightning Bolt Solution to a package](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_export2.png) ## Reuse Your Own Solution When you create a solution, it appears in the list of Lightning Bolt Solutions in your org. You can use it to build new Experience Builder sites or enhance an existing one. ![New solutions appear in the list of Lightning Bolt Solutions.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_lex_bolt_sol_example.png) - **[Create a Lightning Bolt Solution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Have at least one Experience Builder template, custom app, or flow category that you want to distribute? Then you’re ready to create a Lightning Bolt Solution. With Lightning Bolt Solutions, you can combine custom Lightning apps, business process flows, and Experience Builder templates and pages in easy-to-build, distributable packages. - **[Export a Customized Experience Builder Template for a Lightning Bolt Solution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can customize and export an Experience Builder template to use as a base for creating Experience Builder sites. Create custom pages, layouts, and components. Export and package the template on its own or distribute it for others to use as a part of a Lightning Bolt Solution. - **[Export a Customized Experience Builder Theme for a Lightning Bolt Solution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_theme.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Export themes that you’ve customized and use them in your own Experience Builder sites, or package and distribute them for others to use. - **[Export a Customized Experience Builder Page for a Lightning Bolt Solution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Export pages that you’ve customized in an Experience Builder site. Use them as a base for new pages, or package and distribute them for others to use in their sites. - **[Add Flows to a Lightning Bolt Solution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_flow_category.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you want to add flows to a Lightning Bolt Solution, group them into a flow category. Then add one or more flow categories to your solution. - **[Export and Packaging Considerations for Lightning Bolt Solutions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you export and package a Lightning Bolt Solution, keep the following considerations and limitations in mind. - **[Requirements for Distributing Lightning Bolt Solutions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_guidelines.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before Salesforce can recognize a Lightning Bolt Solution that’s ready for distribution on AppExchange, your solution must meet certain requirements. - **[Package and Distribute a Lightning Bolt Solution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_package.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you create a Lightning Bolt Solution, package the solution to distribute it to other users or orgs. You can upload the package to AppExchange to share or sell your solution. #### See Also - [_Salesforce Partner Community_: Lightning Bolt for Partners](https://partners.salesforce.com/s/education/general/Lightning_Bolt) - [Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.lightning.meta/lightning/intro_framework.htm) - [_Experience Cloud Developer Guide_](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/communities_dev_intro_before.htm) - [_Security Developer Center_](https://developer.salesforce.com/devcenter/security) - [_Second-Generation Managed Packaging Developer Guide_: Second-Generation Managed Packages](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.pkg2_dev.meta/pkg2_dev/sfdx_dev_dev2gp.htm) # Like Posts and Comments Like posts or comments to show your approval and receive email notifications if others comment on that post. You receive notifications only if you’ve selected to in your personal Chatter settings. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Below a post or comment, click **Like**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note When upvotes are enabled in an Experience Builder site, they count toward influence as likes received. After you click **Like** on a post, the person who created the post is notified, and you receive email notifications if others comment on that post. If you click **Like** on a comment, the person who created the comment is notified, but you aren’t notified about subsequent comments. You can change this notification behavior through your [email notification settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_email_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In your personal Chatter email settings, you can change your preferences for receiving email notifications and digests. On a group page, you can set your notification preferences for that group."). - To stop liking a post or a comment, click **Unlike**. When you stop liking a post or a comment, you aren’t notified about subsequent comments or likes. - View the profiles of others who have liked a post by clicking their name at the bottom of the post or comment, for example, “**John Smith** likes this.” - If more than three people like a post, click the link to see the full list; for example, “You, **John Smith**, and **2 others** like this.” ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note From that list, you can follow or stop following people. - Likes on comments show how many people have liked the comment, for example, “**1 person**” or “**7 people**”. To see their names, click the link. #### See Also - [Guidelines for Managing Your Personal Chatter Email Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_email_notify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Control the number of Chatter emails that you receive by choosing your most important feeds. And set the best frequency for personal and group digests.") # Limit Files in Your Experience Cloud Site Restrict the size and types of files that your members can upload. This list of file types lets you control what your members upload and also prevents spammers from polluting your Experience Cloud site with inappropriate files. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To limit files:

Manage Experiences OR Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the Experience Cloud site

File moderation must be enabled for your org before you can limit files in your Experience Cloud site. If you don’t see the option to limit files in Experience Workspaces, contact Salesforce. Your file limits apply to files uploaded by members anywhere in the site—in posts and comments, directly in the Files tab, and from the Salesforce mobile app. You can also set file limits using SOAP or Metadata API. Files uploaded before setting your file limits are unaffected. However, newer versions of those files must meet the limits you specify. Keep the following things in mind: - A file must meet the file limits set in the Experience Cloud site in which it’s uploaded. For example, if a customer uploads a file on a case and then an agent uploads a newer version in your Salesforce internal org, the limits from the customer site still apply. - Files uploaded in your internal Salesforce org that are shared in a site aren’t subject to site file limits. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Select **Administration** | **Preferences**, then enter your limits in the Files section on the page. 1. Maximum file size in MB—Enter a number between 3 MB and your org’s maximum file size. To use the default limit of 2 GB, leave this field empty or enter 0. 2. Allow only these file types—Enter file extensions separated with a comma (for example: jpg,docx,txt). You can enter lowercase and uppercase letters. You can enter up to 1,000 characters. To allow all file types, leave this field empty. 3. Click **Save**. After you set your file limits, members receive an error message if their file is larger than the size you set or if their file extension isn’t allowed. When a member tries to upload multiple files at once and a file is found that doesn’t meet your limits, none of the files are uploaded. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note By default, guest user files are blocked from being uploaded. After developer customizations (Lightning pages, for instance) have been created, admins can change the settings to let guest users upload files. To enable, go to Setup and in **Salesforce Files** | **General Settings** select Allow site guest users to upload files. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Files uploaded by guest users are unassigned. Unassigned files are public by default. We recommend setting up a trigger to assign an owner to files uploaded by guest users. You may also wish to restrict file upload size or type using file moderation. #### See Also - [Configure Settings in Your Administration Workspace](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_miscellaneous.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure settings in your administration workspace, and enable other optional features in your Experience Cloud site such as user nicknames, guest access, private messages, direct messages, content flagging, and reputation levels.") # Limitations for Autonomous AI on Experience Cloud Sites Review the mandatory constraints for search and orchestration features to make sure your Experience Cloud site functions as intended and maintains a secure guest user experience. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost. To purchase, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Available in: Aura Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Available in: LWR Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
## Data Model Object Constraints Harmonized Citations: Standard content (such as Knowledge articles) successfully routes to the intended detail page. Non-Harmonized Citations: References to specific, raw record data trigger a login wall or an authorization failure. This behavior disrupts authenticated community members, forces guest users to a Salesforce Login screen, and can expose internal record IDs in the browser URL. - Experience Cloud sites support only Enterprise Knowledge Harmonized Data Model Objects. - The search engine can’t retrieve or summarize data from non-harmonized Data Model Objects within the site context. - Citation Inconsistencies: If a search profile includes non-harmonized objects, citations appear inconsistently for all user types (both authenticated and unauthenticated guest users). - Harmonized Citations (such as Knowledge articles) go to the detail page successfully. - Non-Harmonized Citations (referencing specific record data) trigger a login wall. This forces the guest user to a Salesforce Login screen and can expose internal record IDs in the URL. ## Security and Access Limitations - Guest User Experience: To maintain a consistent experience, do not include internal-only records in a search configuration available to guests. If a record is internal-only, the autonomous AI should not present a clickable citation link to a guest user. - API Permission: Salesforce admins must assign the API Enabled permission set to all portal users. Without this permission, the Actionable Smart Search tool returns empty results. - Guest User Context: For unauthenticated guest users, the agent runs in the context of the Bot user. This user must follow Default External Access org-wide defaults to protect sensitive data. - Deployment Version: Agentforce Orchestrator requires a V2 Embedded Service Deployment. V1 deployments do not support the Concierge Agent Actor. # Link to a Record from a Chatter Post or Comment After a little administrative setup, you can link to a recently viewed record from a Chatter post or comment. In the Chatter publisher, enter a forward slash (/) and start typing the record name. You can link to any record type that’s enabled for your org, such as work records, accounts, opportunities, and cases. Link to up to 25 records in each post or comment. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Before you can link to records from a post or comment, your Administrator must contact Salesforce Support. Ask Salesforce to enable and set up the Quill editor for composing Rich Text content in Chatter. You can link to records from a post, comment, and a question detail, but not the question itself. You can link to up to 25 records in a post, comment, or question detail. In a report, linking to records isn’t available on the feed that opens when you click the Collaborate button ![Collaborate button on a report](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collaborate_button.png). 1. When you want to link to a record, enter a forward slash (/). 2. Start entering the record name. ![Linking to a record in a post](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collab_slash_records_1.png) 3. Select a record from the list. Records on the list are returned as the result of a search, and search returns only the records that you’ve looked at recently. So, if you’ve never viewed or interacted with a particular record, it doesn’t appear on the list. 4. Finish writing your post or comment, and click **Share**. The people who can access the record see the record name as a link. ![A linked record in a post](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collab_slash_records_2.png) The people who can’t access the record see a Record Not Available message. Salesforce supports hyperlinks and entity links, but only hyperlinks are searchable. An entity link is a user at-mention or a record slash-mention. An easy way to tell if a link is a hyperlink or entity link is to hover over the link in a post. If a hover card pops up with details about the user or record, then it’s an entity link. If there’s no hover card but instead a tooltip with the link url, then it’s a hyperlink. # Live Chatter Comments In Lightning Experience Chatter feeds, comments are live—they appear when they’re posted, without requiring a page refresh. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
To see live comments in a feed, you must be subscribed. Subscription is easy. Here are three ways to do it: - Click in the **Comment** field. - Post something - Click **more comments** If you go idle for a while or navigate away from a feed, click in a comment field to resubscribe. When you’re subscribed to live comments in a feed, a typing indicator shows you when people are actively entering comments. ![Live comment typing indicator](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/206_collab_typing_indicator_nonum.png) When the comment is posted, it briefly flashes yellow. ![A highlighted live comment](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_livecomment.png) - When new comments are published on a feed post that you’re engaged in, you receive notifications only in Lightning Experience. Notifications appear when you’re actively typing comments or you’ve clicked in the comments box. - The number of participants that are supported for live comments depends on your org’s subscription limits. If you’re not getting live comments, click in a comment field. If comments still aren’t live, it’s likely that your org has hit its limit. You can still get updates the old-fashioned way, by refreshing the page. # Live Chatter Feeds When you’re in a group in Lightning Experience, the Chatter feed is live. Live feeds offer posts and comments right as they’re posted, without requiring a page refresh. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
In a live feed, new posts trigger a message that appears briefly at the top of the feed (1). ![New post message in a live group feed](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/lex_chatter_live_feed_pill.png) Live comments appear in all feeds in Lightning Experience and not just group feeds. While people are entering comments, an animation shows activity on the post (2). And when a live comment is first posted, it briefly flashes yellow. ![Live comment indicator](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/206_collab_typing_indicator.png) There are a few differences between live and non-live, or served, feeds: - Live feeds show content that’s posted by users—that is, by human beings. They don’t show system-generated posts, like feed tracked changes (FTCs) and custom event posts. To see these posts, refresh the feed. - Live feeds show content that is posted directly to the group feed. They don’t show posts that were mentioned into the group nor edits made to existing posts. To see these posts, refresh the feed. - A live feed is as good as its network connection. It’s possible that some posts aren’t served live nor appear in the exact order that they were posted. Consider refreshing the feed from time-to-time. If you go idle for a while or navigate away from a live feed, refresh the page to make it live. For developers, live updates are not transactional. The server and the browser are a distributed system, and there is no transaction coordination between them. The served feed is a snapshot of the state of the feed in time. The live feed is a series of incremental updates to the current page, which are best efforts. They're not intended to be equivalent to the snapshot that the next served page delivers. Live feeds are optimized for human consumption. We don't recommend writing code that consumes them that depends on the delivery of specific entities or the format of the pushed (live) data. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The number of participants that are supported in a live feed depends on your orgʼs subscription limits. If you're not getting a live group feed or live comments, refresh the page or click in a comments field. If the feed still isn't live, it’s likely that your org has hit its limit. You can still get updates the old-fashioned way by refreshing the page. # Login Form Let users log in with login fields for a username and password and a button for submitting both. The **Login Form** component is a simple username and password form that lets users with an existing account log in to the site. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If the site administrator deselects the username and password checkbox on the **Administration** | **Login & Registration** page in Experience Management, the Login Form doesn’t appear in the published site. For more information, see “Customize Your Experience Cloud Site’s Login Experience” in Salesforce Help. 1. Select the **Login Form** component in the page that you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Start URL | Enter the path to the page that users see after they log in successfully. This page is the home page for the site. | | Username Label | Enter the text for the username field label. The default text is **Username**. | | Password Label | Enter the text for the password field label. The default text is **Password**. | | Login Button Label | Enter the text for the button that the user clicks to submit the login request. The default text is **Log in**. | | Forgot Password Link Label | Enter the text for the link to the page where users can request a password reset. The default text is **Forgot your password?** | | Forgot Password URL | Enter the page where users can request a password reset. | | Self Register Link Label | Enter the text for the link to the page where users can complete a self-registration form. The default text is **Not a member?** | | Self Register URL | Enter the page where users can complete a self-registration form. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Login Form component: ![Sample Login Form component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/login_login_form.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Make a File Private You can restrict access to shared files that you own by making them private.
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
To stop sharing a file that you own or have the “Modify All Data” permission for, make the file and the file link private (![file lock](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_lock.png)). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important On private files, file metadata is not also private. A user without permission to access a private file can nonetheless access the file’s metadata. So, for example, through a private file’s metadata, an unpermitted user can see who’s following the private file. 1. From the file detail page, click either ![Share File](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_share.png) **Share File** | **Sharing Settings** or **Show All** on the Shared With list. 2. In the Sharing Settings dialog box, click **Make private** (or **Restrict access** if the file originated in a Salesforce CRM Content library). 3. In the confirmation dialog box, click **Make private** (or **Restrict access**). Making a file private removes it from any posts that it's attached to and removes it from everywhere that it's been shared. Only the owner and people with the “Modify All Data” permission can access it. If the file originated in a Salesforce CRM Content library, it’s removed from everywhere that it's been shared, except the library. If the file is shared using a content delivery, the content delivery becomes inaccessible, but is not deleted. If the file is shared using **Share via link** in Chatter, the link to the file is deleted. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce doesn't remove geolocation information from uploaded images. #### See Also - [Chatter Post Visibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_post_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn where you can post in Chatter, who can see your posts, and whose posts you can see.") - [View Where a File Is Shared](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_shared_with.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out who can see a file and their level of access. From the File Detail page, you can access a full list of every person or object the file is shared with.") - [Prevent Others from Sharing and Unsharing a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_freeze_sharing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can prevent others from sharing and unsharing a file that you own. Preventing others from sharing or unsharing doesn’t affect existing shares.") - [Make a File Private on a Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_make_private_on_record.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the File Privacy on Records setting to control who can see a file when it’s attached to a record. The setting is available when you edit a file’s details.") # Make a File Private on a Record Use the **File Privacy on Records** setting to control who can see a file when it’s attached to a record. The setting is available when you edit a file’s details.
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
The **File Privacy on Records** option lets you control the visibility of a file when it’s attached to a record. If you don’t see the **File Privacy on Records** option when you edit a file’s details, ask your admin to add it. Only admins and file owners can change the value of **File Privacy on Records**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important On private files, file metadata isn’t also private. A user without permission to access a private file can nonetheless access the file’s metadata. So, for example, through a private file’s metadata, an unpermitted user can see who’s following the private file. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The **File Privacy on Records** option also appears in Salesforce Classic on the content detail page and content edit dialog. A file marked as private in Lightning Experience is also private in Salesforce Classic. This feature is also available in Experience Builder sites. 1. On the Files home page, open the actions menu of the file you want to change and select **Edit File Details**. 2. From the File Privacy on Records list, select an option for controlling the file’s visibility when it’s attached to a record. ![Options for File Privacy on Records](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_files_priv_on_records.png) - **Visible to Anyone With Record Access** lets anyone who can see the record also see this file attachment under Files on the record’s Related tab. - **Private on Records** lets only the file owner see the file under Files on the record’s Related tab. 3. Click **Save**. According to your selection, whenever people view record details, they either see or don’t see this file when it’s attached to the record. The file owner sees the attachment, no matter the privacy setting. #### See Also - [Make a File Private](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_make_private.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can restrict access to shared files that you own by making them private.") # Make Files on Records Visible to Customers The Customer Access toggle on a file’s sharing detail page lets you decide when customers can see individual files on records. Ensure that your customers can access files on records. [Enable digital experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=networks_enable.htm&type=5&language=en_US) to view the Customer Access option on a file’s sharing detail page. Users with collaborator or owner access to the file can change the Customer Access option. Users with view-only access to the file have read-only access to the Customer Access Option. External users can’t see this option. On Files home in Salesforce, from the row-level action list or file preview, click **Share**. To see where the file is shared, in the sharing detail window, expand the **Who Can Access** section. The customer access option is visible in the sharing detail of any file shared with a record. ![Customer Access toggle on a record file](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_customer_access_toggle.png) To set the sharing level, in the menu next to the Customer Access option, select **Viewer** to give the customer view access to the file. If you choose **Set by Record**, then the customer’s file access depends on their record access. View access on the record provides view access to the file, and edit access on the record provides collaborator access on the file. The Customer Access option isn’t available to files shared with users, groups, workspaces, Experience Cloud sites, or orgs. If your org doesn’t have Experience Cloud enabled, the sharing setting for files on records defaults to **Customer Access - Enabled**. If you do enable digital experiences in your org, check record access settings to ensure you’re sharing the files you want with the correct customer users. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can only share files to records from the record using the Files related list or posting in the record’s feed. To set the sharing settings for files sent through email, make sure that the email is in a draft form for the settings to go into effect. #### See Also - [Make a File Private on a Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_make_private_on_record.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Make Objects Available for SEO When you make your site public, search engines can index the pages of your Experience Builder site. However, to ensure that you don't expose sensitive data, the data displayed by objects on those pages aren’t public. Instead, you must specifically make those objects and their associated fields publicly available for indexing by search engines. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences

    OR

  • Be a member of the site AND View Setup and Configuration AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
To publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences

    OR

  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin or publisher in that site
The guest user profile controls what unauthenticated users and search engines can see in a publicly available site. To make a standard or custom object’s records available for indexing, provide Read access to that object and its fields. Every instance of that object, regardless of page location, is added to the sitemap. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - To ensure that object data is available to search engines, review the sharing rules, field-level security (FLS), and permission sets assigned to an object. Even though an object and its fields are public, Salesforce security settings still determine guest user access to this data. - Ensure that all sensitive objects are private, even objects used in private pages that aren’t included in the sitemap. All public pages and public objects are discoverable because search engines use the sitemap only as a starting point to identify which site content is available for crawling. - Regularly review and update the objects and records that are public through your guest user profile. This best practice controls the scope of your sitemap and helps keep your site secure. - To be included in your sitemap, knowledge articles on Aura sites must have at least one [navigational topic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_navigational.htm&type=5&language=en_US) assigned to them. 1. For Topics, Feed Items, and Questions pages, enabling object read access or creating a sharing rule isn’t required. Instead, to allow access: 1. In Experience Workspaces, select **Administration**. 2. On the Preferences page, select **Give access to public API requests on Chatter** and **Let guest users see other members of this site**. 3. Save your changes. 2. For standard and custom objects, configure which objects are public using the guest user profile: 1. In Experience Builder, select the SEO setting tab. 2. Click **Guest User Profile**. ![SEO Tab for Object Access](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/seo_seo_tab.png) 3. Click **Edit**, and in the Standard Object Permissions section, give at least read access to the object. 4. Save your changes. 3. Ensure that the appropriate object fields have read access using the guest user profile: 1. In the Field-Level Security section, click **View** beside the relevant object. ![Field-Level Security View](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/seo_field_security.png) 2. Save your changes. 4. [Create a sharing rule for guest users](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=networks_secure_guest_user_sharing.htm&type=5&language=en_US) for each public object. ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_warning.png) Warning Sharing rules allow immediate and unlimited access to all records matching the sharing rule’s criteria. To secure your Salesforce data and give your site guest users access to what they need, consider all the use cases and implications of creating a sharing rule. 5. To make your changes live, publish your site. It can take up to 24 hours for the list of available objects to appear along with the number of indexed records. ![SEO object access](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/seo_table.png) #### See Also - [Secure Guest Users’ Sharing Settings and Record Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_secure_guest_user_sharing.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [SEO Best Practices and Considerations for Guest Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_SEO_best_practices_guest_users.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Configure the Guest User Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.rss_config_guest_user_profile.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Make Records Available in Chatter Groups Add records to groups to collaborate on and discuss the records as a team. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To view a group record or add a record to a group:
  • Read on the record
  • Access to the group
1. From the group publisher, click **Add Record**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don’t see this option, ask your administrator to include the Add Record action in the group publisher. You can’t add records to groups that allow customers. 2. From the **Record** list, select a record type. You can add account, contact, lead, opportunity, contract, campaign, case, and custom object records. Other objects aren’t supported. 3. In the blank search field, enter the name of the record to search for and click ![Group record search icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/group_record_search_icon.png). To search for all available records of the selected type, leave the field blank. 4. From the lookup search results list, select the record to add to the group. 5. Click **Create**. A success message confirms when the record is added to the group. The record appears in the Group Records list. If the Groups related list appears on the record detail page, you can see the list of groups that the record is associated with. There is no limit to the number of records you can add to a group. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Adding a record to a group doesn’t affect its visibility. Only users with the necessary permissions (via license, profile, permission sets, or sharing) can see the records in a group. For example, Chatter Free users don’t see any records in groups. Or, a user with permissions to view only accounts and contacts can’t view any case records in the group. Permissions can influence whether users see fewer records than the actual count indicated on the group records list. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example Here are some ways to use Chatter groups to collaborate on records that you’re working on. - A sales team that is working together on an account can track the related opportunities, contacts, and leads in one group. Team members with permissions can access records directly from the group. New team members can use the group as a one-stop reference to familiarize themselves with historical discussions about the account and its child records. - Customer service teams can use groups to track the cases that they handle. The group can become the team’s forum to monitor cases, discuss solutions, and analyze trends in common problem areas. - Marketing teams can use groups to track their campaigns, plan events, and discuss the potential leads and contacts to invite for the event. Groups also make for a great space to collaborate on marketing content or campaign artifacts. # Malware Scanning for Salesforce Files Files are scanned for viruses or other malware when they’re uploaded or downloaded. New files are scanned when users upload them, and uploads are blocked when a file is malicious. Any existing malicious files in your org are listed in the Malicious Files list in Files home. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions hosted on Hyperforce
The setting **Scan files for viruses or malware** is on by default in **Setup** | **Salesforce Files** | **Malware Scanning**. To turn on notifications for users with the Manage Malicious Files permission, select **Notify users when a malicious file is detected**. When a user attempts to upload a new file to Salesforce Files, Salesforce scans the file and blocks the upload process if the scanned file is malicious. When a user uploads a file via the API, Salesforce allows the upload and scans the file asynchronously. If the scanned file is malicious, it appears in the Malicious Files list. Any file that was uploaded to Salesforce Files before this feature was enabled doesn't get scanned until a user tries to download it. When a user first tries to download the file, Salesforce allows the download to proceed and scans the file asynchronously. If the file is malicious, it appears in the Malicious Files list, and Salesforce blocks any future download attempts. Malicious files can appear in any list view in Files home, but not all list views indicate when a file is malicious. To know if a scanned file contains malware, look for it in the Malicious Files list. Users can't preview malicious files. Files are scanned only when they're 100 MB or smaller. If a file is larger than 100 MB, Salesforce doesn’t scan it or block users from uploading, previewing, or downloading it. Malware scanning flags files only if they have a high probability of being malicious. If you require more stringent scanning, consider using one of Salesforce’s malware scanning partners. ## Mark a Malicious File as Safe When a scanned file is incorrectly identified as malicious, designate it as safe. After you mark a file as safe, it's removed from the Malicious Files list, and users can preview or download it. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions hosted on Hyperforce
User Permissions Needed
To access the Malicious Files list, get notified when a malicious file is detected, mark a file as safe, and download a malicious file: Manage Malicious Files
To download a malicious file: Download Malicious Files
1. In Lightning Experience, from the App Launcher, open Files. 2. To see malicious files, open the **Malicious Files** list (1). 3. Find the file that was incorrectly identified as malicious and open its row-level actions dropdown. 4. Click **Mark File as Safe** (2). ![The Malicious Files list with a malicious file and the selection to mark it as safe](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collab_files_malware_scan_malicious_files_list.png) # Manage Channel Partnerships with Channel Programs and Levels Use channel programs and levels to organize and manage channel partners. Within each program, you can group partners into levels, such as bronze, silver, and gold, and promote them based on performance. Use sharing groups, audience targeting, and sharing settings to manage access to resources based on program or level. ## Organize Partner Users - Group partners by type or geography - Create levels within each program that organize partners by position or rank - Add or remove members from channel programs or levels using groups - Promote or demote users by changing group membership ## Manage Access to Resources - Use audience targeting to create different versions of a page with criteria fields specific to each program level - Use the criteria fields for audience targeting to assign visibility to certain components or branding sets - Set organization-wide defaults and sharing settings to control access to Channel Program Level and Channel Program Member objects - Offer incentives to different levels, such as market development funds, to motivate partner users to meet Key Performance Indicators(KPIs) ## Track Individual Performances - Measure partner users’ performances, and establish benchmarks for their channel programs - Customize partner scorecards so that you get the report summary results that channel account managers or executive teams wants to see - Add multiple scorecards for tracking different categories #### See Also - [Considerations for Audience Targeting in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_use_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Audiences are a great help when you want to target specific user segments with relevant site content. As you work with audiences, there are some things to consider.") - [Market Development Funds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_funds_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Drive demand for your products and provide incentives to partner users by offering market development funds as part of your channel marketing program. Create marketing budgets, allocate marketing funds or co-op (accrued) funds to channel partners, streamline fund requests, and process fund claims using Market Development Fund (MDF) features. Channel account managers can get a full audit of MDF activity, including fund requests and claims approval.") - [Track Performance with Partner Scorecard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_scorecard.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Channel account managers can measure partner users’ performances and establish benchmarks for their channel programs using partner scorecards. You can customize partner scorecards to display any report summary results that your channel account manager or executive team wants to see. Add multiple scorecards to track more than one category. Partner scorecards are available in Lightning Bolt Solutions.") - [Manage Channel Program Members with Sharing Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_program_groups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use sharing groups to manage Channel Program members. When new partner users join a team, you can add them to a Channel Program Member group. You can also move partner users to another group when they are promoted, demoted, or transitioned to a different area of expertise.") # Manage Channel Program Members with Sharing Groups Use sharing groups to manage Channel Program members. When new partner users join a team, you can add them to a Channel Program Member group. You can also move partner users to another group when they are promoted, demoted, or transitioned to a different area of expertise. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
You can also use Channel Program Member sharing groups to manage access to resources within levels, such as public queues, list views, sharing rules, and folders. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Deleting a partner account that was added as a channel program member, deletes the associated channel program member. Undeleting the partner account brings back the account and the channel program member, but the account is no longer enabled as a partner account. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Org-wide defaults and field-level security control data access for partner users in channel groups. Set organization-wide default to **Private** on Channel Program Level and Channel Program Member objects. Grant each partner user access to their level and member records to ensure that they have visibility into their accounts and opportunities. # Manage Customer Relationships with Experience Cloud Give your customers a private and secure place to access and update their account information with the Customer Account Portal solution from Experience Cloud. Improve customer relationships and decrease service costs by allowing customers to see and pay invoices. They can also update their account information and search your knowledge base for answers to their most frequently asked questions. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Customer Account Portal is designed with account management in mind, so you can: - Give access to customers to create and update vital information in any Salesforce record, including custom objects. As a result, reduce call center calls for easily resolved issues, like updating a phone number or address. - Integrate and expose data and processes from third-party systems, like ERP and ecommerce, via Salesforce Connect. - Show customers information that matters the most in their member profile, and let them update their accounts on the fly. - Use Salesforce Knowledge to give customers answers to their most pressing questions about your product and brand. Customer Account Portal has the same flexibility and extensibility that you’re accustomed to with other Lightning sites, so you can: - Build custom pages and use custom branding. - Expose more CRM objects and data that suit your business needs. - Use audience targeting by geolocation, and create personalized content for customers by their geographical location. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Here are a few industry examples of how a company can use Customer Account Portal to enhance customer relationships. - A utilities company allows customers to check their bills and pay them online. - An insurance company lets clients file claims online. - A university makes it easy for students to sign up for classes online. # Manage Libraries On the Libraries tab, access your private library, create libraries, choose libraries to view or edit, and analyze library usage and activity. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create libraries:

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

OR

Create Libraries

To edit libraries:

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

OR

Manage Libraries checked in your library permission definition

For details about the publishing options at the top of the page, see [Upload and Publish Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_upload.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add files to libraries to take advantage of the permission setting and content delivery capabilities of Salesforce CRM Content."). The libraries home page has two tabs: Shared Content, which provides information about shared libraries, and My Private Files, which contains information about your private library. ## Shared Content The Shared Content tab on the libraries home page contains the following sections: - My Libraries This section lists all the libraries to which you have access. Click a library name to view details about that library or click **Browse** to view a list of all the content in the library. Click the **New** button to create libraries, add users to a library, or assign library permissions to users. - Featured Content This section lists the five pieces of content in your libraries most recently designed as “featured.” Featured content receives a higher priority than similar content in search results; for example, if 100 files contain the search criteria term sales asset, any featured files with that term appear at the top of the search results list. To see all featured content, click **Show All**. To toggle a piece of content's feature status on or off, go to its [content details page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_workspace_detail.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you have located a Salesforce CRM Content library in the My Libraries area of the Libraries tab home page or on a content details page, click the library name to display detailed information."). - Top Content This section includes lists that summarize content activity across all your libraries. Each list sorts content according to specific criteria. Within a list, click a file icon to download content or click a title to open the associated content details page. In the Top Content section you can choose from the following categories: - **Publication Date**—This content is sorted in descending order according to the most recent publication date. Choose the number of records you want to view from the accompanying dropdown list, or click the **Show All** button to list all the published files, Web links, and Google docs. - **Num Downloads**—This content is sorted in descending order according to the highest number of downloads. The bar graphic indicates how one record compares to another. Choose the number of records you want to view from the accompanying dropdown list, or click the **Show All** button to list all the downloaded content. - **Rating**—This content is sorted in descending order according to the highest number of thumbs-up votes. Green and red in the bar graphic represent positive and negative votes, respectively. Choose the number of records you want to view from the accompanying dropdown list, or click the **Show All** button to list all the content with votes. - **Num Comments**—This content is sorted in descending order according to the highest number of viewer comments. The bar graphic indicates how one record compares to another. Choose the number of records you want to view from the accompanying dropdown list, or click the **Show All** button to list all the content with associated comments. - Popular Tags This section, commonly referred to as a “tag cloud,” shows you how the content in your libraries has been labeled. Tags are descriptive terms assigned during upload or revision that help classify and organize content. Click a tag name to view search results containing all the files, Web links, and Google docs with that tag. The tag names increase in size within the tag cloud according to popularity, meaning that the largest tags have been assigned to the most content. You can choose to sort the tags alphabetically or by popularity. The tag cloud contains the 30 most popular tags. - Recent Activity This section is a snapshot of activity within your libraries. It shows the most recent files, Web links, and Google docs to receive comments, votes, or subscriptions. Featured content and newly published content are also included, but new versions of existing content, archived content, and deleted content do not appear in the Recent Activity section. Use the **Older** and **Newer** buttons to scroll through records. The Recent Activity section contains a maximum of 100 records. - Most Active Contributors This section shows the authors who have published content into your libraries most frequently. The names increase in size according to activity, so the largest names are the authors who have contributed the most content. ## My Private Files The My Private Files tab on the libraries home page is your private library. When you upload or create content and do not select a public library, your content is stored in your private library. You can publish content to a public library at any time or leave content in your private library indefinitely. Content in your private library can be assembled in content packs. It can also be sent to leads and contacts outside your organization using the content delivery feature. The My Private Files tab has these sections: - Private Library If you choose the **Save to my private library** option when publishing a file, Web link, content pack, or Google doc, your content is saved here. You can publish or delete files from this list or click the file's name to view its content details page. The following options that are available on the content details page for shared content are not available for private-library content: tagging, rating, subscribing, tracking downloads, tracking subscriptions, or using custom fields. If you publish a file from the Private Library list and click **Cancel** during the publishing process, your file is deleted. - Upload Interrupted If an error occurs when you upload a new file, for example your browser crashes or your session times out, the file you were uploading is saved here. Click **Publish** to publish the file to a public library or save it to your private library. If you click **Cancel** on the Save or Publish Content dialog, your file is deleted. - Revision Upload Interrupted If an error occurs when you upload a new version of a file, the file you were uploading is saved here. Users can continue to access the original version. Click **Publish** to publish the file to a public library or save it to your private library. If you click **Cancel** on the Save or Publish Content dialog, your file is deleted. # Manage Libraries from Files Home Working in libraries is simpler now that admins can change libraries in Lightning Experience and manage libraries from Files Home. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
User Permissions Needed
To manage a library using Lightning Experience: Manage Library checked in your library permission definition
To manage a library using Salesforce Classic: Manage Salesforce CRM Content
Every library that you create is automatically structured in a folder. Library creators have administrator permissions so that they can keep libraries current and relevant. Start in Files Home. You can sort the order of libraries to work more efficiently. Library users can switch between tile view and list view, and edit libraries in the view that they prefer. - To create a library and brand your library with a library image, click **New Library**. - To edit a library, click the dropdown menu next to a library and choose **Edit Library Details**. - To delete a library, click **Delete**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Only empty libraries can be deleted. Delete files first, and then delete the library. If you delete the files and still have trouble deleting the library, permanently delete the files from your Recycle Bin. ![Manage Libraries from the dropdown.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/214_manage_libraries.png) # Manage Library Membership from Files Home Library admins can update, add, delete, and track library members from Files Home. In the Current Members section, external users automatically get an “external badge” to help you identify external partners, customer site members, and portal and Chatter users. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
User Permissions Needed
To manage library membership using Lightning Experience: Manage Library checked in your library permission definition
To manage library membership using Salesforce Classic: Manage Salesforce CRM Content
1. To change a library, from Files Home, click **Libraries**. 2. Click the dropdown menu next to a library and choose **Manage Members**. ![Manage libraries from Files home.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/214_manage_libraries.png) From here, you can manage members: add them, delete them, or change their permissions. # Manage Library Permissions A library permission is a group of privileges assigned to each Salesforce CRM Content library member. It determines the tasks that a member can perform in a particular library. The same user can have a different library permission in each library. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create, edit, or delete library permissions:

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

OR

Manage Content Permissions

- From Setup, enter Content Permissions in the Quick Find box, then select **Content Permissions**. - Next to the appropriate permission, select **Edit** or **Delete**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If your Salesforce CRM Content organization was created after the Spring '09 release, your organization already has three library permissions: Library Administrator, Author, and Viewer. Library permissions don’t apply to personal libraries. All Salesforce CRM Content users can save files in their personal libraries. #### See Also - [Create Libraries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_workspace_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Store, share, and manage your files in content libraries so you can decide who has access to files in each library and what permissions they have. Each org can have up to 2,000 libraries.") - [Create and Edit Library Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_workspace_perm_add.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Library permissions provide the different levels of library access that are required for most organizations. Here’s how to add new permissions and edit existing ones.") # Manage Members Section The Manage Members Section component allows you to search for and add members to your group from an Experience Cloud site. Search results update dynamically as you type. 1. Select the **Manage Members Section** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Group ID

Enter a group ID. To find a specific group ID, navigate to the group home page and copy the ID from the URL. The ID is a string of numbers and letters.

Group URL format example: https://MyDomainName.my.site.com/siteName/s/group/0F7A0000000DZXiNQO/groupName

For this URL, the group ID is 0F7A0000000DZXiNQO.

Header Label Enter header text for your component. The default is Manage Members.
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Manage Members Section component: ![Manage members component example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_manage_members.png) ![Manage members component showing an example search.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_manage_members_search.png) # Manage Partner Relationships with Experience Cloud Sites Experience Cloud sites are a powerful tool for partner relationship management. Invite partners to a site and share CRM data with them to drive channel sales and marketing. Create a shared pool of leads and pass them to partner users in the site. Configure deal registration to allow partners to submit qualified deals, minimize channel conflict, and get early pipeline visibility. Use the power of Lightning and Salesforce and drive your bottom line together. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If you have an existing partner portal, you can continue to use the portal to collaborate with partners. However, we strongly recommend you migrate your partners to an Experience Cloud site. Partner portal licenses can be reused in a partner site. Salesforce offers a powerful Lightning solution to help you build a partner site with button clicks, and no code: [Partner Central](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lightning_partner_central.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Quickly set up a custom, branded space where you can invite your partners and work on driving channel sales and marketing together. The Lightning Partner Central solution is optimized for channel managers and partners to collaborate on and track sales data. A simplified setup combined with rich branding and a responsive UI lets you quickly build an exclusive online experience for your partners."). A site allows your partner users to log in to Salesforce through a separate website and access data you’ve made available only to them. In a partner site, you can: - Extend Salesforce to securely expose CRM data with partners. - Recruit, onboard, and educate partners (training and certifications). - Manage your channel sales with programs, tiers, business plans, and partner scorecards. - Manage lead distribution, deal registration, and quoting for channel sales. - Streamline channel marketing with marketing development funds (MDF), marketing campaigns, and co-branded email communications. - Provide a rich, personalized and mobile-ready experience to drive partner productivity - Manage, track, and forecast partner sales _alongside_ your direct sales in your Salesforce org. With Experience Cloud sites, you can publicly share information that you want all partners to see in a single location. You can also share data privately with specific partner users in the same site and restrict access with the security built into Salesforce. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Here are a few industry examples of how a company can use a site to drive partner sales: - A technology company can work with resellers to pass leads, register deals, and market products together - A manufacturer can work with its distributors, wholesalers, and retailers in sites. - An insurance company can work with independent brokers to track leads and sell insurance products. # Manage Site Emails and Notifications Manage the emails that are sent out from your Experience Cloud site, and which notifications your members see. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Enable Notifications in Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_enable_notifications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With Global Notifications, your members receive messages wherever they’re working, whether in their sites or in their apps. Members receive notifications on any screen—mobile, tablet, and desktop. This functionality is available in Experience Builder sites based on Customer Service (Napili), Partner Central, and any Lightning Bolt solutions. - **[Troubleshooting Steps If Site Members Don’t Receive Welcome Emails](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_administer_no_welcome_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you create a site, publish it, and then activate it, you expect site members to receive a welcome email that gives them access to the new site. Take these troubleshooting steps if site members don’t receive welcome emails. # Manage the Concierge Sidebar Define the proactive experience for your users. By configuring Suggestion Themes and the Concierge Sidebar, you provide users with "one-click" actions that trigger specific agent topics immediately, reducing the need for typing. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost. To purchase, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Available in: Aura Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Available in: LWR Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
User Permissions Needed
To Configure Sidebar Create and Set Up Experiences
To Configure Conversation History
  • Create and Set Up Experiences
  • View All Data

OR

  • object-level read access
The Concierge Sidebar provides a personalized Resume Chat experience for authenticated users. It categorizes recommendations into suggestion themes to help users find relevant actions quickly. 1. From Setup, enter Digital Experiences and select **All Sites**. 2. Locate your site and click **Builder**. 3. Click the **Components icon** in the top-left sidebar. 4. Drag the **Concierge Sidebar** component onto your canvas from the Components panel. 5. Click the **Concierge Sidebar** component on your Page structure to open its properties. 6. Enter a Sidebar Title. If you leave this blank, the title defaults to the username or Guest Portal. 7. In the Home Page property field, select **Concierge Home Page**. 8. In the Chat Page property field, select **Concierge Chat Page**. 9. To show previous messages for authenticated users, select Show Conversation History. 10. To show shortcuts for common tasks, select **Show Suggestion Themes**. 11. Select a value for Max Suggestion Themes to determine the number of recommendation categories that appear. 12. Save your work and select **Publish**. # Manage Topics in Experience Cloud Sites As the number of topics in an Experience Cloud site grows, curate them to improve usability. You can create, merge, rename, enable for content, and delete topics in one convenient location. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To access Experience Workspaces or Experience Management page:

Manage Experiences

OR

Create and Set Up Experiences

To create topics: Create Topics
To merge topics: Merge Topics AND Delete Topics AND Edit Topics AND Assign Topics
To delete topics: Delete Topics
To edit topics: Edit Topics
1. In Experience Workspaces, access topics by clicking **Content Management** | **Topics**. 2. Do one of the following. - To create a topic (often with a plan to merge existing ones into it), click **New**. To boost SEO, add a name and a topic description. If you want to be able to associate the topic with native content, select **Enable for content**. - To combine topics, click **Merge**. Merging a topic automatically redirects existing hashtags in posts. If you merge a navigational or featured topic, the topic type, image, and any subtopic relationships are discarded. If you merge a topic with a content topic, the content associations are preserved. If you merge a topic with an inactive endorsee, the endorsement is discarded. - To enable up to 10 topics for content at the same time, select the topics and click **Enable for Content**. After enabling topics for content, you can associate the topics with your native content. - To edit a topic, click ![Actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_manager3.png) and select **Edit**. If you deselect **Enable for content** when editing a topic that is associated with content, saving your changes removes the associations. - To see a topic detail page in your site, click the topic name. - To delete a topic, click ![Actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_manager3.png) and select **Delete**. If you don’t see a topic you’re looking for, you can search for it. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip For sites with a global audience, you can [translate names and descriptions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_translate_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Translation Workbench to translate topic names and descriptions in international Experience Cloud sites.") of topics. #### See Also - [Set Up Navigational Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_navigational.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Structure your Experience Cloud site’s content and help your users find what they need with navigational topics. If your org uses data categories, community managers can link current Salesforce Knowledge articles associated with those categories to each navigational topic. If data categories aren’t enabled, administrators can add articles to each topic using Connect REST API.") - [Set Up Featured Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_featured.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Featured topics highlight current, popular conversations in your Experience Cloud site. Change them regularly to keep members up-to-date and engaged.") - [Set Up Content Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_content.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Content topics organize your original content around common themes for your Experience Cloud site.") # Manage Users and Data Access One of the most important administrative tasks is setting up and maintaining your users. Salesforce provides a variety of features and tools that help you ensure that your Experience Cloud partner, customer, and guest users have the right access to data. To get started, see [Manage Users and Data Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_manage_access.htm&type=5&language=en_US). # Manage Who Can Assign a Specific Recognition Badge Controlling who can assign a recognition badge helps make sure the right badges are awarded to the right members. For example, you can set it up so that only community managers can assign MVP and VIP badges. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To create recognition badges: Create Custom Badge Definitions
To manage your recognition badges:

Create And Set Up Experiences

AND

Moderate Chatter

OR

Manage Experiences

AND

Moderate Chatter

To manage badges created by someone else:

Modify All Data

AND

Moderate Chatter

By default, recognition badges are available to everyone with permission to assign badges. To be able to select specific givers, make sure to deselect **Public** when you create or edit the badge. 1. In Experience Workspaces, click the Gamification tile. 2. Click the dropdown and the end of the badge’s row, and click **Manage Badge Givers**. 3. In the window, search to add the users or public groups you want to have permission to assign badges. ![Manage givers dialog showing user search.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/recog_badges_manage_giver_user.png) ![Manage giver list showing group in search.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/recog_badges_manage_giver_group.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Only those users with the Assign Recognition Badges in Experience Builder Sites permission are available. You can remove members from the list by clicking the X by their name. 4. Click **Save**. # Manage Your Experience Cloud Site Administer, manage, and moderate your Experience Cloud site from Experience Workspaces. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
- **[Managers, Moderators, and Admins Working Together](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_community_management_roles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Cloud sites can thrive when their managers, moderators, and admins understand their unique roles and work together effectively. - **[Experience Cloud Site Moderation Strategies and Tools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderation_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Moderation allows you to empower members of your Experience Cloud site to monitor content and ensure that it’s appropriate and relevant. Set up rules to automate moderation and do the heavy lifting for you. - **[Organize Experience Cloud Sites with Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Navigational, featured, and content topics are a fantastic way to organize information and content in an Experience Cloud site and boost SEO for your articles. Use topics to structure your site’s content or highlight key discussions. You can create topics or use the topics that organically emerge from site member posts. - **[Customize Recommendations in Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create recommendations to drive engagement for your Experience Cloud site, encouraging users to watch videos, take trainings, and more. Target specific audiences and use channels to specify locations for the recommendations. - **[Gamification](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_gamification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use gamification tools, like Recognition Badges and Reputation, to keep your members engaged in your site. To add gamification features, make sure that Chatter is enabled for the site. - **[Share a Link to Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_share_link.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can allow members to preview your Experience Cloud site before making it active. - **[Switch Between Your Salesforce Org and Your Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_navigate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you use Experience Builder sites and Lightning Experience, use the App Launcher to switch back and forth between your Salesforce org and your Experience Cloud sites associated with it. If you use Tabs + Visualforce sites and Salesforce Classic, use the global header. You can embed a site URL directly into buttons or links. You can also redirect a user to another site or to a specific page within another site. # Manage Your Files Connect External Data Source Authentication Credentials You or your Salesforce admin can use Files Connect to set up and manage your authentication settings for external data sources. With valid authentication settings, you can access files from external systems right from Salesforce. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Files Connect for cloud-based external data sources is available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To access cloud-based data sources like SharePoint Online: Files Connect Cloud
Your admin defines external systems in external data sources and named credentials. Before you begin, your administrator: - Sets up the external data source or named credential to use per-user authentication. - Grants you access to the external data source or named credential. - Tells you the authentication settings to enter. If you don’t see the expected settings or options, ask your admin for help. 1. From My Settings, enter Authentication in the Quick Find box, then select **Authentication Settings for External Systems**. 2. To set up a new connection, click **New**. To modify an existing external data source, click **Edit**. 3. From the External System Definition menu, select “External Data Source.” 4. From the External Data Source menu, select a data source that your administrator created. 5. Set the options for the authentication protocol required by Box, Google Drive, SharePoint Online, or OneDrive for Business.
Authentication Protocol Choose OAuth 2.0
Authentication Provider Choose the provider that your administrator created for this data source
Scope Leave blank
Start Authentication Flow on Save Select to immediately verify your login credentials with the external data source.

When you click Save, the external system prompts you to log in. After successful login, the external system grants you an OAuth token for accessing its data from this org.

Redo the OAuth flow when you need a new token—for example, when the token expires—or if you edit the Scope or Authentication Provider fields.

6. Click **Save**. # Manage Your Site Email Notifications Use email notifications to keep up with important updates in your Experience Cloud sites. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Visualforce sites
You can choose to receive email notifications whenever someone posts on your profile, comments after you on a post you’ve commented on, posts to a group you belong to, and more. Email notification preferences are set by community. To set your email preferences, go to your profile page within a community, click the dropdown button (![drop down menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/arrow_down.png)) in the upper-right corner and select **My Settings**, then click **Email Settings**. You can turn individual notifications on or off. Your chosen settings apply to the current community. If you don’t belong to any groups yet, you won’t see the option to set groups on this page until after you join your first group. You can also set your group email preferences using the **Email Me...** dropdown on each group’s page. You can choose to receive a daily or weekly digest email or an email every time someone posts. This option is visible if you’re a group member. Your email options are similar to the Chatter email settings in your internal organization under your personal settings (**Your Name** | **My Settings** | **Email Settings** for Chatter Free users). Within communities, however, note the following differences. ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_warning.png) Warning Avoid spamming new group members in a community, especially if you are adding group members en masse. Deselect the following org-wide Chatter email notifications: **Allow Emails** and **Allow Posts via Email**. Access these settings by searching Email Settings in the Quick Find search box in Salesforce Setup. - The default notification frequency for new groups you join can’t be set via the user interface. It can be set only via Salesforce APIs (SOAP API and REST API). - Personal digests aren’t currently available. - You don’t receive notifications when new articles are added to topics. - If your community has Chatter messages enabled, you’re notified of file shares in a message. If Chatter messages aren’t enabled, you are notified of file shares by email. - If flagging is enabled in the community, the **Flags an item as inappropriate** option appears for all members of the community, but only sends notifications if: - You’re a group owner or manager and a member flags a post, comment, or file in your group. - You’re a moderator and a member flags a post, comment, or file you have access to. Depending on the type of notification you want to receive, you also need following permissions: | Email Notifications About | Required Permission | | --- | --- | | Flagged posts and comments | “Moderate Community Feeds” | | Flagged files | “Moderate Community Feeds” | | Flagged Chatter messages | “Moderate Community Feeds” and “Moderate Communities Chatter Messages” | | Flagged direct messages | “Moderate Communities Chatter Messages” | If the **Flag as Inappropriate** link doesn't work in your email, try flagging the message from the UI. #### See Also - [Navigate to Chatter Email Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_email_settings.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Manage Your Site’s Pages and Their Properties in Experience Builder The Pages and Page Action menus centralize all your page-related needs, from page creation to audience criteria-based page visibility and everything in between. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
From the Pages menu (1), you can search for a page, add a page (2), or click ![Open Page Properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_properties_ellipsis.png) to access the Page Action menu (3). ![Pages menu in Experience Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_menu.png) From the Page Action menu, you can: - Click **Page Settings** to [edit a page’s properties](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_prop.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Page Action menu to view and edit the properties of the pages that make up your Experience Builder site."), such as its URL, layout, or variations. From Page Settings, click **Page Variations** to create alternative versions of a page and set audience criteria for the page’s visibility. If the selected page isn’t a template, you can easily delete it and its page variations with a single click. ![Edit Page Variations](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_variations.png) - Click **Add Subpage** to build out your site’s hierarchy with up to six page levels by nesting a standard, object, or content page under an existing page. ![Parent page with subpages in Experience Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_hierarchy.png) - Click **Move Page** to change your page hierarchy and move a page and its subpages to a new destination. When you move a parent page, the URLs for its subpages update automatically to reflect your changes. ![Move Page Dialog in Experience Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_move_page_dialog.png) - Click **Delete Page** to remove a page from the Pages menu. When you delete a parent page, its subpages are also deleted. - ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Not all pages have the Move Page, Add Subpage, and Delete Page options in the Page Actions menu. Review [Considerations for Page Hierarchy and URL Conflicts in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_management_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you create and organize pages in your Experience Builder site, some pages behave differently than others. Keep these page management considerations in mind when you use the Page Action menu."). Click **\+ New Page** at the bottom of the Pages menu to create a standard, object, or [custom page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_create_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To extend your Experience Builder template, create custom site pages. To get the most from your Salesforce data, add custom record detail, list, and related list pages. To display individual pieces of content along with any combination of components, use CMS content pages."). ![New Page window in Experience Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_new_page.png) - **[Page Properties and Types in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_prop.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Page Action menu to view and edit the properties of the pages that make up your Experience Builder site. - **[Considerations for Page Hierarchy and URL Conflicts in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_management_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you create and organize pages in your Experience Builder site, some pages behave differently than others. Keep these page management considerations in mind when you use the Page Action menu. - **[Enable the App Launcher in Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_enable_app_launcher.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Display the App Launcher in Experience Builder Sites to make it easy for members to move between their sites and their Salesforce org. This functionality is available in any site based an Experience Builder site template or Lightning Bolt solution. - **[Inform Customers About Your Experience Builder Site Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_availability_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep your customers informed when they can’t immediately access your Experience Builder site. Customizable availability pages describe what’s happening while customers wait for your site to load. The Service Not Available page lets them know when your site is down. When your site has higher-than-usual demand, the Too Many Requests page appears. - **[Edit Pages and Components in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_edit_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Each page contains a collection of components that are organized around a task or function, whether it’s opening a case or searching for an article. The pages in each Experience Builder template are ready for you to use with little configuration. Add new components to your site’s pages, edit the properties of existing components, or delete components that you don’t require. - **[Add Data Providers to Get Data on Enhanced LWR Site Pages (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.add_data_providers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure data providers on enhanced LWR site pages in Experience Builder and get access to data from different sources. You can bind data from Apex or Record data providers to individual builder components on to these pages. - **[Create Custom Site Pages with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_create_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To extend your Experience Builder template, create custom site pages. To get the most from your Salesforce data, add custom record detail, list, and related list pages. To display individual pieces of content along with any combination of components, use CMS content pages. - **[Add Markup to the Page to Customize Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_head.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add custom analytics, improve your SEO results, and more by adding custom markup to the page `` in Experience Builder. For example, you can include SEO meta tags that are visible only to search engines, add a favicon, or add custom code for Adobe Analytics and Google Tag Manager. - **[Expression-Based Component Variations in Enhanced LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_expression_based_variations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Site visitors are important to your business and deserve to have the most custom experience possible. With Expression-Based Component Variations, you can create multiple versions of a component and then change the style and visibility settings to make each version unique. You can choose to have a single variation for a targeted group or several variations that apply broadly to subsets of your users. Apply visibility rules to each variation to make it appear to the appropriate site visitors. And when you have multiple variations for the same component, prioritize them so you know when your variations appear and to whom. - **[Expression-Based Visibility in Enhanced LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_expression_based_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With Expression-Based Visibility, you can create a set of rules that dictate when and to whom your components in your enhanced LWR sites appear. Choose visibility settings based on User and Product object fields such as location, language, buyer groups, and more. Creating visibility conditions based on expressions improves the agility of your site. - **[Personalization with Audience Targeting in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_visibilty_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep your users engaged by offering personalized, relevant content that’s customized for a particular audience. To create an audience, you assemble a set of criteria that defines a user segment. You can then tailor a single site to meet the needs of multiple user segments. For example, you can present the same site with a different look and feel for each audience or show different pages, components, or data to different audiences. - **[Use Visualforce in Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_use_visualforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you created Visualforce pages, actions, buttons, links, and canvas apps for your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template-based sites, you can use them in Experience Builder sites. - **[Add Streams to Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_add_streams_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your site users can combine multiple feeds into a stream to create a single point of access to related information. Combine feeds of top contributors or discussions concerning a particular product line. Create a stream that combines feeds from discussions, groups, topics, profiles, and all kinds of objects, like cases, opportunities, and accounts. No more jumping from feed-to-feed to get a sense of what people are saying. Each member can create up to 100 streams. # Managers, Moderators, and Admins Working Together Experience Cloud sites can thrive when their managers, moderators, and admins understand their unique roles and work together effectively. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
An Experience Cloud site manager and moderator work hand-in-hand. They’re partners and support one another in fostering engagement and harmony. Sometimes, they perform some of the same tasks, but each has unique contributions. The site manager monitors adoption and engagement and the moderator ensures that the site is a healthy environment and that members feel encouraged to be active and helpful to each other. Experience Cloud site managers, moderators, and admins all work together to protect, engage, and measure a site’s success.
Protect icon Engage icon Measure icon

Prevent spammers, bots, and trolls from attacking the site.

Protect the site from trademark infringement and legal issues.

Ensure site members use appropriate language and adhere to the terms of use.

Welcome new members, add contributors, and connect members with resources.

Help ensure that members questions are answered quickly.

Acknowledge helpful members and thank them.

Identify, encourage, groom, and retain MVPs.

Review analytics on community health.

Measure return on investment (ROI) and key performance indicators (KPI), such as money saved and cases deflected.

Identify and track community trends.

- **[What’s an Experience Cloud Site Manager?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_community_manager_def.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Cloud site managers help ensure that a site thrives by encouraging member participation. - **[What’s an Experience Cloud Site Moderator?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderator_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Cloud site moderators help ensure the success of a site by monitoring user activity and flagged items. # Map Context Variables and Route Chat with Omni-Channel Flow Configure an Omni-Channel flow to map the pre-chat variables from the chat deployment to the custom fields on the Messaging Session object and route chats to your Agentforce Service agent. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Aura and LWR Experience Cloud Sites
Available in: Enhanced Chat with the Einstein for Service, Einstein Platform, Community, Community Plus, or Agentforce Service Agent add-on
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Foundations or Agentforce 1 Editions. Access to some standard agent actions requires additional add-on licenses
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows.** 2. Click **New Flow**. From the New Automation screen, select **Omni-Channel Flow** under Frequently Used. 3. Click the **Toolbox** icon on the left-hand side to access the resource panel. 4. Click **New Resource** for each custom parameter for example, lastViewedArticleId. 5. Set Resource Type to **Variable**. 6. Set the API Name to match the custom parameter defined in your Messaging Channel exactly for example, lastViewedArticleId. 7. Set the Data Type to **Text**. 8. Under Availability Outside the Flow, check the box for **Available for Input** and then Click **Done**. 9. To update the messaging session record, click the **Add Element** button (+) between Start and End. 10. Select the **Update Records** element. 11. Set up the element to update the Messaging Session record that initiated the flow. 12. Map each of your new Input Variables to the corresponding Custom Field on the Messaging Session object. For example, map the flow variable {!lastViewedArticleId} to the custom field lastViewedArticleId\_\_c. 13. To route the chat, click the **Add Element** button (+) after the Update Records element. 14. Select the **Route Work** element and configure it to route the chat session to your Agentforce Service agent. 15. Click **Save**, provide a name, and then click **Activate** to make the Omni-Channel Flow available. # Map the Customer Journey and Drive Engagement You defined a site vision that aligns your site with your company’s purpose. Now you want to design a site experience that encourages users to visit your site and interact with your content. But to promote customer engagement, you must first understand your customers’ needs and create compelling content in to meet those needs. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## Why Is This Important? Engagement describes just how involved your customers and partners are with your site. How often do they visit the site? How long do they stay? What do they do on the site? Improve customer engagement and satisfaction by understanding the customer experience. The customer experience is a combination of two factors: - User personas represent specific types of customers. Think of your personas as fictional characters with real-world responsibilities, goals, and challenges. - Customer journeys map how your customers use your products and services. Identify what your customers want to accomplish and how they feel at each stage of their experience. When you understand what your users need, you can design a site that helps them accomplish their goals. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As you go through this process, define specific outcomes to measure success: improved customer retention, reduced support costs, faster conversions, and so on. Then you can measure improvements as you make them. ## What Should You Keep in Mind? To begin mapping the customer journey, first develop the characteristics of your user personas. To start the process, answer some questions. - What roles do the top two or three users have? - What are their responsibilities, challenges, goals, and motivations? - What do they want to accomplish on your site? You can then start asking some questions about the customer journey to detail the sequence of customers’ key activities on the site. Where possible, seek input from your support, sales, and marketing teams. - To meet their goals, what type of content do your customers need? - Are customers looking at your content for informational or learning purposes? - Are they accessing the site using desktop or mobile devices? - What do they do when they access the site? - Which interactions are most important? Ideas for Promoting Engagement Obviously, the best way to engage users is to have a site that meets their needs. Let’s look at some examples. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Let's say you want to create a compelling product registration experience for new customers. Consider creating a home page with a vivid product image in the background and a prominent call-to-action registration button. Provide links to product information and customer testimonials. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example If your site is a self-service help portal, you want to create an experience that helps users solve a problem or learn more about your product or services. In this case, to improve engagement, consider making the portal available from the home page of your corporate website with an easily identifiable icon that links to the self-service portal. Also consider providing as much publicly available self-service content as possible on your site. Because public, or unauthenticated, content is discoverable through search engines, it encourages users to visit, stay, and explore your site. When they're on your site, consider guiding visitors to the most relevant content with a quick-start topic or a search bar where they can enter key terms. # Market Development Fund Reports These reports are provided in the **Market Development Fund Reports** folder. | **Report Name** | **Description** | **Additional Customization** | | --- | --- | --- | | Total Budget | Amount of total marketing budget. | N/A | | Total Budget Allocated | Total budget allocated to partners. | N/A | | Fund Requests Approved/Rejected | Total approved and rejected fund requests. | N/A | | Fund Claims Approved/Rejected | Total approved and rejected claims. | N/A | | Total Funds Paid | Total paid claims. | N/A | | Budget Remaining | Amount of budget available. | N/A | | Funds Remaining | Amount of allocated funds available. | N/A | | Fund Requests in Draft | Number of fund requests in draft status. | N/A | | Fund Requests Approved/Rejected | Displays fund requests by approved or rejected status. | N/A | | Fund Request Submit Trend | Number of fund requests submitted. | N/A | | Fund Requests By Activity Type | Number of approved fund requests by activity. | N/A | | Fund Requests By Activity Type (value) | Number of approved fund requests by activity type (value). | N/A | | Fund Claims in Draft | Number of fund claims in draft status. | N/A | | Total Funds Claimed | Displays fund claims that have been approved. | N/A | | Funds Used vs. Allocated By Fund Type | Displays funds used vs. funds allocated by type. | N/A | | Funds Used vs. Allocated By Budget | Displays funds used vs. funds allocated by budget. | N/A | | Funds Used By Partners | Displays requested funds vs. allocated funds by partner. | N/A | # Market Development Funds Drive demand for your products and provide incentives to partner users by offering market development funds as part of your channel marketing program. Create marketing budgets, allocate marketing funds or co-op (accrued) funds to channel partners, streamline fund requests, and process fund claims using Market Development Fund (MDF) features. Channel account managers can get a full audit of MDF activity, including fund requests and claims approval.
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
With Market Development Fund features, you can: - Create marketing budgets - Allocate marketing funds or co-op (accrued) funds to channel partners - Streamline fund requests - Process fund claims ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Setting up Market Development Funds is easy, using Guided Setup. Click **Experience Workspaces** | **Guided Setup** | **Market Development Fund**. The Market Development Fund reports, available in the guided setup, make it easy to understand partner adoption, funds usage, and marketing ROI. Market Development Funds is available out-of-the-box for partner sites. We created a Budget custom report type for you. If you want to view information about allocations, requests, or claims, create report types for those objects and give partners read access to them. - **[Create a Market Development Budget](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_budget.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Channel account managers can create budgets for specific vendor groups based on location, type of funds (Market Development or co-op), or by channel programs. Using custom lookup fields, they can also associate budgets with marketing campaigns. - **[Configure Market Development Budgets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_budget_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Partner Marketing Budgets so that channel account managers can access them. Set up workflows to streamline the approval process. - **[Create a Partner Fund Allocation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_allocation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Allocate Market Development Funds (MDF) or co-op funds to channel partners from an existing budget. Allocations are associated with budgets and channel partners to track budget usage. - **[Configure Partner Fund Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_allocation_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure partner fund allocation for your partner site to make funds available to your partner users. Channel account managers can create and update funds and track fund activity. - **[Create a Partner Fund Request](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_request.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Partner users can request funds before marketing a vendor’s product or service. Channel account managers can approve the fund request. Fund requests are associated with channel partners, allocations, and campaigns to track how allocated funds are used. - **[Configure Partner Fund Requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_request_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Partner Fund Requests so that partner users can request funds for marketing campaigns and channel account managers can approve or reject the requests. - **[Create a Partner Fund Claim](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_claim.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let partner users claim money for expenses incurred on marketing activities. Claims are associated with fund requests. - **[Configure Partner Fund Claims](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_claim_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Partner Fund Claims so that partner users can claim funds for reimbursement after running a marketing campaign. Channel account managers can approve or reject the claim. # Maximum Sizes by File Type in Chatter Search The following file types and sizes are supported when you search Chatter. Search supports several file types and has file size limits. If a file exceeds the maximum size, the file’s content isn't searched, but the file's name, description, type, and owner are. | File Type | File Extensions | Maximum File Size for Search | | --- | --- | --- | | HTML | .htm, .html, .xhtml | 5 MB | | PDF | .pdf | 25 MB | | PPT | .ppt, .pptx, .pptm | 25 MB | | RTF | .rtf | 5 MB | | Text | .c, .cpp, .css, .csv, .ini, .java, .log, .sql, .txt | 5 MB | | Word | .doc, .docx, .docm | 25 MB | | XLS | .xls, .xlsx, .xlsm | 5 MB | | XML | .xml | 5 MB | # Member Profile and Settings The Member Profile component allows site members to easily edit their account information. And the best part is that all a member’s important information is in one place—profile information and various settings in one handy component. What does that mean for you and your business? Fewer phone calls into your call centers for simple updates. The Member Profile component uses a default image in the header. Using the component’s properties in Experience Builder, you can choose to not show the default image. The fields that you see in the Member Profile component are set in Salesforce setup **Setup** | **Users** | **Page Layouts** | **User Profile Page Layout**. Use the Member Profile component on the User Profile page of sites made using the Customer Account Portal. 1. Select the **Member Profile** component in the page you’re configuring. 2. To view the component properties, select the Properties pane: | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | User ID | The system supplies this value so that authenticated users can view their own information. Don’t update this field. | | Show banner image at top | Shows a banner image at the top of the Member Profile component. If unselected, no banner image is seen. | | Edit Banner Image | Choose a banner image for displaying at the top of the Member Profile component. | | Show Settings tab | Show the Settings tab on the component. | | Profile Tab Label | Enter a label for the Profile tab. The default text is Profile. | | Settings Tab Label | Enter a label for the Settings tab. The default text is Settings & Preferences. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Member Profile component. ![Member Profile component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/member_profile.png) # Membership The Membership component displays the number of new group members, either in the past 30 days or the past 12 months. The Membership component is visible only to users who have reporting permissions in orgs that have group engagement. You can also choose to make the component visible only to group managers. 1. Select the **Membership** component in the page that you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Group ID | The group’s ID. Typically, this field is populated when the page loads. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Membership component displaying as Current Membership chart and showing monthly totals for new members.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/membership_component.png) # Mention People and Groups in Chatter A great way to get someone’s attention or to share a post with a group is to mention them. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note To get the best performance, access checks for mentions occur after you select a name. If the check fails, a message tells you that the mentioned user can't see the update: \[_Name_\] doesn't have access and won't see this update. The mention becomes a link. When you have access to the mentioned person, the link is to that person's profile. When you don't have access—for example, when the user is an external user—the link is to the person's user record detail page. In either case, the mention doesn't trigger a notification for the mentioned person. - **[@Mention People and Groups in Chatter Posts and Comments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_add_mentioning_people.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** @Mention a person or a group to call their attention to something you want them to see. - **[Visibility of User and Group @Mentions in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_mention_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you @mention people or groups in a Chatter update, anyone who has access to the update can see the post and all comments. # Merge Fields for Experience Cloud Sites You can personalize the email that you send to Experience Cloud site members by adding merge fields to your email templates. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
When you enable digital experiences in your org, Salesforce provides text-based email templates to simplify communicating with your Experience Cloud site members. You can use these templates to: - Welcome new members - Handle forgotten passwords - Reset passwords - Notify users when they’re locked out after failing to log in after so many attempts - Comment on cases - Send one-time passwords when identity verification is required for multi-factor authentication or passwordless login - Send one-time passwords when identity verification is required for device activation - Send verification links in async email messages for identity verification - Send verification emails when a user changes their email address Experience Cloud site email templates have merge fields unique to sites. You can find them under the Network Member Fields field type. You can also use other merge field types, such as Receiving User and Organization. Here are a few merge fields commonly used in Experience Cloud site email templates.
Field Name Description

{!Network_Community_Name}

OR

{!Community.Name}

OR

{!Community_Name}

The name of the Experience Cloud site.

{!Network_Community_Url}

OR

{!Community.Url}

OR

{!Community_Url}

The URL to the login page of the Experience Cloud site, for example,  https://MyDomainName.my.site.com/partners/login.

{!Community_Url} is populated in the:

  • Welcome New Member template when Send welcome email is selected
  • Forgot Password or Change Password template if the external user receiving the email is a member of the Experience Cloud site

The login page URLs populated for authenticated LWR sites created after Winter ’23 have a different structure than the login page URLs populated for all other Experience Cloud sites. Clicking the URL still directs users to your site’s login page as expected.

{!Receiving_User.Username} The username of the user receiving the email. This field only renders for mass emails.

{!NetworkMember.Operating_System}

OR

{!Operating_System}

The operating system of the Experience Cloud site member.

{!NetworkMember.EmailVerify_Url}

OR

{!EmailVerify_Url}

The verification link sent to a user via email.

{!ChgEmailVer.NewEmail}

OR

{!ChgEmailVer.OldEmail}

The user’s email address.
{!ChgEmailVer.URL} The verification link sent to a user via email when their email address is changed.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Available merge fields differ between email templates. View Available Merge Fields at the top of each email template to see the available fields. For more flexibility, you can create custom Experience Cloud site email templates in Visualforce. For a Visualforce email template, use the `$Network` global merge field type and its properties, as described in this table. These fields are populated only in Visualforce Experience Cloud site email templates.
Field Name Description
$Network.ActionForVerificationEmail Used in one-time password (OTP) and device activation emails to specify the action that prompted sending a verification email.
$Network.AsyncVerificationLink Used in asynchronous emails to send a verification link (URL) to users. Users click the link to verify their email address with Salesforce. After verifying their email address, external users can log in with a one-time password (OTP) via email (passwordless login).
$Network.BrowserForVerificationEmail Used in OTP and device activation emails to specify the browser where the action occurred that prompted sending a verification email.
$Network.CodeForVerificationEmail The verification code sent in the OTP or device activation email.
$Network.ChgEmailVerOldEmail The user’s old email address, when they change it.
$Network.ChgEmailVerNewEmail The user’s new email address, when they change it.
$Network.ChgEmailVerLink The link, sent to the user’s new email address, that the user follows to verify their email address change.
$Network.Name The name of the Experience Cloud site.
$Network.NetworkUrlForUserEmails

The URL to the login page of the Experience Cloud site, for example, https://MyDomainName.my.site.com/partners/login.

If this merge field is in the welcome email to new members, the URL is appended with a link to a reset password page.

$Network.OperatingSystemForVerificationEmail Used in OTP and device activation emails to specify the operating system where the action occurred that prompted sending a verification email.

$Network.passwordLockTime

OR

{!PASSWORD_LOCK_TIME}

Used in the formula field for lockout emails to specify how long a user must wait until logging in again after being locked out.
For more information on creating Visualforce templates, see the Visualforce Developer Guide. If your Experience Cloud site uses cases, approvals, or workflows, emails created from an email template that use the {!.Link} or {!Case.Link} merge fields include a link to the record in the site. If the user receiving the email is a member of multiple active Experience Cloud sites, the link goes to the oldest active site. If the user is already logged in to a site and clicks the link in the email, the link goes to that site. If the user isn't a member of any site, the link goes to the internal org. If the user is a member of a portal and a site, the link goes to the site.
Field Name Description
{!Case.Link}

Used in:

  • Case comment notifications to contacts and owners
  • Case creation and update notifications to contacts
{!<any_object>.Link}

Used in:

  • Approval requests sent to approvers and delegated approvers
  • Workflow email alerts
To insert merge fields into your Experience Cloud site email templates: 1. From Setup, enter Email Templates in the Quick Find box, and select **Classic Email Templates**. Next to an email template, click **Edit**. 2. Under Available Merge Fields, from the dropdown menu, select the field type, and then select the field. For merge fields specific to sites, select **Network Member Fields**. 3. Copy the merge field value into the body of the email template. #### See Also - [Customize Email Sent from Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can customize email sender information and Chatter email branding. You can also customize email templates, such as templates for welcoming new members and resetting members’ passwords. Decide how Salesforce sends emails for users with unverified email domains, and customize email templates in the user interface.") - [Email Templates in Salesforce Classic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.admin_emailtemplates.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Message Notification Add the Message Notification component to your site pages to let users view their recent messages from outside the Messages list view. The Message Notification component shows up to three recent messages and allows users to send new messages. Add the Message Notification component to the site Home page and configure it in the Page Editor. 1. Select the **Message Notification** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Header Label | Enter a title for the component. The default text is Recent Messages. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Message Notification component: ![Message Notificaiton component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/direct_messages_recent_component.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Migrate a Koa or Kokua Site to a New Template The Koa and Kokua templates are retired, and you can no longer use them to create site. Salesforce supports existing sites built with Koa and Kokua, but we recommend migrating to newer templates. The new templates provide richer support for Salesforce Knowledge and case management, and they also receive updates and new features with each release. **Migration Options** Because your Koa and Kokua sites aren't using the latest Lightning technology, we recommend creating a new site. A new site reflects the most recent innovations and features. You can choose to migrate your site using the **Change Template** button from **Workspaces** | **Administration**. If you do, the migrated version won’t reflect all the innovations made to the product. To determine which template is right for your use case, check out [Which Experience Cloud Template Should I Use?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.siteforce_commtemp_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Cloud templates let you build responsive sites for delivering rich, branded spaces for your customers and partners. And with Experience Builder, you can accomplish a lot without coding. For example, you can edit a template’s components to include information about your site, add images to extend your branding, and include CMS content. And if you want a more customized experience, you can create custom pages, add components to pages, build custom Lightning components, and expose more Salesforce objects."). Also think about what you envision for the future. If your use case is strictly a help forum, consider using the Help Center template. Otherwise, consider the Customer Account Portal as an option. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Always test your implementation first in a sandbox before publishing your new site. See [Deploy an Experience Cloud Site from Sandbox to Production](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_migrate_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "We recommend creating, customizing, and testing your Experience Cloud site in a test environment, such as a sandbox, before deploying it to your production org. When testing is complete, you can use change sets or Metadata API to migrate your site from one org to another. Deciding whether to use change sets or MD API depends on several factors. Some things to consider are the complexity of the changes that you’re migrating, your level of comfort with developer tools, and the application lifecycle management (ALM) model that you’re using."). Your Koa or Kokua site allows you to expose your Salesforce Knowledge implementation to the world while giving users the chance to file cases. The Customer Service template lets you do both. But it also lets you do other things, such as add Chat capabilities or the potential for customers to edit their cases. If the Customer Service template’s extra features are more than you need, you can remove unnecessary pages and components. **Filtering in Searches** Koa and Kokua searches allow users to filter by article type and category. These filtering options are only available in the Koa and Kokua templates. However, you can scope searches to specific topics and see all articles associated with that topic. You can also look for search components created by trusted Salesforce partners and distributed via AppExchange. **Data Categories Versus Topics** Your Koa or Koa site uses your Salesforce Knowledge setup and data categories to organize content. The Customer Service template also uses Salesforce Knowledge in the back end to organize content, but in the site, content is organized using topics. You can map the articles in your data categories to topics in a site. To map articles to topics automatically: 1. Select **Experience Workspaces** | **Content Targeting** | **Automatic Topic Assignment**. 2. Enable **Automatic Topic Assignment**. 3. Map topics to data category groups and data categories. You can choose to add the topics to all existing articles and articles added in the future. Because data categories aren’t the primary content organization scheme in the Customer Service template, you can’t use the following components. - Article Type Filter - Category Filter - Category Navigation - Expanded Category Navigation - Featured Data Categories - Featured Search - Trending Articles You can map your exact hierarchy from data categories to topics, up to eight levels of depth. **Data Category Permissions** Thoroughly check the data category permissions for all profiles accessing your newly built site. If you add new profiles and users to your site, check that all the articles’ data categories are set to the right permissions for your users. In particular, check the permission on the [guest user profile](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.community_templates.meta/community_templates/rss_config_guest_user_profile.htm) for each site. **Viewing Articles** The Article Listview and Article Home components are only supported in the Koa and Kokua templates. Use the Top Articles by Topic component for a list view in a Customer Service community. When you click a topic in the Top Articles by Topic component, you see the topic detail page with a list of articles for that topic. **Left-Hand Navigation** Use [custom themes](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=community_builder_theme.htm&language=en_US) to replicate the left-hand navigation scheme seen in the Koa and Kokua templates. **New URL** Your new site’s URL is different from your old Koa or Kokua URL. Give your customers a smooth transition from one to the next by following these steps. 1. In your Koa or Kokua site, select **Workspaces** | **Administration**. 2. Click the pencil button, and change the site’s URL. 3. Click **Save**. 4. In your new site, select **Workspaces** | **Administration**. 5. Click the pencil button, and change the community’s URL so that it matches your old URL. 6. To handle bookmarked articles, [consider rewriting your site URLs](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.apexcode.meta/apexcode/apex_site_urlRewriter.htm). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Change the URL only after testing that your new site works just as you want it to. # Migrate from a Partner Portal to an Experience Cloud Site Salesforce recommends that you migrate from partner portals to Experience Cloud sites. Portal licenses are supported in Experience Coud sites so you don’t need to switch licenses. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting from Summer ’13, portals are no longer available for new Salesforce orgs. Existing organizations using portals can continue to use their partner portals or migrate to an Experience Cloud site. If you don’t have a partner portal, but want to share records and information with your partners, give an Experience Cloud site a try. Contact Salesforce for more information. ## Why Migrate from Portals to Experience Cloud sites? Experience Cloud sites offer all the functionality available in portals and customer portals, plus more features including: - A rich, responsive, mobile-ready Lightning solution designed with channel sales and marketing workflows in mind: Partner Central - Build personalized, rich experiences with your company’s branding - Collaborate with your partner users in groups and feeds - Share files - Access to reports and dashboards plus the ability to create custom reports for your site - Single sign-on and login support for multiple authentication providers - Content moderation, direct messages, and much more - Single location where you can design, moderate, and manage your site Plus, we’re working round the clock to bring you more features in every release. ## If You Continue to Use Partner Portals All the information about setting up partner accounts, users, portals, and tracking partner sales is available in the [Salesforce Partner Portal Guide](https://resources.docs.salesforce.com/rel1/doc/en-us/static/pdf/salesforce_partner_portal_guide.pdf). # Migrate Peer-to-Peer Conversations to Your Experience Cloud Site Migrating peer-to-peer conversations from other platforms can be a part of creating an Experience Cloud site. Understand the steps to take before migrating and how to use Data Loader to migrate conversations. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Before you can load your data, perform these steps. - [Create your Experience Cloud site](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=networks_setup_basics.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - Create the profiles to assign to your internal and external users, as applicable. - [Assign profiles to your site](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=networks_customize_members.htm&type=5&language=en_US) (**Setup** | **All Sites** | **Workspaces \[for the site you’re working on\]** | **Administration** | **Members**). - Create an Account and Contact (for B2B sites) or a Person Account (for B2C sites) before creating an external user. Internal users (employees of your company) aren’t linked to accounts and contacts. Your internal users can exist in Salesforce, so you don’t need to create them as users. - Put together a plan for how to migrate your data. Identify how to transform the data from your current format into the format that Salesforce uses. We recommend that you do a trial run of your data load into a full sandbox before migrating in production. Create a guide to refer to when you do the load into production. - As with all data migrations, do a test load of a few records first. Ensure the data looks as you expect, and then proceed with the full load. This process is especially important when loading conversations to ensure that they render the way you expect them to. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important - When you create site users during the data load, don’t send a welcome email. You can prevent this action by taking your site offline or by deactivating the welcome email option. - To prevent users from receiving Chatter email alerts during the data load, turn off emails for all your site members. Email notification preferences are site-specific and are stored in the `NetworkMember` object. Query `NetworkMember (SELECT Id,NetworkId,PreferencesDisableAllFeedsEmail FROM NetworkMember WHERE NetworkId = 'ENTER YOUR 18-DIGIT SITE ID HERE')` and set the `PreferencesDisableAllFeedsEmail` field for all users in the community to `TRUE`. Be sure to set it back to `FALSE` after the entire data load is complete so that site members get email notifications after the site is live. We advise not globally disabling all system emails from your sandbox when doing a test load. Disabling all system emails when doing the data load in production prevents other departments that also use your Salesforce instance from sending email. There are many dependencies between objects when migrating posts, so it’s important to pay attention to the order in which the data is loaded. Here is our recommended order and the key required fields to populate to be successful. 1. Load Accounts Ensure that the Account Owner for each account has a role assigned to their user. If you aren't specifying an Account Owner, ensure that the user doing the data load has a role assigned to them. Users without an assigned role can't load users. - For business accounts—`Account Name` - For person accounts—`First Name`; `Last Name` 2. Load Contacts If you're using person accounts, upload contacts as they're automatically created when you load their information to the Accounts object. At a minimum, load these fields: - `AccountId` - `First Name` - `Last Name` 3. Load Users Required fields: - `ContactId`: Leave blank if creating a user in your Salesforce org who works for your organization. Only external users must be linked to a contact. - `FirstName` - `LastName` - `Email` - `Username`: The username in the format of an email address that members use to log in and isn't visible to anyone else in the site. - `Alias`: The alias doesn't appear anywhere in the site, but it's a globally required field in Salesforce. - `Nickname`: If you choose to use a nickname instead of first and last names, the nickname appears to users in the site. - `ProfileId` - `LanguageLocaleKey`: The user's language and locale. - `LocaleSidKey`: The two-digit ISO language code. For example, English (United States) is en\_US. - `TimeZoneId` - `EmailEncodingKey`: The email encoding for the user, such as ISO-8859-1 or UTF-8. 4. Load Collaboration Groups
Required Field Description
GroupName  
OwnerId The user ID of the person who owns the group.
CollaborationType

Controls the visibility of the group:

  • Public: Anyone can see and post updates. Anyone can join a public group.
  • Private: Only members can see the group feed and post updates. Non-members can see only the group name and a few other details in list views, search, and on the group page. The group's owner or managers add members who request to join the group.
  • Unlisted: Only members and users with the Manage Unlisted Groups permission can see the group and post updates. Other users can't access the group or see it in lists, search, or feeds.
5. Load Collaboration Group Members Required fields: - `GroupId`: The ID of the group - `CollaborationRole`: If the user is a Standard or Admin user. - `MemberId`: The user ID of the member. 6. Load Topics Required fields: - `Name` - `Description` - `NetworkId`: The 18-digit Experience Cloud site ID. 7. Load Content Documents For information about how to load files, see [Upload Content with the Data Loader](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=loader_content.htm&language=en_US). You can leave the `ParentId` (for example, Library) field blank because files attached to Chatter records typically aren't stored in Libraries. 8. Load Feed Items
Required Field Description
Body The main content of your post. Only specific HTML tags are supported, so make sure to clean your data before attempting to upload.
Type

The kind of post made. Common options include:

  • AdvancedTextPost: For announcements in groups
  • ContentPost: A post with an attached file
  • QuestionPost: Used for posting a question to a topic or group
  • PollPost: Used if the post includes a poll in groups
  • LinkPost: A post with an attached URL
IsRichText
  • True: Use when there's HTML markup
  • False: Use if plain text
NetworkScope The 18-digit site ID. To get the ID, query the Network object in Data Loader using: SELECT Id,Name FROM Network
ParentId For group posts, enter the CollaborationGroup ID. For topic posts, enter the ID of the user who created the post.
Visibility AllUsers
Title If using type QuestionPost, enter the question title here.
9. Load Feed Comments When adding feed comments, it's crucial to add attachments at the time of creation. You can't edit a comment and add an attachment to it.
Required Field Description
FeedItemId The parent post that the comment is related to.
CommentBody The content in the post.
ThreadParentId Leave empty if a comment is the first level down of comment on a post. If it is below an existing comment, enter the FeedItemId from its parent comment.
CommentType
  • ContentComment: A comment that includes an attachment.
  • TextComment: A direct text entry on a comment.
RelatedRecordId ID of the ContentVersion object associated with a ContentComment. This field is null for all comments except ContentComment.
10. Load Feed Likes Required fields: - `FeedItemId`: If the like is related to a post, enter the `FeedItemId` from the post here. - `FeedEntityId`: If the like is related to a comment, enter the `FeedCommentId` from the comment here. 11. Load Feed Attachments
Required Field Description
FeedEntityId The ID of the associated post (FeedItem) that contains this attachment.
RecordId The ID of the record that this feed attachment contains. For inline images, RecordId is a ContentDocument ID. For content attachments, RecordId is a ContentVersion ID.
Title The title of this feed attachment. When Type is Link, the Title value is the label for the attachment link. Otherwise, the Title value isn't used.
Type

The type of this feed attachment. Valid values are:

  • Content: A content attachment.
  • FeedEntity: A feed entity, such as a shared post. Available in API version 39 and later in Lightning Experience.
  • InlineImage: An inline image. The system creates an inline image attachment when an image is added to the body of the associated FeedItem. You can't add an inline image directly by using FeedAttachment.
  • Link
Value Enter the URL here if the feed attachment is Type = Link. Otherwise, leave blank.
12. Load Topic Assignments Required fields: - `EntityId`: The ID of the post (such as `FeedItem`) that corresponds to the topic. - `TopicId`: The ID of the topic to assign to the feed. 13. Load Entity Subscriptions Required fields: - `ParentId`: The ID of the record being followed. For example, it could be the ID of a user or a topic being followed. - `SubscriberId`: The ID of the user who is following the record. - `NetworkId`: The 18-digit site ID. 14. Update Network Members Member records were already created. However, if you want to migrate user email preferences or reputation points earned, update these records as a final step of your migration. Other Considerations - External IDs — You can’t add external ID fields to most of the objects, so keep your success files from each data load to track the relationship between your source data and Salesforce. You can then use `VLOOKUPS` to populate the Salesforce ID from the parent record created into the next file load. - Threaded conversations — If your current platform uses threaded conversations, load `FeedComments` in several batches. For example, group all top-level comments into one file and load them. Then group all the posts beneath those comments into the next data load, and so on. Only threaded conversations that are three levels deep are supported. - Inactive users — If you’ve had your legacy forum for some time, chances are that you have some users who are no longer active. Migrate them as active users so that you can bring over their posts and comments, and then deactivate their user record. If you’re using member-based licenses and are migrating more users than you have licenses, before starting your data load, contact your Account Executive to discuss which options are available. - Formatting posts — The trickiest part of this load is getting your posts into the correct format. If you can’t migrate your posts exactly the way you want with these instructions, see the [Connect REST API Developer Guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.chatterapi.meta/chatterapi/connect_requests_message_body_input.htm) for how a developer could load your posts and comments to the site. - Updating Chatter posts to select best answer — If your current forum has the concept of a best answer, update the `BestCommentId` field on the `FeedItem` records after loading all your `FeedComments`. You can’t set this value during the initial `FeedItem` insert, because the child `FeedComment` records don’t yet exist. - Updating the `BestCommentId` field — The `BestCommentId` field can't be updated using Workbench or Dataloader. To update the field, use the [QuestionAndAnswers Class](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.apexref.meta/apexref/apex_ConnectAPI_QuestionAndAnswers_static_methods.htm) via the Connect API. - Uploading Chatter profile photos and Chatter polls — This upload must be done via Connect REST API. For more information, see [this guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.chatterapi.meta/chatterapi/connect_resources_users_UserPhotos.htm) on photos and [this guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.chatterapi.meta/chatterapi/connect_responses_feed_poll.htm) on polls. - What can’t be migrated — For example, you can’t migrate the view count on posts or whether a user has or hasn’t viewed a post. # Migrate to the Contact Support Form and Case Deflection Components If you built your Experience Cloud site before Spring \`18, you could be using the Create Case Form component. A revamped version, ushered in with Spring \`18, has split the component into two: the Contact Support Form and the Case Deflection components. We recommend you update your existing site to use the new components, as future updates and improvements are made on Contact Support Form and Case Deflection. Moreover, the new components allow you to use the Case Deflection Dashboard to verify the efficacy of your site’s case deflection. Replace the Case Create Form component with the Contact Support Form and Case Deflection components using the following steps. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Enable Web-to-Case in your org if it’s not already enabled. 1. [Create a new page variation](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=community_builder_page_visibilty_overview.htm&language=en_US) you can use for case deflection. In the Customer Service, make a variation of the Contact Support page. In the Customer Account Portal template, make a variation of the Contact Us page. We recommend the 2-column, 1:1 ratio layout. 2. Drag the Contact Support Form and Case Deflection components on the page. Configure the component properties. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note One of the properties on the Contact Support Form component is the global action used to create cases. Create [new global actions](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=actions_overview_global.htm&language=en_US) in Salesforce Setup. For a global action to be used in the Contact Support Form component, it must be a **Create a Record** action type with the case object as the target. 3. Enable **Guest Access to the Support API**, and add the global actions you want to use. 1. In Salesforce Setup, enter Sites in the Quick Find box and select **Sites**. 2. Select the **Guest Access to the Support API** checkbox to enable it. 3. Add your global actions to the **Selected Quick Actions** box. ![Selected global actions.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/selected_global_actions.png) 4. Click **Save**. 4. Configure your site’s guest user profile. Disable access to object permissions for guest users. ![Guest user profile with object permissions disabled.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/guest_user_crud.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Your guest users could need object permissions for custom objects, or other functionality in your site. Test your implementation so you have the best object permission configuration for your site. # Missions Game mechanics, such as using badges, are a great way to get your users involved in your Experience Cloud site. However, assigning badges manually can be time consuming. Instead, use the Missions feature to assign members badges automatically. Community managers have their say in what action earns a badge and when it can be awarded, and then Missions takes care of the rest. And members can see which badges they haven’t yet earned, inspiring action. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Community managers create missions and choose the badge, the action, and the threshold. For example, a mission could assign the Nice Work badge when a member answers 10 questions. Actions you can choose from include writing a post or comment, receiving a like, and more. Members can earn each mission badge once. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Badges can only be assigned to users and by users who have Chatter enabled. - **[Create a Mission](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_missions_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a mission, choosing an action, threshold, and badge, to automatically give badges to your members. - **[Display Unearned Mission Badges](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_missions_display_unearned.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Inspire members to participate more in your Experience Cloud site by showing them the badges they can earn. You can display the unearned badges in the member’s recognition badges list. # Moderate Chatter Free Users A moderator is a Chatter user with some additional privileges. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
User Permissions Needed
To moderate Chatter: Moderate Chatter
These privileges include: - [Activate or deactivate Chatter Free users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_moderate_deactivate_free_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "As a moderator, you can deactivate Chatter Free users if, for example, they left the company.") - [Assign a Chatter Free user as moderator or take the privilege away](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_moderate_assign_moderator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "As a moderator, you can assign moderator privileges to Chatter Free users in your organization. If needed, you can also remove moderator privileges.") - Delete the posts and comments that they can see You can tell if someone is a moderator by the special banner on their profile picture. ![Chatter moderator banner on profile photo](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_moderator_badge_sm.jpg) - **[Assign Moderator Privileges to Chatter Free Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_moderate_assign_moderator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As a moderator, you can assign moderator privileges to Chatter Free users in your organization. If needed, you can also remove moderator privileges. - **[Deactivate Chatter Free Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_moderate_deactivate_free_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As a moderator, you can deactivate Chatter Free users if, for example, they left the company. #### See Also - [What Your Chatter Group Role Lets You Do](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_roles_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The actions that you can perform in a Chatter group depend on whether you’re a member, owner, or manager of the group.") # Moderate Flagged Items in Your Experience Cloud Site Moderators can review and act on flagged items in their Experience Cloud sites. If you haven’t already, [install the Salesforce Communities Management (for Communities with Chatter)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reporting_dashboards_package.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Salesforce Communities Management packages give community managers an essential starter set of dashboards and reports to keep tabs on activity and engagement directly in Experience Workspaces.") package from AppExchange. This package automatically installs multiple insight reports that you can use to moderate your site, such as the Flagged Private Messages and Flagged Files reports. It also automatically installs the Flagged Discussions and Flagged Direct Messages tiles to the Moderation tile in Experience Workspaces. A small orange flag appears next to flagged items. The number next to the flag indicates how many people have flagged the item. A few things to keep in mind. - Moderators can only moderate items that they have access to. - Group owners or managers can moderate items in their groups. - Members can only flag messages sent from sites that they’re a member and that allow members to flag content. - You can’t flag items from your internal org, the Salesforce mobile app, or in partner and customer portals. - Site members can only flag items if the Allow members to flag content preference is enabled. - If Allow members to flag content is disabled, only moderators can flag items and view flagged items. - To receive an email each time an item is flagged, select **Flags an item as inappropriate** on your Email Settings page. ## Flagged Posts and Comments Moderators can review, delete, and remove flags from posts and comments that members flag as inappropriate. Group owners or group managers can review and moderate flagged posts and comments in their groups. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
   
To moderate posts and comments:

Moderate Experience Cloud Site Feeds

AND

Manage Experiences OR Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Can Approve Feed Post and Comment

AND

Is a member of the Experience Cloud site

You can moderate flagged posts and comments from: - The Flagged Discussions tile on the Moderation tile in Experience Workspaces. - The Flagged feed in Chatter. If you’re using a Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Experience Cloud site, you can see a list of flagged posts and comments on the Chatter menu. To see the Flagged feed, enable the Allow members to flag content preference. ![Screenshot of Flagged feed filter in Chatter menu.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_moderate_flagged_feed.png) - A custom list. You can expose a list of flagged posts and comments using Connect REST API or ConnectApi in Apex. - The link to the post or comment from the notification email. - The Experience Cloud site. Moderators can remove flags or delete content in the feed. ## Flagged Private Messages Moderators can review, delete, and remove flags from private messages that members flag as inappropriate or as spam. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To moderate messages:

Moderate Experiences Chatter Messages

AND

Access Experience Management OR Manage Experiences OR Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the Experience Cloud site

To view the contents of a flagged message in reports: Moderate Experiences Chatter Messages
To remove flags or delete messages in the SOAP API: Modify All Data
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Ensure that your moderators are assigned the Moderate Experiences Chatter Messages permission, _not_ the Manage Chatter Messages permission. The Manage Chatter Messages permission allows users to see _all_ the messages in your entire Salesforce org. You can monitor and manage flagged messages from: - The Flagged Private Messages Insights report from the Moderation Overview page in Experience Workspaces. You can track trends and monitor spam. You can view flagged messages, who sent them, the date they were sent, and who flagged them. You can also remove flags from messages and delete messages. - A custom report. First, create a custom report type using Networks as the primary object and Network Audits as the secondary object. Create the report using your new custom report type and add a field filter for Audited Object Type set to equal Chatter Message. Use the API to delete flagged messages. - An API query of flagged messages. ## Flagged Direct Messages Members can flag messages in Experience Cloud sites built using the Customer Service template. Moderators can review, delete, and remove flags from direct messages that members flag as inappropriate or spam. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To view and moderate flagged direct messages:

Moderate Experiences Chatter Messages

AND

Moderate Chatter Messages and Direct Messages

AND

Moderate Experience Cloud Site Feeds

AND

Access Experience Management OR Manage Experiences OR Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the Experience Cloud site

To make all posts available to moderation, including direct messages, in Digital Experiences Settings under Moderation Rule Settings: Moderation applies to all feed posts regardless of where they’re visible
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Private messages and direct messages are separate features. Direct messages offer a richer set of features for private communication. Direct messages are based on Chatter and offer a rich text editor that supports inline images and attachments. With direct messages, you can start a message from a feed post. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Select **Moderation** and either click the Flagged Direct Messages tile or click **Moderate** | **Flagged Messages** to see the flagged items. 3. Review and act on the flagged messages. ## Flagged Files Moderators can review, delete, and remove flags from files that members flag as inappropriate or spam. Group owners or group managers can moderate files in their groups. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To view the file detail page, remove flags, and delete files: Moderate Experiences Files
To moderate files:

Moderate Experiences Files

AND

Access Experience Management OR Manage Experiences OR Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the Experience Cloud site

Members can flag files that they deem inappropriate because they contain sensitive information or offensive content. You can moderate flagged files from: - The Flagged Files Insights report on the Moderation Overview page in Experience Workspaces. With this report, you can see flagged files, who created them, who flagged them, and how many flags each file has. You can click a link to open a file and review its content. You can remove the flag or delete the file. You can also select multiple items at once. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note After you delete a file, it remains cached for up to 90 days. - A custom list. You can expose a list of flagged files using Connect REST API or ConnectApi in Apex. - From the Experience Cloud site. You can remove flags or delete content on the file detail page. To limit the size and types of files allowed in your site, go to **Administration** | **Preferences**. ## Flagged Discussions Moderators can review, delete, and remove flags from posts and comments on discussions, and freeze or communicate with the author of those posts, all from one place. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To view flagged items, remove flags, and delete posts or comments: Moderate Experience Cloud Site Feeds
To moderate posts and comments:

Moderate Experience Cloud Site Feeds

AND

Manage Experiences OR Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Can Approve Feed Post and Comment

AND

Is a member of the Experience Cloud site

Moderators can view an entire discussion in context, including all comments related to a post, and sort by the newest discussions or the oldest. To access a list of flagged discussions, go to **Experience Workspaces** | **Moderation** | **Flagged Discussions**. To open a discussion thread, click **View Discussion**. ![Flagged Discussion details](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_flagged_disc_details.png) To see how a post or comment was flagged and who flagged it, click a post or comment or select **View Flag Details**. You can remove the flag or delete the post or comment. ![Flagged Discussion View Flag Details](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_flagged_disc_context.png) You can see which authors have a history of flagged posts and how many times a moderator deleted their posts. You can also freeze the author and send them a message. ![Flagged Discussions Moderation History](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_flagged_disc_history.png) #### See Also - [Guidelines for Deleting Your Users’ Chatter Messages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_message_administering.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Report on Experience Cloud Sites with AppExchange Packages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reporting_dashboards_package.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Salesforce Communities Management packages give community managers an essential starter set of dashboards and reports to keep tabs on activity and engagement directly in Experience Workspaces.") - [_SOAP API Developer Guide_: ChatterMessage](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.api.meta/api/sforce_api_objects_chattermessage.htm) - [_Apex Developer Guide_: Moderate Chatter Private Messages with Triggers](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.apexcode.meta/apexcode/apex_chattermessage_triggers.htm) - [_Connect REST API Developer Guide_: Experience Cloud Sites Moderation Resources](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.chatterapi.meta/chatterapi/connect_resources_communities_moderation.htm) - [_Apex Reference Guide_: CommunityModeration Class](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.apexcode.meta/apexcode/apex_ConnectAPI_CommunityModeration_static_methods.htm#apex_ConnectAPI_CommunityModeration_static_methods) # Move Feed Items from One Public Group Feed to Another In Aura, the **Move** option on feed item dropdown menus offers a way to relocate feed items from one public group feed to another. Use Move to improve an item’s visibility or to place it in a more relevant context. For example, if a user posts a Sales poll in a Marketing feed by mistake, the poll can easily be moved to the right location. System Administrators, Community Managers, and Chatter Moderators can move posts, polls, and questions. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To move feed items from one public group feed to another
  • Is a System Administrator OR has the permission
  • Moderate Experience Cloud Site Feeds
  • AND is a member of the Experience Cloud site
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can’t move feed items into or out of public, broadcast-only groups. When you move an item: - Mentions are preserved. - Announcements become announcements in the target group. - Things that are included in or attached to the feed item stay included or attached. For example, moved items bring their answers, comments, replies, topics, bookmarks, attachments, and other related entities with them. If an answer is marked as best, that status is preserved. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To move a post that’s pinned, unpin it first. 1. Open the dropdown menu on the feed item to be moved, and select **Move**. 2. In the Move Feed Item to Another Public Group dialog, search for the group to move the item to. 3. In the search results, select the target group, and then click **Move**. The item, along with all of its related entities, is removed from the first public group and placed in the second. Users receive notifications about the moved feed item according to their preferences. So, assuming people have opted in to the related notification setting: - People who follow the target group are notified. - When the person who moved the feed item is also a follower of the target group, they’re notified. - People who are mentioned in the moved feed item are notified about the mention. - The moved item’s author is not notified. The author isn’t notified because, no matter their notification settings, a feed item’s author isn’t notified about their post actions. #### See Also - [Experience Cloud Site Moderation Strategies and Tools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderation_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Moderation allows you to empower members of your Experience Cloud site to monitor content and ensure that it’s appropriate and relevant. Set up rules to automate moderation and do the heavy lifting for you.") # Moving Documents to Salesforce Files As you make the move to Lightning Experience, you may have questions about the files you have stored in the Documents tab in Salesforce Classic. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
## Can I See the Files in the Documents Tab in Salesforce Classic in Lightning Experience? The Documents tab isn’t available in Lightning Experience, but your document files aren’t going away. In fact, some features continue to rely on files in your Documents tab, like email templates. Don’t delete these documents. Take this opportunity to add your working files and images as Salesforce Files so they’re usable in Lightning Experience. ## How Do I Work with My Documents in Lightning Experience? Lightning Experience uses Salesforce Files to manage and collaborate on files. Salesforce Files unifies various content types to streamline and improve your experience: they can be stored privately, shared to libraries and groups, and updated with version history. ## How Do I Move Files from the Documents Tab into Lightning Experience? While there isn’t a one-click solution, you do have some options once you identify the files in the Documents tab that you want to use in Lightning Experience and your communities. 1. Export documents in the weekly export, and then upload the documents into Salesforce Files. 2. Use a third-party data export tool from the AppExchange. 3. Use an API-based tool (Connect REST API supports uploading asset files). Salesforce Files are the best way to save, organize, and share files in Salesforce. Salesforce Files continue to see improvements, so move your documents to Salesforce Files now and start taking advantage of them. # Multilingual Sites Experience Builder lets you create different language versions of your site to serve separate international audiences. For example, let’s say that you have customers in France and Germany. You can deliver the same site experience to each in the language that’s appropriate for their region. ### Required Editions
Available in: Experience Builder sites accessed through Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and mobile devices, and is available in Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
When you create a multilingual site, you don’t have to create a separate site for each language. And there’s also no need to duplicate pages within the site for each language. Instead, Experience Builder lets you add translated content to the _properties_ of each component. Translating content through properties lets you maintain all languages within the site. After you choose which languages you want your site to support, an in-built language menu lets you switch between languages when editing component properties. Content editing is quick and easy because you never have to leave the page to change to another language. Alternatively, if you use a translation service, you can export site content as an .xml file and send it for translation. After you receive the edited file, simply import it back into your site to populate each page component with the translated content. You can also apply your own Google Cloud Translation API key to integrate Google Translate into your feeds. Give your site the ability to instantly translate posts, questions, polls, and their comments, answers, and replies. - **[Create a Multilingual Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Creating a multilingual site involves a few main steps. Define the languages that you want your site to support. Add translated content for each language. And enable site visitors to choose their preferred language. - **[Set the Default Language for Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_default.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The default language is the language that’s used in a site before a user has selected another language. By default, the default language is set to English (US). - **[Add Languages to Your Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_add.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the languages that you want your site to support. - **[Set Language Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you add Experience Builder sites languages, you can define separate settings for each language. - **[Edit Language Content on the Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_editing_about.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Builder provides its own language menu that you can use to switch between languages as you edit content on each page. Switch languages and provide spot translations, like fixing a typo. You can also use this method for full page translations instead of exporting and importing site content. - **[Export Language Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_export.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Export and prepare Experience Builder site content as one or multiple .xml files. Prepare the files for translation by creating nodes for specific languages. Then send the file to your translation service. - **[Import Translated Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After your translation service has completed the translations, import the translated .xml file into your Experience Builder site. - **[Delete a Language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_delete.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you delete a language, the translated content isn’t deleted—it’s just no longer visible. When you add the language back to the Experience Builder site, you can access the translated content again. - **[Best Practices and Considerations for Multilingual Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_best_practices.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep these practices and considerations in mind when you’re setting up a multilingual site. - **[Add a Translate Button to Feed Items in Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_translate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A translation setting in Experience Builder puts a Translate with Google menu on every feed item. Translations are offered through a Google Cloud Translation API key that you provide. #### See Also - [_Blog post_: Localization within Experience Cloud Sites](https://www.learnexperiencecloud.com/article/Localization-within-Experience-Cloud-Sites) - [Language Selector](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_language_picker.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add the Language Selector component to multilingual sites so guest users can select their preferred language on public site pages.") # Mute a Chatter Post Mute a Chatter post to stop receiving notifications about it. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
You can mute a feed post from the full feed on the Home and Chatter tabs. In a group, profile, or record feed, you can mute a post from its detail view. To navigate to a post’s detail view, click its date-and-time stamp. ![Date/time stamp on a post](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collab_post_datetime.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The Home tab is a feature in Salesforce Classic only. If your admin enabled email replies, you can also mute posts by replying to notification emails with the single word mute. To mute a post in a feed, select **Mute** from the post’s actions menu. To mute a post from its detail view: 1. Go to detail view in the feed by clicking the post’s date-and-time stamp, or, in an email notification, by clicking the **View/Comment** button. 2. From the post’s actions menu, select **Mute**. - In Salesforce Classic: - The post no longer appears in your feed on the Home and Chatter tabs. - You can use the Muted filter to view your muted posts. - In Lightning Experience and in Experience Builder sites that are based on the Customer Service (Napili) template: - The post stays in place. If you’re in the What I Follow Feed, however, the muted item disappears from the feed—though it continues to appear in its source feed. If you plan to refer to that item again, copy its detail-view URL. Save the URL some place safe to ensure you can get back to the item later. - In all of these environments: - You no longer get notifications for updates to that post. - If someone mentions you on a muted post, the post is automatically unmuted. It reappears in your feed and if you have email notifications enabled, you get a notification about the update. - If the post was originally posted to a group, profile, or record feed, it still appears on that feed. For example, someone posts to a group that you’re a member of. The post appears on the group feed and your news feed on the Home and Chatter tab. You can mute the post in your news feed, but the post remains visible in the group feed. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example Here’s how you mute a post from a post’s actions menu. ![Mute a Chatter post](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_feed_mute.png) In Salesforce Classic, to view all posts you muted, select the Muted filter. ![Muted post filter](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_feed_mute_filter.png) To see a muted post in Lightning Experience and in sites (Napili), go to the post’s original feed. # Navigate to Chatter Email Settings In your personal Chatter email settings, you can change your preferences for receiving email notifications and digests. On a group page, you can set your notification preferences for that group. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
- Click your avatar at the top of the page, and select Settings. Enter Chatter in the Quick Find box, then select **Chatter Email Settings** or **Email Notifications**—whichever one appears. - From any group page, click **Email Me...** | **Email Settings**. To receive Chatter email notifications and digests, your administrator must enable email notifications for your organization. When email notifications are enabled for your organization, you can go to your personal settings to select Receive emails to receive Chatter email. ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_warning.png) Warning Deselecting Receive emails prevents you from receiving all Chatter email notifications and all Chatter bell notifications within the app. To see bell notifications, email notifications must be turned on. #### See Also - [Chatter Email Digests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_email_digest.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Email digests conveniently summarize recent activity in Chatter so you don’t miss important discussions. You can choose to receive daily or weekly summaries of updates from your personal feed or any group’s feed.") - [Guidelines for Managing Your Personal Chatter Email Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_email_notify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Control the number of Chatter emails that you receive by choosing your most important feeds. And set the best frequency for personal and group digests.") # Navigation Menu The Navigation Menu component extends your site’s navigation beyond navigational topics. Navigation menu items can include Salesforce objects, topics, pages in your site, URLs to external sites, and menu labels. Menu labels are parent headings under which you can nest other menu items. You can also enable the App Launcher to make it easy for members to switch between their sites and their Salesforce org. When setting up the navigation menu, consider the following: - You can add up to 20 navigation menu items. Menu items that don’t fit on the first line of the navigation menu appear in a More overflow menu item. - If you want to map a navigational topic to a menu item, you must first set it up in Experience Management. - The Help Center and LWR templates (Build Your Own and Microsites) don’t include generic record pages. So if you create an object or global action type menu item that links to a Salesforce object, make sure that you also create the corresponding object pages. If you don't create the associated object pages, end users can’t see anything when they click the menu item. To create or modify navigation menu items: 1. Select the **Navigation Menu** component in the page you’re configuring. 2. To display the App Launcher in existing sites, clear the checkbox for **Hide App Launcher in header**. 3. To show an icon for Home instead of text, select **Replace Home text with icon**. 4. In the property editor, click **Navigation Menu**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note In the menu editor overlay, you can edit or delete existing menu items, or add new ones. 5. To add a menu item: 1. Click **Add Menu Item**. 2. Enter the name you want to use in the navigation menu for this item. 3. Select the type of item you’re navigating to. Options include: - Event—Events like log in, log out, and account switcher. - External URL—Links to a URL outside of your site. For example, https://salesforce.com. - Global Action—Links to a global action. For example, New Case. - Menu Label—Adds a parent heading for your navigation menu. Nest items underneath the menu label. - Navigational Topic—A dropdown with links to the navigational topics in your site. Navigational topics are set up in Experience Management. - Site Page—Links to a page inside your site using a relative URL. For example, /contactsupport. - Salesforce Object—Available objects include accounts, cases, campaigns, contracts, contacts, dashboards, groups, leads, opportunities, orders, price books, products, quotes, reports, tasks, work orders, and any custom objects. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Select this option to create a list view page for the selected object. This option is the easiest way to expose Salesforce record data in your site with minimum configuration. - System Link—Links to Experience Builder, Workspaces, and setup. 4. Complete the fields based on the type you selected. - If you selected Salesforce Object, select the default list view to show. - If you selected Site Page, use the dropdown to select the site page you want to link to. The URL field automatically populates the relative URL for the page based on your selection. - To add the Messages page to your navigation menu, replace the :recordId parameter with Home. - If you selected External URL, enter the fully qualified URL. To keep navigation within your site, select the Open link in the same tab checkbox. - Select **Publicly Available** if you want the navigation menu item to appear for guest users who aren’t members of the site. 6. To move an item, click ![Move icon for navigation menu items](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/nav_menu_move.png) and drag the item to where you want it to appear in the menu. Nest other menu items underneath a menu label by dragging them to the right under the menu label. 7. To delete a menu item, hover over or click the item and click ![Delete icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/nav_menu_delete.png). 8. To save your changes, click **Save Menu**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note For these changes to be visible to users, your site must be activated in Experience Workspaces and recent changes must be published. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Navigation Menu component: ![Navigation Menu component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/nav_menu.png) On a mobile device, your site navigation menu collapses to better fit your screen. Sample Navigation Menu component on a mobile device: ![Nav menu in header on mobile device](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/nav_menu_mobile.png) If your site hosts users who speak different languages, you can translate your navigation menu using the Translation Workbench. However, the fallback language setting doesn’t apply to the navigation menu. For information on using the Translation Workbench, see [Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.workbench.htm&type=5&language=en_US) in Salesforce Help. Make sure to publish your site after translating so the translations appear to your users. #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") - [Assign an Audience to a Component Variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_personalize_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use audiences to vary the content that users see within the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, or Tile Menu components. For example, show one navigation menu to your site members and a more abbreviated navigation menu to guest users. Or show different CMS content to internal employees and external partners.") # Nest Content Components in Your LWR Site Nest content components within layout components on your LWR site to showcase more content from your Salesforce CMS. Create eye-catching content displays by nesting components that use data binding. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize an LWR site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences

    OR

  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
1. In Experience Builder, navigate to a page that’s already populated with a layout component such as Banner or Tile. ![Experience Builder page containing a Banner component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_builder_nesting_banner.png) 2. To nest components, drag any content component, such as Image or Rich Content Editor, into the content region of the layout component (1). 3. In the component property panel for the nested component click **Select Content**. Or if you added an Image, click **Select Image from CMS** (2). ![Add an image from CMS to a nested component in a Banner component.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lwr_builder_nesting_banner_image.png) 4. Select the content to add from the list of published CMS content items, and save your changes. 5. Click the component fields and map them to elements of your CMS content. Adjust settings as needed. See data binding in action in the [Did You Know Series (English Only)](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/SUwcxSKrE2tNUXeBqtNWFG). #### See Also - [Add an Image from Salesforce CMS to Your LWR Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_data_binding_images.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add an image from Salesforce CMS to your site page or add to a component that's populated with CMS content.") # New Message Button The New Message Button lets site members start a direct message conversation from wherever you place the button. Add the New Message Button component to a site page and configure it in the Page Editor. 1. Select the **New Message Button** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | User ID | The ID of the recipient. The system attempts to detect and populate this value based on the page where the New Message Button is placed. | | Label | Enter a title for the component. The default text is Send Message. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample New Message Button component: ![New Message Button component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/direct_messages_new_message_button.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Objects Supported by Out-of-the-Box Components and Pages in Experience Builder Templates Check out the list of all the objects supported by out-of-the-box components and pages in Experience Builder templates. When we talk about supported objects in templates, we mean that you can use our out-of-the-box components on the object pages, as detailed here.API names are indicated in parentheses.
 
  • Headline
  • Record Banner
  • Record Detail
  • Record Information Tabs
  • Related Records
  • Navigation Menu
  • Object Home Page
  • Create Record Button
  • Create Record Form
Account (Account) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Activity History (ActivityHistory) checkmark    
Address (Address) checkmark    
Approval History (ProcessInstanceHistory) checkmark    
Approval Process Work Item (ProcessInstanceWorkItem) checkmark    
Approval Step (ProcessInstanceStep) checkmark    
Asset (Asset) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Asset Relationship (Asset Relationship) checkmark    
Assigned Resource (AssignedResource) checkmark    
Associated Location (AssociatedLocation) checkmark    
Calendar (Calendar) checkmark    
Campaign (Campaign) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Campaign Member (CampaignMember) checkmark checkmark  
Case (Case) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Channel Program (ChannelProgram) checkmark checkmark  
Channel Program Level (ChannelProgramLevel) checkmark checkmark  
Channel Program Member (ChannelProgramMember) checkmark    
Contact (Contact) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Contract (Contract) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Custom Objects checkmark checkmark checkmark
Dashboard (Dashboard) checkmark checkmark  
Email Message (EmailMessage) checkmark    
Event (Event) checkmark   checkmark
External Objects checkmark checkmark checkmark
Flow Orchestration Work Item (FlowOrchestrationWorkItem)   checkmark  
Group (CollaborationGroup) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Lead (Lead) checkmark checkmark checkmark
List Email (ListEmail) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Location (Location) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Maintenance Asset (MaintenanceAsset) checkmark    
Maintenance Plan (MaintenancePlan) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Note (Note and NoteAndAttachment) checkmark   checkmark
Open Activity (OpenActivity) checkmark    
Operating Hours (OperatingHours) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Opportunity (Opportunity) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Opportunity Contact Role (OpportunityContactRole) checkmark    
Opportunity Product (OpportunityLineItem) checkmark    
Opportunity Team Member (OpportunityTeamMember) checkmark    
Order (Order) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Partner Fund Allocation (PartnerFundAllocation) checkmark checkmark  
Partner Fund Claim (PartnerFundClaim) checkmark checkmark  
Partner Fund Request (PartnerFundRequest) checkmark checkmark  
Partner Marketing Budget (PartnerMarketingBudget) checkmark checkmark  
Price Book (Pricebook2) checkmark checkmark  
Price Book Entry (PricebookEntry) checkmark    
Product (Product2) checkmark checkmark  
Product Consumed (ProductConsumed) checkmark    
Product Item (ProductItem) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Product Item Transaction (ProductItemTransaction) checkmark    
Product Request (ProductRequest) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Product Request Line Item (ProductRequestLineItem) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Product Required (ProductRequired) checkmark    
Product Transfer (ProductTransfer) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Quote (Quote) checkmark checkmark  
Quote Line Item (QuoteLineItem) checkmark    
Report (Report) checkmark checkmark  
Resource Absence (ResourceAbsence) checkmark    
Resource Preference (ResourcePreference) checkmark    
Return Order (ReturnOrder) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Return Order Line Item (ReturnOrderLineItem) checkmark    
Service Appointment (ServiceAppointments) checkmark    
Service Contract (ServiceContract) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Service Contract Line Item (ServiceContractLineItem) checkmark    
Service Crew (ServiceCrew) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Service Crew Member (ServiceCrewMember) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Service Report (ServiceReport) checkmark    
Service Resource (ServiceResource) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Service Resource Capacity (ServiceResourceCapacity) checkmark    
Service Resource Skill (ServiceResourceSkill) checkmark    
Service Territory (ServiceTerritory) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Service Territory Location (ServiceTerritoryLocation) checkmark    
Service Territory Member (ServiceTerritoryMember) checkmark    
Shipment (Shipment) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Skill Requirement (SkillRequirement) checkmark    
Shared Contacts (AccountContactRelationship) checkmark    
Task (Task) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Time Sheet (TimeSheet) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Time Sheet Entry (TimeSheetEntry) checkmark    
Time Slot (TimeSlot) checkmark    
User (User) checkmark    
Work Order (WorkOrder) checkmark checkmark checkmark
Work Order Line Item (WorkOrderLineItem) checkmark    
Work Type (WorkType) checkmark checkmark checkmark
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To be searchable in Experience Cloud sites, objects must be [searchable in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/HTViewHelpDoc?id=search_fields_lex.htm&language=en_US) and supported in templates. # Orchestration Work Guide Use the Orchestration Work Guide component so credentialed site visitors can complete the work items that they’re assigned. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience.
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
  • OR
  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
To publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
  • OR
  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin or publisher in that site
To run a flow in an Experience Builder site Run Flows
1. Build an orchestration or flow approval process in Flow Builder with at least one step assigned to a credentialed site visitor. 2. Activate the flow. 3. Drag the Orchestration Work Guide component into position on an object detail page in your site. ![Orchestration Work Guide component in Components panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_flow_orchestration_work_guide_component.png) 4. Configure the component to affect how it appears to site visitors. ![Orchestration Work Guide component Properties panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_flow_orchestration_work_guide_component_properties.png) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important The Record ID is set automatically. Don’t change the field value. By default, the component shows a refreshed list of work items after a user completes a work item. To open the next work item from the same orchestration run instead, select **Automatically Open Next Work Item**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Changes you make don’t affect how the component appears in Experience Builder. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Orchestration Work Guide component. ![An Orchestration Work Guide component on an object detail page.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_flow_orchestration_work_guide_component_example.png) #### See Also - [_Automate Your Business Processes_: Flow Orchestration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.orchestrator_flow_orchestrator.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Organize Experience Cloud Sites with Topics Navigational, featured, and content topics are a fantastic way to organize information and content in an Experience Cloud site and boost SEO for your articles. Use topics to structure your site’s content or highlight key discussions. You can create topics or use the topics that organically emerge from site member posts. Choose navigational topics and subtopics to provide a consistent map of your site. Use featured topics to highlight current, popular conversations. Use content topics to organize your original content. In the site itself, member-created topics let users organize information for one another, creating a personalized experience that boosts site engagement. Any article with an assigned navigational, featured, or content topic is included in search results. Site members can keep up to date on topics by following them and, optionally, receiving email notifications for topics they follow. ![Get email notifications for topics you follow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/topic_community_email_notifications.png) When members choose Every Post, they get notifications when a post or question is added to the topic. They don’t get notifications when the hashtag topic is added to a comment, answer, or record feed. ## Navigational Topics On every page of a site, navigational topics are available from the Topics menu at the upper left. Site members can also see all the site’s navigational topics and subtopics in one place in the topic catalog. ![Navigational topics menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_topics_menu.png) When visitors choose a navigational topic, the banner image you selected for it appears at the top of the page. ![Navigational topic banner](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_navtopic_banner.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Properties on the Ask and Contact Support & Ask components let you block the selection of a new topic when a user asks a question. For more information, see [Ask Button](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_ask_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Ask Button component lets users click a button to ask a question that is then published to the site. Users must log in to ask questions and participate in discussions.") and [Contact Support & Ask Buttons](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_contact_support.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Contact Support & Ask Buttons component adds two buttons to the page. The Contact Support button lets users click a button to create a case. The Ask button lets members ask a question and publish it to the site. All members must be logged in to ask the site a question."). ## Featured Topics Featured topics are accessible from the body of your site home page. Thumbnail images you select for featured topics uniquely identify them. (These unique thumbnails appear only on the home page; at the top of all featured topic pages, the default banner image specified in Experience Builder appears.) ![Featured topics](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_feature_topic.png) ## Content Topics Content topics allow you to organize your original content around common themes. Enable topics that you’re already using for content, or create topics and enable them for content. After topics are enabled for content, assign them to your native content. ![Topics on content](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_topics_on_content.png) ## Member-Created Topics When posting questions, site members create topics by using hashtags in body text, or typing in the topic suggestions box. (In Setup, the “Assign Topics” and “Create Topics” permissions must be enabled for site users.) ![Member-created topic](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_member_topic.png) If any suggested topics are poor matches for the post, members can simply click to delete them. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Member-created topics can be accessed via search or highlighted as featured topics. ## Topic Metrics Site members can check how often a topic has been used in the past 60 days and how many followers it has. Find metrics on a topic’s detail page. With this information at their fingertips, site members know how current and popular a topic is. Admins can also use these metrics to highlight certain topics in their sites or consolidate similar topics based on usage. - **[Manage Topics in Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_all.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As the number of topics in an Experience Cloud site grows, curate them to improve usability. You can create, merge, rename, enable for content, and delete topics in one convenient location. - **[Automatically Assign Topics to Articles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_automatic_topic_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Transport all your hard work of organizing Salesforce Knowledge in your Experience Cloud site, and boost SEO for your Knowledge articles, by mapping topics to data categories. All articles published with a specific data category are tagged with the topics you specify. Articles added to the data category in the future are also tagged. All articles with assigned topics are included in search results. - **[Set Up Featured Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_featured.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Featured topics highlight current, popular conversations in your Experience Cloud site. Change them regularly to keep members up-to-date and engaged. - **[Set Up Navigational Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_navigational.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Structure your Experience Cloud site’s content and help your users find what they need with navigational topics. If your org uses data categories, community managers can link current Salesforce Knowledge articles associated with those categories to each navigational topic. If data categories aren’t enabled, administrators can add articles to each topic using Connect REST API. - **[Set Up Content Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_content.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Content topics organize your original content around common themes for your Experience Cloud site. - **[See Your Site’s Topics and Subtopics in One Place](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topic_catalog.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You’ve gone through the exhaustive task of adding topics and various levels of subtopics to your Experience Cloud site’s content. Now you want your site members to see all the organized topics in one place, so they can navigate to any subject their hearts desire. Fear not! They can see everything in your site’s topic catalog. - **[Add Topics to Articles or Remove Them](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_articles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Easily add multiple topics of any type to specific articles, or quickly remove them as your Experience Cloud site’s needs change. - **[Translate Topics Names and Descriptions for Experience Cloud Sites with International Audiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_translate_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Translation Workbench to translate topic names and descriptions in international Experience Cloud sites. # Override Default Pages in Your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Site For Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites, you can use company-branded Home and Service Not Available pages by overriding the standard pages in your site. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note These settings don’t apply to Experience Builder sites or Site.com sites. - [Use a Custom Home Page in Your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_custom_community_home.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Personalize the standard Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site home page with company branding by using a custom Visualforce or Site.com Studio page.") - [Use a Custom Service Unavailable Page in Your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_custom_sna_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "On rare occasions, if your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site isn’t available because of a service outage, Salesforce displays a generic Service Not Available page with Lightning Platform branding. You can replace this page with a custom company-branded static resource page for a personalized user experience for your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site members.") You can override other default pages in the Site Details settings for your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site. To do this, open Experience Workspaces. Under Administration, click **Pages** and then click **Go to Force.com**. For Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites, page selections in Administration automatically override any previously specified page selections in the Site Details settings. # Package and Distribute a Lightning Bolt Solution After you create a Lightning Bolt Solution, package the solution to distribute it to other users or orgs. You can upload the package to AppExchange to share or sell your solution. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
  • OR
  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
To publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
  • OR
  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin or publisher in that site
To create and upload packages: Create AppExchange Packages AND Upload AppExchange Packages
A package is a container for something as small as an individual component or as large as a set of related apps. Packages come in two forms—managed and unmanaged. We recommend using only managed packages to avoid naming conflicts with other packages in your customer’s org or your own. To create a managed package, use a Developer Edition org. 1. From Setup, enter Package in the Quick Find box, and then click **Package Manager**. 2. To package a Lightning Bolt Solution, select **Lightning Bolt Solution** as the component type, and select your solution. To package a standalone Experience Builder template, theme, or page, select **Lightning Community Template**, **Lightning Community Theme**, or **Lightning Page**, respectively, as the component type to add. All supported dependencies are included. ![Adding a Lightning Bolt Solution to a package](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_export2.png) 3. Upload the package. Then distribute it on AppExchange, or share the link privately with your clients, customers, or partners. #### See Also - [Create a Lightning Bolt Solution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_export_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Have at least one Experience Builder template, custom app, or flow category that you want to distribute? Then you’re ready to create a Lightning Bolt Solution. With Lightning Bolt Solutions, you can combine custom Lightning apps, business process flows, and Experience Builder templates and pages in easy-to-build, distributable packages.") - [_First-Generation Managed Packaging Developer Guide_: First-Generation Managed Packages](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.pkg1_dev.meta/pkg1_dev/sharing_apps.htm) - [_First-Generation Managed Packaging Developer Guide_: Create and Upload a Managed Package](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.pkg1_dev.meta/pkg1_dev/uploading_packages.htm) - [_ISVforce Guide_: Publish Your Solution on the AppExchange](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.packagingGuide.meta/packagingGuide/packaging_distributing.htm) # Page Properties and Types in Experience Builder Use the Page Action menu to view and edit the properties of the pages that make up your Experience Builder site. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
## Page Types Experience Builder sites comprise of standard, object, content, and login pages. - Standard pages are default pages are the default pages that come with the Experience Builder template or that you create. - Object pages display object properties, such as the object’s record detail, list, and related list pages. Generic object pages display record information for a Salesforce object when custom object pages don’t exist. - Content pages are pages you create to display your Salesforce CMS content. - Login pages are default pages that come with the Experience Builder template. ## Page Properties To edit a page’s properties, open the Pages menu in Experience Builder. Then, click ![Open Page Properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_properties_ellipsis.png) to open the Page Action menu and select **Page Settings**. The properties available to each page depend on the selected page type. ![Page Properties in Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_properties.png) ![page properties menu in Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_properties2.png)
Page property Description
Name The name of the page as it appears in Experience Builder. Editable only in the standard pages that you create.
URL

The URL of the page. Editable only in custom standard pages.

Manage the URLs for each page after creating your page hierarchy. Anytime you move pages around and alter the page hierarchy in your site, the subpage URLs automatically update to reflect your changes. Some pages can’t be moved. Review Considerations for Page Hierarchy and URL Conflicts in Experience Builder.

The site URL for each page reflects the structure you set up in Experience Builder when you share the live site with your users.

page hierarchy and change URL button
page hierarchy in URL of live site
API Name A unique name you define when you create a page.
Page Access

Specifies the level of access to the page. When you enable public access, guest users can view asset files on public pages by default. More restrictive profile settings can prevent certain users from viewing this page, even if you choose Public. Page access for some pages, like My Account, is automatically set to require users to log in and can't be modified.

When you enable public access, the preference Let guest users view asset files and CMS content available to the site in Administration | Preferences is automatically enabled.

Title

The SEO title of the page. Shown in search engine results, the browser’s tab or window title, and bookmarks.

For data-based pages, such as object and content pages, the title is set dynamically.

Description

The SEO description of the page. Shown in search engine results to help people decide if this page is the one they want.

For data-based pages, such as object and content pages, the description is set dynamically.

Head Tags

Provides the opportunity to enter specific meta tags for the page to assist search engine optimization for your site.

For data-based pages, such as object and content pages, you can enter expressions to access values from the record associated with the page, such as the name, title, and value of specific fields.

Content Layout Defines the content regions of your page, such as a two-column layout.
Theme Layout By selecting Override the default theme layout for this page, you can choose to apply a different theme layout for the page.
#### See Also - [Change the Theme Layout of Your Experience Cloud Site’s Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_theme_apply.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A theme layout defines the top-level regions of your page, such as the header and footer, navigation, search, and the user profile menu. A theme layout component categorizes the pages in your site that share a theme layout.") - [Change the Content Layout in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_change_layout.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Quickly change the look of your Experience Builder site pages by switching to a different content layout. You can even create your own custom content layout components in the Developer Console and import them to use in your site.") - [SEO for Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Search engine optimization (SEO) ensures that your public Experience Builder site is visible to search engines. SEO helps customers, partners, and visitors find your content via online search.") - [_Experience Cloud Developer Guide_: Create Custom Content Layout Components for Experience Builder](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/components_config_for_builder_layouts.htm) # Page Refresh The Page Refresh component automatically refreshes the page for your customers. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
The Page Refresh component is built into the body of the Too Many Requests page, so there’s no need to manually add it to the page. The Too Many Requests page uses the same theme layout header and theme layout footer as the Service Not Available page. So if you move the Page Refresh component to the header or footer on the Too Many Requests page, the component is also added to the Service Not Available page. ![Page Refresh in Components panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_refresh.png) # Partner Central—Build Lightning Partner Sites Quickly set up a custom, branded space where you can invite your partners and work on driving channel sales and marketing together. The Lightning Partner Central solution is optimized for channel managers and partners to collaborate on and track sales data. A simplified setup combined with rich branding and a responsive UI lets you quickly build an exclusive online experience for your partners. ![Partner Central community](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/partner_central_multi_view.png) Partner Central comes predesigned with partner sales workflows in mind so you can build and grow your partner network and bring CRM to your partners in a shared space: - Use the Lead Inbox component to configure [lead distribution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lead_distribution_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Automatically pass on leads acquired from your web site, marketing campaigns, or referral programs using lead distribution. Partner Central lets you share a common pool of leads with your channel partners on a partner site using the lead inbox.") - Configure [deal registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_deal_reg_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Deal registration programs involve resellers registering deals with their vendor. Vendors in turn provide extra margins to the reseller for providing early pipeline visibility for these deals and keeping out competitors. Once a deal is registered, other resellers or your direct sales team can’t compete for the registered deal.") and allow partners to submit qualified leads to beat competition - Share training materials, sales collateral, and other resources - Provide [market development funds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_market_dev_funds_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Drive demand for your products and provide incentives to partner users by offering market development funds as part of your channel marketing program. Create marketing budgets, allocate marketing funds or co-op (accrued) funds to channel partners, streamline fund requests, and process fund claims using Market Development Fund (MDF) features. Channel account managers can get a full audit of MDF activity, including fund requests and claims approval.") to drive deals and incentivize partners - Map reports and dashboards of your choice to track deal closure, lead activity - Organize channel partners into [programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_channel_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Channel programs help channel managers organize multiple-channel sales organizations. Managers can create programs for different types of partner users, like Resellers, Value Added Resellers (VARs), Distributors, and Managed Service Providers (MSPs). They can also organize partner users based on geography or level of expertise.") and [levels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_program_level_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use channel programs and levels to organize and manage channel partners. Within each program, you can group partners into levels, such as bronze, silver, and gold, and promote them based on performance. Use sharing groups, audience targeting, and sharing settings to manage access to resources based on program or level.") to provide them with different experiences and resources based on their rank and region - Evaluate and promote partner users based on their performance with [scorecards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_scorecard.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Channel account managers can measure partner users’ performances and establish benchmarks for their channel programs using partner scorecards. You can customize partner scorecards to display any report summary results that your channel account manager or executive team wants to see. Add multiple scorecards to track more than one category. Partner scorecards are available in Lightning Bolt Solutions.") that track them against KPIs - Share marketing [campaigns](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_campaigns_marketplace_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With Campaign Marketplace, you can provide the structure and guidance necessary for partners to successfully execute campaigns. Channel marketers can create and share marketing campaigns, guidelines, and assets with partners. They can also customize the look and feel of the marketplace and highlight information that is important to partners. Partners can then choose which campaigns work best for them. This feature is available in Experience Builder sites and Lightning Bolt Solutions.") and [brand assets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_partner_branding.htm&type=5&language=en_US) to provide the structure and guidance necessary for partners to successfully execute campaigns. - Configure Google Analytics to monitor site activity Get started with this handy recipe of [setup tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lightning_partner_central_setup_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Partner Central is designed with partner sales workflows in mind and comes with components and pages that you can use directly or customize easily.") to create your own site with Partner Central. # Path (Experience Builder Site Component) On object detail pages in Experience Builder sites, use the Path component to indicate and mark the path through a business process. You can add the Path component to Experience Builder site object detail pages for the following objects: - Account - Asset - Campaign - Case - Contract - Lead - Opportunity - Order - Partner Fund Allocations - Partner Fund Claims - Partner Fund Requests - Partner Marketing Budgets - Product Request - Product Request Line Item - Product Service Campaign - Product Service Campaign Item - Service Appointment - Service Contract - Work Order - Work Order Line Item - Custom objects For an overview of setting up Path in Salesforce, see [Guide Users with Path](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=path_overview.htm&language=en_US). The Path component is intended for a wide-column layout. Add it to columns that are at least 50% wide, though full columns are best. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To make paths available on mobile devices, configure a custom path for mobile. In the mobile app, Path supports leads and opportunities only. 1. Set up a [sales process in your org](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/modules/admin_intro_opptys_leads/units/admin_intro_opptys_leads_opportunities). If you’re creating a path for service appointments, work orders, or work order line items, you can skip this step. 2. Set up the path in the Setup menu. 1. From Setup, enter Path in the Quick Find box, then select **Path Settings**. 2. Click **Enable**, and then click **New Path** to create a path. 3. [Create object pages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=community_builder_create_page.htm&language=en_US) in Experience Builder (for any object that supports Path). 4. Drag the **Path** component onto the detail page that you’re configuring. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Path component: ![Sales Path component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_sales_path.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Paused Flows Add the Paused Flows component to let your Experience Builder site members view all the paused flows they own, resume them at a more convenient time without losing their work, or delete them. When setting up a flow in Salesforce Setup, you must choose pause points in order to allow site users to pause and resume flows. To pause a flow, your site members must have the **Run Flows** permission. For example, your financial company has a flow to help folks apply for a credit card. Your customer gets stuck on one of the steps (what _was_ my address 12 years ago?). Rather than lose the previous screens of information, the customer can press **Pause** to find the needed information. Or, your customer pauses a step and needs help with continuing with the forms. The customer can contact your company, and a service agent can continue the flow for them. In **Setup** | **Process Automation Settings**, select **Let users pause flows**. When you set up a pause point in your flows, you can use the Paused Flows component in Experience Builder. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note While we call them flows here at Salesforce, your company could call them processes, forms, steps, or wizards. Use a naming convention that your customers understand for the title field. 1. Select the **Paused Flows** component in the page you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Title | Add a title that is easily understood by your site members. Default text is **Paused Flows**. | | Show number of flows in title | Select to show the number of paused flows in the title, in parentheses. | | Maximum Paused Flows Displayed | The maximum number of flows shown in the component is 10. | | Show pause reason | Shows the reason the flow was paused. | | Show pause time | Displays the time the flow was paused. | | Show pause step | Displays the name of the step that the flow was paused. | | Show owner | Displays the flow’s owner. | | Delete button | Displays a delete button to delete the flow. | | Resume Button Label | The button text to resume a flow. Default text is **Resume**. | | Button Alignment | Choose the button alignment. Default is **Center**. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Paused Flows component: ![Paused flows component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/paused_flows.png) # People in Your Organization Update your personal profile, and view the profiles of other people in your organization. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[People Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_people_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The People tab and the People list on the Chatter tab show a list of recently viewed users in your organization. If your org has 25 people or fewer, these lists show everyone. - **[Chatter Profile Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_profile_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize your personal Chatter profile. Add a photo and information about yourself so others can learn more about you. - **[Chatter Profile Best Practices and Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_profile_best_practices.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Tips and limitations for using Chatter profiles. - **[Set an Out of Office Message in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_profile_out_of_office.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Taking some time off? It’s easy to set up an out-of-office message in Chatter. Schedule your message, and decide what it says. Out of Office is available only in Lightning Experience. - **[Use the Following and Followers Lists in Salesforce Classic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_followers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** View the Following and Followers lists on your profile to see who, what, and how many items you're following in Chatter, and who’s following you. - **[People Recommendations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_people_recommendations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter recommends people for you to follow based on similar interests. - **[Give Thanks to Your Coworkers in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.chatter_thanks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Recognize your coworkers with badges and post your thanks directly to their Chatter feed. - **[Files Owned Lists on Profile Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_profile_authored_files.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Files Owned list on a person’s profile page shows the files that the person most recently attached to a Chatter post. - **[Chatter Activity and Influence](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_activity_influence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check your Chatter influence, and see your personal Chatter activity statistics. Check such statistics as how many posts you’ve made and how many likes or upvotes you’ve received. - **[Invite People to Join Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_invite.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If enabled by your administrator, you can invite people to use Chatter who also work for your company but don't have Salesforce licenses. - **[Moderate Chatter Free Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_moderate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A moderator is a Chatter user with some additional privileges. # People Overview The People tab and the People list on the Chatter tab show a list of recently viewed users in your organization. If your org has 25 people or fewer, these lists show everyone. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
- To view someone’s profile, click their name or photo. - In profile view, if you want to see a person's updates in the Chatter feed, click **Follow**. In Lightning Experience, after you click **Follow**, click the plus sign next to What I Follow. In both environments, you can't follow [customers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_external_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter customers are people outside your company's email domains. Customers can see only the groups they're invited to. They can interact only with members of those groups. Customers can’t see any Salesforce information."). - In profile view, to stop seeing a person's updates in the Chatter feed, click **Following**. In Lightning Experience, after you click **Following**, click the check mark next to What I Follow. - To sort the list, click a column header, for example, the **Full Name** column sorts alphabetically by first name. By default, the list is sorted alphabetically, in ascending order. - Search for users by entering a first or last name in the search box at the top of the page. The list automatically filters based on what you type. - As of Spring ’19 external users appear in the user lookup for people who use Lightning Experience. - Your organization’s size determines what you see in the people list. For example, in the largest organizations, we don’t display any users until you start searching for a person’s name. We count all Salesforce user license types when calculating the approximate number of users, including internal users, Experience Cloud site users, and Chatter users. | Approximate number of users | Defaults to view | All People filter defaults to | | --- | --- | --- | | 25 or fewer | All People | Everyone in the organization | | 26 to 25,000 | Recently Viewed People | People whose profiles you recently viewed | | More than 25,000 | Recently Viewed People | No one until you start searching | - [Invite people](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_invite.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If enabled by your administrator, you can invite people to use Chatter who also work for your company but don't have Salesforce licenses.") to join your Chatter network. Invited users can view profiles, post on their feed, and join groups, but they can't see your Salesforce data or records. - View the people that Chatter recommends that you follow. Click **More** in the Recommended People section to view all of your recommendations. If no recommendations appear, then you're already following all the recommended people. Chatter, Profile, People, Groups, and Files tabs are available by default in the Chatter app. If you don’t see Chatter, you can open it using the App Launcher at the top-right corner of any page. If your administrator has added these tabs to other apps, you see the tabs in those apps unless you previously customized your display. In that case, you can add the tabs to those apps. Not every Lightning Experience feature is in the Salesforce mobile app. Find out what’s different between desktop and mobile for People and Profiles. When using People to view profiles, you can’t: - Edit profile information in Salesforce for iOS. - Upload a profile photo using the Good Access™ secure mobile browser. - Hover on user profile photos to quickly see user information. - Use custom profiles. - Filter the Following related list on your profile. #### See Also - [Moderate Chatter Free Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_moderate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A moderator is a Chatter user with some additional privileges.") # People Recommendations Chatter recommends people for you to follow based on similar interests. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
Chatter recommends people who: - Follow the same people as you. - Are in your management hierarchy, such as your manager, people who report to your manager, and people who report to you. Salesforce uses the Manager field on your personal information page to determine these recommendations. If this field is blank, Chatter doesn't recommend people based on your management hierarchy. Only your Salesforce administrator can edit the Manager field. - Are popular, which means they have many followers. - Are new to Chatter. - Are interested in the same records as you. For example, someone who has looked at or edited an account that you've recently viewed. - Are followed by the people who follow the same people as you. For example, let’s say you follow Madison Rigsby. Many people who follow Madison also follow Suzanne Powell, so Chatter recommends Suzanne to you. To see an expanded list of your recommendations, click **More** in the Recommendations section. If no recommendations appear, then you're already following all the recommended people. #### See Also - [Chatter Profile Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_profile_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize your personal Chatter profile. Add a photo and information about yourself so others can learn more about you.") # Perform Actions on a File in a Chatter Feed You can perform actions on files in feeds. In Lightning Experience, actions are supported for posts but not for comments. You can perform the these actions on files in feeds. In Lightning Experience, these actions are supported for posts but not for comments. - Preview—Click the file thumbnail or click **More Actions** | **Preview** next to the file. - Download—Click **More Actions** | **![Download file](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_download.png) Download** next to the file. - Upload new version—Click **More Actions** | **Upload New Version** next to the file. - View file detail page—Click the file name or **More Actions** | **View File Details** next to the file. - Follow—To receive updates about the file in the Chatter feed, click **Follow** next to a file. To stop receiving updates about the file, click ![Stop following](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png). - Share—Click **More Actions** | **File Sharing Settings** next to the file to share the file with people, groups, or via link. To learn who can perform which actions on a file, see [Who Can See My File?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_settings_perms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your files in Salesforce can be private to you, privately shared, or visible to your entire company. Learn how to identify a file’s sharing settings and how to change them."). #### See Also - [Preview Files and Edit File Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_previewing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Preview a file to view it without downloading. View and update key details about a file from the File Details page.") - [Upload a New Version of a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_versioning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Replace an old version of a file by uploading a new version.") - [View Where a File Is Shared](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_shared_with.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out who can see a file and their level of access. From the File Detail page, you can access a full list of every person or object the file is shared with.") # Performance and Scale of Your Experience Cloud Site With Experience Cloud, you can build a wide range of business-to-consumer (B2C) and business-to-business (B2B) applications. Examples include help forums, self-service portals, partner and channel websites, commerce and ticketing stores, and vaccination and appointment sites. Many of these sites require high user volume and they experience high traffic. We extensively test every standard template, component, and product for performance and scale, but standard capabilities can be extended to build highly customized experiences. Customizations, high user volume, and high traffic, and more can impact a site’s performance. Salesforce offers a range of features focused on supporting performance and scale regardless of your site’s requirements. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
For some sites, we suggest enabling performance and scale optimizations to ensure that your site meets your performance needs. Work with your Salesforce representative to identify whether your site requires further configurations. ## Why You Should Evaluate Your Site Site patterns determine which performance optimization tools are most beneficial. Do site visitors view or create content? Does your site support a high volume of users or a high amount of traffic? Does your site use many roles? Salesforce has created performance tools to address the impact of these different site patterns and more. For examples of Experience Cloud site types and the traffic and transaction patterns most likely to affect performance, see [Which Performance Tools Do I Need Based on My Experience Cloud Site?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_site_use_cases.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With Experience Cloud, you can build a wide range of business-to-consumer (B2C) and business-to-business (B2B) applications that have different performance and scale considerations and optimizations. This section outlines common scenarios, likely performance issues, and the best tools to optimize performance.") ## What Should You Keep in Mind? Consider using performance tools if your site has [these attributes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_perf_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Large-scale sites are more than just sites that support a large volume of users. Transaction loads, and heavy traffic patterns also impact the scale of a site. Large-scale sites can benefit from performance and scale optimization tools. Your account representative can advise you on which performance and scale optimizations to enable."). - You expect a large number of site users - You expect a high amount of traffic or transactions - Your site requires many roles - You’re customizing the standard Salesforce experience - You’re using additional services at scale ## How Can You Improve Performance and Scale? This table outlines the issues most likely to affect site performance and scale and shows the tools to use.
Optimization Tools Content Delivery Network (CDN) for Digital Experiences Experience Cloud License Type Account Role Optimization (ARO) High-Volume Creation Using Micro-Batching Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) Apex Caching Progressive rendering Page Optimizer Scale Testing
Performance Impact
High volume of users  
true
true
           
High traffic
true
   
true
true
true
true
true
 
Heavy transaction load      
true
       
true
Many roles  
true
true
           
Heavy Customizations        
true
 
true
true
true
Additional Services used at scale                
true
## Find Out More ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Serve Your Experience Cloud Site with the Salesforce Content Delivery Network (CDN)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.domain_mgmt_salesforce_cdn.htm&type=5&language=en_US) ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Experience Cloud User Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_license_types_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US) ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Account Role Optimization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_partners_optimize_roles.htm&type=5&language=en_US) ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [High-Volume Creation Using Micro-Batching](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_microbatching.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "High-volume sites often involve heavier than usual registration traffic and record creation. You can process more self-registrations and record creations per second when you process them in small batches, called micro-batches, instead of one at a time. After they’re submitted, the requests are collected into batches, and the batches are processed asynchronously. Processing transactions using micro-batching improves performance and keeps your site moving during heavy traffic spikes.") ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [LWR Sites for Experience Cloud](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/intro.htm) ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Progressive Rendering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_prioritization_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Progressive Rendering prioritizes the display order of your page components. With proper planning and testing, it can improve display time performance and polish your site’s experience to better engage customers.") ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Page Optimizer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_optimizer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Salesforce Page Optimizer analyzes your site and identifies issues that impact performance. Use the information to refine your design and improve site performance for your members. The Page Optimizer is a free plug-in available from the Chrome Web Store. Download and install the plug-in as you would any Chrome extension.") ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Apex Caching on Salesforce CDN for Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_perf_apex_caching.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Personalization for Self-Service Ground every self-Service interaction in a unified view of customer data to reduce effort and provide relevant context. Self-Service success depends on minimizing the time customers spend clarifying intent or restating information. Personalization for Self-Service uses the Unified Customer Profile in Data 360 to provide a context framework. This framework combines profile data, historical activity, and derived insights. With this framework, you can: - Reduce Friction: Fill forms automatically in Unified Catalog and maintain consistent journeys between portals and agents. - Drive Proactivity: Surface critical updates, such as product recalls or expiring subscriptions, through banners. - Streamline Handoffs: Ensure agents have immediate visibility into recent customer site activity and pending tasks. - **[Set Up Event Ingestion for Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.set_up_event_ingestion_for_experience_cloud_sites.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Capture customer interaction data from your sites and flow it into Data Cloud to power personalized greetings and task recommendations. - **[Add the Pending Task Banner to an Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.add_the_pending_task_banner_to_an_experience_cloud_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Surface urgent tasks and recommended actions to authenticated users by adding the Pending Task banner component to your Experience Cloud site. - **[Ground Agentforce Service Agent in Customer Context](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.ground_agentforce_service_agent_in_customer_context.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure your agent to initialize conversations using the user identity, recent activity, and pending tasks. - **[Configure Data Graphs and Timeline Wrapper for Personalization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.configure_data_graphs_and_timeline_wrapper_for_personalization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Organize ingested events into Data Graphs and activate the Timeline Wrapper to surface chronological customer activity on your site. # Personalization with Audience Targeting in Aura Sites Keep your users engaged by offering personalized, relevant content that’s customized for a particular audience. To create an audience, you assemble a set of criteria that defines a user segment. You can then tailor a single site to meet the needs of multiple user segments. For example, you can present the same site with a different look and feel for each audience or show different pages, components, or data to different audiences. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important An audience varies what your site visitors can see, but don’t use audiences to keep sensitive data private. Instead, use standard security methods. To create an audience, you can choose from among several criteria types, such as user related or record related. You can assign audiences to page variations, branding sets, or components. For certain components, you also can assign an audience to a component variation to personalize the content that different audiences see within the component. - Page variations—Apply audiences to show users different versions of the same page, such as the home page or a record detail page. - Branding sets—Show the same content to everyone, with a different look and feel for each audience. - Components—All users see the same page, but what’s on the page differs among user segments. - Component variations—For the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, and Tile Menu components, all users see the components, but the content in the components differs by user segment. For example, your company offers products that differ between North America and Europe. Rather than create an individual site for each region, you can create region-specific versions of the same site. Then you can define audiences based on geolocation and apply each audience to a regional site version. Your audience in North America sees one version, and your audience in Europe sees the other version. ![North American and European page variations](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_regional_page_variations.png) - **[Considerations for Audience Targeting in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_use_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Audiences are a great help when you want to target specific user segments with relevant site content. As you work with audiences, there are some things to consider. - **[Create an Audience for an Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_visibilty_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You define an audience by selecting criteria and the conditions under which the criteria apply. After you create an audience, you can assign it to a page variation, branding set, or component. You also can assign an audience to a component variation to personalize the content that different user segments see in the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, and Tile Menu components. - **[Assign an Audience to a Page Variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audiences_page_variations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can show different pages to different audiences. - **[Assign an Audience to a Branding Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audiences_branding_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can tailor your branding to different audiences. For example, you can show one look and feel to your customers and another to your partners. - **[Assign an Audience to a Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_component.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you assign an audience to a page component, all users see the same page, but the components that are visible on the page differ among user segments. For example, you have a page that’s visible to site members and guest users, and you want your members to be able to post questions and comments. You can add the Feed Publisher component to the page and assign this component to an audience for site members only. Your members can see the component, and guest users can’t. - **[Assign an Audience to a Component Variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_personalize_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use audiences to vary the content that users see within the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, or Tile Menu components. For example, show one navigation menu to your site members and a more abbreviated navigation menu to guest users. Or show different CMS content to internal employees and external partners. - **[Prioritize Audiences in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audiences_prioritize_audiences.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When site visitors meet the criteria for more than one audience, you can prioritize which page variation, branding set, navigation menu, or CMS collection they see. To prioritize audiences, at least two audiences must be assigned to the page variation, branding set, or component variation. # Pin Posts in an Aura Site Pin a post to give more exposure to your most critical information. In your site’s group and topics feeds, an authorized user can pin up to three posts to the top of the feed. A pinned post stays in place until an authorized user unpins it. Pinning a post is only available in Aura sites. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To assign post pinning permission to a user in a site:

Enable Chatter

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

To pin a post in a site:

Create and Set Up Experiences

OR

Pin Posts in Feeds

When all permissions are in place, the **Pin** option appears on a feed item’s overflow menu in your site’s group and topics feeds. The **Pin** option doesn’t appear on a feed item’s overflow menu in the item’s detail view. To enable post pinning for your org, go to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings**, and select **Allow post pinning**. After post pinning is enabled, admins, community managers, and group owners and managers can pin posts. Admins can also assign the Pin Posts in Feeds permission to users through user profiles and permission sets. When you pin a post, it appears twice in the feed: where it was posted and in its pinned position at the top of the feed. You can pin only the posts that were added directly to the feed. You can’t pin posts that were added through an @mention. Pinned posts are similar to announcements, with these differences. - Announcements are available only to group feeds. Post pinning is available to group and topics feeds. - Announcements follow a linear timeline: you post it, and you let it expire. Pinned posts are more flexible: you can pin posts from the past or the present. - An announcement expires on a set date. A pinned post stays pinned until an authorized user unpins it. - Only group owners and managers and users with the “Modify All Data” permission can post and delete group announcements. Admins can choose who is authorized to pin posts. - You can post only one announcement per group feed. Authorized users can pin up to three posts to the top of a feed. - You can add style to a pinned post with the rich text editor. # Plan a Mobile Strategy for Your Site Over half of customer interactions happen over mobile devices. So having a mobile-responsive site isn’t an option anymore, it’s a necessity. Before you create a mobile site, ask these questions to help solidify your mobile strategy. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## What Should You Keep in Mind? Use these questions as a starting point to help you focus. - What is the main goal of your mobile app? - Who is the main audience for your app? - What micro moments are you creating for your customers and partners? - What resources does your new mobile app require? - Do you need just a mobile site, or do you want a mobile app distributed through the App Store or Google Play? - Do you want to enrich your mobile experience with native capabilities, such as push notifications and biometric login? - How well can your site work on slow network connections? - How can you adjust your site design to account for smaller screens on mobile devices? ## Find Out More ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.branded_apps_commun_app.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Plan and Prepare for Your Experience Cloud Implementation Experience Cloud comprises flexible, powerful features that you can combine in multiple ways to deliver the digital experience you need, whether it’s a portal, help center, or mobile app. And although it can be tempting to dive right into building, we recommend taking time to think about the combination of features you need to deliver a productive, successful site. We can’t cover every planning aspect, but these topics describe some key areas to consider, research, and incorporate as you develop your overall plan. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
![Plan your site](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/plan.png) - **[Define Your Site Vision and Purpose](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_vision.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Cloud makes it easy to build sites that deliver customer-first experiences—fast! But, before you dive head-first into building your Experience Cloud site, pause for a moment to envision the larger picture of what you want your site to accomplish. What is your website’s primary purpose? - **[Learn About Experience Cloud Frameworks and Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_frameworks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Select a framework and template as part of your site planning. The choices you make at the beginning of your site creation process have long-term downstream implications. In particular, consider your business objectives, your technical know-how, and the costs associated with each. - **[Learn More About Experience Cloud Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_licenses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Licenses are a gateway to authenticated access to your Experience Cloud sites. So one of the most important steps when planning a site is selecting the right licenses for your use case. These licenses grant access to Experience Cloud sites to customers and partners who can't otherwise log in to your company's Salesforce org: External Identity, External Apps, Customer Community, Customer Community Plus, Partner Community, and Channel Account. A Salesforce account executive can help you understand the difference between the licenses, and help you decide the best ones for your use case. Before that, let’s answer some basic questions first. - **[Who Does What in Experience Cloud?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_who_does_what.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Cloud sites are typically not developed, designed, and maintained by a single person because these tasks require different skills. Depending on the size of your company and scale of your site, you could have some people handle several roles or a dedicated person for each role. - **[Define Your Site Structure, Layout, and Design](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_design.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you consider your site’s vision and purpose and you’re familiar with frameworks and templates, you can plan your site’s structure, layout, and design. - **[Map the Customer Journey and Drive Engagement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_engagement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You defined a site vision that aligns your site with your company’s purpose. Now you want to design a site experience that encourages users to visit your site and interact with your content. But to promote customer engagement, you must first understand your customers’ needs and create compelling content in to meet those needs. - **[Plan Your Site’s Content Management Strategy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_content_strategy.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you’re like most organizations, you have a large amount of content, and you need a plan to create, organize, and manage it. Get the right content in front of the right people at the right time with a solid content strategy. Explore the various Salesforce offerings that provide content management solutions for different scenarios. - **[Plan a Mobile Strategy for Your Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_mobile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Over half of customer interactions happen over mobile devices. So having a mobile-responsive site isn’t an option anymore, it’s a necessity. Before you create a mobile site, ask these questions to help solidify your mobile strategy. - **[Performance and Scale of Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_performance_scale.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With Experience Cloud, you can build a wide range of business-to-consumer (B2C) and business-to-business (B2B) applications. Examples include help forums, self-service portals, partner and channel websites, commerce and ticketing stores, and vaccination and appointment sites. Many of these sites require high user volume and they experience high traffic. We extensively test every standard template, component, and product for performance and scale, but standard capabilities can be extended to build highly customized experiences. Customizations, high user volume, and high traffic, and more can impact a site’s performance. Salesforce offers a range of features focused on supporting performance and scale regardless of your site’s requirements. - **[Develop a Security Plan for Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce has various security settings and permissions you can use when you’re building a site on the Experience Cloud platform. Before you start creating a site, put together a security plan that can help you during the implementation. - **[Prepare to Promote Your Site and Measure Its Success](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_rollout_adoption.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your Experience Cloud site gives you a web presence and helps you connect your business to the people who need it—both inside and outside your company. Generate excitement, awareness, and traffic for your site with a promotional plan, and consider how to measure adoption of your site when it’s live. #### See Also - [_Video_: Implementation Best Practices](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/oJqv5SGyDQYFAPp2EnJmiN?) # Plan Your Site’s Content Management Strategy If you’re like most organizations, you have a large amount of content, and you need a plan to create, organize, and manage it. Get the right content in front of the right people at the right time with a solid content strategy. Explore the various Salesforce offerings that provide content management solutions for different scenarios. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## Why Is This Important? If you create content, you need a content strategy, or a plan for the types of content that you want to create for your site. Define the business goals you want your content to achieve and identify the content that best meets these goals. Also think about how you manage your content: how you organize content assets, when and where to publish, and when to refresh or replace your content. Being strategic about the content you create and deploy lets you extend the reach of your content, refines content workflows, and improves customer interactions and experiences. ## What Should You Keep in Mind? Let’s take a quick look at what to consider when developing a strategy, and the Salesforce tools that can help you manage your content. Develop a Content Strategy - Plan—Identify your audience and goals. - What do you want your content to do? For example, drive sales, build brand awareness, or promote engagement. - How does your audience engage with content? What formats do they like, for what content? - Audit—Understand where you are today. Take note of the resources you have and what’s working (or not) right now. - What content do you have for different stages of the customer journey? - What content can you reuse? - Where are there gaps? - Is existing content easy to find? - What content management system (CMS) are you using? Is there just one, or do you need to coordinate multiple systems? ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note As you plan and audit, you’re likely to find that your content falls into categories such as: - Customer-facing content: Blog posts, social media posts, and so on - Digital assets for branding and web design - Help and support documentation, knowledge articles - Internal documents: Sales decks, spec sheets, market research - Map—Define customer journeys. Consider how you sequence information for maximum customer benefit. - How is your content linked together? - What is the customer experience like across various channels? - Build—Build the right content and define your processes. - What types of content do you need? - How can you plan for content reuse? - How are you organizing content and managing versions? - How do you store resources and assets? - How often do you plan on updating your content? - Activate—Distribute content to the right audiences and channels. - How can you put your content where your audience is? - Do you have an editorial calendar? A social media calendar? - How can you drive people to the content that you’re creating? - How do you manage content lifecycles? - Measure—You know what they say: if you want to manage it, measure it. - What metrics can you use for different content types? For example, visitor counts, likes, search traffic, or downloads. - Which content is turning into leads, sales, or closed deals? - What reports are you running, at what cadence? - How can you continue to optimize over time? ## Salesforce Content Management Tools Here are some Salesforce tools that can help you with a variety of content scenarios. - Salesforce CMS—Our hybrid CMS system lets you author and maintain all your experience-related content inside Salesforce, then serve that content anywhere, inside or outside Salesforce. Your teams can create content in a centralized location and distribute it either to a Salesforce-powered experience (built with Experience Builder or Commerce Page Designer) or to another system. - Create, manage, and reuse articles, news, blogs, banners, and images from a central location. - Use our headless APIs to deliver content to a third-party site, experience, or mobile app. - Organize content into workspaces and provide control over who can create and access content. - Create collections and use topics to organize content. - Support multiple languages. - CMS Connect—Using a CMS other than Salesforce? No problem! Embed content from an external CMS into your Experience Builder site for branding consistency, reuse of material, and ease of maintenance. - Salesforce Files and Libraries—Salesforce Files and Libraries provide a system for organizing, sharing, and controlling access to content within Salesforce. When you share Salesforce Files with related records, you can keep your documents with your CRM data and carry access control over, too. - Store files privately or share with records, groups, or users. - Set access permissions to reflect the record’s access settings and configure security settings for file upload and download. - Use content deliveries and public links to share documents with people outside your organization. - See and organize document versions. - Use Libraries to organize your files into folders and control access to libraries. - Store headers and logo images inside Salesforce as asset files, which can be used for components or Experience Cloud sites. - Salesforce Knowledge—A knowledge base is a collection of articles with information about your products and services. This self-service model improves customer satisfaction while deflecting cases, lowering costs, and increasing support agent productivity. - Write, edit, publish, and archive articles from one system. - Provide information to internal, partner, customer, or public audiences. - Control access to articles based on permissions. - Provide support articles in multiple languages. - Includes version control and version comparison. - Set up approval processes for quality control. - Classify and find articles using topics and data categories. - Extend functionality with Apex code. ## Find Out More Developing a robust strategic content strategy can be a fairly involved process, but we have a couple of excellent guides to help you through it. ![Trailhead](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_trailhead.png) [Content Strategy Development](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/content-strategy-development) ![Trailhead](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_trailhead.png) [Content Operations and Management](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/content-operations-and-management) ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Salesforce CMS](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.community_managed_content_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [CMS Developer Guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.cms_dev.meta/cms_dev/cms_developer_guide.htm) ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Create, Share, and Organize Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_parent.htm&type=5&language=en_US) ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Salesforce Knowledge](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.knowledge_whatis.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Polls A poll contains a question and a list of possible replies. Poll your users and let them vote on their favorite response. People with access to the feed where the poll is posted cast their votes by selecting a reply. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Polls are a great way to gather opinions. For example, you are in charge of planning an annual sales meeting. You want to find out when most people are available to attend the meeting. Instead of emailing everybody in the sales organization, you could create a poll in the Sales Chatter group. The poll could list possible dates and ask for votes on the date that works best. When you create a poll, anybody with access to the feed or the poll can vote on the poll. So when you post a poll, consider who you want to participate. For example, if you post a poll in a private group, only the members of that group can see the poll and vote. Keep the following in mind about polls: - When you create a poll, you can add up to ten choices. - When voting on a poll, you can select only one choice, but you can change that choice. - Polls are anonymous. You can see how many people voted, but you can’t see who voted. - To see the latest poll result and the number of votes that were cast, click **Refresh**. - You can’t repost a poll. - You can mention someone and include hashtag topics in the poll question. - You and others can add topics to your poll question after posting. - The email notification options that you enabled in your Chatter Email Settings apply to polls just as they do to posts. For example, if you get a notification whenever someone comments on one of your posts, you’re also notified when someone comments on your poll. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The poll result doesn’t always add up to 100 percent due to rounding. For example, if a poll has three choices and each gets one vote, the result adds up to 99 percent. When you run a global or feed search, you don't see results for poll questions or options. Polls aren’t indexed for searches. - **[Create a Poll](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_polls_creating.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create polls to gather people’s opinions. - **[Vote on a Poll](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_polls_voting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Cast your vote on a poll. #### See Also - [Like Posts and Comments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_like.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Like posts or comments to show your approval and receive email notifications if others comment on that post. You receive notifications only if you’ve selected to in your personal Chatter settings.") # Post an Announcement to a Chatter Group Post group announcements to highlight important messages on the group page. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note By default, groups use the global publisher layout. If the Announcement action doesn’t appear in groups, ask your administrator to override the global publisher layout. Then have them add the Announcement action to a custom group publisher layout. Only group owners, group managers, and users with the “Modify All Data” permission can post and delete group announcements. 1. On the group page, click **Announcement** in the publisher. 2. Enter your announcement. The character limit is 5,000, and you can include links or mention users and groups. Because of space constraints, approximately 137 characters of the announcement appears on the group page. Users can click **More** to see the rest of the message. 3. Specify an expiration date for the announcement. 4. Click **Share**. A group announcement appears until 11:59 p.m. on the selected expiration date, unless a new group announcement replaces it. In the group feed, users can discuss, like, and post comments on announcements. When you post an announcement, group members receive an email notification, just like they do for other posts, depending on their notification settings. Deleting the feed post deletes the announcement. From Salesforce Classic, you can remove the announcement from the group page without deleting the feed post. Click ![Feed drop-down arrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_feed_dropdown_arrow.png) in the top corner of the announcement, and then select the option to dismiss the banner. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Rich text is not currently supported in Chatter Announcements. Even if the user edits the related feed post to add rich text, the new edits aren’t applied to the announcement card. **Send Email Notifications for Announcements** For group announcements, group owners and managers can send email notifications to all group members, despite the members’ notification settings. Previously, only group members who opted to be notified for each post in the group were notified. Group owners and managers require the “Send announcement emails” permission to use the send email feature. To notify all group members, select **Email all group members** next to the announcement expiration date. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The **Email all group members** feature is available only to groups with fewer than 10,000 members. # Post Drawings with Salesforce Chatter You can post drawings made with the Salesforce Chatter canvas directly on to Chatter posts on touch enabled Windows 10 devices. Create a new Chatter post and tap **Draw** to launch the canvas. Once inside the canvas, use the ruler feature for straight lines, or draw with a stylus or finger. Once your drawing is complete tap **Attach**. You can share more context for your drawing in the Chatter post, or tag coworkers and groups to share the drawing with them specifically. Tap **Post** to share the drawing in your Chatter feed or with a group depending on the audience of your post. # Post Snapshots of Dashboard Widgets to Chatter Post a snapshot of a dashboard widget to a Chatter feed to help other users follow changes in the data. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group (View Only), Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To view dashboards: Run Reports
In Salesforce Classic, widgets are called components. A snapshot is a static image of a dashboard widget at a specific point in time posted to a Chatter feed. - Post a widget snapshot to its dashboard feed to share information with everyone following the dashboard. For example, post a snapshot of a regional sales chart to let your team know that sales are down in the Midwest. - To spark comment or action from a user or group, post a widget snapshot in the user or group feed. Each snapshot has a Viewing As label, which is the name of the running user whose dashboard widget you’re viewing. You can also post snapshots of filtered widgets (except Visualforce or s-control widgets). When viewers click the snapshot title in the feed, they’re taken to your filtered view of the dashboard if the filters are still valid. If the filters aren’t valid, they see the unfiltered dashboard. If you don't see feeds, ask your administrator to enable feed tracking for dashboards. 1. In Salesforce Classic: To display the menu, hover over a component. To clear the hover menu, click an empty part of the screen. In Lightning Experience: Expand a widget by clicking **![Expand widget icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/rd_button_expand.png)**, and then click **![Post to Chatter icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/rd_dashboard_icon_share.png)**. 2. In Salesforce Classic: Choose where you want your snapshot to appear. To show it in a dashboard, click **Post Snapshot to Dashboard Feed**. To show it to a user or group, click **Post Snapshot to User or Group Feed**. In Lightning Experience: Compose a post. Mention people and groups, use rich text formatting, and scroll down to see past posts to the dashboard feed. In Lightning Experience, you always post to the dashboard feed. 3. Write a comment in the text box. In Salesforce Classic, click **OK**. In Lightning Experience, click **Share**. If you’re posting a filtered widget, consider mentioning in your post that the widget is filtered. The snapshot and comment immediately post to Chatter. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note In Salesforce Classic, Snapshot images display in feeds for 4 months. After 4 months, only the comments remain. In Lightning Experience, dashboard widget images shared on feeds behave like other images attached to a feed post, and aren’t subject to a 4-month display window. # Prebuilt Experience Builder Themes Prebuilt themes come with every template. They let you style your site with clicks, not code. Apply color, fonts, and images to your site to match your design or brand. Match your colors precisely by uploading your own logo to generate a custom color scheme. Create branding sets to change colors, fonts, and logos quickly for different audiences and needs. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
Prebuilt themes give you a head start with your site that you can customize further. After you create a site and select your theme, use Experience Builder’s Theme panel to adjust the experience. ![Theme panel in Experience Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme_panel_menu.png) To select a theme, click **Change Theme**. ![Change Themes theme list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme_changethemelist.png) Depending on the theme that you select, you can use Experience Builder for various tasks. - Choose colors for text, actions, links, navigation, and borders. - Specify font family, style, weight, and case, and add a custom font. - Change header and page background color. - Choose a custom Search component. - Choose a custom User Profile component. - Use custom CSS to apply your own styles. - Generate a custom color scheme from an image of your logo or company pallet. - Use a branding set to quickly target different audiences and needs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can apply branding sets on an audience basis to change colors, images, and fonts. For information on how to target content or specific layouts to a specific group, see [Personalization with Audience Targeting in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_visibilty_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep your users engaged by offering personalized, relevant content that’s customized for a particular audience. To create an audience, you assemble a set of criteria that defines a user segment. You can then tailor a single site to meet the needs of multiple user segments. For example, you can present the same site with a different look and feel for each audience or show different pages, components, or data to different audiences."). #### See Also - [Use Branding Sets in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_brandsets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Branding sets let you automatically change the look of your sites for different audiences and shift quickly between brands or presentations for campaigns or events.") - [Personalization with Audience Targeting in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_visibilty_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep your users engaged by offering personalized, relevant content that’s customized for a particular audience. To create an audience, you assemble a set of criteria that defines a user segment. You can then tailor a single site to meet the needs of multiple user segments. For example, you can present the same site with a different look and feel for each audience or show different pages, components, or data to different audiences.") - [Change the Theme of Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_theme_change.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experiment and find the theme that works best for your needs, without changing your content.") - [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Builder lets you easily style your site, create and customize pages, add drag-and-drop components, and deliver personalized experiences to different audiences. Choose a template to quickly start your site, and then style the pages to match your company’s branding.") - [Preview Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_preview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before going live, you can preview your Experience Builder site to see how it looks in a desktop browser window or on a mobile device.") - [Find and Create Asset Files in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_find_create_assets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Upload and select images for your header, logo, rich content editor, and custom components using the file selector in Experience Builder. After they're uploaded, files are converted to packageable asset files and stored in your org asset library for easy reference and retrieval.") # Prep Your Org for a Partner Site You’ve bought your partner licenses and have partner functionality enabled in your org. You’re ready to collaborate with your partners and start closing deals together. Before you actually create a partner site, work with your channel manager to create partner accounts and users, assign partner roles, and manage permissions. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To view accounts: Read on accounts
To create accounts: Create on accounts
To disable a partner account: Manage External Users
To create, edit, disable, or deactivate partner users: Manage External Users
To create contacts: Create on contacts
To view contacts: Read on contacts
To create, edit, and delete profiles: Manage Profiles and Permission Sets
To set field-level security:

Manage Profiles and Permission Sets

AND

Customize Application

To set sharing rules: Manage Sharing
At the very outset, [set up the channel manager role](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_partner_community_channel_manager.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Channel managers are internal users who manage your partner accounts and partner users. Before setting up a partner site, identify an internal user to play the channel manager role.") and assign it to the internal users in your org who manage channel sales and work with partner organizations. Channel managers with the necessary permissions can perform the next steps. 1. Each partner account is [automatically assigned three partner roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_partner_roles_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip We strongly recommend that you [reduce the number of roles to one](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Manage settings that apply to all sites built on Experience Cloud.") role: Partner User. To avoid role proliferation, it’s better to use one role and [grant super user access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_partner_super_user_access.htm&type=5&language=en_US) to users who need access to other users’ data. 2. In Setup, type Sharing Settings in the Quick Find/Search box and edit the organization-wide defaults. Set the Default External Access setting to **Private** for all the objects you want to share with your partners. 3. Clone and customize the [Partner User profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.exp_cloud_partner_create_considerations.htm&type=5&language=en_US) per your site’s needs and, if necessary, grant extra permissions with a permission set. 4. [Create a partner account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_partner_community_create_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add each company with which you partner to Salesforce as a business account. We recommend that channel managers create partner accounts so they can view all partner data.") for each partner organization you work with. Partner accounts store details about partner users and their sales data. 5. Also, plan how you want to use [sharing rules to share data with partners](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.security_about_sharing_rules.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 6. Add users from each partner company as contacts on the respective partner account. 7. Convert the contacts on the partner account to [partner users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_create_external_users.htm&type=5&language=en_US) and assign a partner license, profile, and role. 8. Optionally, enable and [grant super user access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_partner_super_user_access.htm&type=5&language=en_US) to partner users if you want them to view data owned by other users in their role hierarchy. 9. If you work with many partner users or don’t want to deal with user management for a partner organization, consider [delegating user administration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_DPUA.htm&type=5&language=en_US). With that, you’re ready to set up a site and assign partner users to it. #### See Also - [Default Organization-Wide Access Levels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.security_sharing_owd_default_settings.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Control Which Users Experience Cloud Site Users Can See](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_user_sharing.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Prepare to Promote Your Site and Measure Its Success Your Experience Cloud site gives you a web presence and helps you connect your business to the people who need it—both inside and outside your company. Generate excitement, awareness, and traffic for your site with a promotional plan, and consider how to measure adoption of your site when it’s live. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## Why Is This Important? You want to create a good site that creates value for your business and your customers. Start by having a solid plan for site rollout and measuring what success looks like for your company. First [define your site purpose and vision](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_vision.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Cloud makes it easy to build sites that deliver customer-first experiences—fast! But, before you dive head-first into building your Experience Cloud site, pause for a moment to envision the larger picture of what you want your site to accomplish. What is your website’s primary purpose?") and [map the customer journey and drive engagement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_engagement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You defined a site vision that aligns your site with your company’s purpose. Now you want to design a site experience that encourages users to visit your site and interact with your content. But to promote customer engagement, you must first understand your customers’ needs and create compelling content in to meet those needs."). ## What Should You Keep in Mind? All your hard work to plan and build your site culminates with a site launch! When you plan for a successful site rollout, consider how to: - Promote your site internally and externally. - Measure adoption success based on key performance indicators and business goals. Promote: Get the word out to your internal audience and external customers when your site goes live or has new offerings. A promotional plan helps you gather your thoughts, tie back to your site vision and purpose, and prepare for communicating the growth of your site over time. Create a promotional and marketing plan for every phase of growth. - Generate excitement and promote your site internally by letting employees know that you’re launching. - Use existing promotional channels such as other websites, social media, Slack, YouTube, and email to communicate with customers. - Consider creating a 2–3 minute video to generate excitement and direct traffic to your site. Measure: As part of your engagement and adoption planning, think about how you can measure success. - Choose success metrics that are important to your site’s purpose and tie them to your overall business goals and key performance indicators. - Think about which business processes are important and what you’re looking to improve. - Consider how to measure your return on investment with Salesforce or third-party analytics tools. Define how to measure success for your business and use case. Here are some examples of use cases. - For a self-service help portal, success could include an increase in site traffic along with a decrease in customer service calls and support costs. - For an account management portal, measure how many new customers sign up and how many customers you retain within a time. - Consider asking your site visitors to periodically take a customer satisfaction (CSAT) survey. Ask them directly how they feel about your site, and evaluate the responses and scores over time to identify trends. Check out this video to learn more about promoting your site, and measuring its success. ## Find Out More ![Video](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_video.png) [Show Me How: Best Practices for Adoption in Your Sites (English Only)](https://www.learnexperiencecloud.com/s/news/show-me-how-best-practices-for-adoption-in-your-sites-MCF46SJXSNS5HEXE5VMMENEMC3YM) # Prevent Others from Sharing and Unsharing a File You can prevent others from sharing and unsharing a file that you own. Preventing others from sharing or unsharing doesn’t affect existing shares. 1. On **Files** home, find the file you want. 2. Go to **Sharing Settings** or **Share File** for the file. (Or, if the file is in a library, open the Content Detail page from the **Libraries** tab.) 3. Select the checkbox **Prevent others from sharing and unsharing**. 4. Click **Save**. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example Let’s say I post a file in Chatter, and share it with a private group. I’m okay with members of the group having access to the file, but I don’t want them to share it further. I can prevent sharing and unsharing so that the existing shares remain but new ones can’t be added, except by me or an admin. You can also prevent others from sharing and unsharing a file in the API by using the SharingOption field on ContentVersion and other objects. # Prevent Users from Attaching Salesforce Files Use permission sets to prevent users from attaching Salesforce Files to posts, records, and other objects. ### Required Editions
Available in: All Editions
Permission sets available in: Contact Manager, Professional, Group, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Database.com Editions
1. From Setup, enter User Profiles in the Quick Find box, and select **Profiles**. 2. Click **Edit** next to the user profile you want to change. 3. In the Administrative Permissions section, enable or disable the **Select Files from Salesforce** checkbox, and click **Save**. Another option is to apply the permission in a permission set. Users who have this permission disabled are still able to upload files from their local drive. To apply the permission in a permission set, from Setup enter Permission Sets in the QuickFind box, then select **Permission Sets**. Edit the permission set and apply the Select Files from Salesforce permission. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The Enable Chatter permission on a user's profile can affect how files are uploaded. If your custom component doesn't use lightning-file-upload or lightning:fileUpload, users can still upload files even if Enable Chatter is turned off. You need to add your own rules to block file uploads if you don't want users to upload files. If your custom component uses lightning-file-upload or lightning:fileUpload, users cannot upload files if Enable Chatter is turned off. You should make sure the Enable Chatter permission is set correctly to control who can upload files. # Preview Files and Edit File Details Preview a file to view it without downloading. View and update key details about a file from the File Details page. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional,Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
## Preview a File Clicking a file from Files Home or in a related list opens the File Previewer, which lets you view the file without downloading it. Use the arrow keys in the previewer to see each page, zoom in or out, or change the preview width and screen size. Files can be previewed by the file owner and anyone with access to the file. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - Only the first 500 pages of very large files are rendered in the preview. If your org has migrated to Hyperforce, only the first 100 pages may be rendered in the preview. - You can’t preview files larger than 25 MB or 500 pages, unknown file types, password-protected files, and copy-protected PDFs. - For files that you can’t preview, the **Preview** option isn’t available on feeds or list views, and files appear as generic file type icons in the feed. - Some Microsoft Office 2007 features don’t display correctly in previews. - Some extended characters, such as ellipsis, and formatting can appear inconsistently in previews. - If a file can be previewed, but a preview doesn’t exist, contact your Salesforce admin to request to regenerate the preview. - In the file previewer, the heading overlay menu disappears after 5 seconds of inactivity. Move the mouse or press tab to make the menu reappear. - Previews for CMS images and files aren’t visible in Firefox when the browser security is set to standard. This occurs because the standard Firefox security policy blocks third-party domain cookies. To preview CMS content set the security policy to custom and allow cookies. For the complete list of file types that Salesforce File Preview supports, see [Supported File Preview Formats](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.chatterapi.meta/chatterapi/connect_resources_files_preview_format.htm). ## View and Edit File Details in Lightning Experience Click View File Details from a file preview or from the actions menu on Files home, in the feed, or on a record. From the file details page, you can see key details about the file, including size, extension, and file owner. View or update the file title and description. View information about sharing and file versions. To edit file details - On a file detail page, click **Edit Details** - Edit the title and description - Click **Save** File owners, collaborators, and users with the “Modify All Data” permission can edit file details. Admins can customize the page layout of the Files detail page. If you have a custom layout, you see it displays when you view or edit file details from the actions arrow on Files home, or when you edit file details from a file preview. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If you click Edit File Details from the files related list on a record, the default file detail page displays instead of the custom layout. To see the custom file detail page layout on a file attached to a record, click the file title to open the file preview, and then click **Edit File Details**. ## View and Edit File Details in Salesforce Classic - See if the file is private, privately shared, or shared with your company. - Click **File Sharing Settings** to share a file with people, groups, or via file link; or to see the file’s Sharing Settings. - Click **Make private** on the Sharing Settings dialog box to remove the file and file link, if applicable, from everywhere that it's been shared. Or click **Restrict access** to remove the file from everywhere that it's been shared except the library (only for files that originated in a Salesforce CRM Content library). . By default, anyone who can see a file can share it. Only owners and users with the “Modify all Data” permission can make a file private or restrict access. ## Take Action - Click **Download** to open or save the file. - Click **Upload New Version** to update the file with a newer version. - Click **Edit Details** to edit the name or description of the file. - Click **Delete** to delete the file. - Read the file description. Add a description by clicking **Add Description**, or click the edit icon to edit the description. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note After you delete a file, it can remain cached for up to 90 days. Anyone who can see a file can download it. Only file owners, collaborators, and users with the “Modify all Data” permission can upload a new version of a file or edit file details. Only file owners and users with the “Modify All Data” permission can delete files. ## Get More Information - See who owns the file and when it was last modified. - See the file's current version number and click **Show all versions** to see the file's version history. - Click **Show file report** to see data about the file, such as how many times the file has been downloaded, shared, liked, and commented on. **Show file report** is visible only to users with the “Run Reports” and “View Reports in Public Folders” permissions. - Click **Follow** to follow the file, or click X to stop following the file. - See who's following the file. - See who the file is shared with. - Click **Go to Content Detail Page** to see the content detail page of that file. Some actions performed on files that originated in Salesforce CRM Content must be taken on the file's content detail page rather than the file detail page. - See other files that people who viewed this file also viewed. #### See Also - [View File Version History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_history.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The file detail page and the Version History list give you access to lots of useful file actions and information.") - [View Where a File Is Shared](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_shared_with.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out who can see a file and their level of access. From the File Detail page, you can access a full list of every person or object the file is shared with.") # Preview Your Experience Builder Site Before going live, you can preview your Experience Builder site to see how it looks in a desktop browser window or on a mobile device. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
- To preview the site in a browser window, click **Preview** on the toolbar. ![Preview Button in Experience Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_preview_button.png) - In Preview mode, to see the site in its own browser tab as: - A logged-in customer would see it, click **![View as](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/preview_guestuser1.png)** | **Authenticated User**. - An unauthenticated visitor would see it, click **![View as](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/preview_guestuser1.png)** | **Guest User**. As long as your site includes one public page (such as the Home page), you can use the **Guest User** option. ![Preview as guest user](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/preview_guestuser.png) - To preview the site on different devices, use the options in the ![View Mode](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_designer_devices.png) menu. ![View modes](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_designer_view_modes.png) #### See Also - [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Builder lets you easily style your site, create and customize pages, add drag-and-drop components, and deliver personalized experiences to different audiences. Choose a template to quickly start your site, and then style the pages to match your company’s branding.") - [Publish Your Experience Builder Site Customizations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_publish.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Publish your Aura or LWR site in Experience Builder to make your site updates and component customization updates available to your site members.") # Prioritize Audiences in Aura Sites When site visitors meet the criteria for more than one audience, you can prioritize which page variation, branding set, navigation menu, or CMS collection they see. To prioritize audiences, at least two audiences must be assigned to the page variation, branding set, or component variation. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
## Prioritize Audiences for Page Variations Let’s say you have a page variation for all North American site members and one specifically for Canadian members. Canadian site members meet the criteria for two audiences, the broader North American audience and the more narrowly targeted Canadian audience. To prioritize which variation of the page is visible to Canadian members, adjust the order of the pages in the Page Variations panel. 1. In Experience Builder, open the Pages menu in the top toolbar, hover over the page that you want to work with, and click the Page Actions icon. 2. Click **Page Settings**, and open the Page Variations tab. 3. Drag the page variation that you want to show to the more narrowly targeted audience (1) into the first position on the priority list (2). In this case, the Home (Canada) page, assigned to your Members Canada audience, is in the first position on the priority list. ![Page variations panel showing prioritized audiences](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/audiences_prioritize_page_variations.png) 4. Drag the page for the more broadly defined audience into the second position on the priority list. In this case, the Home (North America) page, assigned to your Members North America audience, is in the second position on the priority list. In this example, all site members in Canada now see the Canadian home page because it has first priority. Everyone else in the Members North America audience sees the North American home page. Site members who don’t fall into any audience see the default home page (3). ## Prioritize Audiences for Branding Sets To vary the style and appearance of your site for different audiences, the process is similar. Let’s see how that works for the Canadian and North American audiences. 1. In Experience Builder, open the Theme panel, click the down arrow next to the panel title, and select **Manage Branding Sets**. 2. In the Branding Sets panel, click the list view option (1). ![Branding Sets panel, showing prioritized audiences](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/audiences_prioritize_branding_sets.png) 3. Drag the branding set that you want to show to the more narrowly targeted audience (2) into the first position on the priority list (3). In this case, the Canadian branding set, assigned to your Members Canada audience, is in the first position on the priority list. 4. Drag the branding set for the more broadly defined audience into the second position on the priority list. In this case, the North American branding set, assigned to your Members North America audience, is in the second position on the priority list. In this example, all site members in Canada now see the look and feel of your site that you designed specifically for your Canadian audience. Everyone else in the Members North America audience sees the site branding that you designed for the broader North American audience. Site members who don’t fall into any audience see the look and feel that you designed for your default branding set (4). ## Prioritize Audiences for Component Variations To prioritize audiences for component variations, the process is the same for the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, and Tile Menu components. Let’s say that you have separate navigation menus for regular and VIP site members. Your VIP site members meet the criteria for two audiences, the broader Site Members audience and the more narrowly targeted VIP Members audience. To ensure that your VIP members see their special navigation menu, prioritize the variations for the menu component. 1. In Experience Builder, click the component. 2. In the component’s properties panel, click **Personalize**. 3. Drag the more narrowly targeted component variation (1), into the first position on the priority list (2). In this case, the VIP Members audience is in the first position on the priority list. ![Assign audiences window for a menu component, showing prioritized audiences](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/audiences_prioritize_nav_menus.png) 4. Drag the more broadly targeted component variation into the second position on the priority list. In this case, the Site Members audience is in the second position on the priority list. In this example, VIP site members now see their special navigation menu because that component variation has first priority. Users who visit your site and don’t fall into any specified audience see the default navigation menu (3). # Prioritize Component Display Order with Progressive Rendering Quickly set the display order of components on your Experience Builder pages with Progressive Rendering. By carefully optimizing how your pages display, you can enhance the experience of your site and better engage your community. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To enable Progressive Rendering and apply settings: Create and Set Up Communities
Before you activate this feature, read [Component Prioritization Guidelines](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_prioritization_guidelines.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Here are some guidelines for how to get the most out of Progressive Rendering."). Determine the need and value of using Progressive Rendering for your site. Choose the components you want to load first and which can load later. Evaluating components is a combination of determining their computational load and their design and user impact. Good decisions require research, analysis, testing, and retesting. Consider working with other disciplines, such as usability experts, to ensure that you’re evaluating all potential impacts. 1. In the Experience Builder Advanced settings, enable Progressive Rendering. ![Progressive rendering settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_progrend_control.png) 2. Select a component on the page. 3. From the actions menu (1) in the Property Editor, select **Assign Display Priority** (2). ![Component menu with progressive rendering selection](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_progrend_component_menu.png) 4. Choose the appropriate priority, and click **Assign**. There are three priority choices. Component Priority Levels | Priority | Description | | --- | --- | | Highest | Highest priority components are displayed first. This priority is recommended for key content that you want to display first or content that appears above the fold on longer pages. | | High | High priority components are displayed after all components in the Highest group. | | Neutral | Neutral priority components are displayed after all other components that have a higher priority. By default, all components begin with a Neutral priority. | After you select a priority, a color border and icon around the component indicates the priority that is assigned. An icon also appears by the component in the Page Structure panel. In addition, a banner is added to the page to remind you that there are components with priorities set on the page. To change the priority later, select **Edit Display Priority** in the component menu, or click either of the priority icons displayed in the page structure menu or the component border. ![Progressive rendering page structure menu indicator](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communites_builder_progrend_pagestructure.png) ![Progressive rendering component border indicator](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communites_builder_progrend_compborder.png) To remove the priority entirely, select **Unassign Display Priority** in the component menu. 5. Test your results, and ensure that the experience is what you expect. If you add new components or change the priorities of existing components, re-examine the priority choices on your page to ensure that they’re still appropriate and working as intended. #### See Also - [Progressive Rendering Guidelines](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_prioritization_guidelines.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Here are some guidelines for how to get the most out of Progressive Rendering.") - [Salesforce Community Page Optimizer analyzer](https://salesforce.quip.com/eXICApPXVIaN) # Private Messages in Chatter Use Chatter messages for secure private conversations with other Chatter users. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Chatter Messages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_message_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Salesforce Classic, send a question to another person privately, or communicate with a limited set of people. Messaging is useful when a discussion isn't relevant to everyone you work with. Messages also notify people when a file is shared with them. - **[Search for Chatter Messages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_message_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the search box above your messages to search for Chatter messages. - **[Send Chatter Messages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_message_send.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Salesforce Classic, to communicate privately, use Chatter messages. # Profile Header The Profile Header component displays a user's name (or nickname) and profile picture. It also displays a dropdown that lets users navigate to their profile, open a case, access their locale and email notification settings, or log out of the site. External users can also access and manage their account. If the user isn't logged in, a Login button appears in the header. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The User Profile Menu component replaces the Profile Header component in sites based on Winter ’18 and later versions of Experience Builder templates. Users can’t customize the profile photo functionality in the profile header—they need to edit all profile information from the profile details page. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If nickname display is enabled in the site, this component shows the nickname instead of the user’s name. The user’s reputation level displays only if reputation is enabled in the site. 1. Select the **Profile Header** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Case Filter Name or ID

The name or ID of the list view that displays the user's cases. This value is used throughout the site to display the user's list of cases.

By default, the template uses the AllOpenCases view, which lets users view any open cases that they have permission to see. Configure sharing to ensure that users see only cases that belong to them. Alternatively, you can use another pre-defined list view or create a custom list view.

Include Contact Support Select this checkbox to include the option to contact an agent from the profile.
Home Label Enter the text you want to show for the link to the site home page from the user navigation menu. The default text is Home.
View Profile Label Enter the text you want to show for the link to the profile detail page. The default text is View Profile.
Contact Support Label Enter the text you want to show for the link to the page where the user can open a case. The default text is Contact Support.
Login Label Enter the text you want to show for the link to log in to the site. The default text is Login.
Logout Label Enter the text you want to show for the link to log out from the site. The default text is Log Out.
Experience Management Enter the text you want to show for the link to the Experience Management page. This link only appears for users with permissions to manage the site.
Setup Label Enter the text you want to show for the link to the setup page for sites. The default text is Site Setup. This link is shown to users with permissions to create or modify the site’s administration settings.
User Settings (Customer Service template only) Enter the text you want to show for the link to access an authenticated user’s personal settings for the site. The default text is My Settings.
Show User Settings in Menu (Customer Service template only) Select this checkbox to show user settings in the profile dropdown list.
My Account Label (Customer Service template only)

Enter the text you want to show for the link that external users click to view their account record. The Default text is My Account. This feature is available in the Spring ’16 version of the Customer Service template and later.

![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Profile Header component: ![Profile header with profile navigation menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/napili_profile_navigation_menu.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Profile-Based Chatter Rollout Overview A profile-based rollout of Chatter makes Chatter available to a controlled set of users instead of all users in your organization. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
With a profile-based rollout, only users who have the required user profile or permission set have access to Chatter. A profile-based rollout is useful for larger companies and companies or government agencies with regulatory constraints. It empowers admins to plan a controlled deployment in such orgs on a department-by-department basis. Ask Salesforce about enabling a profile-based Chatter rollout. Chatter is secure and works in accordance with the security and permission settings in your Salesforce org. After profile-based rollout is enabled for your org, you can enable Chatter for the users with the required user profile or permission sets. Users without the right profile or permission set don’t have access to Chatter. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example Let’s say you assign a profile or permission set that excludes Chatter access to a subset of users. These users still have access to Salesforce objects, but they don’t see the record feed and they can’t post or comment. - **[Get Ready for Profile-Based Rollout of Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_pbr_prepare.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you’re rolling out Chatter to a subset of your users, you can manage Chatter access with custom user profiles and permission sets. There’s a little up-front work that you can do to prepare. - **[Control Chatter Access Through User Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_pbr_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Modify existing custom user profiles to allow or deny access to Chatter. - **[Control Chatter Access Through Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_pbr_perm_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage Chatter access by modifying existing permission sets or setting up new ones. - **[Profile-Based Rollout Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_pbr_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In organizations that use Chatter profile-based rollout, limitations apply. There are limits with user profiles, permissions sets, and the interaction between users with and without Chatter access. # Profile-Based Rollout Considerations In organizations that use Chatter profile-based rollout, limitations apply. There are limits with user profiles, permissions sets, and the interaction between users with and without Chatter access. - The Enable Chatter option isn’t available on profiles or permission sets unless profile-based rollout of Chatter is enabled for the organization. - When you enable Chatter in a permission set, the permission set takes precedence over user profile settings. All users with a Chatter-enabled permission set have access to Chatter, even if Chatter isn't enabled in their user profile. - When you disable Chatter in a permission set, the permission set doesn't take precedence over user profile settings. All users with a Chatter-enabled user profile have access to Chatter, even if Chatter is disabled in their permission set. To prevent that person from accessing Chatter, disable Chatter in both the person's user profile and permission set. - Enabling Chatter in a person's user profile or permission set doesn't automatically turn on Chatter for the organization. Turn on Chatter for your organization in Setup, after you modify user profiles and permission sets. - Standard Salesforce user profiles have Chatter enabled by default. You can’t disable Chatter for these standard profiles. - Don't deselect the Enable Chatter permission on a cloned Chatter External user profile. The user sees an error message and can’t log in. - Don’t deselect the Enable Chatter permission on a cloned Chatter Free or Chatter Moderator profile. You get an error message and can’t save the profile. - Enabling Chatter and profile-based rollout for an organization also enables a set of dependent Chatter user permissions. If Chatter is disabled for the organization, these permissions are also disabled at the same time. However, if Chatter is reenabled, these permissions aren’t automatically re-enabled, and the administrator must enable them explicitly. - When profile-based rollout of Chatter is enabled for an organization, Chatter is automatically enabled for standard profiles. For custom profiles and permission sets, Chatter is automatically enabled if any of these user-level permissions are enabled manually or as part of a license: - Create and Own New Chatter Groups (ChatterOwnGroups)—Users with this permission can create groups in Chatter. - Create and Share Content Deliveries for Chatter Files (ChatterFileLink)—Users with this permission can use files with Chatter, like uploading, attaching, and sharing. - Invite Customers To Chatter (ChatterInviteExternalUsers)—Users with this permission can invite users who don’t have a Salesforce license to Chatter. - Manage Chatter Messages and Direct Messages (ManageChatterMessages)—Users with this permission have management access to Chatter Messages and Direct Messages (Experience Builder sites). - Moderate Chatter (ModerateChatter)—Users with this permission can moderate Chatter feeds. - Moderate Chatter Feeds (ModerateNetworkFeeds)—Users with this permission can moderate feeds in sites. - Use Case Feed (ViewCaseInteraction)—Users with this permission can access Case feeds. - View All Data (ViewAllData)—Users with this permission can view all data, regardless of their membership status in a feed or ownership of a record. - When profile-based rollout of Chatter is enabled for an organization, two org preferences are set to OFF: - Allow Coworker Invitations (inviteCsnUserEnabled) - Allow Customer Invitations (inviteChatterGuestEnabled) - In organizations that have thanks badges enabled, users with access to Chatter can’t thank users who don’t have access to Chatter. - If your organization already has Chatter enabled and switches to profile-based rollout of Chatter, manually enable Chatter in all existing custom profiles and permission sets. Otherwise, users that are assigned these custom profiles and permission sets lose access to Chatter. - When profile-based rollout of Chatter is enabled in Salesforce Classic, users who can’t use Chatter also can’t use global search. Advanced search is available to these users. # Progressive Rendering Guidelines Here are some guidelines for how to get the most out of Progressive Rendering. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## When is the best time to Progressive Rendering? Not all Experience Cloud sites require this powerful feature, so don’t rush to use it. However, when you need it, you really need it. Progressive Rendering is designed to help improve the performance of your page by fetching and rendering page components in a parallel and prioritized manner. If you notice that your site pages take a long time to load before you see the components rendered on the screen, then progressive rendering can help improve your experience. Use the Page Optimizer tool to determine if Progressive Rendering is a good choice for your site pages and to get suggestions on how to prioritize your components. It can also help you evaluate the performance impact of your configurations. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Page Optimizer is available as a [Chrome extension](https://chrome.google.com/webstore/detail/salesforce-community-page/alkcnclapbnefkodhbkpifdkceldogka). You can read more about the tool in its [documentation](https://salesforce.quip.com/eXICApPXVIaN). Finding the right configuration that works best for you both in terms of performance and user experience can take a few iterations of configuration and testing. ## Which components are good candidates for prioritization? Generally, it’s probably best to have a few small (but important) components in the **Highest** group. However, trial and error testing and in-depth performance analysis are the best routes to figuring out how to best optimize your pages. ## What happens while Progressive Rendering is doing its thing? Your page layout is roughly rendered and then components are added in order of decreasing priority. Generally, this type of rendering doesn’t cause any visual issues. However, sometimes components rearrange as the page displays, depending on which components you prioritized and how quickly it loads. That’s another good reason to test, test, and retest when you decide to take advantage of this advanced feature. ## When is the best time to revisit your priority settings? After priorities are set, adding, deleting, or duplicating a component or changing themes or layouts potentially invalidates your currently set priorities. Any changes require you to review the display order to ensure it’s still effective. ## Test, test, test Always test your pages after you change your priority settings. We made it easy to test the page with and without Progressive Rendering enabled. If you turn off the feature, your component priority settings are remembered, and they’re reapplied when you turn it back on. #### See Also - [Prioritize Component Display Order with Progressive Rendering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_prioritization_howto.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Quickly set the display order of components on your Experience Builder pages with Progressive Rendering. By carefully optimizing how your pages display, you can enhance the experience of your site and better engage your community.") - [Salesforce Community Page Optimizer analyzer](https://salesforce.quip.com/eXICApPXVIaN) # Progressive Rendering Overview Progressive Rendering prioritizes the display order of your page components. With proper planning and testing, it can improve display time performance and polish your site’s experience to better engage customers. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Progressive Rendering improves the performance of your page by fetching and rendering page components in a parallel and prioritized manner. If you notice that your site pages take a long time to load before you see the components rendered on the screen, then progressive rendering can help improve your site’s performance. Assign one of three priorities to any top-level component. Component Priority Levels | Priority | Description | | --- | --- | | Highest | Highest priority components are displayed first. This priority is recommended for key content that you want to display first or content that appears above the fold on longer pages. | | High | High priority components are displayed after all components in the Highest group. | | Neutral | Neutral priority components are displayed after all other components that have a higher priority. By default, all components begin with a Neutral priority. | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Only top-level components in the content area of your pages can have a priority. You can’t assign a priority to a nested component. As an example, assign **Highest** (first) to the few components that you want to be viewed first. Specify **High** (second) for those components that can load later without affecting your customer’s experience. Unassigned components are treated as **Neutral** by default and are displayed last. There’s no right choice for assignments, but a lack of planning can degrade performance and diminish positive experiences on your site. For instance, sometimes you want a critical notice to appear first, prioritized as highest, and then fill in some of your highlighted content, prioritized as high. All other components, visible and below the fold, load after critical notices are rendered. Whether explicitly prioritized as neutral or not, they’retreated as neutral. ![Abstract image of progressive rendering depicting load order](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communites_builder_progrendabstract.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note All unassigned components are set to **Neutral** priority. For new sites, the default priorities for components can vary based on the site template. Because Progressive Rendering requires careful planning and testing, it’s off by default. Turn it on from the **Advanced** section of your Experience Builder Settings. Using this feature requires time and effort. But don’t worry, we provide some ideas to help you get started in the [Progressive Rendering Guidelines](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_prioritization_guidelines.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Here are some guidelines for how to get the most out of Progressive Rendering.") So, what happens while Progressive Rendering is doing its thing? Your page layout is roughly rendered and then components are added in order of decreasing priority. Generally, this type of rendering doesn’t cause any visual issues. However, sometimes components rearrange as the page displays, depending on which components you prioritized and how quickly it loads. That’s another good reason to test, test, and retest when you decide to take advantage of this advanced feature. Assign a priority to a component in the actions menu of the Property Editor. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note After you set the priorities, adding, deleting, or duplicating a component or changing themes or layouts doesn’t change your priority settings, but it invalidates your assumptions and testing. To ensure that your choices remain effective, you can expect any changes made to kick off a new round of testing. We try to notify you when you make those kinds of changes, but you still have to do the testing. Always make testing a part of your change plan. Turning off Progressive Rendering removes prioritized behavior, but your settings remain. If you turn on Progressive Rendering again later, the original priority settings go back into force. While the continuity makes testing easier, the results can surprise you if you don’t watch for it. - **[Progressive Rendering Guidelines](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_prioritization_guidelines.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here are some guidelines for how to get the most out of Progressive Rendering. - **[Prioritize Component Display Order with Progressive Rendering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_prioritization_howto.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Quickly set the display order of components on your Experience Builder pages with Progressive Rendering. By carefully optimizing how your pages display, you can enhance the experience of your site and better engage your community. #### See Also - [Salesforce Community Page Optimizer analyzer](https://salesforce.quip.com/eXICApPXVIaN) - [Prioritize Component Display Order with Progressive Rendering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_prioritization_howto.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Quickly set the display order of components on your Experience Builder pages with Progressive Rendering. By carefully optimizing how your pages display, you can enhance the experience of your site and better engage your community.") - [Assign an Audience to a Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_audience_component.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you assign an audience to a page component, all users see the same page, but the components that are visible on the page differ among user segments. For example, you have a page that’s visible to site members and guest users, and you want your members to be able to post questions and comments. You can add the Feed Publisher component to the page and assign this component to an audience for site members only. Your members can see the component, and guest users can’t.") # Provide Search Engines with Fresh Content Snapshots Experience Builder sites in your production org use the Content Snapshot service to generate SEO optimized HTML for web crawlers such as Googlebot, and content sharing platforms such as Facebook. The concept is common to single-page application frameworks known as dynamic rendering. Salesforce takes a snapshot when you make changes to your site’s publicly available content. This functionality works well for most updates. But let’s say you update a page with time-sensitive information, such as price changes for a flash sale. Instead of waiting, you can take a manual snapshot once every 24 hours to refresh the page content served to search engines. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions. This feature isn’t supported in Government Cloud.
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip The Content Snapshot section appears in Experience Builder only after you [set a preferred domain](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_preferred_domain.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "By default, your site is available on the *.my.site.com or *.force.com domain, but you can add a custom domain so that your site URLs reflect your company brand. However, multiple domains for the same site, meaning *.my.site.com, *.force.com, and custom domains, can dilute search engine results and lower page ranking. If you have multiple domains, identify which domain to use for crawling and indexing your site’s pages.") for your Experience Builder site and ensure that your site is publicly available. A content snapshot is generated and served in production for every route included in your [standard sitemap](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_manual_SEO_sitemap.htm&type=5&language=en_US) for all site languages added to your site. A snapshot includes views produced with the standard language parameter and record detail pages where the guest user has read access to one or more records. We don't recommend producing different content based on your own query string parameters because snapshots aren’t supported for permutations of your own parameters. 1. In Experience Builder, update the page’s content, and then publish your site to make your changes live. You can only take snapshots of published pages. 2. On the SEO settings tab, select the page in the Published Page dropdown. ![Content Snapshot](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/seo_snapshot.png) 3. Click **Refresh Snapshot**. Manual snapshots are processed as quickly as possible, but your updates can take some time to appear in search results. If you request manual snapshot refreshes for a large volume of pages simultaneously, your snapshots won’t all be updated at the same time. #### See Also - [Best Practices and Tips for Using SEO in Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_best_practices.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Follow these guidelines and best practices when optimizing SEO in your site.") - [Generate a Manual Sitemap Refresh for Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_manual_SEO_sitemap.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you go live with a new Experience Builder site or make significant updates to an existing one, you can generate a manual sitemap one time every 24 hours outside of the weekly automatic sitemap refresh.") # Publish Files to Libraries To publish files to libraries you can upload them from your computer, contribute them from your private library to a shared library, or share them from Chatter. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To upload and publish files to a public library:

Manage Libraries checked in your library permission definition

OR

Add Content checked in your library permission definition

To upload and save files to a private library: None
1. On the **Libraries** tab, do one of the following: - To upload a file, click **Contribute** and choose a file from your local drive. - To publish files from your private library, click the **My Private Files** tab, select one or multiple files, and click **Publish Selected**. 2. Enter a title for each file. Optionally, enter descriptions. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If you download multiple content files, file names that include special characters change to that file's version ID in the .zip file. 3. If you add a file that you uploaded, choose either **Save in my private library** or **Publish to a shared library**. If you choose the second option, select a library. The selected library becomes the managing (home) library. You can share content in the managing library with another library but only if it is revised by a user with author permissions in the managing library. 4. Optionally, choose a language. If multi-language support is enabled, the Language dropdown list is displayed . If you do not choose a language, Salesforce associates your content with your personal language setting. If users restrict their content searches to a particular language, only content associated with that language is displayed in the search result set. 5. To publish the content on behalf of another author, choose that author from the dropdown list. 6. Tag your content. Your tagging permission depends on the tagging rule assigned to the library: - If the library does not have a tagging rule or if your administrator assigned the open tagging rule, you can enter tags in the Tags field. As you type a tag, Salesforce CRM Content autosuggests tags based on your My Recent Tags list and the Popular Tags section on the Libraries tab. The My Recent Tags list on the Contribute window shows the 20 tags that you used most recently. To add a tag, click it to automatically add it to the Tags field. - If your administrator assigned the guided tagging rule, you can choose from the list of suggested tags or enter a new tag. To add a suggested tag, click it to automatically add it to the Tags field. - If your administrator assigned the restricted tagging rule, you must choose from the list of suggested tags. When you select a tag, it turns green. - You can't change or delete tag names. You can remove tags from a document, but that doesn't delete the tag. - Tags are case insensitive. You can't have two tags with the same name even if they use different upper and lowercase letters. The case of the original tag is always used. 7. If multiple record types are available, choose one from the dropdown list. The record type determines which custom fields appear for you to categorize and define your content. 8. After completing the custom fields, click **Publish** or **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - Unique values in custom fields that are set for the first version of a file aren't included if you upload a new version. You can set the unique values in the new version as long as they aren't the same as a previous version. - Files published to a shared library are added to your Files tab and available to other Chatter users in your organization. Files published to your private library are added to your Files tab, but are private and not shared with anyone. - Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Performance Edition customers can publish a maximum of 200,000 new versions per 24–hour period. Developer Edition and trial users can publish a maximum of 2,500 new versions per 24–hour period. # Publish Your Experience Builder Site Customizations Publish your Aura or LWR site in Experience Builder to make your site updates and component customization updates available to your site members. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Publishing an Aura or LWR site for the first time makes the site URL live and enables login access for site members. Unlike Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites, you don’t need to activate an Experience Builder Site unless you want to set up SEO and send out a welcome email. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important When you publish changes to a live site, remember that: - _All_ updates made to the site since it was last published are included. - You can publish only one site at a time. 1. In Experience Builder, [preview your site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_preview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before going live, you can preview your Experience Builder site to see how it looks in a desktop browser window or on a mobile device.") to make sure that your updates appear as expected. 2. When you’re happy with your changes, click **Publish** in the navigation bar to publish your changes. To keep a record of the changes that you make each time you publish the site, summarize the changes in the Publication Description field in the confirmation window. Your summary then appears in the Change History panel in Experience Builder Settings. An email notification informs you when your changes go live. #### See Also - [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Builder lets you easily style your site, create and customize pages, add drag-and-drop components, and deliver personalized experiences to different audiences. Choose a template to quickly start your site, and then style the pages to match your company’s branding.") - [Preview Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_preview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before going live, you can preview your Experience Builder site to see how it looks in a desktop browser window or on a mobile device.") # Publisher Actions and Layouts Actions add functionality to the Chatter Publisher in Salesforce Classic. Actions let your users do more in Salesforce across all devices. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, Developer, and Database.com Editions
Actions are all about productivity. Actions let users accomplish things with fewer clicks, fewer fields, and ultimately less time spent. Actions are especially useful in the Salesforce app, because it makes it easy to create and edit records with a simple, mobile-optimized interface. By default, the Chatter publisher includes the standard actions Post, File, Link, Poll, and Question. ![Chatter publisher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_publisher_blank.png) Actions appear in the action bar, its associated action menu, and as list-item actions. ![Salesforce app action bar](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/s1_actionbar.png) There are several categories of actions, like standard actions, nonstandard actions, default actions, mobile smart actions, custom actions, and productivity actions. - Standard actions: Standard actions are actions that are automatically added to the publisher when Chatter is enabled—such as Post, File, Link, and Poll. You can customize the order in which these actions appear in the publisher, but you can’t edit their properties. - Nonstandard actions: Nonstandard actions are actions that you create and customize yourself. - Default actions: Default actions are predefined actions provided by Salesforce. To make them available to your users, add them to the Chatter publisher layout. - Mobile smart actions: Mobile smart actions are a set of preconfigured actions, just like default actions. Mobile smart actions let users create records directly in the feed. - Custom actions: Custom actions are Visualforce pages or canvas apps with functionality that you define. For example, you can create a custom action so that users can write comments that are longer than 5000 characters. - Productivity actions: Salesforce predefines productivity actions. They are attached to account, contact, event, lead, user, and user profile objects. You can’t edit or delete productivity actions. To customize the publisher with actions or change the order of actions, first enable actions in the publisher. Enable actions in Setup on the Chatter Settings page. # Question-to-Case Question-to-Case lets moderators create cases from questions in Chatter, which makes it easier to track and resolve your customers’ issues. Question-to-Case is available in your Salesforce org and Salesforce mobile web, as well as in Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites where Chatter Questions is enabled. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura and Visualforce sites
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). When a customer uses the Question action in Chatter to ask a question, similar questions and Knowledge articles appear below the Chatter publisher. If the similar questions and articles don’t address the issue, the customer posts the question. If a question isn’t resolved, you can escalate the question to a case. Users with the Moderate Chatter or Moderate Experiences Feeds user permission can create cases from questions directly in the feed, or you can set up flows in Flow Builder to automatically create cases from questions that meet specified criteria. Cases from questions are added to a queue so support agents can claim them. ![Escalate Action](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/qtc_escalate_action.png) When a customer’s question is turned into a case, the customer receives an email with the case number and a link to the case. The customer can view the case via a link on the question that’s visible only to them, while moderators see a note on the question indicating that a case was created. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The person who asked the question must have access to cases so they can view their case. **Moderator Flag** ![Moderator Flag](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/qtc_moderator_flag.png) **Customer Flag** ![Customer Flag](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/qtc_customer_flag.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note On escalated questions in Salesforce (as opposed to Experience Cloud sites), the notification is visible to all users, not just moderators. When agents find a solution, they can respond to questions directly from the console, and the customer sees the agent’s response on the question or in the My Cases view. Agents choose whether the reply is visible to the Experience Cloud site, or only to the customer who asked the question. ![Agent Response](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/qtc_response.png) - **[Enable Question-to-Case](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.questions_qtc_enable_qtc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Question-to-Case in your Experience Cloud sites, Salesforce org, or both. # Reach More Customers with Channel Marketing Create seamless marketing campaigns for partner user with channel marketing tools for partner sites. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
#### See Also - [Set Up Campaign Marketplace](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_campaigns_marketplace_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With Campaign Marketplace, you can provide the structure and guidance necessary for partners to successfully execute campaigns. Channel marketers can create and share marketing campaigns, guidelines, and assets with partners. They can also customize the look and feel of the marketplace and highlight information that is important to partners. Partners can then choose which campaigns work best for them. This feature is available in Experience Builder sites and Lightning Bolt Solutions.") # Reassign the Scheduled Jobs that Generate an Automatic Sitemap Refresh To generate an automatic sitemap refresh, Salesforce uses an automated process called scheduled jobs. An automatic sitemap refresh requires two scheduled jobs that are associated with the account of the user who most recently published that site. If that user’s account is deactivated, the scheduled jobs can’t run, and your sitemap no longer refreshes automatically. To resume automatic sitemap refreshes, reassign the scheduled jobs that refresh the sitemap to an active or automated user account. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To publish an Experience Cloud site:

Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences

OR

Be a member of the site AND an experience admin or publisher in that site

To edit a scheduled job: Customize Application
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Scheduled Jobs, and then select **Scheduled Jobs**. 2. Find the scheduled jobs with job names that start with CommIncrementalSitemapJob or CommSitemapJob and that list the inactive user in the Submitted By column. 3. Next to the `CommIncrementalSitemapJob` and `CommSitemapJob` scheduled jobs submitted by the inactive user, click **Del**. 4. Republish all sites for which you deleted the scheduled jobs. The scheduled jobs are associated with the user who republishes the site. When you associate the scheduled jobs with an automated user account, you ensure that a deactivated user account can’t affect your automatic sitemap refreshes again. To associate the scheduled jobs with an automated user account of an active user, after you delete the scheduled jobs, visit the site’s sitemap.xml file. To view the sitemap.xml file, navigate to https://site\_URL/s/sitemap.xml for Aura sites or https://site\_URL/sitemap.xml for LWR sites. If you have more than one site, repeat these steps for all `CommIncrementalSitemapJob` and `CommSitemapJob` scheduled jobs that list the inactive user in the Submitted By column. # Recognition Badges Acknowledge your members’ accomplishments or celebrate with them using recognition badges. To add this feature to your site, make sure that Chatter is enabled for the site.
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Badges can only be assigned to users and by users who have Chatter enabled. We provided some default badges but you can create your own. You can also choose who else can create badges and who can give badges in your site. - **[Recognition Badges Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recog_badges_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** While Recognition Badges are a great way to keep your members involved in your site, keep a few things in mind when you use them. - **[Recognition Badges Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recog_badges_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With just a few steps, you can set up Recognition Badges for your site and restrict who can create and give badges. - **[Missions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_missions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Game mechanics, such as using badges, are a great way to get your users involved in your Experience Cloud site. However, assigning badges manually can be time consuming. Instead, use the Missions feature to assign members badges automatically. Community managers have their say in what action earns a badge and when it can be awarded, and then Missions takes care of the rest. And members can see which badges they haven’t yet earned, inspiring action. - **[Assign Recognition Badges to Experience Cloud Site Members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recog_badges_give.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assigning badges to members helps reward them for staying engaged in the Experience Cloud site. - **[Delete Assigned Badges](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recog_badges_delete_profile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes badges are assigned to a member by mistake. If you gave the badge, you can delete it from the member’s profile page. - **[Use the API to Give Recognition Badges Sample Code](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recog_badges_via_api.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can use the API to programmatically give recognition badges to Experience Cloud site members. #### See Also - [_Experience Cloud Recognition Badges Implementation Guide_](https://resources.docs.salesforce.com/216/latest/en-us/sfdc/pdf/salesforce_communities_recog_badges_ig.pdf) # Recognition Badges The Recognition Badges component displays up to three of the most recent badges a user has earned. It also shows the Give Badge button, and a link to view all badges the user has earned. From the User Profile page in Experience Builder, 1. Add the Recognition Badges component to the User Profile page. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Id The system supplies this value. Don’t update this field.
Title Enter a title for the component. The default text is Recognition Badges.
Button Text

Enter a name for the button that users click to give badges. The default text is Give.

The Give button is only available if the Give Recognition Badges in Lightning Communities permission is turned on.

![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Recognition Badges component ![Badge component displayed on a user profile](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_badge_component.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Recognition Badges Limitations While Recognition Badges are a great way to keep your members involved in your site, keep a few things in mind when you use them. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
- Chatter must be enabled for your site. - It’s currently not possible for users with a Customer Community or Customer Community Login license to assign a private badge. Only internal users or users with the following licenses, and with the **Assign Recognition Badges in Experience Builder Sites** permission, can assign a private badge: - Customer Community Plus - Customer Community Plus Login - Partner Community - Partner Community Login - Users with the following licenses can see the badges that they’ve received, but **not** assign badges: - Customer Portal User - High Volume Customer Portal - Internal Portal User - Standard Partner - Badges aren’t translated. The badge name and description are the same regardless of which language the member is using. - “Review” moderation rules aren’t enforced for badges comments. To help prevent unwanted keywords from appearing in your site, add your list of words to “block” or “replace” rules. - Past activity, such as comments or likes, isn’t counted when you create a mission. # Recognition Badges Setup With just a few steps, you can set up Recognition Badges for your site and restrict who can create and give badges. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
- **[Enable WDC Thanks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recog_badges_workcom.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Recognition Badges are based on the WDC Thanks feature. Enable this feature plus the ability to restrict who can create badges before continuing in your setup. - **[Turn On Recognition Badges in Experience Workspaces](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recog_badges_turn_on.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Turn on Recognition Badges via the Gamification Tile to finish setting up and start giving badges. - **[Configure Who Can Create Recognition Badges](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recog_badges_config_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use permission sets, our recommended method, to choose which members can create recognition badges. Restricting who can do so helps control the number of badges in your site and maintains the value of a badge. - **[Configure Who Can Assign Recognition Badges](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recog_badges_config_give.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use permission sets, our recommended method, to choose which members can assign recognition badges. Restricting who can do so helps control the number of badges in your site and maintains the value of a badge. - **[Use Components to Display Assigned Recognition Badges on Member Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recog_badges_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the User Profile component or the Recognition Badge component to display assigned Recognition Badges on a member’s profile. - **[Create, Edit, and Delete Recognition Badges](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recog_badges_create_edit.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In addition to the four default badges, you can create your own to fit the needs of your site. You can edit both the default badges and your custom badges. - **[Manage Who Can Assign a Specific Recognition Badge](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recog_badges_manage_givers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Controlling who can assign a recognition badge helps make sure the right badges are awarded to the right members. For example, you can set it up so that only community managers can assign MVP and VIP badges. - **[Display the Full List of Assigned Recognition Badges on a Member’s Profile Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recog_badges_user_profile_layout.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit the user profile layout to display the full list of assigned recognition badges on a members’ profile page. # Recommendations The Recommendations component displays the popular files for your site. Popularity is determined by the number of people who have recently viewed a file and whether the file includes text and is in a library. The Recommendations component appears by default on the Resources page when a recommendation is available. 1. Select the **Recommendations** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Title | Enter a title for the component. The default text is Popular Now. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Recommendations component: ![Recommendations component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/recs_component.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Recommendations Carousel The Recommendations Carousel component displays the custom recommendations and system-generated topic recommendations for your Experience Cloud site. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - For a more updated content targeting experience, we suggest using the [CMS Collection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_cms_collection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add a CMS Collection to your Aura site using the CMS Collection component in Experience Builder. If you created a collection in your Content Management Workspace, you can customize the layout on your site page. If you don’t have a collection yet, you can still add the component as a placeholder on your page.") component with [personalization audiences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=community_builder_page_visibilty_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - Before Winter ’18, this component was named Recommendations. The Recommendations Carousel component appears on the page when a recommendation is available. 1. Select the **Recommendations Carousel** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component:
Property Details
Title Enter a title for the component. The default text is Recommended.
Recommendation Channel

Choose the recommendation channel. The default is Default Channel. To display recommendations that you created in a custom channel, choose that channel.

Use these channel values; you can’t rename or create other channels.

So that users don’t see the same recommendations all the time, Salesforce periodically removes and brings back custom recommendations that haven’t been accepted or dismissed. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Recommendations Carousel component: ![Recommendations Carousel component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/recs_element.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") - [Customize Recommendations in Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_recs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create recommendations to drive engagement for your Experience Cloud site, encouraging users to watch videos, take trainings, and more. Target specific audiences and use channels to specify locations for the recommendations.") # Record Banner The Record Banner component shows the record name, key record highlights, and action buttons that allow users to edit or delete the record. Before Spring ’16, this component was named Record Headline. The Customer Service template supports a record detail page that you can use out of the box with no configuration. All objects in your site without a preassigned record detail page use this generic page, called Record Detail, to display record data. For example, consider the scenario where a user lands on a case detail page. The page uses a preassigned case detail layout. The user clicks a contact in the related records. If you haven’t created a custom record detail page for contacts, the contact information is displayed using the generic Record Detail page. Under the hood, the Record Detail page uses the Record Banner component along with the Record Information Tabs component to display record data. - You can use the Record Banner component on custom record detail pages that you create. We recommend using it with the Record Information Tabs component. - You can modify what fields display in the Record Banner component by customizing the Highlights Panel layout in the object’s compact page layout. - Members with the necessary permissions can use the Edit, Delete, and Follow buttons to modify, delete, or follow the record. These buttons don’t display on mobile devices. - The Record Banner component doesn’t support translation on the Topic Detail page. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note For optimal appearance, choose a wide column width when placing this component on your page. Some fields are hidden when there isn't enough space to display them due to browser width or zoom level. 1. From the Pages menu in Experience Builder, select Record Detail or your custom record detail page. 2. Select the **Record Banner** component, or drag the component from the Components panel to the page. 3. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Record ID | The ID of the record displayed. Typically, this field is automatically populated. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note In the mobile app, lookup fields in the Record Banner component are shown as text, not links. Sample Record Banner component in the Customer Service template. ![Record Banner component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/record_headline_napili.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Record Detail Add the Record Detail component to a record detail or a custom page to show record information stored in Salesforce. This component is a great way to share information with site members who need it most, such as partners. Users accessing the site on a mobile device have access to actions from the record detail page. For example, a partner user with create and edit access to accounts can create accounts or update an account as needed. However, edit inline, available on desktop, doesn’t function in mobile or tablet display. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To display the record feed, use one the feed components with the feed publisher component. To show the related records, use the [Related Record List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_related_record_list.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Related Record List component shows, in a list, a single type of record related to a record. For example, if you’re looking at an account, you can see a related list of contacts for that account. Use the Related Record List component on a generic Related Record List page or on a custom page. Members can create records from the list and from lookups.") component. To show a combination of record details, related lists, and the record feed together, we recommend using the composite [Record Information Tabs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_record_information.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Record Information Tabs component allows the user to display record information using tabs for Record Details, Related Records, Feed, and Activity Timeline.") component. 1. Select the **Record Detail** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Record ID | The record ID. Typically, this field automatically picks up the record ID when the page loads. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Example of a Record Detail component on a site. ![Record Detail component used in a community.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/record_detail.png) Example of actions on a mobile device. ![Example of actions on a mobile device](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_mobile_actions.png) # Record Feed List View Limitations Limitations for list views on record feeds. Click ![feeds icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_feeds.png) **Feed** on a standard or custom object list view to see a Chatter feed with updates from the records that are included in the list view. The feed shows updates from the last 30 days. The following limitations apply to Chatter feeds on list views: - Some feed-tracked objects don’t have a Chatter feed associated with their list view. Currently, you can view Chatter feeds on list views for opportunities, accounts, cases, leads, campaigns, contacts, and custom objects. - If drag-and-drop scheduling on list views is enabled, you don't see Chatter feeds on the list views for accounts, contacts, or leads. # Record Information Tabs The Record Information Tabs component allows the user to display record information using tabs for Record Details, Related Records, Feed, and Activity Timeline. - You can use the Record Information Tabs component on custom record detail pages that you create. We recommend using it with the Record Banner component. - You can modify what fields display in the Record Information Tabs component by customizing the object’s page layout. - Related lists in the related tab show the number of related records in each list in parentheses. For example, if there are five related contacts related to an account, the related list shows Contacts (5). If there aren’t any related records, the list title shows (0). - Site members with permissions can create new related records and send emails from the Related tab. They can also expand related record lists to see a longer list. These details are displayed on the generic Record Related List page. Related records in the related tab show the number of related records in parentheses. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Emails are supported in accounts, contacts, leads, opportunities, and campaigns. The Customer Service template supports a record detail page that you can use out of the box with no configuration. All objects in your site without a preassigned record detail page use this generic page, called Record Detail, to display record data. For example, consider the scenario where a user lands on a case detail page. The page uses a preassigned case detail layout. The user clicks a contact in the related records. If you haven’t created a custom record detail page for contacts, the contact information is displayed using the generic Record Detail page. 1. From the Pages menu in Experience Builder, select Record Detail or your custom record detail page. 2. Select the **Record Information Tabs** component or drag the component from the Components panel to the page to add it. 3. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Record ID The ID of the record. This value is automatically populated.
Use tabbed activity view If set, tabs are displayed grouped by the tab type.
Tab 1 Type

Label can be set to the following values:

  • Record Details
  • Related Records
  • Feed
  • Activity Timeline
Tab 2 Type

Label can be set to the following values:

  • Record Details
  • Related Records
  • Feed
  • Activity Timeline
  • None
Tab 3 Type

Label can be set to the following values:

  • Record Details
  • Related Records
  • Feed
  • Activity Timeline
  • None
Tab 4 Type

Label can be set to the following values:

  • Record Details
  • Related Records
  • Feed
  • Activity Timeline
  • None
Record Detail Tab Label Label for the tab that shows record details. The default label is Details.
Related Records Tab Label Label for the tab that shows lists of related records. The default label is Related.
Feed Tab Label Label for the tab that shows the record feed. The default label is Discussions. This label is used on mobile devices only.
Activity Timeline Tab Label Label for the tab that shows the activity timeline. The default label is Activity.
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Record Information Tabs component: ![Record Information component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/record_information_component.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Record List The Record List component shows a list of records on the Record List page. Users can view records, switch between record list views, and create records directly from the list view. If a user has no access to a particular list view, they see the Recently Used list view instead. When you create a custom navigation menu item using the Salesforce Object type, it automatically links to a list of the records for the selected object. Templates provide a page to display such a list of records. This generic page is called the Record List page. It’s used for all objects in your site that don’t have a custom page assigned to them. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note There are a few things to keep in mind when using the Record List component: - The Record List component supports all Object Home page supported objects. - You can use the Record List component on any page in your site. We recommend adding it to custom list views that you create. You can also create a navigation menu item to link to that page with its internal page URL. - We advise against using the Record List component to show products in a B2B Commerce store. A product Record List doesn't respect user entitlements and could expose information to users that you don't want them to see. - On a mobile device, if a user taps any field in the Record List component, including a field containing a URL, they’re directed to the full record detail page. 1. Select the **Record List** component on the Record List page. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Number of Records

The number of entries retrieved to show in the list view. The default is 25.

When the compact layout is selected, this property controls the number of records shown. If there are more than 25 records, users click a link to see the full list of records. The maximum number of records for the compact layout is 100.

When the full layout is selected, this property controls the number of records initially shown. As a user scrolls down, more records are displayed. The maximum number of records per page is 100, but this limit doesn't apply when the full layout is selected on desktop.

Layout

Choose from full, standard, or compact layout. The compact layout is ideal for showing short lists of information in a narrow column or when displaying your site on a mobile device. When a page using the full layout is viewed on a mobile device, the page automatically adjusts to a more mobile-friendly layout. To display the compact layout on mobile, explicitly select Compact.

When choosing the layout, consider the following:

  • When using the full layout, use a column width of at least 50% of the page. We also recommend that you don’t place another component below the Record List component on the page.
    • Full layout has a minimum height of 700 pixels. If you place a component below the full layout of the Record List component, the Record List can overlap with the component that’s underneath it.
    • Full layout uses infinite scrolling. If you reference an object that contains many records, infinite scrolling can prevent site members from ever seeing the component below the Record List component.
  • Standard layout has some differences in display.
    • Only the first four fields of the list view are displayed.
    • When there is no data for the list view to display the Record List component is hidden.
  • Compact layout works in any size column. However, View All will always redirect to the object home (for example, case list or account list). We recommend that you create a standard page and add the compact list there. This arrangement avoids issues that can arise when the full list for object home has been deleted.

If there aren’t records to display for either a standard or compact list view, the component is hidden.

Object Name

The Salesforce object whose records you want to show. The dropdown shows the supported objects. The component supports all Object Home page objects. See Objects Supported by Out-of-the-Box Components and Pages in Experience Builder Templates.

If Page’s Object Name name is selected, only Page’s Filter Name is available in the Filter Name field.

Filter Name The list view to show for the selected object. The dropdown shows only list views that are valid for the object you select.
Allow list pinning 1

Lets users select their preferred default view for a record list. Enabled by default.

Lists, as elsewhere in Salesforce, can’t be unpinned, but users can select a new list to change their default view.

Pinned lists almost always override menu and component list settings. The exception is when the navigation menu for a component receives its filter name from the name of the page—like My Accounts. To allow users to see their pinned lists, create at least one more menu item that takes default as the list view.

Allow inline edit 1 Lets users edit individual fields in a list. Enabled by default.
Header Configuration Click to expand.
Show list actions 2

Displays available list view controls, such as new, sharing, filter, and any custom actions that you’ve created. Enabled by default.

  • Users require necessary permissions for the viewed object to use the New button on the component to create records.
  • For shared views, users need appropriate permissions to see the data.
  • Related Lists for Campaign members have quick filters to narrow results, but the resulting views can’t be saved or shared.
  • Site members can use search and quick filters to quickly find information in their current session. Users can click Filter icon to filter the list view or remove filters. They can also click Charts icon to view related charts.
Show list search 1 Displays search field, scoped to the displayed list. Enabled by default.
Show refresh button Enabled by default.
Show charts button Enabled by default.
Show filter button Enabled by default.
Show object name Enabled by default.
Show image icon Enabled by default.
Show display options 1 Lets users view records in a table or Kanban format, or restricts them to a single type of view. Default is Show All Options.
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Record List component (Full layout): ![Record List component with all options called out](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/record_home_list_view-allinone.png) When all properties are enabled, site members can: - Change the list view and pin it (1). - Use search (2) to find items in long lists. - Use list actions to accomplish list-related tasks, such as creating a record (3). - Access list view controls (such as sharing settings), change how the list is displayed, view related charts, and filter the list view (4). - Edit fields inline (5). Sample Record List component (Compact layout): ![Record List component in compact layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/record_home_list_view_compact.png) Sample Record List component (Standard layout): ![Record List component using Standard view](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/record_home_list_view-standard.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") - [Objects Supported by Out-of-the-Box Components and Pages in Experience Builder Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_napili_supported_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Check out the list of all the objects supported by out-of-the-box components and pages in Experience Builder templates.") - [Record List (LWR)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_record_list_lwr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Record List component for LWR sites helps your site visitors easily view, search, and sort their accounts, cases, and other data. The component enhances security and user satisfaction by showing users only the data they’re permitted to view based on admin-defined access. With properties for component customization and styling—including support for custom CSS—the component helps you make sure that your visitors have a smooth and responsive experience across desktop, tablet, and mobile devices. The component offers a clean, professional data display that you can tailor to perfectly align with your brand and website design theme.") 1 Available for Full layout only and therefore unavailable when viewed on mobile devices. 2 Guest users can’t access filter or sort actions on any device. # Record List (LWR) The Record List component for LWR sites helps your site visitors easily view, search, and sort their accounts, cases, and other data. The component enhances security and user satisfaction by showing users only the data they’re permitted to view based on admin-defined access. With properties for component customization and styling—including support for custom CSS—the component helps you make sure that your visitors have a smooth and responsive experience across desktop, tablet, and mobile devices. The component offers a clean, professional data display that you can tailor to perfectly align with your brand and website design theme. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note There are a few things to keep in mind when using the Record List component: - The Record List component supports all Object Home page supported objects. - You can use the Record List component on any page in your community. We recommend adding it to custom list views that you create. You can also create a navigation menu item to link to that page with its internal page URL. - On a mobile device, if a user taps any field in the Record List component, including a field containing a URL, they’re directed to the full record detail page. 1. Select the **Record List** component on the Record List page. ![This image shows the list of Components](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/components.png) 2. In the property editor, click **Settings** and configure the following:
Property Details
Object The Salesforce object whose records you want to display. The component supports all Object Home page objects, such as Opportunities, Accounts, or Contacts.
Record List The Record List component displays a customizable list of records, such as open cases, accounts, opportunities, or product inventory, based on the object you select and the specific records you choose to show.
Number of Records to Display Select how many records to display in a list view. The minimum is five, and the maximum is fifteen.
Choose a List Type

Choose how records appear in the list. Use Table view for detailed data or Card view for a compact, visual layout.

Pro Tip: For the best viewing experience, set Table view for desktop and Card view for mobile.

Header

Customize the record list header to match the look and functionality you want. You can control whether the header is shown, set background color and borders, and choose from various text styling options.

Show Header: This option is enabled by default and can be customized.

  • Set a background color that aligns with your brand or site theme.
  • Define a border color to add emphasis or separation.
  • Adjust the border weight in pixels to control how prominently the border appears.

Show Object Icon

Displays the object’s icon in the header. This option is enabled by default.

Show Title

Controls how the header title appears.

  • Display the title to provide helpful context. Enabled by default.
  • Choose a text style: heading or paragraph.
  • Apply formatting such as bold, italic, or underline.
  • Set the text color to match your site design.

Show List View Picker

Lets you switch between list views. Enabled by default.

  • Choose a heading or paragraph for the text style.

  • Apply bold, italic, or underline formatting to suit your design.

Show Status

Shows the status of the list view, including the total number of records, the column used for sorting, the sort order (ascending or descending), and whether any filters are applied. Enabled by default.

  • Choose either heading or paragraph style.

  • Apply bold, italic, or underline formatting.

Show Search

Adds a search field to the record list so users can filter results quickly and easily.

Records

Customize the record display settings for Table and Card list types. These settings include hover colors, padding, background, border, spacing, and text styling.

Customize the appearance of records for a consistent and accessible display across layouts. Adjust background and border settings, control cell or card padding, and define spacing between items. Style text to match your site’s design.

Row or Card Hover Color

Set the background color shown when hovering over a row (Table) or a card (Card). Use the gradient panel to adjust saturation and brightness, and the vertical hue slider to pick a base color. Applies to Table and Card.

Cell or Card Padding

Adjust the internal spacing of each table cell or card. Use padding to control spacing around content and improve overall readability for Top, Right, Bottom, and Left, or use Make all values equal (enabled by default) to apply the same value to all sides. You can also select the unit of measurement in px, rem, or %. Applies to Table and Card.

Background Color

Sets the background color of the record rows (Table) or cards (Card). Use this setting to align with your brand or improve visual clarity. Applies to Table and Card.

Column Header Background Color

Sets the background color of the column headers in a table layout. Applies to Table only.

Column Header Text Color

Sets the text color of column headers in the table view. Applies to Table only.

Card Border Color

Defines the color of the outer border—either around the full table or each card. Applies to Table and Card.

Border Weight (px)

Specifies the thickness of the border in pixels. The default value is 1px. Applies to Table and Card.

Divider Border Color

Sets the color of horizontal dividers between table rows. Applies to Table only.

Divider Border Weight (px)

Specifies the thickness of dividers between rows. The default value is 1px. Applies to Table only.

Space Between Items (px)

Sets the spacing between individual cards in the list. Default value is 16px. Applies to Card only.

Text Style

Controls how record content appears. Select from available text styles such as Paragraph or Heading. Applies to Table and Card.

Text Color

Sets the color of the record text. Choose a color that complements your site’s design and ensures readability. Applies to Table and Card.

Pagination

Pagination helps you navigate between different pages of records on the Record List page. There are two types of pagination:

Previous/Next

Displays a fixed number of records per page. You can click Previous or Next to move between pages.

Show More

Loads additional records below the current list, creating a smooth scrolling experience.

3. In the property editor, click **Visibility** and configure the following:
Property Details
Layout

Configures the overall layout of the record list, including spacing and alignment settings.

  • Margin

    Sets the outer spacing around the component. Configure spacing individually for Top, Right, Bottom, and Left, or use Make all values equal (enabled by default) to apply the same value to all sides. You can also select the unit of measurement in px, rem, or %.

  • Padding

    Sets the inner spacing between the component’s content and its border. Configure spacing individually for Top, Right, Bottom, and Left, or use Make all values equal (enabled by default) to apply the same value to all sides. You can also select the unit of measurement in px, rem, or %.

Custom CSS

Applies a custom CSS to modify the appearance of the record list.

Edit Head Markup

To customize the head section of your site’s HTML, click Edit Head Markup This section is useful for adding metadata, linking to custom stylesheets, or configuring site-level settings that influence how your site loads and appears.

4. In the property editor, click **Style** and configure the following:
Property Details
Show Component on Desktop

Controls whether the component is visible when the site is viewed on desktop devices. This setting is enabled by default.

Component visibility is also affected by visibility rules. These rules determine when the component appears and who can see it based on factors such as the user profile, audience, or device type. See Add Visibility Rule for Record List.

The List Type screen (Table and Card View), Show Header, Show List View Picker, and Layout screen are responsive on desktop. The default value for tablets and mobiles is the desktop value, but you can specify different values. 5. To move between **Mobile**, **Tablet**, and **Desktop** view, use the **View Mode** 6. To search for existing cases, accounts, opportunities, or available product inventory, use Preview. 7. To narrow down the number of records shown based on predefined criteria set by your admin and your own custom selections, click the Show Filter icon. - Use the Quick Filters section to refine results for your session using fields like Account Name, Phone, Type, and Account Owner Alias. - Click  **Apply** to apply the selected filters. Admin-Defined Filters at the top are locked and can’t be changed or removed. For example, a filter like Billing State equals AL shows only accounts in Alabama. Quick Filters are temporary, not saved, and don’t affect other users. 8. To publish you site, click **Publish**. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Record List component (Full layout): ![The record list displays All Accounts](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/all_accounts.png) - **[Add Visibility Rule to the Record List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.add_visibility_rule_record_list_lwr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Control when to show or hide a Record List component based on user context or custom logic to deliver a more tailored experience. # Record Recommendations Following records helps keep you up-to-date on important changes to accounts, contacts, opportunities, and more. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
Chatter recommends records that you've viewed or edited, records that you own (but aren't following), and parent accounts of records that you're following. Chatter doesn't recommend records that your Salesforce administrator has disabled feed tracking for. Only opportunities, accounts, leads, contacts, and articles are included in record recommendations. To see an expanded list of your recommendations, click **More** in the Recommendations section. To see your record recommendations by object, click the object in the side filters. For example, click **Accounts** to view only your account recommendations. If no recommendations appear, then you're already following all the recommended records. #### See Also - [View Record Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_viewing_record_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "View the Chatter feed associated with a record you follow to see updates about the record.") # Record Related List The Record Related List component shows a list of all records that are related to a record. For example, if you’re looking at an account, you can see a related list of contacts, opportunities, and activity history for that account. Use the Record Related List component on a generic Record Detail page or on a custom page to show a list of related records. Members can create records from the list and from lookups. When a user expands the list of related records, the Record Related List page is displayed, which uses the Record Related List component under the hood. The component can occasionally be empty. For example, if there aren't any records related to the current record, or if the current record was created in the last 24 hours, no related items populate the component. 1. Select the **Record Related List** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Record ID | (Required) The ID of the parent record. | | Layout Design | Lay out width options to accommodate main body or narrow column placement of component. | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Related Lists for Campaign members have quick filters to narrow your results for fast results, but the resulting views can’t be saved or shared. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Related Record List component: ![Sample related record list component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/record_related_list_component.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Record Related List row-level actions aren’t available on mobile for Experience Builder sites. #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Records and List Views Configure your follow settings for records, view a Chatter feed on a list view, and learn more about record recommendations. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Automatically Follow the Records That You Create](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_stop_following.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you follow a record, information about updates to tracked record fields are sent to your What I Follow feed in Chatter. - **[View Record Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_viewing_record_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** View the Chatter feed associated with a record you follow to see updates about the record. - **[Record Recommendations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_record_recommendations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Following records helps keep you up-to-date on important changes to accounts, contacts, opportunities, and more. - **[Record Feed List View Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_records_listview_limits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Limitations for list views on record feeds. - **[View Chatter Feeds on List Views](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.customviews_chatter.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Switch to an object’s Chatter feed directly from a list view to see updates for the records included in the list view. - **[Follow Dashboards and Post Snapshots](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_dashboards_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter lets you track updates to your feed-tracked dashboards and post dashboard snapshots. The snapshot posts help other users follow changes in the dashboard data. # Records in Chatter Groups You can interact with your records through your Chatter groups. For example, you can create records and add and remove them from a group. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Create Records in Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_records_creating.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the group publisher to create records in Chatter groups. - **[Make Records Available in Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_records_add_follow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add records to groups to collaborate on and discuss the records as a team. - **[Remove Records from Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_records_remove.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Remove the records that you no longer use from your Chatter groups. # Redirect Users to a Custom Logout URL When your customers log out, they're directed to your site login page by default. To redirect them to a different location, such as your company website or a Visualforce page, specify a custom logout URL. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Next to your site name, click **Workspaces**. 3. Select **Administration**, and then select **Login & Registration**. 4. Under Logout Page URL, enter a complete URL to a webpage or a Visualforce page. #### See Also - [Customize Login, Self-Registration, and Password Management for Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize_login.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the default login, logout, password management, and self-registration options for your site. Or customize the behavior with Apex and Visualforce or Experience Builder (Site.com Studio) pages. You can also use dynamic URLs to brand your pages at run time.") # Reduce Tab Switching in Agentforce Service Agent on Experience Cloud Sites Use your deployed Agentforce Service agent within an Experience Cloud site to keep conversations and relevant content in one place for site visitors. This script prevents links the agent provides in its responses from opening new browser tabs, keeping you in the same conversation window and reducing navigation so you can find solutions faster. This procedure focuses on configuring the Experience Cloud site to optimize the agent's behavior for a single-tab experience. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Aura and LWR Experience Cloud Sites
Available in: Enhanced Chat with the Einstein for Service, Einstein Platform, Community, Community Plus, or Agentforce Service Agent add-on
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Foundations or Agentforce 1 Editions. Access to some standard agent actions requires additional add-on licenses
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site OR View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To create and manage Agentforce Service agents: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site OR View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To set up this Enhanced Chat: Customize Application AND Modify Metadata Through Metadata API Function
Before you begin, make sure you've completed these steps: - An Enhanced Chat channel configured and integrated with your Agentforce Service agent. - An Experience Cloud site is active and accessible. - The Agentforce Service agent is built and ready for deployment. - The Enhanced Chat component is added to your Experience Cloud site using Experience Builder. - Knowledge is set up and configured, as the next step involves mapping data categories. These steps connect your Agentforce Service agent to your Experience Cloud site and apply a script to ensure links open in the same tab. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and select **All Sites**. 2. Find your Experience Site, and then click **Workspaces**. 3. In Experience Builder, confirm that the Enhanced Chat component is added to the builder page. 4. In Experience Builder, confirm that the MIAW component is added to the builder page. 5. Map the site’s configured data categories to the corresponding topics and actions in the Agentforce Service agent configuration. 6. In Experience Builder, from Settings, select **Advanced**, and then select **Edit Head Markup**. Add this script to make sure that links in ASA responses open in the same tab. ```java ``` 7. **Publish** your site. #### See Also - [Configure Your Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_parent_configure.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Quickly Set Up Enhanced Chat for Testing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.miaw_setup_stages.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Create and Send Enhanced Links in Messaging Sessions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.messaging_components_enhanced_link.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Regenerate a File Preview If a file preview is of poor quality, you can try to regenerate the preview. Available for Salesforce Files and CRM content documents that can be previewed. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer
User Permissions Needed
To regenerate a preview: Customize Application
When you regenerate a preview, the new preview request is added to a queue and the existing preview is deleted. During this time, users won’t see a file preview. With very large files, only the first 500 pages will render in the preview. File previews aren’t available for files larger than 25 MB, unknown file types, password-protected files, and copy-protected PDFs. For files that you can’t preview, the Preview option isn’t available on feeds or list views, and files appear as generic file type icons in the feed. 1. From Setup, enter Regenerate Previews in the Quick Find box, then select **Regenerate Previews**. 2. Specify either the Content Document ID or the Content Version ID. When you specify a Content Document ID but don’t specify a the Version Number, the latest version is used. To find the Content Document ID, click View File Details from the file menu on Files Home or from the file preview. From the file detail page, the Content Document ID displays in the file URL following the ContentDocument/ section. ![Content Document ID in file URL](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_preview_docID.png) To see whether the preview regenerated successfully, navigate to the file detail page. # Related Articles List The Related Articles List component displays the articles related to the article the user is viewing. In the Page Editor, you can configure the Related Articles List component on the Article Detail page. The component can occasionally be empty. For example, if there aren't any articles related to the current article, or if the current article was published in the last 24 hours, no related items populate the component. 1. Select the **Related Articles List** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Number of Articles | Enter the maximum number of articles to display in the list. You can display up to 10 articles. The default value is 5. | | Title | Enter a title for the list of related articles. The default text is Related Articles. | | Show Views | Select to show the number of times an article is viewed ![View count icon and count](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/view_count.png). Clear to hide the view count. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Related Articles List component: ![Related Articles List page element](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/related_articles.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Related List - Single The Related List - Single component shows a list of related records based on one specific object. For example, if you’re looking at a contact detail page, you can specify to see the cases related to that contact, without seeing all other types of related records. Use the Related List - Single component on an object page or on a custom page to add specific, related information in context for the page. Members can create records from the list and from lookups. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note A new version of the Related List - Single component is available in Experience Builder with the Winter ’21 release. If you use the old version of the component, shown as Deprecated in the component properties, the component still functions. If you delete your deprecated component, you must use the new version. To see all related records, use the Record Related List component. When a user expands a related record, the detail page is displayed, which uses the Related List - Single component under the hood. The component can occasionally be empty. For example, if there aren't any records related to the current record, or if the current record was created in the last 24 hours, no related items populate the component. 1. Add the **Related List - Single** component to the page and select it. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Related List | The specific record type to retrieve and display for the page context. | | Layout Design | Layout width options to accommodate main body or narrow column placement of your component. | | Change Related List Display | Format presentation options for items in the list. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Related List - Single component: ![Related List - Single component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/related_record_list_single_component.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Row-level actions aren’t available on mobile for Experience Builder sites. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Related List - Single component isn’t supported for Files in the Salesforce mobile and tablet view. # Related Questions List The Related Questions List component displays the questions related to the question the user is viewing. In the Page Editor, you can configure the Related Questions List component on the Question Detail page. To use this component, your site must have a best answer for at least one question. The component can occasionally be empty. For example, if there aren't any questions related to the current question, or if the current question was asked in the last 24 hours, no related items populate the component. 1. Select the **Related Questions List** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Number of Questions | Enter the maximum number of questions to display in the list. You can display up to 10 questions. The default value is 5. | | Title | Enter a title for the list of related questions. The default text is Related Questions. | | Show Views | Select to show only the number of times a question is viewed, remove liked or commented on,![View count icon and count](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/view_count.png). Clear to hide the view count. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Related Questions List component: ![Related Questions List page element](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/related_questions.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Related Record List The Related Record List component shows, in a list, a single type of record related to a record. For example, if you’re looking at an account, you can see a related list of contacts for that account. Use the Related Record List component on a generic Related Record List page or on a custom page. Members can create records from the list and from lookups. When a user expands the list of related records, the Related Record List page is displayed, which uses the Related Record List component under the hood. The component can occasionally be empty. For example, if there aren't any records related to the current record, or if the current record was created in the last 24 hours, no related items populate the component. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Using the Related List - Single component also allows you to show a single related list on a record. The Related List - Single component fills in the parent record ID dynamically, and allows you to select the related list you want to show. 1. Select the **Related Record List** component in the page you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Parent Record ID | The ID of the parent record. | | Related List Name | Name of the related list. | | Breadcrumbs | Select to show breadcrumbs. | | Custom Title | Select to display the title in the header. | | Row Numbers | Select to show row numbers. | | Refresh | Select to display the manual refresh button. | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Related Lists for Campaign members have quick filters to narrow your results for fast results, but the resulting views can’t be saved or shared. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Related Record List component: ![Related Record List component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/related_record_list_component.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Related Record List row-level actions aren’t available on mobile for Experience Builder sites. #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Related Topics List The Related Topics List component displays the topics related to the topic being viewed by the user. In the Page Editor, you can configure the Related Topics List component on the Topics View page. For related topics to show up in this list, three different users must create at least three posts each, and their posts must have the same topics attached. The related topics appear for the topics attached in the posts. 1. Select the **Related Topics List** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Title | Enter a title for the list of related topics. The default text is Related Topics List. | | Topic ID | This field populates dynamically with the topic ID. | | Show the number of people using the Topic | Shows the number of people who are using the topic. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Related Topics List component: ![Related Topics page element](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/related_topics.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Remove a Bookmark from a Chatter Post When you remove a bookmark from a Chatter post, the post no longer appears in the Bookmarked feed. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
1. From the Chatter home page, click the Bookmarked feed. 2. Find the post whose bookmark you want to remove. 3. Open the post’s overflow menu by clicking ![Post overflow menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_feed_dropdown_arrow.png). 4. Select **Remove Bookmark**. # Remove a File from a Record Remove a file from a single record that the file’s attached to. Unlike deleting a file, removing doesn’t affect the file on other records or posts, and the file remains in Files home. To remove files from records, you must have at least collaborator access on the file. On the record’s Files related list, open the row-level action menu and choose **Remove from Record**. ![Screenshot of Files related list with Remove from Record option.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/files_remove_from_record.png) #### See Also - [Delete a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_deleting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you delete a file from Salesforce Files, it’s also removed from all locations where it was shared.") # Remove Records from Chatter Groups Remove the records that you no longer use from your Chatter groups. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To remove group records:
  • Read on the object
  • Access to the group
Anyone with access to a record in a group can remove it from the group. 1. On the group detail page, click **Show All** next to the Group Records list. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The group records list appears on the group detail page only if your administrator lets you add existing records to groups. 2. Optionally, select an option from the **Filter By** list to view records of that type. 3. Find the record that you want to remove, then click **Remove** next to the record’s name. Removing a record from a group deletes the group-record relationship. It doesn’t remove the record itself. You can restore the group-record relationship from the Recycle Bin. # Remove Topics from Chatter Posts If a topic no longer applies to a Chatter post, you can remove it. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To remove topics from posts: Assign Topics
You can remove topics from Chatter posts in the feed, whether they’re regular topics or hashtag topics. Removing topics—whether below or inside the post, like hashtags—doesn’t delete them altogether. It only removes them from the post. Before you remove a topic from a post, consider whether you or someone else added it. Someone that you’re not aware of may be tracking updates using topics. 1. In the top corner of the post, click ![Feed drop-down arrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_feed_dropdown_arrow.png). 2. Click **Edit Topics**. 3. Click ![Remove topic](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_delete_x.png) next to the topic you want removed from the post. 4. Click **Done** or press ENTER. Removing a topic from a post removes the post from the topic feed on the topic detail page and from the feeds of any followers. # Rename the Chatter Tab Most likely, many of your Experience Cloud site members use the Chatter tab as their home base. You can customize it to meet your company's branding. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To rename the Chatter tab:

Customize Application

OR

View Setup and Configuration

AND

Be designated as a translator

The Chatter tab is the fastest way for your Experience Cloud site members to see what's most important to them: activity feeds, groups, bookmarks, files, and more. Many of your site members use the Chatter tab as their home base. Customize the name of the Chatter tab in your site to match your company branding—. For example, you can use your company's name or any other name that’s recognizable to your members. 1. From Setup, enter Rename Tabs and Labels in the Quick Find box, then select **Rename Tabs and Labels**. 2. Select your default language from the Select Language dropdown list at the top of the page. 3. Under Chatter Tabs in Experience Cloud sites, click **Edit** next to the site you want to edit. 4. Type the singular and plural versions of your preferred tab name, for example, Partner and Partners. Select Starts with a vowel sound if appropriate. 5. Click **Save**. # Reply to Chatter Email Notifications When you receive certain email notifications, you can conveniently perform some actions by replying directly from your email. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
You can reply to the types of email that are listed in the table, or any notification from reply@chatter.salesforce.com. Before you can reply to email notifications, your administrator must enable email replies for your organization. | Action You Want to Take | Type of Notification You Received | Text to Include in Your Reply | Limits | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Bookmark a post | Someone posted to your profile or a group, mentioned you in a post, or shared your post | bookmark | N/A | | Comment on a post | Someone posted, commented on your post, also commented after you, or mentioned you in a post or comment | The text of your comment | 1,000 characters maximum. Replies that exceed the limit are truncated to the first 1,000 characters. | | Follow someone | Someone posted, commented on your post, also commented after you, or mentioned you in a post or comment | follow | N/A | | Like a comment | Someone commented on your post or also commented after you | like or +1 | N/A | | Like a post | Someone posted to your profile or a group, mentioned you in a post, or shared your post | like or +1 | N/A | | Mute a post | Any post or comment email when you no longer want to receive notifications for the original post | mute | N/A | | Respond to a Chatter message | Someone sent you a message | The text of your response | 10,000 characters maximum. Replies that exceed the limit are truncated to the first 10,000 characters. | | Unfollow someone | Someone posted, commented on your post, also commented after you, or mentioned you in a post or comment | unfollow | N/A | | Unlike a post | Someone posted, commented on your post, or also commented after you on a post that you previously liked | unlike or –1 | N/A | Before replying, check the email address that displays in the To field of your email. Valid addresses contain tokens, or long character strings, both before and after the @ symbol, such as w8t27apy1@j321imd9gbs.d8rx.d.chatter.yourInstance.salesforce.com. Some email applications automatically use the From address from the original email, reply@chatter.salesforce.com, which isn’t a valid address for receiving replies. If you see this shortened address in the To field of your reply email, replace it with the valid reply-to address in the email header information. For example, in an application such as IBM® Lotus Notes®: 1. Open the original email. 2. Click **View** | **Show** | **Page Source**. 3. In the Reply-To section, copy the email address that looks like: w8t27apy1@j321imd9gbs.d8rx.d.chatter.yourInstance.salesforce.com. 4. Paste the reply-to address in the To field of your reply email. Consider these tips when sending email replies. - Send replies from the email address specified on your profile. If you use email aliases or email forwarding services that send replies from a different email address, your replies aren’t processed. - To bookmark, mute, like or unlike, and follow or unfollow, use the exact single word or the exact text in your replies. For example, when you want to like, enter only like (case insensitive) or +1 in the body of your email. We ignore extra white spaces or the original message that some email applications include and process the reply as a like, a bookmark, or other response. However, if you include any other text in the body, such as Like! or Like this?, we process your reply as a comment. - We treat replies that contain your personal email signature as part of your comment. Default signatures inserted by mobile devices, such as Sent from my iPhone, are automatically removed. Before you reply, delete custom signatures and any extra text you don't want posted to Chatter. Or, add a separator line to the top of your signature to have it automatically removed. The separator line must have a minimum of one of the following characters: - Dash (\-) - Equal sign (\=) - Underscore (\_) You can use any combination of these characters or dash dash space (\-- ), which respects [RFC 3676 4.3](http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3676#section-4.3). - We ignore attachments, @mentions, and inline images in replies. - The Reply to Chatter feature only works with plain text email replies. This feature doesn’t work if your mail app only sends content wrapped in HTML. #### See Also - [Like Posts and Comments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_like.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Like posts or comments to show your approval and receive email notifications if others comment on that post. You receive notifications only if you’ve selected to in your personal Chatter settings.") # Report and Dashboard Considerations for Sites If the Reports and Dashboards tabs are exposed in the Experience Cloud site, external users can access reports and dashboards. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura and Visualforce sites
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important To allow external users to create and edit reports, your org must use the enhanced sharing model. You can give permission to create and edit reports to Experience Cloud site users with the following licenses: Experience Cloud site licenses: - Customer Community Plus - Customer Community Plus Login - Partner Community - Partner Community Login - Lightning External Apps Plus Portal licenses: - Customer Portal Manager - Customer Portal Manager Custom (for Enterprise Administration users) - Customer Portal Manager Standard - Customer Portal Manager User - Gold Partner - Ideas Only Portal - Overage Customer Portal Manager Custom - Overage Customer Portal Manager Standard - Partner - Silver Partner (“Export Reports” permission isn’t available to this license) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - These permissions aren’t available to high-volume user licenses, such as Customer Community, High Volume Customer Portal, Service Cloud Portal, and Authenticated Website. - External users with legacy portal licenses can create and edit reports in Experience Cloud sites, but not in portals. - Users with Customer Account Portal, Partner Central, and Customer Service templates can create, edit, and delete reports in Experience Cloud sites. If you don’t see the New Report button, enable reports and add the Report List page to your site. If the button doesn’t appear after you enable Reports, republish your site. - Objects that don’t have a sharing rule for external users can’t be accessed by external users with the licenses listed. If an object is set to Public Read and no sharing rule is present, it shows an error on the report when accessed by the external user. - Objects that don’t support standard sharing (using Sharing settings) aren’t visible in reports intended for external users. After you grant permission to your external users, they still can’t: - Schedule reports or dashboards for email and refresh at a specific date and time ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The refresh button isn’t available in Experience Builder sites accessed through mobile devices. - Create, edit, or view reports in the Unfiled Public Reports folder All role-based external users in your Experience Cloud site can refresh dashboards set up with “Run as specified user” and “Run as logged-in user” up to 1,000 times daily per org. Scheduled and automatic refreshes don’t count against the limit. There is no refresh limit for internal users. All role-based external users can be selected for the “Run as specified user” option. #### See Also - [Create a Report from Your Site with Report Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_report_builder_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With the new Report Builder page, external users can create, edit, and delete reports directly from their Experience Cloud site.") # Report Chart Use the Report Chart component to add reports to your site pages. Display the reports that you set up in your Salesforce org’s public folder. When you click a report, you see the Report Detail page, which shows the Report Summary component. The report summary includes details from the source report in Salesforce. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note In Report Chart properties, only the reports that have a chart appear on the dropdown list. 1. Drag the Report Chart component to the page, and select it. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Report Name | Reports with charts that are available for use in the site. | | Filter By | Setting a filter on the report chart data is supported only for record pages. If you set a filter option, the Report Chart component displays only that filtered data to users. | | Refresh Time (Minutes) | The number of minutes between each report refresh. | | Show report name | Adds the report name to the site page. | | Show refresh button | Shows a refresh button, so users can refresh the chart. | ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_warning.png) Warning Before Spring '25, Instead of a report’s developer name, the Report Chart component uses the ID of an associated report to populate the component. If a site page is deployed to another environment (such as from Sandbox to Production), the component breaks if the target org doesn't contain a report with the same ID. If the target org contains a different report that uses the same ID as the source org, the component references the wrong report. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Report Chart component: ![Report Chart](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/report_chart.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting Spring '25, the developer name is supported for Report Charts. However, the Report Chart component won't render on the site if it's in a private folder (This can happen if you move the report chart to a private folder after adding it to a site) or if it contains a duplicate developer name. In both cases, you can't retrieve the Report Chart ID. # Report List The Report List component lets users view reports in list form. The report list can be filtered with these criteria: - Recent - Created by Me - Private Reports - Public Reports - All Reports In addition, users have access to report folders. Folders include: - Created by Me - Shared with Me - All Folders The Report List component doesn’t have any editable properties. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - The Report List component can only be used on the Report List page. - The Filter, Group, and Summary options aren't available to users accessing reports from an Experience Cloud site on mobile devices, including apps accessed through the mobile browser and apps created with Mobile Publisher. # Report on Chatter with the Dashboards Package The Chatter Dashboards package for Salesforce Classic includes multiple dashboards, over 100 reports, and custom report types. Use the dashboards to monitor and manage Chatter engagement. ### Required Editions
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer, and Performance Editions
Use the Salesforce Chatter Dashboards package to: - View overall Chatter adoption with detailed metrics and monthly trends - Monitor group adoption with membership and engagement metrics, such as the number of posts, comments, likes, and the top contributors - Monitor content creation and user engagement, such as the top files, trending content, and the top contributors - View topic taxonomy and monitor topic assignments, including the most assigned topics and the top assigners - Create customized reports using existing groupings such as department, country, role, or profile You can install the [Salesforce Chatter Dashboards](https://appexchange.salesforce.com/listingDetail?listingId=a0N30000000pviyEAA) from AppExchange. After the package is installed, you can access your new dashboards, reports, and custom report types alongside all your other Salesforce dashboards and reports. As newer versions of the package become available, you can upgrade your package by reinstalling it. If you customized any of the reports and dashboards, your customizations are retained during the upgrade. | Dashboard | Description | | --- | --- | | Overview | See the overall state of Chatter at a glance. | | Adoption by Department | Get an overview of department metrics for groups, user profiles, and topic adoption. | | Files | Track file uploads, downloads, engagement, and content creators. | | Groups | Monitor feed and member activity in Chatter groups. | | Management | Track unanswered questions and posts, group growth rates, and the overall health of your groups. | | Q&A | Track recent activity for questions, answers, and best answers posted in groups. | | Topics | Track your Chatter topics activity. | | User | Track recent activity for questions, answers, and best answers in user profiles. | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The reports in this package return data for all Chatter. If your organization uses an Experience Cloud site, we recommend that you install the [Salesforce Communities Management (for Communities with Chatter)](https://appexchange.salesforce.com/listingDetail?listingId=a0N3000000B5XHsEAN) package instead. With this package, you can report on Chatter usage in your internal org and in your site. You can't customize a report that’s based on records that you're following in Chatter. # Report on Experience Cloud Sites with AppExchange Packages The Salesforce Communities Management packages give community managers an essential starter set of dashboards and reports to keep tabs on activity and engagement directly in Experience Workspaces. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura and Visualforce sites
User Permissions Needed
To install AppExchange packages: Download AppExchange Packages
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Use the Salesforce Communities Management package to: - Take advantage of the newest features using preconfigured reports (use the latest package version) - View the latest metrics and rapidly spot trends - Determine how fast your Experience Cloud site is growing - Find out who your most engaged members are - Discover which discussions people and groups are most excited about - Identify areas that need attention - Take immediate action on recent activity with Insights reports - Understand the health of your community with the Service Community Scorecard ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To use the preconfigured Insights reports, your Experience Cloud site must use Chatter. During installation, dashboard and report folders are automatically installed in your internal org. You also have the option to give your community managers access to the package contents so you don’t have to share the dashboard and report folders with them later. If you have no previous Insights or dashboards mapped in Experience Workspaces, they’re automatically mapped for you during installation. Search AppExchange for [Salesforce Communities Management (for Communities with Chatter)](https://appexchange.salesforce.com/listingDetail?listingId=a0N3000000B5XHsEAN) or [Salesforce Communities Management (for Communities without Chatter)](https://appexchange.salesforce.com/listingDetail?listingId=a0N3000000B5XI7EAN). Each package has related documentation, attached as a PDF, to help guide you with your installation and customizations. After the package is installed, you can access your new dashboards and reports alongside all your other Salesforce dashboards and reports. When you view the dashboards in Experience Workspaces, site-specific data is displayed. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The mappings for the Moderation report folders are included in the Salesforce Communities Management for Experience Cloud Sites managed package and you can’t delete them. To remove the mappings, uninstall the package. The uninstall procedure deletes all report folders and dashboards included in the package. #### See Also - [Enable and Map Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_dashboards_for_cm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use dashboards in Experience Cloud sites to measure their success. You can even map a dashboard to the Experience Workspaces Home page. Map custom dashboards or use the ones provided in our AppExchange package.") # Report Summary The Report Summary component lets users see a snapshot of the report details from the source report. Use the Report Summary component on the Report Detail page to see a report’s details. Using the component, members can see a report chart, filter data, see the feed, refresh the report, or change its settings. Members with sufficient permissions can also clone, save, export, or subscribe to the report. 1. Select the **Report Summary** component in the Report Detail page. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Report Id | This field autopopulates with the record ID of the report. | # Reports and Dashboards for Site End Users Creating reports for your site’s end users and giving them the ability to access the reports is a powerful tool. For example, your partners can see reports on leads and opportunities to sell faster. Some reporting capabilities require add-on licenses. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura and Visualforce sites
- **[Allow External Users to Create and Edit Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reporting_external_users_report_mgmt.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Partner and customer users can create, delete, and edit reports in their own personal folder or, with sufficient permission, in a privately shared folder. Grant partner and customer users permissions to create and edit reports through their profiles or permission sets. After you grant the required permissions, partners and customers can use the drag-and-drop Report Builder tool. - **[Allow External Users to Access and Report on Tasks and Events](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reporting_tasks_events.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Take the following steps to give access to your portal and Experience Cloud site users to report on tasks and events. # Reputation Leaderboard The Reputation Leaderboard component displays a list of site members with the highest reputation points. In the Page Editor, you can configure the Reputation Leaderboard component on the Home page. 1. Select the **Reputation Leaderboard** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Title Enter a title for the reputation leaderboard. The default text is Leaderboard.
Number of Users Enter the maximum number of users to display. You can display up to 10. The default is 5.
Show user rank Displays the ranks of the users shown in the leaderboard.
Show logged-in user
  • If the logged-in user does have rank, the user is highlighted on the leaderboard.
  • If the logged-in user doesn’t rank on the leaderboard, a row for the user appears at the bottom of the leaderboard.
  • If the logged-in user ranks on the leaderboard, AND the Show User Rank checkbox is selected, AND Knowledge and Points or Knowledge and Last Active is displayed, the user sees a message about their ranking. For example, “Congratulations! You rank #2.”
Show help bubble Displays a question mark icon at the top of the leaderboard that a user can hover over to get more info.
Exclude internal users Excludes internal users from the leaderboard.
Help Bubble Text Enter the message that appears when a user hovers over the question mark icon. The message can be up to 500 characters. The default text is Earn points and climb to new levels when you contribute in the experience!
Display Users

Determines what information about a user shows in the leaderboard. Options include:

  • Levels and Points—Shows a user’s reputation level and total number of reputation points.
  • Knowledge and Points—Shows a user’s total number of reputation points and topics that they’re knowledgeable about.
  • Knowledge and Last Active—Shows topics a user is knowledgeable about and when the user was last active.
Topic Knowledge Label (Up to 20 chars.) When Knowledge is shown in the leaderboard, this text appears before the topics a user is knowledgeable about. The default text is Knows about. For example, if a user is knowledgeable about backpacks, their leaderboard entry can say “Knows about: Backpacks.”
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Reputation Leaderboard component:

Level and Points

Reputation Leaderboard component

Topics and Points

Reputation leaderboard with topics and points

Topics and Last Active

Reputation leaderboard with topics and last active
#### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Reputation Overview Your reputation in the Experience Cloud site directly corresponds to how active you are. The more you post, comment, and share, the higher your reputation level is. This feature requires Chatter to be enabled for the site. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Your reputation level appears on your profile page and when any user hovers over your name. It’s visible to other members so that they know how influential you are. When you start out, you are at the lowest level. As you become more active, you gain points and your reputation level increases. Increases in reputation levels are posted to your feed. In other words, as people see you participating and sharing your knowledge, your credibility and influence grows. These are the default actions that increase your reputation level. - Posting - Commenting - Liking a post or comment - Sharing a post - People sharing your posts - People commenting on your posts - People liking your posts or comments - Mentioning someone - Being mentioned - Asking a question - Answering a question - Receiving an answer - Marking an answer as best - People marking your answer as best - Endorsing someone for knowledge on a topic - Being endorsed for knowledge on a topic Your administrator defines the activities that help you gain points. They also set the number of points for each action. - **[Enable Reputation in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reputation_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable reputation so that site members are recognized and rewarded for participating. - **[Set Up Reputation Levels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reputation_level_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update the default reputation levels to meet your Experience Cloud site’s needs and help motivate your members. - **[Set Up Reputation Points](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reputation_points_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a point system to reward users for participating in the Experience Cloud site. - **[How is my Experience Cloud site reputation calculated?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_faq_how_is_reputation_calculated.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The reputation level on your profile is calculated based on your total points. # Request Approval Use the Request Approval component so credentialed site visitors can submit a record for approval. You can configure one flow approval process in the Request Approval component. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience.
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
  • OR
  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
To publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
  • OR
  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin or publisher in that site
To submit a record for approval in an Experience Builder site Be a member of the site and have access to the record
Before you add the Request Approval component to an object details page, design an autolaunched flow approval process. Consider the input that you want from credentialed site visitors. To require credentialed site visitors to select an approver, assign one or more approval steps to the `firstApprover` input variable. To expose submitter comments to approvers, use the `submissionComments` input variable. Test and activate the flow approval process. 1. Build a flow approval process in Flow Builder. 2. Activate the flow approval process. 3. In Experience Builder, go to the relevant object details page. 4. Drag the Request Approval component into position on an object details page in your site. ![Request Approval component in Components panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_request_approval_component.png) 5. Configure the component to affect how it appears to site visitors. ![Request Approval component Properties panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_request_approval_component_properties.png) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important The Record ID is set automatically. Don’t change the field value. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | **Title** | The component title that credentialed site visitors see at run time. The default is Request Approval. | | **Flow Approval Process** | The active, autolaunched flow approval process to run when a credentialed site visitor clicks Start. | | **Flow Approval Process Label** | A label that identifies the flow approval process to credentialed site visitors. | | **Hide submitter comments** | Select to hide the Approval Request Comments field from credentialed site visitors. The component shows the field by default. | | **Require submitter to select an approver** | Select to require that the credentialed site visitor select an approver before submitting. Select this option if the flow approval process assigns one or more steps to the `firstApprover` input variable, to prevent the flow approval process from failing. | ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Changes you make don’t affect how the component appears in Experience Builder. 6. Save your work. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Request Approval component. ![A Request Approval component on an object details page.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_request_approval_component_example.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") - [_Automate Your Business Processes_: Configure a Single Flow Approval Process for an Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.automate_automated_approvals_deploy_request_approval_component_to_site.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Requirements for Distributing Lightning Bolt Solutions Before Salesforce can recognize a Lightning Bolt Solution that’s ready for distribution on AppExchange, your solution must meet certain requirements. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Before you distribute your solution, use these checklists. ## Requirements for Lightning Bolt Solutions For all Lightning Bolt Solutions that are ready for distribution, make sure that you have: ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Included at least one of the following: - A custom Lightning app - A flow category that contains one or more flows - An Experience Builder template ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Tested all site functionality and appearance across desktop, tablet, and mobile devices ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Confirmed that your customizations have no regressions (each release) ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Verified that Salesforce approves of all third-party technology that you use ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Ensured proper code coverage, and executed basic performance testing ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Adhered to all Salesforce Lightning developer guidelines (such as attribute enforcements) ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Included written installation and configuration documentation ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Developed appropriate customer support for custom functionality ## Requirements When Including an Experience Builder Template If your solution includes a template, make sure that you have: ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Developed a custom Experience Builder template ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Included at least one custom Lightning component (API version 40.0 or later) ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Included at least one custom Theme Layout component with a unique visual design ![checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_checkbox.png) Tested the template with the Strict CSP enabled in your site settings ## Best Practices - To improve automation and code coverage, use a Salesforce testing framework, such as the Lightning Testing Service (LTS). - Include only essential Visualforce components and pages. #### See Also - [_Experience Cloud Developer Guide_: Create Custom Theme Layout Components for Experience Builder](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/components_config_for_builder_layouts.htm) - [_Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide_: Salesforce Lightning CLI](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.lightning.meta/lightning/cli_intro.htm) - [_ISVforce Guide_: Publish Your Solution on the AppExchange](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.packagingGuide.meta/packagingGuide/packaging_distributing.htm) - [_Security Developer Center_](https://developer.salesforce.com/devcenter/security) # Requirements for the Salesforce Chatter App Salesforce Chatter is supported for devices running Windows Anniversary Edition. Salesforce performs automated and manual testing of devices running the Windows 10 Anniversary Edition only. Customers aren’t blocked from using Salesforce Chatter on untested operating systems. The operating systems are subject to change, with or without notice. # Restrict Experience Cloud Site User Access to Cases Determine whether users with Customer Community Plus licenses can view and edit cases in which they’re listed as the contact. You can disable the standard sharing behavior that grants the assigned contact and everyone in their role hierarchy access to a case. After disabling this sharing behavior, you can control access to cases by creating a manual share or by using Apex managed sharing. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
For example, Acme has offices around the world, and it wants to keep its cases private within each office location. By disabling the standard sharing behavior, Experience Cloud site users who transfer from one of Acme’s locations to another can no longer bring their assigned cases with them. 1. From Setup, enter Sharing Settings in the Quick Find box, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. In the Other Settings section, deselect **Grant site users access to related cases**. # Restrict Record Types in a Library Library administrators can choose which record types are available in a library. They can also set the default record type for publishing content to the library. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Record types available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Record types available in: Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To restrict record types:

Manage record types and layouts for Files

OR

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

1. On the Libraries tab, select a library from the **My Libraries** area. 2. Click **Record Types**. 3. Optionally, change the default record type for the library. 4. Select the Restrict the record types available in the library checkbox. 5. Select one or both of the following options:
Allow content with any record type to be linked to this librarySelect this option if you want to enable content published in other libraries to be shared to the library where you have restricted record types. The content in other libraries can be shared regardless of the record types used.
Do not apply record type restrictions to existing contentSelect this option if you don’t want to receive warnings regarding existing content in the library. You won’t be alerted if existing content uses record types that you exclude from the library. This option refers to notifications only; existing content is not affected by restricted record types.
6. For each record type that you want to allow in the library, move it from the Available Record Types list to the Selected Record Types list, and click **Save**. - If the library already contains published content, selecting the Restrict the record types available in the library option automatically moves all the record types used by the published content to the Selected Record Types list. - Deselecting the Restrict the record types available in the library option automatically moves any record types in the Selected Record Types list to the Available record Types list. - When changing a file's managing library, the file's record type must be permitted in the new managing library. - When sharing a file with a library, the file's record type must be permitted in the shared library unless the Allow content with any record type to be linked to this library option is selected for the shared library. - When the default record type for a user's profile differs from the default record type for a library, the user profile default takes priority when a user with that profile shares a file with the library. _General_ is used as the default record type when no default is set for the user profile. - When there are no record types in common between a user profile and a library, the default record type for a library is available to users with that user profile who are sharing files with the library. # Review and Approve Posts and Comments in Your Experience Cloud Site Moderation rules to review and approve content ensure that non-compliant and inappropriate content isn’t immediately visible to everyone in your Experience Cloud site. Posts and comments pending review aren’t displayed in the feed; only the author and moderators can see pending posts and comments in the feed. An author can see a pending comment on a pending post only if the author posted both. After you set up the rules, moderators can approve content directly in the feed and in Experience Workspaces. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To approve, delete, or edit posts and comments that are pending review: An author can see a pending comment on a pending post only if the author posted both. Can Approve Feed Post and Comment
To approve, delete, or edit posts and comments that are pending review:

Can Approve Feed Post and Comment

AND

Access Experience Management OR Manage Experiences OR Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the Experience Cloud site

![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Can Approve Feed Post and Comment permission applies not only to moderation but also to any Chatter feed a user can access. In other words, an assigned user can edit or delete any post or comment. They can take these actions whether in an Experience Cloud site or their internal Salesforce org, in any feed they have access to. To set up a moderation rule to review and approve posts and comments, in Experience Workspaces, go to **Moderation** | **Rules** and create a content rule that uses the Review action. Here are some ways that you can use rules to review content. Self-Service Does your site allow members to self-register? You can set up a rule to review and approve questions from all your self-registering users. Use member criteria that includes only your guest user profile and filters for members who were created in the past seven days. Have spammers ever attacked your site? Use member criteria that includes only your guest user profile and filters for members that have never contributed. Partners Want to ensure that your partners aren’t discussing a recent acquisition or other sensitive transactions? You can set up a rule to review posts and comments that include keywords such as “acquisition” or “merger.” Employees Does your site require HIPAA compliance? Set up your rules to review posts and comments from all your employees. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Users must have Manage Experiences or Create and Set Up Experiences permissions to create moderation rules. _Pending Review_ is displayed in the header of the post or comment until it’s approved. Remember that while a post or comment is pending approval, the author can still edit or delete it, however they can’t comment on it. An author can see a pending comment on a pending post only if the author posted both. To prevent the author from editing the post or comment, you can disable feed post editing for certain users. There are two ways to review and approve posts and comments. - Use the preconfigured Pending Discussions Insights report on the Moderation Overview page in Experience Workspaces. To get this report, [install the Salesforce Communities Management (for Communities with Chatter)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reporting_dashboards_package.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Salesforce Communities Management packages give community managers an essential starter set of dashboards and reports to keep tabs on activity and engagement directly in Experience Workspaces.") package from the AppExchange. Use the Pending Discussions report to see all the posts and comments that are pending review. The report displays the contents of posts and comments so you can quickly assess whether that content is spam or harmless. You can then approve or delete the item directly from the report. You can also perform mass-action and approve multiple items at once. - Approve posts and comments directly in the feed. In the feed, users with the Can Approve Feed Post and Comment permission see an extra action in the post or comment dropdown menu. If the item is inappropriate, they can delete it. If it has a typo, they can edit it. After the item is approved, the author receives an email letting them know the item is approved and providing a link to it. Email notifications, such as @mentions notifications, are sent only after the item is approved. #### See Also - [Create Rules to Moderate Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderator_manage_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Moderation rules help protect your site from spammers, bots, and offensive or inappropriate content. Create and modify rules for your Experience Cloud site to moderate member-generated content. Each rule specifies the member-generated content the rule applies to, the criteria to enforce the rule on, and the moderation action to take.") - [Feed Post and Comments Editing Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_feed_post_editing.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Rich Content Editor The Rich Content Editor component lets you add formatted custom text to your Aura site pages, along with images and videos. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you prefer to create and edit content in HTML, use the HTML Editor component instead. 1. In Experience Builder, drag the Rich Content Editor component from the Components panel onto the page. ![Rich Content Editor in Components panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_rich_text.png) 2. Add and format text (1), and add links (2), images (3), or YouTube or Vimeo videos (4) directly in the editor. ![Rich Content Editor](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_rich_text_editor.png) When you add an image to your site for the first time, an asset file is automatically created and stored in the Org Asset Library. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If public access is enabled in Experience Builder at the page or site level, the **Let guest users view asset files and CMS content available to the site** preference is enabled in **Administration** | **Preferences**. This preference remains enabled as long as any page has public access enabled. If you upload images for use on site login pages, be sure that this preference is enabled. 3. Optionally, to add alt text to an image in the Rich Content Editor component, right-click the image when the component is in edit mode. Select **Add Alt Text**, enter your text, and click **Add**. #### See Also - [Find and Create Asset Files in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_find_create_assets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Upload and select images for your header, logo, rich content editor, and custom components using the file selector in Experience Builder. After they're uploaded, files are converted to packageable asset files and stored in your org asset library for easy reference and retrieval.") - [HTML Editor](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_html_editor.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The HTML Editor component lets you create and edit custom content in HTML.") # Sales Cloud Features Enable Sales Cloud features so that your partners can sell products quickly using partner relationship management (PRM) sites in Experience Cloud. Some objects and features, like Commerce Cloud, require add-on licenses. For more information on how to use PRM in Experience Cloud, check out [Manage Partner Relationships with Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_partners_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Cloud sites are a powerful tool for partner relationship management. Invite partners to a site and share CRM data with them to drive channel sales and marketing. Create a shared pool of leads and pass them to partner users in the site. Configure deal registration to allow partners to submit qualified deals, minimize channel conflict, and get early pipeline visibility. Use the power of Lightning and Salesforce and drive your bottom line together."). - **[Send Emails to Leads and Contacts from an Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_send_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable the Send Email button, so partner and customer users can send emails to leads and contacts from their Aura or Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site. - **[Set Up Approvals for External Users in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_approvals_for_external_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An approval process automates how records are approved in Salesforce. An approval process specifies each step of approval, including who to request approval from and what to do at each point of the process. Customer Community Plus and Partner users in your Experience Cloud site can be assigned as approvers on records or added directly to queues. They can see and take action through the My Approvals and Approval History related lists on the record. Approvals can also be triggered directly from the site’s feed. # Salesforce Chatter With Chatter, users can collaborate on sales opportunities, service cases, campaigns, and projects with embedded apps and custom actions. Salesforce channels, which bring Slack into Salesforce, are another way to collaborate on records. In new orgs created in Summer ’26 and later, Salesforce channels are enabled by default, and Chatter is disabled. You can enable Chatter in these orgs if necessary, and you can continue to use Chatter in existing orgs. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic
Available in: Essentials, Pro Suite, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To enable Chatter: Customize Application
For information on using Slack to collaborate in Salesforce, see [Salesforce Channels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.slack_salesforce_channels.htm&type=5&language=en_US). In orgs where Chatter is turned off, enable Chatter for any features that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs. See [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - **[Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is default disabled in new orgs. In some editions, Salesforce channels are default enabled in new orgs, and in others, admins can turn on this feature. With Salesforce channels, you can use Slack to communicate on record pages in Salesforce. You can still opt to use Chatter to communicate in Salesforce, or you can opt to use Salesforce channels for internal communications and Chatter for external communications. If you have any features that require Chatter functionality or APIs, such as Case Feed or an Experience Cloud site, enable Chatter in Setup. - **[Profile-Based Chatter Rollout Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_pbr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A profile-based rollout of Chatter makes Chatter available to a controlled set of users instead of all users in your organization. - **[Encryption for Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_encryption.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Encryption for Chatter lets you encrypt sensitive data when it’s stored, and not just when it’s transmitted over a network. As of the Winter ’18 release, mass encryption and decryption of Chatter data is generally available. To enable encryption for Chatter, contact support for help with setting it up. - **[Chatter Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure various Chatter features and customize the Chatter experience for your users on the Chatter Settings page in Setup. - **[Publisher Actions and Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_publisher_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Actions add functionality to the Chatter Publisher in Salesforce Classic. Actions let your users do more in Salesforce across all devices. - **[Enable Code Snippets and Assign Permissions to Use Them](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_code_snippets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use code snippets to enter syntax-highlighted code samples through the Chatter publisher. To make code snippets available, enable them and assign the permission to use them. There are two ways to enable code snippets and assign permission: through a user profile (step 1) or through a permission set (step 2). Code snippets are available in Lightning Experience and Experience Builder sites that are based on the Customer Service template. - **[Assign Pin Post Permission](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_pin_post.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Pin your most critical information to the top of a feed. In group and topics feeds, an authorized user can pin up to three posts. A pinned post stays in place until an authorized user unpins it. After you enable post pinning through Chatter Settings, you can assign the Pin Posts in Feeds permission through a permission set or a user profile. - **[Feed Tracking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_tracking_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Feed tracking detects changes to tracked record fields and posts them as updates in the What I Follow feed. Users who follow a record see those updates in their view of What I Follow, with one exception: Updates that users make themselves aren’t posted to What I Follow. Users can see those updates in their profile feeds. - **[Chatter Email Settings and Branding](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_email_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can change the format of your company’s outgoing emails and control whether users receive email notifications. - **[Add Your Custom Brand to Email Notifications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_email_customize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize your company’s Chatter email notifications to show your company’s sender information, footer text, and footer logo. - **[Chatter Post Actions and Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_feed_item_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Actions on posts and comments appear in the drop-down menu on a post or comment. Users can edit, bookmark, mute, and delete posts, add topics, and create tasks from posts. - **[Group Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_group_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The group layout lets you customize which fields, buttons, actions, and lists appear in Chatter groups. Changes to the group layout affect all groups in your organization, but they appear only on the group pages in the Salesforce mobile app. Changes to the group publisher appear in both the full Salesforce site and the Salesforce mobile app. - **[Topics for Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Topics for objects offers a powerful way to crowdsource your company's key themes and issues. Users can add topics to records to organize them by common themes. - **[Customize Chatter Influence](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_influence_customize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize activity thresholds for posts, comments, and likes to improve the Chatter influence calculation. - **[Allow Users to Thank Their Coworkers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.chatter_thanks_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Recognize your coworkers with thanks badges and post your thanks directly to the Chatter feed. - **[Guidelines for Deleting Your Users’ Chatter Messages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_message_administering.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce administrators with the Manage Chatter Messages permission can access all users’ private messages via SOAP API. You can view and delete any message (for example, for compliance). - **[Report on Chatter with the Dashboards Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Chatter Dashboards package for Salesforce Classic includes multiple dashboards, over 100 reports, and custom report types. Use the dashboards to monitor and manage Chatter engagement. - **[Chatter Desktop](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_chatter_dt.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Control access to Chatter Desktop and install and configure the Chatter Desktop Managed Version. # Salesforce Chatter for Windows 10 Anniversary Edition Users Salesforce Chatter is a downloadable app for Windows 10 Anniversary Edition users. Salesforce Chatter combines Chatter feeds and posting functionality with the power of an app optimized for Windows 10 users. Using the Salesforce Chatter app, you only have to log in to Salesforce once to access everything Salesforce has to offer in the app and the full site. You can launch directly into the full Salesforce site to view Lightning Experience pages, saving time and getting to information you need most faster. On the Windows Surface Pro 4, you can attach drawings made in the app to Chatter posts for new ways of collaborating on projects and sharing updates. - **[Requirements for the Salesforce Chatter App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.win_chatter_device_requirements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce Chatter is supported for devices running Windows Anniversary Edition. - **[Get the Salesforce Chatter App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.win_chatter_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce Chatter is available from the Windows Store. Devices must be running Windows 10 Anniversary Edition. - **[What’s Available in the Salesforce Chatter App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.win_chatter_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce Chatter gives you more ways than ever to collaborate with coworkers using Chatter. Salesforce Chatter requires only a single authentication to access all of Salesforce. You can also attach drawings directly from the app to Chatter posts. # Salesforce CMS Collections for Aura Sites Collections help you organize and display multiple pieces of content from your Salesforce CMS workspace on your Aura site. View, create, and edit collections in the Collections tab in the Content Management tile of your Aura site’s workspace. Create collections manually or use conditions for collections that update automatically. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note There are two ways to create collections of CMS content. - If you're working with an Aura site, create manual or conditional collections from the Content Management area of the Experience Workspace. - If you’re working with an enhanced LWR site, you can create and edit CMS collections manually in the enhanced CMS workspace where your CMS content lives. For more information see [Collections in Enhanced CMS Workspaces](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.cms_content_collections.htm&type=5&language=en_US). You can't use this type of collection from an enhanced CMS workspace on an Aura site. Before you can create collections, ensure that your Aura site is added as a channel to your CMS workspace or enhanced CMS workspace. Managing and curating content isn’t always done in a straight line. For instance, you can publish several news articles in your Salesforce CMS workspace and create a complete collection containing those articles. Or you can create a CMS collection before you write content in your CMS workspace. - Create a manual collection by adding individual CMS content items one at a time. You can add the manual collection to your Aura site, and the collection doesn’t change unless you add or remove content. - Create conditional collections to automatically show updated CMS content on your Aura site. With conditional collections, you can create and apply filters to collect content that meets your defined criteria. For instance, you can create a collection that automatically selects new products for the month, rather than manually creating collections each month. In your Aura site's Content Management workspace, the Collections page lists your existing collections by their title, type of content, and last modified date (1). On this page you can create a collection (2) and edit or delete collections from the row-level menu (3). ![Collections page in Content Management](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_cms_collections-managing.png) After you create collections, you can populate your Aura site with content by using CMS Collection components in Experience Builder. Any new or updated content that meets your criteria displays automatically. - **[Create a Manual CMS Collection for Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_managed_content_collections_creatingnative-manually.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create hand-picked static collections of Salesforce CMS content. Select and add specific content in a few clicks, and edit the collection at any time from the Content Management workspace. Create manual collections to gather CMS content items of a single content type. - **[Edit a Manual CMS Collection in Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.edit_a_manual_collection_aura.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit manual CMS Collections in Content Management to keep the content in your Aura site up to date. - **[Create a Conditional CMS Collection for Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_managed_content_collections_creatingnative-auto.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make collections by creating filters that automatically include content that meets your defined criteria. To achieve complex and targeted results in your collection, combine several layers of filters. #### See Also - [Create and Manage CMS Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.cms_content_create_manage.htm&language=en_US) - [Create a Manual CMS Collection for Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_managed_content_collections_creatingnative-manually.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create hand-picked static collections of Salesforce CMS content. Select and add specific content in a few clicks, and edit the collection at any time from the Content Management workspace. Create manual collections to gather CMS content items of a single content type.") - [Create a Conditional CMS Collection for Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_managed_content_collections_creatingnative-auto.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Make collections by creating filters that automatically include content that meets your defined criteria. To achieve complex and targeted results in your collection, combine several layers of filters.") - [CMS Collection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_cms_collection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add a CMS Collection to your Aura site using the CMS Collection component in Experience Builder. If you created a collection in your Content Management Workspace, you can customize the layout on your site page. If you don’t have a collection yet, you can still add the component as a placeholder on your page.") # Salesforce CMS Topics for Aura Sites Assign topics to Salesforce CMS content so that it’s easier to organize and display on your Aura site. Topics help you organize your Salesforce CMS content in the same way that they help you manage your Experience Cloud site’s feeds. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
In the Topics tab of your Content Management workspace, create and manage topics for your Aura site. When you’re creating topics, ensure that they’re enabled for content (1). If they’re not enabled, select the topic, and click **Enable for Content** (2). ![Enable topics for content in the Topics tab in Content Management.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_topics_enable_for_content.png) To assign a topic to a piece of CMS content, select a piece of content from the Content tab, and assign a topic name. ![Native content page with Topics highlighted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_topics_assign_cms_content.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Topics are similar to other list views and subject to the same limitations. For more information, see [List View Search Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=000384156&type=1&language=en_US). #### See Also - [Organize Experience Cloud Sites with Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Navigational, featured, and content topics are a fantastic way to organize information and content in an Experience Cloud site and boost SEO for your articles. Use topics to structure your site’s content or highlight key discussions. You can create topics or use the topics that organically emerge from site member posts.") - [Set Up Content Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_content.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Content topics organize your original content around common themes for your Experience Cloud site.") # Salesforce CRM Content Store, share, and manage your files in content libraries. - **[Set Up Salesforce CRM Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_initialsetup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Salesforce CRM Content in your org to enable content libraries and set up permissions. - **[Customize Salesforce CRM Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Modify content fields, validation rules, library permissions, and other default settings. - **[Customize Content Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create, modify, and delete Salesforce CRM Content custom fields so you can categorize and define your content. - **[Libraries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_content_libraries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Store, share, and manage your files in content libraries. - **[Content Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_content_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize content settings and enable content previews. # Salesforce CRM Content Organize, share, search, and manage all types of files within your organization. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
- **[Salesforce CRM Content Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_about.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Organize, share, search, and manage content within your organization and across key areas of Salesforce with Salesforce CRM Content. Content includes all file types, from traditional business documents such as Microsoft® PowerPoint presentations to audio files, video files, Web pages, and Google® docs. - **[Contribute Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_files_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Contribute Content to your organization. Publish and upload files and Web links. - **[Search and Find Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_find_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Content tab displays files, content packs, Web links, and Google docs published in your Salesforce CRM Content libraries. If your organization has Salesforce CRM Content enabled, you can take advantage of Salesforce CRM Content functionality on detail pages for leads, accounts, contacts, opportunities, products, cases, or custom objects. - **[View and Edit Libraries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_workspace_detail.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you have located a Salesforce CRM Content library in the My Libraries area of the Libraries tab home page or on a content details page, click the library name to display detailed information. - **[Manage Libraries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_workspace.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** On the Libraries tab, access your private library, create libraries, choose libraries to view or edit, and analyze library usage and activity. - **[Deliver Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use content delivery to convert documents into an optimized web-based version for easy online viewing. # Salesforce CRM Content Limits Limits for features and search of Salesforce CRM content. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## Salesforce CRM Content Limits
Feature Details
Content deliveries: default delivery bandwidth per rolling 24-hour window 50 GB
Content deliveries: default delivery view counts per rolling 24-hour window 50,000
Content deliveries: maximum file size for online viewing 25 MB
Content: maximum file size
  • 10 GB in Files Home, libraries, and on a record’s Files related list
  • 2 GB when uploaded in Chatter posts and comments
  • 2 GB (including headers) when uploaded via Connect REST API
  • 2 GB (including headers) when uploaded via REST API
  • 38 MB when uploaded via SOAP API
  • 10 MB when uploaded via Bulk API
  • 150 MB when uploaded via Bulk API 2.0
  • 10 MB when uploaded via Visualforce
Content: maximum number of libraries 2,000
Content: maximum number of files 30,000,000
Content: maximum number of files and versions in a 24–hour period (adjustable) 200,000 (2,500 in Developer Edition and sandboxes)
Content packs: maximum number of files 50 (N/A in Personal Edition)
Documents: maximum size of custom app logo 20 KB
Documents: maximum size of document to upload 5 MB
Documents: maximum file name size (including file extension name) 255 characters
## Salesforce CRM Content Search Limits Search supports several file types and has file size limits. If a file exceeds the maximum size, the file’s content isn't searched, but the file's author name, tags, file extension, and custom fields are. #### See Also - [File Size and Sharing Limits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_size_limits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Here are some size and sharing limits for Salesforce Files and other file types.") # Salesforce CRM Content Overview Organize, share, search, and manage content within your organization and across key areas of Salesforce with Salesforce CRM Content. Content includes all file types, from traditional business documents such as Microsoft® PowerPoint presentations to audio files, video files, Web pages, and Google® docs. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Salesforce CRM Content simplifies content management by incorporating user-friendly features into the following tasks: Organizing Rather than keep files in folders that make content difficult to find, Salesforce CRM Content stores files in fully searchable file repositories known as libraries. Administrators can create multiple libraries based on any classification, such as department name, job function, or team, then configure user permissions within the library to balance content access with security. Authors assign descriptive labels called tags to help classify and organize content across libraries. You can view a list of all content that belongs to a particular tag or filter search results based on a tag or tags. Salesforce CRM Content also provides private libraries, which allow users to reduce the clutter on their desktops while using content-management benefits such as document search and version control. Searching The powerful Salesforce CRM Content search engine scans the entire body of the document as well as content properties such as the title, description, tags, categorization data, and author name. You can filter searches by featured content, file format, author, tags, libraries, or custom fields and then view the results with various levels of detail, providing an easy way to find relevant content quickly. If Chatter is enabled for your organization, you can also filter your search results by Chatter files. The “smart bar” graphic for downloads, comments, ratings, and subscribers allows you to compare documents within a search result set. Subscribing Once a file is located, subscribing to it ensures that you receive an email notification when new versions are published or changes are made to the file's properties. You can also subscribe to authors, tags, and libraries, thus reducing the time spent searching for new or updated content. Notification emails will arrive real-time or once daily, depending on your preferences. Previewing In Salesforce CRM Content you don’t need to download a large document to view it. If the document is a Microsoft PowerPoint, Word, Excel, or Adobe® PDF file, you can preview the entire file in your browser without downloading it. Some aspects of files may not be displayed in previews. Copy-protected PDFs can't be previewed. Contributing Uploading new or revised files in Salesforce CRM Content is fast and easy. During the upload process you choose a library and record type for your file or Web link, write a description, assign one or more tags, and fill out any customized fields that help categorize and define your content. Version management does not require checking files in and out, rather, you simply upload a new version of the file and Salesforce CRM Content maintains a version list accessible from the content details page. You can download past versions of a file and read all reason-for-change comments that an author may have included with a new version. Reviewing Usage and Providing Feedback Salesforce CRM Content provides several methods for determining whether content is valuable to readers. Featuring a piece of content increases its visibility in search results. Voting thumbs up or thumbs down on a file, Web link, or Google doc and adding comments allow you to participate directly in content improvement. You can also see who has subscribed to a file, link, or doc and how many times files have been downloaded. The Reports tab allows you to create standard or custom reports on Salesforce CRM Content data. If the content delivery feature is enabled, you can send content to colleagues, leads, and contacts and then track how often the content has been previewed or downloaded. Sharing Content in Salesforce Salesforce CRM Content is also integrated with leads, accounts, contacts, opportunities, cases, products, and custom objects. If Salesforce CRM Content functionality is enabled on the Opportunity tab, for example, Salesforce CRM Content uses the fields on the opportunity detail page to search for files that may be relevant to that opportunity. You can drill down in the search results as needed or run your own search and then attach one or more files to the opportunity. The most current version of the file will be available on the detail page for the life of the opportunity. #### See Also - [Differences Between Files, Salesforce CRM Content, Salesforce Knowledge, Documents, and Attachments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_differences.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Explore the differences in the various ways to manage your files and content.") # Salesforce Files On the Files tab, organize and access your files. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Work with Salesforce Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Salesforce Files to share and collaborate on files, store files privately, manage version updates, and follow files that are important to you. Use Files Connect to connect to external file systems right from Salesforce. - **[Files Home](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Files Home is the central location of your files in Salesforce. See all files that you’ve stored privately, view files that are shared with you, and share files with others. - **[Upload Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_uploading.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Upload files to Files home, feeds, and records. - **[Upload a New Version of a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_versioning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Replace an old version of a file by uploading a new version. - **[Malware Scanning for Salesforce Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_malware_scan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Files are scanned for viruses or other malware when they’re uploaded or downloaded. New files are scanned when users upload them, and uploads are blocked when a file is malicious. Any existing malicious files in your org are listed in the Malicious Files list in Files home. - **[Search for Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_searching.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are a few ways to find the file you’re looking for. You can search from the global header at the top of your browser. You can use a feed search. And you can use the files-specific search field on Files home. - **[Attach Multiple Files to a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_attach_multiple.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Attach up to 10 files to a Chatter post. View multiple file previews in the Chatter feed. - **[Filter Your Files List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_list_filter.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the filters on the **Files** page to quickly access to your files in Salesforce. - **[Create Folders in Libraries in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_library_folders.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Organize library files into folders to find what you need quickly. - **[File Size and Sharing Limits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_size_limits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here are some size and sharing limits for Salesforce Files and other file types. - **[File Privacy and Sharing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_upload_share.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep your files private, or choose from a variety of sharing options. - **[File Updates in the Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_salesforce_files_feed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow a file to see updates about the file in your feed, view a file’s version history, and get file recommendations. - **[File Previews and Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_salesforce_files_preview_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** View and edit file details, and report on files. # Salesforce Files Configure org-wide preferences to control how your users upload, share, and scan files in Salesforce. Customize page layouts to add the Files related list and modify file detail pages. Most org-wide Files preferences live in **Setup** | **Salesforce Files** | **General Settings**. From Setup, enter Salesforce Files in the Quick Find box, select **Salesforce Files**, then open **General Settings**. This table summarizes key preferences on the General Settings page and where to read more.
Preference Description Learn More
Files uploaded to the Attachments related list on records are uploaded as Salesforce Files, not as attachments In Salesforce Classic, controls whether uploads from Notes & Attachments become Salesforce Files or attachments. When enabled, users see Upload Files instead of Attach File on the related list. Attach Files to Records
Set file access to Set by Record for files attached to records Files attached to records inherit the record’s sharing settings. Users who can edit the record can also collaborate on the associated files; read-only record access maps to viewer access. Set File Sharing to Inherit Record Permissions
Skip triggers execution when deploying asset files and Skip triggers execution and validation rules on asset files Reduces trigger and validation activity when deploying asset files, which helps avoid errors while installing or updating managed packages that include asset files. Enable Salesforce Files Settings For Managed Packages
Display alternative file previews Controls whether Salesforce can use an alternate preview path when standard file previews are unavailable or low quality.

Troubleshooting file preview issues

![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Go to Object Manager to customize layouts and file detail pages. To learn more: - [Add the Files Related List to Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_related_list_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize page layouts to include the Files related list. With the Files related list, users can add files to a record and see a list of files associated with the record.") - [Customize the Files Detail Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_files_customize_files_detail_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Lightning Experience, you can customize the fields and layout of the Files detail page. Use record types to customize the layouts of different record types, and tailor the data you capture based on the file type. Choose from standard fields to show when the file was last updated, file size, file type, and more. Create custom fields and buttons to track metadata that’s specific to your business, to use in validation rules, and to provide data for searches and reports. Use record types to customize the page layouts of different file record types.") - [Add File Privacy on Records to Edit File Details Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_files_priv_on_record.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add the File Privacy on Records option to the Edit File Details layout to let file owners control the visibility of files attached to records.") - **[Add the Files Related List to Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_related_list_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize page layouts to include the Files related list. With the Files related list, users can add files to a record and see a list of files associated with the record. - **[Customize the Files Detail Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_files_customize_files_detail_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Lightning Experience, you can customize the fields and layout of the Files detail page. Use record types to customize the layouts of different record types, and tailor the data you capture based on the file type. Choose from standard fields to show when the file was last updated, file size, file type, and more. Create custom fields and buttons to track metadata that’s specific to your business, to use in validation rules, and to provide data for searches and reports. Use record types to customize the page layouts of different file record types. - **[Prevent Users from Attaching Salesforce Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_sfs_perm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use permission sets to prevent users from attaching Salesforce Files to posts, records, and other objects. - **[Add File Privacy on Records to Edit File Details Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_files_priv_on_record.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the File Privacy on Records option to the Edit File Details layout to let file owners control the visibility of files attached to records. - **[Set File Sharing to Inherit Record Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_on_record_sharing_setting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set the default sharing permissions on files that are attached to records so that they inherit the sharing settings of the record. When enabled, a user who can edit a record can also edit the files on that record. This setting applies to files attached to records created manually from the Files related list and files attached in the record’s Chatter feed. - **[Set Up Users to Query Salesforce Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_query.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Control access to content files and objects via API queries with the Query All Files and Query All Non Vetoed Files user permissions. To grant users access to content files and objects, create a permission set with user permissions and assign it to users. - **[Configure File Upload and Download Security Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_type_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To provide more security, control the way some file types are handled during upload and download. - **[Regenerate a File Preview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_files_regenerate_preview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If a file preview is of poor quality, you can try to regenerate the preview. Available for Salesforce Files and CRM content documents that can be previewed. - **[Salesforce Files Storage Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.files_storage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your organization-wide file storage allocation. - **[Asset Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_asset_files.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Asset files are packageable versions of Salesforce files that are used for branding and design purposes in your org or Experience Cloud site. Asset files can be used for headers and logo images. They can also be referenced by components. You don’t need to create asset files for regular, collaborative use of Salesforce Files. - **[Salesforce Files: What’s Different or Not Available in the Salesforce Mobile App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collaboration_admin_limits_mobile_sf1_files.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check out the differences between the desktop version and the mobile version of Salesforce Files. # Salesforce Files Connect With Files Connect, Salesforce users can access, share, and search external data from systems like Quip, Google Drive, SharePoint, or Box. - **[The Files Connect Setup Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The setup process for Files Connect varies by external data source. - **[Enable Salesforce Files Connect for Your Organization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let users search and share files from external systems like Google Drive and SharePoint. - **[Let Users and Administrators Access Files Connect Data Sources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_perm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you enable Files Connect, give users and administrators permission to access specific external data sources from Salesforce. - **[Create an Authentication Provider for Box](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_box_auth.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use Box as an external data source, first create an authentication provider for it in Salesforce. - **[Define an External Data Source for Box](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_box_xds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let users access their Box content from Files home, feed posts, and search. - **[Create an Authentication Provider for Google Drive](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_google_auth.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use Google Drive as an external data source, create an authentication provider for it in Salesforce. The process begins with creating a related project in the Google Developers console. - **[Define an External Data Source for Google Drive](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_google_xds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let Chatter users access their Google Drive content from the Files tab, feed posts, and search. Salesforce supports Google documents, spreadsheets, presentations, and drawings. - **[Create an Authentication Provider for SharePoint Online or OneDrive for Business Using Azure Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_sp_online_auth.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use a Microsoft cloud-based external data source, create an authentication provider for it in Salesforce and register that provider in a Microsoft Azure web application. - **[Define an External Data Source for SharePoint Online or OneDrive for Business](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_sp_online_xds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With Files Connect and Chatter, Salesforce can access content from Microsoft’s cloud-based systems. - **[Include a Files Connect Data Source in Global Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Combine searches for Salesforce data with external data from Google Drive, SharePoint, OneDrive for Business, or Box. Developers can automate the process with supported SOQL or SOSL queries with the API. - **[Include SharePoint Custom Properties in Search, SOQL, and SOSL Queries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_sp_custom_props.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you create an external object for a SharePoint data source, some special steps are needed to search or query any custom properties it contains. - **[Define a Simple URL External Data Source](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_simple_url_xds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If Chatter is enabled for your organization, Salesforce can access data hosted on another web domain for use in the Files tab and feed. - **[Considerations for Person or Group Between SharePoint and Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.files_considerations_sharepoint_salesforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Note the limitations of two data type fields when using SharePoint Online and Salesforce. - **[Chatter for SharePoint Is EOL](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_c4sp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As of the Summer ’17 release, Salesforce Chatter for SharePoint reached end-of-life and is no longer supported. Chatter for SharePoint was a SharePoint plugin that let users access Chatter feeds from within SharePoint 2010. Salesforce has moved away from this solution to focus its development efforts on other user productivity capabilities. As you move away from the SharePoint plugin, there’s no need to worry about data loss. All Chatter data continues to reside securely in the Salesforce org. # Salesforce Files Storage Allocations Your organization-wide file storage allocation. ## Shared Organization-Wide Storage File storage for your org is calculated by a base allocation based on your Salesforce edition plus a per-user allocation multiplied by the number of standard licensed users in your organization. | **Salesforce Edition** | **File Storage Allocation Per Organization** | **File Storage Allocation Per User License** | | --- | --- | --- | | Contact Manager | 10 GB | 612 MB | | Group | 10 GB | 612 MB | | Professional | 10 GB | 612 MB | | Enterprise | 10 GB | 2 GB | | Performance | 10 GB | 2 GB | | Unlimited | 10 GB | 2 GB | | Developer | 20 MB | N/A | | Personal | 20 MB | N/A | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If your Contact Manager, Group, or Professional Edition org has fewer than 10 people, your per-user file storage equals 1 GB. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If your organization uses custom user licenses, contact your administrator to determine if these licenses provide additional storage. # Salesforce Files: What’s Different or Not Available in the Salesforce Mobile App Check out the differences between the desktop version and the mobile version of Salesforce Files. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important Chatter must be enabled for your org to view, open, and upload files. When using Salesforce Files in the Salesforce mobile app, you can't: - Add more than one file to feed items in Chatter - See multiple files attached to a feed item in the main Chatter feed—only the first attachment is displayed _(Salesforce for Android only)_ - View file types other than these: .doc, .docx, .pdf, .ppt, .pptx, .xls, .xlsx, and all image files, including .gif, .jpg, and .png formats - Create, rename, or delete library folders - Share a file you have Viewer access to - Move files in libraries into folders - Access Files from the navigation menu if you’re a high-volume portal user - Upload files using the Good Access secure mobile browser - Assign topics to files in the main Chatter feed _(downloadable apps only)_ ## Content Libraries and Files The support for Salesforce CRM Content in the Salesforce for iOS is geared towards letting users view and share content. Other activities, such as managing or contributing to libraries, aren’t available in the app. Here’s how working with content libraries is different from what users can do in the desktop site. - The Private Library folder isn’t available. Instead, a user can access the files in their private library by selecting the Owned by Me filter in the Files list on Files home. - When viewing libraries, the top content, popular tags, recent activity, and most active contributors sections aren’t available. - Users can’t: - See content detail pages - Upload and publish new or revised files to libraries - Publish web links in libraries - Edit content details - Add, edit, or delete comments - Delete files (Salesforce for iOS and Salesforce for Android) - Move files to different libraries - Use tags to classify or filter content - Subscribe to libraries, files, authors, or tags - Provide feedback on content, or review feedback on content - Delete, archive, or restore content - Content search options like filtering by file type, author, or library name aren’t available. But users can use global search to find files in libraries. - Creating or managing content deliveries isn’t available. This includes generating an encrypted URL for sharing files and content packs with customers. # SAML for Experience Cloud Sites If your Salesforce org already uses SAML single sign-on (SSO) to simplify and standardize your user authentication, you can extend this capability to your Experience Cloud sites. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
When implementing SAML SSO for Experience Cloud sites, the key is to use the site URL associated with login for the SSO flow. Also, make sure that the site URL in the SAML assertion POST includes `/login`. For more information, see [SAML Single Sign-On with Salesforce as the Service Provider](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.sso_saml_setting_up.htm&type=5&language=en_US). #### See Also - [Example SAML Assertions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.sso_saml_assertion_examples.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [FAQs for Single Sign-On](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.sso_tips.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Scale and Performance Optimization Tools for Experience Builder Sites Salesforce performance tools help ensure that your high-traffic sites and large-scale B2B and B2C applications perform well and deliver lightning fast response times. Each tool has been tested and developed to meet specific scale and performance needs. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
## The Salesforce Content Delivery Network Improve page load time by serving your site with a content delivery network (CDN) such as the [Salesforce CDN](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.domain_mgmt_salesforce_cdn.htm&type=5&language=en_US) or a third-party CDN provider. A CDN is a geographically distributed network of servers that optimizes routing and stores cached versions of web content. When you store content in multiple hubs instead of in a central location, your site can be accessed more quickly from the closest network. And when multiple users request the same content at the same time, they’re accessing it from more than one location, which reduces processing load. Using the Salesforce CDN also unlocks access to other features that can improve the customer experience. ## Experience Cloud Licenses The Customer Community license can support the greatest number of users but offers limited access to Salesforce data. The Customer Community license works well for sites with large user volume and traffic spikes but doesn’t provide as much access to CRM objects or data sharing. Customer Community Plus and Partner Community role-based licenses offer more access to data but don’t support as many users as Customer Community licenses. These licenses are ideal for business-to-business and business-to-consumer sites that require users to access reports and dashboards, sales data, and advanced sharing. You can enable Account Role Optimization or the [Salesforce Optimizer app](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.optimizer_kick_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US) to eliminate unnecessary roles. You can also [configure person account owner power users](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.sfFieldRef.meta/sfFieldRef/salesforce_field_reference_PersonAccountOwnerPowerUser.htm) if you must increase the number of users that your site can support. [Choosing the right license for your site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_licenses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Licenses are a gateway to authenticated access to your Experience Cloud sites. So one of the most important steps when planning a site is selecting the right licenses for your use case. These licenses grant access to Experience Cloud sites to customers and partners who can't otherwise log in to your company's Salesforce org: External Identity, External Apps, Customer Community, Customer Community Plus, Partner Community, and Channel Account. A Salesforce account executive can help you understand the difference between the licenses, and help you decide the best ones for your use case. Before that, let’s answer some basic questions first.") to balance scale and product capabilities is critical to remaining operational at scale. Contact your Salesforce representative to discuss which license is best for your business needs. ## High-Volume Record Creation Using Micro-Batching [Enable micro-batching](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_record_creation_builder.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Create Record Form, Contact Support Form, or Lead Form (LWC) components to create cases, leads, and custom objects more efficiently. When records are collected into batches and processed asynchronously, your site can process more records at a time. Batch processing improves performance and keeps your site moving during traffic spikes.") to create a high-volume of records for Cases, Leads, and Custom Objects. Micro-batching creates these records in batches rather than one at a time. Asynchronously batch processing record creation is an effective way to create object records for high-traffic sites. ## High-Volume Self-Registration Using Micro-Batching Self-registration is the fastest way to register users to a site. But site performance can decrease if too many users register at the same time. Enable [high-volume self-registration using micro-batching](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_self_reg_apex.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your Experience Cloud site can handle twice as many self-registration requests at a time when they’re collected into batches and processed asynchronously rather than one at a time. The accounts and contacts created are owned and managed by the community administrator. After a batch is processed successfully, users receive an email with their login instructions. Batch processing self-registration requests improves performance and keeps your site moving during heavy traffic spikes. Minimal coding is required when you use the Apex controller that manages your self-registration flow.") to process self-registration requests in batches rather than one at a time, and handle self-registration loads for high volume-sites more effectively. ## Account Role Optimization Role-based licenses are required for accounts to share data. But role-based licenses automatically create the default number of roles for every user created, even if they don’t share data. A high volume of roles impact performance and potentially reduce scale of your site. If you anticipate sharing a high volume of data with external users, enable [Account Role Optimization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_partners_optimize_roles.htm&type=5&language=en_US) to avoid creating unnecessary roles. It delays account role creation until there’s a second user and roles are necessary to support sharing data. ## Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) [The Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) framework](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/lwr/guide/lwr-intro.html) was developed with speed and performance in mind. It uses Lightning Web Components (LWC). Because the components are built on code that runs natively on browsers, they’re lightweight and efficient. For unparalleled site performance and scale, pair Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) with the Salesforce CDN. ## Apex Caching Improve performance of your LWR site by caching [public data from Apex methods](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_perf_apex_caching.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Salesforce controls caching of Apex methods used on standard pages and components, and caches data where appropriate. Control caching for your own Apex methods using caching annotation, or control caching for Apex methods in managed packages by enabling a site preference (enabled by default). ## Progressive Rendering Optimize the overall performance of your Aura-based site’s pages by turning on Progressive Rendering. Progressive Rendering fetches, renders, and prioritizes page components, which can significantly improve the performance of component-heavy pages. ## Page Optimizer Page Optimizer reviews site performance and identifies opportunities to optimize performance. The Page Optimizer analyzes your Aura-based sites or apps and identifies performance optimization opportunities. ## Performance and Scale Testing Test site performance when implementing features, making changes, and during final review. If you have a large-scale site, use numerous customizations, or are unclear about your site’s scale limits, testing is even more important. You can test your site using any of the available tools or open-source frameworks. Experience Cloud also has performance and scale testing capabilities. We encourage you to test, using commercial tools or open source. Or internal tools require Salesforce assistance and can’t be used externally. Contact your Salesforce representative to determine whether your site is a good match for Salesforce performance testing tools. ## Outages and Traffic Spikes Preparation If your site becomes unavailable or overwhelmed by a spike in traffic, availability pages can communicate the issue to customers and allow business to continue. You can customize the Service Not Available page to provide the best possible experience for your customers when your site is down. The Too Many Requests page improves user experience when a site is overwhelmed with traffic and redirects users back to the site when it’s available again. # Scroll To Custom code on the Profile page in the Customer Service template lets users scroll to the selected component from a user’s profile page, which saves a mobile user from having to scroll to a profile component that isn’t visible on his or her device. 1. On the Profile page, right-click the area of custom code below the User Profile Header, and click Edit. 2. In the Edit Code page, you can change the labels that let mobile users navigate in their profile. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Scroll To component: ![Scroll To component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/scroll_to.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Search a Chatter Feed Use feed search to find information in the current Chatter feed.
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
You can search for information in the current feed on records, groups, topic pages, user profiles, and on the Chatter and Home tabs. (The Home tab is available in Salesforce Classic only.) 1. Click ![feed search magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/find_in_feed_icon.png) above the feed to look for information in that feed. For example, use the feed search on a group’s page to find information in that group. 2. Enter your search terms, and press Enter or click ![feed search magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/find_in_feed_icon.png). You can search for hashtag topics, mentions, and files posted in the feed, or refine your search using wildcards, operators, and quotation marks to match on exact phrases. To search for hashtag topics with multiple words, use brackets after the hashtag and around the words. For example, to find all instances of #Universal Paper, type #\[universal paper\] in the search box. Search results display with matching terms highlighted. Filters or sorting criteria used in the feed apply to feed search results as well. Click ![clear search icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/find_in_feed_clearsearch_icon.png) to clear your search terms and return to the feed. Feed search behavior can vary slightly depending on where you perform the search. - Feed search isn’t supported for feeds on list views. - You can search only the feeds you have access to via sharing rules. - On the Chatter tab, feed search results are also limited by your feed type selections. For example, if you select the To Me feed, and then apply filters and sorting criteria, all of those criteria also apply to the results. - Feed search results are limited to the posts that are accessible from the context you search within. For example, if you search the feed on a user’s profile, the results include the posts and comments accessible from the user’s profile. Both the posts and comments that are shared by or with the user are included. - Feed search returns matches for file or link names that are shared in posts, but not in comments, and only includes the first attachment. For example: if you attach `file1.pdf`, `file2.pdf`, and `file3.pdf` to a post, where `file1.pdf` is the first file you attach, only `file1.pdf` is included in the search results. - Record field changes aren’t included in record feed search results. # Search and Find Content The Content tab displays files, content packs, Web links, and Google docs published in your Salesforce CRM Content libraries. If your organization has Salesforce CRM Content enabled, you can take advantage of Salesforce CRM Content functionality on detail pages for leads, accounts, contacts, opportunities, products, cases, or custom objects. - **[Find Salesforce CRM Content Related to Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_related_list.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Quickly find content files that are related to leads, accounts, contacts, opportunities, products, cases, or custom objects by using the related lists on those records. - **[Search for Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Content tab displays files, content packs, web links, and Google docs that are published in your Salesforce CRM Content libraries. - **[View and Edit Content Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_preview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Clicking a file name on the Libraries, Content, or Subscriptions tabs opens the content details page, which is a central access point to preview content and gather information about a particular file, Web link, content pack, or Google doc in Salesforce CRM Content. Starting with the Summer '10 release, if Chatter is enabled for your organization, files posted to Chatter are also listed. - **[The Content Related List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_related_list_lookup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Content related list on a record detail page includes links to all of the content that is associated with that record in Salesforce CRM Content. Click the file name to open the content details page. - **[View and Edit Content Subscriptions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_subscribe.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Clicking the Subscriptions tab displays the Subscriptions home page, where you can view your Salesforce CRM Content subscriptions and toggle them off or on. # Search for Chatter Messages Use the search box above your messages to search for Chatter messages. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
To search for people and text in your Chatter messages: 1. In My Messages, enter your search terms in the search box above your messages. Keep in mind these simple search tips: - If you're viewing your list of conversations, search looks for matches across all conversations. If you're viewing a single conversation, search looks for matches only within that conversation. - Searching for a person's name (such as bob johnson) yields two types of results. You get both the conversations where Bob Johnson is named in the text and conversations where he's a participant. If you search for your own name, search results include all of your messages and conversations because you're a participant in every conversation. - Searching for bob jo finds both Bob Jones and Bob Johnson. We automatically search for terms starting with bob jo, as if you had entered the \* (asterisk) wildcard (bob jo\*). - If you search for the term customer, you see matches on that term within the text of messages. Matches don't include people who are identified as customers in a conversation's participant list. 2. Click **Search**. 3. Once you see the search results, you can: - Refine your search by entering more search terms or using wildcards or operators. - If you initially searched across all conversations, click a message to view the full conversation. Let’s say there are matches on names in the participant list, and the conversation involves lots of people. The match might not be visible because the participant list doesn't show everyone's name. That is, you see the conversation included as a match but the highlighted name match can be hidden from view. To clear your search terms, click ![Clear search terms](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/search_clear_sprite.png). Chatter automatically clears your search when you enter a reply, send a new message, or leave My Messages. #### See Also - [Share Files with People in Salesforce Classic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_sharing_people.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Share files with people privately and set Viewer or Collaborator access for each person that you share the file with.") # Search for Content The Content tab displays files, content packs, web links, and Google docs that are published in your Salesforce CRM Content libraries. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To search Salesforce CRM Content:

Salesforce CRM Content User checked in your personal information

AND

Member of the library

If Chatter is enabled, and your admin has enabled the setting to show Salesforce Files in Salesforce CRM Content, files posted to Chatter groups, and other files that aren’t private or privately shared, are also displayed on the Content tab. The top 20 most recently modified items are listed by default. You can filter the list using the Filter Your Results sidebar. To search for specific content: 1. From the Search dropdown list, restrict your search to a specific library or choose to search in all libraries. If available, restrict your search to only Salesforce Files or only files in Chatter groups you're a member of. To display all the locations where content appears, click **Display Options** and select **Display Locations**. The locations are listed under each title. 2. Enter your search term and click **Go!**. Salesforce CRM Content performs a full-text search of rich text format (RTF), UTF-8 encoded TXT, HTML, XML, Adobe® PDF, and Microsoft® Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files. 3. If your administrator has enabled multi-language support, you can restrict your search to a specific language. By default, Salesforce CRM Content searches all the content in your libraries that is published in your default user language. Searching in all languages also searches the titles, author names, tags, file extensions, and custom fields of content in all languages. Searching in all languages does not search the text or description of documents that were published in languages other than your default user language. 4. Optionally, in the Filter Your Results sidebar, filter your search results by file format, featured content, author, tag, libraries, language, custom field, or Chatter group (if available). The number in parentheses next to each filter type shows you how many matching files, content packs, web links, and Google docs are in the search results. The Content tab provides several options. - To customize your view by adding sortable columns for various content criteria (such as Size and Publication Date), click **Display Options**. Display Options also lets you choose display descriptions, tags, and locations. - **Display Locations** shows the libraries and Chatter groups where the content appears. **My Libraries: none** or **My Chatter Groups: none** means that the file is a Salesforce file and is not part of any libraries or Chatter groups. The “smart bar” graphic for downloads, comments, ratings, and subscribers lets you compare files, content packs, Google docs, and links within a search result set. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Chatter groups are included in **Display Locations** only if Chatter is enabled, and if your administrator has enabled the setting to show files in Salesforce CRM Content. - To create a zip file with your selected content, select one or more files, and click **Download**. Web links and Google docs can’t be included in zip files. - To see a snapshot of information about a file, content pack, Google doc, or web link, and options such as subscribing, voting, and downloading, hover over a file icon. - To toggle a subscription on or off, click the subscription icon next to the file name. - To view the content details page, click the file name. The content details page provides all the available information about a file, content pack, Google doc, or link. Search supports several file types and has file size limits. If a file exceeds the maximum size, the file’s content isn't searched, but the file's author name, tags, file extension, and custom fields are. | File Type | File Extensions | Maximum File Size for Search | | --- | --- | --- | | HTML | .htm, .html, .xhtml | 5 MB | | PDF | .pdf | 25 MB | | PPT | .ppt, .pptx, .pptm | 25 MB | | RTF | .rtf | 5 MB | | Text | .c, .cpp, .css, .csv, .ini, .java, .log, .sql, .txt | 5 MB | | Word | .doc, .docx, .docm | 25 MB | | XLS | .xls, .xlsx, .xlsm | 5 MB | | XML | .xml | 5 MB | #### See Also - [Search for Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_searching.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "There are a few ways to find the file you’re looking for. You can search from the global header at the top of your browser. You can use a feed search. And you can use the files-specific search field on Files home.") # Search for Documents Searching returns a list of documents that match all your search terms. Search results are listed in order of the closest matches. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
User Permissions Needed
To view documents: Read on documents
To find specific documents, use the **Find Document** button on the documents home page. 1. Click the Documents tab. 2. Enter your search terms. Salesforce searches the following fields: - Document Name - Keywords - Description 3. Click **Find Document**. The Keywords and Document Name fields are used to determine the closest matches. The fields you see are predefined and can’t be changed. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To search for a phrase, use quotation marks around the words. For example, a search for _“my logos”_ returns documents whose fields or content contains that exact phrase, and ones that contain _my_ and _logos_. Without quotation marks, your search returns all documents that include any of the words in the search. For example, _my logos_ returns documents whose fields or content contains _my_ and _logos_. 4. To go to the detail page for a document, select the document or click **View**. If your administrator enables document content search, Salesforce also performs a full-text search of the document. When a new document is uploaded or an old one is replaced, its contents are available for searches. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce automatically determines if the contents of a document can be searched. If the Document Content Searchable property is checked on a document, then its contents have been processed successfully and can be searched. If your document is large, it may take several minutes before Salesforce searches the contents of a document and marks the Document Content Searchable property. You can also find documents using global search. - Enter your search terms in the header search box. - Select **Search Options...** from the dropdown and select Documents to narrow your search results. - Click **Search**. The following file types are supported for a document content search. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The contents of documents that exceed the maximum sizes are not searched; however, the document fields are still searched. Only the first 1,000,000 characters of text are searched. Text beyond this limit is not included in the search. | File Type | File Extensions | Maximum Size | | --- | --- | --- | | HTML (only the text within a `` tag) | .htm, .html, .xhtml | 5 MB | | PDF | .pdf | 25 MB | | PPT | .pot, .pps, .ppt | 25 MB | | RTF | .rtf | 5 MB | | Text | .c, .cpp, .css.csv, .ini, .java, .log, .sql, .txt | 5 MB | | Word | .doc, .dot | 25 MB | | XLS | .xls, .xlt | 5 MB, or a maximum cell limit of 100,000 cells | | XML | .xml | 5 MB | In some instances documents aren’t searched. For example: - If a file extension is changed to a different format, it isn’t searched, even if both extensions are valid. For example, a .txt file that is renamed to .rtf isn’t searched. - PDF and Word documents may have security restrictions that prevent them from being searched. To ensure that the content is searchable, set the “content extraction” property on your file to “Enabled” when creating your document. #### See Also - [Search for Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_searching.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "There are a few ways to find the file you’re looking for. You can search from the global header at the top of your browser. You can use a feed search. And you can use the files-specific search field on Files home.") # Search for Files There are a few ways to find the file you’re looking for. You can search from the global header at the top of your browser. You can use a feed search. And you can use the files-specific search field on Files home. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
In Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience, you can search for files from the header search field. Use feed search to find files posted in a specific Chatter feed, such as on a profile, on a record, or in a group. Files home lists both the files you own and the ones that you have access to. The list includes files that are posted to feeds. Click a filter in the sidebar to see and search within that selection of files. - **Recent** - **Owned by Me** - **Shared with Me** - **Following** In Salesforce Classic, you can also search for files using the Files search: 1. Optionally, on the **Files** tab click a filter on the sidebar to restrict your search to a specific set of files. 2. Enter your terms in the Search field. You can search by file name, description, owner, type, or content. 3. To see a filtered list of all relevant files based on your search terms, click **Search**. 4. To clear your search terms, click ![Clear search terms and options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/search_clear_sprite.png). In Lightning Experience, you can use the Files dropdown to see favorite and recent files. ![The recent files dropdown.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/214_recent_files_dropdown.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The feed search returns results for file or link names that are shared in posts, but not in comments. Files searches don’t include: - Documents from the Documents tab in Salesforce Classic. - Attachments from Notes and Attachments related lists. - Attachments that aren’t the first attachment. For example: if you attach `file1.pdf`, `file2.pdf`, and `file3.pdf` to a post, where `file1.pdf` is the first file you attach, only `file1.pdf` is included in the search results. - Files within a .zip archive. Search can’t unzip and index a .zip archive. - Scanned PDF files register as images and aren’t included in search results. - Tables in a PDF file aren’t indexed and may not appear in search results. Search supports several file types and has file size limits. If a file exceeds the maximum size, the file’s content isn't searched, but the file's name, description, type, and owner are. | File Type | File Extensions | Maximum File Size for Search | | --- | --- | --- | | HTML | .htm, .html, .xhtml | 5 MB | | PDF | .pdf | 25 MB | | PPT | .ppt, .pptx, .pptm | 25 MB | | RTF | .rtf | 5 MB | | Text | .c, .cpp, .css, .csv, .ini, .java, .log, .sql, .txt | 5 MB | | Word | .doc, .docx, .docm | 25 MB | | XLS | .xls, .xlsx, .xlsm | 5 MB | | XML | .xml | 5 MB | #### See Also - [Follow a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_following.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Follow a file to see updates in your Chatter feed, including when a new version of the file is uploaded. If you stop following a file, the file remains in your Files list, but you don't see updates about it in your feed anymore.") - [Filter Your Files List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_list_filter.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the filters on the Files page to quickly access to your files in Salesforce.") # Search for Files Connect External Files Search an external data source, like Google Drive, Box, or SharePoint, right within Salesforce. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Files Connect for cloud-based external data sources is available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To access cloud-based data sources like SharePoint Online: Files Connect Cloud
## Search in a Specific External Data Source In Salesforce Classic: 1. From the left column of Files home or your Chatter feed, click the data source name. 2. In the search box, enter terms such as _document title_ or _author_. (The specific information that you can search for depends on the configuration of the external data source.) ![Search box for a specific external data source](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/fc_xds_search.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note You can also search external data sources from the file selector when attaching a file to a Chatter post. In Salesforce Classic, click **File** above the feed, and then select a file from Salesforce. In Lightning Experience, click the paperclip icon below the post to open the Select File window. ## Search Globally for Salesforce and External Data If your administrator enables global search for an external data source, you can search its contents along with your Salesforce data. In Salesforce Classic: 1. In the global search box at the top of the Salesforce window, enter your search terms. 2. To filter the results down to a specific external data source, click its name in the left column (for example, “SharePoint Online”). ![Global search results for external files](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/fc_search_results.png) ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you often want to see content from a specific external data source, pin it to the top of global search results. To pin it, in the left column, hover over the data source name, and click the pin icon. (If you don’t see the data source listed, click Search All.) In Lightning Experience: 1. From Files home, enter a search term into the global search box in the header. 2. Optionally, filter your search results to return only Files. - Select **in Files** after entering your search in the global search box. - Do a global search and then select **Files** from the global search results. - Select **Files** from the global search Suggested For You menu, and then enter your search term. # Search for Files to Attach to a Chatter Feed From the file selector, you can see a list of Salesforce files that you own and have access to. In Salesforce Classic, click **File** above the feed, and then select a file from Salesforce. In Lightning Experience, click the paperclip icon below the post to open the Select File window. From the file selector, you can see and search within a selection of files by clicking a filter on the sidebar. - The files that are listed come from libraries that you're a member of where you have the permission Post Content to Chatter Feeds or Manage Library selected in your library permission definition. 1. Optionally, on the **Files** tab click a filter on the sidebar to restrict your search to a specific set of files. 2. Enter your search terms in the search box. You can search by file name, description, owner, type, or content. 3. To see a filtered list of all relevant files based on your search terms, click **Search**. The Select a File to Attach list doesn't include: - Documents from the Documents tab. - Attachments from the Notes and Attachments related list. - Links attached to posts in Chatter - Files from your personal library #### See Also - [Search for Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_searching.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "There are a few ways to find the file you’re looking for. You can search from the global header at the top of your browser. You can use a feed search. And you can use the files-specific search field on Files home.") # Search Results The Search Results component lets users view tabbed lists of articles and discussions. The articles and discussions are returned when a user selects a topic or types a string in the Search Publisher. 1. Select the **Search Results** component in the page you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Articles Tab Label | Enter the text that appears on the tab that users select to view the list of returned articles. The default text is Articles. | | Discussions Tab Label | Enter the text that appears on the tab that users can select to view the list of returned discussions. The default text is Discussions. | | Topic ID | The expression in the Topic ID field uses the topic ID that the user selects when filtering by topic. | | Search Term | The expression returns results based on the text users enter when typing their search queries. | | Active Tab | Specify which tab you want to appear as selected with its contents exposed, when the page loads. The expression retrieves the parameter from the query string in the URL for the page. Type articles to display the article search results first or discussions to display the contents of the discussion search results first. | | Number of Articles | Enter the maximum number of articles to show in the component. | | Show Article Tab | Select this checkbox if you have Salesforce Knowledge enabled and want site members to search for and view articles. | | Default Sort Order for Feed | The default sort order for the feed on the Discussions tab. Presents site members and guests with the initial experience that you intend. If users change the sort order in their view, their selection sticks. | | Show a streamlined question feed on the Discussions tab | Select to show a [compact feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_feed_compact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Feed Compact component to add a compact, scannable version of a feed to an object. Object types that take a compact feed include a record, a topic, a group, a user profile, or an overall site discussion. Feed Compact only shows questions in a feed, and is only recommended if the only feed type used is a question. The component provides a chronological list of questions made with the Feed Publisher component.") on a search results Discussions tab. | ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important For articles to show up in the Search Results component, they must be associated with a topic. Moreover, the site language and article language must match. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Search Results component: ![Search Results component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/results_list.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Searching in Chatter Feeds Quickly find information in posts and comments across Chatter. - Use the header search box (Global Search) to find information in feeds across Chatter. - To find information in a specific Chatter feed, use [feed search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_search_in_groups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use feed search to find information in the current Chatter feed.") (![feed search magnifying glass](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/find_in_feed_icon.png)) in that context. - To create a quick shortcut to a frequently performed search in Chatter, [save a feed search as a favorite](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_favorites_feed_adding.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Salesforce Classic, add a Chatter feed search as a favorite to access feed updates quickly without leaving the Chatter tab.") and click the favorite link from the Chatter page. - **[Maximum Sizes by File Type in Chatter Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_search_limits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The following file types and sizes are supported when you search Chatter. - **[Chatter Feed Search Results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_search_results.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Searches in Chatter feeds return the posts and comments that include your search terms. These results are the same whether your search is global or feed-level. - **[Search a Chatter Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_search_in_groups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use feed search to find information in the current Chatter feed. # Secure Your Experience Cloud Site You can help keep your Experience Cloud site more secure by enabling clickjack protection, authenticating users, encrypting data, and protecting against malicious resources and vulnerabilities in components using CSP and Lightning Locker. These options allow you to maintain the security of your site while still using the external sources you need. In addition, you can use various settings and permissions to protect your data and your customers’ data, and publicly share the site with guest users. - **[Sharing CRM Data in an Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_sharing_CRM_data_cheatsheet.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sharing CRM data in an Experience Cloud site can seem like a daunting task. You need to consider the various layers of sharing data in an internal Salesforce org, and then add the extra security layers included in a portal or community implementation. Here’s a cheat sheet of all the resources you need when setting up data sharing for your Experience Cloud site. - **[Enable Clickjack Protection in Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_clickjack_protection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Clickjacking is a type of attack that tricks users into clicking something, such as a button or link, because they perceive it to be safe. By creating hidden iframes pointing to your Experience Cloud site pages, hackers can entice users to click an element that appears to be on a different web page. But instead of the visible element handling the click, the click is hijacked and some element of the invisible site iframe on top receives it. Clickjacking can potentially lead to data intrusion, unauthorized emails, changed credentials, or other malicious site-specific results. With clickjack protection, however, you can secure your site by controlling whether browsers allow frames pointing to your pages. - **[Authenticate Experience Cloud Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_authentication_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You have several options for authenticating customers and employees in your Experience Cloud site. Customers are users with Community, Customer Portal, External Identity, or partner portal licenses. By default, they can log in with the username and password that Salesforce assigns them for the Experience Cloud site. Your Salesforce org’s employees are users with full Salesforce licensing capabilities. These users follow the employee login flow using their Salesforce username and password. Beyond these default settings, you can configure SAML, third-party authentication providers, or OAuth to authenticate and authorize all users accessing your site. You can also configure self-registration to use Login Discovery, which makes it easier for users to authenticate. - **[Encrypt Experience Cloud Site Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_encryption.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can add a measure of security to your Experience Cloud sites by encrypting files, attachments, and supported fields. - **[CSP and Lightning Locker in Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_security_csp_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Builder sites use Content Security Policy (CSP) and Lightning Locker to secure your site from malicious attacks and custom code vulnerabilities. CSP is a W3C standard that controls the source of content that can be loaded on your site’s pages and helps protect against cross-site scripting (XSS) attacks. Lightning Locker is a Salesforce architectural layer that allows third-party Lightning components and custom code to run safely on the same page in the browser. With different levels of security, you can optimize your site security choices and tolerance for risk. - **[Experience Cloud Cookies](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_cookies.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Cloud uses cookies to improve functionality and accelerate processing times. By saving a user’s settings, cookies can enhance the user’s experience and the performance of the Experience Cloud site. # See Your Site’s Topics and Subtopics in One Place You’ve gone through the exhaustive task of adding topics and various levels of subtopics to your Experience Cloud site’s content. Now you want your site members to see all the organized topics in one place, so they can navigate to any subject their hearts desire. Fear not! They can see everything in your site’s topic catalog. The topic catalog shows the hierarchy of navigational topics you’ve created for the Experience Cloud site. It’s only visible after you set up navigational topics, and it’s accessed from the navigation menu. How is the topic catalog useful to your site members? - New and returning users look at all the organized topics in one place, getting a lay of the land before diving deeper into a specific topic. - Any site user can use the topic catalog as a jumping point to go from topic to topic. To set up the topic catalog, select **Add the “More Topics...” link** when editing the navigation menu on the home page. The link appears when you have at least one subtopic. You can also see an article or discussion’s placement in the topic hierarchy using breadcrumbs. To show breadcrumbs on your site’s pages, drag the Breadcrumb component to the page in Experience Builder. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Image of a topic catalog in a community.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_topic_catalog.png) #### See Also - [Set Up Navigational Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topics_navigational.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Structure your Experience Cloud site’s content and help your users find what they need with navigational topics. If your org uses data categories, community managers can link current Salesforce Knowledge articles associated with those categories to each navigational topic. If data categories aren’t enabled, administrators can add articles to each topic using Connect REST API.") # Seen-By Information in Private and Unlisted Chatter Groups Posts in private and unlisted Chatter groups have a seen-by count that shows the number of people who have seen a post. Click the count to see the names of people who have seen the post. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Seen-by information isn’t available in Experience Cloud sites. ![Seen-by count and list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_seenby.png) What counts as being seen? Liking, commenting, editing, and viewing in detail. An item is also considered seen when a user has it in view on the screen or when they scroll past it. Taking all of these actions into account can mean that the seen-by count is greater than the view count. The person who posted the item isn’t included on the item’s Seen by list. When no one has liked, commented on, edited, or visited the item detail view, the view count is shown instead of the Seen by count. The actions that you take in Salesforce Classic are tracked and counted, but only Lightning Experience shows the seen-by count and list. A user permission, Hide the Seen By List, is available to disable this feature for selected users. Admins can use this permission to control who sees the count and the list. ![Hide the Seen By List permission](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_seenby_perm.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - With a couple of exceptions, only people with access to a private or unlisted group can see seen-by information. Users with Modify All Data or View All Data permission can almost always see seen-by information in all feeds. Such users can also get the information using API calls. That is, their access is the same as with any feed item. - If **Hide the Seen By List** is enabled for a user with Modify All Data or View All Data, that user doesn’t see seen-by information. - When a private group is at-mentioned in a public group, group members can access the seen-by information from the feed item. - Seen-by information isn’t available in any reports. - When seen-by information isn't available, view count is displayed instead. #### See Also - [Characteristics of Chatter Counts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_counts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "There are a few ways to determine how many people are looking at a Chatter post. There’s the view count, the Seen by count, and the counts you find in the Interaction Count Report. Although there’s crossover in terms of what’s being counted, the counts for a given post can be different for each type. Let’s examine why.") - [Seen-By Information in Private and Unlisted Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_seenby.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Posts in private and unlisted Chatter groups have a seen-by count that shows the number of people who have seen a post. Click the count to see the names of people who have seen the post.") # Select a Best Answer for a Question in Chatter One of the advantages of asking a question in Chatter is that users can select the best answer. When a question has a best answer, users can quickly resolve an issue by going directly to the best answer. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Chatter Questions is available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Developer, Performance, Enterprise, Contact Manager, and Unlimited Editions
Moderators and the person who asked the question can: - Select the best answer for a question - Remove the best answer status from an answer Only one answer can be selected as the best answer. Moderators can be the Chatter moderator, the Experience Cloud site moderator, or the Salesforce administrator. If a user doesn’t have permission to select the best answer for a question, they don’t see the **Select as Best** option. ![Select as best option for questions in Chatter](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_question_select_as_best.png) When an answer is selected as a best answer, a check mark (![Best answer check mark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_questions_best_answer_check_mark.png)) appears next to it. A copy of the best answer also appears at the top of the list of answers so other users can quickly spot it. ![Answer selected as Best Answer](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_question_best_answer_w_callouts.png) # Select a Security Level in Experience Builder Sites Choose a security level to control whether scripts can be executed from your Experience Builder site and whether third-party components and custom code can share data. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Selecting a security level depends on your needs and tolerance for risk. We recommend running Strict CSP for optimum security. You can easily switch between levels to test how different security levels affect your customers’ experience. 1. In Experience Builder, open **Settings** | **Security & Privacy**. ![Security tab in Builder Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/experience_builder_csp.png) 2. Select a security level.
Security Level Description
Strict CSP: Block Access to Inline Scripts and Permits Access to Allowed Hosts

Default setting for sites created in Spring ’19 (February 2019) and later.

Provides maximum security.

  • Blocks the execution of all inline scripts and all requests for remote JavaScript files unless explicitly allowed.
  • Allows the display of non-script resources, such as images, from third-party hosts that are explicitly allowed.
  • Lightning Locker is turned on automatically, but can be turned off.
Relaxed CSP: Permit Access to Inline Scripts and Allowed Hosts

Provides moderate security.

  • Allows inline scripts to run in your site.
  • Allows the loading of remote JavaScript files and the display of non-script resources, such as images, from third-party hosts that are explicitly allowed.
  • Lightning Locker is turned on automatically, but can be turned off.
Allow Inline Scripts and Script Access to Any Third-party Host

Provides no added security, but enables your site to work as currently designed.

  • Blocks nothing.
  • Allows access to all third-party hosts without the need to explicitly allow those hosts.
  • Lightning Locker is turned on and can’t be disabled.
Note
Note This option is only visible for sites created before Spring ’19. In Spring ’22 (February 2022), this option is being removed.
3. If you use non-script resources hosted outside Salesforce, such as images or style sheets, add the hosts to Trusted URLs in Setup. See [Manage Trusted URLs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_trusted_urls_manage.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Hosts allowed in Trusted URLs are available to Lightning Experience, Experience Builder sites, or both, depending on the context you apply. If available to Experience Builder sites, that host is allowed for all sites in your Salesforce org. 4. If you use script resources hosted outside Salesforce, you can select either Strict CSP or Relaxed CSP, and allow the third-party hosts in the Trusted Sites for Scripts area that appears. ![Security tab with CSP details](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/experience_builder_csp_trusted_sites.png) 1. Click **Add Trusted Site**. 2. Enter a friendly name and the resource URL. For added security, include the entire URL path to the resource folder—for example, https://www.example.com/logos/. Use the syntax https://site\_url/resource\_folder/, and ensure that the URL ends in /. If you add the URL for the whole domain rather than a specific resource folder, you extend trust to all resources on that domain, which can introduce a security vulnerability. 3. Click **Add Site**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - Allowed external sites are specific to each Experience Builder site. - You can activate or deactivate a trusted site for easy testing and maintenance, without having to remove it from your site configuration. 5. Optionally, you can turn off Lightning Locker. Sometimes it’s necessary to turn off Lightning Locker to use custom components that automatically inject additional third-party JavaScript into the page, including the site’s `head` markup. ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_warning.png) Warning Turning off Lightning Locker can potentially cause security flaws in your site and prevent third-party Aura components from being available at design time and rendering at runtime. Disable Lightning Locker only as a last resort. See [Enable Third-Party Components to Run When Lightning Locker Is Off](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/communities_dev_security_components.htm) and [Resolve Lightning Locker Conflicts in Experience Builder](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.communities_dev.meta/communities_dev/communities_dev_security_limitations.htm) in the Experience Cloud Developer Guide. 6. Publish your site. # Self-Registration The Self-Registration component lets users set up their accounts so that you don’t have to add each one manually. Users put their information into the form fields, and when they click **Sign Up**, an account is created for them. This component has a basic set of fields that you can customize, and you can add more fields. For this component to appear, go to Experience Management and select **Administration** | **Login & Registration** | **Allow external users to self-register**. 1. Select the **Self Registration** component in the page that you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Account ID | Enter the variable expression for the account ID to associate with new users. | | Start URL | Enter the path to the page that users see after they log in. This page is the home page for the site. | | Registration Confirmation URL | Enter the path to the page to display after the user submits the self-registration form. | | First Name Label | Enter the label text for the user’s first name. The default text is **First Name**. | | Last Name Label | Enter the label text for the user’s last name. The default text is **Last Name.** | | Email Label | Enter the label text for the user’s email address. The default text is **Email**. | | Password Label | Enter the text for the password field label. The default text is **Confirm Password**. | | Confirm Password Label | Enter the text for the field in which a user confirms the password. This field usually requests the user to retype the proposed password to make sure that it’s correct. | | Submit Button Label | Enter the text for the button to submit the form values. The default text is **Sign Up.** | | Include Password Field? | Select this option if you want self-registering users to pick their own passwords. Otherwise, password information is provided in the email that they receive after they submit the form. | | Extra Fields Field Set Name | Optionally, add fields to the form. If you’ve created a field set by using our API, enter the variable that’s associated with the field set here. For example, you can write code that creates a field set to collect a phone number or other information. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Self-Registration component: ![Sample Self Registration component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/login_self_register.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Self-Service Agent Actor Understand how the Self-Service agent functions as the central reasoning engine for your site. The agent evaluates user intent and orchestrates specialized sub-agents and tools to deliver a personalized, conversational experience. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost. To purchase, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Available in: Aura Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Available in: LWR Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
The Self-Service agent is the "brain" behind the conversational interface on your Experience Cloud site. Unlike traditional chatbots that rely on static decision trees, the Self-Service agent uses generative AI to understand natural language and reason through user requests. It serves as a primary coordinator, identifying whether a user needs to find information, start a service process, or view personalized recommendationAdd concept content here. When a user interacts with the Unified Prompt Bar, the Self-Service agent performs three key functions: - Intent Analysis: The agent evaluates the user's input to determine their goal. It can distinguish between an informational query (For example, What is the return policy?) and a transactional request (For example, I need to return my order). - Expert Delegation: Instead of attempting to handle every request directly, the agent delegates tasks to specialized sub-agents. For example, it calls the Smart Search Assistance sub-agent to handle informational queries. - Contextual Grounding: The agent uses the Data Cloud DataGraph to "ground" its reasoning in the user's specific history. This allows the agent to provide answers that are relevant to the user's current account status or recent support cases. The Self-Service agent does not work in isolation. Its behavior is defined by the Agentforce Orchestrator Configuration, which acts as its policy manual. - Unified View of Actions: The agent has access to the Unified Catalog, allowing it to surface relevant request forms and Service Processes directly in the chat window. - Conversational Consistency: The agent maintains state throughout a session. If a user asks a follow-up question, the agent remembers the previous turns of the conversation to provide a coherent response. Using a reasoning agent instead of a traditional search or chat tool improves the self-service experience by: - Reducing Friction: Users get direct answers and can start processes without navigating away from the home page. - Increasing Accuracy: By using the Actionable Smart Search tool, the agent provides summaries grounded in your specific Enterprise Knowledge data. - Scaling Support: The agent handles high-volume, repetitive queries, allowing your human agents to focus on complex case resolution. # Send Chatter Messages In Salesforce Classic, to communicate privately, use Chatter messages. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
To send a Chatter message: 1. Start the message from one of these locations: - Click the **Messages** link on the Chatter tab, then click **New Message** in My Messages. - Open a person's profile by clicking their name anywhere in Chatter, and then click **Send a message**. - Click **Send a message** on a person's hover. - When viewing the full message history of a conversation, use the text box under the most recent message to send a reply. - If email replies to Chatter are enabled, when you view an email notification about a message you've received, you can reply to the email. Sharing a file with people is another way to send a Chatter message. When you share a file, recipients automatically receive a notification about the shared file, with any other information that you provided. 2. If you started in the Send a Message dialog box, you can add people's names to the recipient list. Type a name in the **To** field, and select the name by clicking it. Add more people to the conversation by entering more names. If you're replying within a conversation or via email, the conversation participants can't be changed. 3. Write your message. Messages can be up to 10,000 characters. 4. Submit your message using the appropriate method: - In the Send a Message dialog box, click **Send**. - If you're replying within a conversation, click **Reply** (or **Reply All** if the conversation involves multiple recipients). - If you're replying via email, use the Send option in your email application. If your message continues an existing conversation, your reply is added to the conversation and appears at the top of the list in My Messages. If your message starts a conversation with a unique combination of recipients, it appears as a new conversation at the top of the My Messages list. #### See Also - [Reply to Chatter Email Notifications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_email_reply.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you receive certain email notifications, you can conveniently perform some actions by replying directly from your email.") # Send Emails to Leads and Contacts from an Experience Cloud Site Enable the Send Email button, so partner and customer users can send emails to leads and contacts from their Aura or Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura and Visualforce sites
User Permissions Needed
To manage external users: Manage External Users
To create, edit, and delete profiles: Manage Profiles and Permission Sets
1. Click **Edit** next to the Partner or Customer user profile. 2. Scroll down to General User Permissions and select **Send Email**. 3. Save your changes. 4. From Object Manager, enter Contact in the Quick Find box. Select **Contacts** | **Page Layouts** | **Contact Page Layouts**. 5. Add the Activity History related list to the page layout. 6. Add the Email action to Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions. 7. Save your changes. 8. Repeat steps 4–7 for Leads. 9. To enable partner or customer site users to send emails to groups of leads, contacts, or campaign members, click **Edit** next to their user profile. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Users with Customer Community licenses can't send emails. 10. Select **Send Email**, **Mass Email**, and **Allow sending of List Emails**, from General User Permissions. 11. Repeat steps 4–7. # Send Visitor Information to the Salesforce Case Object You can configure visitor information in Workspaces. 1. From Experience Builder, go to Workspaces, and then click the Administration tile. 2. From the Administration settings, select **Preferences**. 3. Under General, select **​​Allow guest users to access public APIs**, and then save your changes. 4. Set your field-level security for the Case object and Contact Support Form component. 1. From Experience Builder, go to Settings. 2. Under Guest User Profile, select the link with your site name. 3. From the example profile, click **Edit**. 4. Under Standard Object Permissions, next to the Case object, select **Read** and **Create**, and then save your changes. 5. Under Field Level Security, click **Edit**, and then select standard fields to show in the form. For example, you can add these standard fields. - Name - Email - Phone You can also add any custom fields to the form, such as Subject and Description. 6. Save your work. 5. Set your site accessibility to let guests access your site and use the form to submit a case. 1. From Experience Builder, go to **Settings** | **General**. 2. Under Public Access, select **Guest Users can see and interact with the site without logging in**. 3. Save your work. # Send Visitor Information to the Salesforce Lead Object Use the Lead Form component in the Microsite template to capture visitor information in your site and create a new Lead record in Salesforce. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions.
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Lead Form component is designed to collect information from guest users. It can't be used for authenticated users. 1. To allow your site to access the proper access to the Leads object, navigate to Workspaces and select the Administration tile. 2. Select **Preferences**. 3. Under **General**, select ​**​Allow guest users to access public APIs** and click **Save**. 4. Navigate back to Experience Builder and select **Settings**. 5. Under **Guest User Profile**, select the link with your site name. 6. From the example profile, select **Edit**. 7. Under **Standard Object Permissions**, select **Read** and **Create** next to the Leads object. 8. Click **Save**. 9. Under **Field Level Security**, select a field and allow access to the fields you intend to capture. 10. Save your work. # SEO for Experience Builder Sites Search engine optimization (SEO) ensures that your public Experience Builder site is visible to search engines. SEO helps customers, partners, and visitors find your content via online search. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
Before you begin setting up SEO for your Experience Builder site, it helps to familiarize yourself with these concepts. ## Publicly Available Sites SEO is supported on production orgs for Experience Builder sites that are public or that have some public pages. SEO isn’t supported on Developer Edition, sandbox, or trial orgs. After you make your site public, search engines can index the public pages of your site. Additionally, the SEO settings tab in Experience Builder becomes available, where you can view the number of indexed records, manually generate the sitemap, and refresh content snapshots. ## Location of Your Experience Builder Site For search engines, such as Google™ or Bing®, your site must be at the root level. To determine the location of your site, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then click **All Sites**. Then, check the address in the URL column. The address for a root-level site has the format https://site\_URL. A site that isn’t at the root level commonly has a URL with a path prefix in the format https://site\_URL/sub\_path/. If your site has a URL prefix, meaning it’s not at the root level, you must create a root site. You submit the sitemap for the root-level site to search engines first, and then submit the URLs for the site with a path prefix. ## The robots.txt File The industry standard robots.txt file informs search engine spiders and bots which areas of your site you want them to access. The robots.txt file for your site is automatically generated and allows search engines to crawl your entire site. The robots.txt file is at the root level of your site and is unique for each domain. Therefore, sites that share a domain also share a robots.txt file. Conversely, sites available on multiple domains, meaning \*.force.com, \*.my.site.com, and custom domains, have different default robots.txt files. To view the robots.txt file, navigate to https:///robots.txt. The robots.txt file uses include (Allow) and exclude (Disallow) directives to inform spiders and bots about which areas of your site to crawl. Only relative URLs are valid for the Allow and Disallow directives. ## The Sitemap The sitemap.xml file for your site contains a list of the public pages and the objects and fields with read access in the guest user profile. Search engines use the sitemap as a starting point to discover which information from your site is available for crawling and important content to index. The sitemap is at the root level of your site. To view the sitemap.xml file, navigate to https:///s/sitemap.xml for Aura sites or https:///sitemap.xml for LWR sites. To ensure that your Knowledge articles are included in the sitemap, assign at least one navigational, featured, or content topic to each article. If your org supports multilingual Knowledge articles, the sitemap includes an entry for each supported language, based on [Google’s recommended format](https://support.google.com/webmasters/answer/189077?hl=en). The sitemap is automatically generated one time a week. It’s generated the first time on the following Sunday, and then regenerated every Sunday thereafter. Additionally, an automatic partial sitemap refresh occurs every 24 hours. The sitemap.xml file is available only in production orgs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The automatic sitemap generation and partial sitemap refresh processes start between 12:00 AM and 3:00 AM GMT and can take up to a few hours to complete in some cases. If this timing interrupts your work during business hours, contact Salesforce Customer Support to disable the automatic sitemap generation and refresh processes, and generate sitemap refreshes manually instead. If your org deactivates the account of the user who most recently published a site, the sitemap is no longer refreshed automatically. To resume automatic sitemap refreshes, [reassign the scheduled jobs that generate an automatic sitemap refresh to an active or automated user](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_scheduled_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To generate an automatic sitemap refresh, Salesforce uses an automated process called scheduled jobs. An automatic sitemap refresh requires two scheduled jobs that are associated with the account of the user who most recently published that site. If that user’s account is deactivated, the scheduled jobs can’t run, and your sitemap no longer refreshes automatically. To resume automatic sitemap refreshes, reassign the scheduled jobs that refresh the sitemap to an active or automated user account."). For best performance, if you generate a manual sitemap, do so during off-peak hours. ## Page Indexing When you make your site public, search engines can then index all the pages of your site. However, if you don’t want search engines to index certain pages, you can: - [Make a page private](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_prop.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Page Action menu to view and edit the properties of the pages that make up your Experience Builder site."). Use this method to make the page unavailable to both guest users and search engines. - [Use the noindex meta tag](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_tags.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set the title, description, and head properties for your Experience Builder site pages to improve search results."). This tag prevents search engines from showing the page in search results, but allows guest users to view the page. - [Create a custom robots.txt file](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The robots.txt file for your site is automatically generated. It allows search engines to crawl your entire site. However, if you want to tell search engines not to crawl certain pages of your public site, you can create a custom robots.txt file."). The robots.txt file is a rules-based approach to control search engine crawler access to specific areas of your site. Guest users can still view pages that you don’t want search engines to crawl. By default, objects displayed on a page are private and can’t be indexed until you explicitly [make an object and its associated fields available to search engines](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_object_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you make your site public, search engines can index the pages of your Experience Builder site. However, to ensure that you don't expose sensitive data, the data displayed by objects on those pages aren’t public. Instead, you must specifically make those objects and their associated fields publicly available for indexing by search engines."). If you plan to use a custom domain, keep your site private until you add and configure the custom domain. This way, search engines don’t index your site’s pages with the Salesforce-managed domain URLs. After a search engine indexes a site page, you can’t remove the public page from search results through Experience Builder. To remove a site page from an existing index, either make the page private or use the search engine’s tools. For example, see [Remove Web Results from Google Search](https://support.google.com/websearch/answer/11080680?hl=en) in Google Search Help. - **[Set Up Your Experience Builder Site for SEO](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Setting up SEO for your Experience Builder site includes a series of tasks that you perform in Salesforce and in the site. From identifying your preferred domain to determining which objects to make public, we’ve got you covered. - **[Identify Your Preferred Domain to Improve SEO Results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_preferred_domain.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, your site is available on the \*.my.site.com or \*.force.com domain, but you can add a custom domain so that your site URLs reflect your company brand. However, multiple domains for the same site, meaning \*.my.site.com, \*.force.com, and custom domains, can dilute search engine results and lower page ranking. If you have multiple domains, identify which domain to use for crawling and indexing your site’s pages. - **[SEO Page Properties in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_tags.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set the title, description, and head properties for your Experience Builder site pages to improve search results. - **[Create a Custom robots.txt File for Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The robots.txt file for your site is automatically generated. It allows search engines to crawl your entire site. However, if you want to tell search engines not to crawl certain pages of your public site, you can create a custom robots.txt file. - **[Use SEO-Friendly URLs in Your Enhanced LWR Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_build_seo_friendly_urls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Boost organic traffic to your site by improving search engine optimization (SEO) with new URL configuration solutions. SEO-friendly URL snippets, or slugs, improve SEO by replacing the record ID in the URL with relevant and human-readable information, ensuring that your site’s pages are optimally surfaced in search engines. - **[Make Objects Available for SEO](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_object_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you make your site public, search engines can index the pages of your Experience Builder site. However, to ensure that you don't expose sensitive data, the data displayed by objects on those pages aren’t public. Instead, you must specifically make those objects and their associated fields publicly available for indexing by search engines. - **[Provide Search Engines with Fresh Content Snapshots](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_snapshot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Builder sites in your production org use the Content Snapshot service to generate SEO optimized HTML for web crawlers such as Googlebot, and content sharing platforms such as Facebook. The concept is common to single-page application frameworks known as dynamic rendering. Salesforce takes a snapshot when you make changes to your site’s publicly available content. This functionality works well for most updates. But let’s say you update a page with time-sensitive information, such as price changes for a flash sale. Instead of waiting, you can take a manual snapshot once every 24 hours to refresh the page content served to search engines. - **[Generate a Manual Sitemap Refresh for Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_manual_SEO_sitemap.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you go live with a new Experience Builder site or make significant updates to an existing one, you can generate a manual sitemap one time every 24 hours outside of the weekly automatic sitemap refresh. - **[Enable GEO to Make Site Pages More Discoverable by AI](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_geo.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To make public site pages more discoverable by AI-powered search engines and enhance the precision of generated answers, enable generative engine optimization (GEO) in Experience Builder. When you enable GEO, AI bots can request content snapshots of your site’s pages to generate answers more effectively. - **[Reassign the Scheduled Jobs that Generate an Automatic Sitemap Refresh](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_scheduled_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To generate an automatic sitemap refresh, Salesforce uses an automated process called scheduled jobs. An automatic sitemap refresh requires two scheduled jobs that are associated with the account of the user who most recently published that site. If that user’s account is deactivated, the scheduled jobs can’t run, and your sitemap no longer refreshes automatically. To resume automatic sitemap refreshes, reassign the scheduled jobs that refresh the sitemap to an active or automated user account. - **[Best Practices and Tips for Using SEO in Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_best_practices.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these guidelines and best practices when optimizing SEO in your site. - **[SEO for Experience Builder Sites FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Answers to common questions about using SEO in your Experience Builder site. #### See Also - [_Blog Post:_ Experience Cloud Content Snapshots and SEO Best Practices](https://www.learnexperiencecloud.com/s/article/Experience-Cloud-Content-Snapshots-and-SEO-Best-Practices) - [SEO Best Practices and Considerations for Guest Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_SEO_best_practices_guest_users.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [_Blog Post:_ Advanced SEO for Lightning Communities](https://developer.salesforce.com/blogs/2018/01/advanced-seo-lightning-communities.html) - [Federated Search in Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.networks_search_federated.htm&language=en_US) - [Enable Salesforce Knowledge in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_knowledge_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable Salesforce Knowledge to quickly get articles to your customers and agents in an Experience Cloud site. Knowledge articles provide accurate information to customers when and where they need it.") - [_Salesforce Security Guide:_ Field Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_profiles_field_perms.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [_LWR Sites for Experience Cloud:_ Create a Multilingual Site](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/multilingual_lwr.htm) # SEO for Experience Builder Sites FAQ Answers to common questions about using SEO in your Experience Builder site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
Can I use SEO features on a sandbox org? No, SEO features are supported on production orgs only. Can I create a custom sitemap? Don’t create custom sitemaps for Aura or LWR sites, as they’re difficult to maintain and scale. Instead, use the automatically generated sitemap.xml file. How often is the sitemap generated? If a site has been published, is active, and is public, the full sitemap is automatically generated one time a week, on Sunday. A partial sitemap refresh occurs every 24 hours and captures any changes made in the last day. You can [manually regenerate a sitemap one time every 24 hours](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_manual_SEO_sitemap.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you go live with a new Experience Builder site or make significant updates to an existing one, you can generate a manual sitemap one time every 24 hours outside of the weekly automatic sitemap refresh."). Can I manually generate a sitemap for my site? If you go live with a new site or make significant changes to an existing site, you can [manually generate a sitemap](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_manual_SEO_sitemap.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you go live with a new Experience Builder site or make significant updates to an existing one, you can generate a manual sitemap one time every 24 hours outside of the weekly automatic sitemap refresh."). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip For the best experience, generate a manual sitemap during off-peak hours. Why does the sitemap have references to other sitemaps? The sitemap.xml file can contain only a limited number of URLs. For large sites, the sitemap is partitioned into multiple smaller sitemaps. These partitions organize the different public pages and objects in your site. Each partition is of the form sitemap-object-#.xml. The sitemap file also contains a partition called sitemap-object-weekly.xml. This partition contains new and updated pages from the current week, and is used for the daily partial sitemap refresh and the weekly sitemap generation. The sitemap-object-weekly.xml partition resets after that week’s sitemap generation. Does the sitemap include URLs for object pages? If an object’s detail page is public and you [enable read access for the object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_object_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you make your site public, search engines can index the pages of your Experience Builder site. However, to ensure that you don't expose sensitive data, the data displayed by objects on those pages aren’t public. Instead, you must specifically make those objects and their associated fields publicly available for indexing by search engines."), the URL for the detail page is included in the sitemap. You can make an object's list page public separately and include it in the sitemap by [adding the page to the Navigation menu](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_setup_nav_menu.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Navigation Menu component extends your site’s navigation beyond navigational topics. Navigation menu items can include Salesforce objects, topics, pages in your site, URLs to external sites, and menu labels. Menu labels are parent headings under which you can nest other menu items. You can also enable the App Launcher to make it easy for members to switch between their sites and their Salesforce org.") and then republishing your site. Related list pages are never included in the sitemap. Why don’t I see the automatically generated robots.txt file when I navigate to https:///robots.txt? Your site must be at the root level of your custom domain for the robots.txt file to appear. If you don’t have a custom domain set up and you’re using the \*.force.com or \*.my.site.com domain, then a site without the path prefix must exist. How do I change the indexing directives of the default robots.txt file? You can [create a custom robots.txt file](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The robots.txt file for your site is automatically generated. It allows search engines to crawl your entire site. However, if you want to tell search engines not to crawl certain pages of your public site, you can create a custom robots.txt file.") to implement a rules-based method to control the visibility of specific areas of your site to search engines. Pages whose URLs you add to the Disallow section of a custom robots.txt file can still appear in search results. To hide a public site page from search results [use the noindex meta tag](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_tags.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set the title, description, and head properties for your Experience Builder site pages to improve search results."). How is SEO supported for sites with multiple languages? When multiple languages are added to a site, translation links are automatically added to each site page's head markup with link tags, according to Google's guidelines. The sitemap isn’t updated with additional translation links. You can't remove or disable the link tags, but you can configure unique SEO tags for each language. Can I remove the /s/ from the default site URL in Aura sites? No, the /s/ is required in the default URL for Aura sites. It’s not required for LWR sites. Does each article have its own URL? Yes, each article that appears in the Article Detail page has its own URL, which is retrieved from the Knowledge article’s URL Name field. Article URLs use the format /article/:urlName. However, the article's recordId is available for use with components on the Article Detail page, like the Article Content component. The recordId on the page is set to the most recent Knowledge Article Version ID for a published article, uniquely defined by the URL Name and, if present, the translation language. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip - If your org has custom components that rely on the article's `urlName`, update the components to use `recordId` instead. - If your org supports multilingual Knowledge articles, keep the same URL as the base language article. We don’t recommend replacing the URLs of translated articles with language-specific URLs. Which bots are allowed to crawl Experience Builder sites, or get served their content snapshot? - adsbot-google - ask - baidu - bing - chrome-lighthouse - dotbot - facebook - facebot - googlebot - gsa-crawler - linkedinbot - rogerbot - screaming frog - slackbot - slurp - swiftbot - twitterbot Additionally, when you [enable generative engine optimization (GEO)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_geo.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To make public site pages more discoverable by AI-powered search engines and enhance the precision of generated answers, enable generative engine optimization (GEO) in Experience Builder. When you enable GEO, AI bots can request content snapshots of your site’s pages to generate answers more effectively."), these AI bots can receive static HTML snapshots of your site: - GPTBot - OAI-SearchBot - ChatGPT-User - ChatGPT-User/2.0 - Anthropic-AI - ClaudeBot - Claude-User - Claude-SearchBot - Google-NotebookLM - PerplexityBot - CCBot - MistralAI-User Why aren’t bots receiving the correct content when I use a CDN? If you serve your Experience Builder site through a third-party CDN and bots aren’t receiving the expected content, check your CDN configuration. - Forward the original `User-Agent` HTTP header to Salesforce. If the CDN removes or replaces this header, Salesforce can’t identify the request as a bot and serves the JavaScript version of the page instead of a content snapshot. - Cache bot responses separately from site visitor responses, or don’t cache responses for bot traffic. If the CDN serves the same cached response to bots and visitors, bots can receive the JavaScript version of the page instead of a content snapshot. For help with these settings, refer to your CDN provider documentation. How do I verify that a bot is receiving a content snapshot? When a page is available to bots, Salesforce serves a static HTML content snapshot instead of the JavaScript version of the page that site visitors see. Search engines and AI bots read this snapshot. Content snapshots are available on production orgs only. To check whether a bot receives the snapshot: - In Google Chrome, open Developer Tools. From Developer Tools, select **More tools** | **Network conditions**. - Deselect **Use browser default**, and then enter a user-agent string for an allowed bot. To test an AI bot, first [Enable GEO to Make Site Pages More Discoverable by AI](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_geo.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To make public site pages more discoverable by AI-powered search engines and enhance the precision of generated answers, enable generative engine optimization (GEO) in Experience Builder. When you enable GEO, AI bots can request content snapshots of your site’s pages to generate answers more effectively."). - Reload the page. Right-click the page, and then select **View page source**. View page source shows the HTML that a bot receives. **Inspect** and the Elements panel show the live page after JavaScript runs. - In the `<head>` of the page source, look for `<meta name="x-sfdc-rendered-at" content="timestamp">`. If this tag is present, the bot is receiving the content snapshot. The timestamp shows the generation time of the snapshot. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Keep the following in mind when verifying whether or not a bot is receiving content. - A `x-sfdc-rendered-at` tag confirms Salesforce is serving the snapshot, but it doesn't mean a search engine or AI bot has crawled or indexed the page. Pages are indexed on the provider's side. If the tag is present but the page still isn't appearing, reach out to your search/AI provider rather than Salesforce. - Results can vary by CDN configuration, so a failing test doesn't necessarily mean snapshots are broken. For security reasons, some user agents are intentionally blocked by Salesforce CDN for testing. If a bot doesn't return the snapshot, try another allowed bot string. If you have a consistent failure, make sure the the CDN settings are set up correctly. look at the CDN settings in the previous question. Can I update the title and add a description to articles to improve search engine results? Each Knowledge article has a URL Name, a Title, and a Summary field. When the article’s displayed in the Article Detail page in Experience Builder, these fields are used for the page URL, the `title`, and `description` tags on the page ``. Are pages with non-standard URLs, such as custom vanity URLs or URLs that include query string parameters, supported for SEO? No, pages with non-standard URLs aren’t included in the sitemap or content snapshots. Therefore, search engines can’t crawl or index those pages. For example, instead of using standard pages to deliver dynamic data via URL parameters (/s/product?productId=12345), use object pages for the record pages to be crawled (s/product/12345). How do I indicate that a version of a page is non-canonical? When different versions of a page exist, search engines crawl only the canonical version of a page. To stop the search engine from arbitrarily choosing a URL as the canonical version of multiple pages, indicate that a page is a duplicate of another page (that is, non-canonical). To do so, [add a element](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_tags.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set the title, description, and head properties for your Experience Builder site pages to improve search results."), with the attribute rel=canonical and point to the canonical page. For example, ``. How are non-canonical URLs for object pages handled? To improve your site’s SEO ranking, we redirect non-canonical URLs to canonical URLs using 301 redirects. A canonical URL lets you tell search engines that slightly different URLs, which all point to the same content, are actually the same thing. A 301 redirect indicates that a URL has been permanently moved, which is optimal for SEO. For example, let’s say you add object pages for the Account object. In this case, the detail page has an object-specific Account Detail page and a generic Record Detail page. When site members access the generic Record Detail page (/s/detail/recordId), they’re permanently redirected to the canonical URL of the object-specific Account Detail page instead (/s/account/recordId). Similarly, 301 redirects are used for list and related list pages. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note URL redirects occur only when a URL is accessed directly from the browser URL bar or from a link that’s external to your site. How are SEO-friendly URLs created for object detail pages? To create a user-readable URL for the detail page of a standard or custom object, we append the value of the object’s Name field to the URL. For example, for AW Computing’s Account Detail page, we redirect https://mysite.com/s/account/001R0000002NzuaIAC to https://mysite.com/s/account/001R0000002NzuaIAC/aw-computing. Where the Name field isn’t available, we use the Subject or Title fields. Otherwise, we append “detail” to the URL. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Case, Dashboard, Group, Report, and User Profile objects aren’t supported. Can I use record names that contain special characters or spaces in my URLs? Yes, but the system automatically replaces all characters that aren't unicode letters or numbers. Spaces are replaced with a single dash and the final URL is truncated to a max length. How do I get analytics for material brought in using CMS Connect? Remember, the content you display in your site when using CMS Connect (JSON) doesn’t live in your site. Getting usage data requires a few extra steps. To configure External Objects for the data that you want to track, use [Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.platform_connect_considerations_reports.htm&type=5&language=en_US) or [OData, Salesforce Reporting](http://www.salesforceben.com/salesforce-external-object-reports-using-odata/). #### See Also - [SEO for Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Search engine optimization (SEO) ensures that your public Experience Builder site is visible to search engines. SEO helps customers, partners, and visitors find your content via online search.") - [Best Practices and Tips for Using SEO in Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_best_practices.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Follow these guidelines and best practices when optimizing SEO in your site.") - [Best Practices and Considerations for Page-Level Access in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_page_level_best_practices.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # SEO Page Properties in Experience Builder Set the title, description, and head properties for your Experience Builder site pages to improve search results. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
To view a page’s properties, in Experience Builder, open the Pages menu and click **![Open Page Properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_page_properties_ellipsis.png)** | **Page Settings**. ![SEO Page Properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/seo_noindex.png) Title The title of the page. Shown in search engine results, the browser’s tab or window title, and bookmarks. For data-based pages such as record and content pages, the title is set dynamically. Description The description of the page. Shown in search engine results to help users decide if it’s the page that they’re searching for. For data-based pages such as record and content pages, the description is set dynamically. If a page’s `description` value is empty, search engines populate the description from the first text they find. ![Example of the link title and description for Salesforce](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_seo.png) Head Tags Edit Head Tags lets you enter specific `head` tags for the page to assist search engine optimization. For data-based pages, such as record and content pages, you can enter expressions to access values from the record associated with the page. Associated values can include things like name, title, and value of specific fields. To prevent search engines from indexing a page, add the `noindex` tag. ``` ``` You can specify local `head` tags for individual site pages, for example to [indicate a non-canonical page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Answers to common questions about using SEO in your Experience Builder site."). And you can augment any global tags that are in your `head` markup. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Alternatively, you can take a rules-based approach to controlling the visibility of specific areas of your site to search engines by creating a custom robots.txt file. For security purposes, we restrict the tags, attributes, and values allowed in the `head` tags on your pages.
Allowed Tags Allowed Attributes
<link>

as, charset, crossorigin, disabled, href, hreflang, id, import, integrity, media, rel, relList, rev, sheet, sizes, target, title, type

For rel, the allowed values are alternate, apple-touch-icon, apple-touch-icon-precomposed, apple-touch-startup-image, author, bookmark, canonical, external, help, icon, license, manifest, mask-icon, next, nofollow, noopener, noreferrer, pingback, prefetch, preload, prev, search, shortcut icon, stylesheet, and tag.

<meta>

charset, content, http-equiv, name, property, scheme

For http-equiv, the allowed values are cleartype, content-type, content-language, and default-style.

You can use the attribute http-equiv="X-UA-Compatible" only in combination with content="IE=Edge".

<script>

type

For type, the allowed value is application/ld+json.

## Dynamic SEO Page Properties Record and CMS Content pages can contain dynamic data, such as from a database or ever-changing inventory. To make these pages discoverable, provide the title and identify which object it comes from. Use expressions to dynamically update the page title, description, and meta tags based on the changing content. The expressions differ depending on the page type. For Record pages, the Expression Language (EL) starts with {!Record.}. For Content pages, the EL starts with {!Content}. Null field values are returned as empty strings. Output appears in the appropriate language, if available. Some object pages with dynamic data don’t affect SEO and aren’t indexed, such as Messages. So those page properties don’t include fields for title or description. Most standard fields are accessible to a guest user by default. To ensure access, confirm that Public Access is enabled in the Experience Builder settings so that the Guest User profile has access to the fields displayed. Custom fields are enabled for the Guest User profile through field-level security (FLS) settings before they can be used in expressions. If a profile or FLS restricts any queried field, the entire record doesn't load and your expressions don't render on the page. You can use these expressions only in the SEO section of the Experience Builder Pages Properties tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Notice that the Object and Title expressions look a little different than usual? Use them as they appear, they work fine. They’re unique for this area of Salesforce. To implement dynamic properties for the PageType `Record`:
Expression Description
{!Record._Object} Returns the display name of the object.
{!Record._Title} Returns the title of the record as defined in the name field. Keep in mind that the name field can have a different label than Name.
{!Record.FieldName}

The value of the specified field for the record. The field name is case-sensitive and includes __c for custom fields.

For example, show a record’s type and title in search results using{!Record.recordTypeLabel}.{!Record.title}.

For example, you can display the object name of a record followed by its title: `{!Record._Object}: {!Record.title}.` Or add a specific field, such as `{!Record.Description}`. For the CMS `Content`PageType, implement dynamic properties using these expressions:
Expression Description
{!Content.contentTypeLabel} Returns the display name of the object.
{!Content.title} Returns the title of the content as defined in the name field. Keep in mind that the name field can have a different label than Name.
{!Content.FieldName}

The value of the specified field for the content. The field name is case-sensitive and includes __c for custom fields.

For example, for a blog post, use {!Content.Body.Title}.

For example, `{!Content.title}.{!Content.lastModified}` displays the Content page’s title and last modified date. ## Canonical URL Tags To consolidate a single page that uses multiple URLs or different pages with similar content, choose a canonical URL . Improve SEO and direct search bots to the most representative page from a set of duplicate pages on your site. Without canonicalization, search engines consider all of your identical or similar URLs as unique pages, which can cause several SEO issues. - Search engines can miss your unique content. - Too much duplicate content can dilute content ranking. - Ranked content doesn’t reflect the best URL. To set up a canonical URL for a standard page, open the Experience Builder Page Properties tab. Select the SEO tab, then **Edit Head Tags**. Enter the properties as shown with your canonical URL. ```html ``` For Record pages with dynamic data, your site adds one canonical URL for each record page. URLs use either the record ID format or, if the **Use SEO-friendly URLs on this site** setting is turned on, the SEO-Friendly format. Here's an example record ID URL: https://mysite.com/s/account/001SG000005DTSjGAO/global-media. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Question and Topic objects don’t currently support Canonical URLs. ## Structured Data To improve your site’s visibility in search results and to increase site traffic, add structured data to page head tags. Structured data provides key page details in a standardized format that helps search engines understand the content and meaning of a web page. Search engines use structured data to display your site pages in enhanced and engaging ways in search results. For example, search results for a recipe can include a hand-selected image of the finished dish with cook time, recipe ratings, and other details. You can use structured data to define thumbnail images, carousels, knowledge boxes, and more. To add structured data to one of your pages, add the ` ``` To include dynamic page information in your structured data, use expressions. Be sure to start expressions for Record pages with {!Record} and expressions for Content pages with {!Content}. #### See Also - [Page Properties and Types in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_prop.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Page Action menu to view and edit the properties of the pages that make up your Experience Builder site.") - [Add Markup to the Page to Customize Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_head.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add custom analytics, improve your SEO results, and more by adding custom markup to the page in Experience Builder. For example, you can include SEO meta tags that are visible only to search engines, add a favicon, or add custom code for Adobe Analytics and Google Tag Manager.") - [Control Public Access to Your Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.community_builder_page_access_settings.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [_Salesforce CMS:_ Create a Detail Page](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=cms_customcontenttype-detailpage.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Service Cloud Features Enable Service Cloud features, such as Salesforce Knowledge and Site Case Feed, for your self-service sites in Experience Cloud. Some objects and features, like Field Service, require add-on licenses. Some features, like Case Feed, require Chatter to be turned in your org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). For more information on how to use sites for different customer use cases, check out: - [Manage Customer Relationships with Experience Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customer_account_portal_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give your customers a private and secure place to access and update their account information with the Customer Account Portal solution from Experience Cloud. Improve customer relationships and decrease service costs by allowing customers to see and pay invoices. They can also update their account information and search your knowledge base for answers to their most frequently asked questions.") - [Give Customers Access to Your Knowledge Base Through Help Center](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_help_center_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A help center is a public-access, self-service site that makes it easy for people to find answers for themselves. Instead of filing cases through customer support, visitors find the information they need from the articles that you make available from your knowledge base. You reduce the load on your customer support team, and folks get the satisfaction of finding their own solutions.") - **[Enable Salesforce Knowledge in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_knowledge_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Salesforce Knowledge to quickly get articles to your customers and agents in an Experience Cloud site. Knowledge articles provide accurate information to customers when and where they need it. - **[Site Case Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.ccf_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With the site case feed, agents and Experience Cloud site members see the lifecycle of a case from start to finish. All case interactions appear in a unified, chronological Chatter case feed. Site members benefit from the added functionalities of Chatter, while service features help agents provide efficient, personalized support. To use Site Case Feed, Chatter must be turned on in your org. - **[Question-to-Case](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.questions_qtc_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Question-to-Case lets moderators create cases from questions in Chatter, which makes it easier to track and resolve your customers’ issues. Question-to-Case is available in your Salesforce org and Salesforce mobile web, as well as in Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites where Chatter Questions is enabled. - **[Restrict Experience Cloud Site User Access to Cases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_restrict_case_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Determine whether users with Customer Community Plus licenses can view and edit cases in which they’re listed as the contact. You can disable the standard sharing behavior that grants the assigned contact and everyone in their role hierarchy access to a case. After disabling this sharing behavior, you can control access to cases by creating a manual share or by using Apex managed sharing. # Set an Out of Office Message in Chatter Taking some time off? It’s easy to set up an out-of-office message in Chatter. Schedule your message, and decide what it says. Out of Office is available only in Lightning Experience. ![Out of Office](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collab_profiles_out_of_office_message.png) 1. On your profile, click **Out of Office**. 2. Enable **Set Out of Office message**. ![Out of Office Scheduler](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/collab_profile_out_of_office_scheduler.png) 3. Select the start date for the time you’re out of the office. The start date is just to let people know when you’re out. The message appears next to your name when you save it. It doesn’t wait for the start date. 4. Select the end date. Your message expires after the end date. 5. Leave the message as it is, or customize it. 6. Click **Save**. 7. Enjoy seeing your custom (or not so custom) message appearing nearly everywhere your name appears in Chatter. # Set File Sharing to Inherit Record Permissions Set the default sharing permissions on files that are attached to records so that they inherit the sharing settings of the record. When enabled, a user who can edit a record can also edit the files on that record. This setting applies to files attached to records created manually from the Files related list and files attached in the record’s Chatter feed. 1. From Setup, enter Files in the QuickFind box. 2. Under Salesforce Files, choose **General Settings**. 3. Enable the preference **Set file access to Set by Record for files attached to records**. With this preference enabled: - Users with read/write access to a record or the Modify All Data permission on a record get Collaborator access to attached files. - Users with read-only record access get Viewer access to attached files. When the preference is disabled, all files attached to records default to viewer access. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Files uploaded by guest users can only be set to Viewer access. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - Viewers can view, download, and share files. - Collaborators can view, download, share, edit the file, and upload new versions. - File owners and collaborators can change file permissions for people and groups. # Set Icons for Social Login The Social Login component provides users with icons that they can click to log in to a third-party account, such as Facebook© or LinkedIn©. Set these icons for each authentication provider that you configure for the org. Some users prefer to use an existing account with a service such as Facebook to log in to the site instead of setting up a new account and password. The third-party service is an authentication provider that verifies user identification. Use the Social Login component to add an icon for each supported authentication provider. The user clicks the icon and logs in using the associated account’s username and password. Before you add the Social Login component, set up each authentication provider. For more information, see [Authentication Providers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.sso_authentication_providers.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 1. Select the **Social Login** component in the page that you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Show Header To show a text header above the authentication header icons, select this option.
Header Text Enter the text for the header text.
Use Experience Builder site auth provider URLs

This option is selected by default in new Experience Builder sites and in new Social Login components that you add to existing sites. It improves performance and reduces HTTP redirects by using site-specific URLs for single sign-on (SSO) for all auth providers for your site. Copy the site’s callback URL in Auth. Providers in Setup. Update the callback URLs in your identity provider accordingly. When you deselect this option, Salesforce continues to use login.salesforce.com or test.salesforce.com to redirect to your site during SSO, which can result in decreased performance.

If you configure Apple as an external authentication provider, select this option to ensure that the Social Login component recognizes user information.

![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Social Login component with “or log in with” text (1) and authentication provider icons (2). ![Sample Social Login component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/login_social_login.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Set Language Options After you add Experience Builder sites languages, you can define separate settings for each language. ### Required Editions
Available in: Experience Builder sites accessed through Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and mobile devices, and is available in Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. In Experience Builder, click **![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings.png)** | **Languages**. 2. Under Site Languages, select a language. 3. Update any of the following settings:
Option Description
Active If you add a Language Selector component to your active site, this checkbox controls whether the selected language appears in the list. Use this setting to hide a language until you’re ready to release the associated content to your site visitors.
Fallback Language

The fallback language appears when no content is available for the currently selected language. For example, imagine that a site visitor chooses Japanese from the language selector but your site doesn’t have a Japanese translation for that page. In that case, content is shown in the fallback language.

Only one level of fallback language is supported for LWR sites. For example, if French (Canadian) falls back to French, then your site’s default language is the only fallback language allowed for French.

Display Label You can define a display label for each language. The display label appears in any Language Selector components that you add to your site and in the Experience Builder’s built-in language menu.
#### See Also - [Add Languages to Your Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_add.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add the languages that you want your site to support.") - [Set the Default Language for Your Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_default.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The default language is the language that’s used in a site before a user has selected another language. By default, the default language is set to English (US).") # Set the Default Language for Your Aura Site The default language is the language that’s used in a site before a user has selected another language. By default, the default language is set to English (US). ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Before you add any language content to your site, you must set the site’s default language. A site’s default language isn’t the same as the default language setting in your Salesforce org. This behavior is deliberate. Let’s say you have multiple sites and want a different default language for each. At the same time, you want your org default language to be consistent. With a separate default language for your org, it’s easy to set things up this way. 1. In Experience Builder, click **![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings.png)** | **Languages**. 2. Select a language from the Default Site Language list. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If you plan to add Salesforce CMS content to your site, it’s important that the site and the CMS workspace have the same default language so that the content appears properly. If the default languages are different, translate the content in your CMS workspace into your default site language, then add the translated content to your site. 3. Optionally, click **Edit display label**, and change the way the selected language label appears. For example, you can use this opportunity to translate the language’s display label. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important If you decide to change a site’s default language after you add translated content, do so in this order: 1. Export site content. 2. Change the default language. 3. Import the exported file. Changing the default language can overwrite existing translations. So you export first to preserve your original default language and your translations. After you change the default, you can import translations to restore them. Here’s how it works. Let’s say you make English the default language and add French as a site language. After you add the translated French content, you decide to change the default site language to French. To preserve your original default language and existing translations, you must first export. Then, select French as the default site language, and import content back into the site. #### See Also - [Add Languages to Your Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_add.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add the languages that you want your site to support.") - [Set Language Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you add Experience Builder sites languages, you can define separate settings for each language.") - [Translate Salesforce CMS Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.cms_translations_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Set the Format of Timestamps on Case Feed Posts In case feeds show users a relative timestamp on new posts, like 10m ago, or an absolute timestamp, like January 7, 2020 at 12:15PM. Comments and replies are also shown with relative timestamps. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager editions.
User Permissions Needed
To set up case feed timestamp format: Customize Application
1. In Setup, enter Chatter in the Quick Find box and select Chatter Settings. 2. To show relative timestamps on new posts, comments, and replies in case feeds, select **Show relative timestamps**. To show absolute timestamps, deselect the setting. When **Show relative timestamps** is selected, case feed posts less than two days old show relative timestamps. After two days, timestamps on case feed posts change to absolute. Case feed comment timestamps remain relative. When relative timestamps are shown, users can see the absolute timestamp by hovering over the stamp. # Set Up Agentforce Orchestrator Configurations Define how your Agentforce Orchestrator interacts with users by configuring greeting behaviors and linking Data Cloud personalization signals. This configuration serves as the engine that coordinates the conversational features of your Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost. To purchase, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Available in: Aura Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Available in: LWR Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
User Permissions Needed
Turn on Agentforce Orchestrator
  • Customize Application
  • Create and Set Up Experiences
  • Manage Agentforce Agents
Setting up the configuration is the first step in establishing the front door for your Experience Cloud site. This configuration determines how the agent greets your users and which data graphs it uses for personalization. 1. From Setup, enter Agentforce Orchestrator in the Quick Find box, and then select **Agentforce Orchestrator**. 2. Select **New**. 3. Enter a descriptive Configuration Name and description. 4. From the Agentforce Orchestrator Type list, select **Self-Service**. 5. In the Greeting Settings section, Configure the Greeting Settings. 1. Greeting Prompt Lookup: Select a prompt template to generate AI greetings. You can use the [standard prompt template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.prompt_builder_standard_prompt_templates.htm&language=en_US&type=5) reference to clone and customize a template. 2. Greeting Profile Data Graph: Select the Data Cloud Data Graph that provides the user context. 6. In the Recommendation Settings section, select the Personalization Point you defined in Setup. This determines the logical placement for both personalized greetings and Suggestion Themes. 7. In the Tool Settings section, select the **Agentforce Service Agent** as the agent tool and add the appropriate topics to enable functional reasoning. 8. Select the Network ID associated with your Experience Cloud site, and select the Search Config ID created during the Smart Search Assistance Sub-Agent setup that contains your Enterprise Knowledge Harmonized Data Model Objects. 9. Save your changes. # Set Up and Configure Your Org for Experience Cloud Sites Before setting up your first Experience Cloud site, complete a few tasks in Salesforce Setup to prepare your org for customer- and partner-facing sites. From enabling digital experiences to selecting the correct org settings, we’ve got you covered! The steps you take when preparing your org for Experience Cloud sites are the same you take when setting up sites for Commerce Cloud, Financial Services Cloud, Health Cloud, and Work.com. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
- **[Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enabling digital experiences is the first step to creating an Experience Cloud site, whether you’re building a community, portal, help center, or website. You also need to enable digital experiences when setting up Commerce Cloud, Financial Services Cloud, Health Cloud, and Work.com. - **[Configure Digital Experiences Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage settings that apply to all sites built on Experience Cloud. - **[Configure a Custom Domain for Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_custom_domain.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To provide a branded experience for users who access your external-facing Salesforce content, serve your Experience Cloud sites on a domain that you own. With a custom domain, your users access your external-facing Experience Cloud site and its functionality through your branded URL, such as https://www.example.com. Also, with the many-to-many relationship between sites and custom domains, you can serve your external-facing content to meet your branding needs. For example, you can serve content from multiple Experience Cloud sites on one parent website, or serve multiple sites on one domain through custom paths. Because you can serve multiple sites on one domain, custom domains simplify the management of your domains and your corresponding network allowlists. And even if your Salesforce-hosted site URL changes due to a My Domain change, your custom domain remains constant, reducing the number of updates required. - **[Find Your Way Around Experience Workspaces](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_workspaces.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Workspaces is your one-stop shop for building, setting up, and monitoring your Experience Cloud site. Access Builder and Administration workspaces to manage your site’s setup and branding. Community managers can view dashboards for groups, members, feed activity, and license usage, and manage the community's reputation system. Moderators can see which items have been flagged for review. - **[Administer Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_setup_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After creating your Experience Cloud site, take care of administrative tasks such as adding members, securing your data, defining what records are shown in your site and to whom, and enabling other features such as SEO. - **[Access Experience Cloud Sites in the Salesforce Mobile App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_access_in_salesforce1.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Accessing Experience Cloud sites from the Salesforce mobile app depends on several factors, including the type of template used to create the site and the licenses and permissions of site users. - **[Enable Other Salesforce Features in Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_other_salesforce_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Cloud offers a platform to expose Salesforce features and functionality to site members. For example, enable Salesforce Knowledge so customers can view knowledge articles in your site. Enable case feeds to facilitate discussions over customer cases. There’s also Chatter Questions, direct messages, Question-to-Case, and field service data. # Set Up and Maintain Collaboration Tools Help your users collaborate with one another and with people outside your organization. For help with basic Salesforce administration, see [Set Up and Maintain Your Salesforce Organization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.setup_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US). For information on using Slack to collaborate in Salesforce, see [Salesforce Channels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.slack_salesforce_channels.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Salesforce Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_setting_up.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With Chatter, users can collaborate on sales opportunities, service cases, campaigns, and projects with embedded apps and custom actions. Salesforce channels, which bring Slack into Salesforce, are another way to collaborate on records. In new orgs created in Summer ’26 and later, Salesforce channels are enabled by default, and Chatter is disabled. You can enable Chatter in these orgs if necessary, and you can continue to use Chatter in existing orgs. - **[Salesforce Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collaboration_admin_files.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure org-wide preferences to control how your users upload, share, and scan files in Salesforce. Customize page layouts to add the Files related list and modify file detail pages. - **[Salesforce Files Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_files_connect.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With Files Connect, Salesforce users can access, share, and search external data from systems like Quip, Google Drive, SharePoint, or Box. - **[Salesforce CRM Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_crm_content.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Store, share, and manage your files in content libraries. - **[Google Apps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_admin_google_apps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Google apps like Google Docs, Gmail, and Google-related AppExchange apps—customized for use within Salesforce. - **[Collaboration Resources for Admins](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collaboration_resources_admin.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In addition to online help, Salesforce publishes printable documentation to help you learn about our features and successfully administer Salesforce. # Set Up Apex Triggers for Flagging Items Use triggers to create custom advanced moderation logic that automatically flags items in your Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create triggers: Modify All Data
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Did you know you can do this in the UI? Most sites don’t need custom moderation triggers. You can create moderation rules and criteria directly in Experience Workspaces. For more information, see [Create Rules to Moderate Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderator_manage_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Moderation rules help protect your site from spammers, bots, and offensive or inappropriate content. Create and modify rules for your Experience Cloud site to moderate member-generated content. Each rule specifies the member-generated content the rule applies to, the criteria to enforce the rule on, and the moderation action to take."). Using triggers to automatically flag items allows you to moderate your Experience Cloud site behind the scenes. These flags are only visible to moderators. You can view flags in Experience Workspaces., query for them in the API, or use custom report types to create reports on flagged items, people whose items are flagged most, and more. Consider the following when creating triggers: - Create Apex after insert triggers on FeedItem, FeedComment, ChatterMessage, or ContentDocument. - Define criteria that when met creates a NetworkModeration (flag) record, with the FeedComment, FeedItem, ChatterMessage, or ContentDocument as the parent. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example This trigger automatically flags posts in your site that contain BadWord. ```java trigger autoflagBadWordOnPost on FeedItem (after insert) { List flags = new List(); for (FeedItem rec : trigger.new) { if (!.equals(rec.networkScope)){ continue; } if (rec.body.indexOf('BadWord') >= 0) { NetworkModeration nm = new NetworkModeration(EntityId = rec.id, Visibility = 'ModeratorsOnly'); flags.add(nm); } } if (!flags.isEmpty()) { insert(flags); } } ``` A similar trigger on comments would look like this. ```java trigger autoflagBadWordOnComment on FeedComment (after insert) { List flags = new List(); for (FeedComment rec : trigger.new) { if (!.equals(rec.networkScope)) { continue; } if (rec.commentBody.indexOf('BadWord') >= 0) { NetworkModeration nm = new NetworkModeration(EntityId = rec.id, Visibility = 'ModeratorsOnly'); flags.add(nm); } } if (!flags.isEmpty()){ insert(flags); } } ``` #### See Also - [_SOAP API Developer Guide_](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.api.meta/api/) # Set Up Approvals for External Users in Your Experience Cloud Site An approval process automates how records are approved in Salesforce. An approval process specifies each step of approval, including who to request approval from and what to do at each point of the process. Customer Community Plus and Partner users in your Experience Cloud site can be assigned as approvers on records or added directly to queues. They can see and take action through the My Approvals and Approval History related lists on the record. Approvals can also be triggered directly from the site’s feed. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create, edit, delete, or clone approval processes: Customize Application
To create or change queues:

Customize Application

AND

Manage Public List Views

![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - Users with high-volume licenses, such as High Volume Customer Portal and Authenticated Website, can’t approve records. - External users with legacy portal licenses can approve records in the Experience Cloud site, but not in legacy portals created before 2013. - Email draft approval processes aren’t supported in Experience Cloud sites. When setting up approvals or queues, use the lookup fields to find customer and partner users. For example, when setting up an approval, if you want to automatically assign a customer user as an approver use the lookup list to find and specify the user. ![Approval user lookup field for external users.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_approvals_csp_lookup.png) If you set up email notifications for your approval workflows, emails are sent based on-site membership. If the user is a member of multiple active sites, the email comes from the oldest active one. Any links included in the email point users directly to the approval within the site. In the Salesforce mobile app, users can see and act from the Approval History related list, but they can’t submit requests for approval. To submit requests for approvals, the user must do so from the full Salesforce site. #### See Also - [Set Up an Approval Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.approvals_getting_started.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Approval Limits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.approvals_limits.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Create Queues](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.setting_up_queues.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Set Up Authentication to an External Data Source When you connect to a Files Connect external data system for the first time, you can set up your authentication in just a few clicks. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Files Connect for cloud-based external data sources is available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To access cloud-based data sources like SharePoint Online: Files Connect Cloud
If you haven’t set up your authentication to an external data system in My Settings, you’re prompted to authenticate the first time you try to access an external system in Salesforce. Click the link or button to complete most of the authentication automatically. - If you are connecting to Box, Google Drive, SharePoint Online, or OneDrive for Business: Select **OAuth 2.0** as the authentication protocol. - When you see a message requesting permission for Salesforce to access information from your external system, click **Allow**. - After the authentication process has finished, you are redirected to Salesforce. # Set Up Campaign Marketplace With Campaign Marketplace, you can provide the structure and guidance necessary for partners to successfully execute campaigns. Channel marketers can create and share marketing campaigns, guidelines, and assets with partners. They can also customize the look and feel of the marketplace and highlight information that is important to partners. Partners can then choose which campaigns work best for them. This feature is available in Experience Builder sites and Lightning Bolt Solutions. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create campaigns. “Create on Campaigns”
To read campaigns and use Campaign Marketplace. “Read on Campaigns”
To edit campaigns. “Edit on Campaigns”
To create or customize page layouts and record types. “Customize Application”
Enable your channel marketers to promote pre-approved campaigns. Let partners browse, signup for, and run campaigns in just a couple of easy steps. When a partner clicks **Sign Up** on a campaign they want to run, a child campaign record is created from the original campaign. Partners can access all assets associated with the campaign and customize it to fit their brand. You must have a Partner Community license or use Distributed Marketing to use Campaign Marketplace. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note We recommend that you define your campaign hierarchy before completing these steps. Think about how you can organize your campaign hierarchy to optimize reporting on campaigns. You can organize them by channel programs and levels or you can organize them by region. 1. Go to **Customize** | **Campaigns** | **Page Layouts**. 2. Create 2 channel marketing page layouts: one for the channel marketer and one for the partner profiles in your partner site. 3. Go to **Customize** | **Campaigns** | **Record Types** and create a record type called Channel Marketing. 4. Go to **Campaigns** | **Create New View** and create a campaign list view called Campaign Marketplace. 5. Create campaigns for your partner users using the Channel Marketing record type. 6. Configure your campaign marketplace in Experience Builder. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Campaign Marketplace ![Campaign Marketplace](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/campaign_marketplace.png) Add filters to your list view to create different categories, such as Recommended and High ROI. Create multiple categories, and display them as tabs to make it easier for partners to search for the campaigns they need. You can also add a custom image to your campaign with the new campaign image field. #### See Also - [Best Practices for Campaign Marketplace](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_campaign_marketplace_best_practice.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Looking for best practices and use cases to help you get the most out of Campaign Marketplace? You’ve come to the right place.") - [Campaign Marketplace](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_campaign_marketplace.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With Campaign Marketplace, you can provide the structure and guidance necessary for partners to successfully execute campaigns. Channel marketers can create and share marketing campaigns, guidelines, and assets with partners. Partners can then choose which campaigns work best for them.") # Set Up CMS Content Search in an LWR Site In enhanced LWR sites, visitors can search for CMS content published from enhanced CMS workspaces. Visitors can also search for content within the Rich Content Editor and HTML Editor components, as well as within page title metadata. Use the Search Bar and Results Layout components to add the search functionality to your enhanced LWR site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences

    OR

  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
Visitors can search only indexed content, so after you publish fresh content in your site or in the connected CMS workspace, rebuild the index. In Experience Builder, navigate to **Settings | Search**, and then click **Rebuild Index**. CMS Content Search isn’t available for Government Cloud organizations. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Searches that contain partial keywords don’t return search results. However, if a user enters a misspelled word in the Search field, CMS Content Search attempts to correct the word and provides search results for records that contain the corrected words. Search results can only be shown on a standard Search page, so to use the Results Layout component, you must first create the search page. 1. In Experience Builder, click the Pages menu on the top toolbar, and then click **New Page** at the bottom of the menu. ![Pages menu with New Page button highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/pages-new-page-highlighted.png) 2. Select the **Standard Page** type. 3. Select the preconfigured **Search** page and click **Next**. ![New Page with Search option selected](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/new_page_search.png) 4. Enter a name and URL for the page, and then click **Create**. 5. From the Components panel, drag the **Search Bar** component onto the header section of the page. When you add the component to the header section, CMS content search is available across all site pages. 6. To open the properties panel of the Results Layout component, drag the component from the Components panel onto the page, and click the component on the canvas. 7. From the properties panel, make sure the **Results Source** field displays the **CMS Content** option. ![Results Source field with CMS Content selected](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/results_source_cms_content.png) 8. Preview and publish your site. # Set Up Content Deliveries A content delivery allows you to convert documents such as Microsoft® PowerPoint and Word files into an optimized web-based version for easy online viewing. After you create your delivery, you can send its encrypted URL to any recipient, such as leads, customers, partners, and colleagues, and then track how often people view or download the content. Content deliveries are available in Salesforce Classic only. However, Lightning Email generates delivery-based links as email attachments for Lightning Experience users who have access to the Content Deliveries feature. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
User Permissions Needed
To enable or disable content deliveries: Customize Application
Content deliveries are available in Salesforce Classic only. However, Lightning Email generates delivery-based links as email attachments for Lightning Experience users who have access to the Content Deliveries feature. In addition to tracking, content deliveries provide several benefits over sending files as attachments, such as giving you control over how long the delivery is available to viewers and whether a viewer can download a file or only view it online. By default, a content delivery shows the most recent version of the file being delivered. 1. From Setup, enter content deliveries and public links in the Quick Find box, and select **Content Deliveries and Public Links**. 2. Click **Edit**, and then select Content Deliveries feature can be enabled for users, Public Links can be enabled for users (Requires Content Deliveries), and Content Deliveries and Public Links can be enabled to let communities users share files managed by libraries (Requires Content Deliveries). 3. Choose a default option for content-delivery passwords. Because users can send content-delivery URLs to leads, customers, or any unauthenticated user, Salesforce recommends requiring password protection if your users plan to send confidential documents via content delivery. The options allow you to select an organization-wide default for content-delivery password protection. - **Password protection is optional and defaults to OFF**—If this option is selected, users can choose to require a password when they create a content delivery, but the Require Password to Access Content field on the create-delivery wizard is not selected by default. - **Password protection is optional and defaults to ON**—If this option is selected, the Require Password to Access Content field on the create delivery wizard is selected by default. Users can deselect the option if they don’t want to require a password. - **Password protection is required**—If this option is selected, a password is generated each time a content delivery is created. Users cannot opt out of the password requirement. This option isn't enforced for public links. - If you choose to require a password, users who create a content delivery receive a password when the delivery is generated; users must send the password and the delivery URL to delivery recipients. Delivery recipients are prompted for the password when they click the content delivery URL. - Content delivery passwords display with the content-delivery URL when the delivery is created. You can also access the password on the delivery detail page for the life of the content delivery. - Files within libraries are governed by settings within the library, so they require an extra setting, in addition to the user permissions. To let a user share files managed by a library, enable **Deliver Content** for that user in the library. After content delivery is enabled, users can add the Content Deliveries related list to their page layouts for leads, business accounts, contacts, opportunities, cases, campaigns, or custom objects. All Salesforce CRM Content users will see a **Deliver Content** option on each content details page. - To ensure quality of service, the total number of content-delivery views allowed within a 24-hour period is limited to 50,000 and the amount of bandwidth allocated to content deliveries is limited to 50 GB. If recipients try to view deliveries after rate limit are exceeded, they’ll be prompted to try again later. Salesforce may be able to increase rate limits on an exception basis. For more information, contact your sales representative. - When you create a content delivery, Salesforce copies the original file and creates a new version of that file specifically for online viewing. Note the following information concerning supported file types: - Microsoft® Office 97 through Microsoft Office 2007 Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files are supported for online views. - Adobe® PDF files are supported for online views, but copy-protected PDFs are not. - JPG, BMP, GIF, and PNG are supported for online views. - Any document over 25 MB isn’t supported for online views.You can create a content delivery with any file type, but if the file type isn’t supported for online viewing, your recipient can only download the document in its original file format. - Content deliveries require Adobe Flash version 9.0.115. If recipients don’t have Flash installed, they can download it. - Customer portal and partner portal users can’t create content deliveries. - Guest users of Experience Cloud sites can't create content deliveries. - Only the creator of a content delivery can delete the delivery record or edit details such as the expiration date. - Each time someone clicks a content delivery's URL, Salesforce records the click as one view and distinguishes between internal and external views. An internal view is a view by a Salesforce user. For example, clicking the delivery URL on the delivery detail page or the View option on the Content Deliveries related list is an internal view. The Content Deliveries related list provides a count of all views for each delivery. To see information about a specific view, open the delivery details page. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note For password-protected content deliveries, a view is recorded each time recipients click the delivery URL regardless of whether they enter the password and view the delivery. - Salesforce CRM Content users can deliver content from shared libraries or a personal library. - After creating a content delivery, always preview it before sending the URL to your recipients to ensure that the formatting in the original file displays properly in the online version. For example, colors and non-standard fonts don’t always display properly in the preview player. If you aren’t happy with the quality of the online version, click **Previous** and choose to make your content available in its original file format or as a PDF file only. Your recipients will be able to download the file, and you can use the delivery detail page to track whether recipients download it - Animation and timings in PowerPoint files aren’t supported in the content delivery's online version. Hyperlinks in all file types are also unsupported. - If you are a Salesforce CRM Content user and want recipients of your content delivery to always see the latest version of a file rather than the version available on the delivery-creation date, open the delivery detail page and click **Edit**. Select the Content Delivery Opens Latest Version checkbox. - If you select Notify Me of First View or Download, you’ll receive an email when someone views the content delivery for the first time. In Salesforce CRM Content, file storage is consumed when content is published to shared libraries or saved to a private library. Creating content deliveries doesn’t have an extra effect on storage limits, but users who frequently upload files to their personal libraries for the purpose of content delivery should consider their organization's file-storage limits. Administrators can use reporting to identify who consumes the most storage and which files are largest. For non-Salesforce CRM Content users, file storage is consumed each time a content delivery is created. After a file is uploaded to Salesforce, it can’t be reused for multiple content deliveries. Users need to upload the file each time they want to create a content library. Deleting a content delivery deletes the source file in Salesforce, and increases file-storage space. #### See Also - [Set Up Salesforce CRM Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_initialsetup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up Salesforce CRM Content in your org to enable content libraries and set up permissions.") - [Content Delivery Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This table provides a description of the fields that make up a content delivery. These fields are on the create-delivery wizard, the Content Deliveries related list, or the delivery details page.") # Set Up Content Topics Content topics organize your original content around common themes for your Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To access Experience Workspaces page:

Manage Experiences

OR

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the site

To set up content topics:

Create Topics

AND

Edit Topics

1. Open Experience Workspaces. You can view and edit content topics in Experience Management, but you can’t create content topics or enable topics for content in Experience Management. 2. Access topics by clicking **Content Management** | **Topics**. 3. Select **All Topics** | **All Content Topics**. 4. To create a content topic, click **New**. 5. Enter a name and description. Select **Enable for content**. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create several content topics for your Experience Cloud site, up to a maximum of 5,000. Alternatively, use the All Topics list and select up to 10 topics at a time and click **Enable for Content**. After a topic is enabled for content, you can associate the topic with your native content. To edit or delete a content topic, click ![Actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_manager3.png) in the topic row and select **Edit** or **Delete**. # Set Up CRM Object Search in LWR Sites Set up a CRM search page so your site visitors can search for CRM records, such as cases, accounts, leads, opportunities, and knowledge articles, in LWR sites. Visitors can filter and sort the search results, making it easier to find what they need. You can create and save search configurations to display only the information you need and apply that configuration to multiple sites. You can customize the labels, buttons, background and images of the No Results panel, object navigation panel, and filter panel to compliment your company’s brand. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences
To customize an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences

    OR

  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
To publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences

    OR

  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin or publisher in that site
Before you use CRM Search, review these limitations. - Site visitors can search for any [object supported by UI API](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.uiapi.meta/uiapi/ui_api_all_supported_objects.htm), except Files. - Filtering isn’t supported for all data types. - For cases, the hover functionality isn’t supported for the Subject field. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Searches with partial keywords return records that contain words starting with the characters entered in the Search field. If a user enters a misspelled word in the Search field, CRM Object Search attempts to correct the word and provides search results for records that contain the corrected words. # Set Up Customer Insights Enable Customer Insights in your org and then set it up for each Experience Builder site you have. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To enable Customer Insights in a site:

Access Experience Management OR Manage Experiences

AND

Is a member of the site

To edit profiles:

Manage Profiles and Permission Sets

AND

Customize Application

To create and save Lightning pages in Lightning App Builder: Customize Application
1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Select **Administration** | **Preferences**. 3. Select **Gather Customer Insights data**. 4. Click **Save**. 5. Assign the **View Customer Insights** profile permission to the customer support profiles that require it. 6. If you’re using Salesforce console in Lightning Experience, open Lightning App Builder and simply drag the Customer Insights component to any case or contact page layout. 7. If you’re using Salesforce console in Salesforce Classic, add the Customer Insights component by placing its Custom Console Component on the contact or case page layout. We recommend placing the component in the left sidebar, stacked, with a 400 pixel width. Your support agents see if the customer has opened a case, and which articles have been viewed in a site directly in the Service Console app. ![Community 360 in the app](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_360.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - Customer Insights checks the following: assets, contracts, cases viewed, articles viewed, article votes, posts made, posts viewed, custom objects, orders, products, and tasks. - Customer Insights data is stored in the NetworkUserHistoryRecent object. API access to the object is limited to users with the “Modify All Data” permission. - Customer Insights isn’t available in sandbox environments. - Articles viewed through the Case Deflection component aren’t listed on the Community 360 component that can be added to the contact layout. # Set Up Dynamic URLs with Experience Workspaces You set up dynamic URLs for your login experience from the Login & Registration page of the Administration workspace. Create dynamic URLs by including a placeholder that resolves at run time. Implement the dynamic URLs for the logo and right-frame content on the pages used to log in, verify identity, reset passwords, and self-register. Set up dynamic branding from the Experience WorkspacesLogin & Registration page. You can add custom login pages to your site regardless of the template that you used to create the community. The dynamic URL contains the expid placeholder for your logo and right-frame content. For example, the dynamic URL https://www.my-cms.com/{expid}/logo.png controls the logo displayed on your pages. The dynamic URL https://www.my-cms.com/{expid}/index.php controls the right-frame content displayed on your pages. The right-frame URL displays the contents of the URL in an iframe. At run time, for the logo and right-frame content, the external site replaces the dynamic URL with the brand specified by the expid value (for example, coffee) in the query parameter. The brand that appears at run time depends on the expid dynamic URL that you specify on the Login & Registration page. For example, given the dynamic URL, https://www.my-cms.com/{expid}/logo.png, the Fix Coffee logo appears when the login URL is https://fix.my.site.com/?expid=coffee. You deliver different brands, or user experiences, based on how the expid query parameter gets set in your implementation. You can set it in a URL that you send to your site users in an email. Or you can set the URL on a login button. You can also set the query parameter programmatically with the `setExperienceId` method of the `System.Site` class. In addition to using dynamic branding for the login process, you can use it to brand the user’s experience during the entire user session. To do so, instruct the site to store the expid value in the user’s browser. When stored, you can retrieve it as long as the user’s logged in to the site. When specifying your logo and right-frame URLs, keep in mind these considerations. - Most browsers don’t allow mixing the `http://` and `https:// protocols` on the same page. - The URL for your right-frame content must use the same protocol as your site. Your resource and test or demo servers must also use the same protocol. Generally, we recommend using `https://` for your logo and right-frame URLs. However, in local and test environments, `http://` can be more flexible. To set up dynamic URLs for your logo and right-frame content, take these steps. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and select **All Sites**. 2. To access Experience Workspaces, next to your site name, click **Workspaces** 3. Select **Administration**, and then select **Login & Registration**. 4. To set up dynamic branding for your logo, take these steps. 1. For Logo Type, select **URL**. 2. For the Logo URL field, enter a dynamic URL. For example, https://www.my-cms.com/{expid}/logo.png. 5. To set up dynamic branding for your right-frame content, for Right Frame URL, enter a dynamic URL. For example, https://www.my-cms.com/{expid}/index.php. ![Login & Registration page with experience ID fields](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/xid_admin_expid_fields.png) # Set Up Enhanced Chat for Context Passing Set up your Enhanced Chat channel and Embedded Service deployment to accept and pass hidden pre-chat variables. These variables enable the User Interaction Context Lightning web component to function with your Agentforce Service agent. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Aura and LWR Experience Cloud Sites
Available in: Enhanced Chat with the Einstein for Service, Einstein Platform, Community, Community Plus, or Agentforce Service Agent add-on
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Foundations or Agentforce 1 Editions. Access to some standard agent actions requires additional add-on licenses
1. [Create Your First Enhanced Chat Channel and Deployment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.miaw_quick_start.htm&type=5&language=en_US). During channel setup: 1. Give your channel a descriptive name. For example, User Journey Context Channel. 2. Set the Routing Type to Omni-Flow. 2. Configure the deployment settings. See [Configure an Enhanced Web Chat Deployment](https://www.google.com/search?q=https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView%3Fid%3Dservice.miaw_configure_web_deployment_1.htm). 3. Set the context parameters. See [Customize the Embedded Pre-Chat Form](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.snapins_chat_customize_prechat_form.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Add Custom Parameters in Messaging Settings using the exact, case-sensitive names: lastViewedArticleId, lastSearchQuery, lastViewedTopicId (Aura), and lastViewedNDCId (LWR). Select these parameters under Pre-Chat Hidden Variables within the Embedded Service Deployment settings. 4. Save all your changes and publish the deployment. # Set Up Event Ingestion for Experience Cloud Sites Capture customer interaction data from your sites and flow it into Data Cloud to power personalized greetings and task recommendations. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Available in: LWR and Aura
User Permissions Needed
To manage permission sets, access Data 360 Setup, and create an identity resolution ruleset: Assign Permission Sets AND View Setup and Configuration
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site OR
  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Before beginning ingestion, use the [Mobile and Web SDK Schema Quick Guide for Data 360](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-int/guide/c360-a-mobile-web-sdk-schema-quick-guide.html) to prepare your JSON schema. [Upload a Website Sitemap to Data 360](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-int/guide/c360-a-upload-a-sitemap-file.html) to track specific site behaviors. 1. [Connect a Website or Mobile App to Data 360](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-int/guide/c360-a-set-up-mobile-web-connection.html). 2. Select **Upload Files** on your new connector and provide your custom [Aura\_Sites\_Schema.json](https://resources.docs.salesforce.com/rel1/doc/en-us/static/misc/Aura_Sites_Schema.json). 3. In the website connector configuration, select the **Sitemap** tab and select **Upload Sitemap** to provide your [aura\_sitemap.js](https://resources.docs.salesforce.com/rel1/doc/en-us/static/misc/aura_sitemap.js) behavioral tracking file. 4. [Create a Web or Mobile App Data Stream](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-int/guide/c360-a-mobile-web-datastream.html) in the Data Cloud app for your website connector. 5. Select the **Party Identification**, **Identity**, **Search**, and **UserEngagement** events during data stream configuration. 6. Deploy the data stream to your designated data space to trigger the creation of Data Lake Objects (DLOs). 7. Map your Data Lake Objects (DLO) to the appropriate Data Model Objects (DMO) using the [Starter Web and Mobile Connector Data Mappings](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-int/guide/c360-a-suggested-web-mobile-connector-data-mappings.html). 8. Map the specific engagement fields for **userEngagement.engagementNotes** to **Engagement Notes** and **userEngagement.engagementNumber** to **Engagement** 9. To authorize the SDK URL, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Trusted URLs, and then select **Trusted URLs**. 10. Select **New Trusted URL** and enter your unique SDK URL found in your connector settings. 11. In the CSP Directives section, select connect-src (scripts) and img-src (images), and save your changes as described in [Manage Trusted URLs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_trusted_urls_manage.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 12. To configure the Web SDK for Aura sites, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. 13. Select **Builder** next to your Aura site, navigate to Settings, and select **Advanced**. 14. Select **Edit Header Markup** and paste the initialization script. Replace the source URL with your unique SDK URL. ``` ``` 15. Navigate to Settings and select **Security & Privacy** in Experience Builder. 16. Select a [Security Level in Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_security_csp_scriptlevel.htm&type=5&language=en_US) and set it to **Relaxed CSP: Permit Access to Inline Scripts and Allowed Hosts**. 17. [Connect Experience Cloud to Data Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_data_cloud.htm&type=5&language=en_US) for your LWR site. Add the native integration in Experience Builder settings. 18. Paste the consent script into the **Header Markup** of your LWR site to initialize tracking. #### See Also - [Using Data Cloud Web SDK to Capture Engagement on Your Website](https://developer.salesforce.com/blogs/2024/04/using-data-cloud-web-sdk-to-capture-engagement-on-your-website?utm_source=chatgpt.com) # Set Up Experience Cloud Site for Agentforce Orchestrator Link your Experience Cloud site to the Agentforce Orchestrator and configure the required page components for autonomous AI interactions. This setup makes it possible for your site to host the conversational and search features needed for a personalized user experience. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost. To purchase, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Available in: Aura Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Available in: LWR Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
User Permissions Needed
To Configure Experience Builder
  • Create and Set Up Experiences
  • Customize Application
To Publish Site
  • Create and Set Up Experiences
  • View Setup and Configuration
Before you begin make sure, - You have a Search Config ID that contains Enterprise Knowledge Harmonized Data Model Objects. - All Experience Cloud site users, including Customer Community Plus users, must have the API Enabled permission set. Without this, the search returns empty results. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, then select **All Sites**. 2. Locate the site you want to configure and click **Workspaces**. 3. Click **AI Experiences**. The AI Experiences page opens, showing separate configuration sections. 4. In the Embedded Service Deployments (Guest Users) section, select the **embedded service deployment for unauthenticated (guest) users**. 5. In the Search Configurations section, select the search configuration for this site. 6. In the Agentforce Orchestrator section, select your **Agentforce Orchestrator configuration** from the dropdown. 7. Save your changes. # Set Up Featured Topics Featured topics highlight current, popular conversations in your Experience Cloud site. Change them regularly to keep members up-to-date and engaged. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To access Experience Workspaces or Experience Management page:

Manage Experiences

OR

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the site

To set up featured topics: Edit Topics
To create, edit, and delete images for featured topics: Create, Edit, and Delete on the image record
1. In Experience Workspaces, access featured topics by clicking **Content Management** | **Topics** | **Featured Topics**. 2. Enter the first few letters of the topic name in the search box. Select a suggested topic and click **Add**. Use navigational or member-created topics. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Using Connect REST API, you can create unique featured topics that are separate from navigational or member-created ones. 3. Hover over a topic name, and click ![Edit topic icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_edit_topics.png). Then click **Upload thumbnail image**, and select an image that represents the featured topic on the site home page. Thumbnail images are scaled to 385 x 385 pixels. To prevent distortion, create image files with those dimensions. To ensure guest users can see featured topic images in your site, select Let guest users view asset files and CMS content available to the site in **Administration** | **Preferences** in Experience Workspaces. This selection also allows guest users to see images associated with recognition badges, site branding, and account branding. 4. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create several featured topics for your site, up to a maximum of 25. Then click **Save**. To edit featured topics, hover over a topic name. - To move topics up or down, click the arrows at left. - To delete topics or change their thumbnail images, click ![Topic settings icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_edit_topics.png). # Set Up Google Apps in Salesforce Edit domain settings and modify Google Apps services. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Not all Google Apps features are available in Lightning Experience. Those that are available may not look the same as they do in Salesforce Classic.
User Permissions Needed
To edit Google Apps domain settings and activate or deactivate services: Customize Application
To install or uninstall AppExchange packages: Download AppExchange packages
From Setup, enter Google Apps Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Google Apps Settings** to edit your Google Apps domain settings, activate or deactivate Google Apps services in Salesforce, or install or uninstall Google-related Salesforce AppExchange packages. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important You cannot use Salesforce and Google Apps until a Google Apps account has been created for your organization and your Google Apps domain settings are configured in Salesforce. ## Editing Google Apps Domain Settings Domain settings consist of two values: the user chosen to administer your organization's Google Apps account and the domain your organization registered with Google. Both fields are required to enable Google Apps in Salesforce. To edit your domain settings: - In the Configure Google Apps Domain section, click **Edit**. - Optionally, choose a new user for the Google Apps Administrative Contact field. This person is the point of contact for Google Apps users in your organization; specifically, if a user cannot access a Google Apps service, he or she is directed to contact the Google Apps Administrative Contact. The Google Apps Administrative Contact does not need to be the same person who is registered as your organization's Google Apps administrator with Google, but only the Google Apps administrator can create new Google Apps users on your domain. - Optionally, modify the Google Apps Domain that is registered with Google for your organization's Google Apps account. Your Google Apps Domain is typically your company's domain; for example, acme.com. ## Modifying Google Apps Services This section lists Google Apps services that are integrated with Salesforce and also provides links to several Google-related Salesforce AppExchange apps that can be easily installed from AppExchange. To activate or deactivate an integrated service, click **Edit** next to the service name. To install or uninstall an AppExchange app, click **Install** or **Uninstall** next to the appropriate name. To view all Google-related AppExchange offerings, visit [https://appexchange.salesforce.com](https://appexchange.salesforce.com). ## Implementation Tips - For detailed information about Google Apps, refer to [Google's online help](http://www.google.com/a/help/intl/en/admins/tour.html). - Google Apps in Salesforce is available for Google business accounts but not consumer accounts. You can identify a consumer account by the “gmail.com” domain in an email address; for example, myname@gmail.com is a consumer account. The Google Apps domain you set up in Salesforce must be the domain you registered with Google for your organization; for example, mycompany.com is a business rather than consumer account. - After creating a Google Apps account for your organization, create Google Apps accounts for your Salesforce users. From Setup, enter Users in the Quick Find box, select **Users**, and then click **Export to Google Apps**. - Notify users of their Google Apps usernames and passwords. - Notify users about the changes they will see in Salesforce when Google Apps services are activated. - To view all the Google apps available on Salesforce AppExchange, visit [https://appexchange.salesforce.com](https://appexchange.salesforce.com). - By default, Google Apps users on your organization's domain can share Google docs with Google Apps accounts outside your domain. The control panel for your Google Apps account contains sharing settings that enable you to restrict document sharing to within your domain. - When the Add Google Docs to Salesforce service is deactivated, Google docs can’t be accessed from Salesforce records. In addition, any Google docs in users' Recycle Bins that were deleted from a record are permanently removed from Salesforce. If the Add Google Docs to Salesforce service is reactivated within 30 days, Google docs that were associated with Salesforce records before the deactivation are restored to their previous location. Deactivating the Add Google Docs to Salesforce service does not affect Google docs in Salesforce CRM Content libraries. Deactivation doesn’t remove Google docs associations in libraries and doesn’t permanently delete Google docs in Recycle Bins. - Customer Portal and partner portal users with access to the Contribute tab in Salesforce CRM Content can create new Google docs and associate existing Google docs to a Salesforce library. Portal users without access to Salesforce CRM Content can associate an existing Google doc to a record, but they cannot create new Google docs from within a record because they do not have access to the Google Docs, Notes, and Attachments related list in the portal. Portal users cannot use the **Add Google Doc to Salesforce** browser button. - Customer Portal and partner portal users cannot access Gmail Buttons and Links. - If your organization purchased the Salesforce for Google Apps Supported feature, see [Get Started With Salesforce and Google Apps Supported](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_premier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Salesforce and Google Apps Supported feature includes a Google Apps Premier Edition account for your organization. In Salesforce, you can create that account or upgrade from an existing Google Apps Standard Edition account to Google Apps Premier Edition."). ## Best Practices - Test your Google Apps integration using a sandbox or Developer Edition organization. - Manage Google Apps users as you would Salesforce users. For example, if you deactivate a Salesforce user, also deactivate his or her Google Apps account in the control panel for your organization's Google Apps account. For information about administering your organization's Google Apps account, refer to [Google's online help](http://www.google.com/a/help/intl/en/admins/admin_features.html). - To locate a Google doc quickly in Salesforce, search for the doc using search. #### See Also - [Get Started with Salesforce and Google Apps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_getstart.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Google Apps is a suite of on-demand communication and collaboration services hosted by Google and designed for business users.") # Set Up Libraries Libraries are a wonderful way to organize files and manage user permissions. See files displayed in a grid or switch to the familiar list view. Click a library or folder to see files displayed as thumbnails. A thumbnail view is an easy way to find files. With the Libraries component, you can sort files and pinpoint exactly what you’re looking for in no time at all. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
To use a guided setup, go to **Experience Workspaces** | **Guided Setup**, and select **Intelligent Sales Enablement**. Click **Guided Setup**. - **[Enable the Library Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_libraries_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up libraries to upload, share, and manage files. You need Salesforce administrator permissions to enable the Libraries component. - **[Add Library Members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_libraries_add_members.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can add members to libraries. Permissions are customizable from the library level, which gives you control over who can access files. - **[Create Library Folders](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_libraries_create_folders.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Creating folders gives you more control over the content in your libraries. You can organize folders and subfolders in a way that makes sense to you. - **[Add Files to a Library](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_libraries_add_files.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you have your folder structure set up, you can add files to your folders. In the file picker, the search field filters among loaded files. Use the search option at the bottom of quick results for a broader library search. - **[Enable Content Deliveries and Public Links](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_libraries_content_deliveries_public_links.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Content deliveries and public links to send links to files to people inside or outside your organization. - **[Manage Libraries from Files Home](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_manage_libraries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Working in libraries is simpler now that admins can change libraries in Lightning Experience and manage libraries from Files Home. - **[Manage Library Membership from Files Home](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_manage_library_membership.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Library admins can update, add, delete, and track library members from Files Home. In the Current Members section, external users automatically get an “external badge” to help you identify external partners, customer site members, and portal and Chatter users. - **[Customize Experience Builder Site Libraries with Images](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_customize_libraries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give each library a unique look by branding it with an image. # Set Up Messaging Settings for Agentforce Orchestrator Configure a messaging channel to use Agentforce Orchestrator so that conversations from your Experience Cloud site are routed through the orchestrator. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost. To purchase, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Available in: Aura Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Available in: LWR Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
User Permissions Needed
To Configure Messaging Settings
  • Customize Application
  • Manage Agentforce Agents
In Messaging Settings, the Agentforce Orchestrator is a routing type that applies directly to your existing messaging channel. When you select this routing type, incoming traffic to your Enhanced Chat channel is handed off to your orchestrator configuration. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Messaging Settings, then select **Messaging Settings**. 2. Click **New Channel** or select an existing channel from the list to edit its properties. 3. In the Channel Type dropdown, select **Enhanced Chat**. 4. In the Routing section, click the **Routing Type** dropdown and select **Agentforce Orchestrator**. 5. In the Agentforce Orchestrator lookup field that appears, select the specific orchestrator configuration you created. 6. Save the channel. # Set Up Navigational Topics Structure your Experience Cloud site’s content and help your users find what they need with navigational topics. If your org uses data categories, community managers can link current Salesforce Knowledge articles associated with those categories to each navigational topic. If data categories aren’t enabled, administrators can add articles to each topic using Connect REST API. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To access Experience Workspaces or Experience Management page:

Manage Experiences

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Is a member of the site

To set up navigational topics:

Create Topics

AND

Edit Topics

To add articles to topics:

View Data Categories

AND

Read on related article types

1. From Setup, enter Topics for Objects in the Quick Find box, then select **Topics for Objects**. 1. In Classic Knowledge, enable topics for all the article types you want to include. 2. In Lightning Knowledge, enable topics for Knowledge. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Enabling topics disables public tags on articles. Personal tags aren’t affected. 2. Open Experience Workspaces. 3. In Experience Workspaces, access navigational topics by clicking **Content Management** | **Topics** | **Navigational Topics**. 4. In the text box at right, enter a topic name, and click **Add**. Want to add subtopics? After you add a topic, choose your topic from the dropdown menu (under Show subtopics of). To add a subtopic, add another topic and click **Add**. You can add up to two levels of subtopics for each parent topic. 5. If your org uses data categories, hover over the navigational topic name, and click ![Add articles icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_add_articles.png). Select a Data Category Group, then select the categories you want to add to the topic, and click **Add Articles & Close Window**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important This process adds only current articles to a topic. To add new articles, return to Experience Workspaces and repeat the previous step. 6. Hover over a topic name, and click ![Edit topic icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_edit_topics.png). Then click **Upload banner image** and select an image that appears across the top of the topic page. Banner images are scaled to 1400 x 180 pixels. To prevent distortion, create image files with those dimensions. To ensure guest users can see navigational topic images in your site, select Let guest users view asset files and CMS content available to the site in **Administration** | **Preferences** in Experience Workspaces. This selection also allows guest users to see images associated with recognition badges, site branding, and account branding. 7. Repeat steps 4–6 to create several navigational topics for your site. Then click **Save**. 8. Use subtopics to further categorize your content. Associate articles for each set of subtopics for a more granular organization. This table shows the maximum number of navigational topics and subtopics you can create in the UI of a Customer Service site. | Level | Maximum Number of Entries | | --- | --- | | One (parent) | 25 | | Two (subtopic) | 10 | | Three (subtopic) | 10 | With Connect REST API or Connect in Apex, you can create an additional five levels, each with 10 subtopics, for a total of 2,775 navigational topics. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To edit navigational topics, hover over a topic name. - To move a topic up or down, click the arrows at left. - To rename or remove a topic, change its banner image, or remove assigned articles, click ![Edit topic icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_edit_topics.png). #### See Also - [See Your Site’s Topics and Subtopics in One Place](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_topic_catalog.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You’ve gone through the exhaustive task of adding topics and various levels of subtopics to your Experience Cloud site’s content. Now you want your site members to see all the organized topics in one place, so they can navigate to any subject their hearts desire. Fear not! They can see everything in your site’s topic catalog.") # Set Up Notifications for a Chatter Stream Notification settings are available in the New Stream dialog and on the stream itself. You can create a stream and decide later whether you want to be notified when new posts are added to a stream. The default is to send a notification for every new post. So if you create a stream without touching its notification settings, you receive email and in-app notifications for that stream. If you like, you can change your selection later in the stream feed. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
The Chatter home page lists your five most recently accessed streams. Click a stream name to open it. If the stream you want to set notifications for is not listed, click the Streams heading to navigate to the streams home page. There you can locate your stream, and click its name to open it. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Currently, activity on a topics feed in a stream doesn’t trigger notifications. 1. Once you open the stream, click its **Notifications** button to open the Set Notifications dialog. ![The Notifications button on a stream](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_streams_notificationsbutton.png) ![Set Notifications dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/help_collab_streams_notifications.png) 2. Select a notifications option. - **Every Post** to get an email and an in-app notification whenever a new post is added to the stream. - **Never** to turn off notifications for this stream. # Set Up Reputation Levels Update the default reputation levels to meet your Experience Cloud site’s needs and help motivate your members. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To update reputation levels:

Manage Experiences

AND

Is a member of the Experience Cloud site

When reputation is enabled, 10 default levels are added. You can add or remove levels, give each level a name, and update the point range and image for each level. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note An Experience Cloud site must have at least three reputation levels and can have up to 50. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Administration** | **Reputation Levels**. From here you can: - Upload your own image for each reputation level. To upload a new image, click the default image and browse to an image file. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You can’t revert to the default reputation level images from the Salesforce user interface. Instead, use Connect REST API. - Give each level a name, such as “Beginner,” “Intermediate,” and “Expert.” If you don't assign a name, the default is used. For example, “Level 1,” “Level 2,” “Level 3.” - Edit the point range for a level. When you update the higher value of a level's point range, the lower value for the next level is automatically adjusted when you save. - Add more levels by clicking **Add a level**, located underneath the list of levels. - Remove a level by clicking ![Gray X icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/delete.png) next to the level. 3. Click **Save**. You can now update the point system for the site. The point system determines how many points a user gets when they perform certain actions or when others recognize their contributions through comments, likes, and shares. Reputation level increases are posted to member feeds. You can [translate](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.entering_translated_terms.htm&type=5&language=en_US) reputation level names so that international members can view their reputation levels in the appropriate language. In Translation Workbench, select the Reputation Level setup component and then expand the node next to your site. #### See Also - [Set Up Reputation Points](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reputation_points_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up a point system to reward users for participating in the Experience Cloud site.") # Set Up Reputation Points Set up a point system to reward users for participating in the Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To update reputation points:

Manage Experiences

AND

Is a member of the Experience Cloud site

When reputation is enabled, there is a default point system setup. When users perform the actions with assigned point values, their total points increase and they start to move towards the next reputation level. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Only active users accrue points. For example, if an active user likes the post of an inactive user, the active user gets 1 point, but the inactive user gets no points. The table shows the default events and points.
Action Points
Engagement
Write a post 1
Write a comment 1
Receive a comment 5
Like something 1
Receive a like 5
Share a post 1
Someone shares your post 5
Mention someone

1

If your post contains more than one @mention, you get a point for each @mention.

Receive a mention 5
Questions and Answers
Ask a question 1
Answer a question 5
Receive an answer 5
Mark an answer as best 5
Your answer is marked as best 20
Knowledge
Endorsing someone for knowledge on a topic 5
Being endorsed for knowledge on a topic 20
Questions and answers in the feed are not to be confused with the Chatter Answers functionality. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note In orgs with reputation enabled before the Winter ’15 release, actions associated with questions and answers are available at the time of the release. Their default point values are set to 0. The release doesn’t affect existing user reputation points, and users don’t accrue points from these actions until you configure point values for them. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Administration** | **Reputation Points**. 3. Update the points for each action. If you don’t want users to accrue points for a certain action, set the Points to 0. 4. Click **Save**. Point totals show up on profile pages beneath the photo. Point totals are visible to anyone in the Experience Cloud site. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip You can directly update reputation points for a member via the Salesforce API. You can also use Apex triggers to send custom notifications based on changes to reputation points. #### See Also - [Set Up Reputation Levels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reputation_level_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Update the default reputation levels to meet your Experience Cloud site’s needs and help motivate your members.") # Set Up Salesforce CRM Content Set up Salesforce CRM Content in your org to enable content libraries and set up permissions. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create, edit, or delete library permissions:

Manage Content Permissions

OR

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

To create, edit, or delete page layouts and record types:

Manage record types and layouts for Files

OR

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

To create content fields:

Manage Content Properties

OR

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

To create libraries:

Create Libraries

OR

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

To edit or delete libraries: Manage Salesforce CRM Content
1. From Setup, enter Salesforce CRM Content in the Quick Find box, select **Salesforce CRM Content**, and then select Enable Salesforce CRM Content. 2. Give users access to Salesforce CRM Content by assigning feature licenses in one of the following ways: - To assign feature licenses to users automatically, from Setup, enter Salesforce CRM Content in the Quick Find box, select **Salesforce CRM Content**, and then select Autoassign feature licenses to existing and new users. - To assign feature licenses to users manually, from Setup, enter Users in the Quick Find box, then select **Users** and click **Edit** next to the user's name. Select the Salesforce CRM Content User checkbox and click **Save**. 3. Verify that the Salesforce CRM Content users have the Salesforce CRM Content user permissions enabled. The user permissions include Manage Salesforce CRM Content, Create Libraries, Manage Content Permissions, Manage Content Properties, Manage record types and layouts for Files, and Deliver Uploaded Files and Personal Content. To add library items as email attachments, a user needs to be a member of the library. Users with the Deliver Uploaded Files and Personal Content user permission can create content deliveries from personal libraries. This user permission doesn’t affect the ability to deliver content from shared libraries. 4. Use the New Library Wizard to create a library, add members to the library, and assign library permissions to the members. You can control access to libraries with library permissions, the groups of privileges that determine user access within a library. Users must be assigned library permissions before they can use libraries. All new organizations contain three library permissions: library administrator, author, and viewer. 5. Categorize and define your content. Create content fields and assign them to page layouts. The default fields are Description, Tags, and Title. If you want to create a field named, for example, Reviewed By, your custom content field would be a picklist with the names of possible reviewers. 6. Create a custom page layout or modify the default page layout. Page layouts are the containers for custom fields; they determine which fields are available during the publishing process and how the fields display on the content details page. You can create multiple page layouts and record types and assign a content field to any or all page layouts. For example, if sales and marketing users want to record different information about their content, you can create Sales and Marketing page layouts and record types. If you create a Related Campaign lookup field and add it to the Marketing page layout and record type only, users who select the Sales record type during the upload process don’t get to choose a campaign. - Before you create libraries, review the files you plan to store to determine how many libraries you need and what content belongs in each library. Users are given access to content based on library. - If you have a lot of Salesforce CRM Content users, create a public group and add the group to a library rather than adding users to the library individually. - To enable Salesforce CRM Content functionality for leads, accounts, contacts, opportunities, cases, products, or custom objects, add the Related Content related list to the appropriate page layout. - To send web-formatted content to colleagues, leads, or contacts and associate it with Salesforce records, add the Content Deliveries related list to the page layout for leads, accounts, contacts, opportunities, cases, campaigns, or custom objects. - To allow users to publish, edit, and search in any of the Salesforce-supported languages, from Setup, enter Salesforce CRM Content in the Quick Find box, select **Salesforce CRM Content**, and then click **Enable multilanguage search and contribute**. - Salesforce CRM Content is available via the Customer Portal and partner portal. - All Salesforce CRM Content items display as primary tabs in the Salesforce Console. Consider these best practics. - If you are using the Related Content related list on Salesforce objects, align your custom content fields with the standard and custom fields on the object to increase the accuracy of a search. Clicking the **Find Content** button on the related list matches content to the fields on the record and displays search results containing the related content. - To ensure that content is classified consistently, define consistent tag names with your contributors. For example, establish tag names at the outset to avoid having tags such as “channel” and “channels” in the same library. - Avoid using too many tags. The search engine helps users find specific content, whereas tags enable users to browse and subscribe. Excessive tagging creates unnecessary clutter. - You can't change or delete tag names. You can remove tags from a document, but that doesn't delete the tag. - Tags are case insensitive. You can't have two tags with the same name even if they use different upper and lowercase letters. The case of the original tag is always used. - To highlight valuable content and make it easier to find, mark it as “featured” on the content details page. Featured content receives a higher priority than similar content in search results, and appears on the Libraries tab for easy access. To feature content, users must have the Feature Content option checked in their library permission. - If your organization uses Google Docs, encourage library members to add their Google docs to a library. Including Google docs in Salesforce CRM Content allows users to access all types of content from a single location and apply Salesforce CRM Content functionality, such as votes, comments, and subscriptions, to Google docs. #### See Also - [Customize Salesforce CRM Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Modify content fields, validation rules, library permissions, and other default settings.") - [Set Up Content Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_about.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A content delivery allows you to convert documents such as Microsoft® PowerPoint and Word files into an optimized web-based version for easy online viewing. After you create your delivery, you can send its encrypted URL to any recipient, such as leads, customers, partners, and colleagues, and then track how often people view or download the content. Content deliveries are available in Salesforce Classic only. However, Lightning Email generates delivery-based links as email attachments for Lightning Experience users who have access to the Content Deliveries feature.") # Set Up Search Pages for Aura Sites In Experience Cloud sites created with Aura templates, use the Global Search Box and Global Search Results components to create a search page for your visitors. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
#### See Also - [Global Search Box](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_search_global_no_publisher.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Global Search Box component lets you expose global search in your Experience Builder site. Let your users search for any object available to them.") - [Global Search Results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_search_global.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Global Search Results component displays search results from across the site. The results shown are based on search terms entered in the Search Publisher and can be displayed in one list or in multiple tabs.") # Set Up the Channel Manager Role Channel managers are internal users who manage your partner accounts and partner users. Before setting up a partner site, identify an internal user to play the channel manager role. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## Channel Manager Role Ideally, channel managers should create all the partner accounts for the partner organizations they manage. All partner users associated with a partner account automatically fall below the channel manager in the partner role hierarchy. So all the data owned by those partner users rolls up and is visible to the channel manager. ## Channel Manager Profile Profiles determine the permissions users have, page layouts they see, the tabs and record types available to them, and other settings. Create a custom profile for channel managers or use a permission set to grant permissions to a standard profile. A few tips on what you might want to include: Grant the “PermissionsManagePartners” permission When this permission is enabled, channel managers can create partner accounts and partner users. Make the following objects available to channel managers Leads, Accounts, Contacts, Opportunities, Documents, Campaigns, Products, and any other object you plan to share with partner users in your site. Assign record types Assign record types to channel manager profiles. For example, the Lightning Partner Management solution includes two lead record types: one to track sales leads and the other to register deals. Make sure that your channel manager has access to both. Make the Partner Account field visible to channel managers on leads, accounts, and opportunities Channel managers can create list views or reports for tracking partner user activity. Assign page layouts Assign the appropriate page layouts to your channel manager profiles. Make the Last Transfer Date field visible to channel managers on leads Channel managers can create lists views or reports for tracking partner user activity. ## More Tips - Create a public sharing group for channel managers. You can use this group for filtering and controlling access to documents. - Create a lead queue for channel managers. You can use this queue for lead assignment rules. # Set Up the Site Case Feed The site case feed lets Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site users and support agents see all case interactions in a unified feed. Also, agents can take more actions directly from the console. To set up the site case feed, make sure that Chatter is turned on in your org. Then enable site case feed and make sure that the case page in your site is properly configured. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura and Visualforce sites
User Permissions Needed
To enable the site case feed:
  • Customize Application
  • Compact case feed enabled in your org
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 1. Enable the site case feed: 1. From Setup, enter Support Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Support Settings**. 2. Select **Enable Site Case Feed**. 3. Optionally, select **Enable Email Notifications for Case Posts** (recommended). 4. Click **Save**. 2. If your site was built using Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce, make sure that your case page includes a Chatter feed. 3. If your site uses an Aura template, confirm that your active case detail page supports the site case feed: 1. In Experience Builder, click ![Settings gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/ccf_gear.png). 2. Click **Page Management**. 3. Find Case Detail in the Name column, and make sure the active page assigned to it is either Chatter Case Detail (the default) or Record Detail. ![Case Detail Active Page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/ccf_active_page_case_detail.png) If you change the active case detail page, publish your change. #### See Also - [Emails in the Site Case Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.ccf_expose_case_emails.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you enable the site case feed for Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce, external users with access to a case see case emails in their feed. Emails in the site case feed include the email’s author, recipients, text, and time sent.") - [Set Up the Site Case Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.ccf_set_up_community_case_feed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The site case feed lets Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site users and support agents see all case interactions in a unified feed. Also, agents can take more actions directly from the console. To set up the site case feed, make sure that Chatter is turned on in your org. Then enable site case feed and make sure that the case page in your site is properly configured.") ## Site Case Feed Considerations Consider the following if the site case feed is enabled. - Agents can use the action in the console case feed to answer questions and create private and public Chatter posts on cases. - Agents can expose or hide published Chatter posts and emails in the case feed of external site users. - External site users with access to a case see associated Chatter posts, questions, and emails in their case feed. If email notifications for case posts are enabled - When someone makes an externally visible post on a case and the **Visible in Self-Service Portal** setting is selected on the case, all case contacts that are also site members are notified by email. They can comment on the post by replying to the email. - If you’re already using custom email notification settings, such as those triggered by workflows, selecting this preference can create duplicate email notifications. - In sites built on Aura or Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce, you can turn off these notifications. In your email notification settings, deselect **Posts on one of my cases** under “Email me when someone...”. # Set Up Users to Query Salesforce Files Control access to content files and objects via API queries with the Query All Files and Query All Non Vetoed Files user permissions. To grant users access to content files and objects, create a permission set with user permissions and assign it to users. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create permission sets: Manage Profiles and Permission Sets
To assign permission sets: Assign Permission Sets
The Query All Files user permission requires the View All Data and View All Records permissions. Users with the Query All Files permission can query all files in the org with SOQL, including files in nonmember libraries and unlisted groups. Users can’t edit, upload new versions, or delete files that they don’t have access to. Users can query the APIs for ContentDocument and ContentVersion, and retrieve all files in the org, including files in nonmember libraries and files in unlisted groups. Users can query ContentDocumentLink without a filter on Id, LinkedEntityId, and DocumentId. On its own, the View All Data permission allows you to query only files that you own or have access to. The Query Non Vetoed Files user permission allows users to query all public, non-vetoed files in a Data Cloud org with SOQL. This permission determines which files can be ingested into Data Cloud. For all files that are enabled, the related records in the APIs for ContentDocument, ContentVersion, and ContentDocumentLink become accessible for ingestion. After you turn on the Query Non Vetoed Files user permission, enable the setting **Enable Files to be ingested into Data Cloud**. To assign these permissions to users, 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **App Permissions** | **Edit**. 3. Select the user permissions. 4. Save your changes. 5. Click **Manage Assignments** | **Add Assignments**. 6. Select the users, then click **Assign**. #### See Also - [_Knowledge Article_: Understanding "Query Non Vetoed Files" Permission and File Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=004517924&type=1&language=en_US) # Set Up Your Experience Builder Site for SEO Setting up SEO for your Experience Builder site includes a series of tasks that you perform in Salesforce and in the site. From identifying your preferred domain to determining which objects to make public, we’ve got you covered. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Here’s an overview of the main steps to set up SEO for your site on a production org. 1. If you have multiple domains, [identify your preferred domain](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_preferred_domain.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "By default, your site is available on the *.my.site.com or *.force.com domain, but you can add a custom domain so that your site URLs reflect your company brand. However, multiple domains for the same site, meaning *.my.site.com, *.force.com, and custom domains, can dilute search engine results and lower page ranking. If you have multiple domains, identify which domain to use for crawling and indexing your site’s pages."). For an enhanced LWR site or for an Aura or LWR site without an identified preferred domain, the site’s first custom domain alphabetically is the preferred domain. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Identify your preferred domain before you make your site public. If the site is made public without a preferred domain, the \*.force.com or \*.my.site.com URLs are also indexed, and removing them from search results can take time. 2. [Make your site public](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.community_builder_page_access_settings.htm&type=5&language=en_US). The SEO settings tab in Experience Builder is available only if your site is public. When you make your site or specific pages public, search engines can then index those public pages. However, if you don’t want unauthenticated visitors or search engines accessing certain pages, you can make those pages private. Also, more granular indexing control is available at the object and field levels. 3. To improve search results, [specify the SEO properties for individual pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_tags.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set the title, description, and head properties for your Experience Builder site pages to improve search results."). These SEO properties are for the title and description that appear in the search results of indexed pages, and to prevent a page from being indexed. 4. Optionally, for a rules-based approach, [create a custom robots.txt file](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The robots.txt file for your site is automatically generated. It allows search engines to crawl your entire site. However, if you want to tell search engines not to crawl certain pages of your public site, you can create a custom robots.txt file.") to control the indexing of specific areas of your site. 5. If you want the information stored in objects accessible to search engines, [make objects and their associated fields readable](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_object_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you make your site public, search engines can index the pages of your Experience Builder site. However, to ensure that you don't expose sensitive data, the data displayed by objects on those pages aren’t public. Instead, you must specifically make those objects and their associated fields publicly available for indexing by search engines."). 6. Optionally, [enable generative engine optimization (GEO)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_geo.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To make public site pages more discoverable by AI-powered search engines and enhance the precision of generated answers, enable generative engine optimization (GEO) in Experience Builder. When you enable GEO, AI bots can request content snapshots of your site’s pages to generate answers more effectively.") to make pages more discoverable by AI-powered search engines. When you enable GEO, AI bots can request content snapshots of your site’s pages to generate answers more effectively. 7. [Activate your site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_publish.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Activate your site to make it accessible to members. The result of activation differs depending on whether you have a Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site or a Lightning site.") to successfully implement SEO. Before activating your site, check the guest user profile to ensure that the correct objects have read access. This best practice controls the scope of your sitemap.xml file and keeps your site secure. 8. To make your changes live, publish your site. 9. If you’re setting up SEO for the first time, or as needed, [generate a manual sitemap refresh](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_manual_SEO_sitemap.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you go live with a new Experience Builder site or make significant updates to an existing one, you can generate a manual sitemap one time every 24 hours outside of the weekly automatic sitemap refresh."). The sitemap is automatically regenerated every Sunday. An automatic partial sitemap refresh that picks up incremental changes occurs every 24 hours. You can also generate a manual sitemap refresh one time every 24 hours if needed. 10. If necessary, [provide search engines with fresh content snapshots](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_seo_snapshot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Builder sites in your production org use the Content Snapshot service to generate SEO optimized HTML for web crawlers such as Googlebot, and content sharing platforms such as Facebook. The concept is common to single-page application frameworks known as dynamic rendering. Salesforce takes a snapshot when you make changes to your site’s publicly available content. This functionality works well for most updates. But let’s say you update a page with time-sensitive information, such as price changes for a flash sale. Instead of waiting, you can take a manual snapshot once every 24 hours to refresh the page content served to search engines."). Salesforce takes a snapshot when you make changes to your site’s publicly available content. This functionality works well for most updates. But if you update a page with time-sensitive content and don’t see your changes in search results right away, you can take a manual snapshot one time every 24 hours. When you take a manual snapshot, you refresh the page content served to search engines. # Share a Chatter Post Sharing lets you quickly copy a public post to your profile or a group. This feature is available in Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience. ### Required Editions
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, Developer, and Database.com Editions
In Salesforce Classic, you can share public Chatter posts that contain text, links, or files. You can share to your profile, with a group, or using a link to the post. In Lightning Experience, you can share posts with your followers and with groups. In both cases, comments aren’t shared. But a shared post links back to its original, where users can see the comments. When you share a post, keep in mind: - When you share with a group, you can share only with a group you’re a member of. - You can’t share a post from a private group. - You can’t share a post to a private group that includes external users. - In Salesforce Classic, you can share a post to your own profile, but not to another person’s profile. - In Salesforce Classic, you can share the original post, including any files and attachments, but you can’t share any comments or likes. - In Lightning Experience, you share only the post. Attachments, comments, and likes aren’t shared. - You can comment on a shared post. - In Lightning Experience, when you edit the original of a post that’s shared, the shared version is updated. - You can’t share feed tracked items and custom feed items, such as approvals, dashboard snapshots, or case interactions. - You can't share a post from a record feed. - Only Chatter users inside your company can see a post that you shared through a link in an email or an instant message. The Chatter email notification setting for post sharing applies only to posts shared in Salesforce Classic. If notification for sharing is enabled, when someone shares your post in Salesforce Classic, you receive an email notification. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To change your email notifications, go to Settings, enter email notifications in the Quick Find box, then select **Email Notifications**. In Lightning Experience, when someone shares your post, you don’t receive an email notification. - **[Share a Chatter Post to Your Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_sharing_post_profile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Salesforce Classic, copy a public Chatter post to your profile to share it with the people who follow you. - **[Share a Chatter Post with a Chatter Group](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_sharing_post_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can share posts with public Chatter groups and groups that you’re a member of. You can’t share a post to a private Chatter group that includes external users. You can share public posts, but you can’t share feed tracked items and custom feed items, like approvals, dashboard snapshots, or case interactions. You can’t share posts with archived or unlisted groups or private groups that include external users. A post’s comments aren’t shared. But the shared post links back to the original, where comments are available. In Salesforce Classic, files attached to the shared post are included, but in Lightning Experience, attached files aren’t shared. - **[Share a Link to a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_sharing_post_link.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Salesforce Classic, share a post with other Chatter users via email or instant message. - **[Share a Link to the Detail View of a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_share_link.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Share feature in the Chatter publisher includes a Copy Link option. Use it to grab a link that jumps directly to the detail view of a post. Copying places the link on your clipboard. You can paste the link wherever you like. Paste it in the Chatter publisher to see a preview of the post that you’re linking to. - **[View a Single Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_single_update.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can navigate to a detailed view of a Chatter post in a feed for a user, record, or group. #### See Also - [View a Single Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_single_update.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can navigate to a detailed view of a Chatter post in a feed for a user, record, or group.") - [Share a Link to the Detail View of a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_share_link.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Share feature in the Chatter publisher includes a Copy Link option. Use it to grab a link that jumps directly to the detail view of a post. Copying places the link on your clipboard. You can paste the link wherever you like. Paste it in the Chatter publisher to see a preview of the post that you’re linking to.") # Share a Chatter Post to Your Profile In Salesforce Classic, copy a public Chatter post to your profile to share it with the people who follow you.
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
In Salesforce Classic, you can share public Chatter posts, but you can’t share feed tracked items and custom feed items. Examples of custom feed items include approvals, dashboard snapshots, and case interactions. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Depending on their Chatter email notification settings, when you share a post, the person who posted the original is notified. In Lightning Experience, the person who posted the original isn’t notified. The email notification setting applies only to posts shared in Salesforce Classic. 1. In Chatter, go to the post you want to share. 2. Click **Share**. 3. From the dropdown list, select **My Followers**. 4. Optionally, write a comment about the post. 5. Click **Share**. The shared post appears in the Chatter feed on your profile. #### See Also - [Chatter Post Visibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_post_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn where you can post in Chatter, who can see your posts, and whose posts you can see.") # Share a Chatter Post with a Chatter Group You can share posts with public Chatter groups and groups that you’re a member of. You can’t share a post to a private Chatter group that includes external users. You can share public posts, but you can’t share feed tracked items and custom feed items, like approvals, dashboard snapshots, or case interactions. You can’t share posts with archived or unlisted groups or private groups that include external users. A post’s comments aren’t shared. But the shared post links back to the original, where comments are available. In Salesforce Classic, files attached to the shared post are included, but in Lightning Experience, attached files aren’t shared. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
You can share a post with your followers and with a group. The posts you share with your followers appear in your profile feed. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The sharing email notification setting applies only to posts shared in Salesforce Classic. If notification for sharing is enabled, when you share a post, the person who posted the original is notified. In Lightning Experience, the person who posted the original isn’t notified. 1. In your Chatter feed, go to the post you want to share. 2. Click **Share.** 3. From the Share menu, select **A Group**. In Lightning Experience, the option is **Share with Group**. 4. Enter part of the group name and select the group from the list. 5. Type a comment about the post or leave the comment field blank. 6. Click **Share**. The shared post appears in the selected group’s feed. #### See Also - [Chatter Post Visibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_post_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn where you can post in Chatter, who can see your posts, and whose posts you can see.") # Share a Link to a Chatter Post In Salesforce Classic, share a post with other Chatter users via email or instant message.
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
When sharing a link to a post in Salesforce Classic, keep in mind: - You can’t share a link to a post from a private group. - You can’t share a post to a private group that includes external users. - You can share public posts, but you can’t share feed tracked items and custom feed items, like approvals, dashboard snapshots, or case interactions. - To see the post, the people to whom you send the link to the post must be Chatter users. 1. In the Chatter feed, go to the post you want to share. 2. Click **Share**. 3. In the top corner, click **Show link to post**. 4. Copy the link, paste it in an email or instant message, and send it. When recipients of the email or instant message click the link, the post appears in their Chatter updates. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note You can also share a link to a post in Lightning Experience. For more information, see [Share a Link to the Detail View of a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_share_link.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Share feature in the Chatter publisher includes a Copy Link option. Use it to grab a link that jumps directly to the detail view of a post. Copying places the link on your clipboard. You can paste the link wherever you like. Paste it in the Chatter publisher to see a preview of the post that you’re linking to."). #### See Also - [Chatter Post Visibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_post_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn where you can post in Chatter, who can see your posts, and whose posts you can see.") # Share a Link to the Detail View of a Chatter Post The Share feature in the Chatter publisher includes a Copy Link option. Use it to grab a link that jumps directly to the detail view of a post. Copying places the link on your clipboard. You can paste the link wherever you like. Paste it in the Chatter publisher to see a preview of the post that you’re linking to. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
The version of copy link presented in this topic is available in Lightning Experience. Salesforce Classic also has a copy link feature. For more information, see [Share a Link to a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_sharing_post_link.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Salesforce Classic, share a post with other Chatter users via email or instant message."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note You aren’t notified when someone shares a link to one of your posts. 1. In your Chatter feed, go to the post you want to share. 2. Click **Share.** 3. In the dropdown list, select **Copy Link**. 4. In the Copy Link to Thread dialog, click **Copy Link**. The link is copied to your clipboard. 5. Paste the link wherever you like, in an email, a message, or to a post on another feed. When you click the link, it jumps to the detail view of the post. In detail view, you can see the post, its attachments, and its comments. # Share a Link to Your Experience Cloud Site You can allow members to preview your Experience Cloud site before making it active. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To share a preview URL for your site: Create and Set Up Experiences
You can share the link for a preview site only with users who were added as members of the site. Sharing a link to an Experience Cloud site in Preview status allows you to easily gather stakeholder feedback. The site functions just as it will when you make it active, so stakeholders can try out all functionality and review your branding and customizations. Additionally, you can take advantage of having early members who can post, comment, and share records so that members enter an active site from their first login. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Administration** | **Settings**. 3. Copy the URL displayed on the page and share it with your stakeholders. #### See Also - [Customize Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_customize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Update basic site settings like your site URL, site name, members, login options, and general preferences in the Administration tile of Experience Workspaces.") - [Experience Cloud Site Statuses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_status.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Cloud sites can have one of these statuses: preview, inactive, active, and archived.") # Share Files Via Link Creating a public link generates a URL that you can copy and share with anyone inside or outside your company. Control access to the file with a password, or set the link to expire.
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
When you create a public link to a file, anyone who has the link can view and download the file. File link recipients can only view and download file—they can't be collaborators. When you share single files, you have the option to set a password and an expiration date. After you delete a link, it no longer provides access to the file. If you create another link, it creates a new URL. ## Create a File Link in Lightning Experience To share a link to a single file - From Files home or a files related list on a record, right-click a file and choose **Public Link**. - From Chatter, right-click the file thumbnail in the feed and choose **Public Link**. - From the file, right-click and click **Share**. From the Sharing dialog, create a link in the **Who Can Access** section under **Public Link Sharing**. Use the toggles to set an expiration date or password. Expiration dates are on by default and set 90 days in the future You can adjust the date or disable the toggle. Turn on the password toggle to generate a password, which displays on your screen. Click **Create link**, and then copy the link. ## Create and Share a Public Link for a Folder in Lightning Experience You can create public links to share folders to give people inside or outside your company access to a set of files. The public link is an encrypted URL. From the Library folder’s row-level actions click **Public Link** | **Copy Link**. To delete the link, click **Public Link** | **trash can**. ## Create and Share a File Link in Salesforce Classic - Start by sharing the file from one of these locations: - On Files home, click **Upload files**, select a file, then click **Sharing Settings**and choose **Anyone with Link**. Copy the link and share it with people inside or outside your company. - On the Home page, click **Create New** | **File**, click **Choose File**, select a file, and then select **Share via link** from the dropdown menu. - On a file detail page, click ![Share File](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_share.png) **File Sharing Settings** | **Via link**. - In the Sharing Settings dialog box, click **Anyone with link** from the Share with list. - Next to the file on the Files page, the Files Owned by list, or the Group Files list, click **![FileActionsArrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_actions_arrow.png)** | **Share via link**. - Next to the file in a feed or on a file hover, click **More Actions** | **File Sharing Settings**, then click **Anyone with link** from the Share with list. - Click **Copy** if available (or copy the link manually), and paste the link into an email or IM. File link recipients can only view and download files. They can't be collaborators. Unless the file’s already shared with your company, it's privately shared and displays the privately shared icon (![Privately Shared](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_privately_shared.png)). It's not posted anywhere, and only the people who you specifically shared it with can find and view it. If it’s already shared with your company, it retains the “your company” icon (![Company-wide](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_company_wide.png)) and anyone in your company can find and view it. To stop sharing a file by link, in the Sharing Settings dialog box, click ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png) next to the link. Anyone with the link can no longer access the file. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - Documents from the Documents tab and attachments from the Notes and Attachments related list can't be shared as Salesforce Files. - A file can be shared a maximum of 2000 times. This count includes shares with records, people, and groups. If a file is approaching the maximum number of shares, consider creating a public link or making the file public by posting it to your feed. #### See Also - [Create Content Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A content delivery lets you convert documents such as Microsoft® PowerPoint and Word files into an optimized web-based version for easy online viewing. After you create your delivery, you can send its encrypted URL to any recipient, such as leads, customers, partners, and colleagues, and then track how often people view or download the content. Content deliveries are available in Salesforce Classic only. However, Lightning Email generates delivery-based links as email attachments for Lightning Experience users who have access to the Content Deliveries feature.") - [Share Files with People in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_sharing_people_lex.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Share files with people privately and set Viewer or Collaborator access for each person who you share the file with.") # Share Files with Groups Share files in Chatter with public or private groups so that members of the groups can view and download the files from their feed. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Share a file with a private or unlisted group so that only members of the group can see it. Share a file with a public group so that all Chatter users in your company can see it. By default, anyone who can see a file can share it. To share a file with one or more Chatter groups: 1. Share the file from one of these locations: - On the detail page of the file you want to share, click ![Share File](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_share.png) **File Sharing Settings** | **With group**. Or click **Show All** on the Shared With list then click **Groups** in the Sharing Settings dialog box. - Next to the file in a feed, click **More Actions** | **File Sharing Settings** then click **Groups** in the Sharing Settings dialog box. - Next to the file on the Files page, the Files Owned by list, or the Group Files list, click ![FilesActionsArrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_actions_arrow.png) **Share with groups**. - On a file hover, click ![Share file](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_share.png) **Share File** then click **Groups** in the Sharing Settings dialog box. 2. Enter the name of the group you want to share the file with, and select it by clicking its name. Repeat this step to share with more groups. 3. Select access levels for each group. By default, private group access is set to **Collaborator**, while public group access is set to **Viewer**. 4. Optionally, add a message to your post. You can @mention people and groups in your message to notify them and post the file in their feed. 5. Click **Share** and **Close**. The file is posted to each group that you shared it with and @mentioned. A private file shared with a private or unlisted group becomes a privately shared file and displays the privately shared icon (![Privately Shared](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_privately_shared.png)). The file is posted to the group's feed, and only the file owner and group members can find and view the file. All users in your company can view any file that’s shared with a public group. A file that’s shared with a public group displays the “your company” icon (![Company-wide](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_company_wide.png)), and is posted to the group's feed. To stop sharing a file with a person or group, in the Sharing Settings dialog box, click ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png) next to the person or group's name. - There is no share button or option on the file detail page on an Experience Cloud site or in an internal org, if the file originated from the site. Documents from the Documents tab and attachments from the Notes and Attachments related list aren't listed on Files home. And they can't be shared as Salesforce Files. - If content files are part of a content pack or delivery, they can be shared with more people than shown in **Share with People**. - A file can be shared a maximum of 2000 times. This count includes shares with records, people, and groups. If a file is approaching the maximum number of shares, consider creating a public link or making the file public by posting it to your feed. #### See Also - [Group Files Lists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_recent_files.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Salesforce Classic, the Group Files list shows a group’s recently posted files.") - [View Where a File Is Shared](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_shared_with.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out who can see a file and their level of access. From the File Detail page, you can access a full list of every person or object the file is shared with.") # Share Files with Libraries in Salesforce Classic Share files with libraries to take advantage of the permission-setting capabilities of content libraries while still using the features of Salesforce Files. If your admin has enabled file sharing for your org, you can share any file with a library. The **Libraries** tab in Salesforce Classic lists your company’s libraries along with the permissions assigned to each. The **Share with library** option in Chatter lets you share Chatter files with a library, applying the permissions that are set for the library. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Sharing files with libraries requires that: - Your user detail page has the **Salesforce CRM Content User** setting enabled. Your administrator can enable this setting. - Your organization has the **Files user interface allows sharing files with libraries** setting enabled. Your administrator can enable this setting on the Salesforce CRM Content page in Setup. 1. On the **Files** tab, click ![Action Arrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_actions_arrow.png) next to the file that you want to share with a library. 2. Select **Share with library**. Or, for external file references (only applicable for Files Connect users), select **Share a reference**, and choose **Library** in the **Sharing Settings** dialog box. 3. Do one of the following, depending on what happens next: - If the **Publish Content to Multiple Libraries** dialog box appears, it means that another library already manages the file. Select one or more other libraries, and click **Publish**. - If the **Share files with a library** confirmation message appears, it means that the file has been shared with people who have Collaborator access. If you proceed, Collaborators have only Viewer access. (A library administrator can give them editing access later.) To continue, click **Share**, or click **Cancel** if you’ve changed your mind. - If the **Publish Content** dialog box appears, enter a title for the file. Select the library you want to share it with, and enter any tags as metadata. Select a record type, enter any optional information, and click **Publish**. The file is now listed on the **Libraries** tab and in **Files in My Libraries** on the **Files** tab. #### See Also - [Create Folders in Libraries in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_library_folders.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Organize library files into folders to find what you need quickly.") # Share Files with People in Lightning Experience Share files with people privately and set **Viewer** or **Collaborator** access for each person who you share the file with. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Share a file privately so that only specific people in your company can see it. By default, anyone who can see a file can share it. To share a file with one or more users in your company: 1. Start by sharing the file from one of these locations: - Next to the file on Files home, click ![FileActionsArrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_actions_arrow.png)**Share**. - On the detail page of the file you want to share, click **Share**. - From the file preview player, click ![File share arrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_share_lex.png) 2. Enter the name of the person who you want to share the file with, and select the name by clicking it. To share with more than one person, enter more names. 3. Choose the file permission you want your audience to have. By default, they have collaborator permission, which lets them view, download, share, change permission, edit the file, and upload new versions. To give your audience permission to view, download, and share files, select **Viewer**. 4. Optionally, add information to the message that recipients receive. 5. Click **Share** and **Close**. Recipients receive a link to the file and a message that you have shared a file with them. Lightning Experience users receive this message as an email notification. Salesforce Classic users get a private Chatter message on their My Messages page on the Chatter tab. If Classic users have email notifications for Chatter messages enabled, they also get an email notification. If you want to stop sharing with a person or a group, in the Sharing Settings dialog box, click ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png) next to the person or group's name. To see everyone the file is shared with, from the Share File window, click **Who Can Access**. Update file permissions or stop sharing the file by clicking ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png) next to the name of a person or group. To prevent others from changing who can access the file, select **Prevent others from sharing and unsharing**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - There is no share button or option on the file detail page on an Experience Cloud site or in an internal org, if the file originated from the site. - Documents from the Documents tab and attachments from the Notes and Attachments related list aren't listed on Files home. They can't be shared as Salesforce Files. - If content files are part of a content pack or delivery, they can be shared with more people than are shown in **Share with People**. - A file can be shared a maximum of 2000 times. This count includes shares with records, people, and groups. If a file is approaching the maximum number of shares, consider creating a public link or making the file public by posting it to your feed. # Share Files with People in Salesforce Classic Share files with people privately and set **Viewer** or **Collaborator** access for each person that you share the file with. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Share a file privately so that only specific people in your company can see it. By default, anyone who can see a file can share it. To share a file with one or more users in your company: 1. Start by sharing the file from one of these locations: - On the detail page of the file you want to share, click ![Share File](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_share.png) **File Sharing Settings** | **Share with people**. Or click **Sharing Settings**, and then click **People** in the Sharing Settings dialog box. - Next to the file in a feed, click **More Actions** | **File Sharing Settings**, and then click **People** in the Sharing Settings dialog box. - Next to the file on the Files home page, click ![FileActionsArrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_actions_arrow.png)**Share with people**. - On a file hover, click ![Share file](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_share.png) **Share File** and then click **People** in the Sharing Settings dialog box. 2. Enter the name of the person who you want to share the file with, and then select a file by clicking its name. 3. Choose the file permission you want your audience to have. By default, they have collaborator permission, which lets them view, download, share, change permission, edit the file, and upload new versions. Give them permission to view, download, and share files by selecting **Viewer**. 4. To share the file with more people, enter more names. 5. Optionally, add information to the message that recipients receive. 6. Click **Share** and **Close**. Recipients receive a link to the file and a message that you have shared the file with them. Lightning Experience users receive this message as an email notification. Salesforce Classic users get a private Chatter message on their My Messages page on the Chatter tab. If Classic users have email notifications for Chatter messages enabled, they also get an email notification . Unless the file’s already shared with your company, it's privately shared and displays the privately shared icon (![Privately Shared](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_privately_shared.png)). It's not posted anywhere, and only the people who you specifically shared it with can find and view it. If it’s already shared with your company, it retains the “your company” icon (![Company-wide](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_company_wide.png)) and anyone in your company can find and view it. To stop sharing the file with a person or a group, in the Sharing Settings dialog box, click ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png) next to the person or group's name. If you don’t want others to change who can access the file, select **Prevent others from sharing and unsharing**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - There is no share button or option on the file detail page on an Experience Cloud site or in an internal org, if the file originated from the site. - Documents from the Documents tab and attachments from the Notes and Attachments related list aren't listed on Files home. And they can't be shared as Salesforce Files. - If content files are part of a content pack or delivery, they can be shared with more people than shown in **Share with People**. - A file can be shared a maximum of 2000 times. This count includes shares with records, people, and groups. If a file is approaching the maximum number of shares, consider creating a public link or making the file public by posting it to your feed. #### See Also - [View Where a File Is Shared](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_shared_with.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out who can see a file and their level of access. From the File Detail page, you can access a full list of every person or object the file is shared with.") # Share Partner Fund Allocations with the CAM Create two sharing rules: one for the channel account manager (CAM) and one for the partner user. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create sharing rules Manage Sharing
If you have a Partner License and have enabled Experience Cloud sites, Market Development Fund objects are available in your org. Create two sharing rules to grant the appropriate access to partner fund allocations for channel account managers and partner users. 1. From Setup, enter Sharing in the Quick Find box, then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Click **New** under **Partner Fund Allocations** | **Sharing Settings**. 3. Enter your rule information for your channel manager. 4. Save your sharing rule. 5. Create a sharing rule for your partner users as well. # Share Partner Marketing Budgets with the Channel Account Manager Create a sharing rule that gives channel account managers access to budgets. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create sharing rules Manage Sharing
If you have a Partner License and have enabled Experience Cloud sites, Market Development Fund objects are available in your org. Create a sharing rule that grants budget access to internal users. 1. From Setup, enter Sharing in the Quick Find box, then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Click **New** under **Partner Marketing Budget** | **Sharing Settings**. 3. Enter your rule information for your channel manager. 4. Save your sharing rule. # Share Updates with People in Chatter Share updates with coworkers, collaborate in Chatter groups, and view record updates. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Welcome to Chatter in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.chatter_lex_homepage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Whether you’re new to Chatter or switching from Salesforce Classic, Chatter in Lightning Experience offers tons of useful features. Use Chatter to communicate with colleagues, gain insight into your company, and preserve your tribal knowledge. - **[Chatter Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Chatter features such as feeds, profiles, and groups to share information, collaborate, and keep up with the latest updates in your company. Chatter works in accordance with all security and permission settings in your Salesforce organization. - **[Get Started with Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_get_started.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Connect with people and share business information securely in real time. - **[Work with Chatter Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feeds_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Stay up-to-date on the posts and comments that you and other people make in Chatter, and the record changes across your Salesforce org. - **[Chatter Streams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter streams are custom feeds that you create by combining multiple related feeds into one feed. Look for streams on your Chatter home page. Create up to 100 streams that each combine posts from up to 25 different feeds and feed types. Create streams that combine feeds from people, groups, and records, like accounts, opportunities, cases, and more. - **[Work with Chatter Posts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_posts_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Share information and collaborate in Chatter with other people inside and outside your organization. Chatter posts, tracked changes, and comments don’t count toward your org’s data storage allowance. - **[People in Your Organization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_people_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update your personal profile, and view the profiles of other people in your organization. - **[Records and List Views](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_records_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure your follow settings for records, view a Chatter feed on a list view, and learn more about record recommendations. - **[Collaborate in Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_groups_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use public, private, or unlisted Chatter groups to collaborate with specific people in your company. - **[Private Messages in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_messages_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Chatter messages for secure private conversations with other Chatter users. - **[Chatter Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_questions_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Got questions? Use Chatter Questions to post a question to a feed, then watch the answers roll in. # Sharing CRM Data in an Experience Cloud Site Sharing CRM data in an Experience Cloud site can seem like a daunting task. You need to consider the various layers of sharing data in an internal Salesforce org, and then add the extra security layers included in a portal or community implementation. Here’s a cheat sheet of all the resources you need when setting up data sharing for your Experience Cloud site. Before implementing your site, familiarize yourself with how Experience Cloud sites coexist in a Salesforce org. Check out this video information: - [Experience Cloud Sites and Users in Your Salesforce Org](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/5kixavmXPC372dCZ37Z2dv) ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_warning.png) Warning In Salesforce orgs created before February 8, 2024 that enabled digital experiences before the “Enable Secure Roles Behavior and Update Sharing Group References in Production” release update was enforced Winter ’26, record access was automatically extended to external members. Records previously accessible to Roles and Subordinates are available to Roles, Internal and Portal Subordinates. Opening up access to the site and portal subordinates could expose your org’s data to external users. To secure your sites, use the Convert External User Access Wizard to help ensure that no records or folders are shared with external users. For more information, see [Use the Convert External User Access Wizard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.customer_portal_access_wizard.htm&language=en_US). In all orgs created on February 8, 2024 or later and in all orgs that enabled digital experiences after Winter ’26, access is secure by default. Records shared with the Roles and Internal Subordinates group through sharing rules or other mechanisms remain accessible only to internal users. Another important concept is that the type of license your users have affects the types of sharing available to them. Based on the licenses used to access an Experience Cloud site, users have standard or simple sharing capabilities. Standard sharing refers to all the sharing mechanisms available to internal Salesforce org users, plus various sharing mechanisms that come with Experience Cloud licenses (sharing sets, share groups, super user access). Standard sharing is available to Customer Community Plus and Partner Community licenses. Simple sharing means that users don’t have access to roles and sharing using the role hierarchy, and is normally employed in sites with a high volume of users. Simple sharing is available to Customer Community license holders. For more information about what’s included in the various licenses, check out [Experience Cloud User Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_license_types_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US).
Resources for Sharing and Security
Org-Wide Defaults

Salesforce Org Resources

Experience Cloud Resources

Account Roles and Role Hierarchies

Salesforce Org Resources

Experience Cloud Resources

Sharing Rules

Salesforce Org Resources

Experience Cloud Resources

Sharing for Experience Cloud Sites

Resources

# Show CRM Data in Your Aura or LWR Site Using Object Pages In Aura and LWR sites, you can use object pages to show CRM data. Object pages include a record detail page, a record list page, and a related list page. Each page provides different views and details about object data. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
Create and assign an object page for every object that you share on your site. If you don’t assign an object page, users land on a generic object page when they click a link to CRM data on your site. The three standard object pages are: - Record Detail: This page shows details about an individual record for your object. - Record List: This page shows the list of records for the object. - Related Record List: This page shows a list of records for an object related to the primary object. For example, the related record list page for the Account object contains records for the Contact object. To customize object pages in Aura sites, you can use several components, including [Record Banner](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_record_headline.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Record Banner component shows the record name, key record highlights, and action buttons that allow users to edit or delete the record."), [Record Detail](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_record_detail.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add the Record Detail component to a record detail or a custom page to show record information stored in Salesforce. This component is a great way to share information with site members who need it most, such as partners."), [Record Information Tabs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_record_information.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Record Information Tabs component allows the user to display record information using tabs for Record Details, Related Records, Feed, and Activity Timeline."), [Record List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_record_list_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Record List component shows a list of records on the Record List page. Users can view records, switch between record list views, and create records directly from the list view. If a user has no access to a particular list view, they see the Recently Used list view instead."), and [Record Related List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_record_related_list.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Record Related List component shows a list of all records that are related to a record. For example, if you’re looking at an account, you can see a related list of contacts, opportunities, and activity history for that account. Use the Record Related List component on a generic Record Detail page or on a custom page to show a list of related records. Members can create records from the list and from lookups."). To customize object pages in your LWR site, you can use the Record Detail (Beta) component. # Show or Hide Components on Mobile, Tablet, or Desktop for Enhanced LWR Sites Improve the readability of your site by hiding unnecessary components. In enhanced LWR sites, site builders can customize which components are shown or hidden for each device type—mobile, tablet, or desktop. Components are shown by default. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. In Experience Builder, click **View Mode** in the top navigation bar. ![View Mode menu.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/ec_builder_view_mode.png) 2. Select the view to customize. 3. On the canvas, select the component. The component property panel opens for the selected view mode. 4. Click the **Visibility** tab. 5. Turn on **Show Component** to show or edit it. Turn it off to hide the component. Your selection applies only to the selected view mode. It doesn’t affect the other view modes. 6. Repeat these steps for all components that you want to customize and for each applicable view mode. 7. To make sure the components are shown or hidden as expected, preview your site. 8. Click **Publish**. When you click a component in the Page Structure panel, Experience Builder scrolls the canvas to show the component and open its property panel. When you click a component on the canvas, Experience Builder scrolls the Page Structure panel to show the selected component there. To locate hidden components in the Page Structure panel, from the Show dropdown list, select **Hidden Components**. You can unhide a component directly from the panel by clicking the eye icon beside the component’s name. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Hidden Components option in the Show dropdown list and the eye icon apply to components hidden via the Show Component toggle on the component property panel. These indicators don’t apply to components hidden via expression-based visibility settings. ![Page Structure panel with hidden icon highlighted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/page-structure-hidden-icon.png) When you hide a component, the canvas shows an overlay of the component and identifies it as hidden. ![Canvas with hidden indicator highlighted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/canvas_hidden_comp_indicator.png) You can also hide components with expression-based visibility settings. #### See Also - [Expression-Based Visibility in Enhanced LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_expression_based_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With Expression-Based Visibility, you can create a set of rules that dictate when and to whom your components in your enhanced LWR sites appear. Choose visibility settings based on User and Product object fields such as location, language, buyer groups, and more. Creating visibility conditions based on expressions improves the agility of your site.") # Show Record Lists in Your Aura or LWR Site Using Navigation Menus Create record list views for objects such as accounts, cases, contacts, and custom objects, and link to them from your site’s Navigation Menu or Tile Menu components. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. In Experience Builder, add a Tile Menu or Navigation Menu component to the appropriate site page. Alternatively, if you’re using the Customer Service, Partner Central, or Customer Account Portal Templates, you can click the default Navigation Menu component, which is in the page header. 2. Go to **Settings** | **Navigation**. Or in the property panel, click **Edit Default Navigation**. 3. Click **Add Menu Item** (1). 4. Give your new menu item a name, and from the Type dropdown, select **Salesforce Object**. Then select the Object Type and your desired List View (2). 5. If you want guest users to access your new record list view page, enable **Publicly available** (3). ![Create a navigation menu item for a Salesforce Object](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/exp_builder_nav_menu_recordlist_page.png) 6. Save your changes. If your site is active, users see the changes to your navigation menu immediately. Under the hood, your data is retrieved from Salesforce and displayed using the generic record list page. The generic Record List page provides the default list view layout for objects without a predefined or custom list view page assigned. For example, if you create a navigation menu item for another Salesforce object, it uses this same generic page. If you modify the record list page, be sure to account for all the affected objects that rely on the page. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important The Help Center and LWR templates don’t include generic record pages, so you also must create the corresponding object pages. If you don’t create the object pages, your end users don’t see anything when they click the menu item. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example A list view page for a custom object called Featured Products. ![List view page in the Customer Service template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_templates_record_list_view.png) - Users can access only records they have access to via licenses, profiles, permissions, and sharing rules, same as in Salesforce. Users with the "Create" permission for the object can create records from the list view page. The ability to create records from this page isn’t supported on mobile devices. - When users click a record on this page, the record details are displayed using the layout from the generic Record Detail page. If you create a custom record detail page and assign it to the object, we use that page instead. - When creating record list views in Experience Cloud sites using Experience Builder, picking a default list view value other than Default overrides the user’s pinned list. If you want users to access their own pinned lists, leave the list view as Default. Otherwise, users see whatever list view was set as the default, even if they have a pinned list. #### See Also - [Navigation Menu](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_setup_nav_menu.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Navigation Menu component extends your site’s navigation beyond navigational topics. Navigation menu items can include Salesforce objects, topics, pages in your site, URLs to external sites, and menu labels. Menu labels are parent headings under which you can nest other menu items. You can also enable the App Launcher to make it easy for members to switch between their sites and their Salesforce org.") - [Record List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_record_list_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Record List component shows a list of records on the Record List page. Users can view records, switch between record list views, and create records directly from the list view. If a user has no access to a particular list view, they see the Recently Used list view instead.") - [Tile Menu](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_tile_menu.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Tile Menu Lightning Web component in Experience Builder to add an intuitive and visually stunning navigation experience to your site.") # Site Case Feed With the site case feed, agents and Experience Cloud site members see the lifecycle of a case from start to finish. All case interactions appear in a unified, chronological Chatter case feed. Site members benefit from the added functionalities of Chatter, while service features help agents provide efficient, personalized support. To use Site Case Feed, Chatter must be turned on in your org. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura and Visualforce sites
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). The site case feed gives Experience Cloud site users an intuitive environment where they can manage their cases. Internal and external users see the following interactions in the site case feed: - Chatter text, file, and link posts - Questions in Chatter that are associated with the case - Case emails - In sites built on Aura, emails in the site case feed don’t display inline images or clickable links. - To learn more about case email visibility, see [Emails in the Site Case Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.ccf_expose_case_emails.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you enable the site case feed for Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce, external users with access to a case see case emails in their feed. Emails in the site case feed include the email’s author, recipients, text, and time sent."). - Read-only social posts on cases if your Salesforce admin enables them **Site case feed in an Experience Cloud site built on the Customer Service template:** ![Community case feed](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/ccf_feed.png) Using the publisher (1), users create posts and attach files to the case. The feed (2) comes fully equipped with Chatter’s collaboration tools: users can bookmark, like, and comment on posts, and mention other users. Images and comments appear inline, making it easy to scan the feed for details. The Attachments component (3) displays all case attachments. When the site case feed is enabled, support agents can: - Use the action in the console case feed to answer questions and create private and public Chatter posts on cases - Expose or hide a published post or email in the site case feed of external users - **[Set Up the Site Case Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.ccf_set_up_community_case_feed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The site case feed lets Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site users and support agents see all case interactions in a unified feed. Also, agents can take more actions directly from the console. To set up the site case feed, make sure that Chatter is turned on in your org. Then enable site case feed and make sure that the case page in your site is properly configured. - **[Emails in the Site Case Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.ccf_expose_case_emails.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you enable the site case feed for Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce, external users with access to a case see case emails in their feed. Emails in the site case feed include the email’s author, recipients, text, and time sent. #### See Also - [Set Up the Site Case Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.ccf_set_up_community_case_feed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The site case feed lets Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site users and support agents see all case interactions in a unified feed. Also, agents can take more actions directly from the console. To set up the site case feed, make sure that Chatter is turned on in your org. Then enable site case feed and make sure that the case page in your site is properly configured.") - [Emails in the Site Case Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.ccf_expose_case_emails.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you enable the site case feed for Aura and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce, external users with access to a case see case emails in their feed. Emails in the site case feed include the email’s author, recipients, text, and time sent.") - [Post on Cases and Experience Cloud Site Questions with the Experience Action in the Case Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.case_interaction_portal_post.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Sites That Generate a Preview in Posts Salesforce provides rich media support for over 400 URLs. When you share a supported link in a post, it’s converted into embedded videos, images, and other types of previews. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Supported preview types include thumbnails, descriptions, and video players for links to videos. If a link doesn’t render as a rich preview, the URL domain isn’t supported or we couldn’t return the preview content. The list of supported domains includes versions of URLs that third-party shorteners have shortened, like bitly, goo.gl, and tinyurl.com. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note For a look-up list of supported URL domains, see the attachment to [Rich preview not generated for link post in Chatter.](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=000337464&language=en_US&type=1&mode=1) #### See Also - [Attach a Link to a File or Other Content to a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_attach_link.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Salesforce Classic, share links with people by attaching them to a Chatter post.") # Smart Search Assistance Logic Learn how the Smart Search Assistance sub-agent uses semantic search and grounded AI to retrieve, summarize, and cite information while maintaining strict security for authenticated and guest users. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost. To purchase, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Available in: Aura Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Available in: LWR Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Smart Search Assistance is a specialized sub-agent that resolves informational queries by reading through your articles and data to provide a direct, natural language answer. It uses Actionable Smart Search to bridge the gap between finding information and starting a service request, such as a Unified Catalog flow. To protect sensitive data, Salesforce restricts certain search reasoning tasks to the External Einstein Agent user license. However, the agent intelligently manages permissions based on the user type: - Authenticated Users: The agent respects the user's specific CRM permissions and object access. - Unauthenticated Guest Users: The tool runs in the context of the Bot user. To make sure citations link correctly for guests, Salesforce recommends aligning Bot user access with your Guest User profile permissions. To make sure that summaries are accurate and citations are navigable, Experience Cloud sites support only Enterprise Knowledge Harmonized Data Model Objects (DMOs). - Citation Integrity: If a search profile includes non-harmonized objects, the agent cannot resolve the citation, which may lead users to incorrect login pages. - Direct Navigation: By mapping the Content ID (DCC ID), the agent makes it possible for users to navigate directly from a summary citation to the specific article detail page. # Sort the Topics List with Filters Use topic filters to narrow the topics list to your favorite topics or the topics that you use. Use sorting options to sort the topics by the number of people talking about them or alphabetically by name. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
Under **Show** on the [Topics list](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Chatter topics list to see the topics that people are talking about in your organization. All topic names appear in this list, including topics that are used solely in private groups or on records."), you can find filters to use to adjust your view of topics. All All topics that have been added to posts in your organization My Favorites Topics that you added to your favorites Topics I Use Topics that you added to posts and topics on posts that you commented on In your filtered view of topics, you can sort by the following columns. People Talking About This Sorts by the number of people talking about the topic. People talking about the topic include: - The number of people adding the topic to updates - The number of people commenting on posts with the topic Name Sorts alphabetically by the topic name. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example Only users with the View All Data permission can filter by record name. # Sort Your Chatter Feed Sort your Chatter feed by the latest posts or the most recent comments. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
1. Above a Chatter feed, click ![down arrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_feed_dropdown_arrow.png) the Sort by menu. 2. To sort the feed by the most recent posts, select **Latest Posts**. To sort the feed by the most recent comments, select **Most Recent Activity**. By default, a feed is sorted by Most Recent Activity. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_example.png) Example Here’s one way to use sorting options effectively. Let’s say you’re following many people and records and have bookmarked the posts that you’re interested in. At the end of your work day, you want to know whether there are any updates for your bookmarked posts. You click **Bookmarked** to view all your bookmarked posts and then sort the posts by Most Recent Activity. Posts are listed in the order of recent comments, starting with the post with the latest comment. #### See Also - [Filter Your Chatter Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_subfilter.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use filters to limit what appears in your Chatter feed to the items that match the selected filter.") # Standard Components for LWR Templates Standard components are built by Salesforce. Build Your Own (LWR) and Microsite (LWR) templates include record experiences such as Record Detail and Actions Bar (beta availability varies by release). LWR templates also support no-code data binding to dynamically show CRM and CMS data without custom code. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To give access to guest users, enable **Allow guest users to access public APIs** in the site’s Administration workspace, under preferences. Actions Bar Help users act on Salesforce records from your LWR site. Add a custom set of actions, choose the number of actions in the bar, and customize how more actions appear in the dropdown menu. Individual action button styles are inherited from site branding settings. See [Actions Bar Considerations in LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lwr_actions_bar_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With the Actions Bar component, users can take action on Salesforce data directly from your LWR site. But before you add actions to LWR sites, it’s important to understand the limitations."). Banner Create a banner layout on your site using images, text, and buttons. Use data binding in this component to dynamically populate content from Salesforce CMS and other data sources. Button Use buttons as calls to action linking to external pages or pages in your site. Nest the Button component inside other components, such as Banner and Tile, to add calls to action in any region of the page. Card Use this flexible container to add content in a rectangular card. You can specify the card’s height, width, and background color, and you can customize image settings. Embedded Messaging To modernize how you communicate with customers, add Messaging for Web to your Experience Builder site. See [Configure a Messaging for Web Deployment in an Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.miaw_deployment_experience_builder.htm&type=5&language=en_US) Flow Automate business processes with the Flow component. Add screen flows to your pages so that you can capture information, take customers through workflows, and use the flexibility of Flow Builder to your advantage. Flows that use Aura components aren’t supported. Grid Use the Grid component to show collections or list views in LWR sites. Select a data source, layout, and pagination option to show content saved in Salesforce. In non-enhanced LWR sites, the Grid component shows object list views. In enhanced LWR sites, the component can display object list views or CMS collections created in enhanced workspaces. When you select the **Show pagination** option, you can customize how you want users to navigate through content on your site. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note In commerce stores, the grid component has a third data source, Nested Expression. With the Nested Expressions data source, you can bind data nested in the top-level data source. Nested Expressions gives you more flexibility to show data that hasn’t been put into list views. Horizontal Line Add a horizontal line to visually separate elements on the page. Choose the line’s weight, width, and style. HTML Editor Use the HTML Editor component to create and edit custom content in HTML. In orgs with at least 1 active community license, this component can use data binding to dynamically populate content from Salesforce CMS and other data sources on record and CMS detail pages. Image Use the image component to add images to your page. Add the image URL and alt text for screen readers. This component can dynamically populate content from Salesforce CMS and other data sources when used on CMS or record detail pages. List Create lists that dynamically populate with CMS or CRM data based on your site’s needs. Control the look and feel of the list data with ease from the property panel. Navigation Menu Design a separate navigation menu for the desktop and mobile version of your site. Customize the Navigation Bar for desktop screens and Mobile Navigation for mobile screens. A tablet held in landscape view shows the desktop navigation, and one held in portrait view shows mobile navigation. You can add menu items of these types: External URL, Menu Label, Salesforce Object, Site Page. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note We recommend against using custom CSS with the Navigation Menu component because the CSS can fail. See [Override Component Branding in LWR Sites with Custom CSS](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/brand_target_css.htm) in the LWR developer guide. Overlap Overlap content components on the page. Overlap an image with content components, such as Text Block and Button, for a layered look. Record List (LWR) Help visitors view, search, and sort accounts, cases, and other data in your LWR site. The component displays only the data users are permitted to view, based on access settings defined by your admin. Customize the component’s appearance with properties for styling and layout, including support for custom CSS. The responsive design ensures a seamless experience across desktop, tablet, and mobile devices. It offers a clean, professional data display that aligns with ‌your brand and website design. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Record List component doesn't support the Task object. Hence, it is not available in the object selection dropdown in Experience Builder. Results Layout Add the Results Layout component, along with the Search Bar component, so that your site visitors can view search results. The Results Layout component is available only after you create a standard Search page. See [Set Up CMS Content Search in an LWR Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_search_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In enhanced LWR sites, visitors can search for CMS content published from enhanced CMS workspaces. Visitors can also search for content within the Rich Content Editor and HTML Editor components, as well as within page title metadata. Use the Search Bar and Results Layout components to add the search functionality to your enhanced LWR site.") and [Set Up CRM Search in LWR Sites (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_build_lwr_crm_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up a CRM search page so your site visitors can search for CRM records, such as cases, accounts, leads, opportunities, and knowledge articles, in LWR sites. Visitors can filter and sort the search results, making it easier to find what they need. You can create and save search configurations to display only the information you need and apply that configuration to multiple sites. You can customize the labels, buttons, background and images of the No Results panel, object navigation panel, and filter panel to compliment your company’s brand."). Rich Content Editor Use the Rich Content Editor component to add formatted custom text to your site pages, along with images and videos. To add alt text to an image, make sure that the component is in edit mode, then right-click the image. In orgs with at least 1 active community license, this component can use data binding to dynamically populate content from Salesforce CMS and other data sources on record and CMS detail pages. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Branding changes that you make using the Themes tab and branding design tokens don’t apply to the Rich Content Editor component. For best results, when you update the content in this component, make your changes in Experience Builder, rather than by using Experience Bundle or Digital Experience Bundle. Search Bar Add the Search Bar and Results Layout components so that visitors can search for CMS content and CRM records. When you add the Search Bar component to the header section, search is available across all site pages. See [Set Up CMS Content Search in an LWR Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_search_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In enhanced LWR sites, visitors can search for CMS content published from enhanced CMS workspaces. Visitors can also search for content within the Rich Content Editor and HTML Editor components, as well as within page title metadata. Use the Search Bar and Results Layout components to add the search functionality to your enhanced LWR site.") and [Set Up CRM Search in LWR Sites (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_build_lwr_crm_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up a CRM search page so your site visitors can search for CRM records, such as cases, accounts, leads, opportunities, and knowledge articles, in LWR sites. Visitors can filter and sort the search results, making it easier to find what they need. You can create and save search configurations to display only the information you need and apply that configuration to multiple sites. You can customize the labels, buttons, background and images of the No Results panel, object navigation panel, and filter panel to compliment your company’s brand."). Site Header (Beta) Create headers for specific site pages. The site Header comes with components for a logo, navigation menu, and button. Add or delete components based on your site’s needs. Responsive properties work only in enhanced LWR sites. To use Site Header in a microsite, in Settings | Theme, create a theme layout using the Simple Theme Layout option. Assign the new layout to the pages where you want the new site header to appear, delete the default header from those pages, and replace it with Site Header. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Site Header component is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/?_ga=2.247987783.1372150065.1709219475-629000709.1639001992). Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. Tabs Add up to 5 horizontal or vertical tabs and control the way they look on your site. Drop any content component into a tab region. You can use a data-bound component to show products in one tab, a button to contact support on another tab, and a list of your product’s features on a third. Text Block Add text to the page. Text formatting, such as heading tags and font size, is inherited from site branding settings. Tile Create a tile layout on your site using images, text, and buttons. Use data binding in this component to dynamically populate content from Salesforce CMS and other data sources. Tile Menu Add an intuitive and visually stunning navigation experience to your site. Video Use the Video component to add videos to your page. Add the video embed URL and settings such as aspect ratio, width, and horizontal alignment. Use data binding in this component to dynamically populate content from Salesforce CMS and other data sources. ## Available in Orgs That Have at Least One Active Community License Biometric Login Button Use the Biometric Login Button component to create a button that triggers the login prompt for face or fingerprint recognition on a mobile app. This component is supported only on the login page of Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud apps configured with [User Opt-In Biometric Login](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.branded_apps_exp_opt_in_biometric_login.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud LWR sites supports only the Build Your Own (LWR) template. Columns Add up to 6 columns of content components to your page. Customize the column structure by selecting the Column Layout icon. Resize the columns by using the handles between the columns. To delete a column, click beneath it. Contact Support Form To enable users to contact support and generate a case from your site, add the Contact Support Form component. Several preconfigured component fields streamline the collection of information from the user to get their support request submitted and resolved quickly. The component contains several custom fields that you can configure to your company’s preferences. Knowledge Article Use the Knowledge Article component to show site visitors knowledge articles in LWR. Salesforce admins can toggle between field labels and field sections and adjust the style of the knowledge article title. Mandatory field labels, such as URL Name, that your site visitors don’t need are also hidden. Knowledge Article List (Beta) Use the Knowledge Article List (beta) component to show knowledge articles that belong to the same data category on LWR sites. You can also control how knowledge articles are sorted on the page for more customization opportunities. Language Selector Allow users to choose their own site language. After configuring translations, add the Language Selector component to your page to provide a language selection dropdown menu. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note In a site that has only one language, you can drag the Language Selector onto a page, but the component is disabled and unavailable. None of the customizations you make in the component property panel are saved. Lead Form Route leads gathered in your site to the Leads object in Salesforce. Using preconfigured mappings, you can transfer your lead data without tedious background setup. Marketing Cloud Engagement Form Send contact information directly from your LWR sites to Marketing Cloud Engagement data extensions. Create data extensions from the Form component with one click and then start gathering customer info. Orchestration Work Guide Use the Orchestration Work Guide component so that credentialed site visitors can complete work items that they’re assigned. Page Refresh On the Too Many Requests page, the Page Refresh component automatically refreshes the page for your customers. The Page Refresh component is built into the body of the Too Many Requests page, so there’s no need to manually add it to the page. Request Approval Use the Request Approval component so credentialed site visitors can submit a record for approval. You can configure one flow approval process in the component. Record Detail View and edit records in your LWR site. In the component, users see the page layout that’s assigned to their profile. The component inherits formatting, such as font and color, from your site’s branding settings. The Record Detail panel doesn’t show in the list of available components if it’s not available for the object, even if **Show All Components** is checked. For example, Note, Report, ServiceReport, and Task are a few of the objects that aren’t available for use with the Record Detail component in LWR sites. Site Logo Personalize the pages on your site with your logo. The Site Logo component replaces the Community Logo component as of Summer ’23. Sites created before Summer ’23 continue to use the Community Logo. To use Site Logo, delete the Community Logo and drag the Site Logo component to the page. Site Logo is also incorporated into the Site Header (beta) component. To learn more about how to dynamically populate data in LWR templates, watch: # Stream Detail The Stream Detail component is available to repair the Stream Detail page in the event its Stream Detail component is mistakenly removed. 1. In the Experience Builder, select the **Stream Detail** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Stream ID | Stream ID has a default variable value that gets the ID of whatever stream was selected on the Stream List page. We recommend that you leave this value at its default, {!recordId}. Changing this value fixes the display to one stream that only one site member has access to. That is, the member who created the stream with the fixed ID you enter here. | # Stream List The Stream List component is available to repair the Stream List page in the event its Stream List component is mistakenly removed. The Stream List component has no properties. # Streamline Customer Support with Customer Insights Customer Insights informs support agents working in the Service Console whether the customer has looked at the pertinent documentation. It also shows if the customer has filed a case before calling support. As a result, agents don’t suggest articles that a customer has accessed or open duplicate cases, decreasing customer frustration and improving support. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
- **[Set Up Customer Insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_community_360_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Customer Insights in your org and then set it up for each Experience Builder site you have. - **[Considerations When Using Customer Insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_community_360_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you enable Customer Insights in your org, you’re allowing data to be gathered from site members and stored in Salesforce. Here are some things to keep in mind when using Customer Insights. # Suggested Actions Suggested Actions brings the power of Einstein Next Best Action into sites. Choose strategies that apply your org’s business rules to display suggested offers and actions. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
  • OR
  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
To publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
  • OR
  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin or publisher in that site
To run a suggested action in an Experience Builder site:

Run Flows

OR

Flow User field enabled on the user detail page

OR

If Override default behavior and restrict access to enabled profiles or permission sets is selected for an individual flow, access to that flow is given to users by profile or permission set

To view Einstein Next Best Action Reccomendation records when using Flow Builder as the reccomendation source in an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND have the View Recommendations user permission enable
1. Create a recommendation strategy in the Flow Builder. 2. Drag the Suggested Actions component onto your site page. 3. In the property editor, enter the title that you want customers to see (1) and select the strategy you want to display (2). Enter the maximum number of suggestions to display (3) and choose where the suggested actions open (4). ![Suggested Actions component properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/suggested_actions_prop_editor.png) - Title—Displays this title for the component on the site page. The default title is Next Best Action. - Strategy—Displays all available strategies created in Flow Builder. - Maximum Suggestions Displayed—Allows up to four suggestions to display when there are multiple suggested actions available. - Hide Empty Component—Hides the component when there are no suggested actions initially available. If there are actions available when the app opens, the component continues to display, even if the actions run out. - Launch Suggested Actions In—Specifies whether your suggestions open in a display window, a new browser window, or on a site flow page. - Show Image—Shows images associated with each suggested action. If the recommendation doesn’t have an image, a placeholder displays. - Show Description—Displays the description defined on the Recommendation record. - Show Reject Option—Displays the reject option associated with suggested actions. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Here’s how a strategy looks when it displays in a site. ![A Suggested Actions component on a community page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/suggested_actions_example.png) # Supported Browsers for Experience Cloud Sites Browser support for Experience Cloud sites varies by the device that you access the site from and the site template. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites are supported on all desktop browsers that Salesforce supports. These sites are also [accessible from the Salesforce app](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_access_in_salesforce1.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Accessing Experience Cloud sites from the Salesforce mobile app depends on several factors, including the type of template used to create the site and the licenses and permissions of site users."). ## Experience Builder Sites Experience Builder sites such as Customer Service, Partner Central, and Help Center are supported on these browsers. Desktop and Laptops | Platforms | Apple® Safari® | Google Chrome™ | Microsoft® Edge Chromium | Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 11 | Mozilla® Firefox® | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Apple® macOS® Desktop | Supports latest stable browser version | Supports latest stable browser version | Not supported | Not supported | Supports latest stable browser version | | Microsoft® Windows® Desktop | Not supported | Supports latest stable browser version | Supports latest stable browser version | Ended support on December 31, 2020 | Supports latest stable browser version | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Support for accessing Experience Builder sites with Internet Explorer 11 ended on December 31, 2020. But there’s no difference for site visitors using the browser in the short term. Because Experience Cloud no longer tests new features on Internet Explorer 11, your site can function differently than expected. To let users know they must switch browsers, enable display warnings for unsupported browers. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences Settings, click **Settings**, and select **Display warning for unsupported browsers**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To load Experience Builder with Safari 13.1 or above, disable these settings: - Block All Cookies - Prevent Cross-Site Tracking - Private Browsing - Block Pop-ups (Pop-up blocking can prevent some pages from opening in a new tab.) ## Mobile Devices | Platforms | Apple® Safari® | Google Chrome™ | Microsoft® Edge (Windows® 10 only) | Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 11 | Mozilla® Firefox® | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Android™ Phone and Tablet | Not supported | Supports latest stable browser version | Not supported | Not supported | Not supported | | iOS Phone and Tablet | Supports latest stable browser version | Not supported | Not supported | Not supported | Not supported | | Windows® 8 Phone | Not supported | Not supported | Not supported | Ended support on December 31, 2020 | Not supported | | Windows® 10 Phone | Not supported | Not supported | Supports latest stable browser version | Not supported | Not supported | ## Unsupported Browser Notification Some unsupported browsers can load the Lightning framework. When users try accessing an Experience Builder site in one of these browsers, they see a notification asking them to update or switch browsers. Other unsupported browsers such as Internet Explorer 10 or below can’t load the Lightning framework. If users try accessing a site in one of these browsers, they see a blank page. If you tested your site in an unsupported browser and everything works as expected, you can disable the default notification. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences Settings, click **Settings**, and deselect **Display warning for unsupported browsers**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - If you used a WebView to create a mobile site, check that the pop-up window appears the way you like. - Users don’t see the unsupported browser notification on site login pages. If you know that your users are using unsupported browsers to access your site, create Visualforce login pages and use them instead of default site login pages. - The unsupported browsers setting doesn’t apply to Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) sites. # Survey Use the Survey component to embed active surveys into your site’s pages. 1. In the page that you’re configuring, select the **Survey** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Survey Name | Select an active survey. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Survey component: ![The Survey component embedded in a community](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/survey_in_community_page.png) # Switch Between Your Salesforce Org and Your Experience Cloud Sites If you use Experience Builder sites and Lightning Experience, use the App Launcher to switch back and forth between your Salesforce org and your Experience Cloud sites associated with it. If you use Tabs + Visualforce sites and Salesforce Classic, use the global header. You can embed a site URL directly into buttons or links. You can also redirect a user to another site or to a specific page within another site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
Switching between your Salesforce org and your sites doesn’t disrupt your workflow. You’re returned to the page that you were working on, either in the current browser tab (standard apps) or in a new browser tab (connected apps and communities). If you’re using the App Launcher or the global header, whichever sites you’re a member of are displayed as a dropdown or tile. ## App Launcher for Experience Builder Sites and Lightning Experience The App Launcher is available to some users on Experience Builder templates. ![App Launcher in communities](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_applauncher.png) In Lightning Experience, the full view of the App Launcher displays a tile for every published site along with your apps. In Experience Builder sites, the App Launcher displays a tile for every published site and app but the All Items area and AppExchange link aren’t available. Members see only the sites and apps that they’re authorized to see according to their profile or permission sets. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The App Launcher isn’t available in Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites. Members of these sites can use the global header to switch between their Salesforce org and their sites. ## Global Header for Tabs + Visualforce Sites and Salesforce Classic ![New global header](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/header_after_callout.jpg) From the menu on the left side, you can switch between sites and your Salesforce org. - The dropdown shows all active sites associated with your org that you’re a member of. - If you have the “Create and Set Up Experiences” permission, you also see previews of sites that you’re a member of. - Internal users who aren’t members of any sites only see the company name. - External users see the dropdown menu only if they belong to more than one active site. - External users who are members of only one active site don’t see the dropdown menu in the site. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Functionality can be affected if you’re setting up a My Domain that hasn’t finished deployment. For example, if you switch from a site to an internal org, you’re directed to the Salesforce login page instead. After your domain is deployed, selecting your organization in the dropdown directs you to the internal organization as expected. The **Your Name** menu on the right side contains links to edit contact information and log out. Internal users can also access Salesforce Help and links to Setup and other tools depending on user permissions and enabled features. ## Embedded Site URLs To allow users to switch between a Salesforce org and a site served on that org without requiring the user to log in again, you can embed site URLs into buttons or links. This method can also bring the user to another site served by the same org. To determine the embedded URL to use, follow these guidelines. To link to a page of a site that’s publicly shared with guest users, use the fully qualified URL. For example, https://example.my.site.com or https://example.my.site.com/store, where siteID is the 15-digit site ID, which can be found in the Experience Builder URL for that site. To create an embedded URL to switch to the landing page of a site that requires login, add this string to your Salesforce org URL: `/servlet/networks/switch?networkId=siteId`. To link to a specific page on a site that requires user login, add `/servlet/networks/switch?networkId=siteId&startURL=pageSubpath` to your Salesforce org URL, where siteID is the 15-digit site ID and pageSubpath is the subpath for the site page. The site subpath varies based on the [site type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_basics_glossary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Here are definitions to some key terms and concepts related to Experience Cloud."). In all cases, the base URL of the site is the URL listed in All Sites in Setup, which is either the URL up to the first slash or the URL up to the site name. - For LWR and Enhanced LWR site pages, the pageSubpath is the string after the base URL. For example, if the base URL of the site is https://example.my.site.com, to switch to https://example.my.site.com/jobs, the pageSubpath is jobs. Or if the base URL for the site is https://example.my.site.com/store, to switch to https://example.my.site.com/store/cart, the pageSubpath is cart. - For Aura site pages, the pageSubpath is the string that starts with s/. For example, s/shopping/cart in https://example.my.site.com/store/s/shopping/cart. - For Visualforce sites, the pageSubpath is the string after the base path for the site. If /s/ is in the URL, start the pageSubpath with the s character. - For example, if https://example.my.site.com/shop is the base path for the site, to switch to https://example.my.site.com/shop/s/store/cart, the pageSubpath is s/store/cart. - For example, if https://example.my.site.com/shop/store is the base path for the site, to switch to https://example.my.site.com/shop/store/cart, the pageSubpath is cart. Here’s another example. In an org with the URL https://example.my.lightning.com, we want to provide options for that user to switch from that org to the landing page and to the shopping cart of an LWR site with the network ID 3X0000000000012. The site requires user login, and the base URL is https://example.my.site.com/store and the shopping cart URL is https://example.my.site.com/store/cart. To provide the option to switch to the site’s landing page, use this embedded URL: https://example.my.lightning.com/servlet/networks/switch?networkId=3X0000000000012. And to provide the option to switch to the shopping cart, use this embedded URL: https://example.my.lightning.com/servlet/networks/switch?networkId=3X0000000000012&startURL=cart. ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_warning.png) Warning When you’re logged in as another user, you can’t use this method to switch to a site from the Salesforce org. Instead, go to the contact detail page, click **Login to site as user**, and select the site that you want to log in to. Switching to another site as another user only works when the specified URL is a root path. Also, if you use the startURL parameter to point to a default landing page, unexpected behavior can occur. #### See Also - [Enable the App Launcher in Experience Builder Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_enable_app_launcher.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Display the App Launcher in Experience Builder Sites to make it easy for members to move between their sites and their Salesforce org. This functionality is available in any site based an Experience Builder site template or Lightning Bolt solution.") - [Enable the Global Header for Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_global_header.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site and Salesforce Classic, the global header lets you switch between your sites and your Salesforce org.") - [Experience Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Salesforce Experience Cloud lets you create branded digital experiences to share information and collaborate with people who are key to your business processes, such as customers, partners, or employees. Whether you call it a portal, help forum, support community, or something else, an Experience Cloud site is a great place to connect with the important folks in your life.") # Sync an Object to the Marketing Cloud Engagement To create an audience-based journey, sync object data to Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
1. In the Engagement app, go to **Audience Builder** > **Contact Builder**. 2. Click **Data Sources**. 3. Click the Synchronized tab. 4. Select the data source. 5. Click **Set Up Object**. 6. Look in the **Synchronize Entity** dialog box with the list of objects that can sync. If you don’t see the object, it can’t be synced. 7. Click **Synchronize** for the entity that contains the data you want to bring into Contact Builder. 8. Select the checkboxes next to the fields you want to synchronize and click **Next**. 9. Using the **Record Collection** buttons, choose whether to bring in all records or begin at a certain date. 10. From the **Poll Schedule** dropdown, choose how often you wish to synchronize data. 11. Click **Save & Synchronize**. # Tab Layout Use the Tab Layout component to group other components in a set of customizable tabs for structure. Add as many tabs as you need and whatever components you want. You can rename and reorder the tabs, and choose whether to show or hide individual tabs to guest users in the site. The Tab Layout component is a replacement for the Tabs component and offers better performance for your Aura site. The Tabs component still works, but because it’s deprecated, we recommend that you move your content from Tabs to Tab Layout for the most up-to-date experience. 1. Add the Tab Layout component to a page, or select it on the page that you’re configuring. 2. In the property panel, configure the component. - To add another tab, click **Add**. - To rename a tab or set its public availability, select the tab. To make that tab available to guest users in the site, select **Publicly available**. If no tabs are publicly available, the entire Tab Layout component is hidden from guest users. - To reorder a tab, drag the tile into a new position. ![The new Tab Layout component shown on the canvas in Experience Builder, with its property panel open](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/tab_layout_component.png) 3. Add components to each tab. You can’t add a Tab Layout component to another Tab Layout component. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important If you applied custom CSS to the old Tabs component, it doesn’t automatically apply to Tab Layout. The newer component uses a different markup from Tabs, so you must adjust the CSS to target the new CSS selector. For example, if you used custom CSS to target the CSS class `uiTabItem` on the Tabs component, that custom CSS must now target `slds-tabs_default__item` on Tab Layout. To present the new tab labels in other languages for a multilingual site, export your site content, translate the tab names, and import the translation back to your site. #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") - [Multilingual Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_multilingual_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Builder lets you create different language versions of your site to serve separate international audiences. For example, let’s say that you have customers in France and Germany. You can deliver the same site experience to each in the language that’s appropriate for their region.") # The Build Your Own Template (Aura) The Build Your Own template provides the basic pages every Experience Builder site needs: Home, Create Record, Error, Record Detail, Record List, Related Record List, Search, Check Password, Forgot Password, Login, Login Error, and Register. And you can easily add more pages and components as needed for the experience you’re building. Customize your branding and themes to refine the look of your site. ![Build Your Own (Aura) Template tile in Experience Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_build_your_own_aura.png) ## What You Get Out-of-the-Box - Experience Builder pages and components - Customizable branding and design ## Advanced Features That You Can Configure - Audience-targeting: Deliver custom content to partners by geography, tier, or other criteria. - Google Analytics™: Track site activity with Google Analytics. - Prebuilt and custom Lightning components: Check out the full list of compatible [Lightning components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") you can use to build out your site. ## Add Pages and Components To view all components in the Components panel, select **Settings** | **Advanced** and click **Show All Components** in the Components Panel area. Some page functions require that you create a page in Experience Builder. For example: - To view reports, add a report object page to your site. - To include a Chatter feed in the site, create a Feed Detail page. - To let community members post questions and answers, add a Question Detail page. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). #### See Also - [Create Custom Site Pages with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_create_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To extend your Experience Builder template, create custom site pages. To get the most from your Salesforce data, add custom record detail, list, and related list pages. To display individual pieces of content along with any combination of components, use CMS content pages.") # The Build Your Own Template (LWR) Use the Build Your Own (LWR) template for Experience Cloud to create blazing-fast digital experiences, such as websites, microsites, and portals, using the Lightning Web Components programming model. Powered by Lightning Web Runtime (LWR), this customizable template delivers unparalleled site performance. Lightning Web Components uses core [web components](https://github.com/w3c/webcomponents/) standards and provides only what’s necessary to perform well in browsers supported by Salesforce. Because the components are built on code that runs natively in browsers, they’re lightweight and efficient. The template’s performance features, such as publish-time freezing and HTTP caching, help you build richer experiences to target B2B and B2C markets. - **[Standard Components for LWR Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_byo_lwr_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Standard components are built by Salesforce. Build Your Own (LWR) and Microsite (LWR) templates include record experiences such as Record Detail and Actions Bar (beta availability varies by release). LWR templates also support no-code data binding to dynamically show CRM and CMS data without custom code. - **[Record List (LWR)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_record_list_lwr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Record List component for LWR sites helps your site visitors easily view, search, and sort their accounts, cases, and other data. The component enhances security and user satisfaction by showing users only the data they’re permitted to view based on admin-defined access. With properties for component customization and styling—including support for custom CSS—the component helps you make sure that your visitors have a smooth and responsive experience across desktop, tablet, and mobile devices. The component offers a clean, professional data display that you can tailor to perfectly align with your brand and website design theme. - **[Considerations for Using Flows in LWR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lwr_flow_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Using flows in your LWR sites lets you automate your business processes and use the versatility of Flow Builder to your advantage. But before you implement flows in your LWR sites, it’s important to understand the limitations. - **[Actions Bar Considerations in LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lwr_actions_bar_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With the Actions Bar component, users can take action on Salesforce data directly from your LWR site. But before you add actions to LWR sites, it’s important to understand the limitations. - **[Send Visitor Information to the Salesforce Case Object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_lwr_contact_support_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can configure visitor information in Workspaces. # The Content Related List The Content related list on a record detail page includes links to all of the content that is associated with that record in Salesforce CRM Content. Click the file name to open the content details page. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To access Salesforce CRM Content: Salesforce CRM Content User checked in your personal information
Only Salesforce CRM Content users who are members of the library where the content was published can see the published file in the Content related list. For example, if you select the “Big Deal” opportunity when publishing BigDealStrategy.doc into the Sales Collateral library, the Content related list on the “Big Deal” opportunity includes a link to BigDealStrategy.doc only for members of the Sales Collateral library. Users who are not members of that library do not see the link. You can use the Related Content related list to access Salesforce CRM Content from leads, accounts, contacts, opportunities, products, cases, or custom objects. For more information, see [Find Salesforce CRM Content Related to Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_related_list.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Quickly find content files that are related to leads, accounts, contacts, opportunities, products, cases, or custom objects by using the related lists on those records."). # The Customer Account Portal Template The Customer Account Portal template improves customer relationships and decreases service costs. The template provides features that make it easy for customers to see and pay invoices, update their account information, and search your knowledge base for answers. ## Included Features - Experience Builder pages and components - Tile menu, for a visual navigation experience - Global search with a customizable list of searchable objects - Dashboards and reports - Customizable branding and design - Rich, responsive look and feel across multiple devices ## Advanced Features That You Can Configure - Audience targeting—Deliver custom content to partners by geography, tier, or other criteria. - Lightning components—Check out the full list of compatible [Lightning components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") that you can use to build out your site. ## Included Pages The Customer Account Portal includes the following pages. - Home - Account Management - Article Detail - Contact Us - Create Record - Dashboard - Error - Feed Detail - File - Flow - Generic record pages - Login - Messages - My Account - Question Detail - Quip Docs Related List - Report - Report Builder - Resources - Search - Top Articles - Topic Catalog - Topic Detail - User - User Settings # The Customer Service Template The Customer Service template provides a rich self-service experience for your customers, where they can get answers to their questions at any time, on any device. With integrated knowledge articles and case management, customers can search for and view articles, post questions, or contact a support agent. To use the Customer Service template, Chatter must be turned on in your org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ## What You Get Out-of-the-Box - Experience Builder pages and components - Self-resolution of cases through knowledge and case creation - Collaboration features such as groups, feeds, topics - Global search with a customizable list of searchable objects - Moderation rules to weed out trolls and bots - Dashboards and reports - Recommendations - Customizable branding, design, and navigation - Rich, responsive look and feel across multiple devices ## Advanced Features That You Can Configure - Audience-targeting: Deliver custom content to partners by geography, tier, or other criteria. - Google Analytics™: Track site activity with Google Analytics. - Prebuilt and custom components: Check out the full list of compatible [components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") you can use to build out your site. ## Customer Support in Action **Customer Service Home Page** The Customer Service Home page includes featured topics and feeds, a leaderboard, recommendations, trending articles and topics, and support options. In addition, every page in the Customer Service template includes the template header, which provides global search, a profile menu, and navigation. ![Home page components](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/home_page_napili.png) **Customers Can Find the Help They Need** The Customer Service template adds discussions and suggested articles to your support community. When customers type a question in the search text box, the results include articles and similar questions that are based on matches with the typed text. If the answer isn’t in the results, they can get help by asking a question in the community. Experts discuss the issue and provide a solution. And if they decide to contact customer support, they’re shown a list of suggested articles based on keywords from the case subject and description. So there’s an excellent chance they can find an answer without needing to create a support case. Both guest users and logged-in users can access articles, search and view discussions, and contact agents through official support channels. When they log in to the site, they’re also able to ask questions and participate in discussions in the feed. Members can answer questions in the community, just like commenting on a post in Chatter. And when a best answer is found, it’s prominently displayed in the feed, allowing other users to quickly and easily find the answer. **Enhanced Profile and Navigation Experience** The Customer Service template has an enhanced profile and navigation experience for logged-in users. From the profile menu, users can quickly access their profile details, Chatter feed and list of cases, and contact customer support. Users with permissions to create or manage the site can also access management and setup pages directly from the profile menu. Users can edit their contact information and profile photo directly from their profile details. They can view statistics, such as how many posts and comments they’ve made and how many people they’re following and are following them. User profiles also show user nicknames and reputation levels if they’re enabled in the site. **Improved Organization with Topics** Topics help you structure a site to quickly guide members to the information that matters most. Choose navigational topics to provide an easy way for customers to explore, and featured topics to highlight current conversations and issues. Trending topics and related topics let members find active discussions and popular content. Member-created topics, meanwhile, let users organize information for each other, creating a personalized experience that boosts engagement. When setting up a site, you associate topics with existing data categories, so your articles appear in the appropriate topics. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note While the Customer Service template uses topics to display articles and questions, Knowledge articles are associated with data categories when they’re created. To ensure that articles appear in the site, set data category visibility at the profile level for each category you associate with a topic. For instructions on setting default data category visibility, see [Modify Default Data Category Visibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.category_visibility_default.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ## Included Pages The Customer Service template includes the following pages. - Home - Account Management - Article Detail - Case - Contact Support - Create Record - Dashboard - Error - Feed Detail - File - Flow - Generic - Group - Login - Messages - My Account - Question Detail - Quip Doc Related List - Report - Report Builder - Search - Stream - Top Articles - Topic Catalog - Topic Detail - User Settings - User # The Files Connect Setup Process The setup process for Files Connect varies by external data source. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Files Connect for cloud-based external data sources is available in: Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip For detailed visuals, tips, and troubleshooting, see the Files Connect [_Setup Guide_](https://org62.my.salesforce.com/sfc/p/000000000062/a/30000000TwBg/oY6nj5H8L_c0djY2t01Q5s39DqCk82b5lLKTOl9Aeuc) and [_User Guide_](https://org62.my.salesforce.com/sfc/p/000000000062/a/30000000TwBb/4P94FDKJU8TLPlV9UwgNyhFIeRb8cjoHnsneKTbtk9Q). ## First, enable Files Connect, and let users access related external data sources - [Enable Salesforce Files Connect for Your Organization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_enable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Let users search and share files from external systems like Google Drive and SharePoint."). - [Let Users and Administrators Access Files Connect Data Sources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_perm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you enable Files Connect, give users and administrators permission to access specific external data sources from Salesforce."). ## For cloud-based data sources, create an authentication provider, and then define the source If you use Google Drive: - [Create an Authentication Provider for Google Drive](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_google_auth.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To use Google Drive as an external data source, create an authentication provider for it in Salesforce. The process begins with creating a related project in the Google Developers console."). - [Define an External Data Source for Google Drive](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_google_xds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Let Chatter users access their Google Drive content from the Files tab, feed posts, and search. Salesforce supports Google documents, spreadsheets, presentations, and drawings."). If you use Quip: - [Set Up Salesforce Anywhere Advanced](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.anywhere_turn_on.htm&type=5&language=en_US). If you use Microsoft’s cloud systems: - [Create an Authentication Provider for SharePoint Online or OneDrive for Business Using Azure Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_sp_online_auth.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To use a Microsoft cloud-based external data source, create an authentication provider for it in Salesforce and register that provider in a Microsoft Azure web application."). - [Define an External Data Source for SharePoint Online or OneDrive for Business](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_sp_online_xds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With Files Connect and Chatter, Salesforce can access content from Microsoft’s cloud-based systems."). If you use Box: - [Create an Authentication Provider for Box](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_box_auth.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To use Box as an external data source, first create an authentication provider for it in Salesforce."). - [Define an External Data Source for Box](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_box_xds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Let users access their Box content from Files home, feed posts, and search."). ## Include the external data in global search To let users access external data in global Salesforce searches, you’ll need to [create an external object and give users access to its fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_connect_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Combine searches for Salesforce data with external data from Google Drive, SharePoint, OneDrive for Business, or Box. Developers can automate the process with supported SOQL or SOSL queries with the API."). This is an optional step, but highly recommended to best integrate external data with Salesforce. ## For per-user data sources, have users authenticate in Salesforce If you specified per-user authentication for a data source and exposed it through profiles or permission sets, ask authorized users to [provide their data source credentials](https://help.salesforce.com/HTViewHelpDoc?id=collab_files_connect_cred.htm&language=en_US). ## Start accessing, sharing, and searching external files! Now users can [access and share external files](https://help.salesforce.com/HTViewHelpDoc?id=collab_files_connect_share.htm&language=en_US) via the Files tab and feed, and [search for them](https://help.salesforce.com/HTViewHelpDoc?id=collab_files_connect_search.htm&language=en_US) right alongside their Salesforce content. # The Microsite Template The Microsite template is the foundation for your small, special-purpose websites. Microsites are often used by companies that already have a full site but want a dedicated space for a single communication or conversion goal. Microsites work well to host an idea or product that requires more content than a single landing page. Built on the Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) platform, the template includes responsive layout and content components that you can use to quickly spin up a landing page, event site, or other web experience. Capture visitor information and send it directly to the Lead object with the Lead Form component. ## Included Features - Experience Builder example design and components - Ability to route lead information directly to the Leads object - Ability to send contact information directly to Marketing Cloud Engagement data extensions - Access to the LWR framework - Direct connection to Salesforce CMS to pull in CMS content ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note You must be an Experience Cloud customer to access the Microsite template. ## Advanced Features That You Can Configure - Pre-built and custom components. Check out the full list of compatible components you can use to build out your LWR site at [Standard Components for LWR Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_byo_lwr_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Standard components are built by Salesforce. Build Your Own (LWR) and Microsite (LWR) templates include record experiences such as Record Detail and Actions Bar (beta availability varies by release). LWR templates also support no-code data binding to dynamically show CRM and CMS data without custom code."). - A quick start repository with sample component code. Use the example code to create and customize your own components. To access the repository, see [Experience Cloud Microsite Samples](https://github.com/forcedotcom/experience-cloud-microsite-samples). ## Microsite Use Case When your company is hosting an event, you need a place to keep all your event information that doesn’t necessarily live with your other content. Enter microsites. Publish your page with all the event information, pull in logos and other content that you created in CMS, and archive the page when the event is over. When you want to promote a specific product or opportunity, consider using a microsite to host your content. You can choose to associate the URL with your full company website, or create a new, dedicated domain. ## Included Components The Microsite template includes these components. - Lead Form - Marketing Cloud Engagement Form - Header - Banner - All components included with the BYO (LWR) template: [Standard Components for LWR Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_byo_lwr_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Standard components are built by Salesforce. Build Your Own (LWR) and Microsite (LWR) templates include record experiences such as Record Detail and Actions Bar (beta availability varies by release). LWR templates also support no-code data binding to dynamically show CRM and CMS data without custom code.") - **[Create Special Purpose Websites with Microsites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_microsites.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Microsites are useful for everything from event pages to lightweight websites. Using the Microsite template, you can create a site with built-in navigation and layout components that are responsive and easy to customize. # The Partner Central Template Partner Central supports partner relationship management workflows, including channel sales, channel marketing, lead distribution, deal registration, partner recruitment and onboarding, and pipeline monitoring with reports and dashboards. The template offers navigation options, enablement pages, and customizable action dropdowns, providing partners with intuitive access to marketing tools, support features, referral insights, and training metrics. Flexible layouts help with site building and maintenance. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## What You Get Out-of-the-Box These capabilities are available immediately when you use the latest Partner Central template: - Navigation and landing pages - Menu items for marketing functions like Campaigns, Fund Allocations, Claims Support menu items such as Cases - An Enablement page - Home page usability features such as an out-of-the-box home-page banner, a secondary navigation bar after the first site publish, and flexible layouts applied to Home, Enablement, and Sales pages ## Advanced Features You Can Configure for Partner Central These features require admin configuration through Experience Builder: - Report-Driven Enablement Metrics—Add report charts to display total courses enrolled, courses completed, and courses pending - Custom Action Dropdown, such as Partner Fund Requests - Component Styling ## Partner Central in Action Partner Central in Experience Workspaces ![Partner Central setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/partner_central.jpg) Partner Central Home Page The Partner Central Home page includes lead inbox, global search, navigation menu, Quick Create menu, compact list views for deals and tasks, and reports and dashboards. ![Partner Central home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/partner_central_newhomepage.jpg) Enablement Dashboard ![Partner Central Enablement Dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/pc2_enablement_dashboard.jpg) # The People and Records You Auto-Follow Initially Starting in June 2010, when your administrator initially turns on Chatter, we help get you started by automatically following certain users and records in your organization. Who and what you auto-follow differ based on the size of your organization: ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The auto-follow setting for records applies only to the records that exist at the time your administrator turns Chatter on. For any future records that you create, auto-follow is disabled by default to reduce the number of updates you receive in your Chatter feed. However, if you want to receive updates on all future records that you create, you can enable auto-follow in your personal settings. Currently, you can't customize a report based on records that you're following in Chatter.
If Your Organization Has: Users You Follow Automatically Records You Follow Automatically
15 users or fewer All users in your organization

Up to 25 of your most recently used records, in the following order:

  • Open opportunities you own
  • Accounts you own
  • Open cases you own
  • Contacts you own
  • Open opportunities you created
  • Accounts you created
  • Open cases you created
  • Contacts you created
  • Open opportunities you last modified
  • Accounts you last modified
  • Open cases you last modified
  • Contacts you last modified
  • Open opportunities you viewed
  • Accounts you viewed
  • Open cases you viewed
  • Contacts you viewed
16 or more users

Up to 25 users in your organization, including (if available):

  • Your manager
  • Users that report to your manager
  • Your subordinates
  • Teammates on your account teams
  • Teammates on your opportunity teams

Up to 25 of your most recently used records, in the following order:

  • Open opportunities you own
  • Accounts you own
  • Open cases you own
  • Contacts you own
  • Open opportunities you created
  • Accounts you created
  • Open cases you created
  • Contacts you created
  • Open opportunities you last modified
  • Accounts you last modified
  • Open cases you last modified
  • Contacts you last modified
  • Open opportunities you viewed
  • Accounts you viewed
  • Open cases you viewed
  • Contacts you viewed
#### See Also - [People Recommendations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_people_recommendations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter recommends people for you to follow based on similar interests.") - [Record Recommendations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_record_recommendations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Following records helps keep you up-to-date on important changes to accounts, contacts, opportunities, and more.") - [Automatically Follow the Records That You Create](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_stop_following.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you follow a record, information about updates to tracked record fields are sent to your What I Follow feed in Chatter.") # The Scale of Your Experience Cloud Sites Large-scale sites are more than just sites that support a large volume of users. Transaction loads, and heavy traffic patterns also impact the scale of a site. Large-scale sites can benefit from performance and scale optimization tools. Your account representative can advise you on which performance and scale optimizations to enable. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
You can ask several questions to determine the scale of your site. ## Are You Using a License That Supports Your Users? Salesforce has the tools to help your site serve all your users and grant them access to the data that they require. The Customer Community license is designed to handle a large volume of users who only need limited access to CRM objects. Licenses such as the role-based Customer Community Plus and the Partner Community licenses are designed to grant more access to CRM objects, but they support fewer users. Enabling Account Role Optimization (ARO) can significantly increase the number of users that a license can accommodate. If still more roles are needed, you can configure a person account owner power user. Person account owner power users can own as many customer or partner portal accounts as are needed. ## Does Your Site Have High-Volume Traffic or Transactions? High-volume traffic can affect the performance and scale of a site, and the type of traffic matters. Here are some considerations. Determine the percentage of unauthenticated guest users and authenticated, logged-in users, and then use the tools that suit your site traffic. Authenticated Traffic Are visitors logging in when accessing your site? - How many visitors are logging in during peak traffic periods? - How many visitors are logging in on average during routine traffic periods? - How frequent are traffic peaks? Unauthenticated (Guest) Traffic Are visitors viewing content or are they registering on your site? How many visitors are registering during peak traffic times? How many visitors register on average? - For high registrations, we recommend [processing self-registration requests using micro-batching](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_self_reg_apex.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your Experience Cloud site can handle twice as many self-registration requests at a time when they’re collected into batches and processed asynchronously rather than one at a time. The accounts and contacts created are owned and managed by the community administrator. After a batch is processed successfully, users receive an email with their login instructions. Batch processing self-registration requests improves performance and keeps your site moving during heavy traffic spikes. Minimal coding is required when you use the Apex controller that manages your self-registration flow.") so you can register twice as many guests at a time. - For high content viewing, set up a custom domain that uses the [Salesforce content delivery network (CDN)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.domain_mgmt_salesforce_cdn.htm&type=5&language=en_US) to reduce page load times. Tailor your performance tools based on page traffic. Which pages do visitors view most, and how many views are there during high-traffic times? How many views do your pages average? - For high-volume traffic, the [Salesforce CDN](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.domain_mgmt_salesforce_cdn.htm&type=5&language=en_US) can reduce load times. - To build a robust and lightweight platform with unparalleled performance, we recommend the Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) platform. - For faster page load times and performance, we recommend Progressive Rendering, which improves individual page performance. You can also tailor your performance tools based on how users interact with the content on your site. Do visitors view content, or do they create CRM object records? If many users create records, we recommend enabling [high-volume record creation using micro-batching](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_record_creation_builder.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Create Record Form, Contact Support Form, or Lead Form (LWC) components to create cases, leads, and custom objects more efficiently. When records are collected into batches and processed asynchronously, your site can process more records at a time. Batch processing improves performance and keeps your site moving during traffic spikes."). Evaluating site performance patterns gives insight into performance bottlenecks. And you can identify areas where increasing limits can help your site perform to the level required. For all high-volume sites, we recommend enabling Page Optimizer and regularly conducting performance and scale tests. ## Does Your Site Use Many Roles? If your high-volume site uses role-based licenses such as the Customer Community Plus and Partner Community licenses, unnecessary roles can result. Business accounts automatically create a default number of roles for each new account. Roles are created to aid in sharing data between two accounts, but not all members share data. Reducing the number of roles can improve the performance and scale of your site. [Enabling Account Role Optimization (ARO)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_partners_optimize_roles.htm&type=5&language=en_US) delays the creation of account roles until more than one user is added to a business account. If the account has a single user, then roles aren’t created for that account. [Configure person account owner power users](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.sfFieldRef.meta/sfFieldRef/salesforce_field_reference_PersonAccountOwnerPowerUser.htm) if your site must support even more customer or partner portal accounts. ## Are You Customizing the Standard Salesforce Experience? We test our standard templates, components, and objects for performance. Your customizations tailor your experiences to meet customer needs but can affect site performance. Common customizations include adding Apex code, creating a custom page or custom components, and embedding managed packages from AppExchange. We recommend that you test for performance and scale before and after launch, and regularly thereafter, to understand your site’s limits. ## Are You Using Additional Services on Your Site at Scale? Experience Cloud sites are often used in tandem with services created by Salesforce or by our independent software vendors (ISVs). Whether standard or custom, evaluate how these products perform at scale. Work with your Salesforce account representative for Salesforce product information. Contact your ISV for information about their services’ performance and scale. We recommend regularly testing your Experience Cloud sites that are combined with other products for performance and scale. # Theme Guidance: Header Components Headers provide context and easy navigation throughout a site. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
## One Header, Lots of Controls Headers have many options and controls for changing the look and feel of a page. Options and controls include the height, color, transparency, and even whether it stays fixed to the top of the screen while customers scroll. Combining adjustments to your header with adjustments to your hero section, if you use it, offers usability, variation, and visual interest. Explore the components property panel for your header and **Theme Settings** in your Theme panel. ## Different Headers for Different Types of Pages in the Same Site It’s common to have a different layout for your login page. Many pre-built themes have different options for the login, home, and other pages. A change to the header on the home page, for instance, isn’t necessarily reflected on your content or login pages. If you employ different theme layouts, configure the changes for each variation separately, as you did in previous releases. ## Changing the Logo If you already set a logo for your site, it’s recognized and used by pre-built themes. If you haven’t set a logo in the past or want to update your current choice, use the Images area of the Theme panel. ![Theme panel in with Images and logo highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_themepanel_images-logo.png) Branding sets let you apply different logos to different variations of your site or for different audiences and occasions. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note We try to resize your logo to fit the header. But you can adjust the size manually in the header component properties panel, using **Logo Width** in the Layout section. Your logo proportionally resizes relative to the width selected. ![Logo width control in compact header properties panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_headercomponent-logo.png) ## Header and Hero Interaction - When "Fix the header's position" and "Start hero under header" are both enabled in **Theme Settings**, choose a background color for best visibility. If you leave the background transparent, menu items can become invisible when a customer scrolls down the page. Menu items can be hidden because the hero image has scrolled out of view. A solid background color avoids this problem. ![Theme settings tab of Theme Panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_themepanel_themesettings-headerundrhero.png) ## Audience Targeting The new theme components (for example, Compact Header) don’t currently support component-level targeting (visibility). However, with a little effort, it’s still possible to set up targeting. - Create a custom theme layout in Experience Builder **Settings** | **Theme** | **Configure**. - Create a page variation. - Assign the new theme layout to your page variation (via Page Properties). ## Finding the Right Controls With so many options, it can be easy to miss which control affects which part of your header. Menu text color formats the options that appear on dropdown menus, like profile menus, navigation menus, and search deflection. Link color formats link text and icons that are visible in the header. ![Compatct Header propeties link between Links and page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme_header-linkcolor.png) ![Compatct Header propeties link between Dropdown Menus and page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme_header-drpdwnmenu.png) ## Mobile Display Specific aspects of the theme component properties, such as header height, are hard-coded for mobile devices using the Salesforce Lightning Design $mq-small media-query. The setting results in a maximum width of 47.9375 em. # Theme Guidance: Hero Component Hero images are large images that are designed to dominate the visual field of a page and grab attention. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Hero layouts are all about visual impact. The _hero_ is an image that dominates your page, providing a sense of theme, style, and purpose. But while hero layouts are excellent for setting mood and style, they eat up space. So they’re not good for a page that needs a lot of functionality. ## A Search Versus a Call to Action Focus Pre-built themes come in two different flavors that focus on different needs: hero search and hero call to action. - Uses for hero search - Sites that serve as an entry to a lot of diverse information with no easy way to provide a top-level organization. - Sites where it’s challenging to predict customer needs or where your customers' information needs vary widely. - Uses for hero call to action - Sites with a focused purpose, like fund-raising or a supporting a specific event. ## Selecting and Swapping Hero Components The Webster, Jepson, and Citizen themes each come with a pre-configured hero theme component (Search or Call to Action). You can use these themes as they come or easily swap them through the component properties in Experience Builder. Like the theme but don’t want to use the hero style layout? Easy, uncheck **Show hero** on the **Theme Settings** tab of the Theme Panel. ![Show hero setting highlighted in Theme Setting area of Theme Panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_themepanel_themesettings-hero.png) ## Header and Hero Interaction - When "Fix the header's position" and "Start hero under header" are both enabled in **Theme Settings**, choose a background color for best visibility. If you leave the background transparent, menu items can become invisible when a customer scrolls down the page. Menu items can be hidden because the hero image has scrolled out of view. A solid background color avoids this problem. ![Theme settings tab of Theme Panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_themepanel_themesettings-headerundrhero.png) # Theme Guidance: Search Component Multiple search components and placement options give you flexibility to design the right experience for your customers. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Pre-built themes offer the flexibility to have a search-first approach. This approach encourages customers to enter questions first to find answers rather than navigate through menus and pages. ![Hero with search first approach](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme-searchfirst.png) But you can also have search in your header. To avoid confusion and clutter, if you’re using the hero with search turned on, deselect search to hide it in your header. Themes with heroes have secondary layouts for the non-Home pages. That’s why search is on by default in the header of your other non-login pages. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Remember that Login pages have their own specific layouts. ![Compact header layout properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_cmpctheader-layproperties.png) ## Selecting a Search Component that Collapses and Expands ![Collapsed search component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_search-collapsed.png) When the search component is collapsed, you can’t select it directly. Click the search icon to expand it, then select it to see its property editor. Alternatively, select **Search** in the page structure panel to bring up its property editor. Selecting Search in the page structure panel means you can’t see any changes you’re making. You can’t see your changes because the search component isn’t visible on the page. ## Exporting a Custom Search Component Imagine that you’re using a Lightning Bolt Solution to export a site with a pre-built theme. The theme uses the global search, peer-to-peer component, or a custom search component. Keep in mind that this solution doesn’t include the custom search component. The search component isn’t exported because the property value `commThemeSearch` isn’t included in the Lightning Bolt Solution. # Threaded Discussions in an Aura Site When you talk to people, it’s rarely like a feed, where one person asks a question and everyone else answers. In real life, when one person asks a question, someone answers, and then there's a reply to that answer, and a reply to that reply. With threaded discussions, you can participate in this lively flow in your sites. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura and Visualforce sites
User Permissions Needed
To enable threaded discussions in a site:

Enable Chatter

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

To delete a discussion thread in a community:

Modify All Data

OR

Moderate Site Feeds

OR

Salesforce disabled block-delete at your org’s request

AND

You’re the author of the post, question, comment, or reply

![A threaded discussion](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_thread.png) A thread is any feed item that has one or more levels nested under it. For example, a question with an answer or a comment with a reply is a thread. When you enable threaded discussions in your site, all discussions convert to threaded discussions: Members can comment on a post, answer a question, and reply to those comments and answers. Discussions are indented up to three levels to clarify who is responding to what. The notification emails you receive for threaded discussions link more deeply into the discussion. All notification links used to go to the top of the thread; now they land you on new thread content. To prevent the loss of important content, in orgs created after Winter ’19 most site members are blocked from deleting discussion threads. For orgs created after Winter ’19, blocking is the default behavior. Orgs that existed before Winter ’19 can call Salesforce Customer Support to enable blocking. When blocking is enabled, only feed moderators and users with the Modify All Data permission can delete threads. We recommend blocking deletions because, when deletion isn’t blocked: - A user who creates a feed item can delete any response nested under it. - A user who deletes a feed item also deletes all responses nested under it. If nothing is nested under a feed item, the author can always delete the item. ## Enable Threaded Discussions Enable a preference in the Administration Workspace to change all site discussions to threaded discussions. Threaded discussions add the Reply feature to feeds. In addition to commenting on a post or poll or answering a question, you can reply to an answer or a comment. Threaded discussions are indented up to three levels to clarify who is replying to what. Enable threaded discussions in your site in the Administration Workspace. 1. Open Experience Workspaces for your site, and click the Administration Workspace. 2. Go to the Preferences page, and select **Allow discussion threads**. 3. Click **Save**. All discussions in your site convert to threaded discussions: In addition to comments and answers, members can reply to comments and answers. Discussions are indented up to three levels to clarify who is responding to what. ## Delete a Discussion Thread Deleting a discussion thread is the same as deleting any feed item with something nested under it. The thing to consider is whether deletion is blocked in your Experience Cloud site. To prevent loss of important content, orgs created after Winter ’19 block most site members from deleting feed items that have something nested under it. For example, when a question has an answer, deletion of the question is blocked. 1. Open the actions menu on a feed item. 2. Select **Delete**, and then confirm the deletion. When delete isn’t blocked, the feed item and everything nested under it are deleted. When delete is blocked, the item is deleted only under these conditions: The item has nothing nested under it and you are its author, or you have the right role or permission. # Tile Menu Use the Tile Menu Lightning Web component in Experience Builder to add an intuitive and visually stunning navigation experience to your site. Customers using the Tile Menu can use images to access an external site, page, record, or global action. For example, clicking an image takes a customer to a page to log a case or file a claim. You can set up a maximum of eight image-link combinations per Tile Menu component. Consider the following when setting up your Tile Menu: - To make the images in the tile menu viewable by guest site users: - Enable **Let guest users view asset files and CMS content available to the site** in **Administration** | **Preferences** in Experience Builder. - Access the site’s guest user profile and **Object Settings**. - Then, give read access to Documents. - When using Translation Workbench to translate text in the Tile Menu, select **Navigation Menu Item** as your **Setup Component**. - A new version of the Tile Menu component was included in the Summer ’20 release, and allows for much more customization. The new version of the Tile Menu is available in Experience Builder in the Summer ’20 release. If you use the old version of the component, shown as Deprecated in the component properties, the component still functions. If you delete your deprecated component, you must use the new version. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - You can package a tile menu with Bolt Solutions and distribute them. All the properties of the tile menu are included in the package, but admins have to associate a navigation menu to the tile menu after the Bolt Solution is installed. - To see a Tile Menu and its images from a production org, use a Full sandbox. - The Tile Menu allows a maximum of 20 tiles. 1. From the components list, select the Tile Menu component and drag it onto a site page. 2. On the page, select the **Tile Menu** component. 3. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Default Navigation Menu Select a navigation menu to showcase in Tile Menu.
Edit Navigation Menu Click to edit your chosen navigation menu.
Image Layout

Select one of the three image options for the images in each menu tile.

  • Full, No Overlay: Image takes up the whole tile. The banner with text doesn’t overlay the image.
  • Full, With Overlay: Image takes up the whole tile. The banner with text overlays the image.
  • Partial: Image is contained in an icon-type box within the tile.
   
Tile Formatting Click to expand.
Show banner For the Full, With Overlay layout, choose to show a banner.
Banner Position

Options for:

  • Full, No Overlay: Top
  • Full, With Overlay: Top or Bottom
  • Partial: Top, Right, Left, Bottom
   
Banner Height

Choose 15–100%.

This setting doesn’t apply to the Full, No Overlay layout.

Banner Background Color Set the color for the banner background.
Border Radius Choose from 0-50px.
Blank Image Color Tile color if there’s no image.
Tile Background Color For the Partial layout, the background tile color if the image doesn’t take up the entire tile.
Icon Size Size of the icon containing the image for the Partial layout. Choose from small, medium, or large.
Text Formatting Click to expand.
Color Text color.
Size Text size. Choose from small, medium, or large.
Horizontal Alignment Choose from right, left, or center.
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Example of a tile menu. ![Tile menu component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks_tile_menu.png) #### See Also - [Navigation Menu](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_setup_nav_menu.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Navigation Menu component extends your site’s navigation beyond navigational topics. Navigation menu items can include Salesforce objects, topics, pages in your site, URLs to external sites, and menu labels. Menu labels are parent headings under which you can nest other menu items. You can also enable the App Launcher to make it easy for members to switch between their sites and their Salesforce org.") - [Assign an Audience to a Component Variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_personalize_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use audiences to vary the content that users see within the CMS Collection, Navigation Menu, or Tile Menu components. For example, show one navigation menu to your site members and a more abbreviated navigation menu to guest users. Or show different CMS content to internal employees and external partners.") # Tips for Deleting Chatter Feed Posts and Comments Here are some useful things to know about deleting posts and comments in a Chatter feed. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
- You can delete any post that you create. - You can delete any comment that you create. - You can delete any comment on any post that you create, no matter who wrote the comment. - On a record that you own, you can delete any post or comment from the feed. - In groups, group owners and managers can delete almost any post or comment. When a post appears in a feed because of a mention, it can’t be deleted. The feed item must be deleted from the feed where the mention was entered. - Users with the Modify All Data permission, can delete any post or comment. - In Experience Cloud sites, moderators can delete any post or comment. # Top Article by Topic Give your customers more direction when they’re browsing your knowledge articles in an Experience Builder site. Using the Top Articles by Topic component, you can organize topics in one view. Articles populate under the topics, ranked by view count. 1. Select the **Top Articles by Topic** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the component. - To add another topic, click **Add**. - To set a topic’s public availability, select the topic. To make that tab available to guest users in the site, select **Publicly available**. - To reorder topics, drag the tile to the correct position. - Indicate the number of articles to list under each topic (maximum 10). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If you delete a topic from a site, but have it referenced in the Top Articles by Topic component, the topic name doesn’t show. The articles, however, are listed under a blank topic name. To not see the article list, delete the topic name from the Top Articles by Topic component as well. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Top Articles by Topic component in use: ![Top Articles by Topic component used in the community](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_networks_top_articles.png) # Topic Catalog The Topic Catalog component lets Experience Builder site members see a full listing of navigational parent and subtopics you have set up for the site in one convenient location. The following is the maximum number of navigational topics and subtopics you can have in a Customer Service template. | Level | Maximum Number of Entries | | --- | --- | | One (parent) | 25 | | Two (subtopic) | 10 | | Three (subtopic) | 10 | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The topic catalog shows only navigational topics and subtopics, and is only visible after you set them up. 1. Edit the Navigation Menu component in your site (typically, on the home page). 2. Select **Add the “More Topics...” link**. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example When site members click More Topics from the Topics list in the navigation menu, they see the topic catalog. ![Image of a topic catalog in a community.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/topic_catalog.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Topic Description The Topic Description component is used on the Topic Detail page in the Customer Service template. It shows the topic’s description as entered in **Content Management** | **Topics**. 1. Select the **Topic Description** component in the page you’re configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Topic ID | The system supplies this value, and populates the component with the description tied to the topic shown on the topic detail page. | | Title | Enter text for the title. The default text is Description. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Topic Description component. ![Topic Description component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/rss_topic_description.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Topic Detail Pages Topic detail pages show a topic's description and a feed with topic updates from all users and public groups. You can also see a list of records that refer to the topic. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
User Permissions Needed
To add existing topics to posts and comments: Assign Topics
To edit topic names and descriptions: Edit Topics
To open a topic detail page, click a topic or hashtag. On the topic detail page, you can: - Search a topic feed to quickly find relevant information. You can also scan the feed to learn about the topic and see the people and public groups that are interested in it. - See all the records that refer to the topics. Use the Related tab in Lightning Experience. In Salesforce Classic, if Chatter is enabled, use the Records tab. - To see updates to the topic in your feed, follow the topic. - Edit the topic name and description. You can change only the capitalization and spacing of topic names. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Topic names and descriptions aren’t private, even for topics that appear solely in private groups and on records. Posts and records that use topics have the same security and privacy as the posts and records that don’t use them. - Add a post directly to the topic feed in Salesforce Classic. Your followers automatically see the post, and you can even add the post to a group that you’re a member of by using an @mention. Because you added the post on the topic feed, the topic is automatically added to your post. - Discover interesting topic metrics. If you’re using Lightning Experience, you can see the number of: - People following the topic - Posts that use the topic ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The number of posts that use the topic can be inaccurate but provides a good comparative measure of how often people use the topic in posts. - People who used the topic in the last 60 days - If available, find out more about a topic using these lists. - Knowledgeable People—People who are knowledgeable about the topic. - Related Topics—Other topics that were also added with the current topic. - Recent Files—Files that you have access to that were most recently posted to the topic feed. - Groups Talking—Public groups and groups that you're a member of that used the topic most recently. # Topic Metrics The Topic Metrics component lets users see how often site members use a topic. You can show the number of posts, articles, and followers that a topic has, and how many people have used the topic in the last 60 days. Use the Topic Metrics component on the Topic Detail page. 1. Select the **Topic Metrics** component on the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Show Posts

Enable this setting to show the number of posts tagged with the topic. For navigational topics, the number of posts includes posts tagged with the topic and posts tagged with subtopics.

The number of posts that use the topic can be inaccurate but provides a good comparative measure of how often people use the topic in posts.

Show Articles Enable this setting to show the number of articles tagged with the topic.
Show Followers Enable this setting to show the number of people following the topic.
Show how many people used the topic in the last 60 days. Enable this setting to show how many Experience Builder site members have used the topic in the past 60 days.
Topic ID This field populates dynamically with the topic ID.
# Topics The Topics component allows your site members to add topics to records to organize them by theme in your Experience Builder site. Add the topics component to record detail pages for objects that have topics enabled. When a user searches with the Topics component, the dropdown menu displays a maximum of five topics. If they select the topic with **Press Enter to Add** listed next to it, and the topic exists, the topic is assigned. If it doesn't exist, the system creates the topic, which is assigned when the user clicks it. 1. Select the **Topics** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Title | Enter a title for the component. The default text is Topics. | | Placeholder Text | Enter placeholder text that appears in the topic editor to encourage members to enter topic names. The default text is Type a topic name and press Enter. | | Number of Topics Shown | Enter the number of topics to show before the Show More link appears. The default number is 10. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Topics component: ![Topics component on a record detail page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/topics_component_ui.png) # Topics for Objects Topics for objects offers a powerful way to crowdsource your company's key themes and issues. Users can add topics to records to organize them by common themes. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: all editions
Your employees can add topics to records based on what they're seeing in the field and from working with customers. In this way, topics can give your business insight into the voice of your customer. And because topics can cross objects, they can provide connections across people, conversations, and records. If your company uses Chatter, users can also add topics to posts. Topics on posts help users organize posts and increase their visibility. Topics are great for discussing a particular issue, theme, or subject, that isn’t limited to a particular group of people. For example, imagine that your company has created a year-long goal around volunteering with local schools. You can create a topic to allow your entire company to share posts, photos, and updates related to the company goal. Users can search Chatter posts and Knowledge articles by topic. No other tagged record types return search results. - **[Configure Topics for Records in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_records_admin_LEX.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the Topics component to record pages so that your users can assign topics to records. Topics allow your users to organize records by theme. On the topic detail page, users can see all the records with a topic and filter their record list views by topic. - **[Enable and Configure Topics for Objects in Salesforce Classic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_records_admin.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable topics for objects so that users can add topics to records and organize them by common themes. This powerful feature is available with or without Chatter. - **[Delete Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_delete_admin.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** People with the right permissions can delete topics directly from topic detail pages. - **[Topics Privacy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_privacy.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Topic names and descriptions are not private, even for topics that appear solely in private groups and on records. Posts and records with topics have the same security and privacy as posts and records without topics. # Topics in Mobile Topics are available in Salesforce for Android and Salesforce for iOS, but there are some differences in mobile applications. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce for Android, Salesforce for iOS
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer editions
When using topics in Salesforce for Android and Salesforce for iOS, you can’t: - See trending topics. - Edit topic details (name and description). - Tag favorite topics. - Assign topics to records. - See the Related Topics and Knowledgeable on Topics related lists. - See topics in auto-complete options when searching using hashtags. # Topics List Use the Chatter topics list to see the topics that people are talking about in your organization. All topic names appear in this list, including topics that are used solely in private groups or on records. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
To view the topics list, on the left side of the Chatter page, click ![Chatter topics](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_topics.png) **Topics**. In the topics list, you can: - To see a topic’s detail page, click the topic name. - To see updates in your Chatter feed, click ![Follow button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_follow.png) **Follow**. - To narrow what you’re looking for, [filter the list of topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_list_filters.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use topic filters to narrow the topics list to your favorite topics or the topics that you use. Use sorting options to sort the topics by the number of people talking about them or alphabetically by name."). - Search for topics by name. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To search topic names and descriptions, use global search. - Only users with the View All Data permission can filter by record name. This topics list isn’t available in Lightning Experience. However, in Lightning Experience, you can add topics to records and then filter your record list views by topics. - **[Sort the Topics List with Filters](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_list_filters.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use topic filters to narrow the topics list to your favorite topics or the topics that you use. Use sorting options to sort the topics by the number of people talking about them or alphabetically by name. - **[Topic Detail Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Topic detail pages show a topic's description and a feed with topic updates from all users and public groups. You can also see a list of records that refer to the topic. - **[Follow Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_following.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow topics so you can see updates in your Chatter feed. - **[Find and Endorse People Who Are Knowledgeable About a Topic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_knowledgeable_people.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Discover experts and recognize them in Chatter using the Knowledgeable People section of topic pages and the Overview tab of user profile pages. - **[Add Topics to Chatter Posts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_add.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add topics to Chatter posts and comments to make it possible to search for all the items that touch on that topic. You can add topics to any posts at any time directly in the feed. - **[Add Hashtag Topics to Chatter Posts and Comments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_add_topic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To organize Chatter posts and comments and make them easy to find, add topics. - **[Add Topics to Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_files.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Topics make it possible to search for all the items that touch on a given topic. Topics added to Chatter posts are also added to any files in the post or its comments. When you search for those topics, the files are included in the results. - **[Remove Topics from Chatter Posts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_remove.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If a topic no longer applies to a Chatter post, you can remove it. - **[View the Topics That People Are Talking About](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_most_used_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The topics you’re talking about appear in your Chatter profile in the Recently Talked About section. - **[View the Topics That Groups Are Talking About](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The topics that a Chatter group is talking about appear on the group detail page in the Recently Talked About section. - **[Trending Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_trending.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Trending Topics area on the Chatter tab shows the topics that are being discussed right now in Chatter. - **[Topics in Mobile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_mobile_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Topics are available in Salesforce for Android and Salesforce for iOS, but there are some differences in mobile applications. # Topics Privacy Topic names and descriptions are not private, even for topics that appear solely in private groups and on records. Posts and records with topics have the same security and privacy as posts and records without topics. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
This table explains where you can see all topics and where you can’t see topics that are used solely in private groups or on records. | User interface element | Shows all topics | Doesn’t show topics that are used solely in private groups and on records | | --- | --- | --- | | Topics list | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   | | Topic search results | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   | | Topic reports | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   | | Knowledgeable User reports |   | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Related Topics on the topic detail page | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   | | Recently Talked About topics on group detail pages | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   | | Recently Talked About topics on profiles |   | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Trending Topics on the Chatter page |   | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Topic suggestions when adding topics to a post or a record |   | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | People-talking number in the topics list and in topic suggestions when adding topics to a post |   | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | For increased security of topic names, Salesforce turns off topics for guest and authenticated external users in Salesforce Sites and in portals created before Summer ’13. If you want to enable topics for external users, go to Setup and enter Chatter in the Quick Find box. Select Chatter Settings, and in the Topics section select **Allow topics in Salesforce Sites and Portals**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note You can’t use topics in unlisted groups. You can add a hashtag topic when you write a post or comment in an unlisted group. The topic is formatted as a link after you post. However, a topic detail page isn’t created, and the link doesn’t work. # Totals The Totals component displays count summaries related to the site group, such as number of posts, members, and likes. The Totals component displays as Summary on a page. It’s visible only to users who have reporting permissions in orgs that have group engagement. You can also choose to make the component visible only to group managers. 1. Select the **Totals** component in the page that you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Group ID | The group’s ID. Typically, this field is populated when the page loads. | | Visible only to managers | To make the chart visible only to group managers, select the box. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Image displaying Totals component on a page.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/totals_component.png) # Track Experience Cloud Site Activity with the Moderation Overview Page Moderation Insights are arranged in clickable tiles on the Moderation Overview page in Experience Workspaces. View the entire picture of your site’s moderation activity at a glance and take action on day-to-day moderation tasks. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example To view all flagged posts and comments, click **Flagged Discussions** and go directly to the Flagged Discussions queue. You can approve or delete flagged posts and comments in bulk, directly from the queue. ![Flagged Discussions queue](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/208_networks_flagged_disc.png) ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Let us do the setup work for you! [Install the Salesforce Communities Management (for Communities with Chatter)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reporting_dashboards_package.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Salesforce Communities Management packages give community managers an essential starter set of dashboards and reports to keep tabs on activity and engagement directly in Experience Workspaces.") package from the AppExchange. Insight reports provided in the package are 100% customizable. You can change the default Insights page names, report folder mappings, and even the Insights report columns and filters at any time. So don’t be afraid to customize or change what you get in the package. You won’t hurt our feelings. # Track Performance with Partner Scorecard Channel account managers can measure partner users’ performances and establish benchmarks for their channel programs using partner scorecards. You can customize partner scorecards to display any report summary results that your channel account manager or executive team wants to see. Add multiple scorecards to track more than one category. Partner scorecards are available in Lightning Bolt Solutions. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To manage scorecards:

Create, Edit, and Delete on Accounts

AND

Create, Edit, and Delete on Reports

AND

Create, Edit, and Delete on Scorecards

To view scorecards:

Read on Accounts

AND

Read on Reports

AND

Read on Scorecards

To view scorecard metrics: Run Reports
Partner scorecards are only available with Partner Community licenses. If you don’t have access to scorecards, contact Salesforce Customer Support to enable Manage Scorecards in your org. Add the “View scorecard” action to the account layout to display the scorecard directly on the account. Each scorecard displays admin-defined metrics that monitor partner performance. You can organize metrics into different categories, such as sales, marketing, and support. When you select the category you want each metric to belong to, the metrics sort into different tabs on your scorecard. Scorecards are built on top of Salesforce reports. 1. Go to **Scorecards**, and click **New**. 2. From Setup, enter Scorecard Metric and select **Fields**, to enter categories that you need and are not already included. 3. Go back to your scorecard and add metrics to it. Assign metrics to categories if you want to group them by KPIs. 4. Associate your scorecard with a program, level, or partner account. Once you’ve associated your scorecard with a program, level, or partner account, you can view the scorecard from that account. If you’ve organize different scorecards into tabs, you can click the tab to see the scorecard metrics associated with that category. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Partner Scorecard for Sales ![Partner Scorecard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/partner_scorecard.jpg) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Metrics are pulled from summary reports. You must have access to the reports you want to associate with scorecards. Scorecard associations are permanently deleted when an account is disabled. See [Configure Reports for Partner Scorecard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_configure_scorecard_metrics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Assigning metrics to a Partner Scorecard is easy, but it’s important to correctly configure the reports. Follow these tips to display accurate information in your scorecard.") for more information about setting up metrics for scorecards. #### See Also - [Configure Reports for Partner Scorecard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_configure_scorecard_metrics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Assigning metrics to a Partner Scorecard is easy, but it’s important to correctly configure the reports. Follow these tips to display accurate information in your scorecard.") - [Design the Field Layout for Reports Created from Your Custom Report Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.reports_report_type_setup.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Build a Report](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=analytics.rd_reports_build.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Track Site Activity with Custom Reports Create custom reports to track usage, moderation, and other activity in your Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
User Permissions Needed
To create custom report types: Manage Custom Report Types
To create, edit, and delete reports: Create and Customize Reports
To create and share dashboards: Manage Dashboards in Public Folders
To report on Chatter Messages: Moderate Experiences Chatter Messages
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). To monitor the health of your Experience Cloud site, create custom report types and then create a report using that custom report type. If you want your community managers to see your report, create or edit a dashboard to include your report and then map the updated dashboard. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Only reports that are based on the Networks object show Experience Cloud site-specific information. By using reports based on the Networks object, you can create one custom report and use it across all your sites. Use the following table to get started with reporting for Experience Cloud sites.
High-level usage Primary Object > B (Child Object) > C (Child Object, If Applicable) Description
Chatter Usage Networks > Chatter Messages Create reports on the private message activity.1
Chatter Usage Networks > Feed Revisions Create reports on posts and comments that your members have edited.
Chatter Usage Networks > Groups Create reports on groups.
Moderation Networks > Network Audits

Create reports on all moderation activity and history.

To report on moderation activity in private Chatter messages, filter the report by Audited Object Type (on the Network Audits object) to equal Chatter Message.

Moderation Networks > Site Members > Network Activity Audit — Moderators Create reports on members who either flagged items or moderated a flagged item.
Moderation Networks > Site Members > Network Activity Audit — User Create reports on the members whose items were flagged, blocked, or replaced.
Moderation Networks > Site Members > User Login Create reports on frozen members.
Moderation

Networks > Network Moderations > Content Documents

Networks > Network Moderations > Feed Posts

Networks > Network Moderations > Feed Comments

Networks > Network Moderations > Private Messages

Create reports on content that is currently flagged. These reports allow you to see the actual contents of the flagged item. For example, you can see the contents of a flagged private message to easily determine if the message is spam.
Moderation Networks > Unpublished Feed Entities > Feed Posts Create report on posts that are pending review and approval.
Public Activity Networks > Network Public Usage Daily Metrics Create reports on the daily public site page views and unique visitors.
Recommendations Networks > Recommendation Metric Create reports on custom recommendation usage.
Topic Activity Networks > Topics Create reports on topic activity.
Topic Activity Networks > Topic Assignments Create reports on topic assignments.
User Activity Networks > Network Activity Daily Metrics Create reports on the daily number of posts and comments by member type.
User Activity Networks > Site Members > Login History Create reports on login activity. This report includes only direct logins to the site. If a user logs in to an org and then switches to a site, their login activity isn't included.
User Activity Networks > Site Membership Daily Metrics Create reports on the daily count of total active members, new members added, and external member logins by member type.
User Activity Networks > Network Unique Contributor Daily Metrics Create reports on the unique daily contributors. A member is counted as a contributor if they posted or commented on a group or a user profile.
User Profile Photos Networks > Site Members To report on user profiles with or without photos, filter the report by Has Profile Photo (on the Site Members object) to equal True or False.
## Create a Report for a Site Create a custom report to gauge the success and engagement levels on your Experience Cloud site. 1. Create custom report types based on the Networks object. Only reports that are based on the Networks object show Experience Cloud site-specific information in Experience Workspaces. You can create reports based on other objects and expose them in Experience Workspaces. Keep in mind that they show data from across your org, not just for the site in which you’re viewing them. 2. Select Networks as the primary object, and the appropriate child object in your custom report type depending on what type of analysis you want to do. 3. Use the custom report type to create a report. Be sure not to filter the report by Network ID. Filtering by Network ID ensures that the report dynamically displays data for the Experience Cloud site that you view it from. When you add a Network ID filter, it causes the report to show data only for the site with that Network ID. The report shows this limited data, regardless of which site you view it in. #### See Also - [Report on Experience Cloud Sites with AppExchange Packages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reporting_dashboards_package.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Salesforce Communities Management packages give community managers an essential starter set of dashboards and reports to keep tabs on activity and engagement directly in Experience Workspaces.") - [_Salesforce Help_: Create a Custom Report Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.reports_defining_report_types.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Track Site Users with Your Google Analytics Tracking ID Add your Google Analytics™ tracking ID to track page views. Enable access to your Salesforce data for deeper insights. Then, adjust your pages to more accurately reach your customers. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
To track using Google Analytics: 1. In Experience Builder, click ![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings.png) on the left sidebar and click **Advanced**. 2. Enter your Google Analytics tracking ID. ![Google ID in Experience Builder Advanced Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_google_id.png) 3. To track user types, user IDs, and search activity, enable **Let Google Analytics access your Salesforce data for deeper insights into search activity**. 4. To enable the masking of IP addresses on the Google server side, which helps with privacy compliance or concerns, **Use IP Anonymization**. 5. To enable the service, publish the site. Your site’s analytics data streams directly to the Google Analytics service where you can review and interpret it. After you’ve set up Google Analytics to integrate with your data, you can [create your own reports](https://support.google.com/analytics/answer/1151300?hl=en). For developers of custom Lightning components, we provide the `global forceCommunity:analyticsInteraction` event. Use this event to track events triggered by the custom component. - **[Configure Google Analytics™ for Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_google_analytics_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Google Analytics to track user IDs, user types, and search activity so that users can pull this information into meaningful reports. #### See Also - [_Lightning Components Developer Guide_: forceCommunity:analyticsInteraction](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.lightning.meta/lightning/ref_forceCommunity_analyticsInteraction.htm) # Track Use of Chatter Questions in Your Salesforce Organization and Experience Cloud Sites Keep tabs on the use and adoption of Chatter Questions in your organization or sites with reports and dashboards. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Chatter Questions is available in: Group, Professional, Developer, Performance, Enterprise, Contact Manager, and Unlimited Editions
Reports on Chatter Questions help you answer questions such as: - What kinds of questions are users asking? - How many questions were asked in the past month? - What percentage of questions go unanswered? - Which topics do users ask the most questions about? - Which departments are asking the most questions? To track the use of Chatter Questions in your _Salesforce organization_, download the [Salesforce Chatter Dashboards](https://appexchange.salesforce.com/listingDetail?listingId=a0N30000000pviyEAA) on AppExchange. For help with getting started, see [Report on Chatter with the Dashboards Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_reporting.htm&type=5&language=en_US). To track the use of Chatter Questions in your _sites_, download the [Salesforce Communities Management (for Communities with Chatter)](https://appexchange.salesforce.com/listingDetail?listingId=a0N3000000B5XHsEAN) on AppExchange. For help with getting started, see [Report on Communities with the AppExchange Packages for Community Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reporting_dashboards_package.htm&type=5&language=en_US). # Track User Engagement with Google Analytics 4 For insights into page visits and user engagement, add Google Analytics 4 to your enhanced LWR site from Experience Builder. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
User Permissions Needed
To create an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
If you don’t have a Google Analytics account, refer to the [GA4 documentation](https://support.google.com/analytics/answer/9304153) from Google to set one up. You must [create a GA4 property](https://support.google.com/analytics/answer/9304153?hl=en) with a Web data stream. Google Analytics 4 allows users to track specific user interactions with page content. These interactions are called events. The out-of-the-box integration tracks certain events, including: - Page views - Scrolling - File downloads - Outbound clicks, which occur when a visitor selects a link that takes them to a separate domain. If you want to track other events, you can develop your own using custom events. For more information about events, see [\[GA4\] Enhanced Measurement Events](https://support.google.com/analytics/answer/9216061?hl=en&utm_id=ad). 1. In Experience Builder, go to Settings and select Integrations. 2. For Google Analytics 4, click **Add to Site**. 3. Enter your Google Analytics [Measurement ID](https://support.google.com/analytics/answer/7372977?hl=en), and save the change. 4. Publish the site. Google Analytics begins tracking user engagement after you publish. To stop Google Analytics from tracking user engagement, you can remove it from the site. Existing data for the site is still available in your Google Analytics account. You can also change the Google Analytics Measurement ID. On the Integrations page, click **Edit** for Google Analytics 4, and enter a different Measurement ID. Then publish the site. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note For testing purposes, you can publish the site from a sandbox or Developer Edition org. However, we recommend that you wait until you can deploy your site to production before you make it available to the public. # Translate Topics Names and Descriptions for Experience Cloud Sites with International Audiences Use the Translation Workbench to translate topic names and descriptions in international Experience Cloud sites. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To translate topics:

View Setup and Configuration

AND

Be designated as a translator

1. From Setup, enter Translate in the Quick Find box, then select **Translate**. 2. Select the language you’re translating into. 3. Select **Managed Topic** for the Setup Component. 4. For Aspect, select **Field Label** for the topic name, and **Description** for the topic description. 5. In the Experience Name column, expand a site to see its primary topic names. 6. To enter language-specific names for topics, double-click in the Topic Name Translation column. For descriptions, double-click in the Topic Description Translation column. Consider the following when you’re using the Translation Workbench: - There’s no Metadata API support for translated topic names or descriptions. - While topic name uniqueness is guaranteed in English, the translator must ensure the uniqueness of topic names in the translated language. - Modifying topic names from Experience Workspaces or Experience Management only changes the English site. All translated topic name and description changes must be made using the Translation Workbench. - If a translated topic name is entered when the site is in English mode, the translated name can appear twice in the translated site. - When topics names are translated with the Translation Workbench, hashtags in the translated sites also change. For example, #help shows as #aiuto in Italian. If the site member then reverts to English from Italian, clicking the #aiuto hashtag gives an error message rather than showing the topic detail page of #help. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To automatically add the translated version of a topic to translated articles, the translated topics and articles must already be uploaded in the system. Otherwise, the translated article is tagged with the English topic. # Trending Articles by Topic The Trending Articles by Topic component displays the most popular articles in your Experience Builder site organized by topic. An article's popularity is based on the number of recent views. 1. Select the **Trending Articles by Topic** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Title | Enter the text that is the title for the component. The default text is Trending Articles. | | Number of Articles | Enter the maximum number of trending articles to display. | | Topic ID | The ID from the topic that the user selects to display the list of articles. To display articles from all managed topics, leave this field blank. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Trending Articles by Topic component: ![Trending Articles by Topic component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/topic_trending_articles.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Trending Topics The Trending Topics area on the Chatter tab shows the topics that are being discussed right now in Chatter. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Trends result from how often people add a topic to their feeds and comment on or like posts with the same topic. For example, let’s say your coworkers plan to attend an upcoming Dreamforce conference. They’ve started discussing it in Chatter. It’s likely that you see a trending topic for Dreamforce. A trending topic is not solely based on popularity. Trends usually relate to a one-time or infrequent event that has a spike in activity, like a conference or a project deadline. For privacy reasons, Trending Topics don’t include topics that are used solely in private groups or record feeds. #### See Also - [View the Topics That People Are Talking About](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_most_used_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The topics you’re talking about appear in your Chatter profile in the Recently Talked About section.") - [View the Topics That Groups Are Talking About](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The topics that a Chatter group is talking about appear on the group detail page in the Recently Talked About section.") # Trending Topics The Trending Topics component displays the popular topics in your Experience Builder site. In the Page Editor, you can configure the Trending Topics component on the Home page. 1. Select the **Trending Topics** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Title | Enter a title for the list of trending topics. The default text is Trending Topics. | | Number of Topics | Enter the number of trending topics to display. You can display a maximum of five topics at a time. | | Show the number of people using the Topic | To show the number of people who are using the topic, check the box. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample Trending Topics component: ![Trending Topics page element](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/trending_topics.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Triggering Journeys Based on Audiences You can select a set of users—an audience—and put them into a journey. Your audience can be specific and include, say, a user who purchased a certain product and posted within the last 30 days.
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
To define the audience, you select the users using either SQL in Automation Studio or Audience Builder. Make sure that Marketing Cloud Engagement can access the data tables. In core Salesforce, the tables must be replicated and synced as a Synchronized Data Source in Contact Builder. This process is assisted by the Marketing Cloud Connect package, but it’s not automatic. You must choose which tables you want to sync and the object must be replicable. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note After object data is synced into Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can use the data to make decisions at junction points in a journey. Such junctions are known as decision splits. #### See Also - [Sync an Object to the Marketing Cloud Engagement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_jb_sync_object.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To create an audience-based journey, sync object data to Marketing Cloud Engagement.") - [Automation Studio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=mktg.mc_as_automation_studio.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Audience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=mktg.mc_ab_audience_builder.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Configure a Decision Split](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=mktg.mc_jb_use_decision_splits.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Interact with Synchronized Data Sources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=mktg.mc_cab_interact_with_synchronized_data_sources.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Triggering Journeys Based on Events You can trigger journeys based on an event that happens in the site, like when members join.
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
For an event to trigger a journey, the object that the event happens to must be workflow-enabled. Most standard objects in Salesforce (such accounts, leads, case, and opportunity), all custom objects, and many community-specific objects are workflow enabled. Some site-specific objects, however, aren’t. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note As a best practice, create sample journeys to make sure that the objects you want to use can trigger a journey and the data is accessible. #### See Also - [Experience Cloud Objects for Creating Member Journeys](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_jb_objects_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Most, but not all, Experience Cloud objects can be used for creating journeys. This list includes the available objects along with a description, their eligibility status, API object, and use cases (as appropriate).") - [Determine If an Object Can Trigger Journeys](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_jb_usable_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before you create an event-based journey, check that the object you want to use works. This test helps you identify available objects.") - [The Salesforce Data Event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=mktg.mc_jb_salesforce_data_event.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Salesforce Experience Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=mktg.mc_jb_salesforce_community.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Troubleshoot Metadata Deployment Errors in Experience Cloud Sites Solve issues that can arise when deploying LWR and Aura sites with ExperienceBundle or enhanced LWR sites with DigitalExperienceBundle. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
Error Message Cause Solution
Specify a unique ID for each component in this view. In DigitalExperienceBundle, each component in a view must have a unique ID. In this case, two or more components have the same ID.

Retrieve the metadata from both the source and target orgs using DigitalExperienceBundle.

In the view that caused the error, in both the source and the target org, search for components with matching IDs.

When you find a matching ID, manually update it by altering a couple of characters to ensure that each component has a unique identifier.

The devName of an existing route can’t be changed. Revert the devName of the generated_route_id route back to its original value and try again. In ExperienceBundle, devName represents a unique API name that’s automatically generated for a route when you create it. devName is a required value that must not be changed. This error occurs if the value was altered in some way.

Review any recent modifications or customizations related to standard component functionality. Determine how and why the name was altered, and revert the name to its original value.

Alternatively, consider using SiteDotCom for your deployment instead of ExperienceBundle.

We couldn't validate property_name in file_path.json for component component_id. Error: specific_error_information In ExperienceBundle, this error occurs when the site configuration in the source org doesn't match the target org. For example, let's say the theme in the source org is using Default_User_Profile_Menu, but the theme in the target org is using Default_User_Profile_Menu1. Ensure that the sites in the source and target orgs use the same configuration. For example, if the specific error information mentions that a component is missing, ensure that the component names match in both orgs.
You seem to be missing the property isLockerServiceEnabled in site_name/config/mainAppPage.json with component ID component_id. In ExperienceBundle, this error occurs when the isLockerServiceEnabled property in the site's config/mainAppPage.json file is missing. Add "isRelaxedCSPLevel" : false to the config/mainAppPage.json file.
Your site needs a route with route type route_type.

This issue can occur due for various reasons.

Reason 1: There's a discrepancy between the site features or custom objects that are enabled in the source org and the target org.

Because of this difference, the ExperienceBundle retrieval process can't include the necessary object- or feature-related files from the source org. However, the target org requires these files.

Enable the relevant permission in the source org. Then retrieve ExperienceBundle again and deploy the updated bundle to the target org.

If it isn't possible to enable the permission in the source org, you can disable the permission on the target org instead. Keep in mind that, as a result, permission-related features can be missing in the deployed site.

Reason 2: Each site template includes default routes types that are required. This issue can occur if the route type was somehow deleted or renamed. Update the site_name.site-meta.xml file to include a route with the correct route type. Ensure that the route configuration aligns with the intended functionality of the site.
# Troubleshooting Steps If Site Members Don’t Receive Welcome Emails When you create a site, publish it, and then activate it, you expect site members to receive a welcome email that gives them access to the new site. Take these troubleshooting steps if site members don’t receive welcome emails. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important System-generated emails from an unverified email-sending domain aren’t delivered, even if the From email address is verified. See [Requirements to Send Email from Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_email_verification_requirements.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - To ensure that you added the correct user profiles or permission sets, check your site’s membership. Make sure that the correct users are assigned to the correct member profiles or assigned the correct permission sets. - Make sure that the Send welcome email option is selected in **Workspaces** | **Administration** | **Emails**. - Check the email deliverability status to ensure that None and System Emails aren’t selected. In Setup, enter Deliverability in the Quick Find box, and click **Email Deliverability**. Ensure that Access level isn’t set to **None** or **System Emails**. - Check email logs to ensure that the emails were sent. In Setup, enter Email Log Files in the Quick Find box, and click **Email Log Files**. Click **Request an Email Log**, and enter the time period to check. After you receive the email log, check to see if emails were sent from Salesforce to your members. - Check the spam folder to ensure that emails aren’t marked as spam. - Use a verified email address. - Ensure that the site is activated. # Turn On Agentic Enterprise Search for Agents Enable the search logic that allows your agent to summarize articles and resolve queries using your customer relationship management (CRM) data. This setup provides the foundation for the Agentforce Service agent to retrieve results from your Enterprise Knowledge data. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost. To purchase, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Available in: Aura Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Available in: LWR Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
User Permissions Needed
To enable Autonomous Enterprise Search
  • Customize Application
  • Manage Agentforce Agents
  Manage Agentforce Agents
Before you start make sure you have, - External Einstein Agent License: You must build your agent by using the Agentforce Service Agent template. - End-User Permissions: Salesforce admins must assign the API Enabled permission set to Customer Community Plus users. Without this, the search returns empty results. 1. From Setup, enter Agentforce Coworker in the Quick Find box and select **Get Started with Agentforce Coworker**. 2. To activate the feature, set the Agentforce Cowork toggle to On. 3. Scroll to the Advanced Search Options section and select **Go to Search Manager**. 4. In the Search Manager sidebar, locate and select **Knowledge**. 5. On the Search Index Fields tab, identify the fields containing your core article content. 6. Select the Search Result Fields tab and make sure Title and URL Name are selected. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Selecting these fields allows the agent to provide clickable links and citations. To ensure users can actually see these AI-generated summaries and citation links in the chat window, they must be assigned the Agentforce Coworker User permission set. 7. To review how Agentforce Coworker identifies users across integrated data sources, return to the search set up page and from the Agentforce Coworker setup page, select **Go to User Mapping**. 8. Agentforce Coworker uses identity resolution to match user accounts across data sources, using email addresses or single sign-on IDs. This ensures search results reflect the permissions users have in each system. Review and manually resolve incorrect matches. 9. From Setup, enter Agentforce Orchestrator in the Quick Find box and select **Agentforce Orchestrator**. 10. Click the name of your specific Agentforce Orchestrator record from the list. 11. Locate the Tool Settings section and make sure the Agentforce Service Agent is selected as the primary tool. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Orchestrator interacts directly with the ASA, which handles conversational intent and relies on its underlying search configurations to surface knowledge. # Turn On Recognition Badges in Experience Workspaces Turn on Recognition Badges via the Gamification Tile to finish setting up and start giving badges. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To turn on or off Recognition Badges:

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Moderate Chatter

Before completing this task, enable WDC’s Thanks feature, configure permission sets for who can create and give badges, and add recognition to user profile layouts. 1. In Experience Workspaces, click the Gamification tile. 2. In **Settings**, turn on Recognition Badges. A Recognition Badges section appears above **Settings**. 3. To see the available badges and create and manage badges, click **Recognition Badges**. ![Recognition Badges related list showing default badges.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/recog_badges.png) # Unanswered Questions The Unanswered Questions component lets users see the most viewed unanswered questions in a site. The component shows the top unanswered questions based on the view count across the site. As questions are answered, they are removed from view. 1. Select the **Unanswered Questions** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | Title | The title of the component. The default text is Do you have the answer?. | | Number of Questions | Enter the number of questions to show on the list. The default is 5. | | Show views | Show the number of times the question has been viewed by users. | # Unarchive a Site Unarchive an archived site so that users can access it. ### Required Editions
 
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
You must have at least one active community license in your org to use this feature.
User Permissions Needed
To unarchive an Experience Cloud site: Create and Set Up Experiences
1. Access the Digital Experience app using the App Launcher. 2. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To update visibility and tab settings for profiles you’d like to have access to the Digital Experience app and the All Sites page, see [Start Using Salesforce CMS](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.community_managed_content_start_using.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Click **View All** in All Sites. 3. Click the name of the site you’d like to unarchive. 4. On the site detail page, click **Unarchive**. 5. Click **Unarchive** again. Your site is archived. If you change your mind, you can unarchive it. # Understand the Basics of Experience Cloud Discover how Experience Cloud helps you create digital experiences and branded spaces for your employees, customers, and partners. You can build sites, portals, and forums with the level of customization that you want using little or no code. Or, if you’re comfortable using code, you can build them programmatically. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Explore the various parts that make up an Experience Cloud site. Get familiar with Experience Cloud’s primary setup areas and terminology. - **[What Is Experience Cloud?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_basics_what.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With Salesforce Experience Cloud you can build CRM-powered experiences quickly and easily. Experience Builder, Salesforce CMS, Mobile Publisher, and a suite of web apps join to help you create robust, customized sites for your every use case. - **[Building Blocks of a Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_basics_parts_pieces.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An Experience Cloud site is composed of several layers that work together. Each layer contributes specific types of content and data. To help you understand how the pieces work together, let’s divide the components into major categories and discuss how they influence one another - **[Find Your Way Around](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_basics_navigation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are three primary areas where you set up, design, and manage your Aura and LWR Experience Cloud sites: Salesforce Setup, Experience Workspaces, and Experience Builder. - **[Experience Cloud Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_resources.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn more about Experience Cloud with helpful videos, guides, and blog posts. Or hit the trail with modules and projects on Trailhead. - **[Experience Cloud Glossary](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_basics_glossary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here are definitions to some key terms and concepts related to Experience Cloud. - **[Supported Browsers for Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_communities_browser_support.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Browser support for Experience Cloud sites varies by the device that you access the site from and the site template. # Unified Catalog Integration Understand how the Agentforce Service agent leverages the Unified Catalog to surface service processes and request forms. This integration makes it possible for users to find and start intake forms through the natural language interface of your Experience Cloud site. results. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost. To purchase, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Available in: Aura Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Available in: LWR Experience Cloud sites that use Build Your Own Template
Unified Catalog Integration is the link that allows the Agentforce Service agent to resolve user requests by initiating specific business processes. The Actionable Smart Search tool facilitates query resolution by identifying relevant service processes or Unified Catalog items. When a user asks a question that matches a defined process, the agent identifies the intent and connects the user to the appropriate intake form or screen flow. This allows users to complete requests without navigating through multiple pages of the Experience Cloud site. To make sure that your site users can view and interact with catalog items, Salesforce admins must coordinate with the IT Service Management (ITSM) team to establish security and governance: - Data Governance Policies: You must create policies that grant portal users access to the Unified Catalog. Without these policies, the search tool cannot retrieve catalog items, even if they match the user's intent. - Role-Based Visibility: Because the Unified Catalog often contains sensitive request types, access is strictly governed by the user’s specific role and permissions. Because the Unified Catalog often contains sensitive request types, access is strictly governed by the user's specific Role and permissions. - Authenticated Users: Visibility is determined by the user's profile and the data governance policies attached to the Unified Catalog. - Unauthenticated Guest Users: The Experience Cloud site does not show Unified Catalog actions or service processes to unauthenticated guest users. All catalog-driven actions require the user to log in to the site to ensure data security and proper request routing. To make it possible for users to complete requests, you must host the Unified Catalog Intake Form component on a dedicated page within your Experience Cloud site. When the Agentforce Service agent identifies a matching catalog item, it directs the user to this component, where the conversational context is maintained to streamline the submission process. # Uninstall Chatter Desktop How to uninstall Chatter Desktop.
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions.
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018. For more information, see [Chatter Desktop Retirement](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=000267581&type=1&language=en_US). - On Windows, go to **Start** | **Control Panel** | **Uninstall a program**. Double-click Chatter Desktop or right-click it and select **Uninstall**. Click **Yes** when prompted. - On Mac, go to your applications folder. You can also type applications in Spotlight. Find the salesforce.com folder with Chatter Desktop in it and drag it to the trash. # Unlisted Chatter Groups Unlisted Chatter groups offer more privacy compared to private Chatter groups. Only group members and users with the Manage Unlisted Groups permission can access unlisted groups in list views, feeds, and search results. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Unlisted Chatter groups are similar to private Chatter groups, in that only members can view an unlisted group’s detail page, feed, or files. But unlisted groups offer more privacy than private groups. - For nonmembers, unlisted groups don’t appear in list views, feeds, and search results. Only members and users with the Manage Unlisted Groups permission can find and access unlisted groups. - Nonmembers can’t visit the group detail page. (With private groups, nonmembers can see a truncated version of the detail page. The truncated version shows the name, description, and member list, but not the feed or files.) - You can convert unlisted groups to public or private groups, but not the other way around. - Only group owners, group managers, and users with the Manage Unlisted Groups permission can add group members. Users can’t ask to join an unlisted group. - Users can’t see unlisted groups on other user profiles unless they have access to the group. - Files shared in unlisted groups are visible only to the members of the unlisted group. If the file is shared outside the unlisted group, then other users with permissions can update the file. - Users with Modify All Data or View All Data permission can’t access an unlisted group or its files unless they’re members of the group. They also can’t change group settings unless they own or manage the group. - Only users with the Manage Unlisted Groups permission can access or modify an unlisted group and its files and feed content without membership. ## Limitations If you decide to create an unlisted Chatter group, consider these limitations. - Custom pages or third-party applications that are integrated with Salesforce can expose unlisted group information to users who don't have access via the Salesforce UI. Check with your administrator about who can access information in unlisted groups in your organization. - You can’t use topics in unlisted groups. You can add a hashtag topic when writing a post or comment in an unlisted group. The topic is formatted as a link after you post. But a topic detail page isn’t created, and the link doesn’t work. - You can’t mention unlisted groups in posts or comments. # Unlisted Group Limitations Before you decide to enable unlisted groups in your organization, consider these limitations. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
## For Administrators - Without membership in an unlisted group, only users with the Manage Unlisted Groups permission can access or modify an unlisted group and its files and feed content. - Users with the Modify All Data permission can’t delete feed content from unlisted groups, unless they are also group members. - Users with the Data Export permission can export all Chatter data and view the exported posts and comments from any group. They can perform these actions regardless of whether they have the Manage Unlisted Groups permission. - You can’t grant the Manage Unlisted Groups permission to users with these profiles: Chatter External, High Volume Portal, or High Volume Customer Portal. - Unlisted groups count toward a user’s group limit. Even so, unlisted groups don’t appear in the Groups list on a user’s profile unless the person who’s viewing the list is a member or has permission to manage unlisted groups. When unlisted groups are hidden, the count that appears next to the Groups list can be inaccurate, depending on the permissions of the person viewing the list. ## For Developers Apex code runs in system mode, which means that the permissions of the current user aren’t taken into account. This limitation has implications for pages that are written in Apex. - Visualforce pages that display groups can expose unlisted groups to users who aren’t members. - Because system mode disregards the user’s permissions, all users who are accessing a Visualforce page that’s showing an unlisted group can act as an owner of that group. - AppExchange apps that are written in Apex and that access all groups expose unlisted groups to users who aren’t members. To limit and manage access to the unlisted groups in your organization: - In all Apex code, explicitly filter out unlisted groups from SOQL queries. - Use permission sets, profile-level permissions, and sharing checks in your code to further limit unlisted group access. - To monitor and manage the creation of unlisted groups, use Apex triggers on the CollaborationGroup object. In Setup, enter Group Triggers in the Quick Find box, then select **Group Triggers** to add triggers. #### See Also - [Enable Unlisted Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_unlisted_groups_enabling_for_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable unlisted groups for your organization to help users collaborate more privately in Chatter.") # Update Content Versions Clicking a file name on any Salesforce CRM Content tab opens the content details page. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To add a version: Add Content checked in your library permission definition
To publish a new version of the file and update its properties: 1. Click **Edit** | **Upload New Version**. This option does not appear for Web links or Google docs. 2. Click **Browse** to find and select the updated file. 3. As needed, update the **Title** and **Description** fields. 4. Fill out the Reason for change field. This text is included on the email notifications sent to subscribers and the version list on the content details page. 5. To publish the content on behalf of another author, choose that author from the dropdown list. 6. Tag your content. Your tagging permission depends on the tagging rule assigned to the library: - If the library does not have a tagging rule or if your administrator assigned the open tagging rule, you can enter tags in the Tags field. As you type a tag, Salesforce CRM Content autosuggests tags based on your My Recent Tags list and the Popular Tags section on the Libraries tab. The My Recent Tags list on the Contribute window shows the 20 tags that you used most recently. To add a tag, click it to automatically add it to the Tags field. - If your administrator assigned the guided tagging rule, you can choose from the list of suggested tags or enter a new tag. To add a suggested tag, click it to automatically add it to the Tags field. - If your administrator assigned the restricted tagging rule, you must choose from the list of suggested tags. When you select a tag, it turns green. - You can't change or delete tag names. You can remove tags from a document, but that doesn't delete the tag. - Tags are case insensitive. You can't have two tags with the same name even if they use different upper and lowercase letters. The case of the original tag is always used. 7. Update any custom fields as needed. 8. Click **Publish**. Consider this information when creating or modifying a new version. - You can't edit a file within Salesforce CRM Content. To edit a file, download it from Salesforce CRM Content to your computer, make your changes, then upload the updated version using the **Upload New Version** button. - The Versions subtab on the content details page lists all content versions. The Recent Activity list on the Libraries tab also notifies users of new content versions. - Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Performance Edition customers can publish a maximum of 200,000 new versions per 24–hour period. Developer Edition and trial users can publish a maximum of 2,500 new versions per 24–hour period. # Update Public Accessibility Settings for Standard Visualforce Pages of Your Experience Cloud Site Review the public accessibility settings of your standard Visualforce pages that are associated with your Experience Cloud site, and update them as needed. If you’re performing this review on an Experience Cloud site that is live, assess the impact in a sandbox first before changing anything in production. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and select **Digital Experiences** | **All Sites**. 2. Next to the site that you want to access, click **Workspaces** | **Administration** | **Pages** | **Go to Force.com**. All the pages in the Site Visualforce Pages section are public facing. If your business case calls for all those pages to be public, you can finish your audit here. If not, change the access settings. 3. To edit a page’s public access settings, in the Site Visualforce Pages section, click **Edit**. The Enabled Visualforce Pages column lists all the public-facing pages. Move pages in and out of the column to change their public accessibility, and then save. If you already use the Experience Builder pages for login and registration, don’t enable public access to SiteLogin, ForgotPassword, SiteRegister, or CommunitiesSelfReg. However, if your site uses Visualforce pages for login or registration, make sure those pages are publicly exposed. Check the Visualforce pages every time you create an Experience Cloud site. Have a process in place to apply changes as you implement new sites. # Update Your Experience Builder Site’s Template We introduce amazing features and enhancements with every release, so it pays to keep your Experience Builder site up to date! Typically, we automatically update your template to the latest version, so you can start adding the newest features to your site right away. However, when the changes are significant, you’re required to update your template manually. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To update your template Create and Set Up Experiences AND Manage Experiences
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note All template improvements are made on the latest version. Avoid missing out by keeping your template current. The Koa and Kokua templates are in a phased retirement. From Summer ’17, you can no longer use them to create sites. We therefore recommend working with Salesforce Support to replace your existing Koa and Kokua sites. Take advantage of the latest templates, which provide richer support for Knowledge and case management, along with a slew of other new features. We no longer support Koa, Kokua, and Customer Service template versions from before Winter ’16 (October 2015). The impact of updating a template depends on the version your site is using. When a manual template update is available, a red notification icon (![Updates Available Indicator](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/communities_updates_available.png)) appears over the Settings icon. ![Experience Builder settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_left_nav.png) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important We strongly recommend that you test the impact of the update in a sandbox environment. After you update and publish your site, you can’t revert to an older version.
My Current Template Type and Version What Can I Expect When Updating to Spring ’19?
Winter ’19 templates and Lightning Bolt solutions
  • Accessibility and performance improvements on the following components:
    • Navigation Menu
    • Reputation Leaderboard
    • Related Records
    • Trending Articles by Topics

If you’ve applied CSS customizations, migrate them in the upgraded components.

Overriding CSS isn’t recommended. The best way to update the styling of your components is to use the Theme panel in Experience Builder. To update existing CSS overrides see CSS mappings for updated components.

Summer ’18 templates and Lightning Bolt solutions Your site is updated automatically with all the features of the Winter ’19 release. No need to manually update.
Spring ’18 templates and Lightning Bolt solutions
  • Improvements to tooltip positioning by changing several panels, dialogs, and tooltips to use a shared container
  • Updates to the Language Selector’s functionality and appearance (current preferences are maintained)
  • Improvements to the property editor container
  • All the changes that apply to subsequent updates
  • If you’ve applied CSS customizations, migrate them to the upgraded components

Overriding CSS isn’t recommended. To update existing CSS overrides, see CSS mappings for updated components and Standard Design Tokens for Sites.

Winter ’18 templates and Lightning Bolt solutions
  • A dropdown menu to set audiences at the component level
  • Out-of-the-box UI enhancements, such as font sizing
  • Upgraded Reputation Leaderboard, Trending Articles by Topic, and Related Articles. If you’ve applied CSS customizations, migrate them to the upgraded components.

    Overriding CSS isn’t recommended. The best way to update the styling of your components is to use the Theme panel in Experience Builder. To update existing CSS overrides see CSS mappings for updated components.

  • A new User Profile Menu component that automatically replaces the Profile Header component in updated templates
  • The base component on the Record Detail page for custom objects is replaced with a newer version for desktop view mode. If you currently have CSS overrides for record layout, keep them, and refer to CSS Overrides Migration for the Record Layout Component to add your styles and customizations to the new component
  • A new Theme panel that redesigns the Branding Panel in Experience Builder.
  • Additions to Theme settings that help you easily see which pages a theme layout is associated with
  • More metadata options to improve discoverability of pages through SEO
  • Query parameters in a site URL, other than language, no longer persist while navigating within a site
  • Updates to CMS Connect (JSON) require manual updating to connections created with the Winter ’18 release.
    • CMS Connect (JSON) now autocreates detail pages. URL’s using query parameters pointing to your manually created pages continue to work. However, they aren’t accessible from the CMS Connect (JSON) Property Editor in Experience Builder.

      For better SEO and management, it is best to use the new, automatically created pages.

      • In Experience Workspaces, add a Content Type and the JSON path for both ID and Title.
      • In Experience Builder, open the Property Editor of the existing CMS Connect (JSON) component by selecting it.
      • Click Save to create and autoconfigure the new detail page.

        The standard page you created in Winter ’18 for navigation isn’t automatically deleted. If it’s not referred to by any other component, you can manually delete it from the Pages menu.

    • CMS Connect (JSON) has new configuration fields.
      • When editing an existing JSON connection, the Connection Type is Public by default and Content Type, Title, and ID are empty. Title and ID have to be filled before the connection can be saved again.

        You can have only one Content Item per Type and it’s necessary to define a Content Item for navigation support.

        • If you have multiple Content Lists and a single Content Item in an existing connection, when you edit your CMS Connection a single Content Type is created in the JSON section with the Content Item and Content Lists assigned to it.
        • If you have multiple Content Items and Content Lists, when you edit your CMS Connection you have one Content Type with a single Content Item and all of your Content Lists under it. The remaining Content Items are each in a separate Content Type.
  • All the changes that apply to subsequent updates.
Spring ’17 and Summer ’17 Customer Service, Partner Central, and Lightning Bolt solutions
  • Decoupling of the search box from the site header, making it easier to insert your own search experience within a site.

    The Search page in the Winter ’18 version of the Customer Service (Napili) template doesn’t include the Headline component out of the box. If your site’s Search page includes the Headline component, it’s removed as part of the upgrade.

  • Sleeker header component improves your site’s mobile experience, leaving more room to show what’s important to your site.
  • Out-of-the-box UI improvements, such as improved spacing in text fields.
  • Streamlined new Global Search for Peer-to-Peer Sites.
  • Upgraded, high-performance navigation menu that offers more styling options and reduces the need for CSS overrides. If you have applied CSS customizations, migrate them to the upgraded navigation menu.

    Overriding CSS isn’t recommended. The best way to update the styling of your navigation menu is to use the Theme panel in Experience Builder. To update existing CSS overrides see CSS mappings for updated components.

  • Adoption of Lightning Design System principles in all content layouts.
  • Two new branding options: Navigation Background Color and Navigation Text Color.
  • All the changes that apply to subsequent updates.
Winter ’16 to Spring ’17 Customer Service (Napili)
  • Login pages retain branding but lose custom code or component customizations.
  • All the changes that apply to subsequent updates.
Pre-Winter ’16 Koa, Kokua, or Customer Service (Napili)

Most component customizations and properties are overwritten. However:

  • For Koa and Kokua, general settings, such as Category Group Name, Top-Level Category, and Company Name, carry over.
  • For Customer Service (Napili), topic definitions carry over.
  • All the changes that apply subsequent updates.
Pre-Spring ’16 Aloha template Most branding properties defined using the Branding Editor in Experience Builder are maintained. However, sometimes your site’s colors are reset to the default value. After you update the template, check the branding properties and update the ones that were reset
Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Template updates for sites using Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce aren’t managed from Experience Builder.
For information on component compatibility with older template versions, see [Which Components Can I Use with Each Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") To update your template: 1. In Experience Builder, click **![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_settings.png)** | **Updates**. 2. Click **Update** and confirm the update when prompted. 3. Make sure that your login pages look correct, and reconfigure missing branding properties, custom code, and component customizations. 4. [Publish your site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_publish.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Publish your Aura or LWR site in Experience Builder to make your site updates and component customization updates available to your site members.") to apply the template updates. If you are upgrading from a pre-Winter ’18 template, some of the old branding properties are reorganized but still there, while others map to different properties. Let’s take a closer look at the changes. ![Old and updated branding and theme properties, numbered 1-7](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_themepanel_schematic.png)
Pre-Winter ’18 branding properties ... Map to these updated branding properties ...
Background Color (1) Background Color (1)
Button Color (2) Action Color (2)
Button Border Color —
Button Hover Color —
Button Hover Border Color —
Font Color (3) Text Color (3)
Error Font Color (4) Error Font Color (4)
Background Image (5) Background Image (5)
Card Background Color (6)

Card Background Color (6)

Also controls card transparency

Card Border Color —
Card Transparency —
Font Family (7) Primary Font (7)
#### See Also - [Experience Builder Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_general_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Settings area to track which template you’re using, view your site’s status and publication history, and customize your template. If you’re using the Customer Service template, access your navigational and featured topic settings.") - [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Builder lets you easily style your site, create and customize pages, add drag-and-drop components, and deliver personalized experiences to different audiences. Choose a template to quickly start your site, and then style the pages to match your company’s branding.") - [Considerations for Changing Your Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_template_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Changing your template affects site navigation, branding, and customizations.") # Update Your Experience Cloud Site’s Name, Status, and Description Manage your Experience Cloud site name, description, status, and template all from one location. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
You can change your site name and URL after the site is activated, but users aren’t redirected to the new URL. So be sure to inform your members before changing the name or URL. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Click **Administration** | **Settings**. 3. Edit your settings as needed. - Select ![Edit](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_management_edit.png) next to the site you want to change, and make your changes. You can change your URL from this page. However, if you’ve already activated your site, users aren’t redirected to the new URL. - Manage the status of your site. - Change the template. #### See Also - [Change Your Experience Cloud Site Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_template_change.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you use the Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template, you can change your template to an Aura template or any installed Lightning Bolt Solution in Experience Builder. Changing templates isn’t available in LWR sites.") - [Experience Cloud Site Statuses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_status.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Cloud sites can have one of these statuses: preview, inactive, active, and archived.") # Update Your LWR Site URL to Remove /s Some older, non-enhanced LWR sites include /s at the end of the site’s base URL, making it difficult to achieve a completely custom site URL. You can remove this unwanted element and switch from https://mycustomdomain.com/s to https://mycustomdomain.com. Removing /s is also a prerequisite when you upgrade to an enhanced LWR site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
- [Considerations Before You Update the URL](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_enhanced_url.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [URL Format Differences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_enhanced_url.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [Update the Site URL](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_enhanced_url.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Remember that changes to the site URL takes immediate effect on the live site.") - [Revert the Site URL](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_enhanced_url.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you previously updated the site URL to remove /s, you can revert the URL to include this element again if necessary.") - [Set Up Redirections for /s Removal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_enhanced_url.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you remove /s from the site URL, the system usually sets up automatic redirects. However, if you see an error message in Experience Builder that this process failed, you can instead create the redirects manually by using the pattern shown here.") ## Considerations Before You Update the URL Before you update the URL of a non-enhanced LWR site, make sure that you understand the changes to expect. - For published sites, as soon as you update the URL, the change takes immediate effect on the live site. - To maintain the site’s SEO rankings, the system sets up automatic redirects for the site’s pages and updates any custom URLs. For example, https://mycustomdomain.com/s/mypage redirects to https://mycustomdomain.com/mypage. - If you use hard-coded URLs as part of your site implementation, you must update these references manually. - Updating the URL of your site affects the deployment process because the URLs in the source and target orgs must match. If you update the site URL in sandbox, for example, remember to also update the URL in production before you deploy your site. Similarly, if you have existing change sets or metadata packages that use the old site URL, you must update the URL references before deployment. ## URL Format Differences In Custom URLs in Setup, you can see the list of sites in your org. Each site has two entries. - _Site.com Community_ serves the site pages from Experience Builder. For older, non-enhanced LWR sites, this URL includes /s and can’t be edited. - _Community_ serves the various Visualforce pages that you can set up in the Administration workspace of a site. ![Custom URLs page before URL update](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/url_update_pre.png) When you update the site URL, the system: - Removes /s from the URL path for _Site.com Community_ and makes the value editable. - Appends vforcesite to the URL path for _Community_. For example, an LWR site at mycompany.my.site.com/helpcenter/ would serve Visualforce pages from mycompany.my.site.com/helpcenter/helpcentervforcesite. ![Custom URLs page after URL update](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/url_update_post.png) ## Update the Site URL Remember that changes to the site URL takes immediate effect on the live site. 1. Identify whether your LWR site includes /s in the URL. The list of sites on the Custom URLs page is the easiest way to check the URL. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Custom URLs and then select it. 2. Open the site’s Administration workspace. From the All Sites page in Setup, click **Workspaces** next to the site’s name, and then select **Administration**. 3. On the URL Update page, click **Update URL**.![The URL Update page in the site's Administration workspace.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/url_update.png) The option to update a site URL is available only for non-enhanced LWR sites. 4. Verify that the site URL was updated correctly. When successful: - The URL Update page refreshes and shows a **Revert URL** button instead. - In Experience Builder, if the site was previously published, the URL for the live site in **Settings** | **General** no longer includes /s. - In Custom URLs in Setup, the two entries for the site are updated as described in the previous section. ## Revert the Site URL If you previously updated the site URL to remove /s, you can revert the URL to include this element again if necessary. However, if you updated the site URL and subsequently upgraded the site to an enhanced LWR site, this option is unavailable. You must revert the site before you can revert the site URL. In the site’s Administration workspace, open the URL Update area and click **Revert URL**. ![The Revert URL button in the URL Update area.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/url_update_revert.png) When you revert the site’s URL, /s is appended to the end of the base URL and takes immediate effect on the live site. ## Set Up Redirections for /s Removal When you remove /s from the site URL, the system usually sets up automatic redirects. However, if you see an error message in Experience Builder that this process failed, you can instead create the redirects manually by using the pattern shown here. | Source URL format | Target URL format | | --- | --- | | /\*/s | / | | /\*/s/ | / | | /\*/s/\[route1\] | /\[route1\] | | /\*/s/\[route1\]/\[route2\] | /\[route1\]/\[route2\] | | _And so on…_ | _And so on…_ | #### See Also - [Key Concepts in Page Redirection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_url_redirects.htm&language=en_US) - [Custom Domains in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.domain_mgmt_overview.htm&language=en_US) # Upgrade Record Components to LWC Technology Update record components in your Aura sites to run on Lightning Web Component (LWC) technology, and see improved accessibility and stylistic changes. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Starting in Winter ’25, the Create Record Form, Record Banner, and Record Detail components are eligible for upgrade. In Summer ’25, the upgrade is enforced for all orgs. We strongly recommend that you test all customized record components before the update. If your record components use custom CSS, the upgrade can cause breaking changes. We strongly recommend that you turn on the setting and test all your record components, in either a sandbox or an unpublished org, before publishing your changes. The setting can be turned off until Summer ’25. To upgrade your components: 1. From **Setup** | **Digital Experiences**, go to **Settings**. 2. Under Experience Management Settings, select **Use Lightning web components on your record pages in Aura sites**. ## CSS Equivalents in Aura and LWC Components When you upgrade your Aura record components to LWC technology, you can expect to see stylistic changes. If your components use custom CSS, use these equivalent CSS selectors to give your upgraded components similar CSS customizations.
CSS Selector Equivalents
Section in UI UI Element Aura Selector LWC Equivalent
Record Detail: Headline General
.forceCommunityRecordHeadline .slds-page-header,
.forceCommunityRecordHeadline .forceRecordLayout.slds-page-header
.forceCommunityRecordHeadline .slds-page-header,
.forceCommunityRecordHeadline .forceRecordLayout.slds-page-header
Field Title
.forceCommunityRecordHeadline .slds-form-element__label
.forceCommunityRecordHeadline .slds-text-title
Field Value
.forceCommunityRecordHeadline .slds-form-element__control
.forceCommunityRecordHeadline .slds-text-body--regular
Actions Ribbon
.forceCommunityRecordHeadline .actionsContainer
.forceCommunityRecordHeadline .actionsContainer, .forceCommunityRecordHeadline .chatterActionContainer
Record Icon
.forceCommunityRecordHeadline .profilePicWrapper
.forceCommunityRecordHeadline force-social-record-avatar-wrapper.forceCommunityRecordHeadline records-highlights-icon
Record Title
.forceCommunityRecordHeadline .slds-page-header__title
.forceCommunityRecordHeadline .slds-page-header__title
Field Row
.forceCommunityRecordHeadline .slds-page-header__detail-row
.forceCommunityRecordHeadline .slds-page-header__detail-row
Record Detail: View Section Title
.forceCommunityRecordDetail .form-element__label
.forceCommunityRecordDetail .slds-form__item .slds-form-element__label
Section Text Value
.forceCommunityRecordDetail .slds-form-element .uiOutputText
.forceCommunityRecordDetail .slds-form__item lightning-formatted-text
Checkbox
.forceCommunityRecordDetail input.uiInput--checkbox
.forceCommunityRecordDetail .slds-checkbox
Record Detail: Edit Field Title
.modal-container .forceCommunityRecordDetail .form-element__label
.uiModal--recordActionWrapper .slds-form__item .slds-form-element__label
Text Input
.modal-container .forceCommunityRecordDetail .uiInput--input input
.uiModal--recordActionWrapper lightning-input input.slds-input
Select Input
.modal-container .forceCommunityRecordDetail .uiInput--select .select
.uiModal--recordActionWrapper lightning-picklist .slds-combobox
Checkbox
.modal-container .forceCommunityRecordDetail input.uiInput--checkbox
.uiModal—recordActionWrapper .slds-checkbox

For visual elements:


.uiModal—recordActionWrapper .slds-checkbox .slds-checkbox_faux
Form Body
.modal-container .forceCommunityRecordDetail .slds-card
.uiModal--recordActionWrapper records-lwc-record-layout
Create Record Form Save/Confirm Button
.forceCommunityCreateRecordForm button, .forceCommunityCreateRecordForm .button
.forceCommunityCreateRecordForm records-form-footer .slds-button.slds-button_brand:not(.slds-combobox__input)
Footer Section
.forceCommunityCreateRecordForm .buttonWrapper

.forceCommunityCreateRecordForm records-form-footer
Page Title
.forceCommunityCreateRecordForm .headerLabel
.forceCommunityCreateRecordForm h1.headerLabel
Form Area
.forceCommunityCreateRecordForm .forceQuickActionLayout
.forceCommunityCreateRecordForm records-record-layout-block
# Upgrade to Enhanced LWR Sites Upgrade existing LWR sites to enhanced LWR sites to take advantage of the latest platform features, including partial deployment, site content search, and expression-based visibility. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
From Winter ’23, new LWR sites that you create are enhanced LWR sites by default. These sites are hosted on the enhanced sites and content platform, a redesigned system that brings together Salesforce CMS and LWR sites. As part of the continued move to this consolidated platform, you can upgrade older LWR sites and gain access to features that are available only with enhanced LWR sites. - **[Considerations Before You Upgrade or Revert a Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_enhanced_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you upgrade your site, spend some time preparing and learning about the impact of these changes. - **[Upgrade Your Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_enhanced_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Upgrade an older LWR site to an enhanced LWR site. - **[Revert Your Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_enhanced_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can revert an enhanced LWR site to a non-enhanced version manually in Experience Builder only once. ## Considerations Before You Upgrade or Revert a Site Before you upgrade your site, spend some time preparing and learning about the impact of these changes. ### Understand Metadata and Deployment Differences When you upgrade your site to an enhanced LWR site, the site’s metadata changes. Unlike non-enhanced LWR sites, which use the ExperienceBundle metadata type, enhanced LWR sites use the DigitalExperienceBundle and the DigitalExperienceConfig types. This change can affect your deployment processes and must be factored into your upgrade plans. If you must upgrade an LWR site that was previously deployed to another org, remember to upgrade the site in both orgs. Let’s say you have an LWR site in sandbox that you previously deployed to production. After you upgrade the site in sandbox, you must also upgrade the site in production before you attempt to deploy it. If you revert a previously upgraded site, the reverse is true. The site’s metadata reverts from the DigitalExperienceBundle and the DigitalExperienceConfig types to the ExperienceBundle type. Remember to revert the site in both orgs when you deploy a reverted site. ### Back Up Your Site Ensure that you create a backup copy of your site by using the appropriate Metadata API type. ### Use Sandbox We strongly recommend that you work in a sandbox environment to upgrade and test your site before you deploy the site to production. ### Remove /s from the Site URL Some older LWR sites include /s at the end of the site’s base URL, which is unsupported in enhanced LWR sites. Before you can upgrade your site, you must first remove /s from the URL. ### Understand Publication Status and History Changes After you upgrade your site, the published status of the enhanced LWR site changes to Unpublished. At this stage, the non-enhanced version of the site is still live, so to replace it with the enhanced version, you must publish the site. Additionally, the previous change history for the site is no longer shown in Experience Builder in **Settings** | **Change History**. If you want to retain a record of previous site publication history, we recommend that you take a screenshot of the history. Similarly, if you upgrade your site and subsequently revert it, the published status of the reverted site again changes to Unpublished, meaning that the enhanced version remains live until you publish the reverted site. Additionally, the change history for the enhanced site is replaced by the prior history for the non-enhanced version. ### Access Enhanced CMS Workspaces and Channels After you upgrade your site to an enhanced LWR site, you can take advantage of enhanced CMS workspaces and channels, which offer features that are unavailable to non-enhanced workspaces. If you revert the site, you lose access to these features. ## Upgrade Your Site Upgrade an older LWR site to an enhanced LWR site. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If the URL of your site includes /s, you must update the URL before you can continue. If you’re unsure whether your site is enhanced, check the All Sites list in Setup under Digital Experiences. Enhanced sites show an ![Enhanced badge](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/enhanced_icon.png) badge beside them. 1. Open your LWR site in Experience Builder and click **Settings** | **Updates**. 2. Click **Upgrade**. ![The Updates area in Settings in Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/enhanced_upgrade.png) 3. Click **Upgrade** in the confirmation window. 4. If your site is a B2B or D2C Commerce store that uses images from a Salesforce CMS workspace, after the system upgrades your site, you must add the public site channel to the workspace. This step isn’t required for non-Commerce sites. See [Add or Remove a Channel](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.cms_channel_add.htm&language=en_US). 5. Preview the site to ensure that all the pages and components look and work as expected. - If your site uses data-binding components, ensure that the content loads correctly. - Ensure that all images load correctly, particularly for B2B or D2C Commerce sites 6. To complete the upgrade process, publish the enhanced LWR site so that the upgraded version goes live. Then verify that the live site functions as expected. ## Revert Your Site You can revert an enhanced LWR site to a non-enhanced version manually in Experience Builder only once. For any subsequent revert requests, you must contact Salesforce Customer Support. After you revert a previously upgraded site, the site retains most of the changes made since the site was upgraded. However, some changes can be lost along with the features that are specific to enhanced LWR sites. 1. Open your LWR site in Experience Builder, and click **Settings** | **Updates**. 2. Click **Revert**. The option to revert a site is available to sites that were previously upgraded from a non-enhanced to an enhanced LWR site and never previously reverted. 3. Click **Revert** in the confirmation window. 4. After the system reverts your site, preview the site to ensure that all the pages and components look and work as expected. If your site uses data-binding components, ensure that the content loads correctly. 5. To complete the process, publish the site so that the non-enhanced version goes live. Then verify that the live site functions as expected. #### See Also - [Update Your LWR Site URL to Remove /s](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_enhanced_url.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Some older, non-enhanced LWR sites include /s at the end of the site’s base URL, making it difficult to achieve a completely custom site URL. You can remove this unwanted element and switch from https://mycustomdomain.com/s to https://mycustomdomain.com. Removing /s is also a prerequisite when you upgrade to an enhanced LWR site.") - [Metadata API Developer Guide: DigitalExperienceBundle](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.api_meta.meta/api_meta/meta_digitalexperiencebundle.htm) - [Metadata API Developer Guide: ExperienceBundle](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.api_meta.meta/api_meta/meta_experiencebundle.htm) # Upload a New Version of a File Replace an old version of a file by uploading a new version. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Uploading a new version of a file replaces the previous version, but [previous versions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_history.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The file detail page and the Version History list give you access to lots of useful file actions and information.") are still available. To see previous versions, click **Show all versions** on the file detail page. If your original file was uploaded via a feed post, use **Upload New Version** to replace the old version. 1. Click **Upload New Version** from any of these locations: - The file detail page - The file previewer - The Files page, via the actions arrow for the file - On a file in a feed, via the More Actions arrow (available in Salesforce Classic only) 2. Click **Choose File**, and select a file from your computer. At this point, you can enter a note about what changed in the What Changed? field. This information is shown on the [Version History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_history.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The file detail page and the Version History list give you access to lots of useful file actions and information.") list. 3. Click **Upload New Version** (Salesforce Classic) or **Start Upload** (Lightning Experience). The file detail page and any previous posts show the updated version. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - Only file owners, collaborators, and users with the Modify All Data permission can upload new versions of a file. To learn who can perform which actions on a file, see [Who Can See My File?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_settings_perms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your files in Salesforce can be private to you, privately shared, or visible to your entire company. Learn how to identify a file’s sharing settings and how to change them."). - The file owner doesn't change when a collaborator uploads a new version. - If the file is from Salesforce CRM Content, you can't upload a new version from the file detail page. You can click **Go to Content Detail Page** and upload a new version there. (Available in Salesforce Classic only.) #### See Also - [View File Version History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_history.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The file detail page and the Version History list give you access to lots of useful file actions and information.") - [Follow a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_following.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Follow a file to see updates in your Chatter feed, including when a new version of the file is uploaded. If you stop following a file, the file remains in your Files list, but you don't see updates about it in your feed anymore.") # Upload and Publish Content Add files to libraries to take advantage of the permission setting and content delivery capabilities of Salesforce CRM Content. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To upload and publish files and Web links:

Manage Libraries checked in your library permission definition

OR

Add Content checked in your library permission definition

To publish Google docs: Google Apps account
The Libraries tab has several publishing-related options at the top of the page that let you upload, classify, and publish files, Web links, and Google docs in Salesforce CRM Content. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The **Add Google Doc** button on the **Libraries** tab is available only if your Salesforce admin has enabled the Add Google Doc to Salesforce service. To publish files, Web links, and Google docs in Salesforce CRM Content refer to the following topics: - [Publish Files to Libraries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_files_upload.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To publish files to libraries you can upload them from your computer, contribute them from your private library to a shared library, or share them from Chatter.") - [Contribute Web Links to Salesforce CRM Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_links_upload.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Classify and publish a Web link in Salesforce CRM Content.") # Upload and Replace Items on the Documents Tab You can store documents and images on the Documents tab without attaching them to records. You can then use these items in your Salesforce org, such as when creating an email template. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: All Editions
User Permissions Needed
To upload new documents: Create on documents
To replace documents: Edit on documents
1. On the Documents tab, click **New Document**, or on the documents home page, click**New** next to Recent Documents. If you do not have a New Document option, check if you have the correct permissions. 2. On the Upload New Document page, specify a descriptive document name. If you want to use the file name, leave this field blank. The file name appears when you upload the file. 3. If you have the “Customize Application” permission, enter a unique name to be used by the API and managed packages. 4. Select one of the following.
Indicate Document is InternalWhen checked, a flag is added to the document indicating that document viewers should not share the file outside of the organization. Checking this box does not expressly enforce any security rules.
Externally Available ImageIf the document is an image, such as a logo, that's not confidential. The image will be available from HTML email templates without requiring a Salesforce username and password. It can be used as a custom tab icon or custom app logo, which do require a Salesforce username and password to view. You can also display the image as a custom logo in meeting requests
The **Indicate Document is Internal** and **Externally Available Image** checkboxes are mutually exclusive; you cannot select both. 5. Select a folder for the document. 6. Enter a description to use later as search criteria. 7. Enter keywords that you can use later as search criteria. 8. Select a document or path option. - To upload a document, click **Browse**, choose the file, and click **Open**. - To store a link to the document, enter the location of the document. Enter a path and file name or a URL such as: C:\\Quotes\\quote.doc, \\\\Server\\Departments\\Marketing\\logo.doc, or https://salesforce.com. 9. Click **Save**. To refer to this document using its URL, right-click the image and copy its URL address. When you use the URL, you reference the copy of the image on the Salesforce server. - Documents stored as links cannot be attached to emails, but they save space in your document library. - If your administrator enables document content search, Salesforce also performs a full-text search of the document. When a new document is uploaded or an old one is replaced, its contents are available for searches. - Salesforce stores the most recent upload date as the modified date. - You can upload documents that have file names of up to 255 characters, including the extension. - The size limit for any document you upload is 255 characters. The maximum size for a custom-app logo is 20 KB. - Your organization’s used file storage includes all files stored in the document library. - If the Don't allow HTML uploads as attachments or document records security setting is enabled for your organization, you cannot upload files with the following file extensions: .htm, .html, .htt, .htx, .mhtm, .mhtml, .shtm, .shtml, .acgi, .svg. ## Replace a Document 1. Display the document you want to replace. 2. Click **Replace Document**. 3. Select a document or path option. - To upload a replacement, click **Browse**, choose the file, and click **Open**. - To store a link to the replacement, enter the location of the replacement. Enter a path and file name or a URL such as: C:\\Quotes\\quote.doc, \\\\Server\\Departments\\Marketing\\logo.doc, or https://salesforce.com. 4. Click **Replace Document**. # Upload Files Upload files to Files home, feeds, and records. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
You can upload files to: - Files home - Any Chatter feed post or comment field - The files card or list on groups, user profiles, opportunities, and other records ## Files Home When you upload files on Files home, they’re private (visible only to you) until you share them. Only file owners and users with the View All Data permission can see private files. You can use the Owned by Me filter to view the files you own. To upload files to a library, select the library and then click **Add Files**. Files you upload to a library inherit the sharing settings of that library. You can also add files to Salesforce by: - Attaching a file to a Chatter post. - Uploading files to Salesforce CRM Content private and shared libraries. All file types are supported, including everything from Microsoft® PowerPoint presentations and Excel spreadsheets, to Adobe® PDFs and image files. You can upload and download audio and video files, but you can’t parse or preview them. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Files without a file extension or with an unrecognized file extension show “unknown” in the Type column. By default, you can upload files up to 10 GB. However, the maximum file size that you can upload is determined by your organization. In Chatter, Experience Cloud LWR sites, and Salesforce Classic, the size limit for uploading a file is 2 GB. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce doesn't remove geolocation information from uploaded images. #### See Also - [File Size and Sharing Limits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_size_limits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Here are some size and sharing limits for Salesforce Files and other file types.") - [Prevent Others from Sharing and Unsharing a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_freeze_sharing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can prevent others from sharing and unsharing a file that you own. Preventing others from sharing or unsharing doesn’t affect existing shares.") # Use a Custom Home Page in Your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Site Personalize the standard Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site home page with company branding by using a custom Visualforce or Site.com Studio page. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
The Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce home page is shown to unauthenticated users in a public site and it allows you to specify a landing page for guest users without setting up redirects. This page is also known as your Active Site Home page. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note This setting doesn’t apply to Experience Builder sites. 1. From Setup, enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then select **All Sites**. Click **Workspaces** for the site you’d like to access. 2. Click **Administration** | **Pages**. 3. For the Home page: 1. Select the page type: **Visualforce** or **Experience Builder** (to select a published Site.com Studio page). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If you select **Experience Builder**, only published Site.com Studio pages are included in the search results. You can’t select pages from Experience Builder. 2. Enter the name of the page or leave the field blank to get a list of available options. 3. Click ![Lookup search icon for custom login page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png), then click the name of the page in the search results to select it. 4. Click **Save**. For Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites, page selections in Administration automatically override any previously specified page selections in the Site Details properties. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note When an internal user clicks a link to a Salesforce Tabs and Visualforce site from All Sites or from App Switcher, they’re directed to the site's Classic view and Aloha tabs instead of the site's home page. To direct internal users to the Salesforce Tabs and Visualforce Home page, either create a custom switcher url or define a URL redirect on the Site Detail page of the Salesforce Tabs and Visualforce site. # Use a Custom Service Not Available Page for Your Experience Builder Site Maintain business continuity with customers and enable them to log cases when your site is down using the Service Not Available page in Experience Builder. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
This feature is available for most sites that use Salesforce’s CDN for Digital Experiences. The Salesforce CDN is enabled by default for sites that use enhanced domains. You can also configure custom domains to use the Salesforce CDN option. ## The Service Not Available Page in Experience Builder The Service Not Available page is an offline page. It appears when a site isn’t available or if there is an unexpected 500 error on the site page. When the site is up and running, the Service Not Available page has no impact on the user’s experience of the site. ![Experience Builder Service Not Available page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/exp_builder_sna_page.png) The Service Not Available page also appears to users when the site is down for maintenance. When an admin deactivates a site, they still see the site, but users see the Service Not Available page. The Service Not Available page is enabled by default, unless you’re using your own static resource. To enable the Service Not Available page instead of using your own static resource: 1. Click the Experiences Menu icon. 2. Select **Administration** | **Pages**. 3. Check the radio button next to **Use the auto-generated Service Not Available page in Experience Builder** and save your changes. 4. To make it available for use, publish the page. ![Service Not Available configuration page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/exp_builder_sna_enable.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Custom pages named Service Not Available prevent Salesforce's standard Service Not Available page from automatically migrating to your org. To replace a custom page named Service Not Available with Salesforce's standard Service Not Available page, rename the conflicting custom page. Contact Salesforce Customer Support if you need further assistance. ## Service Not Available Page in ExperienceBundle The Service Not Available Page also exists as a service-not-available route type in ExperienceBundle. Developers must update their file in order to avoid getting an error on missing this route type. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Images from secondary static resources aren't supported for system-generated SNA bundles using the HTML editor. ## Maintain Business Continuity with Email-to on the Service Not Available Page So that users can log cases when the site is down, you can enable Email-to-Case on your Service Not Available page. First set up Email-to-Case, then encourage your users to use the configured email to submit cases using your Experience Builder Service Not Available page. You can also enable users to create additional records from your Service Not Available page, beyond cases, using Email-to-packages found on AppExchange. ## Maintain a Consistent Experience Between Your Experience Builder and Visualforce Sites You can display the same Service Not Available page on your Experience Builder and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites. After you’ve customized your page in Experience Builder and have published it to your site, it automatically becomes a static resource for your org. The Service Not Available static resource: - Must be a public .zip file 5 MB or smaller. - Must contain a page named maintenance.html at the root level of the .zip file. Other resources in the .zip file, such as images or CSS files, can follow any directory structure. - Must contain only files that have file extensions. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Images from secondary static resources are not supported for system-generated SNA bundles usienr the HTML editor. To use the page on your Visualforce site: 1. Open **Experience Workspaces** or **Experience Management**. 2. Navigate to **Administration** | **Pages**. 3. Select ![Lookup search icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png) next to Service Not Available to search for the Service Not Available static resource generated for your Experience Builder site. Upload it as a static resource. 4. Save your changes. ## Service Not Available Page and the Salesforce Edge Network If your site uses the Salesforce Edge Network, the Service Not Available page appears when Salesforce servers are down regardless of whether you enabled enhanced domains. However, when you deactivate your site or take it down for maintenance, the page that appears depends on your enhanced domain configuration, rather than on your Salesforce Edge Network status. - If enhanced domains is enabled, the Service Not Available page appears. This occurs because enabling enhanced domains automatically enables the Salesforce CDN, which takes priority over Salesforce Edge Network settings. - If enhanced domains is disabled, the Visualforce Maintenance page appears. #### See Also - [Set Up Email-to-Case](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.setting_up_email-to-case.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Use a Custom Service Unavailable Page in Your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_custom_sna_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "On rare occasions, if your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site isn’t available because of a service outage, Salesforce displays a generic Service Not Available page with Lightning Platform branding. You can replace this page with a custom company-branded static resource page for a personalized user experience for your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site members.") # Use a Custom Service Unavailable Page in Your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce Site On rare occasions, if your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site isn’t available because of a service outage, Salesforce displays a generic Service Not Available page with Lightning Platform branding. You can replace this page with a custom company-branded static resource page for a personalized user experience for your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site members. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
The Service Not Available static resource: - Must be a public .zip file 5 MB or smaller. - Must contain a page named maintenance.html at the root level of the .zip file. Other resources in the .zip file, such as images or CSS files, can follow any directory structure. - Must contain only files that have file extensions. For more information, refer to Assigning Salesforce Site Error Pages in Salesforce Help. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note This setting doesn’t apply to Experience Builder sites created with Experience Cloud. You can upload an Experience Builder Service Not Available page to your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce site as a static resource, after it has been saved. 1. Open Experience Workspaces. 2. Navigate to **Administration** | **Pages**. 3. To search for and select your custom page, click ![Lookup search icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/lookup.png) next to **Service Not Available**. 4. Click **Save**. If there’s a service outage at any time, your community displays your selected page. A couple things to keep in mind: - This page selection doesn’t affect sites that use Site.com Studio pages. - The Service Not Available page, after it’s customized, is available for all Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites in the same domain. To avoid using the same page for all the sites in your domain, create and assign separate Service Not Available pages for each site. For example, consider a scenario where you have two Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites in your domain: a customer community (universaltelco.my.site.com/customer) and a partner portal (universaltelco.my.site.com/partner). If you use a custom Service Not Available page for the customer community, then the partner portal displays the same page during a service outage. You can create and assign a separate Service Not Available page to the partner portal. Domains with a custom URL that contains a root path prefix use the site's Service Not Available page for paths that aren't custom URLs of other sites and have their own Service Not Available pages. For example, sites https://www.example.com/ and https://www.example.com/site1 have assigned Service Not Available pages. Site https://www.example.com/site2 doesn’t have an assigned Service Not Available page. Requests to https://www.example.com/, https://www.example.com/Page1, and https://www.example.com/site2 display the Service Not Available page assigned to https://www.example.com/. Requests to https://www.example.com/site1 and https://www.example.com/site1/Page1, display the Service Not Available page assigned to https://www.example.com/site1. If a site doesn’t have an assigned Service Not Available page, and the sites of parent custom URLs in the same domain also don't have assigned Service Not Available pages, the Maintenance page is displayed. - In certain circumstances, when you configure your site to display a custom error page, your site displays the standard Service Not Available page instead. This change happens by design when you switch to using the Salesforce content delivery network (CDN). This change also happens for sites that switch to using enhanced domains, because the Salesforce CDN is enabled by default for enhanced domains. For more information, see [Assigning Salesforce Site Error Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.sites_error_pages.htm&type=5&language=en_US). #### See Also - [Use a Custom Service Not Available Page for Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_sna_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Maintain business continuity with customers and enable them to log cases when your site is down using the Service Not Available page in Experience Builder.") # Use a Custom Too Many Requests Page for Your Experience Builder Site When your site’s performance is impacted by high traffic, the Too Many Requests page displays a customizable message to let customers know they’ll be redirected momentarily. The page automatically refreshes to check when the site is working and redirects customers to the site when it’s available. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
This feature is available for most sites that use Salesforce’s CDN for Digital Experiences. The Salesforce CDN is enabled by default for sites that use enhanced domains. You can also configure custom domains to use the Salesforce CDN option. The Too Many Requests page shares a theme layout with the Service Not Available page. Use the HTML Editor and Rich Content Editor components to customize the page. ![Experience Builder Too Many Requests page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_tmr_page.png) The Page Refresh component automatically refreshes the page for your customers. This component is built into the page by default. #### See Also - [Edit Pages and Components in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_edit_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Each page contains a collection of components that are organized around a task or function, whether it’s opening a case or searching for an article. The pages in each Experience Builder template are ready for you to use with little configuration. Add new components to your site’s pages, edit the properties of existing components, or delete components that you don’t require.") - [HTML Editor](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_html_editor.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The HTML Editor component lets you create and edit custom content in HTML.") - [Rich Content Editor](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_rich_text_component.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Rich Content Editor component lets you add formatted custom text to your Aura site pages, along with images and videos.") - [Page Refresh](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_refresh_component.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Page Refresh component automatically refreshes the page for your customers.") - [Use a Custom Service Not Available Page for Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_sna_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Maintain business continuity with customers and enable them to log cases when your site is down using the Service Not Available page in Experience Builder.") # Use a Grid Component to Show Enhanced CMS Collections and List Views in LWR Sites The Grid component dynamically populates with data that’s saved in enhanced CMS collections and record list views. After you pick a data source, you add a content component within the grid to show the content that you want. The component provides data binding and pagination logic. ### Required Editions
 
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
You must have at least one active community license in your org to use this feature.
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Before you can add a collection from an enhanced CMS workspace to your site, add the site as a channel to the workspace. Then make sure that the collection is published in the CMS workspace. 1. In Experience Builder, click **Components**. 2. Drag the Grid component onto the page. You can add the component to any standard or object page. 3. Select a data source: a CMS collection or record list view. 4. Set the layout and design options for the content. 5. From the components panel, drag in a content component to show the content. Commonly used components include Text Block, Tile, and Image. 6. Map the fields for the content that you want to display. For example, you can map the Text Block in a Tile component to a blog title, image, or similar content. ![Site showing a grid components with different products populating the page.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/product_grid.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note - Enhanced CMS collections can be added only to enhanced LWR sites. - Grids backed by CRM record list views show a maximum of 2,000 records. - When you use record list as your data source, the only fields you can bind to are fields that have been selected in the list view. For example, if you want to show the All Accounts list view, and the list view shows five fields in your internal org, only those five fields are shown as options for data binding. #### See Also - [Collections In Enhanced CMS Workspaces](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.cms_content_collections.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Use Apex to Configure Record Creation in Batches for High-Volume Sites Experience Cloud site users can create more cases, leads, and custom objects per second when they’re collected into batches and processed asynchronously rather than one at a time. Batch processing improves performance and keeps your site moving during heavy traffic spikes. You can invoke batch record creation using the Apex method added for this purpose. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Developer, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
User Permissions Needed
To configure record and case creation in batches: Use Micro-Batching to Create Records
To set the Created By field of a record created to the original user: Set Audit Fields upon Record Creation
To publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
  • OR
  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin or publisher in that site
To edit Apex classes:
  • Author Apex
  • AND
  • Customize Application
The following applies to authenticated users who create records in batches using micro-batching: - The **Use Micro-Batching to Create Records** profile permission is required. - They own all records that they create via micro-batching. - Field-level security and record type access are bypassed when creating the records. They apply after the record is created. - Records created via micro-batching use the default record type for the org when created via micro-batching. - When creating a child record, only Read access on the parent record is required. The Apex Network.createRecordAsync method has three parameters: - The first parameter `processType` must be set to 'GENERIC'. - The second parameter `sObject` can’t be empty or null. It must contain a valid value representing a supported object. Client-side validations are performed through the end-user experience before the submission of the record for creation using micro-batching. - The third parameter is an array of file attachment links. The file attachments must be created ahead of time. This parameter is optional, and available to authenticated users only Salesforce uses the Automated Process user to create records in batches on behalf of the original users. Site administrators with the **Set Audit Fields upon Record Creation**permission can set the Created By field of the record created to the original user. Otherwise, the Created By field is set to Automated Process user. When guest users create records via micro-batching, the Created By field is set to Guest User, however, guest users don’t own the created records. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Apex Classes, and then select **Apex Classes**. 2. Use this function for the Apex controller that manages the batch record creation of the object that you want to create. To create cases in batches: ``` Case mycase = new Case( Subject = 'sample case', Description = 'case description'); ``` ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ``` String uuid = Network.createRecordAsync('GENERIC', mycase, [enter ContentDocumentIDs separated by commas]) ``` ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The return value uuid represents the temporary id of the record submitted for batch processing. If record creation fails, uuid can be used to identify [errors associated with the submission](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_submission_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Request forms on standard components and pages automatically check for errors and prompt users to fix the errors before submitting. If you invoked micro-batching for record creation using the Apex method, resolve all form errors before submission. Errors not discovered before submissions are sent to the site admin via email. You can also access errors that occur during record processing using Connect API."). To verify that micro-batching is working as expected via Apex, test the createRecordAsync method in the Apex class by adding the test class definition. For example: This is the apex class ```java public class MicrobatchCreateRecord { public string microbatchCreateCase(String subject) { Case c = new Case(); c.subject = subject; String uuid = Network.createRecordAsync('GENERIC', c); return uuid; } } ``` This is the apex test class: ```java @IsTest public class MicrobatchCreateRecord_Test { @IsTest public static void testMicrobatchCreateCase() { string newCaseSubject = 'ApexTestCase1'; MicrobatchCreateRecord controller = new MicrobatchCreateRecord(); Test.startTest(); string uuid = controller.microbatchCreateCase(newCaseSubject); Assert.isNotNull(uuid); Test.getEventBus().deliver(); Test.stopTest(); // Assert that the Case was created and has the expected subject List testCases = [Select Id, Subject from Case]; Assert.areEqual(1, testCases.size()); Assert.areEqual(newCaseSubject, testCases[0].subject); } } ``` #### See Also - [Use Experience Builder to Configure Micro-Batching for High-Volume Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_record_creation_builder.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Create Record Form, Contact Support Form, or Lead Form (LWC) components to create cases, leads, and custom objects more efficiently. When records are collected into batches and processed asynchronously, your site can process more records at a time. Batch processing improves performance and keeps your site moving during traffic spikes.") - [High-Volume Self-Registration and Record Creation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_microbatching.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "High-volume sites often involve heavier than usual registration traffic and record creation. You can process more self-registrations and record creations per second when you process them in small batches, called micro-batches, instead of one at a time. After they’re submitted, the requests are collected into batches, and the batches are processed asynchronously. Processing transactions using micro-batching improves performance and keeps your site moving during heavy traffic spikes.") # Use Apex to Configure Self-Registration in Batches for High-Volume Sites Your Experience Cloud site can handle twice as many self-registration requests at a time when they’re collected into batches and processed asynchronously rather than one at a time. The accounts and contacts created are owned and managed by the community administrator. After a batch is processed successfully, users receive an email with their login instructions. Batch processing self-registration requests improves performance and keeps your site moving during heavy traffic spikes. Minimal coding is required when you use the Apex controller that manages your self-registration flow. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Developer, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
User Permissions Needed
To configure record and case creation in batches: Use Micro-Batching to Create Records
To publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
  • OR
  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin or publisher in that site
To edit Apex classes:
  • Author Apex
  • AND
  • Customize Application
External Identity and Customer Community license users or Customer Community Plus and Partner Community license users with account role optimization (ARO) enabled can use micro-batching for self-registration. Users can’t be created for existing accounts using self-registration. Keep the following in mind when using Apex controllers to manage your self-registration flow: - For person account sites, leave the account and contact fields blank. - For business account sites, you must add an account. Contacts are optional, but they require a null value. - User sObjects are required for all sites. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Apex Classes, and then select **Apex Classes**. 2. Use this function for the Apex controller that manages your self-registration flow. ``` String uuid = Network.createExternalUserAsync(user, contact, account); ``` Contact is a (not yet saved) sObject. ``` new Contact( FirstName = firstName, LastName = lastName, Level__c = 'Primary'); ``` Account is an sObject. ``` new Account( name = 'Account for '+ LastName, description = 'account description', active__c = 'Yes' ); ``` # Use Branding Sets in Experience Builder Branding sets let you automatically change the look of your sites for different audiences and shift quickly between brands or presentations for campaigns or events. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
Branding Sets are bundled collections of images, fonts, and colors that can dramatically and dynamically change the look and feel of your site. You manage branding sets in the Experience Builder’s Theme panel. If you’re using a pre-built theme, the branding set doesn’t affect the header and hero areas of your site. ![Main Branding Set menu in Theme Panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_brandingset_mainmenu.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Branding sets apply only to colors, images, and fonts. For more information on targeting layout or content to a specific group, see [Personalization with Audience Targeting in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_visibilty_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep your users engaged by offering personalized, relevant content that’s customized for a particular audience. To create an audience, you assemble a set of criteria that defines a user segment. You can then tailor a single site to meet the needs of multiple user segments. For example, you can present the same site with a different look and feel for each audience or show different pages, components, or data to different audiences."). ![Custom color adjustment in Branding panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_brandingset.png) You can maintain and manage several branding sets for any site. Each set (1) is a collection of colors and other elements that you can apply manually or programmatically, using Audiences. You can also start a new set from scratch (2). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note While you can create many automatic responses to audience, Dynamic Branding, such as declarations of Action Color, doesn’t work with pre-built themes. Manage each set, from its menu. ![Branding Set managment menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_brandingset_menu.png) To create or edit a branding set, select it and the attributes you want to bundle. 1. Open the Theme panel and select **Manage Branding Sets**. ![Main Branding Set menu in Theme Panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_brandingset_mainmenu.png) 2. Choose the branding set to edit, or create one. All of your changes are associated with the selected branding set. 3. (Optional) Experience Builder can generate a color scheme for you when you select **Generate Palette from Image** in the Colors panel. 1. In the Colors panel, click **Generate Palette from Image** 2. Choose your previously uploaded company logo or a different image, like an image of your company palette. Experience Builder extracts the main colors from the image and generates a scheme. 3. To modify colors, click the color swatch. To adjust the color, use the slider or enter hex values.![Custom color adjustment in Branding panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_color_adjustment.png) 4. To set the attributes of your branding set, in the Theme panel, select or adjust the fonts, images, and colors. Your changes are saved automatically and appear instantly on the page. To review the results, select various page types from the Pages menu. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If public access is enabled in Experience Builder at the page or site level, the **Let guest users view asset files and CMS content available to the site** preference is enabled in **Administration** | **Preferences**. This preference remains enabled as long as any page has public access enabled. If you upload images for use on site login pages, be sure that this preference is enabled.When you add an image to your site for the first time, an asset file is automatically created and stored in the Org Asset Library. You can always tell which branding set is active by looking at the Theme panel.![Theme panel with branding set name highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_theme_panel-brandingset.png) Remember that branding sets apply only to colors, images, and fonts. For more information on targeting layout or content to a specific group, see [Personalization with Audience Targeting in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_visibilty_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep your users engaged by offering personalized, relevant content that’s customized for a particular audience. To create an audience, you assemble a set of criteria that defines a user segment. You can then tailor a single site to meet the needs of multiple user segments. For example, you can present the same site with a different look and feel for each audience or show different pages, components, or data to different audiences.") ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Not all components in pre-built themes support audience targeting. You can confirm if a component can be targeted by looking in its component properties panel menu (1) for the Audience (2) section. If the section is missing or if there isn’t a menu on the component properties panel, then the component doesn’t support audience targeting. ![Audience section of component properties menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_component_prop_menu-audiences.png) If you can’t find a way to control aspects of your site through the Theme panel or component properties, you can create your own CSS overrides. Your overrides apply to, and are remembered for, the currently active theme. Click **![Actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_manager3.png)** | **Edit CSS** on the Theme panel to use your own CSS styles. Use CSS sparingly, and only when necessary, in case future releases of template components don’t support all CSS customizations. #### See Also - [Personalization with Audience Targeting in Aura Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_visibilty_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep your users engaged by offering personalized, relevant content that’s customized for a particular audience. To create an audience, you assemble a set of criteria that defines a user segment. You can then tailor a single site to meet the needs of multiple user segments. For example, you can present the same site with a different look and feel for each audience or show different pages, components, or data to different audiences.") - [Developer Guide: Dynamic Branding with Login Pages](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.externalidentityImplGuide.meta/externalidentityImplGuide/external_identity_dynamic_with_default_login_page.htm) # Use Components to Display Assigned Recognition Badges on Member Profiles Use the User Profile component or the Recognition Badge component to display assigned Recognition Badges on a member’s profile. ### Required Editions
Available in: Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
User Permissions Needed
To manage page components: Create And Set Up Experiences
You can either use the User Profile component or the Recognition Badges component to allow assigned badges to display on a member’s profile page. 1. In the User Profile component, select **Show Recognition Badges**. ![User Profile component with Show Recognition Badges selected.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/recog_badges_profile_component.png) 2. Alternatively, drag the Recognition Badges component onto the profile page. ![Components list with Recognition Badges component under Gamification.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/recog_badges_component.png) # Use Email to Post to Chatter Groups In Salesforce Classic, email posts to the Chatter groups that you have access to. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
If your admin has enabled this feature, you can email your posts to any public group. Your admin can also let you include attachments. You can email posts to a private or unlisted group only if you’re a member. Use the email address associated with your Salesforce user account. 1. To launch a blank email to the group using your local email client, go to the group detail page, and click **Post by email** below the group description. 2. Enter your message in the email body, including attachments if needed, and send the email. Attachments to the email are added as files in Chatter and shared with the group. The email content displays as a post on the group detail page. Any hashtags that you include in the email body (for example, #TeamExcellence) are converted to topics on the post. If you include more than one attachment , the first attachment is added as part of the post and other attachments are added in comments. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Save the group’s email address as a contact in your mail client or mobile device for easy access in the future. If you copy and paste the mailto: link directly into the contact’s email field, some mail clients can consider the link invalid and prevent you from sending email to the contact. Try removing the parenthetical group name from the first part of the email address. For example, remove (My Group) from (My Group)0f9b000000004cmkaq@post.k-pxyvmac.kp0.chatter.salesforce.com. The following limitations apply to posting to a group using email: - The 10,000 character limit for Chatter posts also applies to posts created through email. Any text in your email beyond this limit is not included in the post. - The maximum message size is 25 MB, including text and attachments. - The email subject is not included in the post. - You can create text posts using email and include links in the text. You can also include up to 25 attachments. You can’t mention people, create polls, or give titles to links when posting to the group by email. - Character-level formatting, such as the use of bold or different type sizes, is not supported. - Email addresses must be unique at the group level. Imagine that multiple user profiles in your organization use the same email address. If that address is used to post to a group, then the user profile associated with the group is used on the post. If the email address is shared between multiple user profiles in the same group, the email is blocked. - Signature text is treated as part of your post. Default signatures inserted by mobile devices, such as Sent from my iPhone, are automatically removed. Before sending your email, delete custom signatures and any extra text that you don't want posted to Chatter. Or, add a separator line to the top of your signature to have it automatically removed. The separator line must have a minimum of one of the following characters: - Dash (\-) - Equal sign (\=) - Underscore (\_) You can also use any combination of these characters or double-dash space (\-- ), which respects [RFC 3676 4.3](http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3676#section-4.3). # Use Experience Builder to Configure Micro-Batching for High-Volume Sites Use the Create Record Form, Contact Support Form, or Lead Form (LWC) components to create cases, leads, and custom objects more efficiently. When records are collected into batches and processed asynchronously, your site can process more records at a time. Batch processing improves performance and keeps your site moving during traffic spikes. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Developer, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
User Permissions Needed
To configure record and case creation in batches: Use Micro-Batching to Create Records
To publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Be a member of the site AND Create and Set Up Experiences
  • OR
  • Be a member of the site AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
To enable users to configure micro-batching, select the **Use Micro-Batching to Create Records** permission on the user’s profile. The following applies to authenticated users who create records in batches using micro-batching: - They can click **Upload File** on a component to attach files to cases submitted in batches. - They own all records that they create via micro-batching. - Field-level security and record type access are bypassed when creating the records. They apply after the record is created. - Records created via micro-batching use the default record type for the org when created via micro-batching. - When creating a child record, only Read access on the parent record is required. 1. To configure record creation for micro-batching, click the **Create Record Form** component. 2. In the Site Performance section of the component settings, select **Create records in batches**. The Create Record Form can be used to create any object. Cases, leads, and custom objects can be created in batches. Other records are still created one at a time. The Contact Support Form component can be used to create cases in batches. 3. To configure the Contact Support Form for micro-batching, click the **Contact Support Form** component. 4. In the Site Performance section of the component settings, select **Create cases in batches**. 5. To apply your changes, publish your site. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Leads Form (LWC) also uses micro-batching to create leads in batches rather than one at a time. The Lead Form LWC component is enabled for micro-batching by default and requires no further configuration. For more information, see the [Lightning Web Component Developer Guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/component-library/documentation/en/lwc/lwc.reference). ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Create Record Form component with Create records in batches option](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/exp_cloud_high_volume_record_creation_builder.png) #### See Also - [Use Apex to Configure Record Creation in Batches for High-Volume Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_record_creation_apex.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Cloud site users can create more cases, leads, and custom objects per second when they’re collected into batches and processed asynchronously rather than one at a time. Batch processing improves performance and keeps your site moving during heavy traffic spikes. You can invoke batch record creation using the Apex method added for this purpose.") - [High-Volume Self-Registration and Record Creation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_microbatching.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "High-volume sites often involve heavier than usual registration traffic and record creation. You can process more self-registrations and record creations per second when you process them in small batches, called micro-batches, instead of one at a time. After they’re submitted, the requests are collected into batches, and the batches are processed asynchronously. Processing transactions using micro-batching improves performance and keeps your site moving during heavy traffic spikes.") - [Create Record Form](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_create_record_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Create Record Form component displays the action layout when a user clicks an action from the Create Record button.") - [Contact Support Form](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_contact_support_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Contact Support Form allows guest and authenticated users to create cases from a site. It works with the Case Deflection component to help site members find articles and discussions to answer questions as text is being entered into the form.") # Use Google Docs in Salesforce Use Google Docs™ to create and share on-demand documents, presentations, and spreadsheets (“Google docs”) and see your changes in real time as you collaborate with other users. Because your content is stored within Google, there is no need to manage versions or send attachments by email—simply log in with your Google Apps account and view the current document or its revision history. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: all editions except Database.com
User Permissions Needed
Using Google Docs in Salesforce

Read on the appropriate record type

AND

Google Apps account

Salesforce and Google Apps lets you integrate Google Docs with Salesforce. The Docs home page in your Google Apps account lists all the Google documents, presentations, and spreadsheets that you have created or that other Google Apps users have shared with you. For information about Google Docs, refer to [Google's online help](http://www.google.com/a/help/intl/en/users/dands.html). # Use Google Talk in Salesforce Google Talk within Salesforce is no longer available. Learn how to deactivate it. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
User Permissions Needed
Activating or deactivating Google Talk: Customize Application
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important Google Talk within Salesforce is no longer available. For alternative ways to use Google Talk, see [the Google Talk online help](http://support.google.com/chat/?hl=en&topic=1725163#topic=24666). To deactivate Google Talk in Salesforce: 1. From Setup, enter Google Apps in the Quick Find box, then select **Google Apps Settings**. 2. Click **Edit** next to the Google Talk Sidebar Component option in the Activate Google Apps Services list. 3. Deselect the Active checkbox. 4. Click **Save**. #### See Also - [Get Started with Salesforce and Google Apps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.google_setup_getstart.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Google Apps is a suite of on-demand communication and collaboration services hosted by Google and designed for business users.") # Use Reporting in Experience Cloud Sites Use reporting to see short-term and long-term trends in various areas of your Experience Cloud site. The preconfigured AppExchange package makes reporting a snap for community managers. You can also give the power of reporting to your members. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
- **[Track User Engagement with Google Analytics 4](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_google_analytics_4.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For insights into page visits and user engagement, add Google Analytics 4 to your enhanced LWR site from Experience Builder. - **[Report on Experience Cloud Sites with AppExchange Packages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reporting_dashboards_package.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Salesforce Communities Management packages give community managers an essential starter set of dashboards and reports to keep tabs on activity and engagement directly in Experience Workspaces. - **[Enable Analytics in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_wave.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Analytics for Experience Cloud sites to allow your partner and customer users to view and explore Analytics dashboards. - **[Web Analytics and Reporting in Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_dashboards.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you invest in creating a site, community, or portal, you want to measure your investment’s performance and gain insights on how you can improve your site’s engagement. Having site web analytics and data with reports and dashboards at your fingertips can help you iterate your site’s direction. Use Salesforce and third-party analytics tools to stay up to date on your site’s engagement numbers. Some reporting capabilities require add-on licenses. - **[Reports and Dashboards for Site End Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_reporting_ext_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Creating reports for your site’s end users and giving them the ability to access the reports is a powerful tool. For example, your partners can see reports on leads and opportunities to sell faster. Some reporting capabilities require add-on licenses. - **[Report and Dashboard Considerations for Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_analytics_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If the Reports and Dashboards tabs are exposed in the Experience Cloud site, external users can access reports and dashboards. # Use SEO-Friendly URLs in Your Enhanced LWR Site Boost organic traffic to your site by improving search engine optimization (SEO) with new URL configuration solutions. SEO-friendly URL snippets, or slugs, improve SEO by replacing the record ID in the URL with relevant and human-readable information, ensuring that your site’s pages are optimally surfaced in search engines. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
- [Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_build_seo_friendly_urls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [Step 1: Create SEO-Friendly URLs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_build_seo_friendly_urls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "For SEO-friendly URLs to function correctly, you must first create the URL slugs either from the record detail page or in bulk using Object Manager. Then you enable SEO-friendly URLs for your site. Alternatively, you can use the ObjectRelatedUrl object in the Salesforce Platform APIs that you typically use.") - [Step 2: Enable SEO-Friendly URLs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_build_seo_friendly_urls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you create SEO-friendly URLs, you’re ready to enable the functionality in your enhanced LWR site. The setting is site-specific, which means you must enable it on a site-by-site basis.") ## Considerations When adding URL slugs for your site, keep these considerations in mind. - You can't disable the SEO-friendly URLs setting after you enable it. - URL slugs are available for custom objects, accounts, and contacts. They’re also available for product and category pages in LWR Commerce sites. - URL slugs have a 150-character limit and allow these characters: a-z A-Z 0-9 . - \_ $ & : ; \* , = @{}. Foreign-language characters are also allowed. - When URL slugs are enabled and configured for custom object pages, they’re used as the canonical URL in sitemaps created for enhanced LWR sites. Otherwise, the sitemap continues to use the record ID URL. - SEO-friendly URLs don't support site object pages created with custom metadata. URLs for pages made with custom metadata always use the record ID URL. - When using the record ID URL for the navigation menu, use either a site page URL or an external URL. - Site page URL format: /object/. Example: /account/001SG000006px3iAPM - External URL format: https://testorg.my.site.com/lwrCMS/account/001SG000006px3iAPM To use URL slugs on localized versions of your site, keep these considerations in mind. - Enable Translation Workbench and add active languages for translation. See [Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.workbench.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - When choosing a language for a URL slug, select a language that’s active in your org and site. See [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - Create a URL slug in your site’s default language and translate it for each language you support. For example, if your site is configured to have both English and French URL slugs, then site.com/fr/custom-object/{slug-english} redirects to site.com/fr/custom-object/{slug-french}. - When a customer is browsing in a language without a URL slug translation, but the page has a URL slug for your site’s default language, the slug falls back to the default language. For example, if your default site language is English and a customer is browsing in French, site.com/fr/custom-object/{slug-english} loads the page. - When a customer lands on a record ID URL and uses the language selector to change the site's language, the site doesn’t redirect to the SEO-friendly URL format. - When using multilingual alternate `hreflang` tags, guest sharing rules must be set up for translated URL slugs to appear to unauthenticated users. ## Step 1: Create SEO-Friendly URLs For SEO-friendly URLs to function correctly, you must first create the URL slugs either from the record detail page or in bulk using Object Manager. Then you enable SEO-friendly URLs for your site. Alternatively, you can use the ObjectRelatedUrl object in the Salesforce Platform APIs that you typically use. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note No matter where you upload them, URL slugs are available only for custom objects, accounts, and contacts. They’re also available for product and category pages in LWR Commerce sites. ### Create URL Slugs from the Record Detail Page Upload URLs to your enhanced LWR site directly from your records using the URL Slugs component. By default, the Commerce, Product, and Category record pages have the SEO tab and SEO-friendly URL slug component installed. For all other record pages, add the component manually through Lightning App Builder. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App Builder, and then select **Lightning App Builder**. 2. Create a Record Page and select a supported object. 3. Select **Clone Salesforce Default Page**. 4. Select the Tabs component and add a tab. 5. Select **SEO** and then click **Done**. 6. Add the URL Slugs component to your new SEO tab. 7. Save and activate your page. ![Example SEO tab on a record page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/seo_friendly_urls_tab.png) After your component is installed, you can add URL slugs directly from a record page. From the SEO tab, click **Add URL Slug**. Select a language and then enter a URL. ### Create URL Slugs from Object Manager To create SEO-friendly URL slugs in bulk, it’s easiest to go directly to Object Manager. From there, you can bulk import URL slugs via a CSV file. You can also search, filter by language, and edit and delete single URL slugs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Files with fewer than 25 slugs are uploaded synchronously. Files with 25 or more slugs are uploaded asynchronously, with a status email sent upon completion. The row limit is 6,000 rows per file. 1. Construct a CSV file for importing URL slugs. Each row in the file represents a URL slug and the associated language. Specify column headings that correspond to parent ID, URL slug, and language code information. The column headings are case-insensitive, and the columns can be in any order.
Column heading column value
Parent ID The ID of the record that the URL slug is created for.
Language Code A Salesforce-supported language code. For example, en_US.
URL Name

The SEO-friendly URL slug for the record in the specified language.

URL slugs have a character limit of 150 and allow these characters: a-z A-Z 0-9 . - _ $ & : ; * , = @{}. Foreign-language characters are also allowed.

2. When the file is ready to upload, go to **Setup** | **Object Manager**. 3. Select the object page where you want to upload slugs. 4. Select the **URL Slugs** tab. 5. Click **Import** and upload a CSV file. 6. Map the fields in your file to fields in Salesforce. 7. Save your work. ![Url slugs listed in Object Manager](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/seo_friendly_urls_object_manager.png) ## Step 2: Enable SEO-Friendly URLs After you create SEO-friendly URLs, you’re ready to enable the functionality in your enhanced LWR site. The setting is site-specific, which means you must enable it on a site-by-site basis. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important You can't disable the SEO-friendly URLs setting after you enable it. 1. Open [Experience Workspaces](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_workspaces.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 2. Click **Administration** | **Preferences**. 3. Select **Use SEO-friendly URLs on this site**. 4. Save your work. 5. Publish your site. After you enable the setting, you can see and edit the base-friendly URL in the site’s **Experience Builder** | **Page Properties**. # Use the API to Give Recognition Badges Sample Code You can use the API to programmatically give recognition badges to Experience Cloud site members. ## Assign a Recognition Badge and Notify a Member Using Apex ``` ID networkID = '0DBB0000000CdBaOAK'; ID badgeDefintionID = '0W1B0000000ekuJKAQ'; ID giverID = '005B0000003InDeIAK'; ID recipientID = '005B000000483dDIAQ'; String message = 'Welcome to the site'; WorkThanks thanks = new WorkThanks ( NetworkdID=networkID GiverID=giverID, Message=message ); insert thanks; WorkBadge badge = new WorkBadge( DefinitionId=badgeDefinitionId, NetworkID=networkID RecipientId=recipientID, SourceId=thanks.id ); insert badge; // optional: create a Chatter post on the user profile // showing the badge. The user will be notified through // the standard Chatter notification mechanisms. FeedItem feedItem = new FeedItem( NetworkScope=networkID, ParentId=recipientID, RelatedRecordId=thanks.id, Body=message, Type='RypplePost', Visibility='AllUsers' ); insert feedItem; // Unfortunately, there is a limitation in the WDC API that // prevents these 2 lines from working: // thanks.FeedItemID = :feedItem.id; // update thanks; ``` ## Assign a Recognition Badge When a Member Reaches a Number of Reputation Points To avoid assigning the same badge twice, we’ve added a custom “hasBadge\_c” field on the user object. ``` trigger NetworkMemberTrigger on NetworkMember (after update) { for (NetworkMember nm : Trigger.New) { User user = [select ID, hasBadge_c from User where ID = :nm. MemberID]; If (nm.ReputationPonts >= 40 && !user.hasBadge_c) { WorkThanks thanks = new WorkThanks( GiverId='005B00000036ukY', Message='inserted by trigger', NetworkId=nm.NetworkId); insert thanks; WorkBadge badge = new WorkBadge( DefinitionId='0W1B0000000T1QBKA0', NetworkId=nm.NetworkId, RecipientId=nm.MemberId, SourceId=thanks.id); insert badge; user.hasBadge_c = true; update user; } } } ``` ## Automatically Add Reputation Points When Badge Is Assigned to a Member To avoid hardcoding the number of reputation points that are assigned with the badge, this example assumes that the WorkBadgeDefinition entity has been customized with an additional "ReputationPoints\_\_c" field. ``` trigger WorkBadgeTrigger on WorkBadge (after insert) { for (WorkBadge badge : Trigger.new) { if (badge.DefinitionId == '0W1B0000000T1QBKA0') { WorkBadgeDefinition badgeDefinition = [select Id, ReputationPoints_c from WorkBadgeDefinition where Id = :badge.DefinitionId]; NetworkMember member = [select Id, ReputationPoints from NetworkMember where MemberID = :badge.RecipientId]; member.ReputationPoints = member.ReputationPoints + badgeDefinition.ReputationPoints_c; update member; } } } ``` ## Assign Recognition Badge When Member Creates Number of Posts or Comments The ChatterActivity object contains the following useful fields: - CommentCount - CommentRecievedCount - LikeReceivedCount - PostCount These counters can be used to programmatically assign badges based on various thresholds. For example, members could get a badge whenever they create 100 posts or whenever they received 100 likes. ``` trigger ChatterActivityTrigger on ChatterActivity (after update) { for (ChatterActivity ca : Trigger.New) { if (ca.PostCount >= 10) { // TODO: assign badge to user if he hasn't received one already } } } ``` # Use the Content Deliveries Related List A content delivery allows you to convert documents such as Microsoft® PowerPoint and Word files into an optimized web-based version for easy online viewing. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
User Permissions Needed
To create a content delivery: None
To edit a content delivery:

Owner of the record

OR

Modify all Data

After you create your delivery, you can send its encrypted URL to any recipient, such as leads, customers, partners, and colleagues, and then track how often people view or download the content. Content deliveries are available in Salesforce Classic only. However, Lightning Email generates delivery-based links as email attachments for Lightning Experience users who have access to the Content Deliveries feature. From the Content Deliveries related list on leads, business accounts, contacts, opportunities, cases, campaigns, and custom objects you can: - Click **Deliver Content** to create a new content delivery and associate it with the record you are viewing. For more information, see [Creating Content Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A content delivery lets you convert documents such as Microsoft® PowerPoint and Word files into an optimized web-based version for easy online viewing. After you create your delivery, you can send its encrypted URL to any recipient, such as leads, customers, partners, and colleagues, and then track how often people view or download the content. Content deliveries are available in Salesforce Classic only. However, Lightning Email generates delivery-based links as email attachments for Lightning Experience users who have access to the Content Deliveries feature."). - Click **Preview** to open the content delivery. Each time you view a content delivery, it is recorded as one internal view on the Views related list. - Click the content delivery name to open the detail page for that delivery. For more information, see [Viewing and Editing Content Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "On the Content Deliveries related list or the Content Deliveries list page, click the name of a content delivery to open the detail page."). # Use the Following and Followers Lists in Salesforce Classic View the Following and Followers lists on your profile to see who, what, and how many items you're following in Chatter, and who’s following you. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
If you’re not following anyone in Chatter, click **Find people to follow** in the Following list to view the People list and start following people. You can also see the Following and Followers lists on other people’s profiles. When your Salesforce admin enables Chatter, you automatically follow some users and records in your org. In either list, click **Show All** to view the full list in alphabetical order. - Use the **Next** and **Previous** links to see more of the list. - Optionally filter the Following list by people or objects, for example, accounts or files. - In your Following list, click ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png) to stop following a person or record. - In another person's Following list, click **Follow** to follow a person or record. - In any Followers list, click **Follow** to follow a person, or ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png) to stop following them. - To close the window, click **Done**. #### See Also - [Chatter Post Visibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_post_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn where you can post in Chatter, who can see your posts, and whose posts you can see.") - [People Recommendations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_people_recommendations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter recommends people for you to follow based on similar interests.") # Use Visualforce in Experience Builder Sites If you created Visualforce pages, actions, buttons, links, and canvas apps for your Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce template-based sites, you can use them in Experience Builder sites. ### Required Editions ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To include a Visualforce page on a site page, use the Visualforce Page component in Experience Builder. ![Component panel with VisualForce Page highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_component_vf.png) For example, say that you have the Salesforce CPQ app installed in your org. You can create a quote detail page and use the Visualforce Page component to display the quote line editor or other pages. If you have configured actions, buttons, and links associated with standard or custom objects, they work in sites as well. And canvas app overlays let you host third-party applications in your site.
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
1. Give Visualforce page access to users by profile. 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the name of the profile that you want to modify. 3. On the Profile page, in the Enabled Visualforce Page Access section, click **Edit**. 4. In the Available Visualforce Pages list, select the Visualforce pages that you want to make available to this profile, and click **Add**. ![Enable Visualforce page access by profile](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_visualforce_page_access_enable.png) 5. Save your changes. 2. Make the Visualforce page available for your site. 1. From Setup, enter Visualforce in the Quick Find box, then select **Visualforce Pages**. 2. Click **Edit** for the page that you want to make available for your site. 3. Select **Available for Lightning Experience, Experience Builder sites, and the mobile app**, and save the change. ![Make Visualforce pages available to communities](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_visualforce_page_enable.png) If you want to use the page in an Experience Builder template, make sure that **Require CSRF protection on GET requests** isn’t selected, because it prevents the page from rendering. Visualforce Page Component—To add a Visualforce page to your Customer Service site, drag the Visualforce Page component from the Components panel to the page. In the property panel, select the Visualforce page that you want to use. ![Select the Visualforce page in the property editor](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_visualforce_page_properties.png) ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If the Visualforce page requires the Record ID from an object such as Account, create object pages for Account. Then drag the Visualforce Page component onto the object’s detail page. The Record ID field adjusts to the object’s ID. Custom Actions—If you have custom actions with an action type of **Custom Visualforce** associated with a Visualforce page, these actions work in published sites. When users click the action button, the associated Visualforce page is displayed. ![Visualforce custom action](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_visualforce_action.png) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_important.png) Important Visualforce overrides to standard actions such as View, New, Edit, and Delete aren’t supported in sites. These buttons on record detail pages don’t display in sites. Custom Buttons and Links—If you have custom buttons and links with a content source of Visualforce Page, these buttons and links work in published sites. When users click the button or link, the associated Visualforce page shows. ![Visualsource button or link](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_visualforce_button.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Behavior setting for custom buttons and links isn’t supported. When users click custom buttons in published sites, the Visualforce page is always displayed in the current window. Experience Builder sites support custom list buttons with a URL source in published sites only if you deselect the display checkboxes (for Multi-Record Selection). If you select this option, the button doesn't work. Canvas Apps—You can use canvas apps as custom actions to give users access to the functionality of your apps in sites. Configure your canvas app for Lightning Component and Visualforce Page in Canvas App Settings. You can then load the canvas app inside a Visualforce page, Visualforce action, and Lightning components in published sites. ![Configure canvas app for Lightning component and Visualforce page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_visualforce_canvas.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Canvas apps and quick actions aren’t supported for guest users. They’re supported on sites only for logged-in users. You can opt to hide the publisher header and publisher Share button in Canvas App Settings. Best Practices for Using Visualforce in Experience Builder Sites - Site Branding—When developing your Visualforce page code, set the `showHeader` attribute to `true`. That way, branding properties that you set in **Administration** | **Branding** in Experience Workspaces also apply to the Visualforce page component in your Customer Service site. To modify the default gray background for Visualforce components, change the Header Background property on the Branding page. - Mobile—To enable Visualforce pages to display site branding on mobile, set `standardStylesheets=true` or `showHeader=true` in your Visualforce page code. - URLs—If your Visualforce page contains links to other Visualforce pages, make sure that the Visualforce markup includes `http://` or `https://` at the start of the URL. Also, if your page is locked in a frame, use the `target="_top"` attribute to open the page in the full body of the window. For example, `
Name of Visualforce Page` - JavaScript Sources—Use JavaScript sources such as `connection.js`, `apex.js`, `debugshell.js`, and `util.js` in Visualforce pages in either of the following ways: `` or `loadScript("/soap/ajax/36.0/connection.js")` - Images—Hard-coded image URLs in Visualforce pages aren’t supported in Experience Builder preview. We recommend that you upload images as static resources as follows: `{{msg.severity}}` - Standard page layouts—Visualforce pages embedded in standard page layouts aren’t supported in Experience Builder sites. - Custom Theme Layouts—Visualforce pages always use the default theme layout when rendered in an Experience Builder site, even if you’ve applied a custom theme layout to your site pages. # User Profile The User Profile component shows detailed information about a user. Details include contact information, profile photo, Chatter statistics, topics the user is knowledgeable about, who the user is following, and the user’s followers. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). The User Profile component uses a two-column layout by default. Profile details and the profile image are always shown, but you choose if you want to show related lists, Chatter statistics, and Knows About. You can also customize labels. The layout of the component makes it ideal for viewing your site on a mobile device. When viewed on a mobile device or tablet, the component uses a single-column layout with four tabs: Feed, Cases, Details, and Related. The Cases tab is visible only when users view their own profile. You can edit all tab labels. If nickname display is enabled for the site, the nickname is shown in place of the full name when a user views another user’s profile. The full name is shown when a user views their own profile. If you prefer, you can create a custom layout with more granular control over the placement of user profile content. Create a custom site page, and use the profile components to build your own version of a profile. Profile components include the User Profile Summary, User Profile Tabs, User Profile Statistics, User Profile Knows About, and User Profile Related List components. 1. Select the **User Profile** component in the page you’re configuring. 2. To view the properties component, select the Properties pane: | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | User ID | The system supplies this value so that authenticated users can view their own information. Don’t update this field. | | Show All Updates as the Default Feeds Filter | When this box is selected, the feed automatically defaults to the All Feeds filter. If it isn't selected, the feed defaults to the Posts Created by this User filter. | | Show Influence | Determines if the user’s Chatter statistics are shown. Statistics include the number of posts and comments, likes received, followers, and people they’re following. | | Influence Label | Enter a title for the Influence list. The default text is Influence. | | Show Knows About | Determines if the Knows About list is shown. | | Knows About Label | Enter a title for the Knows About list. The default text is Knows About. | | Maximum Topics in Knows About Displayed (up to 10) | Enter the maximum number of topics listed for each user in the Knows About list, up to a limit of 10. | | Show Recognition Badges | Determines if the Recognition Badges card is shown. | | Recognition Badges Label | Enter a title for the Recognition Badges card. The default text is Recognition Badges. | | Button Text | Enter the text you want to display on the button for awarding badges to other users. The default text is Give. | | Show Related Lists | Determines if related lists are shown. Related lists can include Followers, Following, Groups, and Files. | | Feed Tab Label | Enter the text you want to display on the tab that users select to view a user’s Chatter feed. The default text is Feed. | | Cases Tab Label | Enter the text you want to display on the tab that users select to view their cases. This only displays for users on their own profile. The default text is Cases. | | Cases Tab Header Label | Enter the text for the label that appears at the top of the list of cases. The default for this field is My Cases. | | Case Filter Name or ID | Enter the name of the list view that displays cases. | | Create Case Label | Enter the text you’d like to display on the button that users can click to create a case. The default text is Create Case. | | Record Details Tab Label (Mobile only) | Determines if a record details tab appears. Record details include profile details, Knows About, and Influence. The default label is Details. Available only when a site is viewed on a mobile device. | | Related Records Tab Label (Mobile only) | Determines if a related records tab appears, such as Groups, Files, Followers, and Following. The default label is Related. Available only when a site is viewed on a mobile device. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample User Profile component: ![User Profile component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks-user-profile.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # User Profile Detail The User Profile Detail component shows details about a user including contact information, profile photo, Chatter statistics, and topics the user is knowledgeable about. On other users’ profiles, it also shows a Follow button. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Chatter statistics for the site include number of posts and comments, likes received, followers, and people the user is following. Knowledgeable About shows top topics that people know about, so the site can quickly see areas of expertise. Topic knowledge is calculated based on factors such as best answers, mentions, or likes on questions and posts. If nickname display is enabled for the site, the nickname is shown in place of the full name when a user views another user’s profile. The full name is shown when a user views their own profile. 1. Select the **User Profile Detail** component in the page you’re configuring. 2. To view properties for the component, select the Properties pane:
Property Details
User ID The system supplies this value so that authenticated users can view their own information. Don’t update this field.
Show Influence Section To show the user’s reputation scores under their photos, select the box.
Show user’s reputation score in the Influence section To show user’s reputation scores in the Influence section, select the box. Otherwise, the user’s reputations scores under their photos.
Show Knows About Determines if the Knowledgeable About list is shown.
Show Photo To show the user’s photo, select the box.
Display circular photo

To apply a circular crop to user profile photos, select the box. Otherwise the crop is a square/rectangle.

Users may must reload their photos so that they fit inside in the cropped area.

Maximum Topics Displayed Enter the maximum number of topics listed for each user, up to a limit of 10.
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample User Profile Detail component: ![User Profile Detail component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/user_profile_body.png) By default, all the information in a user’s profile is visible to all users in the site, including to unlicensed guest users accessing the site. To limit access to members’ information, use a custom user profile page layout. Hide fields that reveal sensitive information, such as phone, email, title, and manager. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Showing many user fields in a custom layout affects the performance of the profile view. We recommend showing no more than 8 fields. Similarly, consider modifying the fields for unlicensed guest user profiles to show only the necessary information. For example, you could hide the manager field. For detailed instructions on customizing page layouts, see Salesforce Help. # User Profile Image The User Profile Image component displays the user's reputation level, reputation points, and profile photo. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The User Profile Image and the User Profile Summary components replace the User Profile Summary & Image component, which was deprecated in Winter ’21. 1. Select the **User Profile Image** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
User ID The system supplies this value so that authenticated users can view their own information. Don’t update this field.
Display circular photo

To apply a circular crop to user profile photos, select the box. Otherwise the crop is a square/rectangle.

Users must reload their photos so they fit in the cropped area.

Display Reputation To display the reputation level below the user profile photo, select the box.
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample User Profile Image component: ![User Profile Image component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/napili_user_profile_header.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # User Profile Knows About Allow site members to endorse and recognize experts using the widget directly on a member’s profile page. After you have enabled Knowledgeable People, site members can endorse one another for both new and existing topics on their site's user profile page. The profile page displays all the topics the site member is knowledgeable about. Use the component to enter a new topic for endorsement. You can also view the number of endorsements that have been received for each topic that a member has been marked knowledgeable about. To add or remove endorsements, members can click the thumbs up button. Site members aren’t able to endorse themselves on any topic. 1. Do one of the following: - To display the Knows About list within the User Profile component, select that component. - To display the list elsewhere on the profile page, drag the User Profile Knows About component to the desired location. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | User ID | The user profile ID. Typically, this field is automatically populated with the record ID when the page loads. | | Title | Enter a title for the component. The default text is Knows About. | | Maximum Topics Displayed | Enter the maximum number of topics listed for each user, up to a limit of 10. | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Site members can’t opt out of being shown as knowledgeable about specific topics. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example ![Knows About component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/knowledgeable_about_communities.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # User Profile Menu The User Profile Menu component displays a user's name (or nickname) and profile picture. It also displays a dropdown from which users can navigate to their profile, open a case, access their locale and email notification settings, and log out. External users can also access and manage their account. If the user isn’t logged in, a Login button appears in the header. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The User Profile Menu component replaces the Profile Header component in sites based on Winter ’18 and later versions of Experience Builder templates. Each template comes with its own default user profile menu, which can be customized as needed. For example, for the B2B Store template, the link that buyers click to view their account record shows account information on the My Account page. All other templates display external user account information in the generic Record Detail page. Users can’t customize the profile photo functionality in the profile menu. Instead, they edit all profile information from the profile details page. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If displaying a nickname is enabled in the site, this component shows the nickname instead of the user’s name. The user’s reputation level displays only if reputation is enabled in the site. 1. In the page you’re configuring, select the **User Profile Menu** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component.
Property Details
Case Filter Name or IkD

The name or ID of the list view that displays the user's cases. This value is used throughout the site to display the user's list of cases.

By default, the template uses the AllOpenCases view, which lets users view any open cases that they have permission to see. Configure sharing to ensure that users see only cases that belong to them. Alternatively, you can use another pre-defined list view or create a custom list view.

Include Contact Support Select to include the option to contact an agent from the profile.
Home Label Enter the text shown for the link to the site home page from the user navigation menu. The default is Home.
Include My Messages Include a My Messages link in the profile menu, which shows the number of unread messages in the menu and opens the Messages page when clicked.
My Profile Label Enter the text shown to indicate a user’s profile. The default is My Profile.
Contact Support Label Enter the text for the link to the page where the user can open a case. The default is Contact Support.
Login Label Enter the text for the link to log in to the site. The default is Login.
Logout Label Enter the text for the link to log out from the site. The default is Log Out.
Experience Builder Label Enter the text for the link to the Experience Builder page. The default is Experience Builder. This link appears only for users with permissions to manage the site.
Site Setup Label Enter the text for the link to the setup page for sites. The default is Site Setup. This link is shown to users with permissions to create or modify the site’s administration settings.
User Settings Label Enter the text for the link to access an authenticated user’s personal settings for the site. The default is My Settings.
Show User Settings in Menu Select this option to show user settings in the profile dropdown list.
My Account Label

Enter the text for the link that external users click to view their account record. The default is My Account. This feature is available in the Spring ’16 version of the Customer Service template and later.

External site members who access the My Account link see their account details based on the configuration of the Record Detail page.

# User Profile Related List The User Profile Related List component shows lists of a user’s files, groups, followers, and who they’re following. Add the User Profile Related List component to the User Profile page to show a user’s related lists. Users can view full details for a related list by clicking **View All** at the bottom of the list. On the Files related list, users can click ![File upload icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/file_upload.png) to upload a file. You can customize which related lists are visible in your site by editing the User Profile page layout. 1. Select the **User Profile Related List** component. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | User ID | The system supplies this value. Don’t update this field. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample User Profile Related List component ![User Profile Related List component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/user_profile_related_list.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # User Profile Stats The User Profile Stats component displays many of the user’s Chatter statistics for the community. Stats include the number of posts and comments made, likes received, followers, and people they’re following. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). The user statistics that appear in the User Profile Stats component are visible to all members of the community. This visibility lets community members see how active other members are. 1. Select the **User Profile Stats** component on the page. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component. | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | User ID | Don’t update this field. The system supplies this value. | | User Stats Title | Title of the component. The default value is Influence. | | Display Reputation | To display the reputation level, check the box. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample User Profile Stats component: ![User Profile Stats menu on user profile](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/networks-user-profile-stats.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # User Profile Summary The User Profile Summary component displays the user's contact information, title, address, and manager’s name. If nickname display is enabled for the site, other users’ nicknames are shown in place of the full name. The full name is shown when users view their own profiles. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The User Profile Summary and the User Profile Image components replace the User Profile Summary & Image component, which was deprecated in Winter ’21. By default, all the information in a user’s profile is visible to all users in the site, including to unlicensed guest users accessing the site. To limit access to members’ information, use a custom user profile page layout. Hide fields that reveal sensitive information, such as phone, email, title, and manager. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Showing many user fields in a custom layout affects the performance of the profile view. We recommend showing no more than 8 fields. Similarly, consider modifying the fields for unlicensed guest user profiles to show only the necessary information. For example, you could hide the manager field. For detailed instructions on customizing page layouts, see Salesforce Help. You can add the User Profile Summary component to the Profile page. This component allows users to edit their profile information from the site. When viewing another user’s profile, you can click their address to see a Google map of their location. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note When viewing a site on a mobile device, the Google map appears below the address. 1. Select the **User Profile Summary** component in the page you're configuring. 2. To view properties for the component, select the Properties pane: | Property | Details | | --- | --- | | User ID | The system supplies this value so that authenticated users can view their own information. Don’t update this field. | ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample User Profile Summary component: ![User Profile Summary component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/napili_user_profile_detail.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # User Profile Tabs The User Profile Tabs component lets users see their feed and cases on their profile. They can also post to their feed directly from their profile. When viewing another user’s profile, they see the user’s activity but not their cases. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). On desktops and tablets, users see a list view of up to 25 of their most recent cases. They can sort columns in the list and click the case number to view the details of that case. Navigation arrows let them click through the list of cases when there are multiple pages. On mobile devices, the view is optimized and users scroll through a list of cases and select a case to see its details. 1. Select the **User Profile Tabs** component in the page you're configuring. 2. In the property editor, configure the properties for the component:
Property Details
User ID The system supplies this value. Don’t update this field.
Feed Tab Label Enter the text you want to display on the tab that users select to view a user’s Chatter feed. The default text is Feed.
Cases Tab Label Enter the text you want to display on the tab that users select to view their cases. This only displays for users on their own profile. The default text is Cases.
Case Filter Name or ID

Enter the name of the list view that displays cases.

By default, the template uses the AllOpenCases view, which lets users view any open cases that they have permission to see. Configure sharing to ensure that users see only cases that belong to them. Alternatively, you can use another pre-defined list view or create a custom list view.

Header Title Enter the text for the label that appears at the top of the list of cases. The default for this field is My Cases.
Create Case Label Enter the text you want to display on the button that users can click to create a case. The default text is Create Case.
Show All Updates as the Default Feeds Filter When this box is selected, the feed automatically defaults to the All Feeds filter. If it isn't selected, the feed defaults to the Posts Created by this User filter.
![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_example.png) Example Sample User Profile Tabs component: ![Cases in User Profile Tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/napili_user_profile_tabs.png) Case list viewed on a mobile device: ![Case list for mobile device](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/mobile_view_cases.png) #### See Also - [Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available.") # Using Chatter Desktop Chatter Desktop was retired in June 2018.
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions.
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_important.png) Important For more information, see [Chatter Desktop Retirement](https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=000267581&type=1&language=en_US). In the Chatter Desktop window:
Click: To:
Your profile photo Change your chat status. Select Available indicator Available, Away indicator Away, or Offline indicator Offline. People can’t chat with you when you’re Offline indicator Offline.
All Chatter icon

See feed updates from everyone and everything you follow, and post an update.

  • For any feed post, click Comment to add a comment. Click Like to receive email notifications if others comment on that post.Click Delete to delete the post if you have access.
  • To post a file from your computer, drag the file to Chatter file upload icon, or click Attach a file icon, which appears when you enter a post.
  • To post a link, enter the link in the text box at the top of your feed, or click Attach a link icon, which appears when you enter a post.
  • Use the Sort By filter at the top of a feed to sort updates by:
    • Post Date—Sorts feeds by post date. To see comments, you must click Show All Comments below a post.
    • Post and Comment Date—Sorts feeds by post and comment date. Each comment appears again when you click Show All Comments under its associated post.
At mention icon See and comment on updates directed to you.
Chatter people icon

Chat with people and see their updates. Chat messages appear in a separate window.

  • Click Chat Favorites to see people or chats you’ve added as favorites. To add a favorite, click Chat favorite next to someone’s name or in any active chat with one or more people.
  • Click Following or Followers then click a person’s name to see their updates or post to their feed.
  • Hover over someone’s name:
    • Click send message to send them a private message.
    • Click Chat favorite to add them as a favorite chat. Their name appears on your Chat Favorites list.
    • Click follow to follow someone or stop following to stop following them.
    • Click start Chat to start a chat. You can add up to 10 people to the same chat by clicking add participants in the chat window and searching for people to add. You can’t chat with people who are Offline indicator Offline.

Chat is available only if it’s enabled in your organization.

Private Chatter message icon Read and reply to private Chatter messages. Click a message to view it, or click New Message to send a new message. Messages are available only if they are enabled in your organization.
Chatter groups icon

See feed updates from groups:

  • Click a group name or search for a group to view its feed or to post updates. You can post in all public groups and any private groups that you belong to.
  • Click Join to join a group, or Member to leave the group.
  • Click View group description to view the group description.
Chatter records icon See and comment on records that you follow. From the dropdown menu at the top, select the type of record you want to view, for example, Account. If you’re not following records, there aren’t any records in the list. Click a record’s name to view its details. Chatter Desktop shows the first eight fields on a record.
Chatter Desktop settings icon Edit your Chatter Desktop settings or switch your connection.
Refresh icon Instantly synchronize your data. While Chatter Desktop synchronizes your data automatically, it doesn’t always happen instantly. Instant synchronization gives you control over when synchronization occurs.
#### See Also - [Chatter Desktop Troubleshooting Tips](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_desktop_troubleshooting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find solutions for troubleshooting Chatter Desktop.") # Verify Answers for Your Company Sometimes there’s more than one correct answer to a question. Among the correct answers, your company can prefer one course for people to follow. You can highlight an answer that your company endorses by marking it as Company Verified. Questions marked as Company Verified or as Best Answer are copied to the top of the thread under a Top Rated Answers section. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: Aura sites
User Permissions Needed
To assign permission to verify answers in a site:

Enable Chatter

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

To verify answers in a site:

Create and Set Up Experiences

OR

Verify Answers to Chatter Questions

To ensure that the best qualified site members speak for the company, community managers can give these users the Verify Answers to Chatter Questions permission through user profiles or permission sets. Users with this permission see the **Company Verify** option on the answer dropdown menu in feeds that they have access to. # View a Particular Feed Change your Chatter feed to show a subset of posts. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
The landing feed on the Chatter home page is shown when a user navigates to the page, returns to it, or refreshes it. For most people, the landing feed is a form of the What I Follow. However, in Lightning Experience, if a user is following fewer than 10 things, their default feed is a form of Company Highlights. With Company Highlights as their landing feed, new users have a chance to see the most active conversations in their company. Seeing what’s most active can inspire ideas about more things to follow. When a user follows more than 10 things, the default feed changes to What I Follow. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note On most feeds, filters are sticky. That is, they persist until you change them. The landing feed is the exception. For the landing feed, your filter selection doesn’t persist when you leave the Chatter tab and then return to it. But the landing feed differs from the feed that you see when you specifically choose What I Follow or Company Highlights. The actual What I Follow and Company Highlights feeds have sticky filters: For example, apply a filter like All Updates on What I Follow, then navigate away. When you return to What I Follow, the All Updates filter still applies. Use the feed selections on the left sidebar of the Chatter home page to view a subset of posts in your feed. For example, view only posts that mention you, or posts that you bookmarked, or the top posts in your company. - To see available feeds in the left column of the page, click the Chatter tab. - To limit what’s shown in the feed to a subset of posts, click a feed that’s listed in the left column. - **What I Follow** Shows updates for everything you follow, including posts from people you follow, groups you are a member of, and files and records you're following. Users who follow a record, see those updates in their view of What I Follow, with one exception. Feed-tracked changes that users make themselves aren’t posted to What I Follow. Use the sorting and filtering options at the top of your feed to further narrow the subset of posts. - **To Me** Shows the posts on your profile page, including: - Posts others make on your profile page - Posts and comments where you have been mentioned - Any of your posts that have comments - **Bookmarked** Shows the posts that you’ve bookmarked. - **Muted** (Salesforce Classic) Shows all the posts that you’ve muted. You can unmute a post here. - **All Company** (Salesforce Classic) Shows posts and comments from your entire company, including posts and comments from: - People in your company - Public groups - Private groups you’re a member of - Feed tracked changes for records and fields and system-generated posts, provided someone has liked or commented on the post. You must have access to the record to see the post. - Company Highlights (Lightning Experience) Shows the most popular and actively discussed posts across the company, based on engagement metrics like views, likes, and comments. Determine whether posts appear on the Company Highlights Panel by updating the feed tracking settings in your salesforce org and user access permissions on the record level. - My Drafts (Lightning Experience) Shows posts that you’re in the process of writing but haven’t posted yet. Draft posts are saved automatically to My Drafts after seven seconds. They are removed from My Drafts when you post them. #### See Also - [Filter Your Files List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_list_filter.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the filters on the Files page to quickly access to your files in Salesforce.") - [Feed Sort and Filter Options for Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_filters_available.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "On any Chatter feed, the sort and filter options vary, depending on how your admin sets up Salesforce and which feed you’re viewing. Not all sort and filter options are available on all feeds.") # View a Single Chatter Post You can navigate to a detailed view of a Chatter post in a feed for a user, record, or group. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
- In a feed, click the date and time stamp below the post, for example, **July 23, 2019 at 2:40 PM**. ![Date and time stamp on a Chatter post](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/datetime_stamp.png) - In a Chatter email notification, click the link in the body of the email. - To return to a view of the full feed, select the **All Updates** filter. #### See Also - [Share a Link to a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_sharing_post_link.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Salesforce Classic, share a post with other Chatter users via email or instant message.") # View and Edit Asset Files You can view asset files in the Asset Files library in Files home, and view and edit asset files in Setup. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Essentials, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To edit or delete asset files or to add asset files to the Asset Library by default in Experience Builder or Salesforce CMS: Customize Application
Salesforce admins and community managers have access to the Asset Library by default. Admins can edit and delete asset files they don’t own. Standard users who are members of the Asset Library can edit and delete only the asset files they own. - To view asset files in Files home, select Libraries and then select Asset Library. - To view and edit asset files in Setup, enter Asset Files in the Quick Find box, then select **Asset Files**. Click the name of a resource to view its details. Details include who last modified the file, visibility to unauthenticated users, and a link to the file detail page. From the asset file detail page, you can: - Edit the asset file. - Delete the asset file. - Click **Clone** to create a copy of the asset file, and give it a new name. - Click **Where is this used?** to view a list of all references to the asset file in your organization. From the Asset File Edit page, you can: - Edit the file name. - Edit the unique API name, also known as the developer name. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If you edit the API name, be sure to follow the DeveloperName requirements described in the [ContentAsset](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_contentasset.htm) object reference. - Update the checkbox that allows unauthenticated guest users to see the asset file. - Update the Master Language associated with the file. #### See Also - [Create a New Asset File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.admin_files_asset_files_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create an asset file from the Asset Library in Files home.") # View and Edit Content Deliveries On the Content Deliveries related list or the Content Deliveries list page, click the name of a content delivery to open the detail page. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic

Available in: All Editions except Database.com

Salesforce CRM Content available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions

User Permissions Needed
To view the delivery detail page:

Access to the associated content details page in Salesforce CRM Content

OR

Access to the record associated with the content delivery

To edit, expire, or delete a content delivery:

Owner of the record

OR

Modify all Data

- View Content Delivery Details The delivery detail page provides all the information associated with a content delivery, including the number of times the delivery has been viewed, and the delivery settings. The URL providing access to the content delivery is visible only if you have access to the content or to a record associated with the content, or are the content delivery owner. For a description of each field, see [Content Delivery Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_fields.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - Edit Content Delivery Details Click **Expire Now** to immediately remove access to the content delivery. Click **Edit** to modify details such as the delivery methods, expiration date, or the record the delivery is associated with. For a description of each field, see [Content Delivery Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_fields.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - Delete Content Deliveries - Click **Delete** to remove access to the content delivery and delete the delivery record from Salesforce. Salesforce CRM Content users cannot delete files that are associated with a content delivery until the content delivery is deleted. - Track Content Deliveries Each time a content delivery's URL is opened, Salesforce records the event as a view. The Views related list on the content delivery detail page lists every view associated with the delivery. Information about the view includes the date and time, whether the view was by an internal (Salesforce) user, and whether the view included a download. If the content delivery provided the ability to download the file in its original file format or as a PDF file, the File Downloaded flag indicates that a download occurred, but you cannot distinguish between file types. # View and Edit Content Details Clicking a file name on the Libraries, Content, or Subscriptions tabs opens the content details page, which is a central access point to preview content and gather information about a particular file, Web link, content pack, or Google doc in Salesforce CRM Content. Starting with the Summer '10 release, if Chatter is enabled for your organization, files posted to Chatter are also listed. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To preview and download shared content: Member of the library
To preview and download private content: None
To upload a new version: Add Content checked in your library permission definition
To archive and restore content:

Archive Content checked in your library permission definition

OR

Author of the content

To permanently delete content: Delete Content checked in your library permission definition
To view and edit comments: Modify Comments checked in your library permission definition
To delete comments: Delete Comments checked in your library permission definition
To tag content: Tag Content checked in your library permission definition
To mark content as featured: Feature Content checked in your library permission definition
To deliver content from a shared library: Deliver Content checked in your library permission definition
To deliver content from a personal library: Deliver Uploaded Files and Personal Content checked in your library permission definition
To post content from a library to a Chatter feed: Post Content to Chatter Feeds checked in your library permission definition
The Preview tab displays if your file is one of the following types: - Microsoft® Office 97 through Microsoft Office 2007 Word, Excel, and PowerPoint. Some Microsoft Office 2007 features don’t display correctly in previews. - Adobe® PDF. Copy-protected PDFs can't be previewed. - JPG, BMP, GIF, and PNG. These options are available on the Content Details page, depending on: the type of content you are viewing; your library permissions; and whether the content is in a public or private library, or from Chatter: - Click the thumbs up or thumbs down icon to vote for the file, Web link, content pack, or Google doc. To change your vote, click the opposite icon. After you cast a vote, the Recent Activity list on the Libraries tab indicates whether you like or dislike the content. - Click **Deliver Content** to [create a content delivery](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A content delivery lets you convert documents such as Microsoft® PowerPoint and Word files into an optimized web-based version for easy online viewing. After you create your delivery, you can send its encrypted URL to any recipient, such as leads, customers, partners, and colleagues, and then track how often people view or download the content. Content deliveries are available in Salesforce Classic only. However, Lightning Email generates delivery-based links as email attachments for Lightning Experience users who have access to the Content Deliveries feature."). Click **Deliver Content** | **Show Content Deliveries** to [view a list of deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delivery_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "On the Content Deliveries related list or the Content Deliveries list page, click the name of a content delivery to open the detail page.") associated with the content. - For Web links or Google docs, click the **Open** button to open the Web page in a separate window. For files, click the **Download** button to open or save the file. - Click **Subscribe** or **Subscribed** to toggle your subscription on or off. - For files, click the Content Packs subtab to see which content packs include this file. - Library administrators can click **Remove from all** to remove the file from all content packs that include the file. - Click the name of the content pack that includes the file to view the details of that content pack. - Click **Edit** | **Edit Content Details** to modify standard and custom fields. - For files, click **Edit** | **Upload New Version** to [replace the file](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_revise.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Clicking a file name on any Salesforce CRM Content tab opens the content details page.") with a new version. The version option is not available for Web links, or Google docs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If the **Add New Version** button is unavailable, your organization has exceeded its file storage allowance and new content cannot be uploaded. - Click **Edit** | **Archive Content** to [remove the file, Web link, content pack, or Google doc from the library](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delete.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "There are two methods for removing content from libraries: archiving and deleting."). Authors can archive and restore their own content regardless of library permissions. If a file is in Salesforce CRM Content and also posted in Chatter, archiving it doesn't remove the Chatter post. - Click **Edit** | **Delete Content** to [delete the file, Web link, content pack, or Google doc from Salesforce CRM Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_delete.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "There are two methods for removing content from libraries: archiving and deleting.") by moving it to the Recycle Bin. Authors can delete and undelete their own content regardless of library permissions. Deleting a Google doc removes the doc's association with Salesforce CRM Content but does not delete the doc in Google Apps. You cannot delete a file that is included in a content pack or content delivery. Deleting a Chatter file from the content details page deletes the file from Salesforce CRM Content and from Chatter. - Click **Edit** | **Library Actions** and choose **Move to Another Library** to move the content to a different managing (or “home”) library. Choose **Share to Another Library** to share content into additional libraries without changing the managing library. Sharing or linking content to other libraries enables members of those libraries to find your content. If the managing library and shared library have different tagging rules, the most restrictive tagging rule applies. If you want to remove content from a library where the content is shared, click **Remove from Libraries**. This option does not remove content from its managing library. - Click the Comments subtab to view, add, edit, or delete comments. - Click the Versions subtab to view a list of all file versions and the reason-for-change statements provided by the authors. - Click the Downloads subtab to view a list of all Salesforce CRM Content users who have downloaded the file. Download data is not available for Web links or Google docs. - Click the Subscribers subtab to [view a list](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_subscribe.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Clicking the Subscriptions tab displays the Subscriptions home page, where you can view your Salesforce CRM Content subscriptions and toggle them off or on.") of all Salesforce CRM Content users subscribed to the file, Web link, or Google doc. To subscribe to an author, click the dropdown button next to the author's name. To subscribe to a library, click the dropdown button next to the library name. - Enter a web address for the content in the **URL** field. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note The **URL** field is visible in the content details page when the contentURL parameter of contentVersion has a value. - Click a tag name to view all the content associated with that tag. Click the arrow next to the tag to remove the tag or to subscribe to all content with that tag. - To add a tag, enter a tag name in the Add Tags field and click **Save**. As you type a tag, Salesforce CRM Content autosuggests tags based on the tags in your My Recent Tags list in the Save or Publish window and the Popular Tags section on the Libraries tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If your administrator applied a library tagging rule, you aren’t able to enter new tags. If the guided tagging rule is applied, you can click **Add Tags** and choose from the list of suggested tags or enter new tags. If the restricted library tagging rule is applied, you can click **Add Tags** and choose from the list of suggested tags, but you cannot enter your own tags. - Click the author's name to see a list of the author's published content. Click the arrow next to the author's name and choose **Subscribe to Author** to subscribe to all content published by that author. - Click **Feature** or **Don't Feature** to toggle the “feature” designation on or off. Featured content receives a higher priority than similar content in search results; for example, if 100 files contain the search criteria term sales asset, any featured files with that term appear at the top of the search results list. Featured content is also listed on the library overview and library detail pages for quick access. - Click a library name to view details about the library. Click the arrow next to the library name and choose **Subscribe to Library** to subscribe to all content in the library or **Show Library Content** to view a list of all files, content packs, Web links, and Google docs published to the library. # View and Edit Content Subscriptions Clicking the Subscriptions tab displays the Subscriptions home page, where you can view your Salesforce CRM Content subscriptions and toggle them off or on. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To subscribe to content:

Salesforce CRM Content User feature license enabled on the user detail page

OR

Portal user with View Content in Portals profile permission

![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note To subscribe to a file, content pack, Web link, or Google doc, [view its content details page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_preview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Clicking a file name on the Libraries, Content, or Subscriptions tabs opens the content details page, which is a central access point to preview content and gather information about a particular file, Web link, content pack, or Google doc in Salesforce CRM Content. Starting with the Summer '10 release, if Chatter is enabled for your organization, files posted to Chatter are also listed.") and click **Subscribe**. From the content details page you can also subscribe to a tag, author, or library by using the dropdown menus next to the tag, author, or library name. On the Subscriptions tab, click the Content, Tags, Authors, or Libraries subtabs to view your subscriptions. Depending on your notification settings, you are notified of changes to your subscribed content via real-time emails or a once-daily email. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To configure your notification settings, go to your personal information page, click **Edit**, and select Receive Salesforce CRM Content email alerts. If you want to receive a once-daily summary rather than real-time email alerts, also select Receive Salesforce CRM Content emails as daily digest. Subscriptions generate these notifications. - If you subscribe to a file, you are notified when a viewer adds comments to the file or when a new version of the file is published. If you subscribe to a Web link or Google doc, you are notified when comments are added but not when the link is changed or the doc is edited. - If you subscribe to a content pack you are notified when a new version of the pack is published. Unless you are subscribed to the individual files within a content pack, you are not notified when new versions of the files are published. - If you subscribe to a tag, you are notified of any newly published content that is related to the subscribed tag. To be notified that new versions of the tagged content are available, subscribe to the content. - If you subscribe to an author, you are notified when the author publishes new content. To be notified that new versions of an author's content are available, subscribe to the content. - If you subscribe to a library, you are notified when new content is added to the library, including existing content that has been newly linked to your subscribed library. To be notified that new versions of the library content are available, subscribe to the content. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note External community or portal users who subscribe to content don’t see the **Download** and **View Details** links in email notifications. #### See Also - [Update Content Versions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_revise.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Clicking a file name on any Salesforce CRM Content tab opens the content details page.") - [Follow a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_following.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Follow a file to see updates in your Chatter feed, including when a new version of the file is uploaded. If you stop following a file, the file remains in your Files list, but you don't see updates about it in your feed anymore.") - [Upload a New Version of a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_versioning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Replace an old version of a file by uploading a new version.") # View and Edit Libraries When you have located a Salesforce CRM Content library in the My Libraries area of the Libraries tab home page or on a content details page, click the library name to display detailed information. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To edit a library:

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

OR

Manage Libraries checked in your library permission definition

To add or remove library members:

Manage Salesforce CRM Content

OR

Manage Libraries checked in your library permission definition

For details about the publishing options at the top of the page, see [Upload and Publish Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_upload.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add files to libraries to take advantage of the permission setting and content delivery capabilities of Salesforce CRM Content."). From the library title area, you can click the following quick links: - **Browse** to [view search results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Content tab displays files, content packs, web links, and Google docs that are published in your Salesforce CRM Content libraries.") showing all the content in the library. - **Edit** to change the library name or description. - **Delete** to delete an empty library. To delete a library that contains content, move the content to another library or delete it and then permanently delete it from your Recycle Bin. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If your Recycle Bin is empty and you are unable to delete the library, another user's Recycle Bin can contain deleted content from the same library. A library cannot be deleted until all its content is permanently deleted or moved to another library. - **Edit Members** to add or remove library members or change their library permission. - **Tagging Rules** to change the tagging method permitted in the library. - **Record Types** to restrict the record types available to library contributors. - **View Archived Content** to view a list of archived content in the library. If you don’t have the Archive Content or Manage Libraries privilege in your library permission, the archived content list only contains content that you authored and archived, not content that other authors archived. The library detail page contains these sections. - Members This section lists all the Salesforce CRM Content users who are members of the library. To limit the member list, enter a username and click **Filter**. You can filter by the beginning of a username but not the last name. To add new members to the library: 1. Click **Add Members**. 2. If the member you want to add isn’t listed, type their first name in the search box and click **Find**. 3. Select members from the Available Members box. Members can include individual Salesforce CRM Content users or public groups containing Salesforce CRM Content users. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you have many Salesforce CRM Content users, create a public group and add it to a library rather than adding users to the library individually. 4. To add the members to the library, click **Add**. 5. Click **Next**. ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_warning.png) Warning When you add a guest user as a member of the library, the library and files become publicly accessible. 6. Select a library permission for each user or public group and click **Save**. To remove a member from the library, click **Remove**. To change a member's library permission, click **Edit** and choose a new library permission from the dropdown list. - Featured Content This section lists the five pieces of content in the library most recently designated as “featured.” If no content has been featured, this section does not display. Featured content receives a higher priority than similar content in search results; for example, if 100 files contain the search criteria term sales asset, any featured files with that term appear at the top of the search results list. To see all featured content, click **Show All**. To toggle the feature status on or off, go to its [content details page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.content_workspace_detail.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you have located a Salesforce CRM Content library in the My Libraries area of the Libraries tab home page or on a content details page, click the library name to display detailed information."). - Top Content This section includes lists that summarize content activity in your library. Within a list, click a file icon to download the content or click the title to open the associated content details page. In the Top Content section you can choose from the following categories: - **Publication Date**—This content is sorted in descending order according to the most recent publication date. Choose the number of records you want to view from the accompanying dropdown list, or click the **Show All** button to list all the published files, Web links, and Google docs. - **Num Downloads**—This content is sorted in descending order according to the highest number of downloads. The bar graphic indicates how one record compares to another. Choose the number of records you want to view from the accompanying dropdown list, or click the **Show All** button to list all the downloaded content. - **Rating**—This content is sorted in descending order according to the highest number of thumbs-up votes. Green and red in the bar graphic represent positive and negative votes, respectively. Choose the number of records you want to view from the accompanying dropdown list, or click the **Show All** button to list all the content with votes. - **Num Comments**—This content is sorted in descending order according to the highest number of viewer comments. The bar graphic indicates how one record compares to another. Choose the number of records you want to view from the accompanying dropdown list, or click the **Show All** button to list all the content with associated comments. - Popular Tags This “tag cloud” shows you how the content in your library has been labeled. Tags are descriptive terms assigned during upload or revision that help classify and organize content. Click a tag name to view search results containing all the files, Web links, and Google docs with that tag. The tag names increase in size within the tag cloud according to popularity, meaning that the largest tags have been assigned to the most content. You can choose to sort the tags alphabetically or by popularity. The tag cloud contains the 30 most popular tags. - Recent Activity This section is a snapshot of activity within your library. It shows the most recent files, Web links, and Google docs to receive comments, votes, or subscriptions. Featured content and newly published content are also included, but new versions of existing content, archived content, and deleted content do not appear in the Recent Activity section. Use the **Older** and **Newer** buttons to scroll through records. The Recent Activity section contains a maximum of 100 records. - Most Active Contributors This section shows the authors who have uploaded content into your library most frequently. The names increase in size according to activity, so the largest names are the authors who have contributed the most content. # View Chatter Feeds on List Views Switch to an object’s Chatter feed directly from a list view to see updates for the records included in the list view. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
If Chatter is enabled for your organization, Chatter feeds on list views are available for most feed-tracked objects in Salesforce Classic. Some feed-tracked objects don’t have a Chatter feed associated with their list view. You can view Chatter feeds on list views for opportunities, accounts, cases, leads, campaigns, contacts, and custom objects. - To see the feed on a standard or custom object list view, go to the view and click **Feed**. For the records in this list view, the feed contains updates from the last 30 days. If drag-and-drop scheduling on list views is enabled, you don't see Chatter feeds on the list views for accounts, contacts, or leads. - Click **List** to display the list view again. #### See Also - [View Record Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_viewing_record_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "View the Chatter feed associated with a record you follow to see updates about the record.") # View Chatter Group Members The Members section on a Chatter group page shows all members of a group, including any customer members. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
1. To view the full group member list in alphabetical order, click **Show All** in the Members section. In the Members window, you can: - Filter the list to see all members, managers, or the owner - Use the **Next** and **Previous** links to see more of the list - Search using the Find Members search box - To start or stop following someone, click **Follow** or ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png) next to their name. You can’t follow customers. 2. To close the window, click **Done**. # View Chatter Group Memberships In Salesforce Classic, the Groups list on your profile shows you the Chatter groups that you belong to. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
By default, the list is sorted by the most recent activity date. On the Groups tab, you can join or create groups. You can also view the Groups list on other people's profiles to see their group memberships. On other people’s profiles, you can see unlisted group memberships only if you’re also a member of the unlisted group. - To view the full list in alphabetical order, click **Show All**. - To see more of the list, use the **Next** and **Previous** links. - To leave a group or withdraw a request to join, click ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png). - To join a public group on another person's groups list, click **Join**. - To send a request to join a private group on another person's groups list, click **Ask to Join**. #### See Also - [What Your Chatter Group Role Lets You Do](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_roles_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The actions that you can perform in a Chatter group depend on whether you’re a member, owner, or manager of the group.") # View Document Lists The documents list page displays a list of documents in a selected folder. From this page, you can view detailed document information or manipulate the document. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: All Editions except Database.com
User Permissions Needed
To view documents: Read on documents
To change document properties: Edit on documents
To replace documents: Edit on documents
To delete documents: Delete on documents
- Click the document name to view the document properties. - Click **Edit** next to a document to edit the document properties. - Click **Del** to move the document to the Recycle Bin. - Click **View** to open the file in its associated application. If a file type is not recognized or the application is not loaded on your machine, Salesforce displays a standard download dialog prompting you to choose a save option. - Choose a folder to view a list of documents stored in that folder. - Click any column heading to sort the documents in ascending or descending order by the information in that column. - At the top of the list, click a letter to display the contents of the sorted column that begin with that character. - Click **Next Page** or **Previous Page** to go to the next or previous set of documents. - At the bottom of the document list, select **fewer** or **more** to view a shorter or longer display list. - Click **Printable View** to display the current list view in a format that is ready for printing. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note If you can't find a document, you may not have access to the folder that contains it. # View File Version History The file detail page and the Version History list give you access to lots of useful file actions and information. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
The file detail page shows the current version number of the file. View the Version History list to see all versions of the file that have been uploaded, including the current version. From the list you can download the file, see who updated it and when, and see the description if provided. The file detail page always shows the most current version of a file. #### See Also - [Upload a New Version of a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_versioning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Replace an old version of a file by uploading a new version.") - [Follow a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_following.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Follow a file to see updates in your Chatter feed, including when a new version of the file is uploaded. If you stop following a file, the file remains in your Files list, but you don't see updates about it in your feed anymore.") # View Recommendations That Are Tailored to You Chatter provides recommendations to help you identify the people, groups, files, and records that closely relate to your job and interests. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
The more recommendations you accept, the more updates you see in your feed. On the list of recommendations: - Click **Follow** next to the person, record, or file you want to follow. - To become a group member, click **Join** . - To dismiss a recommendation, click ![Dismiss recommendation](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_recs_dismiss.png). - To go to the Recommendations page, click **More**. On the Recommendations page, you can use filters to narrow your recommendations to people, files, records, or groups. #### See Also - [People Recommendations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_people_recommendations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter recommends people for you to follow based on similar interests.") - [Chatter Group Recommendations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_recommendations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter recommends groups for you to consider joining.") - [Record Recommendations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_record_recommendations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Following records helps keep you up-to-date on important changes to accounts, contacts, opportunities, and more.") - [File Recommendations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_recommendations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter recommends popular files for you to follow. The number of people who have viewed or downloaded a file determines the file’s popularity.") # View Record Feeds View the Chatter feed associated with a record you follow to see updates about the record.
Available in both: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Record feeds allow you to track information for records you have access to. On the record detail page, click **Show Feed** to display the record feed above the account details. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Access is all-important. For example, let’s say you reassign a record and then realize it needs an update. Often, you can open and update the record. But if, after the reassignment, you no longer have access, then you won’t be able to see or update the record. In the record feed, you can - View posts, comments, and tracked field changes. - Write an update about the record and share it with other people who follow the record. Updates on the record detail page also appear on the Chatter page of people who follow the record. Anyone who has access to the records can see the update in the All Company (Salesforce Classic) feed. They may see the update in the Company Highlights (Lightning Experience) feed, depending on the update’s popularity ranking and engagement (such as comments, likes, and views). - See who is following the record. - Search the record feed (![feed search icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/find_in_feed_icon.png)). Record field changes in the feed aren’t included in search results. # View the Topics That Groups Are Talking About The topics that a Chatter group is talking about appear on the group detail page in the Recently Talked About section. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
This section helps people understand which topics a Chatter group is knowledgeable about or interested in. These topics are the ones most frequently and most recently added to group posts over the last two months. You can see up to five topics, with the most frequently and recently added topic appearing first. If a group isn’t using topics, the Recently Talked About section doesn’t appear. Click a topic in the Recently Talked About section to see the topic detail page. # View the Topics That People Are Talking About The topics you’re talking about appear in your Chatter profile in the Recently Talked About section. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
This section helps people learn which topics you're knowledgeable about or interested in. These topics are the ones that you and others have frequently and recently (within the last two months) added to your posts and comments. For privacy reasons, Recently Talked About topics don’t include topics used solely in private groups or record feeds. You can see up to five topics, with the most frequently and recently added topic appearing first. If you’re new to topics or you haven’t used topics in the last two months, the Recently Talked About section doesn’t appear. Click a topic in the Recently Talked About section to see the topic detail page. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note On profile pages, if the Knowledgeable About list or WDC Skills is enabled, it replaces the Recently Talked About section. # View Where a File Is Shared Find out who can see a file and their level of access. From the File Detail page, you can access a full list of every person or object the file is shared with. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
The **Shared With** list on a file detail page shows you who the file is shared with and their level of access. In Salesforce Classic, click **Show All** to open Sharing Settings, where you can: - See who the file is shared with and their permission: owner, collaborator, viewer, or no access. - To share the file with specific people, click **People** on the Sharing Settings dialog box. - To share the file with specific groups, click **Groups** on the Sharing Settings dialog box. - To share the file with a library, click **Library**. - To create and share a link to the file, click **Anyone with link** on the Sharing Settings dialog box - To remove the file and file link, if applicable, from everywhere that it’s been shared, click **Make private**. - If the file originated in a Salesforce CRM Content library, to remove the file from everywhere that it’s been shared except the library, click **Restrict access**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Only owners and users with the “Modify all Data” permission can make a file private (![file lock](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/file_lock.png)) or restrict access. - To stop sharing the file with a person or a group, in the Sharing Settings dialog box, click ![blue X button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/eop_following_on.png) next to the person or group's name. #### See Also - [Make a File Private](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_make_private.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can restrict access to shared files that you own by making them private.") - [Who Can See My File?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_settings_perms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your files in Salesforce can be private to you, privately shared, or visible to your entire company. Learn how to identify a file’s sharing settings and how to change them.") # Visibility of User and Group @Mentions in Chatter When you @mention people or groups in a Chatter update, anyone who has access to the update can see the post and all comments.
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
This table describes where you can find posts and comments that mention people, public groups, and private groups. You can’t mention unlisted groups nor private groups with customers.
If the post was made on And mentions Then these people can see the post and comments
A person’s profile Other people Anyone with access to the person’s profile.
Public group Anyone with access to the person’s profile.
Private group Anyone with access to the person’s profile, even if they’re not a member of the private group.
Public group A Other people Anyone with access to public group A.
Public group B Anyone with access to public group A.
Private group Anyone with access to public group A, even if they’re not a member of the private group.
Private group A Other people Members of private group A.
Public group Members of private group A.
Private group B People who are members of both private group A and private group B see this mention in both group feeds. People who are members of private group B but not members of A don’t see the mention or receive any notification for it.
Unlisted group A Other people Members of unlisted group A and users with the “Manage Unlisted Groups” permission.
Public group Members of unlisted group A and users with the “Manage Unlisted Groups” permission.
Private group B People who are members of both private group B and unlisted group A, or people who have the “Modify Unlisted Groups” permission.
Record detail page Other people Everyone who is following you or this record and has access to the record sees your post in their What I Follow feed.
Public group People with sharing access to the record.
Private group People with sharing access to the record, even if they’re not a member of the private group.
The visibility of posts and comments depends on sharing access to the post. Anyone with access to the original post also has access to all subsequent comments on the post. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note To get the best performance, access checks for mentions occur after you select a name. If the check fails, a message tells you that the mentioned user can't see the update: \[_Name_\] doesn't have access and won't see this update. The mention becomes a link. When you have access to the mentioned person, the link is to that person's profile. When you don't have access—for example, when the user is an external user—the link is to the person's user record detail page. In either case, the mention doesn't trigger a notification for the mentioned person. # Visualforce Page Component Use the Visualforce Page component to add existing Visualforce pages to the pages of your Experience Builder site. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To customize or publish an Experience Cloud site:
  • Create and Set Up Experiences AND View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site

    OR

  • View Setup and Configuration AND be a member of the site AND have appropriate role-based site access
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The Visualforce Page component only supports the `navigateToURL` function. Relative and absolute URLs are supported. Relative URLs are relative to the site domain, and retain navigation history. External URLs—that is, URLs that are outside the site domain—open in a separate browser window. 1. In Experience Builder, drag the Visualforce Page component from the Components panel onto the page. ![Visualforce page component in Components panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_visualforce_page_component.png) 2. Edit the component to select the Visualforce page to use. If you installed the Salesforce CPQ (Steelbrick) app, those pages are also available for selection here. ![Visualforce Page properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/community_builder_visualforce_page_properties.png) 3. Adjust the height as you like. 4. Optionally, specify a Record ID if the Visualforce page. Typically, the system populates this value depending on context. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If the Visualforce page requires the Record ID from an object such as Account, create object pages for Account. Then drag the Visualforce Page component onto the object’s detail page. The Record ID field adjusts to the object’s ID. # Vote on a Poll Cast your vote on a poll. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
1. In the poll, select your choice. You can only select one choice. 2. Click **Vote**. The post shows the current result of the poll. To change your vote, click **Change vote** and select your new choice. When you run a global or feed search, you don't see results for poll questions or options. Polls are not indexed for searches. The poll result doesn’t always add up to 100 percent due to rounding. For example, if a poll has three choices and each gets one vote, the result adds up to 99 percent. #### See Also - [Create a Poll](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_polls_creating.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create polls to gather people’s opinions.") # Web Analytics and Reporting in Experience Cloud Sites When you invest in creating a site, community, or portal, you want to measure your investment’s performance and gain insights on how you can improve your site’s engagement. Having site web analytics and data with reports and dashboards at your fingertips can help you iterate your site’s direction. Use Salesforce and third-party analytics tools to stay up to date on your site’s engagement numbers. Some reporting capabilities require add-on licenses. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites
- **[Track Site Activity with Custom Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create custom reports to track usage, moderation, and other activity in your Experience Cloud site. - **[Enable and Map Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_dashboards_for_cm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use dashboards in Experience Cloud sites to measure their success. You can even map a dashboard to the Experience Workspaces Home page. Map custom dashboards or use the ones provided in our AppExchange package. - **[Insights for Engagement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_insights_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Insights are reports that help community managers monitor activity and take action on that activity. Insights make it easier to manage day-to-day moderation tasks, encourage engagement, and drive member adoption. You can set up Insights to monitor new members, unanswered questions, newly created groups, trending topics, and even recent Chatter contributions. The main difference between Engagement Insights and dashboards are that Insights let you take immediate action on recent activity in your Experience Cloud site, and the reports in dashboards let you see trends. # Welcome to Chatter in Lightning Experience Whether you’re new to Chatter or switching from Salesforce Classic, Chatter in Lightning Experience offers tons of useful features. Use Chatter to communicate with colleagues, gain insight into your company, and preserve your tribal knowledge. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). For information on using Slack, rather than Chatter, to collaborate in Salesforce, see [Salesforce Channels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.slack_salesforce_channels.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Depending on how your org is configured, when Chatter is turned on, it can be on records of all types. You can access Chatter on your mobile devices. But let’s start with the Chatter tab, which is its home. ![The Chatter tab in Lightning Experience](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/chatter_tab_lex.png) The Chatter tab gives you quick access to some useful feeds, such as What I Follow, To Me, Bookmarked, Company Highlights, and My Drafts. Select a feed to place it front and center on the Chatter tab. - The What I Follow feed shows post activity on all the people, groups, and objects that you follow. For example, if you follow John Smith, you see the things John Smith posts to all the feeds that you have access to. Typically, the What I Follow feed is the default feed. If you’re following fewer than 10 things, the Company Highlights feed becomes your default. - The To Me feed shows the posts where you’re @mentioned and the posts to your user profile page. - The Bookmarked feed shows the posts that you have bookmarked. The Bookmarked feed gives you easy access to the posts you want to revisit. - The Company Highlights feed shows you the most active posts across your organization. You can use it to find more things to follow. After you follow more than 10, your default feed changes to What I Follow. - The My Drafts feed shows posts that you’re working on, but haven’t saved. You can use the My Drafts feed to perfect a message and then post it or reconsider a message and toss it out. The Chatter tab in Lightning Experience shows the five Chatter streams that you visited most recently. Click the Streams heading to open a list page that shows all your streams. Streams offer a way to combine different but related feeds into one super feed. Let’s say you want to read everything that’s posted about a project you’re working on. With streams, you can combine feeds from the groups working on the project, the topics discussing it, the people assigned to it. You can add any feed type that’s related to the project. Suddenly, instead of visiting many different feeds to get the whole story, you have this one stream you can go to for everything. Create up to 100 streams that each combines posts from up to 25 different feeds. Create streams that combine feeds from people, groups, and records. The Recent Groups list links you to the last five groups that you visited and gives you a way to create groups on the spot. It’s an easy way to get to the groups you visit most often. In the right column of the Chatter tab, Einstein Recommendations lists people, groups, and objects that Einstein recommends to you. You can follow someone or something on the list or click **Skip** to dismiss one recommendation and invite another. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_tip.png) Tip For accessibility, every feed has a hidden Skip Feed link that you get to by tabbing. Skip Feed skips you past the feed to the End Feed tag. From End Feed, you can tab into the column that typically shows features like Einstein Recommendations and Trending Topics. The Skip Feed link follows the tab succession, Sort by, Search, Filter (if present), Refresh this feed, and then Skip Feed. #### See Also - [Get Started with Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_get_started.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Connect with people and share business information securely in real time.") - [View a Particular Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_filters.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Change your Chatter feed to show a subset of posts.") - [Feed Sort and Filter Options for Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_filters_available.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "On any Chatter feed, the sort and filter options vary, depending on how your admin sets up Salesforce and which feed you’re viewing. Not all sort and filter options are available on all feeds.") - [Chatter Streams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_streams_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter streams are custom feeds that you create by combining multiple related feeds into one feed. Look for streams on your Chatter home page. Create up to 100 streams that each combine posts from up to 25 different feeds and feed types. Create streams that combine feeds from people, groups, and records, like accounts, opportunities, cases, and more.") - [Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_about.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you're working on a team, you can create a group for your team to share mission-related files and information. Share information through the group feed.") - [Create Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_creating.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create public, private, and unlisted Chatter groups to collaborate with your teams and work together on projects.") # What Is Experience Cloud? With Salesforce Experience Cloud you can build CRM-powered experiences quickly and easily. Experience Builder, Salesforce CMS, Mobile Publisher, and a suite of web apps join to help you create robust, customized sites for your every use case. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
With Experience Cloud, customers and partners can build digital experience platforms to host marketing and corporate sites, partner portals, support forums, web applications, and more. You can start from a selection of prebuilt templates. Use the Customer Service template to build a self-service experience where your customers can help each other, which increases case deflection and user engagement. Create portals where customers can process insurance claims, access their healthcare information, schedule vaccine appointments, and purchase products from stores. Customers can process warranties and self-service claims on automobiles. Companies can manage inventory and make purchases. Use the Salesforce platform to extend the power of CRM data to partners so that they can manage channel accounts and boost products with marketing campaigns. ## Build Your Site, Your Way Whether you’re an admin, designer, or developer, Experience Cloud makes it easy to work the way you want. You can: - Create customized sites using no-code, point-and-click tools and prebuilt templates, themes, and components. - Build custom components, apps, and processes using low-code tools for interactive development and automation. - Develop customized, enterprise-level sites and portals programmatically. Update sites quickly, using your preferred pro-code development tools such as Salesforce Extensions for VS Code, Salesforce CLI, or your favorite IDE or text editor. To learn more about the versatile ways that you can use Experience Cloud, watch: # What Is the Enhanced Sites and Content Platform? The enhanced sites and content platform is a flexible new system that brings together Salesforce CMS and Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) sites. From Winter ’23, enhanced LWR sites and enhanced CMS workspaces that you create are hosted together on this redesigned platform, which offers partial deployment, improved content management, and expression-based visibility. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR sites
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note To clarify which features apply where, we use the terms enhanced LWR sites and enhanced CMS workspaces to refer to LWR sites and CMS workspaces on the new platform. ## What Are Enhanced LWR Sites? Enhanced LWR sites include several features that are available only on the enhanced platform. - [Partial deployment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_migrate_changesets_partial.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use change sets to move individual Experience Cloud components and content between related orgs that have a deployment connection, such as your sandbox and production orgs. Create and test changes in your test environment, and then migrate only those changes to production when they’re ready."): Use change sets to move individual site components and content between related orgs that have a deployment connection, such as your sandbox and production orgs. Or programmatically deploy partial site content with the DigitalExperienceBundle and DigitalExperienceConfig Metadata API types. - [Expression-based visibility and variations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_expression_based_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With Expression-Based Visibility, you can create a set of rules that dictate when and to whom your components in your enhanced LWR sites appear. Choose visibility settings based on User and Product object fields such as location, language, buyer groups, and more. Creating visibility conditions based on expressions improves the agility of your site."): Create several versions of the same component, and then use visibility rules to determine who sees what. - Component-specific Style tab: Apply custom CSS from a component’s Style tab. The CSS Class property, available on all Lightning web components in enhanced LWR sites, gives CSS-savvy site builders more granular control over the style of each component. - [Site content search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_search_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In enhanced LWR sites, visitors can search for CMS content published from enhanced CMS workspaces. Visitors can also search for content within the Rich Content Editor and HTML Editor components, as well as within page title metadata. Use the Search Bar and Results Layout components to add the search functionality to your enhanced LWR site."): Use the Search Bar and Results Layout components to add search functionality to your site. Site visitors can find content contained in Rich Content Editor and HTML Editor components, as well as within page title metadata. And because everything runs together on our consolidated platform, site search results can include content that you share from an enhanced CMS workspace. - [Data Cloud integration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_data_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To provide customers the personalized, individual experiences they now expect, you need detailed insights about your users and how you can best engage with them. By connecting your enhanced LWR sites to Data Cloud, you can capture and send user interaction data, such as clicks, scrolls, and product interactions, to Data Cloud. From there, you can organize your data and use it to create unified profiles, build robust site analytics, personalize your sites, generate recommendations, and discover new ways to use AI."): Connect enhanced LWR sites to Data Cloud for a complete understanding of who’s visiting your site and how you can best engage with them. - [Google Analytics 4](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_google_analytics_4.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "For insights into page visits and user engagement, add Google Analytics 4 to your enhanced LWR site from Experience Builder."): Gain insights into page visits and user engagement. ## What Are Enhanced CMS Workspaces and Channels? Create and publish content more easily in a simplified user interface, and take advantage of several features that are available only with enhanced CMS workspaces and channels, including: - Workspace sharing: Save time and space when you share content across enhanced CMS workspaces, and reuse content between workspaces without duplicating records. - Workflows and approvals: With role-based workflows, content creators can request an approval, translation, or review directly from relevant users. - Content variants and collections: Create translated content variants and manual collections to help put the right content in front of the right audience. - Sidebar extensions: Add extensions for spell checkers and other productivity-enhancing tools to the sidebar in the CMS content editor. - New APIs: Use APIs to create new content and retrieve published content. ## How Do I Start Using the New Platform? From Winter ’23, the enhanced sites and content platform is automatically enabled. So any new sites that you create by using LWR templates are hosted on this new platform. Similarly, any CMS workspaces that you create run on the redesigned system and are enhanced workspaces by default. Older LWR sites can’t take advantage of the platform’s new features and capabilities. But as part of the move to the enhanced platform, you can upgrade your existing LWR sites to enhanced LWR sites and gain access to those features. You can also publish content from an enhanced CMS workspace or a non-enhanced workspace to any LWR, enhanced LWR, or Aura site, making it easier than ever to transition to the new platform. ## How Can I Tell When a Site or Workspace Is Enhanced? In the Digital Experiences app, you can see an ![Enhanced badge](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/enhanced_icon.png) badge beside workspaces and sites that are hosted on the new platform. ![Digital Experiences app Home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/enhanced_cmshome.png) Similarly, we added this information to the list of sites in Setup under Digital Experiences. ![All Sites list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/enhancedsites.png) And when you create an LWR site, you can see that it’s being created on the enhanced sites and content platform. ![Site creation wizard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/enhanced_sites.png) - **[Upgrade to Enhanced LWR Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_enhanced_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Upgrade existing LWR sites to enhanced LWR sites to take advantage of the latest platform features, including partial deployment, site content search, and expression-based visibility. - **[Update Your LWR Site URL to Remove /s](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_enhanced_url.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Some older, non-enhanced LWR sites include /s at the end of the site’s base URL, making it difficult to achieve a completely custom site URL. You can remove this unwanted element and switch from https://mycustomdomain.com/s to https://mycustomdomain.com. Removing /s is also a prerequisite when you upgrade to an enhanced LWR site. #### See Also - [Learn About Experience Cloud Frameworks and Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_frameworks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Select a framework and template as part of your site planning. The choices you make at the beginning of your site creation process have long-term downstream implications. In particular, consider your business objectives, your technical know-how, and the costs associated with each.") - [Experience Cloud Glossary](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_basics_glossary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Here are definitions to some key terms and concepts related to Experience Cloud.") # What Your Chatter Group Role Lets You Do The actions that you can perform in a Chatter group depend on whether you’re a member, owner, or manager of the group. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
User Permissions Needed
To create groups Create and Own New Chatter Groups
This table describes the actions that are available to members, managers, and owners of public and private Chatter groups. [Customers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_external_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Chatter customers are people outside your company's email domains. Customers can see only the groups they're invited to. They can interact only with members of those groups. Customers can’t see any Salesforce information.") can be group members and managers, but not owners. | Action | Owner | Manager | Member | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Post, comment, and search group feeds | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Add and remove records in groups (if configured) | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Post group announcements | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   | | Delete posts and comments | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   | | Add and remove members | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   | | Change member roles | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   | | Edit group settings | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   | | Edit the Information field | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   | | Archive groups and activate archived groups | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   | | Change group owner | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   |   | | Delete group | ![Check](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/checkmark_16x16.png) |   |   | Users with the Modify All Data permission can perform all actions on all private and public groups. Users with the View All Data permission can view details of all private and public groups, regardless of membership. In unlisted groups: - Users with the Manage Unlisted Groups permission can perform all of these actions in unlisted groups, even if they aren’t members. - Users with the Modify All Data or View All Data permission can find and access unlisted groups only if they are members. Unlike public and private groups, users with the Modify All Data permission can’t perform group owner actions in unlisted groups. If the Modify All Data user has the group manager role in the unlisted group, then they can perform group manager actions. - **[Change Chatter Group Roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_roles_change.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Salesforce Classic, you can change group roles for the groups that you own or manage. # What’s an Experience Cloud Site Manager? Experience Cloud site managers help ensure that a site thrives by encouraging member participation. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Experience Cloud site managers must be internal site users.Site managers must also be members of the site that they’re managing. A site manager monitors engagement. They need access to reports and dashboards that show activity and membership trends, such as how frequently members log in. By monitoring site membership and activity, managers can better engage site members and encourage participation. Member recognition and friendly competition can also lead to more active members. Experience Cloud site managers can set up a points system and reputation levels that reward members when they perform certain actions. When members reach the level's point threshold, they move up a level. - **[Assign an Experience Cloud Site Manager](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_community_manager_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To assign a user as an Experience Cloud site manager, give them the Manage Experiences permission. # What’s an Experience Cloud Site Moderator? Experience Cloud site moderators help ensure the success of a site by monitoring user activity and flagged items. In a successful site, members are actively engaged and communicate with one another. Moderators facilitate knowledge sharing to help members benefit and derive value from their participation. Moderators also ensure that all communications and content are appropriate. A moderator can control the quality of the site’s content by: - Reviewing and acting on the list of flagged posts and comments - Reviewing and acting on the list of flagged files - Removing flags - Deleting inappropriate posts, comments, messages, and files A moderator can help drive the success of a site by: - Sharing relevant and useful information in posts - Encouraging members to post and comment on each other's posts - Setting an example by their activity - Keeping discussions focused, spam-free, and non-controversial - Redirecting email conversations to sites when it can benefit other members - Establishing the site as a reliable source of information and a forum for transparent discussions You can choose to designate more than one moderator, especially if the site has a large number of members. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Although they share some similar capabilities, a moderator in an Experience Cloud site is different from a [Chatter moderator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_moderate.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ## Which Users Can Moderate a Site? Multiple types of users can moderate an Experience Cloud site. Moderators can continue to flag items even if flagging is disabled for members. Group owners and group managers can only moderate when flagging is enabled. - Internal Users—Moderators can be internal users who are also members of your site. - External Users—Moderators who are external users require Access Experience Management and moderation permissions to moderate a site from the Moderation tile in Experience Workspaces. External user moderators without management and moderation permissions can moderate within the context of their Experience Cloud site, such as directly from the site feed. - Group Manager or Owner—The Allow members to flag content option must be enabled for group managers and owners to moderate. Group managers or owners can only moderate items in groups that they manage or own. This table shows who can moderate and what actions they can take in the user interface. | Action | User with Moderate Experiences Feeds | User with Moderate Experiences Files | Group Owner or Manager (on items in groups they own or manage) | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Remove flags on a post or comment | ![Checkmark icon indicating available](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) |   | ![Checkmark icon indicating available](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) | | Delete a post or comment | ![Checkmark icon indicating available](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) |   | ![Checkmark icon indicating available](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) | | Remove flags on a file |   | ![Checkmark icon indicating available](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) | ![Checkmark icon indicating available](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) | | Delete a file1 |   | ![Checkmark icon indicating available](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) | ![Checkmark icon indicating available](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/resources-global/_corporate/images/checkmark.png) | 1 Deleted files can remain cached for up to 90 days. - **[Assign a Moderator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_moderator_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make one or more people moderators in your Experience Cloud site so they can keep an eye on its content. #### See Also - [Move Feed Items from One Public Group Feed to Another](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_chatter_movefeeditem.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Aura, the Move option on feed item dropdown menus offers a way to relocate feed items from one public group feed to another. Use Move to improve an item’s visibility or to place it in a more relevant context. For example, if a user posts a Sales poll in a Marketing feed by mistake, the poll can easily be moved to the right location. System Administrators, Community Managers, and Chatter Moderators can move posts, polls, and questions.") # What’s Available in the Salesforce Chatter App Salesforce Chatter gives you more ways than ever to collaborate with coworkers using Chatter. Salesforce Chatter requires only a single authentication to access all of Salesforce. You can also attach drawings directly from the app to Chatter posts. - **[Post Drawings with Salesforce Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.win_chatter_posting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can post drawings made with the Salesforce Chatter canvas directly on to Chatter posts on touch enabled Windows 10 devices. - **[Authenticate Once with Salesforce Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.win_chatter_authenticate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce Chatter makes getting to work in the full Salesforce site easier than ever. Just log in to the Salesforce Chatter app and launch the full Salesforce site directly from the app. # What’s Your Customer Account Portal Strategy? The type of customer account portal you create depends on your business needs and what you want to accomplish. For example, an insurance company has a different strategy from a clothing retailer. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
To get the most out of your Customer Account Portal implementation, ask yourself some questions. - How many Customer Community licenses do I need? Do I invest in Customer Community licenses or Customer Community Plus licenses? - What level of data visibility and privacy do I need for each object that I’m exposing to my customers? - Which objects do I grant permissions to in my customer profiles? - Do I want to allow my customers to self-register? #### See Also - [Experience Cloud User Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_license_types_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # What’s Your Partner Experience Cloud Site Strategy? The type of partner site you create depends on your business, your channel sales program, and the tiers within it. For example, the strategy for a hardware manufacturer with a few partners is different from that of an insurance company with a large agent network. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Try to get early answers to these questions to plan your site strategy: - How many Partner Community licenses do I need? ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don’t need access to all sales objects, such as opportunities, leads, and campaigns, you can also use Customer Community Plus licenses for partners. - Can I invite all my partners to the same Experience Cloud site or do I need multiple sites? - What objects do I need to grant permissions for in my partner profiles? Do I need to three roles per account? - What level of data visibility and privacy do I need for my site? - Do I want to allow my partners to self-register? For more ideas on planning your site strategy, check out [this Trailhead module for Communities](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/module/community_rollout_impl). #### See Also - [Experience Cloud User Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_license_types_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Where to Allowlist Third-Party Hosts for Experience Builder Sites Regardless of your security level, you must allowlist all non-script resources such as images, style sheets, and fonts that are hosted outside your Experience Builder site. And if you reference external JavaScript files in your site, you must allowlist these remote hosts. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
You allowlist hosts differently depending on the resource type. Non-script resources from external hosts, such as a logo or style sheet stored on a corporate site, can be shared with Lightning Experience across your org and are allowlisted in Setup. Script resources from external hosts such as JavaScript are instead specific to each site and are allowlisted in Experience Builder. Allow only external sites that you trust. These sites are allowed automatically. - All Salesforce-hosted data and files when referenced in your site. - Google Analytics required sites when you add your tracking ID to the Google Analytics setting in Experience Builder. These addresses include https://www.google-analytics.com, https://stats.g.doubleclick.net, and https://www.googletagmanager.com/gtag/js. Some configurations of the Google Analytics integration require more domains to be allowlisted manually. See the [Google Analytics directives](https://developers.google.com/tag-platform/tag-manager/web/csp#google_analytics_4_google_analytics) from Google. - In sites where Chatter is enabled, addresses that can be referenced by image tags in Chatter feed comments with video and the Rich Content Editor’s video insertion functionality. These addresses include https://img.youtube.com, https://i.ytimg.com, and https://i.vimeocdn.com, and addresses that can be referenced by frame tags, such as https://img.youtube.com, https://player.vimeo.com, and https://play.vidyard.com. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Allowlist scripts or images used by external hosts that you already allowed so that those resources are displayed. ## Where to Allow Hosts of Non-Script Resources Non-script resources hosted outside your site use a `src` attribute defined by https://any.otherdomain.com or wss://any.otherdomain.com. Common non-script resources include: - Images - Style sheets - Fonts - Media (audio and video) - URLs using script interfaces - Resources contained in frame elements - Third-party APIs - WebSocket connection For these non-script resources, you allow hosts via Content Security Policy (CSP) directives in Trusted URLs in Setup. The resources are then available for all your Experience Builder sites. See [Manage Trusted URLs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_trusted_urls_manage.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ## Where to Allow Hosts of Script Resources For remote script resources such as JavaScript, you allowlist hosts in Experience Builder from Settings and then Security & Privacy. After you select a security level, you can add hosts in the Trusted Sites for Scripts area that appears. To use remote resources in your other Experience Builder sites, you must allowlist each resource separately per site. ![Security tab of Experience Builder settings showing trusted sites in list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/experience_builder_csp_trusted_sites.png) From the Trusted Sites for Scripts section, you can edit or delete a site in the allowlist. You can also activate or deactivate trusted sites, which makes it easy to test or maintain your site without deleting sites from the site configuration. And if you change to a different CSP security level, these allowed sites remain, which permits you to switch security levels easily. #### See Also - [Track Site Users with Your Google Analytics Tracking ID](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_google_id.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add your Google Analytics™ tracking ID to track page views. Enable access to your Salesforce data for deeper insights. Then, adjust your pages to more accurately reach your customers.") # Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template? Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_tip.png) Tip The components panel in Experience Builder lists all components that you can add to the page you’re editing. Sites built with Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce don’t use Lightning components.
Component Customer Service and Lightning Bolt Solutions Partner Central and Partner Central Enhanced Customer Account Portal Help Center Build Your Own (Aura) Available in Versions
Account Brand Details   Available Available   Available Summer ’19 and later
Activities Available Available Available   Available  
Announcement Section Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Article Content Available Available Available   Available All versions
Articles with This Topic Available Available Available Available Available  
Ask Button Available Available     Available All versions
Biometric Login Button Available Available Available Available Available Spring ’25 and later
Breadcrumb Available Available Available Available Available All versions
Calendar       Available Available All versions
Campaign Marketplace Available Available Available Available Available All versions
Case Comments Publisher Available       Available All versions
Case Deflection Available Available Available Available Available Spring ’18 and later
CMS Collection Available Available Available Available Available Winter ‘19 and later
CMS Connect (HTML) Available Available Available Available Available All versions
CMS Connect (JSON) Available Available Available Available Available All versions
CMS Single Item Available Available Available Available Available Winter ‘19 and later
CMS Single Item (Detail) Available Available Available Available Available Winter ‘19 and later
Calendar Available Available Available   Available All versions
Contact Request Button & Flow Available Available Available   Available Spring ’19 and later
Contact Support Button Available Available Available Available Available All versions
Contact Support & Ask Buttons 1 Available       Available Winter ’16 and later
Contact Support Form Available Available Available Available Available Spring ’18 and later
Create Case Form Available Available Available   Available All versions
Create Record Button Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Create Record Form Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Custom Lightning Components Available Available Available Available Available Winter ’16 and later
Customizable User Settings Available Available Available   Available Summer ’19 and later
Dashboard Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Dashboard List Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Deflection Tracking Available* Available† Available† Available† Available*

* Spring ’19 and later

† Summer ’19 and later

CRM Analytics Dashboard Available Available Available   Available Summer ’17 and later
Einstein Predictions Available Available Available   Available Winter ’20 and later
Einstein Scoring   Available     Available Summer ’23 and later
Engagement Available   Available     Winter ’17 and later
Enhanced List View   Available     Available Spring ’24 and later
Featured Topics Available Available Available Available Available Winter ’16 and later
Featured Topics & Feeds Available       Available All versions
Feed Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Feed Compact Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Feed History Available Available Available   Available Winter ’17 and later
Feed Post & Comments Available Available Available   Available Summer ’15 and later
Feed Publisher Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Files List Available Available Available Available Available Winter ’16 and later
Flow (Experience Builder Component) Available Available Available Available Available Winter ’18 and later
Follow Button Available Available     Available Summer ’15 and later
Global Search Box Available Available Available   Available All versions
Global Search for Peer-to-Peer Communities Available         Winter ’18 and later
Global Search Results Available Available Available Available Available All versions
Group Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Group Banner Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Group Detail Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Group Related List Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Headline Available Available   Available Available All versions
HTML Editor Available Available Available Available Available All versions
Knowledgeable People Available Available     Available Summer ’15 and later
Language Selector Available Available Available Available Available Winter ’16 and later
Lead Inbox Available Available Available   Available Summer ’17 and later
Libraries Available Available Available Available Available Winter ’18 and later
Manage Members Section Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Member Profile and Settings Available Available Available   Available Winter ’18 and later
Membership Available Available Available   Available Winter ’17 and later
Message Notification Available Available     Available Spring ’17 and later
Navigation Menu Available       Available Winter ’16 and later
New Message Button Available Available     Available Spring ’17 and later
Orchestration Work Guide Available Available Available Available Available Winter ‘23 and later
Page Refresh Available Available Available Available Available Summer ’22 and later
Path (Experience Builder Site Component) Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Paused Flows Available Available Available   Available All versions
Profile Header Available Available Available   Available Before Winter ’183
Quip       Available    
Quip Docs Related List       Available    
Recognition Badges Available Available Available Available Available Winter ’19 and later
Recommendations   Available     Available Winter ’18 and later
Recommendations Carousel Available Available Available Available Available Summer ’15 and later
Record Banner Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Record Detail Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Record Information Tabs Available Available Available Available Available Winter ’16 and later
Record List Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Record Related List Available Available Available   Available

Winter ’16 and later

Spring ’20 and later; in Help Center, a file is the only object that’s supported.

Related Articles List Available Available Available   Available Summer ’16 and later
Related List - Single Available Available Available   Available Winter ‘19 and later
Related Questions List Available Available     Available Summer ’16 and later
Related Record List Available Available Available Available* Available Winter ’16 and later
Related Topics List Available Available Available   Available Spring ’15 and later
Report Chart Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Report List Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Report Summary Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Reputation Leaderboard Available Available Available   Available Spring ’15 and later
Request Approval Available Available Available Available Available Winter ’24 and later
Rich Content Editor Available Available Available Available Available Winter ’16 and later
Scroll To Available       Available All versions
Search Results Available Available Available Available Available All versions
Embedded Service Available Available Available   Available Summer ’17 and later
Stream Detail Available Available Available   Available Winter ’18 and later
Stream List Available Available Available   Available Winter ’18 and later
Suggested Actions Available Available Available Available Available Spring ’19 and later
Survey Available Available Available   Available Winter ’18 and later
Tab Layout Available Available Available Available Available Winter ’16 and later
Tile Menu Available Available Available Available Available All versions
Top Article by Topic Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Topic Catalog Available Available Available Available Available Spring ’16 and later
Topic Description Available Available     Available Spring ’16 and later
Topic Metrics Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Topics Available Available Available   Available Winter ’19 and later
Totals Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 and later
Trending Articles by Topic Available Available Available   Available Winter ’17 and later
Trending Topics Available Available Available Available Available Spring ’15 and later
Unanswered Questions Available Available     Available Winter ’16 and later
User Profile Available Available Available   Available Spring ’16 and later
User Profile Detail Available Available Available   Available Winter ’16 only
User Profile Image Available Available Available   Available All versions
User Profile Knows About Available Available     Available Winter ’16 and later
User Profile Menu Available Available Available   Available Winter ’18 and later3
User Profile Related List Available Available Available   Available Spring ’16 and later
User Profile Stats Available Available     Available Spring ’15 and Summer ’15
User Profile Summary Available Available Available   Available All versions
User Profile Tabs Available Available     Available Spring ’15 and later
Visualforce Page Component Available Available Available Available Available Spring ’17 and later
Campaign Marketplace Available Available Available Available Available Summer'24 and later
Lead Inbox Available Available Available   Available Summer'24 and later
Enablement   Available Available   Available Summer'23 and later
Channel Program Details Available Available Available Available Available Summer'25 and later
Joint Business Plans Available Available Available Available Available Summer'26 and later
Partner Referral Welcome Available Available Available Available Available Summer'26 and later
Account Plan Available Available Available Available Available Summer'26 and later
Loyalty Accrual Activities Available Available Available Available Available Summer'26 and later
Loyalty Points Available Available Available Available Available Summer'26 and later
Loyalty Tiers and Benefits Available Available Available Available Available Summer'26 and later
Loyalty Transaction Journals Available Available Available     Summer'26 and later
## Login Components | Component | Available in Versions | | --- | --- | | [Employee Login Link](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_login_employee.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Employee Login Link component to direct users with accounts in the site’s parent org to their login page. When your employees or other users who have accounts in the parent org for the site end up on the site login page, you can redirect them to their own login page with a link. They can then log in with all the settings and permissions of their org account.") | All versions | | [Forgot Password](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_login_forgot_password.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Forgot Password component to let users request a new password.") | All versions | | [Login Form](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_login_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Let users log in with login fields for a username and password and a button for submitting both.") | All versions | | [Self-Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_login_self_register.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Self-Registration component lets users set up their accounts so that you don’t have to add each one manually. Users put their information into the form fields, and when they click Sign Up, an account is created for them. This component has a basic set of fields that you can customize, and you can add more fields.") | All versions | | [Set Icons for Social Login](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_login_social_signon.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Social Login component provides users with icons that they can click to log in to a third-party account, such as Facebook© or LinkedIn©. Set these icons for each authentication provider that you configure for the org.") | All versions | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note The following case components were retired in all Salesforce orgs in Summer ’19: Case Attachments, Case Banner, Case Comments, Case Detail, Case Feed, Case Feed Publisher, and Case List. Similarly, the Set Case Status Button was retired in Winter ’21. Sites already using one of these components can continue to do so, but if you delete a component or the page containing it, you can't use the component again. Instead, to continue using the Case Comments feature, make sure that the Case Comment related list is added to the case page layout used in Experience Builder site. #### See Also - [_Getting Started with the Aloha Community Template for Salesforce Identity_](https://resources.docs.salesforce.com/latest/latest/en-us/sfdc/pdf/salesforce_community_identity_templates.pdf) [1](#fnsrc_1) Contact Support is included as part of the Contact Support & Ask Buttons component. 2 User Profile Menu replaces Profile Header in Lightning templates based on Winter ’18 and later versions of Lightning templates. # Which Experience Cloud Template Should I Use? Experience Cloud templates let you build responsive sites for delivering rich, branded spaces for your customers and partners. And with Experience Builder, you can accomplish a lot without coding. For example, you can edit a template’s components to include information about your site, add images to extend your branding, and include CMS content. And if you want a more customized experience, you can create custom pages, add components to pages, build custom Lightning components, and expose more Salesforce objects. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/images/icon_note.png) Note Apart from Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce, all templates are Lightning-based templates that you customize in Experience Builder. However, although the Aloha template is Lightning-based, it’s used to create an App Launcher, not a site. So when we talk about Experience Builder sites and templates, we mean all templates except Aloha and Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce. - Customer Account Portal—A private and secure place for customers to access and update their account information. Improve customer relationships and decrease service costs by letting customers work in the portal. Customers can see and pay invoices, update their account information, and search your knowledge base for answers to their most frequent questions. - Partner Central—A flexible, responsive template designed for channel sales workflows. Recruit, build, and grow your partner network to drive channel sales and marketing together in a branded online space. Easily configure lead distribution, deal registration, and marketing campaigns. Share training materials and sales collateral in a central space, and use reports to track your pipeline. - Customer Service—A powerful, responsive self-service template with multiple prebuilt theme options. The Customer Service template lets users post questions to the community, search for and view articles, collaborate, and contact support agents by creating cases. Supports Knowledge, Chatter Questions, and cases. - Help Center—A public-access, self-service community that exposes the articles that you make available from your knowledge base. You reduce the load on your customer support team, and your users get the satisfaction of finding their own solutions. - Build Your Own (Aura)—Provides the basic pages that every Experience Builder site needs: Home, Create Record, Error, Record Detail, Record List, Related Record List, Search, Check Password, Forgot Password, Login, Login Error, and Register. Add more pages and components as needed for the experience you’re building. To refine the look of your site, customize your branding and themes. - Build Your Own (LWR)—Powered by the Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) framework, this customizable template delivers unparalleled page performance and improves developer productivity. Quickly build pixel-perfect pages and develop Lightning web components and themes that match your unique brand. Suitable for developers, consulting partners, and ISVs who are familiar with developing custom Lightning web components, and working with Salesforce DX, User Interface API, and Apex. See the [LWR Sites for Experience Cloud](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/intro.htm) guide. - Microsites (LWR)—Use the power of LWR to create beautiful, high-performance sites perfect for event pages, landing pages, or other special purpose websites. Microsites gives you all the tools to quickly spin up a website and then archive it when it’s no longer needed. Suitable for developers, consulting partners, and ISVs who are familiar with developing custom Lightning web components, and working with Salesforce DX, User Interface API, and Apex. See the [LWR Sites for Experience Cloud](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.exp_cloud_lwr.meta/exp_cloud_lwr/intro.htm) guide. - Aloha—A configurable App Launcher template that lets users quickly find applications and access them using single sign-on authentication, including social logins. - Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce—Standard Salesforce structure and tabs that you can customize using Visualforce. Requires developer experience and advanced setup skills. Offers full platform access with a flexible configuration and supports most standard objects, custom objects, and the Salesforce mobile app. Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce isn’t a Lightning-based template and therefore doesn’t work with Experience Builder. - **[The Customer Account Portal Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_customer_account_portal_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Customer Account Portal template improves customer relationships and decreases service costs. The template provides features that make it easy for customers to see and pay invoices, update their account information, and search your knowledge base for answers. - **[The Partner Central Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_partner_central_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Partner Central supports partner relationship management workflows, including channel sales, channel marketing, lead distribution, deal registration, partner recruitment and onboarding, and pipeline monitoring with reports and dashboards. The template offers navigation options, enablement pages, and customizable action dropdowns, providing partners with intuitive access to marketing tools, support features, referral insights, and training metrics. Flexible layouts help with site building and maintenance. - **[The Customer Service Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_napili_views.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Customer Service template provides a rich self-service experience for your customers, where they can get answers to their questions at any time, on any device. With integrated knowledge articles and case management, customers can search for and view articles, post questions, or contact a support agent. To use the Customer Service template, Chatter must be turned on in your org. - **[The Build Your Own Template (Aura)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_build_your_own_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Build Your Own template provides the basic pages every Experience Builder site needs: Home, Create Record, Error, Record Detail, Record List, Related Record List, Search, Check Password, Forgot Password, Login, Login Error, and Register. And you can easily add more pages and components as needed for the experience you’re building. Customize your branding and themes to refine the look of your site. - **[The Build Your Own Template (LWR)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_build_your_own_lwr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Build Your Own (LWR) template for Experience Cloud to create blazing-fast digital experiences, such as websites, microsites, and portals, using the Lightning Web Components programming model. Powered by Lightning Web Runtime (LWR), this customizable template delivers unparalleled site performance. - **[The Microsite Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_microsites_lwr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Microsite template is the foundation for your small, special-purpose websites. Microsites are often used by companies that already have a full site but want a dedicated space for a single communication or conversion goal. Microsites work well to host an idea or product that requires more content than a single landing page. Built on the Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) platform, the template includes responsive layout and content components that you can use to quickly spin up a landing page, event site, or other web experience. Capture visitor information and send it directly to the Lead object with the Lead Form component. - **[Objects Supported by Out-of-the-Box Components and Pages in Experience Builder Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_napili_supported_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check out the list of all the objects supported by out-of-the-box components and pages in Experience Builder templates. - **[Considerations Before You Migrate an Aura Site to Lightning Web Runtime (LWR)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_migrate_lwr_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sites that run on Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) boast increased speed, scalability, security, and design flexibility over Aura sites. Migrating your Aura site to an LWR site requires considerable planning. Keep these considerations in mind. - **[Migrate a Koa or Kokua Site to a New Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_migrate_from_koa_kokua.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Koa and Kokua templates are retired, and you can no longer use them to create site. Salesforce supports existing sites built with Koa and Kokua, but we recommend migrating to newer templates. The new templates provide richer support for Salesforce Knowledge and case management, and they also receive updates and new features with each release. - **[Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_component_reference_table.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Aura site templates, such as Customer Service and Partner Central, are each composed of pages, which in turn are made up of customizable components. Consult this table to find out which Aura template each component can be used in, and when the component became available. #### See Also - [Create an Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_creating.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create an Experience Cloud site using a wizard that helps you choose a template that meets your business needs.") # Which Performance Tools Do I Need Based on My Experience Cloud Site? With Experience Cloud, you can build a wide range of business-to-consumer (B2C) and business-to-business (B2B) applications that have different performance and scale considerations and optimizations. This section outlines common scenarios, likely performance issues, and the best tools to optimize performance. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Applies to: LWR and Aura sites
## Sites with a High Volume of Unauthenticated (Guest) User Traffic B2C sites have a high volume of guest user traffic, such as in help centers and community forums. Visitors are more likely to view content than create it. Such sites rapidly serve content to a large volume of users routinely and during traffic spikes. These tools help with high volume guest user traffic. - [Customer Community License](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_license_types_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Serve Your Experience Cloud Site with the Salesforce Content Delivery Network (CDN)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.domain_mgmt_salesforce_cdn.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) Application](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/lwr/guide/lwr-intro.html) - [Progressive Rendering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_prioritization_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Progressive Rendering prioritizes the display order of your page components. With proper planning and testing, it can improve display time performance and polish your site’s experience to better engage customers.") - [Page Optimizer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_optimizer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Salesforce Page Optimizer analyzes your site and identifies issues that impact performance. Use the information to refine your design and improve site performance for your members. The Page Optimizer is a free plug-in available from the Chrome Web Store. Download and install the plug-in as you would any Chrome extension.") - [Apex Caching on the Salesforce CDN](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_perf_apex_caching.htm&type=5&language=en_US) ## Sites with a High Volume of Authenticated (Logged-In) Traffic Customer portals are an example of a B2C site that serves a high volume of authenticated (logged-in) traffic, such as registered customers or members. Users are more likely to view content than create it. Customer portals support high volume user logins and allow customers to self-register. We recommend these tools. - [Customer Community License](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_license_types_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Serve Your Experience Cloud Site with the Salesforce Content Delivery Network (CDN)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.domain_mgmt_salesforce_cdn.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) Application](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/lwr/guide/lwr-intro.html) - [High-Volume Self-Registration Using Micro-Batching](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_self_reg_apex.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your Experience Cloud site can handle twice as many self-registration requests at a time when they’re collected into batches and processed asynchronously rather than one at a time. The accounts and contacts created are owned and managed by the community administrator. After a batch is processed successfully, users receive an email with their login instructions. Batch processing self-registration requests improves performance and keeps your site moving during heavy traffic spikes. Minimal coding is required when you use the Apex controller that manages your self-registration flow.") - [Progressive Rendering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_prioritization_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Progressive Rendering prioritizes the display order of your page components. With proper planning and testing, it can improve display time performance and polish your site’s experience to better engage customers.") - [Page Optimizer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_optimizer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Salesforce Page Optimizer analyzes your site and identifies issues that impact performance. Use the information to refine your design and improve site performance for your members. The Page Optimizer is a free plug-in available from the Chrome Web Store. Download and install the plug-in as you would any Chrome extension.") - [Login & Identity features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.identity_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Apex Caching on the Salesforce CDN](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_perf_apex_caching.htm&type=5&language=en_US) ## Sites with High Transaction Loads and Business Flows Sites with high transaction loads often include landing pages, business flows, and users who create CRM object records. Examples are marketing sites that collect leads, vaccine scheduling sites, and loan application sites. We recommend these tools for high volume transaction sites. - [Customer Community or Customer Community Plus License](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_license_types_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Serve Your Experience Cloud Site with the Salesforce Content Delivery Network (CDN)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.domain_mgmt_salesforce_cdn.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Account Role Optimization (ARO)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_partners_optimize_roles.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [High-Volume Self-Registration Using Micro-Batching](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_self_reg_apex.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your Experience Cloud site can handle twice as many self-registration requests at a time when they’re collected into batches and processed asynchronously rather than one at a time. The accounts and contacts created are owned and managed by the community administrator. After a batch is processed successfully, users receive an email with their login instructions. Batch processing self-registration requests improves performance and keeps your site moving during heavy traffic spikes. Minimal coding is required when you use the Apex controller that manages your self-registration flow.") - [High-Volume Record Creation Using Micro-Batching](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_high_volume_record_creation_builder.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Create Record Form, Contact Support Form, or Lead Form (LWC) components to create cases, leads, and custom objects more efficiently. When records are collected into batches and processed asynchronously, your site can process more records at a time. Batch processing improves performance and keeps your site moving during traffic spikes.") ## Sites with a High Volume of Users and Roles Large-scale B2B sites require high user volume, extensive use of roles, and high-level access to CRM objects and more advanced data sharing. Data sharing and access can influence performance and scale. Examples of large-scale portals are channel sales applications and partner sites. We recommend these tools for large-scale B2B sites. - [Customer Community Plus or Partner Community License](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_license_types_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Serve Your Experience Cloud Site with the Salesforce Content Delivery Network (CDN)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.domain_mgmt_salesforce_cdn.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Account Role Optimization (ARO)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_partners_optimize_roles.htm&type=5&language=en_US) ## Sites Combining Experience Cloud with Other Products Commerce storefronts and Industry solutions are built by using Experience Cloud in combination with other Salesforce products. For example, an online storefront uses Commerce Cloud checkout, cart, product search services, and more. During large sales events, commerce sites typically handle higher than usual traffic volume, so it’s important to know the limits of all the features enabled for the site. Similarly, Experience Cloud implementations are often combined with managed packages from Salesforce ISV providers. It’s important to understand the performance and scale capabilities of both the additional Salesforce features you’re enabling and the ISV capabilities you’re using. Test your site for performance and scale during development and before launch to make sure the combination of Experience Cloud and additional features provides the performance required for your site. # Who Can See My Attached Files and Links in Chatter? Share files and links with people by attaching them to Chatter posts or comments.
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Essentials, Group, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, Contact Manager, and Developer Editions
Attach links and files to posts and comments from your device, Salesforce Files, Files Connect external sources, and Salesforce CRM Content libraries. All file types are supported. You can upload and download audio and video files, but you can’t parse or preview them. This table describes who can see a file that you attached and where it appears: ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note When you enable Chatter for your org, make sure you also enable Chatter for your users. This way, they can access all Salesforce files in your org, including asset files.
If You Attach a File: Who Can See It? Where Does it Appear?
On a Chatter feed All Chatter users in your company
  • In your and your followers' Chatter feeds, and profile
  • On the Files list and Salesforce CRM Content of all Chatter users in your company
On your Chatter profile or on someone else's Chatter profile All Chatter users in your company
  • In your feed, their feed, your followers' feeds, and their followers' feeds and profiles
  • In the Files Owned list on your profile
  • On the Files list and Salesforce CRM Content of all Chatter users in your company
On a public group All Chatter users in your company
  • In your feed, your followers' feeds, and the group members' feeds
  • In your feed on your profile
  • In the feed on the group
  • In the Group Files list on the group
  • On the Files page and Salesforce CRM Content of all Chatter users in your company.
On a private group that you're a member of Members of the group and users with “Modify All Data” and “View All Data” permissions
  • In your feed and the group members' feeds
  • In your feed on your profile
  • In the feed on the group
  • In the Group Files list on the group
  • On your Files lists, group members' Files lists, and Salesforce CRM Content
On an unlisted group that you're a member of Members of the group and users with the “Manage Unlisted Groups” permission
  • In your feed and the group members' feeds
  • In your feed on your profile
  • In the feed on the group
  • In the Group Files list on the group
  • On your Files lists, group members' Files lists, and Salesforce CRM Content
On a record Anyone with sharing rights to the record
  • Record detail page
  • Your profile page
  • Feed search results
  • All Company or Company Highlights feed
#### See Also - [Chatter Post Visibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_post_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn where you can post in Chatter, who can see your posts, and whose posts you can see.") # Who Can See My File? Your files in Salesforce can be private to you, privately shared, or visible to your entire company. Learn how to identify a file’s sharing settings and how to change them. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
This table describes file sharing settings that depend on how the file is shared. The sharing setting and icon appear on a file's detail page and on the Shared With list on a file detail page.
Sharing Setting Definition When Does a File Have This Setting?
Private Private The file is private. It hasn't been shared with anyone else besides the owner. The file owner and users with Modify All Data permission can find and view this file. However, if the file is in a private library, only the file owner has access to it.

A file is private when you:

  • Upload it in Files home
  • Publish it to your private library
  • Stop sharing it with everyone (Make Private)
  • Delete posts that include the file and the file isn't shared anywhere else
Privately Shared Privately Shared

The file has been shared only with specific people, groups, or via link. It's not available to all users in your company. Only the file owner, users with Modify All Data or View all Data permission, and specific file viewers can find and view this file.

External users see files posted to records they have access to, unless the record post was marked Internal Only.

A file is privately shared when it's:

  • Shared only with specific people or a private group
  • Posted to a private group
  • Shared via link
  • Posted to a feed on a record
  • Published to a shared library
Company-wide Your Company All users in your company can find and view this file.

A file is shared with your company when it's posted:

  • To a feed that all users can see
  • To a profile
  • To a record
  • To a public group
This table describes which actions you can perform on a file depending on your file permissions. | Action | File Owner | File Collaborator | File Viewer | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | View or Preview | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Download | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Share | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Attach a File to a Post | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Upload New Version | Yes | Yes |   | | Edit Details | Yes | Yes |   | | Change Permission | Yes | Yes |   | | Make a File Private | Yes |   |   | | Restrict Access | Yes |   |   | | Delete | Yes |   |   | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - **No Access** means that only the people in your company with whom this file is shared can find or view the file. If the file is shared with a private group, only members of the group can find or view the file. - Users with Modify All Data permission have built-in access to files that they don’t own. They can view, preview, download, share, attach, make private, restrict access to, edit, upload new versions of, and delete files that they don't own. However, if the file is in a private library, then only the file owner has access to it. - Users with View All Data permission can view and preview files that they don't own. However, if the file is in a private library, then only the file owner has access to it. - Groups (including group members) and records have viewer permission for files posted to their feeds. - Permissions for files shared with libraries depend on the library. #### See Also - [Make a File Private](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_make_private.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can restrict access to shared files that you own by making them private.") - [View Where a File Is Shared](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_shared_with.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out who can see a file and their level of access. From the File Detail page, you can access a full list of every person or object the file is shared with.") - [Prevent Others from Sharing and Unsharing a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_freeze_sharing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can prevent others from sharing and unsharing a file that you own. Preventing others from sharing or unsharing doesn’t affect existing shares.") # Who Does What in Experience Cloud? Experience Cloud sites are typically not developed, designed, and maintained by a single person because these tasks require different skills. Depending on the size of your company and scale of your site, you could have some people handle several roles or a dedicated person for each role. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
## Why Is This Important? Experience Cloud accommodates many use cases and customization capabilities. When you create a site, it’s important to consider who has the necessary skills for each role to build your team. Assigning a single person to manage all the different facets can become unmanageable if your site is large or complex. ## What Should You Keep in Mind? Before you begin, consider the lifespan of a site and the required skills. First, you design and build the site and then create and add content. You also promote, maintain, and grow the site. Each phase requires different skills that must be accounted for when you create your site. Here’s our recommended implementation team and the skills they require. Keep in mind that a single person can fill many of these roles in a small company. Design and Build Roles and Skills - Solution Architect— Understands the fundamental structure of the site and how to create it. - Business Process Analyst— Understands the business requirements and how the site is used. The business analyst has deep knowledge of your company, the problems to solve, and how your site plans to solve them. - Developer— Although many Experience Cloud features are point and click, when creating a more complex site, a developer trained on the Salesforce platform can set up and customize your site more efficiently. - User Interface Designer— We offer many tools to customize the look and structure of your site, but without intuitive design they often go to waste. Your designer must have a thorough understanding of web design and your target audience to get the most value for your site. - User Experience Designer— Working with your UI designer, the UX designer is the voice of the customer. A solid user experience grounded in user research can improve the useability of your site. Content Creation and Management Roles and Skills - QA Professional— Before you go live and whenever you update your site, test your changes carefully. It’s helpful to have a fresh set of eyes for quality checks. Make sure that the various user types have access to the correct things and that your setup has no security vulnerabilities. - Content Manager— A single site often uses many different types of content, from images, to videos, to plain text. Make sure that your content is up to date and ready for prime time. If you don’t have someone managing your content, it’s easy for your site to become dated quickly. - Digital Engagement Manager— After your site is deployed and available to your users, you want someone to maintain it over time. Make sure that your users are engaging with your content and each other with analytics tools and the moderation tile. Creating an excellent site requires a significant amount of work, but maintaining your site after going live is the true key to success. ## Find Out More ![Help](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_help.png) [Managers, Moderators, and Admins Working Together](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_community_management_roles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Experience Cloud sites can thrive when their managers, moderators, and admins understand their unique roles and work together effectively.") ![Video](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-communities-264-0-0-production-enus/bf7df212-91a1-4fa3-a007-4d6f3e3b470b/communities/images/icon_video.png) [Best Practices for Adoption in Your Sites](https://www.learnexperiencecloud.com/s/news/show-me-how-best-practices-for-adoption-in-your-sites-MCF46SJXSNS5HEXE5VMMENEMC3YM) # Work in Chatter Groups To make the best use of your groups, it helps to understand the information they offer and different ways to interact with them. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Get Familiar with Your Chatter Group](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_detail.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To see group updates, files, and members, click a group's name in a feed, in the Groups list, or on someone's profile. - **[View Chatter Group Memberships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_widget.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Salesforce Classic, the Groups list on your profile shows you the Chatter groups that you belong to. - **[View Chatter Group Members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_members.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Members section on a Chatter group page shows all members of a group, including any customer members. - **[Chatter Group Recommendations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_recommendations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter recommends groups for you to consider joining. - **[Use Email to Post to Chatter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_email_to_post.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Salesforce Classic, email posts to the Chatter groups that you have access to. - **[Post an Announcement to a Chatter Group](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_announcement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Post group announcements to highlight important messages on the group page. - **[Group Files Lists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_recent_files.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Salesforce Classic, the Group Files list shows a group’s recently posted files. # Work with Chatter Feeds Stay up-to-date on the posts and comments that you and other people make in Chatter, and the record changes across your Salesforce org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Chatter Feeds Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow people and records to see updates about them in Chatter. Updates appear in feeds on profiles, groups, the Chatter tab, topic detail pages, and on record detail pages. - **[View a Particular Feed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_filters.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Change your Chatter feed to show a subset of posts. - **[Filter and Sort Your Chatter Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_filter_sort.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In your Chatter feeds, use the filter and sort options to see updates that are relevant to you. - **[Keep Track of Chatter Posts with Bookmarks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_bookmark_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use bookmarks to track Chatter posts that you’re interested in. - **[Create a Task from a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_create_task.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Read a Chatter post that you want to follow up on? In Salesforce Classic, use the Create New Task action to create a task directly from the post. - **[View Recommendations That Are Tailored to You](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_recommendations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chatter provides recommendations to help you identify the people, groups, files, and records that closely relate to your job and interests. - **[Searching in Chatter Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_search_in_feeds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Quickly find information in posts and comments across Chatter. - **[Chatter Favorites Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_favorites_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Salesforce Classic, Chatter favorites give you easy access to list views, Chatter feed searches, and topics that you want to stay on top of. You can find Chatter favorites on the Chatter tab. # Work with Chatter Posts Share information and collaborate in Chatter with other people inside and outside your organization. Chatter posts, tracked changes, and comments don’t count toward your org’s data storage allowance. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in Summer ’26, Chatter is turned off by default in all new orgs. For any features in these orgs that require access to Chatter functionality or the Chatter APIs, turn on Chatter by going to **Setup** | **Chatter Settings** and selecting **Enable**. For details, see [Chatter Is Turned Off by Default in New Orgs Beginning in Summer ’26](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_default_off.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Chatter Posting Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_posting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Chatter publisher to post, comment, ask questions, and create polls. - **[Chatter Post Visibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_post_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn where you can post in Chatter, who can see your posts, and whose posts you can see. - **[Anatomy of a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_post_anatomy.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here’s a quick look at all the information that surrounds a typical Chatter post in Lightning Experience. - **[Characteristics of Chatter Counts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_counts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are a few ways to determine how many people are looking at a Chatter post. There’s the view count, the Seen by count, and the counts you find in the Interaction Count Report. Although there’s crossover in terms of what’s being counted, the counts for a given post can be different for each type. Let’s examine why. - **[Mute a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_mute.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Mute a Chatter post to stop receiving notifications about it. - **[Tips for Deleting Chatter Feed Posts and Comments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_chatter_posts_delete.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here are some useful things to know about deleting posts and comments in a Chatter feed. - **[Draft Posts in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_draft_posts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Save Chatter posts as drafts and access them later to edit, publish, or delete. - **[Live Chatter Feeds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_group_live_feed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you’re in a group in Lightning Experience, the Chatter feed is live. Live feeds offer posts and comments right as they’re posted, without requiring a page refresh. - **[Live Chatter Comments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_live_comments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Lightning Experience Chatter feeds, comments are live—they appear when they’re posted, without requiring a page refresh. - **[Mention People and Groups in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feeds_mentions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A great way to get someone’s attention or to share a post with a group is to mention them. - **[Link to a Record from a Chatter Post or Comment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_slashrecord.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After a little administrative setup, you can link to a recently viewed record from a Chatter post or comment. In the Chatter publisher, enter a forward slash (/) and start typing the record name. You can link to any record type that’s enabled for your org, such as work records, accounts, opportunities, and cases. Link to up to 25 records in each post or comment. - **[Who Can See My Attached Files and Links in Chatter?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_attachments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Share files and links with people by attaching them to Chatter posts or comments. - **[Attach Files and Links to Chatter Posts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_attach_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Share files and links from Salesforce or from your computer by attaching them to Chatter posts or comments. - **[Polls](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_polls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A poll contains a question and a list of possible replies. Poll your users and let them vote on their favorite response. People with access to the feed where the poll is posted cast their votes by selecting a reply. - **[Topics List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_topics_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Chatter topics list to see the topics that people are talking about in your organization. All topic names appear in this list, including topics that are used solely in private groups or on records. - **[Share a Chatter Post](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_feed_sharing_post.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sharing lets you quickly copy a public post to your profile or a group. This feature is available in Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience. # Work with Files in Your Experience Cloud Site Customize Salesforce Files settings and understand file sharing and visibility to get the most out of Files in your Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
- **[File Visibility and Sharing in Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_files_visibility_and_sharing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When sharing and viewing files, context matters. Experience Cloud site files are tied to the site context in which they’re created or uploaded, with a few exceptions. - **[Customize Experience Cloud Site Libraries with Images](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_files_customize_libraries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give each library a unique look by branding it with an image. - **[Limit Files in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable_file_limits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Restrict the size and types of files that your members can upload. This list of file types lets you control what your members upload and also prevents spammers from polluting your Experience Cloud site with inappropriate files. - **[Make Files on Records Visible to Customers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_files_on_records_visible_to_customers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Customer Access toggle on a file’s sharing detail page lets you decide when customers can see individual files on records. - **[Display Images Faster on All Devices](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_files_optimize_images_all_devices.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When guest users visit your site, cached images are optimized to best suit the user’s phone, tablet, or desktop computer. Image optimization makes your site’s pages load faster, which creates a better browsing experience for your visitors. - **[Display Optimized Images on Mobile Devices](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_files_mobile_optimized_images.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Asset file images are optimized for mobile display in Experience Cloud sites. Mobile-optimized image display creates a version of images that is better suited to a small screen and slower connection. This preference, which is enabled by default, lets customers who use file assets in sites see logos and product images faster on mobile devices. # Work with Salesforce Files Use Salesforce Files to share and collaborate on files, store files privately, manage version updates, and follow files that are important to you. Use Files Connect to connect to external file systems right from Salesforce. ### Required Editions
Available in: Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience
Available in: Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager Editions
Watch a demo: [![Video](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/collaboration/images/play_btn.png)Checklist for Salesforce Files](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/doRH4wRfTeegi7Gi5BCAWi) Working with files in Salesforce means: - Posting files to Chatter feeds to collaborate with coworkers. - Adding files directly to records, such as Accounts, Cases, Leads, and others, to keep information right where you need it. - Sharing files with customers in the secure Salesforce cloud. - Connecting to external file systems with Files Connect. - Running standard and custom file reports to understand how people work with files. All file types are supported, including everything from Microsoft® PowerPoint presentations and Excel spreadsheets, to Adobe® PDFs and image files. You can upload and download audio and video files, but you can’t parse or preview them. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note In Internet Explorer 11, the **Preview** option redirects to the file detail page. As you work with files in Salesforce, keep these file limits in mind:
Feature Limit
Organization-wide storage Storage is based on the number of Salesforce licenses purchased. Additional storage can be purchased.
File size
  • 10 GB when uploaded via the web interface in Lightning Experience
  • 2 GB when uploaded in Salesforce Classic or when uploaded via Chatter or Experience Cloud LWR sites
  • 100 MB when uploaded from a mobile device
Maximum number of versions per file 2,048
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-experience-collaboration-264-0-0-production-enus/1aab5b5e-c990-4b8c-840a-6fb18af49709/images/icon_note.png) Note - For information about the different file tools and solutions in Salesforce, see [Differences Between Files, Salesforce CRM Content, Salesforce Knowledge, Documents, and Attachments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_differences.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Explore the differences in the various ways to manage your files and content."). - To learn who can perform which actions on a file, see [Who Can See My File?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_settings_perms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your files in Salesforce can be private to you, privately shared, or visible to your entire company. Learn how to identify a file’s sharing settings and how to change them."). - Files from external repositories, such as Google Docs and Microsoft® SharePoint®, are available only if Salesforce Files Connect is configured in your organization and enabled for you. - Chatter feeds, groups, and the ability to follow files are available only for orgs that have Chatter enabled. - Files don’t require Chatter, but if your org uses profile-based Chatter rollout, users must have Chatter permissions enabled for files to be available. - The files and photos that your users upload count toward your org’s file storage allowance. Files uploaded on the Files tab also count toward your org’s file storage allowance. - Salesforce doesn't remove geolocation information from uploaded images. #### See Also - [Preview Files and Edit File Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_previewing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Preview a file to view it without downloading. View and update key details about a file from the File Details page.") - [Who Can See My File?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_settings_perms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your files in Salesforce can be private to you, privately shared, or visible to your entire company. Learn how to identify a file’s sharing settings and how to change them.") - [Change File Access in Salesforce Classic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_change_permission.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "File owners and collaborators can change file permissions for people and groups.") - [Upload a New Version of a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_versioning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Replace an old version of a file by uploading a new version.") - [Attach a File to a Post or Comment in Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_attach_file.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can attach all file types to a post or comment—slide decks, spreadsheets, PDF files, images, audio files, and video files.") - [Follow a File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.collab_files_following.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Follow a file to see updates in your Chatter feed, including when a new version of the file is uploaded. If you stop following a file, the file remains in your Files list, but you don't see updates about it in your feed anymore.")